KORG OASYS Paramater Guide - v1 - 3 - E5 PDF

Parameter Guide
5
Contents
75:GERealTimeParameters................113
Program mode: HD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 76:PerfRealTimeParameters...............116
77:DynamicMIDI .........................120
HD-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
78:RandomSeeds .........................122
Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 79:Name/NoteMap .......................125
01:Main ................................... 2
Program P8: Insert Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
06:KARMAGE............................. 7
81:Routing...............................127
07:ControllerView/Effect................... 11
85:InsertFX ..............................130
08:AudioInput/Sampling .................. 12
86:TrackView............................133
09:ControlSurface ......................... 18
87:IFX112...............................134
Program P1: Basic/Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 89:CommonFXLFO.......................136
11:ProgramBasic .......................... 33
Program P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . . . . 138
15:VectorControl ......................... 39
91:Routing...............................138
16:VectorEnvelope ........................ 43
92:MFX1 .................................140
18:SetUpControllers...................... 46
93:MFX2 .................................141
19:SetUpPads ............................ 47
94:TFX1..................................141
Program P2: OSC/Pitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 95:TFX2..................................141
21:OSC1Basic ............................ 49
Program: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . 142
22:OSC1Pitch............................. 54
25:OSC2Basic ............................ 57
26:OSC2Pitch............................. 57
29:PitchEG .............................. 57
Program mode: EXi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Program P3: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
31:Filter1 ................................. 61 01:Main..................................160
32:Filter1Modulation ...................... 64 06:KARMAGE ...........................161
33:Filter1LFOModulation.................. 68 07:ControllerView/Effects..................161
34:Filter1EG............................. 69 08:AudioInput/Sampling..................161
35:Filter2 ................................. 72 09:ControlSurface ........................161
36:Filter2Modulation ...................... 72 EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
37:Filter2LFOModulation.................. 72 41:ProgramBasic..........................163
38:Filter2EG............................. 72 42:EXiAudioInput........................168
Program P4: Amp/EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 45:VectorControl .........................168
41:Amp1/Driver1.......................... 74 46:VectorEnvelope........................169
42:Amp1Modulation...................... 76 48:SetUpControllers ......................169
43:Amp1EG ............................. 79 49:SetUpPads............................169
45:Amp2/Driver2.......................... 81 EXi Program P5: Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
46:Amp2Mod. ............................ 82 51:CommonStepSeq......................170
47:Amp2EG ............................. 82 52:CommonLFO.........................173
49:EQ .................................... 82 53:CommonKeyboardTrack ...............173
Program P5: LFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 EXi Program P6: EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
51:OSC1LFO1............................ 84
EXi Program P7: KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
52:OSC1LFO2............................ 87
55:OSC2LFO1............................ 87 EXi Program P8: Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
56:OSC2LFO2............................ 87 EXi Program P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . 173
59:CommonLFO ......................... 88
EXi Program: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . 174
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track. . 90
61:OSC1AMSMixer ...................... 90
65:OSC2AMSMix........................ 96 EXi: AL-1 Analog Synthesizer . . . . . . 175
69:CommonKeyboardTrack................ 97
AL-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Program P7: KARMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
71:GESetup/KeyZones ................... 100 EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
72:MIDIFilter/CCOffset .................. 103 01:Main..................................176
73:ModuleParametersControl ............. 105 Program P4: OSC Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
74:ModuleParametersTrigger ............. 110
iii
41:OSCBasic ............................ 178
42:Sub/Noise/RingMod ................... 181 EXi: STR-1 Plucked String. . . . . . . . . .239
43:Mixer ................................ 182
STR-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
44:PitchCommon........................ 184
45:PitchEG/Mod ......................... 186 EXi Program P0: Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
01:Main..................................241
Program P5: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
51:FilterBasic ............................ 188 Program P4: String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
52:MultiFilter ........................... 191 41:PluckandNoise........................243
53:FilterModulation ...................... 192 42:PCMOscillator .........................245
54:FilterLFOMod........................ 195 43:PCMOscillatorPitch ....................247
44:ExcitationMixer ........................250
Program P6: Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
45:StringMain............................ 252
61:Amp/Driver........................... 196
46:DampingandDispersion................256
62:AmpModulation ...................... 198
47:StringPitch ............................ 258
63:AmpEG............................. 200
48:PickupsandFeedback ...................260
Program P7: EG 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 49:Mixer .................................263
71:EG1(Filter) .......................... 203 Program P5: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
72:EG2(Pitch) .......................... 206
51:FilterBasic .............................265
73:EG3 ................................. 206
52:MultiFilter ............................ 268
74:EG4 ................................. 206
53:FilterModulation .......................269
Program P8: Step Seq/LFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 54:FilterLFOMod .........................272
81:StepSequencer........................ 207 Program P6: Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
82:LFO1................................ 209
61:Amp..................................273
83:LFO2................................ 212
62:AmpModulation.......................274
84:LFO3................................ 212
63:AmpEG ..............................276
85:LFO4................................ 212
Program P7: EG 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Program P9: AMS Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
71:EG1(Filter) ...........................279
91:AMSMixer ........................... 213
72:EG2(Pitch) ...........................279
AL-1: Tone Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 73:EG3 ..................................279
74:EG4 ..................................279
AL-1: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Program P8: LFO 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
81:LFO1................................. 279
EXi: CX-3 Tonewheel Organ. . . . . . . 217 82:LFO2................................. 279
83:LFO3................................. 279
CX-3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
84:LFO4................................. 279
EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Program P9: AMS Mixers and String Track . . . 280
01:Main ................................. 218
91:AMSMixers12 ........................280
Program P4: Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 92:AMSMixers34 ........................280
41:Basic ................................. 220 99:StringTrack...........................280
42:Controllers............................ 221
STR-1: Tone Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Program P5: Split & Drawbars . . . . . . . . . . . .223
51:KeyboardSplit........................ 223
52:Drawbars ............................. 224 EXi: MS-20EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
53:EXDrawbars.......................... 225
MS-20EX Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Program P6: Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Onscreenknobsandswitches,
61:Percussion ............................ 227 andtheParameterDetailsarea...............286
62:EXPercussion ......................... 228
EXi Program P0: Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Program P7: Amp, V/C, Rotary Speaker. . . . .230 01:Main..................................287
71:Amp&V/C ........................... 230
Program P4: Oscillators & Filters . . . . . . . . . . 289
72:RotarySpeaker ........................ 232
41:Oscillators&Filters.....................289
Program P9: AMS Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Program P5: MG, EG, & Modulation. . . . . . . . 293
91:AMSMixer ........................... 235
51:MG,EG,&Modulation ..................293
CX-3: Tone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Program P6: Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Changes from the original CX-3 . . . . . . . . . . .237 61:PatchPanel ............................ 297
CX-3: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
iv
Program P7: EG 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
71:EG3................................. 307 01:Main..................................340
72:EG4.................................. 307
Program P4: Patch Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
73:EG5................................. 307
41:PatchPanel............................342
74:EG6................................. 307
Program P5: Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Program P8: LFO 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
51:OscMain ..............................346
81:LFO1................................ 307
52:PCMOsc..............................350
82:LFO2................................ 307
53:PCMMod.............................352
83:LFO3................................ 307
54:VPMOsc1 .............................355
84:LFO4................................ 307
55:VPMOscillator2 .......................365
Program P9: AMS Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 56:VPMOscillator3 .......................365
91:AMSMixers12........................ 308 57:VPMOscillator4 .......................365
92:AMSMixers34........................ 308 58:VPMOscillator5.......................365
59:VPMOscillator6 .......................365
MS-20EX: Tone Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
MS-20EX: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . 311 Program P6: Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
61:FilterBasic.............................366
62:MultiFilter ............................366
63:FilterModulation.......................366
EXi: PolysixEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
64:FilterLFOMod.........................366
PolysixEX Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Program P7: Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Onscreenknobsandswitches,andtheParameter
71:Mixers13.............................367
Detailsarea............................... 314
72:MainMixer ............................368
EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 73:Amp ..................................369
01:Main ................................. 315 74:AmpModulation .......................369
Program P4: Main. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 75:AmpEG..............................369
41:Main ................................. 317 Program P8: EG 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Program P5: Modulation & Arpeggiator. . . . . 322 81:EG1..................................370
82:EG2..................................373
51:Modulation&Arpeggiator.............. 322
83:EG3..................................373
Program P7: EG 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 84:EG4..................................373
71:EG2................................. 324 85:EG5..................................373
72:EG3................................. 324 86:EG6..................................373
Program P8: LFO 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 87:EG7..................................373
88:EG8..................................373
81:LFO1................................ 324
89:EG9..................................373
82:LFO2................................ 324
Program P9: Step Sequencer, LFO 1-4, and AMS
Program P9: AMS Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
91:AMSMixers12....................... 324
91:StepSequencer ........................374
92:AMSMixers34....................... 324
92:LFO1 ................................374
PolysixEX: Tone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 93:LFO2 ................................374
94:LFO3 ................................374
95:LFO4 ................................374
EXi: MOD-7 Waveshaping 96:AMSMixers12........................374
VPM Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 97:AMSMixers34........................374
98:AMSMixers56........................374
MOD-7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
99:AMSMixers78........................374
UsingtheParameterDetailsarea ............ 329
LoadingDXsounds ........................ 329 MOD-7: Tone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Synthesis with the MOD-7: a guided tour . . . . 331 MOD-7: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . 376
Overview ................................. 331
Individualoscillators
andsubtractivesynthesis ................... 332 Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
VPM(akaFM)............................. 333 Combination P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
FilteredVPM.............................. 334
01:ProgramSelect/Mixer...................377
PCMasaVPMmodulator .................. 335
06:KARMAGE ...........................383
Waveshaping ............................. 336
07:ControllerView/Effect ..................386
RingModulation .......................... 338
08:AudioInput/Sampling..................387
v
09:ControlSurface........................ 389 05:Preferences............................ 484
06:KARMAGE...........................488
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller. . . . . .401
07:ControllerView/Effect .................. 490
11:TimbreEQ ............................ 401
08:AudioIn/Sampling.....................491
15:VectorVolumeControl ................. 403
09:ControlSurface ........................493
16:VectorCCControl..................... 406
17:VectorEnvelope ....................... 409 Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller . . . . . . . 505
18:SetUpControllers..................... 412 11:MIDITrackEQ.........................505
19:SetUpPads ........................... 413 12:AudioTrackEQ ........................507
15:VectorVolumeControl..................508
Combination P2: Timbre Parameters . . . . . . . .415
16:VectorCCControl ......................511
21:MIDI................................. 415
17:VectorEnvelope........................514
22:OSC ................................. 416
18:SetUpControllers ......................517
23:Pitch ................................. 418
19:SetUpPads............................519
24:Delay ................................ 419
25:WaveSequence/KARMA............... 420 Sequencer P2: Track Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 521
26:EXiAudioInput ....................... 422 21:MIDI .................................521
22:OSC..................................523
Combination P3: MIDI Filter/Zones . . . . . . . . .423
23:Pitch ..................................525
31:MIDIFilter1........................... 423
24:Delay.................................526
32:MIDIFilter2........................... 424
25:WaveSequence/KARMA ................528
33:MIDIFilter3........................... 425
26:EXiAudioInput ........................530
35:KeyboardZones ....................... 426
27:AudioTrackDelay .....................531
36:VelocityZones ........................ 428
Sequencer P3: MIDI Filter/Zones . . . . . . . . . . 532
Combination P7: KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
31:MIDIFilter1 ...........................532
71:GESetup/KeyZones................... 430
32:MIDIFilter2 ...........................533
72:MIDIFilter/CCOffset.................. 434
33:MIDIFilter3 ...........................535
73:ModuleParametersControl............. 435
35:KeyboardZones........................536
74:ModuleParametersTrigger ............. 436
36:VelocityZones.........................538
75:GERealTimeParameters............... 438
76:PerfRealTimeParameters .............. 441 Sequencer P4: Track Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
77:DynamicMIDI........................ 443 41:TrackEdit.............................540
78:RandomSeeds ........................ 444 42:MIDITrackName......................542
79:Name/NoteMap ...................... 446 43:AUDIOTrackName ....................543
Combination P8: Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Sequencer P5: Pattern/RPPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
81:Routing1 ............................. 448 51:PatternEdit............................544
82:Routing2 ............................. 451 52:PatternName ..........................546
85:InsertFX ............................. 452 53:RPPRSetup............................547
86:TrackView ........................... 454
Sequencer P7: KARMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
87:IFX112 .............................. 455
71:GESetup/KeyZones ....................551
89:CommonFXLFO ...................... 457
72:MIDIFilter/CCOffset ...................555
Combination P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . .458 73:ModuleParametersControl .............556
91:Routing .............................. 458 74:ModuleParametersTrigger.............. 557
92:MFX1................................ 459 75:GERealTimeParameters ...............558
93:MFX2................................ 460 76:PerfRealTimeParameters...............560
94:TFX1 ................................. 460 77:DynamicMIDI .........................561
95:TFX2 ................................. 460 78:RandomSeeds.........................562
79:Name/NoteMap .......................563
Combination: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . .461
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
81:MIDIRouting1 .........................565
Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 82:MIDIRouting2 .........................567
83:AudioRouting1 ........................568
Sequencer Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
84:AudioRouting2 ........................570
MIDIsequencer ........................... 467
85:InsertFX..............................571
Setupparameters&Musicaldata............ 469
86:TrackView............................ 572
Tip:AutoSongSetup ...................... 470
87:IFX112...............................574
Sequencer P0: Play/REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 89:CommonFXLFO.......................576
01:MIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer ........... 471 Sequencer P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . . . 578
02:AudioTrackMixer..................... 477
91:Routing...............................578
03:MIDITrackLoop...................... 482
92:MFX1 ................................. 580
vi
93:MFX2 ................................ 581 22:UserScale.............................718
94:TFX1 ................................. 581
Global P3: Category Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
95:TFX2 ................................. 581
31:ProgramCategory ......................720
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . 582 32:CombiCategory ........................721
System Exclusive events supported in 33:KARMACategory ......................721
Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 Global P4: Wave Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
41:SequenceParameters....................722
42:PerStepParameters ....................727
Sampling mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 Global P5: Drum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Sampling Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 51:SampleSetup..........................731
SamplingtoRAM,ordirecttodisk........... 621 52:SampleParameters .....................735
Samplingfeatures.......................... 621 53:VoiceAssign/Mixer .....................736
Sampling P0: Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Global P6: Plug-in Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
01:Recording ............................ 625 Global: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 740
08:AudioInput........................... 631
09:ControlSurface ........................ 636
Sampling P1: Sample Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Disk mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
11:SampleEdit ........................... 643
Disk P0: File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Sampling P2: Loop Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 01:Load ..................................751
21:LoopEdit ............................. 646 02:Save..................................753
03:Utility.................................754
Sampling P3: Multisample Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . 649
09:MediaInformation......................755
31:MultisampleEdit...................... 649
Disk P1: Audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Sampling P4: EQ/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
11:MakeAudioCD ........................756
41:EQ ................................... 652
12:PlayAudioCD .........................758
48:SetUpControllers..................... 653
19:MediaInformation......................760
49:SetUpPads ........................... 655
Disk: Page Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Sampling P5: Audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
51:AudioCD ............................ 657
Sampling P8: Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Effect Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
81:Routing .............................. 660
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
85:InsertFX.............................. 662
Abouteffectsresources......................787
86:TrackView ........................... 664
Effectsineachmode........................788
87:IFX112 .............................. 665
Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)andTempo
89:CommonFXLFO ...................... 666
Synchronization ............................789
Sampling P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . . . . 668 CommonFXLFOs ..........................790
91:Routing .............................. 668 FXControlBuses...........................790
92:MFX1 ................................ 670 EffectI/O ..................................792
93:MFX2 ................................ 670
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
94:TFX1 ................................. 670
In/Out ....................................794
95:TFX2 ................................. 670
Routing...................................794
Sampling: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . 672 Mixer.....................................804
ControllingtheInsertEffectsviaMIDI ........805
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Global mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 In/Out ....................................807
Global P0: Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 Routing...................................807
01:BasicSetup ........................... 699 Mixer.....................................811
02:AudioInput........................... 705 ControllingtheMasterEffectsviaMIDI .......812
Global P1: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 Total Effects (TFX1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
11:MIDI ................................. 708 In/Out ....................................813
12:External1............................. 714 Routing...................................813
13:External2............................. 716 Mixer.....................................814
UsingMIDItocontroltheTotalEffects........814
Global P2: Controller/Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
21:Controller ............................ 717 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
vii
MainOutputs ............................. 815 051:StereoPhaser ..........................866
IndividualOutputs ........................ 815 052:StereoRandomPhaser.................. 867
053:StereoEnvelopePhaser .................868
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
054:BiPhaser ..............................868
Dynamics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819
Modulation and Pitch Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
000:NoEffect............................. 819
055:StereoVibrato..........................870
001:StereoDynaCompressor ............... 819
056:StereoAutoFadeMod. ..................871
002:StereoCompressor..................... 820
057:2VoiceResonator......................872
003:StereoExpander ....................... 823
058:Doppler ...............................873
004:St.MultibandCompressor............... 824
059:Scratch ................................874
005:StereoLimiter ......................... 826
060:GrainShifter ...........................874
006:MultibandLimiter..................... 827
061:StereoTremolo .........................875
007:StereoMultibandLimiter............... 828
062:StereoEnvelopeTremolo ................876
008:StereoMasteringLimiter ............... 829
063:StereoAutoPan ........................877
009:StereoGate ........................... 830
064:StereoPhaser+Tremolo ..................878
010:StereoNoiseReduction ................. 831
065:StereoRingModulator ..................879
EQ and Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832 066:StereoFrequencyShifter.................880
011:StereoParametric4EQ.................. 832 067:Detune ................................881
012:StereoGraphic7EQ.................... 833 068:PitchShifter ...........................881
013:StereoMaster3EQ..................... 834 069:StereoPitchShifter .....................882
014:StereoExciter/Enhncr .................. 835 070:PitchShifterBPM.......................883
015:StereoIsolator ......................... 836 071:StereoPitchShifterBPM.................884
016:StereoWah/AutoWah ................. 836 072:PitchShiftMod. ........................885
017:St.Vintage/CustomWah................ 838 073:OrganVibrato/Chorus .................. 886
018:StereoRandomFilter ................... 839 074:RotarySpeaker.........................886
019:MultiModeFilter ...................... 840 075:RotarySpeakerProOD .................888
020:StereoSubOscillator................... 841 076:RotarySpeakerProCX ..................889
021:TalkingModulator..................... 842
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
022:StereoDecimator...................... 843
077:L/C/RDelay ...........................891
023:StereoAnalogRecord.................. 844
078:L/C/RLongDelay......................891
024:StereoWaveShaper .................... 844
079:Stereo/CrossDelay .....................892
025:PianoBody/Damper ................... 846
080:Stereo/CrossLongDelay ................893
026:Vocoder .............................. 846
081:StereoMultitapDelay ...................893
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models . . . .848 082:StereoModulationDelay................894
027:OD/HiGainWah ...................... 848 083:StereoDynamicDelay .................. 895
028:OD/HyperGainWah................... 849 084:StereoAutoPanningDelay..............896
029:StereoGuitarCabinet .................. 850 085:TapeEcho .............................897
030:GuitarAmpModel+P4EQ .............. 850 086:MultibandMod.Delay ..................898
031:GuitarAmpModel+Cabinet............ 851 087:ReverseDelay..........................899
032:StereoBassCabinet.................... 852 088:HoldDelay ............................900
033:BassAmpModel ...................... 852 089:AutoReverse ..........................901
034:BassAmpModel+Cabinet .............. 853 090:SequenceBPMDelay ...................902
035:BassAmpTubeDrive+Cab ............. 854 091:L/C/RBPMDelay ......................903
036:TubePreAmpModeling ................ 855 092:L/C/RBPMLongDelay .................904
037:St.TubePreAmpModeling............. 855 093:StereoBPMDelay ......................905
038:MicModeling+PreAmp................ 856 094:StereoBPMLongDelay.................906
039:St.MicModeling+PreAmp ............. 856 095:StereoBPMMultitapDelay .............. 907
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser . . . . . . . . . . . . .857 096:StereoBPMMod.Delay .................908
097:St.BPMAutoPanningDly...............909
040:StereoChorus ......................... 857
098:TapeBPMEcho........................910
041:StereoHarmonicChorus................ 858
099:ReverseBPMDelay .....................911
042:St.BiphaseModulation................ 859
043:MultitapCho/Delay4Taps .............. 860 Reverb and Early Reflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
044:MultitapCho/Delay6Taps .............. 860 100:Overb................................. 913
045:BiChorus............................. 861 101:ReverbHall............................914
046:Ensemble ............................. 863 102:ReverbSmoothHall ....................914
047:PolysixEnsemble ...................... 863 103:ReverbWetPlate .......................914
048:StereoFlanger ......................... 864 104:ReverbDryPlate.......................914
049:StereoRandomFlanger................. 865 105:ReverbRoom..........................915
050:StereoEnvelopeFlanger ................ 865 106:ReverbBrightRoom....................915
viii
107:EarlyReflections....................... 916 165:Exciter//Exciter ........................943
108:EarlyReflectionsHiDens ............... 916 166:Exciter//OD/HiGain...................943
167:Exciter//Wah ..........................944
Mono-Mono Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
168:Exciter//Chorus/Flanger................944
109:P4EQExciter ......................... 921
169:Exciter//Phaser ........................944
110:P4EQWah ........................... 921
170:Exciter//MtapBPMDly.................944
111:P4EQChorus/Flanger................. 921
171:OD/HiGain//OD/HiGain ..............945
112:P4EQPhaser ......................... 922
172:OD/HiGain//Wah.....................945
113:P4EQMultitapDelay ................. 922
173:OD/HiGain//Cho/Flanger ..............945
114:CompWah .......................... 922
174:OD/HiGain//Phaser ...................945
115:CompAmpSim...................... 923
175:OD/HiGain//MtBPMDly..............946
116:CompOD/HiGain.................... 923
176:Wah//Wah ............................946
117:CompP4EQ ......................... 923
177:Wah//Chorus/Flanger..................946
118:CompChorus/Flanger................. 924
178:Wah//Phaser ..........................946
119:CompPhaser ........................ 924
179:Wah//MultitapBPMDly................947
120:CompMultitapDelay ................. 925
180:Cho/Flange//Cho/Flanger ...............947
121:LimiterP4EQ ........................ 925
181:Cho/Flange//Phaser ....................947
122:LimiterChorus/Flanger ............... 925
182:Cho/Flange//MtBPMDly...............947
123:LimiterPhaser ....................... 926
183:Phaser//Phaser........................948
124:LimiterMultitapDelay ................ 926
184:Phaser//MtapBPMDly .................948
125:ExciterComp ........................ 927
185:Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly ..............948
126:ExciterLimiter ....................... 927
127:ExciterChorus/Flanger ................ 927
128:ExciterPhaser ........................ 928
129:ExciterMultitapDelay ................ 928
KARMA GE guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
130:OD/HiGainAmpSim ................. 928 About the KARMA GE guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
131:OD/HiGainCho/Flanger.............. 929 HowtoreadtheGEGuide.................949
132:OD/HiGainPhaser................... 929 HowGEparameternamesaredisplayed ......949
133:OD/HiGainMultitapDly.............. 929
About KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
134:WahAmpSim ....................... 930
135:DecimatorAmpSim .................. 930 Overview..................................951
136:DecimatorComp..................... 931 TheoryOfOperation ........................951
137:AmpSimTremolo .................... 931 KARMAArchitecture(Diagram) .............952
138:Cho/FlangerMultitapDly ............. 932 GE (Generated Effect) Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
139:PhaserChorus/Flanger................ 932 Overview..................................953
140:ReverbGate ......................... 932 GEGlobalParameters .......................953
Mono/Mono Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 Note Series Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
141:P4EQ//P4EQ ......................... 937 Overview..................................956
142:P4EQ//Comp ......................... 937 Parameters ................................956
143:P4EQ//Limiter ........................ 938
Phase Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
144:P4EQ//Exciter........................ 938
145:P4EQ//OD/HiGain.................... 938 Overview..................................960
146:P4EQ//Wah.......................... 938 AboutPhasePatterns .......................960
147:P4EQ//Chorus/Flanger ................ 939 GeneralParameters .........................960
148:P4EQ//Phaser ........................ 939 PhaseSpecificParameters ...................962
149:P4EQ//MultitapBPMDly .............. 939 EndLoopParameters.......................963
150:Comp//Comp ........................ 939 PatternParameters .........................963
151:Comp//Limiter ....................... 940 Rhythm Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
152:Comp//Exciter........................ 940 Overview..................................965
153:Comp//OD/HiGain................... 940 AboutRhythmPatterns .....................965
154:Comp//Wah.......................... 940 GlobalParameters ..........................965
155:Comp//Chorus/Flanger ................ 941 PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters.........966
156:Comp//Phaser ........................ 941 RandomWeightingParametersPools ........967
157:Comp//MultitapBPMDly ............. 941 RandomWeightingParametersTies.........967
158:Limiter//Limiter...................... 941 AssociatedParameters ......................968
159:Limiter//Exciter....................... 942
Duration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
160:Limiter//OD/HiGain .................. 942
161:Limiter//Wah......................... 942 Overview..................................970
162:Limiter//Chorus/Flanger ............... 942 AboutDurationPatterns ....................970
163:Limiter//Phaser ....................... 943 PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters.........970
164:Limiter//MtapBPMDly ............... 943 AssociatedParameters ......................970
ix
RandomWeightingParametersPools....... 971 PatternEditingGrid
RandomWeightingParametersTies ........ 972 &AssociatedParameters................... 1003
AssociatedParameters ..................... 972 AssociatedParameters..................... 1004
RandomWeightingParametersPools....... 1005
Index Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .973
RandomWeightingParametersRests ....... 1006
Overview................................. 973
AssociatedParameters..................... 1006
AboutIndexPatterns....................... 973
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 973 Direct Index Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
AssociatedParameters ..................... 973 Overview ................................ 1010
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 974 GeneralParameters ........................ 1010
AssociatedParameters ..................... 974 DurationParameters ....................... 1011
RepeatParameters......................... 1012
Cluster Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .977
BendParameters.......................... 1012
Overview................................. 977
AboutClusterPatterns..................... 977 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 977 UsingAutoBend .......................... 1014
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 978 RandomWeightingCurves ................. 1015
AssociatedParameters ..................... 978
Velocity Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979
Overview................................. 979
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1019
AboutVelocityPatterns .................... 979 Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS). . . . . . . 1019
GlobalParameters......................... 979 AlternateModulationOverview............. 1019
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 980 AlternateModulationSource(AMS)List ..... 1021
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 980 AlternateModulationsettings............... 1025
Dynamic Modulation Sources (Dmod) . . . . . . 1030
CCs/Pitch Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .982 Overview ................................ 1030
Overview................................. 982 DynamicModulationSourceList ............ 1030
AboutCC/Bend/PitchPatterns .............. 982
Controller Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 982
SW1/2Assignments........................ 1033
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 983
RealtimeKnobs58Assignments ............ 1034
GlobalParameters......................... 984
FootSwitchAssignments ................... 1035
FootPedalAssignments .................... 1036
WaveSeq Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .986
Dynamic MIDI Sources & Destinations. . . . . . 1038
Overview................................. 986
DynamicMIDISources..................... 1038
AboutWaveSeqPatterns ................... 986
DynamicMIDIDestinations ................ 1040
GlobalParameters......................... 986
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 987 MIDI transmission from OASYS controllers . . 1045
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 988
OASYS and MIDI CCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
ResponsestostandardMIDIcontrollers...... 1049
Envelope Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .989 ParameterscontrolledbyMIDICCs#7079 ... 1052
Overview................................. 989
MIDI applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
AboutEnvelopes .......................... 989
AboutMIDI .............................. 1055
Parameters ............................... 989
ConnectingMIDIdevices&computers ....... 1055
LevelCombinations........................ 992
Messagestransmitted
TimeCombinations ........................ 992
andreceivedbytheOASYS ................. 1056
Repeat (Melodic Repeat) Group . . . . . . . . . . .994
MIDI Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Overview................................. 994
GeneralParameters........................ 994 Error and confirmation messages . . . . . . . . . 1072
RangeParameters ......................... 997 A(ADCAreYouSure) .................... 1072
GEMode=RealTimeParameters............ 997 B(Buffer)................................. 1072
C(CantcalibrateCompleted) .............. 1072
Bend Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .999
D(DestinationDisk)....................... 1073
Overview................................. 999 E(ErrorExceeded)........................ 1074
GeneralParameters........................ 999 F(FileFront) ............................. 1074
GEMode=RealTimeParameters........... 1001 I(IllegalIndex)........................... 1076
Drum Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1003 M(MasterMultisample)................... 1076
Overview................................ 1003 N(NodataNotenoughsongmemory) ...... 1077
AboutDrumPatterns ..................... 1003 O(ObeycopyrightrulesOscillator).......... 1078
P(PatternProgram) ....................... 1079
x
R(RearsampleRoot) ..................... 1079 * ScreenshotsfromtheKARMAsoftwarethatappear
S(SampleSource)........................ 1079 throughoutthisguideare19942004byStephenKay,
T(TheclockTrack)....................... 1080 KarmaLabLLC.Usedbypermission.Allrights
reserved.
U(UnabletocreatedirectoryUSBHub) ..... 1081
W(Wave)................................ 1081 * KARMATechnologycanbelocatedontheinternetat:
www.karmalab.com.
Y(You) .................................. 1081
* LinuxisatrademarkorregisteredtrademarkofLinus
Disk mode information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083 TorvaldsintheUnitedStatesandinothercountries.
AIFFandWAVEformatdetails:importing ... 1083 * Thisproductwasdevelopedunderlicenseofphysical
AIFFandWAVEformatdetails:exporting... 1083 modelingtonegeneratorpatents(http://www.sondius
AboutKORGformatfiles .................. 1084 xg.com)ownedbyStanfordUniversityUSAand
CDR/RWdisksontheOASYS:UDFandpacket YamahaCorporation.
writing.................................. 1086 * Companynames,productnames,andnamesofformats
etc.arethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheir
EXB-DI option board, additional memory, & respectiveowners.
calendar battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Safetyprecautions ........................ 1089
Overview:userinstallablehardware........ 1090
Installinganoptionboard,memory/calendar
battery .................................. 1090
EXBDIoption............................ 1094
Updating the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Using the included Restore CDs to restore the
system and factory sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
Voice Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
GM Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
KARMA GEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
External Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Multisamples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Drumsamples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
Wave Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Preset Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
Template Songs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
Demo Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
* KARMA(KayAlgorithmicRealtimeMusicArchitec
ture)TechnologyhasbeenlicensedfromStephenKay,
andisprotectedbyU.S.Patents5,486,647,5,521,327,
6,084,171,6,087,578,6,103,964,6,121,532,6,121,533,
6,326,538,and6,639,141.Otherpatentspending.
* KARMAandtheKARMALogoareregisteredtrade
marks,andGeneratedEffect(GE),MelodicRepeat,
DirectIndex,ManualAdvance,SmartScan,
FreezeRandomize,RandomCapture,Random
FF/REWandSceneMatrixaretrademarksof
StephenKay,KarmaLabLLC.Thismanualcopyright
19942004byKORGInc.andStephenKay.Allrights
reserved.
xi
xii
Program mode: HD-1
HD-1 Overview
TheHD1HighDefinitionSynthesizerisKorgsnew WaveSequencing,forcreatingrhythmicpatternsor
flagshipPCMsynthesisengine,featuringoutstanding complex,evolvingtimbres
soundquality,uniquesounddesigntools,andarich VectorSynthesis
arrayofmodulationpossibilities,including:
Dualmultimoderesonantfilters
Ultrahighqualitysampleinterpolation,basedon
new,proprietarytechnology,forminimalaliasing DriveandLowBoost,foraddingpervoicegrit,
andcrystalclearhighfrequencies girthanddistortion
OveragigabyteofROMandEXssamplelibraries Threeenvelopes,twoLFOs,andtwoAMSMixers
perOSC,plusacommonLFO,Vectorenvelope,
DualOSCstructure,providingtwocompletevoice andKARMAfortheProgramasawhole
chainsforlayersandsplits
TwocomplexkeytrackinggeneratorsperOSC,
WithineachOSC,uptofourwayvelocitysplits plustwomorefortheProgramasawhole
andcrossfades(includingtwowaylayers)
Extensiverealtimemodulationcapabilities
HD-1 Program Structure Common

Vector KARMA Key
LFO Track 1
2
OSC1
Mixer
Effects
& EQ
OSC2
HD-1 OSC Structure

AMS AMS
LFO 1 LFO 2
Mixer 1 Mixer 2
Filter Amp Amp

Pitch EG Filter EG
Key Track EG Key Track
Serial/
Parallel
Filter A
Osc + Drive Amp
Filter B
Serial/
Parallel
OSC1
OSC2
1
Program mode: HD-1
Program P0: Play

ThisisthemainpageofProgrammodeforHD1 Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile
Programs.Amongotherthings,youcan: youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart
SelectPrograms recordingimmediately.Todoso:
Jumpdirectlytothemaineditingpages 1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey.
MakebasiceditstoKARMA
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillopenandaskAre
Setuptheaudioinputsandresamplingoptions yousure?
Usethecontrolsurface 2. PressOK.
Auto Song Setup YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill
beintherecordreadystate.
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs 3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer
theOASYSinrecordreadymode. andbeginrecording.
01: Main
01PMC
01a
01b
ThisisthemainpageforselectingPrograms,whichare PressitathirdtimetoselectthemainProgram
thebasicsoundsoftheOASYS.Italsoincludesan nameparameter.
interactiveoverviewofthemostimportantProgram
parametersjusttouchaparameter,andyoulljumpto
thecorrespondingeditpage. 01a: Program Select
Tip:WhereveryouareintheProgrammodepages, Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG]
pressingEXITthreetimes(orfewer)willtakeyouback ThisistheBankofthecurrentProgram.
tothispage,andselecttheProgramname.Youcan
thenimmediatelyusethenumerickeysor / YoucanchangetheBankeitherviatheonscreen
switchestoselectadifferentProgram. menu,orbyusingthefrontpanelBankbuttons.
Forinstance,ifyoureonanypageotherthanP0:Play: Banks GM, g(19), and g(d): General MIDI

Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon TheGMbankcontainsafullsetofGeneralMIDI2
themainP0page,suchasControlSurfaceorAudio Programs,aswellasvariationsubbanksg(1)g(9)
In/Sampling. (GM2variationprograms),andbankg(d)(drums).
PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0 EachtimeyoupressthefrontpanelINTGbutton,
pagethemainProgramPlaypage.Ifyouhad youllstepthroughthesevariationbanksinthe
previouslyselectedaparameteronthispage,that followingorder:GMg(1)g(2)g(8)g(9)GM
parameterwillbeselected.
2
Program P0: Play 01: Main
Bank Bank Type Category Popup Tempo
Program Select Popup Program Select Favorite
Ifavariationbankdoesnthaveadifferentversionof Formoreinformation,seeGlobalP6:PluginInfoon
thecurrentProgram,thebasicGMsoundwillbe page 738oftheParameterGuide.
recalledinstead.Inthiscase,anasterisk*willbeadded
tothebeginningoftheProgramname. Bank Type [HD-1, EXi]
YoucaneditGMPrograms,butyoumustthensave ThisshowswhetherthecurrentBankcontainsHD1
themtoadifferentBank;theGMProgramsthemselves ProgramsorEXiPrograms.ThetwoProgramtypes
cannotbeoverwritten. cantbemixedinasinglebank.
HD1:TheBankcontainsHD1Programs.
Program Bank Contents
EXi:TheBankcontainsEXiPrograms.
Asshippedfromthefactory,thecontentsofthe
ProgramBanksareasfollows: Changing the Bank Type for USER-AG
Programbankcontents BankscancontaineitherHD1ProgramsorEXi
Programs,butnotboth.Thisassignmentisfixedfor
Bank Contents Bank Type
theINTbanks,butcanbesetseparatelyforeachofthe
INT-AD HD-1Programs USERbanks.
HD-1Programs; requires the HD-1 TochangethetypeofaUSERbank:
INT-E
EXs1 ROM Expansion PCM
1. PressthefrontpanelGLOBALbuttontoenter
INT-F AL-1 and CX-3 Programs EXi Globalmode.
GM (INT-G) GM2 main Programs 2. SelecttheBasictab.
g(1)g(9) GM2 variation Programs GM 3. Pressthepagemenubutton,andselectSet
ProgramUserBankType.
g(d) GM2 drum Programs
4. ChangetheTypeforthedesiredbanks.Leaveall
HD-1 Programs; requires the oftheotherbankssettoNoChange.
USER-A,
EXs2 Concert Grand Piano
000007 SettingabankstypewillerasealloftheProgramdata
PCM.
inthebanksomakesurethatyourenoterasingany
USER-A, HD-1 Vocoder and demo song Programsyouwanttokeep!
009010 Programs
5. PresstheOKbutton.
USER-A,
Initialized HD-1 Programs Anareyousure?dialogappears.
11127 Bank type
can be set to 6. Ifyourecertainofthechange,pressOKagain.
USER-B Initialized HD-1 Programs
either HD-1
Theselectedbankswillnowbeinitializedtousethe
USER-C MOD-7 Programs or EXi
newProgramtypes.
MS-20EX and PolysixEX
USER-D
Programs Program Select [(0127 (INT and USER Banks),
USER-E STR-1 Programs
1128 (GM Banks)]
ThisisthecurrentProgram.Whenthisparameteris
USER-F AL-1 and CX-3 Programs
selected,youcanselectprogramsusingtheInc and
USER-G Initialized HD-1 Programs Dec buttons,numericbuttons09(followedby
ENTER),ortheValuedial.
FordetailsonthefactoryPrograms,pleaseseethe YoucanalsochangeProgramsviaMIDIProgram
VoiceNameListonpage 1099. Changemessage,orbypressingafootswitch.Formore
Optional EXi and demo mode information,seeFootSwitchAssignmentson
page 1035.
TheMOD7,MS20EXandPolysixEXareoptionalEXi.
Initially,theywillbeindemomode.Youllbeableto StandardProgramsarenumberedfrom0to127,while
play,edit,andsavePrograms,Combis,andSongs GMProgramsusetherangefrom1to128,asperthe
whichusetheseEXibutuntilyoupurchasean GMspecification.
authorizationcode,theirsoundwillfadeout Note:Onthispageonly,theVALUEsliderfunctionsas
periodically. amodulationsourcewhichmeansthatyoucantuse
Topurchaseauthorizationcodes,andtodownload ittoselectPrograms.
additional,freebanksofsounds,goto PressthepopupbuttontocalluptheBank/Program
www.korguser.net.Oncepurchased,youcanenterthe Selectmenu,asdescribedbelow.Thisshowsallofthe
authorizationcodeonthePlugInInfopageinGlobal Programsinmemory,organizedbyBank.
mode.
3
Program mode: HD-1
Bank/Program Select Category/Program Select

1. PressthepopupbuttonattheleftofProgram 1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton(abovethe
SelecttoopentheBank/ProgramSelectmenu. ProgramSelectparameter)toopenthe
2. Pressoneofthetabsonthelefttoselectaspecific Category/ProgramSelectmenu.
bank. 2. Pressoneofthetabsonthelefttoselectthe
3. Selectaprogramfromthelist.Youcantoucha desiredcategory.
Programsnamedirectly,orusetheInc andDec IfnoProgramsareassignedtoaparticularcategoryor
buttons. subcategory,youwontbeabletoselectitstab.
Thepopupshows16Programsatatime.Tobrowse 3. Pressatabinthesecondfromleftcolumntoselect
throughalloftheProgramsinthecurrentbank,use asubcategory.
thescrollbaratthebottomofthewindow. All:Allprogramsinthecategorywillbeshown.
WhenyouselectBankINTG,theVariationbutton Choosethiswhenyoudontneedtousesubcategories.
appearsatthebottomleftofthedialog.Thisbutton 07:Theprogramswillbeshownbysubcategory.
cyclesthroughtheGMvariationbanks,justlike
repeatedlypressingthefrontpanelINTGBank 4. Selectaprogramfromthelist.
button,asdescribedunderBanksGM,g(19),and YoucantouchaProgramsnamedirectly,orusetheInc
g(d):GeneralMIDI,above. andDec buttons.
TheFavoritebuttontrimsthelisttoshowonly IftherearemoreProgramsthancanbeshownonthe
Programsyouvemarkedasfavorites.Iftheselected screenatonetime,usethescrollbartobrowsethrough
BankcontainsnoProgramsmarkedasFavorites,the theentireCategory.
buttoncantbeturnedon. TheFavoritebuttontrimsthelisttoshowonly
Formoreinformation,seeFavorite,below. Programsyouvemarkedasfavorites.Iftheselected
4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,or CategorycontainsnoProgramsmarkedasFavorites,
presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutchanging thebuttoncantbeturnedon.
theProgram. 5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,or
presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutchanging
Category [0018, Name] theProgram.
Allprogramsareclassifiedintooneofeighteen YoucanassignacategorytoaProgramintheWrite
categories,suchasKeyboard,Organ,Strings,etc.Each Programdialog.Formoreinformation,seeSaving
ofthesecategoriesmayalsohaveuptoeightsub youreditsonpage 59oftheOperationGuide,and
categories. Writingaprogramorcombinationonpage 170of
SelectingbyCategoryletsyousearchforaspecifictype theOperationGuide.
ofsound(likeanelectricbass,forexample),without
concernforwhatBanksthesoundsarestoredin. Favorite [Off, On]
ThisbuttonmarkstheProgramasafavorite,which
PresstheCategorypopupbutton,andthe
makesiteasytofindintheBank/ProgramSelectand
Category/ProgramSelectmenuwillappear,as
Category/ProgramSelectdialogs.
describedbelow.
Bank/ProgramSelectmenu
Tab
Scroll bar
4
Program P0: Play 01: Main
NotethatyoumustwritethePrograminordertosave Red:ROMMultisamples
changestothissetting. Green:RAMMultisamples
Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT] Blue:WaveSequences
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,which Orange:DrumKits
appliestotemposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences,
Grey:Off
theVectorEG,KARMA,andtemposyncedeffects.
Mn:Mono
EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI
clocks.YoullseethisiftheGlobalMIDIpageMIDI St:Stereo
ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,orifitssetto TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
AutoandtheOASYSiscurrentlyreceivingMIDI P2OSC1Basicpage.
clocks.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock
(MIDIClockSource)onpage 710. Key Zone
040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin ThisindicatesthekeyzoneinwhichOSC1willsound.
BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousing The76or88notekeyboardregionisalsoshown.
thestandarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsojustturn TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
theTEMPOknob,orbyplayingafewquarternoteson P1ProgramBasicpage.
theTAPTEMPObutton.
MS14, Velocity Zone Graphic
ThisshowsthevelocityzonesforOSC1multisamples
01b: Overview and Page Jump
14.
Thissectionshowsanoverviewofthemostimportant TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
Programsettings,suchastheselectedMultisamplesor P2OSC1Basicpage.
WaveSequencesandtheirvelocityranges,filter
settings,EGsandLFOs,andsoon. OSC1 LFO1, OSC1 LFO2 Graphic
Thegraphicsgiveyouaquickwaytocheckallofthese ThisshowsthewaveformsofOSC1LFO1andOSC1
settingsataglance.Theyalsoletyoujumpinstantlyto LFO2.IfMIDI/TempoSyncisselected,thiswill
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe indicateMIDI.
graphics,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilterEG P5OSC1LFO1pageorOSC1LFO2page.
graphic,youllgototheFilterEGpage.
Filter 1
OSC1
Filter Routing & Type
OSC1 Multisample/Wave Sequence/Drum Kit
Thisshowsthefilter1routingandfiltertype.
ThisareashowsOSC1sfourMultisamplesorWave
Sequences.Colorsandabbreviationsareusedto TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
distinguishbetweenthevariouspossibilities,as P3Filter1page.
detailedbelow.
Category/ProgramSelectmenu
Category tab
Sub-category tab
Scroll bar
5
Program mode: HD-1
Filter Page Graphic

t 01: Page Menu Commands
Thisshowsthecutofffrequency.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP3Filter1
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
page.
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Filter EG Graphic commandsonpage 142.
Thisshowstheshapeofthefilter1EG. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
P3Filter1EGpage. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Amp 1
Drive, Low Boost, Pan, Amp Level
ThisareashowstheAmp1Driver,LowBoost,Pan,
andAmpLevelvalues.
IfBypassison,DriveandLowBoostarenotshown.
P4Amp1/Drive1page.
Amp EG Graphic
Thisshowstheshapeoftheamp1EG.
P4Amp1EGpage.
Common
Voice Assign Mode
Thisshowsthevoiceassignmodeoftheprogram
eitherPOLYorMONO.
P1ProgramBasicpage.
Pitch EG Graphic
ThisshowstheshapeofthePitchEG.
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP2PitchEG
page.
Common LFO Graphic

ThisshowsthewaveformoftheCommonLFO.Also,if
MIDI/TempoSyncisenabled,thewordMIDIwill
appear.
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP5Common
LFOpage.
3Band EQ Graphic
ThisshowstheMIDsweepablethreebandEQ.
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP4EQpage.
IFX
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP8Routing
page.
MFX/TFX
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP9Routing
page.
KARMA
ThisshowsthenameoftheselectedKARMAGE.
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP7GE
Setup/KeyZonespage.
6
Program P0: Play 06: KARMA GE
06: KARMA GE
06PMC
06a
06b
06c
ThispageletsyoumakebasicadjustmentstoKARMA.
FormoredetailededitingofKARMAparameters,see
ProgramP7:KARMAonpage 100.
ToenableordisableKARMAfortheselectedProgram,
usetheKARMAON/OFFswitch.
ThestatesoftheKARMAON/OFFandLATCH
buttons,theselectedKARMASCENE,andKARMA
SWITCHES18andSLIDERS18aresaved
independentlyforeachProgram.
06a: Program Select, Load GE Options,

KARMA T.Sig, Tempo
2. SpecifyhowyouwanttheKARMAcontrollers
Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG] andscenesettingstochange(orbepreserved)
whenyouselectadifferentGE.
Bank Type [(HD-1, EXi)]
AutoRTCSetup:WhenyouselectaGE,thesettings
Program [(0127 (INT and USER Banks), fortheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHESwillbe
1128 (GM Banks)] madeautomatically.Thismeansthatwhenyou
selectaGE,youwillbeabletousetheslidersand
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] switchestocontrolthephrasesoreffectvariations
Thesearethecurrentbank,Program,andTempo.For withouthavingtoreassignthesettingsyourself.
moreinformation,see01a:ProgramSelecton ClearRTCSetup:WhenyouselectaGE,all
page 2. KARMAcontrollerandscenesettingswillbe
cleared(initialized).TheControlSurfaceSlidersand
Load GE Options [Dialogue]
SwitcheswillhavenoeffectontheGE.
Theseoptionsletyouspecifywhetherthevaluesand
KeepRTCSetup:EvenifyouselectaGE,the
assignmentsfortheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHES
currentKARMAcontrollerandscenesettingswill
willbesetautomatically,beinitialized,orbepreserved
bepreserved.Usethissettingifyouwantto
whenyouselectaGE.
preservethecurrentKARMAcontrollerandscene
TheseoptionsrelatetotheconceptofRTCModels;for settingsbecauseyouareselectingaGEwhose
moreinformation,seeRTCModelonpage 198ofthe assignedGEparametersareexactlythesame(using
OperationGuide. thesameRTCModel),orifyouwanttokeepthe
1. PresstheLoadGEOptionsbuttontoopenthe currentKARMAcontrollersettingsandeditthem
LoadGEOptionsdialogbox. yourselfasnecessary.
7
Program mode: HD-1
3. IfyouchoosetheAutoRTCSetupOnsetting, Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT]

checkorunchecktheUseRTCModeloption ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,which
boxtospecifyhowtheautomaticsettingswillbe appliestotemposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences,
made. KARMA,andtemposyncedeffects.
On(checked):ThecurrentKARMAcontroller
assignmentsandvalueswillbecleared,andnew
clocks.YoullseethisiftheGlobalMIDIpageMIDI
settingswillbemadeaccordingtotheRTCModel
ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,orifitssetto
specifiedforeachGE.HoweverifyouselectaGE
AutoandtheOASYSiscurrentlyreceivingMIDI
whoseRTCModelisCustom,allKARMA
clocks.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock
controllerandscenesettingswillbeinitialized(the
(MIDIClockSource)onpage 710.
sameasifyouveselectedClearRTCSetupOn).
Normallyyouwillleavethison. 040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousing
Off(unchecked):ThecurrentKARMAcontroller
thestandarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsojustturn
assignmentsandvalueswillbepreservedasmuch
theTEMPOknob,orbyplayingafewquarternoteson
aspossible.Forexample,youmightselectadrum
theTAPTEMPObutton.
patternGEwiththissettingturnedOn(checked),
editsomeoftheKARMAScenesettings
appropriatelyforthatGE,andthenturnthisOff 06b: GE Select
(unchecked)whentryingoutadifferentdrum
patternGE,therebyapplyingthesettingsyoumade ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA
tothenewGE. ModulearegeneratedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect).
Basedoninputnotedatafromthekeyboard,theGE
Note:IfyouturnonAutoRTCSetupandturnoff
createsphrasesandpatternsusingnumerousinternal
UseRTCModel,thecurrentKARMAcontroller
parametersettingstocontrolthedevelopmentofthe
settingswillbepreservedasmuchaspossible,
notedata,therhythm,thechordstructure,thevelocity
relativetothestateoftheGERealTimeParameters.
etc.MIDIcontrolchangesandpitchbendetc.canalso
Howeverif(forexample)thenewlyselectedGE
begeneratedinsynchronizationwiththephraseor
doesnothavethesamerealtimeparameters,some
pattern.Inthiswayyoucanproducephrasesand
oftheKARMAcontrollersettingswillbecleared.
patternsinwhichtheGEfreelyvariesthetoneorpitch.
4. IfyouturnedUseRTCModelOn(checked),use TheGEcanbeselectedindependentlyforeach
ResetScenestospecifywhetherscenesettings KARMAModule.
willberesetorpreservedwhenyouselectaGE.
InProgrammodeyoucanuseoneKARMAModule
On(checked):WhenyouselectaGE,thecurrent (ModuleA).InCombinationandSequencermodes,
settingsofscenes18willberesettothestoredGE youcanusefourKARMAModules:A,B,C,andD.
settings.
Off(unchecked):ThecurrentsettingsofScenes18 Module A
willbepreserved.Choosethisifyouintendtoselect
adifferentGEthathasthesameRTCModeland GE Select [Preset 0000...2047,
wanttocontinueusingthesamescenesettings. USER-AL 000...127]
EvenifthisisOff(unchecked),thesettingswillbe ThisselectstheGEfortheKARMAmodule.Thereare
resetifyouselectaGEforwhichadifferentRTC atotalof3,584tochoosefrom:2,048presetGEs,and
Modelisspecified. 1,536rewritableUserGEs(12banksof128each).
IfUseRTCModelisOff(unchecked),theReset PresetGEsarepartofthesystemsoftware.
Sceneoptionisunavailable. UserGEsmaybeincludedwithnewbanksofsounds,
5. ClicktheOKbuttontoapplythesettingsofthe andcanalsobecreatedusingKARMAOASYS
dialogbox,orclicktheCancelbuttontoreturnto software(dedicatedsoftwarefortheOASYS*).For
thesettingsbeforeyouopenedthedialogbox. moreinformationonloadingUserGEs,seeLoad
.KGEonpage 773.
Note:TheRTCModelassociatedwithaGEcanbe
viewedontheControlSurfacepagewhenitissetto *MadebyKarmaLab(http://www.karmalab.com).
R.TimeKnobs/KARMA,andintheVNL. MacintoshandWindowsaresupported.English
versiononly.
KARMA T.Sig (Time Signature)
[GE/TS, 1/416/4, 1/816/8, 1/1616/16] GE Bank Select [Preset...USER-L]
Thisspecifiesthetimesignatureofthephrasesor ThisselectstheGEbank.ThePresetbankispartofthe
patternsgeneratedbytheKARMAModules.The systemsoftware;Userbankscanbeloadedfromdisk.
internaltimesignatureofthephraseorpatternis Formoreinformation,seeGESelect,above.
determinedbytheGE,butyoucansetthisparameter GE Category Select [ArpeggioReal-Time]
tochangethetimesignature.
ThisletsyouselectaGEbycategory,fromArpeggio
GE/TS:Theinitialtimesignaturespecifiedbyeach throughRealTime.
KARMAModulewillbeused.
1/416/16:Specifythedesiredtimesignature.In RTC Model [List of RTC Models]
CombinationandSequencermodes,thiswillchange ThisshowstheGEsRTCModel,asspecifiedinternally
thetimesignatureforallfourKARMAModules. foreachpresetGE.
8
Program P0: Play 06: KARMA GE
Tab
Preset
GE Bank
User
GE Bank
RTC Model
Name
RTCstandsforRealTimeControl.RTCmodels A:KARMAModuleAisbeingcontrolled.Inthiscase,
providealevelofstandardizationforcontrollingthe youarecontrollingaGERealTimeParameter.
over200internalparametersofaGE.Formore P:ThesliderorswitchiscontrollingaPerfRealTime
information,seeRTCModelonpage 198ofthe Parameter.
OperationGuide.
(Parameter Number) [0132]
KARMA Module Info WhenModuleIDisA,thisshowsthenumberofthe
Chord [Chord name] assignedGERealTimeParameter(0132).These
parametersareassignedtocontrolsonthe75:GE
Thisshowsthenameofthechorddetectedbythe RealTimeParameterspage.
KARMAModule.
IfModuleIDisP,thisshowsthenumberofthe
Note:Chorddetectionisaffectedbythefollowing assignedPerfRealTimeParameter(0108).These
parameters: parametersareassignedtocontrolsonthe76:Perf
TheKARMAmodulesKeyZone.SeeKeyZone RealTimeParameterspage.
onpage 101.
Parameter Value
TheKARMAmodulesTranspose.SeeTranspose
onpage 106. ThisareashowsthecurrentvalueoftheGERealTime
ParameterorPerfRealTimeParameter.Thiswill
TheDestination(DynamicMIDIDestination).See changeasyoumovetheslideroroperatetheswitch.
Destinationonpage 121.
Asliderorswitchcanhavemanyparameters
TheChordScanandSmartScansettings. assignedtoit.Amaximumoffourassigned
parameterscanbedisplayedhereintheavailable
KARMA Value
space.Iftherearemore,theywillnotbedisplayed,
WhenyoumoveorpressaKARMASLIDERor buta>willbeaddedtotheendoftheline.They
SWITCH,thisareashowsthenumberandvalueofthe willstillfunctionwhenthecontrolisactivated,even
GERealTimeParametersorPerfRealTime thoughyoucantviewtheirvaluesdirectly.
Parametersassignedtothecontrol.Thisletsyousee
whichparametersarebeingcontrolledbytheslideror Note/CC Activity
switch,andhow.
Displayexample A (Module A)
S (Scene) [18]
Thebluesquareintheupperleftofthesectionshows
thecurrentsceneoftheselectedKARMAmodule.
Parameter Value
ThenumberinparenthesesisthedefaultScene,as
Module ID
Parameter No.
storedintheProgram.
CCs/Notes
(Module ID) [A, P] Thisisarealtimedisplayofthenoteon/offorMIDI
Thisshowsthetypeofparameterassignedtotheslider controlchangemessagesgeneratedbytheKARMA
orswitch. module(ModuleA).
9
Program mode: HD-1
Scan Zone 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore

TheKeyZoneoftheKARMAModuleisdisplayedasa information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
solidbluelineunderthenotesdisplay.Formore page 151.
information,seeKeyZoneonpage 101. 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 151.
Scene
5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Sceneonpage 151.
Module CCs Notes Scan Zone
6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
7:AutoAssignKARMARTCName.Formore
06c: RealTime Controls information,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC
Thisdisplaysthevalues,names,andstoredsettingsof Nameonpage 143.
KARMASLIDERS18andKARMASWITCHES18.
NotethateachScenecanhaveseparatevaluesand
storedsettingsforeachoftheslidersandswitches.
KARMA SWITCHES 18
Current Value 18
ThisshowsthecurrentsettingoftheKARMA
SWITCH.Youcancontrolthiseitherbyusingthe
physicalfrontpanelswitch,orbytouchingtheon
screenswitch.
Stored Value 18
ThisshowsstoredvalueoftheKARMASWITCHfor
thecurrentScene,aswrittenintotheCombination.
Name 18
ThisshowsthenameoftheKARMASWITCH.Youcan
assignthisnameinProgram79:Name/Map.
KARMA SLIDERS 18
Current Value 18
ThisshowsthecurrentsettingoftheKARMASLIDER.
Youcanchangethiseitherbyusingthephysicalfront
panelslider,orbytouchingtheonscreensliderand
thenusinganyofthedataentrycontrols.
Stored Value 18
ThisshowsstoredvalueoftheKARMASLIDERfor
Name 18
ThisshowsthenameoftheKARMASLIDER.Youcan
assignthisnameinProgram79:Name/Map.

commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
10
Program P0: Play 07: Controller View/Effect
07: Controller View/Effect

07PMC
07a
07b
07c
Thispageshowsthefunctionsassignedtothephysical Knobs 58 [Assignment]

controllers,includingthevectorjoystick,SW1and2, Theseindicatethefunctionsassignedtoknobs58.
andknobs58.Italsoincludesanoverviewofallofthe (See18:SetUpControllersonpage 46)
effects,andletsyouadjusttheWet/DryBalances
separatelyfortheIFX,MFX,andTFX.
07c: Effects
07a: Program Select IFX112, MFX1&2, TFX1&2 [Effect]
Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG] Thisareashowstheeffectassignedtoeachinserteffect,
mastereffect,andtotaleffect,anditson/offstatus.
Bank Type [HD-1, EXi]
FX Balance
Program [(0127 (INT and USER Banks),
1128 (GM Banks)] IFX [-100+10]
ThiscontrolstheWet/Drybalanceofallinsert
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] effects.Asettingof+10isWetorWet,asettingof+0
Thesearethecurrentbank,Program,andTempo.For leavesthesettingsoftheprogramunmodified,anda
moreinformation,see01a:ProgramSelecton settingof10isDry.
page 2.
MFX [-100+10]
ThiscontrolstheMFX1and2Return.Asettingof
07b: Controller View +10is127,asettingof+0leavesthesettingsofthe
programunmodified,andasettingof10is000.
VJS
Thisareashowsinformationaboutthevectorjoystick. TFX [-100+10]
XMode,YMode:Theseindicatethebehaviorofthe ThiscontrolstheWet/DrybalanceofTFX1and2.A
vectorCCfortheXaxisandYaxis.Formore settingof+10isWetorWet,asettingof+0leavesthe
information,seeVJSXModeonpage 41. settingsoftheprogramunmodified,andasettingof
10isDry.
VJS+X,VJSX,VJS+Y,VJSY:Theseindicatethe
controllertransmittedbythe+X,X,+Y,andY Whenyoueditthesesettings,thechangewilloccur
vectors.Formoreinformation,see+Xonpage 41. immediatelyinthesound,butthevaluesofthe
originalprogramparameterswillnotchangeuntil
SW1, SW2, Knob58 yousavetheprogram.Whenyousavetheprogram,
thevalueswillbeupdatedandthesesliderswillbe
SW1&2 [Assignment] resetto0.
TheseindicatethefunctionsassignedtoSW1and2.
11
Program mode: HD-1
t 07: Page Menu Commands Programonpage 142.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
commandsonpage 142.
08: Audio Input/Sampling

08PMC
07a
08b
08a
08c
08d
Thispageletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,effects
sends,andbussingfortheaudioinputs,including 08a: Audio Input
analoginputs14andS/P DIFL/R.Italsocontrolsthe
Use Global setting [Off, On]
samplingrelatedsettingsforProgrammode.
EachProgramcaneitherusethesingle,Globalaudio
TheOASYScansampleexternalaudiofromtheanalog
inputmixersetup,orhaveitsowncustomsettings.
orS/P DIFinputs,at48 kHz16bitresolution,inmono
TheGlobalsettingsaredescribedunder02:Audio
orstereo.YoucanrecordsamplesintoRAM,orsample
Input,onpage 705.
directlytodisk.
WhenUseGlobalSettingsisOn,theProgramusesthe
Youcanalsodigitallyresamplethecompletesoundof
Globalsettings.Thisisthedefault,andletsyouchange
aProgram,playedpolyphonically,liveorsequenced,
freelybetweendifferentPrograms,Combis,andSongs
includinganyeffectsandKARMAgeneratedevents.
withoutaffectingtheaudioinputs.
Finally,youcanalsousetheOASYSasa6in,10out
Also,anyeditsmadeonthispagewillaffecttheGlobal
effectsprocessor.
setting,alongwithanyotherPrograms,Combis,or
Youcancombineanyandallofthesefeaturesatonce. SongswhichusetheGlobalsetting.
Forinstance,youcansamplealiveguitarrifffromthe
Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto
audioinputs,processedthroughOASYSeffects,while
saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual
listeningtoandeitherrecordingornotrecordinga
Program,Combi,orSong,tosetupspecialsubmixer
KARMAgeneratedphrase.
settingsoreffectsprocessingforparticularinputs.For
Using the control surface to adjust Audio Input example,youcansetupaProgramtouseamicinput
withavocoder,asdescribedunderVocoder(Program
Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustmostofthe
mode)onpage 791.
AudioInputmixerparameters,includingPlay/Mute,
Solo,Pan,Level,andSends1and2. Inthiscase,setUse/EditGlobalSetuptoOff,andthe
audioinputswillusetheProgramscustomsettings.
Formoreinformation,see09c:AudioInputson
page 22,andAdjustingvolume,Pan,EQ,andFX Input14
sendsonpage 56oftheOperationGuide.
Thesearesettingsforanaloginputs1through4.Inputs
1and2aremic/line;inputs3and4arelinelevelonly.
12
Program P0: Play 08: Audio Input/Sampling
S/P DIF L, S/P DIF R 1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin

stereotothespecifiedpairofRECbusses.ThePan
ThesearesettingsfortheS/P DIFdigitalaudioinput, settingsendsthesignalinstereotobusses1and2or
forconnectingexternalA/Dconverters,computer busses3and4.
audiosystems,DATmachines,orotherdigitalaudio
gear. Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]
OASYSsupportsS/P DIFinputateither48kHzor96
Send2 (to MFX2) [000127]
kHz.Youllneedtoselectthecorrectrateusingthe
GlobalpageS/P DIFSampleRateparameter.96kHz Theseadjustthelevelsatwhichtheexternalaudio
dataisconvertedto48kHzforsampling. inputsignalissenttothemastereffects.
WhensamplingfromS/P DIF,makesurethatthe Send1(toMFX1):Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.

GlobalmodesSystemClockparameterisset Send2(toMFX2):Sendthesignaltomastereffect2.
appropriately.Formoreinformation,seeSystem
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX112,
Clockonpage 702.
thesendlevelstothemastereffectsaresetbythepost
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.) [L/R, IFX112, 18, IFX112Send1andSend2(82a).(SeeAudioInput,
1/27/8, Off] S/P DIFINonpage 801)
Thisspecifiesthebusfortheexternalaudioinput Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
signal. parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust
AudioInputonpage 12)
L/R:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesenttothe
L/Rbus. PLAY/MUTE [Play, Mute]
IFX112:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent Thisshowswhethertheexternalaudiosignalbeing
totheIFX112bus.Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyou inputisinPLAYorMUTEstatus.
wanttoapplyaninserteffectwhilesampling. YoucanusetheMIXPLAY/MUTE16switchesto
18:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent,in changethis.
mono,toINDIVIDUALoutputs18.Pandoesnot Mute:Theinputsoundwillbemuted(silent).
applyinthiscase. Play:Theinputsoundwillbeheard.
1/27/8:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
theindividualoutputsinstereopairs. parameter.Formoreinformation,seeUsingthe
Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbeinput. controlsurfacetoadjustAudioInputonpage 12.
FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2] SOLO On/Off

Thisletsyousendtheaudioinputtooneofthetwo ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio
stereoFXControlbusses.SeeFXControlBuseson signalinput.YoucanusetheMIXSELECT16
page 790. switchestochangethis.
REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4] Soundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelsforwhich

SOLOisOn.Otherchannelswillbemuted.
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC
busses(fourmonochannels;1,2,3,4). TheSolofunctionincludestheoscillatorsinProgram
mode,thetimbresinCombinationmode,andMIDI
UsingtheRECbusses,youcanisolateoneormore tracksandaudiotracksinSequencermode.
soundsforrecordingorsamplingevenifthesounds
arealsobeingmixedintothemainoutputs.For ThewayinwhichtheSolofunctionoperateswill
example,youcanplayaguitarthroughOASYSIFX dependonthesettingoftheExclusiveSolopagemenu
whilelisteningtoaKARMAdrumphrase,andrecord commandineachmode.
theprocessedguitarwithoutrecordingthedrums. ExclusiveSoloOff:Selectedisoff,youcansolo
IndividualPrograms,CombiTimbres,Sequencer multipleaudioinputs.Thesolostatuswillchangeeach
Tracks(bothMIDIandAudio),audioinputs,and timeyoupressSoloOn/Off.
InsertEffectscanallberoutedtotheRECbusses,in ExclusiveSoloOn:Selectedison,pressingaSolo
additiontotheirmainoutput/IFXbussettings. buttonwillsoloonlythataudioinput.
Youcansamplethesesignalsbysettingthesampling TheSOLOsettingisnotmemorizedwhenyouWrite
SourceBus(08c)toRECbus. aProgram.
Formoreinformation,seethediagramSourceBus= Tip:YoucanholddowntheENTERswitchandpress
RECBus1/2onpage 16. numerickey1toswitchExclusiveSoloon/off.
Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttothe Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
RECbusses.NormallyyouwillusetheOffsetting. parameter.Formoreinformation,seeUsingthe
1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto controlsurfacetoadjustAudioInputonpage 12.
thespecifiedRECbus.ThePansettingisignored,and
Pan [L000C064R127]
thesignalissentinmonaural.
Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheexternalaudioinput
signal.Whenusingtwoinputsforastereoaudio
source,youllnormallysettheinputstoL000andR127
respectively.
13
Program mode: HD-1
Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
parameter.Formoreinformation,seeUsingthe 08b: Recording Level [dB]
controlsurfacetoadjustAudioInputonpage 12.
Recording Level [Inf, 72.0+0.0+18.0]
Level [000127] Thisadjuststhesignallevelatthefinalstageof
Thiscontrolstheleveloftheexternalaudiosignal.The sampling.
defaultis127. TheRecordingLevelsettingismadeforProgram
TheanalogaudiosignalsfromAUDIOINPUTS14are modeasawhole,andisnotsavedindependentlywith
convertedintodigitalformbyanA/Dconverter.This eachProgram.
parametersetsthelevelofthesignalimmediatelyafter
Level Meter
thisconversion.
Thisshowsthesignallevelatthefinalstageof
Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhoughthislevelsetting
sampling,afteranyadjustmentsontheAudioInputs
isverylow,seeTipsforeliminatingdistortionwhen
page,anyeffects,etc.Themeterisactiveonlyduring
usingtheanaloginputs,below.
standbymodeandrecording.
parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust CLIP!
AudioInputonpage 12.) If0dBisexceeded,thedisplaywillindicateCLIP!
Thismeansthatthelevelofthesamplingsignalistoo
Avoiding extraneous noise high;inthiscase,adjusttheRecordingLevel,andif
IfaudiocablesareconnectedtoAUDIOINPUTS1 necessaryfollowtheinstructionsunderTipsfor
4,anynoisecarriedbythecableswillenterintothe eliminatingdistortionwhenusingtheanaloginputs,
OASYSmixerstructure.Similarly,theS/P DIFinput below.
maycarrynoisefromexternaldevices.Thismay
includehiss,hum,andotheraudionoise. Setting levels
Toavoidnoisefromunusedaudioinputs,either: Forthebestresults,setthelevelsasdescribedbelow:
SettheinputsLevelto0 1. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch.
OASYSwillentersamplingstandbymode,andthe
or
LevelMeterbecomesactive.
SetallofthebusassignmentstoOff,includingBus
2. Initially,settheRecordingLevelto0.0dB.
Select(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign),RECBus,andFX
ControlBus 3. Adjusttheleveloftheinputsignalsothatitisas
highaspossiblewithoutactivatingtheCLIP!or
IfnoaudiocablesareconnectedtoAUDIOINPUTS
ADCOVERLOAD!messages.
14,theinputsignalsareforcedtozero,preventing
anyadditionalnoise. IfyoureusingAUDIOINPUTS1and/or2,adjustthe
volumeusingrearpanelMIC/LINEswitchesand
ADC OVERLOAD! LEVELknobs.
IfthesignallevelfromAUDIOINPUT14jacksistoo IfyoureusingAUDIOINPUT3and/or4,orthe
high,theADCOVERLOAD!indicationwillappear. S/P DIFinput,adjusttheoutputlevelofyourexternal
YoullneedtoadjusttheMIC/LINEgainselect audiosource.
switchesand/orLEVELknobs(forAUDIOINPUTS1
Ifyouresamplingexternalaudiothroughtheinternal
and2only),ortheoutputlevelofyourexternalaudio
effects,youmayalsoneedtoadjusttheindividual
source.
effectsinputand/oroutputlevelparameters.
Ifyoureusinginternalsounds,adjustthelevelsusing
thecontrolsurface,effectsinput/outputtrim,etc.
4. Ifthelevelisstillnothighenough,increasethe
RecordingLevelusingtheonscreenslider.
Audioinput/output
"Audio Input" (08a)
Bus(IFX/Indiv.) "Source Bus" (0-8c)

ADC OVERLOAD !! = L/R or IFX1-12 Insert = L/R CLIP !!
Effects Sampling
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 ADC Total L-Mono
Effects R-Mono Stereo
LEVEL Analog to
(MIC/LINE) Digital "Level" "Pan" REC Sample Setup
(MIN...MAX) Converter [127=0dB] "Mode" (08c)
Master
ADC OVERLOAD !! Insert Effects
Effects
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 ADC
Analog to
Digital "Level" "Pan" "Recording Level" (08b)
Converter [127=0dB] [inf ... 0.0dB ... +18.0dB]
Insert
Effects
L/MONO AUDIO
S/P DIF IN (L, R) OUTPUT
R
"Level" "Pan"
[127=0dB]
14
Again,thegoalistogetthelevelashighaspossible Whensamplinginstereo,theoddnumberedchannel
withoutactivatingtheCLIP!orADCOVERLOAD! (suchas1,3,5,or7)correspondstotheleftchannel,
messages. andtheevennumberedchannel(suchas2,4,6,or8)
correspondstotheright.
Tips for eliminating distortion when using the
L/R:Thisletsyousamplethesignalheardatthemain
analog inputs
L/Routputs,includinganyprocessingbyTFX1/2.This
Ifsoundfromtheanaloginputsisdistorted,butthe isthedefaultsetting.Formoreinformation,seethe
CLIP!messagedoesntappear,itspossiblethat diagramSourceBus=L/Ronpage 15.
distortionisoccurringattheanaloginputstage,orthat
distortionisbeingcausedbythesettingsoftheinternal REC1/2,REC3/4:Theseletyousamplethesignalssent
effects. totheREC1/2orREC3/4busses.
IftheADCOVERLOAD!messageappearsabovethe UsingtheRECbusses,youcanisolateoneormore
RecordingLevelmeters,thedistortionisdueto soundsforrecordingorsamplingevenifthesounds
excessivelevelsattheinput.Inthiscase,eitherlower arealsobeingmixedintothemainoutputs.For
theoutputleveloftheexternalaudiosource,or(for example,youcanplayaguitarthroughOASYSIFX
inputs1and2only)adjusttheMIC/LINEgainselect whilelisteningtoaKARMAdrumphrase,andrecord
switchandLEVELknobsothatthismessagedoesnot theprocessedguitarwithoutrecordingthedrums.
appear. IndividualPrograms,CombiTimbres,Sequencer
Ifthereisdistortion,buttheADCOVERLOAD! Tracks(bothMIDIandAudio),audioinputs,and
messagedoesnotappear,itspossiblethatthe InsertEffectscanallberoutedtotheRECbusses,in
distortionisbeingcausedbythesettingsoftheinternal additiontotheirmainoutput/IFXbussettings.
effects.Tosolvethisproblem,eitherlowertheinput Formoreinformation,seethediagramSourceBus=
Level(seeLevel,above),oradjusttheeffectssettings RECBus1/2onpage 16.
(suchaschangingtheindividualeffectInputTrim AudioInput1/2,AudioInput3/4:Choosethese
parameters). settingstosampledirectlyfromtheanalogaudio
inputs,withoutanyotherprocessingbyOASYS.The
08c: Sampling Setup settingsontheAudioInputsmixer,includingvolume,
pan,busses,sends,mute,andsolo,willhavenoeffect
Source Bus [L/R, REC1/2 & 3/4, ontherecordedaudio.
Audio Input1/2 & 3/4, Formoreinformation,seethediagramSourceBus=
S/P DIF L/R, Indiv.1/27/8] AudioInput1/2onpage 16.
Youcansampleinstereofromanypairofaudio S/P DIFL/R:ChoosethissettingtosampletheS/P DIF
inputs,fromthetwostereoRECbusses,orfromthe inputdirectly,withoutanyotherprocessingby
signalatanyofthe10outputs(L/RandIndividual1/2 OASYS.ThesettingsontheAudioInputsmixer,
7/8). includingvolume,pan,busses,sends,mute,andsolo,
WhenyousamplefromanoutputpairorRECbus, willhavenoeffectontherecordedaudio.
youllrecordallaudiosenttotheoutputorbus, Formoreinformation,seethediagramSourceBus=
includinginternalProgramsorCombis,effects,audio S/P DIFL/Ronpage 16.
inputs,andHDRaudio.
Indiv.1/27/8:Thisletsyousampletheindividual
outputbusses.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
SourceBus=Indiv.1/2onpage 16.
SourceBus=L/R
Source Bus = L/R L/R REC REC Indiv.

Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...
Master
Effects CLIP !! Sampling
Total L-Mono
Insert
Effects
Audio Inputs
Monitor
Level Pan
L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
R HEADPHONES
Insert
Effects
OSC
Bus = L/R or IFX1-12
15
Program mode: HD-1
SourceBus=RECBus1/2
Source Bus = REC Bus 1/2

L/R REC REC Indiv.
Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...
REC Bus = 1/2
CLIP !! Sampling
L-Mono
R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
Audio Inputs Master
Effects Monitor
Level Pan
Total L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
Effects R HEADPHONES
[x] Source Direct Solo
Insert
Effects
OSC
SourceBus=AudioInput1/2
Source Bus = Audio Input 1/2

L/R REC REC Indiv.
Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...
CLIP !! Sampling
L-Mono
R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
Audio Input 1 Master
Effects Monitor
Level Pan
Insert Total L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
Effects Effects R HEADPHONES
Audio Input 2
Level Pan
Insert
Effects
OSC
SourceBus=S/P DIFL/R
Source Bus = S/P DIF L/R

L/R REC REC Indiv.
Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...
CLIP !! Sampling
L-Mono
R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
S/P DIF L Master
Effects Monitor
Level Pan
Insert Total L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
Effects Effects R HEADPHONES
S/P DIF R
Level Pan
Insert
Effects
OSC
SourceBus=Indiv.1/2
Source Bus = Indiv.1/2 L/R REC REC Indiv.

Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...
CLIP !! Sampling
L-Mono
R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
Audio Inputs Master
Effects Monitor
Level Pan
INDIV.1 AUDIO OUTPUT

INDIV.2
Insert
Effects
OSC
Bus = Indiv.1/2 or IFX1-12
16
Source Direct Solo [Off, On] usersamplingwillvarydependinguponboththe

ThisselectswhatisheardthroughtheL/Routputsand amountofphysicalRAMinstalled,andthesizeofthe
headphoneswhenSamplingRECisenabled. currentlyloadedEXsbanks.Formoreinformation,see
SamplingandRAMonpage 621.
On(checked):OnlythesignaloftheselectedSource
Buswillbeheard.Thisletsyouhearonlythesound DatawrittenintoRAMmemorywillbelostwhen
thatwillbesampled. thepoweristurnedoff,soyoumustsaveitifyou
wanttokeepit.
Off(unchecked):ThesignaloftheselectedSourceBus
willbemergedwiththemainL/Rsignal.Thisisthe Note:IfSaveToissettoRAM,the+12dB(Sampling
default. 21d)settingwillbeappliedtothesamplesampledto
RAM.If+12dBison,aonevoicesamplewillhavea
Note:IfSourceBusissettoL/R,thissettingisignored playbacklevelapproximately+12dBhigher,sothatthe
sincethatsignalisnormallyheardattheL/Routputs levelwillbethesameduringplaybackasitwaswhile
already! sampling.
Trigger [Sampling START SW, Note On] IfyouveselectedtheAuto+12dBOncheckboxinthe
Specifieshowsamplingwillbeinitiated. SelectSampleNo.pagemenucommand,the+12dB
settingwillautomaticallybeturnedonforsampling.
SamplingSTARTSW:PressingtheSAMPLINGREC
switchwillcausetheOASYStoentersampling DISK:Sampleswillberecordedtotheinternalhard
standbymode,andsamplingwillbeginwhenyou diskoraUSBconnectedexternalharddisk.
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. Whenyousample,aWAVEfileiscreatedonthedisk.
NoteOn:PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthen UsetheSelectDirectorypagemenucommandto
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter specifythewritingdestinationdiskanddirectory.
samplingstandbymode.Samplingwillbeginwhen Toopentheresultingsample,youcaneitheruseDisk
youplaythekeyboard. modetoloadthesampleintoRAM,oruseh:Select
Directoryetc.toselectthefileandthenpressthePlay
SamplingwillalsobeginifaMIDInoteonis buttonortheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.
received(insteadofplayingthekeyboard).
Regardlessofthesettingsyoureusing,pressthe Mode (Sampling Mode) [L-Mono, R-Mono, Stereo]
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchonceagainwhen Specifiesthechannel(s)thatyouwanttosample,and
youvefinishedsampling.Alternatively,samplingwill specifywhetheramonoorstereosamplewillbe
endautomaticallyifthespecifiedSamplingTime created.
elapses. TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedbySource
Bus(08c)willbesampled.
Metronome Precount [Off, 4, 8, 3, 6]
Thisspecifieswhetherthemetronomewillsounda LMono:TheleftchanneloftheSourceBuswillbe
countdownbeforesamplingbegins.Thiscanbeset sampledinmono.
onlyifTriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW. RMono:TherightchanneloftheSourceBuswillbe
Off:Samplingwillbeginimmediatelywhenyoupress sampledinmono.
theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchfromrecording Stereo:TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedby
standbymode. SourceBuswillbesampledinstereo.Thiswillcreatea
4,8,3,6:WhenyoupresstheSAMPLING stereomultisampleandsamples.Formoreinformation,
START/STOPswitchfromrecordingstandbymode, seeAboutstereomultisamplesandstereosamples
themetronomewillcountthespecifiednumberof onpage 627.
beatsatthesystemtempo,andthensamplingwill Sample Time [min sec]
begin.Ifyousetthisto4,samplingwillbeginonthe
countof0afteraprecountof43210. Thissetstheamountoftimethatyouwishtosample.
Thiscanbesetin0.001secondincrements.
Theoutputdestinationandlevelofthemetronome
soundarespecifiedbyMetronomeSetup(08d).If Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,this
Bus(Output)SelectissettoL/R,themetronomewill parametershowsthemaximumavailablesampling
stopsoundingtheinstantsamplingactuallybegins. time,equivalenttotheentireamountoffreeRAM.
EachtimeyoupressSTOPaftersamplingtoRAM,the
Save to [RAM, DISK] changeinremainingsampletimewillbedisplayed
Specifiesthedestinationtowhichthedatawillbe automatically.
writtenduringsampling. IfSavetoissettoDISK,themaximumvalueis
RAM:ThesoundwillbesampledintoRAMmemory. determinedbythefreespaceonthecurrentdisk,as
specifiedbytheSelectDirectorymenucommand.
AsamplewrittenintoRAMmemorycanbeheard
immediatelyinProgrammodeorSamplingmode.Use Tips:IfyouhavesufficientRAMmemory,itsagood
thepagemenucommandg:SelectSampleNo.to ideatosetagenerousamountofSampleTime.After
specifytheSampleNo.andtomakesettingsfor yousample,youcanthenusetheTruncatemenu
automaticconversiontoaprogram. commandtodeleteunwantedportionsofthesample,
andreduceittotheminimumsizenecessary.Formore
Note:TheamountofRAMavailableforusersampling information,seeTruncate(forSampleEdit)on
isshownbyFreeSampleMemory/Locations page 680andTruncate(forLoopEdit)onpage 686.
(Sampling01f).TheamountofRAMavailablefor
17
Program mode: HD-1
YoucanalsopresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP 18:Themetronomewillbeheardonlyintheselected
switchtomanuallystopsamplingafteryouhave individualoutput.
recordedthedesiredmaterial.Formoredetailson
sampling,seePreparationsforsamplingonpage 125 Level [000127]
oftheOperationGuide. Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemetronomesound.
IfSavetoissettoRAM,andyoucontinuesampling
withtheAutoOptimizeRAM(Global01d)option t 08: Page Menu Commands
unchecked,wastedspacewilldevelopinmemory,
decreasingtheamountofavailableRAM.Inthis ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
case,usetheOptimizeRAMmenucommandto numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
recoverthewastedspace. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Note:FreeSampleMemory/Locations(Sampling0
1f)inSamplingmodeletsyouchecktheremaining 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
amountofRAM. Programonpage 142.
Note:ThevariousRecordingSetupsettingsarenot 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
madeindependentlyforeachprogram;theyapplyto ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
theentireProgrammode. 2:OptimizeRAM.Formoreinformation,see
OptimizeRAMonpage 143.
08d: Metronome Setup 3:SelectSampleNo.ThisappliesonlywhenSave
toissettoRAM.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
Hereyoucanspecifytheoutputdestinationand SampleNo.onpage 143.
volumeofthemetronome,assetupinbyMetronome
Precount(02c).Themetronomeisavailableonlyif 3:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSaveto
TriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW. issettoDisk.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
Directoryonpage 144.
Bus (Output) Select [L/R, L, R, 18] 4:AutoSamplingSetup.Formoreinformation,see
Thissetstheaudiooutputforthemetronomesound. AutoSamplingSetuponpage 144.
L/R:Themetronomewillbeheardinthemainstereo
outputs(L/MonoandR),theS/P DIFoutput,andthe
headphones.
09: Control Surface

09PMC
09b
09a
09c
09d
09e
09f
TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and MIDImessagestoexternaldevices.
16switchestotheleftoftheLCDdisplay.Itlookslikea Thispageshowsyouthecurrentvaluesforeachofthe
mixer,butitcandootherthingsaswell,including sliders,knobs,andbuttons,alongwithinformation
editingsounds,controllingKARMA,andsending aboutwhattheyarecontrolling.Forinstance,youcan:
18
Program P0: Play 09: Control Surface
AdjustthevolumeandpanforOscillators1and2 AUDIOINPUTSletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,and
ControltheProgramsEQsettingsandMaster sendlevelsfortheanalogandS/P DIFaudioinputs.In
EffectsSendlevels Sequencermode,youcanalsousethistoselecttwo
banksofharddiskrecordingtracks,asshownbythe
ModulatesoundsandeffectsusingtheRealTime LEDstotherightoftheswitch.
Knobs
EXTERNALletsyousendMIDImessagestoexternal
ControlKARMA,andselectKARMAscenes,using MIDIdevices.UsetheGlobalP1External1pageto
theslidersandswitches specifytheMIDImessagethatwillbetransmitted.
EditsoundsusingToneAdjust R.TIMEKNOBS/KARMAletsyoumodulatesounds
Assignsliders,knobs,andswitchestodifferent andeffectswiththeknobs,andcontrolKARMAwith
ToneAdjustparameters theslidersandswitches.
TONEADJUSTgivesyouhandsonaccesstosound
Local Control On/Off and the Control Surface
editing,usingthesliders,knobs,andswitches.
TheControlSurfacegeneratesandreceivesMIDICCs
andSystemExclusivemessages,sothatyoucanrecord Youcanfreelychangebackandforthbetweenthe
knob,switch,andslidermovementsintoasequencer. differentfunctions,withoutlosinganyofyouredits.
ThismeansthattheGlobalmodeLocalControlsetting
Front-panel LEDs for sliders and knobs
isimportant:
TheresaverticalcolumnofLEDsnexttoeachslider,
IfLocalControlisOn,thephysicalControlSurface
andaringofLEDsaroundeachknob.Similarly,each
willworkproperlyaslongasMIDIisnotbeing
oftheswitcheshasanLEDtoshowwhetheritsonor
loopedbackintotheOASYS.
off.
IfLocalControlisOff,youmustloopbackMIDI
AsyouswitchbetweenthedifferentControlAssign
intotheOASYSinorderforthephysicalControl
settings,youllnoticethattheLEDschangetoshowthe
Surfacetoworkproperly.
currentvaluesforallofthecontrollers.
RegardlessoftheLocalControlsetting,youcan
Youcaneditthesevaluesusingeitherthephysical
alwayseditControlSurfaceparametersviathe
sliders,knobs,andswitches,orbyselectingtheon
touchscreen.
screenparametersandusingthestandarddataentry
Formoreinformation,seeLocalControlandthe controls.WhenyoueditavalueusingtheLCDand
ControlSurfaceonpage 709. dataentry,youllnoticethattheLEDsonthesliders,
knobs,andswitchesreflectthechangeaswell.
Control Assign Switches and Tabs
YoucanswitchtheControlSurfacebetweenits Jump/Catch
differentfunctionsusingeitherthetabsontheleftside WhenyouchangetheControlAssignsetting,the
oftheLCDdisplay,orthefrontpanelControlAssign physicalpositionoftheknobsorslidersmaybe
switches.Thetabsandthefrontpanelswitchesmirror differentthantheparametervalue,asshownbythe
oneanother;whenyouchangeoneofthem,theother LEDs.
changesaswell.
TheKnob/SliderModeparameter,underSystem
ControlAssignswitches PreferencesontheGlobalmodeBasicpage,determines
howandwhenmovingthephysicalsliderorknobwill
starttoedittheparametervalue.
WhenitissettoJump,theparameterwillsnaptothe
physicalpositionassoonasyoustarttomovetheknob
INPUTS orslider.Usethisifyoudliketheparametersto
HDR 1-8
respondinstantlytocontrollermovements.
HDR 9-16
-16
WhenitissettoCatch,youneedtomovetheslideror
knobsothatitcatchestheparameter,bypassing
throughitscurrentvalue.Untilthevalueiscaught,
movingthesliderorknobhasnoeffectonthe
parameter.Usethiswhenyoudlikeparametereditsto
besmooth,andalwaysmovefromthecurrentvalue.
InProgrammode,youcanselectoneoffivedifferent RESET CONTROLS

functions: ThefrontpanelRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyou
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,and recallthestoredsettingsforanyslider,knob,orswitch
sendlevelsforOscillators1and2,alongwiththe onthecontrolsurface.Youcanalsouseittoresetthe
ProgramEQ.InCombiandSequencermodes,youcan VectorJoysticktothecenterposition,ortoresetallof
alsousethistoselecttwodifferentbanksofTimbresor theparametersinthecurrentKARMAModule,orto
Tracks,asshownbytheLEDstotherightoftheswitch. unsoloallchannelsatonce.
Resetting a single control

Toresetasingleknob,slider,orswitch:
1. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
19
Program mode: HD-1
2. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,movea InProgrammode,Absoluteparameterswillberesetto
sliderorknob,orpressoneofthecontrolsurface thestoredvalue,andRelativeparameterswillbereset
switches. tothecenter(whichmeansnodeviationfromthe
3. Whenyouredone,releasetheRESET storedvalue).
CONTROLSbutton. InCombinationmode,theywillberesettothevalues
Theslider,knob,orswitchwillberesettothevalue storedintheCombination.
storedintheProgramorCombi.Ifthevalueisnot InSequencermode,theywillberesettothestatein
stored(suchaswiththeREALTIMEKNOBS),the whichtheywereimmediatelyafteryouentered
controlisresettoitsdefaultvalue. Sequencermode,selectedtheSong,executedCopy
InSequencermode,controlswillberesettothestatein FromCombi,etc.
whichtheywereimmediatelyafteryouentered
Sequencermode,selectedtheSong,executedCopy
09a: Program Select & Tempo
FromCombi,etc.
Bank (Bank Select)[INTAF, GM, g(1)g(9), g(d),
Resetting a group of controls
USERAG]
Toresetagroupofcontrolsatonce:
1. MakesurethattheControlSurfaceisshowingthe Bank Type [(HD-1, EXi)]
parametersyouwanttoreset. Program Select [(INTAF, USERAG) 0127,
Asasafetyprecaution,youcanonlyresetthe (G, g(1)g(9), g(d)) 1128]
parameterscurrentlydisplayedontheControlSurface.
ThistakesintoaccountboththecurrentControlAssign q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
setting,andtheMIXERKNOBSbutton. Thisareadisplaysinformationabouttheprogram
Forinstance,ifyouwanttoresetthevolumeandpan selectedforeditingtheprogrambank/number/
forbothOscillators,makesurethatControlAssignis name,andthetempousedtocontroltheKARMA
settoTIMBRE/TRACK,andthatMIXERKNOBSisset functionetc.(See01a:ProgramSelectonpage 2)
toINDIVIDUALPAN.
2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton. 09b: OSC 1/2
3. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,press ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume,
thecurrentControlAssignbuttonagain. pan,andFXsendsettingsforOscillators1and2,along
Allofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesshownonthe withtheProgramEQsettings.
ControlSurfacewillberesettothevaluesstoredinthe
Program. MIXER KNOBS [Channel Strip, Individual Pan]
TheMixerKnobsswitchisonthefrontpanel,
Resetting the Vector Joystick immediatelytotherightoftheknobs,andisalso
ToresettheVectorJoysticktothecenterposition,hold duplicatedintheonscreendisplay.Theeightknobs
downRESETCONTROLSandthenmovetheVector cancontroltwodifferentsetsofparameters,
Joystick. dependingonthesettingofthisswitch.
Resetting KARMA Module parameters ChannelStrip:Withthissetting,theeightknobswill
controlthePan,EQ,andFXSendsettingsforthe
ToresetalloftheslidersandswitchesintheKARMA
selectedOscillator.UsetheSELECTbuttonstochoose
Module:
betweenOscillators1and2.
IndividualPan:Withthissetting,thefirstknobwill
2. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,press controlthePanforOscillator1,andthesecondknob
theKARMAMODULECONTROLbutton. willcontrolthePanforOscillator2.Theremaining
Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScenetoitsstored knobsareunused.
values,holdRESETCONTROLSandpressthedesired MixerKnobsswitch
SCENEbutton.
Clearing all solos

ToturnoffSoloforallMIDITracks,AudioTracks,and
AudioInputsatonce:
1. PressandholdtheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
2. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS,pressthe
SOLObutton.
Resetting Tone Adjust

ThewaythatTONEADJUSTisresetdependsonboth
thecurrentmode,andwhethertheparameteris
RelativeorAbsolute.(Formoreinformation,see
Absolute,Relative,andMetaparameterson
page 27.)
20
Knobs 18, Channel Strip Pan (1) [Random, L001C064R127]

WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip, ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.Asettingof
theknobsprovidequickaccesstothePan,EQ,andFX L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,
Sendparameters.ThePanandEQparameters andR127tothefarright.
duplicatethesimilarlynamedparametersfoundon RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it
theProgrameditingpages;changingthemherewill wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly
changethemintheeditingpages,andviceversa. fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,thepan
FXSendwillbereflectedbythecorrespondingMFX positionwillbedifferentforeachnoteon.
Send1and2.
Pan (2) [Random, L001C064R127]
PAN [Random, L001C064R127] ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator2.Formore
ThiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedOscillator, details,seePan(1),above.
andmirrorstheAmppagePanparameter.Asettingof
L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter, Play/Mute switches 12
andR127tothefarright.
ThetoprowofswitchesallowyoutoturnOscillators1
RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it and2onandoff,whichcanbeconvenientwhen
wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly editingsounds.
fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,thepan
positionwillbedifferentforeachnoteon. Play/Mute (1) [Play, Mute]
Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),Oscillator1will
EQ TRIM [0099] play.Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),Oscillator1
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ. willbemuted.
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrols
Play/Mute (2) [Play, Mute]
cancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.You
cancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinput Whenthisswitchison,Oscillator2willplay.Whenthe
trim. switchisoff,Oscillator2willbemuted.
Note:iftheEQpageEQBypassparameteristurned SOLO switch and SELECT switches 12

On,thennoneoftheEQparametersherewillhave
anyeffect. Solo [Off, On]
LOW EQ [18.00+18.00dB] SololetsyouisolateoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
Inputs,sothatyouhearthembythemselves.Itdoes
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in thisbytemporarilymutingallnonsoloedOscillators
incrementsof0.5dB. andAudioInputs.
MID FREQ [100Hz10.00kHz] SolousestheSELECTswitches.Theseswitchescan
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ. showandcontroleitherwhichOscillatoriscurrently
selected,orwhichOscillatorsaresoloed.Themain
MID GAIN [18.00+18.00dB] Solobuttonletsyouswitchbackandforthbetweenthe
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,in twoviews.
incrementsof0.5dB. WhenSoloisOff(LED=Off),theSELECTswitches
selectthecurrentOscillator;whenSoloisOn(LED=
HIGH EQ [18.00+18.00dB] Onorblinking),theSelectswitchesletyousolooneor
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in bothOscillators.
incrementsof0.5dB.
WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreOscillatorsor
SEND 1 [000127] AudioInputsaresoloed,theSOLOLEDwillblinkon
andofftoremindyouthatsoloisinuse.
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe
ProgramsOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF, Note:ThemainSOLObuttonmerelychangesthe
itscalestheOscillatorsendlevels.IftheOutputBusis functionsoftheSELECT/SOLOswitches.Itdoesnot
settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend enableorcleartheindividualsolostates.
levels.
Clearing all solos
SEND 2 [000127] ToturnoffSoloforallOscillatorsandAudioInputsat
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore once:
details,seeSEND1,above. 1. PressandholdtheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
Knobs 12, Individual Pan
SOLObutton.
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan,
knobs1and2controlthepansettingsforOscillators1 Exclusive Solo menu parameter
and2,respectively.Theother6knobshavenoeffect. ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectsthe
TheseduplicatethePanparametersoftheOscillators1 waythatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff
and2Amppages;changingthemherewillchange (unchecked),youcansolomultipleoscillatorsand
themintheeditingpages,andviceversa. inputsatonce.
21
Program mode: HD-1
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyone MasterVolume
oscillatororinputcanbesoloedatatime.Inthismode,
pressingaSoloswitchautomaticallydisablesany Control Surface Universal Exclusive Front Panel
previoussolos. Master Volume Master Volume Analog Volume
Slider (Fom Knobs, Pedals, Slider
YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER MIDI, or Sequencer)
andpressing1onthenumerickeypad.
OSC1 Select/Solo [Off, On]

Headphone
ThisswitcheitherselectsorsolosOscillator1, & Main L/R
TFX 2
dependingontheSoloswitch.Formoredetails,see Outputs
Solo,above.
OSC2 Select/Solo [Off, On]

ThisswitcheitherselectsorsolosOscillator2, S/PDIF
dependingontheSoloswitch.Formoredetails,see Output
Solo,above.
MIX VOLUMES Sliders 12

Theseslidersadjusttheoveralloutputlevelof
Oscillators1and2.Theseareseparatevolumecontrols,
whichscalethemainAmplevelparameter.
OSC 1 Volume [000127]

ThisslideradjuststhevolumelevelofOscillator1.
OSC 2 Volume [000127]

ThisslideradjuststhevolumelevelofOscillator2.
Master Volume Slider

Master Volume [000127]
Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemainstereooutputs,
aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
Outputs18.
09c
Youcanusethispagetomixsoundsfromother
09c: Audio Inputs sourcesintotheOASYSoutputsasanonstage
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume, submixer,forinstance.
pan,andFXsendsettingsforeachofthesixaudio
inputs:Analog14,andS/P DIFleftandright.
22
Other Audio Input settings Audio Input Pan (16) [L000C064R127]

Eachaudioinputcanbeassignedtouptothreebusses: ThesecontrolthepanforAnalogInputs14and
AnOutput/IFXBus S/P DIFLeftandRight,respectively.AsettingofL000
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,and
AnFXControlBus R127tothefarright.
ARECBus
Play/Mute switches 16
YoucansetupthesebusassignmentsontheAudio
In/Samplingpage.Formoreinformation,see08: Thetoprowofswitchesallowyoutomuteanyorallof
AudioInput/Samplingonpage 12. theaudioinputs.
Use/Edit Global Setup [Off, On] Play/Mute (16) [Off, On]

Programscanusethesingle,Globalaudioinputmixer Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),theinputwillbe
setup,orcaninsteadhavetheirowncustomsettings. enabled.Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),theinput
willbemuted.
WhenUse/EditGlobalSetupisOn,theProgramuses
theGlobalsettings.Thisisthedefault,andletsyou
SOLO switch and SELECT switches 16
changefreelybetweendifferentProgramsand
Combinationswithoutaffectingtheaudioinputs. Solo [Off, On]
Also,anyeditsmadeonthispagewillaffecttheGlobal SololetsyouisolateoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
setting,alongwithanyotherPrograms,Combis,or Inputs,sothatyouhearthembythemselves.Itdoes
SongswhichusetheGlobalsetting. thisbytemporarilymutingallnonsoloedOscillators
Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto andAudioInputs.
saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual TheSelectswitchescanshowandcontroleitherwhich
Program,tosetupspecialsubmixersettingsoreffects audioinputiscurrentlyselected,orwhichinputsare
processingforparticularinputs.Inthiscase,set soloed.ThemainSolobuttonletsyoucanswitchback
Use/EditGlobalSetuptoOff,andtheaudioinputs andforthbetweenthetwoviews.
willusetheProgramscustomsettings.
WhenSoloisOff(LED=Off),theSelectswitchesselect
Mixer Knobs [Channel Strip, Individual Pan] thecurrentinput;whenSoloisOn(LED=Onor
blinking),theSelectswitchesletyousolooneormore
Thisswitchcontrolswhethertheknobsshowthepan
inputs.
settingsforall6inputsatonce(IndividualPan),orthe
panandFXSendlevelsfortheselectedinput(Channel WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
Strip).Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMixerKnobs Inputsaresoloed,theSoloLEDwillblinkonandoffto
onpage 23. remindyouthatsoloisinuse.
Note:ThemainSolobuttonmerelychangesthe
Knobs 18, Channel Strip functionsoftheSelect/Soloswitches.Itdoesnotenable
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip, orcleartheindividualsolostates.
theknobsprovidequickaccesstotheselectedinputs Formoreinformation,seeClearingallsoloson
PanandFXSendparameters. page 21,andExclusiveSolomenuparameteron
page 21.
Pan [L000C064R127]
Thiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedinput.A Select/Solo (16) [Off, On]
settingofL000placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064in Thisswitcheitherselectsorsolostheinput,depending
thecenter,andR127tothefarright. ontheSoloswitchsetting.Formoredetails,seeSolo,
above.
Send 1 [000127]
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe Sliders 16
inputsOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF,it
scalestheprogrammedsendlevel.IftheOutputBusis Audio Input Volume (16) [000127]
settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend Theseslidersadjustthevolumelevelsoftheaudio
levels,overwritinganyprevioussetting. inputs.
Send 2 [000127]
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore
details,seeSend1,above. Master Volume [000127]
Knobs 16, Individual Pan aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan, Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
knobs14controlthepansettingsforanaloginputs1 MasterVolumeonpage 22.
4,respectively,andknobs56controlthepansettings
fortheleftandrightS/P DIFinputs.Knobs7and8
havenoeffect.
23
Program mode: HD-1
09d
GchmeansthattheknobwilltransmitontheGlobal
09d: External MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.Thisallowsyou
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyousendMIDI toredirectanynumberofsliders,knobs,switches,and
messagestoexternaldevices.Eachslider,knob,and padstoadifferentchannelatonce,withouteditingthe
switchcanbeassignedtoaseparateMIDIcontroller individualcontrols.
andMIDIchannel.Theeightdrumpadsalsohave
CC# Assign (18) [Off, 000119]
separatesettingswhichapplyonlywhenControl
AssignissettoExternal. ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby
theknob.
InGlobalmode,youcancreateupto128different
ExternalSetups.Forinstance,youmightmakeone Value (18) [000127]
setupforcontrollingseveraldifferentpiecesofMIDI ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheknobsMIDICC.
gearonstage,anotherforcontrollingasoftware
synthesizer(suchasoneofKorgsLegacyCollection Switches 116
synths),andsoon.Formoreinformation,see12:
External1onpage 714. MIDI Channel (116) [0116, Gch]
TheseExternalSetupsarecompletelyseparatefrom ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
theProgram.YoucanthinkofExternalmodeasbeing theswitch.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
aseparatecontrolsurfacewhichjusthappenstoshare desired.
OASYSssliders,knobs,switches,anddrumpads. GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
WhenyouselectanExternalSetup,itstaysselected MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.
evenwhenyouchangePrograms,orswitchtoCombi
orSequencermodes.Thismakesiteasytoselect CC# Assign (116) [Off, 000119]
differentOASYSsoundswithoutdisruptingany ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby
externalMIDIcontrol,andviceversa. theswitch.
Setup [000127] Switch Off/On (116) [Off, On]

ThisselectstheGlobalsetupfortheknobs,sliders, Whentheswitchisturnedon,itsendsavalueof127;
switches,anddrumpads. whenitisturnedoff,itsendsavalueof0.
Note:thisselectionisnotstoredwiththeProgram.
Sliders 18 & Master Slider
Knobs 18 MIDI Channel (18) [0116, Gch]
MIDI Channel (18) [0116, Gch] ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannel theslider.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
assignedtotheknob.Eachcansendonadifferent desired.
channel,ifdesired. GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.
24
CC# Assign (18) [Off, 000119] Value (18) [000127]

ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheslidersMIDICC.
theslider.
Selected
Parameter
Information
09e
PmeansthattheswitchiscontrollingaPerformance
09e: RT/KARMA (Real Time RealTimeParameter.
Knobs/KARMA) Youcanassignmanyparameterstoasingleslideror
ThisControlAssign(labeledR.TimeKnobs/KARMA switch,ifdesired.Duetospacelimitations,however,
onthefrontpanel)settingletsyoumodulateProgram onlyfirstfourparameterswillbeshownhere.Ifthere
andEffectsparameterswiththeeightknobs,and aremoreassignmentsthancanbedisplayed,youllsee
controlKARMAwiththeswitchesandsliders. a>symbolafterthefourthparameter.
Tochangetheparameterassignments,usetheKARMA
Selected parameter information GERTPandPerfRTPpages.Formoreinformation,
WhenyouselectaKARMASliderorSwitch,thisarea pleasesee75:GERealTimeParameterson
showsdetailedinformationaboutitsKARMA page 113,and76:PerfRealTimeParameterson
parameterassignments. page 116.
Control [SW18, SL18] Parameter Value [Depends on parameter]

ThisshowswhichSwitchorSlideriscurrently ThisshowsthevalueoftheGEorPerformanceReal
selected. TimeParametersassignedtotheselectedSlideror
Switch.Therangecanvary,dependingonthe
Assignment [Name] individualparameters.
EachKARMASliderorSwitchcancontrolmultiple
internalparameterssimultaneously.Thegroupof Knobs 18
parameterscanbegivenasinglename,whichisshown Knobs14allhavededicatedfunctionswhich
here. correspondtoMIDICCs.Knobs58canbeassignedto
Youcanselectdifferentnames,ifdesired.Formore awidevarietyoffunctions,manyofwhichalsohave
information,see79:Name/NoteMaponpage 125 correspondingMIDICCs.
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding
Module and Parameter [A 0132, P 0108]
MIDICC.Also,whentheCCisreceivedviaMIDIor
ThisreadonlydisplayshowstheKARMA generatedbyKARMA,theknobvaluechangesto
parameter(s)assignedtotheSliderorSwitch. matchtheCCvalue.
AmeansthatthesliderorswitchcontrolsaGEReal Unlessotherwisenoted,scalingmeansthatthe
TimeParameterfromKARMAModuleA.(Notethatin parametersareattheirprogrammedvalueswhenthe
Programmode,onlyModuleAisavailable.)The controllerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
followingnumberidentifiesthespecificparameter controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthe
withinthemodule.Forinstance,A22isparameter22 controllerisat127.Foranotherlookatthis,seethe
ofModuleA. diagrambelow.
25
Program mode: HD-1
CCparameterscaling Youcansetknobs58toawidevarietyofmodulation
functions,usingtheControllerSetuppage(P18).
99 ManyofthefunctionsscaleaparticularsetofProgram
parameters.AllofthesettingsalsocorrespondtoMIDI
Parameter
Value messagesusuallyCCs.
KARMA SCENES 18
As Programmed AKARMASceneincludesthesettingsforallofthe
KARMASlidersandSwitches.EachCombicancontain
uptoeightScenes.
00
0 64 127
ToselectaScene,justpressitsswitchyoullseeallof
theKARMASlidersandSwitchesupdateinstantlyto
CC Value
theirnewvalues.
Knob 1: CUTOFF (CC#74) [000127] KARMA SWITCHES 18

ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAand TheseswitchescontrolKARMAPerformanceorGE
B,andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74. (GeneratedEffect)parameters,asassignedonthe
KARMAPerfRTPandGERTPpages.
Knob 2: RESONANCE (CC#71) [000127]
ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and KARMA SLIDERS 18
transmitsandreceivesMIDICC#71. ThesesliderscontrolKARMAPerformanceorGE
Knob 3: Filter EG Intensity (CC#79) [000127] (GeneratedEffect)parameters,asassignedonthe
KARMAPerfRTPandGERTPpages.
ThisknobscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Italsotransmitsand Formoreinformation,seeKARMASWITCHES18,
receivesMIDICC#79. above.
Knob 4: EG Release (CC#72) [000127] Master Volume Slider

ThisknobscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmp
EGs,andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#72.
Knob 58 [000127] aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheknobanditsMIDICC. Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
MasterVolumeonpage 22.
09f
physicalcontrolcanbeassignedtoanyoneofa
09f: Tone Adjust numberofProgramparameters.
ToneAdjustletsyouuseallofthesliders,knobs,and
switchesontheControlSurfacetoeditProgram
parameters,liketheknobsonananalogsynth.Each
26
Tip:InCombiandSequencermodes,ToneAdjustalso Programparameters.ThevalueoftheRelative
letsyoueditProgramparameterswithoutneedingto parametershowstheamountofchangetothese
saveadifferentversionoftheoriginalProgram.For underlyingProgramparameters.
moreinformationonToneAdjustinthesemodes,see WhentheRelativeparameterisat0(inthecenterofthe
09f:ToneAdjustonpage 397. knoborslider),theunderlyingProgramparameters
Saving Tone Adjust Edits areunchanged.
ToneAdjusteditsaresavedintwodifferentways, Themeaningsofhigherandlowersettingscanvary,
dependingonwhethertheparameterisRelativeor dependingonthespecificparameter.Unlessnoted
Absolute.(Formoreinformation,seeAbsolute, otherwise,theyworkasfollows:
Relative,andMetaparameters,below.) WhentheRelativeparameterisat+99(themaximum),
EditstoRelativeparametersaffectthesound theProgramparametersareallattheirmaximumas
immediately,butdontchangetheunderlyingProgram well.Similarly,whentheRelativeparameterisat99
parametersettingsuntiltheProgramissaved.When (theminimum),theProgramparametersareatzero.
theProgramissaved,theOASYScalculatesthe RelativeToneAdjustparameterscaling
combinedeffectsofToneAdjustanddedicatedCC
modulation(fromtheRealTimeKnobs,forinstance), 99
andsavestheresultsintotheProgramparameters
directly.Atthatpoint,alloftheRelativeparametersare Parameter
resetto0. Value
EditstoAbsoluteparametersareimmediately
reflectedinthecorrespondingonscreenparameters,
andviceversa. As Programmed
Tone Adjust and MIDI SysEx

00
TheToneAdjustsliders,knobs,andswitchesallsend 99 0 +99
andreceiveMIDISystemExclusivemessages.Youcan
Relative Tone Adjust Value
usethistorecordandplaybackToneAdjusteditswith
asequencer,includingthebuiltinsequencer.
AfewoftheProgramparameterscontrolledby
NOTE:TheSysExmessagesaretiedtothephysical RelativeToneAdjustarebipolar,meaningthatthey
controls,andnottothefunctionstowhichtheyare canbeeitherpositiveornegative(insteadofjust
assigned.Forinstance,letssaythatslider1isassigned positive).WhentheseProgramparametersaresetto
tocontrolFilterResonance,andmoveslider1while negativevalues,ToneAdjustmaybehavedifferently
recordingintoasequencer.Thesequencerwillrecord fromthedescriptionabove.
thatslider1hasmoved,andnotthatFilterResonance
Forinstance,ifEGIntensityissettoanegativevalue,
haschanged.Ifyoulaterchangeslider1tocontrol
RelativeToneAdjustwilltakeitfrom0to99,likethe
LFO1Speed,playingbackthesequencewillaffectthe
inverseofthediagramabove.EGSustainworks
LFO,andnotFilterResonance.
differently;ifitssettoanegativevalue,ToneAdjust
Interaction between Tone Adjust and MIDI CCs takesitfrom0downtotheprogrammedvalue,and
thenupto+99,asshownbelow.
AnumberoftheCommonToneAdjustparameters
affectparameterswhicharealsomodulatedby RelativeToneAdjustparameterscaling:EGSustain
dedicatedMIDICCs.ThespecificCCnumbersare
notedinthedescriptionsfortheindividualTone 99
Adjustparameters,below.
Parameter
ToneAdjustandtheCCsworkseparately.Itspossible, Value
forinstance,forToneAdjusttoreducethevalueofa
parameter,andthenforaCCtoincreaseitagain. 00
ToneAdjustscalestheparameterfirst,andthentheCC As Programmed
scalestheresultoftheToneAdjust.
Absolute, Relative, and Meta parameters -99

TherearethreekindsofToneAdjustparameters: 99 0 +99
Absolute,Relative,andMeta. Relative Tone Adjust Value
AbsoluteparametersusuallycontrolasingleProgram
MetaparametersdontaffectProgramparameters
parameter,suchasOscillator1Transpose.The
directly.Instead,theyaffectthewaythatotherTone
ProgramandToneAdjustparametersmirrorone
Adjustparameterswork.Forinstance,Multisample
another;whenyouchangeone,theotherwillchange
Min#andMax#settheminimumandmaximum
tomatch.
valuesoftheToneAdjustMultisampleparameter.
Relativeparameterstypicallyadjusttwoormore
Programparameterssimultaneously.Forinstance, Selected parameter information
Filter/AmpEGAttackTimeaffectsatotalofsix
Thisstatuslineshowsdetailed,readonlyinformation
aboutthecurrentlyselectedToneAdjustparameter.
27
Program mode: HD-1
(Control) [Knob18, SW116, WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,or

Slider18, Slider M] anAbsoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
ThisisthephysicalcontrollerassignedtotheTone SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
Adjustparameter.SliderMistheMasterSlider. SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
(Assignment) [Full Parameter Name] WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
Thisshowsthefullnameoftheparameterassignedto parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectly
thecontroller.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssign reflectstheparametervalue:
parameter,below. SwitchOn=On
Value [Current Parameter Value] SwitchOff=Off

Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.The Assign [List of Tone Adjust assignments]
rangeofvalueswillvarydependingontheparameter ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
assignedtothecontrol. switch.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
Type [Relative, Absolute, Meta] CommonToneAdjustParametersandHD1Tone
AdjustParameters,below.
Thisshowsthetypeoftheparameter,whichrelatesto
howeditstotheparameteraresaved.Formore On Value [Depends on parameter]
information,seeAbsolute,Relative,andMeta Theparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchis
parametersonpage 27. On.
Stored Value [Original Parameter Value] WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,before parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesame
theeffectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoTone astheSwitchStatus(seebelow).
AdjustparameterswhichcontrolasingleProgram
Switch Status [Off, On]
parameter.
ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff.
IfyouunassignaRelativeparameterfromacontrol,it ThestatusisalsoshownbytheLEDsinthephysical
willreverttothisvalue. buttons.
Knobs 18 Sliders 18 and Master Slider
Assign [List of Tone Adjust assignments] TheseworkidenticallytoKnobs18,asdescribed
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe above.
knob.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
CommonToneAdjustParametersandHD1Tone Common Tone Adjust Parameters
AdjustParameters,below.
TheseparametersaffectbothOscillators1and2.
Unlessotherwisenoted,alloftheCommonTone
Assign
AdjustparametersareRelative.
Off.ThismeansthattheToneAdjustcontrolhasno
effect.
Value FilterCutoff.(99+99,CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersat
once.Forinstance,intheHD1,itaffectsbothFiltersA
PerOscillatorparametersapplytoOSC1and2 andB.
individually,andaremarkedassuch:[OSC1]and FilterResonance.(99+99,CC#71)
[OSC2}. Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.For
Eachcontrollercanbeassignedtoonlyoneparameter, instance,intheHD1,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
andeachparametercanbeassignedtoonlyone FilterEGIntensity.(99+99,CC#79)
controller. ThisscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
Toswapaparameterfromonecontroltoanother, frequency.Itaffectsallofthefiltersatonce;for
youllneedtofirstunassignitfromtheoldcontrol, instance,intheHD1,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
andthenassignittothenewcontrol. 99meansnomodulation.+99meansmaximum
modulationinthesamedirection,positiveornegative,
Value [Depends on parameter]
astheoriginalProgram.Forinstance,iftheoriginal
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.The ProgramsEGIntensitywassetto25,thensettingthe
rangeofvalueswillvarydependingontheparameter ToneAdjustto+99movestheEGIntensityto99.
assignedtothecontrol.
AmpVelocityIntensity.(99+99)
Switches 116 ThisscalestheeffectofvelocityontheAmplevel.
99removesthevelocitymodulationentirely.+99
ToneAdjustswitchesactalittledifferentlythanknobs
meansmaximummodulationinthesamedirection,
andsliders.
positiveornegative,astheoriginalProgram.
28
Filter/AmpEGAttackTime. LFO1Speed.(99+99,CC#76)
(99+99,CC#73) ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.WhentheLFOisin
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs, MIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.For
alongwithotherrelatedparameters. moreinformation,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 85.
Whenthevalueis+1ormore,thisalsoaffectstheAmp LFO1Fade.(99+99)
EGsStartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,and ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
AttackTimeAMS,asdescribedbelow: pleaseseeFadeonpage 86.
Betweenvaluesof+1and+25,theStartLevel,Start LFO1Delay.(99+99,CC#78)
LevelAMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefrom ThisscalesLFO1sdelaytimethetimebetweennote
theirprogrammedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange, onandtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,
theAttackLevelwillchangefromitsprogrammed pleaseseeDelayonpage 86.
valueto99. ThisparameterinteractswithCC#78.
Filter/AmpEGDecayTime. LFO1Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
(99+99,CC#75) ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO1is
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterand stoppedorrunning.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AmpEGs.ItinteractswithCC#75. Stoponpage 85.
Filter/AmpEGSustainLevel. ThePROGsettingrestorestheProgramsoriginal
(99+99,CC#70) valuesconvenientifOscillator1sLFOwasstopped,
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterandAmp butOscillator2swasnot.
EGs.
LFO2Speed.(99+99)
Filter/AmpEGReleaseTime. ThisscalesLFO2sfrequency.WhentheLFOisin
(99+99,CC#72) MIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.For
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs. moreinformation,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 85.
FilterEGAttackTime.(99+99) LFO2Fade.(99+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterEGs. ThisscalesLFO2sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
FilterEGDecayTime.(99+99) pleaseseeFadeonpage 86.
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterEGs. LFO2Delay.(99+99)
FilterEGSustainLevel.(99+99) ThisscalesLFO2sdelaytimethetimebetweennote
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterEGs. onandtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,
FilterEGReleaseTime.(99+99) pleaseseeDelayonpage 86.
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterEGs. LFO2Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
AmpEGAttackTime.(99+99) ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO2is
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheAmpEGs. stoppedorrunning.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Stoponpage 85.
AmpEGDecayTime.(99+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheAmpEGs. CommonLFOSpeed.(99+99)
ThisscalestheCommonLFOsfrequency.Whenthe
AmpEGSustainLevel.(99+99) LFOisinMIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBase
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheAmpEGs. Note.
AmpEGReleaseTime.(99+99) Unison.(Off/On,Absolute)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheAmpEGs. ThisAbsoluteparameterturnsUnisononandoff.For
PitchEGAttackTime.(99+99) moreinformation,pleaseseeUnisononpage 35.
ThisscalestheattacktimesofthePitchEG(orEGs,in #OfVoices.(216,Absolute)
thecaseofsomeEXiinstruments). ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthenumberofUnison
PitchEGDecayTime.(99+99) voices.IfUnisonisnotOn,thisparameterhasno
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesofthePitchEG effect.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeNumberof
(orEGs,inthecaseofsomeEXiinstruments). voicesonpage 35.
PitchEGSustainLevel.(99+99) Detune.(0.0200.0,Absolute)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsofthePitchEG(orEGs,in ThisAbsoluteparametersetsamountofdetuning
thecaseofsomeEXiinstruments).Note:thisdoesnot betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,this
applytotheHD1. parameterhasnoeffect.Formoreinformation,please
seeDetuneonpage 35.
PitchEGReleaseTime.(99+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesofthePitchEG(orEGs,in Thickness.(Off/0109,Absolute)
thecaseofsomeEXiinstruments). ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthepatternofdetuning
betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,orif
PitchLFO1Intensity.(99+99,CC#77)
Detuneissetto0,thisparameterhasnoeffect.For
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
moreinformation,pleaseseeThicknessonpage 36.
99removestheLFOmodulationentirely.+99means
CommonStepSequencerAttackSmoothing.(0099,
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positive
Absolute)
ornegative,astheoriginalProgram.
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsamountofattack
29
Program mode: HD-1
smoothingfortheCommonStepSequencer.Notethat ThelistofMultisamples,WaveSequences,orDrum
thisappliesonlytoEXiPrograms.Formore Kitscanbequitelong.Theslidersorknobswillletyou
information,pleaseseeSmoothingonpage 171. sweepthroughtheentirerange,butitmaynotbe
CommonStepSequencerDecaySmoothing.(0099, possibletoselectalloftheintermediatevalues.Youcan
Absolute) alwaysselectanyindividualitembyusingselectthe
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsamountofdecay onscreenparameterandusethestandarddataentry
smoothingfortheCommonStepSequencer.Notethat controls,suchastheINCandDECbuttons.
thisappliesonlytoEXiPrograms.Formore Youcanalsolimittherangeofthecontrolbyusingthe
information,pleaseseeSmoothingonpage 171. Min#andMax#parameters,describedbelow.
PROGrestorestheProgramsoriginalMultisamples
HD-1 Tone Adjust Parameters andWaveSequences(ortheDrumKit,foraDrum
Program),includingallvelocityrangesandReverse
Macro parameters andStartOffsetsettings.
ThefollowingthreeparametersaffectbothOscillator1 ForSingleandDoublePrograms:
andOscillator2. MS/WS/DKitSelectoverridesallofthe
*Inthelistbelow,theitemsinparenthesesare MultisampleVelocityzones,sothatthenewly
(value,edittype)respectively. selectedMultisampleorWaveSequenceplaysover
PitchStretch.(12+12,Relative) theentirevelocityrange.
ThisspecialcontrolincreasestheOscillatorTune Bydefault,youcanselectfromthesameBankas
parameterwhileloweringtheTransposeparameter. theoriginalProgramsMS1.
Theresultisthatthepitchstaysthesame,butthe Alsobydefault,iftheoriginalProgramsMS1isa
mappingofthesamplestothekeyschanges.Youcan Multisample,youcanselectMultisamples;ifMS1is
usethistocreateinterestingshiftsintimbre. aWaveSequence,youcanselectWaveSequences.
Hold.(Off/On,Absolute) YoucanusetheMS/WSTypeandMS/WS/DKit
ThisletsyouturnHoldonandoff.Formore Bankparameters,describedbelow,tochangethese
informationonthisparameter,seeHoldonpage 36. defaultsasdesired.
Reverse.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute) ForMultisamplesonly:
ThisprovidesaquickwaytoturnReverseonorofffor
allMultisamplesinbothOscillators.PROGrestores YoucanusetheToneAdjustReverseandStart
theProgramsoriginalsettingsconvenientifsome Offsetparameterstomodifythenewlyselected
MultisampleshadbeensettoOff,andotherssettoOn. Multisample.Bydefault,theReverseissettoOff,
anditsStartOffsetissetto0.
Per-Oscillator parameters ForDrumPrograms:
TheseparametersaffecteachOscillatorseparately.In
Bydefault,youcanselectfromthesameBankas
thelist,theparametersforOscillator1appearfirst,
theoriginalProgramsDrumKit.Youcanusethe
witheachnameprefacedby[OSC1];theparameters
MSBankparameter,describedbelow,toselecta
forOscillator2appearnext,prefacedby[OSC2].
differentBank.
Unlessotherwisespecified,allofthePerOscillator
MS/WSType.(Off/MS/WavSeq,Meta)
parametersareAbsolute.
ThisMetaparametermodifiestheMS/WSSelect
*Inthelistbelow,theitemsinparenthesesare parameter,sothatyoucanspecificallychoosetoselect
(value,edittype)respectively. eitherMultisamplesorWaveSequences.
Tune.(1200+1200,Relative) ItappliesonlytoSingleandDoublePrograms,andhas
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe noeffectwithDrumKits.
OscillatorsTunesetting,asdescribedunderTuneon
MSBank.(ROMMono,Meta)
page 49.
ThisMetaparametermodifiestheMS/WS/DkitSelect
NOTE:aswithTranspose,below,thisisasimple parameter,sothatyoucanselectMultisamplesfrom
additionorsubtraction,asopposedtothemore anyBankyoulike.
complexscalingfunction.
MS/WS/DKitMin#.(016383,Meta)
Transpose.(60+60,Relative) ThisMetaparametersetsaminimumvalueforthe
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe MS/WS/DkitSelectparameter.Youcanusethisin
OscillatorsTransposesetting,asdescribedunder conjunctionwiththeMS/WS/DKitMax#parameter,
Transposeonpage 49. below,sothataknoborsliderselectsonlyfromasmall
MS/WS/DKitSelect.(PROG/016383,Absolute) setofchoices.Thisisparticularlyconvenientwiththe
InSingleorDoublePrograms,thisletsyouselecta internalROM,inwhichsimilarMultisamplesare
newMultisampleorWaveSequencefortheOscillator. groupedtogether.Forinstance,thismakesiteasyto
InDrumPrograms,itletsyouselectadifferentDrum selectbetweenagroupofbells,orasetofelectric
Kit.Ingeneral,itsbesttousethisinconjunctionwith basses.
theMS/WSTypeandMS/WS/DKitBankparameters, MS/WS/DKitMax#.(016383,Meta)
asdescribedbelow. ThisMetaparametersetsamaximumvalueforthe
MS/WS/DkitSelectparameter.Pleasesee
MS/WS/DKitMin#,above,formoreinformation.
30
StartOffset.(08,Absolute) FilterLFO1IntensitytoA.(99+99,Absolute)
ThisallowsyoutochangetheStartOffsetofthe ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
MultisamplespecifiedbytheMS/WSSelect modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunder33a:LFO
parameter.Itappliesonlywhen: 1/2onpage 68.
TheProgramisaSingleorDouble(notaDrumKit) FilterLFO1IntensitytoB.(99+99,Absolute)
TheMS/WSSelectparameterisusedtoselecta ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
Multisample(notaWaveSequence) modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunder33a:LFO
1/2onpage 68.
FormoreinformationonStartOffsets,seeStart
Offsetonpage 52. FilterLFO2IntensitytoA.(99+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
Drive.(099,Absolute) modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunder33a:LFO
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsDriveparameter,as 1/2onpage 68.
describedunderDriveonpage 74.
FilterLFO2IntensitytoB.(99+99,Absolute)
LowBoost.(099,Absolute) ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsLowBoostparameter,as modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunder33a:LFO
describedunderLowBoostonpage 75. 1/2onpage 68.
PitchSlope.(1.02.0,Absolute) PitchLFO1AMSIntensity.(12.00+12.00,Absolute)
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsPitchSlopeparameter,as YoucanuseanAMSsource,suchasaftertouch,to
describedunderPitchSlopeonpage 54. modulatethedepthofpitchmodulation(vibrato)from
LFO1Waveform.(TriangleRad6,Absolute) LFO1.ThiscontrolstheintensityofthatAMS
ThisselectsthewaveformfortheOscillatorsLFO1,as modulation.Formoreinformation,see42c:LFO1/2
describedunderWaveformonpage 84. onpage 78.
LFO2Waveform.(TriangleRad6,Absolute) PitchLFO2AMSIntensity.(12.00+12.00,Absolute)
ThisselectsthewaveformfortheOscillatorsLFO2,as ThisissimilartoPitchLFO1AMSIntensity,above.
describedunderWaveformonpage 84. Formoreinformation,see42c:LFO1/2onpage 78.
AmpLFO1Intensity.(99+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmp Default Tone Adjust Settings
modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunder42c:LFO
1/2onpage 78. ToneAdjustprovidesanelegantphysicalinterfaceto
theHD1sparameters.Mostofthefactorysoundsuse
AmpLFO2Intensity.(99+99,Absolute) thedefaultlayout,asshownbelow.Youcanalso
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmp customizethelayoutforindividualsounds,ifdesired.
modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunder42c:LFO
1/2onpage 78.
HD1ToneAdjust,DefaultSettings
OSC1 OSC1 OSC1

Filter LFO1 Intensity to A Amp LFO1 Intensity LFO1 Waveform
3 switch: OSC2 4 switch: OSC2 LFO1 Speed Amp Velocity
Pitch LFO1 Intensity Intensity
OSC1 Drive
Pitch Stretch
1 switch: Reverse
2 switch: OSC2 Tune
8 switch:
OSC2 Drive
7 switch:
911 switch: Multisample/Wave Seq
Filter Cutoff, /Drum Kit
Filter Resonance,
Filter EG Intensity 5, 6 switch:
OSC1 Transpose,
OSC2 Transpose
Filter EG ADSR Amp EG ADSR
31
Program mode: HD-1

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
2:CopyToneAdjust.Thisisavailableonlywhen
ControlAssignissettoTONEADJUST.Formore
information,seeCopyToneAdjustonpage 147.
3:ResetToneAdjust.Thisisavailableonlywhen
information,seeResetToneAdjustonpage 147.
2:CopyScene.ThisisavailableonlywhenControl
AssignissettoRTKNOBS/KARMA.Formore
information,seeCopySceneonpage 151.
3:SwapScene.ThisisavailableonlywhenControl
information,seeSwapSceneonpage 151.
32
Program P1: Basic/Vector 11: Program Basic
Program P1: Basic/Vector
11: Program Basic

11PMC
11a
11b
11c
11d 11e
11f
11g
Thispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsforthe DrumsmodeisaspecialvariationofSinglemode,and
Program.Amongotherthings,youcan: usesaDrumKit(ascreatedinGlobalmode)insteadof
SetuptheProgramtobeaSingle,aDouble,ora multisamples.
DrumKit Single:TheProgramwilluseoneoscillator,fora
SettheProgramtoplaypolyphonicallyor maximumof172notepolyphony.
monophonically Double:TheProgramwillusetwooscillators,fora
CreateakeyboardsplitbetweenOSC1andOSC2 maximumof84notepolyphony.
SelecttheProgramsscale Drums:TheProgramwilluseoneoscillatortoplaya
DrumKit.Inthiscasetheprogramwillnormallyhave
MakebasicWaveSequenceSettings amaximumof172notepolyphony.
Note:whenplayingdrumkits,itsoftenusefultoturn
11a: Program Name and Tempo ontheHoldparameter.Formoreinformation,see
Hold,onpage 36.
Bank [INTAINTG, USERAUSERG]
A note about polyphony
Program Name [000127/001128: Name]
Polyphonymeansthenumberofnotesthatyoucan
Thesetworeadonlyparametersshowthebank, playatatime.Thisnumberwillvarydependingonthe
number,andnameofthecurrentProgram. particularsoundbeingplayed,andhowthatsoundis
produced.Generallyspeaking:
Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT]
DoubleProgramsusetwiceasmanyvoicesas
ThisisthetempousedforWaveSequences,LFOs,
SinglePrograms.
effects,andKARMA.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Tempoonpage 5. Awavesequenceusestwiceasmanyvoicesasa
multisample.Astereowavesequenceusestwiceas
manyvoicesasamonowavesequence.
11b: Oscillator Mode
StereoMultisamplesusetwiceasmanyvoicesas
Oscillator Mode [Single, Double, Drums] MonoMultisamples.
HD1SingleProgramshaveoneoscillator,andDouble IftheVectorEGisenabled,thenumberofvoices
Programshavetwooscillators.Eachoscillatorincludes usedincreasesslightly.
acompletesynthesisvoice,withvelocityswitched
multisamples,dualfilters,EGs,LFOs,andsoon.
33
Program mode: HD-1
Polyphonyalsodependsontheeffectsbeingused,and TheModeparameter,below,switchesbetweentwo
onwhichsynthesistypesarebeingused(HD1,AL1, differentMonoLegatoeffects,eachofwhichachieves
CX3etc.).Formoreinformation,see85a:Effect/EXi thissmoothnessinadifferentway.Seethedescription
FixedResourceMeteronpage 130. ofthatparameterformoredetails.
On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,
11c: Voice Assign Mode thenoteswithinalegatophrasewillsoundsmoother,
accordingtothesettingoftheModeparameter,below.
Voice Assign Mode [Poly, Mono] Off(unchecked):Legatophrasingwillproducethe
Theseradiobuttonsselectthebasicvoiceallocation samesoundasdetachedplaying.
mode.Dependingonwhichoneyouselect,various
otheroptionswillappear,suchasPolyLegato(Poly Mode [Normal, Use Legato Offset]
modeonly)andUnison(Monomodeonly). ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenMonoLegatois
Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowing On.
youplaychords. Normal:Whenyouplaylegato,themultisample,
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically, envelopes,andLFOswillnotbereset;onlythepitchof
producingonlyonenoteatatime. theoscillatorwillchange.Thissettingisparticularly
effectiveforwindinstrumentsandanalogsynth
Poly sounds.
Withthisoption,thepitchmayoccasionallybe
Poly Legato [Off, On] incorrect,dependingonwhichmultisampleyou
PolyLegatoisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignMode play,andwhereonthekeyboardyouplay.
issettoPoly. UseLegatoOffset:Whenyouplaylegato,thesecond
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand andsubsequentnoteswillusethelegatostartpoint
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnote specifiedforeachmultisample,ratherthantheStart
isreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached. Offset(21c)setting.
On(checked):Whenyouplayalegatophrase,onlythe Thisiseffectivewhenusedwithamultisamplefor
firstnoteofthatphrase(andnoteswithin30msecof whichyouveassignedaspecificlegatooffsetpoint.
thefirstnote)willusethenormalmultisamplestart Forexample,youmightuseittocontroltheattackofa
pointspecifiedbyStartOffset(21c);allsubsequent breathy,slowattacksaxsound.Onsome
noteswillusethelegatostartpointspecifiedforeach multisamples,thiswillhavenoeffect.
multisample. EnvelopesandLFOswillstillbereset,astheyarewith
Note:Thisisausefulwaytosimulatethepercussive detachedplaying.
attackofatonewheeltypeorgan.
Priority [Low, High, Last]
Off(unchecked):Noteswillalwaysusethesettingof
theStartPointOffset,regardlessofwhetheryouplay PriorityisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeisset
legatoordetached. toMono.
WithsomeMultisamples,PolyLegatomaynothave Thisparameterdetermineswhathappenswhenmore
anyeffect. thanonenoteisbeinghelddown.
Low:Thelowestnotewillsound.Manyvintage,
Single Trigger [Off, On] monophonicanalogsynthsworkthisway
SingleTriggerisavailablewhentheVoiceAssign High:Thehighestnotewillsound.
ModeissettoPoly.
Last:Themostrecentlyplayednotewillsound.
On(checked):Whenyouplaythesamenote
repeatedly,thepreviousnotewillbesilencedbefore Max # of Notes
thenextnoteissounded,sothatthetwodonot
overlap. Max # of Notes [Dynamic, 116]
Off(unchecked):Whenyouplaythesamenote Dynamicisthedefault.Withthissetting,youcanplay
repeatedly,thenoteswilloverlap. asmanynotesasthesystemallows.
116letsyoulimitthemaximumnumberofnotes
Mono playedbytheProgram.Voiceswillstillbeallocated
Mono Legato [Off, On] dynamically,uptothismaximumnumber.Youcanuse
thisto:
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono. Modelthevoiceleadingofvintagesynthesizers,
suchasthePolysix
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnote Controltheresourcesrequiredbyindividual
isreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached. ProgramsinCombinationandSequencermodes
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegato Max#ofNotesappliesonlywhenthemainVoice
phrasewillsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnotes AssignModeissettoPoly.IfMonoisselected,thisis
willhaveasmoothersound,formoregentle grayedout.
transitionsbetweenthenotes.
34
ThissettingdoesnotlimittheUnisonNumberof center;at100,thetwogroupswillbehardpannedleft
Voicesparameter.Forinstance,ifMax#ofNotesisset andright,respectively;atintermediatevalues,they
to6,andUnisonNumberofVoicesissetto3,youcan willbepannedtointermediateleftandrightpositions.
playupto6notes,eachwith3Unisonvoices. Ifthereisanoddnumberofvoices,onevoicewillbe
IftheProgramissettoDouble,theMax#ofNotes pannedtothecenter.
appliesequallytobothOscillators.Forinstance,ifMax Ifthevoicesaretruestereo,StereoSpreadsteersthe
#ofNotesissetto4,youcanplayupto4notesoneach stereoimageofeachvoice,similartoMIDIPan
OSC. (CC#10)andtheControlSurfacePanknobs.Inthis
case,intermediatesettingsofStereoSpreadmaybe
Chord themosteffective,sincetheywillstillpreservesomeof
Chord [Off, Bsc, Adv] theoriginalstereoimage.
OffdisablestheChordfunction. Unisondetuningisspreadasevenlyaspossibleacross
theleftandrightchannels.Thelowestvoicewillbeon
Bsc(Basic)recreatesthechordmodeoftheKORG theleft,andthehighestontheright;thenextloweston
Polysix.Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,itwillcutoff theleft,andthenexthighestontheright,etc.,as
thepreviouschord.ThisoptionignorestheVoice below:
Assignsettings.
14cents:L
Adv(Advanced)usestheProgramsVoiceAssign
settings,asifeachnoteinthechordwasatransposed +14cents:R
setofoscillatorslayeredwithintheProgram. 10cents:L
Poly,PolyLegato,SingleTrigger,Mono,MonoLegato, +10cents:Retc.
LegatoOffset,MonoPriority,andMonoandPoly
DependingontheThicknesssetting,thedetuning
Unisonallapply.
mayleanslightlytooneside.
YoucanachievethesameeffectasBsc,above,by
settingChordtoAdvanced,VoiceAssigntoMono, Detune [0200 cents]
PrioritytoLastNote,andLegatotoOff. DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Formoreinformation,seeUsingChordmodeon ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnison
page 54oftheOperationGuide. voices,incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThickness
parameter,below,controlshowthevoicesare
Source Pad [1...8] distributedacrossthedetuneamount.When
ChordmodeusesthechordsassignedtothePads,and ThicknessisOff,thevoicesaredistributedevenly,
thisselectswhichofthePadstouse.Youcanalso centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
choosechordsusingthePadsthemselves;formore
Forinstance,letssaythattheNumberofvoices
information,seeSelectingchordsonpage 55ofthe
parameterissetto3,Detuneissetto24,and
OperationGuide.
ThicknessisOff:
Unison Voiceonewillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwo
willnotbedetuned,andvoicethreewillbedetunedup
Unison [On, Off] by12cents.
UnisoncanbeusedinbothMonoandPolymodes.
Voice Detune
On(checked):WhenUnisonison,theProgramuses
twoormorestacked,detunedvoicestocreateathick 1 12
sound.
2 0
UsetheNumberofVoicesandDetuneparametersto
setthenumberofvoicesandamountofdetuning,and 3 +12
theThicknessparametertocontrolthecharacterofthe
detuning. Asanotherexample,letssaythatDetuneisstillsetto
Off(unchecked):TheProgramplaysnormally.If 24andThicknessisstillOff,butNumberofvoicesis
UnisonisOff,thenallofitsassociatedparametersare setto4:
grayedout. Voiceonewillstillbedetuneddownby12cents,voice
twowillbedetuneddownby4cents,voicethreewill
Number of voices [216]
bedetunedupby4cents,andvoice4willbedetuned
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe upby12cents.
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itapplies
onlywhenUnisonisOn. Voice Detune
Stereo Spread [0...100] 1 12

StereoSpreadletsyoucreateawiderstereofieldwhen
2 4
usingUnison.ItappliesonlywhenUnisonisOn.
ThisfeatureseparatesthedifferentUnisonvoicesinto 3 +4
twogroups.Onegroupispannedtotheleft,andthe
othertotheright.At0,bothgroupswillbeinthe 4 +12
35
Program mode: HD-1
Thickness [Off,0109] Using Hold with Drum Kits

ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn. Holdcanbeespeciallyusefulfordrumprograms,
Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuning sinceitletsthesamplesringoutnaturally.Ingeneral,
fortheunisonvoices. whenyousettheOscillatorModetoDrums,itsgood
tosetHoldtoOn.
Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacross
theDetunerange,asshownabove. OnceyouveturnedonHoldforadrumprogram,the
functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasis
0109:Unisonvoiceswillbedetunedinanasymmetric accordingtosettingswithintheselectedDrumKit.
way,increasingthecomplexityofthedetune,and
changingthewayinwhichthedifferentpitchesbeat IfakeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameter(onthe
againstoneanother.Thiscreatesaneffectsimilarto VoiceMixertaboftheDrumKitpage)isunchecked,
vintageanalogsynthesizers,inwhichoscillatorswere thenotewillbeheld.
frequentlyslightlyoutoftune.Highernumbers IfthekeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameteris
increasetheeffect. checked,itwillnotbeheld.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbe
11d: Key Zone heldregardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceive
setting.
Youcancreatekeyboardsplitsbysettingtopand
bottomkeysforOscillators1and2.Also,youcan Using Hold with Acoustic Pianos
controlthekeyboardrangeoverwhichtheHold Holdisalsousefulforsimulatingthetopoctavesofan
parametertakeseffect. acousticpiano,inwhichnotesalwayssustainuntil
theyfadeoutnaturally,regardlessofhowlongyou
Setting Key Zones from the keyboard
holdthekey.
Inadditiontousingthestandarddataentrycontrols,
TheHoldBottomandHoldTopparametersare
youcanalsosetallkeyboardzonesparametersdirectly
designedforexactlythispurpose.Theyletyoulimit
fromthekeyboard.Justdothefollowing:
theeffectoftheHoldparametertoaspecificrangeof
1. Selectthekeyzoneparameteryoudliketoedit. thekeyboard.
2. PressandholdtheENTERbutton.
Hold Bottom [C1G9]
3. Playanoteonthekeyboardtosettheparameter.
ThissetsthelowestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
4. ReleasetheENTERbutton.
Youcanusethisshortcutforallkeyandvelocity Hold Top [C1G9]
parametersintheOASYS. ThissetsthehighestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
Osc 1 Bottom [C1G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator1willplay. 11e: Wave Sequence
TheSwing,KeySync,andQuantizeTriggersettings
Osc 1 Top [C1G9]
inthissectionaffecthowtheProgramplaysitsWave
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator1will Sequences.Thesesettingsarestoredwithinthe
play. Program,anddonotchangetheoriginalWave
Sequencedata.
Osc 2 Bottom [C1G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator2willplay. Swing [300%+300%]
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheProgramis
Osc 2 Top [C1G9]
usingoneormoreWaveSequencessettoTempomode.
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator2will
play. UseSwingtoaddasenseofswingtotherhythm.For
example,Swingprovidesaneasywaytoturna
Hold [On, Off] squarerhythmintoashufflegroove.
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain Swingworksbyadjustingthepositionoftheupbeats,
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasif relativetotheWaveSequencesResolutionsetting.For
youwereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryoulift instance,iftheResolutionissetto1/8,Swingaffects
yourfingersfromthekeyboard. everyother8thnote.
UnlesstheSustainLevelissetto0inAmpEG1(and WhenSwingissetto+100%,thesenoteswillbemoved
AmpEG2inaDoubleProgram),thesoundwillplay onethirdofthewaytowardthenextdownbeat.Ifthe
fortheentirelengthofthesample(s). Resolutionis1/8,forexample,+100%changesstraight
On(checked):TheHoldfunctionisenabledforthe 8thnotesinto8thnotetriplets.
rangesetbytheHoldBottomandHoldTop WhenSwingissetto+300%,upbeatswillbemoved
parameters,below. allthewaytothenextdownbeat.Atthispoint,the
Off(unchecked):Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthe notesontheupbeatswillnotbeheardatall.
defaultsetting. Positivevaluesmaketheupbeatslater,andnegative
valuesmakethemearlier.
36
WaveSequenceSwing How Quantize Trigger works

Swing Resolution =
TheQuantizeTriggerfeaturetriestomakeagood
guessatwhereyouintendedthenotetobe.Ifyouplay
Beat 1 Beat 2
Swing %
3 3 3 3
thenotejustabitlatewithina32ndnoteofthe8th
0%
noteitwillassumethatyoumeantthenotetosound
+100
onthebeatthatjustpassed.Inthiscase,thenotewill
+100%
100
playimmediately.
100% Ontheotherhand,ifyouplaythenoteuptothree
+200
32ndnotesearly,itwillassumethatyoureintending
+200%
thenotetosoundonthenextbeat.Inthiscase,the
+300%
noteonisdelayeduntilthenext8thnote.
+300
11f: Half-Damper Control

Swing uses the Wave Sequences Resolution setting
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuous
SincetheprogrammedrhythmsofTempoWave
footpedal,suchastheKorgDS1H.Incomparisontoa
Sequencescanvarywidely,eachhasitsownSwing
standardfootswitch,halfdamperpedalsoffermore
Resolutionsetting,from1/32notetripletsto1/4note.
subtlecontrolofsustain,whichcanbeespeciallyuseful
IftheProgramcontainstwoormoreWaveSequences forpianosounds.
withdifferentSwingResolutionsettings,theProgram
TheOASYSwillautomaticallysensewhenahalf
willusethefinestvalue.Forexample,ifoneissetto1/8
damperisconnectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput.
andtheotherissetto1/16,theProgramwilluse1/16
Forproperoperation,youwillalsoneedtocalibrate
notes.
thepedal,usingtheCalibrateHalfDampercommand
Key Sync [On, Off] intheGlobalpagemenu.
On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,eachnotesWave Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperwork
Sequence(s)willprogressindependently,sothateach justlikeastandardfootswitch.Inconjunctionwiththe
onecanbeonadifferentstep,ormovingatadifferent EnableHalfDamperparameter,below,intermediate
rate. positionsallowagraduatedcontrolofsustain,similar
tothedamperpedalofanacousticpiano.
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,allofthe
WaveSequenceswillbesynchronizedonthesame Enable Half-Damper [On, Off]
step.Thereisoneexceptiontothis,however:if
WhenthisisOn(checked),HalfDamperpedals,
Durationismodulatedwithvelocityornotenumber,
normalsustainpedals,andMIDICC#64willall
theWaveSequencescanstillprogressatdifferentrates.
modulatetheAmpEG,asdescribedbelow.
Quantize Trigger [On, Off] WhenthisisOff(unchecked),thepedalsandMIDI
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheProgramis CC#64willstillholdnotesasusual,butwillnot
usingoneormoreWaveSequencessettoTempomode. modulatetheAmpEG.
ItallowsyoutoforcemostTempomodeWave Half-Damper Pedal and Release Time
Sequencenoteonstobeinsync,makingiteasierto
Theamountofmodulationdependsonwhetherthe
playalongwithotherrhythmicelements.
AmpEGSustainLevelissetto0(asisthecasewith
WhenQuantizeTriggersisOn,noteonsarequantized mostacousticpianosounds),orsetto1ormore.The
to8thnotesusingthecurrenttemporeference.(See modulationiscontinuous,from1x(nochange)to55
belowforafewmoredetails.) timeslonger;thetablebelowshowsaselectionof
Thetemporeferencecancomefromdifferentsources, representativepoints.
dependingonthecurrentmode,andwhetherornot HalfDampermodulationofAmpEGReleaseTime
KARMAison:
CC#64 Multiply Amp EG Release Time by
InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAisoff,
Value If Sustain = 0 If Sustain = 1 or more
noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesounding
TempomodeWaveSequence,ifany. 0 1x 1x
InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAison, 32 2.1x 2.1x
noteonsaresynchronizedwithKARMA.
64 3.2x
InSequencermodeduringplaybackorrecording,
noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesequence. 80 5.9x
3.2x
InSequencermode,whilethesequencerisstopped, 96 22.3x
noteonsaresynchronizedwithRPPRand 127 55x
KARMA.
On(checked):Noteonswillbequantized.
11g: Scale
Off(unchecked):Noteonswillbeplayedinstantly,the
momentthatyouplaythekeyboard. Type [Equal TemperamentUser Octave Scale15]
SelectsthebasicscalefortheProgram.
37
Program mode: HD-1
Notethatformanyofthescales,thesettingoftheKey ThissettingdoesnotapplytotheEqualTemperament,
parameter,below,isveryimportant. Stretch,andUserAllNotesscales.
EqualTemperament:Thisisthemostwidelyused IfyoureusingascaleotherthanEqual
scalebyfar,inwhicheachsemitonestepisspacedat Temperament,thecombinationoftheselectedscale
equalpitchintervals. andtheKeysettingmayskewthetuningofthe
EqualTemperamentallowseasymodulation,sothata note.Forexample,AabovemiddleCmightbecome
chordprogressionplayedinthekeyofCsounds 442Hz,insteadofthenormal440Hz.Youcanuse
roughlythesameasthesameprogressionplayedinF#. theGlobalModesMasterTuneparametertocorrect
Sacrificed,however,issomeofthepurityofindividual this,ifnecessary.
intervalsofferedbythescalesbelow. Random [07]
PureMajor:Inthistemperament,majorchordsofthe Thisparametercreatesrandomvariationsinpitchfor
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune. eachnote.Atthedefaultvalueof0,pitchwillbe
PureMinor:Inthistemperament,minorchordsofthe completelystable;highervaluescreatemore
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune. randomization.
Arabic:Thisscaleincludesthequartertoneintervals Thisparameterishandyforsimulatinginstruments
usedinArabicmusic. thathavenaturalpitchinstabilities,suchasanalog
synths,tapemechanismorgansoracoustic
Pythagoras:ThisscaleisbasedonancientGreek
instruments.
musicaltheory,andisespeciallyeffectiveforplaying
melodies.Itproducescompletelypurefifths,withone
exception,attheexpenseofdetuningotherintervals t 11: Page Menu Commands
thirdsinparticular.
AsmuchasPythagorasmighthaveliketodoso,its numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
notpossibletomakeallthefifthspurewhilealso shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
keepingtheoctaveintune.Forthesakeoftheoctave, commandsonpage 142.
oneofthefifthstheintervalfromthesharpfourth
degreetothesharpfirstdegreeismadequiteflat. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Werkmeister(WerkmeisterIII):Thisscalewasoneof
themanytemperamentsystemsdevelopedtowards 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
theendoftheBaroqueperiod.TheseWellTempered ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
tuningswereaimedatallowingrelativelyfree 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
transpositionalthoughyoullstillnoticethatthe CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
differentkeysmaintaintheirowndistinct
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
characteristics,unlikeEqualTemperament.
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
J.S.Bachwasreferringtothesenewscalesinhistitle,
TheWellTemperedClavier.Assuch,thisgroupare
particularlyappropriateforlatebaroqueorganand
harpsichordmusic.
Kirnberger(KirnbergerIII):ThisisasecondWell
Temperedtuning,datingfromtheearly18thcentury.
Slendro:ThisisanIndonesiangamelanscale,withfive
notesperoctave.
WhenKeyissettoC,usetheC,D,F,GandAnotes.
Otherkeyswillplaythenormalequaltempered
pitches.
Pelog:ThisisanotherIndonesiangamelanscale,with
sevennotesperoctave.
WhenKeyissettoC,usethewhitekeys.Theblack
keyswillplaytheequaltemperedpitches.
Stretch:Thistuningisusedforacousticpianos.
UserAllNotesScale:Thisisauserprogrammedscale
withdifferentsettingsforall128MIDInotes.Youcan
setupthisscaleinGlobalmode(Global31b).
UserOctaveScale0015:Theseareuserprogrammed
scaleswithsettingsforeachofthe12notesinan
octave.YoucansetthemupinGlobalmode(Global3
1a).
Key (Scale Key) [CB]

Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
38
Program P1: Basic/Vector 15: Vector Control
15: Vector Control

15PMC
15a
15b
15c
VectorSynthesisletsyoucontrolProgramandEffects Inadditiontomovingthepointdirectlywiththe
parametersbymovingtheVectorJoystick,byusingthe VectorJoystick,youcanalsousetheVectorEnvelope
programmableVectorEnvelope,orbythecombination tomoveitspositionautomaticallyovertime,asshown
ofthetwo. below.
What does Vector mean? VectorEnvelopemovingtheVectorPoint

Modulationgenerallyworksbymovingasingle +127
control.likeaslider,inastraightline.Atoneendofthe
control,themodulationisatitsminimum;attheother
end,itsatitsmaximum.
Y-Axis 0
VectorSynthesisisalittledifferent.Itworksby
movingaroundapointonatwodimensionalplane,
bothleftrightandupdown.
VectorPointandXandYaxisvalues 127 0 +127
X-Axis
Vector Point
+127 Vector Joystick and Vector Envelope

YoucanmovetheVectorpointusingthecombination
Y value: +50 oftheVectorJoystickandtheVectorEnvelope.Thetwo
Y-Axis 0 worktogether,althoughyoudontnecessaryhaveto
usethembothatthesametime.
WhentheVectorJoystickisinitscenterposition,the
VectorEnvelopehascompletecontroloverthepoints
127 0 +127 position.Likewise,whentheVectorEnvelopeisinthe
X-Axis center,theVectorJoystickhascompletecontrol.
WhentheVectorEnvelopeismoving,theVector
X value: 90 Joystickscalesitseffect.RegardlessoftheEnvelopes
Youcanthinkofthispointasbeingpositionedontwo position,theVectorJoystickcanalwaysmovethe
differentlinesatonce:aleftrightline(theXaxis),and Vectorpointallthewaytoanyoftheextremeedges.
anupdownline(theYaxis). Tip:toquicklyresettheVectorJoysticktoitscenter
Inotherwords,insteadofjusthavingonevalue(likea value,holddownthefrontpanelControlResetbutton
slider),eachVectorpointhastwovalues:oneforX, andmovethejoystick.
andoneforY.SeethegraphicVectorPointandXand
Yaxisvaluesforanexample.
39
Program mode: HD-1
Vector Volume Control and CC Control InCombimode,youcanusethistocontroltherelative

TheVectordoestwomainthings:itcancontrolthe volumesofupto16Programsatonce,usingboththeX
relativevolumeofthetwoOscillatorsinProgram andYaxes.Formoredetails,seetheVectorControl
mode(orofupto16ProgramsatonceinCombi sectionofCombimode.
mode),anditcangenerateCCsforcontrolling Enable Volume Control [Off, On]
ProgramandEffectsparameters.
Whenthisboxischecked,theVectorpositionwill
Vector and MIDI controlthevolumesofOscillators1and2.
TheVectorfeaturesinteractwithMIDIintwodifferent Whenthisboxisnotchecked,theVectorpositionwill
ways:throughtheVectorJoystick,andthroughthe notdirectlyaffectvolume.However,itsstillpossible
VectorCCControl. fortheVectortocontrolvolumeviaVectorCCsand
TheVectorJoysticksendsandreceivestwoMIDI AMS.
controllers:onefortheXaxis,andtheotherfortheY Equal Power [Off, On]
axis.InGlobalmode,youcanassignthesetoanyMIDI
CCnumbersyoulike.ThedefaultsareCC#118forthe ThisappliesonlywhenEnableVolumeControlis
Xaxis,andCC#119fortheYaxis. turnedOn.
TheVectorJoystickanditsCCscontroltheVector WhenEqualPowerisOn,theVectorwillfadebetween
position,inconjunctionwiththeVectorEG. Oscillators1and2usinganequalpowervolume
curve.Thisprovidesasmoothfadebetweenthetwo
TheVectorCCControl,ontheotherhand,isgenerated sounds,andisthetypeofvolumecontrolusedby
bytheVectorposition.Normally,thiswillonlyaffect classicvectorsynths.
internalsoundsandeffects.Ifyoulike,however,you
canalsoenableaGlobalparametertosendthese Also,whenthisischecked,theOSC1andOSC2
generatedCCstoexternalMIDIdevices. CenterVolumeparameterswillbegrayedout,since
EqualPowersetsthecentervolumesautomatically.
WhenEqualPowerisOff,theOSC1andOSC2
15a: Vector Volume Control CenterVolumeparametersdeterminethewayin
VectorVolumeControlletsyouadjusttherelative whichVectorpositionaffectsvolume.
volumesofOscillators1and2bymovingtheVector
OSC1 Center Volume [0, 25, 50, 75, 100%]
Joystick(ortheVectorEnvelope)fromlefttorighton
theXaxis. ThissetsthevolumeofOscillator1atthecenterofthe
Xaxis.ItappliesonlywhenEqualPower,above,isset
TheEqualPowercheckboxmakestheVectorcreatea
toOff.
smoothfadebetweenthetwoOscillators,whilethe
OSC1/2CenterVolumeparametersallowyoutocreate ThevolumesattheextremeendsoftheXaxisare
morecomplexfadeshapes. fixed.Attheleftside,Osc1isalwaysat100%volume;
attherightside,Osc1isalwaysat0%.
Vector Synthesis System

Vector CC MIDI Output Global switch:
Vector MIDI Out
Global Controllers Vector Joystick

Vector Joystick MIDI CC Assignments
Defaults: X=118, Y=119 Vector CC MIDI Output
Vector CC Control
Vector Joystick
MIDI In
Vector CC Control
scale X+/ and Y+/ Vector CC Modulation of

Vector EG VJS X and Y modes
CC Assignments Program and FX Parameters
Program switch:
Enable CC control
Vector Volume Control
Osc 1/2 Center Volume Vector Modulation of

and Equal Power settings Oscillator Volume
Program switch:
Enable Volume control
40
Program P1: Basic/Vector 15: Vector Control
OSC2 Center Volume [0, 25, 50, 75, 100%] VJS X Mode [Positive, Negative, Xfade, Split]
ThissetsthevolumeofOscillator2atthecenterofthe YoucansetuptheVectortosendoutCCsinseveral
Xaxis. differentpatterns,asshowninthegraphicbelow.This
ThevolumesattheextremeendsoftheXaxisare controlsthepatternfortheXaxis.Notethatthissetting
fixed,intheoppositedirectionofOscillator1s.Atthe affectsonlyCCControl;ithasnoeffectonVolume
leftside,Osc2isalwaysat0%volume;attheright Control.
side,Osc2isalwaysat100%. VectorCCModes
OscCenterVolumeandXAxisPosition
Positive Negative
Generates only +X, Generates only X,
increasing from left to right. increasing from right to left.
100%
Volume 50%
0 +X CC 127 127 X CC 0
0%
-127 0 +127
Vector X-axis position
127 0 +127 127 0 +127
X-Axis X-Axis
Center Volume Values: 100
75
Xfade Split
50 Generates both +X and X. Generates both +X and -X.
25 One increases as the other Both are 0 in the center.
decreases. +X increases to the right;
0 X increases to the left.
15b: Vector CC Control 0 +X CC 127

+X CC
0 127
VectorCCControlletsyouusethecombinationofthe
127 0
VectorJoystickandtheVectorEGasAMSsources,for 0 X CC 127
X CC
modulatingProgramparameters,andasDMod
sources,formodulatingEffects.
EachofthefourdirectionsoftheVectorcansenda 127 0 +127 127 0 +127
differentCC,includingleft(X),right(+X),up(+Y), X-Axis X-Axis
anddown(Y).Youcanchoosebetweenseveral
differentpatternscombiningthesefourdirectionsby Positivesendsoutonly+X,startingat0atthefarleft,
usingtheVJSXModeandVJSYModeparameters. andincreasingto127atthefarright.Xisdisabledin
thismode.
YoucaneitherusetheVectorCCstoautomateexisting
modulationroutings,suchasthefrontpanelknobs,or NegativesendsoutonlyX,startingat0atthefarleft,
asdistinctmodulationsources.ThevectorCCis andincreasingto127atthefarright.Inthismode,+X
transmittedasMIDIcontrolchangemessagesonthe isgrayedout.
globalMIDIchannel.Thismeansthatitcontrolsall Xfadesendsoutboth+XandX,overlapping
voicesoftheprogram,notindividualvoices. throughouttheXaxis.Asoneincreases,theother
Note:AGlobalparameterallowsyoutoenableor decreases.
disableMIDIoutputfortheCCControl.Bydefault, Splitsendsoutboth+XandX,withasplitinthe
thisisdisabled.Thissettingdoesnotaffecttheinternal center.+Xissentwhenthepointmovestotherightof
Programs,whichcanalwaysreceivetheVectorCCs. thecenter,andXissentwhenthepointmovestothe
leftofcenter.
Enable CC Control [Off, On]
Whenthisboxischecked,theVectorpositionwill +X [OffMIDI CC#119]
controltheCCsassignedto+X,X,+Y,andY,asset Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Xvector.You
below. canusethisasanAMSsourcetocontrolProgram
Whenthisboxisnotchecked,theVectorpositionwill parameters,orasaDModsourcetocontrolEffects
notaffecttheseCCs.However,thejoystickwillstill parameters.ItwillbegrayedoutiftheVJSXMode,
sendandreceiveitsdedicatedMIDICCs,justlike above,issettoNegative.
otherphysicalcontrollers.SeeVectorandMIDI, InadditiontothestandardlistofMIDIcontrollers,you
above,formoreinformation. canalsoassignthe+Xvectortoduplicatethefunction
ofseveralfrontpanelcontrollers,includingJSX,JS+X,
JSX,Knobs58,andSW12.
Forinstance,ifyouassign+XtoKnob6,thevectors+X
willusethecontrollerassignedtoKnob6onthe
ControllerAssignpage.
41
Program mode: HD-1
Finally,youcanalsoassign+XtocontroltheMaster 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Volume. CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
X [OffMIDI CC#119] 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see

ThisassignsthecontrollersentbytheXvector.Itwill
begrayedoutiftheVJSXMode,above,issetto
Positive.
Theselectionsarethesameasfor+X,above.
VJS Y Mode [Positive, Negative, Xfade, Split]

ThiscontrolstheVectorCCpatternfortheYaxis.For
moreinformation,seethedescriptionunderVJSX
Mode,above.
+Y [OffMIDI CC#119]
Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Yvector.Itwill
begrayedoutiftheVJSYMode,above,issetto
Negative.
Y [OffMIDI CC#119]
Positive.
15c: Vector Graphic

Vector Graphic
Thisisadiagramofthevectorspace,includingthefive
pointsoftheVectorEG(labeled04)andthecurrent
positionoftheVectorJoystick(labeledJ).
ThetransitionsbetweentheEGspointsareshownby
blacklines,andthelooptransitionisshownbyagray
line.
Show Volume Image [Off, On]

Thevectorgraphicincludesanimagerepresentingthe
currentVectorVolumeControlsettings.Youcanuse
theShowVolumeImagecheckboxtotogglethispart
ofthegraphiconandoff.
Show Point [Vector Joystick,

Vector Envelope Point 04]
YoucanviewthevolumeandCCvaluesforthecurrent
positionoftheVectorJoystick,orforanyoftheEGs
fivepoints.
Oscillator Volume & CC Display

ThisreadonlydisplayshowsthevolumeandCC
valuesforthecurrentVectorpoint,asselectedbythe
ShowPointparameter,above.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
42
Program P1: Basic/Vector 16: Vector Envelope
16: Vector Envelope

16PMC
16a
16b
16c
TheVectorEnvelopeworkstogetherwiththeVector WhenKeySyncisOn,eachnotesVolumeControlEG
JoysticktocontroltheVectorposition.Itsalsospecial willstartatnoteon,andgointoreleaseatnoteoff.All
becauseitstheonlyprogrammablemodulationsource thenoteswillstillshareasingleCCControlEG.
whichletsyoumodulatebothProgramandEffects
parameters.
16a: Basic
TheVectorEnvelopeisdifferentfromtheother
envelopesinseveralways: Vector Envelope On [Off, On]
EachpointhastwolevelsonefortheXaxis,and On(checked):Whenthisboxischecked,theVectorEG
onefortheYaxis. willworkwiththeVectorJoysticktocontrolthevector
Theenvelopetimescanbebasedonsecondsand position.
milliseconds,orsyncedtotempo. Off(unchecked):Whenthisboxisnotchecked,the
Eachpointhasaholdtime,aswellasatransition VectorEGwillnotrun.Thevectorpositionwillbe
timetothenextpoint. controlledsolelybytheVectorJoystick.
Theenvelopecanloopbetweentwopoints,for Key Sync [Off, On]

eitheraspecifiednumberofrepeats,oraslongas TheKeySyncparameterappliesonlytoVectorVolume
youholdthenote. control.AsdescribedunderVectorVolumeandCC
controluseseparateEGs,above,VectorCCcontrol
Vector Volume and CC control use separate EGs
alwaysactsasifKeySyncwereOff.
ThereareactuallytwodifferentVectorEGs,which
sharethesameparameters:oneforVolumeControl, On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,theVector
andtheotherforCCControl. VolumeEGstartseachtimeyoupressakey,andan
independentEGrunsforeachnote.Thisisthenormal
AllofthenotesintheProgramshareasingleCC setting.
ControlEG,sincetherecanonlybeonesetofCCsfor
eachMIDIchannel.ThisEGstartswhenyoufirstplay Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theVector
anote,andcontinuesaslongasanynotesareheld VolumeEGstartsfromthephasedeterminedbythe
downonthekeyboard.Whenyoureleaseallofthe firstnoteinthephrase,sothattheEGsforallnotes
notes,theEGgoesintoitsreleasephase. beingheldaresynchronizedtogether.
Eachnotethenhasitsown,additionalVolumeControl Mode [Time, Tempo]

EG.TheKeySyncparameterappliesonlytothisper Time:WhentheModeissettoTime,youcansetthe
noteEG. EGsegmenttimesinsecondsormilliseconds.
WhentheKeySyncparameterisOff,theCCControl Tempo:WhentheModeissettoTempo,theVectorEG
andVolumeControlEGsarecompletelysynchronized. willsynchronizetothesystemtempo,assetbyeither
theTempoknoborMIDIClock.Insteadofusing
43
Program mode: HD-1
secondsandmilliseconds,youcanspecifytheEG VectorEGtimes,LoopType=1>3
timesasrhythmicvalues,usingtheBaseNoteand
Note-on or reset Note-off
Multiplierparameters.
Loop
16b: Vector Envelope Loop

TheVectorEGcanloopbetweentwopoints,andcan Change to
Y-Axis
continuetoloopeitherforaslongasyouholdthenote, Time
orforaspecifiednumberofrepeats.Youcanalsoturn
theloopoffcompletely,ifyoulike. Hold 0 H1 T1 H2 T2 H3 T3 H1 T4
(Release)
Transition 0
Loop Type [0->3, 1->3, 2->3, 0<->3, 1<->3]
Thisselectsthestartandendpointsoftheloop,and ThetransitionfromPoint3intotheloopalwaysuses
whethertheloopisforwardsonlyorforwards Point3sTransitiontime,regardlessoftheLoopType.
backwards.
Points0,1,and2sTransitiontimes,however,workin
Thefirstthreeselections,0>3,1>3,and2>3,loop reversewhenmovingbackwardsduringaforwards
forwardsonly.Forinstance,whenLoopTypeissetto backwardsloop.ItsasifyouwereretracingtheEG
1>3,theEGwillplayasfollows:0,1,2,3,1,2,3,1,2,3 shapeinreverse.
etc.
Forinstance,inthebackwardssectionofaloop,
Thelasttwoselections,0<>3and1<>3,areforwards movingfromPoint2toPoint1usesPoint1sTransition
backwards.Forinstance,withthe1<>3setting,theEG time.
willplayasfollows:0,1,2,3,2,1,2,3etc.
ForwardsBackwardsLoop,LoopType=1<>3
Loop Repeat [Off, 1126, Inf]
Loop Type = 1<>3
Off:WhenthisissettoOff,theEGwillnotloopatall.
1126:TheEGwillloopthespecifiednumberoftimes,
andthenholdatpoint3untilthenoteisreleased.
Inf:TheEGwillloopaslongasthenoteisheld,and
Change to
thenmovetopoint4whenthenoteisreleased. Y-Axis
Time
H1 T1 H2 T2 H3 T3 H2 T1 H1
16c: Vector Envelope
LiketheFilter,Amp,andPitchEGs,theVectorEGhas
atotaloffivepoints.SincetheVectorEGcanloop, VJS [Off, 04]
however,thepointsarelabeleddifferently;insteadof Thishorizontalrowofradiobuttonsletsyoueditthe
nameslikeattackanddecay,theyaresimply selectedpointsXYpositionusingtheVectorJoystick.
numbered04.
Justpressthepointsradiobutton,movetheVector
Sustain and Release Joysticktothedesiredlocation.Whenyourefinished,
WhentheEGisinthemiddleofaloop,thereisno presstheOffradiobuttonagain.
sustainpointperse.However,iftheEGhasalready WhenyouarenoteditingtheEGsXYpositions,you
completedthespecifiednumberofLoopRepeats,orif shouldleavethissettoOff,toavoidinadvertent
LoopRepeatisOff,itwillsustainatPoint3until changestotheEG.
release.
Atrelease,theEGalwaysmovestoPoint4. Point 0
Hold and Transition times Position
TheHoldTimesetshowlongtheEGlingersateach InadditiontoeditingtheXandYparameterswiththe
point,andtheTransitiontimesetshowlongittakesto standarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsosimplyuse
gofromtheselectedpointtothenext. theVectorJoysticktosettheposition,asdescribed
underVJS,above.
Forinstance,thegraphicbelowshowsthesuccession
ofHoldandTransitiontimeswhentheLoopTypeisset X [127+127]
to1>3.Forclarity,onlytheYaxispositionsareshown. ThissetsthepointspositionontheXaxis.
Y [127+127]
ThissetsthepointspositionontheYaxis.
Hold Time
ThissetsthelengthoftimethattheEGwillstayon
Point0,beforemovingtoPoint1.YoucansettheHold
Timeineitherseconds/millisecondsorrhythmic
values,dependingonthesettingoftheEGsMode
parameter.
44
Program P1: Basic/Vector 16: Vector Envelope
Time [0ms60sec] Loop

ThisparameterletsyousettheHoldTimeinseconds Thissetsthelengthoftimethatittakestomovefrom
andmilliseconds.ItappliesonlywhentheModeisset Point3tothefirstPointintheloop.Youcansetthisin
toTime. eitherseconds/millisecondsorrhythmicvalues,
dependingonwhethertheModeissettoTimeor
(Base Note) [Off, r w ] Tempo.
ThismenusetsabasicrhythmicvaluefortheHold TheTime,BaseNote,andMultiplierparameterswork
Time,relativetothesystemtempo.Thevaluesrange justlikethoseforPoint0,asdescribedunder
froma32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets. Transitiononpage 45.
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheModeissetto
Tempo. Point 4
x (Multiply Base Note by) [0132] Point4istheVectorEGsreleasedestination.Itstime
settingisdifferentfromthoseoftheotherPoints.
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For InsteadofsettingthetimeittakestomovefromPoint4
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and tothenextPoint,itsetshowlongittakestogofromthe
themultiplierissetto3,theHoldTimewilllastfora previousPointtoPoint4.
dottedeighthnote.
TheEGmovestoPoint4assoonasitreleases,
Transition regardlessofwhereitwasbeforetherelease.For
ThissetsthelengthoftimethattheEGtakestomove instance,letssaythattheEGisinthemiddleofPoint
fromPoint0toPoint1. 2sHoldTimeatnoteoff.TheEGwillimmediately
begintomovetoPoint4,withoutwaitingfortheHold
WhentheLoopTypeissetto0<>3,thisalsosetsthe Timetocomplete.
timethatittakestomovefromPoint1toPoint0
duringthebackwardssectionoftheloop. Release
Time [0ms60sec] Thissetsthelengthoftimethatittakestomoveto
Point4afternoteoff.Youcansetthisineither
ThisparameterletsyousettheTransitiontimein seconds/millisecondsorrhythmicvalues,depending
secondsandmilliseconds.Itappliesonlywhenthe onwhethertheModeissettoTimeorTempo.
ModeissettoTime.
TheTime,BaseNote,andMultiplierparameterswork
(Base Note) [r w ] justlikethoseforPoint0,asdescribedunder
ThissetsabasicrhythmicvaluefortheHoldTime, Transitiononpage 45.
relativetothesystemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma
32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets.
KARMA and Vector EG interaction
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheModeissetto KARMAcancontroltheVectorEGsinvariousways,as
Tempo. describedbelow.
x (Multiply Base Note by) [0132] CC Control EG

ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For WhenKARMAisOn,italwaysstartsandrestartsthe
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and CCControlEG,accordingtotheKARMAtrigger
themultiplierissetto3,theEGwillmovefromPoint0 settings.ThisletsKARMAcontrolsoundsoreffectsin
toPoint1overadottedeighthnote. synchronizationwiththeKARMAGE.
Volume Control EGs

Points 1 and 2
WhenKeySyncisOff,andKARMAisOn,KARMA
Points1and2workexactlylikePoint0,asdescribed willstartandrestarttheVolumeControlEGsaswell
above. astheCCControlEG.Thismeansthattheresulting
changesinoscillatorvolumeswillbesynchronized
Point 3 withtheKARMAGE.
Point3alsoworksmuchlikePoints02,withtwomain WhenKeySyncisOn,KARMAdoesnotaffectVector
differences: VolumeControl.Eachnotewillhaveitsown,
Point3alwaysusesitsownTimewhenmovinginto independentVolumeControlEG,justasifKARMA
theloop,regardlessofthedirectionoftheloop. wasturnedoff.
IfLoopRepeatissettoOff,orifthenumberisset Entering the EGs release stage
between1126andhasalreadyplayedthespecified
AssumingthatKARMAisOn:
numberoftimes,thentheEGwillstayatPoint3until
theEGeithergoesintorelease,orisresetbyKARMA. WhentheKARMALATCHswitchisOff,the
KARMAcontrolledVectorEG(s)willstarttorelease
Hold Time whenyouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard(and
ThisworksjustliketheHoldTimeforPoint0,as whenKARMAisnolongerreceivinganyinputnotes
describedunderHoldTimeonpage 44. fromothersources).
WhentheKARMALATCHswitchisOn,the
onlywhenKARMALatchisturnedOffagain.
45
Program mode: HD-1
t 16: Page Menu Commands ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
commandsonpage 142.
4:CopyVectorEnvelope.Formoreinformation,
Programonpage 142.
seeCopyVectorEnvelopeonpage 148.
18: Set Up Controllers

18PMC
18a
18b
Thispageletsyousetupthefunctionalityofswitches1 SW2 [Off, , After Touch Lock]

and2(SW1/2)andRealTimeKnobs58.These
settingsaremadeindependentlyforeachProgram. Mode [Toggle, Momentary]
ThisassignsafunctiontotheSW2switch.The
functionsthatyoucanassigntotheSW2switcharethe
18a: Panel Switch Assign sameasfortheSW1switch,withtheexceptionthatthe
ThesesettingscontrolthefunctionalityofSW1and SW1switchsSW1Mod.:CC#80assignmentisreplaced
SW2. bySW2Mod.:CC#81.
SW1 [Off, , After Touch Lock]

ThisassignsafunctiontotheSW1switch.Theon/off
18b: Modulation Knob Assign
statuscanalsobememorized.Whenyouchangethe Thesesettingsassignfunctions(mainlyMIDIcontrol
assignment,theswitchissettotheOffcondition. changes)torealtimemodulationknobs58.Fora
Foracompletelistofthepossibleassignments,please completelistofthepossibleassignments,pleasesee
seeSW1/2Assignmentsonpage 1033. RealtimeKnobs58Assignmentsonpage 1034.
Thefunctionsyouassignherewillapplywhenyou
Mode [Toggle, Momentary] operaterealtimemodulationknobs58.
Thisspecifiesthemodeofon/offwhentheSW1switch
ispressed.
Toggle:ThestatewillalternatebetweenOnandOff
eachtimeyoupresstheSW1switch.
Momentary:ThestatewillremainOnonlywhileyou
continueholdingdowntheSW1switch.
46
Program P1: Basic/Vector 19: Set Up Pads
Knob 5 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite

Programonpage 142.
Knob 6 [Off, , MIDI CC#119]
Knob 7 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
t 18: Page Menu Commands SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
commandsonpage 142.
19: Set Up Pads

19PMC
19a
Thereareeightvelocitysensitivetriggerpadsbelow Formoreinformation,includingstepbystep
theLCDscreen.Theselooklikedrummachinepads, instructionsandusagetips,seeDrum&ChordPads
andplayingdrumsoundsiscertainlyoneuseforthem. onpage 53oftheOperationGuide.
However,theycanalsoplayuptoeightnotechordson
anysoundnotjustdrums.Thepadsevenremember 19a: Pads
thevelocitiesoftheindividualnoteswithinthechord,
aswellasthenotesthemselves.Thesesettingsare Pad 1
storedindependentlyforeachProgram.
Inadditiontoplayingsoundsdirectly,thepadsare Notes 18 [Off, C1G9 / 001127]
alsousedtoselectchordsforChordmode.Formore Theseparametersletyoueditthe8notesassignedto
information,seeUsingChordmodeonpage 54of eachpad,alongwithaseparatevelocityforeachnote.
theOperationGuide. Toplayfewerthan8notes,justsettheunwantednotes
toOff.
Assigning notes to the pads
Off:Selectthistodisablethenote.
Youcanassignnotestothepadsdirectlyfromthe
keyboardandfrontpanelcontrols,withoutusingthis C1G9:Thissetsthenotenumber.
pageatall.Alternatively,youcanenternotesand 001127:Thissetsthenotesvelocityvalue.Formore
velocitiesusingtheparametersonthispage. informationonpadsandvelocity,pleaseseePad
Regardlessofhowthenoteswerefirstassigned,you Mode:FixedVelocityvs.VelocitySensitive,below.
canedittheirvalueshere.
47
Program mode: HD-1
Pad Mode: Fixed Velocity vs. Velocity Sensitive Formoredetailedinstructions,pleaseseeDrum&

Eachpadstoresavelocitylevelforeachofits8notes. ChordPadsonpage 53oftheOperationGuide.
ThePADMODEbutton,totherightofthepads,
controlswhetherornotthepadsrespondtohowhard
Pads 28
youplay.ItssettingisstoredwitheachProgram, ThesearethesameasforPad1,asdescribedabove.
Combi,andSong.
InFixedVelocitymode,thepadsalwaysusetheir t 19: Page Menu Commands
storedvelocitysettings,regardlessofhowhardyou
play. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
InVelocitySensitivemode,hittingthepadvery
stronglyproducesthepresetvelocities.Whenyouplay
commandsonpage 142.
moresoftly,thepresetvelocitiesarescaleddown
accordingly,maintainingthebalancebetweenthenotes 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
inthechord. Programonpage 142.
Assigning notes and chords to pads ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Youcanassignsinglenotesandchordstothepadsin 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
threedifferentways. CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
Play the notes, and then press CHORD ASSIGN 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
1. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes. SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
2. PresstheCHORDASSIGNbutton. 4:CopyPadSetup.Formoreinformation,see
CopyPadSetuponpage 148.
3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketoassignthe
notes.
Thatsit!Thenotesarenowassignedtothepad.
Press CHORD ASSIGN, and then play notes

Thismethodletsyoucreateachordoutofwidely
spacednotes,evenifyoucantplayallofthenotes
simultaneously.
1. PresstheCHORDASSIGNbutton.
2. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes.
Youcanplayasinglenote,orasimplechord.
Ifyoulike,youcanalsoplayupto8notesasalegato
phrase.Aslongasyoutakecarethatthenotesoverlap
eachother,theentirephrasewillberecordedasa
singlechord.Youcantakeaslongasyouliketoplay
thephrase.
notes.
Afterpressingthepad,youredone!
Edit notes and velocities using the LCD

Youcanedittherecordednotesandvelocitiesusing
theonscreenparameters.Ifyoulike,youcanalso
enternewnotesthisway.Formoreinformation,please
seePad1,above.
Copying and Merging Pads

Justasyoucanassignnotestoapadbyplayingthem
onthekeyboard,youcanpressapadtocopyits
assignednotestoanotherpad.
Themethodissimilartosteps13above;pressthepad
thatyouwanttocopy,andthenpresstheCHORD
ASSIGNswitch.Thenpressthecopydestinationpad;
theassignmentswillbecopied.
Youcanalsousethistocombinetheassignmentsof
twoormorepads,uptoamaximumofeightnotes.To
doso,justpressallofthecopyfrompads
simultaneously,andthenproceedasabove.
48
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 21: OSC1 Basic
Program P2: OSC/Pitch

Thesepagescontrolthefirstandmostbasicelements Setthebasicpitchofthesound,includingthe
ofHD1ssounds:theMultisamplesthattheoscillators octave,finetuning,andsoon.
play,andthepitchatwhichitplaysthem.Forinstance, Controlpitchmodulationfromawidevarietyof
youcan: sources,suchasJSX,theribbon,LFOs,andthe
SelectMultisamplesandWaveSequencesforSingle PitchEG.
andDoublePrograms,orDrumKitsforDrum NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Programs. Drums,onlyOscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepages
Setupvelocitysplits,crossfades,andlayersfor forOscillator2sfilterswillbegrayedout.
SingleandDoublePrograms.
21: OSC1 Basic

21PMC
21b
21a
21c
21d
HD1ssoundsarebasedonsamples,andthispagelets Tune [1200+1200]

yousetupallofthebasicsamplerelatedsettings. Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1
Amongotherthings,youcan: octave.Acentis1/100ofasemitone.
SelectMultisamplesand/orWaveSequencesforthe
Oscillator(inaSingleorDoubleProgram),orselect Frequency Offset [10.0Hz +10.0Hz]
theDrumKitforaDrumProgram Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1Hz.
SettheOscillatorsbasicpitch FrequencyOffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,when
usedtodetunethetwooscillators,itcancreatea
Createvelocitysplitsandcrossfadesbetween constantbeatfrequencyacrosstherangeofthe
Multisamplesand/orWaveSequences keyboard.
21a: OSC1 Frequency 21b: Note-On Control

Octave [2[32], 1[16], +0[8], +1[4]] Delay [0000ms5000ms, KeyOff]
ThissetsthebasicpitchoftheOscillator,inoctaves. Usethistocreateadelaybetweenthetimethatyou
Thedefaultis+0[8].Thestandardoctaveofa pressakey,andthetimethatthenoteactuallysounds.
multisampleis+0[8].
ThisismostusefulinDoublePrograms,fordelaying
Transpose [12+12] oneoscillatorinrelationtotheother.
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1
octave.
49
Program mode: HD-1
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthe Type [Off, Multisample, Wave Sequence]

soundbyaparticularamountoftime,thesoundwill ThisselectswhetherMS1willplayaMultisample,a
playassoonasyoureleasethekey.Youcanusethisto WaveSequence,ornothingatall.
createtheclickheardwhenaharpsichordnoteis
released,forinstance. TheTypeselectionaffectsthechoicesshowninthe
BankandMultisamplemenus.
Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalso
besttosettheoscillatorsAmpEGSustainLevelto0. Bank (Multisample) [ROM MonoEXs Stereo]
Mode [Key, Key + Damper] ThismenuwillappearonlyiftheTypeissetto
Multisample.
Normally,youplaynotessimplybypressingkeyson
thekeyboard.Inspecialcases,however,youcanset TherearethreemaintypesofBanks:ROM,RAM,and
thisparametersothatyoumustfirstbeholdingdown EXs.Foreachtype,youcanalsochoosebetween
thedamperpedal,andthenpressakey,inorderto lookingatmonoandstereoMultisamples.Notethat
playanote.Forinstance,thiscanbeusefulwhen stereoMultisampleswillrequiretwiceasmanyvoices
modelingthebehaviorofapianosoundboard. asmonoMultisamples.
Keyisthenormalmode. ROMMultisamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds,
andarealwaysavailable.
WhenyouselectKey+Damper,noteswillonlysound
ifthedamperpedalisbeinghelddown.Whenthe RAMMultisamplesincludeAkai,AIFForWAVfiles
damperpedalisreleased,allnoteswillbestopped loadedfromdisk,andsamplescreatedinSampling
eveniftheyarestillbeinghelddown. mode.
EXsMultisamplebanksarePCMexpansionsets
createdespeciallyfortheOASYS.Eachhasitsown
21c: OSC1 Multisample/Wave Sequence uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis
Theparametersinthissectionwillchangedepending EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoexpansionisEXs2.
onthesettingoftheOscillatorModeparameter. OnlythecurrentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearon
thismenu.
InSingleandDoublemodes,eachOscillatorcanplay
uptofourMultisamplesorWaveSequences.InDrum Bank (Wave Sequence) [INT, U-AG]
mode,thereisoneOscillator,anditplaysasingle
ThismenuwillappeariftheTypeissettoWave
DrumKit.
Sequence.
Multisamples, Wave Sequences, and Drum Kits INTWaveSequencesarethebuiltinfactorysounds.
Multisamples,DrumKits,andWaveSequencesallow Youcanoverwritethemifyouwish,butdoingsomay
youtoplaysamplesindifferentways. changethesoundsoftheProgramsandCombisin
BanksINTAE.
Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacross
thekeyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitar UAthroughUGareuserbanks,forstoringsounds
Multisamplemighthavesixsamplesoneforeach thatyoucreateyourself,optionalsoundbanksfrom
string. Korg,orthirdpartysoundlibraries.
WaveSequencesplaybackaseriesofdifferent Multisample/Wave Sequence Select [List]
Multisamplesovertime.TheseMultisamplesmay
ThisparameterletsyouselectaMultisampleorWave
crossfadetocreatesmooth,evolvingtimbres,or
Sequence,dependingontheTypesetting.
changeabruptlytocreaterhythms.
SomeMultisamplesmayhaveanupperlimitto
Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor
theirkeyboardrange,overwhichtheymaynot
playingdrumsamples.
produceanysound.
Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers ToselectaMultisampleorWaveSequence:
Asmentionedabove,unlessyoureinDrummode, 1. PresstheMultisample/WaveSequenceSelect
eachOscillatorhasfourvelocityzones,namedMS1 popupbuttontoopenthemenu.
(High)throughMS4(Low).Eachofthesezonescan
Withinthewindow,ROMMultisamplesareorganized
playeitheraMultisampleoraWaveSequence,andhas
bycategories;WaveSequencesareorganizedbybank;
separatesettingsforLevel,StartOffset,andsoon.
andEXsandRAMMultisamplesappearasa
Eachofthezonescanfadeintothenext,tocreate continuouslist.
smoothervelocitytransitions.Zonescanevenbe
2. ForROMMultisamplesorWaveSequences,use
layeredtogether,twoatatime.
thetabstoselectacategoryorbank.
MS1 (High) 3. SelectaMultisampleorWaveSequencefromthe
list.
Thesearethesettingsforthefirstandhighestvelocity
zone. 4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,or
presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutmakinga
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupwithonlyasingle change.
MultisampleorWaveSequence,justsetupMS1as
desired,andthensettheBottomVelocityto1andthe
XfadeRangeto0.
50
MultisampleROMMonoSelectmenu
Tab
Scroll bar
Multisample ROM/EXs Mono/Stereo Select menu IfBankissettoRAMStereo,onlythestereo

IfBankissettoROMorEXsMono,thelistshowsallof Multisampleswillappear.However,theywillstillbe
themonoMultisamplesintheBank.IftheBank listedasseparateleftandrightMultisamples.Selecting
containsstereomultisamples,youllalsoseetheleft eithertheleftorrightchannelswillselectthestereo
andrightchannelsasseparate,monomultisamples, pair.
withLandRappendedtotheendofthename. Wave Sequence Select menu
IfBankissettoROMorEXsStereo,onlystereo Usethetabstoselectabank,andthenselectaWave
multisampleswillbeshown. Sequence.PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyour
selection,orpresstheCancelbuttontoreverttothe
Multisample RAM Mono, RAM Stereo Select menu
previoussetting.
IfBankissettoRAMMono,thelistshowsallofthe
monoMultisamplesintheBank.IftheBankcontains
stereomultisamples,youllalsoseetheleftandright
channelsasseparate,monomultisamples,withLand
Rappendedtotheendofthename.
WaveSequenceSelectmenu
Tab
Scroll bar
51
Program mode: HD-1
Reverse [Off, On] WhenvelocitiesarewithintheXfadeRange,the

Thisletsyouplaytheselectedmultisamplebackwards, Oscillatorwillusetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasit
withoutlooping.Reverseappliesonlyto wouldnormally.
Multisamples;whentheTypeissetWaveSequence, Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
thisisgrayedout.
Note:IftheindividualsampleswithinaMultisample
arealreadysettoReverse,theywillstillplayin Select
reverse,regardlessofthissetting.
On(checked):TheMultisamplewillplaybackin Xfade Range = 20 84
reverse. Curve = Linear
Off(unchecked):TheMultisamplewillplayback Bottom Velocity = 64

normally.
Level [0127]
Thissetsthebasicvolumelevelofthemultisample.
TheAmpsectioncanmodifythisbasiclevel
extensivelywithenvelopes,LFOs,keyboardtracking,
andothermodulation;formoreinformation,see Curve [Linear, Power, Layer]
ProgramP4:Amp/EQ,onpage 74.
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linear
Dependingonthemultisample,highLevelsettings andPower(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetune
maycausedistortionwhenplayingmanynotesata thewaythatthetwoMultisamplesmixtogether;one
time.Ifthisoccurs,lowertheLevel. ortheothermaybemoreappropriateforagivenpair
WithRAMMultisamples,eachSamplealsohasa ofMultisamples.Layer,truetoitsname,letsyoulayer
+12dBoption.Ifthisisturnedon,theSamplewill thetwoMultisamplestogetherwithoutany
playbackapproximately12dBlouder.Youcan crossfading.
configurethisparameterforeachSampleinSampling CrossfadeCurves
mode.
Start Offset [Off, 1st8th] Linear

MS2
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthe
beginning,ROMandEXsMultisamplescanhaveupto MS1
8differentpreprogrammedalternatestartingpoints.
Volume
Similarly,RAMMultisamplescanplayeitherfromthe Xfade
beginningofthewaveform,orfromtheloopstart
Velocity
point.
StartOffsetappliesonlytoMultisamples;whenthe
TypeissetWaveSequence,thisisgrayedout.
Power
Start Offsets: ROM and EXs Multisamples MS2
WithROMandEXsMultisamples,theStartOffset
MS1
specifieswhethertousethenormalstartpoint(Off),or
touseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st8th). Volume
SomeROMandEXsMultisamplesmayhavefewer Xfade
than8preprogrammedpoints,inwhichcaseonlythe Velocity
availablepointscanbeselected.
Start Offsets: RAM Multisamples

WithRAMMultisamples,onlyOffand1stare Layer
MS2
available.Offusesthenormalstartpoint,and1stuses
theloopstartinstead.2ndthrough8thwillbegrayed MS1
out.
Volume
Bottom Velocity [1127] Xfade
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheMultisample Velocity
orWaveSequencewillsound.MS1sBottomVelocity
canbeequalto,butnotlowerthan,thanthatofMS2. Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%
oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.
Xfade Range [Off, 1127] Sometimes,thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;if
ThissetstherangeofvelocitiesoverwhichMS1will so,tryusingPowerinstead.
fadeintoMS2,goingupfromtheBottomVelocity.
Forinstance,iftheBottomVelocityissetto64,andthe
XfadeRangeissetto20,MS2willstarttofadeinat
velocitiesof84andbelow.
52
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwo Thesevelocityzonestakeprecedenceoverthevelocity
sampleswilleachbeataround70%oftheirfull settingsfortheindividualMS14.
volumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,this
maycreateabumpinthevolumelevel,inwhichcase Top [001127]
youmighttryselectingLinearinstead. ThissetsthehighestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator
LayermeansthatthetwoMultisampleswillbelayered willsound.
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe Note:TheTopvelocitymustbegreaterthantheBottom
crossfade. velocity.
MS2 (Mid Hi), MS3 (Mid Lo), and MS4 Bottom [001127]
(Low) ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator
willsound.
Thesearethesettingsforthesecond,third,andfourth
velocityzones.TheparametersforMS2andMS3are Entering velocity values from the keyboard
exactlythesameasthoseforMS1(High),above. Youcanentervelocityvaluesdirectlybyplayingthem
TheparametersforMS4arealsosimilartothosefor onthekeyboard.Todoso:
MS1,exceptthatMS4hasnosettingsforBottom 1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
Velocity(whichisalwaysfixedat1),XfadeRange,or
Curve. 2. HolddowntheENTERkey.
3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe
keyboardatthedesiredvelocity.
21d: OSC 1 Velocity Zone
Inadditiontosettingthevelocityzonesforeachofthe
fourMultisamplesinasingleOscillator,youcanalso
sethighandlowvelocitiesforeachofthetwo
Oscillatorsasawhole.
21PMC
21e
21f
TheseparametersappearwhentheOscillatorModeis Transpose [12+12]

settoDrumKit. Thisadjuststhelocationoftheinstrumentsinthe
selecteddrumkit.Unlessyouneedtochangethis,
21e: Drum Kit Frequency leaveitat0.
Octave [2[32], 1[16], +0[8], +1[4]] Tune [1200+1200]

Thisadjuststhepitchinoctaveunits.Whenusinga Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentunits.
drumkit,settheOctaveto8. ThepitchofeachdrumkitcanbeadjustedinGlobal
Wheneditingadrumprogram,youmustsetthis P5:Drumkit.
parameterto8.Withothersettings,thesoundsof
thedrumkitwillbeassignedtothewrongnotesof
thekeyboard.
53
Program mode: HD-1
Delay [0ms5000ms, KeyOff]

Usethistocreateadelaybetweenthetimethatyou
pressakey,andthetimethatthenoteactuallysounds. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthe
soundbyaparticularamountoftime,thesoundwill
commandsonpage 142.
playassoonasyoureleasethekey.
Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalso
Programonpage 142.
besttosettheoscillatorsAmpEGSustainLevelto0.
21f: Drum Kit
Drum Kit [I-0039, U-A0015, U-B0015, CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
U-C0015, U-D0015, U-E0015, 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
U-F0015, U-G0015, GM08] SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
Thisselectsadrumkit. 4:SampleParameters.Formoreinformation,see
For000(A/B)143(User),youcanuseGlobalP5:Drum SampleParametersonpage 149.
Kittoedittheinstrumentassignments.
22: OSC1 Pitch

22PMC
22a
22b
22d
22c
ThispagecontainsallofthesettingsforOscillator1s
pitchmodulation.Forexample,youcan: 22a: Pitch
SetuppitchbendfrombothJoystickX(with Pitch Slope [1.0+2.0]
separatesettingsforbendingupandbending
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.0.
down)andtheribboncontroller.
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplay
UsePitchSlopetocontrolhowthepitchchanges
higheronthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescause
whenyouplayupanddownthekeyboard.
thepitchtofallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
SetupPortamento.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthe
AssignAMSmodulationforpitch. keyboardwontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasif
Setupinitialamountsofpitchmodulationfromthe yourealwaysplayingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecial
PitchEGandLFO1/2,aswellasAMSmodulation effectssounds,forinstance.
ofLFOandEGamounts.
54
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 22: OSC1 Pitch
PitchSlope,pitch,andnote
22b: Pitch EG
+2
Pitch Intensity [12.00+12.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGon
+1 Oscillators1sfrequency,inhalfsteps,beforeanyAMS
modulation.
2oct
1oct
0
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to
1oct 99.WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,
positivevaluesfromtheEGraisethepitch,and
1 negativevalueslowerthepitch.
WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,the
C4 C5 Note on keyboard
effectoftheEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmean
lowerpitches,andnegativeEGvaluesmeanhigher
Ribbon [12+12] pitches.
Youcanusetheribboncontrollerforpitchbend.This AMS (Pitch EG) [List of AMS Sources]
parametersetstherangeoftheribbonspitchbend,in
semitones. ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountofthePitchEGappliedtothepitch.
Positive(+)valuesmakethepitchrisewhenyoupress
theribboncontrollertotherightofcenter,and ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
negative()valueswillcausethepitchtofall. Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Forexample,withasettingof+12,pressingthefar Intensity [12.00+12.00]

rightedgeoftheribboncontrollerwillraisethepitch ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEG
oneoctave,andpressingthefarleftedgewilllowerthe AMSmodulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitial
pitchbyoneoctave. IntensityareaddedtogethertodeterminethePitch
Withasettingof12,theeffectisreversed;pressingon EGsfinaleffect.
therightedgewilllowerthepitch,andpressingonthe Withpositive(+)values,greatermodulationwill
leftwillraisethepitch. increasetheeffectofthePitchEG,asshowninexample
Whenyouliftoffoftheribbon,thepitchwillsnapback Bbelow.
tothecenter(unlessyoureusingtheSW1/2Ribbon Withnegative()values,greatermodulationwill
Lockfeature).So,bytappingontherightedgeofthe introducetheoppositeeffectofthePitchEGlike
ribbonandthenreleasingquickly,youcancreate invertingthepolarityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethis
guitarhammeroneffects. inseveraldifferentways:
JS (+X) [60+12] Youcansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththe
Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in Intensityparameter,andthenreducethisamount
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheright.For withAMS.Inthiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGis
normalpitchbend,setthistoapositivevalue. simplydiminished,andnotactuallyinverted,as
showninexampleC.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto+12andmovethe
joystickallthewaytotheright,thepitchwillriseone YoucanalsosettheAMSIntensityamounttobe
octaveabovetheoriginalpitch. greaterthantheinitialIntensity.Inthiscase,theEG
willhaveapositiveeffectwithlowmodulation
JS (X) [60+12] amounts,andaninvertedeffectathigher
Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in modulationamountsasshowninexampleD.
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheleft.For PitchEGAMS
normalpitchbend,setthistoanegativevalue.
A. Original EG B. Intensity = +12.00
Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethe
joystickallthewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfive
octavesbelowtheoriginalpitch.Youcanusethisto Change
to Pitch
createguitarstyledownwardswoops.
AMS (Pitch) [List of AMS Sources]

C. Intensity = 3.00 D. Intensity = 12.00
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthepitch.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Change
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
to Pitch
Intensity [12.00+12.00]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitch
modulation,insemitones.
22c: LFO1/2
ForexampleifyousetAMStoAfterTouchandthen
pressdownonthekeyboard,thepitchwillriseifthis LFO1andLFO2canbothmodulatethepitch.Youcan
parameterissettoapositive(+)value,orfallifthis controlthestrengthofeachLFOsmodulationinthree
parameterissettoanegative()value. differentways:
55
Program mode: HD-1
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingthe Enable [Off, On]

LFO1/2Intensityparameters. On(checked):TurnsonPortamento,sothatpitch
UseJS+YtoscaletheamountoftheLFO. glidessmoothlybetweennotes.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamounttheLFO. Off(unchecked):TurnsoffPortamento.Thisisthe
Youcanuseeachofthesemethodsforeachofthetwo defaultstate.
LFOs.Theresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethe Fingered [Off, On]
totalLFOeffect.
ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamento
LFO1 throughyourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playing
legatowillturnonPortamento,andplayingdetached
LFO1 Intensity [12.00+12.00] willturnitoffagain.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch, ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnable
insemitones,beforeanyJS+YorAMSmodulation. isturnedon.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO. On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento.
JS+Y Intensity (LFO1 JS+Y Int.) [12.00+12.00] Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.

Movingthejoystickupfromthecenterdetent Mode [Constant Rate, Constant Time]
position,awayfromyourself,producestheJS+Y ConstantRatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake
controller.Youcanusethistoscaletheamountofthe thesameamountoftimetoglideagivendistancein
LFOappliedtothepitch.Thisparametersetsthe pitchforinstance,onesecondperoctave.Putanother
maximumamountofLFOmodulationaddedbyJS+Y, way,glidingseveraloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthan
insemitones. glidingahalfstep.
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe ConstantTimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake
+YdirectionwillcausetheOSC1LFO1toproduce thesameamountoftimetoglidefromonenoteto
deeperpitchmodulation. another,regardlessofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisis
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO. especiallyusefulwhenplayingchords,sinceitensures
Youcanalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountofthe thateachnoteinthechordwillenditsglideatthe
LFO,assetbyLFO1Intensity,above.Forexample: sametime.
1. SetLFO1Intensityto+7.00. Time [000127]
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthe Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean
pitch,bendingitbyaperfect5th. longertimes,forslowerchangesinpitch.
2. SetJS+YIntensityto7.00. ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnable
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickup,theeffectoftheLFO isturnedon.
willfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthe
topofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelled Assigning SW1 or SW2 to Portamento On/Off
out. Youcanusethetwoassignableswitches,SW1and
SW2,toturnportamentoonandoff.
AMS (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
Todoso:
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountoftheLFOappliedtopitch. 1. GototheProgramP1SetUpControllerspage.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation 2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,seteitherSW1orSW2
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. toPortamentoSW(CC#65).
Now,theselectedswitchwillenableanddisable
Intensity [12.00+12.00] Portamento.ItwillalsosendtheMIDIPortamento
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFOAMS controller,CC#65.
modulationforpitch. EvenifyoudontassignSW1/2toPortamento,you
Forexample,ifAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive canstilluseMIDIController#65toturnPortamento
settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheamount onandoff.
ofpitchmodulationfromLFO1.
LFO2 t 22: Page Menu Commands

TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothosefor ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
LFO1.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
underLFO1,above. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
22d: Portamento
Programonpage 142.
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetween 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
notes,insteadofchangingabruptly. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
56
25: OSC2 Basic

ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsforOscillator2.It TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
isavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder21:OSC1Basic,onpage 49.
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
26: OSC2 Pitch

ThispagecontrolsthepitchsettingsforOscillator2.It TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
isavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder22:OSC1Pitch,onpage 54.
29: Pitch EG
29PMC
29a
29b
29c
29d
ThePitchEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate ThesinglePitchEGissharedbybothOscillator1
complex,timevaryingchangestothepitchof andOscillator2.
Oscillators1and2.Theparametersonthispage TheSustainlevelisalways0.
controltheshapeoftheEG.Forinstance,youcan:
TheLevelmodulationhastwoAMSsourcesinstead
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsand ofone,andtheTimemodulationhasoneAMS
timesofeachsegment. sourceinsteadofthree.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,for
subtlecontroloverthesoundoftheEG. Pitch EG is also an AMS source
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes. YoucanusethePitchEGasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justlikethekeyboard
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestart
trackingandLFOs.SimplyselectthePitchEGinthe
theEG.
AMSlistforthedesiredparameter.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthepitch,
usethePitchEGparametersonthePitchModpage,as
describedunder22b:PitchEG,onpage 55.
Differences from the other EGs

ThePitchEGisdifferentfromtheFilterandAmpEGs
inseveralways:
57
Program mode: HD-1
Attack [99+99]
29a: EG Reset
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
AMS (EG Reset AMS) [List of AMS Sources]
Break [99+99]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestart
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendof
point.Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFO
theDecaytime.
totriggertheEGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisin
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe Release [99+99]
EGtostart.
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. Time
Threshold [99+99] Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset. EG Value Actual Time
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjustthe
00 0.667 ms
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe
reset,effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstother 10 10 ms
rhythmiceffects. 20 44 ms
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen 30 104 ms
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.When
thethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen 40 224 ms
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards. 50 464 ms
Note:withsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFO 60 944 ms
speeds,theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextreme
70 1.8 seconds
valuesof+99or99.Inthiscase,settingtheThreshold
tothesevaluesmaycauseinconsistentbehavior,or 80 3.8 seconds
maymeanthattheEGdoesntresetatall.Ifthis
90 10.9 seconds
happens,reducetheThresholduntiltheEGtriggers
consistently. 99 87.3 seconds
Attack [0099]
29b: Envelope
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStart
PitchEG leveltotheAttacklevel.
Attack Break Sustain Level

Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas
Level Level (Always 0) fastasthemostpunchyofclassicanalogsynths.
Start Release
Level Level
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansetthe
Startlevelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstart
Change to instantaneouslyatitsmaximumvalue.
Pitch
Time
Attack Decay Slope Release

Decay [0099]
Time Time Time Time
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevel
Note-on or reset Note-off totheBreaklevel.
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymoving Slope [0099]

fromoneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,and ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe
thenmovingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodof BreakleveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitchEG
time,andsoon. isalways0).OnceitreachestheSustain,theEGwill
Theparametersbelowletyousetfourlevels,the staythereuntilnoteoff,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
amountoftimeittakestogofromeachofthelevelsto Release [0099]
thenext,andtheshape(fromlineartocurved)ofeach
transition. ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe
SustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
Level
Curve
Eachofthefourlevelscanbeeitherpositiveor
negative. Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraight
Positivelevelswillmakethepitch(orotherAMS lines.Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelyto
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue; bemadeoutofcurves.
negativelevelswillmakeitgodown.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchange
Notethat,unliketheFilterandAmpEGs,thePitch quicklyatfirst,andthenslowdownasitapproaches
EGsSustainLevelisalways0. thenextpoint.Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,
linearsegments.
Start [99+99]
ThissetstheinitialEGlevel,atnoteon.
58
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 29: Pitch EG
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurved PitchEGLevelModulation
shapesnaturally.TheOASYSgoesastepfurtherthan
vintagesynths,however,andletsyoucontrolthe
amountofcurvatureseparatelyforeachofthefour
envelopesegments.
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremain
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto Original Shape Positive AMS on Start,
soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat Attack, and Break
thebeginning.
PitchEGCurve
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log) Negative AMS on Start, Positive AMS on Start and Break,
Attack, and Break Negative AMS on Attack
Note:OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevel
reachedattheendofthesegment.
Curve = 0 (Linear) Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)

Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecay
time,youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecay
timeortheBreaklevel.
Different curve settings for up and down ThisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,Attack
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare level,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatare
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegments alreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenrestartedvia
whichgodown. EGReset.
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGs
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,
Levelparameters.
suchasDecayandRelease.
Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthe
transitionfromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel. Start [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Decay [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] modulationfortheStartlevel.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthe Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand
transitionfromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel. setStartto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay
Slope [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] harder.IfyouinsteadsetStartto99,theStartlevel
willdecreaseasyouplayharder.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthe
transitionfromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel Attack [99+99]
(whichforthePitchEGisalways0). ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Release [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] modulationfortheAttacklevel.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe Break [99+99]

transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
29c: Level Modulation AMS2
ThesesettingsletyouusetwodifferentAMSsourcesto
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourceforcontrollingthe
controltheLevelparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthe
EGsLevelparameters.TheStart,Attack,Decay,and
twoAMSsources,theStart,Attack,Decay,andBreak
Breaklevelssharethissource,buteachhasitsown
levelseachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
modulationintensity.TheparametersofAMS2are
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels, identicaltothoseofAMS1,above.
youcancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestothe
EGshape,asshownbelow.
29d: Time Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontrolthe
TimeparametersoftheEG.TheAttack,Decay,Slope,
andReleasetimessharethisAMSsource,buteachhas
itsownmodulationintensity.
59
Program mode: HD-1
PitchEGTimeModulation
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value
Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off
Attack= + Attack= + Attack=

Decay= + Decay= + Decay=
Slope= + Slope= + Slope=
Softly played note. Strongly played note. Strongly played note.

Original Shape. Times are longer. Times are shorter.
Reaches Sustain Reaches Sustain
more slowly. more quickly.
AMS [List of AMS Sources]

ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbe
usefulhere,forinstance.
Attack [99+99]
modulationfortheAttacktime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand
setAttackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlonger
athighervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvaluefor
instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will
maketheAttacktimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
settingof8willcuttheAttacktimealmostinhalf.
Decay [99+99]
modulationfortheDecaytime.
Slope [99+99]
modulationfortheSlopetime.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
60
Program P3: Filter 31: Filter1
Program P3: Filter

Filteringcanmakesubtleordramaticchangestothe Setupfiltermodulation,includingkeyboard
oscillatorstimbre.Eachoscillatorhastwomultimode tracking,thefilterenvelope,LFOmodulation,and
resonantfilters,AandB,aswellasadedicatedfilter AMScontrol.
envelopeandkeyboardtrackinggenerator. NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallaspectsofthefilters. onlyOscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesfor
Amongotherthings,youcan: Oscillator2sfilterswillbegrayedout.
Makebasicsettingsforeachoscillatorsfilters,
includingrouting,modes,cutoff,resonance,etc.
31: Filter1
31PMC
31a
31b
31c
Thispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsfor Serial.ThisusesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
Oscillator1sFilterAandFilterB.Forexample,you oscillatorfirstgoesthroughFilterA,andthenthe
can: outputofFilterAisprocessedthroughFilterB.
Setupthefilterstoproduceasingle12dB/octfilter, Parallel.ThisalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
dual12dB/octfiltersineitherserialorparallel oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly,andtheoutputsof
routing,orasingle24dB/octfilter. thetwofiltersarethensummedtogether.
SeteachofthetwofilterstoLowPass,HighPass, 24dB/oct.Thismergesbothfilterstocreateasingle4
BandPass,orBandRejectmodes. pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPassandBand
Setthecutoff,resonance,andinputandoutput Reject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoptionproducesa
levelsofeachfilter,includingmodulationof sharperrolloffbeyondthecutofffrequency,aswellas
resonanceandoutputlevel. aslightlymoredelicateresonance.Manyclassicanalog
synthsusedthisgeneraltypeoffilter.
When24dB/octisselected,onlythecontrolsforFilter
31a: Filter Routing Aareactive;thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Filter Routing [Single, Serial, Parallel, 24dB/oct]
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.
Thisparametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthe
filtersareused,andifbothareused,itcontrolshow
theyareconnectedtoeachother.
Single.ThisusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole,
12dB/octavefilter(6dBforBandPassandBandReject).
Whenthisoptionisselected,thecontrolsforFilterB
willbegrayedout.
61
Program mode: HD-1
SerialandParallelRouting Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand
Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph
sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate
buzzyornasaltimbres.
Oscillator Filter A (Low Pass) Filter B (High Pass)
BandReject.Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotchfilter
cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe
cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan
LFOtocreatephaserlikeeffects.
FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency
Low Pass
Filter A (Low Pass)
Oscillator
Filter B (High Pass)
High Pass
12db/oct/24db/oct
Band Pass
Low Pass:
12dB/oct
Band Reject
Low Pass:
24dB/oct
Cutoff Frequency
Bypass [Off, On]

ThisletsyoubypassFilterAcompletely.
31b: Filter A
IfBypassisOff,FilterAfunctionsnormally.
Filter Type [Low Pass, High Pass, WhenBypassisOn,FilterAhasnoeffectontheinput
Band Pass, Band Reject] signal.
Thefilterwillproduceverydifferentresults
Frequency [0099]
dependingontheselectedfiltertype.Theselections
willchangeslightlyaccordingtotheselectedFilter ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,in
Routing,toshowthecorrectcutoffslopeindBper incrementsof1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectof
octave. thecutofffrequencywillchangedependingonthe
selectedFilterType,asdescribedabove.
LowPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich
arehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe Input Trim [0099]
mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright
Thisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtothefilter.If
timbressounddarker.
younoticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywith
HighPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich highResonancesettings,youcanturntheleveldown
arelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto here,orattheOutputLevel.
maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.
Note:thefilterwillnotclipinternally,sothereisno
BandPass.Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both differencebetweenadjustingtheInputTrimandthe
highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff OutputLevel.Eitherofthesecontrolswillallowyouto
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow minimizeclippinglaterinthesignalchain,suchas
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically mayoccurintheDrivesectionandinsomeeffects.
dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators
multisample.
62
Program P3: Filter 31: Filter1
Resonance
Low resonance value High resonance value
Resonance [0099]
31c: Filter B
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe
cutofffrequency. FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissetto
SerialorParallel.Otherwise,theparametersinthis
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and
sectionwillbegrayedout.
frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish
smoothly. TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothosefor
FilterA.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbre
underFilterA,above.
ofthefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormore
extreme.
Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbeheardasa t 31: Page Menu Commands
separate,whistlingpitch. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,see numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
KeyFollow,onpage 66. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
AMS (Resonance) [List of AMS Sources]
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthe Programonpage 142.
Resonanceamount.ForalistofAMSsources,see
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
page 1021. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Intensity [99+99] CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheResonance 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
modulation. SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
Forexample,ifVelocityhasbeenselected,changesin
keyboardvelocitywillaffecttheresonance.With
positive(+)values,theresonancewillincreaseasyou
playmorestrongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlythe
resonancewillapproachthelevelspecifiedbythe
Resonancesetting.Withnegative()values,the
resonancewilldecreaseasyouplaymorestrongly,and
asyouplaymoresoftlytheresonancewillapproach
thelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.
Theresonancelevelisdeterminedbyaddingthe
ResonanceandIntensityvalues.
Output Level [0099]

ThiscontrolstheoutputlevelofFilterA.Youcanuse
thistobalancethevolumesofFiltersAandBwhenthe
RoutingissettoParallel,ortoturndownthevolume
toavoidclippinglaterinthesignalchain.
AMS (Output Level) [List of AMS Sources]

Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheoutput
levelofFilterA.ForalistofAMSsources,see
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
page 1021.
Intensity [99+99]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheoutput
levelmodulation.
63
Program mode: HD-1
32: Filter1 Modulation

32PMC
32a
32b
32c
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sfilter
modulation.Amongotherthings,youcan: 32a: Keyboard Track
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,and Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay
controlhowthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff. higherpitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingre
createsthiseffectbyincreasingthecutofffrequencyof
ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfilter
alowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
cutoff.
Usually,someamountofkeytrackingisnecessaryin
AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff. ordertomakethetimbreconsistentacrosstheentire
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissetto range.
SerialorParallel.Otherwise,theparametersforFilter
Bwillbegrayedout.
Filter Keyboard Tracking
At the Center Key, key tracking does not affect the filter
Ramp values
+99
+99
+50
00
Ramp values
50
Change to +99 Ramp = +99
0 99
Filter Cutoff
Ramp = 50
99
99
Low Break: C2 Center: F3 High Break: F#5
64
Program P3: Filter 32: Filter1 Modulation
TheOASYSkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuchmore Entering notes from the keyboard

complex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof
changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard. Youcanenternotenumbersdirectlybyplayingthem
Forinstance,youcan: onthekeyboard.Todoso:
Makethefiltercutoffincreaseveryquicklyoverthe 1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
middleofthekeyboard,andthenopenmore 2. HolddowntheENTERkey.
slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves. 3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe
Makethecutoffincreaseasyouplayloweronthe keyboard.
keyboard. KeyboardTrackShapeandIntensity
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike
effects. Intensity = +99 (Original Shape)
How it works: Keys and Ramps

Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,
orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The
bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof Intensity = +50 (Less Effect)
theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother
threekeysnamedLowBreak,Center,andHigh
Breaktobeanywhereinbetween.
ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchange
betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow Intensity = 0 (No Effect)
CenterRampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesame
betweentheLowBreakkeyandtheCenterkey.
Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo
foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe Intensity = 99 (Inverted)
Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas
noeffect.Thetwofoldingdoorsswingoutfromthis
centerpointtocreatechangesinthehigherandlower
rangesofthekeyboard.
Intensity to A [99+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwill Low Break Key Center Key High Break Key
affectFilterAscutofffrequency.Theoveralleffectof
theKeyboardTrackisacombinationofthisIntensity
valueandtheoverallKeyboardTrackshape.
Ramp
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking
Withpositivevalues(+),theeffectwillbeinthe
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenter
directionspecifiedbykeyboardtracking;iftheramp
Key;negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
goesup,thefiltercutoffwillincrease.
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegative
Withnegativevalues(),theeffectwillbeinthe
rampsettingswillchangedependingonwhetherthe
oppositedirection;iftherampgoesup,thefiltercutoff
rampistotheleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
willdecrease.
BottomLowandLowCenter:negativerampsmake
Intensity to B [99+99] thekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplay
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwill loweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
affectFilterBscutofffrequency. outputgohigher.
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe
Key keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigher
Low Break [C1G9] onthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutput
goup.
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwolower
rampsthehingeofthelowerdoor. Theeffectonthefiltercutoffisacombinationofthe
rampvalues,assetbelow,andtheIntensitytoAandB
Center [C1G9] parameters.WhenIntensityissetto+99,arampof50
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtrackingthemain changesthefilterfrequencyby1octaveforevery
hinge.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrackinghasno octaveofthekeyboard,andarampof+99changesthe
effectonthefiltercutoff,oronanyAMSdestinations. frequencyby2octavesforeveryoctaveofthe
keyboard.
High Break [C1G9]
Bottom-Low [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher
rampsthehingeoftheupperdoor. ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI
noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey
track,usenegativevalues.
65
Program mode: HD-1
Low-Center [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]

32b: Filter EG
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues. TheFilter1EGmodulatestheFilterAandBcutoff
frequenciesovertime.Youcancontrolhowstrongly
Center-High [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] theEGwillaffectthefiltersinthreedifferentways:
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak SetaninitialamountofEGmodulation,usingthe
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues. IntensitytoAandBparameters.
High-Top [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] UsevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEGapplied
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe tothefilter.
topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheEG
positivevalues. appliedtothefilter.
Youcanuseallthreeoftheseatonce,andtheresults
+Inf and Inf ramps areaddedtogethertoproducethetotalEGeffect.
+InfandInfarespecialsettingswhichcreateabrupt
TosetuptheEGitself,includingattackandrelease
changesforsplitlikeeffects.Whenarampissetto+Inf
times,levels,andsoon,see34:Filter1EG,on
orInf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextreme
page 69.
highestorlowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
+InfandInfRamps Velocity to A [99+99]
Thisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountofthe
FilterEGappliedtoFilterA.
Ramp = +Inf VelocitycontrolofFilterEG
In all examples below, Intensity to A = +50
A. Original EG B. Velocity to A = +50
Ramp = 50 Original
Filter Cutoff
Ramp = Inf
C. Velocity to A = 25 D. Velocity to A = 99
Low Break Center High Break Original

Filter Cutoff
Note:ifyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,
theHighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly, Withpositive(+)values,playingmorestronglywill
ifyousettheLowCenterrampto+InforInf,the increasetheeffectoftheFilterEG,asshownin
BottomLowrampwillbegrayedout. exampleBabove.
Key Follow Withnegative()values,playingmorestronglywill
introducetheoppositeeffectoftheFilterEGlike
TocreatetheclassicKeyFolloweffect,inwhichthe
invertingthepolarityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethis
filterfrequencytracksthepitchofthekeyboard:
inseveraldifferentways:
1. SettheFilterFrequencyto30.
Youcansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththe
2. SettheKeyboardTrackIntensityto+99. IntensitytoA/Bparameters,andthenreducethis
3. SettheBottomLowandLowCenterrampsto50. amountwithvelocity.Inthiscase,thefinaleffectof
4. SettheCenterHighandHighToprampsto+50. theEGissimplydiminished,andnotactually
inverted,asshowninexampleCabove.
5. SettheCenterKeytoC4.
YoucanalsosettheVelocitytoA/Bamountssothat
ThesettingsfortheLowBreakandHighBreakkeys
theyaregreaterthantheinitialamountsof
dontmatterinthiscase.
IntensitytoA/B.Inthiscase,theEGwillhavea
Filter Keyboard Track is also an AMS positiveeffectatlowvelocities,andaninverted
effectathighvelocitiesasshowninexampleD.
source
YoucanusethekeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
Velocity to B [99+99]
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand Thisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountofthe
LFOs.SimplyselectFilterKeytrackintheAMSlistfor FilterEGappliedtoFilterB.Formoreinformation,see
thedesiredparameter. VelocitytoA,above.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilter
Ascutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMS
modulation.
66
Program P3: Filter 32: Filter1 Modulation
TheFilterEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to Filter B
99.Positivevaluesincreasethecutofffrequency,and
negativevaluesdecreasethecutofffrequency.For TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothosefor
instance,seethegraphicVelocitytoA,above.The FilterA.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions
EGshapeinexampleArisesupatfirst,andthenfalls underFilterA,above.
below0towardstheend.
WhenIntensitytoAissettoapositive(+)value,EGs t 32: Page Menu Commands
effectwillmatchitsshape.WhentheEGrisesabove0,
thecutofffrequencywillincrease.
Withnegative()values,theeffectwillbeinthe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
oppositedirection;whentheEGrisesabove0,thefilter commandsonpage 142.
cutoffwilldecrease.
Intensity to B [99+99] Programonpage 142.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilter 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Bscutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMS ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
modulation.Formoreinformation,seeIntensityto 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
A,above. CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
AMS (Filter EG) [List of AMS Sources] 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountoftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersAandB.The
twofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,withseparate
intensitysettings.Otherwise,theAMSmodulationwill
workinthesamewayastheVelocitytoAparameter,
describedabove.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterA.
Intensity to B [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterB.
32c: Filter A/B Modulation

ThissectionletsyouassignanytwoAMSsourcesto
controlFilterA,andanothertwoAMSsourcesto
controlFilterB.Thismodulationisaddedtothebasic
FilterAandBcutofffrequencies,assetontheFilter1
page.
Filter A
AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]
Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrolling
FilterAscutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,
seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
page 1021.
Intensity (AMS1) [99+99]

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS1.

Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourcefor
controllingFilterAscutofffrequency.ForalistofAMS
sources,seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)List
onpage 1021.
Intensity (AMS2) [99+99]

67
Program mode: HD-1
33: Filter1 LFO Modulation

33PMC
33a
33b
LFO1,LFO2,andtheCommonLFOcanallmodulate Intensity to B (LFO1) [99+99]

FilterAandBscutofffrequencies.Youcancontrolthe ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterBs
strengthofeachLFOsmodulationinthreedifferent cutofffrequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
ways,independentlyforeachfilter:
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingthe JSY Intensity to A (LFO1) [99+99]
IntensitytoAandBparameters. Movingthejoystickdownfromthecenterdetent
UseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFO. position,towardsyourself,producestheJSY
controller.Youcanusethistoscaletheamountofthe
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamounttheLFO. LFOappliedtoFilterA.
Youcanuseeachofthesemethodsforeachofthethree Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
LFOs,anddososeparatelyforbothFilterAandFilter Youcanalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountofthe
B.Theresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotal LFO,assetbyIntensitytoA,above.Forexample:
LFOeffect.
1. SetIntensitytoAto+50.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthe
33a: LFO 1/2 filtercutoff.
LFO1 2. SetJSYIntensitytoAto50.
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickdown,theeffectofthe
Intensity to A (LFO1) [99+99] LFOwillfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayat
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterAs thebottomofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletely
cutofffrequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation. cancelledout.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO. JSY Intensity to B (LFO1) [99+99]
Youcanproduceinterestingeffectsbyusingthesame
ThisletsyouuseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFO
LFOtomodulatetwodifferentparameters(suchas
appliedtoFilterB.
FilterAandFilterB),butwithonesettoapositive
intensity,andtheothersettoanegativeintensity. AMS (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
LFOmodulationofFilterCutoff ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountoftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwo
filtersshareasingleAMSsource,butwithseparate
intensitysettings.
Low setting High setting
68
Program P3: Filter 34: Filter1 EG
Intensity to A [99+99] NotethatwhileLFO1andLFO2areseparateforeach

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS voice,theCommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesinthe
modulationforFilterA. Program.Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallofthe
voicestohaveanidenticalLFOeffect.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive
settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheamount
ofLFO1appliedtoFilterA. t 33: Page Menu Commands
Intensity to B [99+99] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
modulationforFilterB.
commandsonpage 142.
LFO 2 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothosefor
LFO1.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
underLFO1,above. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
33b: Common LFO
TheparametersfortheCommonLFOareidenticalto SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
thoseforLFO1.Formoreinformation,seethe
descriptionsunderLFO1,above.
34: Filter1 EG
34PMC
34a
34b
34c
34d
TheFilterEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthefilters,
complex,timevaryingchangestothecutoff usetheFilterEGparametersontheFilterModpage,as
frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Theparametersonthis describedunder32b:FilterEG,onpage 66.
pagecontroltheshapeoftheEG.Amongotherthings,
youcan: Filter EG is also an AMS source
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsand YoucanusetheFilterEGasanAMSsourceto
timesofeachsegment. modulateotherparameters,justlikethekeyboard
trackingandLFOs.SimplyselecttheFilterEGinthe
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,for
AMSlistforthedesiredparameter.
subtlecontroloverthesoundoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestart
theEG.
69
Program mode: HD-1
Attack [99+99]
34a: EG Reset
AMS (EG Reset) [List of AMS Sources]
Break [99+99]
theDecaytime.
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe Sustain [99+99]
EGtostart.
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntil
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. noteoff,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Threshold [99+99] Release [99+99]
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset. ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe Time
reset,effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstother
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
rhythmiceffects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen EG Value Actual Time
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.When 00 0.667 ms
thethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen
10 10 ms
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards.
20 44 ms
Note:withsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFO
speeds,theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextreme 30 104 ms
valuesof+99or99.Inthiscase,settingtheThreshold 40 224 ms
tothesevaluesmaycauseinconsistentbehavior,or
maymeanthattheEGdoesntresetatall.Ifthis 50 464 ms
happens,reducetheThresholduntiltheEGtriggers 60 944 ms
consistently.
70 1.8 seconds
80 3.8 seconds
34b: Envelope
90 10.9 seconds
FilterEG
99 87.3 seconds
Attack Break Sustain
Level
Level Level
Attack [0099]
Start Release
Level Level ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStart
leveltotheAttacklevel.
Change to
filter cutoff Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas
Time
fastasthemostpunchyofclassicanalogsynths.
Time Time Time Time
instantaneouslyatitsmaximumvalue.
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymoving Decay [0099]
fromoneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,and
thenmovingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodof ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevel
time,andsoon. totheBreaklevel.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfivelevels,the Slope [0099]

amountoftimeittakestogofromeachofthelevelsto ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe
thenext,andtheshape(fromlineartocurved)ofeach BreakleveltotheSustainlevel.Onceitreachesthe
transition. Sustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff
(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
Level
Eachofthefivelevelscanbeeitherpositiveor
Release [0099]
negative. ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe
Positivelevelswillmakethecutofffrequency(orother
AMSdestination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;
Curve
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
Start [99+99] manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraight
ThissetstheinitialEGlevel,atnoteon. lines.Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelyto
bemadeoutofcurves.
70
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchange FilterEGLevelModulation
quicklyatfirst,andthenslowdownasitapproaches
thenextpoint.Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,
linearsegments.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurved
Original Shape Positive AMS on Start,
amountofcurvatureseparatelyforeachofthefour Attack, and Break
envelopesegments.
FilterEGCurve
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
Negative AMS on Start, Positive AMS on Start and Break,
Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulated

OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
Curve = 0 (Linear) Curve = 10 (Exp/Log) reachedattheendofthesegment.
Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecay
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremain time,youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecay
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto timeortheBreaklevel.
soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat
thebeginning. Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveassignedthe
CommonLFOtomodulateBreakLevel.TheLFOmay
Different curve settings for up and down bemovingallthetime,buttheBreakLevelisonly
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare affectedbytheLFOsvalueattheinstantthatthe
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegments Decaysegmentstarts.Afterthat,thelevelisfixed.
whichgodown. Finally,thisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor Attacklevel,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthat
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a arealreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenresetvia
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments, AMS.
Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] SelectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthe parameters.
transitionfromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Decay [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthe Start [99+99]
transitionfromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheStartlevel.
Slope [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
setStartto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay
transitionfromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
harder.IfyouinsteadsetStartto99,theStartlevel
Release [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] willdecreaseasyouplayharder.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe Attack [99+99]
transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
modulationfortheAttacklevel.
34c: Level Modulation
Break [99+99]
ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrol ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
theLevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,and modulationfortheBreaklevel.
BreaklevelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneach
havedifferentmodulationintensities.
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,
youcancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestothe
71
Program mode: HD-1
Decay [99+99]
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsources modulationfortheDecaytime.
tocontroltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachof
thethreeAMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,and Slope [99+99]
Releasetimeseachhavetheirownmodulation ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
intensities. modulationfortheSlopetime.
FilterEGTimeModulation
Release [99+99]
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off modulationfortheReleasetime.
AMS2 and AMS3

TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,
Attack=+, Decay=+, Attack=+, Decay=+, Attack=, Decay=, respectively,forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.
Slope=+, Release=+ Slope=+, Release=+ Slope=, Release=
EachhasitsownintensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,
Softly played note. Stongly played note. Stongly played note.
Original Shape Times are longer. Times are shorter. andRelease.TheparametersofbothAMS2andAMS3
Reaches Sustainmore Reaches Sustainmore areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,above.
slowly. quickly.
AMS1 [List of AMS Sources] t 34: Page Menu Commands

SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbe numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
usefulhere,forinstance. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Attack [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
athighervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities. SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvaluefor 4:SyncBothEGs.Formoreinformation,seeSync
instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will BothEGsonpage 149.
maketheAttacktimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
settingof8willcuttheAttacktimealmostinhalf.
35: Filter2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasicfiltersettings.It TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
isavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder31:Filter1,onpage 61.
36: Filter2 Modulation

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfiltermodulation.Itis TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder32:Filter1Modulation,on
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout. page 64.
37: Filter2 LFO Modulation

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sLFOfiltermodulation. TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
ItisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder33:Filter1LFOModulation,on
38: Filter2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sFilterEG.Itis Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto
72
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
asdescribedunder34:Filter1EG,onpage 69.
73
Program mode: HD-1
Program P4: Amp/EQ

Oscillators1and2haveseparatecontrolsforvolume Setthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
(alsocalledamplitude,orampforshort),pan,and Controlamplevelandmodulation,including
Drive,aswellasdedicatedampenvelopesand keyboardtracking,theampenvelope,LFO
keyboardtrackinggenerators.Additionally,both modulation,andAMScontrol.
OscillatorsshareathreebandEQ.
SetupthethreebandTrackEQ.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolalloftheserelated
parameters.Amongotherthings,youcan: NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,
onlyOscillator1samp,pan,anddriveparametersare
SetuptheDrivercircuit,whichaddssaturationand active;thepagesforOscillator2willbegrayedout.
bassboosttothetimbre.
41: Amp1/Driver1
41PMC
41a
41b
41c
ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsfortheAmp/EQ Drive [0099

section.Here,youcan: Thiscontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthe
SetuptheDrivercircuit. timbre.Lowsettingswillproducemildsaturation,and
Settheinitialvolumelevel. highersettingscreatemoreobviousdistortion.
Controlthepanpositionandpanmodulation. Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwith
theDrive.
Note:evenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,the
41a: Driver Drivercircuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisa
TheDriveraddssaturationandoverdrivetothesound, completelypristinesound,usetheBypasscontrol
foreverythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrastic instead.
distortion.Unlikeanoverdriveeffect,theDriver
AMS (Drive) [List of AMS Sources]
processeseachvoiceindividually,sothetimbrestays
thesameregardlessofhowmanyvoicesarebeing ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
played. Driveamount.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work
togethertocreatetheoverallDrivereffect.Drive Intensity [99+99]
contributesedgeandbite,andLowBoostprovidesthe
bodyaswellasboostingthebass.
modulationforDrive.
Bypass [Off, On]
WhenBypassisOn,theDriveriscompletelyremoved
fromthesignalpath.
74
Program P4: Amp/EQ 41: Amp1/Driver1
Low Boost [0099] YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).A

ThislowfrequencyEQcontrolsthebodycharacterof CC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,
thesound.ThespecificEQfrequenciesaffectedwill 64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythe
changewiththeDrivesetting. Panparameter,and127placesthesoundatthefar
right.
Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso
intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter. Note:youcanselectRandompanonlyfromtheon
screenUI,andnotfromMIDIortheControlsurface.
AMS (Low Boost) [List of AMS Sources]
AMS (Pan) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
LowBoostamount.ForalistofAMSsources,see ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Foralist
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston ofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
page 1021. (AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Intensity [99+99] Intensity [99+99]

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationforLowBoost. modulationforPan.
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSissetto
NoteNumber,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethe
41b: Amp Level soundtomovetowardtherightasyouplayhigher
Amp Level [000127] thanC4,andtowardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4.
ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumelevelofOscillator1, Negative()intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
beforekeyboardtracking,velocity,andother Use DKit Setting [Off, On]
modulation.
ThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorMode
The Control Surface and volume issettoDrums.
YoucancontroltheOscillatorvolumedirectlyfromthe UnlikestandardPrograms,DrumKitscanhavea
ControlSurfacesliders.Thisisaseparateparameter,in differentpansettingforeverynote.Thisparameterlets
additiontoAmpLevel.Todoso: youchoosewhethertousetheDrumKitpansettings,
1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton. ortousetheProgramspansettinginstead.
2. MoveSlider1tosetthevolumeforOscillator1, On(checked):TheProgramwillusetheDrumKits
andSlider2forOscillator2. pernotepansettings;panAMSwillstillapply.Thisis
thedefaultsetting.
MIDI and volume Off(unchecked):TheProgramwillignoretheDrum
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumevia Kitssettings,andusetheProgrampaninstead.
MIDIusingbothVolume(CC#7)andExpression AllkeysofthedrumkitwillusethePan(41c)setting.
(CC#11).Whenusedoneatatime,thetwo
controllersworkinexactlythesameway:aMIDI
valueof127isequaltotheAmpLevelsetting,and t 41: Page Menu Commands
lowervaluesreducethevolume. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously, numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
theonewiththelowervaluedeterminesthe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
maximumvolume,andtheonewiththehigher commandsonpage 142.
valuescalesdownfromthatmaximum.Thisis 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
controlledontheglobalMIDIchannel. Programonpage 142.
41c: Pan ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Pan [Random, L001C064R127]
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.Asettingof
L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,
WhenthisissettoRandom,thepanpositionwillbe
differentforeachnoteon.
YoucanalsosetthePandirectlyfromtheControl
Surfaceknobs.Todoso:
1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton.
2. SettheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoINDIVIDUAL
PAN.
3. MoveKnob1tosetthepanforOscillator1,and
Knob2tosetthepanforOscillator2.
75
Program mode: HD-1
42: Amp1 Modulation

42PMC
42a
42b
42c
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sAmp theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother
levelmodulation.Amongotherthings,youcan: threekeysnamedLowBreak,Center,andHigh
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapestocontrol Breaktobeanywhereinbetween.
theAmplevel. ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchange
AssignAMSmodulationfortheAmplevel. betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow
ControltheeffectoftheLFOsontheAmplevel. betweentheLowBreakkeyandtheCenterkey.
Thetotaleffectsofthemodulationcanincreasethe Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo
volumetoamaximumoftwotimeslouderthanthe foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe
AmpLevelsetting. Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas
42a: Keyboard Track centerpointtocreatechangesinthehigherandlower
Keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythevolumeasyou
playupanddownthekeyboard.Usually,some Key
amountofkeytrackingisnecessaryinordertomake
thevolumeconsistentacrosstheentirerange. Low Break [C1G9]
OASYSskeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwolower
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeover rampsthehingeofthelowerdoor.
uptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,
Center [C1G9]
youcan:
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtrackingthemain
Makethevolumeincreaseveryquicklyoverthe hinge.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrackinghasno
middleofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemore effectonthevolume,oronanyAMSdestinations.
slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves.
Makethevolumeincreaseasyouplayloweronthe High Break [C1G9]
keyboard. Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike rampsthehingeoftheupperdoor.
effects.
Entering notes from the keyboard
How it works: Keys and Ramps Youcanenternotenumbersdirectlybyplayingthem
Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps, onthekeyboard.Todoso:
orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The 1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof 2. HolddowntheENTERkey.
76
Program P4: Amp/EQ 42: Amp1 Modulation
3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe Center-High [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]

keyboard. ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
Ramp
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking High-Top [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenter ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe
Key;negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases. topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegative positivevalues.
rampsettingswillchangedependingonwhetherthe Ramp Change in level
-Inf Silent in one half-step
99 Silent in one whole-step
thekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplay
loweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe 95 Silent in one octave
outputgohigher. 48 Silent in two octaves
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe
25 Silent in four octaves
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigher
onthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutput 00 no change
goup. +25 x2 in four octaves
Differences from other Keyboard Tracks +50 x2 in two octaves
ThereareseveraldifferencesbetweentheAmp +99 x2 in one octave

keyboardtrackingandtheFilterandCommon +Inf x2 in one half-step
keyboardtracking.
Forexample,theresultsoftheRampvaluesare +Inf and Inf ramps
different.AsshowninthegraphicAmpKeyboard
Tracking,below,negativeslopesaremoresteepthan
positiveslopes.
Also,theampdoesnothaveseparatecontrolof highestorlowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
Intensity.Instead,Intensityisalwaysfixedatthe
maximumamount,allowingkeyboardtrackingto Whenarampissetto+Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwill
gotoitshighestvalue(doubletheprogrammed
changethevolumefromcompletesilencetotwiceas
volume)overasinglehalfstep.
loudastheprogrammedlevel.
Similarly,whenarampissettoInf,thekeyboard
Bottom-Low [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] trackingwillgotoitslowestvalue(completesilence)
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI overasinglehalfstep.
noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey Note:ifyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,
track,usenegativevalues. theHighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,
Low-Center [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] ifyousettheLowCenterrampto+InforInf,the
BottomLowrampwillbegrayedout.
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
Amp Keyboard Tracking
Ramp values: +99 +50 +25

Louder x2
Change to
No change
Volume
Silence
Ramp values: 99 97 95 48 25
Low Break: D1 Center: G2 High Break: C4
77
Program mode: HD-1
Amp Keytrack is also an AMS source AMS (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
YoucanusethekeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand amountoftheLFO1appliedtotheAmplevel.
LFOs.SimplyselectAmpKeytrackintheAMSlistfor ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
thedesiredparameter. Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Intensity [99+99]
42b: Amp Modulation ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelbybothvelocityand modulationfortheAmplevel.
anAMSsource. Forexample,ifAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive
ThismodulationscalesthebasicAmplevelandAmp settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheamount
EGlevelparameters.Theresultingvolumeis ofLFO1appliedtotheAmplevel.
determinedbymultiplyingthevolumechangesofthe
ampEGbyothervaluessuchasAMS.Iftheseoriginal LFO2
levelsarelow,themaximumvolumeavailablewith TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothosefor
modulationwillalsobereduced. LFO1.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions
Velocity Intensity [99+99] underLFO1,above.
Withpositive(+)values,thevolumewillincreaseas
youplayharder. t 42: Page Menu Commands
Withnegative()values,thevolumewilldecreaseas ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
youplayharder. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
VelocitymodulationofAmplevel,withAmpEG shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Volume Programonpage 142.
Time Time 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Low velocity High velocity ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
Amplevel.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
Intensity [99+99]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthe
modulation.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive(+)
valuesofthisparameterwillmakethevolumeincrease
whenyoupressdownonthekeyboard.
Notethatiftheothermodulationsettingshavealready
raisedthevolumetoitsmaximumlevel(doublethe
AmpLevelandAmpEGlevelsettings),thevolume
cannotbeincreasedanyfurther.
Withnegative()valuesofthisparameter,thevolume
willdecreasewhenpressureisappliedtothe
keyboard.
42c: LFO 1/2

YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelwithbothLFO1and
LFO2.
LFO1
Intensity (LFO1) [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofLFO1seffect
ontheoscillatorsvolume.
Negative()valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
78
Program P4: Amp/EQ 43: Amp1 EG
43: Amp1 EG
43PMC
43a
43b
43c
43d
Theseparametersletyoucreatetimevaryingchanges
inthevolumeofoscillator1. 43b: Envelope
Theseparametersspecifyhowtheamp1EGwill
43a: EG Reset changeovertime.
AmpEG
AMS (EG Reset) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestart Start Attack Break Sustain
Level Level Level Level
Volume
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe
EGtostart.
Time
Note:OncetheAmpEGisinitsReleasesegment,it
cannotbereset.(Otherwise,thesoundmightkeep Time Time Time Time
playingforever!)
Threshold [99+99] Level

ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset. Start [0099]
Thissetstheinitialvolumelevelatnoteon.
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe
reset,effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstother Attack [0099]
rhythmiceffects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.When Break [0099]
thethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendof
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards. theDecaytime.
Sustain [0099]
valuesof+99or99.Inthiscase,settingtheThreshold ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
tothesevaluesmaycauseinconsistentbehavior,or reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntil
maymeanthattheEGdoesntresetatall.Ifthis noteoff(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
consistently.
79
Program mode: HD-1
Time AmpEGCurve
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow.
EG Value Actual Time Curve = 0 (Linear)
00 0.667 ms Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
10 10 ms
20 44 ms
30 104 ms
40 224 ms
50 464 ms
60 944 ms
70 1.8 seconds
Different curve settings for up and down
80 3.8 seconds
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare
90 10.9 seconds suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegments
99 87.3 seconds whichgodown.
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
Attack [0099] upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
fastasthemostpunchyofclassicanalogsynths. ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthe
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansetthe transitionfromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthe
Decay [0099] transitionfromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel.
totheBreaklevel.
Slope [0099] transitionfromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe
Release [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
BreakleveltotheSustainlevel.Onceitreachesthe
Sustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe
(unlessitisresetviaAMS). transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
Release [0099]
43c: Level Modulation
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe
Sustainleveltosilence. ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrol
theLevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,and
Curve BreaklevelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneach
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis havedifferentmodulationintensities.
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraight Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,
lines.Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelyto youcancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestothe
bemadeoutofcurves. EGshape,asshownbelow.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchange AmpEGLevelModulation
Volume Volume
linearsegments.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurved Time Time
shapesnaturally.TheOASYSgoesastepfurtherthan Original Shape Positive AMS on Start,

vintagesynths,however,andletsyoucontrolthe Attack, and Break
amountofcurvatureseparatelyforeachofthefour
envelopesegments.
Volume Volume
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto Time Time
soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat Negative AMS on Start, Positive AMS on Start and Break,
thebeginning. Attack, and Break Negative AMS on Attack
80
Program P4: Amp/EQ 45: Amp2/Driver2
Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulated ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation

OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This Attack [99+99]
reachedattheendofthesegment. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Formoreinformation,seeOnceanEGsegment
begins,itcantbemodulatedonpage 71. Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand
AMS [List of AMS Sources] athighervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
parameters. WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvaluefor
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. makethesegmenttimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
settingof8willcutthesegmenttimealmostinhalf.
Start [99+99]
Decay [99+99]
modulationfortheStartlevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
setStartto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay Slope [99+99]
harder.IfyouinsteadsetStartto99,theStartlevel ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
willdecreaseasyouplayharder. modulationfortheSlopetime.
Attack [99+99] Release [99+99]
modulationfortheAttacklevel. modulationfortheReleasetime.
Break [99+99] AMS2 and AMS3
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
respectively,forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.
43d: Time Modulation andRelease.TheparametersofbothAMS2andAMS3
areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,above.
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsources
tocontroltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachof
thethreeAMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,and t 43: Page Menu Commands
Releasetimeseachhavetheirownmodulation
intensities.
AmpEGTimeModulation shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.

Programonpage 142.
Attack= +, Decay= +, Attack= +, Decay= +, Attack=, Decay=, 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Slope= +, Release= + Slope= +, Release= + Slope=, Release=
Softly played note. Strongly played note. Strongly played note.
Original Shape. Times are longer. Times are shorter. 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
Reaches Sustain Reaches Sustain
more slowly. more quickly. SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
4:SyncBothEGs.Formoreinformation,seeSync
BothEGsonpage 149.
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
usefulhere,forinstance.
45: Amp2/Driver2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasiclevel,pan,and TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
driversettings.ItisavailableonlywhentheOscillator asdescribedunder41:Amp1/Driver1,onpage 74.
ModeissettoDouble;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayed
out.
81
Program mode: HD-1
46: Amp2 Mod.

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampmodulation.Itis TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder42:Amp1Modulation,on
47: Amp2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampEG.Itisavailable TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
onlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDouble;ifnot, asdescribedunder43:Amp1EG,onpage 79.
thepagewillbegrayedout.
49: EQ
49PMC
49a
ThisthreebandEQ,withsweepablemid,issharedby Bypasscanbeconvenientforcomparingtheresultsof
bothoftheProgramsoscillators. theEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
InCombisandSequences,eachtimbreandtrackhasits Input Trim [0099]
ownindividualEQ.YoucanimporttheProgramsEQ
settingsintoTracksandTimbresbyusingtheCombi ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.
andSequenceAutoLoadProgramEQoptions. HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrols
cancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinput
49a: 3 Band Parametric EQ trim.
Inadditiontousingtheonscreenparameters,youcan
Low Gain [18.0+18.0dB]
alsousethefrontpanelControlSurfacetosetupmost
oftheEQparameters(everythingexceptforBypass). Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in
Todoso: incrementsof0.5dB.
1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton. Mid Frequency [100Hz10.00kHz]
2. SettheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoChannelStrip. ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
3. SettheTrim,LowGain,MidFreq,MidGain,and
HighGainusingtheknobs. Mid Gain [18.0+18.0dB]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,in
Bypass [On, Off] incrementsof0.5dB.
WhenBypassischecked,alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingtheInputTrim.
82
Program P4: Amp/EQ 49: EQ
High Gain [18.0+18.0dB]

Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
83
Program mode: HD-1
Program P5: LFO

EachoftheOscillatorshastwoLFOs,whichyoucan ThetwoOscillatorsalsoshareasingleCommonLFO,
usetomodulatethefilter,amp,pitch,andmanyother similartotheglobalLFOonsomevintageanalog
parameters. synths.
Thesepagesletyousetupalloftheparametersforall
fiveLFOs.
51: OSC1 LFO1

51PMC
51a
51b
51c
ThispagehasallofthecontrolsforthefirstLFOof
Oscillator1.Forinstance,youcan: 51a: OSC 1 LFO 1
SelecttheLFOsbasicwaveform,andmodifyit Waveform [TriangleRandom6 (Continuous)]
withtheShapeparameter.
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform,asshowninthe
ControltheLFOsfrequency,andassignAMS graphicbelow.
controllerstomodulatethefrequency.
Mostofthewaveformsshouldbeselfexplanatory,but
UsetheKeySyncparametertochoosewhetherthe afewwillbenefitfrommoredetails:
LFOrunsseparatelyforeachvoice,oris
Guitarisintendedforguitarvibrato,anditsshapeis
synchronizedacrossallofthevoices
specificallytunedforthispurpose.Thewaveformis
UsetheFadeandDelayparameterstocontrolhow positiveonly,sothatwhenusedforpitch,itwillonly
longtheLFOwaitstostartafternoteon,and bendup,andnotdown.
whetheritstartsabruptlyorfadesinslowly.
Random1(S/H)generatestraditionalsampleandhold
SettheLFOtosynctoMIDItempo. waveforms,inwhichthelevelchangesrandomlyat
fixedintervalsoftime.
LFO Waveforms
Random1 Random4
Triangle Guitar Step Triangle-4
(S/H) (Continuous)
Exponential Random2 Random5
Saw Step Triangle-6 (Continuous)
Triangle (S/H)
Square Step Saw-4 (Continuous)
Saw Down (S/H)
Exponential
Sine Step Saw-6
Saw Up
84
Program P5: LFO 51: OSC1 LFO1
Random2(S/H)randomizesboththelevelsandthe ByusingAMSmodulation,youcanalsogetspeeds
timing. muchfasterandmuchslowerthanareavailable
Random3(S/H)generatesapulsewavewithrandom throughthisbasicsetting.
timing.Itstheoppositeoftraditionalsampleandhold; Frequency Value Frequency in Hz
thetimingvaries,butthelevelsdont.
00 0.014 Hz
Random46(Continuous)aresmoothedversionsof
10 0.112 Hz
Random13,withrampsinsteadofsteps.Youcanuse
themtocreatemoregentlerandomvariations. 20 0.422 Hz
Start Phase [180+180, Random] 30 0.979 Hz
Thiscontrolsthephaseofthewaveformatthestartof 40 1.79 Hz
thenote,instepsof5degrees. 50 2.84 Hz
IfKeySyncisOff,theStartPhasewillapplyonlyto 60 4.14 Hz
thefirstnoteofthephrase.
70 5.69 Hz
Shape [99+99] 80 7.49 Hz
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Asyou
90 9.53 Hz
canseeinthegraphicbelow,thiscanmakethe
waveformseithermoreroundedormoreextreme.It 99 26.25 Hz
canalsobeusefultoemphasizecertainvalueranges, 99 + Fine 99 32 Hz
anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFO Frequency Fine [0099]
tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShapeemphasizesthehigh ThisallowsyoutocontroltheLFOfrequencywith
valuerange,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthe greaterprecision,givingyou98additionalstepsfor
higherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelowrange,the eachstepofthemainFrequencyparameter.
filterwillspendmoretimeatthelowerfrequencies.
Whenthisissetto00,theLFOspeedisassetbythe
LFOShape
Frequencyparameter.
+99 Whenthisissetto99,itsthesameasincreasingthe
mainFrequencyvalueby1.
0
Stop [Off, On]
99
On(checked):WhenStopisOn,theLFOdoesnot
advancenormally,andtheFrequencyparametersare
Shape = 0 (original waveform) ignored.Instead,theLFOsimplygenerateitsveryfirst
Shape = +99 value(asdeterminedbythecombinationofthe
Waveform,StartPhase,Shape,andOffset),andthen
Shape = 99
holdsthatvalueuntiltheendofthenote.
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3 YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandom
waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or waveformstocreatestatic,randommodulation,with
99.Whentheseareselected,Shapeisgrayedout. thevaluechangingonlyatnoteon.
Off(unchecked):WhenStopisOff,theLFOwill
AMS (Shape) [List of AMS Sources]
functionnormally.
Thisselectsamodulationsourceforcontrollingthe
LFOsShape.Modulatingtheshapecandramatically Key Sync [Off, On]
altertheeffectoftheLFOtryitout! On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,theLFOstarts
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation eachtimeyoupressakey,andanindependentLFO
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. runsforeachnote.Thisisthenormalsetting.
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theLFO
Intensity [99+99]
startsfromthephasedeterminedbythefirstnotein
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheShape thephrase,sothattheLFOsforallnotesbeingheldare
modulation. synchronizedtogether.TheFadeandDelaysettings
willonlyapplytothefirstnotesLFO.
Frequency [0099]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeany NotethatevenifKeySyncisOff,eachnotesLFO
modulation.Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds,as speedmaystillbedifferentifyoumodulatethe
showninthetablebelow. Frequencybynotenumber,velocity,keyscaling,or
othernotespecificAMSsources.
85
Program mode: HD-1
Offset [99+99]
51b: Frequency Modulation
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsare
centeredaround0,andthenswingallthewayfrom Youcanusetwoalternatemodulationsources(AMS)
99to+99.ThisparameterletsyoushifttheLFOup toadjustthespeedoftheLFO.
anddown,sothatforinstanceitscenteredon50,and
thenswingsfrom49to+149.
AMS1 (Frequency) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcefortheLFOs
Forexample,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOfor
frequency.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
vibrato.IftheOffsetis0,thevibratowillbecentered
onthenotesoriginalpitch,bendingitbothupand
down. NotethatyoucanuseLFO2tomodulateLFO1s
frequency.
IftheOffsetis+99,ontheotherhand,thevibratowill
onlyraisethepitchabovetheoriginalnote. Intensity [99+99]
Offsetsettingsandpitchchangeproducedbyvibrato ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS1.TheIntensity
ModAMSthenaddstothisinitialamount.
Offset = 99 Offset = 0 Offset = +99
WhenAMS1isatitsmaximumvalue(forinstance,
Pitch whenthejoystickispushedallthewayup),theAMS
affectsthefrequencyasshownbelow:
Intensity Change to LFO Frequency
TheoneexceptiontothisistheGuitarwaveform, +99 64x
whichisdesignedtoemulatebendingastringona
+82 32x
guitarsothatthepitchonlygoesup,andnotdown.
Becauseofthis,thewaveformiscenteredon50,and +66 16x
Faster
noton0.Ofcourse,youcanalwaysuseanegative +49 8x
Offsettoshiftitbackdownbelow0again!
+33 4x
SinceOffsetaffectstheoutputvaluesoftheLFO,its
importanttonotethatitaffectsthesignalafterthe +16 2x
Shapefunction,asshownbelow: 16 1/2x
LFOSignalFlow 33 1/4x
Waveform Shape Offset 49 1/8x

Slower
66 1/16x
82 1/32x
99 1/64x
Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]

Fade [0099]
ThisselectsasecondaryAMSmodulationsourceto
TheLFOcanfadeingradually,insteadofsimply scaletheintensityofAMS1.
startingimmediatelyatfullstrength.Thisparameter
specifiesthetimefromwhentheLFObeginstoplay ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
untilitreachesitsmaximumamplitude. Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
IftheDelayparameterisbeingused,thenthefadewill Intensity [99+99]

beginafterthedelayiscomplete. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
WhenKeySyncisOff,thefadewillapplyonlytothe ModAMS.EvenifthemainAMS1Intensityissetto0,
firstnoteinthephrase. IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamountof
AMSAoverthefull+/99range.
LFOFadeandDelay
Forexample,ifAMS1issettothePitchEG,and
Delay Fade IntensityModAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive
settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheintensity
ofthePitchEGmodulationofLFOFrequency.
AMS2 (Frequency) [List of AMS Sources]

Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourceforthe
Note-on Note-off LFOsfrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,see
Delay [0099] page 1021.
ThissetsthetimefromnoteonuntiltheLFOstarts. Intensity [99+99]

WhenKeySyncisOff,thedelayappliesonlytothe ThiscontrolstheamountofmodulationfromAMS2.
firstnoteofthephrase.
86
Program P5: LFO 52: OSC1 LFO2
Times [0132]
51c: Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On] instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
Timesissetto3,theLFOwillcycleoveradotted
On(checked):TheLFOwillsynchronizetothesystem
eighthnote.
tempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDIClock.
TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNoteand
Timesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFrequency t 51: Page Menu Commands
andFrequencyModulationwillbeignored.
Off(unchecked):TheFrequencysettingswill numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
determinethespeedoftheLFO,andthetempo shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
settingswillhavenoeffect. commandsonpage 142.
Base Note [r w ] 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
ThissetsabasicrhythmicvaluefortheLFOspeed, Programonpage 142.
relativetothesystemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets.Itapplies ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
onlywhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn.
2:SwapLFO1&2.Formoreinformation,see
SwapLFO1&2onpage 150.
52: OSC1 LFO2

ThisisOscillator1ssecondLFO.Itsparametersare
exactlythesameasthoseforthefirstLFO,asdescribed
under51:OSC1LFO1onpage 84exceptthatLFO1
cannotmodulateLFO2.
55: OSC2 LFO1

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfirstLFO.Itis TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder51:OSC1LFO1onpage 84.
56: OSC2 LFO2

ThispagecontrolsOscillator2ssecondLFO.Itis
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto
Itsparametersareexactlythesameasthoseforthefirst
LFO,asdescribedunder51:OSC1LFO1on
page 84exceptthatLFO1cannotmodulateLFO2.
87
Program mode: HD-1
59: Common LFO

59PMC
59a
59b
59c
Thisisasingle,freerunningLFO,globalforallvoices Shape [99+99]

intheProgramlikethemodulationLFOsinsome Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Formore
vintageanalogsynths. details,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1Shape,on
Differences from LFO1/2 page 85.
TheCommonLFOstartsrunningassoonasyouselect Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
theProgram,andonlyresetswhenyoutellittodoso waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or
explicitlyviatheResetSourcecontrol,below.Thisis 99.
differentfromLFO1/2sKeySyncparameter,which
AMS (Shape) [List of AMS Sources]
resetswheneverallnotesarereleased.
Thisselectsamodulationsourceforcontrollingthe
TheCommonLFOspersistencecanbehandyifyou LFOsShape.Modulatingtheshapecandramatically
wanttocreateaconstantrhythmwithanLFO,and altertheeffectoftheLFOtryitout!
thenplayunderneaththatrhythmwithoutre
triggeringit.Forinstance,youcanuseaMIDI ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
controllerinyoursequencertoresettheCommonLFO Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
everyfewbars,regardlessofwhatnotesarebeing
Intensity [99+99]
played.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheShape
TheCommonLFOhasmostofthesamecontrolsas modulation.
LFO1/2.However,itdoesnotincludetheDelay,Fade,
andKeySyncsettings,sincetheseonlymakesensefor Frequency [0099]
pervoiceLFOs. ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeany
modulation.Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds.Fora
59a: Common LFO completedescription,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1
Frequency,onpage 85.
Waveform [TriangleRandom6 (Continuous)]
Frequency Fine [0099]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform.Foracomplete
listofthewaveformsandmoredetails,pleaseseethe ThisallowsyoutocontroltheLFOfrequencywith
entryunderLFO1Waveform,onpage 84. greaterprecision,givingyou98additionalstepsfor
eachstepofthemainFrequencyparameter.
Start Phase [180+180, Random] Whenthisissetto00,theLFOspeedisassetbythe
TheResetSource,describedabove,letsyouresetthe Frequencyparameter.
CommonLFO.ThisisthephasefromwhichtheLFO Whenthisissetto99,itsthesameasincreasingthe
willstartwhenitisreset. mainFrequencyvalueby1.
88
Program P5: LFO 59: Common LFO
Stop [Off, On]

On(checked):WhenStopisOn,theLFOdoesnot
advance,andtheFrequencyparametersareignored.
Instead,theLFOsimplygenerateasinglevaluewhen
theProgramisselected,andthenholdsthatvalueuntil
youselectanotherProgram,oruntilyouresettheLFO
viaAMS.
Note:thisisdifferentfromLFO1/2,inwhichthevalue
isresetwitheverynoteon.
YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandom
waveformstocreatestatic,randommodulation,with
thevaluechangingonlywhenyoufirstselectthe
Program.
functionnormally.
Reset AMS [List of AMS Sources]

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheLFOtotheStart
Phase.TheLFOresetswhentheAMSvaluepassesthe
halfwaymark:+50formostAMSsources,or64for
MIDIcontrollers.
TocreateaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOsKey
SyncOffsetting,setthistoGate1+Damper.
Offset [99+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsare
centeredaround0,andthenswingallthewayfrom
99to+99.ThisparameterletsyoushifttheLFOup
anddown,sothatforinstanceitscenteredon50,and
thenswingsfrom49to+149.
Foracompletedescription,pleaseseetheentryunder
LFO1Offset,onpage 86.
59b: Frequency Modulation

TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequency
ModulationsettingsforLFO1,asdescribedunder5
1b:FrequencyModulation,onpage 86.
59c: Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync

TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequency
MIDI/TempoSyncforLFO1,asdescribedunder51c:
FrequencyMIDI/TempoSync,onpage 87.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
89
Program mode: HD-1
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track

EachOscillatorhastwoAMSMixers,whicharesimple Thesepagesletyoucontrolallofthesemodulation
butpowerfultoolsforcombiningandmodifyingAMS sources.
signals. NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,
ThetwoOscillatorsalsosharetwoCommonkeyboard onlyOscillator1sAMSMixersareactive;thepagesfor
trackinggenerators,inadditiontothededicated Oscillator2willbegrayedout.
keyboardtrackingfortheFilterandAmp.
61: OSC 1 AMS Mixer

61PMC
61a
61b
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,
orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething 61a: AMS Mixer 1
new.
Mixer Type [A+B, Amt AxB, Offset, Smoothing,
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether, Shape, Quantize, Gate]
oruseoneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.
Thiscontrolsthetypeofprocessingperformedby
YoucanalsousethemtochangetheshapesofLFOs
AMSMixer1.EachoftheMixerTypesisdiscussedin
andEGsinvariousways,modifytheresponseof
detailoverthenextseveralpages.
realtimecontrollers,andmore.
A+BaddstwoAMSsourcestogether.Formore
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS
information,seeA+Bonpage 91.
sources,justliketheLFOsandEGs.
AmtAxBscalestheamountofoneAMSsourcewith
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto
theother.SeeAmtAxBonpage 91formoredetails.
theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,
ifyouuseLFO1asaninputtoaAMSMixer,youcan Offsetaddsorsubtractsaconstantvaluetoorfroman
usetheprocessedversionoftheLFOtocontrolone AMSsource.Formoreinformation,seeOffseton
AMSdestination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrol page 92.
another. Smoothingcreatesmoregentletransitionsbetween
Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether, values,smoothingoutabruptchangessuchasaquick
byusingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2. moveonajoystickorasharpedgeonanLFO.For
details,seeSmoothingonpage 93
ShapeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.Foranin
depthdescription,seeShapeonpage 93.
Quantizeturnssmoothtransitionsintodiscretesteps.
SeeQuantizeonpage 94formoreinformation.
90
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track 61: OSC 1 AMS Mixer
GatechoosesbetweentwoAMSinputs(orfixed AMS B Amount [99+99]

values)basedonathirdAMSsource.SeeGateon ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSB
page 95formoreinformation. input.
A+B Amt A x B
AMSMixer,Type=A+B AMSMixer,Type=AxB
Amt A
AMS A Output
AMS B
AMS A
Output
AMS B
Amt B Amt A
Amt B ThisMixerTypeusesAMSBtoscaletheamountof
AMSA.Forinstance,youcancontroltheamount
A+BmergestwoAMSsourcesintoone.Thiscanbe LFO1withtheFilterEG,orcontroltheamountofthe
handywhenyouneedtoaddonemoremodulation PitchEGwiththeribbon.
sourcetoaparameter,butyouvealreadyusedupall AMSMixerAmtAxBexample
oftheavailableAMSslots.
Forinstance,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOto
modulateFilterResonance,andthenyoudecidethatit AMS A: LFO
wouldbeinterestingtoscalethatparameterwithan
EGaswell.ResonancehasonlyasingleAMSinput,
butyoucaneasilymergetheLFOandtheEGtogether
usingtheA+BAMSMixer:
AMS B: EG
1. AssigntheLFOtoAMSA.
2. AssigntheEGtoAMSB.
3. AssigntheAMSMixerastheFilterResonance
AMSsource.
AMSMixerA+Bexample Amt A*B Output
AMS A: LFO
AMS A [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsource,whichcanthenbe
scaledbyAMSB.ForalistofAMSsources,see
AMS B: EG
page 1021.
AMS A Amount [99+99]

ThiscontrolstheinitialamountofAMSA,before
A+B Output modulationfromAMSB.InputfromAMSBthenadds
tothisinitialamount.
EvenifAmountAissetto0,AMSBcanstillcontrol
AMS A [List of AMS Sources] thefinalamountofAMSAoverthefull+/99range.
ThisselectsthefirstAMSinput. AMS B [List of AMS Sources]
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation ThisselectsthesecondAMSsource,toscalethe
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. amountofAMSA.ForalistofAMSsources,see
page 1021.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSA
input. AMS B Amount [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSB
AMS B [List of AMS Sources]
modulationofAMSA.
ThisselectsthesecondAMSinput.
Forexample,ifAMSAissettoLFO1andAMSBis
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation settotheFilterEG,positivesettingsmeanthattheEG
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. willincreasetheamountofLFO1.
91
Program mode: HD-1
Tips for using Amt A x B AMSMixerOffsetexamples
Using SW 1/2 to turn an AMS source on and off AMS A: LFO

YoucanuseAmtAxBtogateanAMSsource: +99
1. SetAMSAtothedesiredsource,andsetAMSA
0
Amountto0.
2. SetAMSBtoSW1or2,andAMSBAmountto 99
+99.
Now,SW1or2willturnAMSAonandoff. Offset = +50, Amount = 50
Muting individual Wave Sequence steps with SW1 +99
YoucanuseAMSMixersinconjunctionwiththeAMS
0
outputsofWaveSequences.Forinstance,youcanuse
SW1toturnoneormorestepsofaWaveSequenceon 99
oroff.Todothis:
1. IntheOscillatorwhichusestheWaveSequence,
Offset = 99, Amount = +199
setanAMSMixertoAmtA*B.
2. IntheAMSMixer,setAMSAtoWaveSequence +99
AMSOutput2. 0
InthesameAMSMixer:
99
3. SetAMSBtoSW1.
4. SetAMSAAmountto0. Clipped
5. SetAMSBAmountto+99. at Output
Now,SW1willgateWaveSequenceAMSOutput2.
Next,intheWaveSequence:
6. Forthestep(s)youdliketomute,settheAMS ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobeoffset.
Output2to+99.
Leaveallotherstepssetto00.
BackintheOscillatorwhichusestheWaveSequence:
7. SettheAmpAMSsourcetotheAMSmixeryou
setupinstep1,above. ThiscontrolsthebasiclevelofAMSA.
8. SettheAMSIntensityto99. +199doublestheoriginalsignallevel,while199
doublesthelevelandinvertsthephase.Thevaluesare
Now,whenSW1isOn,thestepsyousetupin(6)will
clippedonlyattheoutput;internally,theycanbe
bemuted.
greaterthanthenormalrangeof99to+99.
WhenSW1isOff,theyllsoundnormally.
AMS A Offset [199+199]
ThiscontrolstheamountofoffsetforAMSA.
Offset
SettingOffsetto+199shiftsanAMSinputof99allthe
AMSMixer,Type=Offset wayto+99.InconjunctionwithhighAmountvalues,
thiscanbeusefulforcreatingclippedshapes,suchas
Amt A Offset A
showninthelastoftheAMSMixerOffsetexamples,
above.
AMS A Output
Tips for using Offset
Thissimpleprocessoraddsaconstantpositiveor Converting from bipolar to unipolar
negativeoffsettoanAMSsource,andalsoallowsyou YoucanusetheOffsetfunctiontoconvertabipolar
todoublethegain.Amongotherthings,youcanuse AMSsource(bothnegativeandpositive),suchasan
thistoconvertabipolarAMSsource(bothnegative LFO,toaunipolarsignal(positiveonly).Todoso:
andpositive)toaunipolarsource(positiveonly),or
viceversa. 1. SelecttheLFOastheAMSAinput.
2. SettheAMSAAmountto50.
ThiscutstheoverallleveloftheLFOinhalf,sothat
insteadofswingingbetween99and+99,itonly
swingsbetween50and+50.
3. SettheAMSAOffsetto50.
ThisshiftstheLFOsignalup,sothatitnowswings
between0and+99.
92
Converting from unipolar to bipolar ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation

Similarly,youcanconvertaunipolarAMSsource Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
(positiveonly),suchasaknob,joystick,etc.,toa AMS A Attack [00+99]
bipolarsignal(bothnegativeandpositive).Todoso:
Thiscontrolstheattacktimeofthesmoother,orhow
1. SelecttheAMSsourceastheAMSAinput. longittakesthesmoothertoreachanew,highervalue.
2. SettheAMSAAmountto+199. HigherAttacksettingsmeanlongertimes.
ThisdoublestheoverallleveloftheAMSsource,so
DependingonhowquicklytheAMSinputvalueis
thatinsteadofrangingfrom0to+99,itnowgoesfrom
changing,highAttacksettingsmaymeanthatthe
0to+199.
valueisneverquitereached,asshowninAMSMixer
3. SettheAMSAOffsetto100. Shapeexamples,above.
ThisshiftstheAMSsignaldown,sothatitrangesfrom
AMS A Decay [00+99]
99to+99.
Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeofthesmoother,orhow
longittakesthesmoothertoreachanew,lowervalue.
Smoothing
HigherDecaysettingsmeanlongertimes.
ThisMixerTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput,creating
moregentletransitionsbetweenvalues.Youhave
separatecontroloftheamountofsmoothingduring Shape
theattack(whenthesignalisincreasing)anddecay ThisMixerTypeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.
(whenitsdecreasing). Shapecancreatecustomcontrollercurves,suchas
ThehighertheAttackandDecaysettings,themore exponentialjoystick,logarithmicvelocity,andsoon.It
thattheinputwillbesmoothed. canalsoaltertheshapeofprogrammablemodulation
sources,suchasEGsandLFOs.
Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing,
creatingmoregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Higher Note:ShapeonlyaffectsAMSsignalswhichalready
settingscreateautofadeeffects,transformingaquick havesomeamountofslope,suchasEGs,triangleand
gestureintoalongerfadeinand/orfadeoutevent. sineLFOs,andsoon.Itdoesnotaffectsignalswhich
onlycontainabrupttransitions,suchassquarewaves.
Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeof
programmablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs. AMS A [List of AMS Sources]
Forinstance,youcanturnablipintoasimple
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobeshaped.
envelopeshape,asshownbelow.
AMSMixerSmoothingexamples
Original AMS A: Smoothing with Long Attack Mode [Symmetric, Asymmetric]
and Short Release:
ThisselectswhetherShapewillproduceoneortwo
curves.ThegraphicAMSMixerShapeexamples
mayhelptovisualizehowthisworks.
Asymmetricwillproduceasinglecurve,extending
from99to+99.
Smoothing with Short Attack & Long Release:
Symmetricwillproducetwomatchingcurves
extendingoutwardsfrom0to99and+99,
respectively.

ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobesmoothed.
HeresahandychartwhichshowstheresultsofShapewiththedifferentsettingsandinputtypes:
Mode Input Shape Result
Positive (+) emphasizes upper value range
Unipolar
Negative (-) emphasizes lower value range
Symmetric emphasizes both upper and lower value ranges,
Positive (+)
Bipolar and de-emphasizes the center
Negative () emphasizes center value range, around 0
Positive (+) emphasizes extreme upper range, with offset
Unipolar
Negative () emphasizes extreme lower range, with offset
Asymmetric
Positive (+) emphasizes upper value range
Bipolar
Negative () emphasizes lower value range
93
Program mode: HD-1
Shape [99+99] Withunipolarsources,itsalmostalwaysbettertouse

Thiscontrolstheamountofcurvature,andwhetherthe theSymmetricmode.TheAsymmetricmodecan
curvesareconcaveorconvex.Asyoucanseeinthe causeoffsetsandotherstrangeresults.
graphicexamples,theshapewilltendtoemphasize
certainvalueranges,anddeemphasizeothers. Quantize
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangle
ThisMixerTypechangestheinputfromacontinuous
LFO,throughShape,tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShape
signalintoaseriesofdiscretesteps.Insteadofmoving
emphasizesthehighvaluerange,thefilterwillspend
smoothlybetweenvalues,itwillsnapimmediately
moretimeatthehigherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizes
fromonevaluetoanother.
thelowrange,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthe
lowerfrequencies. YoucanusethistochangetheshapeofLFOsorEGs,or
toforceacontrollertolandonafewspecificvalues.
AMSMixerShapeexamples
AMSMixerQuantizeexamples
Bipolar Triangle Wave
Asymmetric Unipolar (e.g., JS+Y) Bipolar (e.g., LFO)
+99 +99
Original 0
0
AMS A
99
99
Symmetric +99
Quantize 0
+99
Steps = 8
0 99
99
+99
Quantize 0
Bipolar Sawtooth Wave Steps = 16
Asymmetric Symmetric 99
+99
0
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobequantized.
99
Unipolar Triangle Wave
Asymmetric Symmetric AMS A # Of Steps [232]
(not recommended) Thiscontrolstheseverityoftheeffect.Thelowerthe
numberofsteps,themoresteppytheoutputwillbe.
+99
Forinstance,whenthisissetto2,therewillbesteps
0
at0,50,and99.WithabipolarAMSinput,therewill
99 alsobestepsat50and99.
Asanotherexample,whenitissetto5,therewillbe
Shape = 0 (original waveform) stepsat0,20,40,60,80,and99(aswellas20,40,60,
Shape = +99 80,and99forbipolarinputs).
Shape = 99
Tips for using Quantize
Bipolar and Unipolar AMS sources Quantized Ribbon Pitch Bend
TounderstandShape,ithelpstounderstandthe YoucaneasilyusetheRibbontocreatequantizedpitch
differencebetweenbipolarandunipolarAMSsources. bend,forfretdraggingeffects,brassrips,andmore.To
Bipolarsourcescanswingallthewayfrom99to+99, doso:
with0inthemiddle.MostLFOsarebipolar,for 1. SelecttheAMSMixerastheOscillatorPitchAMS
instance;soisPitchBend. input.
Generally,bipolarAMSsourceswillworkbetterwith 2. SetthePitchAMSIntensitytoanyexacthalfstep
theAsymmetricmode,butSymmetricmayalso value,suchas+5.00,+7.00,etc.
produceinterestingresults. 3. SettheRibbonamountto0.00.
Unipolarsourcesonlygofrom0to99,with50inthe 4. IntheAMSMixer,selecttheRibbonasAMSA.
middle.MIDIcontrollers,suchasJS+Y(CC#1),areall
5. SettheAMSA#ofStepstothesamenumberyou
unipolar.Inpractice,EGsareusuallyprogrammedto
usedinStep2.
beunipolar,eventhoughtheFilterandPitchEGsdo
allowbothpositiveandnegativelevels.
94
Now,playingtheRibbonwillcreatequantizedpitch Gate Output

bends.JSXwillstillproducesmoothpitchbends,as
usual,soyoucanusebothtechniquestogether. IfthevalueoftheControlSourceislessthanthe
Threshold,theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMS
sourceselectedunderBelowThreshold.
Gate IfthevalueoftheControlSourceisgreaterthanor
AMSMixer,Type=Gate equaltotheThreshold,theGateoutputsthepreset
valueorAMSsourceselectedunderAt&Above
Control Threshold.
Below Threshold [Fixed Value, AMS A]

Fixed Value
Below ThisselectswhetherBelowThresholdusesapreset
AMS value,ortheselectedAMSsource.
Fixed Value Fixed Value [-99+99]

At & Above
AMS Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.Thisonly
ThisMixerTypeletsyousetuptwodifferentAMS applieswhenBelowThresholdissettoFixedValue.
sources(orfixedAMSamounts),andthenswitch
betweenthetwousingathirdAMSsource.
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughthe
Itssimilartoanaudiogatewithasidechain,butwith
GatewhentheControlSourceislessthanthe
evenmoreflexibilitysinceyougettochoosewhat
Threshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenBelowThreshold
happenswhenthegateisclosed(belowthethreshold),
issettoAMSA.
aswellaswhenitsopen(abovethethreshold).
Youcanalsochoosewhetherthegatewillbeableto At & Above Threshold [Fixed Value, AMS B]
openandclosecontinuouslyinresponsetothecontrol ThisselectswhetherAt&AboveThresholdusesa
source,orwhetheritonlyopensorclosesatthe presetvalue,ortheselectedAMSsource.
beginningofthenote,andthenstaysthatwayoverthe
notesentireduration. Fixed Value [-99+99]
YoucanusetheGateto: Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltothe
Useafootswitch(orothercontroller)toapply Threshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&Above
pitchbendorothereffectstosomenotes,butnotto ThresholdissettoFixedValue.
others
Applycontrollerstoaparameteronlyafterthe AMS B [List of AMS Sources]
controllerreachesacertainthresholdforinstance, ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughthe
useVelocitytocontrolharmonicsintheSTR1,but GatewhentheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequal
onlyonceVelocityisgreaterthan90 totheThreshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&Above
Useajoystick,switch,orothercontrollertoswitch ThresholdissettoAMSB.
betweentwodifferentLFOs(oranytwoAMS
sources)
Tips for using Gate
Selective pitch-bend, using a switch
Gate Control
YoucanuseControlatNoteOnOnlytoapplyaneffect
Source [List of AMS Sources] tosomenotes,butnotothers,basedonthestateofan
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontrolthegate. AMSsourceatthestartofthenote.Forinstance:
1. SettheControlSourcetoAssignableFootSwitch
Control at Note-On Only [Check-box]
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked).
Whenthisisenabled(checked),thevalueofthe
3. SettheThresholdto50.
ControlSourceatnoteonwillselecttheoutput
(BelowThresholdorAt&AboveThreshold).The 4. SetBelowThresholdtoaFixedValueof00.
selectedoutputwillthenremainactivethroughoutthe 5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoAMSB:Ribbon
durationofthenote,regardlessofanysubsequent (CC#16).
changeintheControlSourcesvalue. 6. OnthePitchModpage,assigntheAMSMixerto
Notethattheoutputvalueitselfcancontinueto controlthepitch.
change;onlytheselectionofBeloworAt&Aboveis 7. AlsoonPitchMod,setthestandardRibbon
fixed. amountto0.
Threshold [-99+99] Thisway,onlytheAMSMixersprocessedversionof
theRibbonwillaffectthepitch.
ThissetsthevalueoftheControlSourceatwhichthe
gateopensorcloses. 8. Withthefootswitchoff,playachord,andholdit
throughstep9.
9. Pressdownonandholdthefootswitch,andthen
playanewnoteabovethechord.
95
Program mode: HD-1
10.Usetheribbontobendthepitchofthenewnote. Generating a static value

Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played Sometimes,itcanbehandytohaveapresetvalueasan
beforeyoupressedonthefootswitch)willnot. AMSsource.TheGateisonewaytocreatethis.Todo
so:
Selective pitch-bend, using only the joystick
1. SetbothBelowThresholdandAt&Above
YoucanalsouseasingleAMSsourceasboththe
ThresholdtoFixedValue,andenterthesame
ControlSourceandavaluesource:
valueintoeach.
1. SettheControlSourcetoJSX. Now,theAMSmixerwillalwaysgeneratethisstatic
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked). value.
3. SettheThresholdto00.
4. SetBelowThresholdtoAMSA:JSX. 61b: AMS Mixer 2
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoaFixedValueof00.
ThisisthesecondAMSMixerforOscillator1.The
6. OnthePitchModpage,assigntheAMSMixerto parametersareexactlythesameasthoseforAMS
controlthepitch. Mixer1,asdescribedunder61a:AMSMixer1on
7. AlsoonPitchMod,setthestandardJS+XandJSX page 90.
amountsto0.
Thisway,onlytheAMSMixersprocessedversionof t 61: Page Menu Commands
thejoystickwillaffectthepitch.
8. Withthejoystickinthecenter,playachord,and numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
holditthroughstep9. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
9. Bendthejoysticktotheleft,andthenplayanew commandsonpage 142.
noteabovethechord.
10.Usethejoysticktobendthepitchofthenewnote. Programonpage 142.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
beforeyoubentthejoystickdown)willnot.This ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
methodisparticularlygoodforbendingthetopnoteof
achorduptopitch. 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
65: OSC 2 AMS Mix

ThispagecontrolsthetwoAMSMixersforOscillator
2.TheseareavailableonlywhentheOscillatorMode
issettoDouble;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
asdescribedunder61:OSC1AMSMixer,on
page 90.
96
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track 69: Common Keyboard Track
69: Common Keyboard Track

69PMC
69a
69b
ThetwoOscillatorssharetwoCommonkeyboard CommonKeyboardTracking
trackinggenerators,inadditiontoeachOscillators
dedicatedkeyboardtrackingfortheFilterandAmp. At the Center Key, the AMS value is always 0.
YoucanusetheseCommonkeytracksasAMSsources
AMS Ramp:
formodulatingmostAMSdestinations.
+99 +99
TheCommonKeyTrackparametersaresharedbythe +50
entireProgram,buttheactualAMSvaluesare Ramp = +99 00
Ramp:
calculatedindividuallyforeachvoice. +99 50
0
99
What does Keyboard Tracking do? 99 Ramp = 50
Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythe
modulationamountasyouplayupanddownthe 99
keyboard.Thiscanbeusefulformakingthetimbre AMS
consistentacrosstheentirerange,oradjusting
parametersaccordingtopitch.
Low Break Center High Break
TheOASYSkeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeover
uptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance, How it works: Keys and Ramps
youcan:
Makethemodulationincreaseveryquicklyover orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The
themiddleofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemore bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof
slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves. theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother
Makethemodulationincreaseasyouplayloweron threekeysnamedLowBreak,Center,andHigh
thekeyboard. Breaktobeanywhereinbetween.
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchange
effects. betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow
Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo
foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe
Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas
97
Program mode: HD-1
ThetablebelowshowshowtherampsaffecttheAMS
69a: Keyboard Track 1 output:
Key Ramp value AMS change

Inf goes to 99 in 1 half-step
Low Break [C1G9]
99 20 per octave
rampsthehingeofthelowerdoor. 50 10 per octave
Center [C1G9] 0 no change
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtrackingthemain +50 +10 per octave

hinge.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrackinghasno +99 +20 per octave
effectontheAMSdestinations.
+Inf goes to +99 in 1 half-step
High Break [C1G9]
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher +Inf and Inf ramps
rampsthehingeoftheupperdoor. +InfandInfarespecialsettingswhichcreateabrupt
Entering notes from the keyboard orInf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextreme
Youcanenternotenumbersdirectlybyplayingthem highestorlowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
onthekeyboard.Todoso: +InfandInfRamps
1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
2. HolddowntheENTERkey.
3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe Ramp = +Inf
keyboard.
Ramp
Key;negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases. Ramp = 50
Ramp = Inf
thekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplay Low Break Center High Break
loweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgohigher.
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe theHighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigher ifyousettheLowCenterrampto+InforInf,the
onthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutput BottomLowrampwillbegrayedout.
goup.
Bottom-Low [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] 69b: Keyboard Track 2

ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI ThisisthesecondCommonkeyboardtracking
noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey generator.
Itsparametersareexactlythesameasthosefor
Low-Center [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] KeyboardTrack1,asdescribedunder69a:Keyboard
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter Track1onpage 98.
Center-High [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]

ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
High-Top [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] commandsonpage 142.
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use Programonpage 142.
positivevalues.
98
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track 69: Common Keyboard Track
99
Program mode: HD-1
Program P7: KARMA

ThispagesletyoucontroltheProgramsKARMA Normally,whenyouselectanewProgram,its
settings.InProgrammode,youcanuseoneKARMA KARMAsettingswillbeloadedaswell.Insomecases,
Module(ModuleA). however,youmaywishtotryoutdifferentPrograms
whilekeepingtheKARMAsettingsthesame.
Turning KARMA on and off
TheGlobalBasicpageLoadKARMASettingswhen
KARMAcanbeenabledordisabledforthecurrent changingparametersletyouselectbetweenthesetwo
ProgrambyusingthefrontpanelKARMAON/OFF behaviors.ThereareseparatesettingsforPrograms,
switch.YoucanalsotemporarilydisableKARMAfor Combis,andSongs.Tosetthisup:
allPrograms,Combinations,andSongsbyusingthe
GlobalAllKARMAOffparameter.Formore 1. GototheGlobalBasicpage.
information,seeAllKARMAOffonpage 701. 2. UnderLoadKARMAsettingwhenchanging,set
theProgramscheckboxasdesired.
Linking KARMA settings to Program changes
ChecktheboxtoloadtheindividualPrograms
KARMAsettingscanbesavedindividuallyforeach KARMAsettings.
Program.ThisincludesalloftheKARMArelated
frontpanelbuttons,sliders,andknobs,aswellasthe UnchecktheboxtokeepKARMAsettingsthesame,
onscreenparameters. evenwhenchangingPrograms.
Formoreinformation,seetheGlobalparameterLoad
KARMAsettingswhenchangingonpage 701.
71: GE Setup/Key Zones

71PMC
71a
ThispageletsyouselecttheGEusedbytheKARMA
Module,andsetuptheKeyZoneinwhichitoperates. 71a: Program Name, Load GE Options,
KARMA T.Sig, Tempo
Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG]
Bank Type [HD-1, EXi]
Program [0127 (INT and USER Banks),
1128 (GM Banks)]
Thesearethecurrentbank,banktype(HD1orEXi),
andProgram.Formoreinformation,see11a:
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 33.
100
Program P7: KARMA 71: GE Setup/Key Zones
Tab
Preset
GE Bank
User
GE Bank
RTC Model
Name
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] *MadebyKarmaLab(http://www.karmalab.com).

ThisisthecurrentTempo.Formoreinformation,see MacintoshandWindowsaresupported.English
11a:ProgramNameandTempoonpage 33. versiononly.
Load GE Options [Dialogue] GE Bank Select [PresetUSER-L]

Theseoptionsletyouspecifywhetherthevaluesand ThisselectstheGEbank.ThePresetbankispartofthe
assignmentsfortheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHES systemsoftware;Userbankscanbeloadedfromdisk.
willbesetautomatically,beinitialized,orbepreserved Formoreinformation,seeGESelect,above.
whenyouselectaGE. GE Category Select [ArpeggioReal-Time]
Foradetaileddescriptionofthisparameter,pleasesee ThisletsyouselectaGEbycategory,fromArpeggio
LoadGEOptionsonpage 7. throughRealTime.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
06b:GESelectonpage 8.
[GE/TS, 1/416/4, 1/816/8, 1/1616/16] RTC Model [List of RTC Models]
Thisspecifiesthetimesignatureofthephrasesor ThisshowstheGEsRTCModel,asspecifiedinternally
patternsgeneratedbytheKARMAModules.The foreachpresetGE.Formoreinformation,seeRTC
internaltimesignatureofthephraseorpatternis Modelonpage 198oftheOperationGuide.
determinedbytheGE,butyoucansetthisparameter
tochangethetimesignature. Key Zone
GE/TS:Theinitialtimesignaturespecifiedbyeach TheKARMAModuleiscontrolledbyinputnotedata
KARMAModulewillbeused. innumerousways,includingthevariationofphraseor
1/416/16:Specifythedesiredtimesignature.In patternproducedbytheGE,bytrigger,andbychord
CombinationandSequencermodes,thiswillchange detection.
thetimesignatureforallfourKARMAModules. Hereyoucanspecifytherangeofnotedata(KeyZone)
thatwillcontroltheKARMAModule.
GE Setup
Note:withintheKeyZonespecifiedBottomandTop
GE Select [Preset 00002047, USER-A ValueswillbeinputintotheKARMAfunction,while
U-A000...U-A127, ..., USER-L U-L000...U-L127] notesoutsidetheKeyZonemaybeusedforother
functions,orechoedthru.
ThisselectstheGEfortheKARMAmodule.Thereare
atotalof3,584tochoosefrom:2,048presetGEs,and Note:InProgrammode,allMIDIdatafortheKARMA
1,536rewritableUserGEs(12banksof128each). ModuleistransmittedandreceivedontheGlobal
MIDIchannel(Global21).
PresetGEsarepartofthesystemsoftware.
UserGEsmaybeincludedwithnewbanksofsounds, Bottom (Key Zone Bottom) [C1G9]
andcanalsobecreatedusingKARMAOASYS Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)oftheKeyZone.
software(dedicatedsoftwarefortheOASYS*).For
moreinformationonloadingUserGEs,seeLoad Top (Key Zone Top) [C1G9]
.KGEonpage 773. Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)oftheKeyZone.
Note:Theseparameterscanalsobesetbyholding
downtheEnterswitchandpressinganote.
101
Program mode: HD-1
Thru In Zone [Off, On]

t 7-1: Page Menu Commands
On(checked):NotedatafromkeyswithintheKey
ZonewillbeinputtotheKARMAModule,andwill ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
alsobeinputdirectlytothetonegenerator. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
WhenyouplayakeywithintheKeyZone,thephrase
commandsonpage 142.
orpatterngeneratedbytheKARMAModulewill
sound,aswillthenoteitself. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Off(unchecked):Onlythephraseorpatterngenerated
byKARMAwillsound.KeysplayedwithintheKey 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Zonewillnotsound. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Transpose In Zone [36+36]
Specifiesthetransposesettingappliedtonotedata
fromwithintheKeyZone. 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
Makethissettingifyouwishtoapplyatransposition page 151.
insemitonestepstothepitchofnotesplayedfromthe
keyboardwhenThruInZoneisOn(checked). 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 151.
Thru Out Zone [Off, On] 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
On(checked):NotedatafromkeysoutsidetheKey Sceneonpage 151.
Zonewillbeinputdirectlytothetonegenerator.(They 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
willnotbeinputtotheKARMAModule,sincetheyare seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
outsidethekeyzone.)Whenyouplaykeysoutsidethe
keyzone,thetonegeneratorwillsound.
Off(unchecked):Thetonegeneratorwillnotsound
evenifyouplaykeysoutsidetheKeyZone.
Transpose Out Zone [36+36]

Specifiesthetransposesettingappliedtonotedata
fromkeysoutsidetheKeyZone.
Makethissettingifyouwishtoapplyatransposition
insemitonestepstothepitchofnotesplayed
conventionallyfromthekeyboardwhenThruOut
ZoneisOn(checked).
Youcouldselectabassprogramandmakethesettings
shownbelow.
Example
UsingtheKARMAModuletocontrolthebasslinein
thelowerrangeofthekeyboard,andplayinginreal
timeintheupperrange.
Key Zone Bottom Key Zone Top
KARMA Module Key Zone
Thru In Zone Thru Out Zone

Transpose In Zone Transpose Out Zone
Playing in real-time
Bass line
Tone generator
Module Zone Display
Asolidblueline(greenwhileyoureeditingthekey
zone)indicatesthespecifiedKeyZone.
NotesandmessagesfromtheMIDIINconnector
withinthiszonewillbeinputtotheKARMAModule.
102
Program P7: KARMA 72: MIDI Filter/CC Offset
72: MIDI Filter/CC Offset

72PMC
72a
72b
72c
InthispageyoucanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsforthe WhentheKARMAfunctionison,theMIDIcontrol
KARMAfunction.Youcanspecifythefollowing datareceivedbytheKARMAModulewillbe
settings. transmittedtothetonegeneratorwithoutchange.
MIDIfilteringfortheKARMAmodule Dependingonthesesettings,youcan(forexample)
makesettingssothatthedamperpedalisenabled
MIDIcontrolchangemessagestransmittedwhen whentheKARMAModuleisoff,anddisabledwhenit
theKARMAfunctionisturnedon(CCOffset ison.(Seethediagrambelow,KARMA
parameters) Receive/TransmitFilter.)
ThesesettingsdonotaffecttheDynamicMIDI(77)
72a: Program Name and Tempo settings.IfyouhavespecifiedMIDIcontroldataas
theDynamicMIDIsource,itwillbevalidregardless
Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG] ofthesesettings.
Bank Type [HD-1, EXi] After Touch [Off, On]
Program [(0127 (INT and USER Banks), SpecifieswhetherMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
1128 (GM Banks)] echoedtothetonegenerator.
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] Pitch Bend [Off, On]

Thesearethecurrentbank,banktype(HD1orEXi), SpecifieswhetherMIDIpitchbendmessageswillbe
Program,andTempo.Formoreinformation,see11a: echoedtothetonegenerator.
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 33. Damper (CC#64) [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessage#64
72b: MIDI Filter Sustain(damperpedal)willbeechoedtothetone
generator.
Receive MIDI Filter
JS+Y (JS+Y CC#01) [Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherfilterswillbeappliedtothe
MIDIcontroldatareceivedbytheKARMAModule SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessage#1
beforeitispassedon(echoed)tothetonegenerator. (internaljoystick+Ydirection,specifiedasthe
assignmentofarealtimecontrolknob,orVectorCC
On(checked):ThecorrespondingMIDIdatawillbe control)willbeechoedtothetonegenerator.
echoedtothetonegenerator.
Off(unchecked):ThecorrespondingMIDIdatawill
notbeechoedtothetonegenerator.
103
Program mode: HD-1
KARMA function
KARMA Module
MIDI IN Receive MIDI
Filter
Transmit MIDI Tone

GE
Filter generator
OASYSs controllers Dynamic MIDI
JS-Y (JS-Y CC#02) [Off, On] WhentheKARMAfunctionisonandtheKARMA

SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessage#2 Moduleisproducingpitchbenddata,thepitch
(internaljoystickYdirection,specifiedasthe bendrangeoftheprogramwillbecontrolledas
assignmentofarealtimecontrolknob,orVectorCC follows.
control)willbeechoedtothetonegenerator. ThepitchbendrangespecifiedwithinKARMAGE
willautomaticallybetransmittedfromtheKARMA
Ribbon (CC#16) [Off, On] Module,andsetwithintheprogram.Thisensures
SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessage#16 thatthepitchbenddataproducedbytheGEofthe
(internalribboncontroller,specifiedastheassignment KARMAwillfunctioncorrectly.Atthistime,the
ofarealtimecontrolknob,orVectorCCControl)will pitchbenddataproducedwhenyouoperatethe
beechoedtothetonegenerator. joystickwillautomaticallybeoptimizedsothatit
willproducethesamebendeffectasiftheKARMA
Other CC [Off, On] wereoff(inmostcases).
SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessagesother
thantheabovewillbeechoedtothetonegenerator. CCA/CCB [Off, On]
SpecifieswhethertotransmitthevariousMIDI
Transmit MIDI Filter messagesgeneratedbyCCA/CCBoftheGEselected
SpecifieswhetherfilteringwillbeappliedtotheMIDI bytheKARMAModule.
controldataproducedbytheGEselectedforthe HoweverifCCA/CCBareproducingpitchbend
KARMAModule.(Seethediagramonthepreceding messages,thesesettingswillbeignored,andthe
page,KARMAReceive/TransmitFilter.) GEBendsettingwillbeused.
On(checked):ThecorrespondingMIDIdatawillbe Envelope1/Envelope2/Envelope3 [Off, On]
transmittedfromtheKARMAModule.
SpecifieswhethertotransmitthevariousMIDI
Off(unchecked):ThecorrespondingMIDIdatawill messagesorotherfunctionsgeneratedbyEnvelope1,
notbetransmittedfromtheKARMAModule. Envelope2,andEnvelope3oftheGEselectedbythe
Note:TheGEcanalsoautomaticallyproducepitch KARMAModule.
bendandvarioustypesofcontrolchangemessagesin IfEnvelope1,Envelope2,orEnvelope3are
additiontonotedata.Threeenvelopegeneratorscan producingpitchbendmessages,thesesettingswill
alsobeusedtoapplytimevariantchangetovelocity, beignored,andtheGEBendsettingwillbeused.
tempo,duration,andvariouscontrolchangessuchas
pitchbend,JS+Y(CC#1)etc. GE Notes [Off, On]
Thedatathatisoutputwilldependonthesettingsof SpecifieswhethertheMIDInoteon/noteoffmessages
theparametersfortheselectedGE.Forexample, generatedbytheKARMAModulewillbetransmitted.
transmitting/filteringpitchbendwillproducenoresult Note:Thissettingletsyoumutethenotephrases
iftheGEhasnotbeendesignedtoproducepitchbend generatedbytheKARMAModule,anduseonlythe
data.Formoreinformation,pleaseseetheVoice controldatageneratedfromtheKARMAModule(e.g.,
NameListonpage 1099. pan,filtercutoff,resonance)toapplymodulationto
phrasesorchordsyouyourselfplayonthekeyboard.
Pitch Bend [Off, On]
SpecifieswhethertotransmittheMIDIpitchbend WaveSeq [Off, On]
messagesgeneratedbytheGEselectedforthe Specifieswhetherthewavesequencedata
KARMAModule. (multisamplenumber)generatedbytheKARMA
Note:Thissettingalsoappliestothepitchbend Modulewillbetransmitted.
messagesthatmaybeproducedbyCCA,CCB,
Envelope1,Envelope2,andEnvelope3.
104
Program P7: KARMA 73: Module Parameters-Control
Value [000127]
72c: CC Offset
Specifiesthevalueofthemessagethatwillbe
WhentheKARMAfunctionisturnedon,MIDIcontrol transmitted.
changemessagescanbetransmittedtothetone
ThiswillhavenoeffectifCCNumberisOff.
generator.Makethesesettingswhenyouwishto
controltheprogramsoundoreffectsetc.whenthe
KARMAfunctionisturnedon. t 7-2: Page Menu Commands
YoucanassignuptofourMIDIcontrolchangesfor ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
eachKARMAModule. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
1, 2, 3, 4 commandsonpage 142.
CC Number [Off, MIDI CC# 00MIDI CC# 95] 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
SelectstheMIDIcontrolchangemessagethatwillbe Programonpage 142.
transmitted. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Thevalueofthetransmittedmessageisspecifiedby ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Value. 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
IftheKARMAON/OFFswitchison,thespecified seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
MIDIcontrolchangemessagewillbetransmitted 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
whenyouselectaprogramwhoseKARMA information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
ON/OFFswitchisturnedon.IftheselectedGE page 151.
producesthecontrolchangespecifiedhere,the 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
effectofthecontrolchangeproducedbytheGEwill Sceneonpage 151.
begivenpriority.
Note:TheMIDIcontrolchangemessagesspecified Sceneonpage 151.
herefortransmissionandtheMIDIcontrolchange
messagesproducedbytheselectedGEwhenthe 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
KARMAON/OFFswitchisOnwillbereset seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
automaticallywhentheKARMAON/OFFswitchis
turnedoff.
73: Module Parameters-Control

73PMC
73a
73b
HereyoucansetKARMAModuleControlparameters. Specifythetransposition,range,andchord
NotethatinProgrammode,youcanuseoneKARMA inversionforphrasesandchordsgeneratedbythe
Module(ModuleA). KARMAmodule
Youcanmakethefollowingsettings: ControltheclockthatoperatestheKARMAmodule
105
Program mode: HD-1
Convertordeletethenotedatageneratedbythe
KARMAmodule. Force Range = Lowest
73a: Program Name and Tempo Input Notes
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a:
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. Force Range = Higest
73b: Module Parameter-Control

Control
Transpose [36+36] Theinputnoteswillbeforcedtoarangenearthe
Controlsthepitchofthephrasesorchordsproduced middleoctave(C3B3).TheForceRangeWrap
bytheKARMAModule,insemitonesteps. parameterwillbecomeavailable(seebelow),and
ThenotedatafromthekeyboardortheMIDIIN specifiesthescalestepatwhichawraparoundwillbe
connectorwillbeinputtotheKARMAModule.(+ performed.Forexample,ifForceRangeWrap=7:G,
Program71a:Bottom(KeyZoneBottom,Top(Key ifthepitchofthelowestnoteisCtoF#,itwillbe
ZoneTop))Hereyoucantransposethepitch(in placedinthe4thoctavewiththeothernotesgrouped
semitonesteps)ofthenotedatathatisinputtothe aboveit.IfthepitchofthelowestnoteisaGtoB,it
KARMAModule. willbeplacedinthe3rdoctave,withtheothernotes
groupedaboveit.Playingthesamechord
Force Range [Off, Lowest, Highest, chromaticallyupthekeyboardwillwraparound
C3B3[1], C3B3[2]] whenthescalestepoftherootofthechordis
Controlsthepitchrangeofthephrasesorchords determinedtobeG,droppingthenotesdownan
producedbytheKARMAModule,inrelationshipto octave.Thisessentiallymaintainstheinversionthe
theareaofthekeyboardthatisplayed. chordwasplayedwithnotesmayalsoextendintothe
5thoctaveor3rdoctave.
NotedatafromthekeyboardortheMIDIINconnector
willbeinputtotheKARMAModule(+Bottom(Key Thisiseffectivewhenyouwishtoproducephrasesor
ZoneBottom,Top(KeyZoneTop)(71b), patternshavingasimilarinversiontowhatwas
Transpose73a).Hereyoucanmakesettingssothat played,butinafixedrangeregardlessofwhereyou
thenotedatainputtotheKARMAModuleisrestricted areplayingonthekeyboard.Thebehaviorissimilarto
toaspecificrange. anautoaccompanimentpattern,inthatnomatter
whereyouplayonthekeyboard,theresultisinthe
Off:TheinputnoteswillbesenttotheKARMA sameoctave.
Moduleasplayed,withnofurtheralteration.
C3B3[2]:Theinputnoteswillbeforcedtoarange
Lowest:Theinputnoteswillbeforcedtoarange withinthecenteroctave(C3B3).becauseofthis,the
withinoneoctaveofthelowestnote,andduplicate chordinversionwillchangesignificantly;forexample,
pitchesarediscarded.Usefulforeliminating thebassnotemaychange.Thisiseffectivewhenyou
inversionssothatachordvoicedindifferentways wanttoabsolutelylimittheinputnotestoaspecific
producesidenticalresults. octave.
IfyouplayachordofE2,E4,G#4,B4,andD#5(i.e.,E Playedonkeyboard:
Maj7)onthekeyboard,theinputnoteswillallbe
transposedtobewithinanoctaveofthelowestnote Playchordsintheorderof
(E2):E2,G#2,B2,andD#3. E4G#4B4D#5(EMaj7firstinversion)
Highest:Theinputnoteswillbeforcedtoarange G#4B4D#5E5(EMaj7secondinversion)
withinoneoctaveofthehighestnote,andduplicate B4D#5E5G#5(EMaj7thirdinversion)
pitchesarediscarded.Usefulforeliminating
inversionssothatachordvoicedindifferentways D#5E5G#5B5(EMaj7fourthinversion)
producesidenticalresults. C3B3[1]
IfyouplayachordofE2,E4,G#4,B4,andD#5(i.e.,E Resultingtransposedinputnotes:
Maj7)onthekeyboard,theinputnoteswillallbe
E3G#3B3D#4(EMaj7firstinversion)
transposedtobewithinanoctaveofthehighestnote
(D#5):E4,G#4,B4,andD#5. G#2B2D#3E3(EMaj7secondinversion)
Playedonkeyboard: B2D#3E3G#3(EMaj7thirdinversion)
E2E4G#4B4D#5(playanEMaj7chord) D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7fourthinversion)
Resultingtransposedinputnotes: C3B3[2]
Lowest:inputnotestransposedtoE2G#2B2D#3 Resultingtransposedinputnotes:
Highest:inputnotestransposedtoE4G#4B4D#5 D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7/D#)
C3B3[1]:allnotesnear4thoctave(maintaininversion) D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7/D#)
D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7/D#)
106
D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7/D#) RootPositionalsohasasimilareffectonhowthe
(allidentical) DrumPatternsaretransposed,butonlyifDrum
TrackKeyboardison.Formoreinformation,see
Force Range = C3-B3[1] DrumGrouponpage 1003.
AlsowhentheGETypeisGeneratedDrum,ifusing
Input Notes arpeggiatedpitchbending(basedontheNoteSeries),
theresultingpitchbenddatawillbeaffectedaswell.
Formoreinformation,seeBendGrouponpage 999.
Force Range = C3-B3[2] WhentheGETypeisRealtime,thisparameterhas
noeffectunlessyouareusingDynamicMIDItoDirect
IndextheNoteSeries(seeDynamicMIDISources&
Destinationsonpage 1038).
Note:whenRootPositionisturnedonforanyNote
TypeexceptRegular(i.e.Scalic,Scalic2,Chromatic,
WholeToneetc.),thebehaviorisveryconsistent:the
Force Range Wrap [CB] scalespecifiedbytheNoteTypeisplaceinroot
positionbeforeapplyingtherestoftheNoteSeries
WhenForceRange(above)issettoC3B3[1],this
parameterstocreatetheNoteSeries.
parametersetsthehighestscalestepforthechords
rootnote,afterwhichtherangemodifiedinputnotes However,whenRootPositionisturnedonforNote
willbedroppeddownanoctaveinordertostay TypeRegular,thebehaviorisabitdifferent,and
centeredaroundthe4thoctave.Forexample,ifthe requiressomeexplanation,asbelow.
valueisF#,thenstartingwithGthenoteswillbe Iftheinputnotesspananoctaveorless,theeffectis
droppeddownanoctave. verypredictable,andsimilartotheeffectwhenNote
FIG.4showsanexamplewhereaMaj7chordina TypeisanyothersettingbesidesRegular.
varietyofvoicingsisplayedthrough7scaletones,i.e. Iftheinputnotesspananoctaveorless:
CMaj7,DMaj7,EMaj7,FMaj7,GMaj7etc.SinceForce
RangeWrap=F#,theresultinginputnotesdrop Input Sort is: Result on Input Notes before replication:
downanoctavestartingwiththeGMaj7chord.This Notes placed in root position for chord, in
Up
allowsyoutokeepaGEinaspecificrangeregardless octave of lowest note, sorted in up direction
ofwhereachordisplayedonthekeyboard,butto Notes placed in root position for chord, in
adjustatwhichpointitdropsdownanoctave. Down
octave of lowest note, sorted in down direction
Force Range = C3-B3[1] As Played Notes are arranged so the first note is the root
Input Notes
Force Range Wrap = F# Random pitch class.
Iftheinputnotesspanmorethananoctave,theeffect
islesspredictable.IftheInputSort=Up,AsPlayed,
orRandom,thefirstnoteofeachreplicationwillbethe
rootpitchclass(meaningthattheNoteSerieswillstart
withtherootnote,i.e.ifthekeyofthechordisD,the
firstnotewillbeaD).IftheInputSort=Down,then
Note:NotavailableunlessForceRangeissetto
thelastnoteofeachreplicationwillbetherootpitch
C3B3[1].
class.However,noteslowerthantherootnotewillstill
Root Position [Off, On] beallowed,since,afterall,thepurposeofNoteType
=Regularistocollectthenotesasplayed.Forexample,
ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA
withInputSort=Up,ifyouplayG2C4E4G4
ModulearegeneratedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect).In
(Cmaj/G),thenoteswillbeorderedsothataCisfirst,
mostcases,thisisdonebasedonaNoteSeries.When
butthelowGwillstillbepresentineachreplication.
RootPositionisOn(checked),theNoteSerieswillbe
createdinrootposition,regardlessoftheinversionof Iftheinputnotesspanmorethananoctave:
thechord,basedonchordrecognition.Inotherwords,
Input Sort is: Result on Input Notes before replication:
whenthisisOff(unchecked),ifyouplayCMaj/E,the
NoteSerieswillstartfromEandcontinueup,orifyou Notes are arranged so the first note is the
Up,
playCMaj/G,theNoteSerieswillstartwithG.By root pitch class (i.e. if the key of the chord is
As Played
usingRootPositionOn(checked),youcanmake D, the first note will be a D). Notes lower than
Random
the root note will still be allowed.
surethatanyinversionofachordendsupthesame.
Forexample,CMaj/EandCMaj/Gwillbothbethe Notes are arranged so the last note is the
sameasCMaj,andtheNoteSerieswillstartfromaC. Down root pitch class. Notes lower than the root
ThiscanallowaGEtobehavemorepredictablywith note will still be allowed.
allinversionsofachord.(SeeNoteSeriesGroupon
NotethatForceRangemaybeappliedin
page 956.)
conjunctionwithRootPosition.Forexample,with
Note:WhentheGETypeisGeneratedDrum,the anyForceRangesettingotherthanOff,theeffectsof
notescomefromDrumPatternsandnottheNote RootPositionwithNoteType=Regularbecome
Series.Thedrumpatternscanbeusedtogenerate
melodies,inadditiontodrumandpercussiongrooves.
107
Program mode: HD-1
quitepredictable,asspansgreaterthananoctaveare 1st:Whenyouinputachordfromthekeyboard,the
essentiallycompressedintooneoctavebeforegoing firststepofthephraseorpatternwillsound.When
intotheNoteSeriessection. youoperatethecontroller,thephraseorpatternwill
continueadvancing.
Clock Advance Chord1:Whenyouinputachordfromthekeyboard,
Hereyoucanmakesettingsfortheclockthatwill thefirstseveralstepsofthephraseorpatternwill
operatetheKARMAModule.Byusingthesesettings sound,accordingtothenumberofnotesthatyou
inconjunctionwiththeDynamicMIDI(Program77) input.Whenyouoperatethecontroller,thephraseor
function,youcanuseManualAdvancebyoperating patternwillcontinueadvancing.
controllerssuchasthejoystickornotesfromthe Chord2:Whenyouinputachordfromthekeyboard,it
keyboardtotriggertheclockthatoperatesthe willsoundinthesamewayasforChord1.However,
KARMAModule,causingthephraseorpatternto thephraseorpatternwillplayfromthebeginningof
advanceunderyourcontrol. thepatternwhenyouoperatethecontroller.
Mode [Auto, Dyn, Auto+Dyn1, Auto+Dyn2] Chord3:Whenyouinputachordfromthekeyboard,it
Auto:TheKARMAModulewilloperateaccordingto willsoundinthesamewayasforChord1.However,
theTempo(Program11a)setting.IfMIDIClock thephraseorpatternwillstartfromthesecondstep
(Global21a)isExternal,theKARMAModulewill whenyouoperatethecontroller.Whensimulating
operateinsynchronizationwiththeMIDIclockfrom acousticguitarfingerpicking,thisallowsyoutocreate
theExternalMIDIdevice.Normallyyouwillselect anaturalconnectionbetweentheplayedchordandthe
Auto. fingerpickingsoundedbythecontroller.
Dyn:TheclockbywhichtheKARMAModulewill Velocity Sense Bottom [001127]

operatecanbetriggeredbyoperatingthejoystickor ThisisvalidwhenModeisDyn,Auto+Dyn1orAuto
othercontrolleraccordingtotheDynamicMIDI +Dyn2.IftheDynamicMIDISourceisNoteor
(Program77)setting,causingthephraseorpatternto Velocity,thephrasewillbeproducedbyapplyingthe
advance,notebynote.(SetDynamicMIDIDestination velocityofeachManualAdvancetriggerthatisinput
toClockAdvance.) totheKARMAModuletothenotesastheyare
Youcaninputachordfromoneareaofthekeyboard, generated.Thisparameterspecifiesthelowerlimitofa
andusenotesfromanotherareaofthekeyboardto scaledrangethatthevelocityisadjustedbybefore
advancethroughthearpeggiopattern. beingapplied.
Auto+Dyn1:TheKARMAModulewilloperate Withasettingof001,thevelocitydatawillbeinputto
accordingtobothAutoandDyn. theKARMAModulewithanunmodifiedrangeof1
Auto+Dyn2:TheKARMAModulewilloperate 127(fullsensitivity).
accordingtobothAutoandDyn,exceptthatatrigger Withasettingof064,velocitydataintherangeof1
receivedfromDynamicMIDIwillmomentarilystop 127willbescaledtotherangeof64127beforeitis
theautomaticadvancementuntiltheKARMAModule inputtotheKARMAModule(halfsensitivity).
playbackisrestarted.
Note Map
Size [ 3, r3, r, x3, x, x., e3, e, e., q3, q, Event]
TheNoteMapParametersallowafinalnoteshaper
ThisisvalidwhenModeisDyn,Auto+Dyn1orAuto tobeappliedattheendoftheKARMAnotegeneration
+Dyn2.Itspecifiestheunitbywhichthephraseor process.Implementedasalargegrid(128x129),it
patternwillbeadvancedwhenthecontrolleris allowsanyincomingMIDInotegeneratedbyKARMA
operated. (0127)toberemappedtoanyotherMIDInote(0127),
3q:Thephraseorpatternwillbeadvancedbythe orfilteredout(removed).Therefore,adiagonalline
specifiednotevalue,synchronizedtotherhythmofthe representslinear/nochange,andwhatgoesinis
phraseorpattern.DependingontheinternalGE whatcomesout.
RhythmParameters,thismayresultinnonotes,1note, Youcanuseittoremapdrumkitsfromonesetofdrum
orseveralnotesforaaparticulartrigger. soundstoanother,removeorsubstitutedifferentdrum
Event:Thephraseorpatternwillbeadvancedbyone soundswithinthesamekit,removecertainpitches
noteoronechord,ignoringtherhythmofthephraseor frommelodicoutput,constrainoutputpitchesto
pattern.Eachtriggerwillproducethenextnoteor variousscales,limitnotesgeneratedthruMelodic
chordinthephrase. Repeattocertainpitches,andmore.Formore
information,seeRepeat(MelodicRepeat)Groupon
Chord Trigger Mode [Off, 1st, Chord1, page 994.
Chord2, Chord3]
Eachprogram,combination,orsongcontainsasingle
ThisisvalidwhenModeisDyn,Auto+Dyn1or usertable.namedCustom.Thesettingsofthis
Auto+Dyn2.Itspecifieshowachordwillbesounded singletablearestoredinsidetheprogram,
whenthatchordisinputfromthekeyboard. combination,orsong.Additionally,thereareanumber
Off:Therewillbenosoundwhenyouinputachord oftablesstoredinglobalmemory,withpredefined
fromthekeyboard.Thisisanalogoustoaguitarist functions,thatcanbeselectedforusebyanyModule.
changingchordsinthelefthand.Thephraseorpattern ThesametablecanbeappliedtomultipleModulesat
willsoundfromthefirststepwhenyouoperatethe thesametime.AllModulescanrunthroughthesingle
controller.
108
Customtableatthesametime,orbeassignedtoutilize However,ifyouplaytheinputchordanoctavelower,
variousGlobalNoteMaps,inanycombination. thenoteswouldgothroughtheoctaveofthetable
belowMiddleC,andwouldnothavetheremoved
Mode (Note Map Mode) [Off, On-Main, note.Thisallowsyoutosetupdifferentmapsforeach
On-Repeat, On-All] octave,yethavethetabletrackyourchordchanges
Selectsoneofseveraldifferentmodesofoperation, withineachoctave.
controllingwhetherallnotesgeneratedbyKARMAor Note:Thewaythatthisparameterworksisaffectedby
asubsetofthosenotesaremodifiedbythespecified KbdTrack(C2Ref),below.
NoteMapTable.
Off:Thetableisinactiveandnofilteringorremapping Keyboard Track (C2 Ref)
isdone. (Note Map Kbd Track) [Off, On]
OnMain:Thetableisusedtomaporfilternotesbeing SelectswhethertheNoteMapTablewilltrackyour
generatedfromtheNoteSeriesorDrumPattern(s),but chordchangesacrosstheentirekeyboard,with
notanynotesgeneratedasaresultoftheMelodic referencetoC2.
Repeatparameters. WhenChordTrackisalreadyturnedon,settingKbd
OnRepeat:Thetableisusedtomaporfilternotes TracktoOn(checked)providestheadditional
beinggeneratedasaresultoftheMelodicRepeat functionalityoftrackingthetabletothelowestnoteof
parameters,butnotthemainnotesgeneratedbythe theinputchord(withreferencetoC2),nomatter
NoteSeriesorDrumPattern(s).Forexample,thiscan whereitisplayed.Inotherwords,anychordplayedin
beusedtothinoutrepeatsorlimitstrangenotesin anyoctavewillbetransposedsoitendsupwithits
DrumPatternsfromtransposedrepeats,without lowestnoteintheC2octavebeforebeingrunthrough
affectingthemainnotes. thetable,andreturnedtothecorrectoctaveafter.Asan
example,assumeyouplayaninputchordinthekeyof
Formoreinformation,seeRepeat(MelodicRepeat) CintheC2octave(lowestoctaveofa61note
Grouponpage 994. keyboard).Ifyouremovethe3rd(forexample)which
OnAll:Thetableisusedtomaporfilterallnotes isE2,playingachordanywhereonthekeyboardwill
beinggeneratedbythemodule. havethelowestnoterunthroughthetableatC2and
hencekeeptheexactsametablemappingforany
Table (Note Map Table) [Custom, chord,removingthethirdinanykey,inanyoctave.
Gtable 1Maj 7 -> oct] Thisallowsyoutosetupcomplexmelodicmaps
SelectstheCustomtable(usertable)oroneofthe spanningseveraloctavesifdesired,andthenhave
GlobalNoteMapTables. themtrackyourchordsalloverthekeyboard.
Note:YoucaneditacustomtableinProgram79: Note:NotavailableunlessChordTrackissettoOn
Name/NoteMap.(See79c:NoteMaponpage 125.) (checked).
Transpose (Note Map Transpose) [12+12] Note Map Table Display

ThisallowsyoutosetupaFixedNoteTranspose ThisdisplaysasmallgraphicofthecurrentNoteMap
Map,withoutChordTrackorKeyboardTrack(C2 TableselectedfortheModule.ChangingtheNote
Ref),andthenapplyanoffsettotransposeittoother MapTablesetting(directlyorviaRealTime
keys.Inotherwords,youcansetupafixedmapso ParameterControl)causestheselectedtabletobe
thatnomatterwhatyouplay,itcomesoutinC displayed.
Mixolydian.Then,youcansettheNoteMapTranspose
to+2,anditwouldbeDMixolydian,etc.
TheTransposeparameterisonlyavailablewhen
ChordTrackisOff(unchecked).
Chord Track (Note Map Chord Track) [Off, On]

SelectswhethertheNoteMapTablewilltrackyour
chordchangeswithintherangeofasingleoctave. ThevariousNoteMapTablescanbeviewedfullsize
ontheNoteMapPage(79c).
TablesusethekeyofCasareference.Asanexample,
assumeyouplayaCChordthatgeneratesaCMajor Whenyoupressthedisplay,youwillmovetothenote
arpeggio(CEGetc.)intheMiddleCoctave(C4to maptableforthesamemoduleintheNoteMaptabof
C5).YoueditthatoctaveinthenoteMapEditorto theName/NoteMappage.
haveno3rd(E4removed).
WithChordTracksettoOff(unchecked),playinga t 7-3: Page Menu Commands
Dchordwouldexhibitnochangednotes,because
thereisnoE4inthearpeggio.WithChordTrackset ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
toOn(checked),theDchordwouldsoundthesameas numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
theCchord(no3rd),exceptitwouldbeinthekeyofD. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
WhenOn(checked),allchordsplayedintheMiddleC commandsonpage 142.
octavewouldhavetheir3rdremoved. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
109
Program mode: HD-1
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. Sceneonpage 151.
2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation, 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150. Sceneonpage 151.
3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
page 151.
74: Module Parameters-Trigger

74PMC
74a
74b
HereyoucansetKARMAModuleTriggerparameters. Off(unchecked):Triggeringwilloccurinstantlyatthe
InProgrammode,youcanuseoneKARMAModule momentyouplaythekeyboardoractivateatrigger
(ModuleA). throughDynamicMIDI.
Youcanmakethefollowingsettings. Quantize Window [x! q ]
Timingcorrectionandlatchoperationfortriggers Specifythemetricdivisionbywhichinputnotedata
SettingsfortheenvelopegeneratorsinsidetheGE fromthekeyboardorDynamicMIDIwillbequantized
beforetriggeringtheModuleandthestartofthe
phrase.
74a: Program Name and Tempo
16thtripletQuarter:Specifythetimewindowasa
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a: notevalueintervalrelativetothetempo.Fortriplet
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. basedpatterns,youmayneedtoselectoneofthe
tripletbasedsettingsifyouintendtoretriggeroffthe
beat.
74b: Module Parameters-Trigger
Note:WhenQuantizeTriggerisOn(checked),
Control triggeringatatimingthatiswithina32ndnoteofthe
QuantizeWindowsettingwillbeconsideredlate
Quantize Trig/Window (shownbythepinkcolorinthediagramabove),and
willcausetheplaybacktobeginimmediatelywhile
Quantize Trigger [Off, On] bringingtheModuleintosyncwithotherrunning
Quantize(correct)thetimingoftheModules ModulesortimebasedfeaturessuchastheDrum
triggeringcausedbyinputnotedatafromthe TrackandRPPR.Ifthetriggerislaterthanthis(shown
keyboardorDynamicMIDI. bytheyellowcolorinthediagramabove),playback
On(checked):Triggertimingwillbequantizedtothe willstartatthenextmetricdivisioncorrespondingto
metricunitspecifiedbytheWindowsetting,relative theQuantizeWindow.
tothebasictempo.
110
Program P7: KARMA 74: Module Parameters-Trigger
Update On Release [Off, On] 1st(1stOnlyUntilModuleStops+DynamicMIDI):

Allowsthereleaseofindividualinputnotestoremove AfterKARMAfunctionisturnedon,onlythefirst
thosenotesfromthenotesgoingtotheGE,thereby noteonwillcausetriggering.Subsequentnoteonswill
changingtheeffecttouseonlythosenotesstillbeing notcausetriggering.
held. Thisisusefulfordrumgroovesandphraseswhereyou
Off(unchecked):Releasingsomenoteswhileholding donotwantsubsequentchordchangestorestartthe
otherscausesnochangetotheinputsourcematerial, phrase.
andthereforenochangeintheGeneratedEffect.Thisis Dyn(DynamicMIDI):Triggeringwillbeproducedby
themostsmoothandnaturalway,andsimilartomost operatingthecontrollerspecifiedbyDynamicMIDI
advancedautoaccompanimentkeyboards. (Program77).Inthiscase,noteonswillnotcause
On(checked):Notesthatarereleasedareremoved triggering.
fromtheinputsourcematerial,therebychangingthe Note:Withanyofthesesettings,thetriggerwillbe
effecttouseonlythosenotesstillbeingheld.Thisis appliedbyoperationsofthecontrollerspecifiedfor
typicallythewaysimplearpeggiatorswork,especially DynamicMIDI(Program77),ifDestinationissetto
iftheirlatchmodeisturnedoff. TriggerNotes&Envs,TriggerNote(seeDynamic
MIDISources&Destinationsonpage 1038).
Delay
Note Latch [Off, On]
Delay Start [Off, Fixed, 34x1] Specifieswhetherthephraseorpatternwillcontinue
Specifythedelayfromwhenthetrigger(bynotedata) whenyoureleaseyourhandfromthekeyboard(latch
isinput,untilthephraseorpatternstarts. on)orwhetherthephraseorpatternwillstop(latch
34x1:Specifythedelaytimeasanotevalueinterval off).InProgrammode,turnthisOn(checked)anduse
relativetothetempo. theLATCHswitchtocontrollatchon/off.
Fixed:Thedelaytimewillbespecifiedintimeunits Off(unchecked):Latchwillbeoffregardlessofthe
(ms).SetthetimeinDelayStartFixed. LATCHswitchon/offstatus.
On(checked):TheLATCHswitchwillcontrollatch
Delay Start Fixed [0000 ms 5000 ms] on/off.
ThisisvalidifDelayStartissettoFixed.SetDelay WhentheLATCHswitchisoff(LEDdark),latchisoff.
Startinmsunits.Thedelayspecifiedherewill
remaingconstant,evenwhenthetempoischanged. WhentheLATCHswitchison(LEDlit),latchison.
Note:InCombinationandSequencermode,uptofour
Note KARMAModulescanbeused.Inthesemodes,you
canturnNoteLatchon/offindependentlyforeach
Note Trigger [Any, AKR, 1st, Dyn] KARMAModule.IfyouuseCopyKARMAModule
Any(AnyNote+DynamicMIDI):Everynoteonwill tocopyKARMAModulesettingsfromthesemodesto
causetriggering;i.e.,eachnoteonwillcausethe aprogram,theremaybecasesinwhichthesetting
phraseorpatterntorestartfromthebeginning. herewillbeoff,sothatlatchonwillnotoccurevenif
AKR(1stNoteAfterKeyRelease+DynamicMIDI): youturnontheLATCHswitch.Insuchcases,turnthis
Triggeringwilloccurwhenthefirstnoteonoccurs on.
fromastateinwhichnokeysareon.Triggeringwill
notoccurifevenonenoteisbeingpressed.By Envelope1, Envelope2, Envelope3
changingthechordyouplayonthekeyboardwhile EachGEprovidesthreeEnvelopes.Theycanproduce
holdingatleastonenote,youcanchangethenotesof timevariantcontrolofvelocity,tempo,duration,pitch
thephraseorpatternwithouttriggering. bend,andvariouscontrolchanges.
111
Program mode: HD-1
Youcanspecifytriggeringconditionsandlatch Theenvelopecanbesettorepeatasaloopaspartof
conditionsforeachofthethreeEnvelopesoftheGE, theGE.Aloopedenvelopewillbecontrolledas
separatelyfromtheNoteTriggerandLatch(although follows.
manytimesyouwillwantthemtobethesame.) ForSus1andRel1,theenvelopewillcontinue
IftheselectedGEdoesnotuseEnvelopes,these repeatingaslongasthekeyisheld.
settingswillhavenoeffect.Forinformationon ForSus2andRel2,theenvelopewillcontinue
specificGEs,pleaseseetheVoiceNameListon repeatingevenifthekeyisreleased.
page 1099.
Envelope Trigger [Any, AKR, 1st, Dyn] t 7-4: Page Menu Commands
Any(AnyNote+DynamicMIDI):Everynoteonwill
causetriggering;i.e.,eachnoteonwillcausethe
envelopetostartfromthebeginning.
AKR(1stNoteAfterKeyRelease+DynamicMIDI): commandsonpage 142.
Triggeringwilloccurwhenthefirstnoteonoccurs
fromastateinwhichnokeysareon.Retriggering
Programonpage 142.
willnotoccurifevenonenoteisbeingpressed.
1st(1stOnlyUntilModuleStops+DynamicMIDI):
AfterKARMAisturnedon,onlythefirstnoteonwill
causetriggering.Subsequentnoteonswillnotcause 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
triggering. seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
Dyn(DynamicMIDI):Triggeringwillbeproducedby 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
operatingthecontrollerspecifiedbyDynamicMIDI information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
(Program77).Inthiscase,noteonswillnotcause page 151.
triggering. 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Note:Foranyofthesesettings,triggeringwillbe Sceneonpage 151.
appliedbyoperationsofthecontrollerspecifiedfor 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
DynamicMIDI,ifDestinationissettoTrigger Sceneonpage 151.
Notes&Envs,TriggerEnv1TriggerEnv3.
Envelope Latch [Off, Sus1, Rel1, Sus2, Rel2] seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
Off:Theenvelopewillnotbelatched.Whenallkeys
arereleasedoraDynamicMIDItriggerisreleased
(noteoff),theenvelopewillmovetotherelease
segment.
Sus1:Oncetheenvelopeisstarted,itwillproceed
throughattackdecaysustainrelease.Ifnote
offoccursbeforetheenvelopereachesthesustainlevel,
theenvelopewillnotbeginthereleaseimmediately
butwaituntilafterreachingthesustainlevel.Evenin
thecaseofanoteforwhichthenoteon/offintervalis
short,theenvelopewillproceedthroughattack
decaysustainreleaseasifthekeywasbeingheld
foralongertime.Iftheenvelopereachesthesustain
levelbeforereceivingnoteoff,itwillholdatthe
sustainlevel(thesameoperationasfortheOffsetting).
Ifthenoteoffoccursaftertheenvelopereachesthe
sustainlevel,theenvelopewillbeginthereleasewhen
noteoffoccurs(thesameoperationasfortheOff
setting).
Rel1:Oncetheenvelopehasstarted,itwillproceed
throughattackdecayrelease,regardlessofwhen
thenoteoffoccurs.Evenifakeyisbeingpressed,the
envelopewillignoresustain,andwillproceed
immediatelytotherelease.
Sus2:Theenvelopewillignorenoteoff,andwill
proceedthroughattachdecaysustain.Therefore,
thissettingwillneverreachthereleaseportion.Other
operationisthesameasforSus1.
Rel2:ThesameoperationasRel1,exceptwillignore
noteoffforthepurposeoflooping,asexplainedbelow.
112
Program P7: KARMA 75: GE Real-Time Parameters
75: GE Real-Time Parameters

75PMC
75a
75b
HereyoucanedittheRealTimeparametersoftheGE EachoftheGERealTimeParametershasabasicvalue,
selectedfortheKARMAModule.ByassigningGE acontrollerassignmentwithpolarity,andminimum
parameterstoKARMARealTimeControls,youcan andmaximumvalues(forsettingtherangeofthe
controlthephraseorpatterninrealtimewhileyou selectedcontroller).WhenyouselectanewGE,the
play. basic,minimum,andmaximumvalueswillberesetto
thevaluessavedintheGE,andthecontroller
assignmentwillbesettothedefaultsfortheGEsRTC
75a: GE Number & Name, RTC Select, Model.
and Tempo FordetailsontheindividualGERealTime
GE Number & Name parameters,pleaseseetheKARMAGEguideon
[0000: Arp Model 01 Up/Dn page 949.
2047: Tempo Env Repeats] MIN (Minimum Value) [5000+5000]
ThisshowstheGEselectedfortheModule.Formore Thissetstheparametervaluewhentheselected
information,pleasesee06b:GESelectonpage 8. controllerisatitsminimumpointforinstance,when
asliderisatthebottomofitsthrow.Notethatyoucan
GE RTC Select [116, 1732]
reversetheactionofthecontrollerbysettingthistobe
ThisswitchestheGErealtimeparameterdisplay. higherthantheMAXvalue,below.
116:GEparameters116willbedisplayed. TheavailablevalueswilldependontheGERealTime
1732:GEparameters1732willbedisplayed. parameter.
q (Tempo) [40.00240.00, EXT] MAX (Maximum Value) [5000+5000]

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTempoonpage 5. Thissetstheparametervaluewhentheselected
controllerisatitsmaximumpointforinstance,when
asliderisatthetopofitsthrow.
75b: GE Real-Time Parameters
TheavailablevalueswilldependontheGERealTime
GE Parameter 0132 [Parameter Name] parameter.
EachGEhasupto32presetparametersforcontrolling VALUE [5000+5000]
thephraseorpattern,referredtoasGERealTime
ThissetsthebasicvalueoftheGEparameter,which
Parameters(orGERTP).Thespecificparameters,and
correspondstothecenterpositionofthecontroller.It
theavailablevalueranges,willvarydependingonthe
mustbewithintheMINandMAXvalues.
selectedGE.
ASSIGN [---, Slider18, Slider (SW)18, HereyoucanassignthecontrollerfortheGEReal

SW18, DynaMIDI18] Timeparameter.
113
Program mode: HD-1
ByassigningGERealTimeParametertoKARMA Turningtheslidertowardtheminimumwill
RealTimeControls,theycanbecontrolledinrealtime produceavalueof+0000.Turningittocenteror
whileyouplay. maximumwillproduceavalueof+0100.
:Noassignment. SW18:Theparameterwillbeassignedtoswitch18.
Theminimumisoff,andthemaximumison.
Slider18:AssigntheparametertoKARMASLIDERS
18.Thesliderwillcontinuouslycontrolthevalue. Note:thecorrespondencebetweentheKARMA
SLIDERS,SWITCHESandMIDIcontrolchange
Forexample,letsassumethattheRhythmSwing%
messagescanbespecifiedinGlobalP31:
parameteroftheselectedGEissettoaMINof+0000,
Controller/Scale,Controller.ForSW18andSlider
andaMAXof+0100.
(SW)18,aMIDIcontrolchangemessagevalueof
IfyousetValue:+0050,Assign:Slider1,and lessthan64willbeoff,and64orgreaterwillbe
Polarity:+ on.
Slider1atthecenterpositionwillproduceavalue DynaMIDI18:ThiscorrespondstoDynamicMIDI
of+0050.Atminimumthevaluewillbe+0000,and 18.
atmaximumthevaluewillbe+0100.Turningthe
SelectthisifyouwishtocontrolaGEparameterusing
Sliderfromcentertowardtheminimumwillcontrol
thecontrollerselectedforSourceinDynamicMIDI(7
thevaluefrom+0050+0000,andturningitfrom
8).(SettheDynamicMIDIDestinationtoRTParams
centertowardthemaximumwillcontrolthevalue
Control.)
from+0050+0100.
IfyousetValue:+0080,Assign:Slider1,and POLARITY [+, ]
Polarity:+ Thissetsthepolarityoftheselectedcontroller.
Slider1atthecenterpositionwillproduceavalue +:InthecaseofSlider18,movingdownfromthe
of+0080.Atminimumthevaluewillbe+0000,and centerwillmovethevaluetowardstheMinimum
atfarmaximumthevaluewillbe+0100.Turningthe setting,andmovingupfromthecenterwillmove
sliderfromcentertowardtheminimumwillcontrol towardstheMaximumsetting.InthecaseofSlider
thevaluefrom+0080+0000,andturningitfrom (SW)18,thebottomofthesliderthrowwillbe
centertowardthemaximumwillcontrolthevalue Minimum,andthetopwillbeMaximum.Inthe
from+0080+0100. caseofSW18,theparameterwillbeMaximum
Slider(SW)18:AssigntheparametertoKARMA whentheLEDislit.
SLIDER18.TheSliderwillswitchthevaluebetween :InthecaseofSlider18,movingdownfromthe
minimumandmaximumonly.Theminimumtocenter centerwillmovethevaluetowardstheMaximum
rangeoftheSliderisoff,andthecentertomaximumis setting,andmovingupfromthecenterwillmove
on. towardstheMinimumsetting.InthecaseofSlider
IfyousetValue:+0050,Assign:Slider(SW)1, (SW)18,thebottomofthesliderthrowwillbe
andPolarity:+ Maximum,andthetopwillbeMinimum.Inthe
caseofSW18,theparameterwillbeMaximum
whentheLEDisdark.
75PMC
75c
114
Program P7: KARMA 75: GE Real-Time Parameters
Scene Status
75c: Scenes
Displaysinformationrelatedtoupcomingscene
HereyoucansetaSceneChangeQuantizeWindow changes.WhenusingtheSceneChangeQuantize
thatcontrolsatimeintervalforwhenthescene Windowwithlongersettingssuchas1,2or4bars,you
changeswilloccur,andviewinformationabout canselectascenechangeseveralbeatsormorein
upcomingscenechanges. advanceofwhenyouwantittooccur.TheControl
SurfaceandSceneMatrixwillchangetothenewscene
Scene Change Quantize Window immediately,butinternallythescenechangewillnot
[x! q, 1 Bar4 Bars] occuruntilthespecifiedtimeintervalhaselapsed.The
Specifythemetricdivisionbywhichscenechanges SceneStatusareadisplaysamessageindicatinga
willbequantized.Dependingonthesetting,thismay pendingscenechange,fromthecurrentscenetothe
delaythescenechangefromoccurringuntilthenext newscene.Youcanusethistocancelapending
beat,nextbar,orseveralbarslater. scenechangeifdesired.Forexample,ifyouareon
x!q :Specifythetimewindowasanotevalue Scene2andyouselectScene8,themessage2>8
intervalrelativetothetempo.Fortripletbased willbedisplayed.TheSceneMatrixandControl
patterns,youmayneedtoselectoneofthetriplet SurfaceimmediatelychangetoScene8,butinternally
basedsettingsifyouintendtoperformscenechanges thescenechangehasnotyetoccurred.Youcanreselect
offthebeat. Scene2andtherebycanceltheupcomingscene
change.
1Bar4Bars:Specifythetimewindowasabarvalue
relativetothetempo,andthetimesignatureofthe Note:ifyouhaveselectedascenechangeinadvance,
PerformanceortheModulesGE. andithasnotyetoccurred,theControlSurfaceand
variouseditingpagessuchastheKARMAGEPage06
Note:iftheKARMAT.Sig(TimeSignature)issetto andtheControlSurfaceRT/KARMAPage09dwill
somethingotherthan0GE/TS,thenthespecified showthenewscenesparameters.Editingthemwhile
TimeSignatureiswhatwillbeusedtocalculatethebar thescenechangeispendingwillactuallybeeditingthe
lengths.IftheKARMAT.Sigissetto0GE/TS upcomingscene,andyouwillnothearanychanges
(meaningthattheModulesGEusesitsownstored untilthescenechangehasactuallyoccurred.
internaltimesignature),thenthebarlengthisbasedon
theinternalstoredtimesignatureoftheGE.Formore
information,seeKARMAT.Sig(TimeSignature)on t 7-5: Page Menu Commands
page7.
Note:Scenechangesselectedatatimingthatiswithin numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
a32ndnoteoftheSceneChangeQuantizeWindow shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
settingwillbeconsideredlate(shownbythepink commandsonpage 142.
colorinthediagramabove),andwillcausethescene
changetooccurimmediately.Ifthescenechangeis
Programonpage 142.
laterthanthis,itwillbeconsideredearly(shownby
theyellowcolorinthediagramabove),andwilloccur 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
atthenextmetricdivisioncorrespondingtotheScene ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
ChangeQuantizeWindow.(Duetospace,notall 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
settingsareshowninthediagram.) seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
q (Tempo) [40.00240.00, EXT] 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTempoonpage 5.
page 151.
115
Program mode: HD-1
4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Sceneonpage 151. seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
Sceneonpage 151.
76: Perf Real-Time Parameters

76PMC
76a
76b
HereyoucanassigncontrollerstoKARMA Real-Time Parameters 18

PerformanceRealTimeParameters(Perf.RTP)outside
oftheGERealTimeParametersthatcontrolthe Group [Off, PE, Mix, Control, Trigger,
internalsettingsoftheGE.Examplesincludethe Key Zones, Random Seeds]
KARMAKeyZoneparameters(Program71b)and Selectsthegroupofparametersthatyouwishto
KARMAControlandTriggerparameters(Program7 chooseaParameterfrom.TheKARMAparameters
3,74). aredividedintosixgroups.
ByassigningthesetoKARMASLIDERS18and
KARMASWITCHES18etc.,youcancontrolthemin Parameter [---, Time Signature
realtimewhileyouplay. Retrigger Each Time]
InPerfRealTimeParameters18,ifyouselecta Indicatestheparameterthatyouwishtoassign.The
parameterbyGroupandParameterandOn parametersthatcanbeselectedwilldifferaccordingto
(checked)ModuleA,thatparametercanno theGroupsetting,above.
longerbeeditedasaKARMAKeyZoneparameter
Min (Minimum Value) [8192+8192]
(Program71b)orKARMAControlandTrigger
parameter(Program73,74). Thissetstheparametervaluewhentheselected
controllerisatitsminimumpointforinstance,when
asliderisatthebottomofitsthrow.Notethatyoucan
76a: Program Name and Tempo reversetheactionofthecontrollerbysettingthistobe
higherthantheMAXvalue,below.
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. Theavailablevalueswilldependontheselected
parameter.Whenaparameterisselected,the
minimumparametervaluewillbesetasthedefault.
76b: Perf Real-Time Parameters
Max (Maximum Value) [8192+8192]
Youcansetup8differentPerformanceRealTime
Parameters,eachofwhichhasanidenticalsetof Thissetstheparametervaluewhentheselected
parameters,asdescribedbelow. controllerisatitsmaximumpointforinstance,when
asliderisatthetopofitsthrow.Theavailablevalues
willdependontheselectedparameter.
116
Program P7: KARMA 76: Perf Real-Time Parameters
Value [8192+8192] +0000:Off

SpecifiesthevalueoftheselectedKARMAparameter. +0001:Lowest
IfyouturnonA(ModuleA)andselectParameter, +0002:Highest
thiswillbesetasthecurrentvalueoftheparameter
(setin73and74).Thevalueyouspecifyherewillbe +0003:C3B3[1]
thecentervaluewhenyouuseAssigntocontrolthe +0004:C3B3[2]
parameterfromaKARMASLIDER,etc.Thevaluewill
Formoreinformation,seeForceRangeonpage 106.
notbeavailablewhenassigningtoSwitchesorSlider
(SW). Force Range Wrap [+0000+0011]
A ( Module A) [Off, On] AssignstheForceRangeWrap(Program73b)
function.
SpecifiesthemoduletowhichthesettingsofRTParm
18willapply.InProgrammode,onlyoneKARMA +0000:C0011:B
Module(ModuleA)canbeused.ThusinProgram Formoreinformation,seeForceRangeWrapon
mode,youcanturntheRTParm18settingson/off. page 107.
On(checked):RTParmsettingswillbevalid.
Root Position [+0000, +0001]
Off(unchecked):RTParmsettingswillbeignored.
AssignstheRootPosition(Program73b)function.
Assign [---, Slider18, Slider (SW) 18, +0000:Off
SW18, DynaMIDI18] +0001:On
Assignstheselectedparametertoacontroller.Ifyou
Formoreinformation,seeRootPositiononpage 107.
assignaparametertoKARMARealTimeControls,
youcancontrolitinrealtimewhileyouplay. Clock Advance Mode [+0000+0003]
Formoreinformation,seeASSIGNonpage 113. AssignstheMode(ClockAdvanceMode)(Program
73b)function.
Polarity [+, ]
+0000:Auto
Specifiesthepolarityusedwhenyouoperatethe
KARMARealTimeControlsthatyouselectedfor +0001:Dyn
Assign. +0002:Auto+Dyn1
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePOLARITYon +0003:Auto+Dyn2
page 114.
Formoreinformation,seeModeonpage 108.
Group: PE (Performance) Clock Advance Size [+0000+0011]
Time Signature [+0000+0048] AssignstheSize(ClockAdvanceSize)(Program7
3b)function.
AssignstheKARMAT.Sig(Program71a)function.
+0000+0010:r3q
+0000:Off
+0011:Event
+0001+0048:Correspondsto1/416/16.
Formoreinformation,seeSizeonpage 108.
Formoreinformation,seeKARMAT.Sig(Time
Signature)onpage 101. CA Vel. Sensitivity [+0001+0127]
IfyouselectTimeSig.asaparameterfor AssignstheVelocitySenseBottom(Program73b)
assignment,youwillnotbeabletosetA(Parm function.
ModuleA).
Formoreinformation,seeVelocitySenseBottomon
Group: Mix page 108.
Transpose [0036+0036] CA Chord Trigger Mode [+0000+0004]

AssignstheTranspose(Program73b)function. AssignstheChordTriggerMode(Program73b)
Controlthetranspositioninsemitonesteps. function.
+0000:Off
Transpose Octave [0036+0036]
AssignstheTranspose(Program73b)function. +0001:1st
Controlthetranspositioninoctavesteps. +0002:Chrd1
Transpose Octave/5th [0036+0036] +0003:Chrd2
AssignstheTranspose(Program73b)function. +0004:Chrd3
Controlthetranspositioninstepsofanoctaveanda Formoreinformation,seeChordTriggerModeon
fifth. page 108.
Group: Control Note Map Mode [+0000+0003]

AssignstheMode(NoteMapMode)(Program73b)
Force Range [+0000+0004] function.
AssignstheForceRange(Program73b)function.
+0000:Off
117
Program mode: HD-1
+0001:OnMain Delay Start [+0000+0025]

+0002:OnRepeat AssignstheDelayStart(Program74b)function.
+0003:OnAll +0000:Off
Formoreinformation,seeMode(NoteMapMode) +0001:Fixed
onpage 109. +0002+0025:r34xw
Note Map Table [+0000+0064] Formoreinformation,seeDelayStartonpage 111.
AssignstheTable(NoteMapTable)(Program73b)
Delay Start ms [+0000+5000]
function.
AssignstheDelayStartFixed(Program74b)
+0000:Custom function.
+0001+0064:GlobalTables1Maj7>oct SeeDelayStartFixed+p.111
Formoreinformation,seeTable(NoteMapTable)on
page 109. Note Trigger [+0000+0003]
AssignstheNoteTrigger(Program74b)function.
Note Map Transpose [0012+0012]
+0000:Any
AssignstheTranspose(NoteMapTranspose)
(Program73b)function. +0001:AKR
Formoreinformation,seeTranspose(NoteMap +0002:1st
Transpose)onpage 109. +0003:Dyn
Note Map Chord Track [+0000, +0001] Formoreinformation,seeNoteTriggeronpage 111.
AssignstheChordTrack(NoteMapChordTrack) Note Latch [+0000, +0001]
(Program73b)function.
AssignstheNoteLatch(Program74b)function.
+0000:Off
+0000:Off
+0001:On
+0001:On
Formoreinformation,seeChordTrack(NoteMap
Formoreinformation,seeNoteLatchonpage 111.
ChordTrack)onpage 109.
Env1 Trigger [+0000+0003]
Note Map Kbd Track [+0000, +0001]
AssignstheKeyboardTrack(NoteMapKbdTrack) Env2 Trigger [+0000+0003]
(Program73b)function.
Env3 Trigger [+0000+0003]
+0000:Off
AssignstheEnvelopeTrigger(Program74b)
+0001:On functions.
Formoreinformation,seeKeyboardTrack(C2Ref) +0000:Any
(NoteMapKbdTrack)onpage 109.
+0001:AKR
Group: Trigger +0002:1st
+0003:Dyn
Quantize Trigger [+0000, +0001]
AssignstheQuantizeTrigger(Program74b) Formoreinformation,seeEnvelopeTriggeron
function. page 112.
+0000:Off Env1 Latch Mode [+0000+0004]

+0001:On Env2 Latch Mode [+0000+0004]
Formoreinformation,seeQuantizeTriggeron
page 110. Env3 Latch Mode [+0000+0004]
AssignstheLatch(Program74b)function.
Quantize Window [+0000+0005]
+0000:Off
+0000+0005:16thtriplettoQuarterNote
+0001:Sus1
AssignstheQuantizeWindow(Program74b)
parameter.Formoreinformation,seeQuantize +0002:Rel1
Windowonpage 110. +0003:Sus2
Update On Release [+0000, +0001] +0004:Rel2
AssignstheUpdateOnRelease(Program74b) Formoreinformation,seeEnvelopeLatchon
function. page 112.
+0000:Off Group: Zone
+0001:On
Thru Inside Zone [+0000, +0001]
Formoreinformation,seeUpdateOnReleaseon
page 111. AssignstheThruInZone(Program71a)function.
118
Program P7: KARMA 76: Perf Real-Time Parameters
+0000:Off Transpose Octave/5th Out Thru [0036+0036]

+0001:On AssignstheTransposeOutZone(Program71a)
Formoreinformation,seeThruInZoneonpage 102. function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata
fromthekeyboardoutsidetheKeyZone,inunitsofan
Thru Outside Zone [+0000, +0001] octaveandafifth.
AssignstheThruOutZone(Program71a)function.
Group: Random
+0000:Off
+0001:On Start Seed [-81920+8191]
AssigntheStartSeed(Program78b)function.
Formoreinformation,seeThruOutZoneon
page 102. +0000:Random
Otherthan+0000:AnydesiredStartSeedvalue.
Key Zone Bottom [+0000+0127]
However,youcannotselectvaluesoutsidetherangeof
AssignstheBottom(KeyZoneBottom)(Program7 8192to+8191whenchangingthevalueinthisway.
1a)function.
Formoreinformation,seeStartSeedonpage 122.
+0000+0127:C1G9(correspondstonotenumbers)
Note:IftheStartSeedvalueissettoavalueoutside
Formoreinformation,seeBottom(KeyZone ofthisrangewhenyoufirstassignitasaRTParameter,
Bottom)onpage 101. itwillbelimitedtoeitherendoftherange.
Key Zone Top [+0000+0127] Freeze Loop Length [+0000+0032]
AssignstheTop(KeyZoneTop)(Program71a) AssignstheFreezeLoopLength(Program78b)
function. function.Thisspecifiesthenumberofmeasures(bars)
+0000+0127:C1G9(correspondstonotenumbers) inthephrasesthatarerepeatedlygeneratedbythe
KARMAModule.Afterbeingtriggered,theModule
Formoreinformation,seeTop(KeyZoneTop)on
willgenerateaphraseofthenumberofmeasuresyou
page 101.
specifyhere,andwillthenrepeatthatphrase.
Transpose In Thru [0036+0036]
Freeze Loop Length + Reset [+0000+0032]
AssignstheTransposeInZone(Program71a)
LikeFreezeLoopLength,above,thisalsoassignsthe
function.Thiscontrolstranspositionofthenotedata
FreezeLoopLength(Program78b)function.
fromthekeyboardwithintheKeyZone,insemitone
However,whenthisisused,andtheStartSeedissetto
steps.
someothervaluethan0:Random,changingtheFreeze
Formoreinformation,seeTransposeInZoneon LoopLengthtoanyvalueexcept0:Offwillresetthe
page 102. StartSeedinternallytotheindicatedvalue,thereby
restoringtheoriginalphraseatthenextdownbeat
Transpose Out Thru [0036+0036]
withoutretriggeringitfromthekeyboard.
AssignstheTransposeOutZone(Program71a)
Normally,ifyouweregeneratingarandomizedriff
function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata
fromaparticularStartSeedvalue,settingFreezeLoop
fromthekeyboardoutsidetheKeyZone,insemitone
Lengthto0:Offwouldcausethephrasetocontinue
units.
randomizingfromitscurrentinternalposition.Ifyou
Formoreinformation,seeThruOutZoneon thensettheFreezeLoopLengthtosomeothervalue
page 102. than0:Off,therebyloopingthephrase,itdoesnot
automaticallyresettheStartSeeduntilyouretriggerit
Transpose Octave In Thru [0036+0036]
fromthekeyboard(dependingonTriggersettings).By
AssignstheTransposeInZone(Program71a) usingFreezeLoopLength+Reset,achangeinthe
function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata FreezeLoopLengthcanadditionallyresettheinternal
fromthekeyboardwithintheKeyZone,inoctave StartSeedandthereforegeneratethesamephraseas
units. before,allowinginstantaneousswitchingbetween
randomizedandpresetphrases.
Transpose Octave Out Thru [0036+0036]
AssignstheTransposeOutZone(Program71a) Retrigger Each Time [+0000, +0001]
function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata AssignstheRetriggerEachTime(Program79b)
fromthekeyboardoutsidetheKeyZone,inoctave function.
units.
+0000:Off
Transpose Octave/5th In Thru [0036+0036] +0001:On
AssignstheTransposeInZone(Program71a) Formoreinformation,seeRetriggerEachTimeon
function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata page 124.
fromthekeyboardwithintheKeyZone,inunitsofan
octaveandafifth.
119
Program mode: HD-1
t 7-6: Page Menu Commands seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu page 151.
commandsonpage 142.
4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite Sceneonpage 151.
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see Sceneonpage 151.
77: Dynamic MIDI

77PMC
77a
77b
DynamicMIDIletsyouusethisinstruments Dynamic MIDI 18

controllersandMIDIcontrolmessagestocontrol
specificKARMAfunctions. Input (Input Module) [A]
YoucantakeadvantageofthistocontrolKARMAin InProgrammodethisisfixedatA.Thisisbecause
variouswayswhileyouplay.Forexample,youcanuse onlyKARMAModuleAisused.Thissettingcannotbe
noteonstoadvancetheKARMAclock(Manual changed.
Advance),orajoysticktoTriggerthestartofthe
patterns.YoucanuseafootpedaltocontrolAuto Source [Off, JS+Y (CC#01)
Transpose,oradamperpedaltocontroltheKARMA Velocity Outside Zone]
Latchsettings. Indicatesthecontrolleroraction.thatwillbethe
DynamicMIDIsource.Formoreinformation,see
DynamicMIDISources&Destinationsonpage 1038.
77a: Program Name and Tempo
Bottom (Range Bottom) [000127]
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. Specifiesthelowerlimitforthevaluecontrolledby
Source.IfSourceisShortNote,NoteNo.,WhiteNote,
orBlackNote,thenumericvaluecorrespondstothe
77b: Dynamic MIDI notenumbersC1G9.
Youcansetup8differentDynamicMIDIroutings,
eachofwhichhasanidenticalsetofparameters,as
describedbelow.
120
Program P7: KARMA 77: Dynamic MIDI
Top (Range Top) [000127] ForexampleifyousetPolarityto+andtheSourceis

Specifiestheupperlimitforthevaluecontrolledby KARMASLIDER1,movingtheSlider1fromminto
Source.IfSourceisShortNote,NoteNo.,WhiteNote, maxwillchangethevaluefrom0127.Ifyouset
orBlackNote,thenumericvaluecorrespondstothe Polarityto,thesameSlider1movementwillchange
notenumbersC1G9. thevaluefrom1270.
Action (Source Action) [Momentary, Toggle,

Continuous]
SpecifiestheoperationmodeforDynamicMIDI. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Momentary:Theparameterwillbecontrolledasa shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
momentaryswitch.ForexampleifSourceisJS+Y commandsonpage 142.
(CC#01),theparameterwillnormallybeoff,andwill
beonwhenyoumovethejoystick. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Note:IfPolarityis+andthesourcecontrollervalueis
lessthanorequaltotheBottomsetting,thedestination 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
willbeoff.Ifthecontrollervalueisgreaterthanor ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
equaltotheTopsetting,itwillbeon. 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
Example seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
WhenBottom:000andTop:127 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
Thecontrollervalueandtheon/offstatusarerelatedas page 151.
follows.
000127:onat127 Sceneonpage 151.
127000:offat000 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Toggle:Theparameterwillbecontrolledasatoggle Sceneonpage 151.
switch.Forexample,ifSourceisJS+Y(CC#01),moving 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
ittothetopandreleasingitonetimewillturnthe seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
destinationon,andmovingittothetopandreleasing
itagainwillturnthedestinationoff.IfPolarityis+,on
andoffwillalternateeachtimethesourcecontroller
valueexceedstheTopvalueafterhavingpassed
throughtheBottomvalue.
Example
WhenBottom:0andTop:127
Thecontrollervalueandtheon/offstatusarerelatedas
follows.
000127:onoffat127
127000127:offonat127
(127001127:nochange)
Continuous:Theparameterwillbecontrolled
continuously,overtherangespecifiedbyBottomand
Top.Forexample,ifbottomis25andTopis100,the
destinationvaluewillbesmoothlyoperatedwhenthe
controllersvaluemovesbetween25and100.Values
outsidethatrangewillcausenofurtherchange.
Note:Theoperatingmodesthatcanbeselectedare
limitedbytheDestination.Formoreinformation,
seeDynamicMIDISources&Destinationson
page 1038.
Destination [Off, RT Params ControlBuffer Latch]

SelectstheDynamicMIDIControldestination
function.Formoreinformation,seeDynamicMIDI
Destinationsonpage 1040.
Polarity [+, , +/, /+]

SpecifiestheDynamicMIDIpolarity.
121
Program mode: HD-1
78: Random Seeds

78PMC
78a
78b
TheRandomSeedspageallowsyoutocontrolsomeof 0:Random:Adifferentphrasewillbegeneratedeach
therandomizablecharacteristicsofaModulesGE. timethetriggeroccurs.WithintheKARMAModule,a
Youcanfreeze(capture)theendlesslyvaryingphrases differentStartSeedvalueisspecifiedrandomlyeach
generatedbyKARMAsrandomizefeatures. timethetriggeroccurs.
AnyvalueotherthanRandom:Thesamephrasewill
begeneratedeachtimethetriggeroccurs.Different
78a: Program Name and Tempo valuesfortheStartSeedparameterwillproduce
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a: differentphrases,butthesamephrasewillalwaysbe
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. generatediftheStartSeedvalueisthesame.
How the Start Seed value affects the phrase

78b: Start Asanexample,wewilluseProgramINTF099:Widow
ByusingtheCaptureRandomSeed(+p.151),Start MakertoseehowdifferentStartSeedsettingswill
Seed,andFreezeLoopLengthparameters,youcan affectthephrase.
looparandomlychangingphrase,orplaythesame 1. InProgrammode,selectINTF099:WidowMaker.
phraseeachtimeyoutriggerit.Thesecapabilitiesare ThisisanEXiProgram,usingtwoAL1stocreatea
collectivelycalledFreezeRandomize.Youcanalso leadsynthsound.KARMAisprogrammedtoplaya
storeaProgramorCombinationwiththesesettings,so phrase.
thatitwillalwaysplaythesamerandomizedphraseor
patternwhenyoufirstcallitup. 2. TurnonthefrontpanelKARMAON/OFFswitch.
3. PresstheCommonbutton,toseetheEXiCommon
NotallGEshavebeenprogrammedtoutilizethe
pages.
KARMAfunctionsrandomizationcapabilities.Ifno
randomizationhasbeenprogrammedaspartofthe 4. SelecttheP78:RandomSeedspage.
GE,changingtheseparameterswillappeartohave 5. PresstheCommonbuttontoaccessthe74:
noeffect. ModuleParametersTriggerpage,andsetNote
TriggertoAny.
Start Seed [21474836480:
Random+2147483647]
SpecifiestheseedthatisusedbytheKARMAModule
togeneratetherandomphrase.
Note:Seedisthesourcedatafromwhichthe
randomizationsarecreated.StartSeedistheseed
thatwillbeusedeachtimeatriggeroccurs.
122
Program P7: KARMA 78: Random Seeds
Formoreinformation,seeCheckingtheFreeze
Randomizefunction,andperformingCapture
RandomSeedonpage 152.
Freeze Loop Length [Off, 0132]

Specifiesthenumberofmeasuresinthephrasesthat
arerepeatedlygeneratedbytheKARMAModule.
Afterbeingtriggered,themodulewillgeneratea
phraseofthenumberofmeasuresyouspecifyhere,
andwillthenrepeatthatphrase.IfyousetthistoOff,
thephrasewillnotberepeated.
Thetablebelowandtheexplanationsthatfollow
describehowvariouscombinationsofStartSeedand
FreezeLoopLengthsettingswillaffectthephraseor
6. TurnthefrontpanelKARMALATCHswitchon. controldatathatisrandomlygeneratedbythe
7. Gotothe78:RandomSeedspage. KARMAModuleeachtimetriggeringoccurs,
accordingtotheGEsettingsyouareusing.
8. MakesurethattheKARMAmodulesStartSeed
valueis0:Random. 1. StartSeed:0:Random,FreezeLoopLength:
Off(unchecked)
IfStartSeedisotherthan0:Random,setitto
0:Random. Thephrasewillchangerandomlyeachtime
triggeringoccurs.Eachtimethephraserepeats,it
willchangerandomly.Forexample,supposethere
isaGEthat,ifyouinputCDEF,willrandomly
varytheorderofnotes,andrepeatedlyplayfour
notesineachmeasure.WhenyoutriggerthisGE,it
producesnotesinarandomorderof(forexample)
CDEF,CCDF,FDCE.Whenyoutrigger
thisGEagain,itproducesadifferentrandomphrase
of(forexample)EDCC,CCDD,CDCE.
2. StartSeed:anyvalue,FreezeLoopLength:Off
Eachtimetriggeringoccurs,thesamephrasewillbe
generated.DifferentStartSeedvaluescause
differentphrasestobegenerated.Thephrasewill
changerandomlyeachtimeitrepeats,butthesame
phrasewillalwaysbegeneratedeachtimeyou
TheKARMAmodulewillgeneratealeadsynth
retriggerwithagivenStartSeedvalue.Thislets
phrase.
youselectanydesiredoneofmorethanfourbillion
9. Usepad1toproduceatriggerseveraltimesata (!)differentphrasevariations.Forexample,suppose
fixedinterval(oneortwoseconds).Whendoing thereisaGEthat,ifyouinputCDEF,will
so,payattentiontothephrasethatbegins randomlyvarytheorderofnotes,andrepeatedly
immediatelyaftertriggering.Adifferentphrase playfournotesineachmeasure.Whenyoutrigger
willbeginplayingeachtimetriggeringoccurs. thisGE,itproducesnotesinarandomorderof(for
10.SetStartSeedtoanyvalueotherthan0:Random. example)CDDC,DCEC,DECD.Evenif
Forthisexample,wellsetitto+1. youtriggerthisGEagain,itreproducesthesame
11.Asyoudidinstep4,triggerpad1severaltimes, phraseofCDDC,DCEC,DECD.Ifyou
andpayattentiontothephrasethatbegins changetheStartSeedvalue,adifferentphrase
immediatelyaftertriggering.Thesamephrase willbegenerated;forexample,EECD,DCCC,
willbeginplayingeachtimetriggeringoccurs. EEEE.
12.SetStartSeedtoavalueotherthan+1,and 3. StartSeed:0:Random,FreezeLoopLength:
repeattheactionsyouperformedinstep4. 132
ThephrasewillbedifferentthanwhenStartSeed Thephrasewillchangerandomlyeachtime
was+1,butthesamephrasewillbeginplayingeach triggeringoccurs.However,thatphrasewillloop
timetriggeringoccurs. (repeat)forthenumberofmeasuresyouspecifiedin
FreezeLoopLength.Thesamephrasewill
Note:IfyousetStartSeedto0:Random,andexecute
continueloopinguntilyoutriggertheGEagain.
CaptureRandomSeed(+p.151)aftertriggering,the
WhenyoutriggertheGEagain,adifferentphrase
StartSeedvaluethatwasinternallysetwithinthe
willloop.Forexample,supposethereisaGEthat,if
moduleatthetimeoftriggeringwillbespecifiedhere.
youinputCDEF,willrandomlyvarytheorderof
Whilelisteningtothephrasesthatchangerandomlyat
notes,andrepeatedlyplayfournotesineach
eachtrigger,youcanexecutethiswhenyouheara
measure.IfyousetFreezeLoopLengthto1
phrasethatyouwanttoreproduce.Inconjunctionwith
(measure)andtriggerthisGE,thesamefournotes
theFreezeLoopLengthandRetriggerEachTime
willcontinuelooping(e.g.,FEDC,FEDC,FE
settings,youcanalsoloopaphrasethatyoulike.
DC,).Whenyoutriggeritagain,adifferent
123
Program mode: HD-1
phrasewillloop(e.g.,DDCC,DDCC,DDC 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
C,).(+RetriggerEachTimeonpage 119) seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
4. StartSeed:anyvalue,FreezeLoopLength: 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
132 information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
Thesamephrasewillplayeachtimeyoutriggerthe page 151.
GE.Thatphrasewillloopforthenumberof 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
measuresyouspecifiedinFreezeLoopLength. Sceneonpage 151.
Forexampleifyouselectaprogramorcombination,
andmakethesesettingsforaKARMAModulethat
Sceneonpage 151.
generatesrandomchangeseachtimeitistriggered,
theexactsamephrasewillloopeverytime.The 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
phrasethatisloopedwillbedifferentifyouchange seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
theStartSeedvalue.Forexample,supposethere
isaGEthat,ifyouinputCDEF,willrandomly
varytheorderofnotes,andrepeatedlyplayfour
notesineachmeasure.IfyousetFreezeLoop
Lengthto1(measure)andtriggerthisGE,the
samefournoteswillloop(e.g.,DEEC,DEEC,
DEEC,).EvenifyoutriggertheGEagain,the
samephrase(DEEC,DEEC,DEEC,)will
bereproduced.IfyouchangetheStartSeedvalue,
adifferentphrase(e.g.,CCEE,CCEE,CCEE,
)willloop.(+RetriggerEachTimeon
page 119)
Retrigger Each Time [Off, On]

WhensettoOn(checked),everytimethespecified
looplengthiscompleted,thePhasePattern,Envelopes,
andIndexeswillretriggerasifthekeyboarditselfwas
retriggered.Thismeansthatthenotesinthephrase
willberestartedaccordingtotheNoteTriggersettings
(+NoteTriggeronpage 111)andtheapplicable
internalsettingsoftheGE,andanyenvelopeswillbe
retriggeredaccordingtotheEnvelopeTrigger/Latch
settings(+ EnvelopeTriggeronpage 112,
EnvelopeLatchonpage 112)
WhenOff(unchecked),theoveralllengthofthe
internalGEPhasePatterncontrolswhentheloopwill
beretriggered.Forexample,ifthePhasePatternis8
bars,andtheFreezeLoopLengthissetto2bars,
thentherandomizationswillresetevery2bars
(controllingtherhythmandmovementofnotes,for
example),butthemelodyandenvelopesmaynot
triggerfromthebeginninguntilevery8barsis
completed.(+CheckingtheFreezeRandomize
function,andperformingCaptureRandomSeedon
page 152)
NotavailableunlessFreezeLoopLengthissetto
somethingotherthanOff(unchecked).
Note:Insomecases,thetwosettingsmaysoundthe
same,dependingontheinternalsettingsoftheGE.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
124
Program P7: KARMA 79: Name/Note Map
79: Name/Note Map

79PMC
79a
79b
79c
HereyoucanassignthenamesforKARMASLIDERS
18andKARMASWITCHES18,viewGlobalNote 79c: Note Map
MapTables,andedittheCustomNoteMapTable NoteMapsallownotesbeinggeneratedbytheGEto
storedwiththeProgram. beselectivelyremappedtoothernotes,orremoved
completely(changedintorests).Hereyoucanview
79a: Program Name and Tempo GlobalNoteMapTables,andedittheCustomNote
MapTablethatisstoredwitheachProgram.TheNote
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a: MapTableisassignedinModuleParametersControl:
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. NoteMap(+p.108).
Table [Custom, Global 164]

79b: Module A Thereare64GlobalNoteMapTablesprovidedinthe
HereyoucanassignthenamesforKARMASLIDERS systemwhichcannotbeedited,andprovideawide
18andKARMASWITCHES18. varietyofpresetnoteremappingfunctions.Thereis
alsoasingleCustomNoteMapTablestoredineach
TheRTCModelsincludeappropriatenamesforthe
Program,Combi,andSequence.
slidersandswitches.However,youmaywishtoedit
thenamesifyoumodifythecontrolassignments,or WhenTable=Custom,youcanedittheCustom
createnewones. TableusingtheInandOutparametersbelow.
WhenTableisoneofthe64GlobalTables,you
Slider1Slider8 [000: (no name) cannoteditit.
571: Waveform Select [16]]
In (Note In) [C-1G9]
SelectsthenamefortheKARMASLIDERS.
Specifiesanotenumber(ofdatabeinggeneratedby
Switch1Switch8 [000: (no name) theGE)thatyouwanttomaptoadifferentnoteorto
571: Waveform Select [16]] remove(changetoarest).
SelectsthenamefortheKARMASWITCH. Note:WhenInisselected,youcanholddownthe
Note:TheSliderandSwitchnamescanalsobe ENTERswitchandpressanoteonthekeyboardtoset
automaticallyassignedtonewcontrolassignments theInfieldtothatnote.
usingthePageMenuAutoAssignKARMARTC
Namecommand.Formoreinformation,seeAuto
AssignKARMARTCNameonpage 143.
125
Program mode: HD-1
79c
Out (Note Out) [Remove, C-1G9]

Specifywhatwillbedonewiththenoteyouspecified
intheInfield. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Remove:ThenotespecifiedbyInwillberemoved
fromtheoutputdata(andchangedtoarest).
commandsonpage 142.
C1G9:ThenotespecifiedbyInwillbeconverted
tothenotenumberyouspecifyhere,andsenttothe
Programonpage 142.
tonegenerator.
Note:WhenOutisselected,youcanholddownthe
ENTERswitchandpressanoteonthekeyboardtoset
theOutfieldtothatnote. 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
Table GridThisareagraphicallyshowstheoverallIn
3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
andOutsettingsinvisualform.
Thehorizontalaxis(Xaxis)correspondstothe page 151.
incomingnotenumbers,andtheverticalaxis(Yaxis)
correspondstotheoutgoingnotenumbers.Thenote
Sceneonpage 151.
transmittedforeachreceivednoteisshownbythe
lightbluepixels.Notesthatarebeingremovedfrom 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
theincomingdataareshowninyellowpixelsinthe Sceneonpage 151.
bottomRemoverow.Astraightdiagonalline 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
representsnochange(whatgoesinispassedthrough seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
withoutmodifications).
Youcanusethe buttonslocatedbelowthe information,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC
graphictochangetheInnotenumberupordown. Nameonpage 143.
Octave Replicate [Off, On] 9:CopyNoteMape.Formoreinformation,see
WhenOn(checked),anyeditthatyoumakewithinan CopyNoteMaponpage 143.
octavewillbemadeineveryoctave.Thisismainlyfor
applyingthetabletoMelodicGEs,whereyouwantto
dosomethinglikeremoveeveryminorthird,remap
everyfourthtoafifth,etc.,andhavethatchangetake
placeineveryoctave.
Reset [button]
Restoresthecurrenttabletolinear/nochange(a
diagonalline).
126
Program P8: Insert Effect 81: Routing
Program P8: Insert Effect

Thesepagesletyoucanmakesettingsfortheinsert Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
effects.Forinstance,youcan: MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
Sendtheoutputofaoscillatortoaninserteffect Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect page 787.
81: Routing
81PMC
81a
81b
81c
81d 81e
81f
Use Dkit Setting [Off, On]

81a: Routing Map
ThisisshownifOscillatorModeissettoDrums.If
Thisgraphicshowsanoverviewoftheinserteffects, OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDouble,thissetting
includingtheroutingoftheoscillatorstotheeffects, isignored.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOscillator
theeffectsnamesandon/offstatus,chainingbetween Modeonpage 33.
theeffects,andtheoutputbustowhichtheinsert
On(checked):TheBusSelect,FXControlBus,Send1,
effectsarethemselvesrouted.
andSend2settings(Global53b)foreachkeyofthe
Thispageletsyouadjusttheroutingoftheoscillators selecteddrumkitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyou
totheinserteffects.Toadjusttheothersettingsshown wanttoapplyanindividualinserteffecttoeachdrum
inthisgraphic,see85:InsertFX,asdescribedon instrument,ortosendindividualdruminstrumentsto
page 130. AUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL).
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedrum
81b: Program Information & Use DKit instrumentshavethesameBusSelectsettings
accordingtotheirtype,asfollows.
Bank [(INTAINTG, USERAUSERG)]
SnaresIFX1
Program Name [000127/001128: Name] KicksIFX2
Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT] TomsIFX3
Thisareadisplaysinformationabouttheprogram CymbalsIFX4
selectedforediting,includingtheProgramBank, Percussion,etc.IFX5
number,andname,andthetempousedforLFOs,
Off(unchecked):TheBusSelect,(81c)FXControl
effects,andKARMA.
Bus,(81d),81f:OSCMFXSendOSCMFXSend
settingswillbeused.Alldruminstrumentswillbesent
tothespecifiedbus.
127
Program mode: HD-1
UseDkitSetting=On
81c: Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.Out Assign) 81e: REC Bus

All OSCs to [L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off] All OSCs to [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforoscillators1and2. Thesesettingssendtheoutputoftheoscillator1,2to
L/R:TheoscillatorswillbeoutputtotheL/Rbus. theRECbusses(fourmonochannels:1,2,3,4).
NormallyyouwillchooseL/R. TheRECbussesarededicatedinternalbussesfor
IFX112:OutputtotheIFX112busses. recording,usedforsamplinginthevariousmodesor
forrecordingaudiotracksinSequencermode.
18:Theoscillatorwillbeoutputinmonofromthe
correspondingAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL). InProgrammode,youcanresampleyourkeyboardor
KARMAperformance,orsampleanexternalaudio
1/27/8:Theoscillatorwillbeoutputinstereo signalfromtheAUDIOINPUTjacks.
accordingtoitspansetting(41c,45:Amp/Driver2)
fromthecorrespondingAUDIOOUTPUT Inorderforyoutosample,SourceBusmustbesettoa
(INDIVIDUAL)pair. RECbus.
Off:TheoscillatorwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus, NormallyyouwillsetSourceBustoL/Rsothatyou
IFX112busses,orIndividual18busses.Choosethe cansamplethesignaloftheL/Rbusline,suchasyour
Offsettingifyouwanttheprogramoscillatoroutputof keyboardorKARMAperformance.However,youcan
thetimbretobeconnectedinseriestoamastereffect. useaRECbusifyouwanttosampleonlyanaudio
UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)tospecify inputwhileperformingonthekeyboardorKARMA
thesendlevels. functionwhicharebeingoutputviaLandR.If
desired,multipleaudioinputscanbemixedtoaREC
bus,orthedirectsignalfromanaudioinputcanbe
81d: FX Control Bus mixedtoaRECbusalongwiththesoundfroman
inserteffectandsampled.Formoreinformation,see
All OSCs to [Off, 1, 2] thediagramSourceBus=RECBus1/2onpage 16.
Sendstheoutputoftheoscillator1,2toanFXControl Off:ThesignalwillnotbesenttoaRECbus.Normally
bus(twochannelstereoFXCtrl1or2). youwillleavethisoff.
UsetheFXControlbusseswhenyouwantaseparate 14:Theoutputoftheoscillator1,2willbesenttothe
soundtocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.Youcan correspondingRECbus.ThePansetting(41c,45:
usetwoFXControlbusses(eachisatwochannel Amp/Driver2)ofeachoscillatorwillbeignored,and
stereobus)tocontroleffectsinvariousways. thesignalwillbesentinmonaural.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuses 1/2,3/4:Theoutputoftheoscillator1,2willbesentin
onpage 790. stereotothecorrespondingpairofRECbusses.The
signalissentinstereotoRECbusses1/2or3/4
accordingtothePansetting.
128
Program P8: Insert Effect 81: Routing
81f: OSC MFX Send

OSC1 Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputof
oscillator1willbesenttomastereffect1.Thisapplies
onlywhenBusSelect(81c)issettoL/RorOff.
IfBusSelectissettoIFX1IFX12,thesendlevelsto
mastereffects1and2aresetbySend1andSend2(8
5a)afterpassingthroughIFX112.

oscillator1willbesenttomastereffect2(seeOSC1
Send1(toMFX1)).

OSC2willbesenttomastereffects1and2.These
parameterswillbevalidwhenOscillatorModeisset
toDoubleandBusSelectissettoL/RorOff.
Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1
andSend2.Thesecanalsobecontrolledfromthemixer
sectionofthefrontpanel,orfromtheP0Control
SurfacepageoftheLCDscreen.Herestheprocedure
foreditingthesesettingsfromthefrontpanel.
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXER
TIMBRE/TRACKswitchtoturniton(lit).
2. PresstheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoselect
CHANNELSTRIP.
3. UsetheMIXERSELECT12switchestoselectthe
oscillatorwhosesendlevelsyouwanttoadjust.
4. UseFXSEND1(knob7)andFXSEND2(knob8)
tocontrolthesendlevels.
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoL/Ror
OFF,thiswillcontrolOSC1Send1(toMFX1)and
OSC2Send2(toMFX2).
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX1
12,thiswillcontrolSend1andSend2(P8InsertFX
page).
CC#93controlsOSC1/2sSend1level,andCC#91
controlstheSend2level.Thesearecontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Theactual
sendlevelisdeterminedbymultiplyingthese
valueswiththesendlevelsofeachoscillator.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
3:SwapInsertEffects.Formoreinformation,see
SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
129
Program mode: HD-1
85: Insert FX
85PMC
85b
85a
Note:thedisplayedvaluesareroundedtotheclosest
85a: Effect/EXi Fixed Resource Meter 1%,buttheinternalvalueshaveamuchfiner
resolution.Thismeansthatyoumaysometimesaddan
Background information
effect,butseenochangeintheresourcemeter.
Mosthardwaresynthesizersofferasingle,fixed
FXshowsthepercentageofthetotalprocessingpower
methodofsynthesis,apredeterminednumberof
beingusedfortheIFX,MFX,andTFX.Thiswillvary
voices,andafixedamountofeffectsprocessingpower.
dependingonthespecificeffectsbeingused.
OASYSisdifferent;ithasnofixedsynthesismethod,
anditsharesitsprocessingpowerbetweenvoicesand IfaneffecthasbeenassignedtoanIFX,MFX,orTFX,it
effects. willtakeupthesameamountofprocessingresources
evenifitisturnedOfforbypassed.Ifyouwanttofree
Thisflexibilitymeansthatthesystemcandeliver
uptheprocessingresources,changetheselectionto
powerwhereyouneeditthemost.Forinstance,one
000:NoEffect.
Programmayneedabunchofvoiceslayeredtogether,
butnotmanyeffects;anothermightneedcomplex EXiFIXEDshowsthepercentageofthetotal
effectsprocessing,butnotasmanyvoices.Inboth processingpowerusedforthefixedcomponentsofEXi
cases,OASYSwillautomaticallydivideitsprocessing instruments.FixedmeansthatpartoftheEXistarts
powerappropriately. usingprocessingpowerassoonastheEXiisloaded,
beforeplayinganynotes;thisincludesthebuiltin
Unlikemostcomputerbasedsystems,OASYSalso
effectsoftheCX3,forexample.
monitorstheoverallprocessingpower,reducingthe
overallnumberofvoicesifnecessary,tomakesurethat OnlysomeEXiincludefixedcomponents;forinstance,
thereareneverproblemswiththeaudio. theCX3does,buttheAL1doesnot.Forinformation
onotherEXi,seetheirindividualdocumentation.
Normally,youshouldntneedtothinkaboutthisatall;
itwilljusthappenautomatically.Sometimes,however, FormoreinformationonEXifixedresources,please
itcanbeconvenienttoknowhowthesystemis seeCX3&STR1:LimitationsonEXifixedresources
allocatingitsresources.Thatswhatthismeterisfor. onpage 382.
The resource meter FREEFORVOICESshowsthepercentageofthetotal

processingpowerremainingaftertheFXandEXifixed
TheresourcemetershowshowtheOASYSprocessing components.Thispowerisavailableforplaying
powerisbeingused,asanapproximatepercentageof synthesizervoices.
thetotalavailablepower.Therearethreemain
categories:FX,EXiFixed,andFreeforVoices. WhenFreeforVoicesisat100%,youcanachievethe
maximumpolyphonyforinstance,172voicesofthe
HD1,96voicesoftheAL1,or172voicesoftheCX3.
WhenmoreeffectsorEXifixedresourcesarebeing
used,polyphonywillbereducedaccordingly.
130
Program P8: Insert Effect 85: Insert FX
Category/IFXSelectmenu
Note:Aswiththemeterasawhole,thenumbershown Ifthisisoff,theinputwillsimplybepassedtothe
inFREEFORVOICESisonlyanapproximation.For output.(When000:NoEffectisselected,theresno
example,ifFREEFORVOICESisshowing98,the differencebetweenOnandOff.)
maximumpolyphonyfortheHD1maynotbeexactly Thesettingwillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtime
172 0.98(approximately168). youpressthebutton.
Themaximumpolyphonywillalsodependonvarious Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanuseMIDICC
otherparameters;formoreinformation,seeAnote #92(ontheglobalMIDIChannel)toturnallinsert
aboutpolyphonyonpage 33. effectsoff.Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof
1127restoretheoriginalsetting.
85b: IFX Chain to [IFX2IFX12]
Hereyoucanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1 Youcanchainuptotwelveinserteffectstogetherin
through12,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthe series,tocreatemorecomplexeffects.Setupthechain
postIFXmixersettings.Forinserteffects,thedirect usingthisparameter,andthenenableitusingthe
sound(Dry)isalwaysstereoinandout.The Chaincheckbox,below.
input/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound(Wet)
Effectsmustbechainedinascendingnumericorder.
dependsontheeffecttype.Formoreinformation,
Forexample,IFX1canbechainedtoanyofIFX2
pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX12)onpage 794.
throughIFX12,andIFX2canbechainedtoIFX3
IFX1 throughIFX12.
Youcanchaintwoormoreeffectsintothesamedown
IFX1 [000185] streameffect.Forinstance,bothIFX1andIFX2canbe
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect1. chainedtoIFX6.
Category/IFX Select menu Effectscanalsojoinachaininthemiddle.Forinstance,

youcanchainIFX3toIFX4toIFX9,andthenchain
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/IFX IFX2toIFX9aswell.
Selectmenuwillappear,lettingyouselecteffectsby
category.Usethetabstoselectacategory,andthen ThePan(CC#8),BusSelect,RECBus,andSend1/2
selectaneffectwithinthatcategory.PresstheOK settingsapplyonlytothelasteffectinthechain.
buttontoexecuteyourselection,orpresstheCancel However,anyeffectinthechaincanbesenttotheFX
buttontocancel. Controlbuses.
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On] Chain [Off, On]

Thisenablesthechain,assetupbytheChainto
parameter,above.
Pan (CC#8) (Post IFX Pan) [L000C064R127]

Switchestheinserteffecton/off.
Specifiesthepanningimmediatelyaftertheinsert
effect.
YoucanuseCC#8tocontrolthis.
131
Program mode: HD-1
Bus Sel. (Bus Select) [L/R, 18, 1/27/8, Off] IFX2: Chain to [IFX3IFX12]
Specifiesthebustowhichthesignalwillbesent
IFX3: Chain to [IFX4IFX12]
immediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
L/R:ThesignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus,which IFX4: Chain to [IFX5IFX12]
passesthroughTFX1and2andthengoestothemain
L/Routputs.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
18:Thesignalwillbesent,inmono,totheselected IFX6: Chain to [IFX7IFX12]
individualoutput.
1/27/8:ThesignalwillbepannedbythePan(CC#8)
setting,andsentinstereototheselectedpairofaudio IFX8: Chain to [IFX9IFX12]
outputs.
Off:Thesignalwillnotbesentdirectlytotheoutputs.
Thissettingisusefulifyouwantto: IFX10: Chain to [IFX11IFX12]
UseSend1or2toroutethesignalentirelythrough
IFX11: Chain to [(IFX12)]
themastereffects,withoutsendingthedrysignalto
theoutputs. Thesespecifythechaindestinationforeachinsert
effect.IfChainisenabled,theinserteffectwillbe
UsetheFXControlBustoroutethesignaltoan connectedinseriestotheIFXspecifiedbytheChainto
effectssidechain,suchasagateorvocoder, setting.
withoutbeinghearddirectlyattheoutputs.
UsetheRECBustorecordthesignal,without Chain [Off, On]
routingthesignaldirectlytotheoutputs. Specifieswhetherinserteffectswillbeconnectedin
series.
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2]
IftheChaincheckboxison,thisinserteffectwillbe
ThissendsthepostIFXsignaltotheFXControl connectedinseriestotheinserteffectselectedby
busses.Formoreinformation,see81d:FXControl Chainto.ThisisnotavailableforIFX12.
Busonpage 128.
Tip:IfyoumovefromthispagetotheP8IFX112
REC Bus [Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1/2, 3/4] page,theIFXyouchooseherewillbeselected.
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheRECbusses.Formore
information,seeSee81e:RECBusonpage 128.If t 85: Page Menu Commands
youwanttoresampleviatheRECbusses,setthe
samplingSourceBus(08d)toREC1/2orREC3/4. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Send1 [000127] shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Send2 [000127]
TheseadjustthelevelatwhichthepostIFXsignalis
Programonpage 142.
senttomastereffects1and2.ThisisvalidifBusSelect
(85a)issettoL/RorOff. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
andSend2.(See81f:OSCMFXSendonpage 129) 2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1level,and
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI 3:SwapInsertEffects.Formoreinformation,see
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)is SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
usedforthesemessages. 4:InsertIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeInsert
IFXSlotonpage 154.
IFX212
5:CutIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeCutIFX
Hereyoucanspecifyeachinserteffectseffecttype, Slotonpage 155.
on/offstatus,chaining,andmixersettingsfollowing
theinserteffect.WiththeexceptionofChaintoand 6:CleanUpIFXRoutings.Formoreinformation,
Chain,theparametersarethesameasforIFX1.See seeCleanUpIFXRoutingsonpage 156.
IFX1onpage 131.
132
Program P8: Insert Effect 86: Track View
86: Track View

85b 86PMC
11a
86a
86b
86a: Track View

Thisshowstheoscillator1,2outputandinserteffect
routing.
Theselectedslotisshownindarkblue.Inthe
Selectedareabelow,youcanspecifytheEffect
TypeandOn/Offstatus.TheInsertIFXSlotand
CutIFXSlotpagemenucommandswillapplytothe
slotyouselecthere.
ThefollowingdiagramshowstheIFXassignedtoeach
IfyoumovefromthispagetotheP8IFX112page,
keyofadrumkitwhenOscillatorModeissetto
theIFXyouchooseherewillbeselected.
DrumsforanHD1ProgramandUseDKitSettingis
Inthefollowingdiagram,theAudioInshownbelow turnedon.
IFX10andIFX11indicatestheinserteffectsthrough
Inthisexample,youcanseethatIFX1,2,3,4,and5are
whichAudioInput14andS/P DIFL/Rarepassing.
eachusedbyakeyinthedrumkit(showninlight
Inthisexample,youcanseethatAudioInput14and blue).IfyoupressanIFXthatisbeingused,thateffect
S/P DIFL/RarepassingthroughIFX11andIFX12. willbeshowninthelinebelow.
OUTPUTshowstheBusSelectsettingthatfollows
theinserteffects.Thistellsyouwheretheaudiosignal
isbeingoutput.
86b: Selected t 86: Page Menu Commands

HereyoucanspecifytheEffectTypeandOn/Off ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
statusoftheinserteffectslotselectedbyTrackSelect. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
(86a:TrackView,above) shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite Programonpage 142.
133
Program mode: HD-1
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 4:InsertIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeInsert
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. IFXSlotonpage 154.
2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see 5:CutIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeCutIFX
CopyInsertEffectonpage 153. Slotonpage 155.
3:SwapInsertEffects.Formoreinformation,see 6:CleanUpIFXRoutings.Formoreinformation,
SwapInsertEffectonpage 154. seeCleanUpIFXRoutingsonpage 156.
87: IFX 112

87PMC
87a
87b
Thispageletsyoueditthedetailedparametersofthe IFX1 On/Off [Off, On]

twelveinserteffects.UsethetabsatlefttoselectIFX1
throughIFX12.
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheInsertFXor
TrackViewpages.Formoreinformation,see85: Thisturnstheinserteffectonandoff.Itislinkedwith
InsertFXonpage 130and86:TrackViewon theon/offsettingintheInsertFXpage.
page 133.
P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, --------]
Effects Modulation: Dmod EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe

Mosteffectshaveoneormoreparameterswhichcan settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16
bemodulatedinrealtime.IntheOASYS,thisiscalled userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re
DynamicModulation,orDmodforshort. writablefactorypresets.
ForacompletelistofDmodsources,seeDynamic Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
ModulationSourceListonpage 1030. Combi,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsofpresets
canbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledon
theglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
information,seeDynamicmodulation(Dmod)and storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethem
TempoSynchronizationonpage 789. asanEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuse
yourfavoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile
87a: IFX1 workingonaparticularProgram,andthenlateruse
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheinserteffect thesameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram,Combi,
youselectedintheP8InsertFXpage.Usethetabsat orSong.
thelefttoselectIFX112.
134
Program P8: Insert Effect 87: IFX 112
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFX
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:ThesecontainpresetdatathatKorgplansto
provideinthefuture.Werecommendthatyoustore
yoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyour
ownsettings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveany
effect.
Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,but
theydontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffect
Preset.IfyouselectanEffectPreset,andthensavethe
Program,theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto
.
Using Effect Presets

1. SelectaneffectintheInsertFXpage.
2. TheP00:InitialSetsettingswillberecalled.
P(EffectPreset)willindicate.
3. UseP(EffectPreset)toselectaneffectpreset:
P00P15orU00U15.
Thestoredparameterswillberecalled.Notethat
thiswilloverwriteallparametersoftheeffect.
4. Edittherecalledparametersasdesired.
5. Ifyouvecomeupwithsettingsyoulikeandwant
tosavethemasanewpreset,usetheSavetoUser
Presetmenucommand.
IFX1 Parameters
ThistabshowstheparametersforIFX1,asselectedon
theP8:InsertFXpage.
Fordetailsonthespecificparametersofeacheffect,
pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX12)onpage 794.
87b: IFX212
ThesetabsshowtheparametersforIFX212,as
selectedontheP8:InsertFXpage.Theyhavethesame
controlsasdescribedunder87a:IFX1,above.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
4:WriteFXPreset.Formoreinformation,see
WriteFXPresetonpage 158.
135
Program mode: HD-1
89: Common FX LFO

89PMC
89a
89b
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize Frequency [0.0220.00 Hz]

LFObasedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchas ThisspecifiesthefrequencyoftheCommonFXLFO.
phasers,flangers,filters,andsoon. HighervaluesmaketheLFOfaster.
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividual MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On]
effectstillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveform On(checked):TheLFOwillsynchronizetothesystem
andphase. tempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDIClock.
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhether TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNoteand
touseoneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousethe Timesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFrequency
individualeffectsfrequency,sync,and/orresetsettings andFrequencyModulationwillbeignored.
instead.ThisisdoneviatheeffectsLFOType Off(unchecked):TheFrequencysettingswill
parameter;selectIndividualtousetheeffectssettings, determinethespeedoftheLFO,andthetempo
orCommon1or2tousetheCommonLFOs. settingswillhavenoeffect.
Dmod(DynamicModulation)iscontrolledonthe BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedinGlobalmodeP1.
Base Note [r w ]
89a: Common FX LFO1 ThissetsabasicrhythmicvaluefortheLFOspeed,
relativetothesystemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma
Sync (Reset) [Off, On] 32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets.Itapplies
ThisspecifieswhethertheCommonFXLFOwillbe onlywhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn.
reset. Times [0132]
Ifthisison,operatingtheSource(below)willresetthe ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For
phaseoftheLFO. instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
Source (Dmod Source) [List of Dmod Sources] Timesissetto3,theLFOwillcycleoveradotted
eighthnote.
IfSync(Reset)ison,thisselectstheDmodsource
thatwillresettheCommonLFO.Foracompletelistof
Dmodsources,seeDynamicModulationSourceList 89b: Common FX LFO2
onpage 1030.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforCommonFX
Thiswillbeoffwhenthemodulationsource LFO1,asdescribedunder89a:CommonFXLFO1
specifiedbySourcehasavaluebelow64,andon onpage 136.
whenthevalueisabove64.TheLFOwillbereset
whenthisvaluerisesfromalevelbelow64toalevel
higherthan64.
136
Program P8: Insert Effect 89: Common FX LFO
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1
Common FX LFO1 Stereo Flanger
Frequency[Hz] Waveforem = Triangle

Reset Generate original LFO waveform Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Stereo Phaser
Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Stereo Auto Pan
Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = +90 [deg]

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
137
Program mode: HD-1
Program P9: Master/Total Effect

Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthemastereffectsand Makedetailedsettingsformastereffectsandtotal
totaleffects.Forinstance,youcan: effects
Routeasoundtoanmastereffectsandtotaleffects Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 787.
91: Routing
85b 91PMC
11a
91a
91b
91c
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsand selectaneffectwithinthatcategory.PresstheOK
totaleffects,andturnthemon/off. buttontoexecuteyourselection,orpresstheCancel
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotal buttontocancel.
effectsareinsertedintotheL/Rbus. MFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
91a: MFX1, 2
Themastereffectdoesnotoutputthedirectsound
(Dry).AdjusttheReturn1andReturn2return Switchesthemastereffect1on/off.Whenoff,the
levelstoreturnthesignaltotheL/Rbusandmixit outputwillbemuted.Thiswillalternatebetweenon
withtheL/Rbussignal. andoffeachtimeitispressed.
Themastereffectsarestereoin/out,butdependingon Separatelyfromthesettingshere,youcanuse
theselectedeffecttype,theoutputmaybemonaural. controlchange#94toturnmastereffects1and2off.
SeeIn/Outonpage 794. Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127
restoretheoriginalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannel
MFX1 specifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)isused
forthismessage.
MFX1 [000185]
Return 1 [000127]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1.Youcan
useanyoftheavailableeffects,withoutlimitation.If Thisspecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffectto
youchoose000:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemaster theL/Rbus(afterwhichitpassesthroughTFX1and2,
effectismuted. andissentfromL/MONOandR).
Category/MFX Select menu

Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/MFX
category.Usethetabstoselectacategory,andthen
138
Program P9: Master/Total Effect 91: Routing
Category/MFXSelectmenu
MFX2 Thetotaleffectsarestereoinandstereoout,butthe
outputmaybemonauraldependingonthetypeof
MFX2 [000185] effectyouselect.(SeeIn/Outonpage 794.)
MFX2 On/Off [Off, On] TFX1

Return 2 [000127] TFX1 [000185]
Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeformaster Thisselectstheeffecttypefortotaleffect1.Youcanuse
effect2,itson/offstatus,andthereturnlevelfrom anyoftheavailableeffects,withoutlimitation.
mastereffect2totheL/Rbus.SeeMFX1onpage 138.
Category/TFX Select menu
Chain: Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/TFX
Selectmenuwillappear,lettingyouchooseeffecttypes
Chain On/Off [Off, On]
bycategory.Usethetabstoselectaneffectcategory,
On(checked):Chain(seriesconnection)willbeturned andthenchooseaneffectwithinthatcategory.Press
onforMFX1andMFX2. theOKbuttontoexecuteyourchoice,orpressthe
Cancelbuttontocancel.
Chain Direction [MFX1->MFX2, MFX2->MFX1]
SpecifiesthedirectionoftheconnectionwhenMFX1 TFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
andMFX2arechained.
MFX1MFX2:ConnectfromMFX1toMFX2.
MFX2MFX1:ConnectfromMFX2toMFX1.
Thisturnstotaleffect1on/off.Ifthisisoff,theinput
Chain Level [000127] willbepasseddirectlythrough.Thesettingwill
alternatebetweenon/offeachtimeyoupressthis.
WhenchainisOn,thissetsthelevelatwhichthe
soundissentfromthefirstmastereffecttothenext Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanusecontrol
mastereffect. change#95toturnbothtotaleffectsoff.Avalueof0
turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restorethe
originalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
91b: TFX1, 2 byMIDIChannel(Global11a)isusedforthis
Thesearetheparametersfortotaleffect1and2,which message.
areplacedatthefinalstageoftheL/Rbus.After
passingthroughthetotaleffects,thesoundisoutputto TFX2
AUDIOOUTPUT(MAINOUT)L/MONOandR. TFX2 [000185]
Forthetotaleffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways
stereoin/out.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe TFX2 On/Off [Off, On]
effectsound(Wet)willdependontheselectedeffect Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeandon/off
type. statusfortotaleffect2.SeeTFX1onpage 139.
139
Program mode: HD-1
91c: Master Volume t 91: Page Menu Commands

Master Volume [000127] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Thisspecifiesthefinalleveloftheaudiooutputthat
haspassedthroughtotaleffects1and2,andoutput
commandsonpage 142.
fromAUDIOOUTPUT(MAINOUT)L/MONOandR.
Note:Youcancontrolthemastervolumefromthe
Programonpage 142.
controlsurface.Youcanalsocontrolthissettingfrom
theP0ControlSurfacepage. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
TIMBRE/TRACK,MIXERAUDIOorR.TIME 2:CopyMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
KNOBS/KARMAswitchtoturniton(lit). CopyMFX/TFXonpage 157.
2. UsetheMIXVOLUMESMASTERsliderto 3:SwapMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
controlthelevel. SwapMFX/TFXonpage 158.
92: MFX1
92PMC
92a
MFX1 On/Off [Off, On]

Effects Modulation: Dmod
Mosteffectshaveoneormoreparameterswhichcan
bemodulatedinrealtime.IntheOASYS,thisiscalled
DynamicModulation,orDmodforshort. Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Itislinkedwiththe
ForacompletelistofDmodsources,seeDynamic on/offsettingintheP9Routingpage.
ModulationSourceListonpage 1030.
P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, --------]
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledon
theglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore
information,seeDynamicmodulation(Dmod)and
TempoSynchronizationonpage 789. Thisselectstheeffectpreset.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeP(EffectPreset)onpage 134.
92a: MFX1 MFX1 Parameters

Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyou Hereyoucanedittheparametersofthemastereffect
chooseforMFX1intheP9Routingpage. selectedintheP9Routingpage.
Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseeMaster
Effects(MFX1,2)onpage 807.
140
Program P9: Master/Total Effect 93: MFX2
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 2:CopyMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese CopyMFX/TFXonpage 157.
3:SwapMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
commandsonpage 142.
SwapMFX/TFXonpage 158.
Programonpage 142.
93: MFX2
94: TFX1
95: TFX2
ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofMaster
Effect2andTotalEffects1and2.Toselectdifferent
effectstypes,usetheRoutingpage,asdescribedunder
91:Routingonpage 138.
TheparametersforMFX2,TFX1,andTFX2arethe
sameasforMFX1.Formoreinformation,see92:
MFX1onpage 140.
141
Program mode: HD-1
Program: Page Menu Commands

TheupperlineofthedialogshowstheBank,number,
ENTER + 0-9: shortcuts for menu andProgramname.
commands Ifyouwishtomodifytheprogramname,pressthetext
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,which editbuttontomovetothetexteditdialogbox,and
provideaccesstodifferentutilities,commands,and enterthedesiredprogramname.
options,dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon. 2. InCategoryandSubCategory,specifythe
Youcanusethemenucommandsentirelyfromthe categoryoftheprogramthatyouarewriting.
touchscreen,bypressingthemenubuttoninthe
ThecategorycanbeusedtofindthisProgramwhen
upperrighthandcornerofthescreenandthen
selectingaprograminProgram,Combination,or
selectinganoptionfromthemenuthatappears.
Sequencermodes.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownunique
Note:YoucaneditthesecategorynamesintheGlobal
menucommands,themenusarestandardizedasmuch
ProgramCategorypage.Formoreinformation,see3
aspossible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthe
1:ProgramCategoryonpage 720.
firstmenuiteminProgram,Combination,and
Sequencemodes. 3. PressToProgramtospecifythedestination
Bankandnumber.
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationby
usingashortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenu YoucanalsousetheBANKINTAUSERGswitchesto
items: selectabank.
1. HolddowntheENTERkey. Important:HD1Programscanonlybewrittento
HD1Banks,andEXiProgramscanonlybewritten
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadto
toEXiBanks.Formoreinformationonthedefault
selectthedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
Banktypes,andonhowtochangethem,pleasesee
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1for ProgramBankContentsonpage 3,and
thesecond,andsoon. ChangingtheBankTypeforUSERAGon
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff page 3.
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthe 4. ToWritetheProgram,presstheOKbutton.To
commandcallsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappear cancel,presstheCancelbutton.
ontheLCD,andyoucanproceedjustasifyoud
selectedthecommandfromthetouchscreen. Saving edits to GM Programs
YoucaneditGMPrograms,butyoumustthensave
themtoaBankotherthanINTG;theGMPrograms
Write Program themselvescannotbeoverwritten.
ThiscommandwritesaneditedProgramintothe Shortcut: SEQUENCER REC/WRITE
OASYSinternalmemory.Itisavailableoneverypage
inProgrammode. YoucanalsousetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton
toquicklyupdatethecurrentProgram,usingthe
WriteProgramletsyou: existingname,bank,number,andcategory.Todoso:
Saveyouredits 1. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton.
RenametheProgram TheUpdateProgramdialogwillappear.
AssigntheProgramtoaCategory 2. PressOKtowritetheprogram.
MarktheProgramasaFavorite
CopytheProgramtoadifferentBankandnumber
Exclusive Solo
BesuretoWriteanyProgramthatyouwishtokeep.
AneditedProgramcannotberecoveredifyoudo ThiscommandisavailableoneverypageinProgram
notwriteitbeforeturningoffthepowerorselecting mode.
anotherProgram. ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteraffectstheway
1. SelectWriteProgramtoopenthedialogbox. thatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff
(unchecked),youcansolomultipleTracksandinputs
atonce.
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneMIDI
Track,HDRTrack,orAudioInputcanbesoloedata
time.Inthismode,pressingaSoloswitch
automaticallydisablesanyprevioussolos.
Onmostpages,youcanalsotoggleExclusiveSoloby
holdingENTERandpressing1onthenumeric
keypad.
FormoreinformationonSolo,pleasesee:
Programmode:Soloonpage 21
142
Program: Page Menu Commands Auto Assign KARMA RTC Name
Combinationmode:Soloonpage 391 WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theselectedtablewill

Sequencemode:Soloonpage 495 becopiedtothecustomnotemap.
Auto Assign KARMA RTC Name Optimize RAM

ThiscommandisavailableontheKARMAGEtabof OptimizeRAMisavailableontheAudioIn/Sampling
thePlaypage,andtheName/NoteMaptabofthe tabofthePlaypage.
KARMApage. Insomecases,especiallyifyouvebeenloadingand
AutoAssignKARMARTCNamewillautomatically deletingdifferentSamplesandMultisamples,the
assignappropriatenamestotheKARMASlidersand internalmemorycanbecomefragmented.
Switches,basedontheGERealTimeparametersand Fragmentedmeansthattherearechunksofdata
PerformanceRealTimeparameterstowhichtheyare scatteredthroughoutthephysicalRAM,liketoyblocks
assigned.YoucanusethiswhencreatingnewKARMA scatteredacrossafloor.Whilethememoryisnt
functionassignments,oreditingexistingones. completelyfull,someofitcantbeusedjustlikeits
Thenamesareselectedfromalistof400options,such difficulttowalkacrossamessyfloor.
asRhythmSwing%andRhythmComplexity. TheOptimizeRAMcommandcleansupthefloor,so
1. ChooseAutoAssignKARMARTCNameto tospeak.Itcollectsallofthedataintoasingle,
openthedialogbox. continuousareaofmemory,sothattheremainingfree
spacecanbeusedmoreefficiently.
2. Toexecutethecommand,presstheOKbutton.To
cancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton. Ifyourunoutofmemory,tryusingthiscommand;it
mayfreeupsomeextraspace.
Pleasebeawarethatevenwithunedited,factory
preloadedProgramsorCombinations,executing YoucanchecktheremainingamountofRAMin
thiscommandmayassignnamesthataredifferent Samplingmode,onthemainRecordingpage,under
fromthosecurrentlyspecified. FreeSampleMemory/Locations.Formore
information,pleaseseeRAMonpage 630.
1. SelectOptimizeRAMtoopenthedialogbox.
Copy Note Map
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromapresettableor
fromthecustomnotemapofaspecifiedprogram,
combination,orsongtothecurrentlyselectedcustom
notemap.
1. ChooseCopyNoteMaptoopenthedialogbox.
2. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand,or
presstheCancelbuttontocancelwithout
executing.
Auto Optimize RAM

IfAutoOptimizeRAM(Global01d)isenabled,you
dontneedtousetheOptimizeRAMcommand;
instead,RAMwillbeoptimizedautomatically.
2. UsetheFromfieldtospecifythecopysource
notemaptable.
Select Sample No.
ChooseCustomifyouwanttocopyfromthecustom SelectSampleNo.isavailableontheAudio
notemapusedbyadesiredprogram,combination,or In/SamplingtabofthePlaypage,whenthesampling
song. SaveToparameterissettoRAM.
Choosethedesiredtableifyouwanttocopyfroma Thisspecifiesthesamplenumberintowhichthe
presettable. sampleddatawillbewritten.Youcanalsospecify
whetherthesamplewillautomaticallybeconvertedto
Note:Bydefault,theTablesettingisselectedinthe
aprogramaftersampling.
CopyNoteMapFromfield.Ifyouwanttocopya
presettable,itsagoodideatoverifyandselectthe 1. ChooseSelectSampleNo.toopenthedialogbox.
tablethatyouwanttocopytothecustomnotemap
beforeyouchoosethiscommand.
3. IfyouvespecifiedCustom,selectthecopysource
mode,bank,andnumber.Youcanalsoselectthe
bankbypressingtheBANKSELECT[A][G]
switches.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyNoteMap
command,orpresstheCancelbuttonifyoudecide
nottoexecute.
143
Program mode: HD-1
SetOriginalKey(Sampling01b)tospecifythe
locationoftheoriginalkey.Themultisamplewill
createanIndex(Sampling01b)withthiskeyasthe
TopKey(Sampling01b).TheOriginalKeywill
incrementbyoneaftersampling,andthenexthigher
notewillbeassignedthenexttimeyousample.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettingsyou
made,orpresstheCancelbuttontoreturntothe
statepriortoaccessingthisdialogbox.
Select Directory
SelectDirectoryisavailableontheAudioIn/Sampling
tabofthePlaypage,whenthesamplingSaveTo
2. InSampleNo.,specifythewritingdestination parameterissettoDISK.
samplenumber. Whensamplingtodisk,thisletsyousetthedisk,
Bydefault,thiswillbethelowestnumberedvacant directory,andfilenamefortheresultingWAVEfile.
samplenumber.Ifyouselect:NoAssign ThisdialogalsoletsyouauditionWAVEfilesdirectly
orasamplenumberthatalreadycontainsdata,the fromthedisk;youcanusethisasashortcut,insteadof
datawillautomaticallybesampledintothelowest usingthesimilarfunctioninDISKmode.
vacantsamplenumber.Ifyouaresamplingin
stereo,Mode(08c),specifySampleNo.(L)and Specifying the save destination for a WAVE file
SampleNo.(R). 1. SelecttheSelectDirectorycommandtoopenthe
3. SetAuto+12dBOn. dialogbox.
On(checked):+12dB(Sampling21d)will 2. UsethepopupbuttonlocatedattheleftofDrive
automaticallybeturnedonforsamplesyourecord. selecttoselectthewritingdestinationdrivefor
Samplesforwhich+12dBisonwillplayback sampling.
approximately+12dBlouderthanifthissettingwere 3. UsetheOpenandUpbuttonstomovetothe
off. desireddirectory.
WhenyouresampleaperformanceinProgram, 4. InName,specifyanamefortheWAVEfilethat
Combination,orSequencermodes,youshould willbewrittenduringsampling.
normallysetRecordingLeveltoabout0.0(dB),sothat IfyoucheckTakeNo.,thefilewillbesavedwithatwo
itwillbeashighaspossiblewithoutclipping. digitTakeNo.addedtotheendofthefilename.This
Whenyouresample,thesoundwillberecordedatthe numberwillautomaticallyincrementeachtimeyou
optimumlevelforsampleddata,buttheplaybacklevel sample.Thisisconvenientwhenyouaresampling
atplaybackwillnotbeasloudasitwasduringthe repeatedly,sinceeachsamplewillbesavedwithits
resamplingprocess(if+12dB(Sampling21d)isoff). ownfilename.
Insuchcases,youcanchecktheAuto+12dBOncheck IfTakeNo.isnotchecked,youcaninputuptoeight
boxwhenyouresample,sothat+12dBwill charactersinName.IfTakeNo.ischecked,youcan
automaticallybeon,makingthesampleplaybackat inputuptosixcharacters.
thesamelevelaswhenitwasresampled.
5. PresstheDonebuttontocompletethesettings.
Inthesemodes,thepowerondefaultsareRecording
Levelsetto0.00(dB)andAuto+12dBOnturnedon.If Playing back a WAVE file
youresampleaperformanceinoneofthesemodes 1. SelecttheSelectDirectorycommandtoopenthe
withthesesettings,thesamplewillplaybackatthe dialogbox.
samelevelatwhichitwasresampled.
2. UseDriveSelectandtheOpenandUpbuttonsto
TheAuto+12dBOnsettingismadeindependentlyfor selectthedriveanddirectory,andselecttheWAVE
Program,Combination,Sequencer,andSampling file(48kHz)thatyouwanttoplay.
modes.
3. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchor
4. Converttospecifieswhetherthesamplewill Playbutton.
automaticallybeconvertedintoaprogramassoon
TheselectedWAVEfilewillbeplayed.
asithasbeensampled.Thisisconvenientwhen
youwanttohearthesoundimmediatelyafter 4. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchor
sampling. Stopbuttononceagaintostopplayback.
IfyouchecktheProgramcheckbox,thesamplewill IftheWAVEfileismono,thesamesoundwillbe
automaticallybeconvertedintoaprogram. outputtoL/R.
Attheright,setProgramandMStospecifythe
programnumberandmultisamplenumberforthe
Auto Sampling Setup
convertedprogram.
AutoSamplingSetupisavailableontheAudio
In/SamplingtabofthePlaypage.
144
Program: Page Menu Commands Auto Sampling Setup
SelectDirectory
ThiscommandautomaticallyconfigurestheProgram
modesamplingrelatedparameters,makingiteasyfor
youtosampleanexternalaudiosourceortoresample
yourperformanceasyouplayaProgram.Youcanalso
usethiscommandtoinitializethesamplingsettings.
AfterusingAutoSamplingSetup,youcanfurther
adjustanyofthesettingstosuityourneedsas
describedintheNoteparagraphsofeachsection.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,theapplicable
parameterswillbesetautomatically.Youcannotuse
theCOMPAREbuttontorecalltheprevious
settings.
1. SelectAutoSamplingSetuptoopenthedialog PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheInitializeoperation,
box. orpresstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidenottoexecute.
2. Pressaradiobuttontoselectthetypeofsettings Formoreinformation,seeAutomaticallyset
youwanttomake. parametersandtheirvaluesonpage 147.
Initialize:Initializesthesamplingrelatedparameters Resample Program Play
totheirdefaultstate.
IfyouselectedResampleProgramPlay:
ResampleProgramPlay:Setsthesamplingrelated
parameterstoallowyoutoplayaProgramand
resampleyourperformance.
RECAudioInput:Setsthesamplingrelated
parameterssothatyoucansampleanexternalaudio
source.Withthesesettings,youcanplayaProgram
whilesampling,butonlytheexternalinputwillbe
recorded.
3. Thesesettingswilldependonthechoiceyou
makeinstep2.
Initialize
IfyouselectedInitialize:
1. UseSavetotoselecteitherRAMorDISKasthe
destinationtowhichtheresampleddatawillbe
written.
IfyouchooseRAM,thesampleddatawillbewritten
intoRAM.IfyouchooseDISK,thesampleddatawill
besavedtodiskasaWAVEfile.
145
Program mode: HD-1
2. IfyouselectedRAMforSaveto,youcanalso IfyouselectedRECAudioInput:
specifywhetherthesamplewillbeautomatically 1. UseSourceAudiotoselecttheexternalaudio
convertedtoaprogramafterresampling.Ifyou inputsource.
wanttoconvertthesample,checktheConvertto
Programoption,anduseProgramtospecifythe Analog1/2:Selectstheanalogaudiosourceconnected
desiredconvertdestinationprogram. totheAUDIOINPUT1andAUDIOINPUT2jacks.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteResampleProgram Analog3/4:Selectstheanalogaudiosourceconnected
Play.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel totheAUDIOINPUT3andAUDIOINPUT4jacks.
button.(SeeAutomaticallysetparametersand S/P DIF:Selectsthedigitalaudiosourceconnectedto
theirvaluesonpage 147) theS/P DIFjack.
Notea:Resample)Toresample,executeResample 2. UseMonoL/MonoR/Stereotospecifywhether
ProgramPlay.ThenpressSAMPLINGRECandthen theinputsourceismonoorstereo.
SAMPLINGSTART/STOP,andplaytheprogramfrom
MonoL:SettingswillbemadeforsamplingtoL
thekeyboardetc.SinceTrigger(08c)issettoNote
MONOfromInput1(ifyouveselectedAnalog1/2)or
On,samplingwillbeginatthefirstnoteon.When
fromInput3(ifyouveselectedAnalog3/4).
youvefinishedplaying,presstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitchtostopresampling. MonoR:SettingswillbemadeforsamplingtoR
MONOfromInput2(ifyouveselectedAnalog1/2)or
Noteb:Checkthesampleddata)Verifythatyour
fromInput4(ifyouveselectedAnalog3/4).
performancewasresampledcorrectly.Ifyouexecuted
withSavetoRAMandConverttoProgram Stereo:SettingswillbemadeforsamplingInput1/2or
checked,selecttheprogramyouspecifiedasthe 3/4instereo.
convertdestinationandplaytheC2noteofthe 3. UseSavetotospecifythewritingdestination
keyboardtohearthesample.Ifyoudidntcheck forthesampleddata.RAMwillwritethedatainto
ConverttoProgram,useSamplingmodetoselect RAMmemory.DISKwillcreateaWAVEfileofthe
thesampleandlistentoit. sampleddata,andsaveittodisk.
IfyouselectedSaveto:DISK,usethepagemenu 4. IfyouveselectedSavetoRAM,youcanspecify
command08C:SelectDirectorytoheartheresults. whetherthesamplewillautomaticallybe
convertedtoaprogram.Ifyouwantthesampleto
Specify the writing destination beconvertedtoaprogram,checkConvertto
Whensavingthesampletodisk,youcanusethemenu ProgramandusetheProgramfieldtospecify
commandSelectDirectorytospecifythediskand theconvertdestinationprogram.
foldertowhichthesamplewillbestored.Formore 5)Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffecttothe
information,pleaseseeSelectDirectoryonpage 144. externalaudioinputsourcewhileyousample,use
Noted:Samplingtrigger)YoucanusetheTrigger IFXtoselecttheinserteffectyouwanttouse.
(08c)settingtochangethewayinwhichsampling Turnthisoffifyoudontwanttouseaninserteffect.
willbestarted. 6)PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteRECAudioInput.
Notee:Samplingmultiplesourcessimultaneously)If Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel
youwanttosimultaneouslysamplebothanexternal button.(SeeAutomaticallysetparametersand
audiosourcefromAUDIOINPUTtogetherwithyour theirvaluesonpage 147)
ownplayingonaprogram,gototheSamplingpage, Note:Tosample,executeRECAudioInput,thenpress
andsettheInput14settingBus(IFX/Indiv.)Select SAMPLINGREC,andthenSTART/STOPtobegin
toL/R,andtheSourceBustoL/R. sampling.(ThisisbecauseTriggerissettoSampling
Notef:IfyouexecuteAutoSamplingSetupwithSave STARTSW.)Whenyourefinished,pressthe
toRAMandtheConverttoProgramoption SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostopsampling.
checked,andyoucontinuesampling,eachsuccessive Ifyouwanttosamplewhilemonitoringthe
samplewillbeautomaticallyassignedtoC2,C#2,D2, performancegeneratedbytheKARMAfunction,check
tocreateamultisample.Anewmultisamplewillbe LatchandstartsamplingwhiletheKARMA
createdthenexttimeyouexecuteAutoSampling functionisplaying.
Setupandstartsampling.
Note:IfyouvesetSourceAudiotoS/P DIF,use
REC Audio Input SystemClock(Global02a)tochangethesystem
clock.
Note:Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffecttotheinput
sourcewhileyousample,makethefollowingsettings.
IntheProgramP0SamplingpageInput14,S/P DIF
L/R,useBus(IFX/Indiv.)SelecttochooseIFX1
IFX12,choose1/2astheRECBusfollowingtheinsert
effectyoureusing,andsetSourceBustoREC1/2.
Foradditionalinformation,refertoNoteb)f)inIf
youselectedResampleProgramPlay.
146
Program: Page Menu Commands Copy Tone Adjust
Automatically-set parameters and their values

Copy Tone Adjust
3.Auto
2.REC Resampl CopyToneAdjustisavailableontheControlSurface
1. pagewhenCONTROLASSIGNissettoTONE
Parameter Audio e
Initialize ADJUST.
Input through
IFX ThiscommandreplacesthecurrentToneAdjust
Analog, (Source Analog,
settingswiththoseofanyotherProgram,Combination
Input (Input Source) : Timbre,orSongTrack.
S/P DIF*1 Audio)*2 S/P DIF*1
Level 127 1. SelectCopyToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
Pan L000
Input1 : Bus Select Off (IFX)*3 Off
Send1 000
Send2 000
Level 127
Pan R127
Input2 : Bus Select Off (IFX)*3 Off
Send1 000
2. UseFromtoselectthecopysourcemode,bank,
Send2 000 andnumber.
Source Bus L/R YoucanusethefrontpanelBANKkeystoselectthe
Trigger Sampling START SW desiredbank.
Recording 3. IntheTimbrefield(ifyouveselecteda
Setup : Metronome
Off Combination)orTrackfield(ifyouveselecteda
Precount
Song),selecttheTimbreorTracktocopyfrom.
Resample Manual Manual Auto
4. SelecteitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytospecify
Save to RAM (Save to) (Save to) theToneAdjustparametersyouwanttocopy.
Sample (Source All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter
LMONO Stereo
Mode Audio)*4 assignmentsandvalues.
Sample AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheTone
REC Sample Maximum
Time: RAM Adjustparameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
Setup :
Sample 4min 5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyTone

Time: DISK 59.999sec Adjustcommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonif
Recording
youdecidetocancel.
+0.0 +0.0 12.0
Level [dB]
REC Sample Auto +12dB
Off Off On Reset Tone Adjust
Preference : On
ResetToneAdjustisavailableontheControlSurface
Bus Select
(P8 Routing) All OSCs to L/R L/R (IFX)
pagewhenCONTROLASSIGNissettoTONE
: ADJUST.
ThiscommandresetstheToneAdjustsettingsforallof
:Notsetautomatically theKnobs,Switches,andSliderstotheirdefault
Valuesenclosedinparentheses()areautomatically values.
setaccordingtothesettingsyoumakeinthedialog 1. SelectResetToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
box.
*1:SettingsforAnalog,S/P DIF(Input1and
Input2)aremadeautomatically.
*2:Theinputsourcesetting(Input1andInput
2)youspecifiedforSourceAudiointhedialog
boxwillbesetautomatically.
*3:IfSourceAudioisMonoLthiswillbeL 2. UsetheTofieldtospecifyhowtheKnob18,
Mono,ifMonoRthiswillbeRMono,andifStereo SW116,Slider18,andMasterSliderparameters
thiswillbeStereo. willbereset.
*4:WhenSaveto:RAM,andConvertto AllOff:AllwillberesettoOff.
Programischecked. DefaultSetting:Theparameterswillberesettothe
defaultvaluesfortheapplicabletypeofprogram
(HD1,AL1,CX3).
147
Program mode: HD-1
3. ToexecutetheResetToneAdjustcommand,press 1. SelectCopyVectorEnvelopetoopenthedialog
theOKbutton.Toexitwithoutresettingthe box.
controls,presstheCancelbutton.
Copy Oscillator
CopyOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Basic/Vector,OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,andAMS
Mix/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Thiscommandisusedtocopythesettingsfromone
oscillatortoanother.
1. SelectCopyOscillatortoopenthedialogbox. 2. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthemode,bank,and
numberofthedesiredcopysource.Youcanpress
aBANKkeytoselectthedesiredbank.
ThiscommandcopiestheparametersoftheP1
VectorEnvelopepageofthecorrespondingmode.
Note:Inordertoreplicatethewayinwhichthe
relativevolumeofoscillatorsiscontrolledbythe
vectorandvectorenvelopeoftheprogramselected
foracombinationtimbreoraMIDIsongtrack,turn
ontheEnableProgramVectorVolumecheckboxin
theVectorControlVolumepage.ToreplicatetheCC
2. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheoscillatorthat controleffects,turnontheEnableProgramVector
youwanttocopy. CCcheckboxintheVectorControlCCpage.
3. UseProgramtoselectthebankandnumberof Usethiscommandwhenyouwanttocopythe
thecopysourceprogram.YoucanpressaBANK PositionorTime/Tempoofavectorenvelopein
SELECTswitchtoselectthedesiredbank. ordertocreateanenvelopethatproducesthesame
Note:IfyoureeditinganHD1Program,youcant movement.
selectEXiPrograms,andviceversa. 3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand,or
4. IfyoucheckToneAdjusttoo,theToneAdjust presstheCancelbuttontocancel.
settingswilltemporarilybeturnedoff,andfrom
thecopysourceToneAdjustsettings,the
Commonportionandtheassignmentsandcurrent Copy Pad Setup
valuesofthecorrespondingOSCportionwillbe
copied. CopyPadSetupisavailableonthePadstabofthe
Basic/Vectorpage.
IfToneAdjusttooisunchecked,theToneAdjust
settingswillbemaintained. Thiscommandcopiesthepadsettingsofthespecified
Program,Combination,orSong.
5. InTo,specifythecopydestinationoscillator.
1. SelectCopyPadSetuptoopenthedialogbox.
6. ToexecutetheCopyOscillatorcommand,press
theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Swap Oscillator
SwapOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunder
theBasic/Vector,OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,andAMS
Mix/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Thiscommandexchangesthesettingsofoscillators1
and2.
1. SelectSwapOscillatortoopenthedialogbox.
2. ToexecutetheSwapOscillatorcommand,press
theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. 2. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthemode,bank,and
ThiscanbeselectedonlyifOscillatorMode(11a)is numberofthedesiredcopysource.Youcanalso
Double. selectBanksviathefrontpanelBANKSELECT
buttons.
IfyoupresstheSetToCurrentbutton,thecurrently
Copy Vector Envelope selectedmode,bank,numberandpad(editcell)
willautomaticallybeassignedtotheFromfield.
CopyVectorEnvelopeisavailableontheVector
Thisisusefulwhenyouretryingoutotherpad
EnvelopetaboftheBasic/Vectorpage.
settingsandwanttotemporarilycopypreviously
Thiscommandcopiesvectorenvelopesettingsfrom editedpadsettingstoanothervacantpad.
thespecifiedprogram,combination/timbre,orsong.
148
Program: Page Menu Commands Sample Parameters
3. Selectthecopysourcepadnumber.Ifyouwantto thesameastheindexLevelparameterinSampling
copyallsettingsforpads18,checktheAlloption. mode;editsherewillaffectthevaluesshownin
4. UsetheTofieldtospecifythecopydestination Samplingmode,andviceversa.
pad. EachSamplealsohasa+12dBsetting,asconfiguredin
Note:Executingthiscommandwillcopythenote Samplingmode;ifthisison,theSamplewillplayback
numberandvelocityvalue.TheMIDIchannelisnot approximately12dBlouder.
copied.
Cutoff [-99+00+99]
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyPad
Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theOscillatorsfilter
Setupcommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonto
cutoffsettings.
cancel.
Resonance [-99+00+99]
Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theOscillatorsfilter
Sample Parameters
resonancesettings.
SampleParametersisavailableontheOSC1/2Basic
pages. Pitch [-64.00+00.00+63.00]
Thiscommandletsyouadjustvariousparametersfor Thisadjuststheplaybackpitchinonecentsteps.A
theindividualsampleswithinaRAMmultisample, settingof+12.00raisesthepitchoneoctave,anda
includingvolumelevel,cutoff,resonance,pitch,EG settingof12.00lowersthepitchoneoctave.Thisisthe
attackanddecay,driveandlowboost,andEQgains. sameastheindexPitchparameterinSamplingmode;
editsherewillaffectthevaluesshowninSampling
TheSampleParameterscommandisavailableonlyif mode,andviceversa.
youveselectedaRAMMultisample;itisnotavailable
forROMMultisamples,WaveSequences,orDrum Attack [-99+00+99]
Kits. Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theattacktimesofthe
Whenyouvefinishededitingtheparameters,pressthe filterEGandampEG.
Donebutton.PleasenotethatCompareisnotavailable
foreditsmadeinthisdialogbox. Decay [-99+00+99]
Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theattacktimesofthe
Note:TheSampleParameterssettingsapply
filterEGandampEG.
everywherethattheMultisampleisused,andnotjust
tothecurrentProgram.IfanotherProgramusesthe Driver [-99+00+99]
sameMultisample,itwillalsobeaffectedbyany
Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theOscillatorsDriver
changesthatyoumakehere.
setting.IftheDrivercircuitisbypassed,thiswillhave
noeffect.
Low Boost [-99+00+99]

Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theOscillatorsLow
Boostsetting.IftheDrivercircuitisbypassed,thiswill
havenoeffect.
LEQ Gain [-36dB+00+36dB]

Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theProgramsLowEQ
gainsetting.IftheEQisbypassed,thiswillhaveno
effect.
MEQ Gain [-36dB+00+36dB]

Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theProgramsMidEQ
gainsetting.IftheEQisbypassed,thiswillhaveno
Index [001128] effect.
AnIndexisakeyzoneinaMultisample,includinga
singleSampleandallofitsassociatedparameters.This HEQ Gain [-36dB+00+36dB]
isthecurrentlyselectedIndex. Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theProgramsHighEQ
Thenumberfollowing/isthetotalnumberof gainsetting.IftheEQisbypassed,thiswillhaveno
indexesinthecurrentMultisample. effect.
Sample [000]
ThisisthenumberandnameoftheIndexsSample. Sync Both EGs
SyncBothEGsisavailableontheFilter1/2EGand
Level [-99+00+99]
Amp1/2EGpages.
ThisadjuststhevolumeoftheSample,relativetothe
Oscillatorssettings.Negative()valueswilldecrease ThisoptionallowsyoutoedittheEGsofOscillator1
thelevels,andpositive(+)valueswillincreasethe andOscillator2together.Whenitischecked,editing
levels.Asettingof+99willdoublethevolume.Thisis theFilterEGofeitherOscillator1or2willchangeboth
FilterEGssimultaneously.Similarly,editingtheAmp
EGofeitherOscillatorwillchangebothAmpEGs.
149
Program mode: HD-1
ThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorMode 6. Ifyouwanttocopythenoteandvelocitysettings
issettoDouble. ofpads18,turnPadson.
1. SelectSyncBothEGs. 7. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyKARMA
TheLCDscreenwillindicateSyncBothEGs,and Modulecommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonif
thetwoEGswillbesynchronized. youdecidetocancel.
Settings copied by Copy KARMA Module

Whencopyingfromaprogram
IfGERTPControlSetting&ScenesandPerf.RTP&
PanelSettingsareOff(checked),thefollowing
contentiscopied.
2. IfyounolongerwanttheEGstobesynchronized, TheGEselectedbythecopysourceKARMA
selectSyncBothEGsonceagain. module.
TheindicationwilldisappearfromtheLCDscreen.
SettingsoftheKARMAmoduleparameters(73:
ModuleParameterTrigger,74:Module
ParameterControl).
Swap LFO 1&2
75:GERTPpageMIN,MAX,andVALUE
SwapLFO1&2isavailableonalloftheLFOpages, settings.
exceptfortheCommonLFOtab.
IfyouturnGERTPControlSetting&ScenesOn
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsofLFO1toLFO2, (checked)
andviceversa.
InadditiontothecontentcopiedwhenGERTP
Note:IfLFO2isbeingusedtomodulateLFO1,this ControlSetting&ScenesisOff(unchecked),the
commandwillerasethatmodulationrouting(sincethe followingcontentiscopied.
LFOscannotmodulatethemselves).
75:GERTPpageASSIGNandPOLARITY
Afteropeningthedialogbox,presstheOKbuttonto settings.
swaptheLFOsettings,orpresstheCancelbuttonto
Thesceneselectedinthemasterbuffer,the
closethedialogboxwithoutmakinganychanges.
KARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMASWITCH
settingsofeachscene(06d:RealtimeControlsand
09f:R.TimeKnobs/KARMAsettings).
78:Name/NoteMapcontrollernamesettings.
IfyouturnPerf.RTP&PanelSettingOn
(checked)
InadditiontothecontentcopiedwhenPerf.RTP&
PanelSettingsisOff(unchecked),thefollowing
Copy KARMA Module contentiscopied.
CopyKARMAModuleisavailableonallofthe Temposetting.
KARMApages,aswellastheKARMAGEtabofthe TimeSignaturesetting.
Playpage. KARMAON/OFFswitchsetting.
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsoftheKARMA KARMALATCHswitchsetting.
Moduleusedbyaspecifiedprogram,combination,or
song. 76:PerfRealTimeParameterspagesettings.
1. SelectCopyKARMAModuletoopenthedialog 77:DynamicMIDIpagesettings.
box. Whencopyingfromacombinationorsong
2. InFrom,selectthecopysourcemode,bank,and IfGERTPControlSetting&ScenesandPerf.RTP&
number. PanelSettingsareOff(unchecked)whenyoucopy
YoucanusethefrontpanelBANKSELECTswitchesto fromacombinationorsong,thefollowingcontentis
selectthebank. copied.
3. Ifyouselectedacombinationorsongasthecopy TheGEselectedforthecopydestinationKARMA
source,selectthemodulefromwhichyouwantto module(includingtheGErealtimeparameters).
copy. KARMAmoduleparameters(73:Module
4. Asappropriateforthecontentthatyouwantto ParameterTrigger,74:ModuleParameter
copy,turnGERTPControlSetting&ScenesOn Control).
(checked). 75:GERTPpageMIN,MAX,andVALUE
Formoreinformation,seeSettingscopiedbyCopy settings.
KARMAModule,below.
IfyouturnGERTPControlSetting&ScenesOn
5. Ifyouwanttocopyperformancerealtime (checked)
parameters,DynamicMIDI,andfrontpanel InadditiontothecontentcopiedwhenGERTP
settings,turnPerf.RTP&PanelSettingsOn ControlSetting&ScenesisOff(unchecked),the
(checked). followingcontentiscopied.
150
Program: Page Menu Commands Initialize KARMA Module
75:GERTPpageASSIGNandPOLARITY InadditiontotheparametersinitializedwiththeOff
settings. (unchecked)setting,thefollowingparameterswillalso
TheKARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMA beinitialized.
SWITCHsettingsofeachsceneinthecopysource 75:GERealTimeParameterspageASSIGN
buffer,andthecurrentlyselectedscene. (Off)andPOLARITY(+).
78:Names/NoteMapcontrollernamesettings. KARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMASWITCH
IfyouturnPerf.RTP&PanelSettingOn settingsineachscene(064/0).
(checked) KARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMASWITCH
InadditiontothecontentcopiedwhenPerf.RTP& names(noname).
PanelSettingsisOff(unchecked),thefollowing IfyouinitializewithPerf.RTP&PanelSettings
contentiscopied. turnedOn(checked)
Temposetting. InadditiontotheparametersinitializedwiththeOff
TimeSignaturesetting. (unchecked)setting,thefollowingparameterswillalso
beinitialized.
KARMAON/OFFswitchsetting.
76:PerfRealTimeParameterspageparameters.
KARMALATCHswitchsetting.
77:DynamicMIDIpageparameters.
KARMAModuleControlswitchsetting.
76:PerfRealTimeParameterspagesettings.
77:DynamicMIDIPagesettings. Copy Scene
TheInputChannelandOutputChannel CopySceneisavailableonalloftheKARMApages,as
(Combination/SequencerP71)settingsofa wellastheKARMAGEtabofthePlaypage.Itsalso
combinationorsongarenotcopied. availableontheControlSurfacepage,when
CONTROLASSIGNissettoRealTime
Knobs/KARMA.
Initialize KARMA Module ThiscommandcopiessettingsfortheKARMAScenes.
InitializeKARMAModuleisavailableonallofthe Youcanusethiscommandwhenyouwanttomake
KARMApages,aswellastheKARMAGEtabofthe settingsforascenebasedontheotherscenesettings
Playpage. youedited,orviceversa.
ThiscommandsetstheKARMAModulesparameters 1. ChooseCopyScenetoopenthedialogbox.
totheirdefaultvalues. 2. InFrom:selectthescenethatyouwishcopy.
TheGEselectionwillnotbeinitialized.TheGE 3. InTo:selectthecopydestinationscene.
parameterValueswillbesettothedefaultvalues 4. Toexecutethecopy,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
thatarepresetfortheselectedGE. withoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton.
1. SelectInitializeKARMAModuletoopenthe
dialogbox.
2. Asappropriateforthesettingsyouwantto
Swap Scene
initialize,youcanturnon(check)theGERTP SwapSceneisavailableonalloftheKARMApages,as
Controlsettings&Scenesand/orPref.RTP& wellastheKARMAGEtabofthePlaypage.Itsalso
PanelSettingoptions. availableontheControlSurfacepage,when
Formoreinformation,seeSettingsinitializedby CONTROLASSIGNissettoRealTime
InitializeKARMAModule,below. Knobs/KARMA.
3. Toinitializethesettings,presstheOKbutton.To Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)thesettingsoftwo
cancelwithoutinitializing,presstheCancel KARMAScenes.
button. 1. ChooseSwapScenetoopenthedialogbox.
Settings initialized by Initialize KARMA Module 2. InSource1andSource2,selecttwoKARMA
Scenes.thatyouwishtoswap.
IfyouinitializewiththeGERTPControlSettings&
ScenesandPref.RTP&PanelSettingoptions 3. Toexecutetheswap,presstheOKbutton.To
turnedOff(unchecked),thefollowingparameterswill cancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton.
beinitialized.
714moduleparameters. Capture Random Seed
75:GERealTimeParameterspageMIN,
CaptureRandomSeedisavailableonallofthe
MAX,andVALUE(theywillreturntothe
KARMApages,aswellastheKARMAGEtabofthe
valuespresetbytheGE).
Playpage.
TheGEselectionwillnotbeinitialized.
TheStartSeedisthesourceoftherandomnessofthe
IfyouinitializewithGERTPControlSettings& phrasegeneratedbytheKARMAModule.Formore
ScenesturnedOn(checked) information,seeStartSeedonpage 119.
151
Program mode: HD-1
Whenyouarelisteningtotherandomlychanging
phrasesgeneratedeachtimeaKARMAModuleis
triggered,andyouhearaphrasethatyouwouldliketo
reproduceconsistentlyeachtimeyoutriggerthatGE,
youcanexecutethiscommandtocapturetheseedthat
resultedinthatphrase.
Formoreinformation,seeCheckingtheFreeze
Randomizefunction,andperformingCapture
RandomSeedonpage 152.
1. SelectCaptureRandomSeedtoopenthedialog
box.
2. TurnthefrontpanelKARMAON/OFFswitchon.
3. PresstheCommonbuttontoaccessthe74:
ModuleParametersTriggerpage,andsetNote
TriggertoAny.
2. Ifyouareinamodethatcanusemorethanone
KARMAModule(CombinationorSequencer
modes),useTo:toselectthemoduleforwhich
youwanttocapturetheseedvalue.
IfyouselectAD,theseedvaluewillbecaptured
forthatKARMAModule.IfyouselectAll,theseed
valueswillbecapturedforallfourKARMA
Modules.
InProgrammode,thisisfixedatA.
3. ToexecutetheCaptureRandomSeed,pressthe
OKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
IftheStartSeedparameter(+p.122)ofthe
4. TurnthefrontpanelKARMALATCHswitchon.
KARMAModuleforwhichyouexecuteCapture
RandomSeedisassignedasaPerfRealTime 5. UseapadorthekeyboardtotriggerGE0267:
Parameter(+p.116),amessageofCouldnot ImprovLeadfortheKARMAModule.
executeCaptureRandomSeedbecausetheselected ThephrasegeneratedbythisGEwillalwayschange
StartSeedisassignedasanRTParmwillbe randomly(eachtimeyoutriggerit,oreachtimethe
displayed,andCaptureRandomSeedwillnotbe phraseisrepeated).
executed.(PresstheOKbuttontoclosethe 6. SelecttheProgramP78:RandomSeedspage.
message.)
IfyousettheTo:fieldofthedialogboxtoALL
(Combination,Sequencermode)toexecuteCapture
RandomSeedforallKARMAModules,Capture
RandomSeedwillbeexecutedonlyfortheKARMA
ModuleswhoseStartSeedparameterisnot
assignedasanPerfRealTimeParameter.Ifthe
StartSeedparameterofanyKARMAModuleis
assignedasaPerfRealTimeParameter,Capture
RandomSeedwillnotbeexecutedforthose
KARMAModules.
Checking the Freeze Randomize function, and

performing Capture Random Seed
ByusingtheCaptureRandomSeed,StartSeed(7
7. SetStartSeedto1(+0000000001).
8b),andFreezeLoopLength(78b)settings,youcan
looparandomlychangingphraseasdesired,or RetriggertheChordtrigger.Eachtimeitwillplay
generatethesamephraseeachtimeyoutriggertheGE. thesamerandomizedphrase;however,ifyouletit
continue,itwillalwaysmakenewrandomizations
Procedure asitgoesalong.
AnexampleoftheprocedureinProgrammodeis 8. SetFreezeLoopLengthto2(2bars).
shownbelow. Now,every2bars,itwillloopandrepeattheexact
1. InProgrammode,selectNTF099:WidowMaker. sameseriesofrandomizationsthatisspecifiedby
StartSeed1.However,thisparticularGEhasa
152
Program: Page Menu Commands Copy Insert Effect
PhasePatternof8steps(bars),soitmaynotsound Example:CaptureRandomSeedhassetStartSeedtoa
alwaysasifitisrestartingevery2bars,becauseof valueof+0254861235
theinternalsettingsofthePhasePattern.Itwill
repeatthesamerandomizations,butnotnecessarily
restarttherifffromthebeginning.However,this
canalsobeusefulforgettingthesamerhythmand
notemovements,withalongerevolvingphrase.
9. SetRetriggerEachTimetoOn(checked).
Now,every2bars,thePhasePatternisrestarted
also,inconjunctionwiththeFreezeLooplength,
andthephrasebecomesasimple2barloop.
10.SetStartSeedbackto0:Random.
Retriggerthephrasebypressingapadorplaying
thekeyboard.Acompletelynewrandomized
phrasewillbegeneratedeachtimeyoutrigger,but
every2barsitwillloopandrepeatuntilyoutrigger
itagain. Note:Seedisthesourcedatafromwhichthe
randomizationsarecreated.TheSeedofthephrase
11.NowsetRetriggerEachTimebacktoOff
beingloopedisautomaticallysetinternallywithinthe
(unchecked).
KARMAModuleastheStartSeed.TheStartSeed
Onceagain,eventhoughtherandomizationsare isusedeachtimetheGEistriggered.Thismeansthat
beingrepeatedevery2bars,the8stepGEPhase eachtimeyoutriggertheGE,aspecificSeedis
Patternallowslongerevolvingphrasestobe alwaysusedtogeneratethephrase.
created.
16.PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtotemporarily
12.SettheFreezeLoopLengthparameter. turnofftheKARMAfunction.Thenpressthe
Ifyousetthisto132,thephrasewillloopforthe KARMAON/OFFswitchonceagaintoturnthe
specifiednumberofmeasures.Forthisexample,set KARMAfunctionbackon.
thisto2andsettheRetriggerEachTimetoOn 17.Inthesamewayasinstep2,usethepador
(checked).Withthissetting,therandomphrasewill keyboardtotriggertheKARMAModule.
freezetoatwomeasurephrase.Youcanusethisto
Thephrasethatwasloopedinstep11willbe
loopaphraseduringaliveperformance.
reproducedeachtimethemoduleistriggered.You
13.Inthesamewayasinstep2,usethepador cannowsavetheProgramandrecallthisphraseat
keyboardtotriggertheKARMAModule. anytime.
14.Whenyouhearaphraseyouwanttobeplayed
eachtimeyoutriggertheGE,executeCapture
RandomSeed.PressthePageMenubuttonand Copy Insert Effect
chooseCaptureRandomSeedfromthepage
CopyInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
menu.
Thiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromwithinthe
currentProgram,fromotherPrograms,Combinations,
orSongs,orfromthecurrentSamplingmodesettings.
ToexecutetheCopyInsertEffectcommand,pressthe
OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Ifyourecopyingfromamastereffect,theresultwill
notbeidenticalduetodifferencesintheroutingand
levelsettingsofthemastereffects.
15.Whenthedialogboxappears,presstheOK
button.
TheStartSeedparameterwillautomaticallybeset
totheinternalvalueneededtoreproducethe
phrase.
153
Program mode: HD-1
From (Mode) [Program, Combination, AlloftheparametersshownontheIFX112pageswill

Song, Sampling Mode] becopied.
ThisselectswhetheryoullcopyfromaProgram,a OtherIFXslotparameterswillnotbeaffected,
Combination,aSong,orthecurrentSamplingMode includingPan,Sends1and2,Chain,RECBus,andFX
settings. ControlBus.
1. SelectSwapInsertEffecttoopenthedialogbox.
From (Bank and Number) [Bank and Number]
ForProgramsandCombis,thisselectstheBankand
Numberfromwhichtocopy.Whenthisparameteris
selected,youcanalsousethefrontpanelBANK
buttonstoselectBanks.
Set to Current [button]

PressingtheSetToCurrentbuttonsetstheFromfields 2. InSource1andSource2,selecteachofthe
tothecurrentlyselectedmode,bank,number,andIFX inserteffectsthatyouwishtoswap.
slot. 3. ToexecutetheSwapInsertEffectcommand,press
Thiscanbeuseful,forinstance,forbackingupthe theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
currentIFXsettingstoavacantIFXslot.Youcanthen
tryoutothereffectssettings,andstillbeabletoreturn
totheprevioussettingsifnecessary. Insert IFX Slot
(Effects slot select) [IFX 112, MFX 1&2, InsertIFXSlotisavailableontheRoutingandInsert
TFX 1&2] FXtabsoftheIFXpage.
Selectwhichoftheeffectsyouwishtocopy. ThiscommandinsertsanIFXslot.
Youcanalsocopyfromamastereffectandtotaleffect. Slotslocatedaftertheinsertedlocationwillbe
relocateddownwardifavacantslotexists.Atthistime,
All [check-box] Chain,Pan(CC#8),RECBus,FXControlBus,Send
Whenthisisenabled,thesettingsofallinserteffects 1/2,andCtrlCh(onlyforCombiandSEQ)willalsobe
(thecontentsoftheInsertFXpageandtheeffect relocated.
parametersofIFX112,butnotCtrlCh)willbecopied. ThiscommandalsoprovidesanAutoRoutingoption
thatautomaticallyadjustsrelatedparametersinorder
All Used [check-box]
topreservethepreviouslyexistingrouting.
Whenthisisenabled,onlytheinserteffects(IFX112)
Thiscommandisconvenientwhenyouwanttoaddan
thatareactuallyusedbythecopysourcewillbe
effectwithinachainofinserteffects.
copied.
1. IntheInsertFXpage,selecttheIFXslotinfrontof
Inthecopydestination,theeffectsettingswillbe
whichyouwanttoinsertaneffect.
copiedintovacantslots(i.e.,slotswith000:NoEffect,
unlesstheyexistwithinachain)startingwiththeinsert Inthisexample,IFX1IFX2IFX3IFX4IFX5
effectspecifiedbytheTofield. arechained,andwearegoingtoinsertaslotinfront
ofIFX3sothatwecanaddanotherIFX.
To [IFX 112]
Thisselectstheinserteffectcopydestination.
Post IFX Mixer Settings [check-box]

Whenthisischecked,thePan,BusSel.,CtrlBus,REC
Bus,andSends1and2settingsthatfollowthecopy
sourceinserteffectwillalsobecopied.
Whenthisisnotchecked,onlytheeffecttypeandits
parameterswillbecopied.
Copying 000: No Effect

Copyingasingleeffectsetto000:NoEffectwillnot
work:nodatawillbecopied.
IfeitherAllorAllusedisselected,and000:No
Effectexistswithinachain,itwillbecopied.
However,iftheentirechainconsistsof000:No 2. Alternatively,youcaninsertaneffectslotfrom
Effect,nothingwillbecopied. withintheTrackViewpage.
Selecttheinserteffectslotinfrontofwhichyou
wanttoinsertaneffect.
Swap Insert Effect
SwapInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
Thiscommandexchangestheeffects,andtheirinternal
parameters,betweentwoIFXslots.
154
Program: Page Menu Commands Cut IFX Slot
DontusetheInsertIFXSlotcommand.Instead,
removetheunwantedIFXslotbychangingthe
Chaintosettings,orbyusingtheCopyIFXor
SwapIFXcommands.
AutoChain:on:IftheIFXyouveinsertedislocated
withinachain,theChainsettingwillautomatically
beturnedonfortheinsertedIFXsothatitwillbe
chainedwiththeprecedingandfollowingIFX.
IftheIFXyouveinsertedisnotinsideachain,Auto
Chaindoesnothing.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheInsertIFXSlot
command,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
IftherearenotenoughIFXunitstoinsert,pressing
theOKbuttonwillsimplyexitthecommand
withoutdoinganything.
Note:InCombiorSeqmodes,thisTrackViewpage
isaconvenientwaytochecktheIFXthatare Inthisexample,000:NoEffectwillbeinsertedinto
chainedforeachtimbreortrack,andtheInsertFX IFX3whenyouexecutethecommand.Theeffects
commandcanbeusedinthispageaswelltoeditthe thatwereatIFX3IFX5willberelocatedtoIFX46,
effectsettingsofeachtimbreortrack.Whenyoudo resultinginachainconsistingofIFX1IFX6.
so,theroutingwillbeadjustedautomaticallysothat
thesettingsofothertimbresortrackswillremain
thesame.
3. SelectInsertIFXSlottoopenthedialogbox.
4. UsetheTofieldtospecifytheIFXnumberat
whichyouwanttoinsertaslot.(TheIFXyou
selectedinstep1or2willbeshownhereasthe
default.)
SpecifytheAutoRoutingandAutoChain
options.Normallyyouwillleavetheseon.
AutoRouting:Thisautomaticallyadjuststhe
followingparametersinordertopreservethe 6. Forthenewlyinsertedslot,turntheOn/Off
currentlyexistingrouting. settingOn.Thenselectandeditthedesiredeffect.
Routing:BusSelect
RoutingPageMenu:DKitPatch(Combi/SEQ)
Cut IFX Slot
Auto Routing always enabled on the Track View
CutIFXSlotisavailableontheRoutingandInsertFX
page
tabsoftheIFXpage.
YoucantchangetheAutoRoutingsettingifyouve
ThiscommandremovesanIFXslot,andmovesthe
executedtheInsertIFXSlotcommandfromtheTrack
otherIFXupwardstofillinthegapconvenientwhen
Viewpage.Thecommandwillalwaysbeexecuted
youwanttoremoveaneffectthatyourenotusing.
withthisoptionOn.
WhentheIFXaremovedupwards,alloftheirrelated
Drum Kits not supported by Auto Routing settingsarecopiedaswell.ThisincludesChain,Pan,
DrumKitscanstoreseparateBusSelectsettingsfor RECBus,FXControlBus,Sends1and2,and(for
eachkey.BecausethesesettingsarestoredintheDrum CombisandSongsonly)CtrlCh.
Kit,andnottheProgram,theAutoRoutingoption ThiscommandalsoprovidesanAutoRoutingoption
cantcorrectthem. thatautomaticallyadjustsrelatedparametersinorder
DrumKitProgramswillusetheseseparateBusSelect topreservethepreviouslyexistingrouting.
settingsiftheIFXRoutingpagesUseDKitSetting 1. IntheInsertFXpage,selecttheinserteffectslot
parameteristurnedOn. thatyouwanttoremove.
Inthiscase,youhavetwooptions.Either: Inthisexample,IFX1IFX2IFX3IFX4IFX5are
UseAutoRouting,andthenmanuallyadjustthe chained,andwearegoingtoremovetheIFX3slot.
BusSelectsettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKitto Youcanalsoperformthisoperationfromwithinthe
matchthenewIFXslotarrangement. TrackViewpage.Selecttheinserteffectslotthatyou
or: wanttoremove.
155
Program mode: HD-1
Drum Kits not supported by Auto Routing

DrumKitscanstoreseparateBusSelectsettingsfor
eachkey.BecausethesesettingsarestoredintheDrum
Kit,andnottheProgram,theAutoRoutingoption
cantcorrectthem.
DrumKitProgramswillusetheseseparateBusSelect
settingsiftheIFXRoutingpagesUseDKitSetting
parameteristurnedOn.
Inthiscase,youhavetwooptions.Either:
UseAutoRouting,andthenmanuallyadjustthe
BusSelectsettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKitto
matchthenewIFXslotarrangement.
or:
DontusetheCutIFXSlotcommand.Instead,
removetheunwantedIFXslotbychangingthe
Chaintosettings,orbyusingtheCopyIFXor
SwapIFXcommands.
2. SelectCutIFXSlottoopenthedialogbox.
Clean Up IFX Routings

CleanUpIFXRoutingsisavailableontheInsertFX
andTrackViewtabsoftheIFXpage.
ThiscommandautomaticallyrearrangesunusedIFX
slotssothattheyareconsecutive.Italsorearranges
3. SpecifythenumberoftheIFXyouwantto effectsinadiscontinuouschainsothattheyare
remove. consecutive.Relatedparametersareautomatically
(TheIFXyouselectedinstep1or2willbeshown adjustedinordertopreservetheexistingroutings.
hereasthedefault.) IfeditinganIFXchainresultsinunusedslots,orifthe
4. SpecifytheAutoRoutingoption.Normallyyou connectionsinachainhavebecomedisorganized,you
willleavethison. canexecutethiscommandtocleanuptherouting.
AutoRouting:Thisautomaticallyadjuststhe 1. AccesstheInsertFXpage.
followingparametersinordertopreservethe Inthisexample,IFX1IFX5IFX11IFX12are
currentlyexistingrouting. chained,andtheremainingslotsareallvacant.
Routing:BusSelect
RoutingPageMenu:DKitPatch(Combi/SEQ)
YoucantchangetheAutoRoutingoptionifyouve
executedtheCutIFXSlotcommandfromthe
TrackViewpage.Thecommandwillalwaysbe
executedwiththisoptionOn.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCutIFXSlot
command,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
2. Alternatively,youcanexecutethiscommandfrom
theTrackViewpage.
156
Program: Page Menu Commands Copy MFX/TFX
Iftheprogramusesadrumkit,andtheRouting
pageUseDKitSettingison,youmayhaveto
changetheBusSelectsettingforeachkeyofthe
drumkitinordertoreproducethepreviousrouting
status.
Insuchcases,dontusetheCleanUpIFX
Routingscommand.Instead,rearrangetheIFX
slotsbymakingtheappropriateChaintosettingsor
byusingtheCopyInsertEffectorSwapInsert
Effectcommands.
Copy MFX/TFX
CopyMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX
pages.
3. SelectCleanUpIFXRoutingstoopenthedialog
Thiscommandletsyoucopyanydesiredeffectsettings
box.
fromProgram,Combination,Song,orSamplingmode.
1. SelectCopyMFX/TFXtoopenthedialogbox.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCleanUpIFX
Routingscommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonif
youdecidetocancel.
2. InFrom,selectthecopysourcemode,bank,and
number.
YoucanalsousetheBANKSELECTswitchesto
selectthedesiredbank.
IfyoupresstheSetToCurrentbutton,the
currentlyselectedmode,bank,number,and
MFX/TFX(editcell)willautomaticallybeassigned
totheFromfield.Thisisusefulwhenyoure
tryingoutothereffectsettingsandwantto
temporarilycopypreviouslyeditedMFX/TFX
settingstoanothervacanteffectslot.
3. Selecttheeffectthatyouwanttocopy.
Youcancopyfromaninserteffectbyselecting
IFX112.
Ifyoucopyfromaninserteffect,theresultmaynot
beexactlythesame,duetodifferencesinrouting
andlevelsettings.
Inthisexample,thediscontinuouschain
IFX1IFX5IFX11IFX12hasbeenreorganized IfyouselectMFX1orMFX2,theReturnlevelwillbe
intoIFX1IFX2IFX3IFX4,andthevacantslots copiedatthesametime.
(000:NoEffect,unlesslocatedwithinachain)have Youcancopysettingsfromatotaleffectbyselecting
beenrearrangedconsecutively. TFX1orTFX2.
Atthistime,thefollowingparametersare IfyoucheckAllMFXs,allmastereffectsettingswill
automaticallyadjustedtomaintaintheexisting becopied.
routings. IfyoucheckAllTFXs,alltotaleffectsettingswillbe
Routing:BusSelect copied.MasterVolumesettingswillnotbecopied.
RoutingPageMenu:DKitPatch(Combi/Seq) 4. InTo,specifythecopydestinationmaster
effectsortotaleffects.
5. ToexecutetheCopyMaster/TotalEffectcommand,
presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancel
button.
157
Program mode: HD-1
Swap MFX/TFX
SwapMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX
pages.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)settingsbetween
MFX1,MFX2,TFX1,andTFX2.
1. SelectSwapMFX/TFXtoopenthedialogbox.
2. UseSource1andSource2toselectthemaster
effect(s)ortotaleffect(s)thatyouwanttoswap.
3. ToexecutetheSwapMaster/TotalEffect
command,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,press
theCancelbutton.
Write FX Preset
WriteFXPresetisavailableonalloftheeffects
parametereditingpages,includingIFX112,MFX1
and2,andTFX1and2.
1. SelectWriteFXPresettoopenthedialogbox.
2. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetextedit
dialogbox,andinputanamefortheeffectpreset.
3. UsetheTofieldtoselectthewritingdestination.
WerecommendthatyouuseU00U15.
4. PresstheOKbuttontowritetheuserpreset,or
presstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidetocancel.
Note:InDiskmodeyoucansaveorloadeffectpreset
settingsonexternalmedia.
158
Program mode: EXi
EXi Program P0: Play

ThisisthemainpageofProgrammodeforEXi
Programs.Amongotherthings,youcan:
SelectPrograms
Jumpdirectlytothemaineditingpages
MakebasiceditstoKARMA
Setuptheaudioinputsandresamplingoptions
Usethecontrolsurface
EXi Common parameters

EXi,orExpansionInstruments,extendthecapabilities
ofOASYSbyaddingnewsynthesistechnologies.Out
ofthebox,OASYScomeswiththreeEXi:theAL1
analogmodelingsynthesizer,theCX3modeled
tonewheelorgan,andtheSTR1PluckedString.
OASYSalsocurrentlyincludesthreeoptionalEXi:the
MS20EXandPolysixEXanalogmodelingsynths,and
theMOD7WaveshapingVPMsynthesizer.w
YoucancombineanytwoEXiwithinanEXiProgram.
EachEXimayhaveitsown,verydifferentparameters,
whichyoucanaccessviatheEXi1andEXi2buttonsat
thebottomofthescreen.
AllEXiProgramsalsoincludeastandardpaletteof
capabilities,includingeffects,KARMA,keytracking,
andtheCommonLFOandCommonStepSequencer.
Thesestandardparametersareavailableinthepages
undertheCommonbutton,andaredescribedinthis
chapter.
Auto Song Setup

TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs
theOASYSinrecordreadymode.
Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile
youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart
recordingimmediately.Todoso:
1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe
yousure?
2. PressOK.
YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill
beintherecordreadystate.
3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer
andbeginrecording.
159
Program mode: EXi
01: Main
01PMC
01a
01b Common
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]

01a: Bank, Program, and Category
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,which
Select appliestoKARMA,temposyncedLFOs,Step
Bank [INT-F, USER-AG] Sequencers,temposyncedeffects,andsoon.
ThisisthebankofthecurrentProgram.EXiPrograms EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI
canbestoredinbankINTF,orinanyoftheUSER clocks.YoullseethisiftheGlobalMIDIpageMIDI
banks,aslongastheirtypeissettoEXi.(Formore ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,orifitssetto
informationonsettingtheUSERbanktype,see AutoandtheOASYSiscurrentlyreceivingMIDI
ChangingtheBankTypeforUSERAGonpage 3.) clocks.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock
(MIDIClockSource)onpage 710.
YoucanselectBankseitherviatheonscreenmenu,or
byusingthefrontpanelBankbuttons. 040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousing
Program Select [000127, Name] thestandarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsojustturn
ThisisnameandnumberofthecurrentProgram. theTEMPOknob,orbyplayingafewquarternoteson
Whenthisparameterisselected,youcanselect theTAPTEMPObutton.
ProgramsusingtheInc andDec buttons,
numericbuttons09,ortheValuedial. 01b: Overview and Page Jump
YoucanalsousethepopupProgramandCategory
Thissectionshowsanoverviewofthemostimportant
menustoselectProgramsfromtheLCD.Formore
settingsfortheProgramstwoEXiinstruments,along
details,pleaseseeProgramSelectonpage 160
withsomeoftheimportantCommonparameters.The
Note:Onthispageonly,theVALUEsliderfunctionsas specificparameterswillvary,dependingonwhichEXi
amodulationsourcewhichmeansthatyoucantuse arebeingused.Parametersthatyoumayseeinclude
ittoselectPrograms. oscillatorsettings,filtersettings,EGs,LFOs,step
sequencers,drawbarsettings,andsoon.Seethe
Favorite [Off, On] individualEXidocumentationfordetails.
ThisbuttonmarkstheProgramasafavorite,which
Thegraphicsgiveyouaquickwaytocheckallofthese
makesiteasytofindintheBank/ProgramSelectand
settingsataglance.Theyalsoletyoujumpinstantlyto
Category/ProgramSelectdialogs.
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe
NotethatyoumustwritethePrograminordertosave graphics,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits
changestothissetting. parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilterEG
graphic,youllgototheFilterEGpage.
160
EXi Program P0: Play 06: KARMA GE
Common PressthisareatojumptotheEQpage.
Thegraphicsalongtherightsideofthescreenshow IFX, MFX/TFX

themostimportantCommonparameters,whichare PresstheIFXareatojumptotheIFXRoutingpage.
sharedbybothEXiintheProgram.Thissectionwill
alwaysshowthesameparameters,regardlessofwhich PresstheMFX/TFXareatojumptotheMFXRouting
EXiarebeingused. page.
Common Voice Assign Mode KARMA GE Name

ThisshowsthevoiceassignmodeoftheProgram ThisshowsthenameoftheselectedKARMAGE.
eitherPOLYorMONO. PressthisareatojumptotheGESetup/KeyZones
PressthisareatojumptotheProgramBasicpage. page.
Common Step Sequencer

ThisshowsagraphicoverviewoftheCommonStep
Sequencer. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
PressthisareatojumptotheCommonStepSequencer
page.
commandsonpage 142.
Common LFO Graphic 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
ThisshowsthewaveformoftheCommonLFO. Programonpage 142.
PressthisareatojumptotheCommonLFOpage. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
3 Band EQ Graphic
Thisshowsthemidsweepable3bandEQ.
06: KARMA GE
ThispageletsyoumakebasicadjustmentstoKARMA. FormoredetailededitingofKARMAparameters,see
ItworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1 ProgramP7:KARMAonpage 100.
Programs;formoreinformation,see06:KARMA
GEonpage 7.
07: Controller View/Effects

Thispageshowsthefunctionsassignedtothephysical ItworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1
controllers,includingthevectorjoystick,SW1and2, Programs;formoreinformation,see07:Controller
andknobs58.Italsoincludesanoverviewofallofthe View/Effectonpage 11.
effects,andletsyouadjusttheWet/DryBalances
separatelyfortheIFX,MFX,andTFX.

Thispageletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,effects ItworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1
sends,andbussingfortheaudioinputs,including Programs;formoreinformation,see08:Audio
analoginputs14andS/P DIFL/R.Italsocontrolsthe Input/Samplingonpage 12.
samplingrelatedsettingsforProgrammode.
09: Control Surface

TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and ControltheProgramsEQsettingsandMaster
16switchestotheleftoftheLCDdisplay.Itlookslikea EffectsSendlevels
mixer,butitcandootherthingsaswell,including ModulatesoundsandeffectsusingtheRealTime
editingsounds,controllingKARMA,andsending Knobs
MIDImessagestoexternaldevices.
ControlKARMA,andselectKARMAscenes,using
Thispageshowsyouthecurrentvaluesforeachofthe theslidersandswitches
sliders,knobs,andbuttons,alongwithinformation
aboutwhattheyarecontrolling.Forinstance,youcan: EditsoundsusingToneAdjust
AdjustthevolumeandpanforEXiinstruments1 Assignsliders,knobs,andswitchestodifferent
and2 ToneAdjustparameters
161
Program mode: EXi
Otherthantheexceptionsnotedbelow,itworksalmost
exactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1Programs,
substitutingEXi1/2forOSC1/2.Formoreinformation,
see09:ControlSurfaceonpage 18.
0-9e: RT/KARMA (Real Time

Knobs/KARMA)
RealtimeKnobs14havededicatedfunctions:Cutoff,
Resonance,FilterEGIntensity,andFilterRelease.EXi
instrumentswillsupportthesefunctionsasmuchas
possible,dependingupontheirarchitecture.
Forinstance,theAL1andSTR1supportallofthese
controls.TheCX3,ontheotherhand,hasnofiltersor
EGs,andsoitdoesnotsupportthematall.Fordetails
onotherEXi,pleaseseetheirdocumentation.
0-9f: Tone Adjust

ThefirstgroupofToneAdjustparametersarethe
Commonset,whichaffectbothEXi1andEXi2.For
moredetails,andacompletelistoftheparameters,
pleaseseeCommonToneAdjustParameterson
page 28.
SomeEXiinstrumentsmaynotsupportallofthe
CommonToneAdjustparameters.Fordetails,please
seetheindividualEXimanuals.
AftertheCommonparameters,theitemsinthelistwill
varydependingontheEXibeingused.Formore
information,pleasesee:
AL1:ToneAdjust,onpage 214.
CX3:ToneAdjust,onpage 236.
STR1:ToneAdjust,onpage 282.
MS20EX:ToneAdjust,onpage 309.
PolysixEX:ToneAdjust,onpage 325.
MOD7:ToneAdjustonpage 375.
OtherEXiinstrumentswillhavetheirownsetof
parameters,asdescribedintheirdocumentation.
ForthesenonCommonparameters,youhave
independentcontrolsforbothEXi1andEXi2evenif
theybothusethesameEXi.Forinstance,ifbothEXi
aresettousetheAL1,theycanstillhaveseparate
ToneAdjustsettingsfortheirLFOs,oscillators,andso
on.
162
EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector 41: Program Basic
EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector

ThesepagescontrolthebasicelementsoftheProgram, SetupVectorfadesbetweenEXi1andEXi2
alongwiththeVectorsynthesisfeatures.Forinstance, SetupVectorCCstomodulateProgramandEffects
youcan: parameters
SelecttheEXiinstrumentswhichformthebasisof ProgramtheVectorEnvelopetomovetheVector
theProgramssound positionautomatically
41: Program Basic

41PMC
41a 41b
41c
41d 41e
41f
41h
41g
Thispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsforthe YoucanselecteitheroneortwoEXisfortheProgram.
Program.Amongotherthings,youcan: UnlikeHD1Programs,thereisnosettingforSingleor
SelecttheEXiinstrumentswhichformthebasisof Double.IftherearetwoEXis,itdoesntmatterwhich
theProgramssound EXiisinwhichslot.Youcanevenselectonlyasingle
EXi,butplaceitinthesecondslot.
SettheProgramtoplaypolyphonicallyor
monophonically
CreateakeyboardsplitbetweenEXi1andEXi2
41b: EXi 2
SelecttheProgramsscale EXi 2 Instrument Type [List of installed EXi]
ThisisthesecondEXislotfortheProgram.
41a: EXi 1
41c: Voice Assign Mode
EXi 1 Instrument Type [List of installed EXi]
ThisisthemostbasicsettingfortheEXiProgram.EXi Voice Assign options may vary with different EXi
instrumentsarecompletesynthesizers,inandof Asmuchaspossible,differentEXiinstrumentswill
themselves;theymaycreateorprocesssoundsin supportallofthevoiceassignoptions.However,there
completelydifferentways,andallowyoutoadjust maybesomecasesinwhichaparticularEXidoesnot
completelydifferentparameters. supportaspecificvoiceassignparameter.
Forinstance,oneEXimightbeavirtualanalog Additionally,whenaProgramusestwodifferentEXi
synthesizer,andanothermightbeaphysically instruments,someofthevoiceassignoptionswillonly
modeledtonewheelorgan. takeaffectiftheyaresupportedbybothEXi.These
ThismenudisplaysalloftheEXisinstalledonthe include:
system. ThemainModeselection(PolyorMono)
PolyLegato
SingleTrigger
163
Program mode: EXi
MonoLegato On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,
Monomode(NormalorUseLegatoOffset) thenoteswithinalegatophrasewillsoundsmoother,
accordingtothesettingoftheModeparameter,below.
Unison
Off(unchecked):Legatophrasingwillproducethe
(Voice Assign Mode) [Poly, Mono] samesoundasdetachedplaying.
Theseradiobuttonsselectthebasicvoiceallocation Mode [Normal, Use Legato Offset]
mode.Dependingonwhichmodeyouselect,various
otheroptionswillappear,suchasPolyLegato(Poly ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenMonoLegatois
modeonly)andUnison(Monomodeonly). On.
Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowing Normal:Whenyouplaylegato,theenvelopesand
youplaychords. LFOs(andsamples,iftheEXisupportssamples)will
notbereset.Instead,onlythepitchoftheoscillatorwill
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically, change.Thissettingisparticularlyeffectiveforwind
producingonlyonenoteatatime. instrumentsandanalogsynthsounds.
Poly WhenusedwithEXiwhichsupportsamples,the
pitchmayoccasionallybeincorrect,dependingon
Poly Legato [Off, On] whichmultisampleyouplay,andwhereonthe
PolyLegatoisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignMode keyboardyouplay.
issettoPoly.ThisoptionappliesonlytoEXiwhich UseLegatoOffset:ThisappliesonlytoEXiwhich
includesampleplayback. supportsamples.Whenyouplaylegato,allbutthefirst
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand notewillusetheMultisamplesLegatoStartPoint,
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnote insteadoftheonesetbytheStartOffsetparameter.
isreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached. ThiswillbemosteffectiveforMultisampleswith
specificallydesignedLegatoOffsetpoints;forsome
On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing, Multisamples,itmayhavenoeffect.
onlythefirstnotesinthephrase(withinthefirst30ms)
willusethenormalMultisampleStartPoint,assetby EnvelopesandLFOswillstillbereset,astheyarewith
theStartPointOffsetparameter.Therestofthenotes detachedplaying.
willusetheLegatoStartPoint. Priority [Low, High, Last]
Off(unchecked):Noteswillalwaysusethesettingof PriorityisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeisset
theStartPointOffset,regardlessofwhetheryouplay toMono.
legatoordetached.
Thisparameterdetermineswhathappenswhenmore
WithsomeMultisamples,PolyLegatomaynothave thanonenoteisbeinghelddown.
anyeffect.
Low:Thelowestnotewillsound.Manyvintage,
Single Trigger [Off, On] monophonicanalogsynthsworkthisway
SingleTriggerisavailablewhentheVoiceAssign High:Thehighestnotewillsound.
ModeissettoPoly. Last:Themostrecentlyplayednotewillsound.
On(checked):Whenyouplaythesamenote
repeatedly,thepreviousnotewillbesilencedbefore Max # of Notes
thenextnoteissounded,sothatthetwodonot
overlap. Max # of Notes [Dynamic, 116]
Off(unchecked):Whenyouplaythesamenote Dynamicisthedefault.Withthissetting,youcanplay
repeatedly,thenoteswilloverlap. asmanynotesasthesystemallows.
116letsyoulimitthemaximumnumberofnotes
Mono playedbytheProgram.Youcanusethisto:
Mono Legato [Off, On] Modelthevoiceleadingofvintagesynthesizers,

suchasthePolysix
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono. Controltheresourcesrequiredbyindividual
ProgramsinCombinationandSequencermodes
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnote Max#ofNotesappliesonlywhenthemainVoice
isreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached. AssignModeissettoPoly.IfMonoisselected,thisis
grayedout.
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegato
phrasewillsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnotes ThissettingdoesnotlimittheUnisonNumberof
willhaveasmoothersound,formoregentle Voicesparameter.Forinstance,ifMax#ofNotesisset
transitionsbetweenthenotes. to6,andUnisonNumberofVoicesissetto3,youcan
playupto6notes,eachwith3Unisonvoices.
TheModeparameter,below,switchesbetweentwo
differentMonoLegatoeffects,eachofwhichachieves IftherearetwoEXiintheProgram,theMax#ofNotes
thissmoothnessinadifferentway.Seethedescription appliesequallytoboth.Forinstance,ifMax#ofNotes
ofthatparameterformoredetails. issetto4,youcanplayupto4notesoneachEXi.
164
Chord case,intermediatesettingsofStereoSpreadmaybe
themosteffective,sincetheywillstillpreservesomeof
Chord [Off, Bsc, Adv] theoriginalstereoimage.
OffdisablestheChordfunction. Unisondetuningisspreadasevenlyaspossibleacross
Bsc(Basic)recreatesthechordmodeoftheKORG theleftandrightchannels.Thelowestvoicewillbeon
Polysix.Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,itwillcutoff theleft,andthehighestontheright;thenextloweston
thepreviouschord.ThisoptionignorestheVoice theleft,andthenexthighestontheright,etc.,as
Assignsettings. below:
Adv(Advanced)usestheProgramsVoiceAssign 14cents:L
settings,asifeachnoteinthechordwasatransposed +14cents:R
setofoscillatorslayeredwithintheProgram.
10cents:L
Poly,PolyLegato,SingleTrigger,Mono,MonoLegato,
+10cents:Retc.
Unisonallapply. DependingontheThicknesssetting,thedetuning
mayleanslightlytooneside.
settingChordtoAdvanced,VoiceAssigntoMono, Detune [00200 cents]
PrioritytoLastNote,andLegatotoOff.
DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Formoreinformation,seeUsingChordmodeon
ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnison
page 54oftheOperationGuide.
voices,incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThickness
Source Pad [1...8] parameter,below,controlshowthevoicesare
distributedacrossthedetuneamount.When
ChordmodeusesthechordsassignedtothePads.This
ThicknessisOff,thevoicesaredistributedevenly,
selectswhichofthePadstouse.Youcanalsochoose
centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
chordsusingthePadsthemselves;formore
information,seeSelectingchordsonpage 55ofthe Forinstance,letssaythattheNumberofvoices
OperationGuide. parameterissetto3,Detuneissetto24,and
ThicknessisOff:
Unison Voiceonewillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwo
willnotbedetuned,andvoicethreewillbedetunedup
Unison [On, Off]
by12cents.
UnisoncanbeusedinbothMonoandPolymodes.
Voice Detune
On(checked):WhenUnisonison,theProgramuses
twoormorestacked,detunedvoicestocreateathick 1 12
sound.
UsetheNumberofVoicesandDetuneparametersto 2 0
setthenumberofvoicesandamountofdetuning,and
3 +12
theThicknessparametertocontrolthecharacterofthe
detuning. Asanotherexample,letssaythatDetuneisstillsetto
Off(unchecked):TheProgramplaysnormally.If 24andThicknessisstillOff,butNumberofvoicesis
UnisonisOff,thenallofitsassociatedparametersare setto4:
grayedout. Voiceonewillstillbedetuneddownby12cents,voice
Number of voices [216] twowillbedetuneddownby4cents,voicethreewill
bedetunedupby4cents,andvoice4willbedetuned
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe upby12cents.
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itapplies
onlywhenUnisonisOn. Voice Detune
Stereo Spread [0...100] 1 12
StereoSpreadletsyoucreateawiderstereofieldwhen
usingUnison.ItappliesonlywhenUnisonisOn. 2 4
ThisfeatureseparatesthedifferentUnisonvoicesinto 3 +4
twogroups.Onegroupispannedtotheleft,andthe
othertotheright.At0,bothgroupswillbeinthe 4 +12
center;at100,thetwogroupswillbehardpannedleft
andright,respectively;atintermediatevalues,they Thickness [Off, 0109]
willbepannedtointermediateleftandrightpositions. ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Ifthereisanoddnumberofvoices,onevoicewillbe Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuning
pannedtothecenter. fortheunisonvoices.
Ifthevoicesaretruestereo,StereoSpreadsteersthe Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacross
stereoimageofeachvoice,similartoMIDIPan theDetunerange,asshownabove.
(CC#10)andtheControlSurfacePanknobs.Inthis
165
Program mode: EXi
0109:Unisonvoiceswillbedetunedinanasymmetric
way,increasingthecomplexityofthedetune,and 41e: Scale
changingthewayinwhichthedifferentpitchesbeat
Type [Equal TemperamentUser Octave Scale15]
againstoneanother.Thiscreatesaneffectsimilarto
vintageanalogsynthesizers,inwhichoscillatorswere SelectsthebasicscalefortheProgram.
frequentlyslightlyoutoftune.Highernumbers Notethatformanyofthescales,thesettingoftheKey
increasetheeffect. parameter,below,isveryimportant.
Foracompletelistoftheavailablescales,pleasesee
41d: Key Zone 11g:Scaleonpage 37.
Youcancreatekeyboardsplitsbysettingtopand Key (Scale Key) [CB]
bottomkeysforEXi1and2.Also,youcancontrolthe Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
keyboardrangeoverwhichtheHoldparametertakes
effect. ThissettingdoesnotapplytotheEqualTemperament,
Stretch,andUserAllNotesscales.
Setting Key Zones from the keyboard IfyoureusingascaleotherthanEqual
Inadditiontousingthestandarddataentrycontrols, Temperament,thecombinationoftheselectedscale
youcanalsosetallkeyboardzonesparametersdirectly andtheKeysettingmayskewthetuningofthe
fromthekeyboard.Justdothefollowing: note.Forexample,AabovemiddleCmightbecome
1. Selectthekeyzoneparameteryoudliketoedit. 442Hz,insteadofthenormal440Hz.Youcanuse
theGlobalModesMasterTuneparametertocorrect
2. PressandholdtheENTERbutton.
this,ifnecessary.
3. Playanoteonthekeyboardtosettheparameter.
4. ReleasetheENTERbutton. Random [07]
Youcanusethisshortcutforallkeyandvelocity Thisparametercreatesrandomvariationsinpitchfor
parametersintheOASYS. eachnote.Atthedefaultvalueof0,pitchwillbe
completelystable;highervaluescreatemore
EXi 1 Bottom [C-1G9] randomization.
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichEXi1willplay. Thisparameterishandyforsimulatinginstruments
thathavenaturalpitchinstabilities,suchasanalog
EXi 1 Top [C-1G9] synths,tapemechanismorgansoracoustic
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichEXi1willplay. instruments.
EXi 2 Bottom [C-1G9]

ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichEXi2willplay. 41f: Note-On Control
EXi 2 Top [C-1G9] EXi 1 Delay [0ms5000ms, KeyOff]
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichEXi2willplay. Usethistocreateadelaybetweenthetimethatyou
pressakey,andthetimethatEXi1snoteactually
Hold [On, Off] sounds.
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain ThisismostusefulinDoublePrograms,fordelaying
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasif oneEXiinrelationtotheother.
youwereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryoulift
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthe
yourfingersfromthekeyboard.
soundbyaparticularamountoftime,thesoundwill
UnlesstheSustainLevelissetto0inAmpEG1(and playassoonasyoureleasethekey.
AmpEG2inaDoubleProgram),thesoundwill
Youcanusethistocreatetheclickheardwhena
continuetoplayforeveror,forEXiwhichsupport
harpsichordnoteisreleased,forinstance.
samples,itwillplayfortheentirelengthofthe
sample(s). Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalso
besttosettheAmpEGSustainLevelto0(assuming
On(checked):TheHoldfunctionisenabledforthe
theEXiincludesanAmpEG).
rangesetbytheHoldBottomandHoldTop
parameters,below. EXi 2 Delay [0ms5000ms, KeyOff]
Off(unchecked):Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthe ThiscontrolsthenoteondelayforEXi2.Formore
defaultsetting. information,seeEXi1Delayonpage 166.
Hold Bottom [C-1G9]

ThissetsthelowestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction. 41g: Half-Damper Control
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuous
Hold Top [C-1G9]
footpedal,suchastheKorgDS1H.Incomparisontoa
ThissetsthehighestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction. standardfootswitch,halfdamperpedalsoffermore
subtlecontrolofsustain,whichcanbeespeciallyuseful
forpianosounds.
166
TheOASYSwillautomaticallysensewhenahalf
damperisconnectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput. t 41: Page Menu Commands
Forproperoperation,youwillalsoneedtocalibrate ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
thepedal,usingtheCalibrateHalfDampercommand numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
intheGlobalpagemenu. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperwork commandsonpage 142.
justlikeastandardfootswitch.Inconjunctionwiththe 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
EnableHalfDamperparameter,below,intermediate Programonpage 142.
positionsallowagraduatedcontrolofsustain,similar
tothedamperpedalofanacousticpiano. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Enable Half-Damper [On, Off] 2:CopyEXiOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
WhenthisisOn(checked),HalfDamperpedals, CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
normalsustainpedals,andMIDICC#64willall
modulatetheAmpEG,asdescribedbelow.
WhenthisisOff(unchecked),thepedalsandMIDI
CC#64willstillholdnotesasusual,butwillnot
modulatetheAmpEG.
Half-Damper Pedal and Release Time

Theamountofmodulationdependsonwhetherthe
AmpEGSustainLevelissetto0(asisthecasewith
mostacousticpianosounds),orsetto1ormore.The
modulationiscontinuous,from1x(nochange)to55
timeslonger;thetablebelowshowsaselectionof
representativepoints.
HalfDampermodulationofAmpEGReleaseTime
CC#64 Multiply Amp EG Release Time by

Value If Sustain = 0 If Sustain = 1 or more
0 1x 1x
32 2.1x 2.1x
64 3.2x
80 5.9x
3.2x
96 22.3x
127 55x
41h: Transpose
Theseparametersmakeiteasytotransposeoneorboth
EXi.Tokeepthetimbrethesameforagivenpitch,
otherkeyrelatedparametersaretransposedaswell,
suchaskeytrackingandnotenumberAMS.
Forinstance:
1. SetakeytrackbreakpointtoC2.
2. Setthetransposeto+2.
Now,thekeytrackbreakpointwillstilldisplayasC2,
butwillbetransposeduptoD2.
Thesetranspositionsarecumulativewith
Timbre/TracktransposeinCombinationsandSongs.
Note:TheEXi1/2keyzonesdirectlyrepresentthe
physicalkeyboard,andarenotaffectedbythese
transposesettings.Formoreinformation,see41d:
KeyZoneonpage 166.
EXi 1 [60+60]
ThistransposesEXi1,insemitones.Thedefaultis0.
EXi 2 [60+60]
ThistransposesEXi1,insemitones.Thedefaultis0.
167
Program mode: EXi
42: EXi Audio Input

42PMC
42a 42b
TheseparametersletyourouteaudiointoEXi Offdisablestheinput.
instrumentswhichsupportaudioinput,suchasthe AudioInput1/23/4andS/P DIFInputL/Rusethe
STR1.Youcanusethistocreatefeedbackloops,orto liveaudiofromtheselectedinput.
processliveorrecordedaudiothroughtheEXis
synthesisengine. L/ROutputandIndiv.Output1/27/8usetheaudio
asitisheardfromtheselectedoutput(likeconnecting
EXiwhichdonotsupportaudioinputwillignorethese acablefromtheoutputbacktotheinput).
settings.
REC1/23/4andFXControl1,2usetheaudiofrom
Formoreinformationonusingaudioinputswiththe theselectedbus.
STR1,see48c:Feedbackonpage 261.
IFX112,MFX1,2,andTFX1,2usetheoutputofthe
Youcanoverridethesesettings,ifdesired,in selectedeffect.
CombinationandSequencermodes.Formore
information,see26:EXiAudioInputonpage 422 Channel Select [Stereo/L+R, Left, Right]
(Combimode),and26:EXiAudioInputon Stereo/L+R:ThisselectionroutesastereosignaltoEXi
page 530(Sequencermode). withstereoinputs,andanL+RsummationtoEXiwith
monoinputs.
42a: EXi 1 Left,Right:Thisusesonlyamonosignalfromthe
selectedchannel.
Input Source [Off, Audio Input 1/2...3/4,
S/P DIF Input L/R, L/R Output,
Indiv. Output 1/2...7/8, REC 1/2, 3/4, 42b: EXi 2
FX Control 1, 2, IFX 1...12, MFX 1, 2, TFX 1, 2] EXi2hasthesamecontrolsasEXi1,above.
ThisselectstheinputsourceforEXi1.Youcanusethis
tocreateafeedbackloop,ifdesired.
45: Vector Control

VectorSynthesisletsyoucontrolProgramandEffects
parametersbymovingtheVectorJoystick,byusingthe t 45: Page Menu Commands
programmableVectorEnvelope,orbythecombination ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ofthetwo. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
ThispageworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Programs,substitutingEXi1/2forOSC1/2.Formore commandsonpage 142.
information,see15:VectorControlonpage 39. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
168
EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector 46: Vector Envelope
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 2:CopyEXiOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
46: Vector Envelope

TheVectorEnvelopeworkstogetherwiththeVector ThispageworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1
JoysticktocontroltheVectorposition.Itsalsospecial Programs,substitutingEXi1/2forOSC1/2.Formore
becauseitstheonlyprogrammablemodulationsource information,see16:VectorEnvelopeonpage 43.
whichletsyoumodulatebothProgramandEffects
parameters.
envelopesinseveralways: ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
EachpointhastwolevelsonefortheXaxis,and
onefortheYaxis.
commandsonpage 142.
Theenvelopetimescanbebasedonsecondsand
milliseconds,orsyncedtotempo.
Programonpage 142.
Eachpointhasaholdtime,aswellasatransition
timetothenextpoint.
Theenvelopecanloopbetweentwopoints,for
2:CopyEXiOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
eitheraspecifiednumberofrepeats,oraslongas
CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
youholdthenote.

ThispageletsyousetupthefunctionalityofSW1/2 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
andRealTimeKnobs58.Itworksexactlylikethe Programonpage 142.
similarpageforHD1Programs;formoreinformation, 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
see18:SetUpControllersonpage 46. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
t 48: Page Menu Commands CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
commandsonpage 142.
49: Set Up Pads

Thispageletsyouviewandeditthenoteassignments
forthe8drumpads.Itworksexactlylikethesimilar
pageforHD1Programs;formoreinformation,see1
9:SetUpPadsonpage 47.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
3:CopyPadSetup.Formoreinformation,see
CopyPadSetuponpage 148.
169
Program mode: EXi
EXi Program P5: Modulation

TheentireProgramsharesseveralmodulationsources, TwoCommonKeyTrackinggenerators,whichare
including: setupfortheentireProgram,butthencalculated
AsingleCommonLFO,sharedbyallthevoices individuallyforeachvoice
similartotheglobalLFOonsomevintageanalog ThesepagesletyousetuptheseProgramwide
synths modulationsources.
AsingleCommonStepsequencer,sharedbyallthe
voices
51: Common Step Seq

51d 51PMC
51a
51a
51b
51c
dosoexplicitlyviatheSequencerResetparameter.
Overview ThisisdifferentfromthepervoiceStepSequencers
TheCommonStepSequencercreatescomplex, KeySyncOffsetting,whichresetswheneverallnotes
rhythmicpatterns,whichcanthenbeusedasanAMS arereleased.
source.Forinstance,youcanmodulateafiltertocreate (However,youcancreateasimilarbehavior,ifyou
sampleandholdeffects,modulatepitchtocreate like;seetheSequencerResetparameterformore
melodicpatterns,ormodulateamplitudetocreate information.)
pulsing,triggeredgateeffects.
TheCommonStepSequencerspersistencecanbe
Thesequencecanhaveupto32steps,eachwithits handyifyouwanttocreateaconstantrhythm,and
ownlevelandduration.Itcanloop,orplayonlyonce. thenplayunderneaththatrhythmwithoutre
Youcanalso: triggeringit.Forinstance,youcanuseaMIDI
RestarttheStepSequencerviaAMS controllerinyoursequencertoresettheCommonStep
Sequencereveryfewbars,regardlessofwhatnotesare
ModulatetheStartStepviaAMS beingplayed.
Useindividualstepstoeithergateordosample
andholdonacontinuousAMSsource,suchasan Creating melodic patterns with the Step Sequencer
LFO YoucanusetheStepSequencertomodulatesynthesis
Assignindividualstepstocreatearandomlevel parameters,suchasfiltercutoffandyoucanalsouse
ittocreatemelodicpatterns.Todoso:
UseSmoothingtocreategentle,curvingshapes
1. AssigntheStepSequencerasanAMSsourcefor
Differences from per-voice Step Sequencers Pitch.
ThereisonlyasingleCommonStepSequencershared 2. SettheAMSintensityto+25.
bytheentireProgram.Itstartsrunningassoonasyou 3. IntheStepSequencer,setthestepvaluesas
selecttheProgram,andonlyresetswhenyoutellitto desired.Eachincrementof4equalsasemitone.
170
EXi Program P5: Modulation 51: Common Step Seq
Forexample,toplayanascendingchromaticscale,set valueofzero.(Youcouldusenegativevalues,aswell,
thestepvaluesto0,+4,+8,+12,+16,andsoon.One butthatwouldmaketheactionoftheAttackand
octaveupis+48,andtwooctavesupis+96. Decaycontrolsmorecomplicated.)
Toheartheeffectclearly,letsuseanAL1,andassign
51a: Step Sequencer theStepSequencertomodulateFilterCutoff:
1. InasingleEXiProgram,setEXi1toAL1.
Mode [Loop, One Shot]
2. SettheFilterTypetoLowpass,andtheRoutingto
LoopmakestheStepSequenceloopcontinuously 24dB(4pole).
betweentheStartStepandtheEndStep.
3. SettheFilterCutoffto00.
OneShotmakestheStepSequenceplayoncefromthe
4. OntheFilterModpage,setFilterAsAMSto
StartSteptotheEndStep,andthenholdattheEnd
CommonStepSequencer,andsettheIntensityto
Step.YoucanstillresettheStepSequencerfromAMS
90.
tomakeitplayagain.
YoucouldalsousethepervoiceStepSequencer,but
Start Step [132] forthisexamplewellusetheCommonone.
Thissetsthesteponwhichthesequencewillstart.The 5. IntheCommonStepSequencer,settheEndStep
StartStepisimportantfortheModeparameter,above. to4.
YoucanalsomodulateitviaAMS. 6. SettheModetoLoop.
AMS [AMS Sources] 7. SetStep1sValueto+100.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheStartStep. 8. ForbothStep2andStep4,settheValueto0.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation 9. SetStep3sValueto+80.
10.SettheDurationsofallfourStepstoa32ndnote.
Intensity [-32+32] 11.TurnthefrontpanelTempoknobtothecenter,at
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheStartStep about120bpm.
modulation. Ifthetempoisreallyfast,youdneedtouselongerStep
Durations.
End Step [0132]
12.SettheSmoothingAttackto0.
Thissetsthelaststepinthesequence.Oncethe
sequencereachestheEndStep,itwilleitherholdthere 13.AdjusttheSmoothingDecayto80.
untilthenotegoesaway(ifModeissettoOneShot), Now,theStepSequencerwillcreateaseriesof16th
orloopbacktotheStartStep(ifModeissettoLoop). notepulses,likesimpleenvelopes.Withthesettings
above,theyenvelopeswillhaveaninstantattack,
Smoothing andamoderatedecay/releasetime.
ThesecontrolsfiltertheStepSequencersoutputsignal, Formorespacebetweenthepulses,trythis:
creatingmoregentletransitionsbetweenvalues.You 14.ForbothStep2andStep4,settheDurationx
canusethistoroundoffthehardedgesoftheStep (MultiplyBaseNoteby)to3.
Sequencersoutput,ortocreateenvelopelikeeffects.
Thiscreatesaseriesof8thnotepulses,withalonger
Youhaveseparatecontroloftheamountofsmoothing timebetweeneachpulse.
duringtheattack(whenthesignalisincreasing)and
15.AdjusttheDecaybetween0and99,andlistento
decay(whenitsdecreasing).
thedifferencethatitmakes.
Attack [0099] Youcanalsocreatesmoother,LFOlikeeffects.Trythis:
Thiscontrolstheattacktimeofthesmoother,orhow 16.SettheDecayto80,andthenvarytheAttacktime.
longittakestoreachanew,highervalue.
WithlongerAttacktimes,thepulsesbecomesofterin
HigherAttacksettingsmeanlongertimes. character.
DependingonhowquicklytheStepSequencervalueis
Using Smoothing to make step transitions more
changing,highAttacksettingsmaymeanthatanew
gentle
valueisneverquitereached.
Withoutsmoothing,theStepSequencersoutputhas
Decay [0099] verysharptransitionsbetweenvalues.Often,thismay
Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeofthesmoother,orhow bejustwhatyourelookingfor.Insomecases,
longittakesthesmoothertoreachanew,lowervalue. however,thesetransitionsmaycauseaudioartifacts,
suchaslowfrequencybumps.Thiswilldependonthe
HigherDecaysettingsmeanlongertimes.
parameterbeingmodulated,andtheintensityofthe
Using Smoothing to create envelope-like shapes modulation.
Sinceyouhaveseparatecontrolovertheattackand Ifthishappens,youcanusesmoothingtomakethe
decaytimes,youcanuseSmoothingtocreate transitionsmoregentle,andreduceoreliminatethe
envelopelikepulses.Todoso,youllneedtoalternate artifacts.Todoso:
StepValuessothatapositivevalueisfollowedbya 1. Adjustthesmoothinguntilitsjusthighenough
thattheartifactsarenolongerheard.Startwiththe
Decay,andthenuseAttackifnecessary.
171
Program mode: EXi
WhenusingpositiveStepSequencervaluesand Duration (Base Note) 1-32 [r w ]

positivemodulation,youllgenerallyonlyneedto Thissetsthebasiclengthofthestep,relativetothe
adjusttheDecay;otherwise,youmayneedtoadjust systemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoa
theAttackaswell. wholenote,includingtriplets.
Thetrickistosetthesmoothinghighenoughsothat
theartifactsgoaway,butlowenoughthatthesoundof x (Multiply Base Note by) 1-32 [0132]
theStepSequencerisntalteredsignificantly. ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
Timesissetto3,thestepsdurationwillbeadotted
51b: Sequencer Reset eighthnote.
AMS [AMS Sources]
Command buttons
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresetthesequencetothe
StartStep. Step
TocreateaneffectsimilartothepervoiceStep Step [0132]
SequencersKeySyncOffsetting,setthistoGate1+
Damper. Selectsthestepthatyouwanttoedit.
Threshold [-99+99] Insert

ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwillmaketheStep Insertsthecutorcopiedstepatthecurrentstep.
Sequencerreset.Amongotherthings,youcanusethis Cut
toadjusttheexactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichthe
sequencerwillbereset,effectivelycontrollingits Cutsthecurrentstep.Subsequentstepswillbemoved
grooveagainstotherrhythmiceffects. forward.Ifdesired,youcanthenpasteorinsertthecut
stepintoanotherlocation.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theStepSequencer
triggerswhenpassingthroughthethresholdmoving Copy
upwards.Whenthethresholdisnegative,theStep Copiesthecurrentstep.Youcanthenpasteorinsert
Sequencertriggerswhenpassingthroughthe thecopiedstepintoanotherlocation.
thresholdmovingdownwards.
Note:withsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFO Paste
speeds,theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextreme Pastesthecutorcopiedstepontothecurrentstep,
valuesof+99or99.Inthiscase,settingtheThreshold replacingit.
maymeanthattheStepSequencerdoesntresetatall. Value
Ifthishappens,reducetheThresholduntiltheStep Reset
Sequencertriggersconsistently.
ResetstheValueofeachstepto000.
51c: Value AMS Input Smooth

AutomaticallyadjuststheValueofeachstepsothat
AMS [AMS Sources] theyaresmoothlyconnected.
ThisistheAMSsourceusedforstepssettoAMS
InputorAMSInputS/H. Exp/Comp
WhenyoupresstheExp/Compbutton,theStep
SequenceValuedialogboxwillappear.Thevalueof
51d: Step Parameters eachstepwillbeexpandedorcompressedbythe
Eachofthe32stepshasitsownsettingsforValueand percentage(%)youspecify.
Duration. StepSequenceValuedialogbox
Value 1-32 [-100+100, Random,
AMS Input, AMS Input S/H]
100through+100generatespecificlevels,justasyoud
expect.
Randomyieldsadifferent,randomvalueeverytime
thestepisplayed.
AMSInputusesthesignalfromtheValueAMSInput
source,above.Thiscanchangecontinuouslyoverthe Expand/Compress [%] [0100]
durationofthestep.Forinstance,ifyouusedanLFO Ifthisisat100%,thecurrentvalueofeachstepwillbe
astheValueAMSInput,youdheartheLFOmove usedwithoutchange.IfyoucheckKeepProportion,
overthedurationofthestep. the%valuewillbelimitedsothattheexpansion/
AMSInputS/HgrabstheleveloftheValueAMS compressionwillmaintaintherelationshipsbetween
Inputsourceatthestartofthestep,andthenmaintains thecurrentstepsettings.
thatsinglevalueforthedurationofthestep.
172
EXi Program P5: Modulation 52: Common LFO
Duration
x2
Thisdoublesthedurationofthestepsorthex numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
(MultiplyBaseNoteby)value.Forexample,it shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
wouldturneighthnotesintoquarternotes,and commandsonpage 142.
quarternotesintohalfnotes.
/2 Programonpage 142.
Thishalvesthedurationofthestepsorthex 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
(MultiplyBaseNoteby)value.Forexample,it ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
wouldturnquarternotesintoeighthnotes,andeighth 2:CopyStepSequencer.Formoreinformation,see
notesintosixteenthnotes. CopyStepSequenceronpage 174.
52: Common LFO

Thisisasingle,freerunningLFO,globalforallvoices ThispageworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1
intheProgramlikethemodulationLFOsinsome Programs.Formoreinformation,see59:Common
vintageanalogsynths.Itsalwaysavailableasa LFOonpage 88.
modulationsourceforbothEXi1andEXi2,regardless
ofwhichEXiinstrumentsarebeingused.
53: Common Keyboard Track

TheProgramincludestwoCommonkeyboard TheyworkalmostexactlyliketheCommonKeyTrack
trackinggenerators,inadditiontoanykeyboard generatorsforHD1Programs;formoreinformation,
trackingwithintheindividualEXiinstruments.You see69:CommonKeyboardTrackonpage 97.
canusetheseCommonkeytracksasAMSsourcesfor Thereisonedifferencebetweenthetwo,however:EXi
modulatingmostAMSdestinations. keyboardtrackingisaffectedbyPortamento,sothatit
TheCommonKeyTrackparametersaresharedbythe changessmoothlyduringglides.
entireProgram,buttheactualAMSvaluesare
calculatedindividuallyforeachvoice.
EXi Program P6: EQ

Thispageisverysimple,butveryuseful:itletsyou
controltheProgramsEQsettings.Itworksexactlylike
thesimilarpageforHD1Programs;formore
information,see49:EQonpage 82.
EXi Program P7: KARMA

ThispagesletyoucontroltheProgramsKARMA
settings.Theyworkexactlylikethesimilarpagesfor
HD1Programs;formoreinformation,seeProgram
P7:KARMAonpage 100.
EXi Program P8: Insert Effect

ThispagesletyoucontroltheProgramstwelveInsert
Effects(IFX).Theyworkexactlylikethesimilarpages
forHD1Programs;formoreinformation,see
ProgramP8:InsertEffectonpage 127.
EXi Program P9: Master/Total Effect

ThispagesletyoucontroltheProgramstwoMaster Effectonpage 138.
Effects(MFX)andtwoTotalEffects(TFX).Theywork
exactlylikethesimilarpagesforHD1Programs;for
moreinformation,seeProgramP9:Master/Total
173
Program mode: EXi
EXi Program: Page Menu Commands

stepsequencer.OnlyEXiwhichactuallycontain
Copy EXi Oscillator pervoicestepsequencerswillappearintheEXi1/2
ThiscommandcopiestheoscillatorsettingsofaEXi selection.
program. 3. UsetheProgramfieldtoselectthebankand
1. SelectCopyEXiOscillatortoopenthedialog numberofthecopysourceprogram.
box. YoucanalsousetheBANKSELECTswitchesto
selectabank.
Note:YoucantselectHD1programs.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyStep
Sequencercommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonif
youdecidenottoexecute.
Some AMS settings are not copied

ThefollowingAMSrelatedparametersarenotcopied:
StartStepAMSandIntensity
2. UsetheFromfieldtoselectwhethertocopy SequenceResetAMSandThreshold
fromEXi1orEXi2. ValueAMSInputAMSselection
3. UsetheProgramfieldtoselectthebankand
numberofthesourceProgram.Youcanalsouse
theBANKSELECTswitchestoselectabank.
Note:YoucantselectHD1Programshere.
IfToneAdjusttooischecked,theToneAdjust
settingswillbecopiedalongwiththerestoftheEXi
parameters.
Ifthisisnotchecked,andthedestination(To)had
previouslyusedthesameEXiInstrumentTypeas
thesource(From),thentheToneAdjustsettingsof
thedestinationwillbepreserved.
IftheEXiInstrumentTypesweredifferent,allTone
Adjustsettingsofthedestinationwillbeinitialized.
4. UsetheTofieldtoselectthecopydestination
oscillator.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyOscillator
operation,orpresstheCancelbuttonifyoudecide
nottoexecute.
Copy Step Sequencer

Thiscommandcopiesthestepsequencersettingsofthe
desiredEXiprogram.
1. SelectCopyStepSequencertoopenthedialog
box.
2. UsetheFromfieldtoselecteitherCommonStep
SequencerorVoiceStepSequencerasthestep
sequenceryouwanttocopy.
VoiceStepSequencerletsyoucopyfromtheper
voicestepsequencerwithinanEXi,suchastheAL
1.YoucanchoosetocopyfromeitherEXi1orEXi2.
SomeEXi,suchastheCX3,donthaveapervoice
174
EXi: AL-1 Analog Synthesizer
AL-1 Overview
TheAL1isKorgsmostfullfeaturedvirtualanalog Twokeytrackinggeneratorsandtwomodulation
synthesizertodate.ItsplayedfromwithinEXi mixers
Programs,soyoucanlayeritwithanyotherEXior AccesstoallstandardEXiProgramfeatures,
layertwoAL1stogether.Itsfeaturesinclude: includingtheCommonLFO,CommonStep
Twoultralowaliasingoscillators,basedonnew, Sequencer,KeyTrack1&2,KARMA,EQ,and
proprietarytechnology effects
Suboscillator,colorednoisegenerator,andlive Unsupported EXi Common parameters
audioinput;FM,sync,andringmodulation
TheAL1supportsalloftheEXiCommonparameters,
Dualmultimoderesonantfilters,includingKorgs exceptfortwoofthevoiceallocationoptions:Poly
newMultiFilter LegatoandMonoMode(Normal/UseLegatoOffset).
DriveandLowBoost,foraddingpervoicegrit, Bothoftheseoptionsaredesignedforsample
girthanddistortion playback,andsotheydontapplytotheAL1.
FourpervoiceLFOs,fiveretriggerableenvelopes, Alloftheothervoiceallocationoptionsarefully
andapervoicestepsequencer supported,includingMono,MonoLegato,Unison,etc.
EXi Program Structure Common Common Key

Vector KARMA
LFO Step Seq Track 1
2
EXi 1
Mixer
Effects
& EQ
EXi 2
AL-1 Structure AMS Step

LFO 1 EG 1
Mixer 1 Sequencer
2 2 2
FM & Sync
3 3
4 4
Amp
Osc 1 EG
Filter Amp
Osc 2 Key Track Key Track
Serial/
Parallel
Noise Mixer
St. Pan
Filter A
X
Sub Osc St. Drive St. Amp
Filter B X
Audio In
Ring Mod
EXi 1
EXi 2
175
01: Main
01b
ThisisthemainpageofProgrammode.Forafull Common Key Zone

descriptionofthispageandallofitsfunctions,please
seeEXiProgramP0:Playonpage 159.Thissection ThisshowsthekeyzonesforEXi1andEXi2,asseton
describesonlytheoverviewdisplay,whichdiffersfor theCommonsectionsProgramBasicpage,inrelation
eachindividualEXi. totheentireMIDInoterange.Therangeofthe76note
or88notekeyboardisalsoshown,asappropriate.
PressthisareatojumptotheProgramBasicpage.
Thispartofthepageshowsanoverviewofthemost Pitch
importantsettingsfortheProgramstwoEXi ThisshowsthePitchEGSelectandPitchLFOSelect
instruments.Thespecificparameterswillvary, settingsforOSC1andOSC2.
dependingonwhichEXiarebeingused.Thespecific
TouchanEGicontojumptothePitchEG/Modpage,
parametersfortheAL1aredescribedbelow.
ortouchanLFOicontojumptothePitchCommon
Thegraphicsgiveyouaquickwaytocheckallofthese page.
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe Filter
graphics,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits
parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilterEG Filter Routing, Type, and Frequency Graphic
graphic,youllgototheFilterEGpage. Thisshowsthefilterrouting,filtertype(s),anda
Tip:PressingEXITseveraltimeswillalwaysbringyou graphicrepresentationofthefilterfrequencyresponse,
backtothispage. includingcutoffandresonance.
PressthisareatojumptotheFilterBasicpage.
Oscillators
ThisshowsthewaveformsselectedforOSC1,OSC2, Amp
andtheSubOscillator.Italsoshowstheleveland
Driver, Low Boost, Pan, Amp Level
balancesettingsforthethreeOscillators,plustheRing
ModulatorandNoiseGenerator.Levelsareshownin ThisshowstheAmpsectionsDriver,LowBoost,Pan,
red,andbalancesettingsingreen. andAmpLevelvalues.
PressthisareatojumptotheOSCBasicpage.Formore IftheDriversectionsBypassison,DriverandLow
information,see41:OSCBasiconpage 178. Boostarenotshown.
PressthisareatojumptotheAmp/Driverpage.
176
EXi Program P0: Play 01: Main
EGs, LFOs, and Step Sequencer

Step Sequencer Graphic
Thisshowsagraphicoverviewofthepervoicestep
sequencer.
PressthisareatojumptotheStepSequencerpage.
EG 14, Amp EG Graphics

TheseshowtheshapesofthefiveEGs.Touchanyof
themtojumpdirectlytothecorrespondingeditpage.
LFO 1, 2, 3, 4 Graphic
Theseshowthewaveformsandshapesofthefour
LFOs.Touchanyofthemtojumpdirectlytothe
correspondingeditpage.
Common
Thegraphicsalongtherightsideofthescreenshow
themostimportantCommonparameters,whichare
alwaysshowthesameparameters,regardlessofwhich
EXiarebeingused.
Common Voice Assign Mode

ThisshowsthevoiceassignmodeoftheProgram
eitherPOLYorMONO.

Sequencer.
page.
Common LFO Graphic

ThisshowsthewaveformoftheCommonLFO.
PressthisareatojumptotheCommonLFOpage.
3 Band EQ Graphic
PressthisareatojumptotheEQpage.
IFX, MFX/TFX
PresstheIFXareatojumptotheIFXRoutingpage.
PresstheMFX/TFXareatojumptotheMFXRouting
page.
KARMA GE Name
PressthisareatojumptotheGESetup/KeyZones
page.
177
Program P4: OSC Pitch

ThesepagescontrolthemostbasicelementsofAL1s Setthebasicpitchofthesound,includingthe
sounds:thewaveformsthattheoscillatorsplay,and octave,finetuning,andsoon.
thepitchatwhichitplaysthem.Forinstance,youcan: Controlpitchmodulationfromawidevarietyof
SelectthewaveformsforOscillator1,Oscillator2, sources,suchasJSX,theribbon,LFOs,andEGs.
andtheSubOscillator.
41: OSC Basic

41PMC
41a
41d 41b
41c
Modeling vintage analog synths 41a: Oscillator 1

OASYSandtheAL1providearangeoffeaturesfor
Waveform
modelingvintageanalogsynths.Insteadofsimply
providingfixedpresetstochoosebetween,thereare Waveform [Saw, Pulse, Saw/Pulse, Double Saw,
separateparametersforindividualsynth Detuned Saw 1, Detuned Saw 2,
characteristicswhichmeansthatyoucanmixand
Triangle, Square/Triangle]
matchasdesired,foranevenbroadertimbralpalette.
ThisselectsthewaveformforOscillator1,andwillalso
Formoreinformationonmodelingspecificaspectsof affectthebehavioroftheWaveMorphandPulse
vintagesynths,seethereferencesbelow. Width/Phase/Detuneparameters,below.
Oscillatortimbre:seeEdgeonpage 180 Sawproducesasawtoothwavethetraditionalbuzzy
Oscillatorpitch:seeRandomizingfrequencyforan analogsynthsound.
analogfeelonpage 180 Pulseproducesasquarewavewithvariablepulse
Unisonpitch:seeThicknessonpage 165 width,ascontrolledbythePulseWidthparameter
Oscillatorinteraction:seeInitialPhaseon below.
page 179 Saw/Pulsecreatesbothofthewaveformsatthesame
Basicfiltercharacteristics:seeFilterRoutingon time.Youcancrossfadebetweenthetwousingthe
page 189 WaveMorphparameter,below.
Filtertimbre:seeResonanceBassonpage 190 DoubleSawproducestwosawtoothwaveforms

simultaneously.Youcanadjustthephaseofthesecond
Monophonicvoiceassignment:seePriorityon sawtoothusingtheaptlynamedPhaseparameter,
page 164 below,andadjustitsvolumewiththeWaveMorph
Portamento:seeModeonpage 185 parameter.
178
Program P4: OSC Pitch 41: OSC Basic
DetunedSaw1producestwodetunedsawtooth More on Pulse Width

waveformssimultaneously.Detunecontrolsthe Pulsewaveformsaresimple,rectangularshapes.The
amountofdetuning,andWaveMorphadjuststhe PulseWidthsetsthepercentageofthewaveformspent
volumeofthesecondsawtooth. intheupposition.Afewexamplesareshowninthe
DetunedSaw2issimilartoDetunedSaw1,except diagrambelow.Notethatasquarewaveisjustapulse
thatthesecondsawtoothis180degreesoutofphase. wavewiththewidthsetto50%.
Thisproducesatimbresimilartopulsewidth Thewidthcontrolsthetimbreoftheoscillator,from
modulation,withtheDetuneparametercontrolling pureandhollowat50%(asquarewave)tothinand
bothdetuneandthespeedofthePWMeffect. reedyattheextremes.
Triangleproducesapuretonewithrelativelyfew Atsettingsof0and100orwhenthePulseWidthis
overtones. modulatedtothesevaluesviaAMSthePulsewave
Square/Trianglesimultaneouslycreatesasquarewave willbesilent,sincetheseeliminatethepulse
(inwhichthepulsewidthisfixedat50%)anda altogether.
trianglewave.WaveMorphcrossfadesbetweenthe Pulsewaveformatdifferentwidths
two.
Initial Phase [-180+180, Random] Pulse Width = 10% Pulse Width = 25%
ThiscontrolstheinitialphaseofOscillator1,in1
degreeincrements.
Random:witheachnoteon,thewaveformwillstart
fromarandompointalongthewaveform,tosimulate
thevaryingphaserelationshipsbetweenoscillatorsin
analogsynthesizers.
Pulse Width = 50% Pulse Width = 75%
Wave Morph [000100]
Thefunctionofthisparameterchangesdependingon
theWaveformselection,above.
WhenWaveformissettoeitherSaw/Pulseor
Square/Triangle,WaveMorphcrossfadesbetweenthe
twowaveforms.At0,youllhearonlythefirst Therealmagicofthepulsewavecomeswhenyou
waveform;at100,youllhearonlythesecond modulatethewidth,usingtheAMSsourceand
waveform;andat50,youllhearanequalmixofboth. intensitybelow.Tryusingamediumspeedtriangle
WhenWaveformissettoDoubleSaw,DetunedSaw LFO,orasweepingEG.
1,orDetunedSaw2,WaveMorphcontrolsthe
volumeofthesecondSawtoothwave.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontrolPulse
WaveMorphisnotavailablewhentheWaveformis
Width/Phase/Detune.ForalistofAMSsources,see
settoSaw,Pulse,orTriangle.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] page 1021.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontrolWaveMorph. AMS Intensity [100+100]
modulationforWidth/Phase/Detune.
AMS Intensity [100+100] Waveform Type and Modulatable Parameters
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS Pulse Width/
modulationforWaveMorph. Waveform Type Morph
Phase/Detune
Pulse Width/Phase/Detune [000100] Saw n/a n/a
Thenameandfunctionofthisparameterchanges Pulse n/a Pulse Width
dependingontheWaveformselection,above.
Xfade between saw
WhentheWaveformissettoPulseorSaw/Pulse,this Saw/Pulse Pulse Width
and pulse
isnamedPulseWidth,andcontrolsthewidthofthe
Double Saw Volume of 2nd saw Phase
Pulsewaveform.Fordetails,seeMoreonPulse
Width,below. Detuned Saw 1 Volume of 2nd saw Detune
WhenWaveformissettoDoubleSaw,itisnamed Detune and PWM

Detuned Saw 2 Volume of 2nd saw
Phase,andcontrolsthephaserelationshipbetweenthe effect
twoSawtoothwaves. Triangle n/a n/a
WhenWaveformissettoDetunedSaw1or2,thisis Xfade between
namedDetune,andcontrolsthedetuneamount Square/Triangle n/a
square & triangle
betweenthetwoSaws.Theadjustmentsareinhalf
centincrements,sothat0=0cents,50=25cents,and
100=50cents.Saw1istunedup,andSaw2istuned
down,sothatthetonalcenterismaintained.
179
Frequency Youcancreatestable,periodicwaveformsbysetting
FMAmounttoanymultipleof6,suchas6,12,18,24,
Note:TheSubOscillatorsfrequencyisalwaysexactly etc.Atothersettings,thesignalwillrollaroundin
oneoctavebelowthatofOscillator1.Thismeansthat interestingways.
adjustinganyofthecontrolsinthissection,including
Octave,Transpose,Tune,andFrequencyOffset,will Thisfeatureissimilartoaclassicfivevoiceanalog
affecttheSubOscillatoraswellasOscillator1. synthesizersOscBtoFreqAfunction,exceptthat
thedepthcanbeuptoeighttimesgreater16octaves
Octave [2[32], 1[16], +0[8], +1[4], +2[2]] insteadof2.
ThissetsthebasicpitchofOscillator1,inoctaves.The TocreateacoolsynclikesoundwithFM:
defaultis+0[8].
1. SetOscillator1sWaveformtoPulse.
Transpose [12+12] 2. AssignanAMSsource,suchasanEGorLFO,to
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1 modulateOscillator1sPulseWidth.
octave. 3. SetOscillator2sWaveformtoPulse.
4. SetOscillator2sPulseWidthto50.
Tune [1200+1200]
5. SettheFMamountto24.
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1
octave.Acentis1/100ofasemitone. NotealsothatFM,Sync,andRingModcanallbeused
simultaneously.
Frequency Offset [-10.0Hz +10.0Hz]
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1Hz.
FrequencyOffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,when ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheFMAmount.
usedtodetunethetwooscillators,itcancreatea ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
constantbeatfrequencyacrosstherangeofthe Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
keyboard.
Intensity [100+100]
Randomizing frequency for an analog feel ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheFM
Youcanusevariousmethodstorandomizethe AmountAMSmodulation.
oscillatorfrequency,inordertosimulatetheinstability
Sync [Off, On]
ofanalogoscillators:
WhenSyncisOn,Oscillator1controlsthepitchof
Simulateanalogdriftbymodulatingpitchwithone
Oscillator2,andchangingormodulatingOscillator2s
oftheContinuousRandomLFOwaveforms.
frequencychangesitstimbre,insteadofitspitch.
UseTuneorFrequencyOffsettodetunethe
EverytimethatOscillator1beginsanewcycle(the
oscillatorsatinybit.
instantthatitpassesthroughzerogoingfromnegative
SettheScaleRandomparameter(intheCommon topositive),Oscillator2snapsbacktothestartofits
section,Basic/Vectorpage,EXiBasictab)to1,2,or3 waveform.
tocreatesmallamountsofrandompitchvariation
NotethatFM,Sync,andRingModcanallbeused
atnoteon.
simultaneously.
Tocreatetheclassicsyncsweepsound:
41b: Oscillator 2
1. TurnSyncOn.
Oscillator2isverysimilartoOscillator1,asdescribed 2. AssignanEGastheAMSsourceforOscillator2
above.Theonlydifferencesare: Pitch.
Oscillator2doesnotincludetheTriangleor 3. Now,theEGiscontrollingthesyncsound.
Square/Trianglewaveforms.
4. SettheEGandPitchAMSIntensityparametersto
Oscillator2spitchdoesnotaffecttheSub createthedesiredsyncsweep.
Oscillator.
WhenSyncisenabled,Oscillator2sInitialPhase 41d: Edge (OSC 1, OSC 2 & Sub OSC)
settingaffectsonlytheverybeginningofthesound,
beforeOscillator1completesitsfirstcycle.After Edge [100+100]
that,Oscillator2sphaseiscontrolledbyOscillator
ThiscontrolsthehighfrequencycharacterofOscillator
1.
1,Oscillator2,andtheSubOscillator.
Setitto0foratimbresimilartovintageAmerican
41c: FM/Sync analogsynths,andtohighervaluesforedgiertones.
FM Amount [000100] Negativevaluesresultinwarmer,darkertones,to
createanoscillatortimbresimilartotheMS20.
Oscillator1isthemodulator,andOscillator2isthe
carrier.Inotherwords,FMaffectsthetimbreof
Oscillator2,anddoesnotaffectthetimbreofOscillator
1.
180
Program P4: OSC Pitch 42: Sub/Noise/Ring Mod
commandsonpage 142.
42: Sub/Noise/Ring Mod

42PMC
42a
42b
42c
NotethatFM,Sync,andRingModcanallbeused
42a: Sub Oscillator simultaneously.
TheSubOscillatorplaysexactlyoneoctavebelow Eventhoughtheoscillatorsthemselveshave
Oscillator1.AllOscillator1pitchmodeffectstheSub extremelylowaliasing,RingModcanproduce
Oscillatoraswell. aliasingespeciallyathigherfrequencies.
Waveform [Square, Triangle] Mode [Ring Mod, AM, Rectify, Clip]
ThisselectsthebasicwaveformoftheSubOscillator. Thisselectsbetweenfourdifferentvariationsofring
TheTrianglewaveformsamplitudeisthreetimesthat modulation.
ofthesquare,tocompensateforthedifferencein
RingModproducesthetraditionalringmodulation
perceivedloudness.ThismeansthatsimilarLevel
effect.
settingsatthemixerresultinsimilaramountsof
boom. AMincludesboththetraditionalringmodulation
effectandthedrysignaloftheCarrierinput.
NotethatthisisdifferentfromOscillator1sTriangle
wave.InOscillator1,theTriangleamplitudeisthe Rectifymeansthatanynegativepartsofthe
sameasthatoftheotherwaveforms,resultingina Modulatorswaveformareflippedaroundtobe
lowerperceivedvolume(justlikeonclassicanalog positiveinstead.IftheModulatorisasquarewave,
synths). thismodesoundsprettymuchlikejustlisteningtothe
Carrieralone.
42b: Ring Modulator ClippedmeansthattheModulatorinputisclippedto

positivevaluesbeforegoingintotheRingMod;any
TheRingModulatorhasitsowninputtotheMixer negativepartsofthewaveformarechoppedoffand
section.Thedefaultvolumeis0,sotohearit,youll thrownaway.
needtoturnitup!
Modulator [OSC 1, Noise]
WhenthefrequenciesoftheCarrierandthe
Modulatorarethesame,theRingModulatorproduces ThisselectsthemodulatorsourcefortheRing
steady,constantwaveforms.Whenthetwoare Modulator.RectifyandClip,above,bothaffectthe
detuned,itproducesmoremovementandovertones. Modulatorsignal.
181
Carrier [OSC 2, Ext Input] Tocreatekeycontactnoise(suchasyoumightfindon

Selectsthecarriersourcefortheringmodulator. vintageanalogsynths),createspecklednoiseas
describedabove,andthenuseafastEGtocontrolits
ExtInputusestheaudioinputselectedunderSub volumeinthemixer.
OSC/AudioInput,ontheMixerpage.Formore
information,see43c:SubOSC/AudioInputon Saturation [099]
page 183. Thiscontrolclipsthenoisesignal,foraddedcrunch.
Subtlevariationsinsaturationaremorenoticeable
42c: Noise Generator withverylowFilterFrequencysettings(seebelow),
allowingyoutocreateorganic,rumblingtimbres.
ThenoisegeneratorincludesSaturation,forcreating
uniqueandchaoticnoiseeffects,andadedicated1 Filter Frequency [099]
polefiltertocontrolnoisecolor. Thisisasimple,1polelowpassfilterforcontrolling
Forstandardwhitenoise,settheSaturationto0,and thecolorofthenoise.
theFilterFrequencyto99.
Forcolorednoise(suchaspinknoise),setthe t 42: Page Menu Commands
Saturationto0,andreducetheFilterFrequencyas
desired.
Tocreatespecklednoisesuchasrocketsoundsand shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
thunder,setSaturationto99,andFilterFrequencyto commandsonpage 142.
10.
Programonpage 142.
43: Mixer
43PMC
43a
43b
43c
43d
43e
TheMixerpagecontrolsthevolumelevelsforthefive elementsthroughFilterA,FilterB,ora
mainpartsoftheOscillator,andalsocontrolsthe combinationofthetwoandthenmodulatethat
routingtothefiltersection.Forinstance,youcan: routingviaAMS.
ControlthevolumelevelsforOscillator1, Selectanaudioinputtoroutethroughthefilters,
Oscillator2,theSubOscillator(oranAudioInput), driver,ringmodulator,andeffects.
theRingModulator,andtheNoiseGenerator.
ModulatethesevolumelevelsviaAMS. 43a: Oscillator 1
WhentheFilterRoutingissettoeitherSerialor
Parallel,youcanrouteeachofthefiveOscillator Level [099]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelforOscillator1.
182
Program P4: OSC Pitch 43: Mixer

43e: Noise
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheOscillator1
Level.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate TheNoiseGeneratorhasthesamemixerparametersas
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. describedunder43a:Oscillator1,above.
Intensity [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheOscillator
1LevelAMSmodulation. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Balance [099] shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
ThiscontrolsthefilterroutingforOscillator1.It commandsonpage 142.
appliesonlywhentheFilterRoutingissettoeither 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
SerialorParallel;otherwise,itisgrayedout. Programonpage 142.
0isthedefault,andmeansthatOscillator1goesinto 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
FilterA.IftheFilterRoutingissettoSerial,itwillalso ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
passthroughFilterB.
99meansthatOscillator1goesintoFilterB.
Inbetween,theoscillatorwillgotoacombinationof
bothfilters.BymodulatingtheBalanceviaAMS,you
cancrossfadebetweenroutingthroughFilterAand
FilterB.Formoreinformation,seeInteraction
betweenthefiltersandthemixer,onpage 188.

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheOscillator1
Balance.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheOscillator
1BalanceAMSmodulation.
Phase Invert [Off, On]

ThisinvertsthephaseofOscillator1.
43b: Oscillator 2
Oscillator2hasthesamemixerparametersas
describedunder43a:Oscillator1,above.
43c: Sub OSC/Audio Input

InadditiontotheLevel,Balance,AMS,andPhase
Invertparametersdescribedunder43a:Oscillator1,
above,thissectionhascontrolsforusinganexternal
audioinput.
Mode [Sub OSC, External Audio Input]

Thisselectswhetherthemixerinputwillbeusedfor
theSubOscillator,ortheaudioinputselectedbelow.
External Audio [Audio Inputs 14,

S/P DIF L, S/P DIF R]
Thisselectstheaudioinputusedforboththismixer
channelandtheRingModulator.
TheRingModulatorcanusetheselectedaudioinput
evenifMode,above,issettoSubOSC.
43d: Ring Mod

TheRingModulatorhasthesamemixerparametersas
describedunder43a:Oscillator1,above.
183
44: Pitch Common

44PMC
44a
44b
44c
ThispageletsyoumodulatethepitchofOscillators1, PitchSlope,pitch,andnote
2,andtheSubOscillatorsimultaneously,sothatthe
modulationappliesequallytoallthreeoscillators.For +2
example,youcan: Pitch
SetuppitchbendfrombothJoystickX(with +1
separatesettingsforbendingupandbending
down)andtheribboncontroller. 2oct
1oct
UsePitchSlopetocontrolhowthepitchchanges 0
1oct
whenyouplayupanddownthekeyboard.
SetupPortamento. 1
AssignanLFOtomodulatethepitchofallthree
C4 C5 Note on keyboard
oscillatorssimultaneously.
Ribbon [-60+60 semitones]

44a: Pitch
Youcanusetheribboncontrollerforpitchbend.This
Pitch Slope [-1.00+0.00+2.00] parameterspecifies,insemitones,theribbonspitch
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.00. bendrange.
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplay Positive(+)valuesmakethepitchrisewhenyoupress
higheronthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescause theribboncontrollertotherightofcenter,and
thepitchtofallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard. negative()valueswillcausethepitchtofall.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthe Whenyouliftoffoftheribbon,thepitchwillsnapback
keyboardwontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasif tothecenter(unlessyoureusingtheSW1/2Ribbon
yourealwaysplayingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecial Lockfeature).So,bytappingontherightedgeofthe
effectssounds,forinstance. ribbonandthenreleasingquickly,youcancreate
guitarstylehammeroneffects.
Ifyouwanttocreatemorecomplexeffects,youcan
assignkeytrackingasanAMSsource. JS+ X [-60+60 semitones]
Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheright.For
normalpitchbend,setthistoapositivevalue.
JS- X [-60+60 semitones]

semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheleft.For
184
Program P4: OSC Pitch 44: Pitch Common
Now,theselectedswitchwillenableanddisable
44b: Portamento Portamento.ItwillalsosendtheMIDIPortamento
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetween controller,CC#65.
notes,insteadofchangingabruptly. EvenifyoudontassignSW1/2toPortamento,you
canstilluseMIDIController#65toturnPortamento
Enable [Off, On] onandoff.
On(checked):TurnsonPortamento,sothatpitch
glidessmoothlybetweennotes.
44c: LFO
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffPortamento.Thisisthe
defaultstate. LFO Select [LFO 1, LFO 2, LFO 3, LFO 4,
Common LFO]
Fingered [Off, On]
ThisselectsanLFOtomodulatealloscillators
ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamento
simultaneously.Thissharedmodulationcanbeuseful
throughyourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playing
forvibrato,amongotherthings.
willturnitoffagain. TheLFOIntensity,JS+YIntensity,andAMSareall
summedtogethertoproducethefinalamountofLFO
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnable
pitchmodulation.
isturnedon.
On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento. LFO Intensity [48.00+48.00]
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento. ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch,
insemitones,beforeanyJS+YorAMSmodulation.
Mode [Constant Rate, Constant Time]
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
ConstantRatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake
thesameamountoftimetoglideagivendistancein JS+Y Intensity [48.00+48.00]
pitchforinstance,onesecondperoctave.Putanother Movingthejoystickupfromthecenterdetent
way,glidingseveraloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthan position,awayfromyourself,producestheJS+Y
glidingahalfstep. controller.Youcanusethistoscaletheamountofthe
ConstantTimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake LFOappliedtothepitch.Thisparametersetsthe
thesameamountoftimetoglidefromonenoteto maximumamountofLFOmodulationaddedbyJS+Y,
another,regardlessofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisis insemitones.
especiallyusefulwhenplayingchords,sinceitensures Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe
thateachnoteinthechordwillenditsglideatthe +YdirectionwillcausetheLFOtoproducedeeper
sametime. pitchmodulation.
Time [000127] Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
Youcanalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountofthe
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean
LFO,assetbyLFO1Intensity,above.
longertimes,forslowerchangesinpitch.WhenTime
issetto0,thepitchwillbereachedinstantlyjustasif AMS [List of AMS Sources]
PortamentoEnablewasturnedOff.
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
AMS [List of AMS Sources] amountoftheLFOappliedtopitch.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontrolthePortamento ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Time.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Intensity [48.00+48.00]
Themodulationoccursonlyatnoteon.Thismeans
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFOAMS
thatyoucanchangethetimeforthenextpitchglide,
butyoucantchangeanyglideswhicharealreadyin
progress.
Intensity [-127+127]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthe ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
PortamentoTimeAMSmodulation. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Assigning SW1 or SW2 to Portamento On/Off commandsonpage 142.
Youcanusethetwoassignableswitches,SW1and 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
SW2,toturnportamentoonandoff. Programonpage 142.
Todoso: 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
1. GotoProgrampage18,ControllerSetup. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,seteitherSW1orSW2
toPortamentoSW(CC#65).
185
45: Pitch EG/Mod

45PMC
45a 45b
45c
45d
ThispageletsyoumodulatethepitchesofOscillators1 WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,the
and2separatelyasopposedtothePitchCommon effectoftheEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmean
page,whosecontrolsaffectbothOscillatorsatonce. lowerpitches,andnegativeEGvaluesmeanhigher
AllpitchmodulationforOscillator1alsoaffectsthe pitches.
SubOscillator. AMS [List of AMS Sources]
45a: OSC 1 & Sub OSC Pitch EG amountofthePitchEGappliedtoOscillator1andthe
SubOscillator.
EG Select [EG 1 (Filter), EG 2 (Pitch),
EG 3, EG 4, Amp EG]
ThisselectsanEGtomodulatethepitchofOscillator1
andtheSubOscillator. Intensity [-48.00+48.00]
TherearefourassignableEGs,inadditiontotheAmp ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEG
EG.Eachofthesecanbeusedasamodulationsource AMSmodulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitial
tocontrolawidevarietyofparameters. IntensityareaddedtogethertodeterminethePitch
EGsfinaleffect.
Inthemidstofallthisflexibility,wethoughtitwould
alsobegoodtoprovidealittlestructure.Withthisin
mind,EG1isnamedEG1(Filter)andEG2islabeled 45b: OSC 2 Pitch EG
EG2(Pitch).
Oscillator2hasthesamePitchEGparametersas
Pleasetakethesenamesassuggestions,ratherthan describedunder45a:OSC1&SubOSCPitchEG,
restrictions.Ifyoulike,yourefreetousetheseEGsto above.
controlanyEGorAMSdestination,ortouseotherEGs
tocontrolFilterFrequencyandPitch.
45c: OSC 1 & Sub OSC Pitch Modulation
Intensity [-48.00+48.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGonthe AMS 1 [List of AMS Sources]
frequencyofOscillators1andtheSubOscillator,in Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrolling
halfsteps,beforeanyAMSmodulation. thepitchofOscillator1andtheSubOscillator.Fora
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to listofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
99.WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value, (AMS)Listonpage 1021.
positivevaluesfromtheEGraisethepitch,and Intensity [+/-48.00 semitones]
negativevalueslowerthepitch.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS1
pitchmodulation,insemitones.
186
Program P4: OSC Pitch 45: Pitch EG/Mod

YoucanmodulateAMS1sIntensityfromanother
AMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.
Intensity [+/-48.00 semitones]

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
ModAMS,insemitones.Theresultissummedwith
themainAMS1Intensitytoproducethefinalpitch
modulationamount.
AMS 2 [List of AMS Sources]

Thisselectsasecondmodulationsourceforcontrolling
thepitchofOscillator1andtheSubOscillator.Fora
listofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
(AMS)Listonpage 1021.



modulationamount.
45d: OSC 2 Pitch Modulation

Oscillator2hasthesamePitchModulationparameters
asdescribedunder45c:OSC1&SubOSCPitch
Modulation,above.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
187
Program P5: Filter
51: Filter Basic

51PMC
51a
51b
51c
Standard parallel configuration

Interaction between the filters and the
Tocreateastandardparallelfilterconfiguration:
mixer
1. SettheFilterRoutingtoParallel.
WhentheFilterRoutingissettoeitherSingleor
2. SetallofthemixersBalancecontrolsto50.
24dB/oct,theroutingfromtheOscillatorsectioninto
theFiltersectionisfairlysimple.Theresonlyasingle Thisroutesalloftheinputstobothfilters,atequal
filter,andthatfilterprocessesalloftheOscillator volumes.
elements.
Dual signal paths
ThingscangetmoreinterestingwhentheFilter YoucanalsosendoneOscillatorthroughFilterA,and
RoutingissettoSerialorParallel.Inthesemodes,The theotherthroughFilterB,tocreatealayeredsound.
MixerpagesBalanceparametersletyouseparately Forinstance:
controlthefilterroutingforeachofthefiveinputs:
Oscillator1,Oscillator2,theSubOscillator,theRing 1. SettheFilterRoutingtoParallel.
Modulator,andtheNoiseGenerator. 2. SetOscillator1sBalanceto0.
WhenaninputsBalanceissetto0,itgoesintoFilterA. ThisroutesOscillator1toFilterA.
(NotethatiftheFilterRoutingissettoSerial,the 3. SetOscillator2sBalanceto99.
signalwillalsopassthroughFilterB.)
ThisroutesOscillator2toFilterB.
IftheinputsBalanceissetto99,itgoesdirectlyinto
FilterB,regardlessofwhethertheroutingissetto Anywhere in-between
SerialorParallel. IfaninputsBalanceissetbetween1and98,itwillgo
toacombinationofbothfilterssothatmanyin
Standard serial configuration
betweenfiltereffectsareavailable.
Tocreateastandardserialfilterconfiguration:
Finally,bymodulatinganinputsBalanceviaAMS,
1. SettheFilterRoutingtoSerial. youcancrossfadebetweenroutingthroughFilterA
ThisconnectstheoutputofFilterAtotheinputof andFilterB.
FilterB.
ThismakesalloftheinputsgotoFilterAfirst,and
thenthroughFilterB.
188
Program P5: Filter 51: Filter Basic
MultiFilter.Thisisacomplexfilterwhichiscapableof
51a: Routing alloftheabovefiltertypes,andmanymorebesides.
Formoreinformation,see52:MultiFilter,on
Filter Routing [Single, Serial, Parallel, 24dB/oct]
page 191.
Therearetwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.This
TheMultiFilterisavailableonlyforFilterA,andonly
parametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthefilters
whentheFilterRoutingissettoSingle,Serialor
areused,andifbothareused,itcontrolshowtheyare
Parallel.
connectedtoeachother.
FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency
Single.ThisusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole,
willbegrayedout.Aclassicsynthesizerexpander
moduleusedthistypeoffilter.
Low Pass
Serial.ThisusesbothFiltersAandBasseparately
controllable2polefilters.TheoutputofFilterAis
processedthroughFilterB.
Parallel.ThisalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.
UnlikeSerial,above,theoutputsofthetwofiltersare
keptseparate,withindividualcontroloverbothlevel
andpan. High Pass
24dB/oct.Thismergesbothfilterstocreateasingle4
pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPassandBand
Reject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoptionproducesa
sharperrolloffbeyondthecutofffrequency,aswellas
aslightlymoredelicateresonance.Manyclassicanalog
synthsusedthisgeneraltypeoffilter. Band Pass
Aareactive;thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Also,notethattheMultiFilterisnotavailableinthis
mode.
Band Reject
51b: Filter A
Filter Type [Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass,
Band Reject, Multi Filter]
Cutoff Frequency
willchangeslightlyaccordingtotheselectedFilter
Routing,toshowthecorrectcutoffslopeindBper Bypass [Off, On]
octave. ThisletsyoubypassFilterAcompletely.
LowPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich IfBypassisOff,FilterAfunctionsnormally.
arehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe
WhenBypassisOn,FilterAhasnoeffectontheinput
signal.
timbressounddarker.
HighPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich Trim [0099]
arelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto ThisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtoFilterA.If
maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy. younoticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywith
BandPass.Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both highResonancesettings,youcanturntheleveldown
highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff here,orattheOutputLevel.
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow Notethatthefilterwillnotclipinternally,sothereisno
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically differencebetweenadjustingtheInputTrimandthe
dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators OutputLevel.Eitherofthesecontrolswillallowyouto
multisample. minimizeclippinglaterinthesignalchain,suchas
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand mayoccurintheDrivesectionandinsomeeffects.
Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph
Output Level [0099]
sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate
buzzyornasaltimbres. ThiscontrolstheoutputlevelofFilterA.Youcanuse
thistobalancethevolumesofFiltersAandBwhenthe
RoutingissettoParallel,ortoturndownthevolume
cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe
cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan
189
AMS [List of AMS Sources] Pan [Random, L001C064R127]

ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheOutput ThiscontrolsthestereopanforFilterAsoutput.Itis
Level.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate availableonlywhenFilterRoutingissettoParallel.
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. WhentheFilterRoutingissettoSingle,Serial,or
Intensity [99+99] 24dB/oct,thePanparameterswillbegrayedout.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheOutput AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Levelmodulation. ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Foralist
Frequency [0099] ofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,in
incrementsof1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectof Intensity [99+99]
thecutofffrequencywillchangedependingonthe ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthePanAMS
selectedFilterType,asdescribedabove. modulation.
Frequency Fine [-99+99]
Thisprovidesfinecontrolofthefiltercutofffrequency. 51c: Filter B
Eachstepofthisparameterisequalto1/100ofastepof
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissetto
themainFrequencyparameter,above.
SerialorParallel.Otherwise,itsparameterswillbe
Resonance Type [Standard, High] grayedout.
Thiscontrolsthestrengthofthefilterresonancewhen FilterBisalmostthesameasFilterA,butwithoutthe
theFilterRoutingissetto24dB/oct.Whentherouting MultiFiltermode,andwiththeadditionoftheLink
issettoSingle,Serial,orParallel,thisparameteris controls,asdescribedbelow.Forallotherparameters,
grayedout. pleaseseethedescriptionsunder51b:FilterA,on
page 189.
Standardprovidestheresonancecharacterofatypical
analog4polefilter. Link [Off, On]
Highcreatesamorepronouncedresonance. WhenLinkisOn,mostofFilterBsparametersare
grayedout,andareinsteadcontrolledbythesettings
Resonance Bass [Tight, Full] forFilterA.
Thiscontrolsthecharacterofthefilterresonanceatlow
Specifically,FilterBwilluseFilterAssettingsfor
cutofffrequencies.Itseffectismostnoticeablewith
Resonance,ResonanceBass,andallFrequencyand
highResonancesettings.
Resonancemodulationsettings.FilterBsFrequencyis
Tightproducesamorerestrainedresonance,similarto alsolinkedtothatofFilterA,withanoptional
aclassic,American,woodpaneledmonophonic frequencyoffsetviatheLinkFrequencyOffset
synthesizer. parameter,below.
Fullproducesawide,boomyresonance,reminiscent TheBypass,Type,InputTrim,OutputLevel,Output
ofafamousfivevoiceAmericansynthesizer. LevelAMS,Pan,andPanAMSparametersarestill
controlledseparately.
Resonance [0099]
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe Link Frequency Offset [99+99]
cutofffrequency. ThisoffsetsFilterBsFrequencyfromthatofFilterA,
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and andappliesonlywhenLinkisOn.
frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish WhenLinkisOff,thisparameterisgrayedout.
smoothly.
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbre t 51: Page Menu Commands
extreme. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbeheardasa
separate,whistlingpitch.
commandsonpage 142.
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,see
KeyFollow,onpage 193.
Programonpage 142.
Resonance Mod by AMS [List of AMS Sources] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthe ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
page 1021.
Intensity [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheResonance
modulation.
190
Program P5: Filter 52: Multi Filter
52: Multi Filter

52PMC
52a
52b
52c
52d
ThispageisavailableonlywhentheFilterATypeis
settoMultiFilter. 52b: Mode Crossfade
Whats a Multi Filter? Mode 1 [List of filter types]
Standardmultimodefiltersgeneratelowpass, ThissetsthefiltertypeforMode1.
highpass,andbandpassfilterssimultaneouslybut LowPass,HighPass,BandPass,andBandRejectare
onlyallowyoutouseoneofthematatime. thestandardfiltertypes.Formoreinformation,see
TheMultiFiltergivesyouaccesstoallthreefilter FilterType,onpage 189.
modessimultaneously,inanycombination,alongwith Thefollowingtypescombinetwoormorefiltersat
thedryinputsignal.Youcanchoosefromalarge equalvolumes.Dryistheunfilteredinputsignal.The
numberofpresetcombinations,orcreateyourown minussign()indicateswhenthephaseofafilteris
complexfiltermodesusingtheManualcontrols. reversed:LP+BP,LPBP,LPHP,BP+HP,BPHP,
Thisiscapableofsomecoolsoundsinandofitself,but Dry+LP,DryLP,Dry+BP,DryBP,Dry+LPHP,
thingsreallygetinterestingwhenyouusethe Dry+LPBP,Dry+BPLP,Dry+BPHP,Dry+HPLP,
Crossfadecontrols.Theseallowyoutocrossfade Dry+HPBP,LP+HP+BP.
betweentwoofthesefiltersettings(Mode1andMode AllOnusestheLowPass,HighPass,BandPass,and
2),usingAMSsourcessuchasEGs,LFOs,orrealtime Drysignalsatequalvolumes.
controllers.
Manual1letsyoucreateyourownmixofthefilters.
Formoreinformation,see52c:Manual1,below.
52a: Filter A
Mode 2 [List of filter types]
Bypass [Off, On] Mode2hasthesameselectionsasMode1,exceptthat
thelistendswithManual2insteadofManual1.
Frequency [0099]
Mode 1-2 Crossfade [0099]
Fine [99+99]
ThisfadesbetweentheMode1andMode2settings.
Resonance [0099] 0isallMode1,99isallMode2,and198are
Thesearethesameasthesimilarlynamedparameters intermediatevaluesbetweenthetwoModes.
ontheFilterBasicpage,asdescribedunder51b:
FilterAonpage 189. AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Editstothevaluesonthispagewillbereflectedonthe ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheMode1
FilterBasicpage,andviceversa. 2Crossfade.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
191
Intensity [99+99] Lowpass [99+99]

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheMode12 ThiscontrolsthevolumeoftheLowpassfilteroutput.
Crossfademodulation. Negativevaluesinvertthephase.
Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources] Highpass [99+99]

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheintensityof ThissetsthevolumeoftheHighpassfilteroutput.
themainMode12CrossfadeAMS.
Bandpass [99+99]
Forinstance,youcansetAMStouseoneoftheLFOs,
andthensettheIntensityModAMStoJSY.Youcan ThiscontrolsthevolumeoftheBandpassfilteroutput.
thenusethejoysticktomodulatetheamountofthe Dry [99+99]
LFO.
Thissetsthevolumeofthedrysignal.
Intensity [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity 52d: Manual 2
ModAMS.
TheManual2parametersareidenticaltothoseof
Manual1,asdescribedabove.
52c: Manual 1
Theseparametersletyoucreateyourownmixofthe t 52: Page Menu Commands
filters.WhenMode1issettoManual1,itwilluse
thesesettings. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
YoumaywonderwhyBandRejectisnotincluded
here.Thisisbecauseitsnotafiltermodeperse.
commandsonpage 142.
Instead,itscreatedbyanequalcombinationofHigh
PassandLowPass.Tryitandsee! 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
53: Filter Modulation

53PMC
53a
53b
53c
53c
ThispagecontainsallofthesettingsforFilter ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfilter
Frequencymodulation(exceptfortheLFOs,whichare cutoff.
ontheirownpage).Amongotherthings,youcan: AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff.
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,and FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissetto
controlhowthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff. SerialorParallel.Otherwise,theparametersforFilter
Bwillbegrayedout.
192
Program P5: Filter 53: Filter Modulation
Bottom-Low [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]

53a: Keyboard Track
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI
Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey
higherpitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingre track,usenegativevalues.
alowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard. Low-Center [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
Usually,someamountofkeytrackingisnecessaryin ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter
ordertomakethetimbreconsistentacrosstheentire keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
range.
Center-High [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
TheOASYSkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuchmore
complex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard. keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
TheAL1sFilterkeyboardtrackingparametersare High-Top [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
identicaltotheHD1s.Formoredetailedexplanations ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe
oftheparameters,pleasesee32a:KeyboardTrack, topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use
onpage 64. positivevalues.
Thereisonedifferencebetweenthetwo,however:the
AL1sFiltertrackingisaffectedbyPortamento,sothat Key Follow
itchangessmoothlyduringglides. TocreatetheclassicKeyFolloweffect,inwhichthe
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwill
affectFilterAscutofffrequency.Theoveralleffectof 2. SettheKeyboardTrackIntensityto+99.
theKeyboardTrackisacombinationofthisIntensity 3. SettheBottomLowandLowCenterrampsto50.
valueandtheoverallKeyboardTrackshape. 4. SettheCenterHighandHighToprampsto+50.
Intensity to B [99+99] 5. SettheCenterKeytoC4.
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwill ThesettingsfortheLowBreakandHighBreakkeys
affectFilterBscutofffrequency. dontmatterinthiscase.
IntensitytoBappliesonlywhentheFilterRoutingis
settoSerialorParallel,andwhenLinkisOff.In 53b: Filter EG
Singleand24dB/octmodes,orifLinkisOn,this
TheEGsmodulatetheFilterAandBcutofffrequencies
parameterisgrayedout.
overtime.Youcancontrolhowstronglytheywill
Key affectthefiltersinthreedifferentways:
SetaninitialamountofEGmodulation,usingthe
Low Break [C1G9] EGIntensityparameters.
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwolower UsevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEGapplied
ramps. tothefilter.
Center [C1G9] UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheEG
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtracking.Atthis appliedtothefilter.
key,thekeyboardtrackinghasnoeffectonthefilter Youcanuseallthreeoftheseatonce,andtheresults
frequency,oronanyAMSdestinations. areaddedtogethertoproducethetotalEGeffect.
High Break [C1G9] TosetuptheEGsthemselves,includingattackand

releasetimes,levels,andsoon,see71:EG1(Filter),
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher onpage 203.
ramps.
Filter A
Ramp
Theeffectonthefiltercutoffisacombinationofthe EG Select [EG 1 (Filter), EG 2 (Pitch),
rampvalues,assetbelow,andtheIntensitytoAandB EG 3, EG 4, Amp EG]
parameters.WhenIntensityissetto+99,arampof50 ThisselectsanEGtomodulateFilterAsFrequency.
changesthefilterfrequencyby1octaveforevery
TherearefourassignableEGs,inadditiontotheAmp
octaveofthekeyboard,andarampof+99changesthe
EG.Eachofthesecanbeusedasamodulationsource
frequencyby2octavesforeveryoctaveofthe
tocontrolawidevarietyofparameters.
keyboard.
mind,EG1isnamedEG1(Filter)andEG2islabeled
EG2(Pitch).
Formoredetailedexplanations,pleasesee32a:
KeyboardTrack,onpage 64
193
Pleasetakethesenamesassuggestions,ratherthan WhenLinkisOn,orwhentheFilterRoutingissetto
restrictions.Ifyoulike,yourefreetousetheseEGsto Singleor24dB/oct,alloftheseparametersaregrayed
controlanyEGorAMSdestination,ortouseotherEGs out.
Velocity Intensity [99+99] t 53: Page Menu Commands

ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEG ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
appliedtoFilterA. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
EG Intensity [99+99]
commandsonpage 142.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheEGonFilterAs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMS
Programonpage 142.
modulation.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
amountoftheEGappliedtoFilterA.
Intensity [99+99]
modulation.
Filter B
TheEGparametersforFilterBarethesameasthose
forFilterA,above.
WhenLinkisOn,orwhentheFilterRoutingissetto
Singleor24dB/oct,alloftheseparametersaregrayed
out.
53c: Filter Modulation

Filter A Frequency
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolFilter
AsFrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheFrequency
modulation.

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheintensityof
AMS1.
Intensity [99+99]
ModAMS.

Thisselectsasecondmodulationsourcetocontrol
FilterAsFrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,see
page 1021.
Intensity [99+99]
Filter B Frequency
ThesettingsforFilterBarethesameasthoseforFilter
AFrequency,above.
194
Program P5: Filter 54: Filter LFO Mod
54: Filter LFO Mod

54PMC
54a
54b
TherearethreeLFOtoFrequencycontrolsforeach ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
filter:abasicamount(LFOIntensity),joystickY Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
controlofLFOamount(JSYIntensity),andAMS
controlofLFOamount(AMSIntensity).Thethree Intensity [99+99]
controlsaresummedtogethertodeterminethefinal ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFOAMS
LFOamount. modulation.
54a: Filter A 54b: Filter B

LFO Select [LFO 1, LFO 2, LFO 3, LFO 4, ThesettingsforFilterBarethesameasthosefor54a:
Common LFO] FilterA,above.
ThisselectsanLFOtomodulateFilterAscutoff WhenLinkisOn,orwhentheFilterRoutingissetto
frequency. Singleor24dB/oct,alloftheseparametersaregrayed
out.
TheLFOIntensity,JSYIntensity,andAMSareall
pitchmodulation. t 54: Page Menu Commands
LFO Intensity [99+99] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterAs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyJS+YorAMSmodulation.
commandsonpage 142.
JS -Y Intensity [99+99] Programonpage 142.
Movingthejoystickdownfromthecenterdetent 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
position,towardsyourself,producestheJSY ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
LFOappliedtoFilterA.
ThisparametersetsthemaximumamountofLFO
modulationaddedbyJSY.

amountoftheLFOappliedtoFilterAscutoff
frequency.
195
Program P6: Amp

Thesepagesletyoucontrolthesoundsvolume(also Setthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
calledamplitude,orampforshort),pan,and Controlamplevelandmodulation,including
Drive,aswellasitsdedicatedampenvelopesand keyboardtracking,theampenvelope,LFO
keyboardtrackinggenerators.Forinstance,youcan: modulation,andAMScontrol.
SetuptheDrivercircuit,whichaddssaturationand
bassboosttothetimbre.
61: Amp/Driver
61PMC
61b
61a
61c
ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsfortheAmp Bypass [Off, On]

section.Here,youcan: WhenBypassisOn,theDriveriscompletelyremoved
SetuptheDrivercircuit. fromthesignalpath.
Settheinitialvolumelevel. Drive [099]
Controlthepanpositionandpanmodulation. Thiscontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthe
timbre.Lowsettingswillproducemildsaturation,and
61a: Driver highersettingscreatemoreobviousdistortion.
Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwith
TheDriveraddssaturationandoverdrivetothesound,
theDrive.
foreverythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrastic
distortion.Unlikeanoverdriveeffect,theDriver Note:evenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,the
processeseachvoiceindividually,sothetimbrestays Drivercircuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisa
thesameregardlessofhowmanyvoicesarebeing completelypristinesound,usetheBypasscontrol
played. instead.
Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work AMS [List of AMS Sources]
togethertocreatetheoverallDrivereffect.Drive
contributesedgeandbite,andLowBoostprovidesthe
Driveamount.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
bodyaswellasboostingthebass.
Althoughtheoscillatorsthemselveshaveextremely
lowaliasing,theDrivercanproducealiasing Intensity [99+99]
especiallyathigherfrequencies.Ifyourgoalisa ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
completelypristinesound,settheDriversBypass modulationforDrive.
toOn.Otherwise,letitrip!
196
Program P6: Amp 61: Amp/Driver
Low Boost [099] YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).A

ThislowfrequencyEQcontrolsthebodycharacterof CC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,
thesound.ThespecificEQfrequenciesaffectedwill 64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythe
changewiththeDrivesetting. Panparameter,and127placesthesoundatthefar
right.
Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso
intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter. Note:youcanselectRandompanonlyfromtheon
screenUI,andnotfromMIDIortheControlsurface.
LowBoostamount.ForalistofAMSsources,see ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Foralist
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston ofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
page 1021. (AMS)Listonpage 1021.

modulationforLowBoost. modulationforPan.
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSissetto
NoteNumber,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethe
61b: Amp Level soundtomovetowardtherightasyouplayhigher
Amp Level [0127] thanC4,andtowardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4.
ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumeleveloftheAL1,before Negative()intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
keyboardtracking,velocity,andothermodulation.
The Control Surface and volume t 61: Page Menu Commands

YoucanalsocontrolthevolumesofEXi1and2 ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
directlyfromtheControlSurfacesliders.Thesevolume numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
levelsareseparateparameters,inadditiontothe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
individualEXiAmpLevels.Todoso: commandsonpage 142.
1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
2. MoveSlider1tosetthevolumeforEXi1,and
Slider2forEXi2. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
MIDI and volume
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumevia
MIDIusingbothVolume(CC#7)andExpression
valueof127isequaltotheAmpLevelsetting,and
lowervaluesreducethevolume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,
theonewiththelowervaluedeterminesthe
maximumvolume,andtheonewiththehigher
valuescalesdownfromthatmaximum.
61c: Pan
ThiscontrolsthestereopanoftheEXi.Asettingof
L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,
YoucanalsosetthisPanparameterdirectlyfromthe
ControlSurfaceknobs.Todoso:
PAN.
3. MoveKnob1tosetthepanforEXi1,andKnob2
tosetthepanforEXi2.
197
62: Amp Modulation

62PMC
62a
62b
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sAmp Center [C1G9]

levelmodulation.Amongotherthings,youcan: Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtracking.Atthis
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapestocontrol key,thekeyboardtrackinghasnoeffectonthevolume,
theAmplevel. oronanyAMSdestinations.
AssignAMSmodulationfortheAmplevel. High Break [C1G9]
ControltheeffectoftheLFOsontheAmplevel. Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher
Thetotaleffectsofthemodulationcanincreasethe ramps.
volumetoamaximumoftwotimeslouderthanthe
AmpLevelsetting. Ramp
62a: Keyboard Track ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI
Keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythevolumeasyou noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey
playupanddownthekeyboard.Usually,some track,usenegativevalues.
amountofkeytrackingisnecessaryinordertomake Ramp Change in level
thevolumeconsistentacrosstheentirerange.
TheAL1sAmpkeyboardtrackingparametersare
identicaltotheHD1s.Inbothcases,theAmp 99 Silent in one whole-step
keyboardtrackingworkssomewhatdifferentlyfrom 95 Silent in one octave
theFilterandCommonkeyboardtracking.Formore
48 Silent in two octaves
detailedexplanationsoftheparameters,pleasesee4
2a:KeyboardTrack,onpage 76. 25 Silent in four octaves
Thereisonedifferencebetweenthetwo,however:the 00 no change
AL1sAmptrackingisaffectedbyPortamento,sothat +25 x2 in four octaves
itchangessmoothlyduringglides.
+50 x2 in two octaves
Key +99 x2 in one octave
Low Break [C1G9] +Inf x2 in one half-step

ramps. Low-Center [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
198
Program P6: Amp 62: Amp Modulation
Center-High [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf] Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak ThisselectsasecondaryAMSmodulationsourceto
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues. scaletheintensityofAMS2.
High-Top [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf] ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation

ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe
topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use Intensity [99+99]
positivevalues. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
ModAMS.EvenifthemainAMS2Intensityissetto0,
62b: Amp Modulation IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamount
ofAMSAoverthefull+/99range.
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelbyvelocityandtwo
AMSsources.EachoftheAMSsourcesalsohasits
ownsecondaryintensitymodulation. t 62: Page Menu Commands
ThismodulationscalesthebasicAmplevelandAmp ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
EGlevelparameters.Iftheseoriginallevelsarelow,the numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
maximumvolumeavailablewithmodulationwillalso shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
bereduced. commandsonpage 142.
NotethatthereisanupperlimittoAmpmodulation. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Oncethevolumelevelreachesdoublethe Programonpage 142.
programmedAmpLevelandAmpEGlevelsettings,it 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
cannotbeincreasedanyfurther. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Velocity Intensity [99+99]
youplayharder.
Withnegative()values,thevolumewilldecreaseas
youplayharder.

ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcefortheAmp
level.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [99+99]
ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS1.TheIntensity

scaletheintensityofAMS1.
Intensity [99+99]
IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamountof
AMSAoverthefull+/99range.
Forexample,ifAMS1issettoLFO1,andIntensity
ModAMSissettoAfterTouch,positivesettings
meanthataftertouchwillincreasetheamountofLFO
modulation.

ThisselectsasecondmodulationsourcefortheAmp
Intensity [99+99]
199
63: Amp EG
63PMC
63a
63b
63c
63d
TheAL1sAmpEGisidenticaltotheHD1s.Formore maymeanthattheEGdoesntresetatall.Ifthis
detailedexplanationsoftheAmpEGfeatures,please happens,reducetheThresholduntiltheEGtriggers
see43:Amp1EG,onpage 79. consistently.
Otherenvelopescanbeusedasadditionalcontrolsvia
AMS,ifdesired. 63b: Amp EG
TheseparametersspecifyhowtheampEGwillchange
63a: EG Reset overtime.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] AmpEG
Start Attack Break Sustain
point.Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFO Level Level Level Level
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe Volume
EGtostart.
Note:OncetheAmpEGisinitsReleasesegment,it Time
cannotbereset.(Otherwise,thesoundmightkeep Attack Decay Slope Release

playingforever!) Time Time Time Time
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation Note-on or reset Note-off


ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjustthe Start [0099]
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe Thissetstheinitialvolumelevelatnoteon.
rhythmiceffects. Attack [0099]
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards. Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendof
theDecaytime.
speeds,theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextreme Sustain [0099]
noteoff(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
200
Program P6: Amp 63: Amp EG
Time 63c: Level Modulation

Highervaluesmeanlongertimes.Forachartshowing
equivalentsinmilliseconds,pleaseseeTimeon ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontrolthe
page 80. LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,and
Attack [0099] havedifferentmodulationintensities.
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStart Note:OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
leveltotheAttacklevel. points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.For
Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas instance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecaytime,
fastasthemostpunchyofclassicanalogsynths. youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecaytimeor
theBreaklevel.
Startlevelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstart ThisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,Attack
instantaneouslyatitsmaximumvalue. level,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatare
alreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenresetviaAMS.
Decay [0099]
totheBreaklevel. ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
Slope [0099] ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Sustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff Start [99+99]
(unlessitisresetviaAMS). ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Release [0099]
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe Attack [99+99]
Sustainleveltosilence. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Curve
Break [99+99]
Classicanalogsynthenvelopescreatedcurvedshapes
naturally.TheOASYSgoesastepfurtherthanvintage ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
synths,however,andletsyoucontroltheamountof modulationfortheBreaklevel.
curvatureseparatelyforeachofthefourenvelope
segments. 63d: Time Modulation
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremain ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsources
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto tocontroltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachof
soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat thethreeAMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,and
thebeginning. Releasetimeseachhavetheirownmodulation
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare intensities.
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegments
whichgodown. AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbe
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments, usefulhere,forinstance.
suchasDecayandRelease. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthe Attack [99+99]
transitionfromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthe instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will
transitionfromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel. makethesegmenttimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
Slope [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] settingof8willcutthesegmenttimealmostinhalf.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthe Decay [99+99]
transitionfromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Release [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] modulationfortheDecaytime.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe Slope [99+99]
201
Release [99+99]
modulationfortheReleasetime.
AMS2 and AMS3

andRelease.TheparametersofbothAMS2andAMS3

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
2:CopyEnvelope.Formoreinformation,see
CopyEnvelopeonpage 216.
3:SwapEnvelope.Formoreinformation,see
SwapEnvelopeonpage 216.
202
Program P7: EG 1-4 71: EG 1 (Filter)
Program P7: EG 1-4

TherearefourassignableEGs,inadditiontotheAmp Inthemidstofallthisflexibility,wethoughtitwould
EG.EachofthesecanbeusedasanAMSmodulation alsobegoodtoprovidealittlestructure.Withthisin
sourcetocontrolawidevarietyofparameters. mind,EG1isnamedEG1(Filter)andEG2islabeled
TherearealsofourparameterswithdedicatedEG EG2(Pitch).
modulationinputs:PitchforOscillators1and2,and Pleasetakethesenamesassuggestions,ratherthan
FrequencyforFiltersAandB.AnyofthefourEGscan restrictions.Ifyoulike,yourefreetousetheseEGsto
beusedforthesemodulationroutings. controlanyEGorAMSdestination,ortouseotherEGs
71: EG 1 (Filter)
71PMC
71a
71b
71c
71d
TheEGs,orEnvelopeGenerators,letyoucreate
complex,timevaryingchangestoAMSmodulatable 71a: EG Reset
parameters.Thecontrolsonthispagespecifytheshape
oftheEG.Amongotherthings,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsand
timesofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,for additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe
subtlecontroloverthesoundoftheEG. EGtostart.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestart Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
theEG. Threshold [99+99]
Onethingthatyoucantdoonthispageistocontrol ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
howmucheffecttheEGhasontheparametersit Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjustthe
modulates.Todothat.youllneedtoadjusttheAMS exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe
intensitiesonthepagesfortheindividualparameters. reset,effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstother
rhythmiceffects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.When
203
tothesevaluesmaycauseinconsistentbehavior,or EG Value Actual Time

happens,reducetheThresholduntiltheEGtriggers 50 464 ms
consistently. 60 944 ms
70 1.8 seconds
71b: Envelope 80 3.8 seconds
EG 90 10.9 seconds

99 87.3 seconds
Level Level Level
Start Release Attack [0099]

Level Level
Change to
Parameter leveltotheAttacklevel.
Value Time
Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas
Time Time Time Time
Envelopescreateamodulationsignalbymovingfrom
oneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,andthen Decay [0099]
movingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodoftime, ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevel
andsoon. totheBreaklevel.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfivelevels,the
amountoftimeittakestogofromeachofthelevelsto Slope [0099]
thenext,andtheshape(fromlineartocurved)ofeach ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe
transition. BreakleveltotheSustainlevel.Onceitreachesthe
Sustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff
Level (unlessitisresetviaAMS).
Eachofthefivelevelscanbeeitherpositiveor Release [0099]
negative.
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe
Positivelevelswillmakethecutofffrequency(orother SustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
negativelevelswillmakeitgodown. Curve
Start [99+99] Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
ThissetstheinitialEGlevel,atnoteon. manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraight
lines.Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelyto
Attack [99+99] bemadeoutofcurves.
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime. Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchange
Break [99+99] thenextpoint.Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendof linearsegments.
theDecaytime. Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurved
Sustain [99+99] shapesnaturally.TheOASYSgoesastepfurtherthan
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit amountofcurvatureseparatelyforeachofthefour
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntil envelopesegments.
noteoff,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release [99+99] thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime. soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat
thebeginning.
Time Different curve settings for up and down
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow: Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare
EG Value Actual Time suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegments
whichgodown.
00 0.667 ms
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
10 10 ms
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
20 44 ms curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,
30 104 ms
40 224 ms
204
Program P7: EG 1-4 71: EG 1 (Filter)
EGCurve Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecay
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveassignedthe
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log) CommonLFOtomodulateBreakLevel.TheLFOmay
bemovingallthetime,buttheBreakLevelisonly
affectedbytheLFOsvalueattheinstantthatthe
Decaysegmentstarts.Afterthat,thelevelisfixed.
Finally,thisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,
Attacklevel,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthat
arealreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenresetvia
AMS.
Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
71c: Level Modulation Break [99+99]
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontrolthe ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,and modulationfortheBreaklevel.
havedifferentmodulationintensities.
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,
youcancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestothe ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsources
EGshape,asshownbelow. tocontroltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachof
EGLevelModulation thethreeAMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,and
Releasetimeseachhavetheirownmodulation
intensities.
EGTimeModulation

Attack, and Break
Attack=+, Decay=+, Attack=+, Decay=+, Attack=, Decay=,

Softly played note. Stongly played note. Stongly played note.
Original Shape Times are longer. Times are shorter.
Reaches Sustainmore Reaches Sustainmore
slowly. quickly.
Negative AMS on Start, Positive AMS on Start and Break,
Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulated SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo usefulhere,forinstance.
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevel ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
reachedattheendofthesegment. Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
205
Attack [99+99] AMS2 and AMS3

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,
modulationfortheAttacktime. respectively,forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvaluefor EachhasitsownintensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,
instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will andRelease.TheparametersofbothAMS2andAMS3
makethesegmenttimealmosttwiceaslong,anda areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,above.
settingof8willcutthesegmenttimealmostinhalf.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand t 71: Page Menu Commands
athighervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Decay [99+99] commandsonpage 142.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
modulationfortheDecaytime. Programonpage 142.
Slope [99+99] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
modulationfortheSlopetime. 2:CopyEnvelope.Formoreinformation,see
Release [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS SwapEnvelopeonpage 216.
72: EG 2 (Pitch)
73: EG 3
74: EG 4
ThesettingsforEGs24areidenticaltothoseforEG1.
Formoreinformation,see71:EG1(Filter)on
page 203.
206
Program P8: Step Seq/LFO 81: Step Sequencer
Program P8: Step Seq/LFO
81: Step Sequencer

81d 81PMC
81a
81a
81b
81c
UsingSmoothingtomakesteptransitionsmore
Overview gentleonpage 171
TheStepSequencercreatescomplex,rhythmic
patterns,foruseasanAMSmodulationsource.For 81a: Step Sequencer
instance,youcanmodulateafiltertocreatesample
andholdeffects,modulatepitchtocreatemelodic Mode [Loop, One Shot]
patterns,ormodulateamplitudetocreatepulsing,
LoopmakestheStepSequenceloopcontinuously
triggeredgateeffects.
betweentheStartStepandtheEndStep.
EachvoiceoftheAL1hasitsownStepSequencer,in
OneShotmakestheStepSequenceplayoncefromthe
additiontotheCommonStepSequencersharedby
StartSteptotheEndStep,andthenholdattheEnd
bothEXiinstruments.TomakeallofthepervoiceStep
Step.YoucanstillresettheStepSequencerfromAMS
Sequencersruninsync,setKeySynctoOff.
tomakeitplayagain.
Thesequencecanhaveupto32steps,eachwithits
ownlevelandduration.Itcanloop,orplayonlyonce. Start Step [132]
Youcanalso: Thisisthesteponwhichthesequencewillstart.If
RestarttheStepSequencerviaAMS ModeissettoLoop,thisalsosetsthestartoftheloop.
ModulatetheStartStepviaAMS AMS [List of AMS Sources]

Useindividualstepstoeithergateordosample ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheStartStep.
andholdonacontinuousAMSsource,suchasan ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
EGorLFO Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Assignindividualstepstocreatearandomlevel Intensity [-32+32]
UseSmoothingtocreategentle,curvingshapes ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheStartStep
modulation.
Step Sequencer usage tips
ForsometipsonusingtheStepSequencer,see: End Step [0132]
CreatingmelodicpatternswiththeStep Thissetsthelaststepinthesequence.Oncethe
Sequenceronpage 170 sequencereachestheEndStep,itwilleitherholdthere
untilthenotegoesaway(ifModeissettoOneShot),
UsingSmoothingtocreateenvelopelikeshapes
orloopbacktotheStartStep(ifModeissettoLoop).
onpage 171
207
Key Sync [Off, On]

81c: Value AMS Input
WhenKeySyncisOn,eachnotesStepSequenceris
independent,andthesequencealwaysstartsfromthe AMS [List of AMS Sources]
StartStepatnoteon.
ThisistheAMSsourceusedforstepssettoAMS
WhenKeySyncisOff,theStepSequencersforall InputorAMSInputS/H.
notesaresynchronizedtogether(unlesstheStartStep
ismodulatedbynotespecificAMSsources).Thefirst
noteinalegatophrasewillstartfromtheStartStep; 81d: Step Parameters
subsequentnoteswillplayinsyncwiththatfirstnote. Eachofthe32stepshasitsownsettingsforValueand
Duration.
Smoothing
Value 1-32 [-100+100, Random,
ThesecontrolsfiltertheStepSequencersoutputsignal,
creatingmoregentletransitionsbetweenvalues.You AMS Input, AMS Input S/H]
canusethistoroundoffthehardedgesoftheStep 100through+100generatespecificlevels,justasyoud
Sequencersoutput,ortocreateenvelopelikeeffects. expect.
Youhaveseparatecontroloftheamountofsmoothing Randomyieldsadifferent,randomvalueeverytime
duringtheattack(whenthesignalisincreasing)and thestepisplayed.
decay(whenitsdecreasing). AMSInputusesthesignalfromtheValueAMSInput
Formoreinformation,seeUsingSmoothingtocreate source,above.Thiscanchangecontinuouslyoverthe
envelopelikeshapesonpage 171,andUsing durationofthestep.Forinstance,ifyouusedanLFO
Smoothingtomakesteptransitionsmoregentleon astheValueAMSInput,youdheartheLFOmove
page 171. overthedurationofthestep.
Attack [0099] AMSInputS/HgrabstheleveloftheValueAMS

Inputsourceatthestartofthestep,andthenmaintains
Thiscontrolstheattacktimeofthesmoother,orhow thatsinglevalueforthedurationofthestep.
longittakestoreachanew,highervalue.
HigherAttacksettingsmeanlongertimes. Duration (Base Note) 1-32 [r w ]
Thissetsthebasiclengthofthestep,relativetothe
DependingonhowquicklytheStepSequencervalueis
systemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoa
changing,highAttacksettingsmaymeanthatanew
wholenote,includingtriplets.
valueisneverquitereached.
Decay [0099] x (Multiply Base Note by) 1-32 [0132]

Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeofthesmoother,orhow
longittakesthesmoothertoreachanew,lowervalue.
Timesissetto3,thestepsdurationwillbeadotted
HigherDecaysettingsmeanlongertimes. eighthnote.
81b: Sequencer Reset Command buttons

Step
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresetthesequencetothe Step [0132]
StartStep. Selectsthestepthatyouwanttoedit.
Threshold [-99+99] Insert
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwillmaketheStep Insertsthecutorcopiedstepatthecurrentstep.
Sequencerreset.Amongotherthings,youcanusethis
toadjusttheexactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichthe Cut
sequencerwillbereset,effectivelycontrollingits Cutsthecurrentstep.Subsequentstepswillbemoved
grooveagainstotherrhythmiceffects. forward.Ifdesired,youcanthenpasteorinsertthecut
Whenthethresholdispositive,theStepSequencer stepintoanotherlocation.
triggerswhenpassingthroughthethresholdmoving
upwards.Whenthethresholdisnegative,theStep
Copy
Sequencertriggerswhenpassingthroughthe Copiesthecurrentstep.Youcanthenpasteorinsert
thresholdmovingdownwards. thecopiedstepintoanotherlocation.
Note:withsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFO Paste
Pastesthecutorcopiedstepontothecurrentstep,
replacingit.
maymeanthattheStepSequencerdoesntresetatall. Value
Ifthishappens,reducetheThresholduntiltheStep
Sequencertriggersconsistently. Reset
ResetstheValueofeachstepto000.
208
Program P8: Step Seq/LFO 82: LFO 1
Smooth Duration
AutomaticallyadjuststheValueofeachstepsothat
x2
theyaresmoothlyconnected.
Thisdoublesthedurationofthestepsorthex
Exp/Comp (MultiplyBaseNoteby)value.Forexample,it
WhenyoupresstheExp/Compbutton,theStep wouldturneighthnotesintoquarternotes,and
SequenceValuedialogboxwillappear.Thevalueof quarternotesintohalfnotes.
eachstepwillbeexpandedorcompressedbythe
/2
percentage(%)youspecify.
Thishalvesthedurationofthestepsorthex
StepSequenceValuedialogbox (MultiplyBaseNoteby)value.Forexample,it
wouldturnquarternotesintoeighthnotes,andeighth
notesintosixteenthnotes.

Expand/Compress [%] [0100] commandsonpage 142.
Ifthisisat100%,thecurrentvalueofeachstepwillbe 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
usedwithoutchange.IfyoucheckKeepProportion, Programonpage 142.
the%valuewillbelimitedsothattheexpansion/
compressionwillmaintaintherelationshipsbetween
thecurrentstepsettings.
2:CopyStepSequencer.Formoreinformation,see
CopyStepSequenceronpage 174.
82: LFO 1
82PMC
82a
82b
82c
ThispagehasallofthecontrolsforthefirstLFO.For UsetheKeySyncparametertochoosewhetherthe
instance,youcan: LFOrunsseparatelyforeachvoice,oris
SelecttheLFOsbasicwaveform,andmodifyit synchronizedacrossallofthevoices
withtheShapeparameter. UsetheFadeandDelayparameterstocontrolhow
ControltheLFOsfrequency,andassignAMS longtheLFOwaitstostartafternoteon,and
controllerstomodulatethefrequency. whetheritstartsabruptlyorfadesinslowly.
SettheLFOtosynctoMIDItempo.
209
LFOShape
82a: LFO 1
+99
Waveform [TriangleRandom6 (Continuous)]
0
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform,asshowninthe
graphicbelow. 99
Mostofthewaveformsshouldbeselfexplanatory,but
afewwillbenefitfrommoredetails: Shape = 0 (original waveform)
Guitarisintendedforguitarvibrato,anditsshapeis Shape = +99
specificallytunedforthispurpose.Thewaveformis
positiveonly,sothatwhenusedforpitch,itwillonly Shape = 99
bendup,andnotdown.
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
Random1(S/H)generatestraditionalsampleandhold waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or
waveforms,inwhichthelevelchangesrandomlyat 99.Whentheseareselected,Shapeisgrayedout.
fixedintervalsoftime.
Random2(S/H)randomizesboththelevelsandthe AMS [List of AMS Sources]
timing. Thisselectsamodulationsourceforcontrollingthe
Random3(S/H)generatesapulsewavewithrandom LFOsShape.Modulatingtheshapecandramatically
timing.Itstheoppositeoftraditionalsampleandhold; altertheeffectoftheLFOtryitout!
thetimingvaries,butthelevelsdont. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Random46(Continuous)aresmoothedversionsof Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Random13,withrampsinsteadofsteps.Youcanuse Intensity [99+99]
themtocreatemoregentlerandomvariations.
Start Phase [-180+180, Random] modulation.
Thiscontrolsthephaseofthewaveformatthestartof Frequency [0099]
thenote,instepsof5degrees.
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeany
IfKeySyncisOn,theStartPhasewillapplyonlyto modulation.Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds,as
thefirstnoteofthephrase. showninthetablebelow.
Shape [99+99] ByusingAMSmodulation,youcanalsogetspeeds
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Asyou muchfasterandmuchslowerthanareavailable
canseeinthegraphicbelow,thiscanmakethe throughthisbasicsetting.
waveformseithermoreroundedormoreextreme.It Frequency Value Frequency in Hz
canalsobeusefultoemphasizecertainvalueranges,
00 0.014 Hz
anddeemphasizeothers.
10 0.112 Hz
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFO
tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShapeemphasizesthehigh 20 0.422 Hz
valuerange,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthe 30 0.979 Hz
higherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelowrange,the
filterwillspendmoretimeatthelowerfrequencies. 40 1.79 Hz
50 2.84 Hz
60 4.14 Hz
70 5.69 Hz
80 7.49 Hz
90 9.53 Hz
99 26.25 Hz
99 + Fine 99 32 Hz
LFO Waveforms
Random1 Random4
Triangle Guitar Step Triangle-4
(S/H) (Continuous)
Saw Step Triangle-6 (Continuous)
Triangle (S/H)
Square Step Saw-4 (Continuous)
Saw Down (S/H)
Exponential
Sine Step Saw-6
Saw Up
210
Program P8: Step Seq/LFO 82: LFO 1
Frequency Fine [0099] SinceOffsetaffectstheoutputvaluesoftheLFO,its

ThisallowsyoutocontroltheLFOfrequencywith importanttonotethatitaffectsthesignalafterthe
greaterprecision,givingyou98additionalstepsfor Shapefunction,asshownbelow:
eachstepofthemainFrequencyparameter. LFOSignalFlow
Waveform Shape Offset
Whenthisissetto00,theLFOspeedisassetbythe
Frequencyparameter.
Whenthisissetto99,itsthesameasincreasingthe
mainFrequencyvalueby1.
Stop [Off, On]

On(checked):WhenStopisOn,theLFOdoesnot Fade [0099]
advancenormally,andtheFrequencyparametersare TheLFOcanfadeingradually,insteadofsimply
ignored.Instead,theLFOsimplygenerateitsveryfirst startingimmediatelyatfullstrength.Thisparameter
value(asdeterminedbythecombinationofthe specifiesthetimefromwhentheLFObeginstoplay
Waveform,StartPhase,Shape,andOffset),andthen
untilitreachesitsmaximumamplitude.
holdsthatvalueuntiltheendofthenote.
IftheDelayparameterisbeingused,thenthefadewill
YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandom beginafterthedelayiscomplete.
waveformstocreatestatic,randommodulation,with
thevaluechangingonlyatnoteon. WhenKeySyncisOff,thefadewillapplyonlytothe
firstnoteinthephrase.
functionnormally. LFOFadeandDelay
Key Sync [Off, On] Delay Fade

On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,theLFOstarts
eachtimeyoupressakey,andanindependentLFO
runsforeachnote.Thisisthenormalsetting.
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theLFO
startsfromthephasedeterminedbythefirstnotein Note-on Note-off
thephrase,sothattheLFOsforallnotesbeingheldare
synchronizedtogether.TheFadeandDelaysettings
willonlyapplytothefirstnotesLFO. Delay [099]
ThissetsthetimefromnoteonuntiltheLFOstarts.
NotethatevenifKeySyncisOff,eachnotesLFO
speedmaystillbedifferentifyoumodulatethe WhenKeySyncisOff,thedelayappliesonlytothe
Frequencybynotenumber,velocity,keyscaling,or firstnoteofthephrase.
othernotespecificAMSsources.
Offset [99+99] 82b: Frequency Modulation

Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsare Youcanusetwoalternatemodulationsources(AMS)
centeredaround0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99 toadjustthespeedoftheLFO.
to+99.ThisparameterletsyoushifttheLFOupand
down,sothatforinstanceitscenteredon50,andthen AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]
swingsfrom49to+149. ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcefortheLFO
Forexample,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOfor frequency.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
vibrato.IftheOffsetis0,thevibratowillbecentered ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
onthenotesoriginalpitch,bendingitbothupand NotethatyoucanuseLFO2tomodulateLFO1s
down. frequency.
IftheOffsetis+99,ontheotherhand,thevibratowill
Intensity [99+99]
onlyraisethepitchabovetheoriginalnote.
Offsetsettingsandpitchchangeproducedbyvibrato ModAMSthenaddstothisinitialamount.
Offset = 99 Offset = 0 Offset = +99 WhenAMS1isatitsmaximumvalue(forinstance,

whenthejoystickispushedallthewayup),theAMS
Pitch affectsthefrequencyasshownbelow:
Intensity Change to LFO Frequency
+99 64x
TheoneexceptiontothisistheGuitarwaveform,
whichisdesignedtoemulatebendingastringona +82 32x
guitarsothatthepitchonlygoesup,andnotdown. +66 16x
Becauseofthis,thewaveformiscenteredon50,and Faster
+49 8x
noton0.Ofcourse,youcanalwaysuseanegative
Offsettoshiftitbackdownbelow0again! +33 4x
+16 2x
211
Intensity Change to LFO Frequency 82c: Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync

16 1/2x
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On]
33 1/4x
On(checked):TheLFOwillsynchronizetothesystem
49 1/8x tempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDIClock.
Slower
66 1/16x TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNoteand
Multiplyparameters,below.Allsettingsfor
82 1/32x
FrequencyandFrequencyModulationwillbe
99 1/64x ignored.
Off(unchecked):TheFrequencysettingswill
Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources] determinethespeedoftheLFO,andthetempo
ThisselectsasecondaryAMSmodulationsourceto settingswillhavenoeffect.
scaletheintensityofAMS1.
Base Note [r w ]
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. ThissetsthebasicspeedoftheLFO,relativetothe
systemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoa
Intensity [99+99] wholenote,includingtriplets.
x (Multiply Base Note by) [0132]
IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamountof ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For
AMSAoverthefull+/99range. instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
Forexample,ifAMS1issettothePitchEG,and eighthnote.
IntensityModAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive
settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheintensity
ofthePitchEGmodulationofLFOFrequency. t 82: Page Menu Commands
AMS2 [List of AMS Sources] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ThisselectsthesecondmodulationsourcefortheLFO
frequency.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
commandsonpage 142.
Intensity [99+99] Programonpage 142.
ThiscontrolstheamountofmodulationfromAMS2. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
2:CopyLFO.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
LFOonpage 216.
3:SwapLFO.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
LFOonpage 216.
83: LFO 2
84: LFO 3
85: LFO 4
ThesettingsforLFOs24areidenticaltothosefor
LFO1.Formoreinformation,see82:LFO1on
page 209.
212
Program P9: AMS Mixer 91: AMS Mixer
Program P9: AMS Mixer

TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone, Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto
orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,
new. ifyouuseAftertouchasaninputtoaAMSMixer,you
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether, canusetheprocessedversionoftheAftertouchto
oruseoneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother. controloneAMSdestination,andtheoriginalversion
Youcanalsousethemtomodifytheresponseof tocontrolanother.
realtimecontrollers. Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS byusingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.
sources,justlikeothercontrollers.
91: AMS Mixer

91PMC
91a
91b
91a: AMS Mixer 1 SeeQuantizeonpage 94formoreinformation.
Mixer Type [A+B, Amt AxB, Offset, Smoothing, GatechoosesbetweentwoAMSinputs(orfixed
Shape, Quantize] values)basedonathirdAMSsource.SeeGateon
page 95formoreinformation.
Thiscontrolsthetypeofprocessingperformedby
AMSMixer1.EachoftheMixerTypesisdiscussedin
detailelsewhereinthemanual. 91b: AMS Mixer 2
A+BaddstwoAMSsourcestogether.Formore ThisisthesecondAMSMixer.Itsparametersare
information,seeA+Bonpage 91. exactlythesameasthoseofAMSMixer1,above.
AmtAxBscalestheamountofoneAMSsourcewith
Offsetaddsorsubtractsaconstantvaluetoorfroman
AMSsource.Formoreinformation,seeOffseton ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
page 92. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Smoothingcreatesmoregentletransitionsbetween commandsonpage 142.
values,smoothingoutabruptchangessuchasaquick
moveonajoystickorasharpedgeonanLFO.For 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
details,seeSmoothingonpage 93. Programonpage 142.
ShapeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.Foranin 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
depthdescription,seeShapeonpage 93. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
213
AL-1: Tone Adjust

AL1ToneAdjustDefaultSettings
Oscillators 1 & 2 Filters A & B FM Amount Drive LFOs 1 & 2

Width/Phase/Detune EG Intensity Speed
AMS Intensity
Switches 15:
Mixer Mutes
OSC 1, OSC 2,
Sub OSC/Audio,
Ring Mod, Switches 7 & 8:
Noise LFOs 1 & 2
Stop
Switch 6:
Sync On/Off
EG 1 (Filter) ADSR Amp EG ADSR
ToneAdjustprovidesanelegantphysicalinterfaceto Oscillators common

theAL1sparameters.Mostofthefactorysoundsuse SyncOn/Off(absolute)
thedefaultlayout,asshownabove.Youcanalso
customizethelayoutforindividualsounds,ifdesired. FMAmount(absolute)
FormoreinformationaboutToneAdjust,pleasesee FMAMSIntensity(absolute)
09f:ToneAdjust,onpage 26.
Mixer
AL-1 Tone Adjust parameters OSC1level(absolute)
TheAL1supportsalloftheCommonToneAdjust OSC2level(absolute)
parameters,asdescribedunder09f:ToneAdjust,on SubOSC/AudioInputlevel(absolute)
page 26.Italsoaddsanumberofitsownadditional
RingModlevel(absolute)
parameters,whichapplyonlytotheAL1.
Noiselevel(absolute)
Notethattheseadditionalparametersareseparatefor
eachEXi,asopposedtobeingsharedbybothEXiinthe Filter A
Program.
InadditiontothestandardToneAdjustfilter
Alloftheadditionalparametersarelistedbelow.Each parameters,theAL1addsthefollowing:
ismarkedaseitherrelative(meaningthatitscalesthe
Type(absolute)
existingparametervalue)orabsolute(whichover
writestheexistingvalue). Cutoff(absolute)
Resonance(absolute)
Oscillator 1
Tune(absolute) FrequencyEGIntensity(absolute)
Waveform(absolute) FrequencyLFOIntensity(absolute)
Morph(absolute) Filter B
MorphAMSIntensity(absolute) FilterBhasthesameToneAdjustparametersasFilter
A,above.
Detune/PulseWidth(absolute)
Detune/PulseWidthAMSIntensity(absolute) Amp
AMS1Intensity(absolute)
Oscillator 2
AMS2Intensity(absolute)
Oscillator2hasthesameToneAdjustparametersas
Oscillator1,above. Drive(absolute)
LowBoost(absolute)
214
AL-1: Tone Adjust 91: AMS Mixer
EGs
InadditiontosupportingthestandardToneAdjustEG
parameters,theAL1addsthefollowingseparate
controlsforbothEG3andEG4:
Attacktime(relative)
Decay&Slopetime(relative)
Sustainlevel(relative)
Releasetime(relative)
LFOs
InadditiontosupportingthestandardToneAdjust
LFOparameters,theAL1addsthefollowingseparate
controls:
LFO3Speed(relative)
LFO3Fade(relative)
LFO3Delay(relative)
LFO3Stop(absolute)
LFO4Speed(relative)
LFO4Fade(relative)
LFO4Delay(relative)
LFO4Stop(absolute)
LFO1,2,3,and4Waveform(absolute)
LFO1,2,3,and4Shape(absolute)
Step Sequencer
CommonStepSequencerparameters,theAL1adds
thefollowingseparatecontrolforthepervoiceStep
Sequencer:
Smoothing(relative)
Pitch
PitchSlope(absolute)
PitchLFOAMSIntensity(absolute)
215
AL-1: Page Menu Commands

1. SelectSwapLFOtoopenthedialogbox.
Copy Envelope
ThiscopiessettingsfromoneAL1envelopeto
another.
1. SelectCopyEnvelopetoopenthedialogbox.
2. UsetheSource1andSource2fieldstoselect
thetwoLFOsyouwanttoswap.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSwapLFO
operation.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe
2. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysource Cancelbutton.
envelope.
envelope.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyEnvelope
Cancelbutton.
Swap Envelope
ThisexchangessettingsbetweentwoAL1envelopes.
1. SelectSwapEnvelopetoopenthedialogbox.
2. UsetheSource1andSource2fieldstoselect
thetwoenvelopesyouwanttoswap.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSwapEnvelope
Cancelbutton.
Copy LFO
ThiscopiessettingsfromoneAL1LFOtoanother.
1. SelectCopyLFOtoopenthedialogbox.
2. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysource
LFO.
LFO.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyLFO
Cancelbutton.
Swap LFO
ThisexchangessettingsbetweentwoAL1LFOs.
216
EXi: CX-3 Tonewheel Organ
CX-3 Overview
TheCX3isadetailedmodelofaclassictonewheel Becauseofthis,youcanuseonlyfourCX3s
organ,basedonKorgsgroundbreakingCX3 simultaneouslyinaCombinationorSong.IfotherEXis
keyboard. withfixedresourcesareinuse,themaximumnumber
Itsawesomesoundstartswithperfecttonewheel ofCX3swillbereducedaccordingly.EachEXiineach
phasecoherency,resultinginpure,powerfulsounding Programcountstowardsthemaximum;forinstance,a
chords,justliketherealthing.Subtletiessuchas ProgramwithtwoCX3scountsastwo,notasone.
differenttonewheeltypes,adjustableovertones, Formoreinformation,seeCX3&STR1:Limitations
leakage,andnoise,alongwithdetailedkeyclick onEXifixedresourcesonpage 382.
modeling,provideunparalleledrealism.
Unsupported EXi Common parameters
Ampmodeling,Vibrato/Chorus,andRotarySpeaker
effectsareincludedinthemodel,sothatyoudont TheCX3supportsmostoftheEXiCommon
needtouseanyInsertEffectstorecreatemostclassic parameters,exceptforscalesandanumberofthevoice
organsounds. allocationoptions,asdetailedbelow:
InEXmode,youcanintroduceadditionaldrawbar PolyLegatoandSingleTrigger
andpercussionharmonics,lettingyouproducenew MonoLegato(simpleMonoretriggermodeis
timbresunavailableontraditionalorgans. supported,however)
IfyourefamiliarwiththeCX3keyboard,youmight MonoMode(NormalorUseLegatoOffset)
wanttocheckoutChangesfromtheoriginalCX3on Unison,includingNumberofVoices,Detune,and
page 237foranoverviewofsomeoftheimprovements Thickness
intheOASYSCX3.
Scale,includingType,Key,andRandom
CX-3 uses EXi fixed resources
TheCX3usesEXifixedresourcesforthebuiltin
rotaryspeaker,amp,vibratochorus,andsoon.These
useupasmallamountofprocessingpower,evenif
yourenotplayinganynotes.
EXi Program Structure Common Common

Vector KARMA Key Track 1
LFO Step Seq 2
EXi 1
Mixer & EQ Effects
EXi 2
CX-3 Structure
Upper
AMS Mixer 1
Normal Drawbars 2
EX Drawbars
Tone Wheels Upper Mix
Vibrato/Chorus Expression Amp Rotary Speaker
Lower Mix
Percussion
Lower
Normal Drawbars
EX Drawbars
EXi 1
EXi 2
217
01: Main
01b
ThisisthemainpageofProgrammode.Forafull CX-3
seeEXiProgramP0:Playonpage 159.Thissection Drawbar Mode
describesonlytheoverviewdisplay,whichdiffersfor ThisshowswhethertheDrawbarsaresettoNormalor
eachindividualEXi. EXmodes.
PressthisareatojumptotheBasicpage.
Keyboard Split
Thispartofthepageshowsanoverviewofthemost
ThisshowswhethertheKeyboardSplitisturnedon,or
importantsettingsfortheProgramstwoEXi
turnedoff.
instruments.Thespecificparameterswillvary,
dependingonwhichEXiarebeingused.Thespecific PressthisareatojumptotheKeyboardSplitpage.
parametersfortheAL1aredescribedbelow.
Keyboard Split Zone/Common Key Zone
Theupperportionofthisgraphicshowsthekeyboard
splitrangewithintheCX3.
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe
graphics,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits PressthisareatojumptotheKeyboardSplitpage.
parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilterEG ThelowerportionshowsthekeyzonesforEXi1and
graphic,youllgototheFilterEGpage. EXi2,assetontheCommonsectionsProgramBasic
Tip:PressingEXITseveraltimeswillalwaysbringyou page,inrelationtotheentireMIDInoterange.The
backtothispage. rangeofthe76noteor88notekeyboardisalsoshown,
asappropriate.
Display shows programmed valuesnot AMS
Thesegraphicsshowthevaluesoftheprogrammed
parameters,includinganyeditsmadeviaToneAdjust. EX Percussion
Theydonotupdatetoshowtemporarychangesmade ThisareashowstheEXPercussionsettings.Itwillonly
byAMSmodulation. appeariftheDrawbarModeissettoEX.
Forinstance,movingthejoystickup(JS+Y)willoften PressthisareatojumptotheEXPercussionpage.
switchtheRotarySpeakerbetweenfastandslow,via
AMS.Youllhearthesoundchangebutsincethe Lower
programmedparameterisstillthesame,thedisplay
ThesegraphicswillonlybedisplayedifKeyboard
wontbeupdated.
SplitisturnedOn.
218
Lower Drawbars Common Step Sequencer

ThisshowstheLowerdrawbarsettings. ThisshowsagraphicoverviewoftheCommonStep
PressthisareatojumptotheDrawbarspage. Sequencer.
V/C On/Off page.
ThisshowswhethertheVibrato/Chorusisturnedonor
offfortheLowerdrawbars. Common LFO Graphic
PressthisareatojumptotheAmp/Vibrato/Chorus ThisshowsthewaveformoftheCommonLFO.
page. PressthisareatojumptotheCommonLFOpage.
EX Drawbars 3 Band EQ Graphic

ThisareashowstheLowerEXdrawbarsettings.Itwill Thisshowsthemidsweepable3bandEQ.
onlyappeariftheDrawbarModeissettoEX. PressthisareatojumptotheEQpage.
PressthisareatojumptotheEXDrawbarspage.
IFX, MFX/TFX
Upper PresstheIFXareatojumptotheIFXRoutingpage.
Upper Drawbars PresstheMFX/TFXareatojumptotheMFXRouting

page.
ThisshowstheUpperdrawbarsettings.
PressthisareatojumptotheDrawbarspage. KARMA GE Name
Percussion
ThissectionshowsthePercussionHarmonicsetting, page.
andwhetherornotPercussionisturnedOn.
PressthisareatojumptothePercussionpage.
V/C On/Off
ThisshowswhethertheVibrato/Chorusisturnedonor
offfortheUpperdrawbars.
PressthisareatojumptotheAmp/Vibrato/Chorus
page.
EX Drawbars
ThisshowstheUpperEXdrawbarsettings.
PressthisareatojumptotheEXDrawbarspage.
Rotary Speaker
PressanywhereinthisareatojumptotheRotary
Speakerpage.
Rotary Speaker On/Off

ThisshowstheOn/Offsettingoftherotaryspeaker.
Mode Switch
ThisshowstherotaryspeakersModeSwitch
(Rotate/Stop)settingoftherotaryspeaker.
Speed Switch
ThisshowstherotaryspeakersSpeedSwitchsetting
(Fast/Slow).
Common
EXiarebeingused.

eitherPOLYorMONO.
219
Program P4: Basic
41: Basic
41PMC
41a
41b
41c
Drawbar Level Curve [Bright, Mellow]

41a: Drawbar Mode
Thiscontrolsthewayinwhichthetonewheellevels
Drawbar Mode [Normal, EX] changeinrelationtopitch,whichcontributestothe
overallbrightnessofthesound.
Thisisabasiccontrol,whichaffectstheparameters
availableintheDrawbarsandPercussionsections. Brightproducesacrispeffect,slightlybrighterthan
traditionaltonewheelorgans.
Normalmodemodelsastandardtonewheelorgan,
with9drawbarsandsinglepitchpercussion. Mellowproducesaslightlydarker,moretraditional
tone.
EXmodeaddsfouradditionaldrawbars,withpitches
adjustableinhalfstepincrementsbetween16andtwo Overtone Level [099]
octavesabove1.Italsoallowsyoutocreatethe
Thiscontrolsthetimbreoftheindividualtonewheels.
percussionusinguptofivedifferentpitches,eachwith
IncreasingtheOvertoneLeveladdsmoreharmonics,
adjustablevolumelevels.
forabrighter,richertone.
TheWheelTypesetting,above,determinesboththe
41b: Tone specificharmonicsaddedandtheirvolumelevels.
Wheel Type [Vintage, Clean] Leakage Level [099]
Vintageoffersanorganic,complextone.Itincludes Thisspecifiestheamountofdrawbarleakage,both
someamountofadditionalharmonicsforeachnote, intoplayednotesandintotheconstantnoise(see
whichcanbefurtherincreasedbyusingtheOvertone NoiseLevel,below).
Levelparameter,below.Italsoaddsleakage,a
pitchednoisecausedbythemixofall91tonewheels ThisparameterisavailableonlywhentheWheelType,
leakingintoeachindividualnoteacharacteristic above,issettoVintage.WhentheWheelTypeissetto
partoftheauthentictonewheelorgansound.The Clean,itisgrayedout.
LeakageLevelparameter,below,controlsthevolume Noise Level [099]
ofthiscomponent.
Thisletsyouaddaconstantamountofnoisetothe
Cleangivesyouapristine,perfectsetoftonewheels, outputsjustlikeyoumightfindinoldervintagegear.
withnoleakagenoise.Bydefault,thesetonewheels Thenoisewillbepresentwhetherornotanynotesare
havenoadditionalovertonesbutyoucanaddthemby beingplayed.
usingtheOvertoneLevelparameter,below.
220
Program P4: Basic 42: Controllers
Thenoiseincludesbothcoloredbroadbandnoiseand Key-On Click Level [ 099]

tonewheelleakage.Theamountofleakagewithinthe Thiscontrolstheamountofclicknoiseatnoteon.
noiseisscaledbyLeakageLevel,describedabove.
Key-Off Click Level [099]
Gate Type [Clean, Dirty]
Thiscontrolstheleveloftheclicknoiseatnoteoff.
Thisaffectsthesoundcharacterwhennotesareturned
onoroff.ItissimilarinconcepttoKeyClick,below,
buthasadifferenttimbralcharacter. t 41: Page Menu Commands
Cleandoesnotaddanyadditionalgatenoise. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Dirtyaddsasmallamountofnoiseatnoteonand numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
noteoff,forasmallamountofextrapunch.Youcan shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
alsousethisifyourelookingtoduplicatethegate commandsonpage 142.
timbreoftheCX3andBX3. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
41c: Key Click 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Pressingdownorreleasingakeyonatonewheel
organcanresultinarcingbetweenthecontacts,
producingacharacteristicKeyClicksound.This
sectionmodelsthateffect.
42: Controllers
42PMC
42a
42b
42c
JS- X [-60+12]
42a: Pitch Bend
JS+ X [-60+12] semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheleft.For
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheright.For Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethe
normalpitchbend,setthistoapositivevalue. joystickallthewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfive
octavesbelowtheoriginalpitch.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto+12andmovethe
joystickallthewaytotheright,thepitchwillriseone
octaveabovetheoriginalpitch. 42b: Expression
Expressionadjustsboththevolumelevelandthe
amountofdistortion.AtlowerExpressionvalues,both
thelowbassandhightreblefrequenciesareslightly
221
emphasized.TheAmpsectioninteractswith AMS [List of AMS sources]

Expression;formoredetails,see71a:Amp,on ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheWheelBrake.
page 230.
Toallowoptimalmodulationflexibility,theAMS Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
worksdifferentlyfrommostotherparameters.See
Mode,below,formoredetails. AMS Mode [Toggle, Momentary]
Expression Minimum [030] ThisparametercontrolsthewayinwhichtheWheel
BrakeAMSworks.
ThisspecifiestheminimumlevelwhentheExpression
LevelparameterorExpressionAMSareat0. WhenthisissettoToggle,theWheelBrakeAMSwill
alternatebetweenpoweronandpoweroff.For
Expression Level [099] instance,ifWheelBrakeissettoOff,andAMSis
ThissetsthedefaultExpressionlevel.Itwillbegrayed assignedtoafootswitch,thefirstpresswillcausethe
outiftheMode,below,issettoControlOnly. wheelrotationtoslow,andthenextpresswillbring
thembackuptospeedagain.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] Momentarymeansthatthepoweristurnedoffonly
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulateExpression. whilethecontrollerisenabled.Continuingthe
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation examplefromabove,whenthefootswitchispressed
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. down,thewheelrotationwillslowdown;whenthe
ThisparameterisgrayedoutifMode,below,issetto footswitchisreleased,thewheelrotationwillspeedup
LevelOnly. again.
NOTE:TheMIDIExpressioncontroller(CC#11)is AMSletsyouswitchtotheoppositeofthe
hardwiredtoscalethechannelvolumelevel.So, programmedsetting.Forinstance,ifWheelBrakeis
despitethesimilarname,itsbesttouseanother settoOn(unlikelybutpossible!),andtheAMSMode
controllerforasanAMSsource. issettoMomentary,thenpressingdownonthe
footswitchwouldcausethetonewheelstocomeupto
Mode [Level Only, AMS Only, speed.
Both Scale, Both Overwrite] IfyousetAMStouseacontinuouscontroller,suchas
ThiscontrolshowtheAMSinteractswiththe theJoystick,valuesof063areasiftheswitchwasoff,
programmedExpressionLevel. andvaluesof64127areasiftheswitchwason.
LevelOnly:TheExpressionLevelparameterhas Finallynotethattheassignableswitches,SW1and
completecontroloverExpression.TheAMSparameter SW2,canthemselvesbesettoeithermomentaryor
isgrayedoutandhasnoaffect. togglemodes,andthesesettingsarereflectedbythe
AMSOnly:TheAMSinputhascompletecontrolover switchLEDs.Individualparametermodesettings,
Expression,whiletheExpressionLevelparameteris suchastheWheelBrakeAMSMode,donotaffectthe
grayedoutandhasnoaffect. LEDs.
BothScale:ThevaluesofExpressionLevelandAMS So,ifyoureusingSW1orSW2astheAMSsource,its
aremultipliedtoproducetheExpressionlevel.Forthe besttosettheAMSModetoMomentary,andthenjust
mathfriendly,avalueof99istreatedas1.0. lettheswitchitselfdeterminethemomentary/toggle
behavior.
BothOverwrite:ExpressionLevelandAMSboth
writedirectlytotheExpressionlevel.IftheExpression Wheel Brake Speed [Slow, Fast]
Levelparameterisupdated,itdirectlycontrols Thiscontrolsthespeedatwhichthewheelswillslow
Expression,andthelastvaluefromAMSisignored.If downandspeedup.
theAMSinputmoves,italsodirectlycontrols
Expression,andthesettingoftheExpressionLevel
parameterisignored. t 42: Page Menu Commands
42c: Wheel Brake numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Tonewheelorgansactuallyhavephysicalwheels, commandsonpage 142.
whichgraduallycomeuptospeedwhenyouturnthe
poweron,andgraduallyslowtoastopwhenyouturn 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
thepoweroff.Asthewheelsrotatemorequickly,the Programonpage 142.
pitchrises;astheyslowdown,thepitchfalls. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Thissectionmodelsthisbehavior,foruseasaspecial ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
effect.
Wheel Brake [Off, On]

Thisparameterallowsyoutomanuallycontrolthe
WheelBrake.Offisthedefault;thetonewheelswill
turnnormally.ChangingthistoOnwillmakethetone
wheelsgraduallyslowdown,andeventuallystop
altogether.
222
Program P5: Split & Drawbars 51: Keyboard Split
Program P5: Split & Drawbars

Youcansetuptheorgantouseasinglesoundacross
theentirekeyboard,ortosplitthekeyboardbetween
twodifferentsetsofdrawbars.
51: Keyboard Split

51PMC
51a
51a: Split t 51: Page Menu Commands

Split Enable [Off, On] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Thisturnsthesplitonandoff.
WhenSplitisOff,onlytheUpperdrawbarswillbe commandsonpage 142.
used.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] Programonpage 142.
ThisallowsyoutoassignanAMSsourcetotogglethe 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
splitonandoff. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
AMS Mode: [Momentary, Toggle]

ThisdeterminesthebehaviorofSplitEnableAMS.For
details,seeAMSModeonpage 222.
Split Point [C-1G9]

Thissetsthehighestkeyofthelowersplitrange.
Upper Octave Shift [-2 octaves+2 octaves]

ThisraisesorlowersthepitchoftheUpperdrawbars
inoneoctavesteps.
Lower Octave Shift [-2 octaves+2 octaves]

ThisraisesorlowersthepitchoftheLowerdrawbars
inoneoctavesteps.
223
52: Drawbars
52PMC
52a
52b
ThedrawbarsaretheheartoftheCX3.Thesesettings
controlthebasicharmoniccontentofthesound,the 52a: Lower Drawbar Levels
perceivedfundamentalpitch,andthebasicvolume Theseparameterscontroltheindividualdrawbar
level. volumelevelsfortheLowersplit.Thedrawbars
expresstheirpitchesintermsoffeet,referringbackto
Use Tone Adjust for physical drawbars
pipeorgans,inwhichhalvingthelengthofapipewill
UsingToneAdjust,youcanmapthedrawbarstothe raiseitspitchbyoneoctave.So,8isanoctavehigher
ninefrontpanelsliders,includingbothsliders18and than16,4isanoctavehigherthan8,andsoon.
theMasterslider.
Youcanadjusttheseparametersbyusingtheonscreen
Liketraditionaltonewheelorgans,thethrowofthe drawbargraphics,orusethephysicalfadersviaTone
slidersisreversedfromthatofamixer:allthewayup Adjust,asdescribedabove.
is0,andallthewaydownisthemaximum(8).
NotethatwhenSplitisturnedOff,onlytheUpper
Wrap-around drawbarsareused;theLowerdrawbarsettingswill
Aswithtraditionalorgans,thetonewheelsproduce havenoeffect.
pitchesbetweenC2andF#8.Dependingonthenotes 16 [08]
thatyouplay,certaindrawbarsettingsmayimply
pitchesoutsideofthisrange.Inthiscase,thedrawbar Thisisthevolumeforthelowestdrawbar.
pitcheswillbewrappedaroundbyoneormore 0meansthatthedrawbarwillbesilent,and8isthe
octavestofitwithintheavailablerange. maximumvolume.
Forinstance,the1drawbarwouldnormallysound3 5-1/3, 8, 4, 2-2/3, 2, 1-3/5, 1-1/3, 1
octavesabovethenotethatyouplay.IfyouplayaD6
onthekeyboard,thiswouldimplythatthe1playa [08]
D9.SincethetonewheelscantplayaD9,however,the Thesesetthevolumelevelsfortheremaining8
1drawbariswrappedaroundtothehighest drawbars.
possibleDaD8.
Thesamethingwillhappenonthelowend.For
instance,the16drawbarnormallysoundsoneoctave
52b: Upper Drawbar Levels
belowtheplayednote.IfyouplayanF1onthe Theseparametersspecifythelevelforeachdrawbar
keyboard,thiswouldimplythatthe16soundatF0. usedbytheUppersplit.Also,whenSplitisturned
Sincethisisfarbelowtherangeofthetonewheels,the Off,theUpperdrawbarsareusedfortheentire
16soundsatitslowestpossibleFanF2. keyboard.
ThesettingsarejustthesameasfortheLower
drawbars.Formoredetails,pleasesee52a:Lower
DrawbarLevels,above.
224
Program P5: Split & Drawbars 53: EX Drawbars
commandsonpage 142.
53: EX Drawbars
53PMC
53a
53b
53c, d
WhentheDrawbarModeissettoEX,thisaddsfour CustomletsyouspecifythepitchesforeachEX
extradrawbarstothebasicnine,withpitches drawbar,usingtheEXDrawbar14Pitchparameters.
adjustableinhalfstepincrementsbetween16andtwo
octavesabove1.Youcanselectfromfourpreset
combinationsofdrawbarpitches,orcreateyourown 53b: Custom Drawbar Settings
fromscratch. Ex Drawbar 1 Pitch [161 +24]
WhentheDrawbarModeissettoNormal,thissection ThisspecifiesthepitchassignedtoEXDrawbar1.The
isgrayedout. valuesareexpressedinorganfeetandsemitones,with
Wrap-around and EX mode singlesemitonestepsfrom16to1+24semitones.
AnyharmonicsaboveF#8arewrappedaroundso ThisparameterisonlyavailableiftheEXDrawbar
thattheywillsoundoneormoreoctaveslower. ModeissettoCustom.Otherwise,itisgrayedout.
Similarly,harmonicsbelowC2willbewrapped Ex Drawbar 1 Level [08]
aroundtosoundanoctavehigher.Formoredetails,see
Wraparoundonpage 224. ThisisthevolumeforEXDrawbar1.
Inparticular,thismeansthathighsettingsoftheEX 0meansthatthedrawbarwillbesilent,and8isthe
Drawbar14Pitchparameters,below,mayonlybe maximumvolume.
perceptibleintheloweroctavesofthekeyboard. Ex Drawbars 2-4 Pitch [161 +24]
TheseparametersspecifythepitchassignedtoEX
53a: Lower EX Drawbars Drawbars24.Formoreinformation,seeExDrawbar
1Pitch,above.
TheseparameterscontroltheindividualEXdrawbar
pitchesandvolumelevelsfortheLowersplit. Ex Drawbars 2-4 Level [08]
EX Drawbar Pitch Mode [Preset 14, Custom] TheseparametersspecifythevolumesofEXDrawbars
24.Formoreinformation,seeExDrawbar1Level,
Presets14aretheCX3sdefaultPitchsettingsforthe
above.
setoffourEXDrawbars.WhenoneofthePresetsis
selected,theEXDrawbar14Pitchparameters,below,
aregrayedout.
225
53c and 53d: Upper EX Drawbars

TheseparameterscontroltheindividualEXdrawbar
pitchesandvolumelevelsfortheUppersplit.The
controlsareidenticaltothosefortheLowerEX
Drawbars,asdescribedabove.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
2:CopyDrawbars.Formoreinformation,see
CopyDrawbarsonpage 238.
3:SwapDrawbars.Formoreinformation,see
SwapDrawbarsonpage 238.
226
Program P6: Percussion 61: Percussion
Program P6: Percussion

Percussionaddsapitchedattacktothenotes,fora
morecrisp,punchytimbre.Whenyouplaylegato,
percussionwillonlysoundforthefirstnoteinthe
phrase.
61: Percussion
61c 61PMC
61a
61b
61d
NotethatthePercussionLevelparametercanalso
61a: Percussion affectthevolumeofthedrawbars,ascontrolledbythe
LoudDrawbarAttenuationparameter.
Percussion [Off, On]
ThistogglesthePercussionsectiononandoff. AMS [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoswitchthePercussion
LevelbetweenSoftandLoud.ForalistofAMS
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoturnthePercussiononor sources,seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)List
off.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate onpage 1021.
AMS Mode [Toggle, Momentary]
ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheLevelAMS.For
ThisdeterminesthebehaviorofthePercussionAMS. details,seeAMSModeonpage 222.
Fordetails,seeAMSModeonpage 222.
Loud Level [0099]
Percussion Assign [Lower, Upper]
Thissetsthevolumeofthepercussionwhen
Thisassignsthepercussiontoeitherthelowerorupper PercussionLevelissettoLoud.
drawbars.ThedefaultisUpper.Thisallowsyouto
playabasslinewithpercussion. Soft Level [0099]
IfSplitisOff,Percussionisautomaticallyassignedto Thissetsthevolumeofthepercussionwhen
theUpperdrawbars. PercussionLevelissettoSoft.
Loud Drawbar Attenuation [0099]

61b: Level Ontraditionaltonewheelorgans,settingtheLevelto
Loud(ordisablingtheSoftbutton)reducestheoverall
Level [Soft, Loud]
drawbarvolume.
ThistogglesthePercussionLevelbetweenSoftand
Toputitanotherway,settingtheLeveltoSoftmakes
Loud.Theactualvolumelevelsaredeterminedbythe
thedrawbarslouder.
LoudLevelandSoftLevelparameters,below.
227
Thisparametercontrolsthedifferenceindrawbar
volumebetweentheSoftandLoudPercussionsettings. 61d: Harmonic
Harmonic [2nd, 3rd]
61c: Decay Thisselectsthepitchofthepercussion,inharmonics
relativetothe8drawbar.
Decay [Slow, Fast]
2ndproducesthesamepitchasthe4drawbarone
ThistogglesthePercussionDecaytimebetweenSlow
octavehigherthanthe8.
andFast.Theactualdecaytimesaredeterminedbythe
FastDecayTimeandSlowDecayTimeparameters, 3rdproducesthesamepitchasthe22/3drawbarone
below. octaveandafifthhigherthanthe8.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] AMS [List of AMS Sources]

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoswitchthePercussion ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoswitchtheHarmonic
DecaytimebetweenSlowandFast.ForalistofAMS between2ndand3rd.ForalistofAMSsources,see
sources,seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)List AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
onpage 1021. page 1021.
AMS Mode [Toggle, Momentary] AMS Mode [Toggle, Momentary]

ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheDecayAMS.For ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheHarmonicAMS.
details,seeAMSModeonpage 222. Fordetails,seeAMSModeonpage 222.
Fast Decay Time [0099]

ThissetsthedecaytimewhentheDecayparameteris
settoFast. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Slow Decay Time [0099] shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
ThissetsthedecaytimewhentheDecayparameteris commandsonpage 142.
settoSlow. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
62: EX Percussion
62PMC
62a
WhentheDrawbarModeissettoEX,thePercussion Theseinclude22/3or4(dependingonthesettingof
canuseamixofuptofivedrawbarpitches,insteadof thePercussionHarmonicparameter),16,51/3,and
justone. thepitchesofthefirsttwoEXdrawbars.Youcanset
thelevelsforeachofthefivedrawbarsindependently.
228
Program P6: Percussion 62: EX Percussion
ThissectionisgrayedoutwhenDrawbarModeisset
toNormal.
62a: EX Percussion
Normal Percussion [08]
Thissetsthevolumeofthe2ndor3rdharmonic(22/3
or4drawbars),dependingonthesettingofthe
PercussionHarmonicparameter.
16 [08]
Thissetsthevolumeofthe16drawbarwithinthe
Percussionpulse.
5 1/3 [08]
Thissetsthevolumeofthe51/3drawbarwithinthe
Percussionpulse.
EX Drawbar 1 [08]
ThissetsthevolumeofEXDrawbar1withinthe
Percussionpulse.
EX Drawbar 2 [08]
ThissetsthevolumeofEXDrawbar2withinthe
Percussionpulse.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
229
Program P7: Amp, V/C, Rotary Speaker
71: Amp & V/C

71PMC
71b
71a
71c
71d
71e
71f
71a: Amp 71b: EQ

Amp Type [Type 1, Type 2, Pre Amp] Treble [-10+10]
Thisselectsthetypeofampmodel. Thisadjuststhehighfrequencyrangeoftheamp,as
Type1isastandardpoweredampfororgan, selectedbyAmpType.
producingawarm,fattone. Mid [-10+10]
Type2emphasizesthehighrangemorethanType1, Thisadjuststhemidfrequencyrangeoftheamp,as
producingalesscoloredtone. selectedbyAmpType.
PreAmpisthesoundofadirectlineoutfromthe
organ. Bass [-10+10]
Thisadjuststhelowfrequencyrangeoftheamp,as
Amp Gain [0099] selectedbyAmpType.
ThisadjuststhegainwhenAmpTypeissettoType1
orType2.
71c: Vibrato/Chorus
ExpressionalsoadjuststhedriveintotheAmpsection.
WithhigherAmpGainsettings,youllgetmore Vibrato/Chorusisatraditionalorganeffect,similarto
overdriveanddistortionasyouincreasethe butnotthesameasotherchoruseffects.Itadds
Expressionamount.Formoreinformation,see42b: varyingdegreesofLFOdrivenflutterandrichnessto
Expression,onpage 221. thetimbre,andcombinesnicelywiththerotary
speaker.
ThissettingdoesnotapplyiftheAmpTypeissetto
PreAmp. Inadditiontothesixtraditionalpresets,theCX3
allowsyoutocreateyourowncustomsettings,which
AMS [List of AMS Sources] canthenbemodulatedviaAMS.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheAmp ThereisasingleVibrato/Choruseffect,andeachsetof
Gain.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate drawbarscaneitherberoutedthroughtheeffectorgo
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. straightontotherotaryspeakerandoutputs.
Intensity [-99+99] Upper Drawbars V/C [Off, On]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS Thisroutestheupperdrawbarsthroughthe
modulationofAmpGain. Vibrato/Chorus.
230
Program P7: Amp, V/C, Rotary Speaker 71: Amp & V/C

71e: Custom
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoturnVibrato/Choruson
orofffortheUpperDrawbars. TheseparametersareavailableonlyiftheMode,
above,issettoCustom.
ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheVibrato/Chorus
Mix [0100]
AMSfortheUpperdrawbars.Fordetails,seeAMS ThisadjuststhebalancebetweentheVibratoand
Modeonpage 222. Choruseffects.0isallVibrato;100isallChorus.
Lower Drawbars V/C [Off, On] AMS [List of AMS Sources]

Thisroutesthelowerdrawbarsthroughthe ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheMix.Fora
Vibrato/Chorus. listofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoturnVibrato/Choruson
orofffortheUpperDrawbars.ForalistofAMS ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
sources,seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)List modulationforMix.
onpage 1021.
Depth [0100]
AMS Mode [Toggle, Momentary] ThissetsthedepthofVibrato/Chorusmodulation.
ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheVibrato/Chorus Highervaluesmeangreaterpitchandvolume
AMSfortheUpperdrawbars.Fordetails,seeAMS modulation.
Modeonpage 222.
Input Trim [000100] ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheDepth.For
ThiscontrolstheinputleveltotheVibrato/Chorus. alistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Itappliesonlytotheset(s)ofdrawbarsroutedthrough
theVibrato/Chorus,viatheV/COn/Offbuttonsabove. Intensity [-100+100]
Youcanusethistocompensateforvolumelevel
differencesbetweentheoutputoftheVibrato/Chorus
modulationforDepth.
andthedrysignal,sothatthevolumestaysconstant
whenyouswitchtheV/Conoroff. Speed [0.2Hz20Hz]
NotethattheoutputvolumeoftheV/Cwillvary, ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheVibrato/ChorusLFO.
dependingontheselectedPresetorthesettingsofthe
0is0.02Hz;230is20Hz;and180is7Hz.Tryaround
Customparameters.
179forthemagicC3frequency.
Mode [Preset/Custom]
WhenModeissettoPreset,theVibrato/Choruswill
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheSpeed.For
usethesettingsunderPreset,below.Thesearethe
alistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
classicV13andC13settings.
WhenModeissettoCustom,theVibrato/Chorususes
thesettingsunderCustom,below.Theseallowyouto Intensity [-20Hz0Hz+20Hz]
createyourownversionsoftheeffect. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationforSpeed.
71d: Preset
TheseparametersareavailableonlyiftheMode, 71f: Main Output
above,issettoPreset. Output Level [000127]
Type [V1, C1, V2, C2, V3, C3] Thiscontrolstheoveralloutputlevel,aftertheAmp
ThisselectsoneofthesixclassicVibrato/Chorus sectionandtheExpressioncontrols.Inotherwords,
presets.VstandsforVibrato,andCstandsfor thisaffectsonlythevolumeofthesound,andnotthe
Chorus. tonalcharacter.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] AMS [List of AMS Sources]

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheType.Fora ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheOutput
listofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource Level.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
(AMS)Listonpage 1021. ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.

modulationfortheType. modulationforOutputLevel.
231
Pan [Random, L001C064R127] Note:youcanselectRandompanonlyfromtheon

Thiscontrolsthestereopanoftheorgan.Asettingof screenUI,andnotfromMIDIortheControlsurface.
L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter, AMS [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Notethat
WhenthisissettoRandom,thePanpositionwill allnotesoftheorgansharethesamePanvalue.Fora
changeateachnoteon.NotethatallnotesoftheCX3 listofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
sharethesamePanvalue,andwillmovetogetherto (AMS)Listonpage 1021.
thenewposition.
YoucanalsosetthePandirectlyfromtheControl Intensity [99+99]
Surfaceknobs.Todoso: ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationforPan.
PAN. t 71: Page Menu Commands
3. MoveKnob1tosetthepanforEXi1,andKnob2 ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
tosetthepanforEXi2. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).A shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
CC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft, commandsonpage 142.
64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythe 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Panparameter,and127placesthesoundatthefar Programonpage 142.
right.
72: Rotary Speaker

72PMC
72a 72b
72c
72d
72e
WhentheRotarySpeakeristurnedoff,thetoneis
72a: Rotary Speaker determinedbytheRotarySpeakerOffOutput
parameter,below.
Rotary On [Off, On]
ThisenablesanddisablestheRotarySpeaker.Its AMS [List of AMS Sources]
differentfromsimplystoppingtherotation(whichyou ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoturntheRotarySpeaker
candowiththeModeparameter,below);instead,this onoroff.
islikeunpluggingtheorganfromtherotaryspeaker
entirely. AMS Mode [Momentary, Toggle]
ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheRotarySpeaker
on/offAMS.Fordetails,seeAMSModeonpage 222.
232
Program P7: Amp, V/C, Rotary Speaker 72: Rotary Speaker
Rotary Speaker Off Output [Pre-Crossover, AMS [List of AMS Sources]

Post-Crossover] ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoswitchbetweentheSlow
ThisdeterminesthesoundwhentheRotarySpeakeris andFastspeeds.
turnedOff,above.Italsodeterminesthedrysignal
intheWet/Drymix,asdescribedonpage 233. AMS Mode [Toggle, Momentary]
ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheSpeedswitch
PostCrossoveristhedefault,andmatchestheCX3.
AMS.Fordetails,seeAMSModeonpage 222.
Withthissetting,thespeakersimulatorandspeaker
crossoverwillstillbeactive,evenwhentheRotary Fast Overrides Stop [Off, On]
Speakerisdisabled.UsethisifyouliketheCX3
Whenthisisenabled,switchingtheSpeedtoFastvia
sound,andarenotsendingtheorganthrougha
AMSwillalwayspushtheRotarySpeakerintoFast
separateRotarySpeakerintheInsertEffects.
modeevenifithadpreviouslybeenstopped.
PreCrossoveryieldsatonewithouttheeffectsofthe SwitchingtheSpeedbacktoSlowwillstopitagain.
speakersimulatorandcrossovers.Usethissettingif
WhenFastOverridesStopisdisabled,ifthespeakeris
youllbesendingtheorganthroughaseparateRotary
stopped,itwillstaystoppedregardlessofSpeedAMS.
SpeakerintheInsertEffects.
Wet/Dry [Dry,1:9999:1,Wet]
72c: Horn
Thisadjuststhebalancebetweenthedrysignalcoming
intotheRotarySpeakerandtheoutputoftheeffect. TheHorncarriesthehighfrequenciesoftheRotary
Speaker.YoucanindependentlycontroltheSlowand
Thedrysignaliseithertheprecrossoverorpost Fastspeedsofthehorn,aswellasthetimeittakesto
crossoverinput,asselectedbytheRotarySpeakerOff speeduporslowdown.Youalsohaveseparatecontrol
Outputparameterdescribedonpage 233. overtheamountoftimethatthehorntakestostop
AMS [List of AMS Sources] rotatingentirely,andthetimethatittakestoresume
rotationafterbeingstopped.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheWet/Dry
mix.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate Fast Speed [000100]
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. ThisspecifiesthespeedoftheHornwhentheSpeed
Intensity [-100+100] SwitchissettoFast.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheWet/Dry Slow Speed [000100]

AMSmodulation. ThisspecifiesthespeedoftheHornwhentheSpeed
SwitchissettoSlow.
72b: Mode/Speed Acceleration [000100]
Mode ThissetshowlongittakestheHorntochangefromthe
SlowspeedtotheFastspeed.
Mode Switch [Rotate, Stop]
Deceleration [000100]
ThisletsyoustopthemotionoftheRotarySpeaker.
Evenwhenstopped,thespeakerwillstillaffectthe ThissetshowlongittakestheHorntochangefromthe
timbre. FastspeedtotheSlowspeed.
Thehornandrotorcaneachtakedifferentamountsof Start Acceleration [000100]

timetostartandstoptheirrotation.Formore ThissetshowlongittakestheHorntocomeupto
information,seetheStartAccelerationandStop speedaftertheModeSwitchhaschangedfromStopto
Decelerationparametersonpage 233. Rotate.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] Stop Deceleration [000100]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetostartandstoptheRotary Thissetshowlongittakesthehorntocometorest
Speaker. aftertheModeSwitchhaschangedfromRotateto
Stop.
AMS Mode [Momentary, Toggle]
ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheModeswitchAMS. Mic
Fordetails,seeAMSModeonpage 222.
TheRotarySpeakermodelincludestwopairsofstereo
Speed micsonepairfortheHorn,andtheotherforthe
Rotor.
Speed Switch [Fast/Slow]
Horn Mic Distance [000100]
TheRotarySpeakerhastwobasicspeeds,andthis
allowsyoutoswitchbetweenthetwo.Youcansetthe ThisadjuststhedistancebetweentheHornandits
speedsofthehornandrotorsectionsseparatelyfor microphones.Lowervaluesbringthemicsclosertothe
boththeFastandSlowsettings,aswellasthetimethat speaker.
ittakesthemtospeedupandslowdown.Formore
information,seetheHornandRotorsectionsbelow,on
page 233.
233
Horn Mic Spread [000100] Speaker Simulator [Off, On]

ThisadjuststhedistancebetweenthetwoHorn Thisenablesanddisablesmodelingofthespeaker
microphones,towidenthestereofield.Highervalues tone.NotethatiftheRotarySpeakerOffOutputisset
increasethestereoeffect. toPreCrossover,thespeakersimulationwillalsobe
leftoutofthedrysignal.
72d: Rotor Horn Stop Phase [Free, -180+180]
TherotorcarriesthelowfrequenciesoftheRotary WhentheModeSwitchissettoStop,theHorn
Speaker.Itsparametersareidenticaltothoseofthe graduallycomestorestpointingonewayoranother.
Horn,above. Thisallowsyoutocontrolwhereitwillstop.
Freeletsitcometorestnaturally,atamoreorless
Fast Speed [000100]
randomspot.Theothersettings,180to+180,letyou
ThisspecifiesthespeedoftheRotorwhentheSpeed forceittolandinaspecificposition.
SwitchissettoFast.
Thespeakerpositionhasadramaticeffectonthetone,
Slow Speed [000100] sospecifyingafixedpositionallowsyoutoachieve
consistenttimbralresults.
ThisspecifiesthespeedoftheRotorwhentheSpeed
SwitchissettoSlow. Rotor Stop Phase [Free, -180+180]
Acceleration [000100] ThisdetermineswheretheRotorwilllandwhenthe
ModeSwitchissettoStop.Formoredetails,seeHorn
ThissetshowlongittakestheRotortochangefrom
StopPhase,above.
theSlowspeedtotheFastspeed.
Deceleration [000100]
ThissetshowlongittakestheRotortochangefrom
theFastspeedtotheSlowspeed. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Start Acceleration [000100] shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
ThissetshowlongittakestheRotortocomeupto commandsonpage 142.
speedaftertheModeSwitchhaschangedfromStopto 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Rotate. Programonpage 142.
Stop Deceleration [000100] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
SpecifiesthetimeitwilltakefortheRotortoactually
cometorestafterrotationisswitchedoff.
ThissetshowlongittakestheRotortocomerestafter
theModeSwitchhaschangedfromRotatetoStop.
Mic
TheRotarySpeakermodelincludestwopairsofstereo
micsonepairfortheRotor,andtheotherforthe
Rotor.
Rotor Mic Distance [000100]

ThisadjuststhedistancebetweentheRotorandits
microphones.Lowervaluesbringthemicsclosertothe
speaker.
Rotor Mic Spread [000100]

ThisadjuststhedistancebetweenthetwoRotor
microphones,towidenthestereofield.Highervalues
increasethestereoeffect.
72e: Horn/Rotor
Horn/Rotor Balance [Rotor, 199, Horn]
Thissetstheoutputbalancebetweenthehigh
frequenciesoftheHornandthelowfrequenciesofthe
Rotor.
234
Program P9: AMS Mixer 91: AMS Mixer
Program P9: AMS Mixer

TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone, Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto
orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,
new. ifyouuseAftertouchasaninputtoaAMSMixer,you
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether, canusetheprocessedversionoftheAftertouchto
oruseoneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother. controloneAMSdestination,andtheoriginalversion
Youcanalsousethemtomodifytheresponseof tocontrolanother.
realtimecontrollers. Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS byusingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.
91: AMS Mixer

91PMC
91a
91b
GatechoosesbetweentwoAMSinputs(orfixed
91a: AMS Mixer 1 values)basedonathirdAMSsource.SeeGateon
page 95formoreinformation.
Mixer Type [A+B, Amt AxB, Offset, Smoothing,
Shape, Quantize]
Thiscontrolsthetypeofprocessingperformedby 91b: AMS Mixer 2
AMSMixer1. ThisisthesecondAMSMixer.Itsparametersare
A+BaddstwoAMSsourcestogether.Formore exactlythesameasthoseofAMSMixer1,above.
information,seeA+Bonpage 91.
AmtAxBscalestheamountofoneAMSsourcewith t 91: Page Menu Commands
Offsetaddsorsubtractsaconstantvaluetoorfroman numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
AMSsource.Formoreinformation,seeOffseton shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
page 92. commandsonpage 142.
Smoothingcreatesmoregentletransitionsbetween 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
values,smoothingoutabruptchangessuchasaquick Programonpage 142.
moveonajoystickorasharpedgeonanLFO.For
details,seeSmoothingonpage 93. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ShapeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.Foranin
depthdescription,seeShapeonpage 93.
SeeQuantizeonpage 94formoreinformation.
235
CX-3: Tone Adjust

CX3ToneAdjustDefaultSettings
V/C Type Amp Gain Expression Noise Level Leakage Level EQ Bass EQ Mid EQ Treble
Switch 7:
Switches 14: Wheel Brake
Percussion
On/Off,
Switch 8:
Fast/Slow,
Split On/Off
Loud/Soft,
2nd/3rd
Switches 56:
Switches 1416:
Vibrato/Chorus
Rotary Speaker
Lower On/Off,
On/Off,
Upper On/Off
Rotate/Stop,
Slow/Fast
Upper Drawbars 19
ToneAdjustprovidesanelegantphysicalinterfaceto Percussion
theCX3sparameters.Mostofthefactorysoundsuse PercussionOn/Off
thedefaultlayout,asshownabove.
LevelSoft/Loud
Youcanalsocustomizethelayoutforindividual
sounds,ifdesired.Forinstance,mostofthefactory DecaySlow/Fast
soundsusetheslidersfortheupperdrawbars;ifyou Harmonic2nd/3rd
like,youcanreassignthemtothelowerdrawbars
EXPercussionlevels15
instead.
FormoreinformationaboutToneAdjust,pleasesee Vibrato/Chorus
09f:ToneAdjust,onpage 26. Vibrato/ChorusType
CX-3 Tone Adjust parameters UpperDrawbarsV/COn/Off

LowerDrawbarsV/COn/Off
TheCX3issubstantiallydifferentfromotherEXi
instruments,soitdoesnotsupporttheCommonTone Expression
Adjustparameters.Instead,itaddsanumberofits
ExpressionLevel
own,uniqueparameters,asdescribedbelow.
Alloftheseparameterareabsolute,whichmeansthat Amp
theyoverwritethestoredparametervalues. AmpGain
NotethatthesecontrolsareseparateforeachEXi,as EQBass
opposedtobeingsharedbybothEXiintheProgram.
EQMid
Drawbars EQTreble
UpperDrawbars19
Split
LowerDrawbars19
SplitOn/Off
UpperEXDrawbars14
Rotary Speaker
LowerEXDrawbars14
On/Off
Noiselevel
Rotate/Stop
Leakagelevel
Slow/Fast
WheelBrake
OvertoneLevel
KeyOnClickLevel
236
Changes from the original CX-3 91: AMS Mixer
Changes from the original CX-3

WiththeOASYSCX3,Korghastakentheoriginal, Rotary Speaker Horn speeds improved
groundbreakingCX3modelandmadeitevenbetter. ThemaximumspeedoftheHornhasbeenincreasedto
IfyoudliketoconvertsoundsfromtheoriginalCX3, abouttwicethatoftheCX3;theminimumspeedis
thefollowingnotesdescribethesechangesindetail. stillthesame.ToconvertsettingsfromtheCX3,use
Noise Level range improved thefollowingformula:
TheNoiseLevelparameternowoffersmorefine CX3speed=(CX3speedx0.48484848)+52
controloverthemostusefulrangeofvalues.When Inotherwords,theCX3valuerangeof099is
convertingCX3voicing,multiplytheCX3Noise equivalenttotheCX3rangeof52100,withthenew
Levelby10. 051allbeingfasterthantheoriginalCX3.
EX Mode enhanced Rotary Speaker Acceleration and Deceleration
OntheoriginalCX3,therewerefourglobalsettings TheRotarySpeakerAcceleration/Deceleration
fortheEXModedrawbarfrequencies.TheOASYSCX parameterswerenamedTransitontheCX3.Their
3offersfourglobalpresets,whichmatchthefactory rangesarealsoreversedfromtheCX3,inordertobe
defaultsoftheoriginalCX3,andthenalsoallowsyou consistentwiththerestoftheOASYSsystem:0=slow,
tosetdifferentfrequenciesforeachProgramifdesired. and100=fast.
TherangeoftheEXdrawbarpitcheshasalsobeen
Rotary Speaker Stop Phase added
extendedtogoallthewaydownto16,insemitone
steps. YoucannowsetthephaseatwhichtheHornand
RotorwillsettlewhentheRotarySpeakerstops.
Finally,theCX3supportskeyboardsplitswithfullEX
drawbarsonbothupperandlowersidesofthesplit.
Split Transpose increased

Youcannowtransposebothsidesofthesplitupor
downbyuptotwooctaves,formoreflexiblezoningon
76and88keyinstruments.
Expression parameters per-Program

Theexpressionrelatedparameterscanbeset
separatelyforeachProgram.
Percussion for either lower or upper drawbars

Thepercussioncanbeassignedtoeithertheloweror
upperdrawbars,insteadofjusttheupperdrawbars.
Thisallowsyoutoplayabasslinewithpercussion,as
inELPsTarkus.
Percussion parameters changed to absolute values

Insteadofrelativeoffsets,youcandirectlysetthe
valuesforPercussionSlowandFastDecay,and
PercussionLoudandSoft.
Vibrato Chorus custom mode added

Inadditiontothesixtraditionalpresets,youcancreate
yourowncustomsettings,whichcanthenbe
modulatedviaAMS.
Rotary Speaker Mic Modeling

ForconsistencywiththerestoftheOASYS,thevalue
rangesofthemicmodelingparametershavebeen
changedslightly.OntheCX3,theyare099;intheCX
3,theyare0100.
Additionally,theparameterrangesoftheHornand
RotorMicDistanceparametersarereversed.To
converttheseparametersfromtheCX3,subtractthe
CX3valuefrom100:
CX3MicDistance=100(CX3Micdistance)
237
CX-3: Page Menu Commands
Copy Drawbars
ThiscopiesdrawbarorEXdrawbarsettingswithinthe
CX3oscillator.
1. SelectCopyDrawbarstoaccessthedialogbox.
2. UsetheFromfieldtospecifythecopysource
drawbars.
3. UsetheTofieldtospecifythecopydestination
drawbars.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyDrawbars
operation.Ifyoudecidetocancel,presstheCancel
button.
Swap Drawbars
ThisexchangesdrawbarorEXdrawbarsettingswithin
theCX3oscillator.
1. SelectSwapDrawbarstoaccessthedialogbox.
2. UsetheSource1andSource2fieldstospecify
thetwosetsofdrawbarsyouwanttoexchange.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSwap
Drawbarsoperation.Ifyoudecidetocancel,press
theCancelbutton.
238
EXi: STR-1 Plucked String
STR-1 Overview
TheSTR1PluckedStringoffersacomprehensiveand Dualmultimoderesonantfilters(includingKorgs
sophisticatedsetofphysicalmodelingsynthesistools, MultiFilter,asfirstintroducedintheAL1),plusan
capableofcreatingbothtraditionalsounds(acoustic additionalmultimoderesonantfilterdedicatedto
andelectricguitarsandbasses,clavinetsand thestringexcitation
harpsichords,harps,bells,electricpianos,ethnic Liveaudioinput,includingmodeledfeedback
instruments,etc.)andunique,experimentaltimbres.
Upto48voicepolyphony
Someofthefeaturehilightsinclude:
FourpervoiceLFOs,fiveretriggerableEGs,two
Physicallymodeledstring,includingdamping, keytrackinggenerators,astringtrackinggenerator,
decay,dispersion,nonlinearity,andharmonics andfourAMSmixers
Stringexcitationviaaselectionofplucktypes,a AccesstoallstandardEXiProgramfeatures,
noisegeneratorwithsaturationanddedicatedfilter, includingtheCommonLFO,CommonStep
andanymonoROM,EXs,orRAMsamples(using Sequencer,KeyTrack1&2,KARMA,EQ,and
KorgsultralowaliasingPCMoscillator,asfirst effectsaswellaslayeringwithanyotherEXi
introducedintheHD1) (includingusingtwoSTR1stogether!)
STR-1 Overview
String Fret AMS

LFO1-4 EG1-4
LFO1 LFO1 TrackLFO1
1-2 Position Mixer 1-4
LFO1
LFO1 LFO1 LFO1
LFO1 LFO1 LFO1
PCM
Pickup 1
Pluck
Pickup 2
Mixer
Excitation
Noise + Filter +
String
Feedback Damping & Disp.

String Track
Main Filter Amp EQ

Legend
Audio,
Audio, per-voice
per-Program
Filter Key Amp Key
Track Track
Audio
Modulation
Modulation
239
STR-1 uses EXi fixed resources

TheSTR1usesEXifixedresourcesforitsmodeled
feedback.Thisusesupasmallamountofprocessing
power,evenifyourenotplayinganynotes.
Becauseofthis,youcanuseonlysixteenSTR1s
simultaneouslyinaCombinationorSong.IfotherEXis
withfixedresourcesareinuse,themaximumnumber
ofSTR1swillbereducedaccordingly.EachEXiineach
Programcountstowardsthemaximum;forinstance,a
ProgramwithtwoSTR1scountsastwo,notasone.
Formoreinformation,seeCX3&STR1:Limitations
onEXifixedresourcesonpage 382.

TheSTR1supportsalloftheEXiCommon
parameters,exceptfortwoofthevoiceallocation
options:PolyLegatoandMonoMode(Normal/Use
LegatoOffset).
Alloftheothervoiceallocationoptionsarefully
supported,includingMono,MonoLegato,Unison,etc.
240
01: Main
01b
Excitation
Pluck
Excitation
PCM Oscilltor
Excitation
(Mixer)
Key Zone
String (Main)
String (Damping / Dispersion)
ThisisthemainpageofProgrammode.Forafull Red:ROMMultisamples
descriptionofthispageandallofitsfunctions,please Green:RAMMultisamples
seeEXiProgramP0:Playonpage 159.Thissection
describesonlytheoverviewdisplay,whichdiffersfor Grey:Off
eachindividualEXi. Touchthisareatojumptothe42PCMOscillator
page.
01b: Overview and Page Jump Excitation (Mixer)
Thispartofthepageshowsanoverviewofthemost ThisshowstheexcitationLevelforthePluck,andthe
importantsettingsfortheProgramstwoEXi AMS1IntensitiesfortheNoiseGeneratorandPCM
instruments.Thespecificparameterswillvary, Oscillator(sincetheselevelswilloftenbecontrolled
dependingonwhichEXiarebeingused.Thespecific completelyviaAMS).
parametersfortheSTR1aredescribedbelow. Touchthisareatojumptothe44ExcitationMixer
Thegraphicsgiveyouaquickwaytocheckallofthese page.
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe String
sections,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits
parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilterEG String Main
graphic,youllgototheFilterEGpage. ThisshowstheExcitationPositionandDecaysettings
forthestring.
Tip:PressingEXITseveraltimeswillalwaysbringyou
backtothispage. Touchthisareatojumptothe45StringMainpage.
Excitation Damping and Dispersion

ThisshowstheDampingandDispersionsettingsfor
Pluck thestring.
ThisareashowstheselectedPluckTypeandWidth. Touchthisareatojumptothe46Dampingand
Touchthisareatojumptothe41PluckandNoise Dispersionpage.
page.
Output
PCM Oscillator
ThisareashowsthefourMultisamplesselectedforthe Filter
PCMOscillator.Colorsareusedtodistinguish Thisshowsagraphicrepresentationofthefilter
betweenthevariouspossibilities,asdetailedbelow. frequencyresponse,includingcutoffandresonance.
241
Pressthisareatojumptothe51FilterBasicpage.
Amp
ThisshowstheAmpsectionsPanandAmpLevel
values.
Pressthisareatojumptothe61Amppage.
EGs and LFOs

EG 14, Amp EG Graphics
TheseshowtheshapesofthefiveEGs.Touchanyof
themtojumpdirectlytothecorrespondingeditpage.
LFO 1, 2, 3, 4 Graphic
Theseshowthewaveformsandshapesofthefour
LFOs.Touchanyofthemtojumpdirectlytothe
Key Zone
Key Zone
ThisshowsthekeyzonesforEXi1andEXi2,asseton
theCommonsectionsProgramBasicpage,inrelation
totheentireMIDInoterange.Therangeofthe76note
Common
EXiarebeingused.

eitherPOLYorMONO.

Sequencer.
page.
Common LFO Graphic

3 Band EQ Graphic
IFX, MFX/TFX
page.
KARMA GE Name
page.
242
Program P4: String 4-1: Pluck and Noise
Program P4: String
4-1: Pluck and Noise

41PMC
41a 41b
ResonantPulse.ThisissimilartoSmoothPulse,but
4-1a: Pluck brighterandmoreresonant.
Type [Ac Guitar 1Harpsichord] DarkClav,MidrangeClav,BrightClav.Theseoffer
variationsonclavinetsounds.
Thisselectionmodelsdifferenttypesofplucking
actions,includingpicksandfingerplucking.Thepluck Harpsichord.Thistypeincludessmallamountofnoise
typesetsthebasictoneofthepluckedstring. beforethemainpluck.
YoucanalsopluckthestringusingtheNoise Randomization [0100]
Generator,aswellasPCMsamples.Youcaneven
Thisaddsasmallamountofvariationtoeachstrikeof
combineallthreetypesofexcitationtogether,tocreate
thepluck,byaddinginasmallamountoftheNoise
specifictones.
Generatorsoutput.Thetoneoftherandomizationis
AcGuitar1.Thistypeisalittleunusual,inthatit affectedbytheUseSaturation&Filterparameter,
includesthepluckpositionintheplucksounditself. below.
Becauseofthis,itsprobablybesttosettheExcitation
PositionToneto0,sothattheExcitationPositionitself Use Saturation & Filter [Off, On]
hasnoeffect.(Formoreinformation,seeToneon ThiscontrolswhetherornotRandomization,above,is
page 253.) affectedbytheNoiseGeneratorsSaturationandFilter
AcGuitar2.ThisissimilartoA.Guitar1,butdoesnot Frequencyparameters.
includethepluckpositioninthesound.Aswith TousesimplewhitenoisefortheRandomization,
mostoftheothertypes,itwillgenerallyworkbetter whichwillgenerallyyieldthebrightestplucktimbre,
withExcitationPositionTonesetto100. turnthisOff(unchecked).
DarkE.Guitar,BrightE.Guitar,ResonantE.Guitar,
DarkJazzGuitar,BrightJazzGuitar,BrighterJazz
Guitar.WithalloftheE.GuitarandJazzGuitarpluck Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthe
types,settheExcitationPositionbetween5and35. Randomization.ForalistofAMSsources,see
SquarePluck.Withrandomizationturnedup,this
page 1021.
soundslikebrightclavorharpsichord.
MidrangePluck.ThisissimilartoSquarePluck,but Intensity [100+100]
withmoremidrangeharmonics. Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthe
SmoothPulse.Thishasveryfewharmonics,fora RandomizationAMSmodulation.
mellowandfulltone.
243
Delay (milliseconds) [0...250] thattheybecomeshorterasyouplayhigheronthe

YoucandelaythePluckbyupto250msaftertheinitial keyboard.
noteon.Thisletsyoucreatedoublestrikeeffectsand TrysettingtheExcitationPositionToneto100.
complexattacks.Forinstance,tryusinganenvelope Inthemainmixer,usethepickupsinsteadofthe
withaslowattacktimetocontrolthevolumeorfilter directstringoutput.
cutoffofthePCMOscillatororNoiseGenerator,and
thencombiningthiswithadelayedPluck. SettheExcitationFilterTypetoHighpass,and
trackitscutofffrequencywithNoteNumber.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] SetthemainFilterTypetoHighpass,andtrackits
ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheDelay. cutofffrequencywithNoteNumber.Ifyouare
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation usingFilterAasalowpassfilter,settheRoutingto
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. SerialandthenmakeFilterBthehighpassfilter.
Intensity [250+250]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheDelay 4-1b: Noise Generator
AMSmodulation. ThenoisegeneratorincludesSaturation,forcreating
uniqueandchaoticnoiseeffects,andadedicated1
Width [-100.0+100.0]
polefiltertocontrolnoisecolor.
Thismodelsthetimethatthepickisincontactwiththe
string,whichisacombinationofthesizeandthickness Forstandardwhitenoise,settheSaturationto0,and
ofthepick,andthespeedatwhichthepickismoving. theFilterFrequencyto99.
Thewidthadjuststhetoneoftheinitialstring Forcolorednoise(suchaspinknoise),setthe
excitation;lowsettingsemphasizelowerfrequencies, Saturationto0,andreducetheFilterFrequencyas
andhighsettingsemphasizehighfrequencies. desired.
Toputitanotherway,100.0isverywide,and+100.0 Tocreatespecklednoisesuchasrocketsoundsand
isverynarrow. thunder,setSaturationto99,andFilterFrequencyto
10.
Lowornegativewidthsettingsmaycausethumpiness
atthehighendofthekeyboard,butthiscanbesolved Tocreatekeycontactnoise(suchasyoumightfindon
usinganumberofdifferenttechniques.Formore vintageanalogsynths),createspecklednoiseas
information,seeTipsforavoidingthumpy describedabove,andthenuseafastEGtocontrolits
excitation,below. volumeinthemixer.
AMS 1 [List of AMS Sources] Saturation [0100]

Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolthe Thiscontrolclipsthenoisesignal,foraddedcrunch.
Width.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate Subtlevariationsinsaturationaremorenoticeable
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. withverylowFilterFrequencysettings(seebelow),
allowingyoutocreateorganic,rumblingtimbres.
Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
Filter Frequency [0100]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheWidth
AMSmodulation. Thisisasimple,1polelowpassfilterforcontrolling
thecolorofthenoise.
Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourcetocontrol
theWidth.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. noisegeneratorsFilterFrequency.ForalistofAMS
sources,seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)List
Intensity [-100.0+100.0] onpage 1021.
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthesecond Intensity [-100+100]
WidthAMSmodulation.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheFilter
Tips for avoiding thumpy excitation FrequencyAMSmodulation.
Toavoidlowendthumpsatthetopendofthe
keyboard: t 41: Page Menu Commands
Makesurethedurationoftheexcitationinputis ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
aboutthesameasoneperiodofthewaveform.To numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
dothiswhenusingthePluckastheexcitation, shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
youllprobablyneedtousenotenumberorKey commandsonpage 142.
TrackingtoscalethePluckWidthsothatitgets
morenarrow(highervalues)asyouplayhigheron 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
thekeyboard. Programonpage 142.
Similarly,whenusingthePCMoscillatorornoise 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
generatorastheexcitation,useanEGtocontrolthe ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
levelattheExcitationmixer(orthecutoffofthe
ExcitationFilter),andthenscaletheEGtimesso
244
Program P4: String 4-2: PCM Oscillator
4-2: PCM Oscillator

42PMC
42a
Using the string as a comb filter for PCM

Using PCM in the STR-1
YoucanusethestringasacombfilterforthePCM
Using PCM samples to pluck the string Oscillator.Todoso:
InadditiontothePluckandtheNoiseGenerator,you 1. FollowthestepsunderCreatinganinitialized
canalsopluckthestringwithPCMsamples.In STR1Programonpage 246.
general,thiswillworkbestifyouuseafastenvelopeto 2. PresstheEXi1tab,togettotheSTR1parameters.
controlthelevelofthePCMintheExcitationMixer,so
3. OnthePCMOscillatorpage(P42),setMS1touse
thatitbecomesjustashortattacktransient.
Multisample0433POWERSAW.
Forinstance: YoucanusethistechniquewithanyMultisample,but
1. FollowthestepsunderCreatinganinitialized asawtoothwaveformwillmaketheeffectparticularly
STR1Programonpage 246. clear.
2. PresstheEXi1tab,togettotheSTR1parameters. 4. OntheExcitationMixerpage(44),setthePluck
3. GototheExcitationMixerpage(P44). Levelto0,andthePCMLevelto25.
4. SetboththePluckandPCMLevelsto0. 5. OntheEG2(Pitch)page(P72),settheAttack
Timeto50,andtheDecayTimeto70.
5. SetthePCMLevelAMS1sourcetoEG3,andthe
AMS1Intensityto50. 6. SettheBreakandSustainLevelsto+25.
6. GototheEG3page(P73). 7. SettheAttackandDecayCurvesto+5.
7. SettheStartandSustainLevelsto0,andthe 8. OntheStringPitchpage(P47),intheEGsection,
AttackandBreakLevelsto99. settheIntensityto+36.00.
8. Asafirstpass,settheAttackTimeto0,theDecay EG2(Pitch)isalreadyselected,bydefault.Inthis
Timeto10,andtheSlopeTimeto2. setup,thestringspitchcontrolsthefrequencyofthe
combfilter.
Withthesesettings,theAttackTimecontrolshowfast
theEGattacks,theDecayTimesetstheduration,and 9. Playanoteinthelowerpartofthekeyboard.
theSlopeTimecontrolsthedecay. NoticehowtheProgrammakesasweepingsound,
9. UseKeyTrackorNoteNumbertomodulatethe withsomeresemblancetooscillatorsync.Thatsthe
DecaytimeviaAMS,sothatitisshorterforhigher soundofthecombfilter.
notes,andlongerforlowernotes. 10.ExperimentwiththeStringsDecayparameter.
IfyouuseloopedPCMastheexcitation,withoutEG Decaycontrolstheresonanceofthecombfilter.
controloftheamplitude,itwilltendtosoundlike
11.ExperimentwiththeDampingandDispersion
bowing.Inthiscase,usingabitofconstantHarmonic
parameters.
Pressurecanproduceagoodeffect;amongother
things,thisremovessomeenergyfromthestring.
245
Thesecanchangethecharacterofthecombfilterin Multisample Select [List]

interestingways. ThisparameterletsyouselectaMultisampleforthe
Layering PCM with modeled string timbres velocityzone.YoucanuseanymonoMultisample,or
theleftorrightchannelofastereoMultisample.
YoucanalsosimplylayerPCMsampleswithstring
timbres.Todoso,settheFilterRoutingtoParallel, SomeMultisamplesmayhaveanupperlimitto
andthenusetheMixerpagetoroutethePCM theirkeyboardrange,overwhichtheymaynot
OscillatortoFilterA,andtheStringtoFilterB(orvice produceanysound.
versa).Formoreinformation,see51a:Routingon
Multisample Select menu
page 265,and49:Mixeronpage 263.
ToselectaMultisample:
Creating an initialized STR-1 Program 1. PresstheMultisampleSelectpopupbuttonto
Fortheexamplesabove,itcanbeusefultostartwith opentheMultisampleselectmenu.
thedefaultSTR1settings.Todoso: 2. Usethetabstoselectacategoryandsubcategory.
1. InProgrammode,selectUSERF000,FelixsDaKat. 3. SelectaMultisamplefromwithinthat
2. PresstheCommontab,andthentheBasic/Vector category/subcategory.
tab,togototheBasic/Vectorpage(P44). 4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,or
3. UnderEXiInstrumentType,selectSTR1Plucked presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutmakinga
String. change.
Now,youhaveaninitializedSTR1Program. ThelistshowsallofthemonoMultisamplesinthe
Bank.IftheBankcontainsstereomultisamples,youll
alsoseetheleftandrightchannelsasseparate,mono
42a: Multisamples multisamples,withLandRappendedtotheendof
ThissectionselectstheMultisamplestobeusedforthe thename.
stringexcitation.
Reverse [Off, On]
Velocity splits Thisletsyouplaytheselectedmultisamplebackwards,
Asmentionedabove,eachOscillatorhasfourvelocity withoutlooping.
zones,namedMS1(High)throughMS4(Low).Eachof Note:IftheindividualsampleswithinaMultisample
thesezonescanplayadifferentMultisample,andhas arealreadysettoReverse,theywillstillplayin
separatesettingsforLevel,StartOffset,andsoon. reverse,regardlessofthissetting.
Notethat,unliketheHD1,crossfadesandlayersare On(checked):TheMultisamplewillplaybackin
notsupported. reverse.
MS1 (High) Off(unchecked):TheMultisamplewillplayback

normally.
Thesearethesettingsforthefirstandhighestvelocity
zone. Level [0127]
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupwithonlyasingle Thissetsthebasicvolumelevelofthemultisample.
Multisample,justsetupMS1asdesired,andthenset Usethistoadjustthebalancebetweenthefourvelocity
theBottomVelocityto1. zones.
TheExcitationMixer,mainMixer,andAmpsections
Type [Off, Multisample]
canmodifythisbasiclevelextensivelywithenvelopes,
ThisselectswhetherMS1willplayaMultisample,or LFOs,keyboardtracking,andothermodulation;for
nothingatall.Youcanusethistodisableanyofthe moreinformation,see44:ExcitationMixer,on
fourMultisamples. page 250,49:Mixer,onpage 263,and61:Amp,
onpage 273.
Bank [ROM MonoEXs Mono]
Dependingonthemultisample,highLevelsettings
TherearethreemaintypesofBanks:ROM,RAM,and
maycausedistortionwhenplayingmanynotesata
EXs.
time.Ifthisoccurs,lowertheLevel.
ROMMultisamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds,
WithRAMMultisamples,eachSamplealsohasa
andarealwaysavailable.
+12dBoption.Ifthisisturnedon,theSamplewill
RAMMultisamplesincludeAkai,AIFForWAVfiles playbackapproximately12dBlouder.Youcan
loadedfromdisk,andsamplescreatedinSampling configurethisparameterforeachSampleinSampling
mode. mode.
Start Offset [Off, 1st8th]
uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthe
EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoexpansionisEXs2. beginning,ROMandEXsMultisamplescanhaveupto
OnlythecurrentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearon 8differentpreprogrammedalternatestartingpoints.
thismenu. Similarly,RAMMultisamplescanplayeitherfromthe
NotethatunliketheHD1,youcanonlyselectmono beginningofthewaveform,orfromtheloopstart
Multisamples. point.
246
Program P4: String 4-3: PCM Oscillator Pitch
Start Offsets: ROM and EXs Multisamples (Low)

WithROMandEXsMultisamples,theStartOffset Thesearethesettingsforthesecond,third,andfourth
specifieswhethertousethenormalstartpoint(Off),or velocityzones.TheparametersforMS2andMS3are
touseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st8th). exactlythesameasthoseforMS1(High),above.
SomeROMandEXsMultisamplesmayhavefewer TheparametersforMS4arealsosimilartothosefor
than8preprogrammedpoints,inwhichcaseonlythe MS1,exceptthatMS4hasnosettingforBottom
availablepointscanbeselected. Velocity(whichisalwaysfixedat1).
WithRAMMultisamples,onlyOffand1stare t 42: Page Menu Commands
theloopstartinstead.2ndthrough8thwillbegrayed
out.
Bottom Velocity [1127] commandsonpage 142.
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheMultisample 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
orwillsound.MS1sBottomVelocitycanbeequalto, Programonpage 142.
butnotlowerthan,thanthatofMS2. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
MS2 (Mid Hi), MS3 (Mid Lo), and MS4
4-3: PCM Oscillator Pitch

42PMC
43a
43b 43c
43d
43e
ThissectioncontrolsthepitchmodulationforthePCM
oscillator. 4-3a: Main
Important:whenusingthePCMOscillatorasan Octave [2[32], 1[16], +0[8], +1[4]]
excitationforthestring,thepitchofthePCMwill
ThissetsthebasicpitchofthePCMOscillator,in
affectthetimbreofthestring,andnotthepitchofthe
octaves.Thedefaultis+0[8].
overallsound.
Ontheotherhand,whenthestringisusedasa Transpose [12+12]
resonatororcombfilter(bysettingthestringsDecay Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1
andDampingtomoderatevalues),thePCMOscillator octave.
willcontroltheoverallpitchofthesound.
Tune [1200+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1
octave.Acentis1/100ofasemitone.
247
Frequency Offset [10.0Hz +10.0Hz] Fingered [Off, On]

Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1Hz. ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamento
FrequencyOffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,when throughyourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playing
usedtodetunethetwooscillators,itcancreatea legatowillturnonPortamento,andplayingdetached
constantbeatfrequencyacrosstherangeofthe willturnitoffagain.
keyboard. ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnable
Pitch Slope [-1.00+0.00+2.00] isturnedon.
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.00. On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento.
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplay Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.
higheronthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescause
thepitchtofallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
ConstantRatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthe thesameamountoftimetoglideagivendistancein
keyboardwontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasif pitchforinstance,onesecondperoctave.Putanother
yourealwaysplayingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecial way,glidingseveraloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthan
effectssounds,forinstance. glidingahalfstep.
Ifyouwanttocreatemorecomplexeffects,youcanuse ConstantTimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake
oneoftheKeyTrackgeneratorsasasourceforPitch thesameamountoftimetoglidefromonenoteto
ModulationAMS. another,regardlessofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisis
Ribbon [-60+60 semitones] especiallyusefulwhenplayingchords,sinceitensures
thateachnoteinthechordwillenditsglideatthe
Youcanusetheribboncontrollerforpitchbend.This sametime.
parameterspecifies,insemitones,theribbonspitch
bendrange. Time [000...127]
Positive(+)valuesmakethepitchrisewhenyoupress Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean
theribboncontrollertotherightofcenter,and longertimes,forslowerchangesinpitch.WhenTime
negative()valueswillcausethepitchtofall. issetto0,thepitchwillbereachedinstantlyjustasif
Whenyouliftoffoftheribbon,thepitchwillsnapback PortamentoEnablewasturnedOff.
tothecenter(unlessyoureusingtheSW1/2Ribbon AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Lockfeature).So,bytappingontherightedgeofthe
ribbonandthenreleasingquickly,youcancreate ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontrolthePortamento
guitarstylehammeroneffects. Time.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
JS+X [-60+60 semitones] Themodulationoccursonlyatnoteon.Thismeans
Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in thatyoucanchangethetimeforthenextpitchglide,
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheright.For butyoucantchangeanyglideswhicharealreadyin
normalpitchbend,setthistoapositivevalue. progress.
JS-X [-60+60 semitones] Intensity [-127+127]

Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthe
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheleft.For PortamentoTimeAMSmodulation.
4-3c: LFO
4-3b: Portamento
LFO Select [LFO 1, LFO 2, LFO 3, LFO 4,
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetween Common LFO]
notes,insteadofchangingabruptly.
ThisselectsanLFOtomodulatethePCMOscillators
Portamento and MIDI pitch.
IfPortamentoiseitherenabledforboththeStringand TheLFOIntensity,JS+YIntensity,andAMSareall
thePCM,oroffforboth,thenMIDICCs5(Portamento summedtogethertoproducethefinalamountofLFO
Time)and65(Portamentoon/off)affectboththeString pitchmodulation.
andthePCM.
LFO Intensity [48.00+48.00]
IfPortamentoisenabledforonlyoneofthetwo,only
thatelementcanbeaffectedbytheMIDICCs.The ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch,
otherelementwillalwayshavePortamentooff, insemitones,beforeanyJS+YorAMSmodulation.
regardlessoftheMIDICCs. Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
Enable [Off, On] BoththeStringandPCMPitchLFOIntensitiesare

scaledbyMIDICC#77.
defaultstate.
248
Program P4: String 4-3: PCM Oscillator Pitch
JS+Y Intensity [48.00+48.00] Intensity [-48.00+48.00]

Movingthejoystickupfromthecenterdetent ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEG
position,awayfromyourself,producestheJS+Y AMSmodulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitial
controller.Youcanusethistoscaletheamountofthe IntensityareaddedtogethertodeterminethePitch
LFOappliedtothepitch.Thisparametersetsthe EGsfinaleffect.
maximumamountofLFOmodulationaddedbyJS+Y,
insemitones.
4-3e: Pitch Modulation
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe
+YdirectionwillcausetheLFOtoproducedeeper AMS 1 [List of AMS Sources]
pitchmodulation. Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrolling
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO. thePCMOscillatorspitch.ForalistofAMSsources,
Youcanalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountofthe seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
LFO,assetbyLFO1Intensity,above. page 1021.
AMS [AMS Sources] Intensity [+/-48.00 semitones]

ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS1
amountoftheLFOappliedtopitch. pitchmodulation,insemitones.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Intensity [48.00+48.00] AMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFOAMS Intensity [+/-48.00 semitones]
4-3d: Pitch EG themainAMS1Intensitytoproducethefinalpitch
modulationamount.
EG 3, EG 4, Amp EG] AMS 2 [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanEGtomodulatethePCMOscillator Thisselectsasecondmodulationsourceforcontrolling
pitch. thePCMOscillatorspitch.ForalistofAMSsources,
page 1021.
tocontrolawidevarietyofparameters. Intensity [+/-48.00 semitones]
Inthemidstofallthisflexibility,wethoughtitwould ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS2
alsobegoodtoprovidealittlestructure.Withthisin pitchmodulation,insemitones.
EG2(Pitch). Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Pleasetakethesenamesassuggestions,ratherthan YoucanmodulateAMS2sIntensityfromanother
restrictions.Ifyoulike,yourefreetousetheseEGsto AMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.
controlanyEGorAMSdestination,ortouseotherEGs
Intensity [-48.00+48.00] ModAMS,insemitones.Theresultissummedwith
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGonthe themainAMS2Intensitytoproducethefinalpitch
PCMOscillator,inhalfsteps,beforeanyAMS modulationamount.
modulation.
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to t 43: Page Menu Commands
99.WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,
negativevalueslowerthepitch.
WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,the commandsonpage 142.
effectoftheEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmean
Programonpage 142.
pitches.
AMS [AMS Sources] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
amountofthePitchEGappliedtothePCMOscillator.
249
4-4: Excitation Mixer

44PMC
44a 44b
44c 44d
AMS 2 [AMS Sources]

4-4a: PCM Oscillator
Thisselectsasecondmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Level [0100] PCMOscillatorLevel.ForalistofAMSsources,see
ThiscontrolsthePCMOscillatorsinputleveltothe
page 1021.
String.
Phase Invert [Off, On] Intensity [-100+100]

ThisinvertsthephaseofthePCMOscillatorsinputto
theString.Ifyouusetwoinputs,andonehasan
invertedphase,itsasiftheywerepushingthestringin 4-4b: Pluck
oppositedirections.
TheseparameterscontrolthePluckTablesinputlevel
Use excitation filter [Off, On] totheString.TheyareidenticaltothoseforthePCM
Thischeckboxsetswhetherornotthesignalgoes Oscillator;formoreinformation,see44a:PCM
throughtheExcitationFilter,whichcontrolsthetoneof Oscillatoronpage 250.
thesignalgoingintothestring.
AMS 1 [List of AMS Sources] 4-4c: Noise Generator

Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolthe TheseparameterscontroltheNoiseGeneratorsinput
PCMOscillatorLevel.ForalistofAMSsources,see leveltotheString.Theyareidenticaltothoseforthe
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston PCMOscillator;formoreinformation,see44a:PCM
page 1021. Oscillatoronpage 250.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthePCM
4-4d: Excitation Filter
OscillatorLevelAMSmodulation. Thisisa2pole,resonantmultimodefilter,fortailoring
theexcitationtothestring.
Note:MIDICCs74(Cutoff)and71(Resonance)donot
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheintensityof affectthisfilter.
AMS1.
Filter Type [Low Pass, High Pass,
Band Pass, Band Reject]
ModAMS.
dependingontheselectedfiltertype.
250
Program P4: String 4-4: Excitation Mixer
LowPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich Trim [00100]

arehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe Thisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtothefilter.If
mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright younoticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywith
timbressounddarker. highResonancesettings,youcanturntheleveldown
HighPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich here.
arelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto Notethatthefilterwillnotclipinternally.
maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.
BandPass.Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both Frequency [00100]
highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,in
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow incrementsof1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectof
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically thecutofffrequencywillchangedependingonthe
dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators selectedFilterType,asdescribedabove.
multisample.
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand
Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrolling
sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate theFrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
buzzyornasaltimbres. ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
BandReject.Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotchfilter Intensity [-100+100]

cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS1
cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan Frequencymodulation.
FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Low Pass ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
ModAMS.TheresultissummedwiththemainAMS1
IntensitytoproducethefinalFrequencymodulation
amount.

High Pass theFrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Frequencymodulation.
Band Pass Resonance [00100]
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe
cutofffrequency.
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and
smoothly.
Band Reject
extreme.
Cutoff Frequency separate,whistlingpitch.
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,see
Bypass [Off, On] KeyFollow,onpage 270.
Thisletsyoubypassthefiltercompletely. AMS [AMS Sources]
IfBypassisOff,thefilterfunctionsnormally. Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthe
WhenBypassisOn,thefilterhasnoeffectonthe Resonanceamount.ForalistofAMSsources,see
excitationsignal. AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
page 1021.
modulation.
251
commandsonpage 142.
4-5: String Main

45PMC
45a 45c
45b
45d
ExcitationPosition
4-5a: Excitation
TheExcitationistheforcethatmakesthestringstartto Position = 0.0 Position = 100.0
vibrate.Foraphysicalstring,thismightbeaguitar
pick,afingernail,ahammeronaclavinet,aplectrum
onaharpsichord,andsoon.
Position [0100.0]
Thismodelsthepositionoftheexcitation(suchasthe
pluck)alongthestring,whichhasastrongeffectonthe
timbre.
Important:theToneparameter,below,mustbenon
zeroinorderforPositiontohaveanyeffect. How Position affects the timbre
DependinguponthePosition,someovertoneswillbe
0.0isoneendofthestring,atthebridge;100.0isthe
emphasized,andothersdeemphasized.Atspecific
otherendofthestring,atthenut(justbeforethe
positions,certainovertoneswilldisappearcompletely,
headstock).Usually,valuesbetween8.0and25.0
asdetailedbelow.
shouldworkwell.
YoucanalsothinkofthePositionasafractionofthe
50.0isthemiddleofthestring.Thetimbresofdifferent
totalstringlength.Forinstance,50.0meansthatthe
valuesareapproximatelysymmetricaroundthis
excitationishalfwayalongthestring;33.3meansthat
position,exceptforveryneartheendsofthestring.In
excitationis1/3ofthewayalongthestring;25.0is1/4
otherwords,60.0producesasimilartimbreto40.0,
ofthewayalongthestring,andsoon.
75.0issimilarto25.0,andsoon.Thedelaybetweenthe
excitationandthepickupswillchange,however. Reachingbackintomathclassforamoment,the
numberunderthefractioniscalledthedenominator.
Forinstance,thedenominatorof1/5is5.
252
Program P4: String 4-5: String Main
Asaruleofthumb,harmonicswhicharemultiplesof Keyboardscalesthepositionaccordingtopitch,
thedenominatorwillbesilent.Forinstance,ifthe withouttakingtheStringsettingsintoaccount.This
Positionissetto20.0,theratiois1/5,andsoeveryfifth mightbemoreappropriateforclavsounds,for
harmonicwillbesilent:5,10,15,etc.Thisislikeacomb instance.
filter,withsuccessive,evenlyspacednotches.
Tone [-100+100]
Thegraphicbelowshowstheshapeofthiscombfilter,
andtheresultingbasicharmonicstructure.(Comb ThiscontrolstheaffectofthePositionontheoverall
filtersarenamedbecausetheirshapelooksalittlelike tone.WhenToneissetto0,Positionhasnoeffect.
theteethofacomb.) 100isgenerallythemostrealistic,althoughother
HarmonicstructurewithPosition=20.0(ratio=1/5) settingsmaygivegoodresultsdependingonthe
particularexcitationsignal.100alsoworkswellto
Volume counteractthelowendthumpwhichcanbecaused
Shape of comb filter: bylowfrequencyexcitationsignals,includingplucks
withverylow(ornegative)Widthvalues.
OtherTonesettingswillmakethecombfilter
describedunderPosition,above,workdifferently.
Settingsbetween100and0willreducetheeffectof
thefilter,untilat0ithasnoeffectatall.Positive
settingswillmakethefilterworkinreverse,
reinforcingharmonicsinsteadofeliminatingthem.
What does Tone do?

Harmonics: 1 2 3 4 6 78 9
Whenyoupluckarealstring,thestringvibrates
outwardinbothdirectionsfromtheexcitation
Silent Harmonics: 5 10 15
position.Thesetwovibrationsbounceofftheir
Thetablebelowshowsafewmoresettingswhich respectiveendsofthestring,returnintheopposite
canceloutspecificharmonics: direction,andinteractwitheachotheralongtheway,
affectingthetimbreofthestring.
EffectofExcitationPositiononharmonicstructure
Intherealworld,thiscantbechangedbuttheTone
Ratio of string parameterletsyoubendthephysicsabit.Thisis
Position Effect
length useful,inpart,becausesomeofthethingsyoucanuse
Odd harmonics are silent, topluckthestringsuchasaPCMsamplearent
50.0 1/2
like a square-wave. thingsyoucoulduseintherealworld,either.TheTone
Every third harmonic is parametergivesyouanothertooladjustthewaythat
33.3 1/3 theseunusualexcitationsaffectthetimbre.
silent: 3, 6, 9 etc.
Every fourth harmonic is Putsimply,Toneletsyoupluckthesamestringtwice,
25.0 1/4 inthesameplace,withthewavesfromeachpluck
movinginonlyonedirection.Oneoftheseplucks
Every fifth harmonic is
20.0 1/5 thinkofitastheonethatmovesthewaveforward
alwaysworksinthephysicalway.Tonecontrolsthe
pluckthatmovesthewavebackwards.
YoucanalsoadjustthepositionsofthetwoPickups,which
producesimilarcombfilteringeffects.(Formore PluckingthestringwithdifferentTonesettings
information,see48a:Pickup1onpage 260.)Thefiltering
producedbytheexcitationpositionandthetwopickupsis Excitation Position
cumulative,andcanproducecomplexpatternsofpeaksand Wave Wave
valleysintheoverallfrequencyresponse.
String
Tone = -100
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Position.Modulationisappliedonlyatnoteon;while
thenoteissounding,changingthemodulationhasno
effect.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate Tone = 0
Intensity [-100.0+100.0] Tone = +100

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthePosition
modulation.
Tracking Mode [String Track, Keyboard]

Thiscontrolstherelationshipbetweenthepickup 4-5b: Harmonic
Positionandthepitch. Thismodelspressingdownlightly(orfirmly)inthe
StringTrackscalesthepositionaccordingtothe middleofthestring,likeplayingharmonicsona
currentString,assetintheStringTracksection. guitar.
253
Use Excitation Position [Check-box] Pressure [0.0100.0]

Thismakestheharmonicusethesamepositionasthe Thiscontrolshowhardthestringisbeingpressed
excitation,includingAMSmodulation.Usingthis down.Nonzerosettingscancreateinterestingspecial
optioncreatesaninterestinghybridpluck/chime effectsbutforstandarduse,thisshouldbeleftat0.0,
timbre. andthenmodulatedviaAMS.Forinstance:
Whenthisischecked,therestofthePosition 1. FollowtheinstructionsunderCreatingan
parameterswillbegrayedout. initializedSTR1Programonpage 246.
2. AssignEG3toHarmonicAMS1,andsetthe
Position [0100.0]
Intensityto+100.0.
Thiscontrolsthepositionatwhichthestringisbeing
3. OntheEG3page(P73),settheBreakandSustain
presseddown.Aswhenplayingharmonicsonareal
levelsto+00.
string,theharmonicwillbeloudestwhentheposition
alignswiththeharmonicseries. 4. AdjusttheDecayTimebetween0and20,and
listentothewaythesoundchanges.
WhentheHarmonicTrackingModeissetto
Keyboard,itseasytomakethepositionmatcha Thiscontrolstheamountoftimethatthestringisbeing
specificharmonic,asshownbelow.WhenTracking presseddown.Asyouincreasethistime,theharmonic
ModeissettoString,thevaluesbelowarecorrectfor tonewillbecomemoreandmoreprominent.Around
theopenstringnotesonly;onothernotes,the 1820,theharmonictonetakesovercompletely.Asyou
harmonicswilllineupwithslightlyhighervalues. increasefrom20to50,thetonebecomesmorepure,
andlessbright.
HarmonicPositionandtheHarmonicSeries,whenTracking
Mode=Keyboard AMS 1 [List of AMS Sources]
Position Value Harmonic Pitch Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Pressure.Often,itwillmakesensetouseanenvelope
100.0 Fundamental Unison
here.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
50.0 1st 1 octave up ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
33.3 2nd 1 octave + fifth Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
25.0 3rd 2 octaves up ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthePressure
20.0 4th 2 octaves + maj. third modulation.
16.6 5th 2 octaves + fifth Intensity Mod AMS [AMS Sources]
14.2 6th 2 octaves + flat seventh ThisselectsaAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
12.5 7th 3 octaves up
intensityofPressureAMS1.ForalistofAMSsources,
page 1021.
IfUseExcitationPositionisOn,thisparameteris
grayedout. Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
AMS [List of AMS Sources] ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
ModAMS.EvenifthemainAMSIntensityissetto0,
IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamount
Position.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
ofAMSoverthefull+/100range.
IfUseExcitationPositionisOn,thisparameteris AMS 2 [List of AMS Sources]
grayedout. Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourcetocontrol
thePressure.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [-100.0+100.0] ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
modulation. Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
IfUseExcitationPositionisOn,thisparameteris ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthePressure
grayedout. modulation.
Tracking Mode [String Track, Keyboard] Intensity Mod AMS [AMS Sources]
Thiscontrolstherelationshipbetweentheharmonic ThisselectsaAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
Positionandthepitch. intensityofPressureAMS2.ForalistofAMSsources,
StringTrackscalesthepositionaccordingtothe page 1021.
currentString,assetintheStringTracksection.
Keyboardscalesthepositionaccordingtopitch, Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
withouttakingtheStringsettingsintoaccount.This ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
mightbemoreappropriateforclavsounds,for ModAMS.EvenifthemainAMSIntensityissetto0,
instance. IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamount
IfUseExcitationPositionisOn,thisparameteris ofAMSoverthefull+/100range.
grayedout.
254
Program P4: String 4-5: String Main

4-5c: Decay
Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Decay [0100] Nonlinearity.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Thiscontrolstheoveralldecaytimeofthestring
withoutaffectingfrequencycontent.Thisinteracts Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
withDamping,whichcontrolsthedecaytimeforhigh
frequencies.Formoreinformation,see46a:
Nonlinearitymodulation.
Dampingonpage 256.
Note:theAmpEGstillcontrolstheoutputlevelofthe AMS2 [List of AMS Sources]
STR1asawhole,sothefinaldecaytimewillbea Thisselectsasecondmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
combinationoftheStringDecayandtheAmpEG.As Nonlinearity.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
ageneralrule,theAmpEGcanmaketheoveralldecay ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
timeshorterthantheStringDecay,butnotlonger.
Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
Forinstance,iftheStringDecayissettoahighvalue
(foralongdecay),buttheAmpEGDecayisshort,the Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthesecond
finalresultwillbeashortdecay. Nonlinearitymodulation.
Formoreinformation,see63:AmpEGonpage 276.
Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolthe ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Decay.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Intensity [-100+100] 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS1. Programonpage 142.
AMS 2 [List of AMS Sources] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see

Decay.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Release [0100]
Thissetstheoverallreleasetimeforthestringthetime
thatittakestofadeawayafternoteoff.
Note:theAmpEGstillcontrolstheoutputlevelofthe
STR1asawhole,sothefinalreleasetimewillbea
combinationoftheStringReleaseandtheAmpEG.
Formoreinformation,seeDecay,above.

ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheRelease.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheRelease
modulation.
4-5d: Nonlinearity
Amount [-100.0100.0]
Thismodelstheinstabilityofthestringsbridge.
Greaternonlinearitymeansalessrigidbridge.At
higherlevels,thiscausesthecharacteristicbuzzing
soundofsomenonwesternstringedinstruments,such
asthesitar.
255
4-6: Damping and Dispersion

46PMC
46a
46b

4-6a: Damping
Damping [0100.0] Damping.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeforthestringshigh
frequencies.Highersettingsmeanashorterhigh Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
frequencydecaytime,forabrightattackandamore
mellowsustainedtone.Lowersettingsletthestring
ringbrightlyforalongerperiodoftime. AMS 3 [List of AMS Sources]
DampinginteractswiththeDecayparameter,which Thisselectsathirdmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
controlstheoveralldecaytime.Formoreinformation, Damping.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
see45c:Decayonpage 255. ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
TocreateacombfilteredeffectwithPCMoraudio
Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
input,insteadofastringmodel,setDampingtoa
moderatevalue. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS3.
AMS 1 [List of AMS Sources] String Track

String Track Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
Damping.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. ThiscontrolstheoveralldepthanddirectionofString
TrackingseffectontheDamping.Youcanadjustthe
Intensity [-100.0+100.0] offsetsforeachstringusingtheStrings1...6
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheDamping parameters,asdescribedbelow.
AMSmodulation.
String 1...6 [-100.0+100.0]
Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources] ThesesettheindividualDampingoffsetsforthesix
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheintensityof Strings,assetunder99b:Stringsonpage 281.These
AMS1. valuesarealsoavailableformodulatingother
parametersviaAMS;theyappearintheAMSlistas
Intensity [-100.0+100.0] DampingStringTrack.
ModAMS.
256
Program P4: String 4-6: Damping and Dispersion
4-6b: Dispersion String Track

String Track Intensity [100.0+100.0]
Dispersion [0100.0]
ThiscontrolstheoveralldepthanddirectionofString
Thismodelstherigidityofthestring.Highervalues
TrackseffectonDispersion.Youcanadjusttheoffsets
correspondtothickergaugestrings,andincreasethe
foreachindividualstringusingtheString1...6
inharmonicityofthestring.(Inharmonicitymeans
parameters,asdescribedbelow.
thatthepitchesoftheovertonesbecomeoutoftune
withthefundamental.)Atextremevalues,itwillcreate String 1...6 [100+100]
bellliketimbres,asifyouwerehittingabarofmetal.
ThesesettheindividualDispersionoffsetsforthesix
DispersioncanbemodulatedbythreeAMSsources, Strings,assetunder99b:Stringsonpage 281.For
whichareaddedtotheDispersionsetting. instance,youmightsetthelowerstringstogreater
values,tomodeltypicalguitarstrings.
Character [Bell, String]
Thesevaluesarealsoavailableformodulatingother
Thischangesthewaythattheupperharmonics
parametersviaAMS;theyappearintheAMSlistas
becomedetunedasDispersionisincreased.
Disp.StringTrack.
WiththeBellsetting,asyouincreasetheDispersion
amount,thelowerharmonicswillgooutoftune
gradually,buttheupperharmonicswilldosovery t 46: Page Menu Commands
steeply.Thehighertheharmonic,themoreoutoftune ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
itwillbecome.Theresultinginharmonicityissimilar numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
tothesoundofabell. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
WiththeStringsetting,theupperharmonicswillstill commandsonpage 142.
becomemoreoutoftunethanthelowerharmonics, 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
butwithamoregradualslope.Uptomoderatelyhigh Programonpage 142.
Dispersionsettings,thisretainsastringlikecharacter.
AMS 1 [List of AMS Sources] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Dispersion.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheDispersion
AMSmodulation.

AMS1.
Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
ModAMS.

Intensity [-100.0+100.0]

Thisselectsathirdmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Intensity [-100.0+100.0]
257
4-7: String Pitch

47PMC
47a
47b 47c
47d
47e
Whenyouliftoffoftheribbon,thepitchwillsnapback
4-7a: Main tothecenter(unlessyoureusingtheSW1/2Ribbon
Lockfeature).So,bytappingontherightedgeofthe
Octave [2[32], 1[16], +0[8], +1[4]]
ribbonandthenreleasingquickly,youcancreate
ThissetsthebasicpitchoftheString,inoctaves.The guitarstylehammeroneffects.
defaultis+0[8].
JS+ X [-60+60 semitones]
Transpose [12+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1 semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheright.For
octave. normalpitchbend,setthistoapositivevalue.
Tune [1200+1200] JS- X [-60+60 semitones]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1 Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in
octave.Acentis1/100ofasemitone. semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheleft.For
Pitch Slope [-1.00+0.00+2.00]
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.00.
4-7b: Portamento
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplay
higheronthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescause Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetween
thepitchtofallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard. notes,insteadofchangingabruptly.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthe Portamento and MIDI
keyboardwontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasif
yourealwaysplayingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecial IfPortamentoiseitherenabledforboththeStringand
effectssounds,forinstance. thePCM,oroffforboth,thenMIDICCs5(Portamento
Time)and65(Portamentoon/off)affectboththeString
Ifyouwanttocreatemorecomplexeffects,youcan andthePCM.
assignkeytrackingasanAMSsource.
IfPortamentoisenabledforonlyoneofthetwo,only
Ribbon [-60+60 semitones] thatelementcanbeaffectedbytheMIDICCs.The
Youcanusetheribboncontrollerforpitchbend.This otherelementwillalwayshavePortamentooff,
parameterspecifies,insemitones,theribbonspitch regardlessoftheMIDICCs.
bendrange. Enable [Off, On]
Positive(+)valuesmakethepitchrisewhenyoupress On(checked):TurnsonPortamento,sothatpitch
theribboncontrollertotherightofcenter,and glidessmoothlybetweennotes.
negative()valueswillcausethepitchtofall.
defaultstate.
258
Program P4: String 4-7: String Pitch
Fingered [Off, On] LFOappliedtothepitch.Thisparametersetsthe

ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamento maximumamountofLFOmodulationaddedbyJS+Y,
throughyourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playing insemitones.
legatowillturnonPortamento,andplayingdetached Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe
willturnitoffagain. +YdirectionwillcausetheLFOtoproducedeeper
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnable pitchmodulation.
isturnedon. Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento. Youcanalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountofthe
LFO,assetbyLFO1Intensity,above.
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.
AMS [AMS Sources]
ConstantRatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake amountoftheLFOappliedtopitch.
thesameamountoftimetoglideagivendistancein
pitchforinstance,onesecondperoctave.Putanother ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
way,glidingseveraloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthan Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
glidingahalfstep. Intensity [48.00+48.00]
ConstantTimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFOAMS
thesameamountoftimetoglidefromonenoteto modulation,insemitones.
another,regardlessofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisis
especiallyusefulwhenplayingchords,sinceitensures
thateachnoteinthechordwillenditsglideatthe 4-7d: Pitch EG
sametime.
Time [000...127] EG 3, EG 4, Amp EG]
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean ThisselectsanEGtomodulatetheStringpitch.
issetto0,thepitchwillbereachedinstantlyjustasif
AMS [List of AMS Sources] Inthemidstofallthisflexibility,wethoughtitwould
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontrolthePortamento alsobegoodtoprovidealittlestructure.Withthisin
Time.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate mind,EG1isnamedEG1(Filter)andEG2islabeled
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. EG2(Pitch).
Themodulationoccursonlyatnoteon.Thismeans Pleasetakethesenamesassuggestions,ratherthan
thatyoucanchangethetimeforthenextpitchglide, restrictions.Ifyoulike,yourefreetousetheseEGsto
butyoucantchangeanyglideswhicharealreadyin controlanyEGorAMSdestination,ortouseotherEGs
progress. tocontrolFilterFrequencyandPitch.
Intensity [-127+127] Intensity [-48.00+48.00]

Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthe ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGonthe
PortamentoTimeAMSmodulation. String,inhalfsteps,beforeanyAMSmodulation.
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to
99.WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,
4-7c: LFO
LFO Select [LFO 1, LFO 2, LFO 3, LFO 4, negativevalueslowerthepitch.
Common LFO] WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,the
ThisselectsanLFOtomodulatetheStringspitch. effectoftheEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmean
TheLFOIntensity,JS+YIntensity,andAMSareall pitches.
pitchmodulation. AMS [AMS Sources]
LFO Intensity [48.00+48.00] ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountofthePitchEGappliedtotheString.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch,
insemitones,beforeanyJS+YorAMSmodulation. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
BoththeStringandPCMPitchLFOIntensitiesare Intensity [-48.00+48.00]
scaledbyMIDICC#77. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEG
AMSmodulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitial
JS+Y Intensity [48.00+48.00] IntensityareaddedtogethertodeterminethePitch
Movingthejoystickupfromthecenterdetent EGsfinaleffect.
position,awayfromyourself,producestheJS+Y
259

4-7e: AMS
AMS 1 [List of AMS Sources] pitchmodulation,insemitones.
Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrolling Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]
theStringspitch.ForalistofAMSsources,see
page 1021.
Intensity [+/-48.00 semitones] Intensity [+/-48.00 semitones]

Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources] modulationamount.
AMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource. t 47: Page Menu Commands
Intensity [+/-48.00 semitones] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
ModAMS,insemitones.Theresultissummedwith shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
themainAMS1Intensitytoproducethefinalpitch commandsonpage 142.
modulationamount. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
theStringspitch.ForalistofAMSsources,see
page 1021.
4-8: Pickups and Feedback

48PMC
48a 48b
48c
youcanmodulatethePickupPositionwhilethenote
4-8a: Pickup 1 issounding.Typically,valuesbetween8.0and25.0will
workwell.
Position [0100.0]
Thisadjuststhelocationofthepickupalongthestring.
YoucanmodulatethisviaAMS,tocreateeffects
similartochorusing.UnliketheExcitationPosition,
260
Program P4: String 4-8: Pickups and Feedback
TheeffectofthePickupPositionissimilartothatof PickupPosition
theExcitationPosition.Thecombfilteringproduced
bytheexcitationandthetwopickupsiscumulative, Position = 0.0 Position = 100.0
andcanproducecomplexpatternsofpeaksand
valleysinthefrequencyresponse.
Thepositionisapproximatelysymmetricaround50for
allofthenoteswhenTrackingModeissetto
Keyboard;inotherwords,avalueof60isroughlythe
sameas40.WhenTrackingModeissettoString,
however,thepointofsymmetryvariesforeachnote.
Formoreinformation,seeHowPositionaffectsthe
timbreonpage 252.
Harmonic and Pickup Positions Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthe
IfthePickupPositionissameastheHarmonic Position.TryusinganLFO,forinstance.Foralistof
Position,thepickupwontproducemuchsoundwhen AMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)
HarmonicPressureisapplied. Listonpage 1021.
Pickup Position and Note Intensity [-100.0+100.0]

Thenotebeingplayeddefinesanotherpositionalong ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthePosition
thestring.Forinstance,withaguitar,thenoteisthe AMSmodulation.
positionofthefingeronthefretboard,asitpresses
downonthestring.Thiscreatesatemporaryendpoint
Tracking Mode [String Track, Keyboard, Off]
forthestring.Atthisendpoint,thestringvibratesvery Thiscontrolstherelationshipbetweenthepickup
little;beyondit,thestringdoesntvibrateatall. Positionandthepitch.
Pickupsdontheartheentirestring;theyonlyhear StringTrackscalesthepickuppositionaccordingto
thepartofthestringdirectlyabovethem.Ifthatpartof thecurrentString,assetintheStringTrackingsection.
thestringisntvibrating(forinstance,ifitsbeingheld Keyboardscalesthepickuppositionaccordingto
down!),theresverylittleforapickuptolistentoand pitch,withouttakingtheStringsettingsintoaccount.
thusthepickupwontproducemuchsound,ifit Thismightbemoreappropriateforclavsounds,for
producesanyatall. instance.
Forexample,letssaythatyouwerelisteningonlyto Offdisablespitchrelatedscaling.Thissettingworks
Pickup1. wellwhensweepingthepositionviaAMS(suchasby
SetthePickupPositionto50(themiddleofthe anLFO)forchorusingeffects,asdescribedbelow.
string),andtheTrackingModetoStringTrack.The
opennoteofthetopstring,E4,willsoundfine.Asyou
Creating chorusing with the pickups
playhighernotes,however,thesoundwillbecome Forachoruslikeeffect,setthepickupTrackingMode
thinner,untilitbecomesveryquietatE5. toOff,andmodulatethepickuppositionwithanLFO.
WiththepickupTrackingModesettoKeyboard,the
Whathappenedhere?
modulationdepthvarieswithnote,sothatthedepthis
Thepickupstaysinsamelocation,rightinthemiddle largeonthelowendofthekeyboardandsmallatthe
ofthestring.Witheachsemitone,thepointatwhich top.WiththepickupTrackingModesettoString,the
thestringisbeingpresseddownmovesuponefret. depthwillsteptoanewvalueateachopenstring.
Whenyoureachanoctaveup(atE5),thestringis
beingpresseddowninthemiddleofthestring,right
overthepickup. 4-8b: Pickup 2
Ifyouplayevenhigher,thepickupproducesnosound Thisisthesecondpickup.Ithasthesameparameters
sinceitisnowoutsidethepartofthestringthatis asPickup1,above.
vibrating.(TheSTR1modelassumesthatyour
fingercanholddownthestringperfectly,sothatno
vibrationsgetpastit.)
4-8c: Feedback
ThehigherthePickupPosition,thelowertherangein ThisletsyourouteaudiofromelsewhereinOASYS
whichthiscanoccur.Thenormalrangeofaguitaris throughthestring.Youcanuseanyoftheaudio
muchlessthanthatofa76or88notekeyboard,and inputs,anyoftheaudiooutputs,theRECbuses,theFX
higherpickuppositionsmaymakesense(andmake Controlbuses,ortheoutputsofanyoftheInsert,
sound!)onlywhenplayingwithinthatnormalguitar Master,orTotalEffects.
range. ThemainpurposeofthisistoprocesstheSTR1
Also,notethatthiscanonlyhappenwhenthe throughoneormoreInsertEffects,suchasan
TrackingModeissettoStringTrack. overdriveorampmodel,andthensendthataudio
backintotheSTR1,fortraditionalelectricguitar
feedbackeffects.
261
AllthreefeedbackparametersDistance,Orientation,
andLevelcanbemodulatedinrealtime.Youcanuse t 48: Page Menu Commands
thistomodeltheclassiceffectofholdinganelectric ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
guitarnearanampuntilitfeedsback,andthen numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
varyingthepitchofthefeedbackbychangingthe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
guitarsorientationinrelationto,anddistancefrom, commandsonpage 142.
theamp.
Youcanalsorouteliveorrecordedaudiothroughthe Programonpage 142.
stringan/orfilters,inrealtimeandweresurethat
youllbeabletothinkofothercreativeuses! 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Source and Channel
Thefeedbacksourceandchannel(left,right,orL+R
summation)areselectedbytheInputSourceand
ChannelparametersinthecurrentProgram,
CombinationTimbre,orSongTrack.
Formoreinformation,see42:EXiAudioInputon
page 168(Programmode),26:EXiAudioInputon
page 422(Combinationmode),and26:EXiAudio
Inputonpage 530(Sequencermode).
Distance (meters) [0.23...10.00]

Thismodelsthedistanceoftheguitarfromtheamp.
Usually,itsbesttosetthisverylow,buthighersettings
mayproduceinterestingeffects.

Distance.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [-10.00+10.00]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheDistance
AMSmodulation.
Orientation (degrees) [-180...+180]

Thismodelsturningtheguitarawayfromtheamp.
Turningtheguitarprimarilyaffectsthetoneofthe
feedback,butalsoaffectsthepitchandthevolume.

Orientation.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [-180...+180]
OrientationAMSmodulation.
Level [0100]
Thiscontrolstheoverallgainofthefeedbackintothe
string.Unliketheotherfeedbackparameters,thiscan
bedifferentforeachvoice.

ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheLevel.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLevelAMS
modulation.
262
Program P4: String 4-9: Mixer
4-9: Mixer
49PMC
49a
49b
49c
49d
49e
TheMixerpagecontrolsthevolumelevelsandfilter 0isthedefault,andmeansthattheStringgoesinto
routingforthemainStringoutput,aswellasthedirect FilterA.IftheFilterRoutingissettoSerial,itwillalso
outputs(bypassingthestring)ofthePCMoscillator passthroughFilterB.
andNoiseGenerator.Forinstance,youcan: 99meansthattheStringgoesintoFilterB.
ControlthevolumelevelsfortheString,thePCM Inbetween,theStringwillgotoacombinationofboth
Oscillator,andtheNoiseGenerator. filters.BymodulatingtheBalanceviaAMS,youcan
ModulatethesevolumelevelsviaAMS. crossfadebetweenroutingthroughFilterAandFilter
WhentheFilterRoutingissettoeitherSerialor B.Formoreinformation,seeInteractionbetweenthe
Parallel,youcanrouteeachofthefiveelements filtersandthemixer,onpage 265.
throughFilterA,FilterB,oracombinationofthe AMS [List of AMS Sources]
twoandthenmodulatethatroutingviaAMS.For
instance,youcancreatealayerbysettingtheFilter ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheString
RoutingtoParallel,andthensendingthePCM Balance.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
OscillatortoFilterA,andtheStringtoFilterB. ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
4-9a: String ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheString
BalanceAMSmodulation.
Level [0100]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelfortheString. Phase Invert [Off, On]
ThisinvertsthephaseoftheString.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheStringLevel.
4-9b: PCM Oscillator
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelandbalanceforthePCM
Oscillator.Ithasthesameparametersasdescribed
Intensity [-100+100] under49a:String,above.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheString
LevelAMSmodulation.
4-9c: Noise
Balance [0100]
TheNoiseGeneratorhasthesamemixerparametersas
ThiscontrolsthefilterroutingfortheString.Itapplies describedunder49a:String,above.
onlywhentheFilterRoutingissettoeitherSerialor
Parallel;otherwise,itisgrayedout.
263
4-9d: Pickup 1
Pickup1hasthesamemixerparametersasdescribed
under49a:String,above.
Tryinvertingthephaseforoneofthetwopickups;this
canproduceaninterestingeffect.
4-9e: Pickup 2
Pickup2hasthesamemixerparametersasdescribed
under49a:String,above.

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
264
Program P5: Filter 5-1: Filter Basic
Program P5: Filter
5-1: Filter Basic

51PMC
51a
51b
51c
1. SettheFilterRoutingtoParallel.
Interaction between the filters and the
mixer
Thisroutesalloftheinputstobothfilters,atequal
WhentheFilterRoutingissettoeitherSingleor volumes.
24dB/oct,theroutingfromtheStringsectionintothe
Filtersectionisfairlysimple.Theresonlyasingle Dual signal paths
filter,andthatfilterprocessestheentiresound. YoucanalsosendtheStringthroughFilterA,andthe
ThingscangetmoreinterestingwhentheFilter PCMOscillatorthroughFilterB(orviceversa),to
RoutingissettoSerialorParallel.Inthesemodes,The createalayeredsound.Forinstance:
MixerpagesBalanceparametersletyouseparately 1. SettheFilterRoutingtoParallel.
controlthefilterroutingforeachofthefiveinputs:the 2. SettheStringsBalanceto0.
String,thePCMOscillator,theNoiseGenerator,
ThisroutestheStringtoFilterA.
Pickup1,andPickup2.
3. SetthePCMOscillatorsBalanceto99.
WhenaninputsBalanceissetto0,itgoesintoFilterA.
(NotethatiftheFilterRoutingissettoSerial,the ThisroutesthePCMOscillatortoFilterB.
signalwillalsopassthroughFilterB.)
Anywhere in-between
IftheinputsBalanceissetto99,itgoesdirectlyinto
IfaninputsBalanceissetbetween1and98,itwillgo
FilterB,regardlessofwhethertheroutingissetto
toacombinationofbothfilterssothatmanyin
SerialorParallel.
betweenfiltereffectsareavailable.
Standard serial configuration Finally,bymodulatinganinputsBalanceviaAMS,
Tocreateastandardserialfilterconfiguration: youcancrossfadebetweenroutingthroughFilterA
andFilterB.
1. SettheFilterRoutingtoSerial.
ThisconnectstheoutputofFilterAtotheinputof
FilterB. 5-1a: Routing
2. SetallofthemixersBalancecontrolsto0. Filter Routing [Single, Serial, Parallel, 24dB/oct]
ThismakesalloftheinputsgotoFilterAfirst,and Therearetwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.This
thenthroughFilterB. parametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthefilters
areused,andifbothareused,itcontrolshowtheyare
Standard parallel configuration
connectedtoeachother.
Tocreateastandardparallelfilterconfiguration:
265
Single.ThisusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole, FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency
willbegrayedout.
Serial.Thisusesbothfilters.TheoutputofFilterAis
processedthroughFilterB. Low Pass
Parallel.ThisalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.
UnlikeSerial,above,theoutputsofthetwofiltersare
keptseparate,withindividualcontroloverbothlevel
andpan.
24dB/oct.Thismergesbothfilterstocreateasingle4
pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPassandBand High Pass
Reject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoptionproducesa
sharperrolloffbeyondthecutofffrequency,aswellas
aslightlymoredelicateresonance.Manyclassicanalog
synthsusedthisgeneraltypeoffilter.
Aareactive;thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout. Band Pass
Also,notethattheMultiFilterisnotavailableinthis
mode.
51b: Filter A
Filter Type [Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, Band Reject
Band Reject, Multi Filter]
willchangeslightlyaccordingtotheselectedFilter
Routing,toshowthecorrectcutoffslopeindBper Cutoff Frequency
octave.
LowPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich Bypass [Off, On]
arehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe ThisletsyoubypassFilterAcompletely.
IfBypassisOff,FilterAfunctionsnormally.
timbressounddarker.
WhenBypassisOn,FilterAhasnoeffectontheinput
HighPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich
signal.
arelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto
maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy. Trim [0099]
BandPass.Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both ThisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtoFilterA.If
highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff younoticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywith
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow highResonancesettings,youcanturntheleveldown
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically here,orattheOutputLevel.
dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators
Notethatthefilterwillnotclipinternally,sothereisno
multisample.
differencebetweenadjustingtheInputTrimandthe
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand OutputLevel.Eitherofthesecontrolswillallowyouto
Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph minimizeclippinglaterinthesignalchain,suchas
sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate mayoccurinsomeeffects.
buzzyornasaltimbres.
Output Level [0099]
cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe ThiscontrolstheoutputlevelofFilterA.Youcanuse
cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan thistobalancethevolumesofFiltersAandBwhenthe
LFOtocreatephaserlikeeffects. RoutingissettoParallel,ortoturndownthevolume
MultiFilter.Thisisacomplexfilterwhichiscapableof
alloftheabovefiltertypes,andmanymorebesides. AMS [AMS Sources]
Formoreinformation,see52:MultiFilter,on
ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheOutput
page 268.
Level.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
TheMultiFilterisavailableonlyforFilterA,andonly ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
whentheFilterRoutingissettoSingle,Serialor
Parallel. Intensity [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheOutput
Levelmodulation.
266
Program P5: Filter 5-1: Filter Basic
Frequency [0099] AMS [AMS Sources]

ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,in ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Foralist
incrementsof1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectof ofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
thecutofffrequencywillchangedependingonthe (AMS)Listonpage 1021.
selectedFilterType,asdescribedabove.
Intensity [99+99]
Frequency Fine [-99+99] ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthePanAMS
Thisprovidesfinecontrolofthefiltercutofffrequency. modulation.
Eachstepofthisparameterisequalto1/100ofastepof
themainFrequencyparameter,above.
51c: Filter B
Resonance Type [Standard, High]
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissetto
Thiscontrolsthestrengthofthefilterresonancewhen SerialorParallel.Otherwise,itsparameterswillbe
theFilterRoutingissetto24dB/oct.Whentherouting grayedout.
issettoSingle,Serial,orParallel,thisparameteris
FilterBisalmostthesameasFilterA,butwithoutthe
grayedout.
MultiFiltermode,andwiththeadditionoftheLink
Standardprovidestheresonancecharacterofatypical controls,asdescribedbelow.Forallotherparameters,
analog4polefilter. pleaseseethedescriptionsunder51b:FilterA,on
Highcreatesamorepronouncedresonance. page 266.
Resonance Bass [Tight, Full] Link [Off, On]

Thiscontrolsthecharacterofthefilterresonanceatlow WhenLinkisOn,mostofFilterBsparametersare
cutofffrequencies.Itseffectismostnoticeablewith grayedout,andareinsteadcontrolledbythesettings
highResonancesettings. forFilterA.
Tightproducesamorerestrainedresonance,similarto Specifically,FilterBwilluseFilterAssettingsfor
aclassic,American,woodpaneledmonophonic Resonance,ResonanceBass,andallFrequencyand
synthesizer. Resonancemodulationsettings.FilterBsFrequencyis
alsolinkedtothatofFilterA,withanoptional
Fullproducesawide,boomyresonance,reminiscent
frequencyoffsetviatheLinkFrequencyOffset
ofafamousfivevoiceAmericansynthesizer.
parameter,below.
Resonance [0099] TheBypass,Type,InputTrim,OutputLevel,Output
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe LevelAMS,Pan,andPanAMSparametersarestill
cutofffrequency. controlledseparately.
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and Link Frequency Offset [99+99]
ThisoffsetsFilterBsFrequencyfromthatofFilterA,
smoothly.
andappliesonlywhenLinkisOn.
WhenLinkisOff,thisparameterisgrayedout.
extreme.
Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbeheardasa t 51: Page Menu Commands
separate,whistlingpitch. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,see numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
KeyFollow,onpage 270. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Resonance Mod by AMS [AMS Sources]
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthe Programonpage 142.
page 1021.
Intensity [99+99]
modulation.

ThiscontrolsthestereopanforFilterAsoutput.Itis
availableonlywhenFilterRoutingissettoParallel.
WhentheFilterRoutingissettoSingle,Serial,or
24dB/oct,thePanparameterswillbegrayedout.
267
5-2: Multi Filter

52PMC
52a
52b
52c
52c
ThispageisavailableonlywhentheFilterATypeis
settoMultiFilter. 5-2b: Mode Crossfade
Whats a Multi Filter? Mode 1 [List of filter types]
Standardmultimodefiltersgeneratelowpass, ThissetsthefiltertypeforMode1.
highpass,andbandpassfilterssimultaneouslybut LowPass,HighPass,BandPass,andBandRejectare
onlyallowyoutouseoneofthematatime. thestandardfiltertypes.Formoreinformation,see
TheMultiFiltergivesyouaccesstoallthreefilter FilterType,onpage 266.
modessimultaneously,inanycombination,alongwith Thefollowingtypescombinetwoormorefiltersat
thedryinputsignal.Youcanchoosefromalarge equalvolumes.Dryistheunfilteredinputsignal.The
numberofpresetcombinations,orcreateyourown minussign()indicateswhenthephaseofafilteris
complexfiltermodesusingtheManualcontrols. reversed:LP+BP,LPBP,LPHP,BP+HP,BPHP,
Thisiscapableofsomecoolsoundsinandofitself,but Dry+LP,DryLP,Dry+BP,DryBP,Dry+LPHP,
thingsreallygetinterestingwhenyouusethe Dry+LPBP,Dry+BPLP,Dry+BPHP,Dry+HPLP,
Crossfadecontrols.Theseallowyoutocrossfade Dry+HPBP,LP+HP+BP.
betweentwoofthesefiltersettings(Mode1andMode AllOnusestheLowPass,HighPass,BandPass,and
2),usingAMSsourcessuchasEGs,LFOs,orrealtime Drysignalsatequalvolumes.
controllers.
Manual1letsyoucreateyourownmixofthefilters.
Formoreinformation,see52c:Manual1,below.
52a: Filter A
Mode 2 [List of filter types]
Bypass [Off, On] Mode2hasthesameselectionsasMode1,exceptthat
thelistendswithManual2insteadofManual1.
Frequency [0099]
Mode 1-2 Crossfade [099]
Fine [99+99]
ThisfadesbetweentheMode1andMode2settings.
Resonance [0099] 0isallMode1,99isallMode2,and198are
Thesearethesameasthesimilarlynamedparameters intermediatevaluesbetweenthetwoModes.
ontheFilterBasicpage,asdescribedunder51b:
FilterAonpage 266. AMS [AMS Sources]
Editstothevaluesonthispagewillbereflectedonthe ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheMode1
FilterBasicpage,andviceversa. 2Crossfade.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
268
Program P5: Filter 5-3: Filter Modulation
Intensity [99+99] Lowpass [99+99]

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheMode12 ThiscontrolsthevolumeoftheLowpassfilteroutput.
Crossfademodulation. Negativevaluesinvertthephase.
Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources] Highpass [99+99]

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheintensityof ThissetsthevolumeoftheHighpassfilteroutput.
themainMode12CrossfadeAMS.
Bandpass [99+99]
Forinstance,youcansetAMStouseoneoftheLFOs,
andthensettheIntensityModAMStoJSY.Youcan ThiscontrolsthevolumeoftheBandpassfilteroutput.
thenusethejoysticktomodulatetheamountofthe Dry [99+99]
LFO.
Thissetsthevolumeofthedrysignal.
Intensity [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity 5-2d: Manual 2
ModAMS.
TheManual2parametersareidenticaltothoseof
Manual1,asdescribedabove.
5-2c: Manual 1
Theseparametersletyoucreateyourownmixofthe t 52: Page Menu Commands
filters.WhenMode1issettoManual1,itwilluse
thesesettings. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
YoumaywonderwhyBandRejectisnotincluded
here.Thisisbecauseitsnotafiltermodeperse.
commandsonpage 142.
Instead,itscreatedbyanequalcombinationofHigh
PassandLowPass.Tryitandsee! 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
5-3: Filter Modulation

53PMC
53a
53b
53c
53c
ThispagecontainsallofthesettingsforFilter ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfilter
Frequencymodulation(exceptfortheLFOs,whichare cutoff.
ontheirownpage).Amongotherthings,youcan: AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff.
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,and FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissetto
controlhowthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff. SerialorParallel.Otherwise,theparametersforFilter
Bwillbegrayedout.
269

53a: Keyboard Track
Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey
higherpitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingre track,usenegativevalues.
alowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard. Low-Center [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
Usually,someamountofkeytrackingisnecessaryin ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter
ordertomakethetimbreconsistentacrosstheentire keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
range.
Center-High [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
TheOASYSkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuchmore
complex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard. keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
TheSTR1sFilterkeyboardtrackingparametersare High-Top [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
identicaltotheHD1s.Formoredetailedexplanations ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe
oftheparameters,pleasesee32a:KeyboardTrack, topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use
onpage 64. positivevalues.
Thereisonedifferencebetweenthetwo,however:the
STR1sFiltertrackingisaffectedbyPortamento,so Key Follow
thatitchangessmoothlyduringglides. TocreatetheclassicKeyFolloweffect,inwhichthe
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwill
affectFilterAscutofffrequency.Theoveralleffectof 2. SettheKeyboardTrackIntensityto+99.
theKeyboardTrackisacombinationofthisIntensity 3. SettheBottomLowandLowCenterrampsto50.
valueandtheoverallKeyboardTrackshape. 4. SettheCenterHighandHighToprampsto+50.
Intensity to B [99+99] 5. SettheCenterKeytoC4.
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwill ThesettingsfortheLowBreakandHighBreakkeys
affectFilterBscutofffrequency. dontmatterinthiscase.
IntensitytoBappliesonlywhentheFilterRoutingis
settoSerialorParallel,andwhenLinkisOff.In 5-3b: Filter EG
Singleand24dB/octmodes,orifLinkisOn,this
TheEGsmodulatetheFilterAandBcutofffrequencies
parameterisgrayedout.
overtime.Youcancontrolhowstronglytheywill
Key affectthefiltersinthreedifferentways:
SetaninitialamountofEGmodulation,usingthe
Low Break [C1G9] EGIntensityparameters.
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwolower UsevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEGapplied
ramps. tothefilter.
Center [C1G9] UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheEG
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtracking.Atthis appliedtothefilter.
key,thekeyboardtrackinghasnoeffectonthefilter Youcanuseallthreeoftheseatonce,andtheresults
frequency,oronanyAMSdestinations. areaddedtogethertoproducethetotalEGeffect.
High Break [C1G9] TosetuptheEGsthemselves,includingattackand

releasetimes,levels,andsoon,see71:EG1(Filter),
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher onpage 279.
ramps.
Filter A
Ramp
Theeffectonthefiltercutoffisacombinationofthe EG Select [EG 1 (Filter), EG 2 (Pitch),
rampvalues,assetbelow,andtheIntensitytoAandB EG 3, EG 4, Amp EG]
parameters.WhenIntensityissetto+99,arampof50 ThisselectsanEGtomodulateFilterAsFrequency.
changesthefilterfrequencyby1octaveforevery
octaveofthekeyboard,andarampof+99changesthe
frequencyby2octavesforeveryoctaveofthe
keyboard.
EG2(Pitch).
Formoredetailedexplanations,pleasesee32a:
KeyboardTrack,onpage 64
270
Program P5: Filter 5-3: Filter Modulation
Pleasetakethesenamesassuggestions,ratherthan WhenLinkisOn,orwhentheFilterRoutingissetto
restrictions.Ifyoulike,yourefreetousetheseEGsto Singleor24dB/oct,alloftheseparametersaregrayed
controlanyEGorAMSdestination,ortouseotherEGs out.
Velocity Intensity [99+99] t 53: Page Menu Commands

ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEG ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
appliedtoFilterA. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
EG Intensity [99+99]
commandsonpage 142.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheEGonFilterAs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMS
Programonpage 142.
modulation.
AMS [AMS Sources] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
amountoftheEGappliedtoFilterA.
Intensity [99+99]
modulation.
Filter B
TheEGparametersforFilterBarethesameasthose
forFilterA,above.
WhenLinkisOn,orwhentheFilterRoutingissetto
Singleor24dB/oct,alloftheseparametersaregrayed
out.
5-3c: Filter Modulation

Filter A Frequency
AMS 1 [AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolFilter
AsFrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheFrequency
modulation.

AMS1.
Intensity [99+99]
ModAMS.
AMS 2 [AMS Sources]

Thisselectsasecondmodulationsourcetocontrol
FilterAsFrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,see
page 1021.
Intensity [99+99]
Filter B Frequency
ThesettingsforFilterBarethesameasthoseforFilter
AFrequency,above.
271
5-4: Filter LFO Mod

54PMC
54a
54b
TherearethreeLFOtoFrequencycontrolsforeach ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
filter:abasicamount(LFOIntensity),joystickY Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
controlofLFOamount(JSYIntensity),andAMS
controlofLFOamount(AMSIntensity).Thethree Intensity [99+99]
controlsaresummedtogethertodeterminethefinal ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFOAMS
LFOamount. modulation.
5-4a: Filter A 5-4b: Filter B

LFO Select [LFO 1, LFO 2, LFO 3, LFO 4, ThesettingsforFilterBarethesameasthosefor54a:
Common LFO] FilterA,above.
ThisselectsanLFOtomodulateFilterAscutoff WhenLinkisOn,orwhentheFilterRoutingissetto
frequency. Singleor24dB/oct,alloftheseparametersaregrayed
out.
TheLFOIntensity,JSYIntensity,andAMSareall
pitchmodulation. t 54: Page Menu Commands
LFO Intensity [99+99] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterAs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyJS+YorAMSmodulation.
commandsonpage 142.
JS -Y Intensity [99+99] Programonpage 142.
Movingthejoystickdownfromthecenterdetent 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
position,towardsyourself,producestheJSY ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
LFOappliedtoFilterA.
ThisparametersetsthemaximumamountofLFO
modulationaddedbyJSY.
AMS [AMS Sources]

amountoftheLFOappliedtoFilterAscutoff
frequency.
272
Program P6: Amp 6-1: Amp
Program P6: Amp

Thesepagesletyoucontrolthesoundsvolume(also Setthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
calledamplitude,orampforshort),pan,andthe Controlamplevelandmodulation,including
dedicatedampenvelopesandkeyboardtracking keyboardtracking,theampenvelope,LFO
generators.Forinstance,youcan: modulation,andAMScontrol.
6-1: Amp
61PMC
61a
61b
ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsfortheAmp IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,
section.Here,youcan: theonewiththelowervaluedeterminesthe
Settheinitialvolumelevel. maximumvolume,andtheonewiththehigher
valuescalesdownfromthatmaximum.
Controlthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
61b: Pan
61a: Amp Level
Amp Level [0127]
ThiscontrolsthestereopanoftheEXi.Asettingof
ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumeleveloftheSTR1, L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,
beforekeyboardtracking,velocity,andother andR127tothefarright.
modulation.
The Control Surface and volume differentforeachnoteon.
YoucanalsocontrolthevolumesofEXi1and2 YoucanalsosetthisPanparameterdirectlyfromthe
directlyfromtheControlSurfacesliders.Thesevolume ControlSurfaceknobs.Todoso:
levelsareseparateparameters,inadditiontothe 1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton.
individualEXiAmpLevels.Todoso:
1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton. PAN.
2. MoveSlider1tosetthevolumeforEXi1,and 3. MoveKnob1tosetthepanforEXi1,andKnob2
Slider2forEXi2. tosetthepanforEXi2.
MIDI and volume YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).A
CC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumevia
64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythe
Panparameter,and127placesthesoundatthefar
right.
valueof127isequaltotheAmpLevelsetting,and Note:youcanselectRandompanonlyfromtheon
lowervaluesreducethevolume. screenUI,andnotfromMIDIortheControlsurface.
273
AMS [AMS Sources] Negative()intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect.

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Foralist
ofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource t 61: Page Menu Commands
Intensity [99+99] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
modulationforPan. commandsonpage 142.
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSissetto 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
NoteNumber,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethe Programonpage 142.
soundtomovetowardtherightasyouplayhigher 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
thanC4,andtowardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
6-2: Amp Modulation

62PMC
62a
62b
ThispagecontainsthesettingsfortheSTR1sAmp Thereisonedifferencebetweenthetwo,however:the
levelmodulation.Amongotherthings,youcan: STR1sAmptrackingisaffectedbyPortamento,so
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapestocontrol thatitchangessmoothlyduringglides.
theAmplevel.
Key
AssignAMSmodulationfortheAmplevel.
ControltheeffectoftheLFOsontheAmplevel. Low Break [C1G9]
Thetotaleffectsofthemodulationcanincreasethe
ramps.
volumetoamaximumoftwotimeslouderthanthe
AmpLevelsetting. Center [C1G9]
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtracking.Atthis
62a: Keyboard Track key,thekeyboardtrackinghasnoeffectonthevolume,
oronanyAMSdestinations.
Keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythevolumeasyou
playupanddownthekeyboard.Usually,some High Break [C1G9]
amountofkeytrackingisnecessaryinordertomake Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher
thevolumeconsistentacrosstheentirerange. ramps.
TheSTR1sAmpkeyboardtrackingparametersare
identicaltotheHD1s.Formoredetailedexplanations
oftheparameters,pleasesee42a:KeyboardTrack,
onpage 76.
274
Program P6: Amp 6-2: Amp Modulation
Ramp Intensity Mod AMS [AMS Sources]

Bottom-Low [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf] scaletheintensityofAMS1.
noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey
Ramp Change in level Intensity [99+99]
99 Silent in one whole-step IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamountof
95 Silent in one octave AMSAoverthefull+/99range.
48 Silent in two octaves Forexample,ifAMS1issettoLFO1,andIntensity

ModAMSissettoAfterTouch,positivesettings
25 Silent in four octaves meanthataftertouchwillincreasetheamountofLFO
00 no change modulation.
+25 x2 in four octaves AMS2 [AMS Sources]
+50 x2 in two octaves ThisselectsasecondmodulationsourcefortheAmp
+99 x2 in one octave level.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
+Inf x2 in one half-step
Intensity [99+99]
Low-Center [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf] ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS2.TheIntensity
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter ModAMSthenaddstothisinitialamount.
Intensity Mod AMS [AMS Sources]
Center-High [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf] ThisselectsasecondaryAMSmodulationsourceto
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak scaletheintensityofAMS2.
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
High-Top [-Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe Intensity [99+99]
topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
positivevalues. ModAMS.EvenifthemainAMS2Intensityissetto0,
IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamount
ofAMSAoverthefull+/99range.
62b: Amp Modulation
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelbyvelocityandtwo AMS3 [AMS Sources]
AMSsources.EachoftheAMSsourcesalsohasits ThisselectsathirdmodulationsourcefortheAmp
ownsecondaryintensitymodulation. level.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
ThismodulationscalesthebasicAmplevelandAmp ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
EGlevelparameters.Iftheseoriginallevelsarelow,the Intensity [99+99]
maximumvolumeavailablewithmodulationwillalso
bereduced. ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS3.
NotethatthereisanupperlimittoAmpmodulation.
Oncethevolumelevelreachesdoublethe t 62: Page Menu Commands
programmedAmpLevelandAmpEGlevelsettings,it ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
cannotbeincreasedanyfurther. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Velocity Intensity [99+99] shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
youplayharder. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Withnegative()values,thevolumewilldecreaseas
youplayharder. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
AMS1 [AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcefortheAmp
Intensity [99+99]
275
6-3: Amp EG
63PMC
63a
63b
63c
63d
TheSTR1sAmpEGisidenticaltotheHD1s.For maymeanthattheEGdoesntresetatall.Ifthis
moredetailedexplanationsoftheAmpEGfeatures, happens,reducetheThresholduntiltheEGtriggers
pleasesee43:Amp1EG,onpage 79. consistently.
Otherenvelopescanbeusedasadditionalcontrolsvia
AMS,ifdesired. 63b: Amp EG
TheseparametersspecifyhowtheampEGwillchange
6-3a: EG Reset overtime.
AMS [AMS Sources] AmpEG
Start Attack Break Sustain
point.Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFO Level Level Level Level
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe Volume
EGtostart.
Note:OncetheAmpEGisinitsReleasesegment,it Time
cannotbereset.(Otherwise,thesoundmightkeep Attack Decay Slope Release

playingforever!) Time Time Time Time
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation Note-on or reset Note-off


ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjustthe Start [0099]
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe Thissetstheinitialvolumelevelatnoteon.
rhythmiceffects. Attack [0099]
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards. Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendof
theDecaytime.
speeds,theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextreme Sustain [0099]
noteoff(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
276
Program P6: Amp 6-3: Amp EG
Time 6-3c: Level Modulation

Highervaluesmeanlongertimes.Forachartshowing
equivalentsinmilliseconds,pleaseseeTimeon ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontrolthe
page 80. LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,and
Attack [0099] havedifferentmodulationintensities.
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStart Note:OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
leveltotheAttacklevel. points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.For
Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas instance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecaytime,
fastasthemostpunchyofclassicanalogsynths. youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecaytimeor
theBreaklevel.
Startlevelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstart ThisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,Attack
instantaneouslyatitsmaximumvalue. level,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatare
alreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenresetviaAMS.
Decay [0099]
AMS [AMS Sources]
totheBreaklevel. ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
Slope [0099] ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Sustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff Start [99+99]
(unlessitisresetviaAMS). ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Release [0099]
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe Attack [99+99]
Sustainleveltosilence. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Curve
Break [99+99]
Classicanalogsynthenvelopescreatedcurvedshapes
naturally.TheOASYSgoesastepfurtherthanvintage ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
synths,however,andletsyoucontroltheamountof modulationfortheBreaklevel.
curvatureseparatelyforeachofthefourenvelope
segments. 6-3d: Time Modulation
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremain ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsources
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto tocontroltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachof
soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat thethreeAMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,and
thebeginning. Releasetimeseachhavetheirownmodulation
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare intensities.
whichgodown. AMS1 [AMS Sources]
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbe
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments, usefulhere,forinstance.
suchasDecayandRelease. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthe Attack [99+99]
transitionfromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthe instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will
transitionfromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel. makethesegmenttimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
Slope [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] settingof8willcutthesegmenttimealmostinhalf.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthe Decay [99+99]
transitionfromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Release [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] modulationfortheDecaytime.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe Slope [99+99]
277
Release [99+99]
AMS2 and AMS3

andRelease.TheparametersofbothAMS2andAMS3

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
SwapEnvelopeonpage 216.
278
Program P7: EG 1-4 7-1: EG 1 (Filter)
Program P7: EG 1-4

TheSTR1hasfourassignableEGs,inadditiontothe Inthemidstofallthisflexibility,wethoughtitwould
AmpEG.EachofthesecanbeusedasanAMS alsobegoodtoprovidealittlestructure.Withthisin
modulationsourcetocontrolawidevarietyof mind,EG1isnamedEG1(Filter),andEG2isnamed
parameters. EG2(Pitch).
TherearealsotwoparameterswithdedicatedEG Pleasetakethesenamesassuggestions,ratherthan
modulationinputs:FrequencyforFiltersAandB.Any restrictions.Ifyoulike,yourefreetousethese
ofthefourEGscanbeusedforthesemodulation envelopestocontrolanyEGorAMSdestination,orto
routings. useotherEGstocontrolFilterFrequencyorPitch.
7-1: EG 1 (Filter)
7-2: EG 2 (Pitch)
7-3: EG 3
7-4: EG 4
TheSTR1sEGs14areidenticaltotheAL1sEG1.For
detailedexplanations,pleasesee71:EG1(Filter),
onpage 203.
Program P8: LFO 1-4

TheSTR1hasfourassignableLFOs,inadditiontothe
EXiProgramsCommonLFO.Eachofthesecanbe
usedasanAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolawide
varietyofparameters.
8-1: LFO 1
8-2: LFO 2
8-3: LFO 3
8-4: LFO 4
TheSTR1sLFOs14areidenticaltothoseoftheAL1.
Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee82:LFO1,on
page 209.
279
Program P9: AMS Mixers and String Track

AMS Mixers canusetheprocessedversionoftheAftertouchto
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone, controloneAMSdestination,andtheoriginalversion
orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething tocontrolanother.
new. Finally,youcancascadetheAMSMixerstogetherfor
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether, instance,youcanuseAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMS
oruseoneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother. Mixer2.
Youcanalsousethemtomodifytheresponseof String Track
realtimecontrollers.
TheStringTracktrackinggeneratorsallowyouto
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS scaleparametersbasedonthestringonwhichthenote
sources,justlikeothercontrollers. isplayed.Thishelpstomodelthesoniccharacteristics
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto ofthedifferentstrings,suchasdifferentmaterials(as
theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance, withthenylonandsteelstringsofanacousticguitar),
ifyouuseAftertouchasaninputtoaAMSMixer,you differentgaugesofstrings,andsoon.
9-1: AMS Mixers 1-2
9-2: AMS Mixers 3-4

TheSTR1sAMSMixersareidenticaltothoseofthe
AL1(althoughtheSTR1hasfour,totheAL1stwo).
Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee91:AMS
Mixer,onpage 213.
9-9: String Track

99PMC
99a
99b
99c
Multistringedinstruments,suchasguitars,often Forinstance,electricguitarsmayusewoundlow
includestringsofdifferentthicknesses,orstrings stringsalongwithunwoundhighstrings.Similarly,
createdusingdifferenttechniquesormaterials.For classicalguitarsgenerallyusenylontreblestrings
instance,stringsmaybe: alongwithwoundmetalbassstrings.
Roundwound,flatwound,orunwound
Steel,brass,copper,ornylon
Thicker(heavygauge)orthinner(lightgauge)
280
Program P9: AMS Mixers and String Track 9-9: String Track
Thismeansthatsomestringsmaysoundverydistinct ThesameStringsettingsareusedforallStringTrack
fromothers,quiteasidefromthedifferencesinpitch. generators,includingthoseforDampingand
Itsalmostasifeachstringwasasubinstrumentofits Dispersion.TheyarealsousedfortheExcitation,
own. Harmonic,andPickuppositionswhentheirTracking
Inordertophysicallymodelthesedifferences,its ModeparametersaresettoStringTrack.
sometimeshelpfultomodulatecertainparameters Formoreinformation,see45a:Excitationon
separatelyforeachstring,suchasDamping,Decay, page 252,45b:Harmoniconpage 253,46a:
Dispersion,Inharmonicity,etc. Dampingonpage 256,46b:Dispersionon
StringTrackletsyoudoexactlythis.Itsavariationof page 257,48a:Pickup1onpage 260,and48b:
keyboardtracking,whichdividesthekeyboardinto6 Pickup2onpage 261.
zones,correspondingto6strings.Youcanthensetfour StringTrackstringsandzones
differentoffsetsforeachstring:oneeachforDamping
andDispersion,andthenthetwogeneralpurpose
StringTrack1and2.AllfourcanbeusedasAMS String 1 2 3 4 5 String 6
sourcesthroughouttheSTR1.
Fret Number AMS Source

Stringsmayalsochangeintimbreasyoumoveupthe
neck,playinghigherandhighernotes.Tomodelthis,
youcanuseanadditionalAMSsource,FretNumber.
FretNumberprovidesthedistanceuptheneckforthe
String 1: String 6:
currentnote.Whenthenoteisanopenstring,Fret E2 E4
Numbersvalueiszero.Asnotesmoveupthe String 2: String 5:
fretboard,FretNumberincreases.Oncethenextopen A2 B3
stringisreached,FretNumbergoesbacktozero,and String 3:
startsoveragain. D3
String 4:
G3
9-9a: Fret Position
Fret Position [Open, 148]
9-9c: String Track 1
Thiscontrolsthepositionatwhichthenotesareplayed
alongtheneck.Thiscanhaveasignificanteffectonthe (Strings) 1...6 [100.0+100.0]
timbre,sinceitmaychangethestringonwhichanote
ThesesetindividualoffsetsforthesixStrings.Youcan
isplayed.
usethesetomodulateanyAMSdestination;they
Todothis,FretPositionshiftstherelationshipbetween appearintheAMSlistasStringTrack1.
notesplayedonthekeyboard(orviaMIDI)andthe
selectedStringpitches.Thischangesthebreakpoints
foralloftheStringTrackgeneratorsatonce. 9-9d: String Track 2
ThismeansthatastheFretPositionincreases,the ThisisasecondsetofindividualStringoffsets,which
samenotewillbeplayedinhigherpositionsonthe appearintheAMSlistasStringTrack2.The
neck,usinglowerstrings. parametersareidenticaltothoseof99c:StringTrack
1,above.
Thecurrentfretposition(inotherwords,the
combinationofFretPositionanditsAMS)isitself
availableastheAMSsourcenamed,appropriately,Fret
Position.

ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheFret
Position.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [-48+48]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheFret
PositionAMSmodulation.
9-9b: Strings
Strings 1-6 [C1G9]
Thesesixparameterssetthepitchesofthestrings,from
thelowestpitch(String1)tothehighestpitch(String
6).Thesedefinekeyboardzones,asshownbelow.
281
STR-1: Tone Adjust

STR1ToneAdjustDefaultSettings
Excitation Harmonic Pickup 1 Pickup 2

Damping Dispersion Decay Nonlinearity Position Position Position Position
Switches 7, 8, 15, 16:

LFOs 1, 2, 3, 4 Stop
Switches 1 & 2:
PCM Transpose +12,
String Transpose +12
Pluck Type Pluck Width Pluck Randomization String Level PCM Osc Noise Pickup 1 Pickup 2
Level Level Level Level
Harmonic Pressure
AMS Intensity
ToneAdjustprovidesanelegantphysicalinterfaceto PluckRandomization
theSTR1sparameters.Mostofthefactorysoundsuse PluckDelay
thedefaultlayout,asshownabove.Youcanalso
customizethelayoutforindividualsounds,ifdesired. PluckWidth
FormoreinformationaboutToneAdjust,pleasesee PluckWidthAMS1Intensity
09f:ToneAdjust,onpage 26.
Noise
STR-1 Tone Adjust parameters NoiseSaturation
TheSTR1supportsalloftheCommonToneAdjust NoiseFilterFrequency
parameters,asdescribedunder09f:ToneAdjust,on
PCM Oscillator
page 26.Italsoaddsanumberofitsownadditional
parameters,whichapplyonlytotheSTR1. PCMOscMSSelect(PROG/016383)
Notethattheseadditionalparametersareseparatefor PCMOscMSBank(MS:ROMMonoEXs7Mono)
eachEXi,asopposedtobeingsharedbybothEXiinthe PCMOscMSMin#(meta)
Program.
PCMOscMSMax#(meta)
Alloftheadditionalparametersarelistedbelow.Tone
PCMOscStartOffset
Adjustparametersmayaffecttheinternalparameters
inoneoftwoways:theymaybeRelative,inwhich PCMOscReverse
casetheyscaletheexistingparametervalue,or
Absolute,inwhichcasetheyoverwritetheexisting PCM Pitch
value.Unlessotherwisenoted,alloftheSTR1 PCMTune(1200...+1200,relative)
parametersareAbsolute. PCMTranspose(12...+12,relative)
Thefullnameofthecurrentlyselectedparameteris PCMPitchSlope
showninthestatuslineatthetopoftheControl
Surfacepage,aswellasinthepopupmenu.Some PCMPitchLFOAMSIntensity
parameterswithlongernamesmayshowan Excitation Mixer
abbreviationfortheslider,knob,andswitchlabels.
ExcitationPCMOscillatorlevel
Pluck ExcitationPluckLevel
PluckType ExcitationNoiseLevel
282
STR-1: Tone Adjust 9-9: String Track
Excitation Filter Attacktime(relative)

ExcitationFilterType Decay&Slopetime(relative)
ExcitationFilterFrequency Sustainlevel(relative)
ExcitationFilterResonance Releasetime(relative)
String LFOs
ExcitationPosition InadditiontosupportingthestandardToneAdjust
HarmonicPosition LFOparameters,theSTR1addsthefollowing
separatecontrols:
HarmonicPressureAMS1Intensity
LFO1,2,3,and4Waveform
Decay
LFO1,2,3,and4Shape
Nonlinearity
LFO3Speed(relative)
Damping
LFO3Fade(relative)
Dispersion
LFO3Delay(relative)
String Pitch LFO3Stop
StringTune(1200...+1200,relative) LFO4Speed(relative)
StringTranspose(12...+12,relative) LFO4Fade(relative)
StringPitchSlope LFO4Delay(relative)
StringPitchLFOAMSIntensity LFO4Stop
Pickups
Pickup1Position
Pickup2Position
Feedback
FeedbackLevelAMSIntensity
FeedbackDistanceAMSIntensity
FeedbackOrientationAMSIntensity
Mixer
StringLevel
PCMOscillatorLevel
NoiseLevel
Pickup1Level
Pickup2Level
Filter A
InadditiontothestandardToneAdjustfilter
parameters,theSTR1addsthefollowing:
FilterAType
FilterACutoff
FilterAResonance
FilterAEGIntensity
FilterALFOIntensity
Filter B
FilterBhasthesameToneAdjustparametersasFilter
A,above.
Amp
AmpAMS1Intensity
AmpAMS2Intensity
EGs
InadditiontosupportingthestandardToneAdjustEG
parameters,theSTR1addsthefollowingseparate
controlsforbothEG3andEG4:
283
284
EXi: MS-20EX
MS-20EX Overview
TheMS20EXisaflexible,semimodularvirtualanalog OriginalMS20MGandsampleandhold,plusfour
synthesizer.Atitsheartisafaithfulrecreationofthe additionalLFOs
originalKORGMS20,includingbothitsfeaturesand AMSmodulationofalloriginalMS20parameters,
itsdistinctive,oftenaggressivetimbralsignature. alongwithfourAMSMixers
Tothiscore,weaddedfeaturesfirstintroducedinthe Liveaudioinput
KORGLegacyMS20plugin.Then,weadded
significantpatchpanelmodificationsinspiredbythe ExternalSignalProcessor,withdedicatedfilters,
MS20sbigbrother,theMS50,plusmanyother triggering,andaudiotoCVconversion
OASYSonlyenhancements.Featuresinclude: AccesstoallstandardEXiProgramfeatures,
KorgsproprietaryCMT(ComponentModeling includingtheCommonLFO,CommonStep
Technology) Sequencer,KeyTrack1&2,KARMA,EQ,and
effectsaswellaslayeringwithanyotherEXi
Upto48voicepolyphony (includingusingtwoMS20EXstogether!)
Twooscillators(includingringmodulation),noise
generator,andresonant,selfoscillatinghighpass MS-20EX uses EXi fixed resources
andlowpassfilters TheMS20EXtakesupaverysmallamountof
ManymodificationstothePatchPanel,including processingpower,evenifyourenotplayinganynotes
separateaccesstoVCOs1&2,LPF,HPF,BPF,and onthekeyboard.Thisamountisaround1/12thatof
VCA theCX3,butifotherEXiareusinglargeamountsof
fixedresources,thenumberofMS20EXthatyoucan
Twonewpatchable2in,1outaudioratemixers, loadmaybelimited.EachEXiineachProgramcounts
forcombiningandscalingaudioandcontrolsignals towardsthemaximum;forinstance,aProgramwith
OriginalMS20HADSRandDARenvelopes,plus twoMS20EXscountsastwo,notasone.
fouradditionalmultistageEGs Formoreinformation,seeCX3&STR1:Limitations
MS-20EX Overview
AMS
EG 3--6 LFO 1-4
LFO1 LFO1 Mixer 1-4
LFO1
LFO1 LFO1 LFO1
LFO1 LFO1 LFO1
VCO 1
VCO
HPF LPF VCA EQ
Mixer
VCO 2
Noise S&H MVCA Mixer 1
MG EG1 EG2 Mixer 2
External Signal Processor

Audio HPF & Audio-to- Env
Amp
Input LPF CV Follower
Legend
Audio, Audio
Audio, per-voice Modulation
per-Program Modulation
285
EXi: MS-20EX
Unsupported EXi Common parameters supported,includingMono,MonoLegato,Unison,etc.
TheMS20EXsupportsalloftheEXiCommon
LegatoOffset).
On-screen knobs and switches, and the Parameter Details area

Editing on/off switches
Parameter Details
Toeditanon/offswitch,suchastheMGKEYSYNC
TheLCDdisplaysincludegraphicknobsforallofthe button,simply:
mainMS20EXparameters.Theseletyouviewand
1. Touchtheswitchtotogglethevalue.
editparametersquicklyandeasily.
YoucanprogramanyoriginalMS20soundusingonly
theseknobs.Ifyouwantmoreflexibilityandcontrol, Assigning AMS modulation
however,theMS20EXoffersfouradditionalEGsand MostparameterssupportmodulationviaAMS.
LFOs,fourAMSmixers,accesstotheEXiPrograms SourcesandintensitiescanbeeditedintheParameter
CommonLFO,CommonStepSequencer,andVector Detailsarea:
features,andAMSmodulationforalmostevery
originalMS20parameter. 1. Touchtheknob.
IftheparametersupportsAMSmodulation,the
Theentrywaytotheseadvancedfeaturesisthe
ParameterDetailsareawillshowoneormoreAMS
ParameterDetailsarea,locatedinthelowerrighthand
sourcesandintensities.
partofthescreen.Thisshowsinformationforthe
selectedknoborswitch,includingitsparametergroup 2. EdittheAMSsettingsintheParameterDetails
andparametername,itsexactvalue,anditsAMS area.
assignments: Note:thegraphicknobsalwaysshowtheirstored
ParameterDetailsarea value.AbsoluteToneAdjustsettingseditthesevalues,
justasifyouwereeditingtheparametersthemselves,
andsothegraphicswillshowtheresults.However,
AMSmodulationdoesnoteditthestoredvalue,andso
thegraphicsdonotincludetheresultsofAMS.
NotealsothatAMScansometimesmodulate
parametersoutsidetherangeofthestoredvalues,asif
youwerepushingtheparameterbeyondtheendsof
theknob.
Using the graphic parameters

Editing knobs
Toeditknobs:
1. Touchtheknob.
Ayellowsquarewillappeararoundtheknob,showing
thatithasbeenselected.TheParameterDetailsarea
willchangetoshowthenameandvalueofthecurrent
parameter,alongwithotherrelatedinformation.
2. Useanyofthedataentrycontrolstoeditthevalue.
Youcanusethevalueslider,theinc/decbuttons,the
rotarydial,orthenumerickeypad.
Asyoueditthevalue,noticethatthegraphicknob
moves,andthatthevalueintheParameterDetailsarea
changesaswell.
286
01: Main
01b
ThisisthemainpageofProgrammode.Forafull Patch Panel

seeEXiProgramP0:Playonpage 159.Thissection ThissectionshowsaminiatureoverviewofthePatch
describesonlytheoverviewdisplay,whichdiffersfor Panel,withitscablesandjacks.Touchthisareatojump
eachindividualEXi. directlytothePatchPanelpage.
EGs and LFOs

EG 36 Graphics
TheseshowtheshapesofthefourmultistageEGs.
importantsettingsfortheProgramstwoEXi
Touchanyofthemtojumpdirectlytothe
parametersfortheMS20EXaredescribedbelow. LFO 14 Graphics
Thegraphicsgiveyouaquickwaytocheckallofthese Theseshowthewaveformsandshapesofthefour
settingsataglance.Theyalsoletyoujumpinstantlyto LFOs.Touchanyofthemtojumpdirectlytothe
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe correspondingeditpage.
sections,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits
parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilter Key Zone
graphic,youllgototheOscillatorandFilterpage.
Key Zone
Tip:PressingEXITseveraltimeswillalwaysbringyou
backtothispage. ThisshowsthekeyzonesforEXi1andEXi2,asseton
theCommonsectionsProgramBasicpage,inrelation
Oscillators and Filters totheentireMIDInoterange.Therangeofthe76note
ThissectionshowsthewaveformsforOscillators1and
2,andthecutofffrequenciesfortheHighpassand PressthisareatojumptotheProgramBasicpage.
Lowpassfilters.Touchthisareatojumpdirectlytothe
Oscillators&Filterspage. Common
MG/EG/Mod themostimportantCommonparameters,whichare
Thissectionshowsthewaveformandfrequencyofthe sharedbybothEXiintheProgram.Thissectionwill
MG,andtheAttackandReleasetimesforEGs1and2. alwaysshowthesameparameters,regardlessofwhich
TouchthisareatojumpdirectlytotheMG,EG,& EXiarebeingused.
Modulationpage.
287
EXi: MS-20EX

eitherPOLYorMONO.

Sequencer.
page.
Common LFO Graphic

3 Band EQ Graphic
IFX, MFX/TFX
page.
KARMA GE Name
page.
288
Program P4: Oscillators & Filters 4-1: Oscillators & Filters
Program P4: Oscillators & Filters
4-1: Oscillators & Filters

41b 41c 41d 41e 41PMC
41a
41f
PW [0.0010.00 (50%0%)]
4-1a: Oscillators
ThisadjuststhepulsewidthwhenOscillator1s
VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR 1 WaveformissettoSquare/Pulse.
0.00producesasquarewave.Increasingthevalue
WAVE FORM [ , , , ] producesnarrowerpulses,untilat10.00thepulseisso
ThissetsthebasictimbreofOscillator1. narrowastobesilent.
(TriangleWave):Thisisaverybasicwaveform TheoriginalMS20didntsupportpulsewidth
withfewharmonicsandasoft,roundedtonecolor. modulation,exceptbysweepingtheknobmanually.
YoucancreateasinewavebyprocessingtheTriangle WiththeMS20EX,however,youcanmodulatePWvia
WavethroughtheLowpassFilter.TheoriginalMS20 AMS.TryusingamediumspeedtriangleLFO,ora
manualnotesthatTrianglewavesareexcellentfor sweepingEG.
flute,vibesandothersucheffects.
More on Pulse Width
Note:TheTriangleisalittlemorecomputationally
Pulsewaveformsaresimple,rectangularshapes.The
intensivethantheotherwaveforms,sousingitwill
PulseWidthsetsthepercentageofthewaveformspent
resultinslightlylowerpolyphony.
intheupposition.Afewexamplesareshowninthe
(Sawtooth):Thisisthefoundationofthe diagrambelow.Notethatasquarewaveisjustapulse
traditional,buzzyanalogsynthsound.Theoriginal wavewithPW/PWMsetto0.00.
MS20manualdescribesitthisway:Awaveformrich
Thewidthcontrolsthetimbreoftheoscillator,from
inalltheharmonics,andoneofthemostusefultothe
pureandhollowat0.00(asquarewave)tothin,reedy,
synthesist.Usedforstring,brass,voiceandother
andnasalathighersettings.
harmonicallyrichsounds.
Atthemaximumsettingof10.00,thePulsewavewill
(Square/PulseWave):Thisisavariable
besilent,sincethiseliminatesthepulsealtogether.
waveformshape,whosetimbredependsuponthePW
setting,asdescribedbelow. Pulse Width = 9.00
Pulse Width = 0.00 Pulse Width = 5.00
(WhiteNoise):Thisisanunpitchedsound,
containingequalamountsofallfrequencies.The
originalMS20manualsuggestsusingthisforwind,
surf,gunshot,percussion,andothersucheffects.
289
EXi: MS-20EX
SCALE [32, 16, 8, 4] Now,theselectedswitchwillenableanddisable

AdjuststhepitchofOscillator1instepsofanoctave. Portamento.ItwillalsosendtheMIDIPortamento
Witheachhalvingofthefeetvalue,thepitchgoesup controller,CC#65.
oneoctave.Forexample,4isoneoctavehigherthan EvenifyoudontassignSW1/2toPortamento,you
8,and16isoneoctavelowerthat8. canstilluseMIDIController#65toturnPortamento
onandoff.
VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR 2
FINE TUNE
WAVE FORM [ , , , RING]
ThissetsthebasictimbreofOscillator2. FINE TUNE [5.00+5.00]
(Sawtooth):Thisproducesthetraditional,buzzy Thisadjuststhepitchoftheoscillators,instepsof1/5
analogsynthsound.Formoreinformation,seeWAVE ofacent(foratotalrangeof+/1semitone).
FORMonpage 289.
FREQUENCY MODULATION
(SquareWave):Thisisahollowsounding
waveform,containingonlyoddnumberedharmonics EachoftheFREQUENCYMODULATIONcontrols
present.TheoriginalMS20manualnotesthatthisis affectsbothVCO1andVCO2.
usedtosimulatereedinstrumentsandotherclosed MG/T.EXT [0.0010.00]
pipesounds.
IfnothingisconnectedtothepatchpanelsTOTAL
(PulseWave):Thisisarelativelynarrowpulse inputjack,thisadjuststhedepthofpitchmodulation
waveform,withanasaltonequalityandstrongupper fromtheMGsTriangleWave.
harmonics.TheoriginalMS20manualsuggeststhatit
beusedtosimulatedoublereedinstruments(e.g.,the IfacableisconnectedtotheTOTALinputjack,this
oboe)andcertainpluckedstringsounds(e.g., controlsthedepthofpitchmodulationfromthat
harpsichordandclavinet). signal.
RING(RingModulator):Thissettingcombinesthe Formoreinformation,seeTOTALinputjackon
twoVCOstocreatesumsanddifferencesofalltheir page 299.
harmonics,creatingacomplextone.TheoriginalMS ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#77.
20manualdescribesitthisway:Theresultisa
clangorous,metallicsoundwhichisusefulforgong, EG1/EXT [0.0010.00]
chimeandothersucheffects.VCO1andVCO2 IfnothingisconnectedtothepatchpanelsFREQjack,
SCALE,PITCH,andPWallaffecttheresultingsound, thiscontrolsthedepthofpitchmodulationfromEG1.
andshouldbeusedjudiciouslytocreatethedesired IfacableisconnectedtotheFREQjack,thiscontrols
effect. thedepthofpitchmodulationfromthatsignal.
PITCH [12.00+12.00] WithnothingconnectedtotheFREQjack,try
ThisadjuststhepitchofOscillator2upanddownby increasingtheEG1/EXTvalue,andthenplayanoteon
oneoctave,inonecentsteps.Youcancreatethicker thekeyboard.Noticethatthepitchofthenoterisesand
soundsbymovingthisslightlyawayfrom0.00,sothat fallscorrespondingtoEG1sDELAY,ATTACK,and
thetwooscillatorsbeatagainstoneanother. RELEASEcontrols.
WiththenormalledconnectiontoEG1,thepitch
SCALE [16, 8, 4, 2] alwaysstartslow,risestotheplayednote,andthen
ThisadjuststhepitchofOscillator2instepsofan fallsagainonrelease.ThesettingoftheEG1/EXTknob
octave.Notethattherangeisoneoctavehigherthan determinesthelowpointofthismodulation,whilethe
thatofOscillator1. highpointstaysconstant.
Youcancreateadifferenteffectbymanuallypatching
PORTAMENTO
theEG1OUTjackintotheFREQjack.Inthiscase,the
TIME [0.0010.00] pitchwillstartattheplayednote,riseuptothe
EG1/EXTsetting,andthenfallbacktotheplayednote.
Thiscontrolstheamountoftimeittakestoglidefrom
onepitchtothenext. VCO Mixer
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#5.Youcanalsoenable
ThismixercontrolsthelevelsofthetwoVCOsintothe
anddisablePortamentousingMIDICC#65
HighpassFilter.
(PortamentoSwitch).
Notethatbothfilterswillshowsomeamountof
Assigning SW1 or SW2 to Portamento On/Off saturationandoverdrivewhentheirinputlevelsare
Youcanusethetwoassignableswitches,SW1and high,andPEAKsettingsaremoderateorhigh.Youcan
SW2,toturnportamentoonandoff. controltheresultingtonebyrasingorloweringthe
VCOlevelsinthismixer.
Todoso:
1. GotoProgrampage18,ControllerSetup. VCO 1 LEVEL [0.0010.00]
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,seteitherSW1orSW2 ThisadjuststhevolumeofOscillator1.
toPortamentoSW(CC#65).
VCO 2 LEVEL [0.0010.00]
ThisadjuststhevolumeofOscillator2.
290
Program P4: Oscillators & Filters 4-1: Oscillators & Filters
IfacableisconnectedtotheTOTALinputjack,this
4-1b: High Pass Filter controlsthedepthofmodulationfromthatsignal.
HPF Formoreinformation,seeTOTALinputjackon
page 299.
Thisfiltercutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhichare
lowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto EG2/EXT [0.0010.00]
maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy,orto IfnothingisconnectedtotheHPFsCUTOFFFREQ
enhancebasssounds(seeUsingtheHPFasasub inputjack,thisadjuststhedepthtowhichEG2will
oscillatorforbasssounds,below). modulatethefiltercutofffrequency.
FREQUENCY [0.0010.00] IfacableisconnectedtotheHPFsCUTOFFFREQ
inputjack,thiscontrolsthedepthofmodulationfrom
ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyoftheHighpass
thatsignal.
Filter.
PEAK [0.0010.00]
4-1c: Low Pass Filter
Peakcontrolstheresonanceofthefilter,which
emphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthecutoff LPF
frequency.
TheLowpassFiltercutsoutthepartsofthesound
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and whicharehigherthanthecutofffrequency.Thisisthe
frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright
smoothly. timbressounddarker.
ofthefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormore FREQUENCY [0.0010.00]
extreme. ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyoftheLowpass
Filter.
separate,whistlingpitch.Nearthemaximumsetting, ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#74.
thefilterwillselfoscillate.
PEAK [0.0010.00]
PEAK and filter saturation Peakcontrolstheresonanceofthefilter,which
Iftheinputlevelishigh,raisingthePEAKsettingwill emphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthecutoff
causeincreasingamountsofsaturationandoverdrive, frequency.Formoreinformation,seePEAK,above.
creatingamoreaggressivetone.Tocontrolthis,raise ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#71.
orlowertheinputlevelatthesourceforinstance,in
theVCOMIXER. CUTOFF FREQUENCY MODULATION (LPF)
Using the HPF as a sub-oscillator for bass sounds MG/T.EXT [0.0010.00]
WithPEAKsetrelativelyhigh,andFREQUENCY IfnothingisconnectedtotheTOTALinputjack,this
turneddownlow,theHPFcansomewhatcounter adjuststhedepthtowhichtheMGwillmodulatethe
intuitivelybeusedtoenhancelowendharmonics, filtercutofffrequency.
creatingthunderouslydeepbasssounds.Todoso:
IfacableisconnectedtotheTOTALinputjack,this
1. Startwithasimplebasssound. controlsthedepthofmodulationfromthatsignal.
2. OnthePatchPanel,connecttheKBDCVOUTto Formoreinformation,seeTOTALinputjackon
theHPFCUTOFFFREQinput. page 299.
ThisallowstheHPFtotrackthekeyboard.
EG2/EXT [0.0010.00]
3. SettheHPFPEAKtoaround7or8.
IfnothingisconnectedtotheLPFsCUTOFFFREQ
4. SettheHPFFREQUENCYverylow,butnotquite
inputjack,thisadjuststhedepthtowhichEG2will
at0.
modulatethefiltercutofffrequency.
5. SettheEG2/EXTknobtoabout5.
IfacableisconnectedtotheLPFsCUTOFFFREQ
6. Whileplayingthesound,adjusttheFREQUENCY inputjack,thiscontrolsthedepthofmodulationfrom
andEG2/EXTsettingssothatthefilterresonance thatsignal.
tracksthepitchcorrectlyintheintendedplaying
range. ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#79.
Withthissetup,theresonancewillonlymatchthe
oscillatorpitchesoveraboutoneandahalfoctaves. 4-1d: PITCH
CUTOFF FREQUENCY MODULATION (HPF) BEND RANGE [0.0012.00]
Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbendupand
MG/T.EXT [0.0010.00] down,insemitonesandcents,ascontrolledbyJSX.To
IfnothingisconnectedtothepatchpanelsTOTAL useanotherAMSsourceforpitchbend,modulatethe
inputjack,thisadjuststhedepthtowhichtheMGwill TRANSPOSEparameterinstead.
modulatethefiltercutofffrequency.
BENDRANGEisnotmodulatableviaAMS.
291
EXi: MS-20EX
TRANSPOSE [-24.00+24.00] AMS [List of AMS Sources]

Thiscontrolsthecoarsetuning,inhalfstepsandcents, Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheselected
upordowntwooctaves.Youcanmodulatethis parameter.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
smoothlyviaAMS. ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Intensity [range depends on parameter]

4-1e: PAN & ANALOG ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
PAN [Random, L001C064R127] modulation.Forunipolarparameters,therangeisthe
sameasthatoftheselectedparameter,inbothpositive
ThiscontrolsthestereopanoftheMS20EX,atthevery andnegativedirections.Forinstance,iftheparameter
endofthesignalchain.AsettingofL001placesthe rangeis0.0010.00,theIntensityrangewillbe
soundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,andR127tothe 10.00+10.00.
farright.
Forbipolarparameters,includingVCO2PITCH,
WhenthisissettoRandom,thepanpositionwillbe FINETUNE,TRANSPOSE,andMIXERS1&2
differentforeachnoteon. LEVELSA&B,therangeistwicethatoftheoriginal
YoucanalsosetthisPanparameterdirectlyfromthe parameter.Forinstance,iftheoriginalparameterrange
ControlSurfaceknobs.Todoso: is12.00+12.00,theIntensityrangewillbe
24.00+24.00.Thisallowsfullmodulationofthe
parameter,regardlessoftheinitialsetting.
PAN. Insomecases,youcanuseAMStomodulatethe
parameteroutsideofitsoriginalrange,forawider
3. MoveKnob1tosetthepanforEXi1,andKnob2 rangeofvalues.
tosetthepanforEXi2.
YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).A Int. Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]
CC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft, YoucanmodulatethemainAMSIntensityfrom
64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythe anotherAMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.
Panparameter,and127placesthesoundatthefar ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
right. Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Note:youcanselectRandompanonlyfromtheon
screenUI,andnotfromAMS,MIDIortheControl Intensity [range depends on parameter]
surface. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
ModAMS.TheresultissummedwiththemainAMS
ANALOG [0.0010.00] Intensitytoproducethefinalmodulationamount.
Thismodelstheinstabilityofananalogsystemby
addingsubtlerandomizationtotheVCOandVCF
frequencies. t 41: Page Menu Commands
Thisparameterisnotmodulatable. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
4-1f: Parameter Details commandsonpage 142.
Whenyoutouchaknob,ayellowsquareappears 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
aroundit,showingthatithasbeenselected. Programonpage 142.
Thisareashowsdetailsfortheselectedknob,including 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
itsparametergroupandparametername,itsexact ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
value,anditsAMSassignments.
Individual parameters and AMS

TheBENDRANGEandANALOGparametersarenot
modulatable.VCO1/2WAVEFORM,VCO1/2
SCALE,andPANhaveonlyoneAMSsourceand
Intensity,withoutIntensityModulation.Therestofthe
parametersonthispagecanbemodulatedbytwo
AMSsources,asdescribedbelow.
(Parameter group)
Thisshowsthegroupoftheparameter(suchasVCO
MIXER).
(Parameter name) [range depends on parameter]

Thisshowsthenameandexactvalueoftheparameter.
Youcanedittheparametervaluewithanyofthe
standarddataentrycontrols.
292
Program P5: MG, EG, & Modulation 5-1: MG, EG, & Modulation
Program P5: MG, EG, & Modulation
5-1: MG, EG, & Modulation

51d 51e 51f 51g 51PMC
51a
51b
51h
51c
ViaAMS,EGs36mayalsocontrolthelevelsof
51a: VOLTAGE CONTROLLED AMPLIFIER othermodulationsources(suchasEGs1&2,the
MG,LFOs,etc.)routedthroughMIXER1orMIXER
VOICE ALLOCATION [EG1EG6]
2,andthenpatchedtotheVCAINITIALGAIN
WhentheEGselectedherecompletesitsreleasestage, input
thevoicewillbesilenced,anditsprocessorresources
Tohandleallofthesepossiblecases,insteadofusinga
freed.
fixedAmpEGtodeterminewhenthevoiceis
Normally,youshouldleavethisatthedefaultsetting, finishedplaying,theVOICEALLOCATION
EG2. parameterletsyouselectwhichEGtouse.
IfEGsotherthanEG2aremodulatingvolume(see Forbestresultswithanyofthesespecialcasesetups,
below),thenselectthevolumerelatedEGwiththe setVOICEALLOCATIONtousethevolumerelated
longestreleasetime. EGwiththelongestreleasetime.
Note:theEGselectedherecannotberetriggeredonce
itentersitsreleasephase.
51b: MODULATION GENERATOR (MG)
What does this mean, and when is it useful?
OASYSallocatesprocessingpowerautomaticallyas TheMGissharedbetweenallMS20EXvoices,similar
youplayandreleasenotes.Inordertodothis,the totheCommonLFO.Forpervoicemodulation,use
systemneedstoknowwhenavoicehasfinished LFOs14instead.
playing.
Thesaw/triangleandpulse/squarewaveformsareboth
WithmostEXi,thesystemdoesthisbylookingatthe generatedallofthetime,andavailableseparatelyon
dedicatedAmpEG;whentheAmpEGcompletesits thePatchPanel.EachisalsoavailableasanAMS
release,thesystemknowsthatthevoicehasfinished. source,namedMGTriandMGPulse,respectively.
TheMS20EXismorecomplicatedthanmostEXi. NotethattheAMSversionswillhaveslightlysofter
DependingonthePatchPanelandAMSsettings, edgesthanthesignalsavailableonthePatchPanel,and
severalEGsmayacttogethertocontroltheoutput viatheExternalModulationsections.
volume.Forinstance:
TEMPO SYNC [ON, OFF]
EG1andEGs36mayberoutedtothePatch
Touchthetext/LEDareatoturnTEMPOSYNConand
PanelsVCAINITIALGAINinput
off.
EGs36maycontroltheVOLUMEknobviaAMS
293
EXi: MS-20EX
On(LEDlit):WhenTEMPOSYNCisOn,theMG EG1isnormalledtoVCOfrequencymodulation
synchronizestothesystemtempo,assetbyeitherthe (scaledbytheEG1/EXTknob),aswellastheMVCA
TempoknoborMIDIClock.TheMGspeedis controlinput(see61f:ModulationVCA(MVCA)
controlledbythecombinationoftheBASENOTEand onpage 302).
FREQUENCY/TIMESparameters,below.
Off(LEDdark):WhenTEMPOSYNCisOff,the
FREQUENCY/TIMESknobdeterminesthespeedof
theMG,andtheBASENOTEsettinghasnoeffect. Change to
Parameter
ThisparameterisnotmodulatableviaAMS. Value Time
Delay Attack Release

KEY SYNC [ON, OFF] Time Time Time
Touchthetext/LEDareatoturnKEYSYNConandoff.
Trigger On Trigger Off
IfthissettingisON,thephaseisresetforthefirstnote
onineachlegatophrase.Subsequentnotesinachord, DELAY TIME [0.0010.00]
ornotesplayedlegato,donotcausethephasetobe
Adjuststhetimefromwhenthetriggeroccurs(e.g.,
reset.
noteon)untiltheATTACKTIMEstarts.
ThisparameterisnotmodulatableviaAMS.
Forstandardattackreleasebehavior,settheDELAY
BASE NOTE [1/11/32] TIMEto0.00.
WhenTEMPOSYNCisON,thissetsthebasicspeed ATTACK TIME [0.0010.00]
oftheMG,relativetothesystemtempo.Thevalues
AdjuststhetimefromtheendoftheDELAYTIME
rangefroma32ndnotetoawholenote,including
untiltheEGreachesitsmaximumvalue.
triplets.Thisvalueisthenmultipliedbythe
FREQUENCY/TIMESknob,below. RELEASE TIME [0.0010.00]
WhenTEMPOSYNCisOFF,thisparameterhasno Adjuststhetimefromwhenthetriggerisreleased
effect. (e.g.,noteoff)untiltheleveldecaystozero.
WAVE FORM [ ] 51d: ENVELOPE GENERATOR 2

ThiscontrolsthewaveformoftheMODULATION Bydefault,EG2istriggeredbynoteons.However,
GENERATOR.TheMGalwaysgeneratesboththe youcanusethePatchPanelsTRIGINjacktotriggerit
RectangleandSawtooth/Trianglewaveforms,andeach fromadifferentsource,suchastheMG,AMSsources,
isavailablesimultaneouslyviathePatchPanel.The ortheESPsTRIGOUTjack.Formoreinformation,see
WAVEFORMknobcontrolsthepulsewidthofthe TRIGINjackonpage 301.
Rectanglewave,andmakestheSawtooth/Triangle EG2ishardwiredtotheVCA,andalsonormalledto
leanfromlefttoright,asshowninthegraphics. controltheHPFandLPF.YoucaneasilyuseotherEGs
FREQUENCY/TIMES [0.00...10.00/16...1] forthefilters,viaAMS;usingotherEGsfortheVCAis
possiblebutslightlymoretricky,asdescribedunder
IfTEMPOSYNCisOFF,thiscontrolsthefrequencyof UsingEGs36tocontroltheamplitudeonpage 295.
theMG.
IfTEMPOSYNCisON,thismultipliesthelengthof
theBASENOTE.Forinstance,iftheBASENOTEis
settoasixteenthnote,andTimesissetto3,theMG Change to
willcycleoveradottedeighthnote.Notethathigher Parameter
Value Time
valuesmeanafasterMG.
Attack Decay Sustain Release
Frequency/Times LED Time Time Level Time
ThisLEDgivesavisualindicationoftheLFOspeed. Trigger On Trigger Off

NotethattheLEDisonwhentheMGspulse/square
waveformislow.Initially,thisseemsliketheopposite HOLD TIME [0.0010.00]
ofwhatonemightexpect.WhenusingtheMGto
Adjuststhetimeforwhichtheinputstateofthetrigger
triggertheEGs,however,thismakesperfectsense:the
signal(e.g.,noteon)isheldafterthetriggerisreleased.
EGsstartwhentheLEDgoeson,andreleasewhenthe
LEDgoesoff. IftheEGistriggeredbyaveryshortpulse,itmaynot
havetimetocompleteitsattackanddecaytimesbefore
goingintorelease.IncreasingtheHOLDTIME
51c: ENVELOPE GENERATOR 1 effectivelymakesthetriggerpulselonger,givingthe
Bydefault,EG1istriggeredbynoteons.However, EGmoretimetocompleteitsattackanddecay.
youcanusethePatchPanelsTRIGINorEG1TRIG
INjackstotriggeritfromadifferentsource,suchas
theMG,AMSsources,ortheESPsTRIGOUTjack.
Formoreinformation,seeTRIGINjackonpage 301.
294
Program P5: MG, EG, & Modulation 5-1: MG, EG, & Modulation
EG2HOLDTIME 1. OnthePatchPanelpage,selectthemain
VOLUMEknob.
Trigger Trigger
On Off
Hold Time
2. SettheVOLUMEknobto0.
3. SettheVOLUMEAMSIntensityto+10.00.
4. AssignthedesiredEG(36)astheknobsAMS
source.
Change to
Parameter 5. SettheVOICEALLOCATIONparametertothe
Value Time sameEG.
Attack Decay Sustain Release 6. SelecttheModSwitchjack.
Time Time Level Time
7. SettheModSwitchAMSSourcetoAMSMixer1.
ATTACK TIME [0.0010.00] 8. InAMSMixer1,settheTypetoGate,theSource
AdjuststhetimefromtheEGtrigger(e.g.,noteon) toNoteNumber,andtheThresholdto99.
untiltheEGreachesitsmaximumvalue. 9. SetbothBelowThresholdandAt&Above
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#73. Thresholdtofixedvaluesof+33.
Thesesettingsproducea5voltsignalonthePatch
DECAY TIME [0.0010.00] Panel,which,whenconnectedtotheINITIALGAIN
AdjuststhetimetheEGtakestodescendfromthepeak input,setstheVCAtoitsmaximumlevel.Thisletsyou
tothesustainlevel.Italsocontrolstherateatwhich controltheamplitudeentirelyviatheVOLUMEAMS.
SUSTAINLEVEL,below,respondstoAMS 10.OnthePatchPanel,connecttheModSwitchjack
modulation. totheVCAINITIALGAINinput.
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#75. 11.FortheEGassignedinstep4,setupthetimes,
levels,andcurvaturesasdesired.
SUSTAIN LEVEL [0.0010.00]
RemembertousecurvatureontheEGsegments,foran
Adjuststhesustainlevel.TheEGwillstayatthislevel
analogfeel!
untilthetriggerisreleased(suchaswhenthenoteis
released).UnlikemostotherEGs,thislevelrespondsto
AMSmodulationinrealtime,movingatthe 51e: EXTERNAL MODULATION 1
programmedDECAYTIME.
Source [Off, MG Tri, MG Pulse, EG 1, EG 1 REV,
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#70.
EG 2, EG 2 REV, List of AMS Sources]
Note:withthedefaultconnectiontotheHPFandLPF
Thisselectsthemodulationsourcetocontrolthe
frequencies,thissettinghasaslightlyunusualeffect.
parametersbelow.ForalistofAMSsources,see
TheSUSTAINLEVELalwaysproducesthesameeffect
asthesettingoftheFREQUENCYknob.TheEG2/EXT
page 1021.
settingcontrolstheintensityofthefiltermodulation
duringtheAttack,Decay,andReleaseportionsofthe HPF CUTOFF [10.00+10.00]
envelope,butdoesnotaffecttheSustainatall.
Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation
Effectively,theEGshiftsupanddowninverselytothe appliedtothehighpassfilter(HPF)CUTOFF
SUSTAINLEVEL,asshownbelow.Whenthe FREQUENCY.
SUSTAINishigh,theEGshiftsdown;whenthe
SUSTAINislow,theEGshiftsup. LPF CUTOFF [10.00+10.00]
Change to
Filter Frequency
appliedtothelowpassfilter(LPF)CUTOFF
Sustain = Low FREQUENCY
VCO1 PULSE WIDTH [10.00+10.00]

FREQUENCY
knob setting Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation
Sustain = Medium appliedtotheoscillator1(VCO1)PULSEWIDTH.
Sustain = High
VCO2 PITCH [24.00+24.00]
RELEASE TIME [0.0010.00] appliedtotheoscillator2(VCO2)PITCH,in
semitones.
Adjuststhetimefromthetriggerrelease(e.g.,noteoff)
untiltheleveldecaystozero. AMP [10.00+10.00]
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#72. Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation
appliedtotheamp(VCA).Thisscalesthecombined
Using EGs 36 to control the amplitude
effectoftheVOLUMEknobanditsAMSmodulation.
EG2isalwaysconnectedtotheVCA.Itspossible,
however,toforcetheVCAtoitsmaximumvalueatall
times,andthenuseAMSmodulationofthemain
VOLUMEknobtocontroltheamplitudefromanyof
themultisegmentEGs36.Todoso:
295
EXi: MS-20EX
Thisareashowsdetailsfortheselectedknob,including
51f: EXTERNAL MODULATION 2 itsparametergroupandparametername,itsexact
value,anditsAMSassignments.
Source [Off, MG Tri, MG Pulse, EG 1, EG 1 REV,
EG 2, EG 2 REV, List of AMS Sources] Individual parameters and AMS
Thisselectsthemodulationsourcetocontrolthe TheEXTERNALMODULATIONknobs,BASENOTE
parametersbelow.ForalistofAMSsources,see parameter,andTEMPOSYNCandKEYSYNC
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston switchesarenotmodulatable.
page 1021.
Therestoftheparametersonthispagecanbe
HPF CUTOFF [10.00+10.00] modulatedbyAMS,asdescribedbelow.
Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation (Parameter group)
appliedtothehighpassfilter(HPF)CUTOFF
Thisshowsthegroupoftheparameter(suchasVCO
FREQUENCY.
MIXER).
LPF CUTOFF [10.00+10.00]
appliedtothelowpassfilter(LPF)CUTOFF
Youcanedittheparametervaluewithanyofthe
FREQUENCY.
standarddataentrycontrols.
FM MG/T.EXT [10.00+10.00]
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheselected
appliedtoFREQUENCYMODULATIONMG/T.EXT.
parameter.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
HPF MG/T.EXT [10.00+10.00] ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation Intensity [range depends on parameter]
appliedtothehighpassfilterCUTOFFFREQUENCY
MODULATIONMG/T.EXT.
modulation.Formoreinformation,seeIntensityon
LPF MG/T.EXT [10.00+10.00] page 292.
Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation Int. Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]
appliedtothelowpassfilterCUTOFFFREQUENCY
YoucanmodulatethemainAMSIntensityfrom
MODULATIONMG/T.EXT.
anotherAMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.
5-1g: Mixers Intensity [range depends on parameter]

MIXER 1 ModAMS.TheresultissummedwiththemainAMS
Intensitytoproducethefinalmodulationamount.
ThiscontrolstheinputvolumesforthePatchPanels
Mixer1.Formoreinformation,seeMIXER1on
page 303. t 51: Page Menu Commands
LEVEL A [10.00+10.00] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Thissetsthelevelandpolarityofthefirstinput.
LEVEL B [10.00+10.00] commandsonpage 142.
Thissetsthelevelandpolarityofthesecondinput. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
MIXER 2 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ThiscontrolstheinputvolumesforthePatchPanels ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Mixer1.Formoreinformation,seeMIXER2on
page 303.
LEVEL A [10.00+10.00]
Thissetsthelevelandpolarityofthefirstinput.
LEVEL B [10.00+10.00]
Thissetsthelevelandpolarityofthesecondinput.
5-1h: Parameter Details

Whenyoutouchaknob,ayellowsquareappears
aroundit,showingthatithasbeenselected.
296
Program P6: Patch Panel 6-1: Patch Panel
Program P6: Patch Panel
6-1: Patch Panel

61e 61b 61c
61a
61i
61d
61j
61f
61k
61l
61g 61h
1. Touchoneofthetwojacks(eitherinputoroutput).
Using the Patch Panel
Ayellowsquarewillappeararoundtheselectedjack.
Basic patching rules TheDetailPanelwillalsoshowthenameofthe
selectedjack,andwhatitisconnectedto.
MostofthemainsectionsoftheMS20EX,including
theVCOs,filters,MG,EGs,andsoon,areconnected 2. Touchthesamejackagain.
bydefault,evenwithoutusinganypatchcables.The Theyellowsquarewillbegintoblink,showingthat
linesandarrowsonthePatchPanelshowthese youreabouttomakeaconnection.Tocancelthisand
normalsignalpaths. returntothenormalselectedstate,justtouchthesame
Pluggingacableintoaninputjackdisconnectsthe jackathirdtime.
normalpath,andusesthesignalfromthecable 3. Touchtheotherjack.
instead.Forexample,theMGisnormalledtothe Thetwojackswillnowbeconnected.
TOTALinputjack.IfyouconnecttheEG1OUTjackto
theTOTALinput,thisdisconnectstheMG. Deleting connections
Eachinputcanbeconnectedtoasingleoutput,andno Todeleteaconnectionbetweentwopatchpoints:
more(althoughasingleoutputcanbeconnectedto 1. Touchtheinputjack.
multipleinputs,asdescribedbelow).Ifyouwantto
routetwooutputstoasingleinput,useoneofthe Note:youcanalsoselecttheoutputjack.However,if
mixerstomergetheoutputsfirst. theoutputisconnectedtomorethanoneinput,allof
theconnectionsfromthatoutputwillbeaffected.
Pluggingacableintoanoutputjackletsyouusethe
signalelsewhereonthepatchpanel,anddoesnot 2. PresstheDisconnectbuttonintheDetailPanel.
interruptthenormalpath.Youcanalsoconnecta Theselectedconnectionwillbedeleted.
singleoutputtoanynumberofinputs,ifyoulike;this Todeleteallconnectionsfromanoutput:
issometimescalledamult.Thesignalstrength
remainsthesame,asifyouwereusingadistribution 1. Touchtheoutputjack.
amplifier. 2. PresstheDisconnectbuttonintheDetailPanel.
Connectionsfromoneinputtoanother,orfromone Alloftheoutputsconnectionswillbedeleted.Thisis
outputtoanother,arenotallowed. convenientifanoutputhasbeenconnectedtomultiple
inputs,andyouwanttoclearallofthematonce.
Making connections
Tomakeaconnectionbetweentwopatchpoints:
297
EXi: MS-20EX
Clearing all connections from the Patch Panel Different jacks have different voltage scales
TocompletelyclearthePatchPanel,sothatyoucan Payattentiontothevoltageindications(0~+5,5V~+5V,
startfromscratch: 5Vpp,GND,etc.)onthePatchPanel,andtheir
1. Openthemenu,andselecttheDeleteAll relationshipstotheblockdiagramandsignalflow
Connectionscommand. chart.
Allconnectionswillbedeleted. Forinstance,ifyouconnecta5~+5Vcontrolsignaltoa
0~+5Vinputjack,nothingwillhappenduringthe
5~0Vportionofthecontrolsignal.Itwillonlyoperate
from0Vto+5V.Alwaysconsiderboththe
characteristicsoftheoutputandtheinput.
PatchPanelmodificationsnewinputs/outputsshowninred
MixVCO1andVCO2together,andthenroutethe
Patch Panel modifications mixthroughtheHPFandLPFinparallel,insteadof
IncomparisontotheoriginalMS20,theMS20EXhas inseries
someimportantadditionalfeaturesonthePatchPanel. UseAMSoftheMIXERLEVELStomodulatethe
Theseinclude: relativelevelsoftheseparallelfilters,fromphysical
Individualaccesstoeachofthetwooscillators,two controllers,LFOs,EGs,etc.
filters,andfinalVCA Routeanyaudiosource(suchasaVCOorthe
SeparateEXiAUDIOINPUTandBANDPASS NOISEGENERATOR)throughtheBANDPASS
FILTERIN,whichallowyoutoroutesignals FILTER,andthenmixtheresultsbackintoeither
throughthebandpassfilterand/orfrequencytocv theHPForLPF,ortothefinalVCA
converter,whileusingtheaudioinputseparately Invertthepolarityofamodulationoraudiosignal
Dualtwoinputmixerswithphaseinversion viaMIXER1or2
Thesemodificationsopenupmanynewpossibilities, UseVCO1or2tomodulateLPForHPFcutoffs,or
suchas: VCAgain
RouteVCO1throughtheHPF,andVCO2 ReversetheorderoftheLPFandHPF(most
throughtheLPF(orviceversa) noticeablewithhighPEAKsettings)
...andmanymoreavenuesforyoutoexploreon
yourown.
298
TOTAL input jack

Tip: Creating self-triggering patches
ThisinputmodulatesthefrequenciesofVCOs1and2,
Normally,newnotesandEGs1and2aretriggeredby theHPF,andtheLPF.ItsnormalledtotheMG
playingnotesonthekeyboard.Theydonthavetobe, sawtooth/triangleoutput,butyoucanusepatchcables
however.YoucanusetheMGSquare/Pulseoutput,the toconnectanyothermodulationsource.
TrigOutoftheExternalSignalProcessor,orAMS
Eachofthedestinationshasaknobtoscaletheamount
signalsfromtheWheelorSwitchjackstotriggeroneor
ofmodulationfromtheTOTALinput.Formore
bothEGs.
information,see:
Note:EGs1and2triggerwhentheinputisat0
VCO1and2pitch:MG/T.EXTonpage 290
(low),suchaswhentheMGSquare/Pulseisinthe
bottomportionofthewaveform.TheMGsindicator HPFfrequency:MG/T.EXTonpage 291
LEDisonduringthisportionofthewaveform. LPFfrequency:MG/T.EXTonpage 291
YoucanalsouseAMS(suchasLFOs)toresetEGs36,
FREQ input jack
ifdesired.Finally,theCommonStepSequencerand
LFOcanalsoberesetviaaselectionofcontrollers, ThisinputmodulatesthefrequenciesofVCOs1and2.
includingtheVectorEGCCs. ThesignalisscaledbytheEG1/EXTknob,asdescribed
underEG1/EXTonpage 290.
Evenwhenapatchisselftriggering,itwillonlyplay
whenanoteisplayedonthekeyboard,heldbythe VCO CV (Control Voltage) inputs
damperpedal,orheldviatheProgramBasicpages
Holdparameter.Whenthenoteisreleased(bylifting
uponthekeyboardordamperpedal,orturningoff
Hold),theEGselectedbytheVOICEALLOCATION
parameterwillautomaticallyenteritsreleasephase,
andwillnolongerretrigger.AllotherEGswill
continuetoretrigger,accordingtothePatchPaneland
AMSsettings.
Insomecases,youmaywantsomeelementsofthe
patchtoretriggerautomatically,whileothersarestill
triggeredfromthekeyboard.Toallowthekeyboardto VCO 1+2 CV IN jack
actasatriggerwhileyouareholdingthesustainpedal ThiscontrolsthebasicpitchofbothVCO1andVCO2.
(orwhileHoldisenabled): Normally,thissignalcomesfromthenotesplayedon
1. SelecttheKBDTRIGOUTjack. thekeyboard(orviaMIDI).Youcanpatchother
2. IntheParameterDetailsbox,setTriggerOnto signalsintothisjacktocreatespecialeffects,orto
NoteGate. followthepitchofanexternalaudioinput.
Formoreinformation,seeKBDTRIGOUTjackon VCO 2 CV IN jack
page 306.
ThisissimilartoVCO1+2CVINjack,above,but
affectsVCO2only.
61a: VCOs 1 and 2
61b: HPF and LPF
FordescriptionsoftheVCOparameters,see41a:
Oscillatorsonpage 289. EXT SIGNAL IN jack
ThisisadirectinputtotheHPF,summedwiththe
(VCO 1) OUT jack outputoftheVCOMixer.
ThisPatchPanelmodificationprovidestheoutputof
VCO1. (HPF) CUTOFF FREQ input jack
Thisinputmodulatesthecutofffrequencyofthe
(VCO 2) OUT jack HighpassFilter.
VCO2. (HPF) OUT jack
theHighpassFilter.
299
EXi: MS-20EX
(LPF) CUTOFF FREQ input jack SIGNAL OUT jack

Thisinputmodulatesthecutofffrequencyofthe OntheoriginalMS20,thiswasthefinaloutput.With
LowpassFilter. theMS20EX,youmayfinditusefulforroutingthe
overalloutputsignalbackintothepatchsuchasfor
(LPF) IN jack creatingafeedbackloop.
ThisPatchPanelmodificationprovidesadirectinput Notethatconnectingtothisjackdoesnotmutethe
totheLowpassFilter. outputsignal.
(LPF) OUT jack PHONES output jack
ThisPatchPanelmodificationprovidestheoutputof OntheoriginalMS20,thiswasusedforheadphones
theLowpassFilter. (ofcourse!).WiththeMS20EX,youcanuseittoroute
theoveralloutputsignalbackintothepatch,aswith
61c: VCA, VOLUME, and outputs theSIGNALOUTjack,above.
Sinceitsoriginalpurposewastodriveheadphones,the
gainofthePHONESoutputisabout15dBhigherthan
thatoftheSIGNALOUT.Italsoclips(withdistortion)
ataround5dBbelowthemaxoutputlevel.
61d: MODULATION GENERATOR and

SAMPLE & HOLD
VCA IN jack
ThisPatchPanelmodificationprovidesadirectinput
tothemainVCA.
INITIAL GAIN input jack

TheVCAisinternallypatchedtotheoutputofEG2.
ThisjackallowsanexternalcontrollertovarytheVCA
inadditiontoEG2.
Whenthesumofbothcontrollersreaches5volts,no
furtherchangesinvolumewilloccur.
VOLUME [POWER OFF, 0.0110.00]

MODULATION GENERATOR (MG)
ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumeleveloftheMS20EX.
NotethatyoucanmodulatethisviaAMS,foreach TheMGhasseparateoutputsforitstwobasic
individualvoice;formoreinformation,seeUsingEGs waveforms,sothatyoucanusebothsimultaneously.
36tocontroltheamplitudeonpage 295. FordescriptionsoftheMGparameters,see51b:
MODULATIONGENERATOR(MG)onpage 293.
The Control Surface and volume
YoucanalsocontrolthevolumesofEXi1and2 OUT jack (saw/triangle)
directlyfromtheControlSurfacesliders.Thesevolume Thisistheoutputforthesaw/trianglewaveform.The
levelsareseparateparameters,inadditiontothe signaliscenteredaroundzero,from5.00to+5.00.
individualEXiAmpLevels.Todoso:
OUT jack (pulse/square)
2. MoveSlider1tosetthevolumeforEXi1,and Thisistheoutputforthepulse/squarewaveform.The
Slider2forEXi2. signalisunipolar,from0.00to10.00.
Note:whenusedthroughAMSandEXTERNAL
MIDI and volume MODULATION,thesignalrangesforboththe
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumevia saw/triangleandpulse/squareare10.00to+10.00.
(CC#11).Whenusedoneatatime,thetwo SAMPLE & HOLD
controllersworkinexactlythesameway:aMIDI TheSAMPLE&HOLDcangenerateasteppedoutput
valueof127isequaltotheVOLUMEsetting,and fromanyvaryinginput.Youcanusethistocreate
lowervaluesreducethevolume. randomfilterorpitcheffects,arpeggios,quantized
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously, LFOsorEGs,andsoon.
theonewiththelowervaluedeterminesthe TousetheSAMPLE&HOLD,theremustbeatrigger
maximumvolume,andtheonewiththehigher sourceconnectedtotheCLOCKinput,andsomesort
valuescalesdownfromthatmaximum. ofsignal(suchastheNOISEGENERATOR,VCOs,
AMSsourcesetc.)connectedtotheINjack.
300
WhentheCLOCKinputishigh,theOUTjackwill Ofcourse,youcanalsoroutearealAMSsourcetothe
carryaslightlyfilteredversionofthesignalfromthe CLOCKinput,andtriggeritmanuallyorviaanLFO,
INjack.IftheCLOCKinputgoeshighforaverybrief StepSequencer,etc.
periodoftime,thentheinputfromthatinstantwillbe Foramorediffuse,splattyeffect,tryconnectingEG1
heldattheoutput.Theoutputthenstaysheld REVtotheCLOCKinput.
untilthenexttimethattheCLOCKinputgoeshigh.
Important:thetriggerattheCLOCKinputmustbe
verybrief.WhenusingtheMGRectanglewaveformas 61e: ENVELOPE GENERATORS 1 and 2
thetrigger,forinstance,turntheWAVEFORMknobto
theextremerightposition;thisproducesaverysharp EG outputs
pulse.
Withthiscaveatinmind,youcanusetheMGorthe
LFOstotriggertheCLOCKatregularintervals,or
triggeritmanuallyusingaswitch,keyboardtrigger
out,orothersignal.
CLOCK input jack

ThisinputcontrolsthetimingoftheS&H,asdescribed
above.
FordescriptionsoftheEGparameters,see51c:
IN jack ENVELOPEGENERATOR1onpage 294,and51d:
ThisistheinputtotheS&H.Youcanconnectthisto ENVELOPEGENERATOR2onpage 294.
thenoisegenerator,aVCO,anLFO,etc.
EG 1 OUT jack
OUT jack ThisallowsyoutorouteEG1toanotherpointonthe
ThisistheoutputoftheS&H,whichcarriestheheld, PatchPanel.
steppysignal. Notethat,whenmanuallyconnectedtotheVCO
Creating the classic sample-and-hold effect FREQinput,thisproducesadifferentresultthanthe
normalledsignal;formoreinformation,see
Tocreatetheclassicrandomsteppingsampleand EG1/EXTonpage 290.
holdeffect,forrhythmic,bubblingfiltersorcomputer
noisepitcheffects: EG 1 REV OUT jack
1. ConnecttheWHITEorPINKoutputoftheNOISE ThisistheinvertedshapeofEG1.Thesignalstartsat
GENERATORtotheSAMPLE&HOLDINjack. themaximumvalue,fallsto0,andthenreleasesback
2. ConnecttheMGRECTANGLEoutputtothe tothemaximumvalue.
CLOCKinput.
EG 2 REV OUT jack
3. OntheMG,EG,&MODULATIONpage,turnthe
ThisistheinvertedshapeofEG2.Thesignalstartsat
MGWAVEFORMknoballthewaytotheright.
themaximumvalue,fallsto0,risesuptothesustain
4. ConnecttheSAMPLE&HOLDOUTtothe level,andthenreleasesbacktothemaximumvalue.
modulationdestination.
Forinstance,theLPFCUTOFFFREQINjack,orthe Trigger inputs
VCO1+2CVINjack.
5. AdjusttheMGFREQUENCYtocontrolthespeed
ofthesample&holdeffect.
Generating a random value at note-on

Usingnoiseastheinputsignal,youcangeneratea
randomvalueatnoteonbyconnectingtheKBDTRIG
OUTtotheCLOCKinput.Thiswillalsoletthrough TRIG IN jack
additionalvaluesatnoteoff,whichmayormaynotbe
Thisletsyouuseanexternaltriggersources(suchas
desirable.
theMGrectangleoutput,thetriggeroutputoftheESP,
Ifyoudprefertogeneratearandomvalueatnoteon oraswitchcontrollerviaAMS)totriggerbothEG1
only: andEG2.
1. ConnecttheWHITEorPINKoutputoftheNOISE TheEGstriggerwhentheTRIGINmovesfromhigh
GENERATORtotheSAMPLE&HOLDINjack. tolow,suchaswhentheMGRectanglewaveswitches
2. ConnecttheSwitchoutputtotheCLOCKinput. tothebottomportionofthewaveform.Whenthe
TRIGINsignalgoeshighagain,theEGsentertheir
3. LeavetheSwitchAMSsourcesettoOff.
releasephase.
WiththeAMSsourcesettoOff,itwillautomatically
triggertheCLOCKatnoteon,butnotdoanything
else.
301
EXi: MS-20EX
NotethattheMGsLEDisonwhenitislow.Initially, Notethatwhitenoiseisalsoavailableasawaveformin
thisseemsliketheoppositeofwhatonemightexpect. VCO1.
WhenusingtheMGtotriggertheEGs,however,this
makesperfectsense:theEGsstartwhentheLEDgoes
on,andreleasewhentheLEDgoesoff. 61h: Mod Wheel and Mod Switch
EG 1 TRIG IN jack
ThisissimilartotheTRIGINjack,above,butit
triggersEnvelopeGenerator1only.
61f: Modulation VCA (MVCA)

TheModWheelandSwitchjacksallowyoutoselect
anyAMSsource(controllers,EGs,LFOs,step
sequenceretc.),scaleitviaIntensity,andthenroutethe
signalintothepatchpanel.
Formoreinformation,seeModWheelandMod
Switchonpage 305.
(Mod Wheel) jack

Thisletsyouselect,scale,androutethefirstAMS
signal.ThiscouldbetheModWheel,ifyouwishbutit
couldalsobeanyotherAMSsource.
ThisisasecondVCA,intendedforscalingmodulation
signals. (Mod Switch) jack
Forinstance,tocreateadelayedvibrato: Thisletsyouselect,scale,androutethesecondAMS
signal.YoucanuseanyAMSsource,including
1. ConnecttheMGtrianglewaveoutputtothe
continuoussourcessuchasLFOsandEGs;the
MVCAinput
selectionisnotlimitedtoon/offswitches.
2. ConnecttheMVCAoutputtotheTOTALinput
EG1isnormalledtotheCONTROLinput,sowithout
anyadditionalconnections,youcansimply:
61i: Keyboard Trigger and CV outputs
3. AdjusttheEG1DelayandAttackcontrolsto
createthedesireddelayandfadeintimes
CONTROL INPUT jack

ThiscontrolstheleveloftheMVCA.Itsnormalledto
theEG1output,butyoucanpatchinanyothercontrol
signal.
IN jack
ThisistheinputtotheVCA.
OUT jack KBD CV OUT jack

ThisistheoutputoftheVCAtheinputsignalscaled Thisallowsyoutoroutethekeyboardscontrolvoltage
bythecontrolsignal. (whichisasignalrepresentingthecurrentnote)to
otherpartsofthesynthesizer.
61g: NOISE GENERATOR KBD TRIG OUT jack
Wheneveryouplayakeyonthekeyboard,atrigger
signalisgenerated.
UsingtheParameterDetailsbox,youcanselect
whetherthistriggerrepresentsNoteGate+Sustain,or
NoteGateonly.
NoteGate+Sustainisthedefault,andismost
Theseoutputsprovidepinkandwhitenoise,
appropriateforgeneraluse.
respectively.Youcanusetheseassoundsourcesoras
modulationsignals. NoteGateisusefulforkeyboardtriggeroperation
withinselftriggeringpatches.Formoreinformation,
PINK output jack seeTip:Creatingselftriggeringpatchesonpage 299.
Pinknoisehasadarkersoundthanwhitenoise,with
reducedhighfrequencycomponents.
WHITE output jack

Whitenoiseisclassicbroadbandnoise.
302
Itseasytomakeapatchinwhichonlytheincoming
61j: MIXERS 1 and 2 audioisheard,withthebuiltinVCOscompletely
silentbutyoustillneedtopressakey(orplayanote
viaMIDI)inordertoactivatetheMS20EX.Youcan
usetheEXiCommonHoldparametertokeepthenote
helddownindefinitely,ifyoulike.
Formoreinformation,seeUsingtheExternalSignal
Processor(ESP)onpage 305,andTip:Creatingself
triggeringpatchesonpage 299.
Audio Inputs
EXi AUDIO IN jack

MIXER 1 Thismonoinputletsyourouteaudiofromelsewhere
inOASYSthroughtheMS20EX.Youcanuseanyof
Thisisasimple2in,1outmixer;youcanuseitfor
theaudioinputs,anyoftheaudiooutputs,theREC
mergingandscalingeithercontroloraudiosignals.
buses,theFXControlbuses,ortheoutputsofanyof
Notethatyoucanalsousethistoinvertthepolarityof
theInsert,Master,orTotalEffects.
asignal.
Youcanalsorouteliveorrecordedaudiothroughthe
ThelevelsofinputsAandBarecontrolledbyknobson
MS20EX,inrealtimeandweresurethatyoullbe
theMG,EGs,andModulationpage,andcanbe
abletothinkofothercreativeuses!
modulatedviaAMS;formoreinformation,see51g:
Mixersonpage 296. Theaudioinputsourceandchannel(left,right,orL+R
summation)areselectedbytheInputSourceand
IN A jack ChannelparametersinthecurrentProgram,
Thisisthefirstinputtothemixer. CombinationTimbre,orSongTrack.
IN B jack
Thisisthesecondinputtothemixer. page 422(Combinationmode),and26:EXiAudio
OUT jack
ThisisthemergedoutputofINAandINB. Onceyouveselectedthedesiredaudiosource,youcan
connecttheEXiAUDIOINjacktoanyinputonthe
MIXER 2 PatchPanel.Forinstance,youcanroutetheaudio
throughtheHPF,LPF,orBPF,mixitwiththebuiltin
Thisisasecond2in,1outmixer,identicaltoMIXER VCOsandnoisegenerator,andsoon.Youcanalsouse
1,above. theESPtoconverttheaudiotoatriggerorCVsource,
asdescribedunderUsingtheExternalSignal
IN A jack
Processor(ESP),onpage 305.
Thisisthefirstinputtothemixer.
TheEXiAUDIOINismonophonic,butyoucanuse
IN B jack twoMS20EXtogethertoprocessstereosignals:
Thisisthesecondinputtothemixer. 1. CreateadoubleEXiProgram,andassignboth
EXi1andEXi2tousetheMS20EX.
OUT jack
2. IntheEXiAudioInputparameters,assigntheleft
ThisisthemergedoutputofINAandINB. channeltoEXi1,andtherightchanneltoEXi2.
3. PantheoutputofEXi1totheleft,andtheoutput
61k: EXTERNAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR ofEXi2totheright.
(ESP) NOTE:IntheLegacyMS20plugin,theaudioinputis
normalledtotheHPFsExtSignalInput.Toenable
Important: the ESP is only active when moreflexibilityinpatching,thissignalisnotnormalled
notes are played intheMS20EX.Whenconvertingsoundsfromthe
Legacyplugin,theEXiaudioinputshouldbepatched
TheESPcanprocessliveaudioinputs,feedbackfrom totheExtSignalInjack.
effects,oranyotheraudiofromwithintheOASYSas
wellasaudiofromwithintheMS20EXitself.Note,
however,thattheESPisonlyactivewhenavoiceis
beingplayedontheMS20EX.
303
EXi: MS-20EX
SIGNAL IN jack
ThisistheinputtotheExternalSignalProcessor.To
usethiswithliveaudioinput,connecttheEXiAUDIO
INjacktotheSIGNALINjack.
SIGNAL LEVEL knob [0.0010.00]

Thisadjuststhevolumeofthesignalconnectedtothe
SIGNALINjack.
CV ADJUST knob [0.0010.00]
Thisknobhasover50dBofgainatthemaximum
settingof10.00.Unitygain(+0dB)isat3.75;5.00is Adjustthissothattheinputsignalandthe
about+4dB,and7.50isabout+12dB. synthesizersoutputsignalarethesamepitch.For
moreinformation,seeUsingtheExternalSignal
Iftheinputlevelishigh,settingaboveunitygainwill
Processor(ESP)onpage 305.
causeincreasingamountsofsaturationandoverdrive,
creatingamoreaggressivetone. FV CV OUT jack
(SIGNAL) OUT jack ThisistheoutputoftheFVCONVERTER.Youcan
connectthistotheVCO1+2CVINorVCO2CVIN
ThisisthesignalfromtheSIGNALINjack,scaledby
jacks,tocontroltheoscillatorpitch.
theSIGNALLEVELcontrol.
BAND PASS FILTER ENVELOPE FOLLOWER and TRIG OUT

TheENVELOPEFOLLOWERcreatesacontrolsignal
TheBandpassfilterincludesseparatecontrolsforhigh
outoftheaudioinputlevel.Forinstance,youcould
andlowcut,andpassesthroughonlytheaudio
connecttheENVOUTtotheLPFCUTOFFFREQ
betweenthosetwofrequencies.Itsnormalledtothe
input,tocreateanautowahfilter.
inputoftheFrequencytoVoltageconverter,forfine
tuningtheincomingaudio. TheENVELOPEFOLLOWERtakesitsinputfromthe
volumescaledSIGNALIN,rightaftertheSIGNAL
Youcanalsousethisfiltertoprocessaudiosignals,or
LEVELknob.
tosculpttheNoiseGeneratorsoutputforparticular
modulationeffects.Youcanevenuseitasathirdfilter Similarly,theTRIGOUTcreatesatriggersignalfrom
fortheVCOs,inadditiontotheHPFandLPF. theinput.UsetheTHRESHOLDknobtosetthe
volumelevelatwhichthetriggeroccurs.
Note:Evenatthewidestsettingsforhighandlowcut,
therewillstillbesomeattenuationofthehighestand
lowestfrequencies.
PEAK LED [Off, On]

ThisLEDshowsthattheENVELOPEFOLLOWERis
atitspeakvalue.Youcanusethisasanaidwhen
(BAND PASS FILTER) IN jack adjustingtheinputsignalsleveland/orfrequency
ThisPatchPanelmodificationprovidesadirectinput contentforoptimalperformance.
totheBandpassfilter.Thismeansthatyoucanusethe
filterseparatelyfromtheEnvelopeFollower,ifdesired. ENV OUT jack
ThisistheoutputoftheENVELOPEFOLLOWER.
LOW CUT FREQ knob [0.0010.00] Connectthistoanymodulationinput.
Thisknobadjuststhelowcutfrequencyofthe
Bandpassfilter.Onlyfrequencieshigherthanthiswill THRESHOLD knob [0.0010.00]
passthroughthefilter. Thissetsthevolumelevelatwhichthetriggeroccurs.
Adjustthistomatchthe
HIGH CUT FREQ knob [0.0010.00]
Thisknobadjuststhehighcutfrequencyofthe TRIG OUT jack
Bandpassfilter.Onlyfrequencieslowerthanthiswill Thisisthetriggergeneratedfromtheaudiosignal.You
passthroughthefilter. canconnectthistotheEG1&2TRIGINjack,theEG1
TRIGINjack,ortheSAMPLE&HOLDCLOCK
(BAND PASS FILTER) OUT jack input.
ThisistheoutputoftheBandpassfilter.
TRIG OUT LED [Off, On]
Frequency-to-Voltage (FV) CONVERTER ThisLEDshowsthatinputsignalisoverthetrigger
Thisconvertergeneratesacontrolvoltagesignal THRESHOLD,andthatthetriggeroutputison.You
basedonthepitchoftheaudioinput,whichyoucan canusethisasanaidwhenadjustingthe
thenusetocontrolthepitchoftheVCOs.
304
THRESHOLD,LOWCUTFREQandHIGHCUT 10.PlaythehighestnotetheESPistopickup,and
FREQcontrols,orwhenusingothercontrolstomodify slowlyincreasetheHIGHCUTuntilthedesired
theinputsignal. pitchispickedup.
11.PlaythelowestnoteandslowlydecreasetheLOW
Using the External Signal Processor (ESP) CUTuntilthenoteispickedup.
YoucanusetheESPtocontroltheMS20EXfroman ThesemeasureshelptorefinetheCVconverters
externalmonophonicaudiosource,suchasamelody responsetotheinputsignal.
playedonaguitar.JustliketheoriginalMS20,theMS
12.SettheCVADJUSTcontrolsothatthepitch
20EXwilltriggeritsEGsandtrackthepitchofthe
matchesthatoftheinputinstrument.
guitarwithvaryingdegreesofaccuracy.Ofcourse,the
unpredictabilityispartofthecharm TheMS20EXshouldnowrespondtotheaudioinput,
asifyouwereplayingonthekeyboard.
Notethatthiswillonlyworkwithsinglenoteinput,
suchasmelodies;polyphonicinputwillnotwork
properly. 6-1l: Parameter Details
YoucanalsousetheESPasamodulationsourcewhen Theparameterdetailsboxshowsdifferentinformation
processingaudiosignalsthroughtheMS20EX.This dependingonwhetherthecurrentselectionisaninput
canbeveryusefulwithdrums,forinstance;youcan oroutputjack,aknob,oroneofthetwoassignable
usetheinputsignaltotriggerEGs,usetheESPs modsources(thewheelandswitch).
envelopefollowertomodulatethefilters,andsoon.
Important:theESPonlyworksifanMS20EXnoteis Input and Output Jacks
beingplayed!YoucanusetheHoldparameter,ora Ifajackisselected,thisareashowsthenameofthe
damperpedal,tosustainasinglenoteindefinitelyif selectedjackonthetopline,andthejack(s)towhichit
desired. isconnectedonthebottomline,totherightofthe
TosetuptheESPforexternalcontrol: arrow.Ifnothingisconnectedtothejack,thebottom
linereads(NoConnection).
1. Ifyouareusingaliveinput,connectthe
instrumentormicrophonetotheOASYSaudio Iftheselectedjackisanoutputconnectedtomultiple
inputs,andsetupthegainaccordingly. inputs,onlythefirstconnectionisshown,followedby
2. OntheEXiAudioInputpage,selectthedesired anellipse.
input.
page 422(Combinationmode),and26:EXiAudio
3. OnthePatchPanel,connecttheEXiAUDIO
INPUTtotheSIGNALIN.
4. Playanoteonthekeyboard,orviaMIDI.Use
eitherthedamperpedalortheHOLDparameterto
keepthenotesustained.
TheESPisonlyactivewhenanoteisbeingplayed. Disconnect button
5. IncreasetheTHRESHOLDwhilewatchingthe PressingtheDisconnectbuttonclearsallcables
TRIGOUTlight,untilitlightswhenplayingat connectedtothejack.
mediumtohighvolumes.
Thelightshowswhenthesignalisoverthetrigger Mod Wheel and Mod Switch
threshold. InadditiontothefunctionalitydescribedunderInput
6. ConnecttheESPsTRIGOUTjacktotheTRIGIN andOutputJacks,above,thesejacksallowyouto
jack. selectanyAMSsource,useIntensitytoscalethesignal,
andthenrouteitintothepatchpanel.
ThismakesEG1andEG2respondtotheESPstrigger
output,insteadofthekeyboard. NotethattheModSwitchcanuseanyAMSsource,
includingcontinuoussourcessuchasLFOsandEGs;it
7. ConnecttheENVOUTjacktotheVCAsINITIAL
isnotlimitedtoon/offswitches.
GAINjack.
ThismakestheVCAlevelfollowtheamplitudeofthe
ESPssignal,asgeneratedbytheenvelopefollower.
8. ConnecttheFVCVOUTjacktotheVCO1+2CV
INjack(ortheVCO2CVINjack).
ThismakesthepitchoftheVCOsfollowthepitchof
theESPssignal.
9. IntheBANDPASSFILTER,settheLOWCUT
FREQto10.00andHIGHCUTFREQto0.00.
305
EXi: MS-20EX

Thisselectsthemodulationsourcetorouteintothe
patchpanel.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Knobs
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021. Ifaknobisselected,thisareashowsitsparameter
Important:ontheoriginalMS20,theModWheelwas groupandparametername,itsexactvalue,andits
abipolarmodulationsourcemeaningthatthecenter AMSassignments.AllsixPatchPanelknobs,including
positionproducednomodulation,movingdownfrom MasterVolume,aremodulatable.
thecentermadethevaluelower,andmovingupfrom
thecentermadethevaluehigher.
TheMS20EXhasanumberofbipolarmodulation
sources,includingtheLFOs,EGs36,andtheCommon
StepSequencer.JS+Y(theequivalentoftheMod
Wheel),ontheotherhand,isunipolar.
YoucanuseanAMSMixertoconvertJS+Yintoa (Parameter group)
bipolarsignal,ifyoulike.Todoso: Thisshowsthegroupoftheparameter(suchasVCO
1. OntheAMSMixerpage,settheMixerTypeto MIXER).
Offset.
2. SelectJS+YasAMSA.
3. SetAMSAOffsetto99. Youcanedittheparametervaluewithanyofthe
4. SetAMSAAmountto+199. standarddataentrycontrols.
ThesesettingsshiftJS+Ydownandthendoubleits
range,creatingabipolarsignal.
5. InthePatchPanel,settheModWheeljacktouse
parameter.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
theAMSMixer(insteadofJS+Y).
TheModWheeljackwillnowcarrythebipolarJS+Y
signal. Int (Intensity) [range depends on parameter]
Int (Intensity) [range depends on parameter]
modulation.
ThiscontrolsthedepthandpolarityoftheAMSsignal.
KBD TRIG OUT jack t 61: Page Menu Commands

InadditiontothefunctionalitydescribedunderInput ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
andOutputJacks,above,thisjackletsyouselectthe numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
triggertype,asbelow. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Trigger On [Note Gate + Sustain, Note Gate]
NoteGate+Sustainisthedefault,andismost Programonpage 142.
appropriateforgeneraluse.
NoteGateisusefulforkeyboardtriggeroperation ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
withinselftriggeringpatches.Formoreinformation,
seeTip:Creatingselftriggeringpatchesonpage 299. 2:DeleteAllConnections.Formoreinformation,
seeDeleteAllConnectionsonpage 311.
306
Program P7: EG 3-6 7-1: EG 3
Program P7: EG 3-6

TheMS20EXhasfourassignableEGs,inadditionto
theoriginalMS20EGs1and2.Eachofthesecanbe
usedasanAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolawide
varietyofparameters.
7-1: EG 3
7-2: EG 4
7-3: EG 5
7-4: EG 6
TheMS20EXsEGs36areidenticaltotheAL1sEG1.
Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee71:EG1
(Filter),onpage 203.
Program P8: LFO 1-4

TheMS20EXhasfourassignableLFOs,inadditionto
theoriginalMS20MGandtheEXiPrograms
CommonLFO.EachofthesecanbeusedasanAMS
modulationsourcetocontrolawidevarietyof
parameters.
8-1: LFO 1
8-2: LFO 2
8-3: LFO 3
8-4: LFO 4
TheMS20EXsLFOs14areidenticaltothoseofthe
AL1.Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee82:LFO
1,onpage 209.
Program P9: AMS Mixers

TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone, canusetheprocessedversionoftheAftertouchto
orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething controloneAMSdestination,andtheoriginalversion
new. tocontrolanother.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether, Finally,youcancascadetheAMSMixerstogetherfor
oruseoneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother. instance,youcanuseAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMS
Youcanalsousethemtomodifytheresponseof Mixer2.
realtimecontrollers.
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto
theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,
ifyouuseAftertouchasaninputtoaAMSMixer,you
307
EXi: MS-20EX
9-1: AMS Mixers 1-2
9-2: AMS Mixers 3-4

TheMS20EXsAMSMixersareidenticaltothoseof
theAL1(althoughtheMS20EXhasfour,totheAL1s
two).Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee91:AMS
Mixer,onpage 213.
308
MS-20EX: Tone Adjust Common Tone Adjust parameters
MS-20EX: Tone Adjust

MS20EXToneAdjustDefaultSettings
VCO1 VCO2 HPF HPF HPF LPF LPF LPF

Waveform Waveform Cutoff Peak EG2/Ext Mod Cutoff Peak EG2/Ext Mod
Switches 7, 8, 15, 16:

LFOs 1, 2, 3, 4 Stop
EG1 EG1 EG1 EG2 EG2 EG2 EG2 MG MG

Delay Attack Release Attack Decay Sustain Release Waveform Frequency
ToneAdjustprovidesanelegantphysicalinterfaceto Filter/AmpEGDecayTime.
theMS20EXsparameters.Mostofthefactorysounds (99+99,CC#75)
usethedefaultlayout,asshownabove.Youcanalso ThisscalesthedecaytimeofEG2.ItinteractswithCC#
customizethelayoutforindividualsounds,ifdesired. 75.
FormoreinformationaboutToneAdjust,pleasesee Filter/AmpEGSustainLevel.
09f:ToneAdjust,onpage 26. (99+99,CC#70)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelofEG2.
Filter/AmpEGReleaseTime.
Common Tone Adjust parameters (99+99,CC#72)
TheseparametersaffectbothEXi1and2.Exceptas ThisscalesthereleasetimeofEG2.
notedbelow,theCommonToneAdjustparameters FilterEG,AmpEG,andPitchEGAttackTime,Decay
behaveasdescribedunderCommonToneAdjust Time,SustainLevel,ReleaseTimearenotsupported
Parameters,onpage 28. bytheMS20EX.
FilterCutoff.(99+99,CC#74) PitchLFO1Intensity.(99+99,CC#77)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofthelowpassfilter.To ThisscalestheFREQUENCYMODULATION
adjustthehighpassfilter,usetheseparate,MS20EX MG/T.EXTknob.(Notethatthiscontrolstheamount
specificToneAdjustparameters. ofpitchmodulation,butdoesnotnecessarilyapplyto
FilterResonance.(99+99,CC#71) LFO1.)
Thisscalestheresonance(PEAK)ofthelowpassfilter.
Toadjustthehighpassfilter,usetheseparate,MS
20EXspecificToneAdjustparameters. MS-20EX Tone Adjust parameters
FilterEGIntensity.(99+99,CC#79) InadditiontotheCommonToneAdjustparameters
ThisscalestheEG2/EXTknobforthelowpassfilter. listedabove,theMS20EXaddsanumberofitsown
AmpVelocityIntensity.(99+99) parameters.
Notsupported. Notethattheseadditionalparametersareseparatefor
Filter/AmpEGAttackTime. eachEXi,asopposedtobeingsharedbybothEXiinthe
(99+99,CC#73) Program.
ThisscalestheattacktimeofEG2,whichisnormalled
tobothfiltercutoffandamplitude.
309
EXi: MS-20EX
Alloftheadditionalparametersarelistedbelow.Tone MGFrequency
Adjustparametersmayaffecttheinternalparameters MGTimes
inoneoftwoways:theymaybeRelative,inwhich
casetheyscaletheexistingparametervalue,or MGWaveForm
Absolute,inwhichcasetheyoverwritetheexisting
ENVELOPE GENERATOR 1
value.Unlessotherwisenoted,alloftheMS20EX
parametersareAbsolute. EG1DelayTime
Thefullnameofthecurrentlyselectedparameteris EG1AttackTime
showninthestatuslineatthetopoftheControl EG1ReleaseTime
Surfacepage,aswellasinthepopupmenu.Some
parameterswithlongernamesmayshowan ENVELOPE GENERATOR 2
abbreviationfortheslider,knob,andswitchlabels. EG2HoldTime
VCO1 EG2AttackTime
VCO1WaveForm EG2DecayTime
VCO1PW EG2SustainLevel
VCO1Scale EG2ReleaseTime
VCO2 MIXER 1
VCO2WaveForm Mixer1LevelA
VCO2Pitch Mixer1LevelB
VCO2Scale MIXER 2
PORTAMENTO Mixer2LevelA
PortamentoTime Mixer2LevelB
FINE TUNE EXTERNAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR

FineTune ESPSignalLevel
ESPLowCutFreq
FREQUENCY MODULATION
ESPHighCutFreq
FreqModMG/T.Ext
ESPCVAdjust
FreqModEG1/Ext
ESPThreshold
VCO Mixer
VCO1Level EGs
TheMS20EXaddsthefollowingseparatecontrolsfor
VCO2Level
EGs3,4,5and6:
HPF Attacktime(relative)
HPFFrequency Decay&Slopetime(relative)
HPFPeak Sustainlevel(relative)
CUTOFF FREQUENCY MODULATION (HPF) Releasetime(relative)
HPFModMG/T.Ext LFOs
HPFModEG2/Ext InadditiontosupportingthestandardToneAdjust
LFOparameters,theMS20EXaddsthefollowing
LPF
separatecontrols:
LPFFrequency
LFO1,2,3,and4Waveform
LPFPeak
LFO1,2,3,and4Shape
CUTOFF FREQUENCY MODULATION (LPF) LFO3Speed(relative)
LPFModMG/T.Ext LFO3Fade(relative)
LPFModEG2/Ext LFO3Delay(relative)
PITCH LFO3Stop
BendRange LFO4Speed(relative)
Transpose LFO4Fade(relative)
MODULATION GENERATOR (MG) LFO4Delay(relative)
MGKeySync LFO4Stop
MGTempoSync
MGBaseNote
310
MS-20EX: Tone Adjust Delete All Connections
MS-20EX: Page Menu Commands
Delete All Connections

Thiscommandremovesalloftheconnectionsfromthe
PatchPanel,sothatyoucanstartfromablankslate.
311
EXi: MS-20EX
312
EXi: PolysixEX
PolysixEX Overview
ThePolysixEXisarichsounding,easytouse,high AccesstoallstandardEXiProgramfeatures,
polyphonyvirtualanalogsynth(upto172voices!).It includingtheCommonLFO,CommonStep
combinesthefeaturesandsoniccharacteroftheclassic Sequencer,KeyTrack1&2,KARMA,EQ,and
KorgPolysix(andtheLegacyPolysixplugin)with effectsaswellaslayeringwithanyotherEXi
manyadditionalcapabilitiesuniquetotheOASYS. (includingusingtwoPolysixEXstogether!)
Featuresinclude:
PolysixEX uses EXi fixed resources
KorgsproprietaryCMT(ComponentModeling
Technology) ThePolysixEXusesEXifixedresourcesforitsbuiltin
effects.Thesetakeupasmallamountofprocessing
Upto172voicepolyphony power,evenifyourenotplayinganynotes.
Oscillator,suboscillator,and4poleresonant Becauseofthis,youcanuseonly16PolysixEXs
lowpassfilter simultaneouslyinaCombinationorSong.IfotherEXis
Dedicatedchorus/ensemble/phasereffects withfixedresourcesareinuse,themaximumnumber
ofPolysixEXswillbereducedaccordingly.EachEXiin
ClassicADSRenvelope,plustwomultistageEGs
eachProgramcountstowardsthemaximum;for
ClassicMGLFO,plustwomultiwaveformLFOs instance,aProgramwithtwoPolysixEXscountsas
Easytouse,sampleaccuratearpeggiator two,notasone.
ExtensiveAMSmodulation,plusfourAMSmixers Formoreinformation,seeCX3&STR1:Limitations
PolysixEX Overview
AMS
Polysix EG MG EG 2-3 LFO 1-2
LFO1 LFO1 Mixer 1-4
LFO1
LFO1
LFO1
VCO
Polysix
VCF VCA EQ
Effects
Sub Osc
Legend
Audio,
Audio, per-voice
per-EXi
Audio
Modulation
Modulation
313
EXi: PolysixEX
Unsupported EXi Common parameters supported,includingMono,MonoLegato,Unison,etc.
ThePolysixEXsupportsalloftheEXiCommon
LegatoOffset).
On-screen knobs and switches, and the Parameter Details area

Youcanusethevalueslider,theinc/decbuttons,the
Parameter Details rotarydial,orthenumerickeypad.
TheLCDdisplaysincludegraphicknobsandswitches Asyoueditthevalue,noticethatthegraphicknobor
forallofthemainPolysixEXparameters.Theseletyou switchmoves,andthatthevalueintheParameter
viewandeditparametersquicklyandeasily.Almost Detailsareachangesaswell.
alloftheoriginalPolysixparametersfitontoasingle
OASYSpage. Editing on/off switches
YoucanprogramanyoriginalPolysixsoundusing Toeditanon/offswitch,suchastheMGKEYSYNC
onlytheseknobsandswitches.Ifyouwantmore button,simply:
flexibilityandcontrol,however,thePolysixEXoffers 1. Touchtheswitchtotogglethevalue.
twoadditionalEGsandLFOs,fourAMSmixers,access
totheEXiProgramsCommonLFO,CommonStep
Sequencer,andVectorfeatures,andAMSmodulation Assigning AMS modulation
foralmosteveryoriginalPolysixparameter. MostparameterssupportmodulationviaAMS.
Theentrywaytotheseadvancedfeaturesisthe SourcesandintensitiescanbeeditedintheParameter
ParameterDetailsarea,locatedinthelowerrighthand Detailsarea:
partofthescreen: 1. Touchtheknoborswitch.
ParameterDetailsarea IftheparametersupportsAMSmodulation,the
ParameterDetailsareawillshowoneormoreAMS
sourcesandintensities.
2. EdittheAMSsettingsintheParameterDetails
area.
Note:thegraphicknobsandswitchesalwaysshow
theirstoredvalue.AbsoluteToneAdjustsettingsedit
thesevalues,justasifyouwereeditingtheparameters
themselves,andsothegraphicswillshowtheresults.
However,AMSmodulationdoesnoteditthestored
value,andsothegraphicsdonotincludetheresultsof
AMS.
NotealsothatAMScanoftenmodulateparameters
outsidetherangeofthestoredvalues,asifyouwere
pushingtheparameterbeyondtheendsoftheknob.
Poly, Unison, Chord, and Hold

TheParameterDetailsareashowsinformationforthe
selectedknoborswitch,includingitsparametergroup TheoriginalPolysixhadfourswitchestoselect
andparametername,itsexactvalue,anditsAMS differentvoiceallocationoptions,includingPOLY,
assignments. UNISON(mono),CHORD,andHOLD.Inthe
OASYS,allofthesefunctions(andmanymorebesides)
areavailableontheProgramBasicpage.
Using the graphic parameters
Editing knobs and sliding switches
Toeditknobsandslidingswitches,suchasthethree
positionMGMODEswitch:
1. Touchtheknoborswitch.
Ayellowsquarewillappeararoundtheknobor
switch,showingthatithasbeenselected.The
ParameterDetailsareawillchangetoshowthename
andvalueofthecurrentparameter,alongwithother
relatedinformation.
2. Useanyofthedataentrycontrolstoeditthevalue.
314
01: Main
01b
ThisisthemainpageofProgrammode.Forafull EGs and LFOs

seeEXiProgramP0:Playonpage 159.Thissection EG 2,3 Graphics
describesonlytheoverviewdisplay,whichdiffersfor TheseshowtheshapesofthetwomultistageEGs.
eachindividualEXi. Toucheitherofthemtojumpdirectlytothe
01b: Overview and Page Jump LFO 1,2 Graphics
Thispartofthepageshowsanoverviewofthemost Theseshowthewaveformsandshapesofthetwo
importantsettingsfortheProgramstwoEXi LFOs.Toucheitherofthemtojumpdirectlytothe
instruments.Thespecificparameterswillvary, correspondingeditpage.
parametersforthePolysixEXaredescribedbelow. Key Zone
Key Zone
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe ThisshowsthekeyzonesforEXi1andEXi2,asseton
sections,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits theCommonsectionsProgramBasicpage,inrelation
parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilter totheentireMIDInoterange.Therangeofthe76note
graphic,youllgototheOscillatorandFilterpage. or88notekeyboardisalsoshown,asappropriate.
Tip:PressingEXITseveraltimeswillalwaysbringyou PressthisareatojumptotheProgramBasicpage.
backtothispage.
Common
VCO/VCF/EG/MG Thegraphicsalongtherightsideofthescreenshow
Thissectionshowsthemostimportantoscillator,filter, themostimportantCommonparameters,whichare
envelope,andmodulationgeneratorparameters. sharedbybothEXiintheProgram.Thissectionwill
TouchthisareatojumpdirectlytothemainPolysixEX alwaysshowthesameparameters,regardlessofwhich
page. EXiarebeingused.

Arpeggiator
Thissectionshowsthearpeggiatorparameters.Touch eitherPOLYorMONO.
thisareatojumpdirectlytotheModulation&
Arpeggiatorpage. PressthisareatojumptotheProgramBasicpage.
315
EXi: PolysixEX

Sequencer.
page.
Common LFO Graphic

3 Band EQ Graphic
IFX, MFX/TFX
page.
KARMA GE Name
page.
316
Program P4: Main 4-1: Main
Program P4: Main
4-1: Main
41PMC
41a 41g
41b 41h
41c
41i
41d
41e
41f
PWMissimilartoPW,butusesadedicatedLFOto
4-1a: VCO modulatethewaveform.ThespeedoftheLFOis
controlledbyPWMSPEED,below.ThePW/PWM
VIBRATO INT [0.00...10.00]
settingdeterminesthemaximumwidth.
Movingthejoystickupfromthecenterdetent
position,awayfromyourself,producestheJS+Y PW/PWM [0.00...10.00]
controller(MIDICC#1).OnthePolysixEX,JS+Y WhenWAVEFORMissettoPW,thisdirectlycontrols
normallycontrolsVIBRATOtheamountoftheMG theshapeofthewaveform.
appliedtoVCOpitch.
WhenWAVEFORMissettoPWM,thiscontrolsthe
VIBRATOINTcontrolstheintensityofthis maximumpulsewidthwhenbeingmodulatedbythe
modulation,upto+/2semitones.TodisableJS+Ys dedicatedPWMLFO.WhenPW/PWMissetto0.00,
controlofVIBRATO,setthisto0.00. theLFOwillhavenoeffect.
Notethatthisisoptimizedforfairlysmallamountsof
More on Pulse Width
pitchmodulation.Formoredramaticeffects,setthe
MGsMODEtoVCO,andadjustthedepthviathe Pulsewaveformsaresimple,rectangularshapes.The
MGsLEVELknob. PulseWidthsetsthepercentageofthewaveformspent
intheupposition.Afewexamplesareshowninthe
Alternatively,youcanmodulateTRANSPOSEor
diagrambelow.Notethatasquarewaveisjustapulse
TUNEviaAMS.
wavewithPW/PWMsetto0.00.
VIBRATOINTisscaledbyMIDICC#77.
Thewidthcontrolsthetimbreoftheoscillator,from
OCTAVE [16', 8', 4'] pureandhollowat0.00(asquarewave)tothinand
reedyathighersettings.
ThissetstheVCOscoarsetuning,inoctaves.
Atthemaximumsettingof10.00,thePulsewavewill
WAVEFORM [SAW, PW, PWM] beveryquiet,sincethepulsegoesupandthendown
ThisselectstheVCOswaveform. againalmostinstantly.
SAWproducesasawtoothwavethetraditionalbuzzy Therealmagicofthepulsewavecomeswhenyou
analogsynthsound. modulatethewidth,usingeitherAMSorthededicated
PWMLFO.WithAMS,tryusingamediumspeed
PWproducessquareandpulsewaveforms;formore
triangleLFO,orasweepingEG.
information,seePW/PWM,below.
317
EXi: PolysixEX
Pulsewaveformatdifferentwidths BASE NOTE [1/1...1/32]

WhenTEMPOSYNCisON,thissetsthebasicspeed
Pulse Width = 0.00 Pulse Width = 5.00 Pulse Width = 9.00
oftheMG,relativetothesystemtempo.Thevalues
rangefroma32ndnotetoawholenote,including
triplets.Thisvalueisthenmultipliedbythe
FREQUENCY/TIMESknob,below.
WhenTEMPOSYNCisOFF,thisparameterhasno
effect.
PWM SPEED [0.00...10.00] ThisparameterisnotmodulatableviaAMS.
ThePolysixEXhasanLFOdedicatedtopulsewidth FREQUENCY/TIMES [0.00...10.00/16...1]
modulation(PWM).ThisadjuststhespeedofthatLFO.
NotethatthisappliesonlywhentheWAVEFORMis IfTEMPOSYNCisOFF,thiscontrolsthefrequencyof
settoPWM. theMG.
ThededicatedPWMLFOissharedbetweenallthe IfTEMPOSYNCisON,thismultipliesthelengthof
PolysixEXvoices,similartotheCommonLFO. theBASENOTE.Forinstance,iftheBASENOTEis
settoasixteenthnote,andTimesissetto3,theMG
IfyoudlikemoreflexiblePWM,includingpervoice willcycleoveradottedeighthnote.Notethathigher
modulation,youcanuseAMStomodulatethe valuesmeanafasterMG.
PW/PWMparameterdirectly.
DELAY [0.00...10.00]
SUB OSC [2OCT, 1OCT, OFF]
AdjuststhetimefromnoteonuntiltheMGisheard.
TheVCOincludesasuboscillator.Youcansetthisto
soundeitheroneortwooctavesbelowthemain Notethatthisaffectsonlytheroutingselectedbythe
oscillator,orturnitoffcompletelyifdesired. MODEparameter,below;theVIBRATOalwaysuses
theundelayedMGsignal.
2OCT:thesuboscillatorwillsoundattwooctaves
belowthemainoscillator. LEVEL [0.00...10.00]
1OCT:thesuboscillatorwillsoundatoneoctave AdjuststhedepthoftheeffectproducedbytheMG.
belowthemainoscillator.
MODE [VCA, VCF, VCO]
OFF:disablesthesuboscillator.
SelectswhethertheMGmodulatestheamplitude
(VCA),thefiltercutoff(VCF),orthepitch(VCO).
4-1b: MG (Modulation Generator)
TheMGissharedbetweenallPolysixEXvoices,similar 4-1c: VCF
totheCommonLFO.Forpervoicemodulation,use
LFO1or2instead. CUTOFF [0.00...10.00]
TheMGisavailableasanAMSsourcethroughoutthe Thiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofthe24dBlowpass
PolysixEX,intwodifferentversions:MGisthe filter.Soundsabovethisfrequencyareremoved,
unalteredMGsignal,andMG+Delayisat0untilthe makingthetimbredarker.
programmedDELAYtimehaselapsed. ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#74.
TEMPO SYNC [Off, On] RESONANCE [0.00...10.00]
Touchthetext/LEDareatoturnTEMPOSYNConand Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe
off. cutofffrequency.
On(LEDlit):WhenTEMPOSYNCisOn,theMG Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and
synchronizestothesystemtempo,assetbyeitherthe frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish
TempoknoborMIDIClock.TheMGspeedis smoothly.
controlledbythecombinationoftheBASENOTEand
FREQUENCY/TIMESparameters,below.
Off(LEDdark):WhenTEMPOSYNCisOff,the extreme.
theMG,andtheBASENOTEsettinghasnoeffect.
separate,whistlingpitch.Nearthemaximumsetting,
ThisparameterisnotmodulatableviaAMS. thefilterwillselfoscillate.
KEY SYNC [Off, On] RESONANCEisscaledbyMIDICC#7.
IfthissettingisON,thephaseisresetforthefirstnote EG INTENSITY [5.00+5.00]
onineachlegatophrase.Subsequentnotesinachord,
SpecifiesthedepthanddirectiontowhichtheEGwill
ornotesplayedlegato,donotcausethephasetobe
affectthecutofffrequency.
reset.
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#79.
318
KBD TRACK [0.0150.0]

4-1e: VCA
Adjuststhedepthtowhichthecutofffrequencywill
changeaccordingtothenotenumber,centeredatC3. VCAstandsforVoltageControlledAmplifier,whichis
thecircuitthatcontrolsthevolumeofananalog
Withasettingof100,thechangeincutofffrequency
synthesizer.
willbeproportionatetothechangeinpitch(1octavein
pitch=1octaveinfilterfrequency). MODE [EG, Gate]
Note:unlikesomeoftheotherEXi,thePolysixEX Thisselectsthemaincontrolsourceforthevolume.
keyboardtrackingdoesnotincludetheeffectsofpitch
EGmeansthatthevolumeiscontrolledbytheADSR
bend.Thismatchesthebehavioroftheoriginal
envelope.
synthesizer.Ifdesired,youcancreatethesameeffect
byusingJSXasanAMSsourcefortheVCFCUTOFF. YoucanalsouseEGs2or3tomodulatethemain
VOLUMEparameterviaAMS.
4-1d: EG Gatemeansthatthevolumegoestomaximum
immediatelyatnoteon,andfallstosilence
EG immediatelyatnoteoff.
Sustain ATTENUATOR [20.0+20.0dB]

Level
Adjuststhevolumeupordownby20dB,in0.1dB
increments.ThisisseparatefromthemainVOLUME
Change to
knob,below.
Parameter
Value Time Also,unlikeVOLUME,theATTENUATORisper
voice,whichmeansthatyoucanmodulateitviaper
Attack Decay Release
Time Time Time voiceAMSsourcessuchasEGs,LFOs1and2,key
tracking,etc.
Note-on Note-off
ATTACK [0.00...10.00] 4-1f: OUTPUT

Adjuststhetimefromnoteonuntilthemaximumlevel PAN [Random, L001C064R127]
isreached. ThiscontrolsthestereopanofthePolysixEX,atthe
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#73. veryendofthesignalchain.AsettingofL001places
thesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,andR127to
DECAY [0.00...10.00] thefarright.
AdjuststhetimetheEGtakestodescendfromthepeak WhenthisissettoRandom,thepanpositionwillbe
tothesustainlevel.
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#75. YoucanalsosetthisPanparameterdirectlyfromthe
SUSTAIN [0.00...10.00] ControlSurfaceknobs.Todoso:
Adjuststhesustainlevel.TheEGwillstayatthislevel 1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton.
untilthenoteisreleased. 2. SettheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoINDIVIDUAL
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#70. PAN.
3. MoveKnob1tosetthepanforEXi1,andKnob2
RELEASE [0.00...10.00] tosetthepanforEXi2.
Adjuststhetimefromthenoteoffuntilthelevel YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).A
decaystozero. CC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,
ThisisscaledbyMIDICC#72. 64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythe
Panparameter,and127placesthesoundatthefar
Using separate EGs for the VCF and VCA right.
UnliketheoriginalPolysix,thePolysixEXletsyouuse Note:youcanselectRandompanonlyfromtheon
separateEGsfortheVCFandtheVCA.Todoso: screenUI,andnotfromAMS,MIDIortheControl
1. SettheVCAMODEswitchtoEG. Surface.
2. SettheVCFEGINTENSITYto0.00. Notethatthisisaposteffectspan,whileUnison
3. SelecttheCUTOFFparameter. StereoSpreadispreeffects:
4. IntheParameterDetailspanelforCUTOFF,select PanviaUnisonStereoSpread>PolysixEXEffects
EG2astheAMSsource. (stereo)>PANknob(stereoinout)
5. SettheAMSIntensityasdesired. InthePolysixEX,PANaffectsallvoicesatonce,andso
Now,theoriginalEGwillcontroltheVCA,andEG2 itcannotbemodulatedbypervoiceAMSsourcessuch
willcontroltheVCF. asEGsorLFOs1and2.
319
EXi: PolysixEX
VOLUME [0.00...10.00] (Parameter name) [range depends on parameter]

Thiscontrolsthemainoutputlevel.Itaffectsallvoices Thisshowsthenameandexactvalueoftheparameter.
atonce,andsoitcannotbemodulatedbypervoice Youcanedittheparametervaluewithanyofthe
AMSsourcessuchasEGsorLFOs1and2. standarddataentrycontrols.
Forpervoicemodulation,usetheATTENUATOR
parameterinstead.Formoreinformation,see
Knobs
ATTENUATORonpage 319. AMS [List of AMS Sources]
4-1g: PITCH parameter.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
BEND RANGE [0.00...12.00]
Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbendupand Intensity [range depends on parameter]
down,insemitonesandcents,ascontrolledbyJSX.To ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
useanotherAMSsourceforpitchbend,modulatethe modulation.Forunipolarparameters,therangeisthe
TRANSPOSEorTUNEparametersinstead. sameasthatoftheselectedparameter,inbothpositive
andnegativedirections.Forinstance,iftheparameter
BENDRANGEisnotmodulatableviaAMS.
rangeis0.0010.00,theIntensityrangewillbe
TRANSPOSE [-24.00+24.00] 10.00+10.00.
Thiscontrolsthecoarsetuning,inhalfstepsandcents, Forbipolarparameters,includingFILTEREG
upordowntwooctaves.Youcanmodulatethis INTENSITY,VCAATTENUATOR,TRANSPOSE,
smoothlyviaAMS. andTUNE,therangeistwicethatoftheoriginal
parameter.Forinstance,iftheoriginalparameterrange
TUNE [5.00...+5.00] is24.00+24.00,theIntensityrangewillbedouble
Thisadjuststhepitchoftheoscillators,instepsof1/5 that:48.00+48.00.Thisallowsfullmodulationofthe
ofacent,foratotalrangeof+/1semitone. parameter,regardlessoftheinitialsetting.
Insomecases,youcanusethistomodulatethe
4-1h: EFFECTS parameteroutsideofitsoriginalrange,forawider
rangeofvalues.
MODE [OFF, CHORUS, PHASE, ENSEMBLE]
Int Mod [List of AMS Sources]
Switchestheeffectmode.Choosefromchorus,phase,
andensemble. YoucanmodulatethemainAMSIntensityfrom
anotherAMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.Foralist
SPREAD [0.00...10.00] ofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
Adjuststhewidthtowhichtheeffectsoundwillbe (AMS)Listonpage 1021.
panned. Intensity [range depends on parameter]
SPEED/INTENSITY [0.00...10.00] ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
Adjuststhespeedorintensityoftheeffect. Mod.TheresultissummedwiththemainAMS
IfMODEissettoChorusorPhase,thisadjuststhe
speed.IfEnsembleisselected,thisadjuststhedepth. Pan knob and Switches
ThePANknobandtheOCTAVE,WAVEFORM,SUB
4-1i: Parameter Details OSC,VCAMODE,MGMODE,andEFFECTS
MODEswitchescaneachbemodulatedfromasingle
Whenyoutouchaknoborswitch,ayellowsquare
AMSsource.
appearsaroundit,showingthatithasbeenselected.
TEMPOSYNC,KEYSYNC,andBASENOTEarenot
TheParameterDetailsareashowsinformationforthis
modulatable.
selecteditem,includingitsparametergroupand
parametername,itsexactvalue,anditsAMS AMS [List of AMS Sources]
assignments.
Individual parameters and AMS parameter.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
PITCHBENDRANGEisnotmodulatableviaAMS.
ThePANknobandanumberofswitchesare Intensity [range depends on parameter]
modulatablebyasingleAMSsource,asdescribed
underPanknobandSwitches,below.Therestofthe
modulation.Therangeisthesameastheselected
continuousknobsonthispagearemodulatablevia
parameter,inbothpositiveandnegativedirections.
twoAMSsources,asdetailedunderKnobs,below.
(Parameter group)
Thisshowsthegroupoftheparameter(suchasVCO).
320

commandsonpage 142.
Programonpage 142.
321
EXi: PolysixEX
Program P5: Modulation & Arpeggiator
5-1: Modulation & Arpeggiator

51PMC
51a
51b
51d
51c
5-1a: EXTERNAL MODULATION Source 2

ThisallowsyoutorouteasecondAMSsourcetothe
TheExternalModulationsectionoffersaneasywayto samelistofmoddestinations.Theparametersare
assignmodulationtomultipledestinationsatonce, identicaltothoseunderSource1,above.
usinganyAMSsource.Notethatmostparametersalso
includededicatedAMSmodulation,viatheParameter
Detailsarea. 5-1b: ARPEGGIATOR
Source 1 ON/OFF [Off, On]
Switchesthearpeggiatoron/off.
SOURCE 1 [List of AMS Sources]
Thisselectsthemodulationsourcetocontrolthe KEY SYNC [Off, On]
parametersbelow.ForalistofAMSsources,see IfthissettingisON,thearpeggiatorwillberesetatthe
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston beginningofeachlegatophrase.
page 1021.
Thisparameterisnotmodulatable.
VCO PULSE WIDTH [10.00+10.00]
TEMPO SYNC [Off, On]
Touchthetext/LEDareatoturnTEMPOSYNConand
appliedtotheoscillator(VCO)PW/PWM.
off.
VCF CUTOFF [10.00+10.00] On(LEDlit):WhenTEMPOSYNCisOn,the
Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation arpeggiatorsynchronizestothesystemtempo,asset
appliedtothefilter(VCF)CUTOFF. byeithertheTempoknoborMIDIClock.The
arpeggiatorspeediscontrolledbythecombinationof
VCA GAIN [10.00+10.00] theBASENOTEandSPEED/TIMESparameters,
Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation below.
appliedtotheamp(VCA). Off(LEDdark):WhenTEMPOSYNCisOff,the
MG LEVEL [10.00+10.00]
thearpeggiator,andtheBASENOTEsettinghasno
Specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation effect.
appliedtotheMG(ModulationGenerator)LEVEL.
322
Program P5: Modulation & Arpeggiator 5-1: Modulation & Arpeggiator
BASE NOTE [1/1...1/32] SPEED/TIMES knob

WhenTEMPOSYNCisON,thissetsthebasicspeed
ofthearpeggiator,relativetothesystemtempo.The AMS [List of AMS Sources]
valuesrangefroma32ndnotetoawholenote, Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
includingtriplets.Thisvalueisthenmultipliedbythe selectedparameter.ForalistofAMSsources,see
SPEED/TIMESknob,below. AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
page 1021.
WhenTEMPOSYNCisOFF,thisparameterhasno
effect. Intensity [range depends on parameter]
ThisparameterisnotmodulatableviaAMS. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
SPEED/TIMES [0.00...10.00/16...1]
IfTEMPOSYNCisOFF,thiscontrolsthespeedofthe Forinstance,iftheparameterrangeis0.0010.00,the
arpeggiator. Intensityrangewillbe10.00+10.00.
IfTEMPOSYNCisON,thismultipliesthelengthof
Int Mod [List of AMS Sources]
theBASENOTE.Forinstance,iftheBASENOTEis
settoasixteenthnote,andTimesissetto3,each YoucanmodulatethemainAMSIntensityfrom
arpeggiatorstepwilllastforadottedeighthnote.Note anotherAMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.
thathighervaluesmeanafasterarpeggio. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
RANGE [1OCT, 2OCT, FULL]
Specifiestherangeinwhichthearpeggiatorwillplay Intensity [range depends on parameter]
thepattern.FULLplaysthepatternover6octaves. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
Mod.TheresultissummedwiththemainAMS
MODE [UP/DOWN, DOWN, UP]
Selectsthepatternthatthearpeggiatorwillplay.
Multi-position Switches
LATCH [Off, On]
Multipositionswitchparameters,includingRANGE
Specifieswhetherthearpeggiatorwillcontinue
andMODE,haveonlyasingleAMS/Intensitypair,as
playingevenafternoteoffoccurs.
below.
5-1c: ANALOG AMS [List of AMS Sources]

ANALOG [0.0010.00] parameter.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Thismodelstheinstabilityofananalogsystemby ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
addingsubtlerandomizationtotheVCOandVCF
Intensity [range depends on parameter]
frequencies.
Thisparameterisnotmodulatable.
5-1d: Parameter Details
On/Off Switches
Thisareashowsdetailsfortheselectedknob,including
itsparametergroupandparametername,itsexact On/offswitchparameters,includingARPEGGIATOR
value,anditsAMSassignments. ON/OFFandLATCH,haveonlyasingle
AMS/Intensitypair,asbelow.
Individual parameters and AMS
OnlytheARPEGGIATORparametersare
modulatableviaAMS;theEXTERNAL Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheselected
MODULATIONandANALOGknobs,theBASE parameter.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
NOTEparameter,andtheTEMPOSYNCandKEY ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
SYNCswitchesarenotmodulatable. AMS Mode [Toggle, Momentary]
NotethattheARPEGGIATORaffectsallvoicesat Thisparametercontrolsthewayinwhichtheswitch
once,andsoitcannotbemodulatedbypervoiceAMS AMSworks.
sourcessuchasEGsorLFOs1and2.
WhenthisissettoToggle,theswitchwillalternate
(Parameter group) betweenonandoff.Forinstance,ifLATCHissetto
Thisshowsthegroupoftheparameter(suchas Off,andAMSisassignedtoafootswitch,thefirst
ARPEGGIATOR). presswillcausethearpeggiatorlatchtoturnon,and
thenextpresswillturnitoffagain.
(Parameter name) [range depends on parameter] Momentarymeansthattheswitchvalueischanged
Thisshowsthenameandexactvalueoftheparameter. onlywhilethecontrollerisenabled.Continuingthe
Youcanedittheparametervaluewithanyofthe examplefromabove,whenthefootswitchispressed
standarddataentrycontrols. down,thearpeggiatorlatchwillturnon;whenthe
footswitchisreleased,thelatchwillturnitoffagain.
323
EXi: PolysixEX
AMSletsyouswitchtotheoppositeofthe So,ifyoureusingSW1orSW2astheAMSsource,its
programmedsetting.Forinstance,ifLATCHissetto besttosettheAMSModetoMomentary,andthenjust
On,andtheAMSModeissettoMomentary,then lettheswitchitselfdeterminethemomentary/toggle
pressingdownonthefootswitchwouldcausethelatch behavior.
toturnoff.
IfyousetAMStouseacontinuouscontroller,suchas t 51: Page Menu Commands
theJoystick,valuesof063areasiftheswitchwasoff,
andvaluesof64127areasiftheswitchwason. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Finallynotethattheassignableswitches,SW1and
SW2,canthemselvesbesettoeithermomentaryor
commandsonpage 142.
togglemodes,andthesesettingsarereflectedbythe
switchLEDs.Individualparametermodesettings, 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
suchastheLATCHAMSMode,donotaffecttheLEDs. Programonpage 142.
Program P7: EG 2-3

ThePolysixEXhastwoassignableEGs,inadditionto
theoriginalEG.EachofthesecanbeusedasanAMS
parameters.
7-1: EG 2
7-2: EG 3
ThePolysixEXsEGs2and3areidenticaltotheAL1s
EG1.Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee71:EG1
(Filter),onpage 203.
Program P8: LFO 1-2

ThePolysixEXhastwoassignableLFOs,inadditionto
theoriginalPolysixMGandtheEXiPrograms
CommonLFO.EachofthesecanbeusedasanAMS
parameters.
8-1: LFO 1
8-2: LFO 2
ThePolysixEXsLFOs1and2areidenticaltothoseof
theAL1.Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee82:
LFO1,onpage 209.
Program P9: AMS Mixers
9-1: AMS Mixers 1-2
9-2: AMS Mixers 3-4

ThePolysixEXsAMSMixersareidenticaltothoseof AMSMixer,onpage 213.
theAL1(althoughthePolysixEXhasfour,totheAL
1stwo).Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee91:
324
PolysixEX: Tone Adjust Common Tone Adjust parameters
PolysixEX: Tone Adjust

PolysixEXToneAdjustDefaultSettings
Filter Filter Filter EG Filter VCO VCO PW/ PWM

Cutoff Resonance Intensity Kbd Track Octave Waveform PWM Speed
VCA Switches 7 & 8:

Mode LFOs 1 & 2 Stop
Switches 9 & 10: Switches 15 & 16:

Arp Tempo & Key Sync MG Tempo & Key Sync
EG1 EG1 EG1 EG1 Effect Effect MG MG MG

Attack Decay Sustain Release Mode Int/Speed Freq/Times Level Mode
ToneAdjustprovidesanelegantphysicalinterfaceto Filter/AmpEGReleaseTime.
thePolysixEXsparameters.Mostofthefactorysounds (99+99,CC#72)
usethedefaultlayout,asshownabove.Youcanalso ThisscalesthereleasetimeofthePolysixEXEG.It
customizethelayoutforindividualsounds,ifdesired. interactswithCC#72.
FormoreinformationaboutToneAdjust,pleasesee FilterEG,AmpEG,andPitchEGAttackTime,Decay
09f:ToneAdjust,onpage 26. Time,SustainLevel,ReleaseTimearenotsupported
bythePolysixEX.
PitchLFO1Intensity.(99+99,CC#77)
Common Tone Adjust parameters ThisscalestheVIBRATOINTparameter.
TheseparametersaffectbothEXi1and2.Exceptas
notedbelow,theCommonToneAdjustparameters
behaveasdescribedunderCommonToneAdjust PolysixEX Tone Adjust parameters
Parameters,onpage 28. InadditiontotheCommonToneAdjustparameters
AmpVelocityIntensity.(99+99) listedabove,thePolysixEXaddsanumberofitsown
Notsupported. parameters.
Filter/AmpEGAttackTime. Notethattheseadditionalparametersareseparatefor
(99+99,CC#73) eachEXi,asopposedtobeingsharedbybothEXiinthe
ThisscalestheattacktimeofthePolysixEXEG.It Program.
interactswithCC#73. Alloftheadditionalparametersarelistedbelow.Tone
Filter/AmpEGDecayTime. Adjustparametersmayaffecttheinternalparameters
(99+99,CC#75) inoneoftwoways:theymaybeRelative,inwhich
ThisscalesthedecaytimeofthePolysixEXEG.It casetheyscaletheexistingparametervalue,or
interactswithCC#75. Absolute,inwhichcasetheyoverwritetheexisting
Filter/AmpEGSustainLevel. value.Unlessotherwisenoted,allofthePolysixEX
(99+99,CC#70) parametersareAbsolute.
ThisscalesthesustainlevelofthePolysixEXEG.It Thefullnameofthecurrentlyselectedparameteris
interactswithCC#70. showninthestatuslineatthetopoftheControl
Surfacepage,aswellasinthepopupmenu.Some
parameterswithlongernamesmayshowan
abbreviationfortheslider,knob,andswitchlabels.
325
EXi: PolysixEX
VCO PITCH
VibratoInt Transpose
VibratoIntAMSInt TransposeAMSInt
VCOOctave Tune
VCOWaveform TuneAMSInt
PW/PWM EFFECTS
PW/PWMAMSInt EffectMode
PWMSpeed EffectSpread
PWMSpeedAMSInt EffectSpreadAMSInt
SubOsc EffectSpeed/Intensity
SubOscAMSInt EffectSpeedAMSInt
VCF ARPEGGIATOR
FilterCutoff ArpegOn/off
FilterCutoffAMSInt ArpegKeySync
FilterResonance ArpegTempoSync
FilterResonanceAMSInt ArpegBaseNote
FilterEGIntensity ArpegSpeed
FilterEGIntensityAMSInt ArpegSpeedAMSInt
FilterKeyboardTrack ArpegTimes
VCA ArpegTimesAMSInt
VCAMode ArpegRange
Attenuator ArpegMode
AttenuatorAMSInt ArpegLatch
EG EGs
EGAttackTime ThefollowingcontrolsareavailableforbothEG2and
EGAttackTimeAMSInt EG3:
EGDecayTime Attacktime(relative)
EGDecayTimeAMSInt Decay&Slopetime(relative)
SustainLevel Sustainlevel(relative)
SustainLevelAMSInt Releasetime(relative)
ReleaseTime LFOs
ReleaseTimeAMSInt InadditiontosupportingthestandardToneAdjust
LFOparameters,thePolysixEXaddsthefollowing
OUTPUT separatecontrols:
Volume LFO1and2Waveform
VolumeAMSInt LFO1and2Shape
MODULATION GENERATOR (MG)
MGKeySync
MGTempoSync
MGBaseNote
MGFrequency
MGFrequencyAMSInt
MGSyncTimes
MGSyncTimesAMSInt
MGDelay
MGLevel
MGLevelAMSInt
MGMode
326
EXi: MOD-7 Waveshaping VPM Synthesizer
MOD-7 Overview
TheMOD7isapowerful,semimodularsynthesizer,
combiningVariablePhaseModulation(VPM), MOD-7 uses EXi fixed resources
waveshaping,ringmodulation,PCMsampleplayback, TheMOD7usesEXifixedresourcesforitsaudio
andsubtractivesynthesis.Exceptionallyversatile,the input.Thistakesupaverysmallamountofprocessing
MOD7produceseverythingfromclassicFM power,evenifyourenotplayinganynotesonthe
keyboardsandbellstorhythmicsoundscapes,from keyboard.Theamountistinyaround1/96thatofthe
cutthroughthemixsynthbassestosparkling,epic CX3butifotherEXiareusinglargeamountsoffixed
pads. resources,thenumberofMOD7thatyoucanloadina
VPMreferstoKorgspatentedcontributionsto CombinationorSongmaybelimited.
FrequencyModulation(FM)synthesis;formore EachEXiineachProgramcountstowardsthe
information,seeVPMandFMSynthesison maximum;forinstance,aProgramwithtwoMOD7s
page 331. countsastwo,notasone.
Featuresinclude: Formoreinformation,seeCX3&STR1:Limitations
SixVPMOscillators.Eachcanbeusedasasine, onEXifixedresourcesonpage 382.
saw,triangle,square,orwaveshapingoscillator
withFMandringmodulation,orasawaveshaping
and/orringmodprocessorforothersignals.
101differentwaveshapingtables,whoseresponse TheMOD7supportsalloftheEXiCommon
canbecontrolledviamodulatabledriveandoffset. parameters,exceptfortwoofthevoiceallocation
APCMsampleplaybackoscillatorusingKorgs LegatoOffset).
ultralowaliasingPCMtechnology,asfirst
introducedintheHD1.Thissupportsfourway Alloftheothervoiceallocationoptionsarefully
velocityswitchingbetweenanymonoROM,EXs, supported,includingMono,MonoLegato,Unison,etc.
orRAMsamples.
Dualmultimoderesonantfilters(includingKorgs
MultiFilter,asfirstintroducedintheAL1).
Threepatchable,modulatable2in,1outmixersfor
combiningandscalingaudiosignals.
Noisegeneratorwithdedicatedfilterand
saturation.
Liveaudioinput.
PatchPanelallowsfreeconnectionofall
components,includingthesixVPMOscillators,
PCMoscillator,noisegenerator,realtimeaudio
input,threemodulatablemixers,andtwofilters.
Connectionscanincludemultiplecablesfroma
singleoutput,hybridserial/parallelroutings,and
feedbackpaths.
Vastsamplemanglingcapabilities,with
incredibleflexibilityandpower.UsesamplesasFM
modulators,andcreateincrediblyrichprocessing
environmentscombiningmultiplestagesof
filtering,waveshaping,andringmodulation,
patchedtogetherhoweveryoudlike.
Upto52voicesofpolyphony.
ImportclassicFMsoundsfromtheDX7.
FourpervoiceLFOs,tenretriggerableEGs,nine
keytrackinggenerators,eightAMSmixers,anda
pervoicestepsequencer.
AccesstoallstandardEXiProgramfeatures,
includingtheCommonLFO,CommonStep
Sequencer,KeyTrack1&2,KARMA,EQ,and
effectsaswellaslayeringwithanyotherEXi
(includingtwoMOD7stogether,for12VPM
oscillators!)
327
MOD-7 overview
AMS
AMS AMS
EG 1-9 Amp EG LFO1-4
Per-voice step LFO1 LFO1 Mixer 1-4
LFO1 MixerLFO1
5-8
sequencer LFO1 LFO1 LFO1 LFO1
LFO1 LFO1 LFO1 LFO1
Amp Key Filter Key

Track Track
FM Oscillators/Waveshapers
FM Osc 1-6
FM Osc 1-6
FM Osc 1-6
FM Osc 1-6
FM Osc 1-6
FM Osc 1-6 Level Key
Patch Panel Track
Level
In 1
FM
Patch Panel
Level Sine Osc Waveshaper Ring Mod Level Patch Panel
In 2
Feedback
Feedback from Sine Osc
Feedback From Output
PCM Oscillator Patch Panel Mixers 1-3
Mixers 1-3
Level Key Patch Panel Level

Track
Patch Panel
PCM Osc Level Patch Panel Patch Panel Level
Noise Generator Filters
Filter (24dB/oct)
Noise
Level Patch Panel
Generator Filter A
Patch Panel Patch Panel
(w/ Multifilter)
Audio Input
Patch Panel Filter B Patch Panel

EXi Audio
Level Patch Panel
Input
Output
Patch Panel
In 1
... Stereo
Main Stereo Mixer Stereo Amp Output
EQ
Patch Panel
In 6
328
MOD-7 Overview Using the Parameter Details area
Using the Parameter Details area
Parameter
Details area
Main
area
indicatesthattheParameterDetailsareaincludesthe
Overview possibilityofAMSmodulation,butthatnoneis
TheLCDdisplaysaredividedintotwosections.The assigned;theredDandarrowshowthatanAMS
firstisthemainpartofthedisplay,whichincludesall sourceisalreadyassigned
ofthemajorMOD7parameters.Thisprovidesquick ToeditAMSsettingsintheParameterDetailsarea:
accesstodifferentfunctions,andaneasytoread
1. Touchtheparameterinthemainareaofthe
overviewofthecurrentsettings.
display.
TheothersectionistheParameterDetailsarea,located IftheparametersupportsAMSmodulation,the
intheupperrighthandpartofthescreen.Thisarea ParameterDetailsareawillshowoneormoreAMS
showsinformationfortheselectedparameter,suchas sourcesandintensities.
descriptivegraphicsandAMSassignments.
2. EdittheAMSsettingsintheParameterDetails
area.
Assigning AMS modulation NotethatAMScanoftenmodulateparametersoutside
ParameterswhichhaveAMSmodulationshownonly therangeofthestoredvalues,asifyouwerepushing
intheParameterDetailsareaaremarkedwitheithera theparameterbeyondtheendsoftheknob.
blueDoraredDandanarrow.TheblueD
Loading DX sounds
ThefilemaycontainmultipleSystemExclusive
Overview messages,butonlyifthemainDX7bankdumpis
TheMOD7canloadsoundscreatedforthevintage thefirstofthesemessages.Allsubsequent
DX7.Therearethousandsofthesesoundsavailableon messagesinthefilewillbeignored.
theinternet,providingamassivepreexistinglibrary Note:someinstruments,suchastheDX7II,may
oftimbres(inadditiontothemanysoundscreated transmitmultipleSystemExclusivemessageswhen
exclusivelyfortheMOD7!).TrysearchingforDX7 doingtheirprogramdatadump,withthemainDX7
SysExdownload. bankdumpcominglast.Ifthissetofmessagesis
Onceloaded,youcanbringthesevintagesoundsupto storedintoasingle.SYXfile,theOASYSwillnotbe
dateusingalloftheMOD7suniquefeatures,layer abletoloadthefile.
themwithotherEXi,andprocessthemwithKARMA TheSystemExclusivemustbeintheoriginal,first
andtheOASYSeffects. generationDX7format,whichwassupportedbyall
Theconversionworksbyreading.SYXformatSystem oftheclassic6operatorFMsynthsaswellasthe
Exclusivefiles.Thisformatissupportedbyprograms DX9.SystemExclusivefilesfromlatergeneration
onallmajorcomputeroperatingsystems. FMinstruments,suchas4operatorbabyDX
synthsandtheTX81Z,SY77,etc.,cannotbeloaded.
Supported file types

Loading a single bank of DX7 sounds
Inordertoloadafile,itmustmeetthefollowing
requirements: ToloadabankofDX7sounds:
Thefilemustcontainacompletebankof32DX7 1. TransfertheDX7.SYXfiletoOASYSreadable
sounds.Fileswithonlyasinglesoundcannotbe media,suchasaUSBflashdriveorCDR.
loaded. 2. ConnectorinsertthemediaintotheOASYS.
329
3. PressthefrontpanelDISKbuttontoenterDisk
mode.
4. IfusingaUSBdevice,mountthedeviceusingthe
ScanDevicemenucommandontheMedia
Informationpage.
5. GototheLoadpage.
6. SelecttheDX7.SYXfile.
7. PresstheLOADbutton.
Adialogboxwillappear,allowingyoutoselectabank
intowhichtoloadthesounds.SinceDX7banks
contain32sounds,whileanOASYSbankcontains128,
youcanalsoselectwheretoplacetheDX7sounds
withintheOASYSbank:intoPrograms031,3263,64
95,or96127.
8. SelectthebankandProgramrangeintowhichto
loadthesounds.
Important:IfyouselectanHD1bank,itwillbe
changedtoanEXibank,andallofthebankssHD1
Programswillbeerased.
9. PressOKtoloadthesounds.
ThesoundswillbeloadedintotheOASYSasMOD7
Programs.
Loading multiple banks of DX7 sounds

Ifyoulike,youcanloadmultiple.SYXfilesatonce.To
doso:
1. Followsteps1through5underLoadingasingle
bankofDX7sounds,above.
2. EnabletheMultipleSelectcheckbox.
3. SelectthedesiredDX7.SYXfiles.
4. PresstheLOADbutton.
AnAreyousure?dialogwillappear.
5. PressOK.
6. Foreach.SYXfile,selectthebankandProgram
rangetoloadinto.
Formoreinformation,seesteps8and9under
LoadingasinglebankofDX7sounds,above.
Error messages
IftheOASYScantreadthefile,itwillshowoneoftwo
errormessages:
Thereisnoreadabledatawillappearifthefileis
shorterthan4104bytes,oriftheSysExheader
indicatessomethingotherthanDX7ProgramBank
format.
Filecontainsunsupporteddatawillappearifthe
headeriscorrect,butthedataisdamaged;forinstance,
ifthefileschecksumdoesntmatch,orifthetrailingF7
ismissing.
330
Synthesis with the MOD-7: a guided tour Overview
Synthesis with the MOD-7: a guided tour
Overview
ThetutorialsbelowprovideaguidedtouroftheMOD
7ssynthesiscapabilities.Theystartwithalittle VPM, PCM, Waveshaping, and Ring Mod
backgroundinformation,andthendiverightintostep TheMOD7combinesVPMwithPCMsample
bystepinstructionsforcreatingsimplesoundsfrom playback,waveshaping,ringmodulation,anddual
scratch,usingalloftheMOD7smajorfeatures. multimoderesonantfilters,Itsapowerfuldigital
Pleasereadeachsectioninorder,sincethelaterones synthesistoolkit,anditcanbeapproachedfrommany
relyonwhatyouvedoneearlier. differentangles,asdiscussedinthetutorialsbelow.
VPM and FM Synthesis More information on the internet

VariablePhaseModulation(VPM)synthesisrefersto TherehavebeenentirebookswrittenaboutFM
KorgspatentedcontributionstoFrequency synthesis.Whilewelllookatmanypracticalexamples
Modulation(FM)synthesis. ofFMinthetutorialsbelow,moretheoretical
informationisunfortunatelyoutsidethescopeofthis
Carrier-modulator pairs manual.
Initsmostbasicform,thesesynthesismethodsusea Ifyouarecurioustolearnmore,youcanfindagreat
pairofoscillators:amodulatorandacarrier.Onlythe dealofinformationontheinternet,rangingfrom
carrierisconnectedtotheaudiooutput.The introductoryarticlestohighlytechnicalacademic
modulatorisnothearddirectly;instead,itsoutput treatises.TrysearchingforFMsynthesisor
modulatesthefrequency(orphase)ofthecarrier. frequencymodulationsynthesis.
Thismodulationcreateschangesintimbre.The
relativefrequencies(orratios)ofthetwooscillators
determineswhichovertonesareproduced,andthe
Aliasing
levelofthemodulatorcontrolstheloudnessofthose Multiplyingoneaudioratesignalwithanother
overtones. generallycausesaliasing,andVPMisnoexception.
Ingeneral,wholenumberratiosproduceharmonically Highermodulatorlevelscanproducealiasingartifacts,
relatedovertones,finedeviationsfromwholenumber fromlowlevelgrungetophantompitchesto,atthe
ratiosproducesimilarovertoneswithchorusing,and extremes,loudwhitenoise.Thisbecomesmoreofan
morecomplexratiosproducewild,clangorous issuewithhigherfrequencies,suchaswhenplayingin
overtones. thetopoctavesofthekeyboard.
Sometimes,theseartifactsmaybeusefulaspartofthe
Greater complexity overalltimbre;othertimes,theymaybeunwelcome
MostmodernVPMandFMsynthsallowmorethan guests.Themostvaluabletooltomitigatealiasingis
simpleoscillatorpairs.Forinstance,amodulatormight KeyTracking,whichletsyoureducethemodulator
itselfbemodulated,tocreateamorecomplextimbre; levelsathigherfrequencies,whilekeepingthem
twomodulatorsmighthaveseparatepathsintoa strongeratlowerfrequencies.TheMOD7includes
singlecarrier;asinglemodulatormightbesenttotwo dedicatedmultipointkeytrackingforeachVPM
ormorecarriers;andsoon.Acarriermightbothbe Oscillator.
hearddirectly,andalsoactasamodulatoronanother
oscillator.Feedbackpathsmayletacarriermodulate
itself. Creating an initialized MOD-7 Program
IntheMOD7,theseroutingsarecreatedonthePatch Forthetutorialsbelow,wellneedtostartwithan
Panel,byselectinganalgorithm,creatingpatchcables, initializedMOD7Program.Todothis:
oracombinationofthetwo. 1. InProgrammode,selectfactoryProgramUF007,
Themorecomplextheroutingandfrequency CatOnaMoJo.
relationships,themoredifficultitcanbeforeven 2. PresstheCommonbutton,togototheEXi
experiencedsounddesignerstopredicttheresults.As Commonpages.
legendhasit,themainbreakthroughforFMitself 3. PresstheBasic/Vectortab.
camefromamistake,whenFMpioneerJohn
ChowningprogrammedanLFOwithafrequency100 TheBasic/Vectorpageswillappearontheupperrow
timesfasterthanhedintended.Whenworkingwith oftabs.
theMOD7,takeacuefromhisexample:keep 4. PresstheProgramBasictab.
experimenting,andleaveyourearsopenforhappy Now,youshouldbeontheProgramBasicpage.
accidents.
5. ChangetheEXi1InstrumentTypefromCX3
TonewheelOrgantoMOD7WaveshapingVPM
Synthesizer.
331
Thatsit;younowhaveaninitializedMOD7Program, IfyouvealreadybeenworkingwiththeMOD7,and
plusabitofreverbforearcandy.TheControlSurface wanttoreturntoaninitializedstate:
isalsosettoToneAdjust,whichwelltakeadvantage 1. SelecttheEXi1InstrumentTypeparameter.
ofthroughoutthetutorial.
2. UsetheDec buttontochangeittoPolysixEX.
3. UsetheInc buttontotoggleitbacktoMOD7.
Individual oscillators and subtractive synthesis

EachofthesixVPMOscillatorscanbeusedonitsown, 7. PresstheJumpbutton.
togeneratesine,saw,triangle,orsquarewaveforms, Thistakesyoutotheselectedblockspageinthiscase,
plustimbrescreatedbywaveshaping.Youcanlayer theVPMOscillator1page.Youcanusethisshortcut
multipleVPMOscillatorstogether,modulatetheir withanyoftheblocksonthePatchPanel.
volumes,andprocessthemthroughfiltersforstandard
subtractivesynthesis. 8. OntheVPMOscillator1page,settheModeto
Saw.
Thiscontrolsthebasictimbreoftheoscillator.
Layering six saw oscillators
9. SettheRatioFineto+0.004.
Letsstartbycreatingasimplesoundwithsixlayered Thiscausesthepitchtobeveryslightlyhigherthan
sawtoothoscillators. nominal.Weregoingtodetuneallsixoscillators,to
1. FollowtheinstructionsunderCreatingan createafat,stackedsawtoothtimbre.
initializedMOD7Program,above. 10.Usingthetabs,selecteachoftheotherVPM
2. PresstheEXi1button. Oscillatorsinturn.Foreachone,settheModeto
TheMOD7stabswillappearontheright. Saw,andsettheRatioFineasnotedbelow.
3. PressthePatchPaneltab. Osc2:0.004
ThePatchPanelwillappear.Thisshowsallofthebasic Osc3:+0.008
buildingblocksoftheMOD7,includingallofthe Osc4:0.008
oscillators,filters,mixers,andsoon.
Osc5:+0.014
TheAlgorithmnameisshownintheupperlefthand
Osc6+0.014
corner.Bydefault,itssettoBlankPatch.
Now,tryplayingthekeyboard.Itshouldsoundlikea
4. OpentheAlgorithmpopup,andselect05:All
thick,detunedsawtoothtimbre,withadigitaltone
carriers>4pole.
quality.
5. PressOKtoconfirmtheselectionandclosethe
popup. Towarmitupabit,letsmakeitsoeachoscillatorstarts
witharandomphase.
Asashortcut,youcanalsoselecttheAlgorithmname
onthePatchPanelpage,andthenentertheAlgorithm 11.ForeachoftheVPMOscillators,setthePhase
numberfromthenumerickeypad. Sync(intheOscillatorsection)toRandom.
NoticethatthelinesonthePatchPanelhavechanged. Noticehowthismakesthesoundmorefulland
Theseshowthenormalledconnectionsbetweenthe rounded.
variousblocks.(Normalledisatermusedin
patchbaysandmodularsynths,meaningthedefault Hands-on control with Tone Adjust
internalconnectionsbetweenpastchpoints.)
ThedefaultToneAdjustsettingsgiveyouhandson
05Allcarriers>4polehasoutputsfromallsixVPM
controlofthemostimportantMOD7parameters.
Oscillatorsmixedintoasinglefilter.
Noticethat,totheLeftoftheControlSurface,theTone
TheVPMOscillatorsareshownasalineofsixboxes, Adjustbuttonislit.ThismeansthattheControl
runningfrom1atthetopto6atthebottom.Theboxes Surfaceknobs,sliders,andswitcheswillcontrolthe
arelabeledsimplywiththenumbers1through6.Each ToneAdjustparameters.
hastwoinputjacks,coloredred,andoneoutputjack,
Letstrythisout,continuingfromtheabove:
coloredblue.
1. UseSwitches16toturnVPMOscillators16on
6. Touchthebluecircle(theoutput)onVPM
andoff.
Oscillator1.
2. UseSliders16toadjustthevolumesofVPM
Ayellowhighlightboxwillappeararoundtheoutput
Oscillators16.
jack,toshowthatthejackisselected.
Inthissound,turningofforreducingthevolumeofthe
Lookintheupperrighthandcornerofthepage.This highernumberedoscillatorswillreducethetimbres
istheParameterDetailsarea;itshowsadditional fatness.
informationabouttheselecteditem.Inthiscase,itwill
showthatyouveselectedtheoutputofVPMOscillator 3. Whileplaying,turnKnob7totheLeft.
1,alongwiththeoutputlevelandtheinputstowhich Bydefault,Knob7controlsFilterAscutoff,soturning
itisconnected(ifany).Italsohastwobuttons:Jump itcreatesafiltersweep.
andDisconnect.
332
Synthesis with the MOD-7: a guided tour VPM (aka FM)
ForagraphicshowingallofthedefaultToneAdjust
assignments,seeMOD7:ToneAdjustonpage 375.
VPM (aka FM)
Basic VPM Feedback

TostartusingVPMinearnest,simplyconnectthe Continuingfromtheabove,letstakeabrieflookat
outputofoneVPMOscillatortotheinputofanother. Feedback.ThiscausestheVPMOscillatortomodulate
Youcandothiseitherbyselectinganalgorithm,or itself,essentiallyactingasboththecarrierandthe
creatingapatchcable.Forinstance: modulatoratthesametime.
1. FollowtheinstructionsunderCreatingan 1. PressSwitch1,sothatitsLEDisoff.
initializedMOD7Program,above. ThismutesVPMOscillator1.
2. PresstheEXi1button,andthenpressthePatch 2. Playthekeyboard.
Paneltab.
Noticethatthesoundisnowasinewave,sincewere
ThePatchPanelwillappear. hearingonlytheunmodulatedVPMOscillator2.
3. SettheAlgorithmto08:2+2+2>ParallelFilters. 3. GototheVPMOsc2page.
ThisgroupsthesixVPMOscillatorsintothreecarrier IfyourestillonthePatchPanelpage,youcandothis
modulatorpairs. byselectinganyofthejacksonOsc2andthenpressing
4. OntheControlSurface,pressswitches3through theJumpbuttoninParameterDetails.
6,sothattheirLEDsturnoff. Otherwise,selecttheOsctab,andthentheVPMOsc2
ThismutesVPMOscillators36.Wellonlybeworking tab.
withOscillators1and2.
4. Whileplayingthekeyboard,slowlyraisethe
5. LowerSlider1tothebottomofitsrange,andplay Feedbackparametertoabout65.
thekeyboard. Noticehowthesoundbecomesbrighter,almostlike
LoweringSlider1turnsVPMOscillator1svolumeall sweepingthefilteronananalogsynth.Infact,when
thewaydown.ThismeansthatyoullhearonlyVPM Feedbackisat65,thesoundisveryclosetoasawtooth
Oscillator2,whichplaysapuresinewave. waveform.
6. Whileplayingthekeyboard,slowlyraiseSlider1 YoucanmodulatetheFeedbacklevel,andalsochoose
tothemiddleofitsrange,orslightlyhigher. betweentwodifferentfeedbackpaths.Formore
AsyouraiseSlider1,listentohowthetimbrechanges information,seeFeedbackonpage 357.
tobeincreasinglybright.WhatyourehearingisFM
synthesis:VPMOscillator1ismodulatingVPM
Phase
Oscillator2.BycontrollingthelevelofVPMOscillator
1,Slider1controlstheamountofmodulation. Insomecases,thephaserelationshipbetweenthe
Inthisalgorithm,usingstandardFMterms,VPM carrierandmodulatorhasaninterestingeffectonthe
Oscillator1isamodulator,andVPMOscillator2isa sound.Continuingfromtheabove:
carrier. 1. LowerVPMOsc2sFeedbackto0.
7. Whileplayingthekeyboard,veryslowlyrotate 2. GototheVPMOsc1page.
Knob1. 3. InVPMOsc1,settheRatioto1.
Knob1controlstheRatio,orfundamentalpitch,of Now,bothVPMOsc1and2aresettothesameRatio,
VPMOscillator1.SinceVPMOscillator1isactingasa forthemostbasicFMtimbre:acarrier/modulatorratio
modulator,thischangesthetimbreofthesound. of1.
8. ExperimentwithdifferentsettingsofSlider1and 4. PressSwitch1,sothatitsLEDisOn.
Knob1.
5. SetSlider1tothemiddleofitsrange.
NoticehowKnob1changestheovertonefrequencies
6. Whileplayingthekeyboard,slowlyincreaseVPM
createdbytheFM,whileSlider1changestheir
Osc1sPhasefrom0to90.
intensity.
Noticehowthetimbrechanges.
9. Whileplayingthekeyboard,presstheControl
SurfacesSwitch1toturnitonandoff. Phasehasastrongeffectwithcarrier/modulatorratios
of1:1and2:1,butismuchmoresubtle(ornot
ThisenablesanddisablesVPMOscillator1.Whenits
noticeableatall)atotherratios.
off,youllhearVPMOscillator2onitsown:apuresine
wave.Whenprogramming,thisisahandywaytofind
outhowanindividualVPMOscillatorisaffectingthe Detuning
overallsound.
Letslookatwhathappenswhenthecarrierand
modulatorareslightlyoutoftune.Continuingfrom
theabove:
1. SetVPMOsc1sPhasebackto0.
333
2. Whileplayingthekeyboard,usetheIncbuttonto 4. GototheEG1page,bypressingfirsttheEGtab
changeVPMOsc1sFreqOffsetfrom+0000Hzto andthentheEG1tab.
+0001Hz. 5. SettheBreakandSustainLevelsto00.
Noticehowthisintroducesachoruseffectintothe Eachnotenowhasabowwwsoundattheattack.
sound.
6. Whileplayingthekeyboard,gototheControl
3. Whileplayingthekeyboard,usetheDecbuttonto Surfaceandexperimentwithdifferentsettingsof
changetheFreqOffsetbackto+0000Hz. Knob1andSlider1.
Noticehowthesoundbecomesmoreflatandstatic.A ThesechangetheRatioandOutputLevelofVPMOsc
smallamountofdetuningcanaddalotofinterestto 1.Noticethedifferentsoundsthatthiscreates.Slider1
thesound. willoftenworkwellinthemidtolowranges;dont
4. Whileplayingthekeyboard,usetheIncbuttonto keepitatthemaximumlevel!
changeVPMOsc1sRatioFinefrom+0.000to Next,letscreateamorepercussivesound:
+0.003.
7. InEG1,settheDecayCurveto10(Exp).
Thisalsoaddsachorusingeffect.Theresadifference
betweenchangingtheRatioandtheFreqOffset, 8. SettheDecayTimeto22.
however,aswellseenext: 9. Whileplayingthekeyboard,gototheControl
Surfaceandexperimentwithdifferentsettingsof
5. Playdifferentrangesofthekeyboard:low,middle,
Knob1andSlider1.
andhigh,includingallthewayuptothetopofthe
keyboard. DependingontheRatio(assetbyKnob1),thiscreates
percussivesoundswithwoodyormetalliccharacters.
Noticehowthespeedofthechoruseffectgetsfasteras
youplayhigher.WithFreqOffset,ontheotherhand,
thespeedstaysthesameacrossthekeyboard.Eachis Modulating Ratio
usefulfordifferentpurposes.
Sofar,wevebeenusingToneAdjusttocontrolRatio.
6. Whileplayingthekeyboard(arpeggios,for Youmayalsosometimeswanttomodulatethiswith
instance),usetheVALUEslidertosweepVPM othercontrollers,orevenwithLFOs,EGs,andsoon.
Osc 1sRatioFinethroughoutitsrange.
Ratioisonewayoflookingatpitch.OntheMOD7,
Noticehowtheeffectchangeswithbroaderdetuning,
youcanmodulateeachVPMOscillatorspitchin
includingnewfrequenciesappearingbothaboveand
semitonesandcents,justaswithotherOASYSEXi.To
belowtherootpitch.
doso,continuingfromabove:
1. SetVPMOsc1sRatioto4.
Envelopes and VPM NoticethattheParameterDetailsarea,intheupper
EachVPMOscillatorcanhaveitsownvolume rightofthescreen,nowhastheheadingPitch
envelope.AswevenoticedbyusingControlSurface Modulation.ThisappearswhenanyoftheRatioor
Slider1,changingthelevelofamodulatoraffectsthe FreqOffsetparametersareselected.
intensityoftheFM.Envelopesletyoucreate 2. SetAMS1toSW1Mod(CC#80),andIntensityto
interestingtimbresbyvaryingthatintensityovertime. +12.00.
Continuingfromtheabove: Now,pressingSW1willraisethepitchofVPMOsc1
1. SetVPMOsc1sRatioFinebackto+0.000. byanoctave.
ThemainRatioshouldstillbesetto1. 3. PressSW1,toturniton.
2. SettheOutputLevelto75. Noticehowthischangesthetimbreoftheattack.
3. NoticethattheOutputsectionsEGSelectissetto 4. ChangeAMS1toLFO1.
EG1. Now,thepitchismodulatedbyLFO1.Thisgivesthe
ThisistheEGassignedtocontroltheVPMOscs attackaswoopingcharacter,kindoflikeofawater
volume.Bydefault,EGs16areassignedtoVPMOsc droplet.
16.
Filtered VPM
VintageFMsynthsdidnthavefilters.Ifyouwanted FMsweepsandresonantfiltersweepshavedifferent
thesoundtobedarker,orthinner,orchangeintimbre qualities;useeachforwhatitdoesbest,orusethem
atall,youhadtomakeithappenusingFM. together.Usehighpassorbandpassfilters,resonance,
FilteringaddsanotherdimensiontoVPM,bothin ortheMultiFiltertoachievesoundsimpossiblewith
termsoftimbralpossibilitiesandeaseofuse.For FMalone.
instance,ifyoulikethebasictimbrebutwantittobea Filterscanevenbeusedinbetweenmodulatorsand
littlemoremellow,youcanusealowpassfilter. carriers,aspartoftheVPMprocessingchain.
334
Synthesis with the MOD-7: a guided tour PCM as a VPM modulator
3. SetIn1sLevelto0.
Filtering the VPM output
Whenyouselectajack,itslevelisalwaysselectedas
FilteringtheoutputofasetofVPMOscillatorsis well.So,youcanusethedataentrycontrols
simpleandeffective.Todoso: immediately,withoutneedingtoselecttheonscreen
1. FollowtheinstructionsunderCreatingan Levelparameter.
initializedMOD7Programonpage 331. 4. TouchFilterAsoutput(thebluejack)twice,so
2. OntheMOD7PatchPanel,settheAlgorithmto thattheyellowhilightboxisblinking.
08:2+2+2>ParallelFilters. Thisshowsthatthejackisreadytobeconnectedviaa
3. OntheControlSurface,pressswitches3through patchcable.
6,sothattheirLEDsturnoff. 5. TouchthefirstinputjackonVPMOsc4.
ThismutesVPMOscillators36. Thereshouldnowbeabrowncableconnectingthe
4. GototheVPMOsc1page. outputofFilterAtoIn1ofVPMOsc4.
Rememberthatyoucanjumptothispagedirectly LookintheParameterDetailsarea,andverifythatit
fromthePatchPanel.Justselectoneofthejackson saysOsc4atthetop.Also,verifythatthemiddleline
VPMOsc1,andpresstheJumpbuttoninthe readsIn1>FilterA,Out.
ParameterDetailsarea. YouvenowcreatedacomplexVPMpatch,likethis:
5. SettheOutputsectionsEGSelecttoNone. VPMOsc1>VPMOsc2>FilterA>VPMOsc4
Thismeansthatthevolumewillbeatitsmaximum, 6. GotoFilterA,andsetitsResonanceto00.
unaffectedbyanEG.
7. OntheControlSurface,pressswitch4,sothatits
6. GototheFilterBasicpage,bypressingfirstthe LEDturnson.
FiltertabandthentheBasictab.
ThisturnsonVPMOsc4.
7. SetFilterAsResonanceto65.
8. AlsoontheControlSurface,setSlider1tothe
8. Whileplaying,moveSlider1andKnob7,and middle,andmoveSlider2allthewayup.
comparethedifferenteffectsthattheycreate.
9. ExperimentwithmovingKnob7andSlider2.
Slider1controlstheVPMOsc1Level,andthusthe
Knob7controlsFilterAcutoff,andSlider2controls
intensityoftheFMonVPMOsc2.Knob7controls
VPMOsc2Level.Listentothedifferenteffects.
FilterAsFrequency,andsomovingitcreatesafilter
sweep. NotethatVPMOsc2isnowamodulator,affectingthe
timbreofVPMOsc4.WearenthearingVPMOsc2
directly.
Filtering VPM modulators
10.MoveSlider2tothetopofitsrange.
YoucanalsousefiltersaspartoftheVPMprocessing
Slider2controlstheoutputvolumeofVPMOsc2.
chain,betweenmodulatorsandcarriers.Todoso,
continuingfromtheabove: 11.SetFilterAsTypetoBandPass.
1. GotothePatchPanelpage. 12.Whileplaying,sweepKnob7betweenthe
minimum(allthewayleft)andthemiddle.
2. SelectInput1oftheMainMixer.
Thisproducesinterestingsoundsdefinitelyfilterlike,
TheMainMixeristhetallblockonthefarrightofthe
butnotthesameasusingafilterintraditional
PatchPanel,andInput1isthetopmostjack.Lookin
subtractivesynthesis.
theParameterDetailsareatoverifythatyouve
selectedMainMixandIn1.
PCM as a VPM modulator

AlloftheexamplesaboveuseVPMOscillatorsas 3. IntheAlgorithmSelectpopup,selectthe
modulators,butyoucanalsousethePCMOscillator, Processingtab.
NoiseGenerator,andtheEXiAudioInputas Thissmallsetofalgorithmsisdesignedforprocessing
modulators. PCMortheEXiAudioInputthroughoneormore
Forinstance,herearetwoquicktutorialsinusingPCM VPMOscillators.
asanFMmodulator,whichwasapopularfeatureona 4. SelectAlgorithm51,PCM>1>4pole.
fewlatergenerationvintageFMsynths.
5. GotothePCMModpage.
Todoso,selecttheOsctabandthenthePCMModtab.
Single Multisample as VPM modulator
6. SettheOctaveto+1[4].
1. FollowtheinstructionsunderCreatingan SinceVPMOsc1sRatioissetto1,thiscreatesanFM
initializedMOD7Programonpage 331. ratioof2:1.
2. OnthePatchPanelpage,pressthebuttontothe 7. SettheOutputLevelto67.
leftoftheAlgorithmnametoopentheAlgorithm
Selectpopup. 8. SettheVelocitySensto+050.
Thisletsvelocitycontroltheoutputlevel.
335
9. GotothePCMOscillatorpage,andselect MS3:0509:MuteGtr1
differentMultisamplesforMS1. MS4:0518:BassHarm
ThechoiceofMultisampledramaticallyaffectsthe
3. Next,settheBottomVelocitiesasfollows:
sound.YoucanuseanymonoMultisamples,including
ROM,EXs,andRAM.Trythesetostart: MS1:110
Choir:203VoiceChoir MS2:95
Wavestation:0597puh MS3:080
Wavestation:0619VS35 (TheBottomVelocityforMS4isalways1.)
SE1:1200HouseHits 4. GotothePCMModpage.
5. SettheOutputLevelto100,andtheOctaveto
+0[8].
Velocity-switched Multisamples
6. Playthekeyboardatdifferentvelocities,and
Ofcourse,youcanalsovelocityswitchbetween noticehowthetimbrechanges.
differentMultisamples.Continuingfromtheabove: PCMsamplescanoftenbeverybrightand
1. OnthePCMOscpage,setallfourMSType harmonicallycomplex.Whenusingbrightorcomplex
parameterstoMultisample. signalsasFMmodulators,highlevelsgoingintothe
2. SetthefourMultisamplesasfollows: carriermayresultinlotsofnoise;togetgoodresults,
youmayneedtolowerthemodulatorslevel
MS1:0510:MuteGtr2
significantly.YoumightalsotryprocessingthePCM
MS2:0511:MuteGtr3 (oranybrightmodulatorsignal)throughalowpassor
bandpassfilter,beforesendingitintothecarrier.
Waveshaping
Waveshapingprocessesaninputthroughatable, Eachofthesesimple,staticwaveformscanbealtered
changingitstimbre.Youcanusethisintwodifferent sometimesdramaticallybyusingOffsetandDrive,
butrelatedways. evenwithoutanyrealtimemodulation.Theyllalso
First,waveshapingoffersawidearrayofwaveform havedifferenteffectsdependingontheinputsignal;a
optionsfortheVPMOscillator.Thereare101tablesto complex,acousticMultisamplewillgivedifferent
choosefrom,andthewaythatthetableinteractswith resultsthanasimplesinewave.
theinputsignalcanbemodulatedinrealtime.
Second,waveshapingletsyouprocessanysignal, Using Offset
includingPCMsamples,theoutputsofother
Bymodulatingoffset,wecanmakeaquickandsimple
oscillators,orrealtimeaudioinput.Thiscapability
reedpianosound,usingonlyasingleVPMOscillator.
providesavastamountofsoundmanglingpotential,
andhasbeenacentralfeatureofseveralclassicdigital Continuingfromtheabove:
synths. 1. IntheWaveshapersectionofVPMOsc1,setthe
Formoreinformation,see54c:Waveshaperon Offsetto+090.
page 358. 2. IntheParameterDetailsarea,setOffsetAMSto
ExponentialVelocity,andsetIntensityto090.
Creating different waveforms 3. SetDriveto06dB.
4. SetMakeupGainto+06dB.
Aswithmostothersynthesistechniques,modulation
iswhatreallymakeswaveshapingcomealive.Even 5. SettheTabletoPickup1.
withoutanymodulation,however,waveshapingopens Inthepopuplist,Pickup1isnearthetopofthefirst
upawiderangeofdifferentwaveforms,whichcanbe column.
usefulbothontheirown,andaselementsinanFM 6. SetKeySlopeto5.
chain.
Thestepsarein0.2dB/octave,so5is1dB/octave.
1. FollowtheinstructionsunderCreatingan
initializedMOD7Programonpage 331. 7. Playthekeyboard,andnoticehowthesound
changesatdifferentvelocities.
2. GototheVPMOsc1page.
3. SettheModetoSine+Waveshaper.
Creating evolving timbres
4. IntheWaveshapersection,setKeySlopeto1.
KeySlopescalestheDriveasyouplayhigherand Next,letsseehowwaveshapingsoundswhen
lower,primarilytominimizealiasing.1isaverymild modulatedfromanenvelope.Continuingfromthe
setting,reducingDriveby0.2dBperoctaveaboveC4. above:
5. SettheTabletoLinear. 1. GototheEG3page.
6. UseInctostepthroughtables;listentothesound. 2. SettheAttackTimeto70,andtheDecayTimeto
90.
3. SetboththeBreakandSustainLevelsto00.
336
Synthesis with the MOD-7: a guided tour Waveshaping
Thiscreatesanenvelopewhichsweepsslowlyupand Finally,letsbringbacktheEG3modulationofDrive:
down. 11.SetDriveto36dB.
4. GototheVPMOsc1page. 12.InParameterDetails,setDriveAMSIntensityto
5. SetOffsetto+000. +36dB.
6. InParameterDetails,setOffsetAMSIntensityto 13.Again,useInctostepthroughthetables,and
+000. experimentwithdifferentsettingsofSlider1.
7. SettheDriveto36dB.
8. InParameterDetails,setDriveAMStoEG3,and Waveshaping and PCM
Intensityto+36dB.
YoucanusewaveshapingtoalteranyPCMsample,
BymodulatingtheDrive,EG3changesthewaythat includingROM,EXs,andRAM.
thetableinteractswiththeinputsignalcreatingan
effectthatvariesovertime. Continuingfromtheabove:
9. SettheTabletoForest. 1. GotothePatchPanel.
Inthepopuplist,Forestisnearthetopofthefourth 2. SelectAlgorithm51,PCM>1>4pole.
column. 3. Openthemenu,andselecttheDeleteAll
10.Whileplayingthekeyboard,useInctostep Connectionscommand.
throughthedifferenttables. AnAreyousure?dialogwillappear.
Thisisafairlyslowenvelope,soforthisexamplejust 4. PressOKtoconfirmthedeletion.
playsimplechords,andholdthemtohearthesound Allofthecableswilldisappear,returningthe
astheEGsweepsthroughthetable. algorithmtoitsdefaultstate.
5. GotothePCMOscpage.
Waveshaping and VPM 6. SetMS1Multisampleto0330:El.BassSlapMuted.
Continuingfromtheabove: 7. GotothePCMModpage.
1. GotothePatchPanelpage. 8. SetVelocitySens+050.
2. TouchVPMOsc1sOutputjacktwice,sothatthe Thismakesthelevelrespondtovelocity.Sincethe
yellowsquarestartstoblink. waveshaperseffectchangeswiththeinputlevel,this
3. TouchVPMOsc2sInput1jack. meansthatvelocitywillalsoaffectthetimbre.
Apatchcablewillappear,connectingVPMOsc1s 9. GototheVPMOsc1page.
OutputtoVPMOsc2sInput1. 10.SettheModetoWaveshaper.
4. Similarly,touchVPMOsc2sOutputjacktwice, ThismeansthatVPMOsc1isnolongeranoscillator
andthentouchInput1ontheMainMixer. perse;instead,itsfunctioningasawaveshaper,
Input1isthetopmostjackontheMainMixer,just processingtheoutputofthePCMOscillator.
belowtheParameterDetailsarea.VPMOsc1is 11.SettheTabletoResonant2.
connectedtothisjackbydefault,asyoucanseebythe Inthepopuplist,Resonant2isnearthemiddleofthe
thinblackline.Thenewpatchcablereplacesthat thirdcolumn.
normalledconnection,sonowwellhearonlyVPM
Osc2. 12.SetDriveto30dB.
13.InParameterDetails,SetDriveAMStoEG3,and
5. PressthefrontpanelToneAdjustbutton.
settheIntensityto+30dB.
Thiswillbeusefullater,sothatwecaneasilyadjust
14.SetOffsetto+50.
VPMOsc1sLevelwithSlider1.
15.InParameterDetails,SetOffsetAMSto
Next,letsgetridoftheDrivemodulation,sothatwe
ExponentialVelocity,andsettheIntensityto50.
canhearthetableonitsown:
16.SettheMakeupGainto+24dB.
17.Playaslowbasslineonthekeyboard.
7. SetDriveto0dB.
Noticethefiltersweepsound.Thiscomesentirely
8. InParameterDetails,setDriveAMSIntensityto frommodulatingthedrivethroughthetable;byitself,
0dB. themultisamplehasaverydarktone.
9. SettheTabletoLinear.
ThiswillsoundjustasifOsc1wassettotheSine
Waveshaping and filtered PCM
waveform.
10.UseInctostepthroughthetables,andexperiment UsingPCMwithwaveshapingproducesunique
withdifferentsettingsofSlider1(VPMOsc1 results,butitcanalsobetrickytocontrol.Youll
OutputLevel). probablyneedtoexperimenttofindwhichtablesbest
matchaparticularMultisample.Often,waveshaping
StartwithSlider1aroundthemidpoint,andkeep worksbetterwithdarkerinputsounds,soitmaybe
tryingoutdifferentlevelsasyoulistentothedifferent usefultopatchinalowpassfilterbetweenthePCM
tables.Thebrighterthemodulatorswaveform,theless andtheVPMOscillator.
levelyoullneed.Ifthelevelistoohigh,youllstartto
hearnoiseandgrit. Continuingfromtheabove:
337
1. GotothePCMOscpage. Now,VPMOsc1worksasanoscillatoragain,and
2. SetMS1Multisampleto0201:VoicePopAh. werebackintherealmofFMsynthesis.Thefiltered
PCMsoundisthemodulator,andtheVPMOscisthe
3. GotothePatchPanel.
carrier.
4. ConnectthePCMOscOutputtoFilterAsInput.
5. SetInputLevel1to80.
5. ConnectFilterAsOutputtoVPMOsc1sInput1.
Thiscontrolstheintensityofthemodulationfromthe
6. ConnectVPMOsc1sOutputtoInput1onthe filteredPCM.
MainMixer.
6. SettheTabletoMixture4.
Now,thesignalflowisPCM>FilterA>VPMOsc1
>Output. Inthepopuplist,Mixture4isnearthebottomofthe
secondcolumn.
7. Playthekeyboard.
7. SetDriveto36dB.
Atthispoint,thesoundisprettybuzzy.Letsseewhat
thefilterwilldo: 8. InParameterDetails,settheDriveAMSIntensity
to+30dB.
8. Whileplayingachordinthemiddleofthe
Thismeansthattheinputwontquiteusetheentire
keyboard,moveKnob7sothatitsslightlytothe
table,andleavesroomforOffsettomovetheactive
leftofcenter.
regionofthetablewithoutclipping.
Thislowersthecutofffrequencyofthefilter,sothatthe
soundchangesfrombuzzytomellowbutthe 9. ExperimentwithdifferentsettingsofKnob7.
waveshaperisstillhavingastrongeffect. ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA.Thisfilter
isntprocessingtheoutputofVPMOsc1;itsjust
affectingthemodulatorsignalgoingintoVPMOsc1.
Waveshaping, PCM, and VPM VPMOsc1itselfisconnecteddirectlytotheMain
YoucanuseWaveshaping,PCM,andVPM Mixer,bypassingthefilters.
simultaneously,forevenmorecomplextimbres. Finally,notethatalloftheexamplesaboveusedonlya
Continuingfromtheabove: singleVPMOscillatorjustafractionoftheMOD7s
resources.YoucanprocessPCMthroughallsixVPM
1. GotothePCMModpage. Oscillators,inserialorparallel.Foranexampleofthis,
2. SetFreqOffsetto+01.0. listentofactoryMOD7ProgramUSERC012,
ThePCMwillbeamodulatorinthissound,andsothis DancingWaveshapes.ThisprocessesthePCM
addsalittlechoruseffecttotheendresult. throughallsixVPMOscillatorsinparallel,including
bothVPMandwaveshaping.Eachcreatesadifferent
timbre,andrhythmicallytriggeredenvelopesswitch
4. SettheModetoSine+Waveshaper. betweentheminturn.
Ring Modulation
Ringmodulationtakestwoinputsignals,andcreates 5. GotothePatchPanel.
newfrequenciesbasedonthoseinputs.Itcancreate 6. ConnectVPMOsc2sOutputtoVPMOsc1s
everythingfromsubtlebrighteningeffectstowild, Input 1.
dissonant,gongliketimbres.
IntheMOD7,eachVPMOscillatorincludesaring
8. SettheRatioto2.
modulator.Youcanusethistoprocessany
combinationofVPM,PCM,noise,andrealtimeaudio 9. InParameterDetails,setPitchModulationAMS1
input.Youcanalsomodulatethewet/drycrossfadeof toEG3,andsettheIntensityto+00.10.
theringmodulator,inrealtime. Thissmallamountofpitchmodulationwillcreatea
Formoreinformation,see54e:RingModulatoron moresubtleringmodulationeffect.
page 363. 10.GototheVPMOsc1page.
11.SettheModetoSaw.
Subtle motion 12.SetInputLevel1to0.
Letsfirstlookatasubtleuseofringmodulation,to ThismeansthatVPMOsc2willonlyaffectthering
createsomemotioninasimplesawtoothtimbre. modulator.
1. FollowtheinstructionsunderCreatingan 13.SettheLPFto50.
initializedMOD7Programonpage 331. 14.Playthekeyboard;sofar,thisisasimplesawtooth
Tostart,wellcreateanenvelopeformodulation: sound.
15.OntheVPMOsc1page,selecttheRingMod
2. GototheEG3page.
Crossfadeparameter.
3. SettheAttackTimeto70,andtheDecayTimeto
16.InParameterDetails,settheCrossfadeAMSto
90.
EG3,andtheIntensityto100.
4. SetboththeBreakandSustainLevelsto00.
Next,letsconnectVPMOsc2toVPMOsc1:
338
Synthesis with the MOD-7: a guided tour Ring Modulation
Now,EG3isdoingtwothings:itschangingthepitch
ofVPMOsc2,andfadingtheringmodulationinand
out.Together,thiscreatesafluttering,rollingeffect.
Attack transient
Next,welluseringmodulationtocreateanattack
transient.Continuingfromtheabove:
1. GototheEG3page.
2. SettheAttackTimeto00,andtheDecayTimeto
40.
4. SettheModetoSaw.
5. SettheLPFto60.
6. SelecttheRatioparameter.
ThismakesthePitchModulationparametersappearin
theParameterDetailsarea.
7. ChangetheAMS1Intensityto+02.00.
Thiswillresultinastrongerringmodulationeffect.
9. SettheModetoSine.
Thismakestheeffectoftheringmodulationmore
obvious,whencrossfadedinandout.
10.Playthekeyboard.
Now,theringmodulationiscreatingachiffatthestart
ofthenote.
Extreme sweep
Foramoresurrealringmodulationeffect:
1. GototheEG3page.
2. SettheDecayTimeto80.
4. SettheRatioFineto+0.002.
Thiswillcreatealittlemotioninthesustainedsound,
aftertheinitialsweepiscomplete.
6. SettheModetoSaw.
7. SettheRingModCrossfadetoRingMod.
8. InParameterDetails,settheAMSIntensityto000.
Now,theoutputwillcontainonlytheringmodsound.
Previously,thesoundhadcrossfadedbetweenthedry
andringmodtimbres.
9. Playachordonthekeyboard,andholdituntilthe
soundsettles.
Conclusion
Wevenowlookedatmostofthesynthesistechniques
providedbytheMOD7,includingsubtractive,VPM,
PCM+VPM,waveshaping,andringmodulation.To
stepbeyondthebasics,trylookingthroughsomeofthe
factorysoundstoseehowtheywork.Theresstill
muchmoretodiscover,andwehopethatyouenjoy
playingandworkingwiththeMOD7asmuchaswe
do!
339
01: Main
01b
ThisisthemainpageofProgrammode.Forafull Amp
seeEXiProgramP0:Playonpage 159.Thissection Pan, Amp Level
describesonlytheoverviewdisplay,whichdiffersfor ThisshowstheAmpsectionsPanandAmpLevel
eachindividualEXi. values.
PressthisareatojumptotheAmppage.
EGs, LFOs, and Step Sequencer
importantsettingsfortheProgramstwoEXi EG Graphics
Theseshowtheshapesofall10EGs,includingEGs19
andtheAmpEG.Toucheitherofthemtojumpdirectly
parametersfortheMOD7aredescribedbelow.
tothecorrespondingeditpage.
settingsataglance.Theyalsoletyoujumpinstantlyto LFO 1-4 Graphics
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe Theseshowthewaveformsandshapesofthefour
sections,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits LFOs.Touchthemtojumpdirectlytothe
parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilter correspondingeditpage.
graphic,youllgototheOscillatorandFilterpage.
IftheLFOissynchronizedtotempo,asmallM
Tip:PressingEXITseveraltimeswillalwaysbringyou appearsundertheLFOnumber(shortforMIDI
backtothispage. Clock).
Patch Panel Step Sequencer

Thissectionshowsaminiatureversionofthepatch ThisshowsagraphicoverviewofthepervoiceStep
panel,includingpatchcablesandtheselected Sequencer.
algorithmsnormalledconnections.Touchthisareato PressthisareatojumptotheStepSequencerpage.
jumpdirectlytothePatchPanelpage.
Key Zone
Filter
Key Zone
Filter ThisshowsthekeyzonesforEXi1andEXi2,asseton
Thisshowsagraphicrepresentationofthefilter theCommonsectionsProgramBasicpage,inrelation
frequencyresponse,includingcutoffandresonance. totheentireMIDInoterange.Therangeofthe76note
PressthisareatojumptotheFilterBasicpage. or88notekeyboardisalsoshown,asappropriate.
340
Common
EXiarebeingused.

eitherPOLYorMONO.

Sequencer.
page.
Common LFO Graphic

3 Band EQ Graphic
IFX, MFX/TFX
page.
KARMA GE Name
page.
341
Program P4: Patch Panel
41: Patch Panel
41b
41a
Thepatchpanelshowsanoverviewofmost Eachinputcanbeconnectedtoasingleoutput,andno
componentsintheMOD7,andletsyou: more(althoughasingleoutputcanbeconnectedto
Controltheconnectionsbetweencomponents multipleinputs,asdescribedbelow).Ifyouwantto
(oscillators,filters,mixers,andsoon)byselecting routetwooutputstoasingleinput,useoneofthe
algorithmsand/orusingpatchcables mixerstomergetheoutputsfirst.
Editinputandoutputlevelsforallcomponents Pluggingacableintoanoutputjackletsyouusethe
signalelsewhereonthepatchpanel,anddoesnot
Jumpdirectlytothedetailededitingpagesforall interruptthenormalpath.Youcanalsoconnecta
components singleoutputtoanynumberofinputs,ifyoulike;this
issometimescalledamult.Thesignalstrength
Using the Patch Panel remainsthesame,asifyouwereusingadistribution
amplifier.
Algorithms Connectionsfromoneinputtoanother,orfromone
Dependingontheselectedalgorithm,manyofthe outputtoanother,arenotallowed.
MOD7elements(VPMoscillators,PCMoscillator,
NoiseGenerator,filters,mixers,etc.)areconnectedby
default,evenwithoutusinganypatchcables.Thelines
Creating and deleting connections
andarrowsonthePatchPanelshowthesenormal Making connections
signalpaths.
Tomakeaconnectionbetweentwopatchpoints:
Youcanchangeanyandallofthesedefault
connectionsusingpatchcables,asdesired.Plugginga 1. Touchoneofthetwojacks(eitherinputoroutput).
cableintoaninputjackdisconnectsthenormalpath, Ayellowsquarewillappeararoundtheselectedjack.
andusesthesignalfromthecableinstead.Plugginga TheDetailPanelwillalsoshowthenameofthe
cableintoanoutputjackdoesnotaffectthenormal selectedjack,andwhatitisconnectedto.
path,sinceasingleoutputcanbeconnectedtoany 2. Touchthesamejackagain.
numberofinputs.
Theyellowsquarewillbegintoblink,showingthat
Formoreinformationonusingalgorithms,see41a: youreabouttomakeaconnection.Tocancelthisand
AlgorithmSelectonpage 343. returntothenormalselectedstate,justtouchthesame
jackathirdtime.
Basic patching rules
3. Touchtheotherjack.
Inputsarecoloredred,andoutputsarecoloredblue.
Thetwojackswillnowbeconnected.
342
Program P4: Patch Panel 41: Patch Panel
Deleting connections
Filter B and 4-pole routing
Todeleteaconnectionbetweentwopatchpoints:
WhenthefilterRoutingissetto4pole,onlyFilterAis
1. Touchtheinputjack.
active.FilterBnolongerpassesanyaudiofrominput
Note:youcanalsoselecttheoutputjack.However,if tooutput,andbothinputandoutputjacksaregrayed
theoutputisconnectedtomorethanoneinput,allof out.
theconnectionsfromthatoutputwillbeaffected.
AnycablespreviouslyconnectedtoFilterBwill
2. PresstheDisconnectbuttonintheDetailPanel. remaininplace,withtheircolorchangedtoblack&
Theselectedconnectionwillbedeleted. redtoindicatethefiltersdisabledstatus.
Todeleteallconnectionsfromanoutput:
1. Touchtheoutputjack. 41a: Algorithm Select
2. PresstheDisconnectbuttonintheDetailPanel. Algorithm [List]
Alloftheoutputsconnectionswillbedeleted.Thisis Algorithmsdothreethings:
convenientifanoutputhasbeenconnectedtomultiple
inputs,andyouwanttoclearallofthematonce. Theycreateasetofdefaultconnectionsbetweenthe
elementsonthePatchPanel,whichcanthenbe
Clearing all connections from the Patch Panel alteredasyouwishusingpatchcables.
TocompletelyclearthePatchPanel,sothatyoucan Aspartoftheseconnections,theysettheLink
startfromscratch: parametersforMixers1,2,and3,aswellasthe
1. Openthemenu,andselecttheDeleteAll Filters4pole/Parallelparameter.
Connectionscommand. TheyspecifywhichVPMOscillatorsarecarriers,
Allconnectionswillbedeleted. andwhicharemodulators.Thisaffectsthewaythat
theMacroparameterswork.Youcaneditthese
settingsafterselectinganAlgorithm,ifdesired,to
Setting input and output levels accountforchangesduetousercreatedpatch
Youcaneditthemaininputandoutputlevelsforeach cablesoroscillatorsettings.
blockdirectlyfromthePatchPanel.Todothis: Algorithm groups
1. Selectthejackwhoseinputlevelyouwanttoedit. Thealgorithmsaredividedintoseveralgroups,
Forinstance,selectInput2ofVPMOscillator4. selectedbytabsonthelefthandsideoftheAlgorithm
2. Usethestandarddataentrycontrolstosetthe Selectpopup.
levelasdesired. VPMincludesthemostusefulconfigurationsofVPM
Notethatmodulationcanaffecttheselevels,aswellso Oscillators,routedthrougheither4poleorparallel
youmayhavetolookattheindividualeditpagesto filters.ThePCMandNoisealgorithms,below,are
getthecompletepicture. primarilybasedonthissetofconfigurations.
Thefirstentry,BlankPatch,isaspecialalgorithmwith
onlythesimplestofconnections:VPMOscillator1
Jumping directly to edit pages
goesstraightintothemainmixer.Usethisifyouwant
Youcanjumptothedetailededitpagesforanyofthe tobuildyourownalgorithmfromthegroundup.
blocksshownonthePatchPanel.Todothis: PCM+VPMoffersaselectionofVPMconfigurations
1. Selectajackontheblockthatyouwanttoedit. layeredwithPCMsamples.
Youcanselectanyinputoroutputontheblock. PCM>Filter>VPMincludesthestandardsetof
2. PresstheJumpbuttonintheParameterDetails configurations,usingPCM(througha2polefilter)as
area,atthetoprightofthedisplay. anFMmodulator.
Thiswilltakeyoudirectlytothepageoftheselected PCM>VPM>4polearesimilar,buttheseroutethe
jacksblock.Forinstance,ifyouveselectedoneofthe unfilteredPCMdirectlyintotheVPMOscillators,and
inputsoroutputsofVPMOscillator2,pressingJump thenprocessestheresultthrougha4polefilter.
willtakeyoutotheVPMOsc2page. Noise>VPM>4poleusetheNoiseGeneratorasan
FMModulator.
Muting oscillators ManyofthePCMandNoisealgorithmshavetwo
variations,labeledIandII.IntheIversions,thePCM
ThePCMOscillatorandeachVPMOscillatorcanbe orNoisegoestotheinputofaModulator;intheII
mutedtemporarily,sothatyoucanheartheireffecton versions,thePCMorNoiseisroutedtothesecond
thesound.Todothis,selectanyoftheblocksinputor Carrierinput,inparallelwiththeVPMModulator.
outputjacks,andeditthecheckboxintheparameter
detailsarea.YoucanalsouseToneAdjustbuttons16 Processingarespecialalgorithmsforsimple
(VPMOsc16)and9(PCM),whichareassignedto waveshaping,ringmodulation,and/orFMmodulation
theseparametersbydefault. withPCMorliveaudioinput.
VintageDXfeaturesalloftheoriginalDX7algorithms,
withoutanyfiltering.Feedbackismuchmoreflexible
ontheMOD7thanitwasontheDX7,andsowhenthe
343
originalalgorithmsdifferedonlybyfeedbackrouting, # Group Algorithm

theyvebeengroupedintoasingleselection.Todisable
anexternalfeedbackrouting,justgototheinputjack 21 PCM -> 4+2 -> 2-pole I
thatthefeedbackleadsto,andsetitsLevelto0. 22 PCM -> 4+2 -> 2-pole II
Remember,youcanusepatchcablestochangeanyof 23 PCM -> 3+3 -> 2-pole I
thesealgorithmstosuityourneeds.
24 PCM -> 3+3 -> 2-pole II
Which algorithm should I use? 25 PCM -> 2+2+2 -> 2-pole I
AlgorithmsarejustshortcutsforconfiguringthePatch PCM->Filter->VPM
26 PCM -> 2+2+2 -> 2-pole II
Panel.Youdonthavetousethematall;ifyouprefer,
youcanjustmakeallofyourconnectionsusingpatch 27 PCM -> 2+2+1+1 -> 2-pole I
cables. 28 PCM -> 2+2+1+1 -> 2-pole II
Thepresetalgorithmsdomakeiteasytocallup 29 PCM -> 3+1+1+1 -> 2-pole
commonlyusedsetups,however.
30 PCM -> all carriers -> 2-pole
Ingeneral,withmorecarriers,theresmorepotential
forlayering;withfewercarriers,theresmorepotential 31 PCM -> 4+2 -> 4-pole I
forcomplexanddetailedFMmodulation. 32 PCM -> 4+2 -> 4-pole II
Theallcarriersalgorithms(10,20,30,40,50,andDX 33 PCM -> 3+3 -> 4-pole I
#32)aregoodforcreatingthicklayers,orforsimple
34 PCM -> 3+3 -> 4-pole II
additivesynthesis(upto7partials,plusnoise,each
withitsownEG). 35 PCM -> 2+2+2 -> 4-pole I
PCM->VPM -> 4-pole
TheProcessingalgorithmsareagoodplacetostartif 36 PCM -> 2+2+2 -> 4-pole II
youwanttotransformaPCMsampleintosomething
37 PCM -> 2+2+1+1 -> 4-pole I
new,orprocessaliveaudioinput.
38 PCM -> 2+2+1+1 -> 4-pole II
ThePCM+VPMalgorithmsaregoodforlayering
sampleswithVPM. 39 PCM -> 3+1+1+1 -> 4-pole
# Group Algorithm 40 PCM -> all carriers -> 4-pole
0 Blank Patch 41 Noise -> 4+2 -> 4-pole I
1 4+2 -> 4-pole 42 Noise -> 4+2 -> 4-pole II
2 3+3 -> 4-pole 43 Noise -> 3+3 -> 4-pole I
3 2+2+2 -> 4-pole 44 Noise -> 3+3 -> 4-pole II
4 2+2+1+1 -> 4-pole 45 Noise->VPM -> 4- Noise -> 2+2+2 -> 4-pole I
46 pole Noise -> 2+2+2 -> 4-pole II
5 VPM All carriers -> 4-pole
6 4+2 -> parallel filters 47 Noise -> 2+2+1+1 -> 4-pole I
7 3+3 -> parallel filters 48 Noise -> 2+2+1+1 -> 4-pole II
8 2+2+2 -> parallel filters 49 Noise -> 3+1+1+1 -> 4-pole
9 2+2+1+1 -> parallel filters 50 Noise -> all carriers -> 4-pole
10 All carriers -> parallel filters 51 PCM -> 1 -> 4-pole
11 PCM+4+2 -> 4-pole 52 PCM -> 1+1+1 -> 4-pole

Processing
12 PCM+3+3 -> 4-pole 53 Audio -> 1 -> 4-pole
13 PCM+2+2+2 -> 4-pole 54 Audio -> 1+1+1 -> 4-pole
14 PCM+2+2+1+1 -> 4-pole

15 PCM+2+1+1+1+1 -> 4-pole
PCM + VPM
16 PCM+4+2 -> parallel filters
17 PCM+3+3 -> parallel filters
18 PCM+2+2+2 -> parallel filters
19 PCM+2+2+1+1 -> parallel filters
20 PCM+all carriers -> parallel filters
344
Program P4: Patch Panel 41: Patch Panel
# Group Algorithm (Connection) [Jack name]

55 DX #1 & #2 Thisreadonlyparametershowsthejacktowhichthe
selectedjackisconnected,includingthenormalled
56 DX #3 connection.Ifnothingisconnectedtothejack,the
57 DX #4 bottomlinereads(NoConnection).
58 DX #5 Iftheselectedjackisanoutputconnectedtomultiple
inputs,onlythefirstconnectionisshown,followedby
59 DX #6
anellipse.
60 DX #7, #8, & #9 IfthedefaultconnectionfromAlgorithmisactive,itis
61 DX #10 & #11 showninparentheses.
62 DX #12 & #13 Input or Output Level [0100]
63 DX #14 & #15 Thissetstheinputoroutputvolumelevelofthejack.It
64 DX #16 & #17 duplicatesthesimilarlynamedparameteronthe
blockspage.
65 DX #18
66 DX #19
Jump
Vintage DX PresstheJumpbuttontogodirectlytothepageofthe
67 DX #20
selectedjacksblock.Forinstance,ifyouveselected
68 DX #21 oneoftheinputsoroutputsofVPMOscillator2,
69 DX #22 pressingJumpwilltakeyoutotheVPMOsc2page.
70 DX #23 Disconnect button

71 DX #24 PressingtheDisconnectbuttonclearsallcables
connectedtothejack.
72 DX #25
73 DX #26 & #27
74 DX #28
75 DX #29 numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
76 DX #30 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
77 DX #31
78 DX #32
Programonpage 142.
41b: Parameter Details ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Thisareaattheupperrightofthedisplayshows 2:DeleteAllConnections.Formoreinformation,
informationforboththeselectedjack,andtheblock seeDeleteAllConnectionsonpage 311.
containingthatjack. 3:CopyVPMOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
(Block name) [PCM Osc, Noise, Audio In, CopyVPMOscillatoronpage 376.
VPM Osc 16, Mixer 13, 4:SwapVPMOscillators.Formoreinformation,
Filter AB, Main Mixer] seeSwapVPMOscillatorsonpage 376.
Thisreadonlyparametershowsthenameofthe
selectedblock.
Mode [Off, Sine, Saw, Triangle, Square,

Sine + Waveshaper, Waveshaper,
Ring Mod Only]
WhenaVPMOscillatorisselected,thisreadonly
parametershowstheOscillatorMode.
On [Check-box]
Thischeckboxletsyoutemporarilymutetheoutputof
theblock.Itduplicatesthesimilarlynamedparameter
ontheOscillatorspage.
(Jack name) [Depends on block]

Thisreadonlyparametershowsthenameofthe
selectedjack,suchasInput1.
345
Program P5: Oscillators
51: Osc Main
51a 51g
51b 51d
51f
51c
51e
Thispageincludes: PitchSlope,pitch,andnote
Pitchslopeandportamentosettings
+2
PitchmodulationappliedequallytothePCM Pitch
OscillatorandallsixVPMOscillators(notethat
individualoscillatorshavetheirownpitch +1
modulation,aswell)
2oct
Macroparameters,forquickeditstoVPMsounds 1oct
0
1oct
Carrier/ModulatorsettingsforthesixVPM
Oscillators
1
NoiseGeneratorsettings
AudioInputsettings C4 C5 Note on keyboard
51a: Pitch Ribbon [-60+60 semitones]

Youcanusetheribboncontrollerforpitchbend.This
Theseparametersletyoumodulatethepitchofthe
parameterspecifies,insemitones,theribbonspitch
PCMOscillatorandall6VPMOscillators
bendrange.
simultaneously,sothatthemodulationappliesequally
toallofthem. Positive(+)valuesmakethepitchrisewhenyoupress
theribboncontrollertotherightofcenter,and
Pitch Slope [-1.00+0.00+2.00] negative()valueswillcausethepitchtofall.
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.00. Whenyouliftoffoftheribbon,thepitchwillsnapback
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplay tothecenter(unlessyoureusingtheSW1/2Ribbon
higheronthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescause Lockfeature).So,bytappingontherightedgeofthe
thepitchtofallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard. ribbonandthenreleasingquickly,youcancreate
guitarstylehammeroneffects.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthe
keyboardwontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasif JS+ X [-60+60 semitones]
yourealwaysplayingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecial
effectssounds,forinstance.
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheright.For
Ifyouwanttocreatemorecomplexeffects,youcan normalpitchbend,setthistoapositivevalue.
assignkeytrackingasanAMSsource.
346
Program P5: Oscillators 51: Osc Main
JS- X [-60+60 semitones] AMS [List of AMS Sources]

Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheleft.For amountoftheLFOappliedtopitch.
normalpitchbend,setthistoanegativevalue. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Analog [000...100] Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Thismodelstheinstabilityofananalogsystemby Intensity [48.00+48.00]
addingsubtlerandomizationtotheoscillatorandfilter ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFOAMS
frequencies.ThePCMOscillator,eachVPMOscillator, modulation,insemitones.
andFiltersAandBeachreceivedifferentrandom
values,andthevaluesaredifferentforeachnewnote
aswell. 51c: Portamento
Pitch AMS [List of AMS Sources] Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetween
notes,insteadofchangingabruptly.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatethepitchofall
oscillatorssimultaneously.ForalistofAMSsources, Enable [Off, On]
page 1021.
Intensity [48.00...+48.00] Off(unchecked):TurnsoffPortamento.Thisisthe
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthePitchAMS defaultstate.
Fingered [Off, On]
Pitch Slope Parameter Details ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamento
throughyourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playing
ThePitchSlopegraphicappearsintheParameter
DetailsareawhenanyofthePitchparametersare
willturnitoffagain.
selected.
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnable
isturnedon.
51b: Pitch LFO
On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento.
LFO Select [LFO 1, LFO 2, LFO 3, LFO 4, Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.
Common LFO]
ThisselectsanLFOtomodulatealloscillators
simultaneously.Thissharedmodulationcanbeuseful ConstantRatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake
forvibrato,amongotherthings. thesameamountoftimetoglideagivendistancein
pitchforinstance,onesecondperoctave.Putanother
TheLFOIntensity,JS+YIntensity,andAMSareall
way,glidingseveraloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthan
glidingahalfstep.
pitchmodulation.
ConstantTimemeansthatPortamentowillalways
LFO Intensity [48.00+48.00] takethesameamountoftimetoglidefromonenoteto
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch, another,regardlessofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisis
insemitones,beforeanyJS+YorAMSmodulation. especiallyusefulwhenplayingchords,sinceitensures
thateachnoteinthechordwillenditsglideatthe
sametime.
JS+Y Intensity [48.00+48.00]
Time [000127]
Movingthejoystickupfromthecenterdetent
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean
position,awayfromyourself,producestheJS+Y
issetto0,thepitchwillbereachedinstantlyjustasif
LFOappliedtothepitch.Thisparametersetsthe
maximumamountofLFOmodulationaddedbyJS+Y,
insemitones. Portamento Parameter Details
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe
TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen
+YdirectionwillcausetheLFOtoproducedeeper
anyofthePortamentoparametersareselected.
pitchmodulation.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO. AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Youcanalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountofthe ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontrolthePortamento
LFO,assetbyLFO1Intensity,above. Time.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Pitch LFO Parameter Details
Themodulationoccursonlyatnoteon.Thismeans
TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen thatyoucanchangethetimeforthenextpitchglide,
anyofthePitchLFOparametersareselected. butyoucantchangeanyglideswhicharealreadyin
progress.
347
51e: Noise Generator
PortamentoTimeAMSmodulation. ThenoisegeneratorincludesSaturation,forcreating
uniqueandchaoticnoiseeffects,andadedicated1
Assigning SW1 or SW2 to Portamento On/Off polefiltertocontrolnoisecolor.
Youcanusethetwoassignableswitches,SW1and Forstandardwhitenoise,settheSaturationto0,and
SW2,toturnportamentoonandoff. theFilterFrequencyto99.
Todoso: Forcolorednoise(suchaspinknoise),setthe
1. GotoProgrampage18,ControllerSetup. Saturationto0,andreducetheFilterFrequencyas
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,seteitherSW1orSW2 desired.
toPortamentoSW(CC#65). Tocreatespecklednoisesuchasrocketsoundsand
Now,theselectedswitchwillenableanddisable thunder,setSaturationto99,andFilterFrequencyto
Portamento.ItwillalsosendtheMIDIPortamento 10.
controller,CC#65. Tocreatekeycontactnoise(suchasyoumightfindon
EvenifyoudontassignSW1/2toPortamento,you vintageanalogsynths),createspecklednoiseas
canstilluseMIDIController#65toturnPortamento describedabove,andthenuseafastEGtocontrolits
onandoff. volumeinthemixer.
Saturation [099]
51d: Macro Edit Thiscontrolclipsthenoisesignal,foraddedcrunch.
Subtlevariationsinsaturationaremorenoticeable
Brightness [100+100] withverylowFilterFrequencysettings(seebelow),
ThiscontrolstheinputlevelsofallCarriers. allowingyoutocreateorganic,rumblingtimbres.
Brightness Vel. Sens. [100+100] Filter Freq [099]

Thiscontrolstheoutputlevelvelocitysensitivitiesof Thisisasimple,1polelowpassfilterforcontrolling
allModulators. thecolorofthenoise.
Timbre [100+100] Level [0100]

ThiscontrolsthepitchesofallModulators. ThissetsthebasicoutputleveloftheNoiseGenerator.
ItisalsoshownintheParameterDetailsonthePatch
Feedback [100+100] Panel.
ThiscontrolsthefeedbacklevelsofallCarriers.
EG Select [None, EG1EG9, Amp EG]
Detune [100+100] Thisselectsanyofthe10EGstocontroltheNoise
ThiscontrolsthepitchesofallCarriers. Generatorsoutputlevel.
NoneisthesameasiftheEGwasalwaysatits
Macro Edit Parameter Details maximumlevel.
Oscillator Carrier/Modulator Status
Noise Generator Parameter Details
anyoftheMacroparametersareselected.Theycontrol TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen
thewaythateachVPMOscillatorrespondstothe anyoftheNoiseGeneratorparametersareselected.
Macroparameters,asdetailedbelow.
AMS Mode [Add, Multiply]
ModulatorsareaffectedbytheBrightnessVelSens., TocalculatetheNoiseGeneratorsoutputvolume,the
andTimbreparameters. mainLevelparameterandtheselectedEGarealways
CarriersareaffectedbytheBrightness,Feedbackand multipliedtogether.Ifeitheroftheseisat0,theother
Detuneparameters. hasnoeffect.Forinstance,iftheLevelissetto0,the
TheCarrier/Modulatorstatesaresetautomatically EGcantbringthevolumebackupagain.
whenanAlgorithmisselected,butmaythenbeedited TheAMSModeparameterdetermineshowAMS
manuallyasdesired,tomatchanyspecial modulation(includingIntMod)interactswiththese
configurationsonthePatchPanel. othercontrols.
Notethatthesesettingsonlyaffectthewaythatthe Add:AMSisaddedinafterLevelandtheEGare
VPMOscillatorsrespondtotheMacroParameters; multipliedtogether.Thismeansthatevenifoneof
theydonotmakeanoscillatorintoaCarrieror theseothervaluesisat0,AMScanstillbringupthe
Modulatorperse. volumetoitsmaximum.
VPM Osc 16s [Carrier, Modulator] Youcanalsothinkofthisashavingparallel

modulationpaths:theEGononeside,andAMSonthe
ThiscontrolsthewaythateachVPMOscillator other.
respondstotheMacroparameters,asdescribedabove.
Expressedmathematically,thisis:
Volume=(Level*EG)+AMS.
348
Program P5: Oscillators 51: Osc Main
Multiply:Thisisthedefault,andissimilartotheway
thatmostotherOASYSAmpmodulationworks.AMS 51g: Parameter Details
ismultipliedalongwiththeLevelandtheEG.Ifanyof TheParameterDetailsareashowsinformationforthe
theseareat0,theoutputwillbesilent. selecteditem,includingexplanatorygraphicsand
Expressedmathematically,thisis: AMSmodulationroutings.
Volume=Level*EG*(1+AMS). PitchLFOModulationappearswhenanyofthe
PitchLFOparametersareselected.
ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheLevel. PortamentoModulationappearswhenanyofthe
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation Portamentoparametersareselected.
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. VPMOscillator16Carrier/ModulatorStatus
appearswhenanyoftheMacroEditparametersare
Intensity [100+100] selected.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLevel NoiseGeneratorModulationappearswhenanyof
modulation. theNoiseGeneratorparametersareselected.
EXiAudioInputModulationappearswhentheEXi
51f: EXi Audio Input AudioInputLevelparameterisselected.
Important: the audio input is only active when ThePitchSlopegraphicappearswhenanyofthe

Pitchparametersareselected.
notes are played
TheMOD7canprocessliveaudioinputs,feedback
fromeffects,oranyotheraudiofromwithinthe t 51: Page Menu Commands
OASYS.Note,however,thattheaudioinputisonly
activewhenavoiceisbeingplayedontheMOD7.
Itseasytomakeapatchinwhichonlytheincoming shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
audioisheard,withthebuiltinoscillatorscompletely commandsonpage 142.
silentbutyoustillneedtopressakey(orplayanote
viaMIDI)inordertoactivatetheMOD7.Youcanuse
Programonpage 142.
theEXiCommonHoldparametertokeepthenote
helddownindefinitely,ifyoulike. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Level [0100]
ThissetsthebasicoutputleveloftheAudioInput.Itis
alsoshownintheParameterDetailsonthePatchPanel.
EXi Audio Input Parameter Details

anyoftheEXiAudioInputparametersareselected.
AMS Mode [Add, Multiply]

TheAMSModeparameterdetermineshowAMS
modulationinteractswiththeLevelparameter.
Add:AMSisaddedtotheLevel.Thismeansthateven
iftheLevelissetto0,AMScanstillbringupthe
volumetoitsmaximum.
Volume=Level+AMS.
thatmostotherOASYSAmpmodulationworks.AMS
andLevelaremultipliedtogether.
Volume=Level*(1+AMS).

ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheLevel.
Intensity [100+100]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLevel
modulation.
349
52: PCM Osc
52b
52a
FormoreinformationaboutusingPCMintheMOD7, Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupwithonlyasingle
includinghandsontutorials,seePCMasaVPM Multisample,justsetupMS1asdesired,andthenset
modulatoronpage 335,andWaveshapingon theBottomVelocityto1.
page 336.
Type [Off, Multisample]
ThisselectswhetherMS1willplayaMultisample,or
Overview nothingatall.Youcanusethistodisableanyofthe
Disabling the PCM Oscillator fourMultisamples.
IfthePCMOscillatorisnotbeingused,youcandisable IfallfourMSaresettoOff,thePCMOscillatorwillbe
ittosaveprocessingpower.Youcandothisintwo disabledentirely,savingprocessingpower.
ways: Bank [ROM MonoEXs Mono]
1. SetallMSTypeparameterstoOff,insteadof TherearethreemaintypesofBanks:ROM,RAM,and
Multisample. EXs.
or: ROMMultisamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds,
2. MakesurethatthePCMOscillatorisnot andarealwaysavailable.
connectedtoanythingelseonthePatchPanel.
RAMMultisamplesincludeAkai,AIFForWAVfiles
Thisincludesbothpatchcableconnections,andthe loadedfromdisk,andsamplescreatedinSampling
normalledconnectionsofthealgorithm.Ifnecessary, mode.
selectadifferentalgorithminwhichthePCM
Oscillatorisnotconnectedtoanythingelseonthe
PatchPanel.
uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis
EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoexpansionisEXs2.
52a: Multisamples OnlythecurrentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearon
thismenu.
Velocity splits
NotethatunliketheHD1,youcanonlyselectmono
EachOscillatorhasfourvelocityzones,namedMS1 Multisamples.
(High)throughMS4(Low).Eachofthesezonescan
playadifferentMultisample,andhasseparatesettings Multisample Select [List]
forLevel,StartOffset,andsoon. ThisparameterletsyouselectaMultisampleforthe
Notethat,unliketheHD1,crossfadesandlayersare velocityzone.YoucanuseanymonoMultisample,or
notsupported. theleftorrightchannelofastereoMultisample.
SomeMultisamplesmayhaveanupperlimitto
MS1 (High) theirkeyboardrange,overwhichtheymaynot
Thesearethesettingsforthefirstandhighestvelocity produceanysound.
zone.
350
Program P5: Oscillators 52: PCM Osc
Multisample Select menu Bottom Velocity [1127]

ToselectaMultisample: ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheMultisample
1. PresstheMultisampleSelectpopupbuttonto orwillsound.MS1sBottomVelocitycanbeequalto,
opentheMultisampleselectmenu. butnotlowerthan,thanthatofMS2.
2. Usethetabstoselectacategoryandsubcategory. MS2 (Mid Hi), MS3 (Mid Lo), and MS4

3. SelectaMultisamplefromwithinthat (Low)
category/subcategory.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,or
velocityzones.TheparametersforMS2andMS3are
presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutmakinga
exactlythesameasthoseforMS1(High),above.
change.
TheparametersforMS4arealsosimilartothosefor
ThelistshowsallofthemonoMultisamplesinthe
MS1,exceptthatMS4hasnosettingforBottom
Bank.IftheBankcontainsstereomultisamples,youll
Velocity(whichisalwaysfixedat1).
alsoseetheleftandrightchannelsasseparate,mono
multisamples,withLandRappendedtotheendof
thename. 52b: Velocity Graphic
Reverse [Off, On] Velocity zone graphic
Thisletsyouplaytheselectedmultisamplebackwards, Thisisagraphicrepresentationofthevelocityzones
withoutlooping. forMS14.ThecurrentlyselectedMSisshownin
Note:IftheindividualsampleswithinaMultisample green.
arealreadysettoReverse,theywillstillplayin
reverse,regardlessofthissetting.
On [Checkbox]
ThismutesandunmutesthePCMOscillator,forquick
On(checked):TheMultisamplewillplaybackin
comparisonsduringediting.Thischeckboxisalso
reverse.
shownintheParameterDetailsonthePatchPanel.
Off(unchecked):TheMultisamplewillplayback
NotethatthePCMOscillatorwillstilluseprocessing
normally.
powerunlessitisnotconnectedonthePatchPanel,or
Level [0127] allMSaresettoOff.Formoreinformation,see
DisablingthePCMOscillatoronpage 350.
Thissetsthebasicvolumelevelofeachmultisample.
Usethistoadjustthebalancebetweenthefourvelocity
zones. t 52: Page Menu Commands
Dependingonthemultisample,highLevelsettings ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
maycausedistortionwhenplayingmanynotesata numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
time.Ifthisoccurs,lowertheLevel. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
WithRAMMultisamples,eachSamplealsohasa commandsonpage 142.
+12dBoption.Ifthisisturnedon,theSamplewillplay 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
backapproximately12dBlouder.Youcanconfigure Programonpage 142.
thisparameterforeachSampleinSamplingmode.
Start Offset [Off, 1st8th] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
beginning,ROMandEXsMultisamplescanhaveupto
8differentpreprogrammedalternatestartingpoints.
Similarly,RAMMultisamplescanplayeitherfromthe
point.
Start Offsets: ROM and EXs Multisamples

WithROMandEXsMultisamples,theStartOffset
specifieswhethertousethenormalstartpoint(Off),or
touseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st8th).
SomeROMandEXsMultisamplesmayhavefewer
than8preprogrammedpoints,inwhichcaseonlythe
availablepointscanbeselected.

WithRAMMultisamples,onlyOffand1stare
theloopstartinstead.2ndthrough8thwillbegrayed
out.
351
53: PCM Mod
53a 53d
53b
53c
Thispageprovidescontrolofpitchandvolume AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]

settingsandmodulationforthePCMOscillator. Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrolling
theoscillatorspitch.ForalistofAMSsources,see
53a: Pitch AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
page 1021.
Octave [2[32], 1[16], +0[8], +1[4]]
Intensity [-48.000.00+48.00]
ThissetsthebasicpitchofthePCMOscillator,in
octaves.Thedefaultis+0[8]. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS1
pitchmodulation,insemitones.Toeasilyconvertfrom
Transpose [12+12] semitonestoFMratios,seethetablebelow.
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1 Ratio Pitch in semitones
octave.
1 Root pitch
Tune [1200+1200] 2 +12.00
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1 3 +19.01
octave.Acentis1/100ofasemitone.
4 +24.00
Frequency Offset [10.0Hz+10.0Hz]
5 +27.83
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1Hz.
6 +31.03
FrequencyOffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,when
usedtodetunethetwooscillators,itcancreatea 7 +33.44 -- 2 octaves + minor seventh (-56 cents)
constantbeatfrequencyacrosstherangeofthe
8 +36.00
keyboard.
9 +38.09 -- 3 octaves + whole tone (+9 cents)
Pitch Parameter Details 10 + 39.65 -- 3 octaves + major third (-35 cents)
TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen 12 +43.06 -- 3 octaves + fifth (+6 cents)
anyofthePitchparametersareselected.
15 +46.50 -- 3 octaves + major seventh (-50 cents)
Use Common Mod [Checkbox] 16 +48.00
Whenoff,theoscillatorstillrespondstothePitchand
PortamentosettingsfromPitchCommon,butignores AMS1 Int. Mod [List of AMS Sources]
theLFOandAMSsettings.
352
Program P5: Oscillators 53: PCM Mod
Intensity [-48.000.00+48.00] 3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity keyboard.
Ramp
modulationamount. Bottom-Low [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
AMS2 [List of AMS Sources] ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI
Thisselectsasecondmodulationsourceforcontrolling noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey
theoscillatorspitch.ForalistofAMSsources,see track,usenegativevalues.
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston Low-Center [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
page 1021.
Intensity [-48.000.00+48.00] keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS2 Center-High [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
53b: Keyboard Track
High-Top [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
ThePCMOscillatorhasitsownkeyboardtracking,
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyand
whichisdedicatedtomodulatingtheOutputLevelas
thetopoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,
youplayupanddownthekeyboard.Thiscanbe
usepositivevalues.
especiallyconvenientwhenusingPCMasamodulator
foraVPMOscillator. Ramp Change in level
Formoredetailsontheseparameters,see54d: -Inf Silent in one half-step
KeyboardTrackonpage 361.
How it works: Keys and Ramps 95 Silent in one octave
Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps, 48 Silent in two octaves
orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The
bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof 25 Silent in four octaves
theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother 00 no change
+25 x2 in four octaves
Breaktobeanywhereinbetween.
+50 x2 in two octaves
Thefourrampvaluescontroltherateofchange
betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow +99 x2 in one octave
CenterRampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesame +Inf x2 in one half-step
Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo Keyboard Track Parameter Details
foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe
Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas TheKeyboardTrackgraphicappearsintheParameter
noeffect.Thetwofoldingdoorsswingoutfromthis DetailsareawhenanyoftheKeyboardTrack
centerpointtocreatechangesinthehigherandlower parametersareselected.
53c: Output
Key
Theseparameterscontroltheoverallvolumeofthe
Low Break [C1G9] PCMOscillator.
rampsthehingeofthelowerdoor.
On [Checkbox]
Thismutesandunmutestheentireoscillator,forquick
Center [C1G9] comparisonsduringediting.Thisparameterisalso
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtrackingthemain shownintheParameterDetailsonthePatchPanel.
hinge.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrackinghasno Notethattheoscillatorwillstilluseprocessingpower
effectonthevolume,oronanyAMSdestinations. unlesseitherallMSaresettoOff,orthePCM
OscillatorisnotconnectedtoanythingonthePatch
High Break [C1G9]
Panel.Formoreinformation,seeDisablingthePCM
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher Oscillatoronpage 350.
rampsthehingeoftheupperdoor.
Output Level [0100]
Entering notes from the keyboard
ThissetsthebasicoutputleveloftheVPMOscillator.It
Youcanenternotenumbersdirectlybyplayingthem isalsoshownintheParameterDetailsonthePatch
onthekeyboard.Todoso: Panel.
1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
2. HolddowntheENTERkey.
353
EG Select [None, EG1EG9, Amp EG]

53d: Parameter Details
Thisselectsanyofthe10EGstocontroltheOscillators
outputlevel.Bydefault,EGs16areassignedtoVPM TheParameterDetailsareashowsinformationforthe
Oscillators16,EG7isassignedtothePCMOscillator, selecteditem,includingexplanatorygraphicsand
andEG8isassignedtoFilterACutoff. AMSmodulationroutings.
NoneisthesameasiftheEGwasalwaysatits PitchModulationappearswhenanyofthePitch
maximumlevel. parametersareselected.
TheKeyboardTrackgraphicappearsinthe
Velocity Sens [100+100]
ParameterDetailsareawhenanyoftheKeyboard
Thiscontrolsthedegreetowhichoutputlevel Trackparametersareselected.
respondstovelocity.Negativesettingsareusefulfor
creatingvelocitycrossfades. OutputLevelModulationappearswhenanyofthe
Outputparametersareselected.
Output Level Parameter Details
TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen t 53: Page Menu Commands
anyoftheparametersintheOutputsectionare ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
selected.ThisincludesOn,OutputLevel,EGSelect, numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
andVelocitySens. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
AMS Mode [Add, Multiply] commandsonpage 142.
TocalculatethePCMOscillatorsoutputvolume,the 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
mainLevelparameter,VelocitySens,KeyTracking, Programonpage 142.
andtheselectedEGarealwaysmultipliedtogether.If 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
thevalueofanyoftheseisat0,noneoftheothershas ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
anyeffect.Forinstance,iftheselectedEGfallsto0,
KeyTrackingcantbringthelevelbackupagain.
modulation(includingIntMod)interactswiththese
othermodulators.
Add:AMSisaddedinafterLevel,VelocitySens,Key
Tracking,andtheEGaremultipliedtogether.This
meansthatevenifoneofthemainvaluesisat0,AMS
canstillbringupthevolumetoitsmaximum.
Youcanalsothinkofthisashavingparallel
modulationpaths:EG,KeyTrack,andVelocity
Sensitivityononeside,andAMSontheother.
Volume=(Level*EG*KeyTrack*VelSens)+AMS.
ismultipliedalongwithalloftheothermodulators.
Volume=Level*EG*KeyTrack*VelSens*(1+AMS).

Thisselectsthemainmodulationsourceforcontrolling
theOutputLevel.ForalistofAMSsources,see
page 1021.
Intensity [100+100]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheOutput
Levelmodulation.
AMS Int. Mod [List of AMS Sources]

YoucanmodulatetheAMSIntensityfromanother
Intensity [100+100]
IntensitytoproducethefinalOutputLevel
modulationamount.
354
Program P5: Oscillators 54: VPM Osc1
54: VPM Osc1
54a 54g
54b
54d
54c
54e
54f
ThesixVPMOscillatorsarethemaintoolsofthe Off:ThiscompletelydisablestheVPMOscillator.If
MOD7,andcanbeusedinvariouswaysforboth yourenotusingtheVPMOscillatoratall,setitsMode
generatingwaveformsandprocessingaudio.For toOffinordertosaveprocessingpower.
generalinformationaboutthesedifferentpossibilities,
Off
pleaseseeSynthesiswiththeMOD7:aguidedtour
onpage 331.
ThispagecontrolsallaspectsoftheVPMOscillator,
including:
Whetheritwillfunctionasanoscillatoronitsown, Sine:Thisincludesasineoscillatorfollowedbyaone
orasawaveshaperorringmodulatorforother polelowpassfilterandaringmodulator.Sineisthe
signals defaultsetting,usedforclassicFMsounds.Evenwhen
AllFMrelatedcontrols,includinginputlevels, usingmorecomplexwaveformsforFMModulators,
oscillatorphase,feedback,andratio,alongwith SineisstillthenormalsettingforanFMCarrier.
modulationforfeedbackandpitch
Sine
Allwaveshapingrelatedcontrols,includingtable
selection,drive,offset,keyboardslope,and
modulationfordriveandoffset
Ringmodcrossfademodulation
Saw:ThismodeusesFMfeedbacktocreateasawtooth
Outputlevelandmodulation,includingkeyboard waveform.AswithSine,itincludesaonepolelowpass
tracking,EGselection,andvelocitysensitivity filteraftertheoscillator,aswellasaringmodulator.
Saw
54a: Main
Mode [Off, Sine, Saw, Triangle, Square,
Sine + Waveshaper, Waveshaper,
Ring Mod Only] Triangle:Thismodeusestheoscillatortocreatea
ThisselectsthebasicfunctionalityoftheVPM trianglewaveform,followedbytheringmodulator.
Oscillator.DependingontheselectedMode,other
parametersintheVPMOscillatormaybegrayedout. Triangle
TheModealsoaffectstherequiredprocessingpower.
Triangle,Square,andSine+Waveshaperneedthe
mostpower,andusingthemmayresultinslightly
lowerpolyphony.Offrequiresnoprocessingpowerat
all.
355
Square:Thismodeusestheoscillatortocreateasquare WhenModeissettoRingModOnly,theinputlevel
waveform.Theresstillaringmodulatorbeforethe hasnoeffect.
output.
Mode Parameter Details
Square
AdiagramoftheselectedModessignalflowappears
intheParameterDetailsareawhenanyoftheMain
parametersareselected.
Sine+Waveshaper:Thisistheultrasuperdeluxe 54b: Oscillator

mode:sineoscillator,waveshaper,lowpassand
highpassfilters,andringmodulator.Threescoops,hot TheOscillatorparametersdonotapplywhenthe
fudgesauce,whippedcream,choppednuts,anda ModeissettoOff,Waveshaper,orRingModOnly.
cherryontop. Formoreinformationaboutusingtheoscillatorfor
VPM/FM,includinghandsontutorials,seeVPM(aka
Sine + Waveshaper
FM)onpage 333.
Ratio [064]
Thissetsthebasictuningfortheoscillator.Youcan
createinbetweensettings(including0.5)byusing
Waveshaper:Thismodeletsyouusethewaveshaper Fine,below.
sectiontoprocesssignalsfromothersources,suchas
0meansthatthepitchwillnotchangeinresponseto
theotherVPMOscillators,thePCMOscillator,the
thenotenumber.FortheclassicDXfixedfrequency
audioinput,andsoon.Itincludesaonepolehighpass
effect,setbothRatioandRatioFineto0,andthenset
filterafterthewaveshaper,followedbyaring
theFrequencyOffsetandFrequencyFinetothe
modulator.Notethatthissettingdisablestheinternal
oscillator. desiredfrequency.Notethatwiththesesettings,pitch
modulationwillhavenoeffect.
Waveshaper 1producesthestandardrootpitch.
2producesthefirstharmonic,3thesecondharmonic,
andsoon.Formoreinformation,seeVPMandFM
Synthesisonpage 331.
RingModOnly:Inthismode,asthenameimplies, Tip: Carrier Ratio near 0 produces chorusing
onlytheRingModulatorisactive.Inputlevelshaveno
effect.Input1istheModulator,andInput2isthe InanFMpair,settingtheCarriersRatioand
Carrier. FrequencyOffsetcloseto0reversesthenormal
relationshipbetweentheCarrierandtheModulator.In
Note:thissettingdisablesthesineoscillator.Usethis thiscase,theModulatorstimbrecomesthroughvery
settingonlyifyouwanttouseexternalsignalsforboth clearly,whiletheCarrierprovidesonlyachorusing
theModulatorandtheCarrier.Ifyouwanttousethe effect.UseRatioFineand/orFrequencyOffsetFineto
internalsineoscillatorastheCarrier,setModetoSine controlthespeedanddepthofthechorus.
instead.
(Ratio) Fine [0.9990+0.999]
Ring Mod Only
Thisallowsyoutofinetunetheratio.Youcanthinkof
thisasthedigitstotherightofthedecimal.For
instance,settingtheRatioto0andFineto+0.500
resultsinanactualratioof0.5,forapitchoneoctave
lowerthanstandard.
Input Level 1 [0100]
Frequency Offset [-99990000+9999Hz]
Thissetsthelevelforthefirstinput.Thelevelapplies
tobothFMandWaveshaping,butitdoesnotaffectthe Thisproducesastaticfrequencyoffset,inHertz,from
directpathfromInput1totheRingModulator. thepitchsetbyRatio.
WhenModeissettoSine,Saw,Triangle,Square,or (Frequency) Fine [-0.99+0.99 Hz]

Sine+Waveshaper,thiscontrolstheintensityofthe ThisadjuststheFrequencyOffsetin1/100Hz
FMfromthisinput. increments.
WhenModeissettoWaveshaper,thiscontrolsthe
basiclevelgoingintotheWaveshaper,whichcanbe Initial Phase [1800+180]
furthercontrolledviatheDriveparameter. Thissetstheinitialphaseoftheoscillator.Therelative
WhenModeissettoRingModOnly,theinputlevel phasesofthecarrierandmodulatorwillaffectthe
hasnoeffect. soundofFMmodulation.
Tip:TrycreatingasimpleFMpair,withthecarriers
Input Level 2 [0100] Ratiosetto0,andthemodulatorsRatiosetto1.Set
Thissetsthelevelforthesecondinput,similarto thecarriersInitialPhaseto+90,andthenlistentohow
InputLevel1,above. thesoundchangeswhenyoumovethisupordownby
afewdegrees.Thesoundissimilartoanelectricpiano.
356
Phase Sync [Key Sync, Random, Free Run] Ratio Pitch in semitones
KeySyncsetstheoscillatortotheInitialPhasevalue 5 +27.83
ateverykeydown.
6 +31.03
Randomsetstheoscillatortoarandomvalue,withthe
valuerandomizedperoscillator.(Thisisthesameas 7 +33.44 -- 2 octaves + minor seventh (-56 cents)
theAL1behaviorforrandom.) 8 +36.00
FreeRunsetstheoscillatortoInitialPhaseplusa 9 +38.09 -- 3 octaves + whole tone (+9 cents)
randomvaluethatisthesameforalloftheEXisvoices,
andforalloftheVPMOscillatorswithinthosevoices. 10 + 39.65 -- 3 octaves + major third (-35 cents)
Forinstance,ifaProgramhastwoMOD7s,thevoices 12 +43.06 -- 3 octaves + fifth (+6 cents)
forEXi1wouldhaveonerandomvalue,andthosefor
15 +46.50 -- 3 octaves + major seventh (-50 cents)
EXi2wouldhaveanother.TogetthevintageDX7
behavior,setoscillatorstoFreeRunandsettheirphase 16 +48.00
to0.
AMS1 Int. Mod [List of AMS Sources]
Feedback [0100]
FeedbackisathirdFMinput,hardwiredinoneoftwo AMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.
waystotheoscillatorsownoutput,whichallowsthe
oscillatortomodulateitself.Theexactroutingdepends Intensity [-48.000.00+48.00]
ontheFeedbackPathparameter;formore ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
information,seeFeedbackPathonpage 357. ModAMS,insemitones.Theresultissummedwith
FeedbackisavailableonlywhenModeissettoSineor themainAMS1Intensitytoproducethefinalpitch
Sine+Waveshaper. modulationamount.
WithFeedbackPathsettoFromSineOsc,setting AMS2 [List of AMS Sources]
Feedbackto65createsareasonableapproximationofa
sawtoothwaveform.ModulationofFeedbackwill
thensoundsimilartomodulatingthecutofffrequency
ofalowpassfilter.
page 1021.
Pitch Parameter Details Intensity [-48.000.00+48.00]
TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS2
Ratio,(Ratio)Fine,FreqOffset,(FreqOffset)Fine, pitchmodulation,insemitones.
InitialPhase,orPhaseSyncareselected.
Note:whenbothRatioandRatioFinearesetto0, Feedback Parameter Details
pitchmodulationwillhavenoeffect. TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen
Feedbackisselected.
Use Common Mod [Checkbox]
On:Theoscillatorwillrespondtoallofthepitch Feedback Path [From Sine Osc, From Output]
modulationfromtheOscMainpage.Thisthedefault. ThiscontrolsthesourceoftheFeedbacksignal.
Off:TheoscillatorwillignoretheOscMainpagesLFO FromSineOscroutesthefeedbackdirectlyfromthe
andAMSsettings.ItwillstillrespondtothePitchand outputoftheSineOscillator.TherestoftheVPM
Portamentosettings,includingPitchSlope,JS(+X), Oscillatorsignalchain,includingtheLPF,HPF,
JS(X),Ribbon,andAnalog.Itwillalsorespondtoall waveshaper,ringmodulator,andoutputvolume
pitchrelatedEXiCommonparameters,suchasChord control,willnotaffectthefeedback.Usethisoption
andScale. whenyouwantthefeedbacktimbretobeindependent
fromtheoutputvolume.
FromOutputroutesthefeedbackfromtheoutputof
Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrolling
theentireVPMOscillatorsignalchain.Whenthe
OscillatorModeissettoSine,thisproducesthe
feedbackstructureofclassicFMsynths.
page 1021.
FeedbackPath
Intensity [-48.000.00+48.00]
Feedback = From Sine Osc
pitchmodulation,insemitones.Toeasilyconvertfrom
semitonestoFMratios,seethetablebelow. Sine Osc LPF Waveshaper HPF Ring Output
Ratio Pitch in semitones

Feedback = From Output
1 Root pitch
2 +12.00 AMS [List of AMS Sources]
3 +19.01 ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheFeedback.
4 +24.00
357
Intensity [100+100] Sine4:WhenDriveisat0dB,thistableislike0:1FM

ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS withthecarrierlevelatmaximum.Toproducea
modulationforFeedback. similareffecttoSine2,reducetheDriveby6dB;to
produceasimilareffecttoSine,reducetheDriveby
12dB.
54c: Waveshaper SineandSine2:ThesearedarkerversionsofSine4.
ThissectionisavailableonlywhentheModeissetto
Sine Sine2 Sine4
Sine+WaveshaperorWaveshaper.
Notethat,ifthesameoscillatorisusingbothFMand
waveshaping,theyoccurinthatorder:firstthesine
oscillatorismodulatedbytheinputs,andthenthe
resultiswaveshaped.
Formoreinformationaboutusingthewaveshaper, Pickups
includinghandsontutorials,seeWaveshapingon Thesetablessimulateelectromagneticpickups,suchas
page 336. thoseofanelectricpiano.Drivefunctionsasthesignal
gain.
Table [List of tables]
Tocreateelectricpianosounds,useasinewaveas
Thisselectsthetableusedbythewaveshaper.The
input,andassignanEGtomodulateDrive;itshould
waveshapingeffectwillbeacombinationoftheinput
bearound0dBatfirst,andthendecayexponentiallyto
signal(includingboththewaveformandthesignal
averylowvalue.Offsetcontrolsthedistancebetween
level),theselectedtable,andthesettingsforDriveand
thepickupandthecenterofthetine;typically,values
Offset.
closeto0willworkwell.
Linear, Sine->Tri, and Step Pickup1:Thissimulatesabrightelectromagnetic
Linear:Thissimpletabledoesnotalterthesignal,as pickup.
longaslevelsarewithintherangeofthetable. Pickup2:Thiscreatesadifferentamountofsaturation;
Extremelyhighinputlevels,orDrivesettingsover itstoneisslightlydarkerthanPickup1.
0dB,maystillcauseclipping.Nonzerovaluesof
Offsetmayalsocauseclippingoneitherthepositiveor Pickup1 Pickup2
negativeside,changingthewaveformssymmetry.
Sine>Tri:Withfullscalesineinput,thistablecreatesa
trianglewaveform.Ifyoujustwanttocreateatriangle
waveform,settingtheModetoTrianglewillworka
littlebetter,butthistableallowsyoutouseDriveand
Tanh
Offsetincreativeways.
Tanh2,4,and8:Thesecreatesoftclipping,similarto
Forabasictrianglewaveform,settheKeySlopeto1,
theStep.VarytheDrivetocontroltheamountof
andsettheKeySlopeModetorolloffonlyaboveC4.
distortion.2,4,and8produceincreasingamountsof
Formoremellow,sineliketones,reducetheDrive;for
clipping.Fullscalesinewaveinputwillproduce
sharpertimbres,increaseit.
outputsimilartoasoftedgedsquarewave.
Step:Thistablecreatessoftclipping.Increasingthe
inputleveland/orDrivecreatesharderclipping. Tanh 2 Tanh 4 Tanh 8
Withafullscalesinewave,theoutputissomething
likeasoftsquarewave,withOffsetbeingsimilarto
pulsewidth.
Linear Sine->Tri Step

Additive
WhiletheAdditivetablescanproduceinteresting
resultswithanyinputsignal,theyproducethe
describedresultsonlywithafullscalesinewave.
ReducingtheDrive(orthelevelofthesinewave
Sines input)willdiminishtheleveloftheadditive
Withsinewaveinput,thesetablesproduceoutput harmonics,makingtheresultsoundmorelikethe
similartoasimpleFMpairwiththeCarrier:Modulator originalsine.DynamicmodulationofDrivemay
ratiosetto0:1.DrivefunctionsliketheFMinputlevel, soundsimilartoafilteropeningandclosing.
andrespondswelltoAMSmodulation.Withfullscale AddSaw3Harm:Thisproducesthefirstthree
input,Drivesettingsover0dBwillcauseclipping. harmonicsofasawtooth.
Thetablesdifferonlyintheirmaximumbrightness. AddSquare3Harm:Thisproducesthefirstthree
Sine4isthebrightest,forthebroadestrangeof harmonicsofasquarewave.
timbres.Sine2isdarker,andSineisdarkerstill;these
AddTri3Harm:Thisproducesthefirstthree
offerfinercontrolwithDrivemodulation,formore
harmonicsofatrianglewave.
subtlecoloration.
358
Add12345:Thisproducesharmonics1through5with Sine Octave Sine 2Octave Triangle4

equalamplitude,similartoafilteredpulsewaveform.
Add Saw 3Harm Add Square 3Harm Add Tri 3Harm Add 12345
TX Waves
TXWave2,3,4,7,and8:Withfullscalesineinput,
Add1Plus2:Thisproducesthefundamentalplusthe theseproducewaveformssimilartothoseofclassic4
2ndharmonicatequalamplitude,andsoundslikean operatorFMsynths.ModulateDrivebelow0dBfora
8+4organstop. moresinelikesound.
Add1Plus3:Thisproducesthefundamentalplusthe TX Wave 2 TX Wave 3 TX Wave 4 TX Wave 7
3rdharmonicatequalamplitude,andsoundslikean8
+22/3organstop.
Add1Plus4:Thisproducesthefundamentalplusthe
4thharmonicatequalamplitude,andsoundslikean8
+2organstop.
TX Wave 8
+13/5organstop.
+11/3organstop. Tube and Diode
Add1Plus7:Thisproducesthefundamentalplusthe Tube:Thisisasoftclippingtable,forsimulating
7thharmonicatequalamplitude. analogsaturation.Thecombinationofinputleveland
Add1Plus8:Thisproducesthefundamentalplusthe Drivecontrolstheamountofclipping;Offsetcontrols
8thharmonicatequalamplitude,andsoundslikean8 symmetry,likeDCoffsetintoaVCA.
+1organstop. Diode1and2:Theseproduceasymmetricsoft
Add 1plus2 Add 1plus3 Add 1plus4 Add 1plus5
clipping,likeananalogdiode.Diode2producesmore
distortionthanDiode1.
Tube Diode 1 Diode 2
Add 1plus6 Add 1plus7 Add 1plus8
Mixture
Mixture1,2,3,and4:Withsinewaveinput,thesefour
tablescreateabunchofdifferentharmonicsatdifferent
amplitudes,likeFMororganstops.
Multipliers
SineOctave:Withfullscalesineinput,thisproducesa Mixture 1 Mixture 2 Mixture 3 Mixture 4
sinewaveoneoctavehigherthantheinput,andclips
above0dB.
Sine2Octave:Withfullscalesineinput,thisproduces
asinewavetwooctaveshigherthantheinputsignal.
WithdecreasingDrivesettings,itjumpsdowntothe Invert
originaloctaveproducinganinterestingeffectwhen
Driveismodulated.Morecomplexinputsignalscan Invert:Thistablesimplyinvertstheinputsignal.Itcan
alsoproducegoodresults. beusedtoinvertawaveformpriortoaddingitbackto
itselfforpulsewidthmodulation,forexample.
Triangle4:ThisissimilartoSine4,exceptthatitusesa
triangleshape.Itproducesoutputsimilartoasimple Invert
FMpairwiththeCarrier:Modulatorratiosetto0:1,and
thecarriersettoatrianglewave.Drivefunctionslike
theFMinputlevel,andrespondswelltoAMS
modulation.Withfullscaleinput,Drivesettingsover
0dBwillcauseclipping.
Fuzzy
Fuzzy:Thistableaddsrandomsoundingnoisetothe
input,evenwithlowinputlevels.ModulatingDrive
canproduceinteresting,grungyeffects.
359
FuzzyTube:ThisissimilartoFuzzy,above,withthe Take4 Take5 Experiment Real Steep

additionofsoftclipping.
GetFuzzy:Thisunusualtableisnoisyonlyaround
zero.Highlevelinputsignals(orhighDrivesettings)
willproducelessnoisyoutput,whilelowlevelsignals
willbemuchmorenoisy.
Pulse5 BowwBass Pulse Octave Inverter1
Fuzzy Fuzzy Tube Get Fuzzy
Integers Super Square Line Sine2 Comb

01/W and Waveshaper Effect tables
Therestofthetablesarebasedonthoseoftheclassic
Korg01/WandtheWaveshapereffect.
Sine + Saw 2 Cycle Frequency3 Frequency7
Snake Rezzo Super Resonant Accordion
10 Cycle Cocoon Double Sine Phase
Triangles Inverter2 7th Resonant Waves
20 Cycle Attack Up Symmetry Frequency8
Take6 Exciter Booster Claver
Resonant1 Resonant2 Zinger GeoGraphic
Soft Road Rubber Parabola Wurly
Reptile SyncSter Profile Star
Drive [-36dB0dB+36dB]
Thissetsthevolumeofthesignalgoinginto
waveshaper.ByreducingtheDrive,youcanmakethe
signalinteractwithonlypartofthetable.Thisis
particularlyusefulincombinationwithOffset,as
Take1 Vital Signs Forest Zigzag
showninthediagrambelow.Drivecanalsobe
modulatedtocreatechangesintimbre,asdescribed
underTip:ModulatingDrive,below.
Withapuresineoscillator,anythinggreaterthan0dB
willclip.Often,clippingwillsoundbadbutsome
High Pass Line Sine1 WS Bass Soft Curve tables,suchastanh,step,tubeanddiode,are
specificallymadeforclipping.Withthesetables,the
harderyoudrive,themoresaturation/overdriveyoull
get.
Smoothy Log Sine1 Take2 Take3
360
DriveandOffset Drive Parameter Details

Table = Vital Signs Table = Vital Signs TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen
Drive = 06dB Drive = 06dB anyoftheparametersintheWaveshapersectionother
Offset = 00 Offset = 50
thanOffsetareselected.ThisincludesTable,Drive,
KeySlope,SlopeShape,HPF,andMakeupGain.

ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheDrive.Fora
Gray = active part of table
Intensity [72dB+72dB]
Key Slope [075] ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheDrive
ThisscalestheamountofDriveasyoumoveupand modulation.
downthekeyboard,withacenterpointofC4.Key
Tip: Modulating Drive
Slopecanhelptokeepthetimbreevenacrossthe
keyboard,andalsohelptominimizealiasing.The ModulatingDrivecanbeextremelyusefulforcreating
SlopeShapeparameter,below,affectshowthis dynamictimbres.Dependingontheselectedtable,this
parameterworks. modulationwillalsooftencausesignificantchangesin
overalllevel.Youcancompensateforthiswitha
Thestepsareinincrementsof0.2dBperoctave,uptoa
combinationofMakeupGainandOutputLevel
maximumof15dB/oct.
modulation:
Slope Shape [graphics: symmetric, 1. SetupanAMSsourcetomodulateDrive.
high range only] 2. AssignthesameAMSsourcetomodulatethe
KeySlopealwaysattenuatesDriveaboveC4.This mainOutputLevel,inverselyfromDrive.
parameterselectswhetherornotitalsoboostsDrive Inotherwords,ifyouuseapositiveintensityforDrive
belowC4. AMS,useanegativeintensityforOutputLevelAMS.
Offset [0100] 3. AdjusttheOutputLevelAMSIntensityuntilthe
ThisintroducesaDCOffsetintotheinputsignal, volumelevelstayssufficientlyeven.
shiftingthesignalinrelationtothewaveshapertable. Theactualsettingswillvarydependingontheinput
levelandtheselectedtable.DontexpecttheOutput
Withafullscaleinputsignal,thiswillmakethesignal
LevelintensitytobethesameasthatofDrive.
clipononesideortheother,andresultinan
asymmetricwaveform.Whenusedinconjunctionwith 4. IncreasetheWaveshapersMakeupGain
Drive,itcanselectthepartofthetableusedtoprocess parametertocompensateforthereductionin
thesignal.Offsetcanbemodulatedatnoteon,which volume.
workswellwithAMSsourcessuchasVelocityand
ExponentialVelocity. Offset Parameter Details
Offsetalsohasspecificuseswithparticulartables;see TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen
theindividualtabledescriptionsformoreinformation. theWaveshaperOffsetparameterisselected.
Formoreinformation,seethediagramDriveand AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Offset,above.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheOffset.Fora
HPF [0100] listofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
Theoutputofthewaveshaperisprocessedthrougha
simplehighpassfilter.Thisfilterisprimarilyintended Offsetcanbemodulatedatnoteononly.Thisworks
topreventDCoffsetsinthewaveshapedsignal,which wellwithAMSsourcessuchasVelocityand
cancauseunexpectedclippingattheaudiooutputs, ExponentialVelocity.
alongwithotherstrangeresults.
Intensity [100+100]
Thisparametercontrolsthecutoffofthefilter.The
defaultvalueof5isgenerallysufficienttoblockDC
modulationforOffset.
offsets.Highervalueswillmakethesound
increasinglythin,whichmaybeusefulforcreative
purposes. 54d: Keyboard Track
Makeup Gain [-36dB0dB+36dB] EachVPMOscillatorhasitsownkeyboardtracking,
Thisprovidesadditionalgaintocompensateforloss whichisdedicatedtomodulatingtheOutputLevelas
throughtheWaveshaper.Forinformationonhowto youplayupanddownthekeyboard.
usethis,seeTip:ModulatingDrive,below. OASYSskeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeover
uptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.
361
Tracking for timbre Alsonotethat,asshowninthegraphicAmp

Mostacousticinstrumentschangeintimbreasyou KeyboardTracking,below,negativeslopesaremore
playhigherorlowerpitches.Atitsmostbasic, steepthanpositiveslopes.
keyboardtrackingcancompensatefortheseeffectsby BottomLowandLowCenter:negativerampsmake
adjustingtheoutputlevelofanFMModulatorasyou thekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplay
playhigherandloweronthekeyboard.With loweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
Modulators,raisingthelevelwillmakethetimbre outputgohigher.
brighter;reducingthelevelwillmakeitdarker. CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe
Tracking for aliasing keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigher
onthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutput
WithFM,aliasinggenerallyincreasesathigher goup.
frequencies(seeAliasingonpage 331).Reducing
Modulatorlevelsathigherpitchesisusuallythemost Bottom-Low [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
effectivewaytominimizealiasing. ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI
How it works: Keys and Ramps noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey
orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The Low-Center [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter
theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
Breaktobeanywhereinbetween. Center-High [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
Thefourrampvaluescontroltherateofchange ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
betweentheLowBreakkeyandtheCenterkey. High-Top [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyand
foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe thetopoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,
Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas usepositivevalues.
noeffect.Thetwofoldingdoorsswingoutfromthis Ramp Change in level
Key 95 Silent in one octave
Low Break [C1G9] 48 Silent in two octaves
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwolower 25 Silent in four octaves
rampsthehingeofthelowerdoor.
00 no change
Center [C1G9] +25 x2 in four octaves
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtrackingthemain +50 x2 in two octaves
hinge.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrackinghasno
effectonthevolume,oronanyAMSdestinations. +99 x2 in one octave
+Inf x2 in one half-step
High Break [C1G9]
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher +Inf and Inf ramps
rampsthehingeoftheupperdoor.
Entering notes from the keyboard changesforsplitlikeeffects.Whenarampissetto+Inf
Youcanenternotenumbersdirectlybyplayingthem orInf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextreme
onthekeyboard.Todoso: highestorlowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters. Whenarampissetto+Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwill
gotoitshighestvalue(doubletheprogrammed
2. HolddowntheENTERkey. volume)overasinglehalfstep.
3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe
Similarly,whenarampissettoInf,thekeyboard
keyboard.
trackingwillgotoitslowestvalue(completesilence)
Ramp overasinglehalfstep.
theHighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,
ifyousettheLowCenterrampto+InforInf,the
key;negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
BottomLowrampwillbegrayedout.
rampistotheleftorrightoftheCenterkey.
362
Amp Keyboard Tracking
Ramp values: +99 +50 +25

Louder x2
Change to
No change
Volume
Silence
Ramp values: 99 97 95 48 25
Low Break: D1 Center: G2 High Break: C4
Keyboard Track Parameter Details Crossfade [Dry, 1:9949:51, AM,

51:491:99, Wet]
TheKeyboardTrackgraphicappearsintheParameter
DetailsareawhenanyoftheKeyboardTrack Thiscrossfadesbetweenthedryandringmodulated
parametersareselected. signal.Thecentervalue,withequalamountsofwet
anddry,producesAM(AmplitudeModulation).You
canmodulatethisvalueinrealtime,asdescribed
54e: Ring Modulator underCrossfadeParameterDetails,below
Ringmodulationaddsnewfrequenciestotheaudioby More details on ring modulation
multiplyingoneinput,calledtheCarrier,byanother,
theModulator. Inthemostsimplecase,whenboththeCarrierand
Modulatoraresinewaves,ringmodulationproduces
Ingeneral,ifthefrequenciesoftheCarrierand twonewfrequencies.Thesenewfrequenciesarecalled
Modulatorareharmonicallyrelated,thesenew,added sidebands.
frequenciescreatebrightertimbres.Thebrighterthe
inputs,themorenewfrequenciesarecreated,andthe Oneisthesum,attheCarrierfrequencyplusthe
greatertheeffect.Smallamountsofdetuningbetween Modulatorfrequency.Theotheristhedifference,at
theCarrierandModulatorproducemoremotionand theCarrierfrequencyminustheModulatorfrequency.
richnessintheoutput. Forinstance,letssaythatCarrierisa1,000Hzsine
IftheCarrierandModulatorfrequenciesarenot wave,andtheModulatorisa300Hzsinewave.The
related(byusinglotsofdetuneorfrequencyoffseton twosidebandswouldbeat1,300Hz(thesum)and
oneofthem,forinstance),theringmodulatorcreates 700Hz(thedifference).
dissonant,gongliketones. Noticethatneitherofthesesidebandshasasimple
IntheMOD7,Input1alwaysactsastheModulator;it musicalorharmonicrelationshiptotheoriginaltones.
hasadirectpathintotheringmodulator,whichisnot Thisiswhytheoutputcansoundlikeagong,with
affectedbytheInputLevelcontrol.Dependingonthe clangorousanddissonantovertones.
selectedVPMOscillatorMode,theCarriercanbe IftheModulatorsfrequencyishigherthanthatofthe
eithertheVPMOscillatoritself(afterallapplicableFM Carrier,thedifferencesidebandisreflectedaround
andwaveshaping),orInput2. 0Hz,witha180degreephaseshift.Forinstance,ifthe
WhenModeissettoWaveshaper,Input2is Carrierisat100HzandtheModulatorisat400Hz,the
waveshapedbeforeenteringtheringmodulator.There differencesidebandwouldbe300Hz,180degreesout
aremanypossibilitieshere,buttwosimpletablesmay ofphase.
beparticularlyuseful:Inverter1createsarectified Theeffectbecomesmuchmorecomplexwhenusing
signal,andIntegersclipsthesignaltonegativevalues inputsotherthanpuresinewaves,sinceseparatesum
only. anddifferencetonesarecreatedforeachcomponent
AswithFM,ringmodulationcanproducealiasing frequencyineachinput.
especiallyathigherfrequencies. Forinstance,letssaythattheCarriernowhastwosine
Formoreinformationaboutusingtheringmodulator, waves,at1000Hzand2000Hzrespectively,andthatthe
includinghandsontutorials,seeRingModulation Modulatoralsohastwosinewaves,at300Hzand
onpage 338. 600Hz.Theoutputoftheringmodulatorwouldthen
includeeightdifferentsidebands:
1,300Hz(1,000Hz+300Hz)
363
1,600Hz(1,000Hz+600Hz) NoneisthesameasiftheEGwasalwaysatits
700Hz(1,000Hz300Hz) maximumlevel.
400Hz(1,000Hz600Hz) Velocity Sens [100+100]

2,300Hz(2,000Hz+300Hz) Thiscontrolsthedegreetowhichoutputlevel
respondstovelocity.Negativesettingsareusefulfor
2,600Hz(2,000Hz+600Hz)
creatingvelocitycrossfadesbetweentwosetsofVPM
1700Hz(2,000Hz300Hz) Oscillators.
1400Hz(2,000Hz600Hz)
Output Level Parameter Details
Ifbothinputscontainthreefrequencieseach,the
numberofsidebandsgrowsto18;iftheycontainfour TheseitemsappearintheParameterDetailsareawhen
frequencieseach,itgrowsto32;withfiveeach,the anyoftheparametersintheOutputsectionare
sidebandsgrowto50.So,theeffectcanbecomevery selected.ThisincludesOn,OutputLevel,EGSelect,
complicated,veryfast! andVelocitySens.
(IftheCarrierandModulatorareharmonicallyrelated, AMS Mode [Add, Multiply]
thefrequenciesofsomeofthesidebandsmaybethe
TocalculatetheVPMOscillatorsoutputvolume,the
same,resultinginasomewhatsimplertone.)
mainLevelparameter,VelocitySens,KeyTracking,
Ifoneormoresumfrequenciesarehigherthan24kHz andtheselectedEGarealwaysmultipliedtogether.If
(halfofthesamplerate),thiswillcausealiasing. thevalueofanyoftheseisat0,noneoftheothershas
Aliasingaddsitsownsidebands,whichmayormay anyeffect.Forinstance,iftheselectedEGfallsto0,
notenhancetheeffectoftheringmodulator.Ifyou KeyTrackingcantbringthelevelbackupagain.
wanttominimizealiasing,avoidusingbrighttonesfor
boththeCarrierandModulatorsimultaneously.Ifone
modulation(includingIntMod)interactswiththese
ofthesoundsisverybright,considerusingadark,
othermodulators.
lowpassedsoundfortheother.
Add:AMSisaddedinafterLevel,VelocitySens,Key
Crossfade Parameter Details Tracking,andtheEGaremultipliedtogether.This
meansthatevenifoneofthemainvaluesisat0,AMS
canstillbringupthevolumetoitsmaximum.
theRingModulatorCrossfadeparameterisselected.
Youcanalsothinkofthisashavingparallel
AMS [List of AMS Sources] modulationpaths:EG,KeyTrack,andVelocity
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheCrossfade. Sensitivityononeside,andAMSontheother.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation Expressedmathematically,thisis:
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. Volume=(Level*EG*KeyTrack*VelSens)+AMS.
Intensity [100+100] Multiply:Thisisthedefault,andissimilartotheway
ismultipliedalongwithalloftheothermodulators.
modulationforCrossfade.
Volume=Level*EG*KeyTrack*VelSens*(1+AMS).
54f: Output
On [Checkbox]
Thisselectsthemainmodulationsourceforcontrolling
ThismutesandunmutestheentireVPMOscillator, theOutputLevel.ForalistofAMSsources,see
forquickcomparisonsduringediting.Thisparameter AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
isalsoshownintheParameterDetailsonthePatch page 1021.
Panel.
Intensity [100+100]
NotethattheOscillatorwillstilluseprocessingpower
unlesstheModeissettoOff. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheOutput
Levelmodulation.
Output Level [0100]
AMS Int. Mod [List of AMS Sources]
ThissetsthebasicoutputleveloftheVPMOscillator.It
isalsoshownintheParameterDetailsonthePatch YoucanmodulatetheAMSIntensityfromanother
Panel. AMSsource.Thisselectsthatsource.
IftheOscillatorisanFMModulator,theoutputlevel Intensity [100+100]
affectsthebrightnessofitsassociatedCarrier(s).Ifthe
OscillatorisanFMCarrier,theoutputlevelaffects
volume.
IntensitytoproducethefinalOutputLevel
EG Select [None, EG1EG9, Amp EG] modulationamount.
Thisselectsanyofthe10EGstocontroltheOscillators
outputlevel.Bydefault,EGs16areassignedtoVPM
Oscillators16,EG7isassignedtothePCMOscillator,
andEG8isassignedtoFilterACutoff.
364
Program P5: Oscillators 55: VPM Oscillator 2
CrossfadeModulationappearswhen(RingMod)
54g: Parameter Details Crossfadeisselected.
TheParameterDetailsareashowsinformationforthe OutputLevelModulationappearswhenanyofthe
selecteditem,includingexplanatorygraphicsand parametersintheOutputsectionareselected.
AMSmodulationroutings.
TheModegraphicappearswhenanyofthe t 54: Page Menu Commands
parametersintheMainsectionareselected.
PitchModulationappearswhenRatio,(Ratio)Fine,
FreqOffset,(FreqOffset)Fine,InitialPhase,or
PhaseSyncareselected.
commandsonpage 142.
FeedbackModulationappearswhenFeedbackis
selected.
Programonpage 142.
DriveModulationappearswhenanyofthe
parametersintheWaveshapersectionotherthan
Offsetareselected.ThisincludesTable,Drive,Key
Slope,SlopeShape,HPF,andMakeupGain. 2:CopyVPMOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyVPMOscillatoronpage 376.
OffsetModulationappearswhentheWaveshaper
Offsetparameterisselected. 4:SwapVPMOscillators.Formoreinformation,
seeSwapVPMOscillatorsonpage 376.
TheKeyboardTrackgraphicappearswhenanyof
theparametersintheKeyboardTracksectionare
selected.
55: VPM Oscillator 2

VPMOscillators2through6areidenticaltoVPM
Oscillator1.Fordetailedparameterexplanations,
pleasesee54:VPMOsc1onpage 355.
365
Program P6: Filter
61: Filter Basic

controls.ThemainmixersupportsmodulatablePan
Overview forall6inputs.
TheMOD7includesdualmultimoderesonantfilters, Fordetaileddescriptionsofthefilterparameters,see
includingKorgsMultifilter.Thesefiltersarealmost 51:FilterBasiconpage 188.
identicaltothoseoftheAL1,exceptforthefollowing:
ForinformationaboutusingthefiltersintheMOD7,
ThereisnoTrimparameter.(Thiswasunnecessary includinghandsontutorials,seeFilteredVPMon
evenintheAL1,sincethefilterwillnotclip page 334.
internally.)Outputvolumeisstillavailableand
modulatable.
Filters and the Analog parameter
ThepatchpanelallowsindividualaccesstoFilters
AandB,andsotheRoutingparameterprovides WhentheOscillatorMainpageAnalogparameteris
onlyParalleland4Polemodes.Youcancreate greaterthan0,FiltersAandBeachgetadifferent
serialroutingusingthepatchpanel,ifdesired. randomdetunevalue(includingwhenLinkissetto
On).
Similarly,sinceFiltersAandBhaveindependent
outputswhichcanberoutedseparatelytothemain Ifyouwantthetwofilterstobeperfectlyintune,turn
mixer,therearenofilterspecificPanorPanAMS Analogto0.
62: Multi Filter

TheMultiFilterisidenticaltothatoftheAL1.For
detailedinformation,see52:MultiFilteron
page 191.
63: Filter Modulation

TheFilterModulationpageisalmostidenticaltothat Thereisoneexception:intheFilterAandBEGSelect
oftheAL1.Fordetailedinformation,see53:Filter parameters,youcanselectanyoftheMOD7
Modulationonpage 192. envelopes:EG1EG9,plustheAmpEG.
64: Filter LFO Mod

TheFilterLFOModpageisidenticaltothatoftheAL
1.Fordetailedinformation,see54:FilterLFOMod
onpage 195.
366
Program P7: Amp 71: Mixers 1-3
Program P7: Amp
71: Mixers 1-3
71a
71c
71b
71c
71b
7. TheThresholdcontrolsthesplitpoint;setitas
Overview desired.
Thesearethethree2in,1outmixersonthePatch WhentheSourceissettoNoteNumber,a
Panel.Theycanbeusedformixingsignalstogether,or Thresholdof00ismiddleC.
foradditionalcontrolofvolumeandphase.Allinput 8. AssigntheoutputoftheAMSMixertomodulate
levelscanbemodulatedviaAMS. thetwomixerinputsfromstep(1).
Tip: using a VPM Oscillator as a mixer 9. SettheAMSIntensityto100forinput1,and+100
forinput2.
Thethreemixersshouldbesufficientforalmostall
purposes.Inapinch,however,youcanalsocreatea Now,iftheinputisbelowtheThreshold,input1will
mixeroutofanunusedVPMOscillator.Todoso,set beheard;iftheinputisabovetheThreshold,input2
theModetoWaveshaper,andsettheTabletoLinear. willbeheard.
NotethatthishasamuchhigherCPUcostthana
normalmixer.
71a: Mixer 1
Tip: creating splits between elements
Input 1
Youcaneasilycreateakeyboardorvelocitysplit
betweentwodifferentsoundswithinasingleMOD7 Level [0100]
patch.Todoso:
Thiscontrolsthevolumelevelforinput1.
1. Createthetwoelementsofthepatch.
Forinstance,threeVPMoscillatorscreatingabell Phase Invert [Off, On]
timbre,andthreeotherscreatingapad. Thisinvertsthephaseofinput1.
2. Routethetwoelementstotwoinputsofanymixer. AMS [List of AMS Sources]
YoucanuseoneofMixers13,orthemainmixer. Thisselectsthemainmodulationsourceforcontrolling
3. Onthemixer,setinput1slevelto100,andinput theLevel.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
2slevelto0. ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
4. SetanAMSMixertoGate. Intensity [100+100]
5. IntheAMSMixer,settheSourcetoNoteNumber ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLevel
tocreateakeyboardsplit,ortoVelocityorExp modulation.
Velocitytocreateavelocitysplit.
6. SetboththeBelowandAt&Aboveoutputsto
fixedvalues;00forbelow,99forabove.
367
Input 2 Link 1->2 [Off, On]

ThecontrolsforInput2arethesameasthosefor ThismergestheoutputofMixer1intotheoutputof
Input1,above. Mixer2.
Link 2->3 [Off, On]

71b: Mixers 2 and 3 ThismergestheoutputofMixer2intotheoutputof
Mixer3.
ThecontrolsforMixers2and3arethesameasthose
for71a:Mixer1,above.
71c: Link buttons ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
TheLinkbuttonsletyoucombinetwoorthreeofthe
mixerstogether,cascadingtheoutputofoneintothe
commandsonpage 142.
next.
Tocreatea4in,1outmixer,useeitheroftheLink
Programonpage 142.
buttons.Tocreatea6in,1outmixer,usebothofthem.
Internally,Mixers2and3haveathirdinputdedicated
totheLinkfunction.Thisinputisunitygainonly,
withoutavolumecontrol.
72: Main Mixer
72a
72b
TheMainMixerisa6in,stereooutmixer,whichtakes
signalsfromthePatchPanelandroutesthemtothe 72a: Input 1
Ampsection.
Level [0100]
Important:Inordertoheartheoutputofanyblockon
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelforInput1.
thePatchPanel,includingtheVPMOscillators,the
PCMOscillator,theNoiseGenerator,theAudioInput, AMS [List of AMS Sources]
andtheFilters,thesignalmusteventuallybepatched
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheLevel.Fora
intotheMainMixer.
IntheMainMixer,youcan: (AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Controlthevolumelevel,pan,andphaseforeach Intensity [100+100]
ofthesixinputs
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLevelAMS
ModulatevolumelevelsandpanviaAMS. modulation.
368
Program P7: Amp 73: Amp
Pan [L000C064R127] 2. SetthePanAMSIntensityto+64.

Thiscontrolstheinputsstereopan.AsettingofL000 3. AssignanunusedLFOtoPanAMS.
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,and Next,makethefollowingsettingsintheLFO:
R127tothefarright.
4. EnabletheKeySynccheckbox.
AMS [List of AMS Sources] 5. SettheWaveformtoRandom1.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Foralist 6. EnabletheStopcheckbox.
ofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource StopmakestheLFOgenerateasinglevalueatnoteon,
(AMS)Listonpage 1021. andthenholdthatvalue.Now,theinputwillhavea
Intensity [127+127] differentrandompanpositioneachtimeyouplaya
note.
modulationforPan.
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSissetto 72b: Inputs 26
NoteNumber,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethe ThecontrolsforInputs2through6arethesameas
soundtomovetowardtherightasyouplayhigher thoseforInput1,above.
thanC4,andtowardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4.
Negative()intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect. t 72: Page Menu Commands
Phase Invert [Off, On] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ThisinvertsthephaseofInput1. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Tip: Creating random panning commandsonpage 142.
Mixerinputshavenorandompansettingperse. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
However,youcancreatethiseffecteasilyusingAMS. Programonpage 142.
Todoso:
1. SettheinputsPantoC064. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
73: Amp
TheAmppageisidenticaltothatoftheSTR1.For
detailedinformation,see61:Amponpage 273.
74: Amp Modulation

TheAmpModulationpageisidenticaltothatofthe
STR1.Fordetailedinformation,see62:Amp
Modulationonpage 274.
75: Amp EG
TheAmpEGinteractswiththeAmpandAmp
Modulationsettingstocontroltheoverallvolumeof
theMOD7.ThisEGalwaysaffectsthatoverall
volume,butitcanalsobeusedasanEGandAMS
sourceelsewhereintheMOD7.
TheAmpEGisalmostidenticaltoEGs19,withthe
followingexceptions:
Levelscanonlybepositive.
TheAmpEGcannotberesetafterithasenteredits
releasephase.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee81:EG1on
page 370.
369
Program P8: EG 19
TheMOD7hasnineassignableEGs,inadditiontothe TheseEGsaresimilartothoseoftheAL1,butwith
AmpEG.EachofthesecanbeusedasanAMS slightlysimplifiedAMSmodulation,SustainLevel
modulationsourcetocontrolawidevarietyof modulation,andanewparameter:TriggeratNote
parameters. On.
Bydefault,EGs16areassignedtoOutputLevelon
VPMOscillator16,EG7isassignedtoOutputLevel
onthePCMOscillator,andEG8isassignedtoFilterA
Cutoff.
81: EG 1
TheEGs,orEnvelopeGenerators,letyoucreate OffmeansthattheEGwillonlystartwhentriggered
complex,timevaryingchangestoAMSmodulatable viatheselectedAMSsource.Thisisusefulfordelayed
parameters.Thecontrolsonthispagespecifytheshape EGs,ortriggeredeffectssuchasthosedescribedbelow.
oftheEG.Amongotherthings,youcan: Note:evenwhenthisissettoOff,iftheselectedAMS
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsand triggersourceisabovethethresholdatnoteon,then
timesofeachsegment. theEGwilltriggerinstantly.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,for Tip: Multiple Rhythmic Envelopes via the Step
subtlecontroloverthesoundoftheEG.
Sequencer
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes. 1. SetupseveralEGswithTriggeratNoteOnsetto
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestart Off,andthetriggerAMSsourcesettotheper
theEG. voiceStepSequencer.
Onethingthatyoucantdoonthispageistocontrol 2. SeteachEGtouseadifferentthresholdvalue,so
howmucheffecttheEGhasontheparametersit thatthefirsttotriggerhasalowthreshold,the
modulates.Todothat.youllneedtoadjusttheAMS nexttotriggerhasaslightlyhigherthreshold,and
intensitiesonthepagesfortheindividualparameters. soon.
YoucanthenusetheStepSequencertotriggereachEG
ataspecifiedtime,syncedtotempo.Forcomplex
81a: EG Reset
rhythmicvariations,youcanthenlooptheStep
AMS [List of AMS Sources] Sequencer,modulateitsstartpoint,andresettheStep
SequencerfromanotherAMSsource.
point.Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFO Tip: Multiple Rhythmic Envelopes via LFOs
1. SetupseveralEGswithTriggeratNoteOnsetto
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe
Off,andthetriggerAMSsourcesettooneormore
EGtostart.
LFOs.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation 2. SettheLFO(s)tosynctotempo,withalargenote
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. value(suchasawholenote).
Threshold [99+99] ByusingacoupleofLFOsatdifferentfrequencies,you
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset. cansetupcomplex,essentiallynonrepeatingpatterns.
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjustthe 3. SettheLFOwaveform(s)toTriangle.
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe 4. Usingthesametrickasabove,settheEGs
reset,effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstother thresholdstodifferentlevels.
rhythmiceffects.
Youcouldalsousethismethodwithnontempo
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen syncedLFOsandslowEGs,tocreategentle,evolving
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.When sounds.
consistently.
Trigger at Note-On [Check-box]

OnmeansthattheEGwillstartautomaticallyatnote
on.Thisisthedefault.
370
Program P8: EG 19 81: EG 1
81b: Envelope EG Value Actual Time

90 10.9 seconds
EG
99 87.3 seconds
Level
Level Level
Attack [0099]
Start Release
Level Level ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStart
Change to
Parameter
Value Time Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas
Time Time Time Time
Envelopescreateamodulationsignalbymovingfrom Decay [0099]
oneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,andthen
movingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodoftime, ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevel
andsoon. totheBreaklevel.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfivelevels,the Slope [0099]

amountoftimeittakestogofromeachofthelevelsto ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe
thenext,andtheshape(fromlineartocurved)ofeach BreakleveltotheSustainlevel.Onceitreachesthe
transition. Sustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff
(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
Level
Eachofthefivelevelscanbeeitherpositiveor Release [0099]
negative. ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe
Positivelevelswillmakethecutofffrequency(orother
Curve
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
Start [99+99] manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraight
ThissetstheinitialEGlevel,atnoteon. lines.Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelyto
bemadeoutofcurves.
Attack [99+99]
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchange
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime. quicklyatfirst,andthenslowdownasitapproaches
Break [99+99]
linearsegments.
theDecaytime. Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurved
Sustain [99+99] vintagesynths,however,andletsyoucontrolthe
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit amountofcurvatureseparatelyforeachofthefour
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntil envelopesegments.
noteoff,unlessitisresetviaAMS. Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremain
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto
Release [99+99] soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime. thebeginning.
Time Different curve settings for up and down

Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow: Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare
EG Value Actual Time whichgodown.
00 0.667 ms Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
10 10 ms upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
20 44 ms suchasDecayandRelease.
30 104 ms
40 224 ms
50 464 ms
60 944 ms
70 1.8 seconds
80 3.8 seconds
371
EGCurve Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecay
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveassignedthe
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log) CommonLFOtomodulateBreakLevel.TheLFOmay
bemovingallthetime,buttheBreakLevelisonly
affectedbytheLFOsvalueattheinstantthatthe
Decaysegmentstarts.Afterthat,thelevelisfixed.
Finally,thisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,
Attacklevel,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthat
arealreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenresetvia
AMS.
Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
81c: Level Modulation Break [99+99]
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontrolthe ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,Break, modulationfortheBreaklevel.
andSustainlevelsshareasingleAMSsource,buteach
hasitsownmodulationintensity. Sustain [99+99]
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthefourlevels, ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
youcancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestothe modulationfortheSustainlevel.
EGLevelModulation 81d: Time Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontrolthe
TimeparametersoftheEG.TheAttack,Decay,Slope,
andReleasetimesshareasingleAMSsource,buteach
hasitsownmodulationintensity.
EGTimeModulation
Attack, and Break AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value
Attack=+, Decay=+, Attack=+, Decay=+, Attack=, Decay=,

Negative AMS on Start, Positive AMS on Start and Break, Softly played note. Stongly played note. Stongly played note.
Attack, and Break Negative AMS on Attack Original Shape Times are longer. Times are shorter.
Reaches Sustainmore Reaches Sustainmore
slowly. quickly.
Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulated
OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo AMS [List of AMS Sources]
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This SelectstheAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevel parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbe
reachedattheendofthesegment. usefulhere,forinstance.
372
Program P8: EG 19 82: EG 2
Attack [99+99] Release [99+99]

modulationfortheAttacktime. modulationfortheReleasetime.
instance,whenVelocityisat128asettingof+8will t 81: Page Menu Commands
makethesegmenttimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
settingof8willcutthesegmenttimealmostinhalf. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
commandsonpage 142.
athighervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Decay [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Slope [99+99] CopyEnvelopeonpage 216.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS 3:SwapEnvelope.Formoreinformation,see
modulationfortheSlopetime. SwapEnvelopeonpage 216.
82: EG 2
83: EG 3
84: EG 4
85: EG 5
86: EG 6
87: EG 7
88: EG 8
89: EG 9
TheMOD7sEGs2through9areidenticaltoEG1.For
detailedexplanations,pleasesee81:EG1on
page 370.
373
Program P9: Step Sequencer, LFO 1-4, and AMS Mixers

TheMOD7hasonepervoiceStepSequencerandfour TherearealsoeightAMSMixers:fourfullfunctioned,
assignableLFOs,inadditiontotheEXiPrograms andanotherfourwhichsupportonlytheA+BandAmt
CommonLFOandCommonStepSequencer.Eachof AxBMixerTypes.
thesecanbeusedasanAMSmodulationsourceto
controlawidevarietyofparameters.
91: Step Sequencer

TheMOD7sStepSequenceridenticaltothatofthe
AL1.Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee81:Step
Sequencer,onpage 207.
92: LFO 1
93: LFO 2
94: LFO 3
95: LFO 4
TheMOD7sLFOs1,2,3,and4areidenticaltothose
oftheAL1.Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee82:
LFO1,onpage 209.
96: AMS Mixers 1-2
97: AMS Mixers 3-4

TheMOD7sAMSMixers1through4areidenticalto
thoseoftheAL1.Fordetailedexplanations,pleasesee
91:AMSMixer,onpage 213.
98: AMS Mixers 5-6
99: AMS Mixers 7-8

TheMOD7sAMSMixersfivethrough8aresimilarto
thoseoftheAL1,butsupportonlytheA+BandAmt
AxBMixerTypes.Fordetailedexplanations,please
see91:AMSMixer,onpage 213.
374
MOD-7: Tone Adjust Common Tone Adjust parameters
MOD-7: Tone Adjust

MOD7ToneAdjustDefaultSettings
Filter A Filter B
VPM Osc 1-6 Ratio Cutoff Cutoff
Switches 1-6:
VPM Osc 1-6 Switches 7 & 8:
On/Off LFOs 1 & 2 Stop
Switches 9 & 10:

PCM On & Reverse
VPM Osc 1-6 Output Level

Macro Macro Macro
Brightness Timbre Feedback
ToneAdjustprovidesanelegantphysicalinterfaceto
theMOD7sparameters.Mostofthefactorysounds MOD-7 Tone Adjust parameters
usethedefaultlayout,asshownabove.Youcanalso InadditiontotheCommonToneAdjustparameters
customizethelayoutforindividualsounds,ifdesired. listedabove,theMOD7addsanumberofitsown
FormoreinformationaboutToneAdjust,pleasesee parameters.
09f:ToneAdjust,onpage 26. Notethattheseadditionalparametersareseparatefor
eachEXi,asopposedtobeingsharedbybothEXiinthe
Program.
Common Tone Adjust parameters
Alloftheadditionalparametersarelistedbelow.Tone
Exceptasnotedbelow,theCommonToneAdjust Adjustparametersmayaffecttheinternalparameters
parametersbehaveasdescribedunderCommonTone inoneoftwoways:theymaybeRelative,inwhich
AdjustParameters,onpage 28. casetheyscaletheexistingparametervalue,or
Filter/AmpEGAttackTime. Absolute,inwhichcasetheyoverwritetheexisting
(99+99,CC#73) value.Unlessotherwisenoted,alloftheMOD7
ThisscalestheattacktimeofEG8andtheAmpEG.It parametersareAbsolute.
interactswithCC#73. Thefullnameofthecurrentlyselectedparameteris
Filter/AmpEGDecayTime. showninthestatuslineatthetopoftheControl
(99+99,CC#75) Surfacepage,aswellasinthepopupmenu.Some
ThisscalesthedecaytimeofEG8andtheAmpEG.It parameterswithlongernamesmayshowan
interactswithCC#75. abbreviationfortheslider,knob,andswitchlabels.
Filter/AmpEGSustainLevel. Macro Parameters

(99+99,CC#70) Brightness
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsofEG8andtheAmpEG.
ItinteractswithCC#70. BrightnessVelSens
Filter/AmpEGReleaseTime. Timbre
(99+99,CC#72) Feedback
ThisscalesthereleasetimeofEG8andtheAmpEG.It
Detune
interactswithCC#72.
FilterEGAttackTime,DecayTime,SustainLevel, Noise
andReleaseTimeapplytoEG8. Saturation
PitchEGAttackTime,DecayTime,SustainLevel, FilterFreq
andReleaseTimearenotsupportedbytheMOD7.
375
PCM Oscillator Drive

On/off OutputLevel
MSSelect Filters A and B
MSBank Type
MSMin Cutoff
MSMax Resonance
StartOffset EGInt
Reverse LFOInt
Transpose
LFOs
Tune
VPM Oscillators 16 LFOparameters,theMOD7addsthefollowing
separatecontrols:
On/off
LFO1through4Waveform
Mode
LFO3and4Speed
Feedback
Ratio Step Sequencer
Table AttackSmoothing
DecaySmoothing
MOD-7: Page Menu Commands
Copy VPM Oscillator

ThiscommandcopiesalltheparametersofoneVPM
OscillatortoanotherVPMOscillator.Adialogbox
allowsyoutoselectthesourceanddestination
Oscillators,withinthecurrentProgram.
Swap VPM Oscillators

Thiscommandswapsalloftheparametersbetween
twoVPMOscillators,likecopyingeachtotheotherin
asinglestep.Notethatitdoesnotautomaticallycopy
anyPatchPanelconnections;youllneedtodothat
manually,ifnecessary.
Forinstance,letssaythatyouvecreatedacustom
algorithmbitbybit,andyouendupwithtwochainsof
ModulatorsandCarriers:
VPMOsc1>VPMOsc2>VPMOsc6
VPMOsc4>VPMOsc5>VPMOsc3
Tomakethealgorithmeasiertounderstand,youmight
wanttodothefollowing:
1. UsetheSwapVPMOscillatorcommandtoswap
theparametersofVPMOsc3andVPMOsc6.
2. ManuallycorrectthePatchPanelconnectionsto
VPMOsc3and6,asnecessary.
376
Combination mode
Combination P0: Play

ThisisthemainpageofCombinationmode.Among Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile
otherthings,youcan: youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart
Selectcombinations recordingimmediately.Todoso:
EdittheKARMAfunctioninsimpleways 1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe
Makeaudioinputandresamplingsettingsforuse
inCombinationmode
yousure?
Usethecontrolsurface
2. PressOK.
Auto Song Setup YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent beintherecordreadystate.
ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs 3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer
theOASYSinrecordreadymode. andbeginrecording.
01: Program Select/Mixer

01PMC
01a
01b
Thisisthemainpageforselectingandplaying previouslyselectedaparameteronthispage,that
Combinations.YoucanalsosettheProgram,status, parameterwillbeselected.
pan,andvolumeforeachofthe16Timbres. PressitathirdtimetoselectthemainCombination
Tip:WhereveryouareintheCombinationmodepages, nameparameter.
pressingEXITthreetimes(orfewer)willtakeyouback
tothispage,andselecttheCombinationname.Youcan
thenimmediatelyusethenumerickeysor / 01a: Combination Select
switchestoselectadifferentCombination. Bank [INTAINTG, USERAUSERG]
Forinstance,ifyoureonanypageotherthanP0:Play: Thisindicatesthecurrentlyselectedcombinationbank.
Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon PressoneoftheBANKSELECTINTAUSERG
themainP0page,suchasControlSurfaceorProg switchestoselectthedesiredbank.
Select/Mixer.
PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0
pagethemainCombinationPlaypage.Ifyouhad
377
Combination mode
Bank Category Popup Hold Balance Tempo
Combination Select Popup Combination Select Favorite
Eachbankcontainsrewritablecombinationprogram Note:Onthispageonly,theVALUEsliderfunctions
areasfor128combinations(atotalof1,792). asamodulationsourcewhichmeansthatyoucant
useittoselectcombinations.
Bank No. Description
Ifthe01a:CombinationSelectparameteris
INTAC 000127 Preloaded combinations
selected,theBANKSELECTINTAUSERG
INTDG, switcheswillswitchcombinationbanks.
000127 User combinations
USERAG
FromtheBank/CombinationSelectmenuyoucan
viewandselectcombinationsbybank.
Note:PressingoneoftheBANKSELECTINTAUSER
GswitcheswhiletheProgramSelectparameteris FromtheCategory/CombinationSelectmenuyou
selectedinthispagewillchangethetimbreprogram canviewandselectcombinationsbycategory.
bank(ratherthanthecombinationbank). IntheBank/CombinationSelectmenuor
Category/CombinationSelectmenu,youcanuse
Combination Select [000127] theFavoritefunctiontoviewandselect
HereyoucanselectthedesiredCombination. combinationswhoseFavoritesettingison.
To switch combinations Youcanuseafootswitchtoselectcombinations.

Formoreinformation,seetheGlobalparameter
ChooseCombinationSelect,usenumerickeys0
FootSwitchAssignonpage 717.Foralistofthe
9toinputthedesiredcombinationnumber,and
functionsthatcanbeassignedtothefootswitch,see
presstheENTERswitch. FootSwitchAssignmentsonpage 1035.
ChooseCombinationSelectandturntheVALUE YoucantransmitMIDIprogramchangesfroma
dialorusethe / switches. connectedexternalMIDIdevice.
Bank/CombinationSelectmenu
Tab
Scroll bar
Bank/Combination Select Ifthescreencannotdisplayalloftheavailable

1. Pressthepopupbuttonlocatedattheleftof items,usethescrollbar.
CombinationSelecttoaccessthe 4. IfyoucheckFavoriteinthemenu,the
Bank/CombinationSelectmenu. combinationsyoumarkedasFavoriteswillbe
2. Pressoneofthetabsatlefttoselectabank. shown.
3. Selectacombinationfromthelist.Youcandirectly Iftheselectedbankcontainsnocombinationsfor
pressyourchoicewithinthelist,orusethe / whichFavoriteisturnedon,thiscannotbechosen.
switches. 5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancel
buttontocancelyourselection.
378
Combination P0: Play 01: Program Select/Mixer
Category/CombinationSelectmenu
Category tab
Sub-category tab
Scroll bar
Category/Combination Select Favorite [Off, On]

Youcanselectcombinationsbycategoryandsub On(checked):TurnsontheFavoritesettingfor
category.Allcombinationsareorganizedintoupto combinations.Onlycombinationsthatyoumarkedas
eighteencategories,andeachcategoryisfurther favoriteswillbeshownandcanbeselectedinthe
organizedintoeightsubcategories.Youcanusethese Bank/CombinationSelectmenuand
categoriesandsubcategoriestoselectcombinations. Category/CombinationSelectmenu.Ifyoumark
1. PressCategory/CombinationSelecttodisplay frequentlyusedcombinationsasFavorites(i.e.,check
themenu. theFavoritesettingforthosecombinations),itwillbe
easytofindthemlater.
2. Pressatabintheleftmostcolumntoselecta
category.Youcannotchooseacategorytabto NotethatyoumustwritetheCombinationinorderto
whichnocombinationshavebeenassigned. savechangestothissetting.
3. Pressatabinthesecondfromleftcolumntoselect q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
asubcategory.
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
All:Allcombinationsinthecategorywillbeshown. appliestotemposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences,
Choosethiswhenyoudontneedtousesub theVectorEG,EXiStepSequencers,KARMA,and
categories. temposyncedeffects.
07:Thecombinationswillbeshownbysub EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI
category. clocks.YoullseethisiftheGlobalMIDIpageMIDI
Youcannotselectthetabofasubcategorytowhich ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,orifitssetto
nocombinationshavebeenassigned. AutoandtheOASYSiscurrentlyreceivingMIDI
Selectacombinationfromthelist.Youcandirectly clocks.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock
pressyourchoicewithinthelist,orusethe / (MIDIClockSource)onpage 710.
switches. 040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
Iftherearemorecombinationsthancanbeshownin BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousing
thescreen,usethescrollbartoseetheremaining thestandarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsojustturn
combinations. theTEMPOknob,orbyplayingafewquarternoteson
theTAPTEMPObutton.
4. IfyoucheckFavoriteinthemenu,the
combinationsyoumarkedasFavoriteswillbe Hold Balance [Off, On]
shown.
On(checked):Whenanyoneofthevolumeslidersis
Youcannotselectthisifnocombinationsinthe moved,thevolumeoftheothertimbreswillchangeas
selectedcategoryaremarkedasFavorites. well.Thevolumebalanceoftimbres116willbe
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancel maintained.Thisisusefulwhenyouwishtoadjustthe
buttontocancelyourselection. overallvolume.
Note:Thecategoryofeachcombinationcanbe
specifiedintheWriteCombinationdialogbox.
379
Combination mode
All:Allprogramsinthecategorywillbeshown.
01b: Timbre Program Select Choosethisifyoudontneedtoseesubcategories.
07:Theprogramswillbeshownbysubcategory.
Selected Timbre Info
Youcantselectthetabforasubcategoryifno
Thisareashowsinformationonthetimbreselectedfor programsareassignedtothatsubcategory.
editing.T:Timbrenumber/program Selectthedesiredprogramfromthelist.Youcan
bank/number/name,Ch:MIDIchannel/number. directlypressaprograminthelist,orusethe
/ switches.
Select Timbre Info
Timbre No. Iftherearemoreprogramsthancanbeshowninthe
Category screen,usethescrollbartoseetheremaining
programs.
Bank/Program Select
Program Select 4. IfyoucheckFavoriteinthemenu,theprograms
Status youmarkedasFavoriteswillbeshown.
Play/Mute Youcannotselectthisifnoprogramsintheselected
Solo On/Off categoryaremarkedasFavorites.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancel
Pan
Program Select [INTAF, USERAG: 000127

Volume
G, g(1)g(9), g(d): 001128]
Hereyoucanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbre.
Thelowerlinedisplayspartoftheprogramname.
Timbre 01
To switch the program of a timbre
Gray color and [Inactive] warning in Timbre Info ChooseProgramSelect,usenumerickeys09to
inputtheprogramnumber,andpresstheENTER
Normally,thenumbersforunselectedTimbresuse switch.
adarkbluebackground,andalightblue
backgroundhilightstheselectedTimbre. ChooseProgramSelectandturntheVALUEdialor
usethe / switches.
Ifthebackgroundisgray,instead,thismeansthat
themaximumamountofEXiFixedResourceshas IftheProgramSelectparameterisselected,the
beenexceeded,andtheEXiProgramassignedtothe BANKIAUGswitcheswillswitchprogram
Timbrewillbemutedandinactive.Inthiscase,the banks.(IfTimbreProgramSelectisselected,the
SelectedTimbreInfowillalsoshowthewarning BANKswitchLEDoftheprogrambankselectedfor
[Inactive]aftertheProgramsname. thattimbrewilllight.)
Formoreinformationonthissubject,including FromtheBank/ProgramSelectmenuyoucanview
waystogetmoreoutofthesystem,seeCX3& andselectprogramsbybank.
STR1:LimitationsonEXifixedresourceson FromtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuyoucan
page 382. viewandselectprogramsbycategory.
IntheBank/CombinationSelectmenuor
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number) Category/ProgramSelectmenu,youcanusethe
Thisindicatesthetimbrenumber.Beloweachtimbre Favoritefunctiontoviewandselectprograms
numberareshownvariousparameterswhichyoucan whoseFavoritesettingischeck.
editforthattimbre.
YoucantransmitMIDIprogramchangesfroma
Category (Timbre Program) [0017] connectedexternalMIDIdevice.
Hereyoucanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbre WhenyouselectaCombinationontheOASYS,a
byprogramcategoryandsubcategory.Allprograms MIDIprogramchangefortheselectedcombination
areorganizedintouptoeighteencategoriesandeight numberwillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
subcategories. Channel(Global11a).Atthesametime,bank
select,programchange,andvolume(CC#7)
PressthispopupbuttontogettheCategory/Program
messageswillbetransmittedontheMIDIchannel
Selectmenu,thenselectthedesiredcategoryandsub
specifiedforeachtimbrewhoseStatus(01b,21a)
category,andfinallyselectthedesiredprogram.
issettoEXTorEX2.However,thesemessageswill
Category/Program Select notbetransmittedfortimbresthataresettothe
sameMIDIchannelastheglobalMIDIchannel.In
1. PressCategorytogettheCategory/Program
thiscase,EX2timbreswillshowtheProgram
Selectmenu.
Bankas,andwilltransmitthebanknumberthat
2. Pressatabintheleftmostcolumntoselecta wasspecifiedinBankSelect(21a).
category.Youcantselectthetabforacategoryif
WhenyouplayontheOASYSkeyboardand
noprogramsareassignedtothatcategory.
controllers,MIDImessagesaretransmittedonthe
3. Pressatabinthesecondfromleftcolumntoselect globalMIDIchannel.Atthesametime,timbres
asubcategory. whoseStatusissettoEXTorEX2willtransmitthe
samemessagesontheirownMIDIchannel.
380
Combination P0: Play 01: Program Select/Mixer
Ifbankselectandprogramchangemessagesare EX2:UsethistoplayanexternalMIDIdevice,with
receivedonaMIDIchannelthatmatchestheMIDI customsetBankSelectviatheBankSelectLSBand
channelofatimbrewhoseStatusisINT,the MSBparameters,ontheMIDItaboftheTimbre
programofthattimbrewillchange.Howeverifthe Parameterspage.Inallotherways,thisisthesameas
MIDIchanneloftheincomingmessagematchesthe EXT.
globalMIDIchannelMIDIChannel,thenthe Formoreinformation,seeBankSelectMSB(When
combinationwillchange. Status=EX2)onpage 415.
Ifyoudonotwantthecombinationtochange,you
caneitherchangetheglobalMIDIchannelsothatit INT
MIDI IN
doesnotmatchthechannelonwhichtheprogram
changemessagesarebeingreceived,oryoucan Tone
generator
uncheckCombinationChange(Global11c).You
canalsouncheckBankChangesothatonlythe
EXT, EX2
programnumberwillchangeandthebankwill
remainthesame.
MIDI OUT
Ifyouwishtochangetheprogramassignedto
certaintimbreswithoutchangingthecombination,
youcanalsosetEnableProgramChange(31a)so
thattheprogramwillchangeoncertaintimbresbut Using the control surface to make timbre settings
notonothers. Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoeditthemix
Bank/Program Select parametersforeachTimbre,includingPLAY/MUTE,
SoloOn/Off,Pan,Volume,FXsends,andEQ.These
1. PressthepopupbuttonattheleftofProgram canalsobecontrolledfromthemixersectionofthe
SelecttogettheBank/ProgramSelectmenu. frontpanel,orfromtheP0ControlSurfacepageof
2. Pressthelefttabtoselectabank. theLCDscreen.
3. Choosethedesiredprogramfromthelist.Youcan Formoreinformation,seeAdjustingthemixon
directlypressaprograminthelist,orusethe page 76oftheOperationGuide.
/ switches.
Iftherearemoreprogramsthancanbeshowninthe Play/Mute [Mute, Play]
screen,usethescrollbuttonstoseetheremaining Thissettingmutesatimbre.Thesettingwillalternate
programs. eachtimeyoupressthePlay/Mutebutton.
4. IfyoucheckFavorite,onlytheprogramsyou Mute:Thetimbrewillnotsound.
markedasFavoriteswillbeshown. Play:Thetimbrewillsound.
Youcannotselectthisifnoprogramsintheselected
bankaremarkedasFavorites.
parameter.(Usingthecontrolsurfacetomaketimbre
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancel settingsonpage 381)
Solo On/Off [On, Off]
Status [Off, INT, EXT, EX2]
ThissettingswitchestheSolofunctionon/off.
ThissetswhethertheTimbrecontrolstheinternal
OnlytimbresthataresettoSoloOnwillbeheard.
sounds,orexternalMIDIdevices.
Othertimbres(andaudioinputs:08a)willbemuted.
WhencontrollingexternalMIDIdevices,italsoallows
ThesettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupresstheSolo
youtochoosebetweenusingtheinternalBankSelect
button.
numbers(assetbythefrontpanelbuttons),orusing
customBankSelectsettingstomatchtheexternal TimbresthathavebeensilencedbytheMuteorSolo
device. functionswillnottransmitnoteon/offmessageson
theMIDIchannelassignedfortheirtrackwhenthe
Off:UsethistodisabletheTimbre.Withthissetting,
timbresStatus(21a)isBTH,EXT,orEX2.
theTimbresProgramwillnotsound,andMIDIdata
willnotbetransmitted.Also,anyEXifixedresources TheSolofunctionoperatesdifferentlydependingon
usedbytheProgramwillbefreed. thesettingoftheExclusiveSolopagemenucommand.
IfExclusiveSoloisoff,youcanturnSoloonformore
INT:UsethistomaketheTimbreplayinternalsounds.
thanonetimbre.
Withthissetting,theTimbresProgramwillrespondto
IfExclusiveSoloison,pressingaSolobuttonwillturn
boththelocalkeyboardandMIDIinputonthe
Soloonforonlythattimbre.
TimbresMIDIchannel.TheTimbrewillnottransmit
MIDIdata. Solosettingsarenotpreservedwhenyouwritea
combination.
EXT:UsethistoplayanexternalMIDIdevice,with
BankSelectviathefrontpanelBankbuttons.Withthis Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
setting,theTimbresProgramwillnotrespondto parameter.(Usingthecontrolsurfacetomaketimbre
eitherthelocalkeyboardorMIDIinput.MIDIwillbe settingsonpage 381)
transmittedtoexternaldevicesontheselectedMIDI
channel. Pan [RND, L001C064R127]
Thisspecifiesthepanofeachtimbre.
381
Combination mode
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftand Timbre 0216 (Timbre Number)

R127isfarright.AsettingofC064willreproducethe
pansettingoftheProgrammode. Hereyoucanspecifytheprogrametc.foreachTimbre
2through16.ThesesettingsarethesameasforTimbre
OSC1/EXi1 OSC2/EXi2 OSC1/EXi1: OSC1/EXi1 OSC2/EXi2 OSC1/EXi1: 1,asdescribedabove.
Amp1 Pan=L001 Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2/EXi2: OSC2/EXi2:
Left Center Right Amp2 Pan=R127 Left Center Right Amp2 Pan=R096
Pan (CC#10) Pan (CC#10)

CX-3 & STR-1: Limitations on EXi fixed
resources
C064 C064
L032 L032
L001 L001
OASYSprocessingpowerissharedbetween
R096 R096
synthesizervoicesandeffects.
R127 R127
Left Center Right Left Center Right

Synthesizervoicestypicallyusedynamicresource
allocation,sothattheyonlyuseprocessingpower
OSC1/EXi1 OSC2/EXi2 OSC1/EXi1:
whennotesarebeingplayed.Effects,ontheother
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2/EXi2:
hand,usefixedallocation;onceyoucallupaneffectin
Left Center Right Amp2 Pan=C064
anIFX,MFX,orTFXslot,italwaysusesprocessing
Pan (CC#10)
power,whetherornotanyaudioispassingthroughit.
C064
L032
EXi with fixed resources
L001
TheHD1iscompletelydynamic,asaresomeEXi
R096
instruments,suchastheAL1.OthersEXimayusea
R127
Left Center Right

combinationoffixedanddynamicallocation.
Forinstance,theCX3includesfixedelementssuchas
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumake thebuiltinrotaryspeaker,amp,andvibratochorus
herewillbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan(CC#8) alongwithdynamicallyallocatedindividualvoices.
parameterinP8InsertFXpagewilladjustthe Thesefixedelementstakeupareasonableamountof
panningofthesoundaftertheinserteffect(Mixeron processingpower,whileeachadditionalvoiceuses
page 804). onlyasmallamountmore.
RND:Theoscillatorpanwillchangerandomlyateach TheSTR1usesamuchsmalleramountoffixed
noteon. resourcesforitsmodeledfeedbackaboutasmuch
Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis processingpowerasasingleSTR1voice.
parameter.(Usingthecontrolsurfacetomaketimbre Limits on usage of fixed resources
settingsonpage 381)
WhenyouloadanEXiwhichusesfixedresources,the
IfStatus(21a)issettoINT,CC#10(pan)messages fixedelementsstartusingprocessingpower
canbereceivedtocontrolthesetting.CC#10values immediately.Thismeansthat,aswitheffects,youcan
of0or1willplacethesoundatfarleft,64atcenter, onlyloadsomanyofthemintoasingleCombination
and127atfarright.(excludeRND)Pancanbe orSong.
controlledbymessagesreceivedontheMIDI
Channel(21a). Toleaveroomfordynamicvoicesandeffects,OASYS
limitsthesefixedelementstoalittleover35%ofthe
Volume [000127] totalprocessingpower.Whenthislimitisreached,the
Adjuststhevolumeofeachtimbre116. systemwontletyouloadanymoreEXiwithfixed
elements.Youllstillbeabletoaddeffects,andload
Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis otherHD1andEXiPrograms.
parameter.(Usingthecontrolsurfacetomaketimbre
settingsonpage 381) Forinstance,youcanuseuptofourCX3s
simultaneously,orsixteenSTR1ssimultaneously,ora
Thevolumeofeachtimbreisdeterminedby combinationofthetwo(e.g.,twoCX3sandeightSTR
multiplyingthisvolumevaluewiththeMIDI 1s).ForinformationonotherEXi,seetheir
volume(CC#7)andexpression(CC#11). documentation.
IfStatus(01b,21a)hasbeensettoINT,incoming EachEXiineachProgramcountstowardsthe
MIDICC#7orCC#11messageswillcontrolthe maximum.Forinstance,aProgramwhichusestwo
volumeofatimbre.(Howeverthesemessageswill CX3scountsastwo,notasone.
notaffectthesettingofthisparameter.)
YoucanseethecurrentamountofEXifixedprocessing
IfStatusisEXTorEX2,thevalueofthisparameter intheeffectsresourcemeter,shownatthetopofthe
willbetransmittedasMIDICC#7whenthe IFXInsertEffectsandTrackViewtabs,aswellasthe
combinationischanged.Howeverthiswillnotbe MFXRoutingtab.Formoreinformation,seeAbout
transmittedbyatimbrethatissettothesameMIDI effectsresourcesonpage 787.
channelastheglobalMIDIchannel.Thismessageis
transmittedontheMIDIChannel(21a)specified
foreachtimbre.
382
Combination P0: Play 06: KARMA GE
Gray Timbre/Track number, and [Inactive] shown ThesesamestepswillworkwithTracksinSequencer

after Program name mode.
IfyouvealreadyloadedProgramswhichusethe Use Program Changes to optimize resource usage
maximumamountofEXifixedresources,andthen
IfyoureusingOASYSformultitimbralsequencing
loadadditionalProgramswhichrequirefixed
(withdifferentProgramsondifferentMIDIchannels),
resources,thenewlyaddedProgramswillnotsound.
youcanoptimizetheEXifixedresourceusagebyonly
Toletyouknowthatthishashappened,the havingtheseProgramsloadedwhentheyareneeded.
Timbre/Tracknumber(atthetopofthemixerchannel)
Forinstance,ifyoureplayingaCX3onlyduringthe
willturngray,andtheSelectedTimbre/TrackInfowill
chorusofasong,youcanuseProgramChangeto
showthewarning[Inactive]aftertheProgramname.
switchthatchanneltoanHD1orAL1Program
YoucanreenableaninactiveProgrambyremovingor duringtheverse.
disablingotherProgramswhichuseEXifixed
NeithertheHD1northeAL1usesfixedresources,so
resources.Forinstance:
thiswillfreeupOASYScomputingpower.Youcan
1. StartwithanemptyCombination. thenusethispowerformorevoicesofothersounds,or
2. LoadProgramUSERF000FelixsDaKatinto forotherEXiwithfixedresourcesondifferentTimbres
Timbre1through4. orTracks.
ThisProgramusesasingleCX3,soloadingitintofour
separateTimbresusesupalloftheavailableEXifixed t 01: Page Menu Commands
resources.
3. LoadthesameProgramintoTimbre5.
SincetherearenoremainingEXifixedresources,the shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Timbrenumberwillturngray,andtheProgramwont commandsonpage 142.
makeanysound.Letsfixthat:
0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
4. SetTimbre1sStatustoOff WriteCombinationonpage 461.
or
ChangeTimbre1touseanHD1orAL1Program
(suchasINTA000),insteadofaCX3.
ThisfreesuptheEXifixedresourcesformerlyusedby 1:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
Timbre1;Timbre5willthenreturntoitsnormalcolor, CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
anditsProgramwillmakesoundagain.
06: KARMA GE
06PMC
06a
06b
06c
06d
ThispagegivesyouanoverviewofthefourKARMA FormoredetailededitingofKARMAparameters,see
Modules(AD),andletsyoumakebasicadjustments. CombinationP7:KARMAonpage 430.
383
Combination mode
ThesettingsoftheKARMAON/OFFandLATCH GE Select [Preset 0000...2047, USER-A U-

switches,KARMASCENES18switches,KARMA A000...U-A127, ..., USER-L U-L000...U-L127]
SLIDERS18,andKARMASWITCHES18aresaved
ThisselectstheGEfortheKARMAmodule.Thereare
independentlyforeachCombination.
atotalof3,584tochoosefrom:2,048presetGEs,and
1,536rewritableUserGEs(12banksof128each).
06a: Combination Select, Load GE PresetGEsarepartofthesystemsoftware.
Options, KARMA T.Sig, Tempo UserGEsmaybeincludedwithnewbanksofsounds,
andcanalsobecreatedusingKARMAOASYS
software(dedicatedsoftwarefortheOASYS*).For
Combination [0127] moreinformationonloadingUserGEs,seeLoad
.KGEonpage 773.
Thesearethebank,number,andnameofthecurrent
Combination.Formoreinformation,see01a: *MadebyKarmaLab(http://www.karmalab.com).
CombinationSelectonpage 377. MacintoshandWindowsaresupported.English
versiononly.
GE Bank Select [Preset...USER-L]
Formoreinformation,seeLoadGEOptionson
page 7. ThisselectstheGEbank.ThePresetbankispartofthe
systemsoftware;Userbankscanbeloadedfromdisk.
KARMA T.Sig (KARMA Time Signature) Formoreinformation,seeGESelect,above.
[GE,/TS, 1/416/4, 1/816/8, 1/1616/16]
GE Category Select [ArpeggioReal-Time]
PleaseseeKARMAT.Sig(TimeSignature)onpage 8.
ThisletsyouselectaGEbycategory,fromArpeggio
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] throughRealTime.
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
appliestotemposyncedLFOs,WaveSequences,and B, C, D (Module B, C, D)
VectorEGs,EXiStepSequencers,KARMA,andtempo HereyoucanmakesettingsforModulesBthroughD.
syncedeffects. ThesesettingsarethesameasforModuleA.SeeA
EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI (ModuleA).
clocks.Formoreinformation,seeTempoon
page 379. Selected KARMA Module Info
040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin ThisdisplaysinformationfortheKARMAModule
BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy. specifiedbytheModuleControlSetting.
GE Number & Name [A:0000(PRE):24 characters]

06b: GE Select ThisdisplaystheGEnumberandfullGEnameforthe
ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA specifiedKARMAModule.IfyouselecttheGE
ModulearegeneratedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect). Selectparameter(seeGESelectonpage 384)for
Basedoninputnotedatafromthekeyboard,theGE anotherModule,itwilldisplaytheGEnumber&name
createsphrasesandpatternsusingnumerousinternal forthatModule,untiltheModuleControlSettingis
parametersettingstocontrolthedevelopmentofthe changed.
notedata,therhythm,thechordstructure,thevelocity RTC Model [List of RTC Models]
etc.MIDIcontrolchangesandpitchbendetc.canalso
begeneratedinsynchronizationwiththephraseor ThisshowstheGEsRTCModel,asspecifiedinternally
pattern.Inthiswayyoucanproducephrasesand foreachpresetGE.
patternsinwhichtheGEfreelyvariesthetoneorpitch. RTCstandsforRealTimeControl.RTCmodels
providealevelofstandardizationforcontrollingthe
A (Module A) over200internalparametersofaGE.Formore
information,seeLoadGEOptionsonpage 7.
Run [Off, On]
TurnsontheselectedModule(s).Whenoff,theModule Chord [Chord name]
(s)maystillplaying,buttheyaremuted.Inthiscase, Thisshowsthenameofthechorddetectedforthe
turningRunonallowstheModuletoresumeplayback KARMAModulespecifiedbytheModuleControl
fromitspresentlocation.TheRunsettingsarestored setting.IfMMasterisselected,thechordforthelast
withthecombination. oftheModulesinoperationwillbedisplayed.(Inother
words,ifModulesA,BandCarerunning,thechord
Solo [Off, On] forModuleCwillbedisplayed.)
SolostheselectedModule(s),eveniftheirRun Note:Chorddetectionisaffectedbythekeyzone
button(s)areOff(unchecked).Thissettingwillbe (Combination71b)andTranspose(Combination7
clearedwhenyoureselectthecombination. 3b:ModuleParameterControl)ofeachKARMA
Itwillnotberememberedwhenyouwritethe Module,andbytheDynamicMIDIDestination
combination. (Combination78)ChordScanandSmartScan
settings.
384
Combination P0: Play 06: KARMA GE
KARMA Value Module CCs/Notes and Scan Zones

WhenyoumoveorpressaKARMASLIDERor
SWITCH,thisareashowsthenumberandvalueofthe CCs/Notes AD
GERealTimeParametersorPerfRealTime Thesearerealtimedisplaysofthenotesand/orCC
Parametersassignedtothecontrol.Thisletsyousee messagesgeneratedbyeachoftheKARMAModules.
whichparametersarebeingcontrolledbytheslideror
switch,andhow. Scan Zone
ThekeyzonesettingsoftheKARMAModulesare
Displayexample
displayedassolidbluelinesunderthenotesdisplay.
Formoreinformation,seeBottom(KeyZone
Bottom)onpage 431.
Scene
Module ID Parameter Value

Parameter No.
Module ID [A, B, C, D, P] Module CCs Notes Scan Zone
Thisshowsthetypeofparameterassignedtotheslider
orswitch,andthemoduletowhichitbelongs.
A,B,C,D:ThecontrolisassignedtoaGERealTime
06d: Realtime Controls
ParameterfromtheindicatedKARMAModule. Thisdisplaysthevalues,names,andstoredsettingsof
P:ThecontrolisassignedtoaPerfRealTime KARMASLIDERS18andKARMASWITCHES18.
Parameter. NotethateachScenecanhaveseparatevaluesand
storedsettingsforeachoftheslidersandswitches.
Parameter No. [0132]
WhenModuleIDisA,B,C,orD,thisshowsthe
KARMA SWITCHES 18
numberoftheassignedGERealTimeParameter Current Value 18
(0132).Theseparametersareassignedtocontrolson
the75:GERealTimeParameterspage. ThisshowsthecurrentsettingoftheKARMA
SWITCH.Youcancontrolthiseitherbyusingthe
IfModuleIDisP,thisshowsthenumberofthe physicalfrontpanelswitch,orbytouchingtheon
assignedPerfRealTimeParameter(0108).These screenswitch.
parametersareassignedtocontrolsonthe76:Perf
RealTimeParameterspage. Stored Value 18
ThisshowsstoredvalueoftheKARMASWITCHfor
Parameter Value
ThisareashowsthecurrentvalueoftheGERealTime
ParameterorPerfRealTimeParameter.Thiswill Control Timbre Category 18
changeasyoumovetheslideroroperatetheswitch. ThisshowsthecategoryoftheProgram(s)being
Asliderorswitchcanhavemultipleparameters playedbytheswitchsKARMAmodule.Forinstance,
assignedtoit.Amaximumoffourassigned iftheKARMAmoduleisplayingadrumpattern,this
parameterscanbedisplayedhereintheavailable wouldshowDrums.
space.Iftherearemore,theywillnotbedisplayed IfthemoduleisplayingmultipleProgramsofdifferent
(buta>willbeaddedtotheendoftheline).They categories,thiswillshowMulti.
willstillfunctionwhenthecontrolisactivated,but
youcannotviewtheirvaluesdirectly. Name 18
ThisshowsthenameoftheKARMASWITCH.Youcan
06c: Note/CC Activity assignthisnameinProgram79:Name/Map.
S (Scene) [18] KARMA SLIDERS 18

Thebluesquareintheupperleftofthesectionshows Current Value 18
thecurrentsceneoftheselectedKARMAmodule.
ThisshowsthecurrentsettingoftheKARMASLIDER.
ThenumberinparenthesesisthedefaultScene,as
storedintheCombination. Youcanchangethiseitherbyusingthephysicalfront
panelslider,orbytouchingtheonscreensliderand
Module [M, AD] thenusinganyofthedataentrycontrols.
TheselabelsidentifytheCCandnoteinformation Stored Value 18
showntotheirright.
ThisshowsstoredvalueoftheKARMASLIDERfor
Theyalsoworkasmoduleselectbuttons,duplicating thecurrentScene,aswrittenintotheCombination.
functionofthefrontpanelMODULECONTROL
button.Toselectamodule,justtouchitslabel;the
selectedmoduleisshowninred.
385
Combination mode
Control Timbre Category 18 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see

ThisshowsthecategoryoftheProgram(s)being ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
playedbytheslidersKARMAmodule.Forinstance,if 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
theKARMAmoduleisplayingadrumpattern,this CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
wouldshowDrums. 3:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
IfthemoduleisplayingmultipleProgramsofdifferent seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464.
categories,thiswillshowMulti. 4:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
Name 18 information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
page 465.
ThisshowsthenameoftheKARMASLIDER.Youcan
assignthisnameinProgram79:Name/Map. 5:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 151.
6:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
t 06: Page Menu Commands Sceneonpage 151.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 7:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
commandsonpage 142. 8:AutoAssignKARMARTCName.Formore
information,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC
0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see Nameonpage 465.
WriteCombinationonpage 461.

07PMC
07a
07b
07c
Hereyoucanviewthefunctionthatisassignedtothe q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]

vectorjoystick,SW1and2,andknobs58,andview ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
informationabouttheeffects.Youcanalsoadjustthe appliestotemposyncedLFOs,WaveSequences,and
FXBalance. VectorEGs,EXiStepSequencers,KARMA,andtempo
syncedeffects.
07a: Combination Select EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI
clocks.Formoreinformation,seeTempoon
Bank [INTAINTG, USERAUSERG] page 379.
Combination [000127] 040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
Thesearethebank,number,andnameofthecurrent BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.
Combination.Formoreinformation,see01a:
CombinationSelectonpage 377.
386
Combination P0: Play 08: Audio Input/Sampling
MFX:ThiscontrolstheMFX1and2Return.Asetting
07b: Assignment View of+10is127,asettingof+0leavesthesettingsofthe
combinationunmodified,andasettingof10is000.
VJS
TFX:ThiscontrolstheWet/DrybalanceofTFX1and
Thisareashowsinformationaboutthevectorjoystick. 2.Asettingof+10isWetorWet,asettingof+0leaves
XMode,YMode:Theseindicatethebehaviorofthe thesettingsofthecombinationunmodified,anda
vectorCCfortheXaxisandYaxis. settingof10isDry.
VJS+X,VJSX,VJS+Y,VJSY:Theseindicatethe Whenyoueditthesesettings,thechangewilloccur
controllertransmittedbythe+X,X,+Y,andY immediatelyinthesound,butthevaluesofthe
vectors. originalcombinationparameterswillnotchange
(See16a:VectorCCControlonpage 406) untilyousavethecombination.Whenyousavethe
combination,thevalueswillbeupdatedandthese
SW1, SW2, Knob58 sliderswillberesetto0.
SW1,SW2:Theseindicatethefunctionsassignedto
SW1and2. t 07: Page Menu Commands
Knob58:Theseindicatethefunctionsassignedto ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
knobs58.Formoreinformation,see18:SetUp numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Controllersonpage 412. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
07c: Effects 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
IFX112,MFX1,2,TFX1,2:Thisareaindicatesthe
effectassignedtoeachinserteffect,mastereffect,and 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
totaleffect,anditson/offstatus. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
FX Balance CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
IFX:ThiscontrolstheWet/Drybalanceofallinsert
effects.Asettingof+10isWetorWet,asettingof+0
leavesthesettingsofthecombinationunmodified,and
asettingof10isDry.

08PMC
07a
08b
08a
08c
08d
Thispageletsyouadjustthesettingsfortheanalog
anddigitalaudioinputs,andthesamplingrelated
settingsforCombinationmode.
387
Combination mode
Youcansampleincomingaudiosignalsorresample Recording Level [Inf, 72.0 +0.0 +18.0]

internalOASYSsounds,includingKARMAandreal TheRecordingLevelsettingappliestoallof
timeperformances.TheOASYScanalsobeusedasa6 Combinationmode,andisnotsavedwithindividual
in,10outeffectprocessor. Combis.
Forexample,youcan:
Playanguitarthroughanaudioinput,while 08c: Sampling Setup
listeningtoaKARMAphraseandsampleonlythe
guitarinput,withoutanyoftheKARMAsounds. Hereyoucanselectthesourcetobesampled,andthe
methodbywhichtoinitiatesampling.
Playaguitarasabove,butsampleboththeguitar
andtheKARMAphrasetogether. Source Bus [L/R, REC1/23/4, Audio
SampleyourselfwhileplayingOASYSsoundsin Input1/23/4, S/P DIF L/R,
realtime,includingcontrollermovements, Indiv.1/27/8]
KARMA,effects,etc.
Source Direct Solo [Off, On]
Using the control surface to adjust Audio Inputs
Trigger [Sampling START SW, Note On]
YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjusttheAudio
InputSend1(toMFX1),Send2(toMFX2), Metronome Precount [Off, 4, 8, 3, 6]
PLAY/MUTE,SoloOn/Off,Pan,andLevel.
Save to [RAM, DISK]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee09c:AudioInputs
onpage 22. Mode (Sample Mode) [L-Mono, R-Mono, Stereo]
ThecontrolsurfacewillcontroltheGlobalmode
settingsifUseGlobalSettingisOn(checked).
Sample Time [min sec]
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode
P0AudioInput/Sampling.Formoreinformation,
08a: Audio Input pleasesee08c:SamplingSetuponpage 15.
Theseparameterscontrolthelevel,pan,play/muteand TheSamplingSetupsettingsapplytoallof
solostatus,sendlevels,andbusassignmentsforeach Combinationmode,andarenotsavedwithindividual
oftheanaloganddigitalinputs.Formoreinformation, Combinations.
see08a:AudioInputonpage 12.
Use Global setting [Off, On] 08d: Metronome Setup

EachCombinationcaneitherusethesingle,Global Hereyoucanspecifytheoutputdestinationand
audioinputmixersetup,orhaveitsowncustom volumeofthemetronomesoundthatisheardwhen
settings.Formoreinformation,seeUseGlobal youbeginsampling.Themetronomeisvalidonlyif
settingonpage 12. TriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW.
Input1, Input2, Input3, Input4 Bus (Output) Select [L/R, L, R, 18]
S/P DIF L, S/P DIF R Level [000127]

TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.) [L/R, IFX112, 18, Formoreinformation,pleasesee08d:Metronome
1/27/8, Off] Setuponpage 388.
FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2]
REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4]
Send1 (to MFX1) [000127] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Send2 (to MFX2) [000127] commandsonpage 142.
PLAY/MUTE [Off, On] 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
Solo ON/OFF [Off, On]
Pan [L000C064R127] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Level [000127] 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see

CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
3:OptimizeRAM.Formoreinformation,see
08b: Recording Level [dB] OptimizeRAMonpage 143.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode 4:SelectSampleNo.ThisappliesonlywhenSave
P0AudioInput/Sampling.Formoreinformation, toissettoRAM.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
pleasesee08b:RecordingLevel[dB]onpage 14. SampleNo.onpage 143.
388
Combination P0: Play 09: Control Surface
4:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSaveto 5:AutoSamplingSetup.Formoreinformation,see
issettoDisk.Formoreinformation,seeSelect AutoSamplingSetuponpage 144.
09: Control Surface

09PMC
09b
09a
09c
09d
09e
09f
TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and Local Control On/Off and the Control Surface

16switchestotheleftoftheLCDdisplay.Itlookslikea TheControlSurfacegeneratesandreceivesMIDICCs
mixer,butitcandootherthingsaswell,including andSystemExclusivemessages,sothatyoucanrecord
editingsounds,controllingKARMA,andsending knob,switch,andslidermovementsintoasequencer.
MIDImessagestoexternaldevices. ThismeansthattheGlobalmodeLocalControlsetting
Thispageshowsyouthecurrentvaluesforeachofthe isimportant:
sliders,knobs,andbuttons,alongwithinformation IfLocalControlisOn,thephysicalControlSurface
aboutwhattheyarecontrolling.Forinstance,youcan: willworkproperlyaslongasMIDIisnotbeing
Adjustthevolumeandpanforall16Timbres loopedbackintotheOASYS.
ControleachTimbresEQsettingsandMaster IfLocalControlisOff,youmustloopbackMIDI
EffectsSendlevels intotheOASYSinorderforthephysicalControl
ModulatesoundsandeffectsusingtheRealTime Surfacetoworkproperly.
Knobs RegardlessoftheLocalControlsetting,youcan
ControlKARMA,andselectKARMAscenes,using alwayseditControlSurfaceparametersviathe
theslidersandswitches touchscreen.
EditsoundsusingToneAdjust Formoreinformation,seeLocalControlandthe
ControlSurfaceonpage 709.
Assignsliders,knobs,andswitchestodifferent
ToneAdjustparameters Control Assign Switches and Tabs
FormoreinformationabouttheControlSurface,see: YoucanswitchtheControlSurfacebetweenits
FrontpanelLEDsforslidersandknobson differentfunctionsusingeitherthetabsontheleftside
page 19 oftheLCDdisplay,orthefrontpanelControlAssign
switches.Thetabsandthefrontpanelswitchesmirror
Jump/Catchonpage 19
oneanother;whenyouchangeoneofthem,theother
RESETCONTROLSonpage 19 changesaswell.
InCombimode,youcanselectoneoffivedifferent
functions:
389
Combination mode
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,EQ,
andsendlevelsforeachofthe16Timbres,eightata 09b: Timbre 18/916
time.TheLEDstotherightoftheswitchshowwhether ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume,
yourecurrentlyeditingTimbres18or916;pressthe pan,EQ,andFXsendsettingsforTimbres116.
TIMBRE/TRACKbuttontotogglebetweenthetwo.
IfyouswitchtooneoftheotherControlAssignmodes,
Mixer Knobs [Channel Strip, Individual Pan]
andthengobacktoTIMBRE/TRACK,itwill TheMixerKnobsswitchisonthefrontpanel,
automaticallyreturntothepreviouslyselectedgroup immediatelytotherightoftheknobs,andisalso
(18or916). duplicatedintheonscreendisplay.Theeightknobs
cancontroltwodifferentsetsofparameters,
AUDIOINPUTSletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,and
dependingonthesettingofthisswitch.
sendlevelsfortheanalogandS/P DIFaudioinputs.In
Sequencemode,youcanalsousethistoselecttwo ChannelStrip:Withthissetting,theeightknobswill
banksofharddiskrecordingtracks,asshownbythe controlthePan,EQ,andFXSendsettingsforthe
LEDstotherightoftheswitch. selectedTimbre.UsetheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttonto
selectagroupof8Timbres(18or916),andthenuse
theSELECTbuttonstochoosethespecificTimbre.
MIDIdevices.
IndividualPan:Withthissetting,theknobswill
R.TIMEKNOBS/KARMAletsyoumodulatesounds
controlthePanforthecurrentgroupofTimbres.Knob
andeffectswiththeknobs,andcontrolKARMAwith
1controlsthepanforTimbre1(or9),knob2controls
theslidersandswitches.
thepanforTimbre2(or10),andsoon.
TONEADJUSTletsyoueditProgramswithinthe
MixerKnobsswitch
contextoftheCombi,andwithoutmakingany
changestotheoriginalProgramdata.Youalsoget
handsonaccesstotheseedits,usingthesliders,knobs,
andswitches.
Youcanfreelychangebackandforthbetweenthe
differentfunctions,withoutlosinganyofyouredits.
ControlAssignswitches
INPUTS
HDR 1-8
HDR 9-16
-16
Knobs 18, Channel Strip

WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip,
theknobsprovidequickaccesstothePan,EQ,andFX
Sendparameters.ThePanandEQparameters
duplicatethesimilarlynamedparametersfoundon
theCombieditingpages;changingthemherewill
09a: Combi Select & Tempo changethemintheeditingpages,andviceversa.
Thissectionduplicatesthemostimportantinformation
fromthemainPlaypage. Pan [Random, L001C064R127]
ThiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedTimbre.A
Bank [INT AE, USER AG] settingofL001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064in
ThisistheBankofthecurrentCombi. thecenter,andR127tothefarright.
Combi [000127] RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it

wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly
ThisisthecurrentCombi. fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,eachnote
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] willhaveadifferent,randompanposition.
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which Note:WithsomeEXiinstruments,suchastheCX3,
appliestotemposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences, notescannotbepannedindividually.FortheseEXi,
theVectorEG,EXiStepSequencers,KARMA,and Randompanwillmoveallsoundingnotestoa
temposyncedeffects. differentpanpositionateachnoteon.
EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI EQ Trim [0099]

clocks.Formoreinformation,seeTempoon ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.
page 379.
040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.
390
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrols Play/Mute 1/9 [Play, Mute]

cancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.You Thiscontrolstheplay/mutestatusofeitherTimbre1or
cancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinput Timbre9,dependingwhethertheTIMBRE/TRACK
trim. buttonissetto18or916.
Note:iftheEQpageEQBypassparameteristurned Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),Timbre1willplay.
On,thennoneoftheEQparametersherewillhave Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),Timbre1willbe
anyeffect. muted.
Low EQ [18.0+18.0dB] Play/Mute 2/108/16 [Play, Mute]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in Thesecontroltheplay/mutestatusofTimbres28or
incrementsof0.5dB. 1016,dependingonthesettingofthe
Mid EQ Freq [100Hz10.0kHz] TIMBRE/TRACKbutton.
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ. Formoredetails,seePlay/Mute1/9,above.
Mid EQ Gain [18.0+18.0dB] Solo switch and Select switches 18

Solo [Off, On]
incrementsof0.5dB.
SololetsyouisolateoneormoreTimbresorAudio
High EQ [18.0+18.0dB] Inputs,sothatyouhearthembythemselves.Itdoes
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in thisbytemporarilymutingallnonsoloedTimbresand
incrementsof0.5dB. AudioInputs.
SolousestheSelectswitches.Theseswitchescanshow
Send 1 [000127] andcontroleitherwhichTimbreiscurrentlyselected,
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe orwhichTimbresaresoloed.ThemainSolobuttonlets
TimbresOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF,it youswitchbackandforthbetweenthetwoviews.
scalestheOscillatorsendlevels.IftheOutputBusis
WhentheSolobuttonisOff(LED=Off),theSelect
settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend
switchesselectthecurrentTimbre;whentheSolo
levels.
buttonisOn(LED=Onorblinking),theSelect
Send 2 [000127] switchesletyousolooneormoreTimbres.
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreTimbresorAudio
details,seeSend1,above. Inputsaresoloed,theSoloLEDwillblinkonandoffto
remindyouthatsoloisinuse.
Knobs 18, Individual Pan Note:ThemainSolobuttonmerelychangesthe
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan, functionsoftheSelectswitches.Itdoesnotenableor
theknobswillcontrolthePanforthecurrentgroupof cleartheindividualsolostates.
Timbres.Knob1controlsthepanforTimbre1,knob2
Clearing all solos
controlsthepanforTimbre2,andsoon.
ToturnoffSoloforallTimbresandAudioInputsat
TheseduplicatetheCombisTimbrePanparameters;
once:
changingthemherewillchangethemintheediting
pages,andviceversa. 1. PressandholdtheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
Pan 1/9 [Random, L001C064R127] SOLObutton.
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofeitherTimbre1or
Timbre9,dependingonwhethertheTIMBRE/TRACK Exclusive Solo menu parameter
buttonissetto18or916. ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectsthe
AsettingofL001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064 waythatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff
inthecenter,andR127tothefarright. (unchecked),youcansolomultipleTimbresandAudio
Inputsatonce.
RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it
wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyone
fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,thepan TimbreorAudioInputcanbesoloedatatime.Inthis
positionwillbedifferentforeachnoteon. mode,pressingaSoloswitchautomaticallydisables
anyprevioussolos.
Note:withsomeEXisounds,suchastheCX3,Random
panmayaffectallnotesatonce. Select 18/916 [Off, On]
Pan 2/108/16 [Random, L001C064R127] ThesebuttonseitherselectorsolotheTimbre,
dependingonthestateoftheSoloswitch.Formore
ThesecontrolthestereopanofTimbres28or1016, details,seeSolo,above.
dependingonthesettingoftheTIMBRE/TRACK
button.Formoredetails,seePan1/9,above. Volume Sliders 18
Play/Mute switches 18 TheseslidersadjustthevolumeleveloftheTimbres.
Thetoprowofswitchesallowyoutoturneachofthe
Timbresonandoff.
391
Combination mode
Volume 1/9 [000127] Master Volume Slider

ThiscontrolsthevolumeofeitherTimbre1orTimbre
9,dependingonwhethertheTIMBRE/TRACKbutton Master Volume [000127]
issetto18or916. Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemainstereooutputs,
Volume 2/108/16 [000127] Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
ThesecontrolthevolumeofTimbres28or1016, MasterVolumeonpage 393.
button.Formoredetails,seeVolume1/9,above.
09c
processingforparticularinputs.Inthiscase,set
09c: Audio Inputs Use/EditGlobalSetuptoOff,andtheaudioinputs
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume, willusetheCombiscustomsettings.
pan,andFXsendsettingsforeachofthesixaudio
Youcanusethispagetomixsoundsfromother settingsforall6inputsatonce(IndividualPan),orthe
sourcesintotheOASYSoutputsasanonstage panandFXSendlevelsfortheselectedinput(Channel
submixer,forinstance. Strip).Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMixerKnobs
InSequencermode,twoadditionalAudioControl onpage 392.
Assignsettingsareavailable:HDR18andHDR916.
Theseselectthetwobanksofharddiskrecording Knobs 18, Channel Strip
tracks,forcontrolofvolume,pan,sends,EQ,solo,and WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip,
mute. theknobsprovidequickaccesstotheselectedinputs
Use/Edit Global Setup [Off, On] PanandFXSendparameters.
Combiscanusethesingle,Globalaudioinputmixer Pan [L000C064R127]
setup,orcaninsteadhavetheirowncustomsettings. Thiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedinput.A
WhenUse/EditGlobalSetupisOn,theCombiuses settingofL000placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064in
theGlobalsettings.Thisisthedefault,andletsyou thecenter,andR127tothefarright.
changefreelybetweendifferentProgramsand
Combinationswithoutaffectingtheaudioinputs. Send 1 [000127]
Also,anyeditsmadeonthispagewillaffecttheGlobal ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe
setting,alongwithanyotherPrograms,Combis,or inputsOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF,it
SongswhichusetheGlobalsetting. scalestheprogrammedsendlevel.IftheOutputBusis
settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend
Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto levels,overwritinganyprevioussetting.
saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual
Combi,tosetupspecialsubmixersettingsoreffects Send 2 [000127]
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore
details,seeSend1,above.
392
Knobs 16, Individual Pan Master Volume Slider

WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan, Master Volume [000127]
knobs14controlthepansettingsforanaloginputs1
4,respectively,andknobs56controlthepansettings Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemainstereooutputs,
fortheleftandrightS/P DIFinputs.Knobs7and8 aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
havenoeffect. Outputs18.
MasterVolume
Audio Input Pan (16) [L000C064R127]
ThesecontrolthepanforAnalogInputs14and Control Surface Universal Exclusive Front Panel
S/P DIFLeftandRight,respectively.AsettingofL000 Master Volume Master Volume Analog Volume
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,and MIDI, or Sequencer)
R127tothefarright.
Play/Mute switches 16
Headphone
Thetoprowofswitchesallowyoutomuteanyorallof TFX 2 & Main L/R
theaudioinputs. Outputs
Play/Mute (16) [Play, Mute]

Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),theinputwillbe
enabled.Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),theinput S/PDIF
willbemuted. Output
Solo switch and Select switches 16

Solo [Off, On]
SololetsyouisolateoneormoreTimbresorAudio
thisbytemporarilymutingallnonsoloedTimbresand
AudioInputs.
TheSelectswitchescanshowandcontroleitherwhich
Inputiscurrentlyselected,orwhichInputsaresoloed.
ThemainSolobuttonletsyouswitchbackandforth
betweenthetwoviews.
switchesselectthecurrentInput;whentheSolobutton
isOn(LED=Onorblinking),theSelectswitcheslet
yousolooneormoreInputs.
WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreTimbresorAudio
Inputsaresoloed,theSoloLEDwillblinkonandoffto
Note:ThemainSolobuttonmerelychangesthe
functionsoftheSelectswitches.Itdoesnotenableor
cleartheindividualsolostates.
Formoreinformation,seeClearingallsoloson
page 391,andExclusiveSolomenuparameteron
page 391.
Select (16) [Off, On]

Thisswitcheitherselectsorsolostheinput,depending
ontheSoloswitchsetting.Formoredetails,seeSolo,
above.
Sliders 16
Audio Input Volume (16) [000127]
Theseslidersadjustthevolumelevelsoftheaudio
inputs.
393
Combination mode
09d
09d: External MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.Thisallowsyou
CC# Assign (18) [Off, 000119]
theknob.
synths),andsoon.Formoreinformation,see12:
External1onpage 714. MIDI Channel (116) [0116, Gch]
TheseExternalSetupsarecompletelyseparatefrom ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
theCombi.YoucanthinkofExternalmodeasbeinga theswitch.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
separatecontrolsurfacewhichjusthappenstoshare desired.
OASYSssliders,knobs,switches,anddrumpads. GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
WhenyouselectanExternalSetup,itstaysselected MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.
evenwhenyouchangeCombis,orswitchtoProgram
orSequencermodes.Thismakesiteasytoselect CC# Assign (116) [Off, 000119]
differentOASYSsoundswithoutdisruptingany ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby
externalMIDIcontrol,andviceversa. theswitch.
Setup [000127] Switch On/Off (116) [Off, On]

ThisselectstheGlobalsetupfortheknobs,sliders, ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheswitchsMIDICC.
switches,anddrumpads. Whentheswitchisturnedon,itsendsavalueof127;
Note:thisselectionisnotstoredwiththeCombi. whenitisturnedoff,itsendsavalueof0.
Knobs 18 Sliders 18 & Master Slider

MIDI Channel (18) [0116, Gch] MIDI Channel (18) [0116, Gch]
ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannel ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
assignedtotheknob.Eachcansendonadifferent theslider.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
channel,ifdesired. desired.
GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
394

theslider.
Selected
Parameter
information
09e
Youcanassignmanyparameterstoasingleslideror
09e: RT/KARMA (Real Time switch,ifdesired.Duetospacelimitations,however,
Knobs/KARMA) onlyfirstfourparameterswillbeshownhere.Ifthere
aremoreassignmentsthancanbedisplayed,youllsee
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyoumodulate
a>symbolafterthefourthparameter.
Program,CombiandEffectsparameterswiththeeight
knobs,andcontrolKARMAwiththeswitchesand Tochangetheparameterassignments,usetheKARMA
sliders. GERTPandPerfRTPpages.Formoreinformation,
pleasesee75:GERealTimeParameterson
Selected parameter information page 113,and76:PerfRealTimeParameterson
page 116.
WhenyouselectaKARMASliderorSwitch,thisarea
showsdetailedinformationaboutitsKARMA Parameter Value [Depends on parameter]
parameterassignments.
ThisshowsthevalueoftheGEorPerformanceReal
Control [SW18, SL18] TimeParametersassignedtotheselectedSlideror
ThisshowswhichSwitchorSlideriscurrently
individualparameters.
selected.
Assignment [Name] KARMA Module Control

EachKARMASliderorSwitchcancontrolmultiple Module Control [M, A, B, C, D]
internalparameterssimultaneously.Thegroupof
WhenusedtocontrolKARMA,theControlSurface
parameterscanbegivenasinglename,whichisshown
slidersandswitchesarefivelayersdeep:oneforeach
here.
Module(AD),andaMasterLayercapableof
Youcanselectdifferentnames,ifdesired.Formore controllingselectedparametersfromallofthe
information,see79:Name/NoteMaponpage 125. Modulesatonce.EachlayerhasitsownSlider,Switch,
andScenesettings.
Module and Parameter [AD 0132, P 0108]
TheModuleControlradiobuttons(andthefront
ThisreadonlydisplayshowstheKARMA
panelMODULECONTROLbutton)letyouswitch
parameter(s)assignedtotheSliderorSwitch.
betweenthesefivelayers.
A,B,C,andDmeanthatthesliderorswitchcontrolsa
Toselectadifferentlayer,justpressitsonscreenradio
GERealTimeParameterfromthecorresponding
button,orusethefrontpanelMODULECONTROL
KARMAModule.Thefollowingnumberidentifiesthe
buttontostepthrougheachlayerinturn.Whenyoudo
specificparameterwithinthemodule.Forinstance,
so,alloftheKARMASliders,SwitchesandSceneswill
A22isparameter22ofModuleA.
updateinstantlytoshowtheircurrentvaluesand
PmeansthattheswitchiscontrollingaPerformance nameswithintheselectedlayer.
RealTimeParameter.
395
Combination mode
Knobs 18 KARMA SCENES 1-8

Knobs14allhavededicatedfunctionswhich KARMA Scenes [18]
correspondtoMIDICCs.Knobs58canbeassignedto
awidevarietyoffunctions,manyofwhichalsohave AKARMASCENEincludesthesettingsforallofthe
correspondingMIDICCs. KARMASLIDERSandSWITCHES.EachCombican
containuptoeightScenes.
Whenyoumovetheknob,itwillsendthe
correspondingMIDICCtoallTimbresontheGlobal ToselectaScene,justpressitsswitchyoullseeallof
Channel.(ToeditindividualPrograms,useTone theKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHESupdate
Adjustinstead.) instantlytotheirnewvalues.
Also,whentheCCisreceivedviaMIDIorgenerated KARMA SWITCHES 1-8

byKARMA,theknobvaluewillchangetomatchthe
CCvalue. KARMA Switches [Off, On]
NotethattheKnob18settingsoftheindividual TheseswitchescontrolKARMAPerformanceorGE
ProgramsdonotapplyinCombimode. (GeneratedEffect)RealTimeParameters,asassigned
ontheKARMAPerfRTPandGERTPpages.
Unlessotherwisenoted,scalingmeansthatthe
Theswitchesindicatethecurrenton/offstatus.
parametersareattheirprogrammedvalueswhenthe
Theparametersassignedtotheswitchesandtheir
controllerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
on/offstatuscanbeeditedintheGERTPpageorthe
controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthe
KARMAPerfRTPpage.
controllerisat127.Foranotherlookatthis,seethe
diagrambelow.
KARMA SLIDERS1-8
CCscalingofparameters
KARMA Sliders [000127]
99 ThesesliderscontrolKARMAPerformanceorGE
RealTimeParameters,asassignedontheKARMA
Parameter
PerfRTPandGERTPpages.
Value
Thecurrentvaluesareshownunderthesliders.The
parametersassignedtotheslidersandtheirvaluecan
beeditedintheGERTPpageortheKARMAPerfRTP
As Programmed
page.
00 Master Volume Slider

0 64 127
CC Value
Knob 1: CUTOFF (CC#74) [000127] Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAand MasterVolumeonpage 393.
B,andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74.

ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
transmitsandreceivesMIDICC#71.
Knob 3: Filter EG Intensity (CC#79) [000127]

frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Italsotransmitsand
receivesMIDICC#79.
Knob 4: EG Release (CC#72) [000127]

Knobs 58 [000127]
Youcansetknobs58toawidevarietyofmodulation
ManyofthefunctionsscaleaparticularsetofProgram
messagesusuallyCCs.
396
09f
09f: Tone Adjust Timbre select

ToneAdjustprovidestwoimportantfeatures Timbre [116]
simultaneously: ThisselectstheTimbrewhoseToneAdjustparameters
Itletsyouuseallofthesliders,knobs,andswitches appearonthescreenandtheControlSurface.Youcan
tocontrolProgramparametersliketheknobson switchbackandforthbetweenthedifferentTimbresas
ananalogsynth,orthedrawbarsonanorgan. muchasyoulike,withoutlosingyouredits.
ItletsyoumodifyProgramsforusewithina ThisparameteristhesameastheselectedTimbrein
specificCombi,includingeverythingfromsubtle TIMBRE/TRACKmode;changingonewillalsochange
tweaks(likechangingLFOspeeds)todramatic theother.
changes(suchasselectingadifferentMultisample). YoucanuseashortcuttochangethecurrentTimbre
Anychangesthatyoumakearestoredwiththe directlyfromtheControlSurface,withoutleaving
Combi,anddonotaltertheoriginalProgram. ToneAdjustmode:
EachofthesixteenTimbreshasitsownsetoftone 1. PressandholdtheTONEADJUSTbutton.
adjustparameters,butonlyoneTimbreisshownata 2. WhileholdingTONEADJUST,pressa
time. PLAY/MUTEorSELECTbuttontoselectaTimbre.
Formoreinformation,see: ThePLAY/MUTEbuttonsselectTimbres18,andthe
ToneAdjustandMIDISysExonpage 27 SELECTbuttonsselectTimbres916.
InteractionbetweenToneAdjustandMIDICCs 3. ReleasetheTONEADJUSTbutton.
onpage 27 TheControlSurfaceandscreenwillchangetoshow
Absolute,Relative,andMetaparameterson theToneAdjustparametersforthenewlyselected
page 27 Timbre.
Saving Tone Adjust Edits Auto Load PRG [Off, On]

InProgrammode,whenyoumakeeditsviaTone WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTimbre,this
Adjustandthensavetheresults,theProgramdatais parameterdetermineswhetherornotthePrograms
changedjustasifyoudeditedtheinternalparameters ToneAdjustsettingswillbeloadedaswell.
directly.Formoreinformation,seeSavingTone Thesesettingsincludetheparametersassignedtoeach
AdjustEditsonpage 27. slider,knob,andswitch,alongwiththeon/offstateof
InCombimode,however,allToneAdjusteditsare anySwitchesassignedtoAbsoluteparameters.
storedwithintheCombi;theProgramitselfisnot NotethatanyeditsyouvemadeusingToneAdjustin
changed.ThisletsyoualterthewaythataProgram Programmodewillalreadyhavebeenstoredintothe
soundsinonespecificCombiwithoutaffectingthe Programsparameters.ThismeansthattheProgram
waythatitsoundsinProgrammode,orinanyother willstillsoundthesame,whetherornotyouloadthe
CombisorSongs. ToneAdjustsettings.
397
Combination mode
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchange Ifyouunassignaparameterfromacontrol,itwill
anyoralloftheToneAdjustsettingsasdesired, reverttothisvalue.
includingbothassignmentsandvalues.Allsuchedits
arestoredintheCombi,withoutaffectingtheoriginal Knobs 18
Program.
Assign [List of Tone Adjust assignments]
IfAutoLoadPRGisOn,ToneAdjustsettingswillbe
automaticallyloadedalongwiththeProgram. ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
knob.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOff,thentherelationship
betweenthetypesoftheoldandnewProgramswill ThefirstgroupofparametersaretheCommonset,
determinewhathappens,asshowninthetablebelow: whicharesupportedbymostProgramtypes.Forafull
list,seeCommonToneAdjustParameterson
Then Tone page 399.
Adjust AftertheCommonparameters,theitemsinthelistwill
If the old And the new
parameters varydependingontheProgramtype.Formore
Program is Program is
and values information,pleasesee:
are
HD1ToneAdjustParameters,onpage 30.
An HD-1 Program An HD-1 Program kept the same AL1:ToneAdjust,onpage 214.
loaded from the CX3:ToneAdjust,onpage 236.
A HD-1 Program An EXi Program
new Program STR1:ToneAdjustonpage 282.
loaded from the MS20EXToneAdjustparametersonpage 309
Any EXi Program A HD-1 Program
new Program PolysixEXToneAdjustparametersonpage 325.
An EXi Program OtherEXiinstrumentswillhavetheirownsetof
with the same EXi parameters,asdescribedintheirmanuals.
An EXi Program assigned to the kept the same
same slots as the Assignments are exclusive
previous Program Eachcontrollercanbeassignedtoonlyoneparameter,
andeachparametercanbeassignedtoonlyone
An EXi Program controller.
which does not
loaded from the Toswapaparameterfromonecontroltoanother,
An EXi Program use the same EXi
new Program
as the previous youllneedtofirstunassignitfromtheoldcontrol,
Program andthenassignittothenewcontrol.

Selected parameter information
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.The
Thisstatuslineshowsdetailed,readonlyinformation rangeofvalueswillvarydependingontheparameter
aboutthecurrentlyselectedToneAdjustparameter. assignedtothecontrol.
(Control) [Knob18, SW116,
Switches 116
Slider18, Slider M]
ThisisthephysicalcontrollerassignedtotheTone
andsliders.
Adjustparameter.SliderMistheMasterSlider.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,or
(Assignment) [Full Parameter Name] anAbsoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
Thisshowsthefullnameoftheparameterassignedto SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
thecontroller.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssign
parameter,below. SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
Value [Current Parameter Value] parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectly
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.The reflectstheparametervalue:
rangeofvalueswillvarydependingontheparameter SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
Type [Relative, Absolute, Meta]
howeditstotheparameteraresaved.Formore ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
information,seeAbsolute,Relative,andMeta switch.Formoreinformation,seeAssign,above.
parametersonpage 27.
On Value [Depends on parameter]
Stored Value [Original Parameter Value] Theparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchis
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,before On.
theeffectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoTone WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
AdjustparameterswhichcontrolasingleProgram parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesame
parameter. astheSwitchStatus(seebelow).
398
Switch Status [Off, On] Filter/AmpEGSustainLevel.Thisscalesthesustain

ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff. levelsoftheFilterandAmpEGs.ItinteractswithCC#
ThestatusisalsoshownbytheLEDsinthephysical 70.
buttons. Filter/AmpEGReleaseTime.Thisscalestherelease
timesoftheFilterandAmpEGs.ItinteractswithCC#
Sliders 18 and Master Slider 72.
TheseworkidenticallytoKnobs18,asdescribed FilterEGAttackTime.Thisscalestheattacktimesof
above. theFilterEGs.
FilterEGDecayTime.Thisscalesthedecayandslope
Common Tone Adjust Parameters timesoftheFilterEGs.
FilterEGSustainLevel.Thisscalesthesustainlevels
TheseparametersaffectbothOscillatorsinaHD1
oftheFilterEGs.
Program,orbothEXiinanEXiProgram.SomeEXi
instrumentsmaynotsupportalloftheCommonTone FilterEGReleaseTime.Thisscalesthereleasetimesof
Adjustparameters;fordetails,pleaseseethe theFilterEGs.
individualEXimanuals. AmpEGAttackTime.Thisscalestheattacktimesof
Unlessotherwisenoted,allofthefollowingTone theAmpEGs.
AdjustparametersareRelative. AmpEGDecayTime.Thisscalesthedecayandslope
Off.ThismeansthattheToneAdjustcontrolhasno timesoftheAmpEGs.
effect. AmpEGSustainLevel.Thisscalesthesustainlevels
FilterCutoff.Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallof oftheAmpEGs.
thefiltersatonce.Forinstance,intheHD1,itaffects AmpEGReleaseTime.Thisscalesthereleasetimesof
bothFiltersAandB. theAmpEGs.
ThisparameterinteractswithCC#71. PitchEGAttackTime.Thisscalestheattacktimesof
FilterResonance.Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthe thePitchEG(orEGs,inthecaseofsomeEXi
filtersatonceforinstance,intheHD1,itaffectsboth instruments).
FiltersAandB.ItinteractswithCC#74. PitchEGDecayTime.Thisscalesthedecayandslope
FilterEGIntensity.ThisscalestheeffectoftheFilter timesofthePitchEG(orEGs,inthecaseofsomeEXi
EGonthecutofffrequency.Itaffectsallofthefiltersat instruments).
once;forinstance,intheHD1,itaffectsbothFiltersA PitchEGSustainLevel.Thisscalesthesustainlevels
andB. ofthePitchEG(orEGs,inthecaseofsomeEXi
99meansnomodulation.+99meansmaximum instruments).Note:thisdoesnotapplytotheHD1.
modulationinthesamedirection,positiveornegative, PitchEGReleaseTime.Thisscalesthereleasetimesof
astheoriginalProgram.Forinstance,iftheoriginal thePitchEG(orEGs,inthecaseofsomeEXi
ProgramsEGIntensitywassetto25,thensettingthe instruments).ItinteractswithCC#77.
ToneAdjustto+99movestheEGIntensityto99.
PitchLFO1Intensity.ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1on
ThisparameterinteractswithCC#79. thePitch.
AmpVelocityIntensity.Thisscalestheeffectof 99removestheLFOmodulationentirely.+99means
velocityontheAmplevel. maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positive
99removesthevelocitymodulationentirely.+99 ornegative,astheoriginalProgram.
meansmaximummodulationinthesamedirection, LFO1Speed.ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.Whenthe
positiveornegative,astheoriginalProgram. LFOisinMIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBase
Filter/AmpEGAttackTime.Thisscalestheattack Note.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFrequencyon
timesoftheFilterandAmpEGs,alongwithother page 85.
relatedparameters. ThisparameterinteractswithCC#76.
Whenthevalueis+1ormore,thisalsoaffectstheAmp LFO1Fade.ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.Formore
EGsStartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,and information,pleaseseeFadeonpage 86.
AttackTimeAMS,asdescribedbelow:
LFO1Delay.ThisscalesLFO1sdelaytimethetime
Betweenvaluesof+1and+25,theStartLevel,Start betweennoteonandtheonsetoftheLFO.Formore
LevelAMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefrom information,pleaseseeDelayonpage 86.
theirprogrammedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange,
theAttackLevelwillchangefromitsprogrammed ThisparameterinteractswithCC#78.
valueto99. LFO1Stop.ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhether
ThisparameterinteractswithCC#73. LFO1isstoppedorrunning.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeStoponpage 85.
Filter/AmpEGDecayTime.Thisscalesthedecayand
slopetimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs.Itinteractswith ThePROGsettingrestorestheProgramsoriginal
CC#75. valuesconvenientifOscillator1sLFOwasstopped,
butOscillator2swasnot.
399
Combination mode
LFO2Speed.ThisscalesLFO2sfrequency.Whenthe
LFOisinMIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBase
Note.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFrequencyon
page 85.
LFO2Fade.ThisscalesLFO2sfadeintime.Formore
information,pleaseseeFadeonpage 86.
LFO2Delay.ThisscalesLFO2sdelaytimethetime
betweennoteonandtheonsetoftheLFO.Formore
information,pleaseseeDelayonpage 86.
LFO2Stop.ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhether
LFO2isstoppedorrunning.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeStoponpage 85.
CommonLFOSpeed.ThisscalestheCommonLFOs
frequency.WhentheLFOisinMIDI/Tempomode,this
adjuststheBaseNote.
Unison.ThisAbsoluteparameterturnsUnisononand
off.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUnisonon
page 35.
#OfVoices.ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthenumber
ofUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,thisparameter
hasnoeffect.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Numberofvoicesonpage 35.
Detune.ThisAbsoluteparametersetsamountof
detuningbetweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnot
On,thisparameterhasnoeffect.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeDetuneonpage 35.
Thickness.ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthepatternof
detuningbetweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnot
On,orifDetuneissetto0,thisparameterhasno
effect.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeThicknesson
page 36.

commandsonpage 142.
3:CopyScene.ThisisavailableonlywhenControl
information,seeCopySceneonpage 151.
4:SwapScene.ThisisavailableonlywhenControl
information,seeSwapSceneonpage 151.
400
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 11: Timbre EQ
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller
11: Timbre EQ
11PMC
11a
11b
EachTimbrehasadedicatedthreebandEQ,with q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]

sweepablemidband.Thispageletsyouviewand ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
adjustthesettingsforall16Timbresatonce. appliestotemposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences,
Timbre EQ and the control surface theVectorEG,EXiStepSequencers,KARMA,and
temposyncedeffects.
YoucanusetheControlSurfacetoadjustalmostallof
theTimbreEQparameters(exceptforBypass).Todo EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI
so: clocks.Formoreinformation,seeTempoon
page 379.
TIMBRE/TRACKswitchtoselecteithertimbres1 040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
8or916. BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.
2. UsetheMIXSELECT1/98/16switchestoselect
thetimbreyouwanttocontrol. 11b: 3 Band Parametric EQ
CHANNELSTRIP. Select Timbre Info
4. UsetheMIXCHANNELSTRIPknobs26to Timbre Number
adjusttheEQTRIM,LOWEQgain,MIDEQ Timbre Category
frequencyandgain,andHIGHEQgain,as
desired. Selected Timbre Info
Thisareadisplaysinformationaboutthetimbre
11a: Combination Name selectedforeditingT:timbrenumber/program
bank/number/name,Ch:MIDIchannelnumber.
Combination Name [(000127: Name)]
Timbre Number
Thesedisplayonlyparametersshowthebank, Thisindicatesthetimbrenumber.Thevarious
number,andnameofthecurrentCombination. parametersbeloweachtimbrenumbermakesettings
forthecorrespondingtimbre.
Timbre Category
Thisshowstheabbreviatedcategorynameofthe
ProgramassignedtotheTimbre.
401
Combination mode
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number) 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see

Auto Load Prog EQ [Off, On] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTimbre,this ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
parameterdetermineswhetherornotthePrograms
EQsettingswillbeloadedaswell.
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchange
3:ShowEQGraphic.Formoreinformation,see
anyoralloftheEQsettingsasdesired.Allsuchedits
ShowEQGraphiconpage 463.
arestoredintheCombination,withoutaffectingthe
originalProgram.
Regardlessofthissetting,subsequenteditstothe
ProgramsEQinProgrammodewillnotaffectthe
Combination.
On:theProgramsEQsettingswillbeloaded
automaticallyalongwiththeProgram.Thisisthe
defaultsetting.
Off:theProgramsEQsettingswontbeloaded.Use
thisifyouvesetuptheEQinaspecificway,andthen
wantittostayunchangedwhileyoutryoutdifferent
Programs.
Bypass [On, Off]

IfthisisOn(checked),alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingInputTrim.Bypasscanbeconvenientfor
comparingtheresultsoftheEQwiththeoriginal
signal.
Input Trim [0099]

ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Note
thatthisparameterusesalinearscale;50isequivalent
to6dB,25isthesameas12dB,andsoon.
trim.
High Gain [18.0+00.0+18.0dB]

incrementsof0.5dB.
Mid Frequency [100Hz10kHz]

ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
Mid Gain [18.0+00.0+18.0dB]

incrementsof0.5dB.
Low Gain [18.0+00.0+18.0dB]

Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.
Timbre 0216 (Timbre Number)

TheseparametersadjustthethreebandEQ(with
sweepablemidrange)fortimbres2through16.They
arethesameasfortimbre1.SeeTimbre01.

commandsonpage 142.
402
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 15: Vector Volume Control
15: Vector Volume Control

15PMC
15a 15c
15b
VectorSynthesisletsyoucontrolTimbrevolumesand
Program&EffectsparametersbymovingtheVector 15a: Combination Name
Joystick,byusingtheprogrammableVectorEnvelope,
orbythecombinationofthetwo.
FormorebackgroundinformationonVectorSynthesis, Combination Name [(000127: Name)]
pleaseseeWhatdoesVectormean?onpage 39,and Thesedisplayonlyparametersshowthebank,
VectorJoystickandVectorEnvelopeonpage 39. number,andnameofthecurrentCombination.
Program and Combi Vectors work together q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
InCombimode,eachTimbresProgramstillhasits ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
ownVectorEG,whichcontrolsvolumeandCCsasit appliestotemposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences,
didinProgrammode.YoucandisabletheProgram theVectorEG,EXiStepSequencers,KARMA,and
VectorVolumeandCCcontrolseparatelyforeach temposyncedeffects.
Timbre,ifdesired.
ThereisalsoaseparateCombiwideVectorEG,with clocks.Formoreinformation,seeTempoon
itsownVectorVolumeandCCcontrolsettings.As page 379.
withtheProgramVector,youcandisabletheCombi
040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
VolumeandCCcontrolseparatelyforeachTimbre.
How Combi Vector Volume works
InProgrammode,VectorVolumefadesbetweenthe
twoOscillators.Oscillator1isalwaysatmaximum
volumewhentheVectorpositionisallthewaytothe
left(X),andOscillator2isalwaysatmaximumwhen
theVectorPositionisallthewaytotheright(+X).
InCombimode,ontheotherhand,theVectorcanfade
betweenanyorallofthe16Timbres.Youcanassign
eachoftheTimbrestobecontrolledbyanyofthefour
Vectoraxes(+X,X,+Y,Y),ortonotbecontrolledat
all.
Thisletsyousetupcomplextransitionsbetween
differentPrograms,includingbetweenHD1and
differentEXiinstruments.
403
Combination mode
Vector Synthesis system, Combi mode
Combination
Combi Vector Volume Control
Timbres 1-16 Center Volume Vector Modulation of

and Equal Power settings Timbre Volume
Combi switch:
Combi
Vector EG +
Combi Vector CC Control
Combi switch:
Vector Joystick
Enable CC control
MIDI In Vector CC Modulation of
(Global Chan.) X+/- and Y+/-
VJS X and Y modes Program and FX Parameters
CC Assignments
(Global Channel Only)

Vector MIDI Out
Vector CC Control
Global Controllers Vector CC MIDI Output

Defaults: X=118, Y=119 Vector Joystick
Timbre 1
The front-panel Vector Joystick applies only
when the Timbre is set to the Global Channel
Vector Joystick Program Vector Volume Control

MIDI In
(Timbre Chan.) Osc 1-2 Center Volume Vector Modulation of
and Equal Power settings Osc 1-2 Volume
Program switch:
Program
Vector EG +
Program Vector CC Control
X+/- and Y+/- Vector CC Modulation of

VJS X and Y modes
CC Assignments Program Parameters
Program switch:
Enable CC control
Timbre 16
Enable Volume Control [Off, On]

15b: Vector Volume Control
VectorVolumeControlletsyouadjusttherelative controlthevolumesofallTimbreswhoseVJSAssign
volumesofthe16TimbresbymovingtheVector parameterisnotsettoOff.
Joystick(ortheVectorEnvelope)fromlefttorighton
Whenthisboxisnotchecked,theVectorpositionwill
theXaxis,andupanddownontheYaxis.
notdirectlyaffectvolume.However,itsstillpossible
TheEqualAmountcheckboxmakestheVectorcreate fortheVectortocontrolvolumeviaVectorCCsand
asmoothfadebetweentheTimbres,whilethe AMS,dependingontheindividualPrograms
individualTimbreCenterVolumeparametersallow parametersettings.
youtocreatemorecomplexfadeshapes.
404
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 15: Vector Volume Control
Equal Amount [Off, On] Timbre 01

ThisappliesonlywhenEnableVolumeControlisOn.
VJS Assign [Off, +X, X, +Y, Y]
WhenEqualAmountisOn,theVectorwillfade
ThisassignsanaxisoftheVectortocontrolthe
betweenallfourVectoraxeswhilemaintainingatotal
Timbresvolume.SeethediagramVJSAssignand
amountof100%.Thisprovidesasmoothfadebetween
ProgramVolume,below,formoredetails.
thedifferentsounds,andisthetypeofvolumecontrol
usedbyclassicVectorsynths. OffmeansthattheVectorpositionwillnotaffectthe
Timbresvolume.
NotethatthiswillworkbestwhenthePrograms
assignedtoeachofthefouraxeshaveequivalent VJSAssignandProgramVolume
volumes.Forinstance,youmightcreateaCombiwith
fourPrograms,eachsoundingatthesamevolumeand +X X
Program volume increases Program volume increases
assignedtoadifferentaxis.Youcouldthenaddafifth
from left to right. from right to left.
Program,assignittooneoftheaxes,andthenusethe
Timbrevolumesliderstoreducethelevelsofboth
Programsonthataxisby50%sothattheircombined
volumeisthesameasanyoneoftheotherPrograms. 0% 100% 100% 0%
Also,whenthisischecked,theCenterVolume
parameterswillbegrayedout,sinceEqualAmount
setsthemautomatically.
WhenEqualAmountisOff,theindividualTimbre 127 0 +127 127 0 +127
CenterVolumeparametersdeterminethewayin
whichVectorpositionaffectsvolume.
Note:Foraninterestingvariationonthiseffect,turn +Y Y
EqualAmountOff,andinsteadsetalloftheTimbre from bottom to top. from top to bottom.
CenterVolumesto50%.TheTimbreswillstillfade +127 +127
togethersmoothly,butwithamoregentleeffect 100% 0%
towardstheextremesoftheVectoraxes.
0 0
15c: Vector Graphic
Vector Graphic 0% 100%
127 127
Thisshowsadiagramofthevectorspace,including
thefivepointsoftheVectorEG(labeled04)andthe
currentpositionoftheVectorJoystick(labeledJ). Center Volume [0, 25, 50, 75, 100%]
ThetransitionsbetweentheEGspointsareshownby ThissetsthevolumeofTimbre1atthecenterpoint.It
blacklines,andthelooptransitionisshownbyagray appliesonlywhenEqualAmount,above,issettoOff.
line. Thevolumesattheextremeendsoftheaxisarefixed,
dependingonthesettingoftheVJSAssignparameter.
Forinstance,ifVJSAssignissettoX,theTimbrewill
Thevectorgraphicincludesanimagerepresentingthe alwaysbeat100%volumeontheleftside,and0%
VectorVolumeControlsettingsforthecurrentTimbre (silent)ontherightside.
(seeTimbreSelect,below).YoucanusetheShow
VolumeImagecheckboxtotogglethispartofthe ThisparameterappliesonlytotheCombiVector
graphiconandoff. Volumecontrol,anddoesnotchangethePrograms
individualVectorVolumesettings.
Timbre Select [0116]
ThisselectstheTimbrewhosevolumeimagewillbe
shown.
Show Point [VJS, Vector EG Point 04]

fivepoints.Thisselectsthepointwhosevalueswillbe
shown.
Timbre Volume & CC Display

405
Combination mode
TimbreCenterVolume,VJSAssign=X willbecontrolledbythecombinationofthePrograms
VectorEGandtheVectorJoystick,andisnotaffected
bytheCombisVectorEG.
100% WhenthisisturnedOff,theProgramsVectorVolume
controlwillbedisabled.
Volume 50% Timbres 0216

TheparametersforTimbres216areidenticaltothose
0% forTimbre01,asdescribedabove.
-127 0 +127
Vector X-axis position t 15: Page Menu Commands
Center Volume Values: 100 numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
75 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
50 commandsonpage 142.
25 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
0 WriteCombinationonpage 461.
Enable Program Vector Volume [Off, On] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
WhenthisisturnedOn,theProgramsVectorVolume 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
controlwillfunctionasitdoesinProgrammode, CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
crossfadingbetweenOscillators1and2.Thecrossfade
16: Vector CC Control

16PMC
11a
16a
EachofthefourdirectionsoftheVectorcansenda
16a: Vector CC Control differentMIDICC,includingleft(X),right(+X),up
VectorCCControlletsyouusethecombinationofthe (+Y),anddown(Y).Youcanchoosebetweenseveral
VectorJoystickandtheVectorEGtocontrolthe differentpatternscombiningthesefourdirectionsby
CombisEffects. usingtheVJSXModeandVJSYModeparameters.
TheVectorCCsarealsosenttoallGlobalChannel
Timbres.ThesemaymodulateProgramparameters,
likeanyotherMIDICCs,dependingonthesettings
withineachindividualProgram.
406
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 16: Vector CC Control
Finally,youcanoptionallysendtheseCCsoutto Positivesendsoutonly+X,startingat0atthefarleft,
externalMIDIinstruments.Aglobalparameterallows andincreasingto127atthefarright.Xisdisabledin
youtoenableordisablethisMIDIoutput;bydefault,it thismode.
isdisabled. NegativesendsoutonlyX,startingat0atthefar
Program and Combi Vectors work together right,andincreasingto127atthefarleft.Inthismode,
+Xisgrayedout.
InCombimode,eachTimbresProgramstillhasits
ownVectorEG,whichcontrolsvolumeandCCsasit Xfadesendsoutboth+XandX,overlapping
didinProgrammode.YoucandisablethePrograms throughouttheXaxis.Asoneincreases,theother
VectorVolumeandCCcontrolseparatelyforeach decreases.
Timbre,ifdesired. Splitsendsoutboth+XandX,withasplitinthe
ProgramVectorCCsaffectonlytheirownProgram, center.+Xissentwhenthepointmovestotherightof
evenifotherTimbresaresettothesameMIDIchannel. thecenter,andXissentwhenthepointmovestothe
leftofcenter.
ThereisalsoaseparateCombiwideVectorEG,with
itsownVectorVolumeandCCcontrolsettings.Combi VectorCCModes
VectorCCsaffectallTimbressettotheGlobalchannel.
Positive Negative
AswiththeProgramVector,youcandisablethe
Generates only +X, Generates only X,
CombiVolumeandCCcontrolseparatelyforeach increasing from left to right. increasing from right to left.
Timbre.
Vector and MIDI

TheVectorfeaturesinteractwithMIDIintwodifferent 0 +X CC 127 127 X CC 0
ways:throughtheVectorJoystick,andthroughthe
VectorCCControl.
TheVectorJoysticksendsandreceivestwoMIDI
controllers:onefortheXaxis,andtheotherfortheY
127 0 +127 127 0 +127
axis.InGlobalmode,youcanassignthesetoanyMIDI
CCnumbersyoulike.ThedefaultsareCC#118forthe X-Axis X-Axis
Xaxis,andCC#119fortheYaxis.
TheVectorJoystickanditsCCscontroltheVector Xfade Split
position,inconjunctionwiththeVectorEG. Generates both +X and X. Generates both +X and -X.
One increases as the other Both are 0 in the center.
TheVectorCCControl,ontheotherhand,isgenerated decreases. +X increases to the right;
bytheVectorposition.Normally,thiswillonlyaffect X increases to the left.
internalsoundsandeffects.Ifyoulike,however,you
canalsoenableaGlobalparametertosendthese +X CC
0 +X CC 127
generatedCCstoexternalMIDIdevices. 0 127
Notethat,inCombimode,onlytheCombisVector 127 0
CCscanbesenttoexternalMIDIinstruments;the 0 X CC 127
X CC
individualProgramsvectorCCsareonlyused
internally.
127 0 +127 127 0 +127
Enable CC Control [Off, On] X-Axis X-Axis
controltheCCsassignedto+X,X,+Y,andY,asset +X [OffMIDI CC#119]
below.
Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Xvector.You
Whenthisboxisnotchecked,theVectorpositionwill canusethisasanAMSsourcetocontrolProgram
notaffecttheseCCs.However,thejoystickwillstill parameters,orasaDmodsourcetocontrolEffects
sendandreceiveitsdedicatedMIDICCs,justlike parameters.ItwillbegrayedoutiftheVJSXMode,
otherphysicalcontrollers.SeeVectorandMIDI, above,issettoNegative.
above,formoreinformation.
InadditiontothestandardlistofMIDIcontrollers,you
ThisparameteraffectsonlytheCombiVectorCCs. canalsoassignthe+Xvectortoduplicatethefunction
EvenifthisisturnedOff,theindividualPrograms ofseveralfrontpanelcontrollers,includingJSX,JS+X,
VectorCCswillstillfunctionnormally. JSX,Knobs58,andSW12.
VJS X Mode [Positive, Negative, Xfade, Split] Forinstance,ifyouassign+XtoKnob6,thevectors+X
willusethecontrollerassignedtoKnob6onthe
YoucansetuptheVectortosendoutCCsinseveral
ControllerAssignpage.
differentpatterns,asshowninthegraphicbelow.This
controlsthepatternfortheXaxis. Finally,youcanalsoassign+XtocontroltheMaster
Volume.
NotethatthissettingaffectsonlyCCControl;ithasno
effectonVolumeControl.Also,itappliesonlytothe
CombiVectorCCs,andhasnoeffectontheindividual
ProgramVectorCCs.
407
Combination mode
X [OffMIDI CC#119] Timbres 0216

ThisassignsthecontrollersentbytheXvector.Itwill ThesettingsforTimbres216areidenticaltothosefor
begrayedoutiftheVJSXMode,above,issetto Timbre01,asdescribedabove.
Positive.
VJS Y Mode [Positive, Negative, Xfade, Split] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ThiscontrolstheVectorCCpatternfortheYaxis.For numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
moreinformation,seethedescriptionunderVJSX shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Mode,above. commandsonpage 142.
+Y [OffMIDI CC#119] 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
begrayedoutiftheVJSYMode,above,issetto 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Negative. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Theselectionsarethesameasfor+X,above. 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
Y [OffMIDI CC#119]
Positive.

shown.
CC at Show Point [%]

Thisreadonlydisplayshowsthevolumevaluesfor
thecurrentVectorpoint,asselectedbytheShowPoint
parameter,above.
Timbre 01
Enable Combi Vector CC [Off, On]
ThiscontrolswhetherornottheTimbrewillreceive
theCombiVectorCCs.
IfthisisOn,theTimbrewillreceivetheCCs,andthe
TimbresProgramwillrespondtothemaccordingtoits
ownAMSsettings.
IfthisisOff,theTimbrewillnotreceivetheCCs.This
canbeusefuliftheCombisVectorCCsarecausing
unwantedmodulation,orconflictingwiththe
ProgramsownVectorCCs.
Enable Program Vector CC [Off, On]

ThiscontrolswhetherornottheProgramsownVector
CCswillbeactive.
IfthisisOn,theProgramsVectorCCsandVectorEG
willworkasAMSsources,justastheydidinProgram
mode.TheCCswillnotaffectanyotherTimbres,even
iftheyaresettothesameMIDIchannel.
Notethat.insomecases,theVectorCCsmayhave
beenusedformodulatingtheProgramseffectsvia
Dmod.ThisfunctionalityisnotcarriedintotheCombi;
formodulatingtheCombieffects,usetheCombis
VectorCCsinstead.
IfEnableProgramVectorCCisOff,thenthePrograms
VectorCCswillhavenoeffect.Thiscanbeusefulif
theyareconflictingwiththeCombisVectorCCs.
408
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 17: Vector Envelope
17: Vector Envelope

17PMC
11a
17a
17b
17c
JoysticktocontroltheVectorposition.Itsparticularly willstartatnoteon,andgointoreleaseatnoteoff.All
convenientformodulatingeffects,sinceitstheonly thenoteswillstillshareasingleCCControlEG.
Combiwideprogrammablemodulationsource
outsideofKARMA.
17a: Basic

AllofthenotesontheCombisGlobalChannelsharea setting.
singleCCControlEG.ThisEGstartswhenyoufirst
playanote,andcontinuesaslongasanynotesareheld Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theVector
downonthekeyboard.Whenyoureleaseallofthe VolumeEGstartsfromthephasedeterminedbythe
notes,theEGgoesintoitsreleasephase. firstnoteinthephrase,sothattheEGsforallnotes
beingheldaresynchronizedtogether.
Eachnotethenhasitsown,additionalVolumeControl
EG,whichletsyoucrossfadebetweenProgramsto Mode [Time, Tempo]
createcomplex,evolvingtimbres.TheKeySync Time:WhentheModeissettoTime,youcansetthe
parameterappliesonlytothispernoteEG. EGsegmenttimesinsecondsormilliseconds.
409
Combination mode
timesasrhythmicvalues,usingtheBaseNoteand
Multiplierparameters. Note-on or reset Note-off
Loop

continuetoloopeitherforaslongasyouholdthenote, Y-Axis
Time
(Release)
Transition 0
Loop Type [0->3, 1->3, 2->3, 0<->3, 1<->3]
backwards.
etc.
Loop Type = 1<>3
Inf:TheEGwillloopaslongasthenoteisheld,and Change to
Time
H1 T1 H2 T2 H3 T3 H2 T1 H1
TheVectorEGhasatotaloffivepoints.Sincethe
VectorEGcanloop,thepointsarelabeleddifferently VJS [Off, 04]
fromstandardenvelopes;insteadofnameslikeattack Thishorizontalrowofradiobuttonsletsyoueditthe
anddecay,theyaresimplynumbered04. selectedpointsXYpositionusingtheVectorJoystick.
Sustain and Release Justpressthepointsradiobutton,movetheVector
Joysticktothedesiredlocation.Whenyourefinished,
WhentheEGisinthemiddleofaloop,thereisno
presstheOffradiobuttonagain.
sustainpointperse.However,iftheEGhasalready
completedthespecifiednumberofLoopRepeats,orif WhenyouarenoteditingtheEGsXYpositions,you
LoopRepeatisOff,itwillsustainatPoint3until shouldleavethissettoOff,toavoidinadvertent
release. changestotheEG.
Atrelease,theEGalwaysmovestoPoint4.
Point 0
Hold and Transition times
Position
TheHoldTimesetshowlongtheEGlingersateach
InadditiontoeditingtheXandYparameterswiththe
point,andtheTransitiontimesetshowlongittakesto
standarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsosimplyuse
gofromtheselectedpointtothenext.
theVectorJoysticktosettheposition,asdescribed
Forinstance,thegraphicbelowshowsthesuccession underVJS,above.
ofHoldandTransitiontimeswhentheLoopTypeisset
to1>3.Forclarity,onlytheYaxispositionsareshown. X [127+127]
ThissetsthepointspositionontheXaxis.
Y [127+127]
Hold Time
parameter.
410
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 17: Vector Envelope

froma32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets. Transitiononpage 411.
Tempo. Point 4
dottedeighthnote.
ModeissettoTime.
Thismenusetsabasicrhythmicvalueforthe Transitiononpage 411.
Transitiontime,relativetothesystemtempo.Itapplies
onlywhentheModeissettoTempo.
KARMAcanstartandrestarttheVectorEGinvarious
x (Multiply Base Note by) [0132] ways,asdescribedbelow:
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and CC Control EG
themultiplierissetto3,theEGwillmovefromPoint0 WhenKARMAisOn,italwaysstartsandrestartsthe
toPoint1overadottedeighthnote. CCControlEG,accordingtotheKARMAtrigger
settings.ThisletsKARMAcontrolsoundsoreffectsin
Points 1 and 2 synchronizationwiththeKARMAGE.
Points1and2workexactlylikePoint0,asdescribed Volume Control EGs
above.
Point 3 willstartandrestarttheVolumeControlEGsaswell
astheCCControlEG.Thismeansthattheresulting
Point3alsoworksmuchlikePoints02,withtwomain changesinoscillatorvolumeswillbesynchronized
differences: withtheKARMAGE.
Point3alwaysusesitsownTimewhenmovinginto WhenKeySyncisOn,KARMAdoesnotaffectVector
theloop,regardlessofthedirectionoftheloop. VolumeControl.Eachnotewillhaveitsown,
IftheLoopRepeatsissettoOff,oriftheLoopissetto independentVolumeControlEG,justasifKARMA
1126andhasalreadyplayedthespecifiednumberof wasturnedoff.
times,thentheEGwillstayatPoint3untiltheEG
eithergoesintorelease,orisresetbyKARMA. Entering the EGs release stage
Hold Time
WhentheKARMALATCHswitchisOff,the
ThisworksjustliketheHoldTimeforPoint0,as KARMAcontrolledVectorEG(s)willstarttorelease
describedunderHoldTimeonpage 410. whenyouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard(and
whenKARMAisnolongerreceivinganyinputnotes
fromothersources).
411
Combination mode
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
3:CopyVectorEnvelope.Formoreinformation,
commandsonpage 142.
seeCopyVectorEnvelopeonpage 148.

18PMC
11a
18a
18b
HereyoucansettheCombinationfunctionsoftheSW1 SW2 [Off, , After Touch Lock]

switch,SW2switch,andtheRealtimeModulation
Knob58.Thesesettingsaremadeindependentlyfor Mode [Toggle, Momentary]
eachcombination. AssignsafunctiontotheSW2switch.Thefunctions
youcanassigntotheSW2switcharethesameasfor
theSW1switchwiththeexceptionthanSW1
18a: Panel Switch Assign Mod.:CC#80isreplacedbySW2Mod.:CC#81.
HereyoucanassignthefunctionoftheSW1andSW2
switches.Fordetailsonthefunctionsthatcanbe
assigned,seeSW1/2Assignmentsonpage 1033.
18b: Realtime Modulation Knob Assign
Hereyoucanassignthefunctionoftherealtime
SW1 [Off, , After Touch Lock] modulationknobs5through8.Mostofthefunctions
AssignsafunctiontotheSW1switch.Theon/offstatus thatcanbeassignedarecontrolchanges.Formore
canalsobesaved.Whenyouchangetheassigned information,pleaseseeRealtimeKnobs58
function,thestatuswillberesettooff. Assignmentsonpage 1034.
Mode [Toggle, Momentary] Thefunctionsyouassignhereareperformedwhenyou
operaterealtimemodulationknobs5through8.
Specifiestheon/offactionthatoccurswhenyoupress
theSW1switch.
Toggle:Thefunctionwillalternatebetweenonandoff
Momentary:Thefunctionwillbeononlywhileyou
412
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 19: Set Up Pads
Knob 5 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see

Knob 7 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.

commandsonpage 142.
19: Set Up Pads

19PMC
11a
19a
Thereareeightvelocitysensitivetriggerpadsbelow
theLCDscreen.Theselooklikedrummachinepads, 19a: Pad Chords
andplayingdrumsoundsiscertainlyoneuseforthem.
Pad 1
However,theycanalsoplayuptoeightnotechordson
anysoundnotjustdrums.Thepadsevenremember MIDI Channel [Ch01Ch16, Gch]
thevelocitiesoftheindividualnoteswithinthechord,
ThissetsthepadsMIDIoutputchannel.Youcanset
aswellasthenotesthemselves.Finally,eachPadcan
thistoeitheraspecificchannel(116),ortheGlobal
beassignedtoadifferentMIDIchannel,ifdesired.
MIDIChannel.
Thesesettingsarestoredindependentlyforeach
Ch01Ch16:Thepadwilltransmitontheselected
Combination.
MIDIchannel.AsshowninthediagramPadsand
Youcanassignnotestothepadsdirectlyfromthe MIDIChannel,below,youcan:
keyboardandfrontpanelcontrols,withoutusingthis
UsethisinconjunctionwiththeTimbreMIDI
pageatall.Alternatively,youcanenternotesand
Channelsetting,torouteapadtoaspecificTimbre.
velocitiesusingtheparametersonthispage.
Formoreinformation,seeMIDIChannelon
Regardlessofhowthenoteswerefirstassigned,you
page 415.
UsethiswiththeKARMAModuleInputChannel
Formoreinformation,includingstepbystep
setting,togenerateaphraseorotherKARMA
instructionsandusagetips,seeDrum&ChordPads
functionwhenyouplayaspecificpad.Formore
onpage 53oftheOperationGuide.
information,seeInputChannelonpage 431.
413
Combination mode
Gch:UsetheglobalMIDIChannelsetting.Thisisthe Press CHORD ASSIGN, and then play notes

default.Formoreinformation,seeMIDIChannel Thismethodletsyoucreateachordoutofwidely
(GlobalMIDIChannel)onpage 708. spacednotes,evenifyoucantplayallofthenotes
PadsandMIDIChannel simultaneously.
Gch 1. PresstheCHORDASSIGNbutton.
T01: Piano Gch 2. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes.
T02: Strings Gch
Ifyoulike,youcanalsoplayupto8notesasalegato
Gch
Pad1
2ch T03: Bell 2ch singlechord.Youcantakeaslongasyouliketoplay
Pad2
thephrase.
Gch
notes.
KARMA Module A T01: Piano Gch
In: Gch/Out:Gch Afterpressingthepad,youredone!
Edit notes and velocities using the LCD

KARMA Module B T02: Strings 2ch
Gch In: Gch/Out:2ch
Youcanedittherecordednotesandvelocitiesusing
Pad1
3ch KARMA Module C T03: Bell 3ch enternewnotesthisway.Formoreinformation,please
In: 3ch/Out:3ch
Pad2
seePad1,above.
Notes 1-8 [Off, C1G9 / 001127] Copying and Merging Pads

Theseparametersletyoueditthe8notesassignedto Justasyoucanassignnotestoapadbyplayingthem
eachpad,alongwithaseparatevelocityforeachnote. onthekeyboard,youcanpressapadtocopyits
Toplayfewerthan8notes,justsettheunwantednotes assignednotestoanotherpad.
toOff. Themethodissimilartosteps13above;pressthepad
Off:Selectthistodisablethenote. thatyouwanttocopy,andthenpresstheCHORD
ASSIGNswitch.Thenpressthecopydestinationpad;
C1G9:Thissetsthenotenumber.
theassignmentswillbecopied.
001127:Thissetsthenotesvelocityvalue.Formore
informationonpadsandvelocity,pleaseseePad Youcanalsousethistocombinetheassignmentsof
Mode:FixedVelocityvs.VelocitySensitiveon twoormorepads,uptoamaximumofeightnotes.To
page 414. doso,justpressallofthecopyfrompads
simultaneously,andthenproceedasabove.
Pad Mode: Fixed Velocity vs. Velocity Sensitive Formoredetailedinstructions,pleaseseeDrum&
Eachpadstoresavelocitylevelforeachofits8notes. ChordPadsonpage 53oftheOperationGuide.
ThePADMODEbutton,totherightofthepads,
controlswhetherornotthepadsrespondtohowhard Pads 28
youplay.ItssettingisstoredwitheachProgram, ThesearethesameasforPad1,asdescribedabove.
Combi,andSong.
InFixedVelocitymode,thepadsalwaysusetheir
play. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
InVelocitySensitivemode,hittingthepadvery numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
stronglyproducesthepresetvelocities.Whenyouplay shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
moresoftly,thepresetvelocitiesarescaleddown commandsonpage 142.
accordingly,maintainingthebalancebetweenthenotes 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
inthechord. WriteCombinationonpage 461.
Assigning notes and chords to pads 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see

Youcanassignsinglenotesandchordstothepadsin
threedifferentways.
Play the notes, and then press CHORD ASSIGN 3:CopyPadSetup.Formoreinformation,see
1. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes. CopyPadSetuponpage 148.
2. PresstheCHORDASSIGNbutton.
notes.
Thatsit!Thenotesarenowassignedtothepad.
414
Combination P2: Timbre Parameters 21: MIDI
Combination P2: Timbre Parameters
21: MIDI
21PMC
11a
11b
21a
HereyoucanmakeMIDIsettingsforeachtimbre. Timbre Priority [Off, On]

Thisspecifiesthevoicepriorityforthetimbre.
21a: MIDI On(checked):Timbresforwhichthisischeckedwill
begivenpriority.Ifanewnoteonwouldexceedthe
Timbre 01 availablenumberofvoices,acurrentlysoundingvoice
willnormallybestopped(stolen),allowingthe
Status [Off, INT, EXT, EX2] newlyrequestedvoicetobesounded.Atthistime,
ThisspecifiestheMIDIandinternaltonegenerator timbreswhoseTimbrePriorityischeckedareless
status. likelytohaveavoicestolen.
YoucanalsosetStatusfromtheP0ProgramSelect Forexampleifyouarelayeringmanytimbres,you
page.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStatuson wouldcheckthissettingfortimbresthathavea
page 381. particularlyimportantmusicalrole(suchasdrumsor
bass)andwouldadverselyaffecttheoverallsongif
MIDI Channel [0116, Gch] notesweretobestolenfromthem.However,this
SetstheMIDItransmit/receivechannelforeachtimbre. settingwillhavelittlemeaningifitisturnedonfor
Gch:Thetimbrewillusethechannelthathasbeen mostoralltimbres.Itsagoodideatoleavethis
selectedastheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a). uncheckedforalltimbres,andcheckitonlyfor
importanttimbresthatwouldcauseaconspicuous
WhenStatusisINT,MIDImessageswillbereceived problemifnotesweretodropoutduringthe
onthechannelyouspecifyhere.Ifthissettingisthe performance.
sameastheglobalMIDIchannel,theinternaltone
generatorwillsoundaccordingtotheinternalsettings. Timbres 0216
IfthisissettoEXTorEX2,playingtheOASYSwill
transmitMIDImessagesontheMIDIchannelspecified ThesearetheMIDIrelatedsettingsfortimbres2
here.(Messageswillalsobetransmitted through16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.See
simultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchannel.) Timbre01.
Bank Select MSB (When Status = EX2) [000127]

Bank Select LSB (When Status = EX2) [000127] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Specifiesthebanknumberthatwillbetransmitted numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
whenStatusissettoEX2.Thissettinghasnoeffectif shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
StatusisotherthanEX2. commandsonpage 142.
415
Combination mode
0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
WriteCombinationonpage 461. CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
22: OSC
22PMC
11a
11b
22a
ThesesettingsspecifyhoweachTimbrewillbeplayed. CX3:PolyandMNaresupported(LGTwilloperate
asMN)
22a: OSC IfdifferentInstrumentTypesareselectedforEXi1
and2,MN(Mono)andLGT(Legato)settingswill
Timbre 01 bevalidonlyifthetypeissupportedbyboth.
Force OSC Mode [PRG, Poly, MN, LGT] OSC Select [BTH, OS1, OS2]
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoice SpecifieswhetherthetimbresprogramwillplayOSC1
AssignModesettings,ifdesired. (EXi1),OSC2(EXi2),orboth.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredVoiceAssignMode ForHD1programswhoseOscillatorMode(Program
settingswillbeused.HD1programswillusethe1 11b)isDouble,thissettingletsyouspecifythatonly
1c:VoiceAssignModesettings,andEXiprograms OSC1orOSC2willsound.ForEXiprogramsinwhich
willusetheEXiCommon41csettings. EXi1andEXi2arenotturnedoffintheInstrument
Type(EXiCommon41),thissettingletsyouspecify
Poly:Thetimbrewillplaypolyphonically,regardless thatonlyEXi1orEXi2willsound.
oftheProgramssettings.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2(orEXi1,2)willsoundas
MN(Mono):Thetimbrewillplaymonophonically, specifiedbythesettingsoftheprogram.
regardlessoftheProgramssettings.
OS1:OnlyOSC1(EXi1)willsound.
LGT(Legato):Thetimbreprogramwillsound
monophonically,andwillplaylegatoaccordingtothe OS2:OnlyOSC2(EXi2)willsound.HD1programs
ProgramsModesetting(Program11b). willnotsoundifOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Drums.EXiprogramswillnotsoundifEXi2isturned
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramsPriority OffintheInstrumentType.
setting(Program11c)willdeterminethepriorityof
thenotethatsoundswhenyouplaytwoormorenotes. Portamento [PRG, Off, 001127]
EXiprogramswillignorethissettingiftheprogram ThiscontrolstheTimbresportamento.
doesnotsupporttheVoiceAssignModespecified PRG:Portamentowillbeappliedasspecifiedbythe
bytheselectedInstrumentType. Programsettings.
AL1:Poly,MN,andLGTaresupported. Off:Portamentowillbeoff,eveniftheoriginal
Programsettingsspecifiedforittobeon.
416
Combination P2: Timbre Parameters 22: OSC
001127:Portamentowillbeappliedwiththe Formoreinformation,seeUsingChordmodeon
portamentotimeyouspecifyhere,evenifitisturned page 54oftheOperationGuide.
offbytheprogramsettings.
Source Pad [PRG, 1...8]
Note:notallEXisupportportamento,asdetailed
below;iftheydonot,thenthisparameterwillbe ChordmodeusesthechordsassignedtothePads.This
ignored. selectswhichofthePadstouse.Youcanalsoselect
AL1,STR1,MS20EX,andMOD7:portamentois information,seeUsingChordmodeonpage 54of
supported theOperationGuide.
CX3andPolysixEX:portamentoisnotsupported PRGusesthenotesofthechordstoredintheTimbres
ThisparametercanbecontrolledviaMIDICCs#05 Program,insteadofanyofthechordsintheCombi.
and#65(portamentotimeandon/offswitch, ThismakesiteasytouseChordmodeforsound
respectively),subjecttotwoconditions: specificeffects,suchasoctaves,stackedfifths,andso
on.WhensettoPRG,theTimbrewillnotchange
First,theTimbresStatusmustbesettoINT.For
chordsinresponsetothepads.
moreinformation,seeStatusonpage 381.
Second,ifPortamentoissettoPRG,onlyCC#65 Timbres 0216
(on/offswitch)willapply.CC#05willbeignored.
Hereyoucanmakevoiceassignmentsettingsfor
Max # of Notes [Dynamic, 116] timbres2through16.Thesettingsarethesameasfor
timbre1.SeeTimbre01.
Dynamicisthedefault.Withthissetting,youcanplay
asmanynotesasthesystemallows.
116letsyoulimitthemaximumnumberofnotes t 22: Page Menu Commands
playedbytheTimbre.Voiceswillstillbeallocated ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
dynamically,uptothismaximumnumber.Youcanuse numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
thisto: shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Modelthevoiceleadingofvintagesynthesizers, commandsonpage 142.
suchasthePolysix 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
ControltheresourcesrequiredbytheTimbre,so WriteCombinationonpage 461.
thatmorevoicescanplayonotherTimbres 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Max#ofNotesappliesonlywhentheProgramsVoice ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
AssignModeissettoPoly,orwhenForceOscMode 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
hasbeensettoPoly.WithMono,ithasnoeffect. CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
ThissettingdoesnotlimittheUnisonNumberof
Voices.Forinstance,ifMax#ofNotesissetto6,and
UnisonNumberofVoicesissetto3,youcanplayup
to6notes,eachwith3Unisonvoices.
IndoublePrograms,theMax#ofNotesapplies
equallytobothOSCorEXi.Forinstance,ifMax#of
Notesissetto4,youcanplayupto4notesoneach
OSC/EXi.
Chord
Chord [PRG, Off, Bsc, Adv]
PRGusestheProgramssetting.IftheProgramissetto
Off,thentheChordSWhasnoeffect.
OffdisablestheChordfunction.
Bsc(Basic)recreatesthechordmodeoftheoriginal
Polysix.Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,itwillcutoff
thepreviouschord.ThisoptionignorestheVoice
Assignsettings.
Adv(Advanced)usestheProgramsVoiceAssign
settings,asifeachnoteinthechordwasatransposed
setofoscillatorslayeredwithintheProgram.
Unisonallapply.
settingChordtoAdvanced,VoiceAssigntoMono,
417
Combination mode
23: Pitch
23PMC
11a
11b
23a
Hereyoucanmakepitchrelatedsettingsforeach TransposeandDetunecanbecontrolledviaMIDI
timbre. RPNmessages.Thewaythatthisworksdependson
whetherornottheTimbreusesanHD1Drum
Program.
23a: Pitch
IftheTimbredoesnotuseanHD1DrumProgram
Timbre 01 forexample,ifitusesaSingleorDoubleHD1
Program,oranEXiProgramthenMIDIRPN
Transpose [60+00+60] CoarseTunewillcontrolTranspose,andRPNFine
Adjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinsemitonesteps. TunewillcontrolDetune.
12unitsequaloneoctave. IftheTimbreusesanHD1DrumProgram,MIDI
RPNCoarseTuneandFineTunewillbecombined
WhenStatus(01b,21a)isINT,thisparameterwill tocontrolDetune.Theoverallrangeis1octavefor
affectthepitchessoundedbytheOASYS.When coarsetuneandfinetunetogether.
StatusisEXT,thisparameterwillaffectthenote
numbersoftheMIDInotemessagesthatare Bend Range [PRG, 24+00+24]
transmitted. Specifiestheamountofpitchchangethatwilloccur
Forexampleifyoumakesettingsof+04and+07 whenthepitchbenderisoperated,insemitones.
respectivelyfortwotimbresthataresettoEXT, PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
playingtheCkeywilltransmitaCnotenumberon used.
theglobalMIDIchannel,andatthesametimewill
alsotransmitEandGnotenumbersontheMIDI 24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthe
channelsofthosetimbres. settingintheprogram.
TheMIDIRPNPitchBendChangemessagecanbe
Detune (Use BPM Adj. in Page Menu) receivedtocontrolthisandchangethesetting.
[1200+0000+1200] (Howeveritwillnotbereceivedifthisparameteris
Adjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinonecentunits. settoPRG.)ThismessageisreceivedontheMIDI
channelforeachtimbresetbyMIDIChannel(2
+0000:Normalpitch.
1a).(SeeKARMATransmitMIDIFilter,Pitch
Note:YoucanalsousetheDetuneBPMAdjustmenu Bend72a)
commandtoalteraloopstempoviadetuning.Since
thiswillalterthepitchoftheloopalongwiththe Use Programs Scale [Off, On]
tempo,itsgenerallysuitedonlytounpitched TimbrecanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale
percussiveloops.Formoreinformation,seeDetune (Program11c).
BPMAdjustonpage 464.
On(checked):Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwill
beused.
418
Combination P2: Timbre Parameters 24: Delay
Off(unchecked):ThescalespecifiedbyScale(23b) Random [07]

willbeused. Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandom
deviationwillbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
Timbres 0216
IfStatus(01b,21a)isINT,thissettingwillaffect
Thesearethepitchrelatedsettingsfortimbres2 thepitchproducedbytheOASYS.IfStatusisEXT,
through16.Thesettingsarethesameasfortimbre1. thissettingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenote
Formoreinformation,seeTimbre01. messagestransmittedviaMIDI.
23b: Combinations Scale t 23: Page Menu Commands

Thisspecifiesthescalethatthecombinationwilluse. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Formoreinformation,pleasesee11g:Scaleon numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
page 37. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Type (Combis Scale) [Equal TemperamentUser commandsonpage 142.
Octave Scale15] 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
Selectsthescale. WriteCombinationonpage 461.
Key [CB] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Selectsthetonickeyoftheselectedscale. 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
3:DetuneBPMAdjust.Formoreinformation,see
DetuneBPMAdjustonpage 464.
24: Delay
24PMC
11a
11b
24a
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhenthetimbre Time:Specifythedelaytimeinunitsofmilliseconds
receivesanoteonuntilthesoundbegins. (ms=1/1000thofasecond).
Tempo:SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBaseNote
24a: Delay andTimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBase
Note=q,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelay
Timbre 01 timewillbeequivalentto1000ms.
Mode [Time, Tempo]

Choosestheunitinwhichyouwillspecifydelaytime.
419
Combination mode
Time [ms] [00006000ms, KeyOff] Forexample,ifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote( q )

Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthe andTimesto02,thetimbrewillsoundwithadelayof
timbrebeginstoproducesound,inunitsofms ahalfnote( h )evenifyouchangeTempo( q ).Inthis
(1/1000thofasecond).ThissettingisavailableifMode case,aTempoof60.00BPMwillproducea2000ms
issettoTime. delay,andaTempoof120.00BPMwillproducea1000
msdelay.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.In
thiscase,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustain Timbres 0216
leveloftheprogramsampEGisotherthan0.This
settingisusedwhencreatingharpsichordsounds. Thesearethedelaytimesettingsfortimbres2through
16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.SeeTimbre01.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
Base Note [r w ] t 24: Page Menu Commands

Times [0132] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ThissettingisavailablewhenModeissettoTempo.It numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
specifiesthedelaytimefromnoteonuntilthetimbre shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
beginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevalue commandsonpage 142.
relativetotheTempo( q )(01a). 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,and WriteCombinationonpage 461.
useTimestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecified 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
multiple. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
25: Wave Sequence/KARMA

25PMC
11a
11b
25a
Hereyoucanmakesettingsrelatedtowavesequence
andKARMAfunctionalityforeachtimbre. 25a: Wave Sequence/KARMA
Timbre 01
Wave Sequence Key Sync [PRG, Off, On]
SpecifiesthewavesequenceKeySyncsetting
(Program11e)oftheprogramselectedforthetimbre.
Thissettingisvalidiftheprogramusesawave
sequence.
PRG:Thesettingoftheprogramisused.
420
Combination P2: Timbre Parameters 25: Wave Sequence/KARMA
Off:KeySyncisforcedoff.Thewavesequenceofeach IftheStatus(01b)ofeachtimbreisINT,youcanuse
notewillsynchronizetothesamestep. theTimbreOffControlsettingtostoptheoscillatorof
On:KeySyncisforcedon.Thewavesequencewill eachtimbrefromsounding.
starteachtimeyoupressakey.Ifthewavesequences
havedifferingstepsorrates,theywillproceed
Timbres 0216
independently. ThesearethewavesequenceandKARMArelated
settingsfortimbres2through16.Theyarethesameas
Wave Sequence Swing[%] [PRG, 300+300] fortimbre1.SeeTimbre01.
SpecifiesthewavesequenceSwing%setting
(Program11e)oftheprogramselectedforthetimbre.
Thissettingisvalidiftheprogramusesawave t 25: Page Menu Commands
sequence. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
PRG:Thesettingoftheprogramisused. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
300+300:TheSwing%specifiedhereisused
commandsonpage 142.
regardlessoftheprogramsSwingsetting.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwingonpage 36.
Wave Sequence Quantize Trigger [PRG, Off, On] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ThisallowsyoutooverridetheProgramsWave ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
SequenceQuantizeTriggersetting(Program11d). 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
IfyoureusingmultipleProgramswithrhythmicWave CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
Sequences,youcanusethistosynchronizeallofthe
WaveSequencesatnoteon.
NotethatQuantizeTriggerappliesonlywhenthe
WaveSequencesModeissettoTempo.Formore
information,seeModeonpage 722.
Off:QuantizeTriggerisforcedoff.Thewave
sequencewilltriggerimmediatelyafternoteon.
On:QuantizeTriggerisforcedon.Thewave
sequencepatternwillsynchronizetoeighthnote
timingofthecurrentlysoundingwavesequence;i.e.,
thetriggerwillbequantized.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeQuantizeTrigger
onpage 37.
KARMA Timbre Off Control

[Normal, Timbre Off by KARMA Off, Timbre Off
by KARMA On]
Nrm(Normal):TheKARMAON/OFFswitchwillnot
controlwhetheratimbrewillsound.Normallyyou
willselectNormal.
byOff(TimbreOffbyKARMAOff):Thetimbrewill
soundasusualwhentheKARMAON/OFFswitchis
on.
ThetimbrewillnotsoundwhentheKARMAON/OFF
switchisoff.
Usethiswhenyouwantaspecifictimbreofmultiple
timbressettothesameMIDIchanneltobesilentonly
whenKARMAisoff.
byOn(TimbreOffbyKARMAOn):Thetimbrewill
notsoundwhentheKARMAON/OFFswitchison.
ThetimbrewillsoundasusualwhentheKARMA
ON/OFFswitchisoff.
UsethiswhenyouareusingaKARMAModuleto
controlmultipletimbresthataresettothesameMIDI
channel,andwantaspecifictimbretobesilentonly
whentheKARMAfunctionison.
Forexampleyoucanusethistoplayatwotimbre
layerfromthekeyboardwhenKARMAisoff,anduse
onetimbretosoundthephrasewhenKARMAison.
421
Combination mode
26: EXi Audio Input

26PMC
11a
11b
26a
26b
TheseparametersletyourouteaudiointoEXi Channel Select [Stereo/L+R, Left, Right]

instrumentswhichsupportaudioinput,suchasthe Stereo/L+R:ThisselectionroutesastereosignaltoEXi
STR1.Youcanusethistocreatefeedbackloops,orto withstereoinputs,andanL+RsummationtoEXiwith
processliveorrecordedaudiothroughtheEXis monoinputs.
synthesisengine.
Left,Right:Thisusesonlyamonosignalfromthe
EXiwhichdonotsupportaudioinputwillignorethese selectedchannel.
settings.Formoreinformationonusingaudioinputs
withtheSTR1,see48c:Feedbackonpage 261.
26b: EXi 2
26a: EXi 1 EXi2hasthesamecontrolsasEXi1,above.
Input Source [PRG, Off, Audio Input 1/2...3/4,

Indiv. Output 1/2...7/8, REC 1/23/4,
FX Control 1, 2, IFX 1...12, MFX 1, 2, TFX 1, 2]
PRGusesthesettingstoredintheProgram.Formore
information,see42:EXiAudioInputonpage 168.
Offdisablestheinput.
AudioInput1/23/4andS/P DIFInputL/Rusethe
liveaudiofromtheselectedinput.
L/ROutputandIndiv.Output1/27/8usetheaudio
acablefromtheoutputbacktotheinput).
theselectedbus.
IFX112,MFX1,2,andTFX1,2usetheoutputofthe
selectedeffect.
422
Combination P3: MIDI Filter/Zones 31: MIDI Filter1
Combination P3: MIDI Filter/Zones
31: MIDI Filter1

31PMC
11a
11b
31a
ThesesettingsallowyoutoapplyfilterstotheMIDI Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessage
datathatwillbetransmittedandreceivedbyeach numbers.
timbre116.Forexampleeveniftwotimbresarebeing
playedbythesameMIDIchannel,youcanmake
settingssothatthedamperpedalwillapplytoonebut 31a: MIDI Filter1
nottheother.
Timbre 01
On(checked):TransmissionandreceptionofMIDI
dataisenabled. Enable Program Change [Off, On]
WhenStatus(01b,21a)isINT,operationofthebuilt SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchange
incontrollersorincomingMIDIdatawillapplythe messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
effectofthecheckeditemtotheprogramofthe
correspondingtimbre.(Theeffectdynamicmodulation Enable After Touch [Off, On]
functionisnotaffectedbythissetting.) SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessages
InthecaseofEXTorEX2,operatingacontrolleronthe willbetransmittedandreceived.
OASYSwilltransmitMIDIdataonthechannelofthat Enable Damper [Off, On]
timbre.MIDItransmission/receptionsettingsforthe
entireOASYScanbemadeinMIDIFilter(Global1 SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damper
1b). pedal)messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
TheMIDIFilterpages2and3containMIDIfiltersfor Enable Portamento SW [Off, On]

assignablecontrollers(whosefunctioncanbesetby SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamento
theuser),andiftheseareassignedtoMIDIcontrol on/offmessageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
changes,thefiltersettingswillaffectthosecontrol
changes.Inthiscase,ifthesamecontrolchangeas Enable JS X as AMS [Off, On]
Knob1,2,3,or4hasbeenassignedinMIDIFilter SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages
pages1and2,thesettingsinMIDIFilterpages1and2 (theXaxisoftheOASYSsjoystick)willbereceivedto
willtakepriority.Also,ifthesamecontrolchangeis controltheAMSeffectassignedtoJSX.(Thisisnota
assignedtotwoormorecontrollersintheMIDIFilter filterforMIDIpitchbendmessagereception.)For
pages2and3,checkinganyoneofthemwillenable moreinformation,pleaseseeAlternateModulation
thatcontrolchange. Sources(AMS)onpage 1019.
Off(unchecked):TransmissionandreceptionofMIDI
dataisdisabled.
423
Combination mode
Enable JS+Y [Off, On] Timbres 0216

SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthe ThesearetheMIDIFilter1settingsfortimbres2
OASYSsjoystick,orarealtimemodulationknob through16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.See
assignsetting)willbetransmittedandreceived. Timbre01.
Enable JSY [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthe t 31: Page Menu Commands
OASYSsjoystick,orarealtimemodulationknob
assignsetting)willbetransmittedandreceived.
Enable Ribbon [Off, On] shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(theOASYSs
ribboncontroller,orspecifiedastheassignmentofa 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
realtimemodulationknob)willbetransmittedor WriteCombinationonpage 461.
received. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
32: MIDI Filter2

32PMC
11a
11b
32a
Enable Realtime Control Knob 3 [Off, On]

32a: MIDI Filter2
SpecifieswhetherRealtimeControlknob3MIDI
Timbre 01 CC#79(theOASYSsfilterEGintensity)willbe
received.
CC#74(theOASYSsfiltercutofffrequency)willbe
CC#72(theOASYSsfilter/ampEQreleasetime)willbe
received.
received.
CC#71(theOASYSsfilterresonance)willbereceived.
424
Combination P3: MIDI Filter/Zones 33: MIDI Filter3

Enable Realtime Control Knob 7 [Off, On] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Enable Realtime Control Knob 8 [Off, On] commandsonpage 142.
ThesespecifywhetherMIDImessagewillbereceived 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
forRealtimeControlknobs5through8. WriteCombinationonpage 461.
Timbres 0216 ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
ThesearetheMIDIFilter2settingsfortimbres2
through16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.See
Timbre01.
33: MIDI Filter3

33PMC
11a
11b
33a
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchange
33a: MIDI Filter3 isassigned.
Timbre 01 Enable Foot Pedal [Off, On]

SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE
Enable SW1 [Off, On]
PEDALwillbereceived.Thefunctionisassignedin
Enable SW2 [Off, On] GlobalP2Controllerpage.
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheSW1andSW2 ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchange
switcheswillbereceived. isassigned.
ThefunctionoftheseswitchesisspecifiedintheP1 Enable Other Control Change Messages [Off, On]
SetUpControllerspage.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIcontrolmessagesnot
Thesesettingsarevalidifthesekeysareassignedto coveredintheprecedingitemsMIDIFilterwillbe
SW1Mod.(CC#80),SW2Mod.(CC#81),orPortamento received.
SW(CC#65).
Enable KARMA Waveform SysEx [Off, On]
Enable Foot Switch [Off, On] ThisallowsyoutoenableordisabletheSystem
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE ExclusivemessagesusedbyKARMAWave
SWITCHwillbereceived.Thefunctionisassignedin Sequencing.
GlobalP2Controllerpage.
425
Combination mode
Timbres 0216 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see

ThesearetheMIDIFilter3settingsfortimbres2
through16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.See 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Timbre01. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
commandsonpage 142.
35: Keyboard Zones

35PMC
11a
35a
11b
35b
Thesesettingsspecifythekeyboardrangeinwhich TheLCDscreenwilldisplayalinetoindicatetherange
eachtimbrewillsound. ofnotesandvelocitiesthatwillsound,andwillshow
Thetop/bottomkeyparametersspecifytherangeof theslopeportion.
notesinwhichtimbres116willsound,andthe
top/bottomslopeparametersspecifytherangeover 35b: Keyboard Zones
whichtheoriginalvolumewillbereached.
KeySplit:Bysettingtimbresofdifferentsoundsto Timbre 01
rangesthatdonotoverlap,youcanplaydifferent
soundsindifferentrangesofthekeyboard. Top Key [C1G9]
Layer:Bysettingtherangestooverlap,youcanplay Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
twoormoresoundswithasinglenote. soundeachtimbre.
PositionalCrossfade:Ifyousettheslopes(thegrayed Top Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
portion)tooverlap,thesoundswilloverlap,andthe 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
proportionoftheoverlapwillchangeaccordingtothe Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)over
keyboardlocation. whichthevolumewillbereachedstartingfromthetop
key.
35a: Zone Map 0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetop
key.
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesin
whicheachtimbrewillsound. 12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeone
octavebelowthetopkey.
426
Combination P3: MIDI Filter/Zones 35: Keyboard Zones
ZoneMap
Key zone display Bottom Slope Top Slope Velocity zone display
Bottom Key Top Key
Timbre 1
Top Velocity
Top Slope
Bottom Slope
Timbre 16
Bottom Velocity
C1 E1 G9
1 16
Timbre
72:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesix WriteCombinationonpage 461.
octavesbelowthetopkey. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Bottom Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10, ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72] 2:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)over CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
whichthevolumewillbereachedstartingfromthe
bottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthe
bottomkey.
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
upward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctave
abovethebottomkey.
upward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctaves
abovethebottomkey.
Bottom Key [C1G9]

Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthat
willsoundeachtimbre.
How volume will change according to keyboard location
Volume
Key
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Key Top Key
TopKeyandBottomKeysettingscanalsobeinputby
holdingdowntheENTERswitchandplayinganote
onthekeyboard.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetop
keyofthesametimbre.Norisitpossibleforthetop
andbottomslopestooverlap.
Timbres 0216
Thesearethekeyzonesettingsfortimbres2through
16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.SeeTimbre01.

commandsonpage 142.
427
Combination mode
36: Velocity Zones

36PMC
11a
36a
11b
36b
SetstheTop/BottomVelocityparameterstospecifythe Top Slope [0120]

rangeofvelocitiesthatwillsoundforeachtimbre116, Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
andsettheTop/BottomSlopeparameterstospecifythe originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTop
rangeoverwhichthevolumewillchange. Velocity.
VelocitySwitch:Bysettingtwoormoretimbresto 0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocityzonesthatdonotoverlap,youcanuse velocity.
variationsinplayingdynamicstoplaydifferent
sounds. 120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocity
approachesthetopvelocity.
Layer:Ifyousettwoormoretimbrestovelocityzones
thatoverlap,thesoundswillbeheardtogether. Bottom Slope [0120]
VelocityCrossfade:Ifthesloperanges(grayline) Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
overlap,differentsoundswillbesoundedtogether, originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromthe
andyourplayingdynamicswilldeterminethe BottomVelocity.
proportionofeachsound. 0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthe
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreater bottomvelocity.
thanthetopvelocityforthesametimbre.Norcan 120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocity
thetopslopeandthebottomslopeoverlap. approachesthebottomvelocity.
Bottom Velocity [1127]

36a: Zone Map
Specifiestheminimumvelocityvaluethatwillsound
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesin eachtimbre.
whicheachtimbrewillsound.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee35a:ZoneMapon How volume will change according to keyboard location
page 426. Volume
36b: Velocity Zones

Timbre 01
Velocity
Bottom Slope
Top Velocity [1127] Top Slope
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsound Bottom Velocity Top Velocity
eachtimbre.
428
Combination P3: MIDI Filter/Zones 36: Velocity Zones
TopVelocityandBottomVelocitysettingscanalso
beinputbyholdingdowntheENTERswitchand
playinganoteonthekeyboard.
Timbres 0216
Thesearethevelocityzonesettingsfortimbres2
through16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.See
Timbre01.

commandsonpage 142.
429
Combination mode
Combination P7: KARMA

HereyoucanmakeKARMAfunctionsettingsforthe Normally,whenyouselectanewCombination,its
combination.InCombinationmode,youcanuseall KARMAsettingswillbeloadedaswell.Insomecases,
fourKARMAModules(A,B,C,andD).Thisallows however,youmaywishtotryoutdifferent
youtocreateawidevarietyofsetups,including CombinationswhilekeepingtheKARMAsettingsthe
assigningdifferentphrasesorpatternstodifferent same.
Programs. TheGlobalBasicpageLoadKARMASettingswhen
Turning KARMA on and off changingparametersletyouselectbetweenthesetwo
behaviors.ThereareseparatesettingsforPrograms,
KARMAcanbeenabledordisabledforthecurrent Combis,andSongs.Tosetthisup:
CombinationbyusingthefrontpanelKARMA
ON/OFFswitch.Youcanalsotemporarilydisable 1. GototheGlobalBasicpage.
KARMAforallPrograms,Combinations,andSongs 2. UnderLoadKARMAsettingwhenchanging,set
byusingtheGlobalAllKARMAOffparameter.For theCombinationscheckboxasdesired.
moreinformation,seeAllKARMAOffonpage 701. ChecktheboxtoloadtheindividualCombinations
KARMAsettings.
Linking KARMA settings to Program changes
KARMAsettingscanbesavedindividuallyforeach UnchecktheboxtokeepKARMAsettingsthesame,
Combination.ThisincludesalloftheKARMArelated evenwhenchangingCombinations.
frontpanelbuttons,sliders,andknobs,aswellasthe Formoreinformation,seetheGlobalparameterLoad
onscreenparameters. KARMAsettingswhenchangingonpage 701.

71PMC
71a
71b
71c
HereyoucanselecttheGEthatwillbeusedbyeach
KARMAModule,andspecifytheKeyZoneandMIDI 71a: Combination Name, Load GE
SetupforthefourKARMAModulesusedbythe Options, KARMA T.Sig, Tempo
combination.
Bank [INTAG, USERAG]
Combination [0127]
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
Thesearethecurrentbank,Combination,andTempo.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee11a:Combination
Nameonpage 401.
430
Combination P7: KARMA 71: GE Setup/Key Zones
Load GE Options [Dialogue] Formoreinformation,seeGESelectonpage 384.

Theseoptionsletyouspecifywhetherthevaluesand GE Bank Select [PresetUSER-L]
assignmentsforcontrollerssuchastheKARMA
SLIDERS18andKARMASWITCHES18willbeset ThisselectstheGEbank.ThePresetbankispartofthe
automatically,beinitialized,orbepreservedwhenyou systemsoftware;Userbankscanbeloadedfromdisk.
selectaGE. Formoreinformation,seeGESelectonpage 384.
Formoreinformation,seeLoadGEOptionson GE Category Select [ArpeggioReal-Time]

page 7. ThisletsyouselectaGEbycategory,fromArpeggio
throughRealTime.
[GE/TS, 1/416/4, 1/816/8, 1/1616/16] Key Zones
Thisspecifiesthetimesignatureofthephrasesor
patternsgeneratedbytheKARMAModules.Formore Bottom (Key Zone Bottom) [C1G9]
information,seeKARMAT.Sig(TimeSignature)on
page 8. Top (Key Zone Top) [C1G9]
Formoreinformation,seeKeyZoneonpage 101.
Selected KARMA Module Info Note:InCombinationmode,eachKARMAModule
alsohasitsownMIDIInputChannelandOutput
GE Category [ArpeggioReal-Time]
Channel,asdescribedunder71c:MIDII/O,below.
GE No., GE Name [Preset 0000...2047,
USER-AL 000...127] Transpose
RTC Model [List of RTC Models] Thru In Zone [Off, On]
ThisshowstheGEsRTCModel,asspecifiedinternally Transpose In Zone [36+36]
foreachpresetGE.Formoreinformation,seeLoad
GEOptionsonpage 7. Thru Out Zone [Off, On]
Module Zone Display Transpose Out Zone [36+36]

PleaseseeKeyZoneonpage 101.
ThekeyzonesettingsofeachofthefourKARMA
Modulesaredisplayedasasolidblueline.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeModuleZone 71c: MIDI I/O
Displayonpage 102. SpecifiestheMIDIinput/outputchannelsforthefour
KARMAModulesusedbythecombination.
71b: GE Setup/Key Zones Input Channel [0116, Gch]
GE SpecifiestheMIDIinputchannelforeachKARMA
Module.
Run [Off, On] MIDIdatafromthekeyboardorfromMIDIINthat
PleaseseeRunonpage 384. matchesthespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeinputtothe
KARMAModule.(SeeKARMAMIDI
Solo [Off, On] Input/OutputChannelinthediagrambelow.)
PleaseseeSoloonpage 384. Gch:TheMIDIchannelwillalwaysmatchtheglobal
GE Select [Preset 00002047, USER-A MIDIchannel(GlobalP11a).
U-A000...U-A127, ..., USER-L U-L000...U-L127] WhenusingKARMAwithkeyboardplayingin
ThisselectstheGEfortheKARMAmodule.Thereare Combinationmode,youwillnormallyselectGch.
atotalof3,584tochoosefrom:2,048presetGEs,and
1,536rewritableUserGEs(12banksof128each).
KARMA - MIDI Input / Output Channel
01ch Timbre 1
Global MIDI Ch = 01 KARMA ON/OFF = ON 01ch Timbre 2
In : 01ch KARMA Module [A] Out : 01ch 01ch Timbre 3

01ch
01ch Timbre 4
In : 01ch KARMA Module [B] Out : 02ch
02ch Timbre 5
In : 01ch KARMA Module [C] Out : 03ch
02ch Timbre 6
MIDI IN In : 16ch KARMA Module [D] Out : 04ch

16ch 03ch Timbre 7
04ch Timbre 8
431
Combination mode
Gch Also [Off, On] TheMIDIdatafromtheKARMAModulewillbe

DetermineswhetherinputontheGlobalChannelwill transmittedonthespecifiedMIDIchannel,andwill
alsobeusedfortheselectedModule,inadditiontothe soundtimbreswhosechannelmatches.(Seethe
channelthatisselectedintheInputChannel. diagrambelow,KARMAMIDIInput/Output
Channel.)
Off(unchecked):TheselectedModulewillreceive
datafromthespecifiedInputChannel,andwillnot Gch:TheMIDIchannelwillalwaysmatchtheglobal
receivedatafromtheGlobalInputChannel. MIDIchannel(GlobalP11a).
On(checked):TheselectedModulewillreceivedata Timbre Thru (when KARMA Off) [Off, On]

fromthespecifiedInputChannelandtheGlobalInput InputChannelandOutputChannelsettingsare
Channel. normallyvalidonlywhentheKARMAON/OFF
ThisisusefulwhenusingapadonaspecificMIDI switchison.
ChanneltosenddataintoaModule.TurningGch Asanexception,TimbreThruspecifieswhetherMIDI
AlsoOn(checked)allowsakeyboard(sendingonthe datathathaspassedthroughtheKARMAModulewill
GlobalChannel)toalsocontrolthesameModule. besent(Thru)totimbreswhenKARMAisoff.
NotavailableunlesstheModulesInputChannelis On(checked):WhentheKARMAfunctionisoff,MIDI
settosomethingotherthanGchorglobalMIDI datathathaspassedthroughtheKARMAModulewill
channel. besentviatheOutputChanneltotimbres.
Output Channel [0116, Gch] Off(unchecked):WhentheKARMAfunctionisoff,
SpecifiestheMIDIoutputchannelforeachKARMA MIDIdatathathaspassedthroughtheKARMA
Module. Modulewillnotbesenttotimbres.
KARMA ON/OFF = ON (1) (2)
In : Gch KARMA Module [A] Out : Gch

In : Gch Timbre 1: Bass
In : Gch KARMA Module [B] Out : 02ch

In : 02ch Timbre 2: Piano
KARMA ON/OFF = OFF (1)


Timber Thru
KARMA ON/OFF = OFF (2)


Timber Thru
Ifyouwishtoapplyseparatephrasesorpatternsby InputChannel:Gch
usingKARMAModuleAfortimbre1andKARMA OutputChannel:Gch
ModuleBfortimbre2,settheMIDIchannelsas
TimbreThru:Off
follows:
5. SetKARMAModuleBasfollows.
Example setting 1 GESelect:AnyrifffromtheKeyboardGEcategory
1. SettheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a:MIDI InputChannel:Gch
Channel)to01.
OutputChannel:02
2. Settimbre1asfollows.
TimbreThru:Off
ProgramSelect:Bassprogram
6. TurntheKARMAON/OFFswitchon.
MIDIChannel(21):Gch
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,KARMAModuleAwill
3. Settimbre2asfollows. playthebassoftimbre1,andKARMAModuleBwill
ProgramSelect:Pianoprogram playthepianooftimbre2.(SeeKARMA
MIDIChannel(21):02 ON/OFF=ON(1)(2)inthediagramabove.)
4. SetKARMAModuleAasfollows. 7. TurntheKARMAON/OFFswitchoff.
GESelect:AnyrifffromtheBassGEcategory
432
Combination P7: KARMA 71: GE Setup/Key Zones
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,youwillhearthebassof 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
timbre1,whoseMIDIchannelissettoGch.Since Sceneonpage 151.
timbre2issettoMIDIchannel2,itwillnotsoundin 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
responsetothekeyboard.(SeeKARMA seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
ON/OFF=OFF(1)inthediagramabove.)
Example setting 2 CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
1. Followsteps13fromExamplesetting1,above.
2. SetKARMAModuleAasfollows.
GESelect:AnyrifffromtheBassGEcategory
InputChannel:Gch
OutputChannel:Gch
TimbreThru:Off
3. SetKARMAModuleBasfollows.
GESelect:AnyrifffromtheKeyboardGEcategory
InputChannel:Gch
OutputChannel:02
TimbreThru:On
4. TurntheKARMAON/OFFswitchon.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,theresultwillbethe
sameasforstep6inExamplesetting1.(SeeKARMA
ON/OFF=ON(1)(2)inthediagramabove.)
5. TurntheKARMAON/OFFswitchoff.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,youwillhearthebass
timbre,whoseMIDIchannelisGch.Thepianoof
timbre2willalsobeplayedbythekeyboardbecauseof
theTimbreThruOnsettingofKARMAModuleB.
(SeeKARMAON/OFF=OFF(2)inthediagram
above.)
Module Timbre MIDI Display

Thisshowsthetimbresthatwillbesoundedbyeach
KARMAModule,accordingtotheMIDIoutput
channelsettingsofeachKARMAModuleandthe
MIDIchannelofeachtimbre(21a).

commandsonpage 142.
page 465.
Sceneonpage 151.
433
Combination mode

72PMC
11a
72a
72b
thisbendrange.Thisensuresthatthepitchbend
72a: MIDI Filter datageneratedbytheKARMAModulesGEwill
functionasintended.Atthistime,pitchbenderdata
Receive MIDI Filter producedbyoperatingthejoystickwill
ForeachKARMAModule,specifywhethertofilterthe automaticallybeadjustedtoproducethesamebend
MIDIcontroldatareceivedbytheModule. effectaswhenKARMAisoff(inmostcases).If
multipletimbresarebeingcontrolledbyone
After Touch [Off, On] KARMAModule,thesettingsofthelowest
numberedtimbrewillbeused.
Pitch Bend [Off, On]
CCA, CCB [Off, On]
Damper (CC#64) [Off, On]
Envelope1, Envelope2, Envelope3 [Off, On]
JS+Y (CC#01) [Off, On]
GE Notes [Off, On]
JSY (CC#02) [Off, On]
WaveSeq [Off, On]
Ribbon (CC#16) [Off, On]
Formoreinformation,seeTransmitMIDIFilteron
Other CC [Off, On] page 104.
PleaseseeReceiveMIDIFilteronpage 103.
72b: CC Offset
Transmit MIDI Filter
WhentheKARMAfunctionisturnedon,MIDIcontrol
ForeachKARMAModule,specifywhethertofilterthe
changemessagesaretransmittedtothetonegenerator.
MIDIcontroldatageneratedbytheGEselectedforthe
ThisletsyouuseMIDIcontrolchangemessagesto
Module.
controlprogramsoundsoreffectswhentheKARMA
Pitch Bend [Off, On] functionison.
PleaseseeTransmitMIDIFilteronpage 104. ThesemessageswillbetransmittedontheOutput
Channel(71c)oftheKARMAModule.
IftheKARMAfunctionisonandaKARMA
Moduleisgeneratingpitchbenddata,theBend Formoreinformation,see,72c:CCOffseton
Range(23a:Pitchonpage 418)ofthetimbrewill page 105.
becontrolledasfollows.
ThepitchbendrangespecifiedwithintheKARMA
GEwillbetransmittedfromtheKARMAModuleso
thatthecorrespondingtimbrewillbeforciblysetto
434
Combination P7: KARMA 73: Module Parameters-Control
CC Number [Off, MIDI CC#00CC#95] 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,

Value [000127]
t 72: Page Menu Commands page 465.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese Sceneonpage 151.
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
commandsonpage 142. Sceneonpage 151.
0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
WriteCombinationonpage 461. seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 7:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. CopyFromProgramonpage 461.

73PMC
11a
73a
HereyoucansetKARMAModuleControlparameters. Timbre Zone Bypass [Off, On]

InCombinationmode,fourKARMAModules(A,B,C, Specifieswhetherthekeyzonesettings(35)and
andD)canbeused. velocityzonesettings(36)ofthetimbrewillbe
appliedtothephraseorpatterngeneratedbythe
73a: Module Parameter-Control KARMAModule.
On(checked):Thekeyzonesettingsandvelocityzone
Control settingsofthetimbrewillbebypassedforthephrase
orpatterngeneratedbytheKARMAModule.The
Transpose [36+36] settingsofthetimbrewillbeignored,andthenotes
Force Range [Off, Lowest, Highest, generatedbytheKARMAModulewillbesounded.
C3-B3[1], C3-B3[2]] Off(unchecked):Thekeyzonesettingsandvelocity
zonesettingsofthetimbrewillbeappliedtothe
Force Range Wrap [C#C] phraseorpatterngeneratedbytheKARMAModule.
NotesgeneratedbytheKARMAModulewillnotbe
Root Position [Off, On] soundediftheyareoutsidethekeyzoneorvelocity
PleaseseeControlonpage 106. zoneofthetimbre.
435
Combination mode
Clock Advance t 73: Page Menu Commands

Mode [Auto, Dyn, Auto+Dyn, Auto+Dyn2] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Chord Trigger Mode commandsonpage 142.
[Off, 1st, Chord1, Chord2, Chord3] 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
Velocity Sense Bottom [001127]
PleaseseeClockAdvanceonpage 108.
Note Map 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
Mode (Note Map Mode)
[Off, On-Main, On-Rpt, On-All] information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
Table (Note Map Table) page 465.
[Custom, Gtable 1Maj 7 -> oct] 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 151.
Transpose (Note Map Transpose) [12+12]
Chord Track (Note Map Chord Track) [Off, On] Sceneonpage 151.
Keyboard Track (C2 Ref)
(Note Map Keyboard Track) [Off, On]
Note Map Table Display CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
PleaseseeNoteMaponpage 108.

74PMC
11a
74a
Specifiesthetriggerconditionsandlatchon/offforthe
GEthatisselectedforeachKARMAModule,AD.
436
Combination P7: KARMA 74: Module Parameters-Trigger
Note:TheactualoverallGEPhraseLengthis
74a: Module Parameter-Trigger determinedbythenumberofPhasePatternSteps,the
PhaseLengthMode,andvariousotherinternalGE
Control settings.
Quantize Trigger [Off, On] Cutoff Module A, B, C, D [Off, On]
Quantize Window [x! q ] WhenthisModuleseffectistriggered,itcancutoffany
effectsthatareplayingonthespecifiedModules.
Update On Release [Off, On] Thisismainlyforusewhenyoudonotwanteffects
PleaseseeControlonpage 110. fromtheModulesoverlappingeachother,butwant
themtoappearcontinuous(i.e.4saxriffs,4different
Delay strummingeffects,etc.).Forexample,youcould
triggerdifferentModulesinseparateareasofthe
Delay Start [Off, Fixed, 64T 4x1] keyboard,andonlyhaveoneplayingatanyparticular
Delay Start Fixed [0000ms5000ms] time.
PleaseseeDelayonpage 111. Thiscanalsobeusedtocyclebackandforthbetween
Modules,witheachModuleshuttingofftheprevious
Note Modulewhenitistriggeredin.
Note Trigger [Any, AKR, 1st, Dyn]

PleaseseeNoteTriggeronpage 111.
Note Latch [Off, On] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
PleaseseeNoteLatchonpage 111. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Note:InCombinationmode,thiscanbeturnedon/off
foreachKARMAModule.AKARMAModulefor 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
whichthisisOn(checked)willbeinaLatchOn WriteCombinationonpage 461.
conditionwhentheLATCHswitchison(LEDlit). 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Envelope1, Envelope2, Envelope3
Trigger [Any, AKR, 1st, Dyn] seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464.
Latch [Off, Sus1, Rel1, Sus2, Rel2]
PleaseseeEnvelope1,Envelope2,Envelope3on page 465.
page 111.
Module Trigger Sceneonpage 151.
NoteandenvelopetriggeringofaKARMAModule 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
canbecontrolledbytheoperationofanotherKARMA Sceneonpage 151.
Module. 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Trigger By Module [Off, A, B, C, D]
WhentheKARMAModuleyouspecifyhereadvances CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
bythelengthspecifiedinGEPhraseLength,the
KARMAModuleitselfwillbetriggeredautomatically,
startingthephraseorpattern.
Forexampleyoucouldmakesettingssothatharp
glissandophrasesspecifiedforeachKARMAModule
aretriggeredconsecutively.Alternatively,youcould
makesettingssothatthefourKARMAModulesare
connectedinseries,andplayrepeatedly.
GE Phrase Length [000100%]

SpecifiesapercentageofaModulesoverallGEPhrase
LengthafterwhichtriggeringofthisModulewill
occur.WhentheKARMAModulechosenabove
advancesbythepercentageoflengthspecifiedhere,
thisModulewillbeautomaticallytriggered.
ThisisvalidexceptwhenTriggerByModuleisOff.
SettingaModuletobetriggeredbyapercentageof
itsownphrasewillhavenoadditionaleffect.
437
Combination mode

75PMC
75a
75b
75c
HereyoucanedittheRealTimeParametersoftheGE GE Real-Time Parameters 0132

foreachKARMAModule,AD.Inaddition,youcan
assignGERealTimeParameterstotheKARMAReal HereyoucaneditGEparametersandassignGE
TimeControlssothatyoucancontrolthephraseor parameterstoKARMARealTimeControlsetc.foruse
patterninrealtimewhileyouplay. withModuleControl=Master.
GE PARAMETER (GE Real-Time Parameter)

75a: GE Number & Name, RTC Select, MIN (Minimum Value) [5000+5000]
and Tempo
MAX (Maximum Value) [5000+5000]
GE Number & Name
[0000: Arp Model 01 Up/Dn VALUE [5000+5000]
2047: Tempo Env Repeats] ASSIGN [---, Slider18, Slider (SW)18,
ThisshowstheGEselectedfortheModule.Formore SW18, DynaMIDI18]
information,pleasesee06b:GESelectonpage 8.
POLARITY [+, ]
GE RTC Select [116, 1732]
Pleasesee75b:GERealTimeParameterson
ThisswitchestheGErealtimeparameterdisplay. page 113.
116:GEparameters116willbedisplayed. Note:Normally,theMIN,MAX,VALUE,and
1732:GEparameters1732willbedisplayed. POLARITYparametersofeachmodulearespecified
inmoduleA,B,C,andD.Theseparametersettingsare
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] possibleifyouspecifyASSIGNinMasterA,B,C,and
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTempoonpage 5. D.
ForexampleifyouwanttouseSlider1tocontrolthe
75b: GE Real-Time Parameters for GEREALTIMEPARAMETERNo.1ofmodulesA,B,C,
andDwhenModuleControlissettoMaster,you
Module Control = Master wouldsettheMaster,A,B,C,andDsGEREALTIME
ModuleControl=Masterletsyouuseasingle PARAMETERNo.01ASSIGNtoSlider1.Iftheseare
controller(e.g.,Slider1)tocontrolmultipleKARMA settoASSIGN,youareabletoedittheMIN,MAX,
Modulessimultaneously,orcontrolindividual VALUE,andPOLARITYparametersforMaster,A,B,
parametersfromdifferentModulesconvenientlyatthe C,andD.
sametime. Inthisway,youcanmakeGErealtimeparameter
settingsindependentlyofmodulesA,B,C,andD.
438
Combination P7: KARMA 75: GE Real-Time Parameters
1Bar4Bars:Theselargervaluessetthewindowin
75c: GE Real-Time Parameters for termsofmeasures,relativetoboththetempoandthe
Module Control = A, B, C, D timesignatureofthePerformanceortheindividual
ModulesGE.
ModuleControl=A,B,CandDletyoucontrolGE
RealTimeParametersindependentlyforthe Note:iftheKARMAT.Sig(TimeSignature)issetto
correspondingKARMAModule. somethingotherthan0GE/TS,thenthespecified
TimeSignatureiswhatwillbeusedtocalculatethebar
GE Real-Time Parameters 0132 lengths.IftheKARMAT.Sigissetto0GE/TS
(meaningthateachModulesGEusesitsownstored
HereyoucanedittheGERealTimeParametersofeach
internaltimesignature),thenthebarlengthis
KARMAModuleandassignthemtoKARMAReal
calculatedusinganinternalaveragingformulabased
TimeControlsforusewithModuleControl=Master,
ontheTimeSignaturesofallGEsthatareinuse.For
A,B,CandD.
moreinformation,seeKARMAT.Sig(Time
PleaseseeGEParameter0132onpage 113. Signature)onpage 8
Note:Scenechangesselectedatatimingthatiswithin
75d: Module Control Scene Matrix a32ndnoteoftheSceneChangeQuantizeWindow
settingwillbeconsideredlate(shownbythepink
colorinthediagramabove),andwillcausethescene
changetooccurimmediately.Ifthescenechangeis
laterthanthis,itwillbeconsideredearly(shownby
theyellowcolorinthediagramabove),andwilloccur
atthenextmetricdivisionwcorrespondingtothe
SceneChangeQuantizeWindow.(Duetospace,notall
settingsareshowninthediagram.)
Hereyoucanconvenientlyviewandedittheselected
ScenesforeachofthefiveModuleControllayersatthe Scene Selection
sametime.YoucanalsosetaSceneChangeQuantize
ThisareaincludesarowofbuttonsforeachModule,
Windowthatcontrolsatimeintervalforwhenthe
withthetoprowcorrespondingtotheMastersetting.
scenechangeswilloccur,andviewinformationabout
Eachrowhaseightbuttonscorrespondingtotheeight
upcomingscenechanges.
frontpanelSceneSwitches.Thisletsyouselectany
sceneinanylayerdirectly,withoutchangingthe
Scene Change Quantize Window
ModuleControlsetting.Thegridshowsanoverview
Scene Change Quantize Window ofwhichSceneisselectedinanyofthelayersatany
[x! q, 1 Bar4 Bars] giventime.
Thisspecifiesthemetricdivisionbywhichscene Master [18]
changeswillbequantized,inanyoftheModule
Layers.Dependingonthesetting,thismaydelaythe A [18]
scenechangefromoccurringuntilthenextbeat,next
bar,orseveralbarslater.
B [18]
x q :Thesesmallervaluessetthewindowasanote C [18]
valuerelativetothetempo.Fortripletbasedpatterns,
youmayneedtoselectoneofthetripletbasedsettings D [18]
ifyouintendtoperformscenechangesoffthebeat. Youcantouchanyrowandchangescenesinany
Module,orchangeScenesintheMasterLayerand
consequentlychangetheotherlayersiftheyarelinked
toit(ifLinkScenesToMasterison(checked)).
439
Combination mode
Ifyoutouchthelabelontheleftside,youwillchange tocontrolsinboththeMasterandModuleLayers,
theModuleControlsettingtotheselectedlayer,and dependingonwhethertheywerelastmovedinthe
thelightorangerowwillindicatethecurrentModule Master.
Controlsetting. Ofcourse,anyModulesRealTimeParametersthatare
onlyassignedtocontrolsintheMasterLayerforthat
Link Scenes To Master ModulewillalsobeaffectedbytheMasterScenes,
A [Off, On] unlessEnableRTCByMasterisOff(unchecked).
WhenEnableRTCByMasteristurnedOff
B [Off, On] (unchecked),anyparametersthatareassignedto
controlsinboththeMasterandModuleLayersmay
C [Off, On]
change,becausethevaluesfortheModuleLayer
D [Off, On] willbesentoutforwhateversceneisselectedinthe
ModuleLayer.
On(checked):ChangingaSceneintheMasterLayer
selectsanewSceneforthelinkedModuleLayer.All Inotherwords,ifDuration%(Gate)isassignedinboth
fourModulesindependentlystoretheircurrentScene layerstoaSlider,anditwaslastmovedintheMaster
inthetoplevelMasterScene.ItcanbethesameScene Layer,theGEwillbeplayingwiththeMasterLayer
foreachlinkedModule,orcompletelydifferentScenes. durationsetting.IfyoudisconnecttheMasterLayer,
ThisallowscompleteflexibilityastowhichModules thedurationvalueindicatedbytheModuleLayerwill
havewhichScenesinwhichcombinations. besentout.YoucanadjusttheModuleLayers
Duration%(Gate)controltosoundthesameatthat
Thisisthemodeyouwouldusemainlyin
point,ifdesired.
Combinationmode,forrealtimeplay,andforsetting
upSongTemplates(Combinationsmadetobesong TurningEnableRTCByMasterbackonwillresend
inspirationtemplates,i.e.Scenessimilartoverses, theMasterLayersdurationsetting,ifitwasthelast
choruses,fills,etc.)Forexampleifmasterbuffer1is movedcontrolconnectedtothedurationinthatMaster
selected,ModuleA(e.g.,drumpattern)couldbe Scene.
switchedtoscene5,andModuleB(e.g.,bassriff)
couldbeswitchedtoscene8. Scene Status
Off(unchecked):ChangingaSceneintheMaster Thisareadisplaysinformationrelatedtoupcoming
LayeronlychangesModuleparametersassignedto scenechanges.WhenusingtheSceneChangeQuantize
KARMASLIDERSandSWITCHESintheMaster Windowwithlongersettingssuchas1,2or4bars,you
Layer.TheModuleLayersdonotchangeScenes,but canselectascenechangeinanyofthelayersseveral
staywheretheyare. beatsormoreinadvanceofwhenyouwantittooccur.
TheControlSurfaceandSceneMatrixwillchangeto
Eachlayerisindependentthisisthemodeyouwould
thenewsceneimmediately,butinternallythescene
usemainlyinthesequencerwhenyouwanttocopyin
changewillnotoccuruntilthespecifiedtimeinterval
fourunrelatedKARMAGEsoneatimeandusethem
haselapsed.TheSceneStatusareadisplaysamessage
inasong.Inthiscase,youdonotusuallywantthemto
indicatingapendingscenechangeforaparticular
beconnectedtoeachother.
layer,fromthecurrentscenetothenewscene.Youcan
Enable RTC By Master usethistocancelapendingscenechangeifdesired.
Forexample,ifyouareonScene2inModuleAand
A [Off, On] youselectScene8forModuleA,themessage2>8
willbedisplayednexttotheModuleAlabel.The
B [Off, On] SceneMatrixandControlSurfaceimmediatelychange
toScene8,butinternallythescenechangehasnotyet
C [Off, On] occurred.YoucanreselectScene2andtherebycancel
D [Off, On] theupcomingscenechange.
Off(unchecked):IftherearecontrolsintheMaster Notethatyoucandothisinanyorallofthelayers
LayerthatareassignedtothespecifiedModule, independently,andeachlayerwilldisplayamessage
movingthemorchangingscenesintheMasterLayer indicatingtheupcomingscenechange.
willhavenoeffectontheModulesparameters. Note:ifyouhaveselectedascenechangeinadvance,
ThisallowsyoutodisconnectaModuleLayerfrom andithasnotyetoccurred,theControlSurfaceand
theMasterandfreezeitscurrentsound(in variouseditingpagessuchastheKARMAGEPage06
conjunctionwithturningLinkScenesToMasteroff). andtheControlSurfaceRT/KARMAPage09dwill
showthenewscenesparameters.Editingthemwhile
On(checked):IftherearecontrolsintheMasterLayer thescenechangeispendingwillactuallybeeditingthe
thatareassignedtothespecifiedModule,moving upcomingscene,andyouwillnothearanychanges
themorchangingscenesintheMasterLayerwillaffect untilthescenechangehasactuallyoccurred.
theparametersandsoundoftheModule.
Note:InordertocompletelydisconnectaModulefrom
alterationbytheMasterLayer(freezeitssettings),
youneedtouncheckbothLinkScenesToMasterand
EnableRTCByMaster.IfyouonlydisableLink
ScenesToMaster,thesettingsoftheMasterScenes
maystillinfluenceanyparametersthatarehookedup
440
Combination P7: KARMA 76: Perf Real-Time Parameters
t 75: Page Menu Commands information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ page 465.
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu Sceneonpage 151.
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see Sceneonpage 151.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation, CopyFromProgramonpage 461.

76PMC
11a
76a
HereyoucanassigncontrollerstoKARMA
PerformanceRealTimeParameters(Perf.RTP)outside 76a: Perf Real-Time Parameters (18)
oftheGERealTimeParametersthatcontrolthe
Group [Off, PE, Mix, Control, Trigger,
internalsettingsoftheGE.Examplesincludethe
KARMAKeyZoneparameters(Combination71b)
Key Zones, Random Seeds]
andKARMAControlandTriggerparameters Parameter [---, Time Signature
(Combination73,74). Retrigger Each Time]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee76:PerfRealTime
Parametersonpage 441. Min (Minimum Value) [8192+8191]
Max (Maximum Value) [8192+8191]
Value [8192+8191]
Formoreinformationontheseparameters,see76b:
PerfRealTimeParametersonpage 116.
A/B/C/D [Off, On]

SpecifieswhetherthePerfRealTimeParameter
settingswillbevalidforeachModule.
On(checked):ThePerfRealTimeParametersettings
willbevalid.
441
Combination mode
Off(unchecked):ThePerfRealTimeParameter 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
settingswillbeignored. information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
page 465.
Assign [---, Slider18, Slider18(SW),
SW18, DynaMIDI18]
Sceneonpage 151.
Formoreinformation,seeAssignonpage 117.
Polarity [+, ] Sceneonpage 151.
Formoreinformation,seePolarityonpage 117. 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Group: PE (Performance)
Formoreinformation,seeGroup:PE(Performance) CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
onpage 117.
Group: Mix
Formoreinformation,seeGroup:Mixonpage 117.
Run [0000, 0001]

AssignthefunctionofRun(06b).
+0000:Off
+0001:Run
PleaseseeRunonpage 384.
Group: Control
PleaseseeGroup:Controlonpage 117.
Group: Trigger
PleaseseeGroup:Triggeronpage 118.
Trigger By Module [+0000+0004]

AssignthefunctionofTriggerByModule(74a).
+0000:Off
+0001:A
+0002:B
+0003:C
+0004:D
PleaseseeTriggerByModuleonpage 437.
GE Phrase Length [+0000+0100]

AssignthefunctionofGEPhraseLength(74a).
PleaseseeGEPhraseLengthonpage 437.
Group: Key Zones

Formoreinformation,seeGroup:Zoneonpage 118.
Group: Random Seeds

Formoreinformation,seeGroup:Randomon
page 119.

commandsonpage 142.
442
Combination P7: KARMA 77: Dynamic MIDI
77: Dynamic MIDI

77PMC
11a
77b
DynamicMIDIisafunctionthatletsyouusethis Destination [Off, RT Params Control

instrumentscontrollersandMIDIcontrolmessagesto Buffer Latch]
controlspecificKARMAfunctions.
Formoreinformation,seeDestinationonpage 121,
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePleasesee77: andDynamicMIDISources&Destinationson
DynamicMIDIonpage 120. page 1038.
A/B/C/D [Off, On]

77a: Dynamic MIDI (18) SpecifiestheModulesforwhichtheDynamicMIDI
Input (Input Module) [AD] settingswillbevalid.
IndicateseitherA,B,C,orDastheKARMAModule On(checked):TheDynamicMIDIsettingswillbe
thatwillbetheDynamicMIDISourceinput. valid.
MIDIcontroldatathatmatchestheInputChannel Off(unchecked):TheDynamicMIDIsettingswillbe
(71d)oftheKARMAModulethatyouselectherewill ignored.
beusedastheSource.IftheSourceisNoteInZone
L (Last Triggered) [Off, On]
orNoteOutZone,thezonewillbethekeyzone(7
1c)oftheKARMAModulethatyouselecthere. TheDynamicMIDIsettingswillbevalidonlyforthe
lasttriggeredKARMAModule(A,B,C,orD).For
Source [Off, JS+Y #01Vel Out Z] example,thisallowsyoutoassigndifferentModulesto
Formoreinformation,seeSourceonpage 120,and betriggeredfromdifferentpartsofthekeyboard,and
DynamicMIDISources&Destinationsonpage 1038. dependingonwhichonewaslasttriggered,routea
DynamicMIDIeffecttoit,suchasDirectIndexing.
Polarity [+, , +/, /+]
PleaseseeBottom(RangeBottom)onpage 120.
Formoreinformation,seePolarityonpage 121.
Top (Range Top) [000127]
Formoreinformation,seeTop(RangeTop)on t 77: Page Menu Commands
page 121.
Action (Range Action) [M, T, C] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Formoreinformation,seeAction(SourceAction)on shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
page 121. commandsonpage 142.
443
Combination mode
2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation, 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464. Sceneonpage 151.
3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
page 465. 7:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
Sceneonpage 151.
78: Random Seeds

78PMC
11a
78b
78a
TheRandomSeedspageallowsyoutocontrolsomeof Forexample,ifyouselectRhythmSeed1forallfour
therandomizablecharacteristicsofaModulesGE. KARMAModules,runningthesameGEunderthe
DifferentModulesusingthesameGEcanhavevarious sameconditionswillcausetherandomnessofthe
randomizablecharacteristicslinkedsothatthey rhythmstobeidentical.Ifmanytypesofrandomness
sharethesamestartseeds,generatingphraseswiththe arebeingused,suchasduration,velocityetc.,setting
samecharacteristics. alltheseedstothesamevaluewithineachgroupwill
Formoreinformation,pleasesee78:RandomSeeds causetheresultingphrasestobeidentical.
onpage 122. Conversely,ifyouselectRhythmSeed1,2,3,and4
respectivelyforthefourKARMAModulesandrunthe
sameGEunderthesameconditions,therandomness
78a: Seed oftherhythmswillbedifferent.Ifmanytypesof
randomnessarebeingused,suchasduration,velocity
Rhythm (Rhythm Seed) etc.,settingalltheseedstothedifferentvalueswithin
A [1, 2, 3, 4] eachgroupwillcausetheresultingphrasestobe
completelydifferent.
B [1, 2, 3, 4] Normally,youwillselectdifferentvalues,suchasA:1,
B:2,C:3,D:4.
C [1, 2, 3, 4]
Selectidenticalvaluesifyouwanttwoormore
D [1, 2, 3, 4] KARMAModulestoplaythesamerandomizableGE
Allowsyoutosharethesamerandomrhythm inunisonorharmonywiththesamerandomizations.
characteristicsbetweenmodulesusingthesameGE. Changingthesesettingswillnothaveanyeffectfor
FortheGEselectedforeachKARMAModule,youcan GEsthatwerenotdesignedtoutilizevarious
oftencontrolthedegreeofrandomnessforvarious randomcapabilities.
parametergroupssuchasrhythm,duration,velocity
etc.Therandomcalculationsareperformedbasedon
initialstartingvalues,knownasseeds.
444
Combination P7: KARMA 78: Random Seeds
Duration (Duration Seed) t 78: Page Menu Commands

Controlstherandomizablecharacteristicsforthe
DurationGroup,similartothoseexplainedunder ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Rhythm(RhythmSeed)above.Formore numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
information,seeDurationGrouponpage 970. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Index (Index Seed) 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
ControlstherandomizablecharacteristicsfortheIndex WriteCombinationonpage 461.
Group,similartothoseexplainedunderRhythm 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
(RhythmSeed)above.Formoreinformation,see ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
IndexGrouponpage 973. 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
Cluster (Cluster Seed)
Controlstherandomizablecharacteristicsforthe information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
ClusterGroup,similartothoseexplainedunder page 465.
Rhythm(RhythmSeed)above.Formore
information,seeClusterGrouponpage 977. 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 151.
Velocity (Velocity Seed) 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Controlstherandomizablecharacteristicsforthe Sceneonpage 151.
VelocityGroup,similartothoseexplainedunder 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Rhythm(RhythmSeed)above.Formore seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
information,seeVelocityGrouponpage 979.
CCA/B (CCA/B Seed)
CCs/PitchGroup,similartothoseexplainedunder
information,seeCCs/PitchGrouponpage 982.
Drum (Drum Seed)

ControlstherandomizablecharacteristicsfortheDrum
Group,similartothoseexplainedunderRhythm
(RhythmSeed)above.Formoreinformation,see
DrumGrouponpage 1003.
WaveSeq (WaveSeq Seed)

WaveSeqGroup,similartothoseexplainedunder
information,seeWaveSeqGrouponpage 986.
78b: Start/Loop
Link to Start Seed [Off, On]
IfturnedOn,whenyouspecifyaStartSeedvaluefor
oneoftheactiveKARMAModules,theStartSeedof
allotheractiveModulesinthePerformancewillbeset
tothesamevalue.
Thisisusefulforquicklytryingoutnewsettingsonall
Modulesatthesametime.
ThissettingisignoredwhileRandomCaptureis
beingexecuted.
Start Seed [21474836480:

Random+2147483647]
Retrigger Each Time [Off, On]
Pleasesee78b:Startonpage 122.
445
Combination mode
79: Name/Note Map

79PMC
11a
79a
79b
18andKARMASWITCHES18,viewGlobalNote
MapTables,andedittheCustomNoteMapTable
storedwiththeCombi.
79a: Name
EachModuleControllayerhasitsownsetofnamesfor
the8KARMASLIDERSand8KARMASWITCHES.
Formoreinformation,see79b:ModuleAon
page 125.
Master, Module AD
Slider18 [000 (no name)
571 Waveform Select [16]]
Switch18 [000 (no name)
571 Waveform Select [16]]
79b: Note Map

Table [Custom, Global 164]
Note In [C1G9]
Note Out [Remove, C1G9]
Octave Replicate [Off, On]
Reset button
Formoreinformation,see79b:NoteMapon
page 446.
446
Combination P7: KARMA 79: Name/Note Map
79PMC
79b
79b: Note Map (Custom) Sceneonpage 151.
Table [Custom, Global 1...64] 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
In (Note In) [C-1G9]
Out (Note Out) [Remove, C-1G9] information,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC
Nameonpage 465.
Table Grid 8:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
Octave Replicate [Off, On] CopyFromProgramonpage 461.
9:CopyNoteMap.Formoreinformation,see
Reset CopyNoteMaponpage 143.
Formoreinformation,see79c:NoteMapon
page 125.
Display Module [A, B, C, D]

HereyoucanselecttheKARMAmodulethatyouwant
toedit,andviewtheNoteMapTable.

commandsonpage 142.
page 465.
Sceneonpage 151.
447
Combination mode
Combination P8: Insert Effect

Youcanalsospecifythebusroutingfortheprogram Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
usedbyeachtimbre116.Forinstance,youcan: MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
Sendtheoutputofatimbretoaninserteffect FormoredetailsontheInsertEffects,seetheEffect
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect Guideonpage 787.
81: Routing1
81PMC
81a
11a
11b
81b
Specifiesthebustowhichtheprogramoscillator(s) effect.Thetypeofinserteffect,theon/offstatus,and
usedbyeachtimbre116willbesent.Youcanalsoset thechainsettingscanbeeditedintheP8InsertFX
thesendlevelstothemastereffectsfromthispage. page.
81a: Routing Map

Thisshowsthestatusoftheinserteffects.
Thisareashowstheinserteffectrouting(BusSelect),
thenameoftheassignedeffect,theon/offstatus,
chaining,andtheoutputbusthatfollowstheinsert
448
Combination P8: Insert Effect 81: Routing1
81b: Routing1
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv. Out Assign) Dkit [Off, On]
YoucanselectthisonlyiftheTimbresProgramisa
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrums).This
parametercanalsobeeditedfromtheP8Routing2
page.
On(checked):TheBusSelect,FXControlBus,Send1,
andSend2settingsforeachkeyoftheselecteddrum
kitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyouwanttoapply
anindividualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument,or
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.Out Assign)
tosendindividualdruminstrumentstoAUDIO
OUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL). [L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetimbresprogram
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedrum
oscillator.Thisparametercanalsobeeditedfromthe
instrumentshavethesameBusSelectsettings
P8Routing2page.
accordingtotheirtype,asfollows.
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus.
SnaresIFX1
IFX112:OutputtotheIFX112buses.
KicksIFX2
18:Thetimbrewillbeoutputinmonofromthe
TomsIFX3
correspondingAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)1,2,
CymbalsIFX4 3,4,5,6,7,or8.
Percussion,etc.IFX5 1/27/8:Thetimbrewillbeoutputinstereoaccording
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumKit toitspansettingfromthecorrespondingAUDIO
IFXPatchpagemenucommand. OUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)pairs1/2,3/4,5/6,or7/8.
Off(unchecked):TheBusSelect,FXControlBus,and Off:ThetimbrewillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,
Send1/2settingswillbeused.Alldruminstruments IFX112buses,orIndividual18buses.ChoosetheOff
willbesenttothespecifiedbus. settingifyouwanttheprogramoscillatoroutputofthe
timbretobeconnectedinseriestoamastereffect.Use
Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)tospecifythe
sendlevels.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusing
eachtimbresBusSelectandtheChaintoandChain
settings(55a)thatfollowtheinserteffect.
449
Combination mode
Example:InsertingasingleIFXintomultipletimbre
Example:InsertingaseparateIFXintoeachtimbre,andtheninsertinganIFXatthefinalstage
Example:SharingaportionofatimbresIFXchainwithanothertimbre
Send1 (MFX1) [000127] Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1

Send2 (MFX2) [000127] sectionofthefrontpanel,orfromtheP0Control
Foreachtimbre,theseparameterssetthesendlevelto SurfacepageoftheLCDscreen.Herestheprocedure
mastereffects1and2.Thesesettingsarevalidwhen foreditingthesesettingsfromthefrontpanel.
BusSelectissettoL/RorOff.WhenIFX112are 1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXER
selected,thesendlevelstomastereffects1and2areset TIMBRE/TRACKswitchtoselecteithertimbres1
bytheSend1andSend2parametersoftheInsertFX 8or916.
page,afterthesoundhaspassedthroughIFX112.
IfBusSelectissetto18or1/27/8,thesesettings CHANNELSTRIP.
areignored.
3. UsetheMIXERSELECT1/98/16switchestoselect
ControlchangeCC#93canbeusedtocontrolthe thetimbrewhosesendlevelsyouwanttoadjust.
Send1level,andCC#91tocontroltheSend2,and 4. UseMIXCHANNELSTRIPFXSEND1(knob7)
modifytheirrespectivesettings.Thesemessages andFXSEND2(knob8)tocontrolthesend
willbereceivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedfor levels.
eachtimbreintheP2:MIDIchannelpage.
Theactualsendlevelsaredeterminedby OFF,thiswillcontrolOSC1Send1(toMFX1)
multiplyingthisvaluewiththesendlevelSend1 OSC2Send2(toMFX2).IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.
andSend2(Program81f,85b)foreachoscillator OutAssign)issettoIFX112,thiswillcontrol
oftheprogramselectedforthetimbre. Send1andSend2(P8InsertFXpage).
Thesesettingsspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutput
busandmastereffectsendlevelsfortimbres2through ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.SeeTimbre01. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
commandsonpage 142.
450
Combination P8: Insert Effect 82: Routing2
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see 4:DrumKitIFXPatch.Formoreinformation,see
CopyInsertEffectonpage 153. DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 466.
82: Routing2
82PMC
81a
11a
11b
82a
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutput UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparate
bus,effectcontrolbus,andRECbusforeachtimbre1 soundtocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.Youcan
through16. usetwoFXControlbuses(eachisatwochannelstereo
bus)tocontroleffectsinvariousways.
82a: Routing2 Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuses
onpage 790.
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number) REC Bus (All OSCs to) [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4]
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv. Out Assign) Dkit [Off, On] ThesesettingssendtheoutputofthetimbretotheREC
Youcanselectthisonlyifthespecifiedprogramisa buses(fourmonochannels:1,2,3,4).
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrums).These TheRECbusesarededicatedinternalbusesfor
settingscanalsobemadeintheInsertEffectRouting1. recording,usedforsamplinginthevariousmodesor
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBusSelect forrecordingaudiotracksinSequencermode.
(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)Dkitonpage 449. InCombinationmode,youcanresampleyour
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.Out Assign) keyboardorKARMAperformance,orsamplean
[L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off] externalaudiosignalfromtheAudioInputs.
Foreachtimbre,theseparametersspecifythebusto NormallyyouwillsetSourceBus(08c)toL/R,sothat
whichtheprogramoscillator(s)willbesent.The youcansamplethesignaloftheL/Rbusline,suchas
currentsettingscanalsobeviewedintheRouting yourkeyboardorKARMAperformance.However,
Map.ThisparametercanalsobeeditedfromtheP8 youcanuseaRECbusifyouwanttosampleonlyan
Routing1page.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus audioinputwhileperformingonthekeyboardor
Select(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)onpage 449. KARMAfunctionwhicharebeingoutputviaLandR.
Ifdesired,multipleaudioinputscanbemixedtoa
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2] RECbus,orthedirectsignalfromanaudioinputcan
SendstheoutputofthetimbretoanFXControlbus bemixedtoaRECbusalongwiththesoundfroman
(twochannelstereoFXCtrl1or2). inserteffectandsampled.Alternatively,youcan
resamplethekeyboardperformanceofonlyspecific
timbres.Formoreinformation,seethediagramSource
Bus=RECBus1/2onpage 16.
451
Combination mode
Off:ThesignalwillnotbesenttoaRECbus.Normally
youwillleavethisoff. t 82: Page Menu Commands
14:Theoutputofthetimbrewillbesenttothe ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
correspondingRECbus.ThePansetting(01b)ofeach numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
timbrewillbeignored,andthesignalwillbesentin shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
monaural. commandsonpage 142.
1/2,3/4:Theoutputofthetimbrewillbesentinstereo 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
tothecorrespondingpairofRECbuses.Thesignalis WriteCombinationonpage 461.
sentinstereotoRECbuses1/2or3/4accordingtothe 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Pansetting(01b)ofeachtimbre. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Timbre 0216 (Timbre Number) 2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see

Thesesettingsspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutput
bus,effectcontrolbus,andRECbususedbytimbres2 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
through16.Thesearethesameasfortimbre1.See SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
Timbre01. 4:DrumKitIFXPatch.Formoreinformation,see
DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 466.
85: Insert FX
85b 85PMC
11a
85a
However,unlikeinProgrammode,youcanusea
85a: IFX differentMIDIchanneltomodulateeacheffect,if
Hereyoucanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1 desired.ThisincludesthepostIFXPan(CC#8),Send1,
through12,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthe andSend2settings,aswellastheeffectsdynamic
postIFXmixersettings.Forinserteffects,thedirect modulation(Dmod).TosettheMIDIchannel,usethe
sound(Dry)isalwaysstereoinandout.The ChparameterontheIFX112page(87a).
dependsontheeffecttype. IFX1
Fordetailedexplanationsoftheindividualeffects, Fordetailedinformationontheseparameters,see8
pleaseseetheEffectGuideonpage 787. 5b:IFXonpage 131.
ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinProgram
mode.Formoreinformation,pleasesee85b:IFXon
page 131.
452
Combination P8: Insert Effect 85: Insert FX
IFX1 [000185]
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
Chain to [IFX2IFX12] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Chain [Off, On] commandsonpage 142.
Pan(CC#8) (Post IFX Pan) [L000C064R127] 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see

Bus Sel. (Bus Select) [L/R, 18, 1/27/8, Off] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2]
REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4] CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
Send1 [000127] 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
Send2 [000127]
4:InsertIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeInsert
Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1 IFXSlotonpage 154.
and2.SeeSend1(MFX1)onpage 450.
IFX212 Slotonpage 155.
6:CleanUpIFXRoutings.Formoreinformation,
Theseparametersspecifythetypeofeachinserteffect,
seeCleanUpIFXRoutingsonpage 156.
itson/offstatus,chaining,andpostIFXmixersettings.
WiththeexceptionofChaintoandChain,the
parametersarethesameasforIFX1.Formore
information,pleaseseeIFX1onpage 131.

IFX11: Chain to [IFX12]
85b: Effect/EXi Fixed Resource Meter

FX
EXi FIXED
FREE FOR VOICES
Thenumberofvoicesyoucanplayisaffectedbyhow
effectsandEXiarebeingused.Thismetershowsthe
resourceallocationasanapproximatepercentage(%)
ofthetotalprocessingpower.
onEXifixedresourcesonpage 382,andAbout
effectsresourcesonpage 787.
453
Combination mode
86: Track View

86PMC
86a
86b
WhenyoumovefromthispagetotheP8IFX112
86a: Track View page,theIFXyouselectedherewillbeselected.
Hereyoucanviewthetimbreoutputandinserteffect ForexampleifyouselectTimbre03,onlytheinsert
routing. effectsusedbytimbre3willbeshown.
Used in Tracks
Theupperandlowerrowsofboxeswitheightboxesin
eachrowindicatethetimbrethatisbeingsenttothe
correspondinginserteffect.(Theeightupperboxes
correspondtotimbres18,andtheeightlowerboxes
correspondtotimbres916.) OUTPUTindicatestheBusSelectsettingsthatfollow
theinserteffect.Thistellsyoutheoutputdestinationto
InthisexampleyoucanseethatIFX7and8arebeing whichtheaudiosignalwillbesent.
usedbytimbres6and7,aswellasbytimbre1.So,any
changestotheseeffectswillaffectallthreetimbres.
86b: Selected
Timbre Select [Timbre 01Timbre 16]
HereyoucanspecifytheEffectTypeandOn/Off
Hereyoucanselectthetimbrethatwillbeshownin
statusoftheinserteffectslotselectedbyTrackSelect.
theTrackViewscreen.
(86a:TrackView,above)
ThelowerlineshowstheprogramnameandMIDI
channelofthetimbre.
Thescreenshowstheinserteffect(s)usedbythe t 86: Page Menu Commands
selectedtimbre. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Slot [IFX1IFX12] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Thisindicatestheslotnumber,effecttype,effecton/off commandsonpage 142.
status,andcontrolchannelforthechainedinsert
effects. 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
Selectedareabelow,youcanspecifytheEffect 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
TypeandOn/Offstatusoftheselectedeffectslot. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Thisisalsotheeffectslotthatwillbeaffectedbythe 2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
pagemenucommandsInsertIFXSlotandCutIFX CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
Slot. 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
454
Combination P8: Insert Effect 87: IFX 112
4:InsertIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeInsert 6:CleanUpIFXRoutings.Formoreinformation,
IFXSlotonpage 154. seeCleanUpIFXRoutingsonpage 156.
Slotonpage 155.
87: IFX 112

87PMC
87a
87b
Thispageletsyoueditthedetailedparametersofthe Ch (Control Channel) [Ch0116, G ch, All Routed]

throughIFX12.
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheInsertFXor ThisparameterspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillbe
TrackViewpages.Formoreinformation,see85: usedtocontroleffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod),
InsertFXonpage 452and86:TrackViewon panfollowingtheinserteffect(CC#8),Send1,and
page 454. Send2.
Thechannelnumberofthetimbreroutedthroughthis
Effects Modulation: Dmod IFXwillbefollowedbya*displayedattherightof
Ch0116.IftwoortimbreswithdifferentMIDIchannel
Mosteffectshaveoneormoreparameterswhichcan
settingsareroutedthroughthesameIFX,this
bemodulatedinrealtime.IntheOASYS,thisiscalled
parameterspecifieswhichofthesechannelswillbe
DynamicModulation,orDmodforshort.
usedtocontroltheeffect.
ForacompletelistofDmodsources,seeDynamic
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a)willbe
usedtocontroltheeffect.Normallyyouwillsetthisto
YoucanusedifferentMIDIchannelstocontrol Gch.
Dmodforeacheffect,ifdesired,asselectedbythe
AllRouted:Thechannelofanytimbreroutedthrough
Ch(ControlChannel)parameter.
thiseffectcanbeusedtocontroltheeffect.(Channels
ofeachroutedtimbrewillbeindicatedby*.)
87a: IFX1
Drum Kits and the MIDI Control Channel
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On] IfaTimbreisusingaDrumKit,andtheTimbresBus
Select(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)DKit(81b)isenabled,
thiseffectstheMIDIControlChannelaswell.Inthis
case,theTimbresMIDIchannelwillbeusedtocontrol
Turnstheinserteffecton/off.Thisislinkedwiththe anyeffectwhoseChissettoAllRouted,regardlessof
on/offsettingintheP8InsertFXpage. theBusSelect(Global53b)settingsorthesettingsof
theDrumKitIFXPatchpagemenucommand.
455
Combination mode
P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, --------] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see

EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
writablefactorypresets.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program, WriteFXPresetonpage 158.
Combi,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsofpresets
canbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk.
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeCombiyoudontneedtostorethemas
anEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuse
yourfavoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile
workingonaparticularCombi,andthenlaterusethe
sameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram,Combi,or
Song.
ownsettings.
writtenaprogram,orselectedanewCombi.Selecting
thissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Combissavetheeffectsparametersettings,but
Combi,theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto
.
Formoredetails,seeUsingEffectPresetson
page 135.
IFX1 Parameters
Hereyoucansettheeffectparametersoftheinsert
effectyouchoseintheP8InsertFXpage.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeInsertEffects
(IFX1IFX12)onpage 794.
87b: IFX212
effectsselectedintheInsertFXpage.
TheparametersforIFX2throughIFX12arethesameas
forIFX1.Formoreinformation,pleasesee87a:IFX1
onpage 455.
t 87: Page Menu commands

commandsonpage 142.
456
Combination P8: Insert Effect 89: Common FX LFO
89: Common FX LFO

89PMC
89a
89b
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize Sync (Reset) [Off, On]

LFObasedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchas
phasers,flangers,filters,andsoon. Source (Dmod Source) [List of Dmod Sources]
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI Frequency [0.0220.00 Hz]
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividual
effectstillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveform MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On]
andphase.
BPM [MIDI, 040.00240.00]
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhether
touseoneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousethe Base Note [r w ]
individualeffectsfrequency,sync,and/orresetsettings
instead.ThisisdoneviatheeffectsLFOType Times [0132]
parameter;selectIndividualtousetheeffectssettings, TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
orCommon1or2tousetheCommonLFOs. Fordetails,see89a:CommonFXLFO1onpage 136.
89a: Common FX LFO1 89b: Common FX LFO2

Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01Ch16, G ch] TheseparametersarethesameasforCommonFX
LFO1.Formoreinformation,pleasesee89a:
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
CommonFXLFO1onpage 136.
modulation(Dmod)forCommonLFO1and2.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.Thisisthedefault. t 89: Page Menu Commands
commandsonpage 142.
3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
457
Combination mode
Combination P9: Master/Total Effect

Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthemastereffectsand Makedetailedsettingsformastereffectsandtotal
totaleffects.Forinstance,youcan: effects
Routeasoundtoanmastereffectsandtotaleffects Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 787.
91: Routing
85b 91PMC
11a
91a
91b
91c
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsand
totaleffects,andturnthemon/off. 91a: MFX1, 2
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotal MFX1
effectsareinsertedintotheL/Rbus.
MFX1 [000185]
Return 1 [000127]
MFX2
MFX2 [000185]
Return 2 [000127]
Chain
Chain Level [000127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91a:MFX1,2on
page 138.
458
Combination P9: Master/Total Effect 92: MFX1
91b: TFX1, 2 91c: Master Volume

TFX1 Master Volume [000127]
TFX1 [000185]
TFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
TFX2 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
TFX2 [000185] commandsonpage 142.
TFX2 On/Off [Off, On] WriteCombinationonpage 461.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91b:TFX1,2on
page 139.
2:CopyMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
CopyMFX/TFXonpage 157.
92: MFX1
92PMC
92a
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyou
selectedforMFX1intheP9Routingpage. 92a: MFX1
Effects Modulation: Dmod Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Thisislinkedwiththe
Mosteffectshaveoneormoreparameterswhichcan on/offsettingintheP9Routingpage.
bemodulatedinrealtime.IntheOASYS,thisiscalled Ch (Control Channel) [Ch0116, G ch]
ForacompletelistofDmodsources,seeDynamic
YoucanusedifferentMIDIchannelstocontrol SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
Dmodforeacheffect,ifdesired,asselectedbythe modulation(Dmod)forthemastereffect.
Ch(ControlChannel)parameter. Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeused
forcontrol.
459
Combination mode
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a)willbe Note:Combinationssavetheeffectsparameter
usedforcontrol.NormallyyouwillusetheGch settings,buttheydontsavethenumberoftheselected
setting. EffectPreset.IfyouselectanEffectPreset,andthen
savetheCombination,theEffectPresetsettingwill
P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, --------] revertto.
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe Formoredetails,seeUsingEffectPresetson
settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16 page 135.
userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re
writablefactorypresets. MFX1 Parameters
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program, Hereyoucansettheeffectparametersoftheinsert
Combination,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsof effectyouchoseintheP9Routingpage.
presetscanbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk. Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically Guideonpage 787.
storedwiththeCombinationyoudontneedtostore
themasanEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasierto
reuseyourfavoritesettings. t 92: Page Menu Commands
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
workingonaparticularCombination,andthenlater numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
usethesameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram, shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Combination,orSong. commandsonpage 142.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare 0:WriteCombination.Formoreinformation,see
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFX WriteCombinationonpage 461.
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
P01P15:ThesecontainpresetdatathatKorgplansto ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
provideinthefuture.Werecommendthatyoustore 2:CopyMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
yoursettingsinU00U15. CopyMFX/TFXonpage 157.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyour 3:SwapMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
ownsettings. SwapMFX/TFXonpage 158.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen 4:WriteFXPreset.Formoreinformation,see
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect, WriteFXPresetonpage 158.
writtenaCombination,orselectedanew
Combination.Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwill
nothaveanyeffect.
93: MFX2
94: TFX1
95: TFX2
effectstypes,usetheP9Routingpage.
TheparametersofMFX2,TFX1,andTFX2arethesame
asforMFX1.Formoreinformation,pleasesee92:
MFX1onpage 459.
460
Combination: Page Menu Commands ENTER + 09: shortcuts for menu commands
Combination: Page Menu Commands
ENTER + 09: shortcuts for menu

commands
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,which
provideaccesstodifferentutilities,commands,and
options,dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon.
Youcanusethemenucommandsentirelyfromthe
touchscreen,bypressingthemenubuttoninthe
upperrighthandcornerofthescreenandthen
selectinganoptionfromthemenuthatappears.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownunique
menucommands,themenusarestandardizedasmuch
aspossible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthe IfyouuseCategoryorSubCategorytospecifya
firstmenuiteminProgram,Combination,and categoryforthecombinationyouarewriting,youwill
Sequencemodes. beabletoselectthatcombinationbyitscategoryorsub
categoryinCombinationP0:Play.
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationby
usingashortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenu Thenamesofthecombinationcategoriescanbeedited
items: inCombiCategory(Global32).
1. HolddowntheENTERkey. Note:YoucanalsousetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE
switchtowriteacombinationinthesamewayas
WriteCombination.PresstheSEQUENCER
selectthedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
REC/WRITEswitchtoopenthedialogbox,andwrite
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1for thecombination.Inthiscase,thedatawillbewrittento
thesecond,andsoon. thecurrentlyselectedcombination.
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthe
commandcallsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappear Exclusive Solo
ontheLCD,andyoucanproceedjustasifyoud
Thiscommandisavailableoneverypagein
selectedthecommandfromthetouchscreen.
Combinationmode.WhenExclusiveSoloisOn,only
oneTimbreissoloedatatime;whenitisOff,multiple
Timbrescanbesoloedtogether.
Write Combination
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeExclusiveSoloon
ThiscommandwritesaneditedCombinationintothe page 142.
OASYSinternalmemory.Itisavailableoneverypage
inCombinationmode.
Thisletsyou: Copy From Program
Saveyouredits Thiscommandisavailableoneverypagein
RenametheCombination Combinationmode.ItcopiesEffectsand/orKARMA
settingsfromaselectedProgramtothecurrent
AssigntheCombinationtoaCategory Combination.ThisletstheProgramsoundthesameas
MarktheCombinationasaFavorite itdidinProgrammode.
CopytheCombinationtoadifferentBankand 1. SelectCopyFromProgramtoopenthedialog
number box.
BesuretoWriteanyCombinationthatyouwishto
save.AneditedCombinationcannotberecoveredif
youdonotwriteitbeforeturningoffthepoweror
selectinganotherCombination.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteProgramon
page 142.
2. UseProgramtoselectthecopysourceprogram.
3. SelecttheIFXAll,IFXAllused,MFXs,andTFXs
optionstospecifywhich,ifany,ofthePrograms
effectssettingstocopy.
461
Combination mode
IFXAll:Thesettingsofallinserteffectsettings(the 6. UsetheModulefieldtoselectthecopy
contentsoftheInsertFXpageandtheIFX112effect destinationKARMAModule;eitherA,B,C,orD.
parameters)ofthecopysourceprogramwillbe 7. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecopy.Ifyou
copied. decidenottoexecute,presstheCancelbutton.
IFXAllused:Onlytheinserteffectsusedbythe
copysourceprogramwillbecopied.Thecopied
settingswillbepackedintovacantslots(i.e.,slots Optimize RAM
with000:NoEffect,unlesssuchslotsarelocated
OptimizeRAMisavailableontheAudioIn/Sampling
insidethechain).
tabofthePlaypage.Thiscommandreorganizes
Note:Copysourceinserteffectssetto000:NoEffect unusedspaceinRAM,allowingthefullamountof
willnotbecopied.However,if000:NoEffectis remainingmemorytobeused.
locatedinsidethechain,itwillbecopied.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOptimizeRAMon
MFXs:Allmastereffectsettingsofthecopysource page 143.
programwillbecopied.
TFXs:Alltotaleffectsettingsofthecopysource
programwillbecopied. Select Sample No.
AbouttheBusSelect(81b,82a,85a)setting SelectSampleNo.isavailableontheAudio
RegardlessoftheIFXAll,IFXAllused,MFXs,and In/SamplingtabofthePlaypage.
TFXssettings,willbesettoDKitifthecopysource Thisspecifiesthesamplenumberintowhichthe
programsUseDKitSettingischecked.In sampleddatawillbewritten.Youcanalsospecify
conjunctionwiththis,theDrumKitIFXPatch whetherthesamplewillautomaticallybeconvertedto
settingwillberesettothedefaultsetting. aprogramaftersampling.SelectSampleNo.canbe
IfIFXAllischecked,theBusSelectsettingofthe selectedifyouhaveselectedRAMastheSaveto
copysourceprogramwillbecopied.Ifthecopy destination.
destinationtimbreBusSelectwassettoIFX1 Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSelectSampleNo.
IFX12,itwillautomaticallybesettoL/R.Ifyou onpage 143.
checkIFXAllused,theroutingwillbe
automaticallysettomatchthecopysource
program. Select Directory
IfIFXAllandIFXAllusedisunchecked,thenthe
SelectDirectoryisavailableontheAudioIn/Sampling
copysourceBusSelectsettingwillbeignored.orif
tabofthePlaypage,whenthesamplingSaveTo
theBusSelectofthecopysourceprogramand
parameterissettoDISK.
copydestinationtimbreissettoIFX1IFX12,itwill
automaticallybesettoL/R. Whensamplingtodisk,thisletsyousetthedisk,
directory,andfilenamefortheresultingWAVEfile.
4. IfyoucheckwithKARMA,thePrograms
KARMAsettingswillalsobecopied. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSelectDirectoryon
IfthisisOn(checked),theKARMAModulesettings page 144.
ofthecopysourceprogramwillbecopiedtothe
KARMAModuleyouspecifyinstep6.TheSetUp
Padssettingswillbealsobecopied. Auto Sampling Setup
InCombinationmode,theKARMAModules AutoSamplingSetupisavailableontheAudio
InputChannelwillbesettoGch,itsOutput In/SamplingtabofthePlaypage.
ChannelwillbesettotheMIDIchannelofthe Thiscommandautomaticallysetssamplingrelated
timbreyouspecifyinstep5,andTrackThruwill parametersinCombinationmode.Thisisahelpful
beturnedOn(checked). conveniencewhenyoureresamplingyour
5. UsetheTofieldtospecifythecopydestination performanceonacombination,orwhenyoureusinga
timbre. combinationasaguidewhilesamplinganexternal
Theparametersforeachtimbrewillbeinitialized. source.Youcanalsousethiscommandtoinitializethe
Thecopysourceprogramwillbeassignedto settings.
Program(01b:TimbreProgramSelecton
page 380).
TheMIDIChannel(21a)settingwillnotchangeif
withKARMAischecked.IfwithKARMAis
unchecked,MIDIChannelwillbeautomatically
settoGch.
TheBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)(21a)setting
willnotchange.
TheStatus(21a)settingwillautomaticallybeset
toINT.
TheP1SetUpControllersettingsofthecopy
sourceprogramwillbecopied.
462
Combination: Page Menu Commands Copy Tone Adjust
Initialize:Setssamplingrelatedparameterstotheir AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheTone
defaultstate. Adjustparameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
ResampleCombinationPlay:Makessettingsso 6. ToexecutetheCopyToneAdjustcommand,press
youcanplayacombinationandresampleyour theOKbutton.Toexitwithoutcopyingthe
performance. controls,presstheCancelbutton.
RECAudioInput:Makessettingssoyoucan
sampleanexternalaudiosourcewhilelisteningto
yourselfplayacombination. Reset Tone Adjust
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoSampling ResetToneAdjustisavailableontheControlSurface
Setuponpage 144. pagewhenCONTROLASSIGNissettoTONE
ADJUST.
ThiscommandaffectsonlytheselectedTimbreor
Copy Tone Adjust Track,asopposedtotheentireCombinationorSong.It
CopyToneAdjustisavailableontheControlSurface resetstheToneAdjustsettingsforallofthe
pagewhenCONTROLASSIGNissettoTONE Track/TimbresKnobs,Switches,andSliderstotheir
ADJUST. defaultvalues.
ThiscommandreplacestheToneAdjustsettingsofthe 1. SelecttheTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack
selectedTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack (Sequencermode)toreset.
(Sequencermode)withthoseofanyotherProgram, Youcaneitherusetheparameterontherightsideof
Timbre,orTrack. thedisplay(asshownbelow),orusethisControl
1. SelecttheTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack Surfaceshortcut:
(Sequencermode)whoseToneAdjustsettingsyou PressandholdtheTONEADJUSTbutton
wanttoreplace. WhileholdingTONEADJUST,pressoneofthe
Youcaneitherusetheparameterontherightsideof PLAY/MUTEbuttonstoselectTimbres/Tracks18,
thedisplay(asshownbelow),orusethisControl oroneoftheSELECTbuttonstoselect
Surfaceshortcut: Timbres/Tracks916.
PressandholdtheTONEADJUSTbutton.
WhileholdingTONEADJUST,pressoneofthe
PLAY/MUTEbuttonstoselectTimbres/Tracks18,
oroneoftheSELECTbuttonstoselect
Timbres/Tracks916.
2. SelectResetToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
2. SelectCopyToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
3. UsetheTofieldtospecifyhowtheToneAdjust
parameterswillbereset.
AllOff:AllparameterswillberesettoOff.
DefaultSetting:Theparameterswillberesettothe
defaultsettingsforthecorrespondingprogramtype
(HD1,AL1,CX3).
4. ToexecutetheResetToneAdjustcommand,press
theOKbutton.Toexitwithoutresettingthe
controls,presstheCancelbutton.
3. UseFromtoselecttheProgram,Combination,or
Songfromwhichtocopy.
YoucanalsousethefrontpanelBANKkeystoselect Show EQ Graphic
thedesiredbank. ShowEQGraphicisavailableontheTimbreEQtabof
4. IfyouveselectedaCombinationorSong,selecta theEQ/Vector/Controllerpage.
specificTimbreorTrackaswell. Thiscommandcallsupafloatingwindow,showinga
5. ChooseeitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytoselect graphicrepresentationoftheselectedTimbresEQ
theToneAdjustparametersthatyouwanttocopy. settings.Youcanleavethewindowopenasyouwork;
All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter asyouchangeEQsettings,orselectdifferentTimbres,
assignmentsandvalues. thegraphicwillupdateaccordingly.
463
Combination mode
Thewindowwillcovertheparametersforsomeofthe
Timbresoneithertherightorleftsidesofthedisplay.If Copy KARMA Module
youselectoneoftheseTimbres,thewindowwill ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsoftheKARMA
automaticallymovetotheothersideofthedisplay. Moduleusedbyaspecifiedprogram,combination,or
song.
Copy Vector Envelope 1. SelectCopyKARMAModuletoopenthedialog

box.
CopyVectorEnvelopeisavailableontheVector
EnvelopetaboftheEQ/Vector/Controllerpage.
Thiscommandcopiesthevectorenvelopefroma
specifiedprogram,combination/timbre,orsong.For
moreinformation,seeCopyVectorEnvelopeon
page 148.
Copy Pad Setup

CopyPadSetupisavailableonthePadstabofthe
EQ/Vector/Controllerpage.
ThiscommandcopiesthePadfromaspecified
program,combination/timbre,orsong.(Usethe
Fromfieldtoselectthemode,bank,andnumberof 2. InFrom,selectthecopysourcemode,bank,and
thedesiredcopysource.YoucanpressaBANKkeyto number.
selectthedesiredbank.onpage 148) YoucanpressaBANKSELECTAGswitchtoselect
thebank.
Detune BPM Adjust 3. Ifyouselectedacombinationorsongasthecopy

source,selectthemodulefromwhichyouwantto
DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonthePitchtabofthe copy.
TimbreParameterspage. 4. Asappropriateforthecontentthatyouwantto
Thiscommandchangesaloopstempobychangingthe copy,turnGERTPControlSetting&ScenesOn
TimbresDetuneparameter.Thesampledataitselfis (checked).
notaltered.Sincethisaltersthepitchoftheloopalong Formoreinformation,seeSettingscopiedbyCopy
withthetempo,itsgenerallysuitedonlytounpitched KARMAModule,below.
percussiveloops.
5. Tocopyperformancerealtimeparameters,
Note:UsingDetuneBPMAdjustwilloverwriteany DynamicMIDI,andfrontpanelsettings,turn
previousDetunesettings. Perf.RTP&PanelSettingsOn(checked).
1. GotothePitchtaboftheTimbreParameterspage. (+SettingscopiedbyCopyKARMAModule)
2. SelecttheDetuneparameterforthedesired 6. Tocopythenoteandvelocitysettingsofpads18,
Timbre. turnPadsOn(checked).
DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonlywhenthe 7. UsetheTofieldtoselectthecopydestination
Detuneparameterhasbeenselected.Otherwise,the KARMAmodule.
menuselectionwillbegrayedout. 8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyKARMA
3. SelectDetuneBPMAdjusttoopenthedialog Modulecommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonif
box. youdecidetocancel.
4. InFrom,specifytheloopsoriginalBPMvalue.
Settings copied by Copy KARMA
IgnoreanypreviouschangesfromusingDetuneBPM
Module
adjust.
5. InTo,specifythedesiredBPMvalue. Copying from a Program
TheappropriateDetunevaluewillbecalculated IfGERTPControlSetting&ScenesandPerf.RTP&
automaticallyfromthesetwovalues. PanelSettingsarebothOff(checked)whencopying
fromaProgram,thefollowingcontentiscopied:
Forexample,ifyousetFromto60bpmandToto
120bpm,Detunewillbesetto+1200(oneoctaveup). TheselectedGE,includingtheGErealtime
parameters.
6. ToexecutetheDetuneBPMAdjustcommand,
presstheOKbutton.Toexitwithoutchangingthe SettingsoftheKARMAmoduleparameters(from
Detunevalue,presstheCancelbutton. pages73:ModuleParameterTriggerand74:
Note:sincethiscommanddoesnotaffectthesample ModuleParameterControl).
dataitself,andalwaysoverwritestheprevious 75:GERTPpageMIN,MAX,andVALUE
Detuneamount,usingitrepeatedlyhasnocumulative settings.
effect. IfGERTPControlSetting&ScenesisturnedOn
(checked),thefollowingwillalsobecopied:
464
Combination: Page Menu Commands Initialize KARMA Module
75:GERTPpageASSIGNandPolaritysettings. 1. SelectInitializeKARMAModuletoopenthe
Thesceneselectedinthemasterbuffer(A). dialogbox.
TheKARMASLIDERandSWITCHsettingsfor
eachscene(06d:RealtimeControlsand09f:
R.TimeKnobs/KARMAsettings).
78:Name/NoteMapcontrollernamesettings.
IfPerf.RTP&PanelSettingsisturnedOn(checked),
thefollowingwillalsobecopied:
2. InTo,selecttheKARMAModulethatyouwish
Temposetting. toinitialize.IfyouselectAll,allKARMA
TimeSignaturesetting. ModulesA,B,C,andDwillbeinitialized.
KARMAON/OFFswitchsetting. 3. Accordingtothecontentyouwanttoinitialize,
youcanturnGERTPControlSettings&Scenes
KARMALATCHswitchsetting. and/orPref.RT&PanelSettingON(checked).
76:PerfRealTimeParameterspagesettings. Formoreinformation,seeSettingsinitializedby
77:DynamicMIDIpagesettings. InitializeKARMAModuleonpage 151.
Copying from a Combination or Song TheKARMASLIDERandSWITCHsettingsand

namesineachmasterbufferareinitializedaswhen
IfGERTPControlSetting&ScenesandPerf.RTP& thePref.RT&PanelSettingoptionisOn
PanelSettingsarebothOff(checked)whencopying (checked).
fromaCombinationorSong,thefollowingcontentis
copied: 4. Toinitializethesettings,presstheOKbutton.To
cancelwithoutinitializing,presstheCancel
TheselectedGE,includingtheGErealtime button.
parameters.
KARMAmoduleparameters(frompages73:
ModuleParameterTriggerand74:Module Copy Scene
ParameterControl).
PleaseseeCopySceneonpage 151.
75:GERTPpageMIN,MAX,andVALUE
settings.
IfGERTPControlSetting&ScenesisturnedOn Swap Scene
(checked),thefollowingwillalsobecopied: PleaseseeSwapSceneonpage 151.
75:GERTPpageASSIGNandPolaritysettings.
TheKARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMA
SWITCHsettingsofeachsceneinthecopysource
Capture Random Seed
buffer,andthecurrentlyselectedscene. PleaseseeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
78:Names/NoteMapcontrollernamesettings.
IfPerf.RTP&PanelSettingsisturnedOn(checked), Auto Assign KARMA RTC Name
thefollowingwillalsobecopied:
ThiscommandisavailableontheKARMAGEtabof
Temposetting.
thePlaypage,andtheName/NoteMaptabofthe
TimeSignaturesetting. KARMApage.
KARMAON/OFFswitchsetting. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoAssign
KARMALATCHswitchsetting. KARMARTCNameonpage 143.
KARMAModuleControlswitchsetting.
76:PerfRealTimeParameterspagesettings. Copy Note Map
77:DynamicMIDIPagesettings. PleaseseeCopyNoteMaponpage 143.
TheInputChannelandOutputChannel
(Combination/SequencerP71)settingsofa
combinationorsongarenotcopied. Copy Insert Effect
ThiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromProgram,
Combination,Song,orSamplingmodes.Formore
Initialize KARMA Module information,pleaseseeCopyInsertEffecton
ThiscommandinitializesthesettingsoftheKARMA page 153.
Module. Note:theslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedby
TheGEselectionwillnotbeinitialized.TheGE theChparameterontheIFX112pages,willnotbe
parameterValueswillbesettothedefaultvalues copied.
thatarepresetfortheselectedGE.
465
Combination mode
Alternatively,youcanpresstheResetbuttontorestore
Swap Insert Effect thesamesettings.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)inserteffectsettings.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapInsertEffect
onpage 154. Copy MFX/TFX
Note:theslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedby ThiscommandcopieseffectsettingsfromProgram,
theChparameterontheIFX112pages,willnotbe Combination,Song,orSamplingmodes.Formore
swapped. information,pleaseseeCopyMFX/TFXonpage 157.
Note:theslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedby
theChparameterontheMFX12andTFX12pages,
Insert IFX Slot willnotbecopied.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertIFXSloton
page 154.
Swap MFX/TFX
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)inserteffectsettings.
Cut IFX Slot Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXon
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCutIFXSloton page 158.
page 155. Note:theslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedby
theChparameterontheMFX12andTFX12pages,
willnotbecopied.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCleanUpIFX
Routingsonpage 156.
Write FX Preset
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 158.
Drum Kit IFX Patch
ThispatchestheBusSelectsettingsforeachkeyofa
drumkit,temporarilychangingtheinserteffect
connectiondestinations.Youcanexecutethisonlyif
thetimbresprogramisadrumprogram,DKitis
checked,andtheBusSelect(Global53b)settingof
thekeysinthedrumkitissettoeitherIFX112.
1. IntheRouting1pageorRouting2page,selectthe
timbreforwhichyouwanttomakesettings.
(SelectatimbreparameterorTimbreNumber.)
2. SelectDrumKitIFXPatchtoopenthedialogbox.
RESET
3. IntheDrumKitIFXpopup,selecttheoutputbus
towhichyouwanttopatchthesignal:aninsert
effectorL/R,18,1/27/8,orOff.
4. ToexecutetheDrumKitInsertEffectPatch
theCancelbutton.
Note:Torestoretheconditionofthedrumkit,execute
IFX1IFX1,IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,
IFX5IFX5,IFX6IFX6,IFX7IFX7,IFX8IFX8,
IFX9IFX9,IFX10IFX10,IFX11IFX11,and
IFX12IFX12.
466
Sequencer mode
Sequencer Overview
TheOASYScontainsasophisticatedsequencerthat Whenyouturnoffthepower,thesettingsmadein
integratesa16trackMIDIsequencerwitha16track Sequencermodeandthesongdatathatyou
harddiskrecorder. recordedwillnotbebackedup.Ifyouwishtokeep
ThesixteenMIDItracksandthemastertrack(which thisdata,youmustsaveitonmedia(internalhard
containstempodata,etc.)allowyoutorecordandplay disk,externalUSBdriveetc.)beforeturningoffthe
backMIDIdatafortheinternaltonegeneratororfor power,orperformaMIDIdatadumptosavethe
externalsoundmodules,andthesixteenaudiotracks dataonanexternaldatafileretc.
allowyoutorecordandplaybackaudiosignalsonthe Ifyouwishtosavetheprograms,trackparameters,
internalharddiskrecorderinsynchronizationwiththe effects,andKARMAfunctionsettingsetc.selected
MIDItracks.Youcanusetheaudiotrackstorecord forasongasatemplatesong,usethepagemenu
externalaudiosourcessuchasguitarorvocalsaswell commandSaveTemplateSong.
asthesoundproducedbytheinternaltonegenerator. Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,OASYS
Youcanalsoautomateparameterssuchasvolumeand willnotcontainanysongdata,soifyouwishto
pan. playbackasongonthesequencer,youmustfirst
Whenyouvecompletedasong,youcanresampleitas loaddatafrommediaorreceiveaMIDIdatadump
aWAVEfileanduseDiskmodetoburnitasanaudio fromaMIDIfiler.
CD.Thisentireprocesscanbecompletedonthe Whenyoucreateaudiotracks,werecommendthat
OASYSitself. yousavethemontheinternalharddisk,sinceaudio
TheInTrackSamplingfunction,TimeStretch/Slice trackscanberecordedandplayedbackonlyonthe
function,KARMAfunction,thesophisticatedeffects, internalharddisk.
controllers,andthenumerousotherfunctionsofthe Torecordaudiotracks,MIDIClockmustbesetto
OASYScanbeusedtogethertogiveyouawiderange Internal.Formoreinformation,seeMIDIClock
ofpossibilitiesformusicproductionorlive (MIDIClockSource)onpage 710.
performance.
MIDI sequencer
Thesequencerletsyourecordamaximumof performanceonthekeyboardandcontrollers
400,000MIDIevents(or300,000audioevents),up (includingMIDIcontrolevents)isrecordedjustas
to200songs,andasmanyas999measuresper youplay,andsteprecordinginwhichthetiming,
song. length,andvelocityofeachnotecanbespecifiedin
Timingresolutionisamaximumofq/192. theLCDasyouinputthepitchesfromthe
keyboard.
TherearesixteentracksforMIDIperformancedata,
andamastertrackthatcontrolsthetimesignature Themusicaldataandcontroleventsthatyou
andtempo. recordedcanbeeditedinvariousways(including
eventeditingandmanyothereditcommands).
TheKARMAfunctioncanbeusedduringplayback
orrecording. MIDISystemExclusive(SysEx)messagescanbe
recordedandplayedback.SysExmessages
TheRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Recording) receivedfromanexternalMIDIdeviceor
functioncanbeusedduringplaybackorrecording. parameterchangesproducedbyeditingtrack
Eighteendifferenttemplatesongsarebuiltin,and parametersoreffectparameterscanberecordedin
containprogramandeffectsettingssuitablefor realtimeonanydesiredtrack.
variousmusicalstyles.Youcancreateuptosixteen
originaltemplates,andsavethemasusertemplate
songs.
Parameter-related features
Atrackplayloopfunctionletsyouloopspecified WhentheStatusofatrackissettoINTorBTH,an
measuresindependentlyforeachtrack. externalsequencercanbeusedtoplayOASYSasa
multitimbraltonegenerator.WhentheStatusofa
156presetpatternsidealfordrumtracksarebuilt trackissettoBTH,EXT,orEX2,thesequencerof
in.Inaddition,youcancreateupto100user OASYScanplayexternaltonegenerators.
patternsforeachsong.Thesepatternscanbeused
asmusicaldatawithinasong,orcanbeplayedby ToneAdjustparametersletyoumaketemporary
theRPPRfunction. adjustmentstothesoundoftheprogramusedbya
track,whileleavingtheoriginalprogram
unchanged.Whilecreatingasong,youcanusethis
MIDI recording features capabilitytomakechangesinrealtimeby(for
example)softeningthetoneofthebasssoundor
Variousmethodsofrecordingaresupported,
sharpeningtheattackofthestringswithouthaving
includingrealtimerecordinginwhichyour
467
Sequencer mode
toreturntoProgrammodeandedittheprogram Sixteenaudiotracksareprovided.Eachtrack
itself. provideslinear16bitPCMrecording,witha
OASYSsAMS(AlternateModulation)capability maximumlengthof80minutesforonerecorded
letsyouusecontrolchangesforrealtimecontrolof take.
theparametersoftheprogramsusedinaprogram. Automationdata(volume,pan,EQ,send1/2)can
ItsMIDISyncabilitiesletyousynchronizetheLFO berecordedforeachtrack.
speedtochangesinthetempo. Sixteentrackscanbeplayedbacksimultaneously,
Dmod(DynamicModulation)functionalityletsyou andfourtrackscanberecordedsimultaneously.
controleffectparametersinrealtime.Youcanalso TheStereoPairfunctionletsyoucontroltwo
useMIDISynctosynchronizetheLFOspeedor adjacenttracksbyadjustingjusttheoddnumbered
delaytimetochangesinthetempo. track.Thisletsyousimultaneouslymakemixer
settingsforapairofstereorecordedtracks.
Editing and operation features Abroadrangeofinternalbusescanbeselectedas
therecordingsource:AudioInputs14,S/P DIF,
TheAutoSongSetupfunctionletsyouinstantlyset
L/R,RECBus14,orIndividual18.Flexible
upprogramorcombinationsettingsofProgram
routingevenletsyouinserteffectsintoexternal
modeorCombinationmodeasasong,sothatyou
audiosourcesandrecordthem.
canstartrecordingsimplybypressingthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Whenyourealtimerecord,anaudioeventand
Thisletsyouseamlesslymovefromplayinga regiondataarecreated.Theregiondataislinked
programorcombinationtoproducingasong. withtheWAVEdata(audiodata)recordedonthe
Whenyoucomeupwithaphraseoranidea,this harddisk.Youarefreetoeditthisdatainavariety
functionletsyoueasilyturnyourinspirationintoa ofways,suchasmovingthelocationoftheaudio
song. event,orediting/replacingtheregiondataor
WAVEfile.
ProgramandCombinationsettingscanbecopiedto
asong. Youcanusenumerouseditingcommands
(includingeventediting)toedittherecordedaudio
Sequencerdatasuchasasongthatyoucreatecan
events.Eventeditingletsyoueditthetimestamp
besavedinOASYSsnativeformat,ortransmitted
orregiondataoftheaudioevents.
asaMIDIdatadump.
RegioneditingletsyouedittheWAVEfile
AsongyoucreatedcanbeconvertedintoSMF
selection,andadjustthestart/endaddressesofthe
(StandardMIDIFile)data.SMFsongscanalsobe
WAVEfileinunitsofasinglesample.
loaded.
YoucanfreelyselectaregionofaWAVEfile
ThePlay/Rec/MuteandSolobuttonsletyou
(mono,48 kHzsamplerate)anduseitinyoursong.
instantlyplay/muteanydesiredtrackonthefly.
Youcanusecommerciallyavailablesampledata
YoucanrewindorfastforwardMIDITrackswhile etc.inyoursongbysamplerateconvertingitfrom
listeningtothesound. 44.1kHzinto48kHz.WAVEfilesediting
operationssuchasVolumeRampandNormalize
Sampling features arealsoprovided.
TheTimeStretchfunctionletsyoustretchorshrink
Multisamplesyoucreatecanbeplayedback
thetempoofaphraseyourecordedorasample
togetherwithinternalprogramsinSequencer
youassigned,makingitmatchthetempoofyour
mode.TheTimeSlicefunctionofSamplingmode
song.
letsyoudividearhythmloopsampleandcreate
performancedatathatcorrespondstothedivided TheconvenientAnchorfunctionmakesiteasyto
samples.InSequencermodeyoucanplaythis placeaphraseatthecorrecttiminginyoursong.
performancedata,andadjusttheplaybacktempo Autoandmanualpunchin/outareprovided.
withoutaffectingthepitchoftherhythmloop
TheRehearsalfunctionletsyoupracticepunch
sample.Youcanalsoexchangethenotenumbersof
in/punchoutrecordingwithoutactuallyrecording
thedata,ormodifythetimingtofreelyrecreate
anything.
newrhythmloops.
TheOASYSprovidesanInTrackSampling
functionwhichletsyousampleanexternalaudio Common section
sourcewhilethesongplaysback,andwill AstheMIDIclockmaster,youcanchooseeither
automaticallycreatenotedatatotriggerthat Internal,ExternalorAuto,lettingyousynchronize
sampleattheappropriatepointduringthe theOASYSwithotherMIDIequipment.
playbackofthetrack.
Foreachsong,threebandEQisprovidedoneach
MIDItrackandeachaudiotrack.
Hard disk recorder section Foreachsong,youcanusetwelvestereoinsert
Youcanuseupto300,000audioevents(or400,000 effects,twostereomastereffects,andtwostereo
MIDIevents),upto200songs,andupto999 totaleffects.
measurespersong. Whenyouvecreatedsongs,youcanresamplethem
toharddisktocreateWAVEfiles,andthenuse
468
Sequencer Overview Setup parameters & Musical data
DiskmodetocreateanaudioCDfromtheseWAVE YoucanusetheLOCATEswitchtomove
files. immediatelytothedesiredlocation.
Inadditiontothesongname,youcanassignnames
toeachpattern,track,andregion.
Setup parameters & Musical data

EachsongconsistsofMIDItracks116,amastertrack, FordetailsonControlChangemessagesandRPN,
audiotracks116,varioussongparameterssuchasthe seeOASYSandMIDICCsonpage 1049,and
songname,settingsforthevectorfunction,settingsfor UsingRPN(RegisteredParameterNumbers)on
theKARMAfunction,effectsettings,RPPR page 1063.
parameters,and100userpatterns. FordetailsonMIDISystemExclusivemessages,see
Upto200suchsongscanbecreatedintheOASYS. SystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencer
MIDItracks116andaudiotracks116eachconsistof modeonpage 618.
trackparametersthatspecifythestartingstateofthe
track,andplaybackdata.Themastertrackconsists Master track
oftempoandtimesignaturedata.
Setup parameters/Musical data
MIDI tracks 116 Timesignature,Tempo
BothTimesignatureandTempocanbeautomated,
Setup parameters simplybychangingtheminrealtimeduring
Bank/ProgramNo.*,Play/Rec/Mute,Pan*,Volume* recording.AnychangesarerecordedintotheMaster
TrackPlayLoop,LoopStartMeasure,LoopEnd Track.
Measure,PlayIntro,EQ(Bypass,LowGain,Mid
Frequency,MidGain,HighGain)Status,MIDI Audio tracks
Channel,BankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2),Track
Priority,ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,Portamento*, Setup parameters
Transpose**,Detune**,BendRange**,UsePrograms RecSource,Play/Rec/Mute***,Pan***,Volume***
Scale,Delay(Mode,Time,BaseNote,Times),Wave EQ(Bypass***,LowGain***,MidFrequency***,Mid
Sequence(KeySync,Swing,QuantizeTrigger), Gain***,HighGain***),Delay(Mode,Time,BaseNote,
KARMATrackOn/OffControl,MIDIFilter,KeyZone, Times),TrackName,IFX/Indiv.OutBus,FXControl
VelocityZone,TrackName,IFX/Indiv.OutBus,FX Bus,RecBus,Send1(MFX1)***,Send2(MFX2)***
ControlBus,RecBus,Send1(MFX1)*,Send2(MFX2)*,
DKit,DrumKitIFXPatch Musical data
*and**:seeAutomatingMIDIsetupparameters, Audioevents
below. Automationevents
Musical data Automating Audio setup parameters

NoteOn/Off AlloftheAudiosetupparameterscanbeautomated
ProgramChange(includingBankSelect) simplybychangingthemwhilerecordinginrealtime.
PitchBend Someuseaudioautomationdata,whileothersuse
AfterTouch(andPolyAftertouch) MIDISystemExclusivemessages.
ControlChange Setupparametersmarkedwiththreeasterisks***
PatternNo. generateandrespondtoaudioautomationdata.You
ExclusiveMessages(SysEx) canrecordchangestotheseparametersintoaudio
Automating MIDI setup parameters tracks,inrealtime.
Mostofthesetupparameterscanbeautomatedsimply Theothersetupparameterstransmitandrespondto
bychangingthemwhilerecordingintoaMIDItrackin MIDISystemExclusivemessages.Youcanadjustthese
realtime.ChangingtheparametersendsaMIDI parametersduringrealtimerecording,andrecordthe
message,andwhenthatMIDImessageisplayedback, resultingMIDISystemExclusivemessagesintoaMIDI
theparameterchangesaccordingly. track.
Setupparametersmarkedwithasingleasterisk* WAVE files, regions, and audio events

transmitandreceivespecificMIDImessages,suchas Thedatarecordedonanaudiotrackconsistsofa
CCs. WAVEfile,aregioncontaininginformation
Setupparametersmarkedwithtwoasterisks** specifyingthesectionoftheWAVEfilethatwill
respondtoMIDIRPNmessages,andalsosendand actuallybeplayed,andanaudioeventcontaining
receiveMIDISystemExclusivemessages. datathatspecifiesthelocationsinthesongatwhich
Theothersetupparameterstransmitandrespondto thatregionwillstartandstop.
MIDISystemExclusivemessages. Youshouldbeawarethataudioeventsandregionscan
bedeletedbyeventeditingorregionediting
commands,andcanalsobelostbyturningoffthe
469
Sequencer mode
powerbeforesavingthemtotheinternalharddisk.If Thereareunsavedaudiofilesfromyourprevious
onlytheWAVEfileisleft,leavingtheWAVEfileonthe recordingsession.
internalharddiskwillunnecessarilyoccupyspace,so Doyouwanttorestorethesefiles,ordeletethem
werecommendthatyouexecutetheDiskUtilitypage fromthedisk?
menucommandDeleteUnusedWAVFilestodelete
[Restore][Delete]
suchfiles.
Ifyouwanttodeletethefiles,presstheDeletebutton.
IfyoupoweroffwithoutdeletingtheseWAVEfiles,a
Ifyouintendtousetheminthefuture,forexampleina
dialogboxwiththefollowingmessagewillappearthe
newsong,presstheRestorebuttontokeepthem.We
nexttimeyoupoweron,askingyouwhetheryouwant
recommendthatyoudeleteunusedWAVEfilessothat
todeletetheseWAVEfilesorkeepthem:
spaceontheinternalharddiskisnotoccupied
unnecessarily.
Tip: Auto Song Setup

TheAutoSongSetupfunctioncopiesthesettingsofa 5. TheOASYSwillautomaticallyenterrecordready
programorcombinationtoasong,andputsyouin mode,andthemetronomewillsoundaccordingto
recordreadymode.Thenyoucansimplypressthe theMetronomesetting(Sequencer05d).
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtobeginrecording 6. PresstheSTART/STOPswitchtobeginrealtime
immediately.Thisletsyouseamlesslymovefrom recording.Tostoprecording,pressthe
playingaprogramorcombinationtoproducinga START/STOPswitchonceagain.
song.ForexampleifyouvebeenusingtheKARMA
functionandhavecomeupwithaphraseoranidea,
thisfunctionletsyoueasilyturnyourinspirationintoa
song.
Procedure(example:Combinationmode)
1. EnterCombinationmode.
2. InP0ProgSelect/Mixerpage,selectthedesired
combinationandedittheKARMARTCetc.as
desired.
Note:Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedstateofthe
combination,usetheUpdateCombinationor
WriteCombinationmenucommands.
3. HolddowntheENTERswitchandpressthe
REC/WRITEswitch.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear.
4. ToexecutetheAutoSongSetupfunction,pressthe
OKbutton.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
YouwillautomaticallymovetoSequencermode,
andthesettingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedto
thesong.
Thefirstunusedsongwillbethecopydestination
song.
Contentsautomaticallycopiedfromacombination
Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyou
executethepagemenucommandCopyFrom
Combinationwiththefollowingsettingsinthe
dialogbox.
IFXsAll,MFXs,TFXschecked
MultiRECStandbychecked
Contentsautomaticallycopiedfromaprogram
Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyou
executethepagemenucommandCopyFrom
Programwiththefollowingsettingsinthedialog
box.
IFXsAll,MFXs,TFXschecked
withKARMAchecked
TosettoMIDITrack01
KARMAModulesettoA
470
Sequencer P0: Play/REC 01: MIDI Track Prog Select/Mixer
Sequencer P0: Play/REC
01: MIDI Track Prog Select/Mixer

01PMC
01a
Select Track
Info
01b
HereyoucanmakebasicsettingsforMIDItrack **/**:Thiswillbedisplayedwhenyoupressthe
recordingandplayingbackinthesong,andcanselect SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch.Specifythiswhen
theprogramthatwillbeusedbyeachtrack. youwishtousethetimesignaturethatisalready
recordedforthatmeasure,andwishtorecordwithout
changingthetimesignature.
01a: Location, Song/Track Select
1/416/4,1/816/8,1/1616/16:Thisisthetimesignature
Location [001:01.000999:16.191] atthecurrentlocationofthesong.
Thisdisplayshowsthecurrentpositioninthesong. SetTrackSelecttoaMIDITrack0116,orAudioTrack
Fromtheleft,thenumbersarethemeasure(001999), 0116presstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and
beat(0116),andclock(000191).Whenyoumodify specifythetimesignaturehere.
thesevalues,thecurrentlocationwillchange. WhenyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
WhenMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal switchtobeginrecording,thetimesignatureyou
(orAuto,ifnoMIDIclocksarebeingreceived),the specifywillberecordedontheMasterTrackandon
OASYSwilltransmitSongPositionPointer thealreadyrecordedtracks.
messageswhentheLocationischanged. BeawarethatifyoupresstheSEQUENCER
Also,iftheMIDIClockparameterissettoExternal START/STOPswitchduringtheprecounttostop
MIDI(orAuto,ifMIDIclocksarecurrentlybeing recording,thetimesignaturewillnotberecorded.
received),andReceiveExt.RealtimeCommands Normally,youwillspecifythetimesignaturewhen
(Global11a)ison,theLocationwillchangein yourecordthefirsttrack,andselect**/**when
responsetoreceivedSongPositionPointer recordingsubsequenttracks.
messages.
Recording from measure 2 of track 2
Therangeinwhichthebeatandclockcanbe when Meter = **/** when Meter =7/8
modifiedwilldependonthecurrentlyspecified Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 3 (4/4) Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 3 (4/4) 3 (4/4)
Track 2
timesignature. Track 2 1 (4/4) Recording 1 (4/4) Recording
Meter [**/**, 1/416/4, 1/816/8, Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 3 (4/4) Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) 3 (7/8) 4 (7/8)
1/1616/16] Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 3 (4/4) Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) 3 (7/8) 4 (7/8)
Thisisthetimesignatureatthecurrentlocationofthe
song.Thetimesignaturecanbechangedateach
measure.
471
Sequencer mode
Changing the time signature in the middle of a

With a setting of
song
Ifyouknowbeforehandthelocationatwhichyouwish
tochangetimesignaturesinthemiddleofasong,use
theInsertMeasuremenucommandtospecifyand
insertthetimesignatureforeachmeasureofthesame
timesignature,andthenrecordyourmusicaldata.
Ifyouwishtochangethetimesignatureinthemiddle Tempo Mode [Auto, Manual, REC]
ofasongwhichalreadycontainsmusicaldata,use
Auto:ThetempowillfollowthetempooftheMaster
TrackSelecttospecifytheMasterTrack(orany
Track.Thetempoofthemastertrackcanbespecified
Track0116whichcontainsdata),andusetheMIDI
byusingtheMIDIEventEditmenucommand,with
EventEditmenucommandtomodifythetime
theMasterTrackchoseninTrackSelect,orbytheREC
signatureoftheBarevent.Youcanalsochangethisby
operationdescribedbelow.WhenAutoisselected,it
specifyinganaudiotrackandusingtheAutomation
willnotbepossibletomodifytheq(Tempo)setting
Editmenucommand.
whileasongisplayingorrecording(orduring
Ifthenumberofbeatsinameasureincreaseswhenyou standby).
modifythetimesignature,restswillbeinsertedinthe
Manual:Theq(Tempo)settingwillbeused.
portionthatwasadded.Converselyifthenumberof
beatsdecreases,thatportionwillnotbeplayed. REC:TempochangeswillberecordedontheMaster
Howeverifyoureturntotheoriginaltimesignature, Track.
thedatathathadbeenhiddenwillonceagainbe
played.(Thedataitselfwillnotbeerased.) q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
Thisspecifiesthetempoofthesong.Thistempo
appliestosongplaybackandtheKARMAfunction,
etc.
Rest is inserted 040.00240.00:WhentheTempoModeisManual,
thistempowillbeusedforrecordingandplayback.
WhenTempoModeisREC,thistempowillbe
Not played recordedonthemastertrack.
EXT:ThiswillappearwhenMIDIClock(Global11a)
REC Resolution (Realtime REC Quantize Resolution) issettoeitherExternalMIDIorAuto.Thetempoofthe
[Hi, r3 , r , x3 , x , e3 , e, q ] internalsequencerwillsynchronizewithMIDIClock
Thisletsyoucorrecttimingasyourecord.Itappliesto messagesreceivedfromanexternalsequencerorother
allMIDIdata,includingnotesandcontinuous MIDIdevice,between40and240BPM.
controllers,aswellasaudiotrackautomation. IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal,the
Notethatthisdoesnotaffectpreviouslyrecordeddata, abovetemposetting(040.00240.00)isused.Ifyouve
oraudioeventdata. selectedAuto,operationwillautomaticallyswitch
fromInternaltoExternalifMIDIClockdataisreceived
Important:TheRECResolutionaffectsallMIDI fromanexternalMIDIdeviceconnectedtotheMIDI
andaudioautomationdata.Thiscancausestair INconnector,andthisindicationwillappear.
stepsinrecordedcontrollerdata,suchaspitch
bend. Note:YoucanalsoadjustthisbyturningtheTEMPO
knob.Alternatively,youcansetthetempobypressing
Ifyoudontwantthiseffect,setRECResolutionto theTAPTEMPOswitchatthedesiredinterval.
Hiwhenrecording,andthenusetheQuantize
menucommandafterwardtocorrectonlythe Note:IfTempoisselectedasanalternatemodulation
desiredtypeofdata(suchasnotes). source,q =120.00willbethebasevalue.
Hi(HighResolution):Timingwillnotbecorrected, To record tempo changes
anddatawillberecordedatthemaximumresolution
(q/192). First,setTrackSelecttoaMIDITrack.
r3q:Timingwillbecorrectedtothenearestinterval PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchtoenter
ofthespecifiedrhythmicvalue.Forexample,ifyou recordingstandbymode,youwillbeabletoselect
selectr3,datawillbecorrectedtothenearest32nd REC.
notetripletinterval.Ifyouselectq,datawillbe SetTempoModetoREC,startrecording,andchange
correctedtothenearestquarternoteinterval. thesystemtempoeitherbyturningtheTEMPOknob,
Audioeventsarealwaysrecordedatthemaximum, orusingnumerickeys09toenteravalueandthen
uncorrectedresolution. pressingtheENTERswitch.Youcanalsovarythe
tempobypressingtheTAPTEMPOswitchatthe
desiredtiming.
ThiscannotbeselectedwhenthePreferencespage
itemRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
472
Whenyouchangetheq(Tempo)valuewhile WhenMultiRecison,thePlay/Rec/Mutebuttons(0
recording,thetempochangeswillberecorded,causing 1b,02a)selecttherecordenabledtracks,regardlessof
thetempotochangeasthesongprogresses. theTrackSelectsetting.
Youcantrecordtempochangesduringaudio UseTrackNametogivethetrackadescriptivename.
recording. IfothertracksaresettothesameMIDIchannelas
TempochangescanalsobecreatedusingtheMIDI theselectedtrack,andtheirStatusissettoINTor
EventEditorCreateControlDatamenu BTH,theyllbecontrolledbythekeyboardaswell.
commands. Also,ifothertracksaresettothesameMIDI
Note:Ifyouwishtorecordonlythetempochanges,set channelastheselectedtrack,andtheirStatusisset
RecordingSetup(05a)toOverdub,andthetempo toEXT,EX2,orBTH,theylltransmitMIDIto
willberecordedonthemastertrackwithoutbeing externaldevices.Foranotherlookatthis,seethe
affectedbythemusicaldataofTrackSelect. tablebelow.
Song Select [000199] Keyboard Keyboard

MIDI
Status plays Internal Transmits
Selectthesongthatyouwanttorecordorplayback. Channel
Sounds MIDI Out
Eitherselectthesongnamefromthepopupmenu,or
OFF No No
usenumerickeys09tospecifythesongnumberand
thenpresstheENTERswitch. INT Yes No
Same as the
selected MIDI EXT No Yes
Creating a new song Track
EX2 No Yes
Chooseanumberfromthepopupmenuwhosesong
nameisblank,orusethenumerickeys09tospecify BTH Yes Yes
thesongnumberandpresstheENTERswitchtoopen Different from
thedialogbox.ThenspecifySetLengthtospecify Any
the selected No No
thenumberofmeasuresinthesong,andpresstheOK setting
MIDI Track
button.
IfyouveselectedMasterTrackorAudioTrack01
16,thesettingsofthemostrecentlyselectedMIDI
trackwillbeused.
MasterTrack:Selectthemastertrackifyouwanttouse
theP4:TrackEditpagemenucommandstoeditthe
mastertrack.Youcannotperformrealtimerecordingor
steprecordingonthemastertrackbyitself.
Note:Ifyouwanttochangethelengthofasongafter AudioTrack01AudioTrack16:Selecttheaudio
creatingit,usethepagemenucommandSetSong trackyouwanttorecord.Youwillalsoselectoneof
Length.Whencreatinganewsong,youcanspecify thesewhenyouwanttoeditanaudiotrackinP4:Track
thelengthtobesomewhatlongerthannecessary,and Edit,etc.
afteryouhavefinishedrecordingandediting,useSet
InthesamewayasforMIDItracks,thedatawillbe
SongLengthtospecifythecorrectlength.
recordedontheselectedtrackifyoureusingsingle
IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal(or trackrecording.Ifyouwanttoperformmultitrack
Auto,ifnoMIDIclocksarebeingreceived), recording,turnonMultiREC(01a),andusethe
changingthesongwillcauseSongSelectandSong Play/Rec/Mutebuttons(01b,02a)toselectthetracks
PositionPointermessagestobetransmitted. youwanttorecord.
IfMIDIClockissettoExternalMIDI(orAuto,if Youcanrecorduptofouraudiotracks
MIDIclocksarecurrentlybeingreceived),the simultaneously.
OASYSwillchangesongsinresponsetoreceived
SongSelectmessages. RPPR On/Off [Off, On]
Whenthesongchanges,trackswhosetrackStatus ThisturnstheRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/
isEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmitBankSelect, Recording)functionon/off.RPPRletsyouassigna
ProgramChange,Volume,Pan,Portamento,Send1, patterntoeachnoteofthekeyboard,sothatthepattern
2,PostIFXPan,andPostIFXsend1,2messageson willplayback(orberecorded)whenyoupressthe
theirrespectiveMIDIchannels. appropriatekey.
On(checked):TheRPPRfunctionwillbeon.Ifa
Track Select [MIDI Track01MIDI Track16, Master patternhasbeenassignedtoeachkeyintheP5:RPPR
Track, Audio Track01Audio Track16] Setuppage,pressingthatkeywillperformthe
MIDITrack01MIDITrack16:SelecttheMIDItrack assignedpattern.Fordetails,see53:RPPRSetupon
thatyouwanttorecord.Thisisalsowhereyoumake page 547.
yourselectionwheneditingaMIDItrackinP4:Track
Edit. Metronome [Only REC, REC & Play, Off]
WhenMultiRecisoff,thisalsoselectstherecord OnlyREC:Themetronomewillsoundonlyduring
enabledtrack. recording.
473
Sequencer mode
REC&Play:Themetronomewillsoundduring KBD:TheMIDITracknumber/program
recordingandplayback. bank/number/namethatsoundswhenyouplaythe
Off:Themetronomewillnotsound.However,thepre keyboard.
countwillsoundbeforerecordingbegins. Gray color and [Inactive] warning in Track Info
Multi REC [Off, On] Normally,thenumbersforunselectedTracksusea
On(checked):Multitrackrecordingsetupisenabled. darkbluebackground,andalightbluebackground
Selectthisifyouwanttorecordtwoormoretracks hilightstheselectedTrack.
simultaneously. Ifthebackgroundisgray,instead,thismeansthat
UseMIDImultitrackrecordingifyouwantto themaximumamountofEXiFixedResourceshas
simultaneouslyrecordmultipleMIDItracksof beenexceeded,andtheEXiProgramassignedtothe
differentchannels,suchaswhenrecordingtheoutput Trackwillbemutedandinactive.Inthiscase,the
oftheKARMAorRPPRfunctions,orwhenrecording SelectedTrackInfowillalsoshowthewarning
fromanexternalmultitracksequencer. [Inactive]aftertheProgramsname.
Youcanalsorecorduptofouraudiotracks Formoreinformationonthissubject,including
simultaneously. waystogetmoreoutofthesystem,seeCX3&
STR1:LimitationsonEXifixedresourceson
IftheMultiRECboxischecked,thePlay/Rec/Mute page 382.
statusofthetrackyouselectinTrackSelectwillbeset
toREC;pressthePlay/Rec/Mutebuttonofthetrack(s) Track 01 (Track Number)
youwanttorecordsothattheyindicateREC.(The
buttonindicationwillchangeintheorderofPlay ThisshowstheMIDItracknumber.Theparameters
RecMute.) belowthisletyoumakesettingsforthetrack.
RegardlessoftheTrackSelect(01a)setting,datawill Track Category [0017]

berecordedontheMIDItracksandaudiotracksthat Hereyoucanselectacategoryandsubcategoryto
aresettoREC.MIDIdatawillberecordedonthe choosetheprogramusedbytheMIDItrack.All
tracksofthematchingMIDIchannel. programsareorganizedintoupto18categoriesand8
FordetailsonhowtorecordfromtheKARMA subcategories.Choosethedesiredcategoryandsub
functionoranexternalmultitracksequenceronto category,andthenchoosefromtheprogramswithin
multipletracksofdifferentMIDIchannels,seethe thatcategory.
OperationGuide:KARMAfunctionsettingsin PressthispopupbuttontoaccesstheCategory
Sequencermodeonpage 214,andRealtimemulti ProgramSelectmenu,andchooseaprogram.
trackrecordingusingsettingscopiedfroma
combinationonpage 216. Fordetails,seeCategory/ProgramSelecton
page 380.
Note:Ifyourerecordingdatafromanexternalmulti
tracksequencer,setMIDIClock(Global11a)to Program Select [INTAF, USERAG: 000127
ExternalMIDIsothattheOASYSwillsynchronizeto G, g(1)g(9), g(d): 001128]
yourexternalsequencer.Tempochangescannotbe
SelectstheprogramthatwillbeusedbyeachMIDI
recorded.
track.
Off(unchecked):Singletrackrecordingsetupwillbe
Thelowerlinedisplayspartoftheprogramname.
selected.Recordingwilloccuronthetrackselectedby
TrackSelect. Theprogramyouselectherewillbeusedwhenthe
songisplayedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Ifthe
ThiscannotbeselectedifRecordingSetupissetto
programischangedwhilerecording,theprogram
LoopAllTracks.
changewillberecordedasmusicaldata,andthe
programwillchangeduringplayback.Youcanalso
01b: Track Program Select changetheprogrammanuallyduringplayback.
Howeverifmusicaldata(programchangedata)is
Selected Track Info alreadyrecorded,theprogramwillchangeatthat
point.
Thispagedisplaysinformationaboutthetrackyoure
editing.IfyouveselectedaMIDItrack,thisshowsthe IftheStatus(21a)iseitherINTorBTH,programs
banktype,T:MIDItracknumber/program canbeselectedbyreceivingMIDIprogramchange
bank/number/name,Ch:MIDIchannelnumber,RPPR messages.Also,whenthesongischangedorwhen
(Assign):thekeynumberthatstartstheRPPRassigned thesongreturnstothebeginning,trackswhose
tothetrack,andKBD:theMIDITrack StatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmitthebank
number/programbank/number/namethatsounds andprogramnumbersviaMIDI.Trackswhose
whenyouplaythekeyboard. StatusisEX2willshowBankasandwill
transmitthebanknumberthatwasselectedinthe
RPPR(Assign)willnotshowalloftheassignmentsif BankSelect(21b)parameter.
therearemanyRPPRassignments.TheP6Pattern
Editpageletsyouseealloftheassignments. Various ways to change the program for a track
Ifyouveselectedanaudiotrack,thisshowsAT:audio ChooseProgramSelect,usenumerickeys09to
tracknumber/regionnumberofthefirstaudio inputaprogramnumber,andpresstheENTER
event/name,[STEREO]:StereoPairon/offstatus,and switch.
474
ChooseProgramSelect,andturntheVALUEdial Solo On/Off [On, Off]

orusethe / switches. ThisturnstheSolofunctionon/off.
IfyouvechosenProgramSelect,thefrontpanel OnlytrackswithSOLOOnwillsound.Othertracks
BANKbuttonswillchangetheprogrambankfor willbemuted.
theselectedtrack.(IfProgramBankisselected,
theBANKswitchLEDoftheprogrambank Thesettingwillalternateon/offeachtimeyoupress
selectedforthetrackwilllight.) theSolobutton.
UsetheBank/TrackProgramSelectmenutoview TheoperationwilldependontheExclusiveSolo
andselectprogramsbybank. setting.
UsetheCategory/TrackProgramSelectmenuto ExclusiveSolooff:Multipletrackscanbesoloed.The
viewandselectprogramsbycategory. solosettingofeachtrackwillchangeeachtimeyou
pressitsSoloOn/Offbutton.
UsetheFavoritefunction;intheBank/Track
ProgramSelectmenuortheCategory/Track ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Off
ProgramSelect,youcanviewandselectprograms button,onlythattrackwillbesoloed.
whoseFavoritesettingisturnedon. Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetoturnSolo
TransmitMIDIprogramchangemessagesfroma on/off.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefront
connectedexternalMIDIdevice(ifthetrackStatus panelmixersectionorfromtheP0ControlSurface
isINTorBTH). pageoftheLCD.Theproceduregivenbelowdescribes
howtomakethesesettingsfromthefrontpanel.
Youcanalsousetheabovemethodstoswitch
programswhileasongisplaying.Ifyouswitch 1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERTIMBRE
programswhilerecording,theprogramchange /TRACKswitchtoselecttracks18or916.
datawillberecorded,andtheprogramwillswitch 2. PresstheSOLOswitch.
atthatpointinthesongduringplayback.Youcan 3. UsetheMIXSELECT1/98/16switchestoturn
alsousethepagemenucommandMIDIEvent Soloon/offforeachtrack.
Edittoaddprogramchangedatatoatrack.
Note:TheSolofunctionappliestoMIDItracks116,
CX-3: Limitations on EXi fixed resources audiotracks116,audioinputs14,andS/P DIFinput
L/R.
Undercertaincircumstances,theremaybelimitations
onthenumberofparticularEXiProgramsthatyoucan Note:Ifevenonetrackisbeingsoloed,theSOLO
loadsimultaneously.Formoreinformation,pleasesee switchLEDwillblink.
CX3&STR1:LimitationsonEXifixedresourceson Tip:ToturnSolooffforalltracks,holddownthe
page 382. RESETCONTROLSswitchandpresstheblinking
SOLOswitch.
Play/Rec/Mute [Play, Rec, Mute]
UsethistomuteaMIDItrack,ortoselecttherecording IfMIDItrackswhoseStatus(21a)isBTH,EXT,or
tracksformultitrackrecording.Duringplayback,or EX2aremutedbyMuteorbytheSolofunction,note
forsingletrackrecording(normalrecording),itis on/offmessageswillnotbetransmittedontheMIDI
possibleonlytoselectPlayorMutefortracks channelselectedforthosetracks.
(playbacktracks)otherthantherecordingtrack.For Solosettingsarenotsavedwiththesong.
multitrackrecording,trackscanbesettoPlay,Rec,or
Mute.Thesettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupressthe Recording MIDI Track Pan and Volume
Play/Rec/Mutebutton. Thepanandvolumethatyouspecifyherewillbeused
Play:Thetrackwillplay. whenyouplaybackorrecordfromthebeginningofthe
song.Ifyouchangethesettingsduringrecording,the
Rec:Thiswillbedisplayedduringsingletrack changeswillberecordedasmusicaldata,andpanand
recording(normalrecording).Itcannotbeselected. volumewillchangeduringplayback.Youcanalso
Whenyouusemultitrackrecording(whenthe changethesettingsduringplayback.Howeverwhen
PreferencespageMultiRECison),selectRECforthe thesongreachesalocationwherepanorvolumedata
tracksthatyouwishtorecord. wasrecorded,thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
Mute:Thetrackwillbemuted(silent). Pan [RND, L001C064R127]
Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrol ThisspecifiesthepanofMIDItrack.
Play/Rec/Mute.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthe
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftand
frontpanelmixersectionorfromtheP0Control
R127isfarright.AsettingofC064willreproducethe
SurfacepageoftheLCD.Theproceduregivenbelow
oscillatorpansettingoftheProgrammode.
describeshowtomakethesesettingsfromthefront
panel.
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERTIMBRE/
TRACKswitchtoselecttracks18or916.
2. UsetheMIXPLAY/MUTE1/98/16switchesto
switchthePlay/Rec/Mutestatusofeachtrack.(You
cantselectRECforsingletrackrecording.)
475
Sequencer mode
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERTIMBRE
OSC1/EXi1 OSC2/EXi2 OSC1/EXi1: OSC1/EXi1 OSC2/EXi2 OSC1/EXi1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2/EXi2:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2/EXi2:
/TRACKswitchtoselecttracks18or916.
Left Center Right Amp2 Pan=R127 Left Center Right Amp2 Pan=R096
2. UsetheMIXVOLUMES1/98/16sliderstoadjust
Pan (CC#10) Pan (CC#10)
C064 C064
thevolume.
L032 L032 WhenStatus(21a)isINTorBTH,CC#7Volume
L001 L001 canbereceivedtocontrolthevolume.Thevolume
R096 R096 ofatrackisdeterminedbymultiplyingtheMIDI
R127 R127 Volume(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11)values.
Left Center Right Left Center Right
Whenyouchangethesongorreturntothe
beginningofthesong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,
OSC1/EXi1 OSC2/EXi2 OSC1/EXi1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
EX2orBTHwilltransmitthevolumeyouspecify
OSC2/EXi2:
Left Center Right Amp2 Pan=C064 hereasaMIDIVolumemessage.
Pan (CC#10)
C064 Track 0216 (Track Number)

L032
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01(Track
L001
Number)onpage 474.
R096
R127
Left Center Right

Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumake ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
herewillbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan(CC#8) numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
parameterinP8InsertFXpagewilladjustthe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
panningofthesoundaftertheInsertEffect.Fordetails, commandsonpage 142.
seeMixeronpage 804. 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
RND:Thepanwillchangerandomlyateachnoteon. MemoryStatusonpage 582.
Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustthepan. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefrontpanel ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
mixersectionorfromtheP0ControlSurfacepageof 2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see
theLCD.Theproceduregivenbelowdescribeshowto RenameSongonpage 582.
makethesesettingsfromthefrontpanel.
3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERTIMBRE Songonpage 582.
/TRACKswitchtoselecttracks18or916.
4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
2. Ifyouwanttocontrolthepan,EQ,andeffectsend CopyFromSongonpage 582.
levelsofasingletrack,presstheMIXERKNOBS
5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
switchtoselectCHANNELSTRIP.Thenpressthe
LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
MIXSELECT1/98/16switchforthetrackyou
wanttocontrol. 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
Ifyouwanttoadjustthepanoftracks18or916 SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
together,presstheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoselect 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
INDIVIDUALPAN. FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
3. IfyouveselectedCHANNELSTRIP,usetheMIX 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
CHANNELSTRIPPan(knob1)toadjustthepan. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
IfyouveselectedINDIVIDUALPAN,usetheMIX page 583.
CHANNELSTRIPknobstoadjustthepanoftracks 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
18or916. Initializeonpage 584.
YoucanadjusttheknobsinarangeofL001toR127. 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
(YoucantselectRND.) information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
IfStatus(21a)isINTorBTH,CC#10Pancanbe page 584.
receivedtocontrolthepanning.Whenreceiving 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
CC#10,avalueof0or1isfarleft,64iscenter,and CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
127isfarright.Whenyouchangethesongorreturn
tothebeginningofthesong,trackswhoseStatusis
EXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmitthepanyouspecify
hereasaMIDImessage(exceptforRND).
Volume [000127]
SetsthevolumeofMIDItracks116.
Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustthe
volume.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefront
panelmixersectionorfromtheP0ControlSurface
pageoftheLCD.Theproceduregivenbelowdescribes
476
Sequencer P0: Play/REC 02: Audio Track Mixer
02: Audio Track Mixer

02PMC
01a
01b
02a
Hereyoucanmakesettingsforrecordingand
playbackofaudiotracksinthesong.Youcanspecify
theaudiosourceforrecording,andchangethe
Play/Mutestatus,Solostatus,pan,andvolumefor
playback.
02a: Audio Track Select

Selected Track Info
Thisdisplaysinformationaboutthecurrentlyselected
MIDIoraudiotrack.Formoreinformation,see01b:
TrackProgramSelectonpage 474.
Track 01 (Track Number)

Thisindicatestheaudiotracknumber.Theparameters
belowthistracknumberarethesettingsforthattrack.
REC Source [(Stereo Pair Off): Audio Input14,

S/P DIF-L, S/P DIF-R, L, R,
REC14, Indiv.18]
[(Stereo Pair On): Audio Input1/23/4,
S/P DIF L/R, L/R, REC1/23/4,
Indiv.1/27/8]
Thisselectsthesourcethatwillberecordedonthe
track.Thesignalofthebuslineyouspecifyherewillbe
recorded.
TheavailablesettingsdependonwhetherornotStereo
Pairisenabledforthetrack.
AudioInput14,AudioInput1/2and3/4:Choose
thesetorecorddirectlyfromanaloginputs14.The
inputsignalwillberecordeddirectly,withoutpassing
throughanybusesoreffects,andwithoutbeing
477
Sequencer mode
affectedbytheaudioinputmixersettings.Formore
information,seethediagramRECSource=Audio
Input1,2,below.
REC Source = Audio Input 1 L/R REC Indiv.

(Single Track REC) Bus 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
...
REC Source CLIP ! Recording
Audio Input1 HDR Track (Mono)
Insert Audio Track selected in

Effects Track Select
Insert
Audio Input 1 Effects
Level Pan
Insert
Effects Pan Level
Audio Input 2
Master
Level Pan Effects Monitor
Insert L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
Effects Total
Sequencer Playback
Keyboard [x] Source Direct Solo
IfStereoPairison,inputs1and/or3aresenttoodd
numberedtracks,andinputs2and/or4aresentto
evennumberedtracks.
REC Source = Audio Input 1, 2 L/R REC Indiv.

Bus 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
(Multi REC)
...
REC Source CLIP ! Recording (Multi REC On)

Insert
Effects Audio Track selected in
Insert Track Select
Audio Input 1 Effects
Level Pan
Insert
Effects
Audio Input 2 Pan Level
Master
Effects Total
Sequencer Playback
S/P DIFL,R,S/P DIFL/R:Choosetheseifyouwantto

recordtheinputfromtheS/P DIFjack.Theinputfrom
theS/P DIFjackwillberecordeddirectlywithout
passingthroughtheL/Rbus,RECbuses,orIndividual
buses.TheS/P DIFL,Rinputwillbeconnecteddirectly,
regardlessoftheAudioInput(08a)settingsforPan,
Level,Solo,andPlay/Mute.Seethediagram
REC=S/P DIFL,R,below.
478
IfStereoPairison,S/P DIFLissenttoodd
numberedtracks,andS/P DIFINRissenttoeven
numberedtracks.
REC Source = L/R

Bus
REC Indiv.
1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
S/P DIF L, R
...
REC Source CLIP ! Recording (Multi REC)
S/P DIF L HDR Track (Mono)

S/P DIF R HDR Track (Mono)
Insert Set Play/Rec/Mute
Effects to Rec
Insert
S/P DIF L Effects
Level Pan
Insert
Effects
S/P DIF R Pan Level
Master
Effects Total
Sequencer Playback
L,R,L/R:ThisistheL/Rbus,afterpassingthrough theOASYS(andsenttotheL/Rbus)inresponseto
bothTFX1and2.Choosethisifyouwanttorecordan sequencerplayback,keyboardplaying,orMIDIinput.
externalaudiosignalbeingsenttotheL/Rbus SeethediagramRECSource=L,R,below.
(specifiedby08a),orthesoundbeingproducedby IfStereoPairison,Lissenttooddnumberedtracks,
andRissenttoevennumberedtracks.
REC Source L/R REC Indiv.

Bus 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
= L, R ...
Master
Effects REC Source CLIP ! Recording (Multi REC)
Total L HDR Track (Mono)

Effects R HDR Track (Mono)
Insert
Effects Set Play/Rec/Mute
to Rec
Audio CD
Level Pan
Pan Level
Bus = Off, Indiv.1...8
Monitor
Effects HEADPHONES
R
Sequencer Playback
Keyboard
When an audio tracks Bus Select is set to L/R, the Rec input will
automatically be muted to prevent a feedback loop. The same will occur if
you set Bus Select to IFX and send the post-IFX signal to the L/R Bus.
REC1,2,1/2,REC3,4,3/4:TheREC1/2orREC3/4
buseswillberecorded.Choosethisifyouwantto
recordonlytheaudioinputwhilehearingthe
sequencerplaybackandyourkeyboardplayingfrom
theL/Routputs.Youcanalsomixseveralaudioinputs
totheRECbuses,orusetheRECbusestomixthe
directsoundfromtheaudioinputswiththesound
processedbyinserteffects,andrecordtheresult.For
moreinformation,seethediagramRECSource=REC
Bus1,2.
479
Sequencer mode
IfStereoPairison,RECBus1(3)issenttoodd
numberedtracks,andRECBus2(4)issenttoeven
numberedtracks.
REC Source
= REC Bus 1 (2)
L/R REC Indiv.
Bus 1,2, 3, 4 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
REC Bus = 1,2
REC Source CLIP ! Recording
REC1 HDR Track (Mono)
Insert Audio Track selected in

Effects Track Select
Insert
Audio CD Effects
Level Pan
Pan Level
Master
Effects Monitor

Insert
Effects [x] Source Direct Solo
Sequencer Playback
Keyboard If REC Source is set to REC Bus 1 or 2, setting the Audio Track REC Bus to 1 or 2 will
automatically cause the Rec input to be muted in order to avoid a feedback loop. If
you route the signal to IFX, the same thing will occur if you send the post-IFX signal to
Bus = L/R or IFX1-12 REC Bus 1 or 2.
Indiv.18,Indiv.1/2,Indiv.3/4,Indiv.5/6,Indiv.7/8: recordingonlytheaudioinput.Formoreinformation,
TheIndiv.1/2Indiv.7/8buseswillberecorded. seethediagramRECSource=Indiv.1,2(3,4,5,6,7,
SimilarlytowhenusingtheRECbuses,youcanchoose 8).
thiswhenyouwanttomonitortheL/Routputwhile IfStereoPairisonandyouveselectedIndiv.1/2,the
Indiv.bus1willbesenttooddnumberedtracks,and
Indiv.bus2willbesenttoevennumberedtracks.
REC Source L/R REC Indiv.

Bus 1,2, 3, 4 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
= Indiv.1, 2 (3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) ...
REC Source CLIP ! Recording (Multi REC)
Indiv.1 HDR Track (Mono)

Indiv.2 HDR Track (Mono)
Insert
Effects Set Play/Rec/Mute
Insert to Rec
Audio CD Effects
Level Pan
Pan Level
Master
Effects Monitor
Effects Total
Sequencer Playback
INDIV.1 AUDIO OUTPUT
Bus = L/R or IFX1-12 INDIV.2
If the Bus Select of an audio track is set to Indiv. 1 or 2, the Rec input will
automatically be muted in order to avoid a feedback loop. If you route the signal to
IFX, the same thing will occur if you send the post-IFX signal to REC Bus 1 or 2.
STEREO Rec:Thiswillbedisplayedduringsingletrack
ThisisshownifStereoPairison. recording(normalrecording).Itcannotbeselected.
Whenyouusemultitrackrecording(thePreferences
Play/Rec/Mute [Play, Rec, Mute] pageMultiRECison),selectRECforthetracksthat
Usethistomuteanaudiotrack,ortoselectthe youwishtorecord.YoucanspecifyRECforuptofour
recordingtracksformultitrackrecording.During tracks.
playback,orforsingletrackrecording(normal Mute:Thetrackwillbemuted(silent).
recording),itispossibleonlytoselectPlayorMutefor Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrol
tracks(playbacktracks)otherthantherecordingtrack. Play/Rec/Mute.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthe
Formultitrackrecording,trackscanbesettoPlay,Rec, frontpanelmixersectionorfromtheP0Control
orMute.Thesettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupress SurfacepageoftheLCD.Theproceduregivenbelow
thePlay/Rec/Mutebutton. describeshowtomakethesesettingsfromthefront
Play:Thetrackwillplay. panel.
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERAUDIO
switchtoselecttracks18or916.
480
2. UsetheMIXPLAY/MUTE1/98/16switchesto Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustthepan.
switchthePlay/Rec/Mutestatusofeachtrack.(You Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefrontpanel
cantselectRECforsingletrackrecording.) mixersectionorfromtheP0ControlSurfacepageof
theLCD.Theproceduregivenbelowdescribeshowto
Solo On/Off [On, Off] makethesesettingsfromthefrontpanel.
ThisturnstheSolofunctionon/off. 1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERAUDIO
OnlytracksthataresettoSoloOnwillsound.Other switchtoselecttracks18or916.
trackswillbemuted. 2. Ifyouwanttocontrolthepan,EQ,andeffectsend
Thesettingwillalternateon/offeachtimeyoupress levelsofasingletrack,presstheMIXERKNOBS
theSolobutton. switchtoselectCHANNELSTRIP.Thenpressthe
MIXSELECT1/98/16switchforthetrackyou
Theoperationwilldependonthesettingofthe
wanttocontrolthepan.
ExclusiveSolomenucommand,asdescribedbelow:
Ifyouwanttoadjustthepanoftracks18or916
ExclusiveSolooff:Multipletrackscanbesoloed.The
together,presstheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoselect
solosettingofeachtrackwillchangeeachtimeyou
INDIVIDUALPAN.
pressitsSoloOn/Offbutton.
3. IfyouveselectedCHANNELSTRIP,usetheMIX
ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Off CHANNELSTRIPPAN(knob1)toadjustthepan.
button,onlythattrackwillbesoloed.
IfyouveselectedINDIVIDUALPAN,usetheMIX
Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetoturnSolo CHANNELSTRIPknobstoadjustthepanoftracks
on/off.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefront 18or916.
YoucanadjusttheknobsinarangeofL000toR127.
pageoftheLCD.Theproceduregivenbelowdescribes
(Randompanisnotavailableforaudiotracks.)
Forpairedaudiotracks,theaboveparametersare
controlledbytheoddnumberedaudiotrack.
switchtoselecttracks18or916.
Theseparameterswillnotbecontrolledifyouedit
2. PresstheSOLOswitch. theevennumberedaudiotrack.
3. UsetheMIXSELECT1/98/16switchestoturn If,however,intheStereoPairpagemenu
Soloon/offforeachtrack. commandyousetPanModetoIndex,thePanof
Note:TheSolofunctionappliestoMIDItracks116, theevennumberedaudiotrackwillbevalid.
audiotracks116,audioinputs14,andS/P DIFinput
Volume [000127]
L,R.
Setsthevolumeofaudiotracks116.
Note:Ifevenonetrackisbeingsoloed,theSOLO
switchLEDwillblink. Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustthe
volume.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefront
Tip:ToturnSolooffforalltracks,holddownthe panelmixersectionorfromtheP0ControlSurface
RESETCONTROLSswitchandpresstheblinking pageoftheLCD.Theproceduregivenbelowdescribes
SOLOswitch. howtomakethesesettingsfromthefrontpanel.
Solosettingsarenotsavedwiththesong. 1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERAUDIO
Recording Audio Track Pan and Volume switchtoselecttracks18or916.
Thepanandvolumethatyouspecifyherewillbeused 2. UsetheMIXVOLUMES1/98/16sliderstoadjust
whenyouplaybackorrecordfromthebeginningofthe thevolume.
song.Ifyoumodifythesesettingswhilerecording, Forpairedaudiotracks,theaboveparametersare
yourchangeswillberecordedasautomationevent controlledbytheoddnumberedaudiotrack.
dataontheautomationtrackforeachaudiotrack,and Theseparameterswillnotbecontrolledifyouedit
thepanandvolumedatawillchangeaccordingly theevennumberedaudiotrack.
duringplayback.Youcanalsochangethesettings
duringplayback.Howeverwhenthesongreachesa Track 0216 (Track Number)
locationwherepanorvolumedatawasrecorded,the Fordetails,seeTrack01(TrackNumber)on
settingswillchangeaccordingly. page 477.
Pan [L000C064R127]
Thisspecifiesthepanofaudiotrack. t 02: Page Menu Commands
L000C064R127:L000ishardleft,andR127ishard ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
right. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumake shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
herewillbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan(CC#8) commandsonpage 142.
parameterinP8InsertFXpagewilladjustthe 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
panningofthesoundaftertheInsertEffect.Fordetails, MemoryStatusonpage 582.
seeMixeronpage 804.
481
Sequencer mode
2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
RenameSongonpage 582. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete page 583.
Songonpage 582. 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see Initializeonpage 584.
CopyFromSongonpage 582. 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
LoadTemplateSongonpage 582. page 584.
6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
SaveTemplateSongonpage 583. CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see 12:StereoPair.Formoreinformation,seeStereo
FF/REWSpeedonpage 583 Paironpage 585.
13:AutoHDR/SamplingSetup.Formore
information,seeAutoHDR/SamplingSetupon
page 587.
03: MIDI Track Loop

03PMC
01a
01b
03a
Whenplayingorrecordingasong,youcan On(checked):ThattrackwillloopbetweenLoop
independentlylooptheMIDItracks. StartMeasureandLoopEndMeasure.
Loop Start Measure [001999]

03a: Track Select Specifiesthefirstmeasureoftheloop.
Selected Track Info Loop End Measure [001999]
Thisdisplaysinformationaboutthecurrentlyselected Specifiesthelastmeasureoftheloop.
MIDIoraudiotrack.Formoreinformation,see01b:
TrackProgramSelectonpage 474. Play Intro [Off, On]
On(checked):Afterthemeasuresbeforethespecified
Track 01 (Track Number) LoopStartMeasureareplayedonce,theregionof
LoopStartMeasureLoopEndMeasurewillbe
Category [(0017)] playedrepeatedly.
Indicatesthecategory. Forexample,youcanusethisonadrumtracktomake
Track Play Loop [Off, On] itplayafillinandthenbeginlooping.
SpecifiesloopingforaMIDItrack. Off(unchecked):PlaybackwillbeginfromtheLoop
StartMeasure,andwillbeginloopingimmediately.
482
Sequencer P0: Play/REC 03: MIDI Track Loop
ThiswillbevalidifTrackPlayLoopischecked 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
andLoopStartMeasureissettootherthan001. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
Example)WhenPlayIntroischecked page 583.
9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
Initializeonpage 584.
10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
page 584.
Track1willloopasfollows.
M001M002M003M004M003M004M003
M004
WhenPlayIntroisnotchecked
Track1willloopasfollows.
M003M004M003M004M003M004M003
M004
Inthisway,youcanuseTrackPlayLooptomakethe
realtimerecordingprocessmoreefficient.

Fordetails,seeTrack01(TrackNumber)on
page 477.

commandsonpage 142.
0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
MemoryStatusonpage 582.
2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see
RenameSongonpage 582.
Songonpage 582.
CopyFromSongonpage 582.
6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
483
Sequencer mode
05: Preferences
05PMC
01a
01b
05a
05c
05b
05d
Hereyoucanspecifytherealtimerecordingmethod, Overdub
adjustlevelsandmakeothersettingsforaudio Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoadddatatoa
recording,andadjustthemetronomesettings. previouslyrecordedtrack.(exceptforaudioevents)
Selected Track Info Tobeginrecording,presstheSEQUENCER
REC/WRITEswitchandthentheSEQUENCER
Thisdisplaysinformationaboutthecurrentlyselected START/STOPswitch.Tostoprecording,pressthe
MIDIoraudiotrack.Formoreinformation,see01b: SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchonceagain.
TrackProgramSelectonpage 474.
Ifyouusethismethodtorecordonatrackthathas
alreadybeenrecorded,theresultwilldifferdepending
05a: Recording Setup onthetrackortypeofevent,asfollows.
Selectsthemethodofrealtimerecording. MIDITracks,AudioTrackAutomationEvents:The
previouslyrecordeddatawillremain,andthenewly
Fordetailed,stepbystepinstructions,pleasesee
recordeddatawillbeaddedtoit.
MIDIrecordingonpage 89oftheOperationGuide.
AudioTrackAudioEvents:AswithOverwrite,only
Overwrite themeasuresyourecordedwillbeoverwritten;the
Whenrecordingforthefirsttime,youwillnormally datainsubsequentmeasureswillremainunchanged.
selectthismethod.
Manual Punch In
Tobeginrecording,presstheSEQUENCER
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtousethe
REC/WRITEswitchandthentheSEQUENCER
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorafootswitchto
START/STOPswitch.Tostoprecording,pressthe
rerecordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchonceagain.
track.
Ifyouusethismethodtorecordonatrackthathas
PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto
alreadybeenrecorded,theresultwilldifferdepending
playbackthesong.Whenyoureachthemeasureat
onthetrackortypeofevent,asfollows.
whichyouwishtobeginrewritingthedata,pressthe
MIDITracks,AudioTrackAutomationEvents:All SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorthefootswitch,
datafollowingthemeasureatwhichyoubegin andrecordingwillbegin.Whenyouarefinished
recordingwillbeerased. recording,presstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch
AudioTrackAudioEvents:AswithOverwrite,only orthefootswitchonceagain,andrecordingwillend.
themeasuresyourecordedwillbeoverwritten;the
Auto Punch In
datainsubsequentmeasureswillremainunchanged.
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre
recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded
track.
484
Sequencer P0: Play/REC 05: Preferences
IfyouselectAutoPunchIn,thedisplaywillindicate (horizontal)direction,benderdatawillbeerased.
M***M***(AutoPunchInStartMeasureAutoPunch Whileyouapplypressuretothekeyboard,aftertouch
InEndMeasure)attheright,allowingyoutospecifythe datawillbeerased.Thisappliestokeyboard
rangeofmeasuresthatwillberewritten. aftertouch,Joystick+Y(CC#01)/Y(CC#02),JoystickX
PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthen (PitchBend),andRibbonController(CC#16).
theSTART/STOPswitch,andplaybackwilloccuruntil Also,youcanpressandholddowntheSEQUENCER
thespecifiedmeasureisreached.Then,recordingwill REC/WRITEswitchtodeleteallMIDIdataforaslong
occuronlyoverthespecifiedarea(StartMeasureEnd asthekeyisheld.
Measure),rewritingitwiththenewlyrecordeddata. Ifyouwanttodeleteaudiotrackautomationevents,
Auto Punch In Start Measure [M001M999] checkAutomationOnly(05b),chooseLoopAll
Tracks,andbeginrecording.ThencheckRemove
Auto Punch In End Measure [M001M999] Data(05a)andholddowntheSEQUENCER
WhenRecordingSetupissettoAutoPunchIn,specify REC/WRITEswitchtodeletetheautomationevents
themeasuresatwhichrecordingwillstartandend. thatoccurwhileyoureholdingdownthatswitch.
Loop All Tracks

05b: Recording Setup (Audio Track)
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtorepeatedlyrecord
aspecifiedareaofatrack,andcontinueaddingdata. Automation Only [Off, On]
Thisissuitableforcreatingdrumpatterns,etc. On(checked):Onlyaudiotrackautomationevents
IfyouselectLoopAllTracks,thedisplaywillindicate willberecorded.Audioeventswillnotbechanged.
M***M***(LoopStartMeasureLoopEndMeasure) Off(unchecked):Bothaudiotrackautomationevents
attheright,allowingyoutospecifytherangeof andaudioeventswillberecorded.
measuresthatwillberecordedrepeatedly.
PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthen Auto Input [Off, On]
theSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,andplayback Thisswitchesthemonitorchannel(RECSource/track
willoccuruntilthespecifiedmeasureisreached.Then, playback)fortheaudiotrackselectedinTrackSelect.
recordingwilloccurrepeatedlyoverthespecifiedarea Seethetablethatfollows.
(LoopStartMeasureLoopEndMeasure). IfMultiRECison,thisappliestoalltrackswhose
Previouslyrecordeddatawillremain,andthenew Play/Rec/MuteissettoREC.
datawillbeadded.ThisappliesonlytoMIDIdata.
On(checked):Whenperformingauto/manualpunch
Whilerecording,youcancheckRemoveDatato inrecording,theaudiotrackselectedinTrackSelect
deleteunwanteddata. willbemonitoredviaitsRECSourceduringthe
Youcantrecordaudioeventstoaudiotrackswhile measuresbeingrecorded,andthetrackplaybackwill
usingLoopAllTracks.IfyousetTrackSelecttoan bemonitoredduringmeasuresthatarenotbeing
audiotrack,andleaveAutomationOnly(05b) recorded.
unchecked,youwontbeabletostartrecording. FortheaudiotracksnotselectedinTrackSelect,you
CheckingAutomationOnlywillallowyoutostart willalwaysbemonitoringthetrackplayback.
recordingsothatyoucanrecordautomationevents
d.YoucanuseRemoveDatatodeleteaudiotrack Whenperformingauto/manualpunchinrecording
automationevents. withMultiRECon,audiotrackswhose
Play/Rec/MuteissettoRECwillbemonitoredvia
IfMultiRECischecked,thisparameterwillnotbe RECSourceduringthemeasuresbeingrecorded,and
available. willautomaticallyswitchtomonitoringthetrack
Loop Start Measure [M001M999] playbackduringmeasuresthatarenotbeingrecorded.
FortheaudiotracksthatarenotsettoREC,youwill
Loop End Measure [M001M999] alwaysbemonitoringthetrackplayback.
Specifiestherangeofmeasuresoverwhichrecording Off(unchecked):TheaudiotrackselectedinTrack
willrepeatwhenRecordingSetupissettoLoopAll SelectwillalwaysbemonitoredviaitsRECSource.
Tracks. FortheaudiotracksnotselectedinTrackSelect,you
willalwaysbemonitoringthetrackplayback.
Remove Data [Off, On]
IfMultiRECison,youwillalwaysbemonitoring
UsethistodeleteunwantedMIDIdataoraudiotrack theRECSourceofaudiotrackswhosePlay/Rec/Mute
automationeventsthatyourecordedwhileusingLoop issettoREC.
AllTracks.ThisisavailablewhenRecordingSetupis
settoLoopAllTracks. FortheaudiotracksthatarenotsettoREC,youwill
alwaysbemonitoringthetrackplayback.
On(checked):YoucandeleteunwantedMIDIdata
whilerecordingwithLoopAllTracks.During
recording,pressthekey(notenumber)that
correspondstotheMIDIdatayouwishtodelete.All
occurrencesofthatnotenumberwillbedeletedforthe
intervalthatyoucontinueholdingdownthekey.
Controllerdatacanalsobeerasedinasimilarway.For
examplewhileyoumoveandholdthejoystickintheX
485
Sequencer mode
AudioInput/Output Stereo Pair (0-2c)

Audio Input (02a)
= On
BUS(IFX/Indiv.) REC Source (0-2c)
ADC OVERLOAD ! = L/R or IFX1-12 Insert = L/R CLIP !
Effects
AUDIO INPUT 1,2 ADC Total L-Mono
LEVEL Analog to
(MIC/LINE) Digital Level Pan REC Sample Setup
(MIN...MAX) Converter [127=0dB] Mode (01d)
Master
ADC OVERLOAD ! Insert Effects
Effects
AUDIO INPUT 3,4 ADC
Analog to
Digital Level Pan
Converter [127=0dB] Recording Level (01c)
[inf ... 0.0dB ... +18.0dB]
Insert
Effects
L/MONO AUDIO
R
Level Pan
[127=0dB]
Audiotrackmonitorchannels
05c: Audio Track Recording Level [dB]
(Line:RECSource,Track:trackplayback)
RecordingLevel,Name,Take,andTakeNo.settings
During Punch Rec
During Stop
During Play
During Rec
Auto Input
forthesixteenaudiotracksarenotmaintained
InOut
separatelyforeachsong;instead,theyapplyglobally
Out
In
totheentireSequencermode.
Thisareadisplaysthesettingsofthetrackselectedin
Track TrackSelect(forsingletrackrecording)orthesettings
Track Select On Line Track Line Track Line
* ofthetrackswhosePlay/Rec/MutebuttonissettoREC
track (formultitrackrecording).
Off Line Line Line Line Line Line
Tracks On Track Track Track Track Track Track Audio Tracks 14
other than
Track Off Track Track Track Track Track Track Recording Level 14 [Inf, 72.0+18.0]
Select
Level Meter 14
Source Direct Solo [Off, On] Thisadjuststhefinallevelofthesignalbeingrecorded
On(checked):Onlythesignalofthebuslinespecified fromtheRECSourcetotheaudiotrack.Adjustthe
byRECSourcewillbeoutputtotheL/Rjacksandthe leveloptimallywithoutallowingthelevelmeterto
headphonejack.Checkthisifyouwanttomonitor reachtheCLIP!indication.
onlythesoundthatsbeingrecorded.Whenusing Theupperpartofthelevelmeter/slidershowsthe
MultiREC,youllhearthesoundfromtheRECSource correspondingaudiotracknumber.
buseswhosePlay/Rec/MutesettingissettoREC.
Ifyoureusingsingletrackrecording,RecordingLevel
Off(unchecked):TheL/R(postTFX)andbusline 1andLevelMeter1arevalid.
signal(s)specifiedbySourceBuswillbesentfromthe
Ifyoureusingmultitrackrecording,thesettingsfor
L/Rjacksandtheheadphonejackasspecifiedbythe
trackswhosePlay/Rec/MuteisRECwillbevalid.
AudioInputBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutBusSelect)
(83a)andpostIFXBusSel.(85a)settings.Thisisthe Whenrecordingasingleaudiotrack,thesignallevel
normalstate. willappearinthelevelmetersassoonasyousetTrack
Selecttoanaudiotrack.Whenrecordingmultiple
Note:IftheSourceBusisL/R,thissettingisignored;
audiotracksviaMultiREC,thesignallevelswill
theL/R(postTFX)signalisoutputfromtheL/Rjacks
appearinthelevelmeterswhenyoupressthe
andtheheadphonejack.
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchtoenterrecord
Rehearsal [Off, On] standbymode.
On(checked):Recordingtotheaudiotrack(s)willbe Usethesliderstoadjustthesignallevels.
simulated(recordingwillnotactuallyoccur). Formoreinformation,seeSettinglevelsonpage 14,
Themonitoringduringrehearsalwilldependonthe Tipsforeliminatingdistortionwhenusingtheanalog
AutoInputsetting.IfAutoInputischecked,you inputsonpage 15,andAvoidingextraneousnoise
willmonitortheexternalinputbetweenpunchinand onpage 14.
punchout,andmonitorthealreadyrecordedsoundat
CLIP ! message
othertimes.
If0dBisexceed,thedisplaywillindicateCLIP!This
Forexampleifyousetpunchinat005(measure5)and
meansthatthelevelofthesamplingsignalistoohigh,
punchoutat008(measure8),youwillmonitorthe
soadjustthelevelasdescribedunderSettinglevels
alreadyrecordedsoundduringmeasures1to4and
onpage 14.
measures9totheend,andmonitortheexternalinput
duringmeasures5to8. ADC OVERLOAD! message
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCLIP!message,
above.
486
Sequencer P0: Play/REC 05: Preferences
Name 14 2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see
Hereyoucanspecifythenamesoftheregionsand RenameSongonpage 582.
WAVEfilesthatwillbecreatedwhenyourecordaudio 3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
tracks. Songonpage 582.
Youcanuseuptoeightcharacters. 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
IfyoucheckTakeattheright,thetakenumberwill CopyFromSongonpage 582.
automaticallybeinputasthelasttwocharactersofthe 5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
name.Formoreinformation,seeTake(below). LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
Take [Off, On] 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see

On(checked):ThetakenumberspecifiedbyTakeNo.
willautomaticallybeassignedasthelasttwo 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
charactersinthenameoftheregionandWAVEfiles FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
thataresaved.Thenumberwillautomatically 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
incrementafterrecording.Ifyouarerecording information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
repeatedly,youcanusethetakenumberstomanage page 583.
theseparaterecordings.
IfTakeisunchecked,youcaninputuptoeight Initializeonpage 584.
charactersasthefilename.Ifitischecked,youcan
inputuptosixcharacters.
Off(unchecked):Thetakenumberwillnotbe page 584.
includedinthenameofthesubsequentlyrecorded
regionandWAVEfiles.
Take No. [0099] 12:StereoPair.Formoreinformation,seeStereo
ThisspecifiesthetakenumberthatwillbeusedifTake Paironpage 585.
ischecked.Aftereachrecording,thisnumberwill 13:AutoHDR/SamplingSetup.Formore
automaticallyincreasebyonefromtheprevioustake. information,seeAutoHDR/SamplingSetupon
page 587.
05d: Metronome Setup
Hereyoucanmakemetronomesettings.
Level [000127]
Setsthevolumeofthemetronome.
Bus (Output) Select [L/R, L, R, 18, 1/27/8]

Selectstheoutputdestinationofthemetronome
sound.
L/R,L,R:OutputfromOUTPUT(MAIN)L/Mono
and/orR.
18,1/27/8:OutputfromOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)
18respectively.
Precount [Measure] [02]

Specifiestheprecountthatwilloccurbeforerecording
begins.
Withasettingof0,recordingwillbegintheinstantyou
presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch(afterfirst
pressingtheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch).

commandsonpage 142.
487
Sequencer mode
06: KARMA GE
06PMC
06a
06b
Select KARMA
Module Info
06c
06d
ThispagegivesyouanoverviewofthefourKARMA
Modules(AD),andletsyoumakebasicadjustments. 06b: GE Select
FormoredetailededitingofKARMAparameters,see
SequencerP7:KARMAonpage 550. A, B, C, D (Module A, B, C, D)
ThesettingsoftheKARMAON/OFFandLATCH Run [Off, On]
switches,KARMASCENES18switches,KARMA
SLIDERS18,andKARMASWITCHES18aresaved Solo [Off, On]
independentlyforeachSong.
GE Select [Preset 0000...2047, USER-A U-
A000...U-A127, ..., USER-L U-L000...U-L127]
06a: Location, Track Select, Load GE
GE Bank Select [Preset...USER-L]
Options, KARMA T.Sig, Tempo
Location [001:01.000999:16.191]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee06b:GESelecton
Track Select [MIDI Track01MIDI Track16, page 384.
Master Track, Audio Track01Audio Track16]
Selected KARMA Module Info
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
TheseparametersletyouselectthecurrentTrack,set GE Number & Name
thelocationofthesequence,andcontrolthetempo. RTC Model [List of RTC Models]
Formoreinformation,see01a:Location,Song/Track
Selectonpage 471. Chord
Load GE Options [Dialogue] KARMA Value
Theseoptionsletyouspecifywhetherthevaluesand Formoreinformation,seeSelectedKARMAModule
assignmentsfortheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHES Infoonpage 384.
whenyouselectaGE.Formoreinformation,seeLoad
GEOptionsonpage 7. 06c: Note/CC Activity
KARMA T. Sig (KARMA Time Signature) S (Scene) [18]
[GE/TS, 1/416/4,1/816/8, 1/1616/16] Thebluesquareintheupperleftofthesectionshows
Formoreinformation,seeKARMAT.Sig(Time thecurrentsceneoftheselectedKARMAmodule.
Signature)onpage 8. ThenumberinparenthesesisthedefaultScene.
488
Sequencer P0: Play/REC 06: KARMA GE
InSequencermode,thedefaultSceneworksslightly 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
differentlythaninProgramandCombinationmodes. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
WheneveryouenterSequencermode,orselectaSong, page 583.
thedefaultissettothecurrentScene.Afterthat,the 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
defaultstaysthesameuntilyouselectanotherSong,or Initializeonpage 584.
exitSequencermode.
IfyouselectaScene,thengotoanotherSongorchange information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
modes,andfinallygobacktotheoriginalSong,the page 584.
previouslyselectedScenewillnowbethedefault.
Module [M, AD] CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
CCs/Notes and Scan Zones 12:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,

ThesearethesameasinCombinationmode.For
details,see06c:Note/CCActivityonpage 385. 13:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
page 465.
06d: Real-Time Controls 14:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 465.
KARMA SWITCHES 18
Current Value 18 Sceneonpage 465.
Stored value 18 16:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,

Control Timbre Category 18 17:AutoAssignKARMARTCName.Formore
Name 18 information,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC
Nameonpage 465.
KARMA SLIDERS 18
Current Value 18
Stored value 18
Control Timbre Category 18
Name 18
ThesearethesameasinCombinationmode.For
details,see06d:RealtimeControlsonpage 385.

commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
489
Sequencer mode

07PMC
07a
07b
07c
Hereyoucanviewthefunctionthatisassignedtothe Knob58:Theseindicatethefunctionsassignedto
vectorjoystick,SW1and2,andknobs58,andview knobs58.Formoreinformation,see18:SetUp
informationabouttheeffects.Youcanalsoadjustthe Controllersonpage 412.
FXBalance.
07c: Effects
07a: Location, Song/Track Select IFX112,MFX1,2,TFX1,2:Thisareaindicatesthe
Location [001:01.000999:16.191] effectassignedtoeachinserteffect,mastereffect,and
totaleffect,anditson/offstatus.
Song Select [000199]
FX Balance
Track Select [MIDI Track01MIDI Track16,
IFX:ThiscontrolstheWet/Drybalanceofallinsert
effects.Asettingof+10isWetorWet,asettingof+0
RPPR [Off, On] leavesthesettingsofthetrackprogram,andasetting
of10isDry.
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
MFX:ThiscontrolstheMFX1and2Return.Asetting
Selectthesongwhoseinformationyouwanttoview. of+10is127,asettingof+0leavesthesettingsofthe
Formoreinformation,see01a:Location,Song/Track trackprogram,andasettingof10is000.
Selectonpage 471.
TFX:ThiscontrolstheWet/DrybalanceofTFX1and
2.Asettingof+10isWetorWet,asettingof+0leaves
07b: Assignment View thesettingsofthetrackprogram,andasettingof10is
Dry.
VJS Whenyouedit,thechangeswillbeimmediately
Thisareashowsinformationaboutthevectorjoystick. reflectedinthesound,butwillnotbesavedinthe
song.Usethiswhenyouwanttomaketemporary
XMode,YMode:Theseindicatethebehaviorofthe
adjustmentstotheeffectsettingsoftheselected
vectorCCfortheXaxisandYaxis.Formore
song.
information,seeVJSXModeonpage 407.
VJS+X,VJSX,VJS+Y,VJSY:Theseindicatethe
controllertransmittedbythe+X,X,+Y,andY t 07: Page Menu Commands
vectors.Formoreinformation,see+Xonpage 407. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
SW1, SW2, Knob58 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
SW1,SW2:Theseindicatethefunctionsassignedto commandsonpage 142.
SW1and2.
490
Sequencer P0: Play/REC 08: Audio In/Sampling
0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
MemoryStatusonpage 582. SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
RenameSongonpage 582. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete page 583.
Songonpage 582. 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see Initializeonpage 584.
CopyFromSongonpage 582. 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
LoadTemplateSongonpage 582. page 584.
08: Audio In/Sampling

08PMC
07a
08a
08c
08b
Hereyoucanadjustthesettingsfortheanalog/digital ThecontrolsurfacewillcontroltheGlobalmode
audiosignalinput(AUDIOINPUT,S/P DIF),andthe settingsifUseGlobalSettingisOn(checked).
samplingrelatedsettingsforSequencermode.
InSequencermode,theexternalaudiosourcesyou 08a: Audio Input
specifyherecanberecordedtoaudiotracksor
sampled.(Youcanalsorecordorsampleasongthats Theseparameterscontrolthelevel,pan,play/muteand
playedbackbytheOASYSoryourownplayingonthe solostatus,sendlevels,andbusassignmentsforeach
keyboard.)YoucanalsousetheOASYSasa6in/10out oftheanaloganddigitalinputs.Formoreinformation,
effectprocessor. see08a:AudioInputonpage 12.
YoucantrecordaSongorpatternwhilesampling. Use Global Setting [Off, On]
NorcanyousamplewhilerecordingaSongor
EachSongcaneitherusethesingle,Globalaudioinput
pattern.
mixersetup,orhaveitsowncustomsettings.Formore
Using the control surface to adjust Audio Inputs information,seeUseGlobalsettingonpage 12.
YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjusttheAudio Input14
InputSend1(toMFX1),Send2(toMFX2),
Play/Rec/Mute,SoloOn/Off,Pan,andLevel. S/P DIF L, S/P DIF R
Formoreinformation,pleasesee09c:AudioInputs
onpage 22. Bus Select (IFX/Indiv. Out Assign)
491
Sequencer mode
[L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off] SequencerSTARTSW:PresstheSAMPLINGREC

switchandthentheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch
FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2] toentersamplingstandbymode.Thenpressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtobeginsampling.
REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4]
Usethiswhenyouwanttoresamplethesong
Send1 (to MFX1) [000127] playback.
Tostopsampling,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
Send2 (to MFX2) [000127] switchonceagain.Samplingwillalsoendifyoukeep
Play/Mute [Play, Mute] samplinguntilthetimespecifiedbySampleTime.
Fortheprocedure,seeTriggeronpage 633.
Solo On/Off [Off, On]
Pan [L000C064R127]
Threshold Level [63dB00dB]
Level [000127] WhensamplingwithTriggersettoThreshold,this
specifiesthelevelatwhichsamplingwillbegin.This
canbesetonlywhenTriggerissettoThreshold.See
08b: Recording Level [dB]
step3oftheTriggerThresholdprocedure.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode
P0AudioInput/Sampling.Formoreinformation, Save to [RAM, DISK]
pleasesee08b:RecordingLevel[dB]onpage 14. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSavetoonpage 17.
Thefinalsignallevelwhenrecordinganaudiotrack Mode (Sample Mode) [L-Mono, R-Mono, Stereo]
issetbytheP0PreferencepageRecordingLevel
setting. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMode(Sampling
Mode)onpage 17.
Recording Level [Inf, 72.0+18.0]
Sample Time [min sec]
TheRecordingLevelsettingappliestoallofSequencer
mode,andisnotsavedwithindividualSongs. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSampleTimeon
page 17.
08c: Sampling Setup

Hereyoucanselectthesourcetobesampled,andthe
methodbywhichtoinitiatesampling. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ExceptforTrigger,thefollowingparametersarethe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
sameasintheProgrammodeP0Audio commandsonpage 142.
Input/Samplingpage.See08c:SamplingSetupon
page 15. 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
SamplingSetupsettingsaremaintainednot
separatelyforeachsong,butasasinglesetin 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Sequencermode. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Source Bus [L/R, REC1/23/4, RenameSongonpage 582.
Audio Input1/23/4,
S/P DIF L/R, Indiv.1/27/8]
Songonpage 582.
Source Direct Solo [Off, On] 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
Trigger [Sampling START SW, Note On,
Threshold, Sequencer START SW] 5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
Specifieshowsamplingwillbeinitiated.
SamplingSTARTSW:PressingtheSAMPLINGREC SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
switchwillcausetheOASYStoentersampling
standbymode,andsamplingwillbeginwhenyou 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
NoteOn:PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthen 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
samplingstandbymode.Samplingwillbeginwhen page 583.
youplaythekeyboard. 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
YoucanalsoinitiatesamplingbyreceivingaMIDI Initializeonpage 584.
noteonmessageinsteadofplayingthekeyboard. 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
Threshold:Samplingwillbeginautomaticallywhen information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
theinputlevelexceedsthespecifiedLevelvalue.For page 584.
moreinformation,see08c:SamplingSetupon 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
page 633. CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
492
Sequencer P0: Play/REC 09: Control Surface
12:OptimizeRAM.Formoreinformation,see 14:AutoHDR/SamplingSetup.Formore
OptimizeRAMonpage 143. information,seeAutoHDR/SamplingSetupon
13:SelectSampleNo.ThisappliesonlywhenSave page 587.
toissettoRAM.Formoreinformation,seeSelect 15:BounceAllTracksToDisk.Formore
SampleNo.onpage 143. information,seeBounceAllTracksToDiskon
13:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSave page 593.
toissettoDisk.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
09: Control Surface

09PMC
09a
09b
TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and FrontpanelLEDsforslidersandknobson
16switchestotheleftoftheLCDdisplay.Itlookslikea page 19
mixer,butitcandootherthingsaswell,including Jump/Catchonpage 19
editingsounds,controllingKARMA,andsending
MIDImessagestoexternaldevices. RESETCONTROLSonpage 19
Thispageshowsyouthecurrentvaluesforeachofthe Local Control On/Off and the Control Surface

sliders,knobs,andbuttons,alongwithinformation TheControlSurfacegeneratesandreceivesMIDICCs
aboutwhattheyarecontrolling.Forinstance,youcan: andSystemExclusivemessages,sothatyoucanrecord
Adjustthevolumeandpanforall16MIDITracks knob,switch,andslidermovementsintoasequencer.
and16AudioTracks ThismeansthattheGlobalmodeLocalControlsetting
ControleachTracksEQsettingsandMasterEffects isimportant:
Sendlevels IfLocalControlisOn,thephysicalControlSurface
ModulatesoundsandeffectsusingtheRealTime willworkproperlyaslongasMIDIisnotbeing
Knobs loopedbackintotheOASYS.
ControlKARMA,andselectKARMAscenes,using IfLocalControlisOff,youmustloopbackMIDI
theslidersandswitches intotheOASYSinorderforthephysicalControl
Surfacetoworkproperly.
EditsoundsusingToneAdjust
RegardlessoftheLocalControlsetting,youcan
Assignsliders,knobs,andswitchestodifferent alwayseditControlSurfaceparametersviathe
ToneAdjustparameters touchscreen.
SelecttheKeyboardTrackandtheHDRAudio Formoreinformation,seeLocalControlandthe
recordtrack ControlSurfaceonpage 709.
FormoreinformationabouttheControlSurface,see:
493
Sequencer mode
Control Assign Switches and Tabs 09a: Song Select & Tempo
YoucanswitchtheControlSurfacebetweenits
differentfunctionsusingeitherthetabsontheleftside Thissectionduplicatesthemostimportantinformation
oftheLCDdisplay,orthefrontpanelControlAssign fromthemainPlaypage.
switches.Thetabsandthefrontpanelswitchesmirror Song [000127]
oneanother;whenyouchangeoneofthem,theother
changesaswell. ThisisthecurrentSong.
ControlAssignswitches Tempo [040.00240.00, EXT]

ThisisthetempoforthecurrentSong,whichappliesto
KARMA,temposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences,
andsoon.
INPUTS clocks.
HDR 1-8
HDR 9-16
-16 040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
09b: MIDI Tracks 18 and 916

TheseControlAssignsettingsletsyouadjustthe
volume,pan,EQ,andFXsendsettingsforMIDITracks
18and916.
InSequencermode,youcanselectoneofsixdifferent
functions: Mixer Knobs [Channel Strip, Individual Pan]
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,EQ, TheMixerKnobsswitchisonthefrontpanel,
andsendlevelsforeachofthe16Tracks,eightata immediatelytotherightoftheknobs,andisalso
time.TheLEDstotherightoftheswitchshowwhether duplicatedintheonscreendisplay.Theeightknobs
yourecurrentlyeditingTracks18or916;pressthe cancontroltwodifferentsetsofparameters,
TIMBRE/TRACKbuttontotogglebetweenthetwo. dependingonthesettingofthisswitch.
IfyouswitchtooneoftheotherControlAssignmodes, ChannelStrip:Withthissetting,theeightknobswill
andthengobacktoTIMBRE/TRACK,itwill controlthePan,EQ,andFXSendsettingsforthe
automaticallyreturntothepreviouslyselectedgroup selectedTrack.UsetheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttonto
(18or916). selectagroupof8Tracks(18or916),andthenuse
theSELECTbuttonstochoosethespecificTrack.
TheAUDIObuttonletsyoucontrolboththeHDR
AudioTracks,andtheAudioInputs.TheLEDstothe IndividualPan:Withthissetting,theknobswill
rightoftheswitchshowwhetheryourecurrently controlthePanforthecurrentgroupofTracks.Knob1
editingHDRTracks18,HDRTracks916,orthe controlsthepanforTrack1(or9),knob2controlsthe
AudioInputs;presstheAUIDIObuttonrepeatedlyto panforTrack2(or10),andsoon.
stepthroughthethreeoptions. MixerKnobsswitch
AswithTIMBRE/TRACKabove,theControlSurface
remembersyourlastselectionunderAUDIO.Ifyou
switchtooneoftheotherControlAssignmodes,and
thengobacktoAUDIO,itwillautomaticallyreturnto
thepreviouslyselectedgroup.
AUDIOHDR18andHDR916letyouadjustthe
volume,pan,EQ,andsendlevelsforeachofthe16
harddiskAudioTracks,eightatatime.
sendlevelsfortheanalogandS/P DIFaudioinputs.
MIDIdevices.
R.TIMEKNOBS/KARMAletsyoumodulatesounds
andeffectswiththeknobs,andcontrolKARMAwith
theslidersandswitches.
TONEADJUSTletsyoueditProgramswithinthe
contextoftheSong,andwithoutmakinganychanges WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip,
totheoriginalProgramdata.Youalsogethandson theknobsprovidequickaccesstothePan,EQ,andFX
accesstotheseedits,usingthesliders,knobs,and Sendparameters.ThePanandEQparameters
switches. duplicatethesimilarlynamedparametersfoundon
theSongeditingpages;changingthemherewill
Youcanfreelychangebackandforthbetweenthe
changethemintheeditingpages,andviceversa.
differentfunctions,withoutlosinganyofyouredits.
494
Pan [Random, L001C064R127] AsettingofL001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064

ThiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedTrack.A inthecenter,andR127tothefarright.
settingofL001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064in RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it
thecenter,andR127tothefarright. wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly
RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,thepan
wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly positionwillbedifferentforeachnoteon.
fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,eachnote Note:withsomeEXisounds,suchastheCX3,
willhaveadifferent,randompanposition. Randompanmayaffectallnotesatonce.
Note:WithsomeEXiinstruments,suchastheCX3, Pan 2/108/16 [Random, L001C064R127]
notescannotbepannedindividually.FortheseEXi,
Randompanwillmoveallsoundingnotestoa ThesecontrolthestereopanofTracks28or1016,
differentpanpositionateachnoteon. dependingonthesettingoftheTIMBRE/TRACK
button.Formoredetails,seePan1/9,above.
EQ Trim [0099]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.
Play/Mute switches 1/98/16
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrols Thetoprowofswitchesallowyoutoturneachofthe
cancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.You Tracksonandoff.
cancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinput Play/Mute 1/9 [Off, On]
trim.
Thiscontrolstheplay/mutestatusofeitherTrack1or
Note:iftheEQpageEQBypassparameteristurned Track9,dependingonwhethertheTIMBRE/TRACK
On,thennoneoftheEQparametersherewillhave buttonissetto18or916.
anyeffect.
Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),Track1willplay.
Low EQ [18+00.0+18.0dB] Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),Track1willbe
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in muted.
incrementsof0.5dB. Play/Mute 2/108/16 [Off, On]
Mid EQ Freq [100Hz10kHz] Thesecontroltheplay/mutestatusofTracks28or10
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ. 16,dependingonthesettingoftheTIMBRE/TRACK
button.
Mid EQ Gain [18.0+00.0+18.0dB] Formoredetails,seePlay/Mute1/9,above.
incrementsof0.5dB. Solo switch and Select switches 1/98/16
High EQ [18.0+00.0+18.0dB] Solo [Off, On]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in SololetsyouisolateoneormoreMIDITracks,HDR
incrementsof0.5dB. AudioTracks,orAudioInputs,sothatyouhearthem
bythemselves.Itdoesthisbytemporarilymutingall
Send 1 [000127] nonsoloedTracksandInputs.
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe SolousestheSelectswitches.Theseswitchescanshow
TracksOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF,it andcontroleitherwhichTrackiscurrentlyselected,or
scalestheOscillatorsendlevels.IftheOutputBusis whichTracksaresoloed.ThemainSolobuttonletsyou
settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend switchbackandforthbetweenthetwoviews.
levels.
Send 2 [000127] switchesselectthecurrentTrack;whentheSolobutton
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore isOn(LED=Onorblinking),theSelectswitcheslet
details,seeSend1,above. yousolooneormoreTracks.
WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreTracksorAudio
Knobs 1/98/16, Individual Pan Inputsaresoloed,theSoloLEDwillblinkonandoffto
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan, remindyouthatsoloisinuse.
theknobswillcontrolthePanforthecurrentgroupof NOTE:ThemainSolobuttonmerelychangesthe
Tracks.Knob1controlsthepanforTrack1,knob2 functionsoftheSelectswitches.Itdoesnotenableor
controlsthepanforTrack2,andsoon. cleartheindividualsolostates.
TheseduplicatetheSongsTrackPanparameters;
Clearing all solos
changingthemherewillchangethemintheediting
pages,andviceversa. ToturnoffSoloforallMIDITracks,AudioTracks,and
AudioInputsatonce:
Pan 1/9 [Random, L001C064R127] 1. PressandholdtheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofeitherTrack1orTrack9, 2. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS,pressthe
dependingonwhethertheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttonis SOLObutton.
setto18or916.
495
Sequencer mode
Exclusive Solo menu parameter MasterVolume

ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectsthe
waythatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff Control Surface Universal Exclusive Front Panel
Master Volume Master Volume Analog Volume
(unchecked),youcansolomultipleTracksandinputs Slider (Fom Knobs, Pedals, Slider
atonce. MIDI, or Sequencer)
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneMIDI
Track,HDRTrack,orAudioInputcanbesoloedata
time.Inthismode,pressingaSoloswitch Headphone
automaticallydisablesanyprevioussolos. TFX 2 & Main L/R
Outputs
Onmostpages,youcanalsotoggleExclusiveSoloby
holdingENTERandpressing1onthenumeric
keypad.
Select 1/98/16 [Off, On] S/PDIF

Output
ThesebuttonseitherselectorsolotheTrack,
dependingonthestateoftheSoloswitch.Formore
details,seeSolo,above.
YoucanlinktheseSelectbuttonstotheKeyboardTrack
selection,sothatyoucanswitchbetweenplayingthe
differenttrackssimplybypressingtheirfrontpanel
buttons.Formoreinformation,seeLinkKBD/REC
TrktoCtrlSurface,below.
Link KBD/REC Trk to Ctrl Surface [Off, On]

ThisonscreencheckboxlinkstheSelectbuttonstothe
KeyboardTrack(forMIDItracks)andtheRectrack
(forHDRaudiotracks).
Whentheboxischecked,andCONTROLSELECTis
settoTIMBRE/TRACK,pressingtheSelectbuttonswill
changetheKeyboardTrack,andviceversa.
Also,whenCONTROLSELECTissettoAUDIOHDR
18or916,pressingtheSelectbuttonswillchangethe
audiorecordtrack,andviceversa.
Volume Sliders 1/98/16

TheseslidersadjustthevolumeleveloftheTracks.
Volume 1/9 [000127]

ThiscontrolsthevolumeofeitherTrack1orTrack9,
dependingonwhethertheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttonis
setto18or916.
Volume 2/108/16 [000127]

ThesecontrolthevolumeofTracks28or1016,
button.Formoredetails,seeVolume1/9,above.

Outputs18.
496
09c
Pan [L000C064R127]
09c: Audio Inputs
Thiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedinput.A
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume, settingofL000placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064in
pan,andFXsendsettingsforeachofthesixaudio thecenter,andR127tothefarright.
Send 1 [000127]
Youcanusethispagetomixsoundsfromother
sourcesintotheOASYSoutputsasanonstage ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe
submixer,forinstance. inputsOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF,it
scalestheprogrammedsendlevel.IftheOutputBusis
Use/Edit Global Setup [Off, On] settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend
Songscanusethesingle,Globalaudioinputmixer levels,overwritinganyprevioussetting.
setup,orcaninsteadhavetheirowncustomsettings.
Send 2 [000127]
WhenUse/EditGlobalSetupisOn,theSongusesthe ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore
Globalsettings.Thisisthedefault,andletsyouchange details,seeSend1,above.
freelybetweendifferentProgramsandSongwithout
affectingtheaudioinputs. Knobs 16, Individual Pan
Also,anyeditsmadeonthispagewillaffecttheGlobal WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan,
setting,alongwithanyotherPrograms,Combis,or knobs14controlthepansettingsforanaloginputs1
SongswhichusetheGlobalsetting. 4,respectively,andknobs56controlthepansettings
Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto fortheleftandrightS/P DIFinputs.Knobs7and8
saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividualSong, havenoeffect.
tosetupspecialsubmixersettingsoreffects
processingforparticularinputs.Inthiscase,set Audio Input Pan (16) [L000C064R127]
Use/EditGlobalSetuptoOff,andtheaudioinputs ThesecontrolthepanforAnalogInputs14and
willusetheSongscustomsettings. S/P DIFLeftandRight,respectively.AsettingofL000
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,and
Mixer Knobs [Channel Strip, Individual Pan] R127tothefarright.
settingsforall6inputsatonce(IndividualPan),orthe Play/Mute switches 16
panandFXSendlevelsfortheselectedinput(Channel Thetoprowofswitchesallowyoutomuteanyorallof
Strip).Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMixerKnobs theaudioinputs.
onpage 497.
Play/Mute (16) [Off, On]
Knobs 18, Channel Strip Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),theinputwillbe
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip, enabled.Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),theinput
theknobsprovidequickaccesstotheselectedinputs willbemuted.
PanandFXSendparameters.
497
Sequencer mode
Solo switch and Select switches 16 Formoreinformation,seeClearingallsoloson

page 495,andExclusiveSolomenuparameteron
Solo [Off, On] page 496.
SololetsyouisolateoneormoreMIDITracks,HDR
Select (16) [Off, On]
AudioTracks,orAudioInputs,sothatyouhearthem
bythemselves.Itdoesthisbytemporarilymutingall Thisswitcheitherselectsorsolostheinput,depending
nonsoloedTracksandInputs. ontheSoloswitchsetting.Formoredetails,seeSolo,
above.
Inputiscurrentlyselected,orwhichInputsaresoloed. Volume Sliders 16
ThemainSolobuttonletsyouswitchbackandforth
betweenthetwoviews. Audio Input Volume (16) [000127]
WhentheSolobuttonisOff(LED=Off),theSelect Theseslidersadjustthevolumelevelsoftheaudio
switchesselectthecurrentInput;whentheSolobutton inputs.
isOn(LED=Onorblinking),theSelectswitcheslet
yousolooneormoreInputs. Master Volume Slider
WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreTracksorAudio Master Volume [000127]
remindyouthatsoloisinuse. Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemainstereooutputs,
NOTE:ThemainSolobuttonmerelychangesthe Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
functionsoftheSelectswitches.Itdoesnotenableor MasterVolumeonpage 496.
cleartheindividualsolostates.
09d
09d: Audio HDR 18 and HDR 916

TheseControlAssignsettingsletyoucontrolthe
volume,pan,EQ,andsendlevelsforeachofthe16
harddiskAudioTracks,eightatatime.
ExceptforPan,theaudiotrackmixerfunctions
identicallytotheMIDITrackmixer,asdescribedunder
09b:MIDITracks18and916onpage 494.
Panisslightlydifferentforaudiotracks:hardleftis
L000(asopposedtoL001),andtheRandomsettingis
notavailable.
498
09e
09e: External MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.Thisallowsyou
CC# Assign (18) [Off, 000119]
theknob.
synths),andsoon.
TheseExternalSetupsarecompletelyseparatefrom MIDI Channel (116) [0116, Gch]
theSong.YoucanthinkofExternalmodeasbeinga ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
separatecontrolsurfacewhichjusthappenstoshare theswitch.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
OASYSssliders,knobs,switches,anddrumpads. desired.
WhenyouselectanExternalSetup,itstaysselected GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
evenwhenyouchangeSongs,orswitchtoProgramor MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.
Combimodes.Thismakesiteasytoselectdifferent
OASYSsoundswithoutdisruptinganyexternalMIDI CC# Assign (116) [Off, 000119]
control,andviceversa. ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby
theswitch.
Setup [000127]
ThisselectstheGlobalsetupfortheknobs,sliders, Switch On/Off (116) [Off, On]
switches,anddrumpads. Whentheswitchisturnedon,itsendsavalueof127;
Note:thisselectionisnotstoredwiththeSong. whenitisturnedoff,itsendsavalueof0.
Knobs 18 Sliders 18 & Master Slider

MIDI Channel (18) [0116, Gch] MIDI Channel (18) [0116, Gch]
ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannel ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
assignedtotheknob.Eachcansendonadifferent theslider.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
channel,ifdesired. desired.
499
Sequencer mode

theslider.
09f
Youcanassignmanyparameterstoasingleslideror
09f: RT (Real Time Knobs)/KARMA switch,ifdesired.Duetospacelimitations,however,
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyoumodulateProgram onlyfirstfourparameterswillbeshownhere.Ifthere
andEffectsparameterswiththeeightknobs,and aremoreassignmentsthancanbedisplayed,youllsee
controlKARMAwiththeswitchesandsliders. a>symbolafterthefourthparameter.
Tochangetheparameterassignments,usetheKARMA
Selected parameter information GERTPandPerfRTPpages.Formoreinformation,
WhenyouselectaKARMASliderorSwitch,thisarea pleasesee75:GERealTimeParameterson
showsdetailedinformationaboutitsKARMA page 113,and76:PerfRealTimeParameterson
parameterassignments. page 116.
Control [(SW18, SL18)] Parameter Value [Depends on parameter]

ThisshowswhichSwitchorSlideriscurrently ThisshowsthevalueoftheGEorPerformanceReal
selected. TimeParametersassignedtotheselectedSlideror
Assignment [Name] individualparameters.
EachKARMASliderorSwitchcancontrolmultiple
internalparameterssimultaneously.Thegroupof KARMA Module Control
parameterscanbegivenasinglename,whichisshown
Module Control [M, A, B, C, D]
here.
WhenusedtocontrolKARMA,theControlSurface
Youcanselectdifferentnames,ifdesired.Formore slidersandswitchesarefivelayersdeep:oneforeach
information,see79:Name/NoteMaponpage 125 Module(AD),andaMasterLayercapableof
Module and Parameter [AD 0132, P 0108] controllingselectedparametersfromallofthe
Modulesatonce.EachlayerhasitsownSlider,Switch,
ThisreadonlydisplayshowstheKARMA andScenesettings.
parameter(s)assignedtotheSliderorSwitch.
TheModuleControlradiobuttons(andthefront
A,B,C,andDmeanthatthesliderorswitchcontrolsa panelMODULECONTROLbutton)letyouswitch
GERealTimeParameterfromthecorresponding betweenthesefivelayers.
KARMAModule.Thefollowingnumberidentifiesthe
specificparameterwithinthemodule.Forinstance, Toselectadifferentlayer,justpressitsonscreenradio
A22isparameter22ofModuleA. button,orusethefrontpanelMODULECONTROL
buttontostepthrougheachlayerinturn.Whenyoudo
PmeansthattheswitchiscontrollingaPerformance so,alloftheKARMASliders,SwitchesandSceneswill
RealTimeParameter. updateinstantlytoshowtheircurrentvaluesand
nameswithintheselectedlayer.
500
Knobs 18 KARMA SCENES 1-8

Knobs14allhavededicatedfunctionswhich AKARMASceneincludesthesettingsforallofthe
correspondtoMIDICCs.Knobs58canbeassignedto KARMASlidersandSwitches.EachSongcancontain
awidevarietyoffunctions,manyofwhichalsohave uptoeightScenes.
correspondingMIDICCs. ToselectaScene,justpressitsswitchyoullseeallof
Whenyoumovetheknob,itwillsendthe theKARMASlidersandSwitchesupdateinstantlyto
correspondingMIDICCtothecurrentKeyboard theirnewvalues.
Track,andalsotoallTracksonthesameMIDIChannel
astheKeyboardTrack.(ToeditindividualPrograms, KARMA SWITCHES 1-8
useToneAdjustinstead.) TheseswitchescontrolKARMAPerformanceorGE
Also,whentheCCisreceivedviaMIDIorgenerated (GeneratedEffect)RealTimeParameters,asassigned
byKARMA,theknobvaluewillchangetomatchthe ontheKARMAPerfRTPandGERTPpages.
CCvalue.
NotethattheKnob18settingsoftheindividual
Karma Sliders 1-8
ProgramsdonotapplyinSequencermode. ThesesliderscontrolKARMAPerformanceorGE
Unlessotherwisenoted,scalingmeansthatthe RealTimeParameters,asassignedontheKARMA
parametersareattheirprogrammedvalueswhenthe PerfRTPandGERTPpages.
controllerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
controllerisat127.Foranotherlookatthis,seethe Master Volume [000127]
diagrambelow.
CCscalingofparameters aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
99 MasterVolumeonpage 496.
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
00
0 64 127
CC Value
Knob 1: CUTOFF (CC#74) [000127]

ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAand
B,andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74.

Knob 3: Filter EG Intensity (CC#79) [000127]

receivesMIDICC#79.

Knobs 58 [000127]
messagesusuallyCCs.
501
Sequencer mode
Selected parameter
information
09g
09g: Tone Adjust Track select

ToneAdjustprovidestwoimportantfeatures Track [116]
simultaneously: ThisselectstheTrackwhoseToneAdjustparameters
Itletsyouuseallofthesliders,knobs,andswitches appearonthescreenandtheControlSurface.Youcan
tocontrolProgramparametersliketheknobson switchbackandforthbetweenthedifferentTimbresas
ananalogsynth,orthedrawbarsonanorgan. muchasyoulike,withoutlosingyouredits.
ItletsyoumodifyProgramsforusewithina ThisparameteristhesameastheselectedTrackin
specificSong,includingeverythingfromsubtle TIMBRE/TRACKmode;changingonewillalsochange
tweaks(likechangingLFOspeeds)todramatic theother.
changes(suchasselectingadifferentMultisample). YoucanuseashortcuttochangethecurrentTrack
Anychangesthatyoumakearestoredwiththe directlyfromtheControlSurface,withoutleaving
Song,anddonotaltertheoriginalProgram. ToneAdjustmode:
EachofthesixteenTrackshasitsownsetoftoneadjust 1. PressandholdtheTONEADJUSTbutton.
parameters,butonlyoneTrackisshownatatime. 2. WhileholdingTONEADJUST,pressa
Formoreinformation,see: PLAY/MUTEorSELECTbuttontoselectaTrack.
ToneAdjustandMIDISysExonpage 27 ThePLAY/MUTEbuttonsselectTracks18,andthe
SELECTbuttonsselectTracks916.
InteractionbetweenToneAdjustandMIDICCs
onpage 27 3. ReleasetheTONEADJUSTbutton.
Absolute,Relative,andMetaparameterson TheControlSurfaceandscreenwillchangetoshow
page 27 theToneAdjustparametersforthenewlyselected
Track.
Saving Tone Adjust Edits
Auto Load PRG [Off, On]
InProgrammode,whenyoumakeeditsviaTone
Adjustandthensavetheresults,theProgramdatais WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTrack,this
changedjustasifyoudeditedtheinternalparameters parameterdetermineswhetherornotthePrograms
directly.Formoreinformation,seeSavingTone ToneAdjustsettingswillbeloadedaswell.
AdjustEditsonpage 27. Thesesettingsincludetheparametersassignedtoeach
InSequencemode,however,allToneAdjusteditsare slider,knob,andswitch,alongwiththeon/offstateof
storedwithintheSong;theProgramitselfisnot anySwitchesassignedtoAbsoluteparameters.
changed.ThisletsyoualterthewaythataProgram NotethatanyeditsyouvemadeusingToneAdjustin
soundsinonespecificSongwithoutaffectingtheway Programmodewillalreadyhavebeenstoredintothe
thatitsoundsinProgrammode,orinanyother Programsparameters.ThismeansthattheProgram
CombisorSongs. willstillsoundthesame,whetherornotyouloadthe
ToneAdjustsettings.
502
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchange Ifyouunassignaparameterfromacontrol,itwill
anyoralloftheToneAdjustsettingsasdesired, reverttothisvalue.
includingbothassignmentsandvalues.Allsuchedits
arestoredintheSong,withoutaffectingtheoriginal Knobs 18
Program.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOn,ToneAdjustsettingswillbe
automaticallyloadedalongwiththeProgram. ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
knob.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOff,thentherelationship
betweenthetypesoftheoldandnewProgramswill ThefirstgroupofparametersaretheCommonset,
determinewhathappens,asshowninthetablebelow: whicharesupportedbymostProgramtypes.Forafull
list,seeCommonToneAdjustParameterson
page 399.
Then Tone
AftertheCommonparameters,theitemsinthelistwill
Adjust
If the old And the new varydependingontheProgramtype.Formore
parameters
Program is Program is information,pleasesee:
and values
are HD1ToneAdjustParameters,onpage 30.
AL1:ToneAdjust,onpage 214.
An HD-1 Program An HD-1 Program kept the same
CX3:ToneAdjust,onpage 236.
loaded from the
An HD-1 Program An EXi Program STR1:ToneAdjustonpage 282.
new Program
MS20EXToneAdjustparametersonpage 309
loaded from the
Any EXi Program An HD-1 Program PolysixEXToneAdjustparametersonpage 325.
new Program
OtherEXiinstrumentswillhavetheirownsetof
An EXi Program parameters,asdescribedintheirmanuals.
with the same EXi
An EXi Program assigned to the kept the same Assignments are exclusive
same slots as the Eachcontrollercanbeassignedtoonlyoneparameter,
previous Program
andeachparametercanbeassignedtoonlyone
An EXi Program
controller.
which does not use loaded from the Toswapaparameterfromonecontroltoanother,
An EXi Program
the same EXi as the new Program youllneedtofirstunassignitfromtheoldcontrol,
previous Program andthenassignittothenewcontrol.

Selected parameter information Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.The
Thisstatuslineshowsdetailed,readonlyinformation rangeofvalueswillvarydependingontheparameter
aboutthecurrentlyselectedToneAdjustparameter. assignedtothecontrol.
(Control) [Knob18, SW116, Switches 116
Slider18, Slider M]
ThisisthephysicalcontrollerassignedtotheTone andsliders.
Adjustparameter.SliderMistheMasterSlider.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,or
(Assignment) [Full Parameter Name] anAbsoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
Thisshowsthefullnameoftheparameterassignedto SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
thecontroller.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssign
SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
parameter,below.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
Value [Current Parameter Value] parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectly
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.The reflectstheparametervalue:
rangeofvalueswillvarydependingontheparameter SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
Type [Relative, Absolute, Meta]
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
howeditstotheparameteraresaved.Formore
switch.Formoreinformation,seeAssign,above.
information,seeAbsolute,Relative,andMeta
parametersonpage 27. On Value [Depends on parameter]
Stored Value [Original Parameter Value] Theparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchis
On.
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,before
theeffectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoTone WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
AdjustparameterswhichcontrolasingleProgram parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesame
parameter. astheSwitchStatus(seebelow).
503
Sequencer mode
Switch Status [Off, On]

ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff.
ThestatusisalsoshownbytheLEDsinthephysical
buttons.
Sliders 18 and Master Slider

TheseworkidenticallytoKnobs18,asdescribed
above.

commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
page 584.
12:CopyScene.Thisisavailableonlywhen
ControlAssignissettoRTKNOBS/KARMA.For
moreinformation,seeCopySceneonpage 151.
13:SwapScene.Thisisavailableonlywhen
ControlAssignissettoRTKNOBS/KARMA.For
moreinformation,seeSwapSceneonpage 151.
504
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 11: MIDI Track EQ
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller
11: MIDI Track EQ

11PMC
11a
11b
EachTrackhasadedicatedthreebandEQ,with startstheRPPRassignedtothetrack,andKBD:the
sweepablemidband.Thispageletsyouviewand bank/number/nameoftheprogramthatwillsound
adjustthesettingsforall16MIDITracksatonce. whenyouplaythekeyboard.
Ifyouveselectedanaudiotrack,thisshowstheAT:
11a: Location, Song/Track Select audiotracknumber/regionnumberandnameofthe
firstaudioevent,[STEREO]:StereoPairon/offstatus,
Location [001:01.000999:16.191] andKBD:thebank/number/nameoftheprogramthat
willsoundwhenyouplaythekeyboard.
Song Select [000199]
RPPR(Assign)willnotshowalloftheRPPR
Track Select [MIDI Track01MIDI Track16, assignmentsiftherearemanyofthem.Youcanusethe
Master Track, Audio Track01Audio Track16] P5PatternEditpagetoseealloftheRPPR
assignments.
RPPR [Off, On]
Track Number
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
ThisindicatestheMIDItracknumber.Thevarious
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01a:Location, parametersbeloweachtracknumbermakesettingsfor
Song/TrackSelectonpage 471. thecorrespondingtrack.
Track Category [0017]

11b: 3 Band Parametric EQ
Thisshowstheabbreviatedcategorynameofthe
Select Track Info ProgramassignedtotheTrack.
Track Number
Track Category Track 01 (Track Number)
Auto Load Prog EQ [Off, On]
Selected Track Info WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTrack,this
Thispagedisplaysinformationaboutthetrackthats parameterdetermineswhetherornotthePrograms
selectedforediting.IfyouveselectedaMIDItrack, EQsettingswillbeloadedaswell.
thisshowsthebanktype,T:MIDItrack
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchange
number/programbank/number/name,Ch:MIDI
anyoralloftheEQsettingsasdesired.Allsuchedits
channelnumber,RPPR(Assign):thekeynumberthat
arestoredintheCombination,withoutaffectingthe
originalProgram.
505
Sequencer mode
Regardlessofthissetting,subsequenteditstothe
ProgramsEQinProgrammodewillnotaffectthe t 11: Page Menu Commands
Combination. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
On:theProgramsEQsettingswillbeloaded numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
automaticallyalongwiththeProgram.Thisisthe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
defaultsetting. commandsonpage 142.
Off:theProgramsEQsettingswontbeloaded.Use 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
thisifyouvesetuptheEQinaspecificway,andthen MemoryStatusonpage 582.
wantittostayunchangedwhileyoutryoutdifferent 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Programs. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Bypass [Off, On] 2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see
IfthisisOn(checked),alloftheEQwillbedisabled, RenameSongonpage 582.
includingInputTrim.Bypasscanbeconvenientfor 3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
comparingtheresultsoftheEQwiththeoriginal Songonpage 582.
signal. 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
Input Trim [0099] CopyFromSongonpage 582.
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Note 5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
thatthisparameterusesalinearscale;50isequivalent LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
to6dB,25isthesameas12dB,andsoon. 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrols SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
cancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.You 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
cancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinput FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
trim.
High Gain [18.0+18.0dB] information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
incrementsof0.5dB. 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
Mid Frequency [100Hz10.00kHz]
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ. information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
page 584.
Mid Gain [18.0+18.0dB]
incrementsof0.5dB.
12:ShowEQGraphic.Formoreinformation,see
Low Gain [18.0+18.0dB] ShowEQGraphiconpage 463.
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.
MIDI Track EQ and the control surface

YoucanusetheControlSurfacetoadjustalmostallof
theTrackEQparameters(exceptforBypass).Todoso:
TIMBRE/TRACKswitchtoselecteitherTracks18
or916.
2. UsetheMIXSELECT1/98/16switchestoselect
theTrackyouwanttocontrol.
CHANNELSTRIP.
4. UsetheMIXCHANNELSTRIPknobs26to
adjusttheEQTRIM,LOWEQgain,MIDEQ
frequencyandgain,andHIGHEQgain,as
desired.

TheseparametersadjustthethreebandEQ(with
sweepablemidrange)forMIDItracks2through16.
Theyarethesameasfortrack1.SeeTrack01:.
506
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 12: Audio Track EQ
12: Audio Track EQ

12PMC
11a
11b
12a
HereyoucanadjustthethreebandEQ(with Audio Track EQ and the control surface

sweepablemidrange)foraudiotrack. EQparametersotherthanBypasscanbeeditednot
onlyfromwithinthescreen,butalsousingthecontrol
12a: 3 Band Parametric EQ surface.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefront
Track 0116 (Track Number) pageoftheLCD.Theproceduregivenbelowdescribes
STEREO 1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERAUDIO
ThisisshownifStereoPairison. switchtoselecteither18or916.
Bypass [Off, On] 2. PresstheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoselect

CHANNELSTRIP.
Input Trim [0099] 3. UsetheMIXSELECT1/98/16switchestoselect
thetrackyouwanttocontrol.
High Gain [18.0+18.0dB]
4. UsetheMIXCHANNELSTRIP26knobsto
Mid Frequency [100Hz10.00kHz] adjustEQTRIM,LOWGAIN,MIDFREQ,
MIDGAIN,andHIGHEQ.
Mid Gain [18.0+18.0dB]
Fortracksthatyouvespecifiedasastereopair,the
Low Gain [18.0+18.0dB] EQoftheoddnumberedtrackwillcontrolboth
tracks.EditingtheEQoftheevennumberedtrack
HereyoucanadjustthemidsweepablethreebandEQ
willnotcontrolthesound.
foraudiotracks116.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
11b:3BandParametricEQonpage 505.
Recording the Audio Track EQ

TheBypass,InputTrim,HighGain,Mid ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Frequency,MidGain,andLowGainsettingsyou numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
makehereareusedwhenyouplaybackorrecordfrom shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
thebeginningofthesong.Ifsettingsotherthan commandsonpage 142.
Bypassaremodifiedduringrecording,thechanges 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
arerecordedtoeachaudiotrackasautomationevent MemoryStatusonpage 582.
data,andthesechangeswillbereproducedduring
playback.
Youcanalsomodifythesettingsduringplayback.
HoweverifyouverecordedEQdata,thesettingswill
changeaccordingtotherecordeddata.
507
Sequencer mode
3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
Songonpage 582. Initializeonpage 584.
4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
CopyFromSongonpage 582. information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see page 584.
LoadTemplateSongonpage 582. 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
SaveTemplateSongonpage 583. 12:ShowEQGraphic.Formoreinformation,see
7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see ShowEQGraphiconpage 463.
FF/REWSpeedonpage 583 13:StereoPair.Formoreinformation,seeStereo
8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore Paironpage 585.
page 583.
15: Vector Volume Control

15PMC
15a
15b
VectorSynthesisletsyoucontrolTrackvolumesand How Sequencer mode Vector Volume works

Program&EffectsparametersbymovingtheVector InProgrammode,VectorVolumefadesbetweenthe
Joystick,byusingtheprogrammableVectorEnvelope, twoOscillators.Oscillator1isalwaysatmaximum
orbythecombinationofthetwo. volumewhentheVectorpositionisallthewaytothe
FormorebackgroundinformationonVectorSynthesis, left(X),andOscillator2isalwaysatmaximumwhen
pleaseseeWhatdoesVectormean?onpage 39,and theVectorPositionisallthewaytotheright(+X).
VectorJoystickandVectorEnvelopeonpage 39. InSequencermode,ontheotherhand,theVectorcan
Program and Song Vectors work together fadebetweenanyorallofthe16Tracks.Youcanassign
eachoftheTrackstobecontrolledbyanyofthefour
InSequencermode,eachTracksProgramstillhasits Vectoraxes(+X,X,+Y,Y),ortonotbecontrolledat
ownVectorEG,whichcontrolsvolumeandCCsasit all.
didinProgrammode.YoucandisabletheProgram
VectorVolumeandCCcontrolseparatelyforeach Thisletsyousetupcomplextransitionsbetween
Track,ifdesired. differentPrograms,includingbetweenHD1and
differentEXiinstruments.
ThereisalsoaseparateSongwideVectorEG,withits
ownVectorVolumeandCCcontrolsettings.Aswith
theProgramVector,youcandisabletheSongVolume
andCCcontrolseparatelyforeachTrack.Notethatthe
SongVectorCCsaffectonlyTracksandEffectsonthe
GlobalMIDIChannel.
508
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 15: Vector Volume Control
Vector Synthesis system, Sequencer mode
Song
Song Vector Volume Control
Track 1-16 Center Volume Vector Modulation of

and Equal Power settings Track Volume
Song switch:
Song
Vector EG + Song Vector CC Control
Song switch:
Enable CC control
Vector CC Modulation of
Vector Joystick X+/- and Y+/-
VJS X and Y modes Program and FX Parameters
MIDI In CC Assignments
(Global Channel Only)
(Global Chan.)
The front-panel Vector Joystick applies only when the

Keyboard Track is on the Global Channel.

Vector MIDI Out
Vector CC Control
Global Controllers Vector CC MIDI Output

Defaults: X=118, Y=119 Vector Joystick
Track 1
The front-panel Vector Joystick applies only when the Track
is on the same MIDI Channel as the Keyboard Track.
Vector Joystick Program Vector Volume Control

MIDI In
(Track Chan.) Osc 1-2 Center Volume Vector Modulation of
and Equal Power settings Osc 1-2 Volume
Program switch:
Program
Vector EG +
Program Vector CC Control
X+/- and Y+/- Vector CC Modulation of

VJS X and Y modes
CC Assignments Program Parameters
Program switch:
Enable CC control
Track 16
Enable Volume Control [Off, On]

15a: Vector Volume Control
VectorVolumeControlletsyouadjusttherelative controlthevolumesofallTrackswhoseVJSAssign
volumesofthe16TracksbymovingtheVectorJoystick parameterisnotsettoOff.
(ortheVectorEnvelope)fromlefttorightontheXaxis,
andupanddownontheYaxis.
notdirectlyaffectvolume.However,itsstillpossible
TheEqualAmountcheckboxmakestheVectorcreate fortheVectortocontrolvolumeviaVectorCCsand
asmoothfadebetweentheTracks,whiletheindividual AMS,dependingontheindividualPrograms
TrackCenterVolumeparametersallowyoutocreate parametersettings.
morecomplexfadeshapes.
509
Sequencer mode
Equal Amount [Off, On] Track 01

ThisappliesonlywhenEnableVolumeControlisOn.
VJS Assign [Off, +X, X, +Y, Y]
WhenEqualAmountisOn,theVectorwillfade
ThisassignsanaxisoftheVectortocontroltheTracks
betweenallfourVectoraxeswhilemaintainingatotal
volume.SeethediagramVJSAssignandProgram
amountof100%.Thisprovidesasmoothfadebetween
Volume,below,formoredetails.
thedifferentsounds,andisthetypeofvolumecontrol
usedbyclassicvectorsynths. OffmeansthattheVectorpositionwillnotaffectthe
Tracksvolume.
NotethatthiswillworkbestwhenthePrograms
assignedtoeachofthefouraxeshaveequivalent VJSAssignandProgramVolume
volumes.Forinstance,youmightcreateaSongwith
fourPrograms,eachsoundingatthesamevolumeand +X X
assignedtoadifferentaxis.Youcouldthenaddafifth
from left to right. from right to left.
Program,assignittooneoftheaxes,andthenreduce
thevolumesofbothProgramsonthataxisby50%so
thattheircombinedvolumeisthesameasanyoneof
theotherPrograms. 0% 100% 100% 0%
Also,whenthisischecked,theCenterVolume
parameterswillbegrayedout,sinceEqualAmount
setsthemautomatically.
WhenEqualAmountisOff,theindividualTrack 127 0 +127 127 0 +127
CenterVolumeparametersdeterminethewayin
whichVectorpositionaffectsvolume.
Note:Foraninterestingvariationonthiseffect,turn +Y Y
EqualAmountOff,andinsteadsetalloftheTrack from bottom to top. from top to bottom.
CenterVolumesto50%.TheTrackswillstillfade +127 +127
togethersmoothly,butwithamoregentleeffect 100% 0%
towardstheextremesoftheVectoraxes.
0 0
15b: Vector Graphic
Vector Graphic 0% 100%
127 127
Thisshowsadiagramofthevectorspace,including
thefivepointsoftheVectorEG(labeled04)andthe
currentpositionoftheVectorJoystick(labeledJ). Center Volume [0, 25, 50, 75, 100%]
ThetransitionsbetweentheEGspointsareshownby ThissetsthevolumeofTrack1atthecenterpoint.It
blacklines,andthelooptransitionisshownbyagray appliesonlywhenEqualAmount,above,issettoOff.
line. Thevolumesattheextremeendsoftheaxisarefixed,
dependingonthesettingoftheVJSAssignparameter.
Forinstance,ifVJSAssignissettoX,theTrackwill
Thevectorgraphicincludesanimagerepresentingthe alwaysbeat100%volumeontheleftside,and0%
VectorVolumeControlsettingsforthecurrentTrack (silent)ontherightside.
(seeTrackSelect,below).YoucanusetheShow
VolumeImagecheckboxtotogglethispartofthe ThisparameterappliesonlytotheSongVectorVolume
graphiconandoff. control,anddoesnotchangetheProgramsindividual
VectorVolumesettings.
Track Select [0116] TrackCenterVolume,VJSAssign=X
ThisselectstheTrackwhosevolumeimagewillbe
shown. 100%

YoucanviewthevolumeandCCvaluesforthecurrent Volume 50%
shown. 0%
-127 0 +127
Track Volume & CC Display Vector X-axis position
Center Volume Values: 100
75
50
25
0
510
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 16: Vector CC Control
Enable Program Vector Volume [Off, On] 2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see

WhenthisisturnedOn,theProgramsVectorVolume RenameSongonpage 582.
controlwillfunctionasitdoesinProgrammode, 3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
crossfadingbetweenOscillators1and2.Thecrossfade Songonpage 582.
willbecontrolledbythecombinationofthePrograms 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
VectorEGandtheVectorJoystick,andisnotaffected CopyFromSongonpage 582.
bytheSongsVectorEG.
WhenthisisturnedOff,theProgramsVectorVolume LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
controlwillbedisabled.
Tracks 0216 SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
TheparametersforTracks216areidenticaltothose 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
forTrack01,asdescribedabove. FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
t 15: Page Menu Commands page 583.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese Initializeonpage 584.
commandsonpage 142. 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see page 584.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
16: Vector CC Control

16PMC
11a
16a
EachofthefourdirectionsoftheVectorcansenda
16a: Vector CC Control differentMIDICC,includingleft(X),right(+X),up
VectorCCControlletsyouusethecombinationofthe (+Y),anddown(Y).Youcanchoosebetweenseveral
VectorJoystickandtheVectorEGtocontroltheSongs differentpatternscombiningthesefourdirectionsby
Effects. usingtheVJSXModeandVJSYModeparameters.
511
Sequencer mode
TheVectorCCsarealsosenttoallGlobalChannel NotethatthissettingaffectsonlyCCControl;ithasno
Tracks.ThesemaymodulateProgramparameters,like effectonVolumeControl.Also,itappliesonlytothe
anyotherMIDICCs,dependingonthesettingswithin SongsVectorCCs,andhasnoeffectontheindividual
eachindividualProgram. ProgramVectorCCs.
Finally,youcanoptionallysendtheseCCsoutto Positivesendsoutonly+X,startingat0atthefarleft,
externalMIDIinstruments.Aglobalparameterallows andincreasingto127atthefarright.Xisdisabledin
youtoenableordisablethisMIDIoutput;bydefault,it thismode.
isdisabled. NegativesendsoutonlyX,startingat0atthefar
Program and Song Vectors work together right,andincreasingto127atthefarleft.Inthismode,
+Xisgrayedout.
InSequencermode,eachTracksProgramstillhasits
ownVectorEG,whichcontrolsvolumeandCCsasit Xfadesendsoutboth+XandX,overlapping
didinProgrammode.YoucandisablethePrograms throughouttheXaxis.Asoneincreases,theother
VectorVolumeandCCcontrolseparatelyforeach decreases.
Track,ifdesired. Splitsendsoutboth+XandX,withasplitinthe
ProgramVectorCCsaffectonlytheirownProgram, center.+Xissentwhenthepointmovestotherightof
evenifotherTracksaresettothesameMIDIchannel. thecenter,andXissentwhenthepointmovestothe
leftofcenter.
Thereisalsoasingle,separateVectorEGfortheentire
Song,withitsownVectorVolumeandCCcontrol +X [OffMIDI CC#119]
settings.SongVectorCCsaffectallTrackssettothe Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Xvector.You
Globalchannel.AswiththeProgramVector,youcan canusethisasanAMSsourcetocontrolProgram
disabletheSongVolumeandCCcontrolseparatelyfor parameters,orasaDmodsourcetocontrolEffects
eachTrack. parameters.ItwillbegrayedoutiftheVJSXMode,
Vector and MIDI above,issettoNegative.
TheVectorfeaturesinteractwithMIDIintwodifferent InadditiontothestandardlistofMIDIcontrollers,you
ways:throughtheVectorJoystick,andthroughthe canalsoassignthe+Xvectortoduplicatethefunction
VectorCCControl. ofseveralfrontpanelcontrollers,includingJSX,JS+X,
JSX,Knobs58,andSW12.
TheVectorJoysticksendsandreceivestwoMIDI
controllers:onefortheXaxis,andtheotherfortheY Forinstance,ifyouassign+XtoKnob6,thevectors+X
axis.InGlobalmode,youcanassignthesetoanyMIDI willusethecontrollerassignedtoKnob6onthe
CCnumbersyoulike.ThedefaultsareCC#118forthe ControllerAssignpage.
Xaxis,andCC#119fortheYaxis. Finally,youcanalsoassign+XtocontroltheMaster
TheVectorJoystickanditsCCscontroltheVector Volume.
position,inconjunctionwiththeVectorEG.
X [OffMIDI CC#119]
TheVectorCCControl,ontheotherhand,isgenerated ThisassignsthecontrollersentbytheXvector.Itwill
bytheVectorposition.Normally,thiswillonlyaffect begrayedoutiftheVJSXMode,above,issetto
internalsoundsandeffects.Ifyoulike,however,you Positive.
canalsoenableaGlobalparametertosendthese
generatedCCstoexternalMIDIdevices. Theselectionsarethesameasfor+X,above.
Notethat,inSequencermode,onlytheSongsVector VJS Y Mode [Positive, Negative, Xfade, Split]
CCscanbesenttoexternalMIDIinstruments;the ThiscontrolstheVectorCCpatternfortheYaxis.For
individualProgramsvectorCCsareonlyused moreinformation,seethedescriptionunderVJSX
internally. Mode,above.
Enable CC Control [Off, On] +Y [OffMIDI CC#119]
Whenthisboxischecked,theVectorpositionwillsend Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Yvector.Itwill
theCCsassignedto+X,X,+Y,andY,assetbelow. begrayedoutiftheVJSYMode,above,issetto
NotethattheSongVectorCCsaffectonlyTracksand Negative.
EffectsontheGlobalMIDIChannel.
notaffecttheseCCs.However,thejoystickwillstill Y [OffMIDI CC#119]
sendandreceiveitsdedicatedMIDICCs,justlike Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Yvector.Itwill
otherphysicalcontrollers.SeeVectorandMIDI, begrayedoutiftheVJSYMode,above,issetto
above,formoreinformation. Positive.
ThisparameteraffectsonlytheSongVectorCCs.Even Theselectionsarethesameasfor+X,above.
ifthisisturnedOff,theindividualProgramsVector
CCswillstillfunctionnormally.
VJS X Mode [Positive, Negative, Xfade, Split]

YoucansetuptheVectortosendoutCCsinseveral
differentpatterns,asshowninthegraphicbelow.This
controlsthepatternfortheXaxis.
512
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 16: Vector CC Control
VectorCCModes Notethat.insomecases,theVectorCCsmayhave
beenusedformodulatingtheProgramseffectsvia
Positive Negative Dmod.ThisfunctionalityisnotcarriedintotheSong;
Generates only +X, Generates only X, formodulatingtheSongseffects,usetheSongsVector
increasing from left to right. increasing from right to left.
CCsinstead.
IfEnableProgramVectorCCisOff,thenthePrograms
VectorCCswillhavenoeffect.Thiscanbeusefulif
0 +X CC 127 127 X CC 0 theyareconflictingwiththeSongsVectorCCs.
Tracks 0216
ThesettingsforTracks216areidenticaltothosefor
Track01,asdescribedabove.
127 0 +127 127 0 +127
X-Axis X-Axis
Xfade Split ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Generates both +X and X. Generates both +X and -X. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
One increases as the other Both are 0 in the center.
decreases. +X increases to the right;
X increases to the left. commandsonpage 142.
+X CC
0 +X CC 127
0 127 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
127 0
0 X CC 127
X CC 2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see
127 0 +127 127 0 +127 3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
X-Axis X-Axis
Songonpage 582.
Show Point [VJS, Vector EG Point 04] CopyFromSongonpage 582.
YoucanviewthevolumeandCCvaluesforthecurrent 5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
positionoftheVectorJoystick,orforanyoftheEGs LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
fivepoints.Thisselectsthepointwhosevalueswillbe 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
shown. SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
CC at Show Point [%] 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
Thisreadonlydisplayshowsthevolumevaluesfor FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
thecurrentVectorpoint,asselectedbytheShowPoint 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
parameter,above. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
Track 01 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
Enable Song Vector CC [Off, On] Initializeonpage 584.
ThiscontrolswhetherornottheTrackwillreceivethe 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
SongsVectorCCs. information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
page 584.
IfthisisOn,theTrackwillreceivetheCCs,andthe
TracksProgramwillrespondtothemaccordingtoits 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
ownAMSsettings. CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
IfthisisOff,theTrackwillnotreceivetheCCs.This
canbeusefuliftheSongsVectorCCsarecausing
unwantedmodulation,orconflictingwiththe
ProgramsownVectorCCs.
Enable Program Vector CC [Off, On]

ThiscontrolswhetherornottheProgramsownVector
CCswillbeactive.
IfthisisOn,theProgramsVectorCCsandVectorEG
willworkasAMSsources,justastheydidinProgram
mode.TheCCswillnotaffectanyotherTracks,evenif
theyaresettothesameMIDIchannel.
513
Sequencer mode
17: Vector Envelope

17PMC
11a
17a
17b
17c
JoysticktocontroltheVectorposition.Itsparticularly willstartatnoteon,andgointoreleaseatnoteoff.All
convenientformodulatingeffects,sinceitstheonly thenoteswillstillshareasingleCCControlEG.
programmablemodulationsourcestoredwiththe
Song,outsideofKARMA.
17a: Basic

AllofthenotesontheSongsGlobalChannelsharea setting.
singleCCControlEG.ThisEGstartswhenyoufirst
playanote,andcontinuesaslongasanynotesareheld Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theVector
downonthekeyboard.Whenyoureleaseallofthe VolumeEGstartsfromthephasedeterminedbythe
notes,theEGgoesintoitsreleasephase. firstnoteinthephrase,sothattheEGsforallnotes
beingheldaresynchronizedtogether.
Eachnotethenhasitsown,additionalVolumeControl
EG,whichletsyoucrossfadebetweenProgramsto Mode [Time, Tempo]
createcomplex,evolvingtimbres.TheKeySync Time:WhentheModeissettoTime,youcansetthe
parameterappliesonlytothispernoteEG. EGsegmenttimesinsecondsormilliseconds.
514
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 17: Vector Envelope
timesasrhythmicvalues,usingtheBaseNoteandx
(MultiplyBaseNoteby)parameters. Note-on or reset Note-off
Loop

continuetoloopeitherforaslongasyouholdthenote, Y-Axis
Time
(Release)
Transition 0
Loop Type [0->3, 1->3, 2->3, 0<->3, 1<->3]
backwards.
etc.
Loop Type = 1<>3
Inf:TheEGwillloopaslongasthenoteisheld,and Change to
Time
H1 T1 H2 T2 H3 T3 H2 T1 H1
TheVectorEGhasatotaloffivepoints.Sincethe
VectorEGcanloop,thepointsarelabeleddifferently VJS [Off, 04]
fromstandardenvelopes;insteadofnameslikeattack Thishorizontalrowofradiobuttonsletsyoueditthe
anddecay,theyaresimplynumbered04. selectedpointsXYpositionusingtheVectorJoystick.
Sustain and Release Justpressthepointsradiobutton,movetheVector
Joysticktothedesiredlocation.Whenyourefinished,
WhentheEGisinthemiddleofaloop,thereisno
presstheOffradiobuttonagain.
sustainpointperse.However,iftheEGhasalready
completedthespecifiednumberofLoopRepeats,orif WhenyouarenoteditingtheEGsXYpositions,you
LoopRepeatisOff,itwillsustainatPoint3until shouldleavethissettoOff,toavoidinadvertent
release. changestotheEG.
Atrelease,theEGalwaysmovestoPoint4.
Point 0
Hold and Transition times
Position
TheHoldTimesetshowlongtheEGlingersateach
InadditiontoeditingtheXandYparameterswiththe
point,andtheTransitiontimesetshowlongittakesto
standarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsosimplyuse
gofromtheselectedpointtothenext.
theVectorJoysticktosettheposition,asdescribed
Forinstance,thegraphicbelowshowsthesuccession underVJS,above.
ofHoldandTransitiontimeswhentheLoopTypeisset
to1>3.Forclarity,onlytheYaxispositionsareshown. X [127+127]
ThissetsthepointspositionontheXaxis.
Y [127+127]
Hold Time
parameter.
515
Sequencer mode

froma32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets. Transition,above.
Tempo. Point 4
dottedeighthnote.
ModeissettoTime.
Thismenusetsabasicrhythmicvalueforthe Transition,above.
TransitionTime,relativetothesystemtempo.It
appliesonlywhentheModeissettoTempo.
KARMAcanstartandrestarttheVectorEGinvarious
x (Multiply Base Note by) [0132] ways,asdescribedbelow.
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and CC Control EG
themultiplierissetto3,theEGwillmovefromPoint0 WhenKARMAisOn,italwaysstartsandrestartsthe
toPoint1overadottedeighthnote. CCControlEG,accordingtotheKARMAtrigger
settings.ThisletsKARMAcontrolsoundsoreffectsin
Points 1 and 2 synchronizationwiththeKARMAGE.
Points1and2workexactlylikePoint0,asdescribed Volume Control EGs
above.
Point 3 willstartandrestarttheVolumeControlEGsaswell
astheCCControlEG.Thismeansthattheresulting
Point3alsoworksmuchlikePoints02,withtwomain changesinoscillatorvolumeswillbesynchronized
differences: withtheKARMAGE.
Point3alwaysusesitsownLooptimewhenmoving WhenKeySyncisOn,KARMAdoesnotaffectVector
intotheloop,regardlessofthedirectionoftheloop. VolumeControl.Eachnotewillhaveitsown,
IfLoopRepeatissettoOff,oriftheLoopissetto1 independentVolumeControlEG,justasifKARMA
126andhasalreadyplayedthespecifiednumberof wasturnedoff.
times,thentheEGwillstayatPoint3untiltheEG
eithergoesintorelease,orisresetbyKARMA. Entering the EGs release stage
Hold Time
WhentheKARMALATCHswitchisOff,the
ThisworksjustliketheHoldTimeforPoint0,as KARMAcontrolledVectorEG(s)willstarttorelease
describedunderHoldTime,above. whenyouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard(and
whenKARMAisnolongerreceivinganyinputnotes
fromothersources).
516
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 18: Set Up Controllers
t 17: Page Menu Commands SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
commandsonpage 142.
0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see page 583.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see Initializeonpage 584.
2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
RenameSongonpage 582. page 584.
3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
Songonpage 582. CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see 12:CopyVectorEnvelope.Formoreinformation,
CopyFromSongonpage 582. seeCopyVectorEnvelopeonpage 148.

18PMC
01a
18a
18b
HereyoucansettheSequencerfunctionsoftheSW1 Sincetheassignablepanelswitchfunctionsofthe
switch,SW2switch,andtheRealtimeModulation programassignedtoeachtrackareignored,youcan
Knob58.Thesesettingsaremadeindependentlyfor makenewsettingshere.
eachsong.
Whenyouoperatetheseswitchesandknobsduring
recording,theMIDImessagesassignedtothemwillbe AssignsafunctiontotheSW1switch.Theon/offstatus
recorded. canalsobesaved.Whenyouchangetheassigned
function,thestatuswillberesettooff.
18a: Panel Switch Assign Mode [Toggle, Momentary]

Specifiestheon/offactionthatoccurswhenyoupress
HereyoucanassignthefunctionoftheSW1andSW2
theSW1switch.
switches.Fordetailsonthefunctionsthatcanbe
assigned,seeSW1/2Assignmentsonpage 1033. Toggle:Thefunctionwillalternatebetweenonandoff
517
Sequencer mode
Momentary:Thefunctionwillbeononlywhileyou

Mode [Toggle, Momentary]
AssignsafunctiontotheSW2switch.Thefunctions
youcanassigntotheSW2switcharethesameasfor
theSW1switchwiththeexceptionthanSW1
Mod.:CC#80isreplacedbySW2Mod.:CC#81.
18b: Modulation Knob Assign

Hereyoucanassignthefunctionoftherealtime
modulationknobs5through8.Mostofthefunctions
thatcanbeassignedarecontrolchanges.Formore
information,pleaseseeRealtimeKnobs58
Assignmentsonpage 1034.
Thefunctionsyouassignhereareperformedwhenyou
operaterealtimemodulationknobs5through8.


commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
page 583.
page 584.
518
Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller 19: Set Up Pads
19: Set Up Pads

19PMC
01a
19a
Thereareeightvelocitysensitivetriggerpadsbelow UsethiswiththeKARMAModuleInputChannel
theLCDscreen.Theselooklikedrummachinepads, setting,togenerateaphraseorotherKARMA
andplayingdrumsoundsiscertainlyoneuseforthem. functionwhenyouplayaspecificpad.Formore
However,theycanalsoplayuptoeightnotechordson information,seeInputChannelonpage 431.
anysoundnotjustdrums.Thepadsevenremember Tch:Withthissetting,thepadswillfollowtheMIDI
thevelocitiesoftheindividualnoteswithinthechord, channelofthecurrentlyselectedTrack.
aswellasthenotesthemselves.Finally,eachPadcan PadsandMIDIChannel
beassignedtoadifferentMIDIchannel,ifdesired.
ThesesettingsarestoredindependentlyforeachSong. Gch
Youcanassignnotestothepadsdirectlyfromthe T01: Piano Gch

keyboardandfrontpanelcontrols,withoutusingthis
pageatall.Alternatively,youcanenternotesand T02: Strings Gch
velocitiesusingtheparametersonthispage. Gch
Regardlessofhowthenoteswerefirstassigned,you Pad1
2ch T03: Bell 2ch
Formoreinformation,includingstepbystep
Pad2
instructionsandusagetips,seeDrum&ChordPads
onpage 53oftheOperationGuide. Gch
KARMA Module A T01: Piano Gch
In: Gch/Out:Gch
19a: Pad Chords
Pad 1 Gch KARMA Module B
In: Gch/Out:2ch
T02: Strings 2ch
Pad1
MIDI Channel [Ch01Ch16, Tch]
3ch KARMA Module C T03: Bell 3ch
ThissetsthepadsMIDIoutputchannel.Youcanset In: 3ch/Out:3ch
Pad2
thistoeitheraspecificchannel(116),ortofollowthe
channeloftheselectedTrack.
Ch01Ch16:Thepadwilltransmitontheselected Notes 1-8 [Off, C1G9 / 001127]
MIDIchannel.AsshowninthediagramPadsand Theseparametersletyoueditthe8notesassignedto
MIDIChannel,below,youcan: eachpad,alongwithaseparatevelocityforeachnote.
Toplayfewerthan8notes,justsettheunwantednotes
UsethisinconjunctionwiththeTrackMIDI
toOff.
Channelsetting,torouteapadtoaspecificTrack.
Formoreinformation,seeMIDIChannelon Off:Selectthistodisablethenote.
page 519.
519
Sequencer mode
C1G9:Thissetsthenotenumber. Themethodissimilartosteps13above;pressthepad
001127:Thissetsthenotesvelocityvalue.Formore thatyouwanttocopy,andthenpresstheCHORD
informationonpadsandvelocity,pleaseseePad ASSIGNswitch.Thenpressthecopydestinationpad;
Mode:FixedVelocityvs.VelocitySensitiveon theassignmentswillbecopied.
page 520. Youcanalsousethistocombinetheassignmentsof
twoormorepads,uptoamaximumofeightnotes.To
Pad Mode: Fixed Velocity vs. Velocity Sensitive doso,justpressallofthecopyfrompads
Eachpadstoresavelocitylevelforeachofits8notes. simultaneously,andthenproceedasabove.
ThePADMODEbutton,totherightofthepads, Formoredetailedinstructions,pleaseseeDrum&
controlswhetherornotthepadsrespondtohowhard ChordPadsonpage 53oftheOperationGuide.
youplay.ItssettingisstoredwitheachProgram,
Combi,andSong. Pad 28
InFixedVelocitymode,thepadsalwaysusetheir ThesearethesameasforPad1,asdescribedabove.
play.
InVelocitySensitivemode,hittingthepadvery t 19: Page Menu Commands
stronglyproducesthepresetvelocities.Whenyouplay ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
moresoftly,thepresetvelocitiesarescaleddown numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
accordingly,maintainingthebalancebetweenthenotes shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
inthechord. commandsonpage 142.
Assigning notes and chords to pads 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see

Youcanassignsinglenotesandchordstothepadsin
threedifferentways. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Play the notes, and then press CHORD ASSIGN 2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see
1. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes. RenameSongonpage 582.
2. PresstheCHORDASSIGNbutton. 3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketoassignthe Songonpage 582.
notes. 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
Thatsit!Thenotesarenowassignedtothepad. CopyFromSongonpage 582.
Press CHORD ASSIGN, and then play notes
Thismethodletsyoucreateachordoutofwidely
spacednotes,evenifyoucantplayallofthenotes 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
simultaneously. SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
1. PresstheCHORDASSIGNbutton. 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
2. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes.
Ifyoulike,youcanalsoplayupto8notesasalegato page 583.
singlechord.Youcantakeaslongasyouliketoplay
thephrase. 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
page 584.
notes.
Afterpressingthepad,youredone!
Edit notes and velocities using the LCD 12:CopyPadSetup.Formoreinformation,see
Youcanedittherecordednotesandvelocitiesusing CopyPadSetuponpage 148.
enternewnotesthisway.Formoreinformation,please
seePad1,above.
Copying and Merging Pads

Justasyoucanassignnotestoapadbyplayingthem
onthekeyboard,youcanpressapadtocopyits
assignednotestoanotherpad.
520
Sequencer P2: Track Parameters 21: MIDI
Sequencer P2: Track Parameters
21: MIDI
21PMC
01a
11b
21a
HereyoucanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsforeach EXT:WhenthemusicaldatarecordedintheMIDI
MIDItrack. trackisplayedback,orwhenyouselectaMIDItrack
thatissettoEXTandplaythekeyboardandoperate
thecontrollers,MIDIdatawillbetransmittedtoan
21a: MIDI externaldevice,buttheinternaltonegeneratorofthe
OASYSwillnotsound.
Whenyouselectanothersongorreturntothe
Status [Off, INT, BTH, EXT, EX2] beginningofthesong,theprogramchange,volume,
ThissetswhethertheTrackcontrolstheinternal panpot,portamento,sends1and2,postIFXpan,and
sounds,externalMIDIdevices,orboth. postIFXsends1and2ofeachMIDItracksettoEXT
willbetransmittedviaMIDI.
WhencontrollingexternalMIDIdevices,italsoallows
youtochoosebetweenusingtheinternalBankSelect EX2:ThisenablesyoutospecifyaparticularMIDI
numbers(assetbythefrontpanelbuttons),orusing BankSelectmessagefortheTrack,insteadof
customBankSelectsettingstomatchtheexternal automaticallyusingtheBankoftheselectedOASYS
device. Program.Usetheparametersbelow,labeledBank
SelectMSBandLSB(WhenStatus=EXT2),tosetthe
Off:UsethistodisabletheTrack.Withthissetting,the BankSelectmessageasdesired.Inotherrespectsthisis
TracksProgramwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawill thesameasEXT,describedabove.
notbetransmitted.Also,anyEXifixedresourcesused
bytheProgramwillbefreed. MIDIdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDI
channelthatisspecifiedseparatelyforMIDItrack
INT:WhenthemusicaldatarecordedintheMIDI byMIDIChannel.
trackisplayedback,orwhenyouuseTrackSelect(0
1a)toselectaMIDItrackthatissettoINTandplaythe Keyboard, Sequencer, Keyboard &
keyboardandoperatethecontrollers,theinternaltone Status & MIDI In Sequencer Transmit
generatoroftheOASYSwillsound,andMIDIdatawill play Internal Sounds MIDI Out
notbetransmittedtoanexternaldevice. OFF No No
BTH:TheoperationofbothINTandEXTwillbe INT Yes No
performed.Whenthemusicaldatarecordedinthe
MIDItrackisplayedback,orwhenyouselectaMIDI Yes (using the Bank
EXT No Select message of the
trackthatissettoBTHandplaythekeyboardand
tracks Program)
operatethecontrollers,theinternaltonegeneratorof
theOASYSwillsound,andatthesametimeMIDIdata
willalsobetransmittedtoanexternaldevice.
521
Sequencer mode
Yes (using the Bank

Select message LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
EX2 No specified on the MIDI 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
tab of the Track Param SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
page)
BTH Yes Yes FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
MIDI Channel [0116] 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore

SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthattheMIDItrackwilluse page 583.
totransmitandreceivemusicaldata.TheMIDI
channelyouspecifyherewillbethereceivechannel 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
whenStatusisINT,thetransmitchannelwhenitis Initializeonpage 584.
EXTorEX2,andthereceive/transmitchannelwhenit 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
isBTH.TrackssettoINTwhichhavethesameMIDI information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
channelwillsoundandbecontrolledidenticallywhen page 584.
theyreceiveMIDIdataordatafromthesequencer
tracks.
Bank Select MSB (When Status=EX2) [000127]
Bank Select LSB (When Status=EX2) [000127]
WhenStatusissettoEX2,thissetsthebanknumber
thatwillbetransmitted.WhenStatusisotherthan
EX2,thissettinghasnoeffect.
Track Priority [Off, On]

ThisspecifiesthevoicepriorityfortheMIDItrack.
On(checked):MIDItracksforwhichthisischecked
willbegivenpriority.Ifanewnoteonwouldexceed
theavailablenumberofvoices,acurrentlysounding
voicewillnormallybestopped(stolen),allowingthe
newlyrequestedvoicetobesounded.Atthistime,
MIDItrackswhoseTrackPriorityischeckedareless
likelytohaveavoicestolen.
However,thissettingwillhavelittlemeaningifitis
turnedonformostoralltracks.Itsagoodideatoleave
thisuncheckedforalltracks,andcheckitonlyfor
importanttracksthatwouldcauseaconspicuous
problemifnotesweretodropoutduringthe
performance.

ThesearetheMIDIrelatedsettingsforMIDItracks2
through16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.SeeTrack
01:.

commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
522
Sequencer P2: Track Parameters 22: OSC
22: OSC
22PMC
01a
11a
22a
TheseparametersspecifyhoweachMIDItrackwillbe cometoanyPortamentoOn/OffdataorPortamento
sounded. Timedatathatwasrecorded,thesettingswillchange
accordingly.
22a: OSC WhenthetrackwhoseStatus(21a)isINTorBTH,
MIDIcontrolchangeCC#5(PortamentoTime)and
Track 01 (Track Number) CC#65(PortamentoSwitch)canbereceivedtocontrol
thisandchangethesetting.(IfthesettingisPRG,
Force OSC Mode [PRG, Poly, MN, LGT] CC#05PortamentoTimewillnotbereceived.)
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoice Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothebeginningof
AssignModesettings,ifdesired. thesong,trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2will
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeForceOSCMode transmitthissettingviaMIDI.IfthisisOff,CC#65with
onpage 416. avalueof0willbetransmitted.Ifthisis001127,a
CC#65of127andCC#05of1127willbetransmitted.
OSC Select [BTH, OS1, OS2] IfthisissettoPRG,nothingwillbetransmitted.
SpecifieswhethertheMIDItracksprogramwillplay ThisdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDI
OSC1/EXi1,OSC2/EXi2,orboth. channelspecifiedforeachtrackbyMIDIChannel(2
ForHD1programswhoseOscillatorMode(Program 1a).
11b)isDouble,thissettingletsyouspecifythatonly
OSC1orOSC2willsound.ForEXiprogramswhich Max # of Notes [Dynamic, 116]
usetwoEXiinstruments,thissettingletsyouspecify Dynamicisthedefault.Withthissetting,youcanplay
thatonlyEXi1orEXi2willsound.Formore asmanynotesasthesystemallows.
information,pleaseseeOSCSelectonpage 416. 116letsyoulimitthemaximumnumberofnotes
Portamento [PRG, Off, 001127] playedbytheTrack.Voiceswillstillbeallocated
dynamically,uptothismaximumnumber.Youcanuse
MakeportamentosettingsforeachMIDItrack.For thisto:
moreinformation,pleaseseePortamentoon
page 416. Modelthevoiceleadingofvintagesynthesizers,
suchasthePolysix
Theportamentosettingyoumakeherewillbeused
whenthesongisplayedorrecordedfromthe ControltheresourcesrequiredbytheTrack,sothat
beginning.Ifyouchangethesettingwhilerecording,it morevoicescanplayonotherTracks
willberecordedaspartofthemusicaldata.(However Max#ofNotesappliesonlywhentheProgramsVoice
ifyousetthistoPRG,itwillnotberecorded.)Youcan AssignModeissettoPoly,orwhenForceOscMode
changethissettingduringplayback.Howeverifyou hasbeensettoPoly.WithMono,ithasnoeffect.
523
Sequencer mode
ThissettingdoesnotlimittheUnisonNumberof 3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
Voices.Forinstance,ifMax#ofNotesissetto6,and Songonpage 582.
UnisonNumberofVoicesissetto3,youcanplayup 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
to6notes,eachwith3Unisonvoices. CopyFromSongonpage 582.
IndoublePrograms,theMax#ofNotesapplies 5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
equallytobothOSCorEXi.Forinstance,ifMax#of LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
Notesissetto4,youcanplayupto4notesoneach
OSC/EXi. 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
Chord
Chord [PRG, Off, Bsc, Adv] FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
PRGusestheProgramssetting.IftheProgramissetto 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
Off,thentheChordSWhasnoeffect. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
OffdisablestheChordfunction. page 583.
Bsc(Basic)recreatesthechordmodeoftheoriginal 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
Polysix.Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,itwillcutoff Initializeonpage 584.
thepreviouschord.ThisoptionignorestheVoice 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
Assignsettings. information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
Adv(Advanced)usestheProgramsVoiceAssign page 584.
settings,asifeachnoteinthechordwasatransposed 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
setofoscillatorslayeredwithintheProgram. CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
Unisonallapply.
settingChordtoAdvanced,VoiceAssigntoMono,
Formoreinformation,seeUsingChordmodeon
Source Pad [PRG, 1...8]

ChordmodeusesthechordsassignedtothePads.This
selectswhichofthePadstouse.Youcanalsoselect
information,seeUsingChordmodeonpage 54of
theOperationGuide.
PRGusesthenotesofthechordstoredintheTracks
Program,insteadofanyofthechordsintheCombi.
ThismakesiteasytouseChordmodeforsound
specificeffects,suchasoctaves,stackedfifths,andso
on.WhensettoPRG,theTrackwillnotchangechords
inresponsetothepads.

HereyoucanmakeOSCsettingsforMIDItracks2
through16.Thesearethesameasfortrack1.See
Track01:.

commandsonpage 142.
524
Sequencer P2: Track Parameters 23: Pitch
23: Pitch
23PMC
01a
11a
23a
Hereyoucanmakepitchrelatedsettingsforeach IftheTrackusesanHD1DrumProgram,MIDI
MIDItrack. RPNCoarseTuneandFineTunewillbecombined
tocontrolDetune.Theoverallrangeis1octavefor
coarsetuneandfinetunetogether.
23a: Pitch
Bend Range [PRG, 24+00+24]
Track 01 (Track Number) Specifiestheamountofpitchchangethatwilloccur
Transpose [60+00+60] whenthepitchbenderisoperated,insemitoneunits.
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinsemitonesteps. PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
used.
12unitsequaloneoctave.
24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthe
Detune (BPM Adj. in Page Menu) settingintheprogram.
[1200+0000 +1200] AslongasthissettosomethingotherthanPRG,
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinonecentunits. youcancontroltheBendRangeusingMIDIRPN
PitchBendChangemessages.(SeeKARMA
+0000:Normalpitch.
TransmitMIDIFilter,PitchBend72a)
Note:YoucanalsousetheDetuneBPMAdjustpage
menucommandtoautomaticallymakeadetune Use Programs Scale [Off, On]
settingfromacalculationinBPMunits. MIDItrackcanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale
TransposeandDetunedonotaffectthenotes (Program11f).
transmittedviaMIDIOut. On(checked):Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwill
TransposeandDetunecanbecontrolledviaMIDI beused.
RPNmessagesreceivedontheTracksMIDI Off(unchecked):ThescalespecifiedbyScale(23b)
channel.Thewaythatthisworksdependson willbeused.
whetherornottheTrackusesanHD1Drum
Program. Track 216 (Track Number)
IftheTrackdoesnotuseanHD1DrumProgram HereyoucanmakepitchrelatedsettingsforMIDI
forexample,ifitusesaSingleorDoubleHD1 tracks2through16.Thesettingsarethesameasfor
Program,oranEXiProgramthenMIDIRPN track1.SeeTrack01:.
CoarseTunewillcontrolTranspose,andRPNFine
TunewillcontrolDetune.
525
Sequencer mode
23b: Scale ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Scale 2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see
Specifiesthescalethatthesongwilluse.Formore
information,pleasesee11g:Scaleonpage 37.
Songonpage 582.
Type (Songs Scale) [Equal TemperamentUser 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
Octave Scale15] CopyFromSongonpage 582.
Selectsthescale. 5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
Key [CB]
Selectsthetonickeyoftheselectedscale.
Random [07] 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandom FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
deviationwillbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon. 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
IfStatus(21a)isINT,thissettingwillaffectthe information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
pitchproducedbytheOASYS.IfStatusisEXT,this page 583.
settingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenote 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
messagestransmittedviaMIDI. Initializeonpage 584.
t 23: Page Menu Commands information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
page 584.
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
commandsonpage 142. 12:DetuneBPMAdjust.Formoreinformation,see
0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see DetuneBPMAdjustonpage 593.
24: Delay
24PMC
01a
11a
24a
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhentheMIDI
trackreceivesanoteonuntilthesoundbegins.
526
Sequencer P2: Track Parameters 24: Delay
24a: Delay Songonpage 582.
Track 01 (Track Number) 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see

Mode [Time, Tempo] 5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
ThisselectswhethertheTrackdelaywillbesetin LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
milliseconds,orinrhythmicunits. 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
Time:Specifythedelaytimeinunitsofmilliseconds SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
(ms=1/1000thofasecond). 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
Tempo:SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBaseNote FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
andTimesrelativetothesystemtempo.Forexampleif 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
BaseNote=q,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,the information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
delaytimewillbeequivalentto1000ms. page 583.
Time [ms] [00006000, KeyOff] 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthe Initializeonpage 584.
MIDItrackbeginstoproducesound,inunitsofms 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
(1/1000thofasecond).Thissettingisavailableif information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
ModeissettoTime. page 584.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.In 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
thiscase,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustain CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
leveloftheprogramsampEGisotherthan0.This
settingisusedwhencreatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
Base Note [r w ]
Times [0132]
ThissettingisavailableisModeissettoTempo.It
specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthe
MIDItrackbeginstoproducesound,intermsofanote
valuerelativetotheTempo( q )(01a).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,and
useTimestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecified
multiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote( q )
andTimesto02,thatMIDItrackwillsoundwitha
delayofahalfnote( h ).EvenifyouchangeTempo
( q )(01a),thedelaytimewillalwaysbeahalfnote
( h ).Ifyouusetheseparameterstospecifyadelayofa
halfnote( h ).Inthiscase,aTempoof60.00BPMwill
producea2000msdelay,andaTempoof120.00BPM
willproducea1000msdelay.

ThesearethedelaytimesettingsforMIDItracks2
01:.

commandsonpage 142.
527
Sequencer mode
25: Wave Sequence/KARMA

25PMC
01a
11a
25a
Hereyoucanmakesettingsrelatedtowavesequence Wave Sequence Quantize Trigger [PRG, Off, On]

andKARMAfunctionalityforeachMIDItrack. ThisallowsyoutooverridetheProgramsWave
SequenceQuantizeTriggersetting(Program11e).If
25a: Wave Sequence/KARMA youreusingmultipleProgramswithrhythmicWave
Sequences,youcanusethistosynchronizeallofthe
Track 01 (Track Number) WaveSequencesatnoteon.
NotethatQuantizeTriggerappliesonlywhenthe
Wave Sequence Key Sync [PRG, Off, On] WaveSequencesModeissettoTempo.Formore
SpecifiesthewavesequenceKeySyncsetting information,seeModeonpage 722.
(Program11e)oftheprogramselectedfortheMIDI PRG:Thesettingoftheprogramisused.
track.Thissettingisvalidiftheprogramusesawave
sequence. Off:QuantizeTriggerisforcedoff.Thewave
sequencewilltriggerimmediatelyafternoteon.
On:QuantizeTriggerisforcedon.Thewave
Off:KeySyncisforcedoff.Thewavesequenceofeach sequencepatternwillsynchronizetoeighthnote
notewillsynchronizetothesamestep. timingofthecurrentlysoundingwavesequence;i.e.,
On:KeySyncisforcedon.Thewavesequencewill thetriggerwillbequantized.
starteachtimeyoupressakey.Ifthewavesequences Formoreinformation,pleaseseeQuantizeTrigger
havedifferingstepsorrates,theywillproceed onpage 37.
independently.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeKeySyncon KARMA Track Off Control [Normal, Track Off by
page 37. KARMA Off, Track Off by KARMA On]
Nrm(Normal):TheKARMAON/OFFswitchwillnot
Wave Sequence Swing% [PRG, 300.+300] controlwhetherthetrackwillsound.Usuallyyouwill
SpecifiesthewavesequenceSwingsetting(Program usetheNormalsetting.
11e)oftheprogramselectedfortheMIDItrack.This
byOff(TrackOffbyKARMAOff):Thetrackwill
settingisvalidiftheprogramusesawavesequence.
soundasusualwhentheKARMAON/OFFswitchis
PRG:Thesettingoftheprogramisused. on.
300+300:TheSwing%specifiedhereisused ThetrackwillnotsoundwhentheKARMAON/OFF
regardlessoftheprogramsSwing%setting. switchisoff.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwingonpage 36. Usethiswhenyouwantaspecifictrackofmultiple
trackssettothesameMIDIchanneltobesilentonly
whenKARMAisoff.
528
Sequencer P2: Track Parameters 25: Wave Sequence/KARMA
byOn(OSCOffbyKARMAOn):Thetrackwillnot 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
soundwhentheKARMAON/OFFswitchison. SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
ThetrackwillsoundasusualwhentheKARMA 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
ON/OFFswitchisoff. FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
UsethiswhenyouareusingaKARMAModuleto
controlmultipletracksthataresettothesameMIDI 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
channel,andwantaspecifictracktobesilentonly information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
whentheKARMAfunctionison. page 583.
Forexampleyoucanusethistoplayatwotracklayer 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM
fromthekeyboardwhenKARMAisoff,anduseone Initializeonpage 584.
tracktosoundthephrasewhenKARMAison.
IftheStatus(01b)ofeachtrackisINT,youcanusethe information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
TrackOn/OffCtrlsettingtostoptheoscillatorof page 584.
eachtrackfromsounding.
IfyousetOSCOn/OffCtrltobyOfforbyOn CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
settingsandoperatetheKARMAON/OFFswitch
whilerealtimerecordingasong,youmustbe
awareofthefollowingpoints.
Inordertocontrolthisparameterduringplayback,
operationsoftheKARMAON/OFFswitchmustbe
recordedinrealtime.
SetKARMAON/OFF(Global21b)toMIDI
CC#14.IfthisisassignedtoMIDICC#14,
operationsoftheKARMAON/OFFswitchcanbe
recordedinrealtime.(See21b:MIDICC#Assign
KARMAControllersonpage 717)
Operationswillalsoberecordedifyouassignthis
keytoMIDICC#0095,butinordertoavoid
confusionwhenreceivinganotherCC#,youshould
useCC#14.
KARMAON/OFF(Global21b)willalsobesetto
MIDICC#14ifyouexecutethepagemenu
commandResetControllerMIDIAssignwith
To:settoDefaultSetting.Afterexecuting,turn
theassignmentOffforotherMIDICC#Assign
KARMAControllersthatyoudonotneedto
record.

ThesearethewavesequenceandKARMArelated
settingsforMIDItracks2through16.Theyarethe
sameasfortrack1.SeeTrack01:.

commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
529
Sequencer mode
2-6: EXi Audio Input

26PMC
11a
11b
26a
26b
TheseparametersletyourouteaudiointoEXi IFX112,MFX1,2,andTFX1,2usetheoutputofthe
instrumentswhichsupportaudioinput,suchasthe selectedeffect.
STR1.Youcanusethistocreatefeedbackloops,orto
processliveorrecordedaudiothroughtheEXis Channel Select [Stereo/L+R, Left, Right]
synthesisengine. Stereo/L+R:ThisselectionroutesastereosignaltoEXi
EXiwhichdonotsupportaudioinputwillignorethese withstereoinputs,andanL+RsummationtoEXiwith
settings. monoinputs.
Formoreinformationonusingaudioinputswiththe Left,Right:Thisusesonlyamonosignalfromthe
STR1,see48c:Feedbackonpage 261. selectedchannel.
26a: EXi 1 26b: EXi 2

EXi2hasthesamecontrolsasEXi1,above.
Input Source [PRG, Off, Audio Input 1/2...3/4,
Indiv. Output 1/2...7/8, REC 1/2, 3/4,
FX Control 1, 2, IFX 1...12, MFX 1, 2, TFX 1, 2]
PRGusesthesettingstoredintheProgram.Youmay
findthisconvenientifyouuseProgramChange
messagestoswitchbetweentwoEXiPrograms,and
wishtohavetheinputenabledforone,butdisabled
fortheother.Formoreinformation,see42:EXi
AudioInputonpage 168.
Offdisablestheinput.
AudioInput1/23/4andS/P DIFInputL/Rusethe
liveaudiofromtheselectedinput.
L/ROutputandIndiv.Output1/27/8usetheaudio
acablefromtheoutputbacktotheinput).
theselectedbus.
530
Sequencer P2: Track Parameters 27: Audio Track Delay
27: Audio Track Delay

27PMC
01a
11a
27a
Hereyoucanspecifyadelaytimebywhichtheaudio 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
eventsofeachaudiotrackwillbedelayedrelativeto CopyFromSongonpage 582.
theirLocation. 5:LoadTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
27a: Delay 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
Track 0116 (Track Number) 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
STEREO FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
ThisisshownifStereoPairison. 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
Mode [Time, Tempo] page 583.
Time [ms] [00006000] 9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM

Base Note [r , x ! , x , e ! , e , q ! , q , h ! , h , w ] 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
Times [0132] information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
page 584.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee24a:Delayon
page 527. 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see

commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
531
Sequencer mode
Sequencer P3: MIDI Filter/Zones
31: MIDI Filter1

31PMC
11a
11b
31a
Hereyoucanselectwhetherornottoapplyfilteringto Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessage
theMIDIdatareceivedbyMIDItracks116.For numbers.
exampleeveniftwotracksarereceivingthesame
MIDIchannel,onecanbesettorespondtodamper
pedalactivitywhiletheotherdoesnot. 31a: MIDI Filter 1
TheseMIDIfiltersettingshavenoeffectonthe Track 01 (Track Number)
MIDImessagesthathavealreadybeenrecorded.
ThesesettingsaffecttheMIDImessagesthatare Enable Program Change [Off, On]
transmittedwhenyouadjustprogram,pan,volume, SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchange
portamentoandsend1/2parametersofatrack messageswillbereceived.
whoseStatus(21a)issettoBTH,EXT,orEX2.
Enable After Touch [Off, On]
On(checked):ReceptionofMIDIdataisenabled.
TrackswhoseStatus(21a)isINTorBTHwillreceive SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessages
thesetypesofMIDImessagesontheirrespective willbereceived.
channels.Thetypeofeffectsthatarecheckedwillbe Enable Damper [Off, On]
appliedtotheprogramofeachtrackwhenthe
OASYSscontrollersareoperatedorwhenMIDIdatais SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damper
received.(Theeffectdynamicmodulationfunctionis pedal)messageswillbereceived.
notaffectedbythesesettings.) Enable Portamento SW [Off, On]
SettingsthatregulateMIDItransmission/receptionof SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamento
theOASYSitselfaremadeinMIDIFilter(Global11c). on/offmessageswillbereceived.
Iftheuserassignablecontrollersthatcanbefilteredin
theMIDIFilter2and3pagesaresettoMIDIcontrol
Enable JS X as AMS [Off, On]
changes,filteringwillbeperformedforthesecontrol SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages
changes.Inthiscase,anycontrolchangefilteringthat (theXaxisoftheOASYSsjoystick)willbereceivedto
isbeingperformedintheMIDIFilter1and2pages controltheAMSeffectassignedtoJSX.(Thisisnota
willbegivenpriority.Furthermore,ifthesamecontrol filterforMIDIpitchbendmessagereception.)For
changeisassignedtomultiplecontrollersforwhich moreinformation,pleaseseeAlternateModulation
therearefiltersettingsintheMIDIFilter2and3pages, Sources(AMS)onpage 1019.
checkinganyoneofthesewillenablethatcontrol
change.
Off(unchecked):ReceptionofMIDIdataisdisabled.
532
Sequencer P3: MIDI Filter/Zones 32: MIDI Filter2
Enable JS+Y [Off, On] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see

SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthe ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
OASYSsjoystick,oraModulationKnobAssign 2:RenameSong.Formoreinformation,see
setting)willbereceived. RenameSongonpage 582.
Enable JSY [Off, On] 3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete

Songonpage 582.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthe
OASYSsjoystick,oraModulationKnobAssign 4:CopyFromSong.Formoreinformation,see
setting)willbereceived. CopyFromSongonpage 582.
Enable Ribbon [Off, On] LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(theOASYSs
ribboncontroller,orspecifiedastheassignmentofa
realtimemodulationknob)willbereceived.
Track 0216 (Track Number) FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
ThesearetheMIDIFilter1settingsforMIDItracks2 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
through16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.SeeTrack information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
01:. page 583.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese page 584.
commandsonpage 142. 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
32: MIDI Filter2

32PMC
11a
11b
32a
HereyoucanenabletransmissionfortheREALTIME
CONTROLS18knobs.TheMIDIcontrolmessagesof
knobs14arefixed.Thefunctionofknobs58canbe
assignedintheSetUpControllerspage.
533
Sequencer mode
32a: MIDI Filter 2 information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
Enable Realtime Control Knob 1 [Off, On] Initializeonpage 584.
SpecifieswhetherRealtimeControlknob1MIDI 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
CC#74(theOASYSsfiltercutofffrequency)willbe information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
received. page 584.
Enable Realtime Control Knob 2 [Off, On] 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see

SpecifieswhetherornotRealtimeControlknob2MIDI
CC#71(theOASYSsfilterresonance)willbereceived.

CC#79(theOASYSsfilterEGintensity)willbe
received.

CC#72(theOASYSsfilter/ampEGreleasetime)willbe
received.

ThesespecifywhetherornotMIDImessagewillbe
receivedforRealtimeControlknobs5through8.

ThesearetheMIDIFilter2settingsforMIDItracks2
01:.

commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
534
Sequencer P3: MIDI Filter/Zones 33: MIDI Filter3
33: MIDI Filter3

33PMC
11a
11b
33a
Enable KARMA Waveform SysEx [Off, On]

33a: MIDI Filter 3
ThisallowsyoutoenableordisabletheSystem
Track 01 (Track Number) ExclusivemessagesusedbyKARMAWave
Sequencing.
ThesearetheMIDIFilter3settingsforMIDItracks2
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheSW1andSW2 through16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1,as
switcheswillbereceived. describedabove.
ThefunctionoftheseswitchesisspecifiedintheSetUp
Controllerspage.
Thesesettingsarevalidifthesekeysareassignedto
SW1Mod.(CC#80),SW2Mod.(CC#81),orPortamento ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
SW(CC#65). numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Enable Foot Switch [Off, On] commandsonpage 142.
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
SWITCHwillbereceived.Thefunctionisassignedin MemoryStatusonpage 582.
GlobalP2Controllerpage. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchange ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
isassigned.
Enable Foot Pedal [Off, On] RenameSongonpage 582.
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE 3:DeleteSong.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
PEDALwillbereceived.Thefunctionisassignedin Songonpage 582.
GlobalP2Controllerpage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchange
isassigned.
Enable Other Control Change Messages [Off, On] LoadTemplateSongonpage 582.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIcontrolmessagesnot 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see
coveredintheprecedingitemsMIDIFilterwillbe SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
received.
535
Sequencer mode
8:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore 10:CopyFromCombination.Formore
information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
page 583. page 584.
9:GMInitialize.Formoreinformation,seeGM 11:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
Initializeonpage 584. CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
35: Keyboard Zones

35PMC
11a
35a
11b
35b
HereyoucanspecifythekeyzonesinwhichMIDI Top Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
tracks116willsound. 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
Thetop/bottomkeysettingsspecifythezoneinwhich Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)over
MIDItracks116willsound,andthetop/bottomslope whichthevolumewillbereachedstartingfromthetop
settingsspecifythekeyrangeoverwhichthevolume key.
willchangestartingfromthetop/bottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetop
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDI key.
transmission/reception.Allnotedatathatis
receivedwillberecordedintotheinternal
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeone
sequencer,andallnotedatafromtheinternal
octavebelowthetopkey.
sequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbetransmitted.
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesix
35a: Zone Map octavesbelowthetopkey.
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesin Bottom Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
whicheachMIDItracks116willsound.
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
TheLCDscreenwilldisplayalinetoindicatetherange Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)over
ofnotesandvelocitiesthatwillsound,andwillshow whichthevolumewillbereachedstartingfromthe
theslopeportionindifferentcolor. bottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthe
35b: Keyboard Zones bottomkey.
Track 01 (Track Number) upward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctave
Top Key [C1G9] abovethebottomkey.
Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill 72:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
soundeachMIDItrack. upward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctaves
abovethebottomkey.
536
Sequencer P3: MIDI Filter/Zones 35: Keyboard Zones
ZoneMap
Selecting track
Key zone display Velocity zone display
Bottom Slope Top Slope
Bottom Key
Track 1
Top Velocity
Top Slope
Bottom Slope
Track 16
Bottom Velocity
C1 E1 G9
1 16
Track
Bottom Key [C1G9] 6:SaveTemplateSong.Formoreinformation,see

Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthat SaveTemplateSongonpage 583.
willsoundeachMIDItrack. 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
How volume will change according to keyboard location
Volume information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
Key
Bottom Slope information,seeCopyfromCombinationon
Top Slope
page 584.
Bottom Key Top Key
TopKeyandBottomKeysettingscanalsobeinputby CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
holdingdowntheENTERswitchandplayinganote
onthekeyboard.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetop
keyofthesametrack.Norisitpossibleforthetop
andbottomslopestooverlap.

ThesearethekeyzonesettingsforMIDItracks2
01:.

commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
537
Sequencer mode
36: Velocity Zones

36PMC
11a
36a
11b
36b
HereyoucansettheTop/BottomVelocityparameters 120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocity
tospecifytherangeofvelocitiesthatwillbesounded approachesthetopvelocity.
byMIDItracks116,andTop/BottomSlopespecifythe
rangeoverwhichthevolumewillbeadjusted. Bottom Slope [0120]
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/ Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
reception.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillbe originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromthe
recordedintotheinternalsequencer,andallnote BottomVelocity.
datafromtheinternalsequencerorfromthe 0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthe
keyboardwillbetransmitted. bottomvelocity.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreater 120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocity
thanthetopvelocityforthesametrack.Norcanthe approachesthebottomvelocity.
topslopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
Bottom Velocity [1127]
Specifiestheminimumvelocitythatwillbesounded
36a: Zone Map byeachMIDItrack116.
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesin
whicheachMIDItrackwillsound.Formore How volume will change according to keyboard location
information,pleasesee35a:ZoneMaponpage 536. Volume
36b: Velocity Zones

Velocity
Bottom Slope
Top Velocity [1127] Top Slope
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsound Bottom Velocity Top Velocity
eachtrack.
TopVelocityandBottomVelocitysettingscanalso
Top Slope [0120] beinputbyholdingdowntheENTERswitchand
Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe playinganoteonthekeyboard.
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTop
Velocity. Track 0216 (Track Number)
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop ThesearethevelocityzonesettingsforMIDItracks2
velocity. through16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.SeeTrack
01:.
538
Sequencer P3: MIDI Filter/Zones 36: Velocity Zones

commandsonpage 142.
Songonpage 582.
page 583.
page 584.
539
Sequencer mode
Sequencer P4: Track Edit
41: Track Edit

41PMC
01a
41b
41a
41b
HereyoucaneditMIDItracks,themastertrack,and Note:Toperformtrackediting(orstepediting),use
audiotracks. TrackSelecttoselectthetrackyouwanttoedit,and
WheneditingaMIDItrack,youcanmove,insert,and useFromMeasureandToEndofMeasureparameters
deleteindividualeventsofnoteorcontrolchangedata, tospecifytheregionthatyouwanttoedit.Thenchoose
orcopy,move,insert,anddeletemeasuresortracks. acommandfromthepagemenu,andexecutetheedit.
YoucanalsoperformStepRecordinginthispage. Fordetailsonthespecificcommands,seeSequencer:
PageMenuCommandsonpage 582.
Wheneditingthemastertrack,youcaneditthetempo
andtimesignaturedata.
Youcaneditaudiotracksbymoving/inserting/
41a: Track data Map
deletingindividualdataevents,orby Thisareashowsthepresenceorabsenceof
copying/moving/inserting/deletingspecifiedmeasures performancedata,andindicatestheeditrange,etc.
ortracks. ThecurrentlyselectedTrackwillbehighlighted.
Length of the entire song Length of the entire song
Shows the left region of Shows the right region of

measures (near From Locations move in measures (near To End of
Measure) synchronization Measure)
Measure no.
MIDI Track
MIDI data
Patterns used
Master Track
Audio Track
Master track data

From Measure Region data To End of Measure
Shows the From Measure and

To End of Measure regions
540
Sequencer P4: Track Edit 41: Track Edit
8:EraseMeasure.Formoreinformation,seeErase
41b: Track Select, From Measure, To End Measureonpage 601.
of Measure 9:DeleteMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
Track Select [MIDI Track01MIDI Track16, Master DeleteMeasureonpage 602.
Track, Audio Track01Audio Track16] 10:InsertMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
InsertMeasureonpage 603.
Hereyoucanselectthetrackyouwanttoedit(oruse
asthecopysource)orrecord. 11:RepeatMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
RepeatMeasureonpage 604.
Ifyouwanttoperformanoperationonalltracks,you
dontneedtospecifyatrackhere.SimplyturnonAll 12:CopyMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
Tracksinthepagemenucommanddialogbox. CopyMeasureonpage 604.
MIDITrack0116:Choosethisifyouwanttoedita 13:MoveMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
MIDItrack. MoveMeasureonpage 605.
MasterTrack:Choosethisifyouwanttoeditthe 14:CreateControlData.Formoreinformation,see
mastertrack. CreateControlDataonpage 605.
AudioTrack0116:Choosethisifyouwanttoeditan 15:EraseControlData.Formoreinformation,see
audiotrack. EraseControlDataonpage 606.
Ifyouselectanaudiotrackforwhichstereopairingis 16:Quantize.Formoreinformation,seeQuantize
enabled,andexecuteanedit,thesameeditwillalsobe onpage 606.
appliedtotheotheraudiotrackofthepair.However, 17:Shift/EraseNote.Formoreinformation,see
automationeditswillaffectonlyoneaudiotrack. Shift/EraseNoteonpage 607.
Note:Theavailablepagemenucommandswilldiffer 18:ModifyVelocity.Formoreinformation,see
dependingonwhetheryouselectaMIDITrack01 ModifyVelocityonpage 608.
MIDITrack16orMasterTrack,oranAudioTrack01
AudioTrack16. 19:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
From Measure [001999] 20:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
To End of Measure [001999] information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
Specifiestherangeofmeasuresthatyouwishtoedit
(orcopyfrom)orsteprecord. Audio Track Edit commands
UseFromMeasuretospecifythestartingmeasure, 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
andToEndofMeasuretospecifytheendingmeasure. MemoryStatusonpage 582.
2:AudioEventEdit.Formoreinformation,see
Theavailablecommandswillbedifferentdepending
AudioEventEditonpage 596.
onwhetherthecurrentlyselectedTrackisMIDIor
Audio,asshownbelow. 3:AudioAutomationEdit.Formoreinformation,
seeAudioAutomationEditonpage 599.
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese 4:SetSongLength.Formoreinformation,seeSet
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu SongLengthonpage 600.
commandsonpage 142. 5:EraseTrack.Formoreinformation,seeErase
Trackonpage 600.
MIDI Track Edit commands
0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see 6:CopyTrack.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
MemoryStatusonpage 582. Trackonpage 600.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 7:
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. 8:EraseMeasure.Formoreinformation,seeErase
2:MIDIStepRecording.Formoreinformation,see Measureonpage 601.
MIDIStepRecordingonpage 593. 9:DeleteMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
3:MIDIEventEdit.Formoreinformation,see DeleteMeasureonpage 602.
MIDIEventEditonpage 595. 10:InsertMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
4:SetSongLength.Formoreinformation,seeSet InsertMeasureonpage 603.
SongLengthonpage 600. 11:RepeatMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
5:EraseTrack.Formoreinformation,seeErase RepeatMeasureonpage 604.
Trackonpage 600. 12:CopyMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
6:CopyTrack.Formoreinformation,seeCopy CopyMeasureonpage 604.
Trackonpage 600. 13:MoveMeasure.Formoreinformation,see
7:BounceTrack.Formoreinformation,see MoveMeasureonpage 605.
BounceTrackonpage 601.
541
Sequencer mode
14:RegionEdit.Formoreinformation,seeRegion 18:AdjustRegiontoSongsTempo(Time
Editonpage 609. Stretch).Formoreinformation,seeAdjustRegion
15:VolumeRamp.Formoreinformation,see toSongsTempo(TimeStretch)onpage 612.
VolumeRamponpage 610. 19:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
16:CopySongsTempotoRegion.Formore FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
information,seeCopySongsTempotoRegion 20:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
onpage 611. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
17:AdjustSongsTempotoRegion.Formore page 583.
information,seeAdjustSongsTempotoRegion
onpage 611.
42: MIDI Track Name

42PMC
01a
11a
42a
Hereyoucanassignanametoeachtrack.
42a: MIDI Track Names

T01T16 [MIDI Track Name]
HereyoucanrenametheMIDItracks.
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthedialogbox,and
inputthedesiredcharacters.Youcanenterupto24
characters.Formoreinformation,seeEditingnames

Audio.
Thecommandsareexactlythesameasforthemain
TrackEditpage;formoreinformation,seeMIDITrack
Editcommandsonpage 541,andAudioTrackEdit
commandsonpage 541.
542
Sequencer P4: Track Edit 43: AUDIO Track Name
43: AUDIO Track Name

43PMC
01a
11a
43a
Hereyoucanassignanametoeachaudiotrack.
43a: Audio Track Names

T01T16 [Audio Track Name]
Hereyoucanrenametheaudiotracks.
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthedialogbox,and
inputthedesiredcharacters.Youcaninputupto24
characters.Formoreinformation,seeEditingnames

Audio.
Thecommandsareexactlythesameasforthemain
TrackEditpage;formoreinformation,seeMIDITrack
Editcommandsonpage 541,andAudioTrackEdit
commandsonpage 541.
543
Sequencer mode
Sequencer P5: Pattern/RPPR

OntheOASYSyoucanusepresetpatternsP00155, Normally,youwillcreateatrackofperformancedata
anduserpatternsU0099. byusingthePutToMIDITrackorCopyToMIDI
Presetpatternsprovidepatternsthataresuitablefor Trackpagemenucommandstoplacepatterns
drumtracks,andcanbeselectedfromanysong. consistingofseveralmeasuresintoatrack.Youcan
alsousetheRPPRfunction,whichletsyoutrigger
Onehundreduserpatternsareprovidedforeachsong; patternsassignedtoeachkeysimplybypressingthe
youcancreateandstoreyourownpatternsinthese. desiredkey,andrealtimerecordthepatternsthatplay
back.(SeetheRPPRSetuppage.)
51: Pattern Edit

51PMC
51a
51b
51c
42b
Hereyoucanrecordandeditpatterns,andassign Resolution [Hi, r3 , r , x3 , x , e3 , e, q ]

themtotracksofasong.Thefollowingtypesofpattern Specifieshowthetimingofthedatabeingrecorded
operationsareavailable. intothepatternwillbecorrected.Fordetails,seeREC
Userpatternscanberecordedinrealtime(aswellas Resolution(RealtimeRECQuantizeResolution)on
recordedfromperformancesgeneratedbythe page 472.
KARMAfunction),steprecorded,orcreatedusingthe
GetFromMIDITrackcommandorCopyPattern q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
command.Youcanalsocopyapresetpatterntoauser Specifiestheplaybacktempoofthepattern.Fordetails,
patternandeditit.(Youcantdirectlyeditapreset seeq (Tempo)onpage 472.
pattern.)
Track Select [MIDI Track01MIDI Track16,
Presetpatternsanduserpatternscanbeplacedinor
copiedintoatrack.
Selectsthetrackthatwillbeusedtorecord/playthe
patterndata.Thepatterndatawillberecorded/played
51a: Location, Resolution, Tempo, usingthesettingsofthetrackyouselect.Theareaat
Song/Track Select therightdisplaystheprogrambank,number,and
namefortheselectedtrack.
Location [0199] SettingsofMasterTrack,AudioTrack0116willbe
Displaysthecurrentmeasurelocationoftheselected ignored.ThemostrecentlyselectedMIDITrack01
pattern. 16willbeused.
Song Select [000199: name]
Selectsasong.
Theuserpatternwillbecreatedinthesongyouselect.
544
Sequencer P5: Pattern/RPPR 51: Pattern Edit
51b: Pattern, Pattern Select, Metronome, 51c: USED IN SONG TRACK, USED IN
Remove Data RPPR
How to record a user pattern USED IN SONG TRACK
1. UseSongSelecttoselectthesonginwhichyou Thisareaindicatesthepatternusagestatusforthe
wanttocreateauserpattern. patternsselectedforthetrack.
2. UseTrackSelecttoselectthesoundthatyouwill
USED IN RPPR
record.
ThisareaindicatestheRPPRinwhichtheselected
Thepatternyourecordwillsoundaccordingto
patternisused.Theassignedkeyandthespecified
yourchoiceinTrackSelect.
trackareshown.
3. UsePatternBankandPatternSelecttoselectUser
patternandthedesiredpatternnumber.
4. SelectthepagemenucommandPattern
Parameter,andinthedialogbox,specifythe ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberofmeasuresandtimesignatureofthe numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
pattern. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
5. Checkthetempoinq. commandsonpage 142.
6. Ifyouwanttorecordinrealtime,setResolution 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
tospecifytheresolution,andpressthe MemoryStatusonpage 582.
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe 1:StepRecording(LoopType).Formore
START/STOPswitchtobeginrecording. information,seeStepRecording(LoopType)on
Whenyoufinishrecordingtotheendofthe page 612.
measuresspecifiedbyPatternParameter,youwill 2:EventEdit.Formoreinformation,seeEvent
returntothefirstmeasure,andcancontinue Editonpage 612.
recordingwhileaddingmorematerial.Fordetails,
seeLoopAllTracksonpage 485. 3:PatternParameter.Formoreinformation,see
PatternParameteronpage 612.
Ifyouwanttoperformsteprecording,selectthe
pagemenucommandStepRecording(Loop 4:ErasePattern.Formoreinformation,seeErase
Type)toopenthedialogbox,andrecord.Forthe Patternonpage 613.
procedureofsteprecording,seeMIDIStep 5:CopyPattern.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Recordingonpage 593andStepRecording(Loop Patternonpage 613.
Type)onpage 612.
6:BouncePattern.Formoreinformation,see
7. Afterrecording,usethepagemenucommandsas BouncePatternonpage 613.
desiredtoeditthepatternortheeventsinthe
pattern. 7:GetFromMIDITrack.Formoreinformation,see
GetFromMIDITrackonpage 613.
Pattern (Pattern Bank) [Preset, User] 8:PutToMIDITrack.Formoreinformation,see
Selectsthetypeofpattern. PutToMIDITrackonpage 614.
IfPresetisselected,itwillnotbepossibletorecord. 9:CopyToMIDITrack.Formoreinformation,see
YouwillbeabletoselectandexecutetheCopy CopyToMIDITrackonpage 614.
Pattern,BouncePattern,PutToMIDITrack,and 10:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
CopyToMIDITrackpagemenucommands. FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
Pattern Select [P000149, U00U99]
Selectsapattern.Userpatternscanberenamedinthe
P5PatternNamepage.
Metronome [Only REC, REC & Play, Off]

Specifieswhetherthemetronomewillsoundduring
recordingorplayback.Fordetails,see05d:
MetronomeSetuponpage 487.
Remove Data [Off, On]

On(checked):Unwantedperformancedatacanbe
removedduringpatternrecording.Theprocedureis
thesameasexplainedinRemoveDataofLoopAll
Tracks.Fordetails,seeRemoveDataonpage 485.
545
Sequencer mode
52: Pattern Name

52PMC
51a
51b
52a
8:PutToMIDITrack.Formoreinformation,see
52a: User Pattern Names PutToMIDITrackonpage 614.
Pattern name [U00U99] 9:CopyToMIDITrack.Formoreinformation,see
CopyToMIDITrackonpage 614.
Hereyoucanrenamethepattern.Pressthetextedit
buttontoopenthedialogbox,andinputthename.You 10:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
canenterupto24characters.Formoreinformation, FF/REWSpeedonpage 583
seeEditingnamesonpage 172oftheOperation
Guide.

commandsonpage 142.
1:StepRecording(LoopType).Formore
information,seeStepRecording(LoopType)on
page 612.
2:EventEdit.Formoreinformation,seeEvent
Editonpage 612.
3:PatternParameter.Formoreinformation,see
PatternParameteronpage 612.
4:ErasePattern.Formoreinformation,seeErase
Patternonpage 613.
5:CopyPattern.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Patternonpage 613.
6:BouncePattern.Formoreinformation,see
BouncePatternonpage 613.
7:GetFromMIDITrack.Formoreinformation,see
GetFromMIDITrackonpage 613.
546
Sequencer P5: Pattern/RPPR 53: RPPR Setup
53: RPPR Setup

53PMC
53a
53b
53c
HereyoucanmakesettingsfortheRPPR(Realtime
PatternPlay/Recording)function.RPPRletsyouassign 53a: Song Select, Track Select, Tempo
patternstoindividualkeys,andthenplaybackpatterns
Song Select [00199: name]
simplybypressingindividualnotesonthekeyboard.
Thisperformancecanberecordedinrealtime. Selectsthedesiredsong.TheRPPRsettingswillbe
assignedtothesongyouselecthere.
Foreachsong,youcanassigneitherapresetpatternor
auserpatterntoeachofthe72keysintherangeC#2 Track Select [MIDI Track01MIDI Track16,
C8.Foreachkey,youcanspecifythepattern,track Master Track, Audio Track01Audio Track16]
number,andhowthepatternwillbeplayed.
WhenyouplayakeythatisnotassignedtoRPPR,it
KeysusedtoplaypatternsviaRPPRcannotbeused willsoundusingthesettingsofthetrackthatsselected
fortheKARMAfunction.IfRPPRison,keysto inTrackSelect.Usethistoselectthetrackthatyou
whichapatternisnotassignedwillplaythe wanttoplaytogetherwithRPPR,ortoauditiona
programofthetrackthatsselectedinTrackSelect. patternbeforeyouassignit.Theprogrambank,
Inthiscase,theKARMAfunctionwilloperateif number,andnameoftheselectedtrackisshownatthe
KARMAModuleA,B,C,orDisassignedtothe right.
trackandturnedon.Also,notesgeneratedbythe
EachRPPRpatternwillbeginplayingwhenyoupress
KARMAfunctionwillnottriggertheRPPR
theassignedkey,regardlessoftheTrackSelectsetting.
function.
Itwillsoundusingthesettingsofthetrackselectedin
WhenLocalControlisOFF(LocalControlOn TrackName.
Global11a),thekeyboardwillnottriggerRPPR
TheMasterTrackandAudioTrack0116settings
patternplayback.NotesreceivedatMIDIINonthe
areignored.ThelastselectedMIDITrack0116will
channelofthetrackcurrentlyselectedbyTrack
beused.
Selectwilltriggerpatterns.Ifyouhaverecorded
onlythetriggernotesonanexternalsequencerand q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
wishtousetheplaybackfromtheexternal
Specifiestheplaybacktempoofthepatterns.(01a)
sequencertotriggerRPPRpatternsonOASYS,set
LocalControlOFF.
IfyouwantthenotedatageneratedbyRPPRtobe 53b: KEY, Keyboard & Assigned
recordedbytheexternalsequencer,setLocal graphics
ControlON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionof
theexternalsequencer.SeeLocalControlOn KEY (Key Select) [C#2C8]
settingsonpage 1056. SpecifiesthekeytowhichyouwanttoassignanRPPR
IntheRPPRSetuppage,RPPRisturnedon pattern.
automatically.Thiswillbethesameresultaswhen Thefollowingparameterswillapplytothekeythat
theRPPRcheckbox(01a)ineachpageischecked. youselecthere.
547
Sequencer mode
ThiscanalsobeselectedbyholdingdowntheENTER Keyboard & Assigned graphics

switchandplayinganoteonthekeyboard. Thisshowstheselectedkey,andthekeystowhicha
patternhasbeenassignedbytheRPPRfunction.See
diagrambelow.
Non-assignable Assigned keys and Track of the Track selected by

keys tracks selected key Track Select
Key range C4 Key range

Key range shown in the Selected key
RPPR Setup List
53c: RPPR Setup Key-on Key-off

Same key, or C2
Key-on
Note [C#2C8] START STOP

Once
Assign [Off, On] START STOP

On(checked):Whenyouplaybackthekeyspecifiedby Manual
KEY,thepatternselectedinPatternwillbe START STOP

triggered. Endless
Off(unchecked):Thatkeywillsoundthecurrently
selectedtrackatthecorrespondingpitch,justasin Shift [12+12]
normalSequencermode. Adjuststheplaybackpitchofthepatternforthe
specifiedKEYinsemitonestepsoverarangeof1
Pattern Bank [Preset, User] octave.
Pattern [P000149, U0099] Withasettingof0,thepatternwillbeplayedatits
SelectstheRPPRpatternforthekeyselectedinKEY. originalpitch.
Iftheselecteduserpatterncontainsnomusicaldata, Sync [Off, Beat, Measure, SEQ]
therewillbenosoundwhenyoupressthatkey.
Specifiesthewayinwhichthepatternplaybackwillbe
Track [MIDI Track 01MIDI Track16] synchronizedwhenyoupressthespecifiedKEY.
SelectsthetrackthatwillbeusedfortheRPPRpattern Off:Thepatternwillbeginplayingatthemomentyou
selectedfortheKEY.Whenyouplaythekey,the pressthenote.
patternwillbeplayedaccordingtothesettingsofthe Beat:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothebeatsofthe
trackyouselecthere.Youcanmaketracksettingsin patternthatwasstartedbythefirstkey(i.e.,thefirst
theP0:Play/RECP3:MIDIFilterpages. noteonthatoccursfromaconditionwherenonotesof
WhenyourecordinrealtimewiththeRPPNfunction thekeyboardarepressed).Thissettingissuitable
turnedon,thedatawillberecordedonthetrackyou whenyouwishtoplayphrasepatternsinunison.
selecthere.Fordetails,seeUsingRPPR(Realtime Measure:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothemeasures
PatternPlay/Record)onpage 117. ofthepatternthatwasstartedbythefirstkey.This
Informationshowsthebank,name,andnumberof settingissuitableforrhythm,bassordrumpatterns.
theprogramthatsselectedforTrack. SEQ:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothemeasuresof
Mode [Once, Manual, Endless] thesequencersong.
Specifiesthewayinwhichthepatternassignedtothe
specifiedKEYwillbeplayed.
Once:Whenyoupressthekey,thecompletepattern
willplaybackoncetotheendandthenstop.
Manual:Thepatternwillcontinuerepeatingaslongas
youcontinueholdingthekey,andwillstopassoonas
youreleasethekey.
Endless:Thepatternwillcontinuerepeatingevenafter
youreleasethekey.Tostopthepatternplayback,press
anynotebelowC2,orpressthesamekeyonceagain.
548
Sequencer P5: Pattern/RPPR 53: RPPR Setup
Paste
Sync settings
Key 1 on Key 2 on Key 1 off
Thispastesthesettingsfromthecopybuffer(obtained
byCopy)intotheKEYoftheselectedparameter.
Song Example): Assigning preset patterns P00, P01, and

Patterns 1 and 2 are set to P02 to KEY
Mode=Manual, and have
identical Sync settings Beforeyoubegin,assignadrumprogramsuchasMIDI
Sync: Off
track1.
Pattern 1
1. CheckC#2Assign.SetPatternBanktoPreset,set
Pattern 2 PatterntoP00,andsetTracktoMIDITrack01.
WithaC#2parameterselected,pressCopy.
Sync: Beat
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: Measure
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: SEQ
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
2. SelectaD2parameter,andpressthePastebutton.
WhenBeatorMeasureareselected,pattern TheAssign,PatternBank,Pattern,Track,Mode,
playbackwillbeginwhenyoupressthefirstkey. Shift,andSyncsettingsyoumadeinstep1willbe
Thesecondandsubsequentpatternsthatare copiedautomatically.
triggeredfromthekeyboardwillsynchronizetothe 3. ChangejustthePattern.SelectPattern,andpress
patternthatwasstartedbythefirstkey;witha the switchtoselectP01.
settingofBeattheywillsynchronizeinstepsofa 4. SelectaD#2parameterandpressthePastebutton.
beat,andwithasettingofMeasuretheywill
TheAssign,PatternBank,Pattern,Track,Mode,
synchronizeinstepsofameasure.
Shift,andSyncsettingsyoumadeinstep1willbe
WhenSEQisselected,thepatternwillplaybackin copiedautomatically.
synchronizationwiththemeasuresofthesequencer
Asyoudidinstep3,setPatterntoP02.
song.Thepatternwillsynchronizewiththe
currentlyplayingsong,soyoumuststartthesong ByusingCopy,Pasteinthisway,youcan
beforeyouplaynotesonthekeyboard. efficientlyspecifyPattern(PatternBank),Pattern,
andTracksettingsforeachKEYwhencreating
Beat,Measure,andSEQwillcausethepatternto RPPRdata.Thisisparticularlyconvenientwhen,asin
startimmediatelyifyouplaythekeywithina theaboveexample,thepatternsthatyouwantto
thirtysecondnoteofthetimingoftherespective assigntothekeysarenumberedconsecutively(orare
beatormeasure,butifyouplaythekeylaterthan
nearbyeachother),andusethesametrack.
this,thestartofthepatternwillbedelayedbya
beat.
Information
Thisareashowsthebank,name,andnumberofthe
programthatsselectedforthetrack.
Stopping playback of a RPPR pattern commandsonpage 142.
BypressingC2(oranynotelowerthanC2),allthe 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
patternsbeingplayedbyRPPRwillstop. MemoryStatusonpage 582.
ThepatternsofkeyswhoseSyncsettingisOffwill
stopimmediately,buttheplaybackofotherkeyswill
stopatthebeginningofthenextbeatormeasure.
PatternplaybackofkeyswhoseSyncsettingisother
thanOncanbestoppedimmediatelybyrapidly
pressingC2oranylowernotetwiceinsuccession.
Copy
ThiscopiestheAssign,PatternBank,Pattern,Track,
Mode,Shift,andSyncsettingsoftheselectedKEY
intoacopybuffer.
549
Sequencer mode
Sequencer P7: KARMA

HereyoucanmakesettingsfortheKARMAfunctions
usedinSequencermode.SongscanusefourKARMA
Modules:A,B,C,andD).
InSequencermode,youcanusetheKARMAfunction
onsongtracksorforpatternrealtimerecording.The
noteon/offandMIDIcontroldatageneratedbythe
KARMAModulescanberecordedaseventsonatrack
orpattern.YoucanusetheKARMASCENESswitches
18,KARMASLIDERS18andKARMASWITCHES1
8.
Whenplayingbackasongorpattern,youcanusethe
KARMAfunctioninrealtimeonyourkeyboard
playing,orinconjunctionwithrealtimeperformance
usingtheRPPRfunction
Thedatafromtheinternalsequencerisnotinputto
theKARMAModules.Notedatafromtheinternal
sequencercannotbeusedastriggerstocausethe
KARMAfunctiontogeneratephrases.
ThestateoftheKARMAON/OFFswitch,KARMA
SLIDERS18,KARMASWITCHES18,LATCHand
SCENES18switches,andthenotesettings/velocityof
thePad18canbesavedindependentlyforeachsong.
ByusingthepagemenucommandCopyKARMA
Module,youcaneasilycopytheKARMAModule
settingsofaprogramorcombination.Usethiswhen
youwishtouseSequencermodetorecordthe
KARMAphraseorpatternofProgrammode.
ByusingthepagemenucommandCopyFrom
Combination,youcancopytheentiresettingsofa
combination,andrealtimerecordaperformancethat
usestheKARMAfunction(MultiREC).
ByusingtheAutoSongSetupfunction(+p.470)you
canautomaticallytransferthesettingsofaprogramor
combinationintoasong,andthenbeginrecording
immediatelysimplybypressingtheSTART/STOP
switch.Ifyoucomeupwithaninspiredphraseorsong
ideawhileusingtheKARMAfunctioninProgramor
CombiMode,youcanimmediatelyconvertyour
inspirationintoasong.TheAutoSongSetupfunction
seamlesslytakesyoufromplayingaprogramor
combinationintocreatingasong.
ThetempoofthesongandtheKARMAfunction
cannotbesetindependently.
IfMIDIClock(Global11b)issettoInternal,youcan
usethestarttimingoftheinternalsequencerto
synchronizetheKARMAModule.
IfyoupresstheSTART/STOPswitchwhilethe
KARMAfunctionisoperating,theKARMA
functionwillsynchronizetothetimingofthe
sequencer.
IfyouthenpresstheSTART/STOPswitchagain,
theKARMAfunctionwillstopplaying,aswillthe
sequencer.IfyouwishtostoponlytheKARMA
function,presstheKARMAON/OFFswitch.
WhenMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoExternal,
KARMAwillplayonlywhenMIDIClockmessages
arebeingreceived,andstopplayingwhentheClock
messagesstop.Formoreinformation,see
SynchronizingtheKARMAfunctiononpage 217
oftheOperationGuide.
550
Sequencer P7: KARMA 71: GE Setup/Key Zones

71PMC
71a
71b
71c
HereyoucanselecttheGEthatwillbeusedbyeach Selected KARMA Module Info

KARMAModule,andspecifytheKeyZoneandMIDI
SetupforthefourKARMAModulesusedbythe GE Number & Name
Sequencermodesong.
RTC Model [List of RTC Models]
ThisdisplaysinformationfortheKARMAModule
71a: Location, Track Select, Load GE specifiedbytheModuleControlSetting.
Options, KARMA T.Sig, Tempo Formoreinformation,seeSelectedKARMAModule
Location [001:01.000999:16.191] Infoonpage 384.
Track Select [MIDI Track01MIDI Track16, Module Zone Display

Master Track, Audio Track01Audio Track16] ThekeyzonesettingsofeachofthefourKARMA
Modulesaredisplayedasasolidblueline.
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,seeModuleZoneDisplayon
TheseparametersletyouselectthecurrentTrack,set
page 102.
thelocationofthesequence,andcontrolthetempo.
Formoreinformation,see01a:Location,Song/Track
Selectonpage 471. 71b: GE Setup
GE
Theseoptionsletyouspecifywhetherthevaluesand
assignmentsfortheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHES Run [Off, On]
whenyouselectaGE.Formoreinformation,seeLoad Solo [Off, On]
GEOptionsonpage 7.
GE Select [Preset 00002047, USER-A
KARMA T. Sig (KARMA Time Signature) U-A000...U-A127, ..., USER-L U-L000...U-L127]
[GE/TS, 1/416/4,1/816/8, 1/1616/16] Formoreinformation,pleasesee06b:GESelecton
Formoreinformation,seeKARMAT.Sig(Time page 384.
Signature)onpage 8.
551
Sequencer mode
GE Bank Select [PresetUSER-L]

71c: MIDI I/O
SpecifiestheMIDIinput/outputchannelsforthefour
KARMAModulesusedbyaSequencermodesong.
Key Zones
Note:Thesesettingsmakeitpossibletousemultiple
Specifytherangeofnotedata(thekeyzone)thatwill
KARMAModules,andsimultaneouslyplaymultiple
controleachKARMAModule.
tracksofdifferentMIDIchannels.Ifyouwishtoreal
Btm (Key Zone Bottom) [C1G9] timerecordsuchaperformance,usemultitrack
recordingsetup(Sequencer01a:MultiREC).
Top (Key Zone Top) [C1G9]
Input Channel [0116, Tch]
PleaseseeKeyZonesonpage 431.
SpecifiestheMIDIinputchannelforeachKARMA
Note:InSequencermode,MIDIdataforeachKARMA Module.
ModuleistransmittedandreceivedontheInput
ChannelandOutputChannel(71c)thatyou MIDIdatafromthekeyboardorfromMIDIINthat
specifyforeachModule. matchesthespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeinputtothe
KARMAModule.(Seethediagrambelow,KARMA
Transpose MIDIInput/OutputChannel.)
Tch:AutomaticallymatchtheMIDIchannel
Thru In Z (Thru In Zone) [Off, On] (Sequencer21a)ofthetrackselectedbyTrackSelect
Trans (Transpose In Zone) [36+36] (Sequencer01a).
Thru Out Z (Thru Out Zone) [Off, On]

Trans (Transpose Out Zone) [36+36]
PleaseseeKeyZonesonpage 431.
KARMA - MIDI Input / Output Channel
01ch Track 01
Track Select = Track01 KARMA ON/OFF = ON 02ch Track 02
In : 01ch KARMA Module [A] Out : 01ch 03ch Track 03

01ch
04ch Track 04
In : 01ch KARMA Module [B] Out : 02ch
05ch Track 05
In : 01ch KARMA Module [C] Out : 03ch
06ch Track 06
MIDI IN In : 16ch KARMA Module [D] Out : 04ch

16ch
Tch Also [Off, On] NotavailableiftheModulesInputChannelisTch

ThisspecifieswhethertheMIDIchanneloftheMIDI orthesameMIDIchannelastheMIDItrackselected
trackselectedinTrackSelectwillbeusedforMIDI forTrackSelect.
inputinadditiontotheMIDIchannelspecifiedby Output Channel [0116, Tch]
InputChannel.
SpecifiestheMIDIoutputchannelforeachKARMA
Off(unchecked):OnlytheMIDIchannelspecifiedby Module.
InputChannelwillbeusedastheMIDIinput
channelfortheKARMAModule. TheMIDIdatafromeachKARMAModulewillbe
transmittedontheMIDIoutputchannelspecifiedfor
On(checked):TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyInput thatKARMAModule,andwillbesoundedbytracks
ChannelandtheMIDIchanneloftheMIDItrack withmatchingchannels.Forrealtimerecording,data
selectedbyTrackSelectwillbeusedastheMIDIinput willberecordedontrackswithmatchingchannels.
channelsfortheKARMAModule. (Seethediagrambelow,KARMAMIDI
IfyoucheckTchAlso,youwillalsobeabletocontrol Input/OutputChannel.)
theKARMAfunctionfromthekeyboard(transmitted Tch:AutomaticallymatchtheMIDIchannel
ontheMIDIchanneloftheMIDItrackselectedby (Sequencer21a)ofthetrackselectedbyTrackSelect
TrackSelect). (Sequencer01a).
Note:IfyouveselectedMasterTrackorAudioTrack Example1
forTrackSelect,theMIDIchanneloftheMIDItrack
showninSelectedTrackInfo:willbeused.
552
Sequencer P7: KARMA 71: GE Setup/Key Zones
Example 1
KARMA ON/OFF = ON
Track Select = MIDI Track 01
01ch Guitar Riff
In : 01ch KARMA Module [A] Out : 01ch In : 01ch MIDI Track 01: Guitar

02ch Bass Riff
In : 02ch KARMA Module [B] Out : 02ch In : 02ch MIDI Track 02: Bass
Example 2
KARMA ON/OFF = ON
Track Select = MIDI Track 01 Guitar Riff
01ch 01ch
In : Tch KARMA Module [A] Out : Tch In : 01ch MIDI Track 01: Guitar

02ch In : 02ch MIDI Track 02: Bass
02ch Guitar Riff
Example 3
KARMA ON/OFF = ON
01ch Guitar Riff
In : 01ch KARMA Module [A] Out : 01ch In : 01ch MIDI Track 01: Guitar

02ch Bass Riff
In : 02ch KARMA Module [B] Out : 02ch In : 02ch MIDI Track 02: Bass
Drums
Pattern
In : Tch KARMA Module [C] Out : 03ch In : 03ch MIDI Track 03: Drums
Withthefollowingsettings,switchingTrackSelect Withthefollowingsettings,switchingTrackSelect
(thetrackyouplay)tochangeprogramswillalso (thetrackyouplay)tochangeprogramswillnot
switchtoadifferentKARMAModuleatthesametime, switchtoadifferentKARMAModulethesame
causingadifferentphrasetoplay.(Seethediagram phrasewillstillbeplayed.(SeethediagramExample
Example1,below.) 2,below.)
1. SetMIDITrack1asfollows. 1. SetMIDITrack1asfollows.
ProgramSelect:aGuitarcategoryprogram ProgramSelect:aGuitarcategoryprogram
MIDIChannel:01 MIDIChannel:01
2. SetMIDITrack2asfollows. 2. SetMIDITrack2asfollows.
ProgramSelect:aBasscategoryprogram ProgramSelect:aBasscategoryprogram
MIDIChannel:02 MIDIChannel:02
3. SetKARMAModuleAasfollows. 3. SetKARMAModuleAasfollows.
GESelect:ariffofGEcategoryGuitar GESelect:ariffofGEcategoryGuitar
InputChannel:01 InputChannel:Tch
OutputChannel01 OutputChannelTch
4. SetKARMAModuleBasfollows. 4. InTrackSelect,selectTrack01,andplaythe
GESelect:ariffofGEcategoryBass keyboard.
InputChannel:02 TheGuitarriffofKARMAModuleAwillbe
soundedbytheGuitartypeprogram.
OutputChannel02
5. InTrackSelect,selectTrack02,andplaythe
keyboard.
keyboard.
TheGuitarriffofKARMAModuleAwillbe
(KARMAfunctionon)
soundedbytheBasstypeprogram.
Example3
Withthefollowingsettings,switchingTrackSelect
(thetrackyouplay)tochangeprogramswillalso
keyboard.
switchtoadifferentKARMAModuleatthesametime,
(KARMAfunctionon) causingadifferentphrasetoplay.Atthistime,the
TheBassriffofKARMAModuleBwillbesounded rhythmtrackcanbetriggeredandcontrolledfrom
bytheBasstypeprogram. eithertrack.(SeethediagramExample3atthe
Example2 bottomofpreviouspage.)
1. SetMIDITrack1asfollows.
ProgramSelect:aGuitarcategoryprogram
553
Sequencer mode
MIDIChannel:01 Module Track MIDI Display

2. SetMIDITrack2asfollows. ThisshowstheMIDItracksthatwillbesoundedby
ProgramSelect:aBasscategoryprogram eachKARMAModule,accordingtotheMIDIoutput
channelsettingsofeachKARMAModuleandthe
MIDIChannel:02
MIDIchannelofeachtrack(Sequencer21b:MIDI
3. SetMIDITrack3asfollows. Channel).
ProgramSelect:adrumprogram(aDrums
categoryprogram)
MIDIChannel:03
4. SetKARMAModuleAasfollows.
GESelect:ariffofGEcategoryGuitar
InputChannel:01
OutputChannel01
5. SetKARMAModuleBasfollows. t 71: Page Menu Commands
GESelect:ariffofGEcategoryBass
InputChannel:02 numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
OutputChannel02 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
6. SetKARMAModuleCasfollows. commandsonpage 142.
GESelect:adrumpattern(apatternofGE 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
categoryDrums) MemoryStatusonpage 582.
InputChannel:Tch 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
OutputChannel03
7. InTrackSelect,selectTrack01,andplaythe 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
keyboard. seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464.
(KARMAfunctionon) 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
page 465.
Simultaneously,thedrumpatternofKARMA
Sceneonpage 465.
ModuleCwillbesoundedbytheDrumsprogram.
8. InTrackSelect,selectTrack02,andplaythe 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
keyboard. Sceneonpage 465.
(KARMAfunctionon) 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
TheBassriffofKARMAModuleBwillbesounded
bytheBasstypeprogram. 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
Simultaneously,thedrumpatternofKARMA
ModuleCwillbesoundedbytheDrumsprogram. 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
Track Thru (when KARMA Off) [Off, On] page 583.
InputChannelandOutputChannelsettingsare 9:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
normallyvalidonlywhentheKARMAON/OFF CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
switchison.
Asanexception,TrackThruspecifieswhetherthe
MIDIdatathatpassesthroughtheKARMAModule
willbesent(Thru)tothetrackwhentheKARMA
ON/OFFswitchisoff.
On(checked):MIDIdatathatpassesthroughthe
KARMAModulewillbesentontheOutputChannel
tothetrackwhentheKARMAON/OFFswitchisoff.
Off(unchecked):MIDIdatathatpassesthroughthe
KARMAModulewillnotbesenttothetrackwhenthe
KARMAON/OFFswitchisoff.
Forexamplesofusingthissetting,seeTimbreThru
(whenKARMAOff)onpage 432.
554
Sequencer P7: KARMA 72: MIDI Filter/CC Offset

72PMC
11a
72a
72b
72a: MIDI Filter 72b: CC Offset

ThesesettingsspecifytheMIDIcontrolchange
Receive MIDI Filter
messagesandvaluesthataretransmittedfromeach
After Touch [Off, On] KARMAModuletothetonegeneratorwhenyoupress
theKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnontheKARMA
Pitch Bend [Off, On] functionorwhenyouselectasongforwhichthe
KARMAfunctionisturnedon.
Damper (CC#64) [Off, On]
ThesemessageswillbetransmittedontheOutput
JS+Y (CC#01) [Off, On] Channel(Sequencer71c)oftheKARMAModule.
Note:IftheGEalsogeneratesthesamecontrolchange
JSY (CC#02) [Off, On]
messagesasthoseyouspecifyhere,thecontrolchange
Ribbon (CC#16) [Off, On] messagesgeneratedbytheGEwillbegivenpriority.
Other CC [Off, On] 1, 2, 3, 4

Formoreinformation,seeReceiveMIDIFilteron
CC Number [Off, MIDI CC#00CC#95]
page 103.
Value [000127]
Transmit MIDI Filter
Formoreinformation,see72b:CCOffseton
Pitch Bend [Off, On] page 434.
CCA, CCB [Off, On]

Envelope1, Envelope2, Envelope3 [Off, On]
GE Notes [Off, On] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
WaveSeq [Off, On] commandsonpage 142.
PleaseseeTransmitMIDIFilteronpage 104and 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
TransmitMIDIFilteronpage 434. MemoryStatusonpage 582.
555
Sequencer mode
3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
page 465. 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
Sceneonpage 465. page 583.
5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap 9:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
Sceneonpage 465. CopyFromProgramonpage 584.

73PMC
11a
73a
HereyoucansetKARMAModuleControlparameters. Clock Advance

InSequencermode,fourKARMAModules(A,B,C,
andD)canbeused. Mode [Auto, Dyn, Auto+Dyn1, Auto+Dyn2]
73a: Module Parameter-Control
Chord Trigger Mode [Off, 1st, Chord1, Chord2,
Control Chord3]
Transpose [36+36] Velocity Sense Bottom [001127]

PleaseseeClockAdvanceonpage 108.
Force Range
[Off, Lowest, Highest, C3B3[1], C3B3[2]] Note Map
Force Range Wrap [C#C] Mode (Note Map Mode)
Timbre Zone Bypass [Off, On] [Off, On-Main, On-Rpt, On-All]
Root Position [Off, On] Table (Note Map Table)

[Custom, Gtable 1Maj 7 -> oct]
Formoreinformation,seeControlonpage 106and
Controlonpage 435. Transpose (Note Map Transpose) [12+12]
Chord Track (Note Map Chord Track) [Off, On]
Keyboard Track (C2 Ref)
556
Sequencer P7: KARMA 74: Module Parameters-Trigger
(Note Map Keyboard Track) [Off, On] 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore

Note Map Table Display page 465.
Formoreinformation,seeNoteMaponpage 108. 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 465.
t 73: Page Menu Commands 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Sceneonpage 465.
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 465.
commandsonpage 142. 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
MemoryStatusonpage 582. 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. page 583.
2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation, 9:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464. CopyFromProgramonpage 584.

74PMC
11a
74a
Hereyoucanspecifythetriggerparametersforeach Delay
KARMAModule,andwhetheritwillbelatched.
Delay Start [Off, Fixed, 64T 4x1]
74a: Module Parameter-Trigger Delay Start Fixed [0000ms5000ms]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDelayonpage 111.
Control
Quantize Trigger [Off, On]
Note
Quantize Window [x! q ] Note Trigger [Any, AKR, 1st, Dyn]
Update On Release [Off, On] Note Latch [Off, On]

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeNoteonpage 111
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeControlon
andNoteonpage 437.
page 110.
557
Sequencer mode
Envelope1, Envelope2, Envelope3 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see

Envelope Trigger [Any, AKR, 1st, Dyn] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Envelope Latch [Off, Sus1, Rel1, Sus2, Rel2] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEnvelope1, 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
Envelope2,Envelope3onpage 111. seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464.
Module Trigger information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
page 465.
Trigger By Module [Off, A, B, C, D]
GE Phrase Length [000100%] Sceneonpage 465.
Cutoff Module A, B, C, D [Off, On] 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap

Sceneonpage 465.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeModuleTriggeron
page 437. 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
t 74: Page Menu Commands FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu page 583.
commandsonpage 142.

75PMC
75a
75b
75c
HereyoucanedittheRealTimeParametersoftheGE
foreachKARMAModule,AD.Inaddition,youcan 75a: GE No. & Name, GE RTC Select,
assignGERealTimeParameterstotheKARMAReal Tempo
TimeControlssothatyoucancontrolthephraseor
patterninrealtimewhileyouplay. GE Number & Name
ThisindicatesthenumberandnameoftheGEthatis
selectedforeachKARMAModule.
558
Sequencer P7: KARMA 75: GE Real-Time Parameters
GE RTC Select [116, 1732] 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,

Formoreinformation,seeGERTCSelecton seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464.
page 113. 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] page 465.
Formoreinformation,seeTempoonpage 5. 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 465.
75b: GE Real-Time Parameters for 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Module Control = Master Sceneonpage 465.
GE PARAMETER [Parameter Name] seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 465.
MIN (Minimum Value) [5000+5000] 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
MAX (Maximum Value) [5000+5000]
8:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
VALUE [5000+5000] information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
ASSIGN [---, Slider18, Slider (SW)18,
SW18, DynaMIDI18]
POL.ARITY [+, ]
Formoreinformation,see75b:GERealTime
Parametersonpage 113and75b:GERealTime
ParametersforModuleControl=Masteronpage 438.
Note:Normally,theMIN,MAX,VALUE,and
POLARITYparametersofeachmodulearespecified
inmoduleA,B,C,andD.Theseparametersettingsare
possibleifyouspecifyASSIGNinMasterA,B,C,
andD.
Forexample,ifyouwanttouseSlider1tocontrolthe
GEREALTIMEPARAMETERNo.1ofmodulesA,B,C,
andDwhenModuleControlissettoMaster,you
wouldsettheMaster,A,B,C,andDsGEREALTIME
PARAMETERNo.01ASSIGNtoSlider1.Iftheseare
settoASSIGN,youareabletoedittheMIN,
MAX,VALUE,andPOLARITYparametersfor
Master,A,B,C,andD.
Inthisway,youcanmakeGErealtimeparameter
settingsindependentlyofmodulesA,B,C,andD.
75c: GE Real-Time Parameters for

Module Control = A, B, C, D (1-32)
Formoreinformation,see75b:GERealTime
Parametersonpage 113,and75c:GERealTime
ParametersforModuleControl=A,B,C,Don
page 439.
75d: Scene Matrix

Formoreinformation,see75d:ModuleControl
SceneMatrixonpage 439.

commandsonpage 142.
559
Sequencer mode

76PMC
11a
76a
HereyoucanassigncontrollerstoKARMA
PerformanceRealTimeParameters(Perf.RTP)outside t 76: Page Menu Commands
oftheGERealTimeParametersthatcontrolthe ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
internalsettingsoftheGE.Examplesincludethe numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
KARMAKeyZoneparameters(Combination71b) shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
andKARMAControlandTriggerparameters commandsonpage 142.
(Combination73,74).
Formoreinformation,pleasesee76a:PerfRealTime MemoryStatusonpage 582.
Parameters(18)onpage 441.
76a: Perf Real-Time Parameters 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
1...8 seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464.
Group [Off, PE, Mix, Control, Trigger, Key Zones,
Random Seeds] page 465.
Parameter [---, Time Signature 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Retrigger Each Time] Sceneonpage 465.
Min (Minimum Value) [8192+8191]
Sceneonpage 465.
Max (Maximum Value) [8192+8191] 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Value [8192+8191]
A/B/C/D [Off, On] FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
Assign 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
[---, Slider18, Slider18(SW), SW18, information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
DynaMIDI18]
Polarity [+, ] CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
Pleasesee76b:PerfRealTimeParameterson
page 116,and76a:PerfRealTimeParameters
(18)onpage 441.
560
Sequencer P7: KARMA 77: Dynamic MIDI
77: Dynamic MIDI

77PMC
11a
77a
DynamicMIDIisafunctionthatletsyouusethis 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
instrumentscontrollersandMIDIcontrolmessagesto MemoryStatusonpage 582.
controlspecificKARMAfunctions. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Formoreinformation,pleasesee77b:Dynamic ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
MIDIonpage 120andp.443. 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
77a: Dynamic MIDI 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
Input (Input Module) [AD] page 465.
Source [Off, JS+Y (CC#01) 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Velocity Outside Zone] Sceneonpage 465.
Sceneonpage 465.
Top (Range Top) [000127] 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Action (Range Action) [Momentary, Toggle,
Continuous] 7:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
Destination [Off, RT Params ControlBuffer Latch] 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
A/B/C/D [Off, On] information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
L (Last Triggered) [Off, On] 9:CopyFromProgram.Formoreinformation,see
Polarity (Dynamic MIDI Polarity) [+, , +/, /+]
Formoreinformation,see77b:DynamicMIDIon
page 120andp.443.

commandsonpage 142.
561
Sequencer mode
78: Random Seeds

78PMC
11a
78a
78b
TheRandomSeedspageallowsyoutocontrolsomeof
therandomizablecharacteristicsofaModulesGE. t 78: Page Menu Commands
DifferentModulesusingthesameGEcanhavevarious ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
randomizablecharacteristicslinkedsothatthey numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
sharethesamestartseeds,generatingphraseswiththe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
samecharacteristics. commandsonpage 142.
78a: Seed MemoryStatusonpage 582.
Rhythm, Duration, Index, Cluster, Velocity, ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
CC-A/B, Drum, WaveSeq 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
A [1, 2, 3, 4] seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 464.
B [1, 2, 3, 4] information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
page 465.
C [1, 2, 3, 4]
D [1, 2, 3, 4] Sceneonpage 465.
Pleasesee78a:Seedonpage 444. 5:SwapScene.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Sceneonpage 465.
78b: Start/Loop 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Start Seed [2147483648
0: Random+2147483647]
Link [Off, On] 8:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
PleaseseeLinktoStartSeedonpage 445. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
Retrigger Each Time [Off, On] CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
Pleasesee78b:Startonpage 122
562
Sequencer P7: KARMA 79: Name/Note Map
79: Name/Note Map

79PMC
11a
79a
79b
18andKARMASWITCHES18,viewGlobalNote
MapTables,andedittheCustomNoteMapTable
storedwiththeSequence.
79a: Name
Master, Module AD
EachModuleControllayerhasitsownsetofnamesfor
eachoftheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHES.For
moreinformation,see79b:ModuleAonpage 125.
Slider18 [000 (no name)

571 Waveform Select [16]
Switch18 [000 (no name)
571 Waveform Select [16]
563
Sequencer mode
79PMC
79b
79b: Note Map (Custom) seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 465.
Table [Custom, Global 164] 7:AutoAssignKARMARTCName.Formore
information,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC
In (Note In) [C1G9] Nameonpage 465.
Out (Note Out) [Remove, C1G9] 8:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
Octave Replicate [Off, On] 9:SetLocation(forLocateKey).Formore
Reset [button] information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
Pleasesee79c:NoteMaponpage 125.
Display Module CopyFromProgramonpage 584.
HereyoucanselecttheKARMAmodulethatyouwant 11:CopyNoteMap.Formoreinformation,see
toedit,andviewtheNoteMapTable. CopyNoteMaponpage 143.

commandsonpage 142.
page 465.
Sceneonpage 465.
Sceneonpage 465.
564
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect 81: MIDI Routing1
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect

Youcanalsospecifythebusroutingfortheprogram Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
usedbyeachMIDItrack116andaudiotrack116. MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
Forinstance,youcan:
FordetailsonInsertEffects,seeEffectGuideon
Sendtheoutputofatracktoaninserteffect page 787.
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect
81: MIDI Routing1

81PMC
81a
11a
11b
81b
Specifiesthebustowhichtheprogramoscillator(s)
usedbyeachMIDItrack116willbesent.Youcanalso 81b: MIDI Routing1
setthesendlevelstothemastereffectsfromthispage.
81a: Routing Map Bus Select (IFX/Indiv. Out Assign) Dkit [Off, On]
Thisareashowstheinserteffectrouting,thenameof Youcanselectthisonlyifthespecifiedprogramisa
theassignedeffect,theon/offstatus,chaining,andthe drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrums).
outputbusthatfollowstheinserteffect.Thetypeof ThisparametercanalsobeeditedfromtheP8MIDI
inserteffect,theon/offstatus,andthechainsettings Routing2page.
canbeeditedintheP8InsertFXpage.
565
Sequencer mode
On(checked):TheBusSelect,FXControlBus,Send1, thesesettingsduringplayback.HoweverifSend1and
andSend2settingsforeachkeyoftheselecteddrum 2datahasbeenrecorded,thesettingswillchange
kitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyouwanttoapply accordingtotherecordeddata.
anindividualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument,or Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1
tosendindividualdruminstrumentstoAUDIO andSend2.Thesecanalsobecontrolledfromthemixer
OUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL). sectionofthefrontpanel,orfromtheP0Control
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedrum SurfacepageoftheLCDscreen.Theproceduregiven
instrumentshavethesameBusSelectsettings belowdescribeshowtomakethesesettingsfromthe
accordingtotheirtype,asfollows. frontpanel.
SnaresIFX1 1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXER
KicksIFX2 TIMBRE/TRACKswitchtoselecteithertracks18
or916.
TomsIFX3
CymbalsIFX4 CHANNELSTRIP.
Percussionetc.IFX5 3. UsetheMIXERSELECT1/98/16switchestoselect
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumKit thetrackwhosesendlevelsyouwanttoadjust.
IFXPatchpagemenucommand.Fordetails,see 4. UseMIXCHANNELSTRIPFXSEND1(knob7)
DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 466. andFXSEND2(knob8)tocontrolthesend
Off(unchecked):TheBusSelect,FXControlBus,and levels.
Send1/2settingswillbeused.Alldruminstruments IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoL/Ror
willbesenttothespecifiedbus. Off,thiswillcontrolSend1(MFX1)Send2
(MFX2).IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)is
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.Out Assign) settoIFX112,thiswillcontrolSend1andSend2
[L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off] (P8InsertFXpage).
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetracksprogram IfStatus(21a)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#93and#91
oscillator.Thisparametercanalsobeeditedfromthe canbereceivedtocontrolsend1and2respectively
P8MIDIRouting2page. andchangetheirsettings.Whenyouswitchsongs
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus. orreturntothebeginningofasong,trackswhose
StatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmitthese
IFX112:OutputtotheIFX112buses.
settingsviaMIDI.Thisdatawillbetransmittedon
18:Thetrackwillbeoutputinmonofromthe theMIDIchannelofeachtrackassetbyMIDI
correspondingAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL). Channel(21a).Theactualsendlevelisdetermined
1/27/8:Thetrackwillbeoutputinstereoaccordingto bymultiplyingthevalueoftheseparameterswith
itspansettingfromthecorrespondingAUDIO thesendlevelsettingsoftheoscillator(s)ofthe
OUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)pairs1/2,3/4,5/6,or7/8. programusedbythetrack(Send1andSend2,
Program81d).
Off:ThetrackwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,
IFX112buses,orIndividual18buses.ChoosetheOff Track 0216 (Track Number)
settingifyouwanttheprogramoscillatoroutputofthe
tracktobeconnectedinseriestoamastereffect.Use Thesesettingsspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutput
Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)tospecifythe busandmastereffectsendlevelsforMIDItracks2
sendlevels. through16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.SeeTrack
01:.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusing
eachtracksBusSelectandtheChaintoandChain
settings(85a)thatfollowtheinserteffect. t 81: Page Menu Commands
Send1 (MFX1) [000127] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Send2 (MFX2) [000127] shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Foreachtrack,theseparameterssetthesendlevelto commandsonpage 142.
mastereffects1and2.Thesesettingsarevalidwhen 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
BusSelectissettoL/RorOff.WhenIFX112are MemoryStatusonpage 582.
selected,thesendlevelstomastereffects1and2areset
bytheSend1andSend2parametersoftheInsertFX
page,afterthesoundhaspassedthroughIFX112.
IfBusSelectissetto18or1/27/8,thesesettings
areignored.
TheSend1and2settingyouspecifyhereareused
whenplayingbackorrecordingfromthebeginningof
thesong.Ifyoumodifythesesettingsduring 4:DrumKitIFXPatch.Formoreinformation,see
recording,yourchangeswillberecordedas DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 466.
performancedata;thesendamountswillchange
accordinglyduringplayback.Youcanalsomodify
566
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect 82: MIDI Routing2
5:PutEffectSettingToTrack.Formore 7:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
information,seePutEffectSettingtoTrackon information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 615. page 583.
82: MIDI Routing2

82PMC
81a
11a
11b
82a
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutput UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparate
bus,effectcontrolbus,andRECbusforeachMIDI soundtocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.Youcan
track1through16. usetwoFXControlbuses(eachisatwochannelstereo
bus)tocontroleffectsinvariousways.
82a: MIDI Routing2 Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuses
onpage 790.
Track 01 (Tack Number) REC Bus (All OSCs to) [Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1/2, 3/4]
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv. Out Assign) Dkit [Off, On] ThesesettingssendtheoutputofthetracktotheREC
Youcanselectthisonlyifthespecifiedprogramisa buses(fourmonochannels:1,2,3,4).
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrums).These TheRECbusesarededicatedinternalbusesfor
settingscanalsobemadeintheInsertEffectRouting1. recording,usedforsamplinginthevariousmodesor
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBusSelect forrecordingaudiotracksinSequencermode.In
(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)Dkitonpage 565. Sequencermode,youcanusethesebusestorecord
audiotracksontotheharddisk,ortosample.
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv. Out Assign)
[L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off] Youwillnormallyuseaudiotrackrecordingtorecord
externalaudiosignalssuchasguitarorvocalthatare
Foreachtrack,theseparametersspecifythebusto inputfromtheAudioInputjacks,butyoucanalso
whichtheprogramoscillator(s)willbesent.The recordtheplaybackofMIDItracksoryour
currentsettingscanalsobeviewedintheRouting performanceusingthekeyboardorKARMAfunction.
Map.ThisparametercanalsobeeditedfromtheP8 UseRECBustosendthedesiredtrackstotheREC
MIDIRouting1page.Formoreinformation,pleasesee buses,andselectREC14(REC1/2,3/4)astheREC
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)onpage 566. Source(02a)sothatthesignalssenttotheRECbuses
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2] canberecorded.
SendstheoutputofthetracktoanFXControlbus Youcanalsoresample(mixdown)thesongplayback
(twochannelstereoFXCtrl1or2). ontotheharddisktocreateastereoWAVEfile,or
sampleexternalaudiosourcesfromtheAudioInputs
intoRAM(theInTrackSamplingfunction).Usethe
RECBussettingtosendthedesiredtracksoraudio
567
Sequencer mode
inputstotheRECbusesforsamplingorresampling,
andsetSourceBus(P0AudioInput/Sampling08c) t 82: Page Menu Commands
toREC1/2or3/4sothatthesesignalscanbesampled. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Off:ThesignalwillnotbesenttoaRECbus.Normally numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
youwillleavethisoff. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
1,2,3,4:Theoutputofthetrackwillbesenttothe
correspondingRECbus.ThePansetting(01b)ofeach 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
trackwillbeignored,andthesignalwillbesentin MemoryStatusonpage 582.
monaural. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
1/2,3/4:Theoutputofthetrackwillbesentinstereoto ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
thecorrespondingpairofRECbuses.Thesignalissent 2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
instereotoRECbuses1/2or3/4accordingtothePan CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
setting(01b)ofeachtrack.
Track 0216 (Track Number) SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
Thesesettingsspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutput 4:DrumKitIFXPatch.Formoreinformation,see
bus,effectcontrolbus,andRECbususedbyMIDI DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 466.
tracks2through16.Thesearethesameasfortrack1. 5:PutEffectSettingToTrack.Formore
SeeTrack01:. information,seePutEffectSettingtoTrackon
page 615.
page 583.
83: Audio Routing1

83PMC
81a
11a
11b
83a
Hereyoucanspecifythebusesfortheoutputsofaudio
tracks116.Youcanalsoadjustthesendamountsto 83a: Audio Routing1
themastereffects.
Track 01 (Tack Number)
Audiotracks116canbeprocessedbytheinsert
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffects,androutedto STEREO
thedesiredbuses,inthesamewayasforMIDItracks
ThisisshownifStereoPairison.
116.
568
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect 83: Audio Routing1
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv. Out Assign) [L/R, IFX112, 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see

18, 1/27/8, Off] MemoryStatusonpage 582.
Thisspecifiesthebusfortheaudiotrack.Thecurrent 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
settingscanalsobeviewedintheRoutingMap.This ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
parametercanalsobeeditedfromtheP8Audio 2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
Routing2page. CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBusSelect 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)onpage 566. SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
Send1 (MFX1) [000127] 4:StereoPair.Formoreinformation,seeStereo
Paironpage 585.
Send2 (MFX2) [000127]
5:PutEffectSettingToTrack.Formore
Foreachaudiotrack,theseparameterssetthesend information,seePutEffectSettingtoTrackon
leveltomastereffects1and2.Thesesettingsarevalid page 615.
whenBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoL/R
orOff.WhenIFX112areselected,thesendlevelsto 6:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
mastereffects1and2aresetbytheSend1andSend2 FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
parametersoftheInsertFXpage,afterthesoundhas 7:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
passedthroughIFX112. information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
IfBusSelectissetto18or1/27/8,thesesettings page 583.
areignored.
TheSend1and2settingyouspecifyhereareused
whenplayingbackorrecordingfromthebeginningof
thesong.Ifyoumodifythesesettingsduring
recording,yourchangeswillberecordedas
automationevent;thesendamountswillchange
accordinglyduringplayback.Youcanalsomodify
thesesettingsduringplayback.HoweverifSend1and
2datahasbeenrecorded,thesettingswillchange
accordingtotherecordeddata.
sectionofthefrontpanel,orfromtheP0Control
SurfacepageoftheLCDscreen.Theproceduregiven
belowdescribeshowtomakethesesettingsfromthe
frontpanel.
switchtoselecteithertracks18or916.
CHANNELSTRIP.
3. UsetheMIXERSELECT1/98/16switchestoselect
thetrackwhosesendlevelsyouwanttoadjust.
4. UseMIXCHANNELSTRIPFXSEND1(knob7)
andFXSEND2(knob8)tocontrolthesend
levels.
Off,thiswillcontrolSend1(MFX1)Send2
(MFX2).IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)is
settoIFX112,thiswillcontrolSend1andSend2
(P8InsertFXpage).

Hereyoucanspecifytheoutputbusandmastereffect
sendamountforeachaudiotrack2through16.These
arethesameasfortrack1.SeeTrack01:.

commandsonpage 142.
569
Sequencer mode
84: Audio Routing2

84PMC
81a
11a
11b
84a
Hereyoucanspecifythebuses,effectcontrolbus,and
RECbusfortheoutputsofaudiotracks116. t 84: Page Menu Commands
84a: Audio Routing2 numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Track 01 (Tack Number) commandsonpage 142.
STEREO MemoryStatusonpage 582.
ThisisshownifStereoPairison. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.Out Assign)
[L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off] 2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
Thisspecifiesthebusfortheaudiotrack.Thecurrent
settingscanalsobeviewedintheRoutingMap.This 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
parametercanalsobeeditedfromtheP8Audio SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
Routing1page.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus 4:StereoPair.Formoreinformation,seeStereo
Select(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)onpage 566. Paironpage 585.
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2] 5:PutEffectSettingToTrack.Formore
SendstheoutputoftheaudiotracktoanFXControl information,seePutEffectSettingtoTrackon
bus(twochannelstereoFXCtrl1or2). page 615.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuson 6:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
page 567.Forexamples,seeFXControlBuseson FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
page 790. 7:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
REC Bus [Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1/2, 3/4] page 583.
Thesesettingssendtheoutputoftheaudiotracktothe
RECbuses(fourmonochannels:1,2,3,4).Formore
information,pleaseseeRECBus(AllOSCsto)on
page 567.

Hereyoucanspecifytheoutputbus,effectcontrolbus,
andRECbusforaudiotracks2through16.Theseare
thesameasfortrack1.SeeTrack01:.
570
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect 85: Insert FX
85: Insert FX
85b 85PMC
11b
85a
transmitthesesettingsviaMIDI.Thisdatawillbe
85a: IFX transmittedontheMIDIchannelsspecifiedinthe
Hereyoucanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1 IFX112pages(87).
through12,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthe
postIFXmixersettings.Forinserteffects,thedirect IFX1
sound(Dry)isalwaysstereoinandout.The
IFX1 [000185]
dependsontheeffecttype.Fordescriptionsofthe IFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
individualeffects,pleaseseeEffectGuide,beginning
onpage 787. Chain to [IFX2IFX12]
ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinProgram Chain [Off, On]
mode.Fordetails,see85b:IFXonpage 131.
However,unlikeinProgrammode,inserteffect Pan(CC#8) (Post IFX PanCC#8) [L000C064R127]
dynamicmodulation(Dmod)andthepostIFXPan Bus Sel. (Bus Select) [L/R, 18, 1/27/8, Off]
(CC#8),Send1,andSend2arecontrolledontheMIDI
channelspecifiedbyCh(87a).Thecontrolchanges Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2]
usedarethesameasinProgrammode.
REC Bus [Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1/2, 3/4]
Thepan(CC#8),send1and2settingsyoumakehere
willbeusedwhenthesongisplayedorrecordedfrom Send1 [000127]
thebeginning.Ifyouchangethesettingswhile
recordingaMIDItrack,thechangeswillberecordedas Send2 [000127]
partofthemusicaldata,andthesettingswillchange Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1
whenthedataisplayedback.Youcanalsochange and2.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSend1
thesesettingsduringplayback.Howeverifpan(CC#8), (MFX1)onpage 450.
send1,or2datahasbeenrecorded,thesettingswill
changeaccordingly. IFX212
IfStatus(21a)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#8,CC#93, Theseparametersspecifythetypeofeachinserteffect,
andCC#91canbereceivedtocontrolthepan itson/offstatus,chaining,andpostIFXmixersettings.
followingtheinserteffect,send1,orsend2 WiththeexceptionofChaintoandChain,the
respectively,andchangetheirsettings.Whenyou parametersarethesameasforIFX1.Formore
switchsongsorreturntothebeginningofthesong, information,pleaseseeIFX1onpage 131.
trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2will
571
Sequencer mode

IFX4: Chain to [IFX5IFX12] numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
IFX5: Chain to [IFX6IFX12] commandsonpage 142.
IFX6: Chain to [IFX7IFX12] 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see

IFX7: Chain to [IFX8IFX12] 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
IFX9: Chain to [IFX10IFX12] CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
IFX10: Chain to [IFX11IFX12] 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
IFXSlotonpage 615.
85b: Effect/EXi Fixed Resource Meter 5:CutIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeCutIFX
Slotonpage 615.
FX
EXi FIXED seeCleanUpIFXRoutingsonpage 615.
FREE FOR VOICES 7:PutEffectSettingToTrack.Formore

information,seePutEffectSettingtoTrackon
Thenumberofvoicesyoucanplayisaffectedbyhow page 615.
effectsandEXiarebeingused.Thismetershowsthe
resourceallocationasanapproximatepercentage(%) 8:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
ofthetotalprocessingpower. FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
Formoreinformation,seeCX3&STR1:Limitations 9:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
onEXifixedresourcesonpage 382,andAbout information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
effectsresourcesonpage 787. page 583.
86: Track View

85b 86PMC
11b
86a
routing.
86a: Track View
Hereyoucanviewthetrackoutputandinserteffect
572
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect 86: Track View
Used in Tracks 4:InsertIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeInsert

Theupperandlowerrowsofboxeswitheightboxesin IFXSlotonpage 615.
eachrowindicatethetimbrethatisbeingsenttothe 5:CutIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeCutIFX
correspondinginserteffect. Slotonpage 615.
TheeightupperboxescorrespondtoMIDItracks 6:CleanUpIFXRoutings.Formoreinformation,
18,andtheeightlowerboxescorrespondtoMIDI seeCleanUpIFXRoutingsonpage 615.
tracks916.) 7:PutEffectSettingToTrack.Formore
Theeightupperboxescorrespondtoaudiotracks information,seePutEffectSettingtoTrackon
18,andtheeightlowerboxescorrespondtoaudio page 615.
tracks916.) 8:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
Track Select [Timbre 01Timbre 16] FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
HereyoucanselecttheMIDItracks116andaudio 9:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
tracks116thatwillbeshownintheTrackView information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
screen. page 583.
Thescreenshowstheinserteffect(s)usedbythe
selectedtrack.
Slot [IFX1IFX12]
Thisindicatestheslotnumber,effecttype,effecton/off
status,andcontrolchannelforthechainedinsert
effects.
TypeandOn/Offstatusoftheselectedeffectslot.
Thisisalsotheeffectslotthatwillbeaffectedbythe
pagemenucommandsInsertIFXSlotandCutIFX
Slot.
WhenyoumovefromthispagetotheP8IFX112
page,theIFXyouselectedherewillbeselected.
Forexample,ifyouselectTrack03,onlytheinsert
effectsusedbytrack3willbeshown.
OUTPUTindicatestheBusSelectsettingsthatfollow
theinserteffect.Thistellsyoutheoutputdestinationto
whichtheaudiosignalwillbesent.
86b: Selected
(86a:TrackView,above)

commandsonpage 142.
573
Sequencer mode
87: IFX 112

87PMC
87a
87b
Thispageletsyoueditthedetailedparametersofthe Ch (Control Channel) [Ch0116, All Routed]

throughIFX12.
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheInsertFXor ThisparameterspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillbe
TrackViewpages.Formoreinformation,see85: usedtocontroleffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod),
InsertFXonpage 571and86:TrackViewon panfollowingtheinserteffect(CC#8),Send1,and
page 572. Send2.
ThechannelnumberoftheMIDItrackroutedthrough
thisIFXwillbefollowedbya*displayedattheright
Effects Modulation: Dmod ofCh0116.IftwoortrackswithdifferentMIDI
channelsettingsareroutedthroughthesameIFX,this
Mosteffectshaveoneormoreparameterswhichcan parameterspecifieswhichofthesechannelswillbe
bemodulatedinrealtime.IntheOASYS,thisiscalled usedtocontroltheeffect.
Note:IfyouwanttocontrolanIFXtowhichanaudio
ForacompletelistofDmodsources,seeDynamic trackisrouted,useaMIDItrackwhosechannel
ModulationSourceListonpage 1030. matchestheCh(ControlChannel)oftheeffectyou
YoucanusedifferentMIDIchannelstocontrol wanttocontrol.
Dmodforeacheffect,ifdesired,asselectedbythe AllRouted:ThechannelofanyMIDItrackrouted
Ch(ControlChannel)parameter. throughthiseffectcanbeusedtocontroltheeffect.
(Channelsofeachroutedtrackwillbeindicatedby
87a: IFX1 *.)
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersoftheinsert Drum Kits and the MIDI Control Channel

effectyouselectedintheP8InsertFXpage.Usethe IfaTimbreisusingaDrumKit,andtheTimbresBus
tabsatlefttoselectIFX1throughIFX12. Select(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)DKit(81b)isenabled,
thisaffectstheMIDIControlChannelaswell.Inthis
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On] case,theTimbresMIDIchannelwillbeusedtocontrol
anyeffectwhoseChissettoAllRouted,regardlessof
theBusSelect(Global53b)settingsorthesettingsof
theDrumKitIFXPatchpagemenucommand.
Turnstheinserteffecton/off.Thisislinkedwiththe
on/offsettingintheP8InsertFXpage. P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, ------]
574
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect 87: IFX 112
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe 3:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16 SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re 4:WriteFXPreset.Formoreinformation,see
writablefactorypresets. WriteFXPresetonpage 158.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program, 5:PutEffectSettingToTrack.Formore
Combi,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsofpresets information,seePutEffectSettingtoTrackon
canbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk. page 615.
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically 6:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
storedwiththeSongyoudontneedtostorethemas FF/REWSpeedonpage 583.
anEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuse
yourfavoritesettings. 7:SetLocation(forLocateKey.)Formore
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile page 583.
workingonaparticularSong,andthenlaterusethe
sameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram,Combi,or
Song.
ownsettings.
writtenaprogram,orselectedanewSong.Selecting
thissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Songssavetheeffectsparametersettings,but
Preset.IfyouselectanEffectPreset,savetheSongto
disk,andthenreloadtheSong,theEffectPreset
settingwillrevertto.
Formoredetails,seeUsingEffectPresetson
page 135.
IFX1 Parameters
effectyouchoseintheP8InsertFXpage.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeInsertEffects
(IFX1IFX12)onpage 794.
87b: IFX212
effectsselectedintheInsertFXpage.
TheparametersforIFX2throughIFX12arethesameas
forIFX1.Formoreinformation,pleasesee87a:IFX1
onpage 574.

commandsonpage 142.
575
Sequencer mode
89: Common FX LFO

89PMC
11b
89a
89b
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize Sync (Reset) [Off, On]

LFObasedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchas
phasers,flangers,filters,andsoon. Source (Dmod Source) [List of Dmod Sources]
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI Frequency [0.0220.00 (Hz)]
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividual
effectstillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveform MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On]
andphase.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhether
touseoneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousethe Base Note [r , x 3 , x , e 3 , e , q 3 , q , h 3 , h , w]
individualeffectsfrequency,sync,and/orresetsettings
instead.ThisisdoneviatheeffectsLFOType Times [0132]
parameter;selectIndividualtousetheeffectssettings, TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
orCommon1or2tousetheCommonLFOs. Formoreinformation,pleasesee89a:CommonFX
LFO1onpage 136.
89a: Common FX LFO1
89b: Common FX LFO2
Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01Ch16, Gch]
TheseparametersarethesameasforCommonFX
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
LFO1.Formoreinformation,pleasesee89a:
modulation(Dmod)forCommonLFO1and2.
CommonFXLFO1,above.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a)willbe
usedforcontrol.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
commandsonpage 142.
576
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect 89: Common FX LFO
page 615.
page 583.
577
Sequencer mode
Sequencer P9: Master/Total Effect

Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthemastereffectsand
totaleffects.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffect
Guideonpage 787.
91: Routing
85b 91PMC
11b
91a
91c
91b
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsand
totaleffects,andturnthemon/off.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotal
effectsareinsertedintotheL/Rbus.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91:Routingon
page 138.
578
Sequencer P9: Master/Total Effect 91: Routing
91a: MFX1, 2 information,seeSetLocation(forLocateKey)on
page 583.
MFX1:
MFX1 [000185]
Return 1 [000127]
MFX2:
MFX2 [000185]
Return 2 [000127]
Chain:
Chain Direction [MFX1MFX2, MFX2MFX1]
Chain Level [000127]
91b: TFX1, 2
TFX1:
TFX1 [000185]
TFX2:
TFX2 [000185]
91c: Master Volume


commandsonpage 142.
page 615.
579
Sequencer mode
92: MFX1
92PMC
92a
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyou P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, ------]

selectedforMFX1intheP9Routingpage. Thisletsyouselectpresetsforthecurrenteffect.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeP(EffectPreset)on
Effects Modulation: Dmod page 574.
Mosteffectshaveoneormoreparameterswhichcan MFX1 Parameters

bemodulatedinrealtime.IntheOASYS,thisiscalled Hereyoucansettheeffectparametersoftheeffectyou
DynamicModulation,orDmodforshort. choseintheP9Routingpage.
ForacompletelistofDmodsources,seeDynamic Fordetailsontheindividualeffects,pleaseseethe
ModulationSourceListonpage 1030. EffectGuideonpage 787.
YoucanusedifferentMIDIchannelstocontrol
Dmodforeacheffect,ifdesired,asselectedbythe
Ch(ControlChannel)parameter.
92a: MFX1 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
MFX1 On/Off [Off, On] commandsonpage 142.
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Thisislinkedwiththe 0:MemoryStatus.Formoreinformation,see
on/offsettingintheP9Master/TotalEffectRouting MemoryStatusonpage 582.
page. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Ch (Control Channel) [Ch0116, G ch]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic SwapMFX/TFXonpage 158.
modulation(Dmod)forthemastereffect. 4:WriteFXPreset.Formoreinformation,see
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeused WriteFXPresetonpage 158.
forcontrol. 5:PutEffectSettingToTrack.Formore
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a)willbe information,seePutEffectSettingtoTrackon
usedforcontrol.NormallyyouwillusetheGch page 615.
setting. 6:FF/REWSpeed.Formoreinformation,see
580
Sequencer P9: Master/Total Effect 93: MFX2
page 583.
93: MFX2
94: TFX1
95: TFX2
effectstypes,usetheP9Routingpage.
TheparametersofMFX2,TFX1,andTFX2arethesame
asforMFX1.Formoreinformation,pleasesee92:
MFX1onpage 580.
581
Sequencer mode
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands
Memory Status
IfyouselectMemoryStatus,theremainingamount
ofsequencermemorywillbedisplayed.
2. InFrom,specifythecopysourcesongnumber.
3. Selectthedatathatyouwishtocopy.
All:willcopyallsettingdataandmusicaldata
(trackeventsandaudioevents,etc.).
Exclusive Solo WithoutTrack/PatternEvents:willcopyonlythe
settingdataofsongs,exceptforPlayLoopand
ThisspecifieshowtheSolofunctionwilloperate.Each RPPRdata.
timeyouselectExclusiveSolo,thesettingwill
4. ToexecutetheCopySongoperation,presstheOK
alternatebetweenmultiplesoloandexclusivesolo.For
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
details,seeExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
BeawarethatifyouexecuteAll,allsettingdata
andmusicaldataofthecurrentlyselectedsongwill
Rename Song beerasedandrewrittenbythedatafromthecopy
sourcesong.
Hereyoucanrenametheselectedsong.Youcanentera
IfyouexecuteWithoutTrack/PatternEvents,song
nameofupto24characters.Formoreinformation,see
settingdataotherthanPlayLoopandRPPRwillbe
Editingnamesonpage 172oftheOperationGuide.
rewritten.
Load Template Song

Thiscommandloadsatemplatesongasasong.
Thebuiltinsequencercontainseighteendifferent
presettemplatesongs(P0017)thatcontainpreset
settingsforprogramsandeffectsappropriatefor
Delete Song variousmusicalstyles.Youarealsofreetocreateyour
ownfavoritesettingsforprograms,trackparameters,
Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselectedsong. andeffects,andsavethemasoneofsixteenuser
1. SelectDeleteSongtoopenthedialogbox. templatesongs(U0015)(SeeSaveTemplateSong).
1. SelectLoadTemplateSongtoopenthedialog
box.
2. IfyouwishtoexecutetheDeleteSongcommand,
button.
Whenyouexecute,theperformancedataand
settingsofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillbe 2. InFrom,specifythetemplatesongthatyou
deleted. wishtoload.
WAVEfilesandtheirregionswillnotbedeleted.If 3. IfyoucheckCopyPatterntoTracktoo?,the
youwanttodeletethisdata,usetheDeleteUnused CopyPatternToTrackdialogboxwillappear
WAVFiles(Disku)menucommand. automaticallyafterLoadTemplateSonghas
beenexecuted.
Ifyouexecutewithoutcheckingthis,onlythe
Copy From Song templatesongyouspecifiedinstep2willbeloaded.
Thiscommandcopiesallofthesettingdataand 4. Toloadthetemplatesong,presstheOKbutton.To
musicaldatafromthespecifiedsongtothecurrently cancelwithoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
selectedsong. Whenyouexecute,songsettingsotherthanPlay
1. SelectCopyFromSongtoopenthedialogbox. LoopandRPPRwillbecopied.
582
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Save Template Song
Ifinstep3youcheckedCopyPatterntoTrack
too?andpressedtheOKbutton,theCopyPattern FF/REW Speed
ToMIDITrackdialogboxwillappear. Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedatwhichfastforward
orrewindwilloccurwhenyoupresstheFFswitchor
REWswitch.
Audiotrackswillnotproducesoundduringfast
forwardorrewind.
1. SelectFF/REWSpeedtoopenthedialogbox.
Thisdialogboxisthesameasinthepagemenu
commandCopyToMIDITrack.
5. InPattern,selectthepatternthatyouwishtocopy.
2. InSpeed,specifythespeed(relativetothe
InToTrack,selectthecopydestinationtrack. playbacktempo)atwhichfastforwardand
InMeasure,specifythebeginningmeasureofthe rewindwilloccur.
copydestination. Thissettingisinmultiplesoftheplaybacktempo.A
Note:Track1ofeachpresettemplatesongscontains settingof1isthesamespeedastheplaybacktempo.
adrumcategoryprogram.(Inpresettemplatesongs Settingsof24respectivelycorrespondtodouble,
P02,P04,P08,andP15drumcategoryprogramsare triple,orquadruplespeedoftheplaybacktempo.
specifiedformultipletracks.) Note:Fastforwardandrewindspeedsmaybe
Thenamesofthe156presetpatternsindicatethe slowerinareaswheretheperformancedatais
musicalgenreandpartoftheoptimaldrum dense.
categoryprogram. 3. IfIgnoreTempoischecked,theplaybacktempo
Byloadingthedrumtrackforthesepresettemplate andnotelengthwillbeignored,andfastforward
songsandthecorrespondingpresetpatterns,you andrewindwillbeperformedasfastaspossible.
canefficientlysetupadrumtrackthatissuitedto Thespeedoffastforwardandrewindwilldiffer
eachpresettemplatesong. betweensectionswheretheplaybackdataisdense
6. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton. andsectionswhereitissparse.
Whenyouexecute,Measurewillcountup Ifthisitemisunchecked,fastforwardandrewind
automatically.Youmaythencopypatternsaswell. willbeperformedatthespeedyouspecifyfor
Toexitthecommand,presstheExitbutton. Speed.
Fordetailsonhowtocopypresetpatternstoasong 4. Toexecutethesettings,presstheOKbutton.To
alongwiththepresettemplatesong,seeTemplate cancel,presstheCancelbutton.
songsonpage 91oftheOperationGuide.
Set Location (for Locate Key)

Save Template Song ThissetstheSequencerslocatepoint.Whenyoupress
Thiscommandsavestheprogramselections,track theLOCATEswitch,theSongwillmovetothe
parameters,andeffectsettingsetc.ofthecurrentsong measure,beat,andtickspecifiedhere.
asausertemplatesongU0015. 1. SelectSetLocationtoopenthedialogbox.
1. SelectSaveTemplateSongtoopenthedialog
box.
2. SpecifythelocationtowhichtheSongwillmove
whenyoupresstheLOCATEswitch.
2. InTo,specifytheusertemplatesong(U0015)in Fromtheleft,thevaluesareMeasure(001999),Beat
whichthedatawillbesaved. (0116),andTick(000191).
3. Tosavethetemplatesong,presstheOKbutton.To Ifyousetthisto001:01.000,pressingLOCATE
cancel,presstheCancelbutton. bringsyoubacktothebeginningofthesong.
Beawarethatwhenyouexecutethiscommand,all 3. Toexecutethesettings,presstheOKbutton.To
settingdataofthesavedestinationUserTemplate cancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Songwillbeerasedandrewrittenwiththecurrent Note:Whenthisdialogboxisnotopen,youcanhold
settings. downtheENTERswitchandpresstheLOCATE
switchtosetthecurrentlocationasthelocatepoint.
583
Sequencer mode
2. InCombination,selectthecopysource
GM Initialize destination.
ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystemOnmessageto 3. UsetheIFXAll,IFXAllused,MFXsandTFXs
theSequencermode,resettingallMIDItrackstothe checkboxestospecifywhetheryouwanttheeffect
GMsettings(SeeGMInitializeListonpage 584). settingsofthecombinationtobecopiedaswell.
1. SelectGMInitializetoopenthedialogbox. IFXAll:Allinserteffectsettingsofthecopysource
combination(thecontentsoftheInsertFXpageand
theIFX112effectparameters)willbecopied.
IFXAllused:Onlytheinserteffectsthatareused
bythecopysourcecombinationwillbecopied.
Whencopied,theywillbepackedintounusedslots
(000:NoEffect,unlesswithinachain).
2. Toexecutethesettings,presstheOKbutton.To Note:Copysourceinserteffectsthataresetto000:
cancel,presstheCancelbutton. NoEffectwillnotbecopied.Howeverif000:No
Effectisincludedwithinachain,itwillbecopied.
InSequencermode,whenaGMSystemOn
Ifanentirechaininthecopydestinationconsistsof
messageisreceivedfromanexternaldevice,orifa
000:NoEffect,itwillbeusedasacopydestination.
GMSystemOnmessageisrecordedinthesequence
data,theOASYSwillberesettosettingsappropriate MFXs:Allmastereffectsettingsofthecopysource
forGMjustasifyouhadexecutedthiscommand. combinationwillbecopied.
However,inthesecases,thevariousP9: TFXs:Alltotaleffectsettingsofthecopysource
Master/TotalEffectparameterswillnotbereset. combinationwillbecopied.
4. SpecifythedesiredMultiRECStandbysetting.
Copy from Combination On:TheStatuswillautomaticallybesettoRECfor
MIDItrackscorrespondingtovalidtimbresinthe
Thiscommandcopiestheparametersofthespecified copysourcecombination.Inaddition,MultiREC
combinationtothesettingdataofthecurrently (01a)willautomaticallybeturnedon,and
selectedsong. RecordingSetup(05a)willbesettoOverwrite.
Note:Onlythetimbresusedbythecombinationwillbe 5. ToexecutetheCopyoperation,presstheOK
copied.TimbresinthecombinationwhoseStatusisOff button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
willnotbecopied.IfanytimbresaresettoMute,the
correspondingtracksofthesongwillbesettoaStatus
ofOff.Howeverifnoneofthetimbresusedinthe Copy From Program
combinationhaveaMIDIchannelsettingofGch,a
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromtheprogramyou
MIDItrackwhoseMIDIchannelisGchwill
specifytothecurrentlyselectedsong.
automaticallybespecified,andthattrackwillbe
selectedinTrackSelect.Afterthecopyisexecuted,you ThisisthesamefunctionasinCombinationmode;for
willimmediatelybeabletoplayinthesamestateas details,seeCopyFromProgramonpage 461.
thatcombination. ThiscommandinSequencermodediffersfromits
1. SelectCopyfromCombinationtoopenthe behaviorinCombinationmodeinthatthechannels
dialogbox. assignedtothetracksofthesongwillbepreserved
regardlessofthewithKARMAsettingofthecopy
destinationtracksMIDIChannel.(Seestep4.)
GMInitializeList
MIDI Track 19, 11

Page Parameter Track 10
16
Program Select G001 g(d)001
Play/Mute, Solo - -
P0 MIDI Prog/Mixer
Pan C064 C064
Volume 100 100
584
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Stereo Pair
MIDI Track 19, 11

Page Parameter Track 10
16
Auto Load Prog EQ On On
Bypass On On
Input Trim 99 99
P1 MIDI Track EQ High Gain +00.0 +00.0
Mid Frequency 3.20k 3.20k
Mid Gain +00.0 +00.0
High Gain +00.0 +00.0
Status - -
MIDI Channel - -
MIDI
Bank Select MSB/LSB 000 000
Timbre Priority Off Off
Force OSC Mode - -
OSC OSC Select - -
Portamento Off Off
Transpose +00 +00
P2 Detune +0000 +0000
Pitch
Bend Range PRG PRG
Use Programs Scale - -
Mode Time Time
Delay
Time 0000 0000
WS Key Sync PRG PRG
WS Swing PRG PRG
WSEQ/KARMA
WS Quantize Trigger PRG PRG
KARMA Track On/Off Nrm Nrm
MIDI Filter On On
P3 Keyboard Zones C1G9 (Slope=000) C1G9
Vel Zone 001127 (Slope=000) 001127
P7 KARMA All parameters -
IFX/Indiv.Out Assign L/R L/R
MIDI Routing1 Send1 0 0
Send2 40 40
FX Control Bus Off Off
MIDI Routing2
REC Bus Off Off
IFX112 -
P8
Pan(CC#8) -
REC Bus -
Insert FX
FX Control Bus -
Send1/2 -
Other parameter -
Common LFO All parameters -
MFX1 Stereo Chorus
MFX2 Reverb Smooth Hall
Chain Off
Routing Chain Direction 1->2
Level 127
P9
Return1 127
Return2 50
Other MFX parameters -
TFX1/2 -
Master Level -
belinkedwiththesamevalues.
Stereo Pair
Volume,Pan,Send1,Send2,EQ(Bypass,InputTrim,
Thisletsyouassignadjacentaudiotracksasastereo LowGain,MidCutoff,MidGain,HighGain),
pair.Thefollowingparametersofpairedchannelswill Play/Rec/Mute
585
Sequencer mode
Inaddition,youcanusetheP4:TrackEditpagemenu
commandstoeditpairedtrackssimultaneously.
Pairedchannelsarecontrolledbytheodd
numberedknoborslider.Movingtheeven
numberedknoborsliderwillnotcontrolthe
channels.
1. SelectStereoPairtoopenthedialogbox.
2. InSampleNo.,chooseasamplenumberwhere
thesamplingwillbeperformed.
Bydefault,thiswillbethelowestnumberedofthe
vacantsamplenumbers.Ifyouselect:No
Assignorasamplenumberthatalreadycontains
2. UseAudioTrack1&2,3&4,5&6,7&8, data,thesamplewillautomaticallybesampledinto
9&10,11&12,13&14,and15&16tospecify thelowestnumberedvacantsamplenumber.Ifyou
theaudiotracksthatyouwanttopair. aresamplinginstereo,SampleNo.(L)and
Uncheckaudiotracksthatyouwanttounpair. SampleNo.(R)willbecreated.
3. SpecifythePanMode. 3. SetAuto+12dBOn.
Individual:Thepanofthetwochannelswill On(checked):+12dB(Sampling21d)will
operateindependently. automaticallybeturnedonforsamplesyourecord.
Samplesforwhich+12dBisonwillplayback
Balance:Thepanofthetwochannelswilloperateas
approximately+12dBlouderthanifthissetting
abalancecontrol.
wereoff.
How tracks 1 and 2 behave when paired WhenyouresampleaperformanceinProgram,
Combination,orSequencermodes,youshould
Individual Balance
normallysetRecordingLeveltoabout+0.0(dB)so
thattherecordinglevelwillbeashighaspossible
withoutclipping.Whenyouresample,thesound
willberecordedattheoptimumlevelforsampled
data,buttheplaybacklevelatplaybackwillnotbe
asloudasitwasduringtheresamplingprocess(if
Pan 1 and 2 can be set If you set pan knob 1 to L000, +12dB(Sampling21d)isoff).Insuchcases,you
separately. pan knob 2 will be set to R127. canchecktheAuto+12dBOncheckboxwhenyou
Pan knob 2 has no effect. resample,sothat+12dBwillautomaticallybeon,
4. Toapplythechangesyoumade,presstheOK makingthesampleplaybackatthesamelevelas
button.Ifyoudecidetocancel,presstheCancel whenitwasresampled.
button. Inthesemodes,thepowerondefaultsettingsare
RecordingLevelat+0.0(dB)andAuto+12dBOn.If
youresampleaperformanceintherespectivemode
Optimize RAM withthesesettings,thesamplewillplaybackatthe
samelevelatwhichitwasresampled.
ThiscommandoptimizestheRAMmemory.Whenyou
executethiscommand,unusedmemoryareaswillbe Ifyouwanttomonitoryourperformancein
reorganized,allowingthefullamountofremainingto Program,Combination,orSequencermode,while
beused.Formoreinformation,seeOptimizeRAM samplingonlytheexternalaudiosignalfrom
onpage 143. AUDIOINPUTetc.,werecommendthatyouset
RecordingLeveltoabout+0.0(dB)andturnoff
Auto+12dBOnwhenyouresample.
Select Sample No. TheAuto+12dBOnsettingismadeindependently
forProgram,Combination,Sequencer,and
Thiscommandspecifiesthesamplenumberintowhich
Samplingmodes.
sampleswillbewritten.Youcanalsospecifywhether
thesamplewillbeautomaticallyconvertedintoa 4. Converttoletsyouspecifywhetherthesample
programaftersampling. willautomaticallybeconvertedtoaprogramafter
sampling.Youcanalsospecifywhetheranote
Note:SelectSampleNo.canbeselectedifyouhave eventwillbecreatedatthetimeofsampling.
chosenRAMforSaveto.
IftheProgramcheckboxischecked,thesample
1. ChooseSelectSampleNo.toopenthedialogbox. willautomaticallybeconvertedtoaprogram.
586
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Select Directory
Attheright,useProgramandMStospecifythe Thesettingsareautomaticallymadeforthemost
programnumberandmultisamplenumberofthe typicalapplications.Afterexecutingtheautosetup
programthatwillbecreated. operation,youcanfurtheradjustanyofthe
OriginalKey(Sampling01b)specifiesthelocation parametersasdescribedintheparagraphsforeach
oftheoriginalkey.Themultisamplewillbecreated item.
withanIndex(Sampling01d)havingthiskeyasits 1. SelectAutoHDR/SamplingSetuptoopenthe
TopKey(Sampling01d).OriginalKeywill dialogbox.
incrementaftersampling,sothatthenextsample
willbeassignedtothenexthigherkey.
IfyouchecktheSeq.Eventcheckbox,anoteevent
willautomaticallybecreatedinthetrackspecified
byTrack.Noteonwilloccuratthelocationatwhich
samplingbegan,andnoteoffwilloccuratthe
locationatwhichsamplingended.Thenoteevent
willbecreatedasinRecordingSetupOverdub
mode(i.e.,itwillbeaddedwithouterasingexisting
events).Ifyouaresamplingrepeatedlywithout
stoppingthesongplayback,theevent(s)willbe
automaticallycreatedwhenyoustopsong
playback.TheProgramSelect(01b)oftheTrack
youcreatedwillautomaticallywillautomatically
changetotheprogramyouspecifiedinProgram.
Seq.EventisavailableonlyifProgramhasbeen
checked.
IfyousamplewithSeq.EventcheckedinConvert
to,themultisampleandsampleswillbetheobject
oftheComparefunction.Ifyouwantredo
sampling,youcanpresstheCOMPAREswitchto
returnthemultisampleandsamplestothestate
priortosampling,andunneededsampleswillnot
remain.Theprogramwillnotbeaffectedbythe 2. Usetheradiobuttonstoselectthetypeofsettings
Compareoperation,andwillnotreturntoitsprior youwanttobemadeautomatically.
state.
Initialize:Setparametersrelatedtoharddisk
5. PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettingsyou recordingandsamplingtotheirdefaultvalues.
made,orpresstheCancelbuttontodiscardany
settingsyoumadeafteraccessingthedialogbox. HDR(AudioTrackRecording):Makethenecessary
settingsforrecordingexternalaudiosignalssuchas
guitarorvocalfromtheaudioinputstoaudio
Select Directory tracks.
BounceAudioTrack:Makethenecessarysettings
Thiscommandletsyouspecifythesavedestination forbouncerecordingaudiotracks.
disk,directory,andfilenamefortheWAVEfilethatwill
becreatedbyrecordingorsampling. 2chMixtoDisk:Makesettingsforresamplinga
completedsonginordertocreateatwochannel
YoucanalsousethisSelectDirectorycommandto stereoWAVEfileontheharddisk.(Usethisifyou
listentoaudiofromaWAVEfilethatwassavedto wanttocreateaWAVEfileandthenusetheDisk
disk. modeMakeAudioCDpagetoburnthefiletoan
TheSelectDirectorycommandisavailablewhen audioCDontheinternalCDR/RWdrive.)
SavetoissettoDISK. ResampleSEQPlay:Makesettingssothatyoucan
Fordetails,seeSelectDirectoryonpage 144. resampleyourkeyboardplayinginSequencer
mode.
InTrackSampling:Makesettingstosampleonly
Auto HDR/Sampling Setup anexternalaudiosignalusingtheInTrack
Samplingfunction.
Thiscommandautomaticallymakestheappropriate
twochannelmixsettingsetc.forharddiskrecording, 3. Thesettingsfortherestoftheprocedurewill
audiotrackbouncing,sampling/resampling(intrack dependonwhatyouselectedinstep2.(Fordetails,
sampling,etc.),orcreatinganaudioCD. refertotheexplanationsbelow.)
Whenyouexecutethisoperation,therelevant If you selected Initialize:
parameterswillbesetautomatically.Youcannotuse
1. RefertoAutoHDR/SamplingSetupsteps1and2,
theCOMPAREswitchtoreverttothepriorsettings.
andselectInitialize.
2. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.If
youdecidenottoexecute,presstheCancelbutton.
587
Sequencer mode
Formoreinformation,seeAutoHDR/Sampling Note:Youcanalsorecordtheinputsourcetoan
Setup:Automaticallysetparametersandtheir audiotrackwithoutapplyinganinserteffect,and
valuesonpage 592. thensendtheoutputoftheaudiotrackthroughan
inserteffect.MaketheappropriateBusSelect
If you selected HDR (Audio Track Recording): settingintheP8AudioRouting1pageforthe
1. RefertoAutoHDR/SamplingSetupsteps1and2, audiotrackyourecorded.
andselectHDR(AudioTrackRecording).Then 4. UseRecordingTracktospecifythetrack(s)that
presstheOKbuttontoopenthedialogbox. willberecorded.
IfSourceAudioissettoAudioInput1(Mono)
AudioInput4(Mono),S/P DIFL(Mono),orR
(Mono),choosefromAudioTrack116.
IfSourceAudioissettoAudioInput1/2(Stereo),
AudioInput3/4(Stereo),orS/P DIFL/R(Stereo),
choosefromAudioTracks1&215&16.Whenyou
executethecommand,theStereoPairsettingwill
bemadeautomaticallysothatyoucanrecordin
stereo.
Formoreinformation,seeAutoHDR/Sampling
Setup:Automaticallysetparametersandtheir
valuesonpage 592.
Recording to the audio track(s) after executing the
command
1. Connectyourinstrumentetc.totheAUDIO
INPUTjackyouselectedinSourceAudio,and
useAudioTrackRecordingLeveltoadjustthe
recordinglevel.
2. SetLocationtothelocationthatyouwantto
record.
2. InSourceAudio,selecttheexternalaudioinput
3. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchand
source.
thentheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
Iftheexternalaudioinputsourceismonaural: (Recordingwillbegin.)
AudioInput1(Mono)4(Mono):Selectsthe 4. Playthemusicalinstrumentetc.thatisconnected
analogaudiosignalfromamic,musicalinstrument totheAUDIOINPUTjack(s)youselectedfor
orotherdeviceconnectedtotheAUDIOINPUT14 SourceAudio.
jacks.
5. Whenyouhavefinishedperforming,pressthe
S/P DIFL(Mono),R(Mono):Selectsthedigital SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.(Recording
audiosignalfromaninstrumentorDATdecketc. willstop.)
connectedtotheS/P DIFjack.
Check the audio track(s) that you recorded
Iftheexternalaudioinputsourceisstereo:
Tolistentotheaudiotrackyourecorded,pressthe
AudioInput1/2(Stereo)3/4(Stereo):Selectsthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplaybackthe
stereoanalogaudiosignalfromamusical track.
instrumentorotherdeviceconnectedtotheAUDIO
INPUT1/2and3/4jacks. If you selected Bounce Audio Track:
S/P DIFL/R(Stereo):Selectsthestereodigitalaudio 1. RefertoAutoHDR/SamplingSetupsteps1and2,
signalfromaninstrumentorDATdecketc. andselectBounceAudioTrack.ThenpresstheOK
connectedtotheS/P DIFINjack. buttontoopenthedialogbox.
IfSourceAudioissettoS/P DIF,changethe
SystemClocksetting(Global01d).
3. Specifywhetheryouwanttoapplyaninserteffect
totheinputsource(i.e.,torecordtheprocessed
signal).Choosetheinserteffectyouwanttouse.If
youdontwanttouseaneffect,turnthisOff.)
Note:Ifyoureusingmorethanoneinserteffect,
makesettingsfortheInsertFXpageChain
parametersafteryouexecuteAutoHDR/Sampling
Setup.Forthelastinserteffectinthechain,setthe
RECBusto1(foramonosource)or1/2(forastereo
source).(Atthistime,youwillnormallysetBus
SelecttoOffbutyoudonthavetodoso.)
588
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Auto HDR/Sampling Setup
Ifyoudontchangethesettingsafterexecutingthe
command,theeffectsettingswillbeignored,and
theaudiofromtheaudiotrackwillbebounced
directly.EvenifIFX1isbeingappliedtotheoutput
ofAudioTrack1and2asshownbelow,IFX1will
notbeappliedtothesoundthatisrecordedonthe
bouncedestinationaudiotracks.
AudioTrack01:SideGuitarIFX1:GuitarAmp
AudioTrack02:SideGuitarIFX1:GuitarAmp
AudioTrack03=AudioTrack01+AudioTrack02
Ifyouwanttoapplyaneffecttotheoutputofaudio
track03,usetheaudiotrack03BusSelecttosend
theoutputtoIFX1.
An example of changing the settings
Ifyouwanttobounceaudiothatisprocessedbyan
effect,youcandothisbychangingtheRECBusor
RECSourcesettings.
Ifyouwanttobouncetheaudiofromtheaudio
trackafterithasbeenprocessedbytheinserteffect
andmaster/totaleffects,sendtheposteffectaudio
totheRECBus,andsetthebouncedestination
audiotracksRECSourcetoRECBus.
AudioTrack01IFX1RECBus1
2. UseModetospecifywhetheryouwillbouncein
AudioTrack02IFX1RECBus1
monoorinstereo.
AudioTrack03:RECSourceREC1
Mono:Settingswillbemadesothetrack(s)you Whenyoubounce,theaudioprocessedbyIFX1will
selectedinFromcanbebouncedinmonotoa berecordedonaudiotrack03.
singleaudiotrack.
Ifyouwanttobounceaudioafteritisprocessedby
Stereo:Settingswillbemadesothatthetrack(s)you atotaleffect,setthebouncedestinationaudio
selectedinFromcanbebouncedinstereototwo tracksRECSourcetoL/R,andmakesettingsso
audiotracks. thattheposteffectsoundissenttothebounce
3. UseFromtoselectthebouncedestination destinationaudiotrack.
track(s). AudioTrack01SoloOnIFX1MFX/TFX
IfyourebouncinginModeMono,theFrom AudioTrack02SoloOnIFX1MFX/TFX
settingcantbemorethan15audiotracks.Ifyoure AudioTrack03:RECSourceL
bouncinginStereo,theFromsettingcantbemore Whenyoubounce,theaudioprocessedbyIFX1and
than14audiotracks. MFX/TFXwillberecordedonaudiotrack03.
4. UseTotoselectthebouncedestinationaudio If you selected 2ch MIX to Disk:
track(s).
IfusingModeMono,choosefromAudioTrack1 andselect2chMIXtoDisk.
16.
IfusingModeStereo,choosefromAudioTrack youdecidenottoexecute,presstheCancelbutton.
1&215&16.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.If Setup:Automaticallysetparametersandtheir
youdecidenottoexecute,presstheCancelbutton. valuesonpage 592.
Formoreinformation,seeAutoHDR/Sampling Making the song into a two-channel (stereo) WAVE file
Setup:Automaticallysetparametersandtheir after you execute this command
valuesonpage 592.
1. Selectthesongthatyouwanttoresample.
Recording to the bounce after executing the command
2. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthenthe
1. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchand START/STOPswitch(Standby).
thentheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
3. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.
Onlytheaudiotrack(s)youselectinFromwill
playback,andbouncerecordingwillbegin. Thesongwillplayback,andresamplingwillbegin
atthesamemoment.
2. Whentheaudiotrack(s)finishplayingback,press
theSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.(Bounce 4. Whensongplaybackends,resamplingwillstop,
recordingwillstop.) andaWAVEfilewillbecreated.
Checking the recorded result EvenifyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
switchduringplayback,playbackandresampling
1. TurnSOLOONfortheaudiotrackselectedby willstop,andaWAVEfilewillbecreated.
Tointhedialogbox.
To audition the WAVE file you created
2. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto
beginplayback. UsethepagemenucommandSelectDirectory.
589
Sequencer mode
Note:UsethepagemenucommandSelectDirectory multisamplewillbecreatedwhenyouexecute
tospecifythelocationinwhichthenewWAVEfilewill ResampleSEQPlayonceagainandsample.
becreated. Auditioning the data you sampled
If you selected Resample SEQ Play: IfyouexecutedwithSavetoRAMandConvert
1. RefertoAutoHDR/SamplingSetupsteps1and2, toProgramchecked,selecttheprogramyou
andselectResampleSEQPlay. specifiedastheconvertdestination,andplaythe
C2keytoheartheresult.
IfyoudidntcheckConverttoProgram,use
Samplingmodetoselectandauditionthesample.
IfyouexecutedwithSavetoDISK,usethepage
menucommandSelectDirectorytoauditionthe
sample.
Note:Tochangethesamplenumberusedfor
sampling(whenusingSavetoRAM),usethe
pagemenucommandSelectSampleNo.Ifyou
wanttochangethesavedestinationfortheWAVE
file(whenusingSavetoDISK),usethepage
menucommandSelectDirectory.
Tochangethewayinwhichsamplingisinitiated,
changetheTriggersetting.
Ifyouwanttosimultaneouslysampleanexternal
audiosourcefromAUDIOINPUTetc.together
withyourownplayingonaprogram,setthe
SamplingpageInput14andS/P DIFBus
(INF/Indiv.)SelectsettingtoL/R,andtheSource
BustoL/R.
If you selected In-Track Sampling:

2. UseSavetotoselecteitherRAMorDISKasthe
destinationtowhichtheresampleddatawillbe
andselectInTrackSampling.
written.
IfyouselectRAM,thedatawillbewrittentoRAM
memory.IfyouselecttheDISKsetting,aWAVEfile
willbecreatedfromthesampleddataandsavedto
theharddisk.
3. IfyouselectedSavetoRAM,youcanspecify
whetherthedatawillbeautomaticallyconverted
toaprogramafterresampling.
Ifyouwantthedatatobeconverted,check
ConverttoProgramandusetheProgramfield
tospecifytheconvertdestinationprogram.
valuesonpage 592.
Resampling after you execute this command
1. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthenthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch,andthenplay
thekeyboardetc.
SinceTrigger(08c)issettoNoteOn,sampling
willbeginatthefirstnoteon.
2. Whenyouvefinishedplaying,pressthe 2. UseSourceAudiotoselecttheexternalaudio
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop inputsource.
resampling. IfyouselectAudioInput1/2or3/4,theanalog
Note:IfyouexecuteResampleSEQPlaywithSave audiooutputofaninstrumentorotherdevice
toRAMandConverttoProgramchecked,you connectedtotheAUDIOINPUT1,2,3,4jackswill
cancontinuesamplingwithoutchangingthe beinputtotheOASYS.
settings,andthesampleswillautomaticallybe IfyouselectS/P DIF,thedigitalaudiooutputfrom
assignedtoC#2,D2,andsoon.Anew aninstrumentorDATplayeretc.connectedtothe
590
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Auto HDR/Sampling Setup
S/P DIFINjackwillbeinputtotheOASYS.(08a pageandsetBus(IFX/Indiv.)SelecttoIFX1

AudioInput) IFX12.SettheBusSelectfollowingtheinserteffect
3. UseMonoL/MonoR/Stereotoselecttheinput youreusingtoREC1/2.
sourceandthenumberofchannelsyouwill Tochangethewayinwhichsamplingisinitiated,
sample. changetheTriggersetting.Ifyousetthisto
TheMonoLsettingwillsamplefromAudioInput1, Threshold,resamplingwillbegintheinstantthe
3andS/P DIFLtosampletoLMONO,MonoRwill inputlevelexceedsthespecifiedvalue.
useAudioInput2,4,andS/P DIFRtosampletoR UsethepagemenucommandSelectSampleNo.to
MONO,andStereowilluseAudioInput1/2,3/4, selectthesamplingdestinationRAMmemory.
andS/P DIFL/Rtosampleinstereo. IfyouselectedS/P DIFforSourceAudio,you
4. UsetheTofieldtoselectthetrackthatyouwill mayalsowishtocheckthattheGlobalSystem
useforInTrackSampling. Clockparameterissetappropriately.Formore
Notedatawillautomaticallybewrittentothetrack information,seeSystemClockonpage 702.
youselect.
5. UseProgramtospecifytheprogramintowhich
thesamplewillbeconverted.
Whensamplingends,theentireprocessofcreating
anewmultisamplethroughconvertingittoa
programandassigningittoatrackwillbe
performedautomatically.
valuesonpage 592.
In-Track Sampling after you execute this command

1. UseLocationtospecifythelocationfromwhich
youwantthesongtoplayback.
2. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchtoenter
samplingstandbymode.
3. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto
beginplayback.
4. Atthepointwhereyouwanttostartsampling,
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.In
TrackSamplingwillbegin.
5. Playtheinstrumentetc.thatisconnectedtothe
AUDIOINPUTjackyouselectedastheSource
Audiosetting.
6. Whenyourefinishedplaying,pressthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostoponly
sampling.
IfyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,
bothsamplingandsongplaybackwillstop.
Note:IfyoucontinuesamplingafterexecutingIn
TrackSampling,successivesampleswill
automaticallybeassignedtoC#2,D2,etc.
HoweverifyouexecuteAutoSamplingSetuponce
againandthensample,thesampleswillbecreated
inanewmultisample.
Auditioning the data you sampled
ReturntheLocation,andthenpressthe
SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplaybackthe
song.
Alternatively,useTrackSelect(01a)toselectthe
trackyouspecifiedinTo(dialogbox),andplay
theC2key.
Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffecttotheinput
source,gototheSequencerP0:AudioIn/Sampling
591
Sequencer mode
Auto HDR/Sampling Setup: Automatically-set parameters and their values

HDR (Audio Bounce Audio 2ch Mix to Resample In-Track
Initialize
Track Recording) Track Disk SEQ Play Sampling
Input14 Input14 Input14 Input14 [Source
Input (Input Source)*1 [Source Audio]*2
S/P DIF S/P DIF S/P DIF S/P DIF Audio]*2
Bus Select Off [IFX] Off Off Off Off
FX Ctrl Bus Off Off Off Off Off Off
Input1, 3, REC Bus Off Off Off Off Off 1/2

S/P DIF-L Send1/2 000 000 000 000 000 000
Pan L000 L000 L000 L000 L000 L000
Level 127 127 127 127 127 127
Bus Select Off [IFX] Off Off Off Off
FX Ctrl Bus Off Off Off Off Off Off
Input2, 4, REC Bus Off Off Off Off Off 1/2

S/P DIF-R Send1/2 000 000 000 000 000 000
Pan R127 R127 R127 R127 R127 R127
Level 127 127 127 127 127 127
Play/Rec/Mut [Recording Track]: [To][Mode]:
Play
e REC *8 REC *8
Solo [From]: Solo On
Audio Track
[Source
REC Source In1 REC 1/2 *8
Audio][IFX]*6
Stereo Pair Off [Source Audio]*6 [Mode] *8
Source Bus L/R L/R L/R REC1/2
Source Direct
(N/A) (N/A) (N/A) Off
Solo
Sequencer Sampling
Trigger Note On Note On
START SW START SW
Metronome
(N/A) (N/A) (N/A)
Precount
Sampling
Setup Save to RAM DISK [Save to] [Save to]
(Name)
[Source
Mode Stereo Stereo Stereo
Audio]*3
Sample
Maximum (N/A)
Time(RAM)
Sample
80min?
Time(DISK)
Rec Level +0.0 +0.0 +0.0 +0.0
Auto +12dB
On On*4 On*4
On
Convert to [Convert to [Convert to
Off
Program Program]*5 Program]*5
Program [Program]*5 [Program]*5
Select
Sample (Newly
MS (Newly created)*5 *5
created)
Original Key (C2)*5 (C2)*5

Seq. Event On*5
MIDI Track [To]*5
Select

Directory
Bus Select (Post REC1/2(st),
Insert FX
IFX) REC1(mn)*7
592
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Bounce All Tracks To Disk
:Notsetautomatically Note:TheRecordingLevelwillautomaticallybeset
[]:Setautomaticallyaccordingtotheparameter to+0.0[dB].
settingsinthedialogbox
*1[]UserGlobalSetting:EditSongParameters Copy Tone Adjust
[x]UserGlobalSetting:EditGlobalParameters
Formoreinformation,seeCopyToneAdjuston
*2TheinputsourcespecifiedasSourceAudiowill
page 147.
beset.
*3LMonoiftheSourceAudioisMonoL,RMonoif
itisMonoR,andStereoifitisStereo Reset Tone Adjust
*4WhenSaveto=RAM Formoreinformation,seeResetToneAdjuston
*5WhenSaveto=RAM,whenConvertto page 147.
Program=On
*6IfIFX=Off,setto[SourceAudio].IfStereo,turn
Show EQ Graphic
StereoPairoff
IfIFX=IFX112,settoREC1/2(Stereo)orREC1 Thiscallsupafloatingwindow,showingagraphic
(Mono) representationoftheselectedTracksEQsettings.You
*7IfIFX=IFX112,specifytheBusSelectofthat canleavethewindowopenasyouwork;asyou
IFX112.Ifeffectsarechained,specifythelastIFX changeEQsettings,orselectdifferentTracks,the
inthechain. graphicwillupdateaccordingly.
*8IfthesourceaudioMode=Stereo,MultiRECis Thewindowwillcovertheparametersforsomeofthe
turnedOn,andastereopairissettoRECastheTo Tracksoneithertherightorleftsidesofthedisplay.If
track. youselectoneoftheseTracks,thewindowwill
SettheFromTrackRECBustoREC1/2. automaticallymovetotheothersideofthedisplay.
Bounce All Tracks To Disk Copy Vector Envelope

Thiscommandbouncerecordsalltracksinthesongto Formoreinformation,seeCopyVectorEnvelopeon
asingleWAVEfile(stereo). page 148.
Simplyusethedialogboxtospecifythebounce
recordingdestinationsongandthenameofthefile Copy Pad Setup
thatwillbecreated,andpresstheOKbutton.The
WAVEfilewillbecreatedautomatically. Formoreinformation,seeCopyPadSetupon
page 148.
1. UseSongSelecttoselectthesongyouwantto
bounce.
Detune BPM Adjust
Ifyouvecreatedaphraseorrhythmloopmultisample
orsampleataspecificBPMinSamplingmode(orthat
youloadedinDiskmode),andwanttouseitwitha
programinatrack,youcanusethiscommandto
changetheBPMofthatmultisampleorsample.The
DetuneBPMAdjustcommandmodifiestheBPMof
thephraseorrhythmbychangingitspitch.
ThiscommandisavailablewhentheDetunesetting
ofthattrackisselected.Whenyouexecutethis
command,theselectedDetunevaluewillbe
adjusted.
Formoreinformation,seeDetuneBPMAdjuston
page 464.
2. SelectBounceAllTracksToDisktoopenthe
dialogbox.
3. UseDriveSelect,Open,andUptoselectthe MIDI Step Recording
directoryinwhichtheWAVEfilewillbesaved. Steprecordingallowsyoutospecifythelengthand
4. UseNametospecifythefilenameoftheWAVE velocityofeachnotenumerically,andtoinputMIDI
filethatwillbecreatedbybouncerecording. data,thepitches,fromthekeyboard.Youcanalsouse
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.If theonscreenbuttonstoenterRestsorTies.
youdecidetocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Thebouncesourcesongwillstartplaying,and
recordingwillbeginsimultaneously.Whensong
playbackends,bouncerecordingwillend.
593
Sequencer mode
Ifyouusesteprecordingtoinputdataintoatrack 5. InNoteDuration,specifythelengththatthe
thatalreadycontainssequencedata,alldatawillbe notewillactuallybeheld,relativetotheStep
erasedfromtheFromMeasureandsubsequent Time.
measures.Ifafterrecording,youdecidetorevertto Ingeneral,100%willbetenuto,85%willbenormal,
thepriordata,usetheComparefunction. and50%willbestaccato.
Toinputdatawithacontinuouslychangingvaluesuch 6. UseNoteVelocitytospecifythevelocityvalue
aspitchbend,itisbesttousetheCreateControl (keyboardplayingstrength)ofthenotedata.
Datamenucommand.Toinputindividualdata
WiththePAUSEswitchpressed,youcanholddown
eventssuchasprogramchanges,usetheMIDIEvent
theENTERswitchandplayanoteonthekeyboard
Editmenucommand.
tospecifythevelocityvalue.IfyousetthistoKey,
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackintowhichyou theactualvelocityatwhichyouplayedthekeywill
wishtoinputdata,anduseFromMeasure(41b) beinput.
tospecifythemeasureatwhichyouwishtobegin 7. Inputthenoteeventsdescribedbelowbyplaying
input. notesonthekeyboardorbypressingthebuttons
2. WhenyouselectMIDIStepRecording,the inthelowerpartofthedialogbox.
followingdialogboxwillappear. Enteringnotes
Whenyoupressakeyonthekeyboard,thatnote
numberwillbeinputasanoteofthelength
specifiedinstep4.
Whenyoupressachordonthekeyboard,thosenote
numberswillbeinputaschordsofthelength
specifiedinstep4.Sinceeachofthenotenumbers
youpressbeforereleasingallofthekeyswillbe
inputatthesamelocation,thenoteswillbeinputas
Time signature achordeveniftheyareactuallyplayedatdifferent
Length
(beats, clocks) times.
Eachtimeyoupressandreleasethekeyboard,the
locationwilladvancebythelengthspecifiedinstep
4.
Location within the Note number Velocity
measure (beat, clock) Enteringrests
3. InMeter,setthetimesignature. PresstheRestbuttontoenterarestofthelength
specifiedinstep4.
Thiswillshowthetimesignaturethathasalready
beensetforthemeasure. Enteringatie
Ifyouchangethetimesignaturesetting,thetime IfyoupresstheTiebuttonwithoutpressingthe
signaturedataofthemeasuresyourecordwill keyboard,thepreviouslyinputnotewillbetied,
change,andalltrackswillchangetothetime andlengthenedbytheamountspecifiedinstep4.
signatureyouspecified. IfyoupresstheTiebuttonwhileholdingdowna
4. InStepTime,specifythelength(intermsofa note,thenoteyouareplayingwillbetied,and
notevalue)ofthebasicintervalatwhichyouwill lengthenedbytheamountspecifiedinstep4.
inputdata. Youcanevenenternotesasshowninthefollowing
Fromthepopupmenuattheleft,selectthenote diagram.
lengthfrombetweenw(wholenote)andr(32nd
note).
Ifyouwanttheselectednotevaluetobeadotted
noteoratriplet,usethepopupmenuattherightto
selectadot.(Dot)ortriplet3(Triplet).Touse Step Time = Step Time = Step Time =
theunmodifiedvalueoftheselectednote,choose Tie
(Normal).
Thefollowingtableshowsthenumberofclocks On Off ON
Press E and C Release E (continue holding C) Press G
representedbyeachStepTimeselection.
Deletinganoteorrest
Todeleteanoteorrest,presstheStepBackbutton.
Thelocationwillmovebackwardbytheamount
specifiedinstep4,andthedatainthatintervalwill
bedeleted.
3
Auditioningthenextnotebeforeinput
Ifyouwishtomakesureofthenextnotebeforeyou
actuallyinputit,pressthePAUSEswitch(theLED
willlight).Nowwhenyoupressakey,youwillhear
soundbutthenotewillnotbeinput.Pressthe
594
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands MIDI Event Edit
PAUSEswitchonceagain(theLEDwillgodark)to
cancelthepausemodeandresumeinput.
8. Whenyouarefinishedwithsteprecording,press
theDonebutton.
IfyoupresstheCOMPAREswitch,youwillreturnto
theconditionofbeforeyoubegansteprecording.
MIDI Event Edit

HereyoucaneditindividualeventsofMIDIdatathat
wereinput.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwishto
edit
2. UsetheFromMeasure(41b)fieldtospecifythe
measureatwhichyouwishtobeginediting.
3. SelecttheMIDIEventEditmenucommand. 5. Intheupperpartofthedialogbox,Measureand
Indexshowthemeasurethatyouareeditingand
IfTrackSelectissettoMIDITrack0116,theSetEvent
theeventsoftheindexnumberswithinthe
Filtersdialogboxwillappear.
measure.
IfTrackSelectissettotheMasterTrack,theEventEdit
Youcantouchthescrollbarlocatedattherightto
windowwillappearimmediately;SetEventFilterswill
movetotheeventthatyouwishtoedit.
notappear.
6. Selecttheeventthatyouwishtoedit,andusethe
VALUEcontrolleretc.tomodifyitsvalue(s).
BymodifyingthevalueoftheBeatTicklocation
withinthemeasure,youcanmovetheeventwithinthe
measure.
Youcanediteacheventbymodifyingitsdatavalue(s).
Whenyouselectanoteevent,itwillsound.
7. Youcanpressthebuttonslocatedatthebottomof
thedialogboxtoediteventsasfollows.
Insertinganevent
SelectthelocationBeatTickatwhichyouwishto
SetEventFiltersletsyouchoosewhichtypesofMIDI
insertanevent,andpresstheInsertbuttontoinsert
datawillappearintheeventeditwindow.Youcanuse
anevent.
thistofocusononeormorespecifictypesofdata,orto
hidedatathatyourenotinterestedinatthemoment. Deletinganevent
Onlythedatawhichisshowncanbeedited. Selecttheeventthatyouwishtodelete,andpress
Youcanchoosetoviewonlyaspecificrangeofnotes, theCutbuttontodeletetheevent.
bysettingtheNoteBottomandTopasdesired.Toedit Movinganevent
thesesettings,youcanusethestandardshortcut:hold YoucanusetheCutbuttonandInsertbuttonto
ENTERandplayanoteonthekeyboard.Normally, moveanevent(bycutandpaste).
leavethesesetatthedefaultsofC1andG9.
UsetheCutbuttontodeletetheeventthatyouwish
ControlChangeletsyoushowonlyaspecificcontrol tomove,thenusetheInsertbuttontoinsertitatthe
changenumber,orALLcontrollers(thedefault). desiredlocation.
YoucanalsoshoworhidePitchBend,Program YoucanalsomoveaneventbymodifyingitsBeat
Change,AfterTouch,PolyAfterTouch,and Tickvalue.
Exclusive.
Copyinganevent
4. PresstheOKbuttontoopentheEventEditdialog
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtocopy,andpressthe
box.
Copybutton.Thenselectthecopydestinationand
presstheInsertbuttontoinserttheeventatthat
location.
Playingbackanevent
WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,adialogboxwill
openandthesongwillbeginplaying.Usethisto
auditiontheeditsyouvemadeinEventEdit.
595
Sequencer mode
Note:*2:Notedataandvelocityvaluescanalsobe
enteredbyholdingdowntheENTERswitchand
playinganoteonthekeyboard.
*3:YoucannotchangeSystemExclusiveeventsinto
adifferenttypeofevent(e.g.,aNoteorControl
Changeevent).Norcanyouchangeanyothertype
ofeventintoaSystemExclusiveevent.
Playbackwillstartfromthebeginningofthe Patternnumberswillbedisplayedinlocationsin
measurethatincludestheselectedevent.Ifthereis whichapatternhasbeenput(placed).Attheendof
noselectedevent,playbackwillstartfromthe thetracktherewillbeanindicationofEndofTrack.
Measuresettingofthesongjustlikeplaybackon
theP0:Play/RECpage.
Ifyouwanttohearonlythetrackyoureediting,use Audio Event Edit
theControlSurfacetosolothetrack,ortomute
Thiscommandletsyoueditindividualaudioevents
othertracks.
thathavebeenrecorded,ortrim(i.e.,make
Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby adjustmentsinstepsofasinglesampleto)theregion
Measure. usedbyaudioevents.
IfyouveeditedtheMeter,thechangewillnotbe Ifyouwanttochangethenameofaregionafter
reflectedintheplaybackuntilyouexitEventEdit. recording,usetheSelectRegiondialogbox.
WhenyoupresstheExitbutton,playbackwillstop Note:Aslongasthereisdatainthemastertrack,you
andyouwillreturntotheEventEditdialogbox. canopentheaudioeventeditingdialogboxevenifthe
8. Whenyouarefinishedeventediting,pressthe audiotrackisempty.
Donebutton.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheaudiotrackyouwant
IfyoupresstheCOMPAREswitchyouwillreturn toedit,anduseFromMeasure(41b)toselectthe
thedatatotheconditioninwhichitwasbeforeyou measureatwhichyouwanttobeginediting.
beganeventediting.
2. ChoosetheAudioEventEditcommandtoopen
Thefollowingtableshowsthetypesofmusicaldata thedialogbox.
thatcanbeeditedbyMIDIEventEditandtherange
oftheirvalues.
Meter:
BAR (displayed only)
1/416/16 *1
(Measure line)
(Time signature)
L:
C1G9 *2 V: 1127 *2
000.00015984.000
(Note data) (Velocity)
(Length: beats, clocks)
PAFT
C1G9 0127
(Polyphonic after
(Note number) (Value)
touch)
C: 0101
CTRL 0127
(Control change
(Control change) (Value)
number)
PROG Bank: IAIF P: 0127,
000127,
3. MeasureandIndexlocatedinthetoplineofthe
G, g(1)g(9) g(d), -
- -, 1128 (G, dialogboxshowthemeasureforeditingandthe
(Program UAUG g(1)g(d)) indexnumberofaneventwithinthatmeasure;
change) (Program bank) (Program number) thiseventisshownatthetopofthelistofevents.
AFTT 0127 Youcanusethescrollbaratrighttomovetothe
(After Touch) (value) eventyouwanttoedit.
BEND 8192+8191 YoucanselectanaudioeventandpressthePlay
(Pitch bend) (value) buttontohearthatevent.Thisisaconvenientway
toauditionyourchanges.
EXCL *3
(Exclusive) 4. Selecttheeventyouwanttoedit,andusethe
VALUEcontrollertoinputthedesiredvalues.
*1:Beawarethatbecausethetimesignatureis YoucanedittheLocationMeasureandBeatTick
recordedinthemastertrack,modifyingitfromany tomovethelocationoftheevent.However,you
trackwillaffectthesamemeasureofalltracks, cantplacetwoormoreeventsatthesamelocation.
causingthemalltobeplayedinthemodifiedtime
signature.
596
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Audio Event Edit
Measure
001 002 003 004
Anchor=Off Anchor
Trim Region Start=Off Point
M=002, BT=01.000
Anchor=Off Anchor
Edit: M=002, BT=02.000
IfyouchecktheAnchorcheckbox,theanchor
pointlocationwillbedisplayedinMeasureand
BeatTick,andyoucanspecifythelocationusing
thisanchorpointasthereference.Thisis
convenientwhenapointinsidearegionneedstobe
alignedataspecificlocation.
Measure
001 002 003 004
Anchor=Off Anchor
M=002, BT=01.000
TheprocedureisthesameasforRegionEdit.The
Edit: Anchor=On
regionwillbechangedwhenyoupresstheOK
Anchor
Trim Region Start=Off Point button.IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theregion
M=002, BT=02.000
willnotbechanged.
Ifstereopairingisenabledandyoureeditinga
Anchor
Anchor=On
Point stereoaudioevent,thedialogboxwillappeartwice.
Trim Region Start=Off
Edit: M=002, BT=01.000 Intheseconddialogbox,selecttheregionforthe
otherpairedtrack.
IfyoueditthelocationwithTrimRegionStart
6. Usethebuttonslocatedatthebottomofthedialog
checked,theStartoftheregionwillalsobe
boxtoedittheevent.
adjustedsimultaneously.Checkthisboxifyou
wanttoadjustthelengthwithoutchangingthe
overallposition.
Measure
001 002 003 004
Oh yeah
Anchor=Off Anchor
M=002, BT=01.000
yeah
Anchor
Anchor=Off Point
Edit: Trim Region Start=On
Edit: M=002, BT=02.000
V(Volume)specifiesthevolumeoftheaudio
event.
Note:Thevolumeofanaudiotrackisdeterminedby
thisvolumevaluemultipliedbythevolumeofthe Insertinganevent
audiotrack. Selecttheeventthatfollowsthelocationatwhich
YoucanedittheendlocationE(Measure.Beat. youwanttoinsert,andpresstheInsertbutton.If
Tick)tochangethelocationatwhichtheevent youpresstheInsertbuttonwithouthaving
ends.Editingtheendlocationwillchangethe previouslyusedtheCopybuttonorCutbuttonto
Endoftheregion.However,youcantsetthisto loadaudioeventdataintothecopybuffer,onlythe
apointbeyondthelengthoftheWAVEfile. firstSelectRegiondialogboxwillappear;selectthe
regionthatyouwanttoinsertasdescribedinstep5,
5. PresstheSelectRegionbuttontochangethe
andthenpresstheOKbutton.PresstheCancel
region.
buttonifyoudecidenottoinsert.(See
WhenyoupresstheSelectRegionbutton,theSelect
Deletinganevent
Regiondialogboxwillappear.
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtodelete,andpress
theCutbuttontodeletetheevent.
Movinganevent
YoucanusetheCutbuttonandInsertbuttonto
moveanevent(bycutandpaste).
597
Sequencer mode
UsetheCutbuttontodeletetheeventthatyouwish 9. EditthewaveformdataoftheWAVEfileassigned
tomove,thenusetheInsertbuttontoinsertitatthe totheregion.
desiredlocation. Selectaneventthatusestheregionyouwanttoedit,
Copyinganevent andpresstheEditbuttontoopentheeditdialog
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtocopy,andpressthe box.
Copybutton.Thenselectthecopydestinationand
presstheInsertbuttontoinserttheeventatthat
location.
7. TRIM:Thiseditstheareainwhichtheregion
willsound.
Selecttheregionthatyouwanttoedit,andpressthe
TrimbuttontoopentheTrimdialogbox.
WAVEfilewaveformdisplay,ZOOM
ThisareadisplaysthewaveformoftheWAVfile
assignedtotheregion.thewaveformdisplayand
ZOOMbuttonsoperateinthesamewayasin
Samplingmode,exceptthatthedisplayeddataisa
WAVEfile.RefertotheSamplingmodesections1
1c:Samplewaveformdisplayonpage 643and1
1f:ZOOMonpage 644.
EditRangeStart[0000000230399998]
Thefunctionsandoperationarethesameasinthe EditRangeEnd[0000001230399999]
trimdialogboxofRegionEdit,withtheexception EditRangeStartandEditRangeEndsetthe
ofTrimAudioEventStart.(SeeRegionEditon rangeofthewaveformthatwillbeedited.
page 609.) ThisrangeishighlightedintheWAVEfile
IfyoucheckTrimAudioEventStart,editingthe display.Toauditiontheselectedregion,pressthe
Startvaluewillsimultaneouslymodifythe PLAYorSAMPLINGSTART/STOPbuttons.
location(MeasureandBeatTick)oftheaudio UseZero[Off,On]
event.Checkthisoptionifyouwanttoadjustthe
lengthwithoutchangingthepositionatwhichthe On(checked):WhenyousetEditRangeStartor
entireeventwillsound.Thiswilloperateinthe EditRangeEnd,youwillonlybeabletoselect
samewayasifTrimRegionStartischeckedin zerocrosspoints;i.e.,addressesatwhichthe
step4. waveformlevelisatthecenterzeroline.Usethe
theVALUEslider,VALUEdial,or / switchesto
Theregionwillbemodifiedwhenyoupressthe movetothepreviousornextzerocrossaddress.If
Donebutton.IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,the youusethenumerickeypadtoenteravalue
regionwillnotbemodified. directly,youwillmovetothezerocrosspointthatis
8. SetAnchor:Thissetstheanchorpointatthe nearestthatvalue.
beginningofthefirstmeasurefromwherethe Off(unchecked):YoucanadjusttheEditRange
audioeventisplaced. StartandEditRangeEndaddressinunitsof1.
Selecttheeventthatusestheregioninwhichyou Thisisthenormalmodeofoperation.
wanttospecifyananchorpoint,andpresstheSet Normalize
Anchorbutton.Formoreabouthowtouseanchor
points,refertostep4. ThiscommandprocessesaWAVEfileinthesame
wayastheNormalize/LevelAdj.menucommand
Measure
004 005 006 007 inSamplingmode.Formoreinformation,see
Normalize/LevelAdjustonpage 683.
Anchor=Off TheNormalizecommandappliesauniform
M=004, BT=04.000
changetothesamplelevelsbetweenEditRange
StartandEditRangeEnd.Itbooststhelevelof
thesampledatainthespecifiedrangeasmuchas
Anchor=Off Anchor
Edit: Set Anchor Point possiblewithoutcausingittoclip.Ifthedatawas
M=005, BT=01.000 sampledatalowlevel,youcanusethiscommand
Note:Ifyouwanttoedittheanchorpointthatis toincreasethedynamicrangeofthesampledata.
automaticallysethere,useTRIMtomake YoucanuseLeveltoraiseorlowerthelevelas
adjustmentsinunitsofsamples. necessary.
Tip:Forexample,youcanspecifytheanchorpoint 10.Crossfade:Thiscreatesaneventinwhichthe
asthestartinglocationofaregion.Thenyoucan volumeisgraduallymodifiedintheareawhere
turnonUseAnchor,andeasilyplacethatphrase twoaudioeventsoverlap,causingthemtobe
atthebeginningofanothermeasure. mixed.
598
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Audio Automation Edit
Editthelocationandendlocationsothatthetwo
eventsoverlap.Thenselectthefirstofthetwo
events,andpresstheCrossfadebuttontodisplay
thedialogbox.
UseCurvetospecifyhowthevolumewillchange
inthecrossfadedportion.
Linear:Thevolumewillchangelinearly.
Power:Thevolumewillchangeinanonlinear
powercurve.Sometimes,usingtheLinearsetting
willproducetheimpressionthatthevolumeisless
duringthemiddleofthecurve.Ifso,usethePower
curve.
PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecrossfade,or
presstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidetocancel.
11.Whenyourefinishedwithaudioeventediting, 3. MeasureandIndexlocatedinthetoplineofthe
presstheDonebutton. dialogboxshowthemeasureforeditingandthe
BypressingtheCOMPAREswitchyoucanreturnto indexnumberofaneventwithinthatmeasure;
thestatepriortoyouraudioeventediting thiseventisshownatthetopofthelistofevents.
operations. Youcanusethescrollbaratrighttomovetothe
eventyouwanttoedit.
4. Selecttheeventyouwanttoedit,andusethe
Audio Automation Edit VALUEcontrollertoinputthedesiredvalues.
Thisletsyoueditindividualautomationdataevents. Youcanmovethelocationoftheeventwithinthe
Alleditsareperformedonlyonthesingleaudiotrack measurebyeditingtheBeatTickvalue.
thatisselected,regardlessofwhetherstereopairingis
Toedittheeventdata,inputthedesiredvaluesfor
onoroff.
eachevent.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheaudiotrackthatyou
5. Youcanpressthebuttonslocatedatthebottomof
wanttoedit,anduseFromMeasure(41b)to
thedialogboxtoediteventsasfollows.
specifythefirstmeasurethatyouwanttoedit.
Insertinganevent
WhenyouuseTrackSelecttoselectAudioTrack
0116andthenchooseAutomationEdit,theSet SelectthelocationBeatTickatwhichyouwishto
EventFiltersdialogboxwillappear. insertanevent,andpresstheInsertbuttontoinsert
anevent.
Deletinganevent
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtodelete,andpress
theCutbuttontodeletetheevent.
Movinganevent
YoucanusetheCutbuttonandInsertbuttonto
moveanevent(bycutandpaste).
UsetheCutbuttontodeletetheeventthatyouwish
IntheSetEventFiltersdialogbox,selectthetypesof tomove,thenusetheInsertbuttontoinsertitatthe
automationeventdatathatyouwanttovieworedit desiredlocation.
intheautomationeditwindow. YoucanalsomoveaneventbymodifyingitsBeat
Checkeachtypeofevent(Audio,Pan,EQ,Volume, Tickvalue.
Send1/2)thatyouwanttosee. Copyinganevent
Audioeventsareshowninthiswindowfor Selecttheeventthatyouwishtocopy,andpressthe
reference,buttheycannotbeeditedhere.Toedit Copybutton.Thenselectthecopydestinationand
them,usetheAudioEventEditcommand. presstheInsertbuttontoinserttheeventatthat
location.
2. PresstheOKbuttontoaccesstheAutomationEdit
dialogbox. 6. YoucanpressthePlaybuttontoplaybackan
audioevent.Duringplayback,anindicationof
Stopwillappear,andyoucanstopplaybackby
pressingthisbutton.
Playbackwillalsostopwhenyoureachtheendof
theaudioevent.Thisisavailableonlyifyouve
selectedanaudioevent.
7. Whenyourefinishedwithautomationediting,
presstheDonebutton.
Ifdesired,youcanpresstheCOMPAREswitchto
returntothestatepriortoautomationediting.
599
Sequencer mode
ThefollowingtableshowsthetypesofAutomation MIDItracks
Editeventsandtherangeofvalues.
Kind Value Value2
E:001.00.000
Region name
999.15.191(Display only)
(display only)
(End of an audio event:
(Audio events)
measure, beat, clock)
Volume 0127
Audiotracks
Pan L000R127
Send1 0127
Send2 0127
EQ Bypass On, Off
EQ Input Trim 099
EQ High Gain 18.0+18.0
EQ Mid Cutoff 10010.00k 3. Selectthetrackwhosedatayouwanttoerase.
EQ Mid Gain 18.0+18.0 IfyoudonotcheckAllTracks,AllMIDITracks,or
AllAudioTracks,onlytheplaybackdataofthe
EQ Low Gain 18.0+18.0
trackyouselectedinTrackSelectwillbeerased.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,theplaybackdataofall
Set Song Length tracks(MIDItracks,mastertrack,andaudiotracks)
willbeerased.WAVEfilesandregionswillnotbe
Thiscommandchangesthelengthofthespecified erased.
song.Whenitisexecuted,thelengthofthemaster IfyoucheckAllMIDITracks(whenTrackSelectis
trackwillchange,andthenumberofmeasuresplayed settoaMIDITrack0116),theplaybackdataofall
willchange. MIDItracks(MIDITrack0116)willbeerased.
1. SelectSetSongLengthtoopenthedialogbox. IfyoucheckAllAudioTracks(whenTrackSelectis
settoanAudioTrack0116),theplaybackdataof
allaudiotracks(AudioTrack0116)willbeerased.
Note:WAVEfilesandregionswillnotbeerased.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteEraseTrack.If
2. InLength,specifythelengthofthesong.
Copy Track
3. ToexecutetheSetSongLengthcommand,press
theOKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,press Thiscommandcopiesmusicaldatafromthecopy
theCancelbutton. sourcetracktothespecifiedtrack.
Alldatafollowingthemeasurespecifiedby Beawarethatthetrackdataofthecopydestination
Lengthwillbedeleted.Ifyouexecutethis willbeerasedwhenyouexecutetheCopyTrack
commandwithLengthshorterthanthesong, operation.
causinganaudioeventtoextendbeyondtheendof 1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(MIDI
thetrack,anewregionwillbeautomaticallynamed Track0116)oraudiotrack(AudioTrack0116)
andcreatedtospecifytheregionoftheWAVEfile thatyouwanttocopy.
thatwillactuallybeplayed.
2. SelectCopyTracktoopenthedialogbox.
TheWAVEfileitselfwillnotbedeleted.
MIDItracks
Erase Track
Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthespecifiedtrack.
Itisnotpossibletoerasethemastertrackbyitself.
1. InTrackSelect,selectthetrackthatyouwishto
erase.
2. SelectEraseTracktoopenthedialogbox.
600
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Bounce Track
Audiotracks 1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(MIDI
Track0116)mastertrackoraudiotrack(Audio
Track0116),thatcontainsthemeasuresofdata
youwanttoerase.
2. SelectEraseMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
MIDItracks
3. UseFromtoselectthecopysourcetrack,and
Totoselectthecopydestination.
(Bydefault,thetrackyouchooseinTrackSelect
willbespecifiedforFrom.)
Whenyoucopyanaudiotrack,onlytheplayback
data(audioeventsandautomationevents)is
copied;theWAVEfilesandregionsarenotcopied.
YoucantcopybetweenMIDIandaudiotracks. Audiotracks
Bounce Track
Thiscommandcombinesthemusicaldataofthe
bouncesourceandbouncedestinationtracks,and
placesthecombineddatainthebouncedestination.
Allmusicaldatainthebouncesourcewillbeerased.
IfMIDIcontroldataexistedinthebouncesourcetrack
andbouncedestinationtrack,unexpectedresultsmay 3. InFromMeasureselectthefirstmeasuretobe
occurduringplaybackafterthebouncecommandis erased,andinToEndofMeasureselectthelast
executed.Topreventthisfromhappening,usethe measuretobeerased.
MIDIEventEditorEraseControlDatamenu (Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasure
commandstoedittheMIDIcontroldataofthetwo willbesettotherangethatyouspecifiedinthe
tracksbeforeyouuseBounceTrack. TrackEditpage.)
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track 4. UseKindtoselectthetypeofdatayouwantto
0116)thatyouwanttobounce. erase.
2. SelectBounceTracktoopenthedialogbox. MIDI data
All:Erasesalltypesofdatainthattrack,including
notedata.
ControlChange:Erasescontrolchangedata.
AfterTouch:Erasesbothchannelpressureandpoly
keypressuredata.
PitchBend:Erasespitchbenddata.
ProgramChange:Erasesprogramchangedata.
3. UseFromtoselectthebouncesourcetrack,and Exclusive:Erasesexclusivedata.
Totoselectthebouncedestinationtrack.
Audio data
(Bydefault,thetrackyouchooseinTrackSelect
All:Erasealldatafromthattrack.
willbespecifiedforFrom.)
AudioEvent:Eraseaudioevents.
youdecidenottoexecute,presstheCancelbutton. AutomationEvent:Eraseallautomationevents
(EQ,Send1/2,Pan,Volume).
InthecaseofBounceTrack,thebouncesource
trackdatawillbesettozero. EQ:EraseonlyEQdata(Bypass,InputTrim,High
Gain,MidCutoff,MidGain,LowGain).
Send1/2:EraseonlySend1andSend2data.
Erase Measure Pan:Eraseonlypandata.
Thiscommanderasesthespecifiedtype(s)ofmusical Volume:Eraseonlyvolumedata.
datafromthespecifiedrangeofmeasures.TheErase 5. Selectthetrack(s)forwhichyouwanttoexecute
Measurecommandcanalsobeusedtoremoveonlya thecommand.
specifictypeofdata.UnliketheDeleteMeasure
IfyouexecutewithAllTracks,AllMIDITracks,
command,executingtheEraseMeasurecommand
andAllAudioTracksunchecked,thespecified
doesnotcausethesubsequentmeasuresofmusical
datatobemovedforward.
601
Sequencer mode
Kindofdatawillbeerasedonlyfromthetrack MIDItracks
thatsselectedinTrackSelect.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,thespecifiedKindofdata
willbeerasedfromalltracks.
IfyoucheckAllMIDITracks(whenaMIDITrackis
selected),thespecifiedKindofdatawillbeerased
fromallMIDItracks(MIDITracks0116).
IfyoucheckAllAudioTracks(whenanAudio
Trackisselected),thespecifiedKindofdatawill
beerasedfromallaudiotracks(AudioTracks01
Audiotracks
16).
6. ToexecutetheEraseMeasurecommand,pressthe
Example: If measures 23 are erased, measures 23 will be blank.
Before Erase 1 2 3 4 5
After Erase 1 2 3 4 5
No data
3. InFromMeasureselectthefirstmeasurethatyou
wishtodelete,andinToEndofMeasureselectthe
Ifdataextendsacrosstheboundarybetweena
lastmeasurethatyouwishtodelete.
measurebeingerasedandameasurethatisnot
beingerased,onlytheportionthatfallswithinthe Bydefault,therangeofmeasureswillbesetas
specifiedregionwillbeerased. specifiedontheTrackEditpage.
Beawarethatifnotedataextendsacrossseveral 4. Specifythetrack(s)onwhichyouwanttoexecute
measures,andyoueraseameasurethatfallsinthe thecommand.
middleofthenote,thatnotedatawilldisappear IfyouexecutewithAllTracks,AllMIDITracks,
fromthesubsequentmeasuresaswell. andAllAudioTracksunchecked,thespecified
measuresofdatawillbedeletedonlyfromthetrack
Note:Notedatacanalsobeerasedusingthe
thatsselectedinTrackSelect.
Shift/EraseNotemenucommand.Usethis
commandwhenyouwishtoeraseaspecificrangeof IfyoucheckAllTracks,thespecifiedmeasuresof
notes,ortoerasenotesfromaspecificBeat.Tick. datawillbedeletedfromalltracks.
Note:ControlChangedatacanalsobeerasedusingthe IfyoucheckAllMIDITracks(whenaMIDItrackis
EraseControlDatamenucommand.Usethiswhen selected),thespecifiedmeasuresofdatawillbe
youwishtoeraseaspecifictypeofcontrolchange,or deletedfromallMIDItracks.
toerasecontrolchangedatafromaspecificBeat.Tick IfyoucheckAllAudioTracks(whenanAudio
range. trackisselected),thespecifiedmeasuresofdatawill
Ifyoueraseaportionofanaudioeventthatextends bedeletedfromallaudiotracks.
acrossseveralmeasures,anewregionthatchanges 5. ToexecutetheDeleteMeasurecommand,press
theregionoftheWAVEfilethatisplayedbackwill theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
automaticallybecreatedandnamed.
Example: When measures 35 are deleted, measures 68 are moved forward.
Note:TheWAVEfilewillnotbedeleted.
Before
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Delete
Delete Measure
After
1 2 3 4 5
Thiscommanddeletesthespecifiedmeasures. Delete
WhentheDeleteMeasurecommandisexecuted,the
musicaldatafollowingthedeletedmeasureswillbe Ifinstep4youuncheckAllTracksandexecutethis
movedtowardsthebeginningofthesequence. operation,themeasureswillnotbedeletedfromthe
mastertrack.Timesignatureandtempodatawill
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(MIDI remainunchanged,andthetimesignatureand
Track0116)oraudiotrack(AudioTrack0116) tempoofthemeasuresthatweremovedforwardas
thatcontainsthemeasuresyouwanttodelete. aresultoftheDeleteoperationwillchange.
2. SelectDeleteMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
602
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Insert Measure
Example: When measures 2 and 3 (3/4 time) of track 2 are deleted, the measures that were
3. InAtMeasure,specifythemeasurelocationat
at 4 and 5 are moved forward, and their time signature will change to 3/4. whichthedatawillbeinserted.(Themeasureyou
Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (4/4) 5 (4/4) specifiedinTrackEditpageFromMeasurewillbe
Before Delete
setasadefault.)
Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (4/4) 5 (4/4)
4. InLength,specifythenumberofmeasuresthat
willbeinserted.
After Delete
Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 3 (3/4) 5. InMeter,specifythetimesignatureofthe
Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (4/4) 5 (4/4)
measuresthatwillbeinserted.
Ifyouwanttheinsertedmeasurestomatchthe
Ifinstep4youcheckAllTracksandexecutethis existingtimesignature,specify**/**.Withany
operation,thespecifiedmeasuresofmusicaldata settingotherthan**/**,thetimesignatureofthe
willbedeletedfromalltracksincludingthemaster insertedmeasureswillchange,andthespecified
track,andthetimesignatureandtempowillalso timesignaturewillapplytoalltracksforthose
moveforwardbythenumberofmeasuresthatwere measures.
deleted. 6. Specifythetrack(s)forwhichyouwanttoexecute
Ifnotedataextendsacrossseveralmeasures,and thecommand.
youdeleteameasurethatfallsinthemiddleofthe IfyouexecutewithAllTracks,AllMIDITracks,
note,thatnotedatawilldisappearfromthe andAllAudioTracksunchecked,themeasureswill
subsequentmeasuresaswell. beinsertedintothetrackthatsselectedinTrack
Ifyoueraseaportionofanaudioeventthatextends Select.Beawarethatatthistime,theplaybackdata
acrossseveralmeasures,anewregionthatchanges thatfollowstheinsertlocationwillmovetowardthe
theregionoftheWAVEfilethatisplayedbackwill endofthesongaccordingtothenumberofinserted
automaticallybecreatedandnamed. measures,butthetimesignatureandtempowillnot
move.
Note:TheWAVEfilewillnotbedeleted.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themeasureswillbe
insertedintoalltracksincludingtheMasterTrack.
Insert Measure Theplaybackdatainsubsequentmeasureswillplay
justasitdidbeforethiscommandwasexecuted.
Thiscommandinsertsthespecifiednumberof
IfyoucheckAllMIDITracks(whenaMIDItrackis
measuresintothespecifiedtrack.Existingdata
selected),themeasureswillbeinsertedintoall
followingtheinsertlocationwillbemovedbackward.
MIDItracks.
Ifyouinsertmeasuresbetweennoteeventsthatare IfyoucheckAllAudioTracks(whenanAudio
connectedbyatie,anoteoffwillbecreated trackisselected),themeasureswillbeinsertedinto
immediatelybeforetheinsertedmeasure,andthe allaudiotracks.
subsequentportionwillbedeleted.
7. ToexecutetheInsertMeasurecommand,pressthe
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(MIDI OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Track0116)oraudiotrack(AudioTrack0116)
intowhichyouwanttoinsertmeasures. Time signature = **/**
2. SelectInsertMeasuretoopenthedialogbox. Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4)
MIDItracks Before Insert
Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4)
Insert two measures
Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4)

After Insert
Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4)
Measures 4 and 5 will use the previously specified

time signature.
Time signature = 7/8
Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4)

Before Insert
Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4)
Audiotracks
Insert two measures
Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) 3 (7/8) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4)

After Insert
Track 1 1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) 3 (7/8) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4)
Measures 2 and 3 will be 7/8, and measures 4 and

5 will be the previously specified time signature.
IfyouexecuteInsertMeasureatalocationinthe
middleofanaudioeventthatspansseveral
measures,twonewregionsthatplaytheregions
dividedattheAtMeasurewillbeautomatically
createdandnamed.
603
Sequencer mode
Note:TheWAVEfileitselfwillnotbemodified. Theplaybackdatainsubsequentmeasureswillplay
justasitdidbeforethiscommandwasexecuted.
IfyoucheckAllMIDITracks(whenaMIDItrackis
Repeat Measure selected),thedatawillbeinsertedintoallMIDI
Thiscommandrepeatedlyinsertsthespecified tracks.
measuresforthespecifiednumberoftimes.Whenyou IfyoucheckAllAudioTracks(whenanAudio
executetheRepeatMeasurecommand,themeasures trackisselected),thedatawillbeinsertedintoall
willbeinsertedfollowingthemeasurespecifiedbyTo audiotracks.
EndofMeasure,andmusicaldatafollowingthe 6. ToexecutetheRepeatMeasurecommand,press
inserteddatawillbemovedbackward.Itisconvenient theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
tousethiscommandwhenyouhaveasongthatyou
playbackwithTrackPlayLoop(03a)turnedon,and If you execute the Repeat Measure operation on measures 14 with Time = 2,
wishtoexpanditintomusicaldata. measures 14 will be inserted into measures 58.
Before
Repeat Track 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(MIDI Measure
Track0116)oraudiotrack(AudioTrack0116)
thatyouwanttoinsertdatainto.
After
Repeat Track 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
2. SelectRepeatMeasuretoopenthedialogbox. Measure
MIDItracks
IfyouexecuteRepeatMeasureatalocationinthe
middleofanaudioeventthatspansseveral
measures,anewregionwillbeautomatically
createdandnamed.
Note:TheWAVEfileitselfwillnotbemodified.
Copy Measure
Thiscommandcopiesthemeasuresofmusicaldata
specifiedastheFromsourcetothebeginningofthe
measurespecifiedastheTolocation.
Audiotracks
WhenyouexecutetheCopyMeasurecommand,the
existingtrackdataatthecopydestinationwillbe
rewritten.
1. Selectthecopysourcesong.
2. SelectCopyMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
MIDItracks
3. InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specify
therangeofmeasuresthatwillberepeated.
Bydefault,therangeofmeasureswillbesetas
specifiedontheTrackEditpage.
4. InTimes,specifythenumberofrepetitions.
ForexampleifyousetFromMeasureto001,ToEnd
ofMeasureto004,andTimesto2,themusicaldata
ofmeasures14willbeinsertedintomeasures58.
Theresultwillbethatmeasures14willbeplayed Audiotracks
twice.
5. Specifythetrack(s)forwhichyouwanttoexecute
thecommand.
andAllAudioTracksunchecked,theplaybackdata
willbeinsertedintothetrackthatsselectedinTrack
Select.Beawarethatatthistime,theplaybackdata
thatfollowstheinsertedlocationwillmovetoward
theendofthesongaccordingtothenumberof
insertedmeasures,butthetimesignatureand
tempowillnotmove.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,theplaybackdatawillbe
insertedintoalltracksincludingtheMasterTrack. 3. UseFrom:TrackorAudioTracktoselectthe
copysourcetrack.
604
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Move Measure
(Bydefault,thiswillbetheTrackSelecttrack.) AudioTracks
andAllAudioTracksunchecked,onlytheselected
trackwillbecopied.Notethatthetimesignature
andtempowillnotbecopied.
tracksincludingtheMasterTrackwillbecopied.
selected),allMIDItrackswillbecopied.
IfyoucheckAllAudioTracks(whenanAudio
Trackisselected),allaudiotrackswillbecopied.
4. InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specify
therangeofcopysourcemeasures. 2. UseFrom:TrackorAudioTracktoselectthe
Bydefault,therangeofmeasureswillbesetas movesourcetrack.
specifiedontheTrackEditpage. (Bydefault,thiswillbetheTrackSelecttrack.)
5. UseTo:Songtoselectthecopydestinationsong, IfAllTracks,AllMIDITracks,andAllAudio
useTrackorAudioTracktoselectthecopy Tracksareunchecked,onlydatafromtheselected
destinationtrack(ifyouhaventcheckedAll trackwillbemoved.
Tracks,AllMIDITracks,orAllAudioTracks),and
useMeasuretoselectthemeasureatwhichthe
tracksincludingtheMasterTrackwillbemoved.
copieddatawillbeinserted.
YoucantcopybetweenMIDIandaudio.
selected),allMIDItrackswillbemoved.
6. ToexecutetheCopyMeasureoperation,pressthe IfyoucheckAllAudioTracks(whenanAudio
OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. Trackisselected),allAudiotrackswillbemoved.
Example: When you copy measures 57 of track 1 to the third measure of track 2, 3. UseFromMeasureandToEndofMeasureto
measures 35 of track 2 will be rewritten. specifytheregionofmeasuresthatwillbemoved.
Track 1
(source) 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 3 (4/4) 4 (3/4) 5 (3/4) 6 (3/4) 7 (4/4) Bydefault,therangeofmeasureswillbesetas
specifiedontheTrackEditpage.
4. UseTo:TrackorAudioTrack(ifyouhavent
Track 2
(destination)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 3 (4/4) 4 (3/4) 5 (3/4) 6 (3/4) 7 (4/4) checkedAllTracks,AllMIDITracks,orAllAudio
Tracks)toselectthedestinationtrack,anduse
Ifthecopysourceyouspecifyisaportionofan Measuretoselectthestartingmeasureatwhich
audioeventthatspansseveralmeasures,orifthe thedatawillbeinserted.
copydestinationisaportionofanaudioeventthat YoucantmovebetweenMIDIandaudio.
spansseveralmeasures,anewregionwill
automaticallybecreatedandnamedwhenyou 5. ToexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand,pressthe
executetheCopyMeasurecommand. OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Note:TheWAVEfileitselfwillnotbemodified. Ifyoumoveaportionofanaudioeventthatspans
severalmeasures,orifyoumovetoaportionofan
audioeventthatspansseveralmeasures,anew
Move Measure regionwillautomaticallybecreatedandnamed
whenyouexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand.
Thiscommandmovesthespecifiedmeasuresto
Note:TheWAVEfileitselfwillnotbemodified.
anotherlocation.Existingdataatthedestinationwill
bepushedbacktomakeroomforthemoveddata,and
thedatasurroundingtheoldlocationwillbemovedto
Create Control Data
fillinthegap.
1. SelectMoveMeasuretoopenthedialogbox. Thiscommandcreatescontrolchange,aftertouch,
pitchbend,ortempodatainthespecifiedregionofa
MIDItracks MIDItrackorthemastertrack.
1. InTrackSelect,selecttheMIDItrackonwhich
youwishtoperformtheCreateControlData
command.
Ifyouwishtomodifytempodata,selectMaster
Trackasthetrack.Inthiscase,thestep4item
KindwillbesettoTempo.
2. SelectCreateControlDatatoopenthedialog
box.
605
Sequencer mode
Erase Control Data

Thiscommanderasesdatasuchascontrolchanges,
aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempointhespecifiedrange.
1. InTrackSelect,selecttheMIDItrackfromwhich
youwishtoerasecontroldata.
Ifyouwishtoerasetempodata,selectMasterTrack.
Inthiscase,theKinditeminstep4willbeTempo.
2. SelectEraseCtrlDatatoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangefromwhichyouwishtoerase
controldata.
InFromMeasuretoToEndofMeasurespecifythe
3. Specifytherangeintowhichthecontroldatawill
measures,andinBeat.Tickspecifythebeatand
beinserted.
clock.(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndof
InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasurespecify Measurewillbetherangethatwasspecifiedinthe
themeasures,andinBeat.Tickspecifythebeatand TrackEditpage.)
clock.(Bydefault,therangeofmeasureswillbeset
4. SetKindtothetypeofmusicaldata(event)that
asspecifiedontheTrackEditpage.)
youwishtoerase.
4. SetKindtothetypeofmusicaldata(event)that
Controlchange:Controlchangedatawillbeerased.
youwishtocreate.
Use#tospecifythecontrolchangenumber.
Controlchange:Controlchangedatawillbe
AfterTouch:Aftertouchdatawillbeerased.
inserted.Use#tospecifytheCCnumber.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeerased.
AfterTouch:Aftertouchdatawillbeinserted.
Tempo:Tempodatawillbeerased.(Ifyouve
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeinserted.
selectedthemastertrack)
Tempo:Tempodatawillbeinserted(ifyouve
selectedthemastertrack).
5. InStartValue,selectthestartingvalueofthe
controldata.InEndValue,selecttheending
valueofthecontroldata.
Bydefault,theStartValuewillbesettothevalue
oftheexistingdataatthestartlocation.Ifyouwish
tocreatecontroldatathatchangessmoothlyfrom
thestartinglocation,youcanleavetheStartValue
unchanged,andsetonlytheEndValue.
6. ToexecutetheCreateControlDatacommand,
button.
5. ToexecutetheEraseControlDatacommand,press
Example: The controller is aftertouch. Starting location is 3:48, ending location is 4:24, theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
and end value is set to 100. This will cause the aftertouch value to begin
changing from 3:48, and reach a value of 100 at 4:24.
Note:Toeraseallcontrolchangedatafromspecified
After touch Start location End location measures,youcanalsousetheEraseMeasure
127 menucommand,andsetKindtoControlChange.
End Value
100 However,theEraseControlDatacommandallows
youtospecifytherangeusingBeat.Tick,andalsoto
eraseonlyspecifictypesofcontrolchangedata.
Previous data
Start Value
default value
0
3:00 3:24 3:48 3:72 4:00 4:24 4:48
Location
Quantize
ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDIdataofthe
WhenyouexecuteCreateControlData,alarge typeyouspecify(notedata,controlchange,aftertouch,
amountofsequencermemorywillbeconsumed. pitchbend,programchange,etc.)inthetrack.
Forthisreasonitmaynotbepossibletoexecutethis
commandifthereisalimitedamountofmemory WhenyouexecutetheQuantizeoperation,themusical
remaining.Insuchcases,firstusetheQuantize datawillbeaffectedasfollows:
menucommandtoquantizethedataandremove Whenquantizingnotedata,onlythetimingofthe
unnecessarycontroldata.Alternatively,youcould noteonisaffected;thelength(durationofthenote)
quantizethedatainsertedbytheCreateControl isnotaffected.
Datacommand. IftheQuantizeresolutionissettoHi,thetiming
willbeadjustedtothebaseresolution(q/192),so
notedatawillnotbeaffected.However,continuous
controllerdatasuchasjoystickoraftertouchwill
beprocessedsothatduplicateeventsonthesame
606
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Shift/Erase Note
tickarecombinedintoasingleevent,thus 7. InIntensity,specifythedegreeofsensitivityto
conservingmemory. whichthetimingwillbecorrected;i.e.,howclose
Similarly,twoormoredataeventsofanidentical tothelocationsspecifiedbystep5and6thedata
typeexistingattheidenticaltimingwillbe willbemoved.
combinedintoone,alsoconservingmemory. Withasettingof0,nocorrectionwilltakeplace.
Withasettingof100,thedatawillbemovedallthe
waytothetimingintervalsspecifiedbystep5and6.
ByvaryingtheOffsetandIntensitysettings,you
cancreatequantizationeffectssuchasthe
following:
Original
100%
100%
Quantize Resolution =
Offset = 0, Intensity = 100%
50% 50%
100% 100% 100%

Offset = +48, Intensity = 100% +48 +48 +48
1. InTrackSelect,specifythetrack.
75% 75% 75%
2. SelectQuantizetoopenthedialogbox. Quantize Resolution =
Offset = +48, Intensity = 75% +48 +48 +48
3. Specifytherangethatwillbequantized.
100% 100% 100%
InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specify Quantize Resolution =
themeasures.InBeat.Tickspecifythebeatand 24 24 24
clock.(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndof
8. UseSwingtoaddasenseofswingtothe
Measurewillbetherangethatyouspecifiedinthe
rhythm.Forexample,thisisaneasywaytogivea
TrackEditpage.)
slightshufflegroovetoasquare16beatrhythm.
4. InKind,selectthetypeofmusicaldata(events)
Settingsotherthan0%willadjustthepositionsof
thatyouwishtoquantize.
notesatevennumberedbeatsrelativetothe
All:Quantizationwillbeappliedtoallperformance specifiedResolution.
MIDIdata.
Withasettingof+100%,noteswillbemovedone
Note:Quantizationwillbeappliedonlytonote thirdofthewaytowardthespecifiedResolution.
data.BottomspecifiesthelowestNotethatwillbe Withasettingof+300%,notesofevennumbered
affected,andTopspecifiesthehighestNote.You beatswillbemovedallthewaytothenexteven
canusethiswhenyouwanttoquantizeonlya numberedbeat.
specificnoteornotes(forexample,justthesnare
ByvaryingtheSwingsettings,youcancreate
soundsofadrumtrack).Ifyouwanttoquantizeall
effectssuchasthefollowing:
notes,settheseparametersC1andG9respectively.
Thesenotesettingscanbeenteredbyholdingdown When Resolution =
theENTERswitchandplayinganoteonthe beat 1 beat 2

0%
beat 3 beat 4
keyboard. Swing = 0%
+100%
ControlChange:Quantizationwillbeappliedto Swing = +100%
controlchanges.Toquantizeonlyaspecificcontrol 100%
change,specifythenumber(No.).Toquantizeall Swing = 100%

+200%
controlchanges,selectAll. Swing = +200%
AfterTouch:QuantizebothChannelPressureand Swing = +300%
PolyphonicKeyPressuremessages. +300%
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbequantized.
9. ToexecutetheQuantizecommand,presstheOK
ProgramChange:Programchangedatawillbe button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
quantized.
5. InResolution,specifythetimingresolutionto
whichthedatawillbecorrected. Shift/Erase Note
Lowerresolutionscansavememory,butifyousetit Thiscommandshifts(moves)orerasesthespecified
toolow,thetimingmaynotbeacceptable. notenumbersinaspecifiedMIDItrackandrangeof
6. InOffset,specifythenumberofclockticksby measures.
whichthedatawillbemovedforwardor 1. InTrackSelect,selecttheMIDItrackonwhich
backwardrelativetothestandardtiming. youwishtoexecutetheShift/EraseNote
48isa16thnote;96isan8thnote.Positive(+) command.
settingsmovethetimingforwards,andnegative() 2. SelectShift/EraseNotetoopenthedialogbox.
settingsmoveitbackwards.Thisallowsyouto
pushordragthebeat.
607
Sequencer mode
1. InTrackSelect,specifythetrackwhosevelocity
willbemodified.
2. SelectModifyVelocitytoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangeinwhichyouwishtoshiftor
erasenotenumbers.
InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specify
themeasures.InBeat.Tick,specifythebeatand 3. Specifytherangeinwhichnotevelocitywillbe
clock.(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndof modified.
Measurewillbetherangethatyouspecifiedinthe
FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurespecifythe
TrackEditpage.)
measure,andBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.
4. Specifytherangeofnotesthatyouwishtoshiftor (Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasure
erase. willbesettotherangethatyouspecifiedinthe
NoteRange:Bottomspecifiesthelowerlimit,and TrackEditpage.)
Topspecifiestheupperlimit.Ifyouwishtoeditall 4. Specifytherangeofnotesthatwillbeaffectedby
notes,setBottomtoC1andToptoG9.These theModifyVelocitycommand.
settingscanalsobemadebyholdingdownthe
NoteRange:Bottomisthelowerlimit,andTopis
ENTERswitchasyouplayanote.
theupperlimit.Ifyouwishtoeditallnotes,set
Shiftingnotes BottomtoC1andToptoG9.Thesesettingscan
5. InShiftNote,specifytheamountbywhichyou alsobemadebyholdingdowntheENTERswitchas
wishtomovethenote. youplayanoteonthekeyboard.
Theamountofshiftissetinsemitonestepsovera 5. InVelocityStartValuespecifythevalueat
rangeof127+127.+1willshiftthenoteasemitone whichthevelocitydatawillstart,andinEnd
upward. Valuespecifythefinalvelocityvalue.
6. SelecteitherReplacetomovethenotenumbers, Thesesettingscanalsobemadebyholdingdown
orCreatetogenerateadditionalnotes. theENTERswitchasyouplayanoteonthe
keyboard.
Forexampleifyouareeditingatrackthatusesa
drumprogram,youcanuseReplacetoexchange 6. InIntensity,specifythedegreetowhichthe
thecurrentsnaresoundforadifferentsnaresound velocitydatawillbeadjustedtowardthecurve
assignedtoadifferentkey,oruseCreatetoadda youspecifyinstep7.
soundeffectatadifferentnote#tothesnaresound. Withasettingof0[%],thevelocitywillnotchange.
Alternatively,youcanuseCreatetoaddanoctave Withasettingof100[%],thevelocitywillbeexactly
doublingtoanexistingguitarphrase,etc. asdescribedbythecurve.
7. ToexecutetheShiftNotecommand,presstheOK 7. Curve*letsyouselectfromsixtypesofcurveto
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. specifyhowthevelocitywillchangeovertime.
Erasingnotes Thesixcurvesareasfollows:
8. CheckEraseNote.
For a Start Velocity of 1 and End Velocity of 127
Ifyouwishtoeraseallnotedatainthespecified Curve 1 Curve 2 Curve 3
127 127 127
rangeofmeasures,youcanalsousetheErase
MeasuremenucommandandsetKindtoNote. Velocity Velocity Velocity
However,thisShift/EraseNotecommandletsyou
1 1 1
specifytheBeat.Tickrange,andtoeraseonly Start
Measure
End
Measure
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Start
Measure
End
Measure
specificrangesofnotedata.
9. ToexecutetheEraseNotecommand,presstheOK Curve 4 Curve 5 Rndm
127 127 127
Velocity Velocity Velocity RANDOM
1 1 1
Modify Velocity Start
Measure
End
Measure
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocityvaluesofnotesin 8. ToexecutetheModifyVelocityoperation,press
thespecifiedareasothattheywillchangeovertime theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
accordingtoaselectedcurve.
608
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Region Edit
Selecttheregionthatyouwanttoimport,andpress
Region Edit theImportbutton.
Hereshowtoedittheregionsusedinanaudiotrack. TheImportdialogboxwillappear.
InadditiontoImportingorPastingaregion,youcan
usetheTrimdialogboxtospecifytherangeinwhicha
WAVEfilewillplayback.
Editingaregionwillaffectallaudiotracksofthe
song.Usecautionwheneditingaregionthatis
alreadyusedbyanaudiotrack.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectanAudioTrack.
2. ChooseRegionEdittoopentheregionedit
dialogbox.
UseDriveSelect,Open,andUptomoveto
thedesireddirectory,selecttheregionfileorWAVE
fileyouwanttoimport,andpressOK.
YoucanuseNameintheupperlinetoeditthe
nameoftheregion.EditNameafteryouve
selectedafile.
Important:YoucanonlydirectlyimportWAVEfiles
fromtheinternalharddrive.TousefilesfromCDs
orexternalUSBdevices,youmustfirstcopythemto
theinternalharddrive,andthenimportthecopied
fileintotheSong.
Note:YoucanonlyimportmonauralWAVEfiles
withasamplerateof48kHzthatarenolongerthan
80minutes.IftheWAVEfilehasasamplerateof
44.1kHz,youmustusetheDiskmodeRate
Convertcommandtoconvertitto48kHzbefore
3. UseIndexatthetopofthedialogboxtospecify importing.Formoreinformation,seeRate
theindexnumberoftheregionyouwanttoedit; Convertonpage 783.
thiswillbedisplayedatthebeginningofthelist
inthedialogbox. WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,theselectedWAVE
filewillplay.Thisappliesto48kHzWAVEfiles.
Youcanalsotouchthescrollbarattherighttomove (SeeWAVEfilesonpage 226oftheOperation
totheregionyouwanttoedit. Guide.)
IfyoucheckSong,onlyregionsofthespecified Copyingaregion
songnumberandaudiotracknumberwillbe
displayed.Thisisconvenientifyouhavedifficulty SelectthecopysourceregionandpresstheCopy
findingtheregionyouwanttoedit. button.Thenselectthecopydestinationandpress
thePastebuttonorInsertbuttontopaste(overwrite)
Thesongnumberandaudiotracknumberofa
orinserttheregionintothatdestination.
regionisspecifiedwhenitisrecorded.Youcanalso
modifytheseintheTrimdialogbox(step6). Commands that are available if Song is unchecked
4. Ifyouwanttoedittheregionname,pressthetext Pasteregion
editbutton. Selecttheregiontowhichyouwanttopaste,and
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetexteditdialog pressthePastebuttontooverwritethatregion.
box,andinputthedesiredregionname(upto24 Clearregion
characters).
Selecttheregionthatyouwanttoclear,andpress
Regionswhosenamesareshownas=NoAssign= theClearbuttontoclearthatregion.
areempty.Youcannoteditthesenames.
Commands that are available if Song is checked
5. Selecttheregionthatyouwanttoedit,andusethe
buttonsatthebottomofthedialogboxtoeditthe Insertregion
region. Selecttheregionatwhichyouwanttoinsert,and
Theavailablebuttonswilldifferdependingon presstheInsertbuttontoinsertaregion.
whetheryouvecheckedSong. Cutregion
Importingaregion Selecttheregionthatyouwanttocut(delete),and
Youcancopyaregionfroma.SNGfile,orcreatea presstheCutbuttontodeletethatregion.
regionfromaWAVEfile. 6. Playbacktheregion.
609
Sequencer mode
Selecttheregionthatyouwanttoplayback,and On:IfyouedittheStartorEndaddress,the
pressthePlaybuttontoplaytheregionfromits EndorStartaddresswillautomaticallybe
StarttoEnd(Trimstep6).Duringplayback,the adjustedtopreservetheexistinglengthbetween
PlaybuttonindicationwillchangetoStop.Youcan StartandEnd.
presstheStopbuttontostopplayback. Allow Tempo [Off, On]
7. Usethetrimdialogboxtospecifytheportionof ThisspecifieswhethertheRegionsTempo(see
theregionthatwillplayback. Tempo[40.00240.00],below)willbeusedwhen
Inthetrimdialogbox,selecttheregionthatyou executingthemenucommandsAdjustRegionto
wanttoeditandpresstheTrimbuttontoopenthe SongsTempo(TimeStretch)orAdjustSongs
trimdialogbox. TempotoRegion.
Normallyyouwillleavethisturnedon,andturnit
offonlywhenusingoneshotsamplessuchas
rhythminstrumentswhoselengthyoudontwantto
changeevenifthetempoischanged.
Thisisturnedonwhenyourecordorimport.
Tempo [40.00240.00]
Thisspecifiesthetempooftheregion.
ThistempoisusedwhenexecutingtheAdjust
RegiontoSongsTempo(TimeStretch)orAdjust
SongsTempotoRegionpagemenucommands.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAdjustRegionto
WAVEfilewaveformdisplay,ZOOM SongsTempo(TimeStretch)onpage 612,and
ThisareashowsthewaveformoftheWAVEfilethat AdjustSongsTempotoRegiononpage 611.
isassignedtotheregion. Thetempoatthebeginningofrecordingissetatthe
ThewaveformdisplayandtheZOOMbuttonsare timeofrecording.Withimportedaudiofiles,the
thesameasinSamplemode,exceptforthefactthat tempoissetto120.00.
thedisplayeddataisaWAVEfile.RefertoSampling Song [000199]
mode11c:Samplewaveformdisplayon
Audio Track [0116]
page 643and11f:ZOOMonpage 644.
Thesespecifythesongnumberandaudiotrackthat
Start[0000000230399998]
aredisplayedwhenviewingregionsforeachaudio
End[0000001230399999] trackifyouvecheckedSongforSelectRegion
StartandEndspecifytherange(startaddress whenusingEditRegionorAudioEventEdit.
andendaddress)ofthewaveformthatwillbe Fordetails,seestep2.
played.Therangeyouspecifyhereishighlightedin Play/Stop
theWAVEfiledisplay.
WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,theareafrom
Duration StarttoEndwillplayback,allowingyouto
ThisindicatesthelengthbetweenStartand auditionthetrimmedregion.Duringplayback,the
End.(Youcanteditthisindication.) buttonisdisplayedasStop;playbackwillstopif
AnchorPoint[0000000230399999] youpressit.
Hereyoucanspecifyananchorpoint,whichis 8. Ifyouwanttokeepthechangesyoumadeinthe
convenientwhenyouneedtomoveanaudioevent. Trimdialogbox,presstheDonebutton.
(Thevalueisshowninsamples.) Ifyoudontwanttosaveyourchanges,pressthe
Anchorpointsareusedinaudioeventediting. Cancelbutton.IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,the
regionwillreverttothestatepriortoenteringthe
UseZero[Off,On]
Trimdialogbox.
On:WhenyoueditStart,End,orAnchor
9. WhenyourefinishedwithRegionEdit,pressthe
Point,youwillbeabletoselectonlyzerocross
Donebutton.
addresses;locationsatwhichthewaveformlevel
crossesthecenterlineofthesamplewaveform
display,andisthereforeat0.Whenyouoperatethe Volume Ramp
VALUEslider,VALUEdial,or / switches,the
nextorpreviouszerocrosspointwillbe Thiscommandmodifiesthedatavalues(volume)of
automaticallyfoundandselected.Ifyouusethe thespecifiedarea.Youcangraduallyincrease(FadeIn)
numerickeys09toenteravalue,thenearestzero ordecrease(FadeOut)thevolumebetweenthestart
crossaddresswillbefoundautomatically. andendpoints.
Off:YouwillbeabletospecifyStart,End,and
AnchorPointinunitsofasinglesample.Thisis
thenormalsetting.
Duration Lock [Off, On]
ThisspecifieswhetherthelengthbetweenStart
andEndwillbefixedduringediting.
610
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Copy Songs Tempo to Region
Fade In
Copy Songs Tempo to Region
Thiscommandchangesthetempousedbythe
specifiedregionsofaudioeventssothattheaudio
eventtempowillmatchthetempoofthelocationin
Fade Out whichthoseregionsplayback.
Ifthetempoofanaudiotrackmatchesthetempoofthe
MIDItracks,executingthiscommandtomatchthe
regiontempowillensurethattheAdjustRegionto
SongsTempo(TimeStretch)orAdjustSongsTempo
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheaudiotrackthatyou toRegioncommandscanbeexecutedcorrectly.
wanttoedit,anduseFromMeasureandToEndof
Note:Thetempoofaregionisspecifiedatthetimeof
Measuretospecifytheareathatyouwanttoedit.
recording.YoucanalsomodifyitusingTriminAudio
2. ChooseVolumeRamptoopenthedialogbox. EventEdit.
ThetempowillnotbecopiedifAllowTempo
(TrimDialog)isOff.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetracktowhichyou
wanttocopythetempo.
2. ChooseCopySongsTempotoRegiontoopen
thedialogbox.
3. UseFromMeasuretoselectthefirstmeasureto
whichyouwanttocopythetempo,anduseToEnd
ofMeasuretoselectthelastmeasure.
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasure
willbetherangeofmeasuresyouspecifiedinthe
TrackEditpage.)
3. UseFromMeasure,ToMeasure,andBeat.Tick
4. Ifyouwanttocopythesequencertempotoall
tospecifytheareaonwhichyouwillexecutethe
audiotracks,checkAllAudioTracks.
command.
Ifthisisnotchecked,thetempodatawillbecopied
SpecifythedesiredmeasuresinFromMeasureand
tothetrackyouspecifiedinTrackSelect.
ToMeasure,andspecifythebeatandclockin
Beat.Tick.Bydefault,FromMeasureandTo 5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopySongs
Measurearesettotherangeofmeasuresyou TempotoRegioncommand,orpresstheCancel
specifiedinFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure buttontocancelwithoutexecuting.
oftheTrackEditpage. Executingthiscommandwillmodifytheregion(s).
4. Usetheradiobuttonstoselectthetypeofvolume Beawarethateditingaregionwillaffecttheaudio
ramp. tracksoftheentiresong.Usecautionwhenediting
FadeIn:Thevolumewillbezeroatthebeginningof regionsthatareusedbyotheraudiotracks.
therange,andwillgraduallyincreasetowardthe Note:Thiscommandwillnotaffectaudioevents,
originalvolumeattheendoftherange. automationevents,orWAVEfiles.
FadeOut:Thevolumewillgraduallydecreasefrom
thebeginningoftherange,reachingzeroattheend
oftherange. Adjust Songs Tempo to Region
5. UseCurvetoselecthowthevolumewillchange. Thiscommandcreatestempoeventsinthemaster
Linear:Thevolumewillchangelinearly.Choosethe tracktomatchthetempooftheregionsusedbythe
Linearsettingforaconventionalfadeinorfadeout. audioeventsinthespecifiedrange.
Power:Thevolumewillchangenonlinearly.In Thisisusefulifyoucreateaudiotracksinapreviously
somecases,suchaswhenyouusetheMixmenu recordedregion,andwantalltracks(includingMIDI
commandtomix(crossfade)afadedinwaveform tracks)tomatchthatregion.
withafadedoutwaveform,usingtheLinearsetting Note:Thetempoofaregionisspecifiedatthetimeof
mayproducetheimpressionthatthevolumeis recording.YoucanalsomodifyitusingTriminAudio
lowerduringthetransition.Ifso,usethePower EventEdit.
setting.
TempoeventswillnotbecreatedifAllowTempo
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheVolumeRamp, (TrimDialog)isOff.
orpresstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidetocancel.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackwhosetempo
Note:Whenyouexecutethiscommand,anewregion youwanttoreference.
andWAVEfilewillbecreated,andthefilewillbe
2. ChooseAdjustSongsTempotoRegiontoopen
namedautomatically.Theaudioeventwillalsobe
thedialogbox.
updated.Automationeventswillnotbeaffected.
3. UseFromMeasuretoselectthefirstmeasurein
whichyouwanttocreatetempoevents,anduseTo
EndofMeasuretoselectthelastmeasure.
611
Sequencer mode
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasure Note:Whenyouexecutethiscommand,newregions
willbetherangeofmeasuresyouspecifiedinthe andWAVEfileswillbecreated,andfilenamesand
TrackEditpage.) regionnameswillbeassignedautomatically.The
4. Ifyouwanttocreatetempoeventsbasedonall audioeventswillalsobemodified.Automationdata
audiotracks,checkAllAudioTracks. willnotbeaffected.
Ifthisisnotchecked,thetrackyouspecifiedin
TrackSelectwillbeusedasthebasisforthetempo
Step Recording (Loop Type)
eventsthatarecreated.
5. PresstheOKbuttontocreatethetempoevents,or Hereyoucanperformsteprecordingintoapattern.
presstheCancelbuttontocancel. Thisisavailablewhenauserpatternisselected.
1. InPatternandPatternSelect,specifythepattern.
Adjust Region to Songs Tempo (Time Bydefault,thepatternlengthisonemeasure.Ifyou
wishtochangethenumberofmeasuresinthe
Stretch) pattern,setthePatternParameter.
Ifthetempoofregionsusedbyaudioeventsinthe 2. SelectStepRecording(LoopType)toopenthe
specifiedrangediffersfromthetempooftherangein dialogbox.
whichthoseregionsplayback,youcanexecuteTime
Stretch(Sustaining)tocreatenewWAVEfilesand
regions.Audioeventsthatusethenewlycreated
regionswillalsobecreatedautomatically.
Ifyouwanttochangethetempoofasongyouve
alreadycreated,youcanfirstexecuteCopySongs
TempotoRegionsothatthetempoofthemastertrack
etc.matchesthesongtempoandregiontempo.Then
youcancreateanaudiotrackthatmatchesthenew
tempo. Time signature
Note:Thetempoofaregionisspecifiedatthetimeof Length
(beats, clocks)
recording.YoucanalsomodifyitusingTriminAudio
EventEdit.
TheTimeStretchcommandwillnotbeexecutedif
AllowTempo(TrimDialog)isOff. Location within the Note number Velocity
measure (beat, clock)
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackforwhichyou
wanttoexecutetheTimeStretchcommand. 3. Theremainingstepsarethesameaswhenstep
2. ChooseAdjustRegiontoSongsTempo(Time recordingonatrack.
Stretch)toopenthedialogbox. Refertosteps3andfollowingintheMIDIStep
3. UseFromMeasuretoselectthefirstmeasureto Recordingmenucommand.However,step
whichyouwanttoapplyTimeStretch,anduseTo recordingapatterndiffersfromsteprecordinga
EndofMeasuretoselectthelastmeasure. trackinthatwhenyoureachtheendofthepattern,
youwillreturntothebeginningandcontinue
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasure
recording,inthiswaycontinuingtoaddmoredata.
willbetherangeofmeasuresyouspecifiedinthe
TrackEditpage.)
4. IfyouwanttoapplyTimeStretchtoallaudio Event Edit
tracks,checkAllAudioTracks.
Hereyoucaneditindividualeventsofthemusicaldata
Ifthisisnotchecked,theTimeStretchcommand
inapattern.
willbeappliedtothetrackyouspecifiedinTrack
Select. UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythepattern,
5. UseQualitytospecifytheaudioqualityofthe andthenselectthiscommand.
samplethatisproducedbytheTimeStretch Theremainingstepsarethesameaswheneditinga
command. MIDItrackusingtrackeventediting.SeeMIDIEvent
Youcanchooseasettinginarangeof07.Although Edit.
theresultwilldependonthetypeofsample,higher
settingsgenerallyproducebetterresults,butwill
takelongertoexecute. Pattern Parameter
Sinceyoucantrythiscommandasmanytimesas Thiscommandspecifiesthenumberofmeasuresand
youlike,startwithavalueofabout4,andraiseit thetimesignatureoftheselectedpattern.
littlebylittleifnecessary. 1. UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythe
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheTimeStretch pattern.
command,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel. 2. SelectPatternParametertoopenthedialogbox.
612
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Erase Pattern
(Bydefault,thiswillbethesongandpatternthat
wasselectedinthePatternEditpage.)
3. InTo:SongandPattern,specifythecopy
destinationsongandpattern.
ForPattern,onlyuserpatternsU00U99canbe
specified.
3. InLength,specifythenumberofmeasuresinthe 4. ToexecutetheCopyPatterncommand,pressthe
pattern. OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
4. InMeter,specifythetimesignatureofthepattern.
However,thistimesignatureisonlytemporary,and
whenyouputorcopythepatterninatrackofa Bounce Pattern
song,thepatternwillplayaccordingtothetime Thiscommandcombinesthemusicaldataofthe
signatureofthatmeasure. bouncesourcepatternandbouncedestinationpattern,
5. ToexecutethePatternParametersettings,press andplacesthecombinedmusicaldatainthebounce
theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. destination.Thetimesignatureandlengthofthe
patternfollowingexecutionwillbeaccordingtothe
settingsofthebouncedestination.UnliketheTrack
Erase Pattern Bounceoperation,themusicaldataofthebounce
sourcewillnotbeerased.
Thiscommanderasesthedatafromtheselected
pattern. IfMIDIcontroldataexistsintheselectedpatternand
inthebouncedestinationpattern,theresulting
1. UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythe
playbackfollowingthebounceoperationmayproduce
pattern.
unexpectedresults.Werecommendthatyouusethe
2. SelectErasePatterntoopenthedialogbox. MIDIEventEditcommandtopreparetheMIDI
controldataofthetwopatternsbeforeexecutingthe
BouncePatterncommand.
bouncesourcepattern.
2. SelectBouncePatterntoopenthedialogbox.
3. IfyoucheckAllPatterns,alluserpatternsinthe
songwillbeerased.
IfAllPatternsisnotchecked,onlythepattern
specifiedinstep1willbeerased.
4. ToexecutetheErasePatterncommand,pressthe
3. InFrom(Song***)Pattern,selectthebounce
Copy Pattern sourcepattern.
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsandmusicaldataof (Bydefault,thesongandpatternthatareselectedin
theselectedpatterntoanotherpattern. thePatternEditpagewillbechosen.)
4. InTo:SongandPattern,selectthebounce
Userpatternsbelongtoaparticularsong,butyoucan
destinationsongandpattern.
usetheCopyPatterncommandtousethesamepattern
inanothersong. ForPattern,onlyuserpatternsU00U99canbe
specified.
Also,whilepresetpatternscannotbeedited,youcan
copyapresetpatterntoauserpatternandthenedit 5. ToexecutetheBouncePatterncommand,pressthe
andsaveitasauserpattern.Beawarethatwhenyou OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
executetheCopyPatternoperation,thepattern
settingsandmusicaldataofthecopydestinationwill
beerased. Get From MIDI Track
1. SelectCopyPatterntoopenthedialogbox. ThiscommandtakesmusicaldatafromaMIDItrack
andloadsitintothespecifiedpattern.
pattern.
2. InthePatternParametermenucommand,
specifythepatternlengthofthegetdestination.
3. SelectGetFromMIDITracktoopenthedialog
box.
2. InFrom(Song***):Pattern,specifythecopysource
pattern.
613
Sequencer mode
4. InSong,selectthegetsourcesong.
5. InTrack,selectthegetsourceMIDItrack.
6. InMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureoftheget
source. Note:IfyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
switchwhilethedialogboxisopen,theselected
7. ToexecutetheGetFromMIDITrackcommand,
patternwillplayback.
button. 2. InPatternandPatternSelect,selecttheput
sourcepattern.
(Bydefault,thiswillbethepatternselectedinthe
Put To MIDI Track PatternEditpage)
ThiscommandplacesapatternintoaMIDItrack. InTo:Track,selecttheputdestinationMIDI
track.
UnliketheCopyToMIDITrackmenucommand,
thiscommandonlyplacesthepatternnumberinthe 3. InMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureoftheput
song,sothatwhenplaybackreachesthatpoint,the destination.
patternwillberecalled.Themusicaldataofthepattern 4. ToexecutethePutToMIDITrackcommand,press
willnotactuallyexistinthetrack. theOKbutton.Whenyouexecutethecommand,
Bycreatingpatternsthatcontainfrequentlyused Measurewillautomaticallycountup.
phrasesordrumpatterns,andthenplacingthemon Ifyouwishto,youcancontinueputtingthe
thetracks,youcanconservememory. pattern.Toexitthecommand,presstheExitbutton.
Beawarethatwhenyoueditapattern,alllocationsin
thesongwherethatpatternhasbeenplacedwillbe
affected. Copy To MIDI Track
WhenyouexecutethePutToMIDITrackcommand, Thiscommandcopiesthespecifiedareaofmusical
themusicaldatawillbeaffectedasfollows. datafromthespecifiedpatterntoaMIDItrackas
musicaldata.
Musicaldatapreviouslyexistingattheput
destinationwillbeerased. UnlikethePutToMIDITrackcommand,this
commandactuallywritesthemusicaldataofthe
Thepatternthatyouputwillplaybackaccording
patternintotheMIDItrack,sothatyoucaneditthe
tothetimesignaturethatisspecifiedbythe
copieddatainthetrack.Evenifyoulatereditthecopy
measuresoftheputdestination.
sourcepattern,themusicaldataofthesongwillnotbe
Controldatasuchaspitchbendetc.(butnot affected.
includingvolumedata)previouslyexistinginthe
WhenyouexecutetheCopyToMIDITrackcommand,
trackwillberesetimmediatelybeforethemeasure
themusicaldatawillbeaffectedasfollows.
atwhichthepatternwasput.
Musicaldatapreviouslyexistinginthecopy
Ifyouwishtousecontroldatasuchaspitchbendin
destinationmeasureswillbeerased.
themeasuresinwhichapatternisput,youmust
firstwritethecontroldataintothepattern. Themusicaldatathatiscopiedwillplayback
accordingtothetimesignaturespecifiedatthe
Todeleteapatternthathasbeenplacedinatrackyou
copydestinationmeasures.
canusetheEraseMeasuremenucommand,
specifyingtheareainwhichthepatternwasput,and
settingKindtoAll. Example: Copy the musical data of pattern 41 to measure 2
Before Copy 1 2 3 4
Example: Pattern 20 has been Put at measures 2, 4, and 6 of track 10. When those measures
are reached, pattern 20 is called and its data is played.
Pattern 41
Track 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
(Drums)
After Copy 1 2 3 4
Pattern 20 TheprocedureisthesameasforthePutToMIDITrack
command.Formoreinformation,seePutToMIDI
Trackonpage 614.
1. SelectPutToMIDITracktoopenthedialogbox.
Copy KARMA Module

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyKARMA
Moduleonpage 464.
614
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Initialize KARMA Module
Initialize KARMA Module DrumKit IFX Patch

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInitializeKARMA Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDrumKitIFXPatch
Moduleonpage 465. onpage 466.
Copy Scene Copy MFX/TFX

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopySceneon Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyMFX/TFXon
page 151. page 157.
theChparameterontheMFX12pages,willnotbe
Swap Scene copied.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapSceneon
page 151.
Swap MFX/TFX
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXon
Capture Random Seed page 158.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCaptureRandom Note:theslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedby
Seedonpage 151. theChparameterontheMFX12pages,willnotbe
swapped.
Auto Assign KARMA RTC Name

Formoreinformation,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC Write FX Preset
Nameonpage 143. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 158.
Copy Note Map
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyNoteMapon Put Effect Setting to Track
page 143
ThisinsertseffectsettingsintoatrackasSystem
Exclusiveevents.Usethiswhenyouwanttochange
Copy Insert Effect theeffectsettingsduringasong.
IfyouuseMIDIparameterchangesystemexclusive
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyInsertEffect
messagestochangetheeffectsettings,itwilltakea
onpage 153.
certainamountoftimefortheeffectchangeto
Note:theslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedby occur.Inaddition,thesoundmaynotchange
theChparameterontheIFX112pages,willnotbe smoothlyifsoundisbeingproducedatthattime.Be
copied. awareofthetimingofyourplaybackdata,and
maketheappropriateadjustmentstothelocationat
whichthesystemexclusivemessageisinserted.
Swap Insert Effect Note:Ifyouswitcheffectsduringthesong,you
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapInsertEffect shouldalsoinsertthiscommandatthebeginningof
onpage 154. thetrack(Measure001,Beat.Tick01.000)aswell,so
thatthesongstartswiththecorrecteffect.
theChparameterontheIFX112pages,willnotbe 1. UseP8:InsertEffectorP9:Master/TotalEffectto
swapped. edittheeffectyouwanttoinsert(IFX112,MFX1,
2,TFX1,2),anddeterminethesong,track,
measure,beat,andclockatwhichyoushould
Insert IFX Slot inserttheSystemExclusiveevent.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertIFXSloton Forexample,letssupposethatIFX6whichisused
page 154. ontrack3needstochangeatthebeginningof
measure9.
Cut IFX Slot

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCutIFXSloton
page 155.

Routingsonpage 156.
615
Sequencer mode
InsertEffectpage,choose051:StereoPhaserfor
IFX3.
IfyouuseMIDIparameterchangesystemexclusive
messagestomodifyeffectsettings,itwilltakea
certainamountoftimefortheeffectchangeto
occur.Ifnotesaresounding,theremaybecasesin
whichthesounddoesnotchangesmoothly.
Considerthetimingoftheperformancedata,and
insertthesystemexclusivemessageatalocation
thatwillcauseminimaldisruptiontothesound.
Youcanonlyinserteventstospecifythetypeof
effectandtheeffectparameters.Settingsforeffect
on/offandbusselectionmustberecordedin
2. SelectPutEffectSettingtoTracktoopenthe realtime.
dialogbox.(Thevaluesshowninthedialogbox 1)Insertingeffectsettingsatthebeginningandinthe
arethesettingsforexample(1).) middleofthesong
Inthisexamplewellusethepagemenucommand
PutEffectSettingtoTracktoinsertMIDIparameter
changesystemexclusivemessagesintoMIDItrack2so
thattheinserteffect(IFX3)uses051:StereoPhaserfor
measures1through8,and048:StereoFlangerfor
measures9andfollowing.
1. SelectthedesiredprogramforMIDItrack2,and
sendittoIFX3.
3. UseEffecttoselecttheeffectthatyouwantto MakethefollowingsettingsforMIDItrack2.
insert. TrackSelect:MIDITrack02(P0)
4. UseTo:Songtospecifythesong,Tracktospecify BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign):IFX3(P8)
thetrack,Measuretospecifythemeasure,and UsetheP0:MIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpageto
Beat.Ticktospecifythebeatandclockatwhich assignthedesiredprogramtotrack2,andusethe
youwanttoinserttheevent. P8:InsertEffectpagetoroutetheeffecttotrack3
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethePutEffect andmakeeffectsettings.
SettingtoTrackcommand.Ifyoudecidetocancel,
presstheCancelbutton.
Theinsertedeventcontainsonlythetypeofeffect
andtheeffectparameters.Youllneedtorealtime
recordtheeffecton/offstatusandthebus,etc.
Note:Returnthelocationtoapointearlierinthesong,
andplaybacktoverifythattheeffectchangesasyou
intend.YoucanalsousetheP4:TrackEditpagemenu
commandMIDIEventEdittoverifythata
parameterchangesystemexclusivemessage
(Exclusive)hasbeeninserted.
Note:Ifapatternhasbeeninsertedattheinsert
destination,thatpatternwillbeexpandedintonote
data.
Using Put Effect Setting to Track to switch effects

2. SetTrackSelecttoMIDITrack02,andspecifythe
ThePutEffectSettingtoTrackpagemenucommand desiredrouting.
insertseffectsettingsintoatrackasexclusiveevent
data. 3. InP8:InsertEffect,choosethePutEffectSetting
toTrackpagemenucommandtoopenthedialog
Inthisexample,wellapplyIFX3toMIDItrack2,and box.
maketheeffect051:StereoPhaserchangeto048:Stereo
4. Specifytheeffectandinsertionlocationforthe
Flangerinthemiddleofthesong.Welldescribetwo
exclusivemessageyouwanttoinsert.
waysofdoingthis;1)and2).
Effect:IFX3
Inordertoperformthisexample,beginbymakingthe
followingsettings. To:Song:000
IntheP0:MIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage,use Track:03
ProgramSelecttochoosethedesiredprogramfor Measure:001
MIDItrack02. Beat.Tick:01.000
IntheP8:MIDIRouting1page,routeMIDItrack02 5. PresstheOKbutton.
IFX/Indiv.OutAssigntoIFX3.ThenintheP8
616
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands Put Effect Setting to Track
6. Specifytheeffectthatyouwanttouseformeasure 4. Insong001,maketheeffectsettingsthatyouwant
9andfollowing. tousefrommeasure9.GototheP8:InsertFX
GototheP8:InsertFXpage,andchoose048:Stereo page,andchoose048:StereoFlangerforIFX3.
FlangerforIFX3. 5. IntheP8:InsertFXIFX3page,settheparameters
7. IntheP8:IFX112IFX3page,settheparameters asdesired.
asdesired. 6. ChoosePutEffectSettingtoTracktoopenthe
8. IntheP8:InsertFXpage,choosethePutEffect dialogbox.
SettingtoTrackpagemenucommandtoopenthe 7. Inserttheeffectsettingsyoucreatedinsong001
dialogbox. intosong000.
9. Specifytheeffectandinsertionlocationforthe Effect:IFX3
exclusivemessageyouwanttoinsert. To:Song:000
Effect:IFX3 Track:03
To:Song:000 Measure:009
Track:03 Beat.Tick:01.000
Measure:009 8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.
Beat.Tick:01.000 Afterexecution,selectsong000andplayitback.
10.PresstheOKbutton. Theeffectfortrack3willchangeto048:Stereo
Whenyouplaybackafterexecutingthese Flangeratmeasure9.
commands,theeffectontrack3willchangeto048: 9. Insong000,youcanpresstheCOMPAREswitch
StereoFlangeratmeasure9. (itwilllight)andplaybacktohearthesongasit
11.IfyoupresstheCOMPAREswitch(itwilllight) wasbeforeyouexecutedPutEffectSettingto
andplayback,theplaybackwilloccurasitdid Track.
beforeyouexecutedPutEffectSettingtoTrack. YoucanusetheCOMPAREswitchtocomparethe
YoucanusetheCOMPAREswitchtocomparethe stateofthetrackbeforeandafterexecution.
stateofthetrackbeforeandafterexecution. Note:IntheP4:TrackEditpageofsong000,set
12.IntheP4:TrackEditpage,setTrackSelecttoTrack TrackSelecttoTrack03andchoosetheMIDI
03,andchoosetheMIDIEventEditpagemenu EventEditpagemenucommandtoaccessthe
commandtoaccesstheeventeditscreen.(Inthe EventEditscreen.(IntheSetEventFiltersdialog
SetEventFiltersdialogbox,checkExclusive.) box,checkExclusive.)
NoticethataMIDIparameterchangesystem NoticethataMIDIparameterchangesystem
exclusivemessageisinsertedatthebeginningand exclusivemessageisinsertedatmeasure9oftrack
atmeasure9oftrack3. 3.
2)Usingthesongsowneffectsettingsfromthe
beginningofthesong,andinsertingeffectsettings
fromelsewhereintothemiddleofthesong
Inthisexample,wellapplyaninserteffect(IFX3)to
MIDItrack3,andmakesettingssothatituses051:
StereoPhaserfromthebeginningofthesong.At
measure9,wellinsertaMIDIparameterchange
systemexclusivemessagetomakeIFX3switchtothe
048:StereoFlangereffectsettingsthatwerecreatedfor
adifferentsong.
1. SelectadesiredprogramforMIDItrack3,and
sendittoIFX3.
MakethefollowingsettingsforMIDItrack3.
TrackSelect:MIDITrack03(P0)
BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign):IFX3(P8)
IntheP0:MIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage,
assignaprogramtotrack3.ThenusetheP8:Insert
Effectpagetoroutetrack3totheeffect,andmake
effectsettings.
2. UseTrackSelecttoselectMIDITrack03,and
recordonit.
3. Onaseparatesongyoucopied,maketheeffect
settingsthatyouwantstartusingatmeasure9.
1)CreatesongS001.
2)UsetheCopyFromSongpagemenucommand
tocopyfromSong000toSong001.
617
Sequencer mode
System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode

YoucanrecordandplaybackSystemExclusiveevents, ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI
andedittracksthatcontainSystemExclusiveevents. device
SysEx messages that can be recorded in real-time ParameterchangesinSequencermode(seetable

below)
Thefollowingexclusivemessagescanberecordedin
realtime: MasterVolumeuniversalexclusivemessages
assignedtothefootpedaloraknob
Parameter change messages that you can realtime-record in Sequencer mode

Front panel/Page Parameter
KARMA ON/OFF, LATCH, MODULE CONTROL switches
Front panel
Control Surface CONTROL ASSIGN, MIXER KNOBS, PAD MODE switches
MIDI Prog Mixer Program Select, Pan, Volume, PLAY/MUTE, Solo On/Off *1
Audio Track Mixer Rec Source, Pan, Volume, PLAY/MUTE, Solo On/Off *1
P0: Play/REC Audio In Sampling All Audio Input parameters
All RT/KARMA REAL TIME CONTROL, KARMA SCENE, KARMA SWITCH,
Control Surface
KARMA SLIDER parameters, TONE ADJ. Assign, Value
Auto Load Prog EQ, Bypass, Input Trim, High Gain, Mid Frequency, Mid Gain, Low
MIDI Track EQ
Gain
Audio Track EQ Bypass, Input Trim, High Gain, Mid Frequency, Mid Gain, Low Gain
All Vector Volume Control parameters, VJS Assign, Center Volume, Enable Program
Vector Volume
Vector Volume
P1: EQ/Vector
Control All Vector CC Control parameters, Enable Song Vector CC, Enable Program Vector
Vector CC
CC
Vector Envelope All Basic, Vector Envelope Loop, Vector Envelope parameters
Set Up Controllers All Panel Switch Assign, Modulation Knob Assign parameters
Set Up Pads All Pads Chord parameters
MIDI Track Priority
OSC Force OSC Mode, OSC Select, Portamento
Pitch Transpose, Detune, Bend Range, Use Programs Scale, Type, Key, Random
P2: Track Param
Delay Mode, Time, Base Note, Times
WaveSeq KARMA Key Sync, Swing, Quantize Trigger, KARMA Track On/Off Control
Audio Track Delay Mode, Time, Base Note, Times
GE Setup Key Zones Load GE Options
P7: KARMA
Name Note Map All parameters except Octave Replicate
MIDI/Audio Routing1/2 Bus Select, Send1, Send2, Fx Control Bus, Rec Bus
Insert FX IFX, IFX On/Off, Chain to, Chain, Pan, Bus Sel, REC Bus, Ctrl Bus, Send1, Send2
P8: IFX
IFX 1-12 All effect parameters
Common FX LFO All Common FX LFO 1, 2 parameters
MFX, MFX On/Off, Chain, Chain Direction, Chain Level, Return 1, Return 2, TFX, TFX
Routing
On/Off, Master Volume
P9: MFX/TFX
MFX 1/2 All effect parameters
TFX 1/2 All effect parameters
*1:SoloOn/Offisalwayscontrolledbyeventsinthe Youcannotsimultaneouslyrecordexclusive
track,regardlessoftheplay/mutestatusofthat messagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevice
track. andparameterchangesproducedbyediting.
Themaximumamountofexclusivedatathatcanbe Ifyourecordaparameterassignedtoacontrol
recordedatonceisapproximately320Kbytes.This changesuchasPanwiththeGlobalmodeGlobal
sizewilldecreaseifothereventsexistwithinthe P1:MIDI,MIDIFiltersettingsEnableControl
samemeasure. ChangeandEnableExclusivebothchecked,
editsyoumakeduringrecordingwillberecorded
bothascontrolchangedataandparameterchange
618
System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode Put Effect Setting to Track
data.Theserecordedeventsmaynotbereproduced
correctlyifyourewindorfastforwardduring
playback.Ifyouwanttorecordsuchevents,check
onlyoneofthesetwoEnablesettingsinGlobal
modeMIDIFilter.
619
Sequencer mode
620
Sampling mode
Sampling Overview
TheOASYScansampleexternalaudiofromtheanalog Finally,youcanalsosample(orrip)directlyfroman
orS/P DIFinputs,at48 kHz16bitresolution,inmono audioCD,inthedigitaldomain.
orstereo.YoucanrecordsamplesintoRAM,orsample OnceasampleisloadedintoRAM,youcanuseit
directlytodisk. directlyinDrumKits,ormakeitintoaMultisample
Youcanalsodigitallyresamplethecompletesoundof anduseitanywherethatyouuseROMMultisamples,
aProgram,Combi,orSong,playedliveorsequenced, suchasinHD1ProgramsorWaveSequences.
includinganyeffectsandKARMAgeneratedevents.
Sampling to RAM, or direct to disk
Sampling and RAM Approximate Sampling Time (min:sec)

Free RAM
Mono Stereo
TheOASYScomeswith1GBofRAMpreinstalled,
whichcanbeexpandedupto2GBwithauser 16 MB 2:54 1:27
installableDIMMmodule.Thismemoryisshared 64 MB 11:39 5:49
betweentheoperatingsystem,ROMandEXssamples,
128 MB 23:18 11:39
andRAMsamples.
Inparticular,thesizeofthecurrentlyloadedEXs 256 MB 46:36 23:18
samplestradesoffagainstthememoryavailablefor 512 MB 93:12 46:36
RAMsamples.ThemorespaceusedbytheEXs
samples,thelessisavailableforRAMsamples. Installing additional RAM
YoucanchoosewhichEXsareloaded,ifany,byusing YoucaninstalladditionalRAM,uptoatotalof2GB.
theExpansionSampleSetupmenucommand,onthe Formoreinformation,seeInstallingmemoryon
GlobalmodeBasicSetuppage.Formoreinformation, page 1092.
seeExpansionSampleSetuponpage 742.
EXssamplesandavailablesampleRAM Sampling to disk
Available Sample RAM Youcansampledirectlytodisk,creatingaWAVEfile.
EXs Loaded
1GB installed 2GB Installed Thisletsyourecordupto80minutescontinuously,in
eithermonoorstereo(mono:approximately440MB,
None 500 MB ~1.5 GB
stereo:approximately879 MB).
EXs1 ROM Expansion 187 MB ~1.2 GB
AslongastheyfitintotheavailableRAM,theseWAVE
EXs2 Concert Grand Piano 0 MB ~1 GB filescanthenbeloadedintoRAMandusedinDrum
Kits,HD1ProgramsorWaveSequences.
Note:TochecktheamountofsampleRAMavailable, WAVEfilescanalsobeusedinaudiotracksofthe
see01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationson sequencer,orusedtocreateanaudioCD.Formore
page 630. information,seetheOperationGuideunderAudio
Theamountofsamplingtimedependsontheamount recordingonpage 102,andCreatingandplaying
offreeRAM,asshownbelow: audioCDsonpage 181.
Sampling features
InDiskmode,youcanloadmultisample/sample
Sampling on the OASYS datafromvarioustypesofmedia.
TheOASYSfeaturesKorgsOpenSamplingSystem. Youcanloadseveraldifferentsampleformats,
Thisletsyouusesamplingandresamplingnotonlyin includingKorgsownformat,AkaiS1000/3000
SamplingmodebutalsoinProgram,Combination, samplesandprogramdata,andAIFForWAVE
andSequencermodes,withoptimizedfeaturesfor samples.
eachmode.
YoucanexportsamplescreatedontheOASYSas
Youcanperform48kHz16bitlinearmonoor AIFForWAVEfiles.
stereosampling.
YoucanusealloftheInsert,Master,andTotal
Amaximumof1,000multisamplesand4,000 effectstoprocesssignalsbeforesampling,from
samplescanbecreated. eitherinternalorexternalsources.Forinstance,you
canusecompression,EQ,decimation,etc.Youcan
621
Sampling mode
alsousetempobasedLFOordelayeffects,which AIFFformats)canbeassignedtoanindex(zone)to
canbeveryusefulwhensamplingrhythmicloops. createamultisample.
Samplingcanbeinitiatedbythefrontpanel ThewaveformcanbeviewedintheLCDscreen,
SAMPLINGorSEQUENCERSTART/STOP andeditedbyavarietycommandsincludingrate
switches,noteon,orthreshold.(Theavailable conversion(downsampling)andreverseplayback.
methodswilldependonthemode.)Threshold Start,loopstart,andendaddressescanbespecified
allowsyoutostartsamplingwhentheinputsignal insinglesampleunits.Looptune,reverseplayback,
exceedsaspecifiedlevel.InSamplingmode,you andlooplockfunctionsarealsosupported.
canalsocapturesoundbeforethetrigger.
TheUseZerofunctionautomaticallysearchesfor
Theanalogaudioinputssupportmicandlinelevel zerocrosspoints,makingiteasytofindthe
signals.DigitalaudioinputviaS/P DIFINsupports beginningorendofthewaveform,orlocationsthat
the96kHz,48kHzsamplerate. willnotproducenoisewhenthesampleisplayed
Youcandigitallysample(i.e.,rip)audiodata back.
fromanaudioCD,usingeitherinternalorexternal ThegridfunctiondisplaysaBPMbasedgridonthe
CDR/RWdrives. waveformdisplay,helpingyoutocreateloopsor
Sampleddatacanbeautomaticallyconvertedinto makewaveformeditsthatmatchthedesiredBPM.
anHD1Program.Itcanthenbeeditedandplayed Atthistime,youcansettheBPMvaluebypressing
justlikeanyotherProgram,includingprocessing TAPTEMPOinrhythmwiththesampleplayback.
withfiltersandeffects.Youcouldevenresample Eachmultisampleallowsyoutocreateupto128
thatProgram,andstartalloveragain indices.Eachindexconsistsofasample
MultisamplescanbeusedinWaveSequences. assignment,akeyzone,anoriginalkey,aplayback
Individualsamplescanalsobeusedindrumkits. pitch,andsettingssuchaslevel.
Whenyouturnoffthepower,allmultisampleand TheKeyboard&Paddisplayletsyouedita
sampledatainRAMmemorywillbelost.Before multisamplewhileviewingtheassignmentsand
youturnoffthepower,besuretosaveimportant zonesofeachsample.
datatodisk.WhentheOASYSisturnedon,the Samplenamesandmultisamplenamesofupto16
RAMmemorywillcontainnomultisamplesor characterscanbeassigned.Samplenamesand
samples,soyouwillfirstneedtoloadpreviously multisamplenamescanalsobeviewedinDisk
saveddataintoRAMbeforeyoucanplayoreditit. mode(seeTranslationonpage 761).
IfAutoOptimizeRAM(Global01d)ison,andthe TheTimeSlicefunctionautomaticallydetectsthe
writingdestinationforsamplingdataisRAM,the attackportionsofakickorsnareetc.inarhythm
RAMmemorywillautomaticallybeoptimizedafter loopsample(aloopedpatternofdrumsetc.),and
thedatahasbeenwritten.Thisisturnedonby dividesitintoseparaterhythminstrumentsounds.
default,butyoumayswitchiton/offasnecessary. Eitherstereoormonosamplescanbeused.A
Formoreinformation,seeAutoOptimizeRAM patterncorrespondingtothedividedsamplesis
onpage 704,andOptimizeRAMonpage 677. createdautomatically,sothatyoucanimmediately
usetheSequencermodeRPPRfunctiontoplaythe
patternandadjustthetempowithoutchangingthe
Editing in Sampling mode pitch.Youcanalsodothingssuchasadjustingthe
InSamplingmode,thesampledatayousampledor pitchofonlythesnare,replacingitwithadifferent
loadedfromvariousmedia(includingWAVEand sample,orchangingtheplaybacktimingonthe
Multisample
Index001 Index002 Index003 Index004
Top Key Top Key Top Key Top Key
Index 001 Index 002 Index 003 Index 004
0000: 0001: 0002: 0003:

Sample A Sample B Sample C Sample D
Multisample Program OSC (Single/Double)
Wave Sequence
Sample Drum Kit Program OSC (Drums)
622
Sampling Overview Sampling features
sequencer,inthiswaycreatinganewrhythmloop
basedontheoneyoustartedwith. Note: Changing velocity on the keyboard
TheTimeStretchfunctionletsyoumodifythe or pads
tempowithoutchangingthepitchofasample.You InSamplingmode,youcannotusekeyboardorpad
canselecteitherSustaining(suitableforsustain velocity(withPADMODEsettoVELOCITY
typeinstrumentssuchasstringsorvocals),orSlice SENSITIVE)tocontroltheloudnessofthesound.
(suitableforrhythmloopsondecaytype However,youwillbeabletousevelocitytocontrol
instrumentssuchdrums).Stereosamplesare effectsifyouselectVelocityasaDmodSource.
supported.
Forexample,youmightmakesettingsasfollows.
TheCrossfadeLoopfunctionisanimportant
BusSelectAllOSCto:IFX1(P8Routing)
loopingtoolthathelpssmoothoutirregularitiesin
longloopswhichcontaincomplexmaterial.By IFX1:005:StereoLimiter,On(P8InsertFX)
executingCrossfadeLoop,youcaneliminatethis StereoLimiter:
problemandcreatenaturalsoundingloops.
Ratio1.0:1
TheLink(withCrossfade)functionallowsyouto
jointwosamplesintoasinglesample.Youcanalso GainAdjust[dB]Inf
crossfadetheoverlappingportionofthesamplesat Source:VelocityorExponentialVelocity
thistime,sothatthevolumechangesgradually, Amount+40
producinganaturalsoundingtransition.
Ifyouareconvertingausermultisampleintoa
TheBPMAdjustfunction(playbackpitchadjust) programforuseinProgrammode,youcanraisethe
letsyouadjusttheplaybackpitchofeachindexso P4:Amp/EQAmp1/2ModulationVelocityIntensity
thattheloopfrequencymatchesthedesiredBPM valueasdesiredtocontrolthesound.
value.
Youcanuseresampling(auto)toautomatically
applyeffectstoasampleandcreateanewsample.
Sampling frequency and bit resolution
Amultisampleyoucreatecaneasilybeconverted Asshowninthediagram,samplingreadsthelevelof
intoaprogram(ConvertMSToProgram). theanalogsignalatfixedintervalsalongthetimeaxis,
andstoresthelevelsinmemoryasdigitaldata.
InSamplingmode,theselectedmultisampleor
Level
samplewillsoundwhenyouplaythekeyboard,
allowingyoutoheartheeditedcontentofthat
page.
Analog waveform
Time
Sampling in Program, Combination, and

Sequencer modes
48kHz
AperformanceinProgram,Combination,or Level
= 48,000 times every second
Sequencermodescanberesampledinternally,with = 0.0208 mS cycle
allaudioremainingindigitalform.Thisletsyou
Sampled digital 16bit
resampleaperformancethatusestheOASYSs waveform = 65,536 levels
Time
filters,effects,KARMA,andsequenceretc. of data
Externalaudiosourcesfromthevariousinputjacks
canbesampled.Aperformanceplayedonthe
OASYScanbemixedwiththeexternalaudio Thefixedintervalsmentionedabovearegenerally
sourceandsampled,oryoucansamplejustthe expressedasthesamplingfrequency.48kHz
externalaudiosourcewhilemonitoringthe (kilohertz)meansthatsamplingisperformed48,000
performanceplayedontheOASYS. timeseachsecond,andthattheintervalis1
(second)/48,000(times)=approximately0.00002083
InSequencermodewhenyousampleanexternal
(seconds)=approximately0.02083mS(millisecond).
audiosourcewhilelisteningtotheplaybackofthe
song,notedatawillbeautomaticallycreatedinthe Thehigherthesamplingfrequencyis,theclosertothe
track.YoucanusethisInTrackSamplingfunction originalanalogsignalthewaveforminmemorywill
tosamplevocalsorguitarwhilethesequenceris be.
running. Eachlevelisread,andconvertedintodigitaldata.The
YoucanresampletheSequencermodesong accuracyatthistimeisdeterminedbythebit
playbacktotheharddisk,useDiskmodetoeditthe resolution.Thisprocessconvertsananalogsignalwith
desiredorderofsongs,andthenusetheinternal infiniteresolutionintoadigitalsignalwithfinite
CDR/RWdriveoranexternalUSBconnectedCD resolution.With16bitresolution,eachlevelis
R/RWdrivetocreateanaudioCD. indicatedin65,536steps(thesixteenthpoweroftwo).
Thegreaterthebitresolutionis,theclosertothe
originalanalogsignalthewaveforminmemorywill
be.
623
Sampling mode
48kHz16bitsamplingisthesamequalityasinaudio
devicessuchasDAT.CDsuse44.1kHz16bit
sampling,whichisaslightlylowersampling
frequency.
624
Sampling P0: Recording 01: Recording
Sampling P0: Recording

Thispageiswhereyoumakebasicsettingsfor Specifyingthesamplingtime,loopsettings,and+12
recording(sampling),including: dBboost
Creatingandeditingmultisamplesandindexes Specifyingtheoutputdestinationsfortheexternal
Specifyingthewritingdestinationforthesamples audioinputs
yourecord,andselectingeithermonoorstereo Selectingthesourcetosample
samples Settingtherecordinglevel
01: Recording
01PMC
01a
01c
01b
01e
01d
01f
Hereyoucancreateandeditmultisamplesand 2. Selectanumberforwhichthemultisamplename
indexes,specifythewritingdestinationforthe isblank.
samplesyourecord,andselectstereoormono Alternatively,usethenumerickeys09tospecifya
sampling.Youcanalsospecifythesamplingtime,loop newmultisamplenumber,andpresstheENTER
settings,+12dBboost,andadjustthefinallevelofthe switch.
inputsignal.
Whenyouselectanewmultisamplenumber,the
Note:Normallyyouwillperformsamplingwhilein CreateNewMultisampledialogboxwillappear.
thispage(RecordingorAudioInput).
Note:Ifyouhavenotyetmadeaudioinputsettings,go
toP0AudioInputpageandmakethesesettings
beforeyouproceed.
01a: Multisample Select (MS)

Multisample Select (MS) [000999] 3. Ifyouwishtocreateastereomultisample,check
Selectsthemultisample. Stereo.
Eachmultisampleconsistsofthesamplesforoneor 4. Tocreatethemultisample,presstheOKbutton.To
moreindexes(anIndexisarangeorzoneofkeys). cancel,presstheCancelbutton.
ThisparametercanalsobesetfromP1P3. Amultisamplewillbecreatedasfollows(example).
Mono 001:NewMS______________001
Creating a new sample Stereo 001:NewMS______________001L
Tocreateanewmultisample, 002:NewMS______________001R
1. PresstheMultisampleSelectpopupbuttonto
accessthepopupmenu.
625
Sampling mode
Keyboard & Pads

Keyboard:Thisshowsthekeyrange,originalkey,and
rootkeyfortheselectedindex.Theredtriangles
indicatethekeyboardrange,andthewhitetriangle
indicatestheC4key.
Keyboard&Pads
Index zone (currently Pads 1...8 correspond to C2...G2.

selected Index is reversed) If you hold down the ENTER switch and press a pad, that index
will be selected and displayed in blue.
Original Key (currently selected
Original Key is displayed in red)
Index01 Index02 Index03...Index08
C4 key
Keyboard range
By holding down the ENTER switch and playing a note, you can select the corresponding
index, and the specified key will be the base key and will be shown in blue.
Note:Thebasekey(displayedinblue) ThisparametercanalsobesetfromP1P3:
InP1:SampleEdityoucanpresstheSAMPLING Multisample.Samplingandeditingintherespective
START/STOPswitchtoplaythesampleofthe pagewillapplytotheindexthatyouselecthere.
selectedIndexinoneshotmodefromStarttoEnd. Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,thiswillbe
Atthistime,thesamplewillsoundatthepitchof 001/008.Thisindicatesthatthereareeightindexes,and
thebasekey. thatcurrentlythefirstindexisselected.
PlaybackinthegriddisplayofP1andP2willbe Toincreasethenumberofindexes,useCreateinthis
accordingtotheplaybackpitchofthebasekey page.WhenyoupresstheCreatebutton,indexeswill
selectedhere,andthespecifiedtempo automaticallybeaddedfromtheleftmostzone,as
BPM/resolution(setinP1andP2). 002/002,003/003,(Theposition,zonewidth,and
ThePitchBPMAdjustmenucommandisbasedon originalkeylocationoftheindexthatiscreatedwhen
theplaybackpitchofthebasekeyyouspecifyhere. youpresstheCreatebuttoncanbesetinCreateZone
Preference(01e,31c).Youarealsofreetomodifythe
Pads:Bydefault,pads18areassignedtoC2G2. zonewidthandoriginalkeylocationlater.)
Whenyouchooseanindextowhichapadisassigned,
itisdisplayedinblue.Theindexzone,originalkey, Sample Select [----: ---No Assign----, 00003999]
andbasekeyofthepadscanbeviewedandeditedin SelectsasamplethatyousampledorloadedinDisk
thekeyboarddisplayorin01b. mode,andplayanotewithintheindexrangetosound
thatsample.Thesampleyouselecthereisthesample
01b: Index, Sample Select, Original Key, thatwillbeaffectedbyyoursamplingandediting
operationsinthevariouspages.Thisparameterisalso
Top Key, Create availableinP1P3.
Hereyoucansetthesample,originalkey,andrangeof :NoAssign:Nosampleisassignedtothe
theselectedindex. index.Therewillbenosoundwhenyouplaythe
keyboard.
Index [xxx (001128)/yyy (001128)]
Torecordasample,selectavacantsamplesuchas
Thisselectstheindextoviewandedit.
0000:.Whenyourecordasample,datawillbeloaded
EachzoneinamultisampleiscalledanIndex.For intotheselectedsample.Thesamplename(suchas
exampleonthe76notekeyboard,amultisamplecould NewSample_0000)willbeshownbesidethenumber.
bedividedintosevenzonesofoneoctave(12keys) ThissamplenamecanbemodifiedusingtheRename
each.EachofthesezonesisreferredtoasanIndex. Samplemenucommand.
Youwillassignasampletoeachoftheseindexes.
Youcanalsorecordasampleevenwhen:No
xxx:Theselectedindex.Choosethedesiredindex. Assignisdisplayed.Inthiscase,asamplenumber
yyy:Thetotalnumberofindexesinthemultisample. willbeselectedautomatically.
Note:Youcanalsoselectanindexbyholdingdownthe Evenifyourecordtoasamplethatalreadycontains
ENTERswitchandplayinganoteonthekeyboardor data,theselectedsamplewillnotbeoverwrittenthe
pad.Theindexthatincludesthisnotewillbeselected. datawillautomaticallybesampledtoavacantsample,
Thekeyyouspecifywillbethebasekey,andwillbe andthenewlyrecordedsamplewillreplacethe
displayedinblueinKeyboard&Pads. previoussampleintheindex.Ifyouwishtodeletea
sample,executetheDeleteSamplemenucommand.
626
Original Key [C-1G9] SetZoneRange:IfyouexecuteCreatewhenitis

Specifiesthekeythatwillplaythesampleatits notpossibletocreateanewindexaccordingtothe
originalpitch(i.e.,thepitchatwhichitwasrecorded). CreateZonePreferencesettings,thefollowing
Thepitchwillchangeinsemitonestepsrelativetothe dialogboxwillappear.Thisdialogboxwillalso
originalkey. appearifyouexecuteInsertwhenitisnotpossible
tocreateanewindexwiththecontentsoftheCut
Forexample,supposethatyourecordedasamplewith orCopy.ResettheZoneRange,andpresstheOK
OriginalKeyofF2.WhenthezoneoftheindexisC2 button.
B2,pressingtheF2keywouldplaybackthesampleat
itsoriginalpitch.PressingF#2wouldplaybackthe
sampleasemitonehigher.PressingE2wouldplayback
thesampleasemitonelower.Thepitchofthissampled
soundwillchangeinsemitonestepsbetweenC2and
B2,centeredatF2.
Theoriginalkeylocationcanalsobeviewedin
Keyboard&Pads.
Stereo
Note:IfConstantPitch(31b)ischecked,thesample
A indicationwillappearhereifyouhave
willbesoundedatitsoriginalpitchbyallnotesinthe
selectedastereomultisampleorsample,orifyou
zone.
recordedasamplewithMode(01d)settoStereo.
Top Key [C-1G9]
About stereo multisamples and stereo
Specifiesthehighestkeyinthezoneoftheindex.The
zoneisdefinedbythisTopKey. samples
Forexample,supposethatyousetaTopKeyofB2for Stereomultisamples:Underthefollowingconditions,
index001/002,andaTopKeyofB3forindex002/002. twomultisampleswillbehandledasastereo
Thismeansthatthezoneofindex001willbeB2and multisample.
lower,andthezoneofindex002willbeC3B3. IfyoucheckedStereowhencreatinganew
multisample(i.e.,selectedanewmultisamplein
Range MultisampleSelect01a)
Thisindicatesthezone(area)thatwasdeterminedby
IfyouexecutedtheMSMonoToStereopage
theTopKeysetting.
menucommand
ThesampleselectedbySampleSelectwillsoundin
IfyousampledwithMode(01d)settoStereo
thisarea.Thezoneforeachindexcanalsobeviewedin
Keyboard&Pads. Inthesecases,astereomultisamplewillbecreated
automaticallyusingthefollowingcriteria.
Create
1)Thelasttwocharactersofthetwomultisample
Thiscreatesanindex.Usethiswhenyouwishtoadda nameswillbeLandRrespectively,andtheearlier
sampletoamultisample. portionofthenamesareidentical.
WhenyoupresstheCreatebutton,anewindexwillbe 2)Thetwomultisampleswillhavethesamenumberof
createdaccordingtotheCreateZonePreference(01e, indexes,andtheirzonesettingsareidentical.
31c)parametersPosition,ZoneRange,andOriginal
Stereosamples:Underthefollowingcondition,two
KeyPosition.
sampleswillbehandledasastereosample.
Ifyouwishtodeleteanindexorexchangeindexes,use
WhenthesampleswererecordedwithMode(01d)
P3:MultisampleEdit.
settoStereo
IfwhenyouexecuteCreate(01b,31b)orInsert
IfyouexecutedtheSampleMonoToStereopage
(31b)itisnotpossibletocreateanewindex
menucommand
accordingtoyourCreateZonePreferencesettings,
oneofthefollowingdialogboxeswillappear.Ifyou Inthesecases,astereomultisamplewillbecreated
wishtocreateanewindex,performthefollowing automaticallyusingthefollowingcriteria.
procedure. 1)Thelasttwocharactersofthesamplenamewillbe
SetTopKey:SelectIndex001,setPosition(01e,3 LandRrespectively,andtheearlierportionofthe
1c)toLeft(toSelectedIndex),andexecuteCreateor namesareidentical.
Inserttoopenthedialogbox.Sothatanewindex 2)Twosamplesthatsatisfycondition1)forstereo
canbecreatedattheleftofindex1,resettheTop multisamplesareselected.
Keysetting,andpresstheOKbutton.
Stereomultisamplesandsamplesaredistinguished
internallybytheirnames.IfyouuseRenameMSor
RenameSamplemenucommandstomodify
multisampleorsamplenames,pleasepayattention
totheaboveconditions.
Asaconditionofastereosample,thesampling
ratesmustbeidentical.Youcanverifythesampling
rateofasamplebyusingthepagemenucommand
RateConvert.BeawarethatifyouuseRate
627
Sampling mode
ConverttoconverttheLandRsamplesto
differingsamplingrates,theywillnolongerbe 01d: REC Sample Setup
handledasastereosample.
Save to [RAM, DISK]
ADC OVERLOAD ! Specifiesthedestinationtowhichthedatawillbe
IfthesignallevelfromAUDIOINPUT14jacksistoo writtenduringsampling.
high,theADCOVERLOAD!indicationwillappear. RAM:ThesoundwillbesampledintoRAMmemory.
YoullneedtoadjusttheMIC/LINEgainselectswitch,
AsamplewrittenintoRAMmemorycanbeheard
theLEVELknob(AUDIOINPUT1and2only),orthe
immediatelyinSamplingmode.
outputlevelofyourexternalaudiosource.
YoucanchecktheremainingamountofRAMonthe
mainRecordingpage,under01f:FreeSample
01c: Recording Level [dB] Memory/Locations,asdescribedonpage 630.
Recording Level [Inf, 72.0+18.0] Note:TheamountofRAMavailableforusersampling
willvarydependinguponboththeamountofphysical
Thisadjuststhesignallevelatthefinalstageof
RAMinstalled,andthesizeofthecurrentlyloaded
sampling.
EXsbanks.Formoreinformation,seeSamplingand
Formoreinformation,seeSettinglevelsonpage 14, RAMonpage 621.
Tipsforeliminatingdistortionwhenusingtheanalog
DatawrittenintoRAMmemorywillbelostwhen
inputsonpage 15,andAvoidingextraneousnoise
thepoweristurnedoff,soyoumustsaveitifyou
onpage 14.
wanttokeepit.
Level Meter DISK:Sampleswillberecordedtotheinternalhard
Thisadjuststhesignallevelatthefinalstageof diskoraUSBconnectedexternalharddisk.
sampling.ThissettingcanalsobemadeintheP0 Whenyousample,aWAVEfileiscreatedonthedisk.
AudioInputpage. UsetheSelectDirectorypagemenucommandto
Themeterisactiveonlyduringstandbymode(after specifythewritingdestinationdiskanddirectory.To
pressingtheSAMPLINGRECswitch)andrecording. opentheresultingsample,youcaneitheruseDisk
modetoloadthesampleintoRAM,orusetheSelect
CLIP ! Directorymenucommandtoselectthefileandthen
If0dBisexceed,thedisplaywillindicateCLIP!This pressthePlaybuttonortheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
meansthatthelevelofthesamplingsignalistoohigh, switch.
soadjustthelevelasdescribedunderSettinglevels Youcannotloadadisksample(WAVEfile)that
onpage 14. exceedstheamountofavailableRAM.
Note:Ifyouhavesampledatalowinputlevel,youcan
usetheNormalize/LevelAdj.menucommandto Mode [L-Mono, R-Mono, Stereo]
amplifytheleveltothemaximumpossiblewithout Specifiesthechannel(s)thatyouwanttosample,and
clipping.Formoreinformation,seeNormalize/Level specifywhetheramonoorstereosamplewillbe
Adjustonpage 683. created.Formoreinformation,seeSourceBuson
page 633.
LMono:TheLchanneloftheSourceBuswillbe
sampledinmono.
Audioinput/output
"Audio Input" (08a)
Bus(IFX/Indiv.) "Source Bus" (0-8c)

ADC OVERLOAD !! = L/R or IFX1-12 Insert = L/R CLIP !!
Effects
AUDIO INPUT 1,2 ADC Total L-Mono
LEVEL Analog to
(MIC/LINE) Digital "Level" "Pan" REC Sample Setup
(MIN...MAX) Converter [127=0dB] "Mode" (01d)
Master
ADC OVERLOAD !! Insert Effects
Effects
AUDIO INPUT 3,4 ADC
Analog to
Digital "Level" "Pan" "Recording Level" (01c)
Converter [127=0dB] [inf ... 0.0dB ... +18.0dB]
Insert
Effects
L/MONO AUDIO
R
"Level" "Pan"
[127=0dB]
"CDRW-1 Insert
Drive Audio Input" (5-1b)
Select Effects
CDRW-1 (L, R)
"Level" "Pan"
[127=0dB]
USB (CD Drive: L, R) Bus(IFX/Indiv.)

= L/R or IFX1-12
628
RMono:TheRchanneloftheSourceBuswillbe SourceBus:L/R(08c)
sampledinmono. Resample:Manual(08c)
Stereo:TheLandRchannelsoftheSourceBuswillbe RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired(01c)
sampledinstereo,creatingastereomultisample.
Mode:Stereo(01d)
Example: Sampling a mono source connected to (seediagramin08c:SourceBus=L/R)
AUDIO INPUT 1
IfusingtheAudioInput: Example: sampling a stereo input, with internal
effects
SourceBus:AudioInput1/2(08c)
Here,wellapplytheinternaleffect012:St.Graphic
Resample:Manual(08c) 7EQtoastereosourceconnectedtoAUDIOINPUT1
RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired(01c) and2,andthensampleinstereo.
Mode:LMono(01d) Input1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1(08a)
(seediagramin08c:SourceBus=AudioInput1/2) Input1Pan:L000(08a)
IfusingtheL/RBus: Input1Level:127(08a)
Input1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):L/R(08a) Input2BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1(08a)
Input1Pan:L000(08a) Input2Pan:R127(08a)
Input1Level:127(08a) Input2Level:127(08a)
SourceBus:L/R(08c) SourceBus:L/R(08c)
Resample:Manual(08c) Resample:Manual(08c)
RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired(01c) IFX1:select012:St.Graphic7EQ(P8)
Mode:LMono(01d) RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired(01c)
(seediagramin08c:SourceBus=L/R) Mode:Stereo(01d)
Example: Sampling a mono input, with internal (seediagramin08c:SourceBus=L/R)

stereo effects Example: Sampling from the S/P DIF input
Here,wellapplytheinternalinserteffect101:Reverb SourceBus:S/PDIFL/R(08c)
HalltoamonosourceconnectedtoAUDIOINPUT1,
andthensampleinstereo. Resample:Manual(08c)
Input1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1(08a) RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired(01c)
Input1Pan:C064(08a) Mode:Stereo(01d)
Input1Level:127(08a) (seediagramin08c:SourceBus=S/PDIFL/R)
SourceBus:L/R(08c) Note:Fordetailsonresampling,seeResampleon
page 634.
Resample:Manual(08c)
IFX1:select101:ReverbHall(P8) Sample Time [min sec]
Specifiestheamountoftimethatyouwishtosample,
RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired(01c)
in0.001secondincrements.
Mode:Stereo(01d)
Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,this
(seediagramin08c:SourceBus=L/R) parameterindicatesamountofremainingRAM
memoryintheselectedmemorybank(theavailable
Example: Sampling a stereo source connected to
samplingtime).Ifyourecordasampleinthis
AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 condition([REC][START][STOP]),thechangein
IfusingtheAudioInput: timewillbedisplayedautomatically.
SourceBus:AudioInput1/2(08c) IfSavetoissettoDISK,themaximumvalueis
Resample:Manual(08c) calculatedfromtheamountofremainingspaceonthe
selecteddisk.
RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired(01c)
Tips:IfyouhavesufficientRAMmemory,itisagood
Mode:Stereo(01d) ideatosetanampleSampleTime,andtousethe
(seediagramin08c:SourceBus=AudioInput1/2) Truncate(forSampleEdit),Truncate(forLoop
IfusingtheL/RBus: Edit)pagemenucommandafteryousampletodelete
unwantedportionsofthesampleandreduceittothe
Input1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):L/R(08a) minimumsizenecessary.Youcanalsopressthe
Input1Pan:L000(08a) SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtomanuallystop
samplingafteryouhaverecordedthedesiredmaterial.
Input1Level:127(08a)
FormoredetailsonsamplingpleaseseeSampling
Input2BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):L/R(08a)
(OpenSamplingSystem)onpage 123ofthe
Input2Pan:R127(08a) OperationGuide.
Input2Level:127(08a)
629
Sampling mode
IfSavetoissettoRAM,andyoucontinuesampling Position [Right (to Selected Index),

withAutoOptimizeRAMdisabled,wastedspace Left (to Selected Index)]
willdevelopinmemory,decreasingtheamountof
Specifieswhetherthenewindexwillbecreatedatthe
availableRAM.Inthiscase,usetheOptimizeRAM
rightorleftoftheselectedindex.
commandtorecoverthewastedspace.Formore
information,seeOptimizeRAMonpage 677. Right(toSelectedIndex):Thenewindexwillbe
createdattherightofthecurrentlyselectedindex.
Note:FreeSampleMemory/Locations(01f)letsyou
checktheremainingamountofRAM. Left(toSelectedIndex):Thenewindexwillbecreated
attheleftofthecurrentlyselectedindex.
Theremainingamountofmemorywilldependonthe
followingconditions: Zone Range [1 Key127 Keys]
Theamountofmemorythatisinstalled. Specifiesthekeyrangeofthenewlycreatedindex.
ThesizeofanyloadedEXssamples. 1Key:Eachindividualnoteofthekeyboardwillbean
Whethersamplinginstereoorinmono.IfMode index.Thesampleofanindexwillsoundatitsoriginal
(01d)issettoStereo,themaximumSample keywhenyouplaythatnote.
Timewillbehalved. 2Keys127Keys:Thesamplewillchangepitchin
ThetimespecifiedforPreTriggerREC(08c:a semitonestepsacrossthespecifiednumberofkeys,
functionthatautomaticallysamplesthesoundeven centeredontheoriginalkeyOriginalKey(01b,31b).
beforeyoubeginsampling)willbesubtractedfrom IfConstantPitch(31b)ischecked,thepitchwillnot
theamountofmemorythatactuallyremains. change.
Auto Loop On [Off, On] Original Key Position [Bottom, Center, Top]
On(checked):Therecordedsamplewillautomatically Specifieswheretheoriginalkeywillbelocatedinthe
beplayedwithloopingturnedonLoop(21d). zone(specifiedbyZoneRange)foranewlycreated
Whenyouplayback,thatsamplewillloop. index.
Bottom:Thelowestkeyinthezonewillbetheoriginal
Auto +12dB On [Off, On] key.
ThissettingappliesonlywhenSavetoissettoRAM.It
Center:Themiddlekeyinthezonewillbetheoriginal
doesnotapplyifSavetoissettoDISK.
key.
On(checked):The+12dB(21d)settingwill
Top:Thetopkeyinthezonewillbetheoriginalkey.
automaticallybeturnedonfornewlycreatedsamples.
Samplesforwhich+12dBisonwillplay
approximately+12dBlouderthanifthe+12dBsetting 01f: Free Sample Memory/Locations
wasoff.
RAM [000.0999.9 sec]
Youwillnormallyturnthisoff(unchecked)whenyou
sampleanexternalaudiosourceinSamplingmode,or ThisshowstheremainingamountofsampleRAM,in
applyinserteffectstoasampleandresampleit.(In bothsecondsandbytes.ThefreeRAMdeterminesthe
Samplingmode,thedefaultforthissettingisOff.) availablesamplingtime,themaximumsizeofsample
filesthatcanbeloadedinDiskmode,andthe
Whenyouaresamplingmorethanoneexternalaudio
maximumsizeofsamplesduringediting.Thegraphto
source,oranaudiosourcemixedwithyourkeyboard
therightshowsthefreespaceinwhite,andtheused
performance,setRecordingLeveltoapproximately0.0
spaceinblue.
(dB)sothattherecordinglevelwillbetheoptimum
levelthatdoesnotcauseclipping.Thiswillallowthe NotethattheamountofRAMavailableforuser
sampleddatatoberecordedattheideallevel,butthe samplingwillvarydependinguponboththeamount
playbacklevelwillbelowerthanitwasduring ofphysicalRAMinstalled,andthesizeofthecurrently
sampling. loadedEXsbanks.
InsuchcasesyoucancheckAuto+12dBOnwhenyou Multisamples [00000999/1000]
resample,sothattheplaybacklevelisthesameasthe
levelduringsampling. Samples [00004000/4000]
Note:TheAuto+12dBOnsettingissetseparatelyfor Samples in MS [00003999/4000]
eachmode:Program,Combination,Sequencer,and
Theseshowthenumberofmultisamplesandsamples
Sampling.
inRAM,aswellasthenumberofsampleswhichare
alreadyplacedinmultisamples.Thecurrentnumbers
01e: Create Zone Preference areshownontheleft,andthemaximumnumbersare
shownontheright.
Thesesettingsdefinetheinitialstateoftheindexesthat
arecreatedwhenyoupresstheCreatebutton(01b,3 Thegraphstotherightshowthefreeamountsin
1b).Eachnewindexwillbecreatedaccordingtothe white,andtheusedamountsinblue.
settingsyoumakehere,butyouarefreetomodifythe
settingslater.
630
Sampling P0: Recording 08: Audio Input
7:RenameMS.Formoreinformation,seeRename
t 01: Page Menu Commands MS(RenameMultisample)onpage 675.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 8:MoveMS.Formoreinformation,seeMoveMS
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese (MoveMultisample)onpage 676.
9:ConvertMSToProgram.Formoreinformation,
commandsonpage 142.
seeConvertMS(Multisample)ToProgramon
0:DeleteSample.Formoreinformation,see page 675.
DeleteSampleonpage 672.
10:MSMonoToStereo.Thiswillappearonlyif
1:CopySample.Formoreinformation,seeCopy thecurrentMSisMono.Formoreinformation,see
Sampleonpage 673. MSMonoToStereo/MSStereoToMono(Change
2:RenameSample.Formoreinformation,see MultisampleType)onpage 676.
RenameSampleonpage 673. 10:MSStereoToMono.Thiswillappearonlyif
3:MoveSample.Formoreinformation,seeMove thecurrentMSisStereo.Formoreinformation,see
MultisampleType)onpage 676.
4:SampleMonoToStereo.Formoreinformation,
seeSampleMonoToStereo(ChangeSample 11:OptimizeRAM.Formoreinformation,see
Type)onpage 674. OptimizeRAMonpage 143.
5:DeleteMS.Formoreinformation,seeDelete 12:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSave
MS(DeleteMultisample)onpage 674. toissettoDisk.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
6:CopyMS.Formoreinformation,seeCopyMS
(CopyMultisample)onpage 675. 13:AutoSamplingSetup.Formoreinformation,
seeAutoSamplingSetuponpage 677.
08: Audio Input

08PMC
08b
08a
08c
08d
Hereyoucanspecifytheoutputdestinationandinput Formoreinformation,pleasesee09c:AudioInputs
leveletc.fortheexternalaudiosignalsbeinginput onpage 22.
fromtheINPUTjacks.Hereyoucanalsospecifythe
sourcethatwillbesampled,andspecifyhowsampling
willbeinitiated.Youcanalsospecifyametronome 08a: Input
countdownbeforesamplingbegins.
Input1, Input2, Input3, Input4
Using the control surface to adjust Audio Input Thesearesettingsforanaloginputs1/4.Inputs1/2are
YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjusttheAudio mic/line;inputs34arelinelevelonly.
InputSend1(toMFX1),Send2(toMFX2),
PLAY/MUTE,SoloOn/Off,Pan,andLevel.
631
Sampling mode
S/P DIF L, S/P DIF R 1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin

stereotothespecifiedpairofRECbuses.ThePan
Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthedigitalaudioinput settingsendsthesignalinstereotobuses1and2or
fromtheS/P DIFINjack.Connectthedigitaloutputof buses3and4.
yourinstrumentorDATetc.totheS/P DIFINjack.The
S/P DIFinputandoutputoftheOASYSsupport48 Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]
kHzand96kHzsamplerates.Makethisselectionin
S/P DIFSampleRate(Global01d).96kHzsample Send2 (to MFX2) [000127]
ratedataisconvertedto48kHzwhenitissampled. Theseadjustthelevelsatwhichtheexternalaudio
WhenusingtheS/P DIFinput,makesurethatthe inputsignalissenttothemastereffects.
wordclocksonallconnecteddigitalaudiodevices Send1(toMFX1):Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.
areconfiguredcorrectly.Formoreinformation,see
Send2(toMFX2):Sendthesignaltomastereffect2.
SystemClockonpage 702.
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettoIFX112,thesend
Note:AudioinputsettingsforCDaudiofromthe
levelstothemastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX112
internalCDR/RWdriveoraUSBconnectedCDR/RW
Send1andSend2(85a).
drivearemadeinP5:AudioCD.
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.) [L/R, IFX112, 18, parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust
1/27/8, Off] AudioInputonpage 12)
Thisspecifiesthemainbusroutingfortheinputsignal.
PLAY/MUTE [Off, On]
L/R:TheinputsignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus. Thisindicateswhethertheexternalaudiosignalbeing
IFX112:TheinputsignalwillbesenttotheIFX112 inputisinPLAYorMUTEstatus.
bus.Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyouwanttoapply YoucanusetheMIXPLAY/MUTE16switchesto
aninserteffectwhilesampling. changethis.
18:Theinputsignalwillbesenttothespecified MUTE:Theexternalaudioinputsignalismuted
INDIVIDUALOUTPUTinmonaural.ThePansetting (silent),andwillnotbeinput.
willbeignored. PLAY:Theexternalaudioinputsignalisbeinginput
1/27/8:Theinputsignalwillbesentinstereo accordingtothesettingsoftherelevantparameters.
(includingtheeffectofthePancontrol)tothespecified Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
INDIVIDUALOUTPUTpair. parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust
Off:Theinputsignalwillnotberouteddirectlytothe AudioInputonpage 12)
outputsorInsertEffects.However,itmaystillbe
routedtoanFXControlBusorRECBus. SOLO On/Off
ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2] signalinput.YoucanusetheMIXSELECT16
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltoanFX switchestochangethis.
Controlbus(twostereochannels;FXCtrl1and2).See Soundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelsforwhich
FXControlBusesonpage 790. SOLOisOn.Samples,andmultisampleswillbe
REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4] muted.
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC ThesettingoftheExclusiveSolopagemenucommand
buses(fourmonochannels;14). specifieshowtheSolofunctionwilloperate.
UsetheRECbuseswhenyouwanttosamplein ExclusiveSoloOff:Selectedisoff,youcansolo
variousmodesortorecordaudiotracksinSequencer multipleaudioinputs.Thesolostatuswillchangeeach
mode.Thesearededicatedbusesforrecording. timeyoupressSoloOn/Off.
YoucansamplethesesignalsbysettingSourceBus(0 ExclusiveSoloOn:Selectedison,pressingaSolo
8c)toRECbus. buttonwillsoloonlythataudioinput.
NormallyyouwillsetSourceBus(08c)toL/R,and TheSOLOsettingisnotmemorizedwhenyou
samplethesignalfromtheL/Rbus.However,youcan Write.
usetheRECbuseswhenyouwanttoplaythe Tip:YoucanholddowntheENTERswitchandpress
keyboardorplaybackanaudioCDwhilesampling numerickey1toswitchExclusiveSoloon/off.
onlytheaudioinput.Youcanalsomixseveralaudio
inputsourcestotheRECbuses,ormixthedirectsound
parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust
ofanaudioinputwithsoundprocessedbyaninsert
AudioInputonpage 12)
effectandmixthemtotheRECbusesforsampling.See
thediagramSourceBus=RECBus1/2(08c). Pan [L000C064R127]
Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttothe Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheexternalaudioinput
RECbuses.NormallyyouwillusetheOffsetting. signal.Wheninputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill
14:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesenttothe normallysettheinputstoL000andR127respectively.
specifiedRECbus.ThePansettingisignored,andthe Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
signalissentinmonaural. parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust
AudioInputonpage 12.)
632
Level [0127] Pre Trigger REC [000500ms]

Specifiestheleveloftheexternalaudiosignalthatwill Ifyouwantaportionofsoundimmediatelybeforethe
beinput.Thedefaultis127. startofsamplingtobeincludedintherecorded
Formoreinformationonusingtheinputsandsetting sample,setthisparametertospecifythelength.
levels,pleaseseeAvoidingextraneousnoiseon WhensamplingwithTriggerThreshold,samplingwill
page 14,andTipsforeliminatingdistortionwhen startwhentheinputsignalexceedstheLevelthreshold
usingtheanaloginputsonpage 15. level.HoweveriftheLevelsettingcausesaportionof
Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis theattacktobelost,youcansetthePreTriggerREC
parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust parametertocapturetheearlyattackaswell.
AudioInputonpage 12.) WhensamplingwithTriggerSamplingSTARTSW,it
isbesttouseMetronomePrecountsothatthe
ADC OVERLOAD ! instrumentalperformanceetc.issampledintempo.If
IfthesignallevelfromAUDIOINPUT14jacksistoo theperformanceisaheadofthetempo,thisPreTrigger
high,theADCOVERLOAD!indicationwillappear. RECparameterletsyousamplewithoutlosinganyof
YoullneedtoadjusttheMIC/LINEgainselectswitch, it.
theLEVELknob(AUDIOINPUT1and2only),orthe Ifyouincreasethissetting,youwillalwaysbe
outputlevelofyourexternalaudiosource. samplinganunneededportionaheadofthedesired
sample.Normallyyoushouldsetthisto000ms,and
08b: Recording Level [dB] specifytheminimumrequiredlengthwhen
necessary.
Recording Level [Inf, 72.0+18.0]
Trigger [Sampling START SW, Note On, Threshold]
Level Meter Specifieshowsamplingwillbeinitiated.
CLIP ! SamplingSTARTSW:PressingtheSAMPLINGREC
switchwillcausetheOASYStoentersampling
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01c:Recording
standbymode,andsamplingwillbeginwhenyou
Level[dB]onpage 628.
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.
NoteOn:PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthen
08c: Sampling Setup presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter
samplingstandbymode.Samplingwillbeginwhen
Source Bus [L/R, REC1/23/4, Audio
youplaythekeyboard.
Input1/23/4, S/P DIF L/R,
Indiv.1/27/8] SamplingwillalsobeginifaMIDInoteonis
received(insteadofplayingthekeyboard).
Youcansampleinstereofromanypairofaudio
inputs,fromthetwostereoRECbusses,orfromthe Threshold:Samplingwillbeginautomaticallywhen
signalatanyofthe10outputs(L/RandIndividual1/2 theinputlevelexceedsthespecifiedThresholdLevel.
7/8).
Using Trigger = Sampling START SW
WhenyousamplefromanoutputpairorRECbus,
youllrecordallaudiosenttotheoutputorbus,
includinginternalProgramsorCombis,effects,audio
inputs,andHDRaudio. 2. UsetheRecordingLevel[dB]slidertoadjustthe
samplinglevel.
Whensamplinginstereo,theoddnumberedchannel
(suchas1,3,5,or7)correspondstotheleftchannel, 3. Samplingwillbeginwhenyoupressthe
andtheevennumberedchannel(suchas2,4,6,or8) SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.
correspondstotheright. (IfyouareusingtheMetronomePrecount
function,pressingtheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSourceBuson
switchwillcausesamplingtobeginafterthe
page 15.
metronomesoundsacountdown.IfMetronome
Source Direct Solo [Off, On] SetupBus(Output)Select(08d)issettoL/R,the
metronomewillstopsoundingatthemomentthat
ThisselectswhatisheardthroughtheL/Routputsand
samplingbegins.)
headphoneswhenSamplingRECisenabled.
4. Tostopsampling,presstheSTART/STOPswitch
On(checked):OnlythesignaloftheselectedSource
onceagain.
Buswillbeheard.Thisletsyouhearonlythesound
thatwillbesampled. Samplingwillalsostopautomaticallyifitcontinues
tothespecifiedSampleTime(01d).
Off(unchecked):ThesignaloftheselectedSourceBus
willbemergedwiththemainL/Rsignal.Thisisthe Ifyouwanttocreateanewsamplebyprocessingan
default. existingsoundthrougheffects(Resampling),set
TriggertoSamplingSTARTSW,andsetResample(0
Note:IfSourceBusissettoL/R,thissettingisignored 8c)toAuto.
sincethatsignalisnormallyheardattheL/Routputs
already! Using Trigger = Note On
1. Performsteps1and2describedabove.
633
Sampling mode
2. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. Auto:Thesampleassignedtotheindexwillbe
3. WhenyouplaythekeyboardorwhenaMIDI resampledautomatically.Usethiswhenyouwantto
noteonisreceived,samplingwillstart applyaneffecttoasampleandresampleit.
automatically. 1. SetKeytothekeyboardlocationwherethesample
4. Tostopsampling,performstep4,above. youthatyouwanttoresampleisassigned.
Samplingwillnotbepossibleifyouspecifyakeyto
Using Trigger = Threshold
whichasamplehasnotbeenassigned.
2. Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffect,settheP8:
RoutingpageBusSelect(81b)parametertoIFX1
2. UsetheRecordingLevel[dB]slidertoadjustthe 12,andselecttheinserteffectyouwanttouse.
samplinglevel.
Ifyouwanttoapplyamastereffect,usetheP8:
Becarefulofchangesinthemonitoringvolume. Routingpage(OSCMFXSend)Send1andSend2
(RecordingLevel[dB]08b) parameterstoadjustthesendlevels,anduseP9:
3. AdjusttheLevelsetting.Theredtrianglesatboth MFX/TFXtoselectthemastereffect(s)youwantto
sidesoftheRecordingLevel[dB]levelbar use.Ifyouwanttoapplyatotaleffect,useP9:
displaywillindicatetheLevelvalue. MFX/TFXtoselectthetotaleffectyouwanttouse.
Normallyyouwillsetthistoalowalevelas 3. SetSourceBus(08c)toL/R.
possiblewithoutallowingsamplingtobetriggered 4. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchtoenterrecord
bynoise. readymode.
4. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.When 5. WhenyoupresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
theinputlevelexceedstheLevelyouspecified, switch,thecurrentsamplewillplayback
samplingwillbeginautomatically. automatically,andtheresamplingwillbegin.
5. Tostopsampling,presstheSTART/STOPswitch Ifyouplaythekeyboardatthistime,thesoundyou
onceagain. playwillberesampledtogetherwiththesource
Alternatively,samplingwillendautomaticallyifit sample.
continuestothetimespecifiedforSampleTime(0 6. WhenthesampleassignedtotheKeyhasplayed
1d). backforitsfulllength,resamplingwillend
automatically.
Alternatively,youcanstopresamplingbypressing
Thisspecifieswhetherthemetronomewillsounda theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchonceagain.
countdownbeforesamplingbegins.Thiscanbeset
onlyifTriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW. Note:Whenresamplingends,theBusSelect(81b)
settingwillautomaticallyberesettoL/R.Atthesame
Off:Samplingwillbeginimmediatelywhenyoupress time,theMFX1On/Off,MFX2On/Off,TFX1
theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchfromrecording On/Off,andTFX2On/Off(91:Routing)settings
standbymode. willautomaticallybeturnedoff.Thesesettingsare
4,8,3,6:WhenyoupresstheSAMPLING madeautomaticallysothattheeffectwillnotbe
START/STOPswitchfromrecordingstandbymode, appliedagain(i.e.,asecondtime)whenyouplayback
themetronomewillcountthespecifiednumberof thesamplethatwasresampledwiththeeffect.Please
beatsatthesystemtempo,andthensamplingwill beawareofthisifyouwanttoresampleonceagain.
begin.Ifyousetthisto4,samplingwillbeginonthe Theparametersofthenewlycreatedsamplewillbe
countof0afteraprecountof43210. automaticallysetthesameasthesourcesamplewhen
playedback.
Theoutputdestinationandlevelofthemetronome
soundarespecifiedbyMetronomeSetup(08d).IfBus Key [C-1G9]
(Output)SelectissettoL/R,themetronomewillstop
WhenResampleissettoAuto,thisspecifiesthenote
soundingtheinstantsamplingactuallybegins.
towhichthesampletoberesampledisassigned.
Resample [Manual, Auto] ThiscanbesetonlyifTriggerissettoSamplingSTART
Specifieshowresamplingwilloccur. SW.
ThiscanbesetonlyifTriggerissettoSamplingSTART Fortheresamplingprocedure,seeResampleAuto.
SW.
Threshold Level [63dB0dB]
Theprocessofsamplingasample(orsamples)iscalled
WhensamplingwithTriggersettoThreshold,this
resampling.
specifiesthelevelatwhichsamplingwillbegin.This
Youcanapplyeffectstoasampleandthenresampleit, canbesetonlywhenTriggerissettoThreshold.See
orresampleaperformanceofsamplesthatyouplay. step3oftheTriggerThresholdprocedure.
Manual:Thisisthenormalmethod.Usethiswhenyou
wanttosampleanexternalinputsound.Ifasampleis
08d: Metronome Setup
alreadyassigned,thesampleassignedforplayingfrom
thekeyboardwillberesampledtogetherwiththe q (Tempo) [040.00240.00]
externalinputsound.
Thissetsthetempoofthecountdownwhen
MetronomePrecountisused.
634
Thistempoisalsousedbytheeffects,fortempo
synchronizeddelaysandLFOs.Youcanalsosetthe
tempobyusingtheTEMPOknobortheTAPTEMPO
button.
Bus (Output) Select [L, R, 18]

Thissetstheaudiooutputforthemetronomesound
playedbyMetronomePrecount(08c).
L/R:Themetronomewillbeheardinthemainstereo
outputs(L/MonoandR),theS/P DIFoutput,andthe
headphones.
Indiv.18:Themetronomewillbeheardonlyinthe
selectedindividualoutput.
Level [000127]
Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemetronomesound.

commandsonpage 142.
0:DeleteSample.Formoreinformation,see
1:CopySample.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sampleonpage 673.
2:RenameSample.Formoreinformation,see
RenameSampleonpage 673.
3:MoveSample.Formoreinformation,seeMove
Sampleonpage 673.
seeSampleMonoToStereo(ChangeSample
Type)onpage 674.
5:DeleteMS.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
MS(DeleteMultisample)onpage 674.
(CopyMultisample)onpage 675.
MS(RenameMultisample)onpage 675.
8:MoveMS.Formoreinformation,seeMoveMS
(MoveMultisample)onpage 676.
page 675.
thecurrentMSisMono.Formoreinformation,see
MSMonoToStereo/MSStereoToMono(Change
10:MSStereoToMono.Thiswillappearonlyif
thecurrentMSisStereo.Formoreinformation,see
12:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSave
13:AutoSamplingSetup.Formoreinformation,
635
Sampling mode
09: Control Surface

09PMC
09a
09b
09c
09d
TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and ControlAssignswitches
16switchestotheleftoftheLCDdisplay.Itlookslikea
mixer,butitcandootherthingsaswell,including
editingsounds,controllingKARMA,andsending
MIDImessagestoexternaldevices.
Thispageshowsyouthecurrentvaluesforeachofthe INPUTS
sliders,knobs,andbuttons,alongwithinformation HDR 1-8

HDR 9-16
-16
aboutwhattheyarecontrolling.Forinstance,youcan:
AdjusttheOscillators(multisample)volumeand
pan
ControltheOscillators(multisample)EQsettings
andMasterEffectsSendlevels
ModulateOscillators(multisample)andeffects
usingtheRealTimeKnobs InSamplingmode,youcanselectoneoffivedifferent
Usetheslidersandswitchestocontrolexternal functions:
MIDIdevices. TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjusttheOscillators
(multisample)volume,pan,andsendlevels,along
Control Assign Switches and Tabs
withtheEQ.
YoucanswitchtheControlSurfacebetweenits
differentfunctionsusingeitherthetabsontheleftside
sendlevelsfortheanalogandS/P DIFaudioinputs.
oftheLCDdisplay,orthefrontpanelControlAssign
switches.Thetabsandthefrontpanelswitchesmirror EXTERNALletsyousendMIDImessagestoexternal
oneanother;whenyouchangeoneofthem,theother MIDIdevices.
changesaswell. R.TIMEKNOBS/KARMAletsyoumodulatesounds
andeffectswiththeknobs.
Front-panel LEDs for sliders and knobs

TheresaverticalcolumnofLEDsnexttoeachslider,
andaringofLEDsaroundeachknob.Similarly,each
oftheswitcheshasanLEDtoshowwhetheritsonor
off.
636
Sampling P0: Recording 09: Control Surface
AsyouswitchbetweenthedifferentControlAssign 3. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,press
settings,youllnoticethattheLEDschangetoshowthe thecurrentControlAssignbuttonagain.
currentvaluesforallofthecontrollers. Allofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesshownonthe
Youcaneditthesevaluesusingeitherthephysical ControlSurfacewillberesettothevaluesstoredinthe
sliders,knobs,andswitches,orbyselectingtheon Program.
screenparametersandusingthestandarddataentry
controls.WhenyoueditavalueusingtheLCDand Resetting the Vector Joystick
dataentry,youllnoticethattheLEDsonthesliders, ToresettheVectorJoysticktothecenterposition,hold
knobs,andswitchesreflectthechangeaswell. downRESETCONTROLSandthenmovetheVector
Joystick.
Jump/Catch
Resetting KARMA module parameters
WhenyouchangetheControlAssignsetting,the
physicalpositionoftheknobsorslidersmaybe Youcanalsoresetalloftheslidersandswitchesinthe
differentthantheparametervalue,asshownbythe KARMAmodule,byholdingRESETCONTROLSand
LEDs. thenpressingtheKARMAMODULECONTROL
button.Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScene,hold
TheKnob/SliderModeparameter,underSystem RESETCONTROLSandpressanyoftheSCENE
PreferencesontheGlobalmodeBasicpage,determines buttons.
howandwhenmovingthephysicalsliderorknobwill
starttoedittheparametervalue.
WhenitissettoJump,theparameterwillsnaptothe
09a: OSC Mixer
physicalpositionassoonasyoustarttomovetheknob ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume,
orslider.Usethisifyoudliketheparametersto pan,andFXsendsettingsforOscillators1and2,along
respondinstantlytocontrollermovements. withtheProgramEQsettings.
WhenitissettoCatch,youneedtomovetheslideror Ifyouwanttosavethesoundyouveeditedhere,you
knobsothatitcatchestheparameter,bypassing canresampleit.
throughitscurrentvalue.Untilthevalueiscaught,
movingthesliderorknobhasnoeffectonthe MIXER KNOBS [Channel Strip, Individual Pan]
parameter.Usethiswhenyoudlikeparametereditsto TheMixerKnobsswitchisonthefrontpanel,
besmooth,andalwaysmovefromthecurrentvalue. immediatelytotherightoftheknobs,andisalso
duplicatedintheonscreendisplay.Theeightknobs
Reset Controls cancontroltwodifferentsetsofparameters,
ThefrontpanelRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyou dependingonthesettingofthisswitch.
recallthestoredsettingsforanyslider,knob,orswitch ChannelStrip:Withthissetting,theeightknobswill
onthecontrolsurface.Youcanalsouseittoresetthe controlthePan,EQ,andFXSendsettingsforthe
VectorJoysticktothecenterposition,ortoresetallof selectedOscillator.
theparametersinthecurrentKARMAmodule.
IndividualPan:Withthissetting,thefirstknobwill
Resetting a single control controlthePanforOscillator1.Theremainingknobs
areunused.
Toresetasingleknob,slider,orswitch:
MixerKnobsswitch
2. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,movea
sliderorknob,orpressoneofthecontrolsurface
switches.
Theslider,knob,orswitchwillberesettothevalue
storedintheProgram.
3. Whenyouredone,releasetheRESET
CONTROLSbutton.
Resetting a group of controls

Toresetagroupofcontrolsatonce:
1. MakesurethattheControlSurfaceisshowingthe
parametersyouwanttoreset.
Asasafetyprecaution,youcanonlyresetthe
parameterscurrentlydisplayedontheControlSurface.
ThistakesintoaccountboththecurrentControlAssign Knobs 18, Channel Strip
setting,andtheMIXERKNOBSbutton.
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip,
Forinstance,ifyouwanttoresetthevolumeandpan theknobsprovidequickaccesstothePan,EQ,andFX
forbothOscillators,makesurethatControlAssignis Sendparameters.ThePanandEQparameters
settoTIMBRE/TRACK,andthatMIXERKNOBSis duplicatethesimilarlynamedparametersfoundon
settoINDIVIDUALPAN. theProgrameditingpageS.
637
Sampling mode
PAN [Random, L001C064R127] Pan (2) [Random, L001C064R127]

ThiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedOscillator.A ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator2.Formore
settingofL001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064in details,seePan(1),above.
thecenter,andR127tothefarright.
RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it
MIX PLAY/MUTE 1
wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly ThetoprowofswitchesallowyoutoturnOscillators1
fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,thepan onandoff,whichcanbeconvenientwhenediting
positionwillbedifferentforeachnoteon. sounds.
EQ TRIM [0099] Play/Mute [Off, On]

ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ. Theoscillatorwillsoundifthisswitchison(LED=lit).
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrols Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),Oscillator1willbe
cancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.You muted.
trim.
Solo switch and MIX SELECT switch 1
Note:iftheEQpageEQBypassparameteristurned Solo [Off, On]
On,thennoneoftheEQparametersherewillhave SololetsyouisolateoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
anyeffect. Inputs,sothatyouhearthembythemselves.
LOW EQ [18.0+00.0+18.0dB] WhenSoloisOff(LED=Off),theSelectswitchesselect
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in thecurrentOscillator;whenSoloisOn(LED=Onor
incrementsof0.5dB. blinking),theSelectswitchesletyousolooneorboth
Oscillators.
MID EQFREQUENCY [100Hz10kHz] WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ. Inputsaresoloed,theSoloLEDwillblinkonandoffto
MID EQ GAIN [18.0+00.0+18.0dB]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,in Clearing all solos
incrementsof0.5dB. ToturnoffSoloforallOscillatorsandAudioInputsat
once:
HIGH EQ [18.0+00.0+18.0dB]
1. PressandholdtheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
incrementsof0.5dB. 2. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS,pressthe
SOLObutton.
SEND 1 [000127] Note:ThemainSolobuttonmerelychangesthe
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe functionsoftheSelect/Soloswitches.Itdoesnotenable
ProgramsOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF, orcleartheindividualsolostates.
itscalestheOscillatorsendlevels.IftheOutputBusis
settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend Exclusive Solo menu parameter
levels. ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectsthe
waythatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff
SEND 2 [000127] (unchecked),youcansolomultipleoscillatorsand
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore inputsatonce.
details,seeSEND1,above. WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyone
oscillatororinputcanbesoloedatatime.Inthismode,
Knobs 12, Individual Pan pressingaSoloswitchautomaticallydisablesany
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan, previoussolos.
knobs1and2controlthepansettingsforOscillators1 YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER
and2,respectively.Theother6knobshavenoeffect. andpressing1onthenumerickeypad.
TheseduplicatethePanparametersoftheOscillators1
and2Amppages;changingthemherewillchange OSC Select/Solo [Off, On]
themintheeditingpages,andviceversa. ThisswitcheitherselectsorsolosOscillator,depending
ontheSoloswitch.Formoredetails,seeSolo,above.
Pan (1) [Random, L001C064R127]
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.Asettingof MIX VOLUMES sliders 1
L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter, Thisadjuststheoveralloscillatoroutputlevel.
RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it OSC Volume [000127]
wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly Thisadjuststheoscillatorvolumelevel.
fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,thepan
positionwillbedifferentforeachnoteon.
638
Master Volume Slider MasterVolume
Master Volume [000127] Control Surface Universal Exclusive Front Panel

Master Volume Master Volume Analog Volume
aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual MIDI, or Sequencer)
Outputs18.
Headphone
TFX 2 & Main L/R
Outputs
S/PDIF
Output
09c
Send 1 [000127]
09c: Audio Inputs
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume, inputsOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF,it
pan,andFXsendsettingsforeachofthesixaudio scalestheprogrammedsendlevel.IftheOutputBusis
inputs:Analog14,andS/P DIFleftandright. settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend
levels,overwritinganyprevioussetting.
Thisswitchcontrolswhethertheknobsshowthepan Send 2 [000127]
settingsforall6inputsatonce(IndividualPan),orthe ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore
panandFXSendlevelsfortheselectedinput(Channel details,seeSend1,above.
Strip).Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMixerKnobs
onpage 639. Knobs 16, Individual Pan
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan,
knobs14controlthepansettingsforanaloginputs1
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip, 4,respectively,andknobs56controlthepansettings
theknobsprovidequickaccesstotheselectedinputs fortheleftandrightS/P DIFinputs.
PanandFXSendparameters.
Audio Input Pan (16) [L000C064R127]
Pan [L000C064R127] ThesecontrolthepanforAnalogInputs14and
Thiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedinput.A S/P DIFLeftandRight,respectively.AsettingofL000
settingofL000placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064in placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,and
thecenter,andR127tothefarright. R127tothefarright.
639
Sampling mode
Play/Mute switches 16 Note:ThemainSolobuttonmerelychangesthe

functionsoftheSelect/Soloswitches.Itdoesnotenable
Thetoprowofswitchesallowyoutomuteanyorallof orcleartheindividualsolostates.
theaudioinputs.
Formoreinformation,seeClearingallsoloson
Play/Mute (16) [Off, On] page 638,andExclusiveSolomenuparameteron
Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),theinputwillbe page 638.
enabled.Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),theinput
Select/Solo (16) [Off, On]
willbemuted.
Thisswitcheitherselectsorsolostheinput,depending
Solo switch and Select switches 16 ontheSoloswitchsetting.Formoredetails,seeSolo,
above.
Solo [Off, On]
SololetsyouisolateoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio MIX VOLUMES sliders 16
Audio Input Volume (16) [000127]
thisbytemporarilymutingallnonsoloedOscillators
andAudioInputs. Theseslidersadjustthevolumelevelsoftheaudio
inputs.
audioinputiscurrentlyselected,orwhichinputsare Master Volume Slider
soloed.ThemainSolobuttonletsyouswitchbackand
forthbetweenthetwoviews. Master Volume [000127]
WhenSoloisOff(LED=Off),theSelectswitchesselect Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemainstereooutputs,
thecurrentinput;whenSoloisOn(LED=Onor aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
blinking),theSelectswitchesletyousolooneormore Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
inputs. MasterVolumeonpage 639.
WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
09d
09d: External synthesizer(suchasoneofKorgsLegacyCollection
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyousendMIDI synths),andsoon.Formoreinformation,see12:
messagestoexternaldevices.Eachslider,knob,and External1onpage 714.
switchcanbeassignedtoaseparateMIDIcontroller TheseExternalSetupsarecompletelyseparatefrom
andMIDIchannel.Theeightdrumpadsalsohave theProgram.YoucanthinkofExternalmodeasbeing
separatesettingswhichapplyonlywhenControl aseparatecontrolsurfacewhichjusthappenstoshare
AssignissettoExternal. OASYSssliders,knobs,switches,anddrumpads.
ExternalSetups.Forinstance,youmightmakeone
setupforcontrollingseveraldifferentpiecesofMIDI
640
WhenyouselectanExternalSetup,itstaysselected Switches 116

evenwhenyouchangePrograms,orswitchtoCombi
orSequencermodes.Thismakesiteasytoselect MIDI Channel (116) [(0116, Gch)]
differentOASYSsoundswithoutdisruptingany ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
externalMIDIcontrol,andviceversa. theswitch.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
desired.
Setup [000127]
ThisselectstheGlobalsetupfortheknobs,sliders, GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
switches,anddrumpads. MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.
Note:thisselectionisnotstoredwiththeProgram. CC# Assign (116) [(Off, 000119)]

ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby
Knobs 18 theswitch.
MIDI Channel (18) [(0116, Gch)] Switch On/Off (116) [On, Off]
ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannel Whentheswitchisturnedon,itsendsavalueof127;
assignedtotheknob.Eachcansendonadifferent whenitisturnedoff,itsendsavalueof0.
channel,ifdesired.
GchmeansthattheknobwilltransmitontheGlobal Sliders 18 & Master Slider
MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.Thisallowsyou
toredirectanynumberofsliders,knobs,switches,and MIDI Channel (18) [(0116, Gch)]
padstoadifferentchannelatonce,withouteditingthe ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
individualcontrols. theslider.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
desired.
CC# Assign (18) [(Off, 000119)]
ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.
theknob.
CC# Assign (18) [(Off, 000119)]
Value (18) [000127]
ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby
ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheknobsMIDICC. theslider.
Value (18) [000127]

ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheslidersMIDICC.
09e
09e: R. Time Knobs Knobs 18

Knobs14allhavededicatedfunctionswhich
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyoumodulate correspondtoMIDICCs.Knobs58canbeassignedto
OscillatorsandEffectsparameterswiththeeight awidevarietyoffunctions,manyofwhichalsohave
knobs. correspondingMIDICCs.
Ifyouwanttosavethesoundyouveeditedhere,you
canresampleit.
641
Sampling mode
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding 3:MoveSample.Formoreinformation,seeMove
MIDICC.Also,whentheCCisreceivedviaMIDIor Sampleonpage 673.
generatedbyKARMA,theknobvaluechangesto 4:SampleMonoToStereo.Formoreinformation,
matchtheCCvalue. seeSampleMonoToStereo(ChangeSample
Unlessotherwisenoted,scalingmeansthatthe Type)onpage 674.
parametersareattheirprogrammedvalueswhenthe 5:DeleteMS.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
controllerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe MS(DeleteMultisample)onpage 674.
controllerisat127.Foranotherlookatthis,seethe 6:CopyMS.Formoreinformation,seeCopyMS
diagrambelow. (CopyMultisample)onpage 675.
CCparameterscaling 7:RenameMS.Formoreinformation,seeRename
99 8:MoveMS.Formoreinformation,seeMoveMS
Parameter
Value 9:ConvertMSToProgram.Formoreinformation,
page 675.
As Programmed 10:MSMonoToStereo.Thiswillappearonlyif
00 MultisampleType)onpage 676.
0 64 127
CC Value
Knob 1: CUTOFF (CC#74) [000127] MultisampleType)onpage 676.
ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAand 11:OptimizeRAM.Formoreinformation,see
B,andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74. OptimizeRAMonpage 143.
Knob 2: RESONANCE (CC#71) [000127] 12:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSave
Knob 3: Filter EG Intensity (CC#79) [000127] seeAutoSamplingSetuponpage 677.
receivesMIDICC#79.

Knob 58 [000127]
ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheknobanditsMIDICC.
messagesusuallyCCs.

commandsonpage 142.
Sampleonpage 673.
642
Sampling P1: Sample Edit 11: Sample Edit
Sampling P1: Sample Edit

Inthispageyoucaneditsampledata(waveformdata). samplingfrequency),reverse(backwardplayback),
Youcanmakedetailededitswhilewatchingthe andlink(connecttwosamples)
samplewaveformdisplay.Herearethemain Whenperformingtheaboveoperations,youcan
operationsyouwillperforminthispage. automaticallydetectzerocrossingpoints,or
Truncate(deleteunwantedregions),copy,paste, displayagrid(verticallines)andeditaccordingto
move,normalize(boostthelevelashighaspossible BPMvaluesorbeats
withoutdistortion),rateconvert(lowerthe
11: Sample Edit

11PMC
11a
11b
11c
11e 11f
11d
Sample Select [----: ---No Assign----, 00003999]

Range [C1B9 C1B9)
Multisample Select [000999]
Thisshowsthesamplenumberandnameforthe
Selectsthemultisamplethatcontainsthesampleyou selectedindex,andtherange.IfyoumodifySample
wishtoedit. Select,thesampleyouspecifyherewillbeassignedto
Keyboard & Pads thisindex(01b).Therangeoftheindexisshownat
theright.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01a:Multisample
Select(MS)onpage 625.
11c: Sample waveform display
11b: Index, Sample Select, Range Sample waveform display
Index [xxx (001128)/yyy (001128)] Thisdisplaysthewaveformoftheselectedsample.The
horizontalaxisisthesampleaddress(timeaxis),and
Selectstheindexofthesampleyouwishtoedit.Your theverticalaxisisthesamplelevel.
editingwillaffectthesampleoftheindexthatyou
selecthere,andthewaveformwillappearinthe Inthefollowingdiagram,aindicatestheentire
Samplewaveformdisplay(01a). sample.bindicatestheportionoftheentiresample
thatisshowninc.Asyouzoominonthetimeaxis,
Note:Anindexcanalsobeselectedbyholdingdown thisshowsyouwherethemagnifiedportionlieswithin
theENTERswitchandplayinganoteonthekeyboard theoverallsample.YoucanusetheZOOMbuttonsto
orpad.Theindexthatincludesthisnotewillbe magnify(zoomin)orshrink(zoomout)theportion
selected.Thekeyyouplayedwillbethebasekey,and showninthecwaveformdisplay.
willbedisplayedinblueinKeyboard&Pads
(Keyboard&Pads01a).
643
Sampling mode
Ifyouhaveselectedastereomultisampleorsample,
theLchannelandRchannelofthesampledatawillbe
shownaboveandbelow.
Samplewaveformdisplay
b
Resolution [ h, h3, q, q3, e, e3, x, x3, r ]

11d: Edit Range
Thisspecifiestheresolutionofthegrid.Thegridis
Start [000000000] definedbythissettingandTempo.
End [000000000] Tempo [040.00480.00]

Thisspecifiestherange(startaddressandendaddress) Thisspecifiesthespacingofthegrid.Thegridis
ofthesamplethatwillbeeditedbypagemenu definedbythissettingandResolution.
commands.(Thisisshowninsampleaddressunits.) YoucanalsosetthisbyusingtheTAPTEMPOswitch.
Therangeyouspecifyherewillbehighlightedinthe Tip:Ifyoudontknowthetempoofthesample,setthe
Samplewaveformdisplay. tempobypressingtheTAPTEMPOswitchseveral
Toauditiontheselectedrange,presstheSAMPLING timesinrhythmwiththeplayback.
START/STOPswitchorPlaybutton.Thesampleinthe Note:240.00isthemaximumvaluethatyoucanset
areabetweenStartandEndwillsoundatthepitchof usingtheTAPTEMPOswitch.
thecurrentlyselectedkey(displayedinblue)
(Keyboard&Pads01a).
11f: ZOOM
Use Zero [Off, On]
On(checked):WhensettingStartandEnd,itwillbe ZOOM
possibletoselecttheseonlytolocationswherethe Thesebuttonsletyouzoominandzoomoutthe
waveformlevelis0(i.e.,wherethewaveformcrosses Samplewaveformdisplayalongthehorizontalaxis
thecenterlineoftheSamplewaveformdisplay).You (sampleaddresses)orverticalaxis(samplelevel).
canusetheVALUEslider,VALUEdial,and /
Zoom-in vertically
switches09toautomaticallysearchforzerocross
addresses.Byusingthenumerickeysyoucansearch
forthezerocrossaddressnearesttothevaluethatyou
input. Zoom-out horizontally Zoom-in horizontally
Off(unchecked):StartandEndcanbesetin Maximum
horizontal zoom-out 1x horizontal zoom-in
incrementsofone.Thisisthenormalsetting.
Zoom-out vertically
Edit Range PLAY/STOP
TheEditRangewillplaybackwhenyoupressthe Byzoominginonthehorizontaldirection,youcan
Playbutton.Duringplayback,thisisshownasSTOP. movefromtheoveralldisplaywherethewaveformis
shownasasolidline(1Xmagnification)to2Xor4X
magnification.(With1Xmagnification,thedisplay
11e: Grid resolutionoftheLCDwillbethesameasthe
resolutionofthesampleaddresses.Forexampleifyou
Grid [Off, On] changethesampleaddressbyone,theverticallinein
On(checked):Agrid(verticallines)issuperimposed theLCDthatindicatesthesampleaddresswillmovein
onthesamplewaveformdisplay.UseResolution stepsofonepixel.)Intheverticalaxis,youcanzoomin
andTempotoadjustthegridspacing.Usethissetting from1X(fullrangedisplay)to512X(or1024Xinthe
whenyouwanttocutoreditsampledatainunitsof caseofstereodisplay).
BPMvaluesorbeats.
ZoomIn/zoomoutwilloccurstartingattheStartor
ThestartingpointofthegridisspecifiedbytheSample Endpointsyouspecify.(Ifadifferentparameteris
StartsettinginP2:LoopEdit.IfLoopisoff,thegridis selectedwhenyouzoominorout,thezoomin/out
displayedstartingattheStartaddress.IfLoopison, willbebasedonthelastselectedpoint.Ifyoureselect
thegridisdisplayedstartingattheLoopStartaddress. theStartorEndpointswhenthedisplayiszoomedin
Thegridindicatesthestateofthesamplewhenitis orout,thedisplayrangewillbeadjustedsoastoshow
playedatthecurrentlyselectedbasekey(displayedin theselectedpoint.)
blue).(Keyboard&Pads01a)
644
Sampling P1: Sample Edit 11: Sample Edit
Ifthezoomratioislow(1Xorless),theSample 18:Insert.Formoreinformation,seeInserton
waveformdisplaymaydifferslightlyfromthe page 681.
displayedwaveformbeforeandafterwaveform 19:Mix.Formoreinformation,seeMixon
editing,butthisdoesnotaffecttheplaybacksound. page 681.
Ifthisoccurs,raisingthezoomratiowillmakethe
displayaccurate. 20:Paste.Formoreinformation,seePasteon
page 682.
21:InsertZero.Formoreinformation,seeInsert
t 11: Page Menu Commands Zeroonpage 682.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 22:Normalize/LevelAdjust.Formoreinformation,
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese seeNormalize/LevelAdjustonpage 683.
commandsonpage 142. 23:VolumeRamp.Formoreinformation,see
VolumeRamponpage 683.
DeleteSampleonpage 672. 24:RateConvert.Formoreinformation,seeRate
Convertonpage 684.
Sampleonpage 673. 25:Reverse.Formoreinformation,seeReverse
onpage 684.
RenameSampleonpage 673. 26:Link.Formoreinformation,seeLinkon
page 684.
Sampleonpage 673.
Type)onpage 674.
page 675.
14:Truncate.Formoreinformation,seeTruncate
(forSampleEdit)onpage 680.
15:Cut.Formoreinformation,seeCuton
page 680.
16:Clear.Formoreinformation,seeClearon
page 680.
17:Copy.Formoreinformation,seeCopyon
page 681.
645
Sampling mode
Sampling P2: Loop Edit

Inthispageyoucanspecifytheregionofthesample Whenperformingtheaboveoperations,youcan
thatwillplayandtheportionthatwillloop.Youcan automaticallydetectzerocrossingpoints,or
editthewaveformdowntothelevelofindividual displayagrid(verticallines)andeditaccordingto
sampleswhilewatchingthesamplewaveformdisplay. BPMvaluesorbeats
Herearethemainoperationsyouwillperforminthis Makesettingsforreverse(backward)playback
page.
UsetheTimeSliceorTimeStretchfunctionsto
Specifytheloopinglocations(startaddress,loop automaticallyeditthesampleaccordingtoBPM
startaddress,endaddress) valuesorbeats
Truncate(deleteunwantedregions),copy,paste,
move
21: Loop Edit

21PMC
21a
21b
21c
21e 21f
21d
Thenoteyouplayedwillbethebasekey,andwillbe
21a: Multisample Select (MS) showninblueinKeyboard&Pads.(Keyboard&
Pads01a)
Multisample Select [000999]
Hereyoucanselectthemultisampletoedit. Sample Select [----: ---No Assign----, 00003999]
Keyboard & Pads Range [C1G9 C1G9]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01a:Multisample Thisselectsthesampleoftheindex.Ifyouchange
Select(MS)onpage 625. SampleSelect,thesampleyouspecifywillbe
assignedtothisindex(01b).Thesampleyouselect
herewillappearintheSamplewaveformdisplay.
21b: Index, Sample Select, Range
Therangeoftheindexisdisplayedattheright.
Index [xxx (001127)/yyy (001127)]
Selectstheindexwhoseloopandothersample 21c: Sample waveform display
parametersyouwishtoedit.Youreditswillapplyto
thesampleoftheindexselectedhere,andthe Sample waveform display
waveformwillappearintheSamplewaveform ThisshowsthewaveformoftheselectedSample.For
display(01a). moreinformation,pleasesee11c:Samplewaveform
Youcanalsoselectanindexbyholdingdownthe displayonpage 643.
ENTERswitchandplayinganoteonthekeyboardor
pad.Theindexthatincludesthisnotewillbeselected.
646
Sampling P2: Loop Edit 21: Loop Edit
On(checked):Thesampleplaybacklevelwillbe
21d: Sample Setup approximately+12dBlouderthanifthissettingwere
Off(unchecked).
Start (Start Address) [000000000]
Off(unchecked):Thesamplewillplaybackatthe
Thisspecifiesthestartpointforsampleplayback,in
normallevel.Thisisthesamestandardlevelasthe
singlesampleunits.
playbacklevelforROMmultisamplesanddrum
Loop Start (Loop Start Address) [000000000] samples.
Thisspecifiestheloopstartpoint,insinglesample Changingthison/offsettingwillnotaffectthesample
units.ThisappliesonlywhenLoopisOn. dataitself;itonlyaffectsthewaythatthesampleis
playedback.
TheLoopStartmustbebetweentheStartandEnd
points.Formoreinformation,seeStartOffseton Youcanenablethisautomaticallyduringsamplingby
page 52. enablingtheAuto+12dBcheckbox.Formore
information,seeAuto+12dBOnonpage 630.
End (End Address) [000000000]
Thesesettingswillbepreservedifyousavethe
Thisspecifiestheendpointforsampleplayback,in sampleasaKorgformatsamplefile(.KSC,.KMP,
singlesampleunits.WhenLoopisOn,thisistheend .KSF).However,thesesettingsareignoredbyKorg
pointoftheloop. formatcompatibledevicesprevioustotheTRITON
Loop (Loop On) [Off, On] STUDIO.Formoreinformation,seeAboutKORG
formatfilesonpage 1084.
Specifieswhetherornotthesamplewillbelooped.
+12dBwillbeturnedOnwhenyouloadanAKAI,
On(checked):Whenplayed,thesamplewillloop AIFF,orWAVEformatsampleinDiskmode.Note
repeatedlybetweentheLoopStartandEndpoints. thatsinceitdoesnotaffectthesampledataitself,
Forinstance,Start End LoopStart EndLoop thisparameterisignoredwhenexportingtoother
Start formats,suchasAIFForWAVE.
Off(unchecked):ThesamplewillplayoncefromStart Loop Tune [99+99]
toEnd,andthenstop.Thisissometimescalledone
Whenyouloopasample,thepitchofthelooped
shotplayback.
portionmaysometimesbeslightlydifferentfromthe
IfyousamplewithAutoLoopOn(01d)checked, sustainedportion.Usethisparametertocompensate
Loopwillbeenabledautomatically. forsuchcases.
Thisparameteradjuststheplaybackpitchoftheloop
overarangeof99cents.
"One" "Two"
Use Zero [Off, On]
Start Loop Start End
On(checked):Start,EndandLoopStartcanbeset
theseonlytolocationswherethewaveformlevelis0
"One" - "Two" - "Two" - "Two" - ... (i.e.,zerocrossaddresseswherethewaveform
crossesthecenterlineoftheSamplewaveform
"One" - "Two" display).(11d)
Off(unchecked):Start,EndandLoopStartcanbeset
instepsofoneunit.Thisisthenormalsetting.
Loop Lock [Off, On]

Thisfixesthelengthoftheloopbeingedited.
"One" "Two" On(checked):ThislinkstheLoopStartandEnd
Start End
points.Whenoneofthesepointsisedited,theother
Loop Start willbeadjustedautomaticallytokeepthelooplength
thesame.Thisisconvenientwhenyouarecreatinga
"One" - "Two" - "One" - "Two" - "One" - "Two" - ... rhythmlooptomatchaspecifictempo.
"One" - "Two"
21e: Grid
Reverse [Off, On] Grid [Off, On]
On(checked):Thesamplewillbeplayedbackward, On:Agrid(verticallines)issuperimposedonthe
fromtheEndtotheLoopStart. samplewaveformdisplay.UseResolutionandTempo
toadjustthegridspacing.Formoreinformation,see
+12dB [Off, On] 11e:Gridonpage 644.
Onplayback,samplesarenormallyreducedinvolume
by12dB,toreducethechanceofclippingwhen
playingmanyvoicessimultaneously.Thisparameter
letsyoudefeatthisvolumereductionforindividual
samples,whendesired.
647
Sampling mode
Resolution [ h, h3, q, q3, e, e3, x, x3, r ] 16:TimeStretch.Formoreinformation,seeTime

Stretchonpage 691.
Tempo [040.00480.00]
17:CrossfadeLoop.Formoreinformation,see
CrossfadeLooponpage 695.
21f: ZOOM
ZOOM
Thisallowsyoutozoomin/outinhorizontaland
verticaldirectionsoftheSamplewaveformdisplay(1
1f).

commandsonpage 142.
Sampleonpage 673.
Sampleonpage 673.
Type)onpage 674.
page 675.
14:Truncate.Formoreinformation,seeTruncate
(forSampleEdit)onpage 680.
15:TimeSlice.Formoreinformation,seeTime
Sliceonpage 686.
648
Sampling P3: Multisample Edit 31: Multisample Edit
Sampling P3: Multisample Edit

Inthispageyoucaneditmultisamples.Youcancreate, Createandeditmultisamplesandindexes
delete,copy,andpasteindexes,andassignsamplesto Edittheplaybacklevelandpitchofsamples
indexes.Youcanalsoeditdetailedsettingssuchas
levelandpitchforeachindex.Herearethemain Delete,copy,andpasteindexes
operationsyouwillperforminthispage.
31: Multisample Edit

31PMC
31a
31b
31c
Stereo
ThisareawillindicateStereoifastereomultisample
Multisample Select (MS) [000999] orsampleisselected,orifyousampledwithasetting
ofStereoinMode(01d).
Selectthemultisamplethatyouwishtoedit.
Keyboard & Pads Original Key [C1G9]

Specifiestheoriginalkeyofthesample(01b).
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01a:Multisample
Select(MS)onpage 625. Top Key [C1G9]
Specifiesthehighestkeyinthezoneoftheindex.The
31b: Multisample Setup zoneisdefinedbythisTopKey(01b).
Index [xxx (001128)/yyy (001128)] Range [C1G9]

Selectstheindex(thesamplekeyzonewithinthe Thisshowstherangeofthezonethatisdeterminedby
Multisample)thatyouwishtoedit. theTopKeysetting.Theselectedsampledatawill
playbackwithinthisarea.Zonesettingsforanindex
Youcanalsoselectanindexbyholdingdownthe
canalsobeviewedinKeyboard&Pads(01a).
ENTERswitchandplayinganoteonthekeyboard.
Theindexthatincludesthisnotewillbeselected.The Level [99+99]
selectedkeywillbethebasekey,andwillbedisplayed
Adjuststheplaybacklevelofthesample.Usethis
inblueinKeyboard&Pads.
whenyouneedtoadjustthelevelbalancebetween
Sample Select [----: ---No Assign----, 00003999] sampleswithinamultisample.
Thisindicatesthenumberandnameofthesamplethat 0:Unitylevel
isassignedtotheselectedindex.Youcanalsoselectthe :Thelevelwillbelowered.
samplehere.(01b)
+:Thelevelwillberaised.
649
Sampling mode
SinceinSamplingmodetheplaybackunitylevel Cut
willnormallybethemaximumlevel,adjustmentsin Thisdeletestheselectedindex.Atthesametime,the
the+directionwillhavenoeffect.IfVolume contentsofthedeletedindexarecopiedtotheInsert
(CC#07)orExpression(CC#11)hasbeenassignedto buffer.
theASSIGNABLEPEDALorastheRealtime
Modulationknob58andthesecontrollershave Copy
beenoperated,oriftheseMIDImessageshavebeen Thiscopiesthecontentoftheselectedindextothe
receivedtolowertheplaybackunitylevel,then Insertbuffer.
adjustmentsinthe+directionwillbevalid.
(Program,SampleParameters:Level) Create
Note:Theplaybacklevelwillalsobeaffectedbythe+12 Thiscreatesanindex.WhenyoupresstheCreate
dB(21d)setting.If+12dBison,thesamplewillplay button,anewindexwillbecreatedaccordingtothe
backapproximately+12dBlouder. settingsofPosition,ZoneRange,andOriginalKey
Position.(31c,01e)(01b).
Pitch (BPM Adj. In Page Menu) [64.00+63.00]
Adjuststheplaybackpitchofthesampleinonecent
steps. 31c: Create Zone Preference
0:Thesamplewillsoundattheoriginalpitchwhenthe Position [Right (to Selected Index),
originalkeyisplayed. Left (to Selected Index)]
:Thepitchwillbelowered.Atasettingof12.00the
Zone Range [1 Key127 Keys]
pitchwillbeoneoctavelower.
+:Thepitchwillberaised.Atasettingof+12.00the Original Key Position [Bottom, Center, Top]
pitchwillbeoneoctavehigher. Hereyoucanspecifythedefaultsettingsforindices
YoucanalsousePitchtomakefineadjustmentsinthe thatarecreatedbyexecutingCreate(31b,01b).New
lengthofarhythmloop.Forexamplewithasettingof indexeswillbecreatedaccordingthesettingsyou
+12.00,theplaybackspeedwillbedoubled,andthe specifyhere.Youarefreetomodifythesettingsofan
loopplaybacktimewillbe1/2.(Program,Sample indexlater.Also,whenyouexecuteInsert(31b),the
Parameters:Pitch) Positionsettingspecifiedherewillbeused.(Create
ZonePreference:01e)
Note:ThePitchBPMAdjustpagemenucommandlets
yousettheplaybacktimeintermsofaBPMvalue.
Constant Pitch
On(checked):Allnotesinthezoneoftheindexwill
soundatthepitchoftheoriginalkey.Usethissetting
whenyouhavesampledadrumsoundorarhythm
commandsonpage 142.
loop,andwantittoalwaysplaybackattheoriginal
pitch. 0:DeleteSample.Formoreinformation,see
Off(unchecked):Thepitchwillchangeinsemitone
steps,basedontheoriginalkey.Usethissettingwhen 1:CopySample.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
youhavesampledamusicalinstrumentsoundetc.and Sampleonpage 673.
wouldliketoplayitconventionallyfromthekeyboard. 2:RenameSample.Formoreinformation,see
Insert RenameSampleonpage 673.
Thiscreatesanindex.WhenyoupresstheInsert 3:MoveSample.Formoreinformation,seeMove
button,anewindexwillbecreatedaccordingtothe Sampleonpage 673.
Positionsetting(01e,31c).Atthistime,thecontents 4:SampleMonoToStereo.Formoreinformation,
oftheindexthatwascutorcopiedbyCutorCopy(i.e., seeSampleMonoToStereo(ChangeSample
theZoneRange,OriginalKeyPosition,Leveland Type)onpage 674.
Pitch)willbeassignedatthesametime.(Thesample 5:DeleteMS.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
willautomaticallybecopiedorassignedtoadifferent MS(DeleteMultisample)onpage 674.
number.)
Ifitisnotpossibletocreateanewindexwhenyou (CopyMultisample)onpage 675.
executeCreateorInsert,adialogboxwillappear.
Ifthisoccurs,seeCreate(01b). 7:RenameMS.Formoreinformation,seeRename
IfyouhavenotyetexecutedCutorCopy,suchas
immediatelyafterpoweron,thenewindexwillbe 8:MoveMS.Formoreinformation,seeMoveMS
createdaccordingtotheCreateZonePreference (MoveMultisample)onpage 676.
settings(01e,31c)Position,ZoneRange,and 9:ConvertMSToProgram.Formoreinformation,
OriginalKeyPosition. seeConvertMS(Multisample)ToProgramon
page 675.
650
Sampling P3: Multisample Edit 31: Multisample Edit
14:PitchBPMAdjust.Formoreinformation,see
PitchBPMAdjustonpage 696.
651
Sampling mode
Sampling P4: EQ/Controller

Inthispageyoucaneditamidsweepablethreeband YoucanalsoassignthefunctionsoftheSW1andSW2
EQthatisappliedtotheoutputofthemultisample. switchesandModulation58knobs,andthenote
numberandvelocitythatareproducedbypads18.
41: EQ
41PMC
41a
HereyoucaneditthemidsweepablethreebandEQ Input Trim [0099]

thatisappliedtotheoutputofthemultisample. ThisadjuststhelevelofthesignalgoingintotheEQ.A
settingof50correspondsto6dB,andasettingof25
41a: 3 Band Parametric EQ correspondsto12dB.
Inadditiontoeditingtheseparametersinthescreen,
youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoeditallEQ
parametersotherthanBypass.Thesecanalsobe
trim.
controlledfromthemixersectionofthefrontpanel,or
fromtheP0ControlSurfacepageoftheLCDscreen.
Herestheprocedureforeditingthesesettingsfromthe
(Freq Response Graphic)
frontpanel. Low Gain [18.0+00.0+18.0dB]
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXER Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in
TIMBRE/TRACKswitchtomake18light. incrementsof0.5dB.
2. PresstheMIXERKNOBSswitchtomake
CHANNELSTRIPlight. Mid Frequency
[100500 (10Hz step) 1.0k (20Hz step)
3. UsetheMIXCHANNELSTRIPknobs26to
2.0K (50Hz step) 10.0k (100Hz step)]
controlEQTRIM,LOWEQ,MIDFREQ,
MIDEQ,andHIGHEQ. ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
(All OSCs) Mid Gain [18.0+00.0+18.0dB]

Bypass [Off, On] incrementsof0.5dB.
WhenBypassischecked,alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
High Gain [18.0+00.0+18.0dB]
includingtheInputTrim.
Bypasscanbeconvenientforcomparingtheresultsof
incrementsof0.5dB.
theEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
652
Sampling P4: EQ/Controller 48: Set Up Controllers
t 41: Page Menu Commands MS(RenameMultisample)onpage 675.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 8:MoveMS.Formoreinformation,seeMoveMS
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese (MoveMultisample)onpage 676.
commandsonpage 142.
0:DeleteSample.Formoreinformation,see page 675.
1:CopySample.Formoreinformation,seeCopy thecurrentMSisMono.Formoreinformation,see
2:RenameSample.Formoreinformation,see MultisampleType)onpage 676.
RenameSampleonpage 673. 10:MSStereoToMono.Thiswillappearonlyif
3:MoveSample.Formoreinformation,seeMove thecurrentMSisStereo.Formoreinformation,see
seeSampleMonoToStereo(ChangeSample 11:OptimizeRAM.Formoreinformation,see
Type)onpage 674. OptimizeRAMonpage 143.
5:DeleteMS.Formoreinformation,seeDelete 12:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSave
MS(DeleteMultisample)onpage 674. toissettoDisk.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
(CopyMultisample)onpage 675. 13:AutoSamplingSetup.Formoreinformation,

48PMC
48a
48b
SpecifiesthefunctionsthattheSW1switch,SW2
switch,andtheRealtimeModulationknobs58will 48a: Panel Switch Assign
haveinSamplingmode. AssignsthefunctionsoftheSW1andSW2switches.
InSamplingmode,itisnotpossibletouseAMSto Fordetailsonthefunctionsthatyoucanassign,see
controlprogramparameters. SW1/2Assignmentsonpage 1033.

AssignsthefunctionoftheSW1switch.Theon/off
statusisalsosaved.Whenyouchangetheassignment,
thestatusisresettooff.
653
Sampling mode
Mode [Toggle, Momentary] 1:CopySample.Formoreinformation,seeCopy

Specifieshowon/offoperationwilloccurwhenyou Sampleonpage 673.
presstheSW1switch. 2:RenameSample.Formoreinformation,see
Toggle:On/offwillalternateeachtimeyoupressthe RenameSampleonpage 673.
SW1switch. 3:MoveSample.Formoreinformation,seeMove
Momentary:Theassignedfunctionwillbeononly Sampleonpage 673.
whileyouholddowntheSW1switch. 4:SampleMonoToStereo.Formoreinformation,
SW2 [Off, , After Touch Lock] Type)onpage 674.
Mode [Toggle, Momentary] 5:DeleteMS.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
AssignsthefunctionoftheSW2switch.Thefunctions MS(DeleteMultisample)onpage 674.
thatcanbeassignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1 6:CopyMS.Formoreinformation,seeCopyMS
exceptthatSW2Mod.:CC#81replacesSW1 (CopyMultisample)onpage 675.
Mod.:CC#80.TherestisthesameasfortheSW1 7:RenameMS.Formoreinformation,seeRename
switch. MS(RenameMultisample)onpage 675.
48b: Modulation Knob Assign (MoveMultisample)onpage 676.
Thesesettingsassignthefunctionsofrealtime 9:ConvertMSToProgram.Formoreinformation,
modulationknobs58.Mostoftheassignable seeConvertMS(Multisample)ToProgramon
functionsaretypesofcontrolchange.Fordetails,see page 675.
RealtimeKnobs58Assignmentsonpage 1034. 10:MSMonoToStereo.Thiswillappearonlyif
Thefunctionsyouassignherewillbecontrolledwhen thecurrentMSisMono.Formoreinformation,see
youoperaterealtimemodulationknobs58. MSMonoToStereo/MSStereoToMono(Change
Knob 6 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] thecurrentMSisStereo.Formoreinformation,see
Knob 7 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] MultisampleType)onpage 676.
Knob 8 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] 11:OptimizeRAM.Formoreinformation,see
Thesecontrollerscanbeusedtomakerealtimechanges
ineffectdynamicmodulationfunctionsetc.whileyou 12:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSave
sample. toissettoDisk.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
Examplesettings)
Inthisexample,welluserealtimemodulationknob5
tocontroltheWet/Dryparameterofthe079:
Stereo/CrossDelayassignedtoIFX1,anduseknob6to
controlthepostIFXPan.Thenwellsampleanaudio
signalfromanexternalsourcewhilecontrollingthese
parametersinrealtime.
1. SetBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)(08a)toIFX1.
2. Select079:Stereo/CrossDelayforIFX1.
3. SettheIFX1pageWet/DrysettingtoDry,
SourcetoKnobMod.5[+],andAmtto+50.
4. IntheModulationKnobAssignarea,assign
Knob5toKnobMod.5(CC#17)andKnob6to
PostIFXPan(CC#08).
5. Rotateknob5,6andthepanningofthedelaylevel
andthedelaywillchange.Youcansamplethe
soundwhileyoumodifyit.

commandsonpage 142.
654
Sampling P4: EQ/Controller 49: Set Up Pads
49: Set Up Pads

49PMC
49a
Hereyoucanspecifythenotenumbers(andtheir
velocities)thatwillbeproducedbypads18in t 49: Page Menu Commands
Samplingmode.Youcanassignuptoeightnote ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numbers(andtheirvelocities)toeachpad. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
49a: Pads 1 commandsonpage 142.
1 [Off, C-1G9 / 001127] DeleteSampleonpage 672.
2 [Off, C-1G9 / 001127] 1:CopySample.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sampleonpage 673.
3 [Off, C-1G9 / 001127]
4 [Off, C-1G9 / 001127] RenameSampleonpage 673.
5 [Off, C-1G9 / 001127] Sampleonpage 673.
6 [Off, C-1G9 / 001127] 4:SampleMonoToStereo.Formoreinformation,
7 [Off, C-1G9 / 001127] Type)onpage 674.
8 [Off, C-1G9 / 001127] 5:DeleteMS.Formoreinformation,seeDelete
Off:Choosethisifyoudontwantthepadtoplaya MS(DeleteMultisample)onpage 674.
note. 6:CopyMS.Formoreinformation,seeCopyMS
C1G9:Specifythenotenumberyouwanttoplay. (CopyMultisample)onpage 675.
001127:Specifythevelocityvalue. 7:RenameMS.Formoreinformation,seeRename
Fordetailsonthesesettingsandhowtousethepads,
see19:Pads. 8:MoveMS.Formoreinformation,seeMoveMS
49b: Pads 28 seeConvertMS(Multisample)ToProgramon
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforPads1,as page 675.
describedunder49a:Pads1onpage 655. 10:MSMonoToStereo.Thiswillappearonlyif
655
Sampling mode
656
Sampling P5: Audio CD 51: Audio CD
Sampling P5: Audio CD

YoucanusetheinternalCDR/RWdrive,oraUSB Beawarethatifyouplaythekeyboardor
connectedCDR/RWdrive,tosampledirectlyfroman controllerswhiletheCDR/RWdriveisoperating,
audioCD. thevibrationmaycausedataskipsorreaderrors,
YoucanevensendtheliveaudiofromtheCDthrough makingitimpossibletoplaytheCDsuccessfully.
InsertorMasterEffects,totheRECandFXControl Use the SEQUENCER buttons to play the CD
Buses,andcontrolpanandlevelseparatelyfortheleft
andrightchannels,justasyoucanwiththeaudio WhileyoureontheAudioCDpage,youcanusethe
inputs.Formoreinformation,seethediagramAudio SEQUENCERbuttonstocontroltheCD,asdescribed
input/outputonpage 628. below.
Thesamplingprocedureisessentiallythesameas (Seq) START/STOP Play/Stop

whensamplingfromtheaudioinputs.Normally,you FF>> Fast-forward
willsettheCDR/RWDriveAudioInputBusSelect
(IFX/Indiv.)toL/R(orIFX112ifyouwanttoapplyan <<REW Rewind
inserteffect),andsetSourceBustoL/R(08c). PAUSE Pause
Whenripping,theaudiosignalfromtheaudioCDis LOCATE Return to the beginning of the track
sampledwhileitsstillindigitalform.
UsetheDestinationpagemenucommandtoexecute IfthecursorislocatedatRangeStartorRangeEnd,
ripping.SeeDestination(AudioCDRipping)on onlytherangebetweenthetwopointswillbeplayed
page 696. back.
Rippingmaynotbesupportedbysomeexternal
CDR/RWdrives,suchasdrivesthatdonotsupport
readingofCDDAdata.Insuchcases,youllseethe
messageErrorinreadingfrommedium.
51: Audio CD
51PMC
51a
51b
51c
Drive [CDD: Name]

51a: Audio CD Play
SelectstheCDR/RWdrivetouse.Ifyouhavemultiple
Location [(00:00.0)] CDR/RWdrivesconnected,selecttheonethat
containstheaudioCDthatyouwanttouse.
Indicatesthecurrentlocationwithintheselected
Track.Whenstopped,thisindicatesthelocationat DrivesotherthanaCDR/RWdrivecannotbe
whichplaybackwillbegin.IfyoureselectTrackor selectedhere.
Index,theLocationwillberesetto00:00.0.
657
Sampling mode
Track [01] REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4]

SelectsthetrackoftheaudioCDthatyouwanttoplay ThissendstheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdriveto
orsampling. theRECbuses(fourmonochannels14).Ifyouwant
tousetheRECbusesforsampling,setSourceBus(0
Index [01] 8c)toREC1/2orREC3/4.
SelectstheindexoftheaudioCDthatyouwanttoplay TheRECbusesareusedtosampleineachmode,and
orsampling. torecordaudiotracksinSequencermode.Theyare
Thiscanbeselectedonlyifyouhaveselectedatrack dedicatedbusesforrecording.
thatcontainsindexdata. Off:TheaudiosignalwillnotbesenttotheRECbus.
InthecaseofsomeCDR/RWdrives,index NormallyyouwillusetheOffsetting.
informationcannotbeobtained. 14:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrivewillbe
Volume [0127] senttothecorrespondingRECbus.ThePansetting
willbeignored,andthesignalwillbesentin
Adjuststhevolumeoftheaudiosignalthatisoutput monaural.
fromtheCDR/RWdrive.
1/2,3/4:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrivewill
SomeCDR/RWdrivesdonotsupportthis,meaning besenttothecorrespondingRECbuses.Thesignal
thatthisadjustmentmaynotaffectthevolume. willbesentviathePansettingtobuses1and2or3
and4instereo.
51b: CD-R/RW Drive Audio Input Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]
Thisspecifiestheoutputdestinationforthesignal
fromanaudioCDplayedbackontheinternalCD Send2 (to MFX2) [000127]
R/RWdriveoraUSBconnectedCDR/RWdrive.Make Thesespecifythelevelatwhichtheaudiosignalfrom
settingsfortheLandRchannels. theCDR/RWdriveissenttothemastereffects.
Note:TheCDR/RWDriveAudioInputsettingsare Send1(toMFX1):Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.
linkedwiththeDiskmode12b:CDR/RWDrive Send2(toMFX2):Sendthesignaltomastereffect2.
AudioInputsettings.
LEFT levelstothemastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX112
Send1andSend2(85a).
RIGHT Pan [L000C064R127]
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.) [L/R, IFX112, 18, Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheaudiosignalfromthe
1/27/8, Off] CDR/RWdrive.NormallyyouwillsetLeftandRight
toL000andR127respectively.
ThisspecifiesthemainbusfortheCDR/RWsaudio
output. Level [000127]
L/R:TheCDR/RWsaudiowillbesenttotheL/Rbus. Thisspecifiestheleveloftheaudiosignalsentfromthe
Thisisthedefaultsetting,andallowsyoutohearthe CDR/RWdrive.Normallyyouwillsetthisto127.
CDusingtheheadphoneand/orthemainoutputs.
IFX112:TheCDR/RWsaudiowillbesenttothe
51c: Ripping
IFX112bus.Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyouwant
toapplyaninserteffect. MakessettingsforrippingdatafromaCD.
18:TheCDR/RWsaudiowillbesenttothe IfthecursorislocatedatRangeStartorRangeEnd,
specifiedINDIVIDUALOUTPUTinmonaural.The CDplaybackwilloccurfromRangeStarttoRange
Pansettingwillbeignored. End.
1/27/8:TheCDR/RWsaudiowillbesentinstereo Rippingisexecutedinthepagemenucommand
(includingtheeffectofthePancontrol)tothespecified Destination.
pairofINDIVIDUALOUTPUTs.
Range Start [00:00.0]
Off:TheCDR/RWsaudiowillnotberouteddirectly
totheoutputsorInsertEffects.However,itmaystillbe Specifythestartinglocationofthedatathatwillbe
routedtoanFXControlBusorRECBus. ripped.
WhenyoureselectTrackorIndex,thiswillberesetto
FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2] 00:00.0.
ThissendstheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdriveto Note:IftheRangeStartorRangeEndeditcellis
theFXControlbuses(twostereochannels;FXCtrl1,2). highlighted,youcanpresstheENTERswitchduring
Formoreinformation,seeFXControlBuson playbacktosetRangeStartorRangeEndtothetiming
page 632. locationatthatmoment.IfyoupresstheENTER
switchmorethanonce,thelocationofthelastpress
willbeused.
IfaneditcellotherthanRangeStartorRangeEndis
highlighted,pressingtheENTERswitchoncewill
specifytheRangeStart,andpressitonceagainwill
658
Sampling P5: Audio CD 51: Audio CD
specifytheRangeEnd.IfyoupresstheENTERswitch
threeormoretimes,theRangeStartandRangeEnd
willbesettothelocationsofthelastpressandthelast
butonepress.
Range End [00:00.0]

Specifiestheendinglocationofthedatathatwillbe
ripped.
WhenyoureselectTrackorIndex,thiswillberesetto
theendingtimeoftheselectedtrackorindex.
Duration [00:00.0]
DisplaysthelengthoftimebetweenRangeStartand
RangeEnd.
Range Graphic
Thisgraphicshowstheselectedrangewithinthe
currentTrackandIndex,assetbytheRangeStartand
RangeEndparameters.

commandsonpage 142.
0:Destination.Formoreinformation,see
Destination(AudioCDRipping)onpage 696.
659
Sampling mode
Sampling P8: Insert Effect

Hereyoucanmakeinserteffectsettingsforusein Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
Samplingmode. MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
IfyouwanttoapplyaninserteffectIFX112tothe Fordetailsoninsertioneffects,seeEffectGuideon
externalaudiosignalwhileyousampleit,choose page 787.
IFX112astheBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)(08a)
parameterforInput14orS/P DIFL,R,andadjustthe Inserteffectsettingsforsamplingmodewillrevert
parametersoftheinserteffect. tothedefaultsettingswhenthepoweristurnedoff.
Ifyouwanttoapplyeffectstoapreviouslysampled UseCopyInsertEffectifyouwanttokeepyour
sampleorasampleyouloaded,andresamplethe inserteffectsettings.Selectaprogramorcombination,
result,settheP8:InsertEffectpageBusSelect(All copytheinserteffectsettingsofSamplingmode,and
OSCsto)(81b)parametertoIFX112,andadjustthe savethem.Writetheprogramorcombinationtosaveit
effectsettings.(Resample08c) ininternalmemory.TheninSamplingmode,use
CopyInsertEffecttoloadtheeffectsettingsfromthe
Forinstance,youcan: programorcombinationsothattheycanbeusedin
Sendtheoutputofamultisampletoaninserteffect Samplingmode.
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect YoucanalsousetheSavetoUserPresetmenu
commandtosaveeffectsindividually.
81: Routing
81PMC
81a
81c 81d
81b
81a: Routing Map 81b: Bus Select

Routing Map Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.Out Assign) (All OSCs to)
Thisdisplaysthestatusoftheinserteffectsettings. [L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off]
Thisindicatestheinputbusesbeingsenttotheinsert Selectsthebus.
effects,theeffectsthatareassigned,theiron/offstatus, Ifyouwanttoapplyaneffecttoasample
chaining,andtheoutputbusthatfollowstheinsert (multisample)thatyousampledorloaded,selectIFX1
effect. 12.(Resample08c)
UsetheP8InsertFXpagetoselectinserteffects,turn Note:Afteryouresample,L/Rwillautomaticallybe
themon/off,andmakechainsettings. selectedastheBusSelect(AllOSCsto)setting.These
settingsaremadeautomaticallysothattheeffectwill
notbeappliedagain(i.e.,asecondtime)whenyou
playbackthesamplethatwasresampledwiththeIFX.
660
Sampling P8: Insert Effect 81: Routing
(Inthesameway,theon/offsettingsforMFX1,2and 0:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
TFX1,2willalsobeturnedoff.)Beawareofthisifyou CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
wanttosampleonceagain. 1:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
81c: FX Control Bus Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSampling:Page
MenuCommandsonpage 672.
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2]
Thissendstheoutputoftheoscillator(multisample)to
aFXControlbus(stereo2channel;FXCtrl1,2)
UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwanttousea
separatesoundtocontroltheinputofaneffect.You
canusethetwo(stereo2channel)busestocontrol
effectsfreely.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuson
page 632.
81d: REC Bus

REC Bus (All OSCs to) [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4]
Thissendstheoutputoftheoscillator(multisample)to
theRECbuses(fourmonochannels;14).Ifyouwant
toresamplefromtheRECbuses,setSourceBusto
REC1/2orREC3/4.
TheRECbusesareusedtosampleineachmode,and
torecordaudiotracksinSequencermode.Theyare
dedicatedbusesforrecording.
Off:TheoscillatoroutputwillnotbesenttotheREC
buses.NormallyyouwillleavethisOff.
14:Theoscillatoroutputwillbesentinmonauralto
thecorrespondingRECbus.
1/2,3/4:Theoscillatoroutputwillbesentinstereoto
thecorrespondingpairofRECbuses.
81e: OSC MFX Send

Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]
Send2 (to MFX1) [000127]
Thissetsthesendlevelsatwhichtheoutputofthe
oscillator(multisample)issenttothemastereffects.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Setthe
SourceBustoL/Rifyouwanttousemastereffects
whileresampling.
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1leveland
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)is
usedforthesemessages.
81f: Tempo
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
ThisistheGlobaltempo,asusedforcontrolling
effects,etc.

commandsonpage 142.
661
Sampling mode
85: Insert FX
85b 85PMC
85a
Inthispageyoucanselecttheeffecttypesfortheinsert Thesettingwillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtime
effects,turnthemon/off,andmakechainingsettings. youpressthis.
Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanusecontrol
change#92toturnallinserteffectsoff.Avalueof0
turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restorethe
85a: IFX originalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
Hereyoucanselectthetypeofeffectforeachinsert byMIDIChannelisusedforthismessage.
effect112,turniton/off,makechainingsettings,and
Chain to [IFX2IFX12]
makepostIFXmixersettings.Forinserteffects,the
direct(Dry)soundisalwaysstereoin/out.The Youcanchainuptotwelveinserteffectstogetherin
configurationoftheeffectsound(Wet)willdependon series,tocreatemorecomplexeffects.Setupthechain
thetypeofeffect. usingthisparameter,andthenenableitusingthe
Chaincheckbox,below.
IFX1 Effectsmustbechainedinascendingnumericorder.
Forexample,IFX1canbechainedtoanyofIFX2
IFX1 [000185]
throughIFX12,andIFX2canbechainedtoIFX3
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect1. throughIFX12.
Category/IFX Select menu Youcanchaintwoormoreeffectsintothesamedown
streameffect.Forinstance,bothIFX1andIFX2canbe
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/IFX
chainedtoIFX6.
category.Usethetabstoselectacategory,andthen Effectscanalsojoinachaininthemiddle.Forinstance,
selectaneffectwithinthatcategory.PresstheOK youcanchainIFX3toIFX4toIFX9,andthenchain
buttontoexecuteyourselection,orpresstheCancel IFX2toIFX9aswell.
buttontocancel. ThePan(CC#8),BusSelect,RECBus,andSend1/2
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On] settingsapplyonlytothelasteffectinthechain.
However,anyeffectinthechaincanbesenttotheFX
Controlbuses.
Chain [Off, On]

Switchestheinserteffecton/off. Thisenablesthechain,assetupbytheChainto
Ifthisisoff,theinputwillsimplybepassedtothe parameter,above.
output.(Turningon000:NoEffectisthesameastheOff
setting.)
662
Sampling P8: Insert Effect 85: Insert FX
Pan (CC#8) (Post IFX PanCC#8) IFX2: Chain to [IFX3IFX12]

[L000C064R127] IFX3: Chain to [IFX4IFX12]
Specifiesthepanningimmediatelyaftertheinsert
effect.
YoucanuseCC#8tocontrolthis. IFX5: Chain to [IFX6IFX12]
Bus Sel. (Bus Select) [L/R, 18, 1/27/8, Off] IFX6: Chain to [IFX7IFX12]
Specifiesthebustowhichthesignalwillbesent IFX7: Chain to [IFX8IFX12]
immediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
L/R:ThesignalwillbeoutputtotheL/Rbus.Then IFX8: Chain to [IFX9IFX12]
afterpassingthroughTFX1andTFX2,itwillbeoutput
toAUDIOOUTPUTL/R.Thisisthenormalsetting.
18:Thesignalwillbeoutputinmonauraltothe IFX10: Chain to [IFX11IFX12]
selectedAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL).
1/27/8:ThesignalwillbepannedbythePan
Thesespecifythechaindestinationforeachinsert
(CC#8)settingandsentinstereototheselected
effect.IfChain(checkbox)ison,theinserteffectwill
AUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)pair.
beconnectedinseriestotheIFXspecifiedbytheChain
Off:ThesignalwillnotbesentdirectlytotheL/Ror tosetting.
Individualbuses.Usethissettingifyouwanttoapply
Send1andSend2andthensendthesignaldirectlyto
themastereffects. 85b: Resource Meter and Tempo
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2] FX
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheFXControlbuses.See EXi FIXED
81d:RECBusonpage 661.
FREE FOR VOICES
REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4]
Thenumberofvoicesyoucanplayisaffectedbyhow
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheRECbuses.See81d: effectsandEXiarebeingused.Thismetershowsthe
RECBusonpage 661.Ifyouwanttoresampleviathe resourceallocationasanapproximatepercentage(%)
RECbuses,setSourceBus(08c)toREC1/2orREC ofthetotalprocessingpower.
3/4.
Send1 [000127] onEXifixedresourcesonpage 382,andAbout
effectsresourcesonpage 787.
Send2 [000127]
TheseadjustthelevelatwhichthepostIFXsignalis
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
senttomastereffects1and2.ThisisvalidifBusSelect Thisspecifiesthetempo.Thissettingisusedfor
(85a)issettoL/RorOff. controllingeffects,etc.
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1level,and
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI t 85: Page Menu Commands
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannelisusedfor
thesemessages. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
IFX212 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Hereyoucanspecifyeachinserteffectseffecttype,
on/offstatus,chaining,andmixersettingsfollowing 0:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
theinserteffect.WiththeexceptionofChaintoand CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
Chain,theparametersarethesameasforIFX1.See 1:SwapInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
IFX1onpage 662. SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
IFXSlotonpage 154.
Slotonpage 155.
663
Sampling mode
86: Track View

85b 86PMC
86a
86b
86a: Track View
Thisshowstheoscillatoroutputandinserteffect
routing.
TypeandOn/Offstatus.TheInsertIFXSlotand
CutIFXSlotpagemenucommandswillapplytothe
slotyouselecthere.
IfyoumovefromthispagetotheP8IFX112page,the
IFXyouchooseherewillbeselected.
86b: Selected
See86a:TrackView,above.

commandsonpage 142.
IFXSlotonpage 154.
Slotonpage 155.
664
Sampling P8: Insert Effect 87: IFX 112
87: IFX 112

87PMC
87a
87b
Thispageletsyoueditthedetailedparametersofthe Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
twelveinserteffects.UsethetabsatlefttoselectIFX1 storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethem
throughIFX12. asanEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuse
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheInsertFXor yourfavoritesettings.
TrackViewpages.Formoreinformation,see85: Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile
InsertFXonpage 662and86:TrackViewon workingonaparticularProgram,andthenlateruse
page 664. thesameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram,Combi,
orSong.
87a: IFX1 page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledon P01P15:ThesecontainpresetdatathatKorgplansto
theglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a). provideinthefuture.Werecommendthatyoustore
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
ownsettings.
Thisturnstheinserteffecton/off.Itislinkedwiththe selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
on/offsettingintheInsertFXpage. writtenaprogram,orselectedanewProgram.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveany
P (Effect Preset) effect.
[P00, P0115, U0015, ---------------] Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,but
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe Program,theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto
settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16 .
userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re Formoredetails,seeUsingEffectPresetson
writablefactorypresets. page 135.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combi,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsofpresets IFX1 Parameters
canbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk. Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheinserteffect
selectedintheInsertFXpage.
Fordetailsontheinserteffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guide,beginningonpage 787.
665
Sampling mode
87b: IFX212 t 87: Page Menu Commands

Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheinserteffects ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
selectedintheP8InsertFXpage. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
TheparametersforIFX2IFX12arethesameasfor shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
IFX1.See87b:IFX212,above. commandsonpage 142.
89: Common FX LFO

89PMC
89a
89b
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize
LFObasedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchas 89a: Common FX LFO1
phasers,flangers,filters,andsoon.
Frequency [0.0220.00 (Hz)]
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividual Sync (Reset) [Off, On]
effectstillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveform
andphase.
Src (Dmod Src) [List of Dmod Sources]
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhether MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On]
touseoneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousethe
individualeffectsfrequency,sync,and/orresetsettings BPM [MIDI, 040.00240.00]
instead.ThisisdoneviatheeffectsLFOType Base Note [r w ]
parameter;selectIndividualtousetheeffectssettings,
orCommon1or2tousetheCommonLFOs. Times [0132]
Dmod(DynamicModulation)iscontrolledonthe TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedinGlobalmodeP1. See89a:CommonFXLFO1onpage 136.
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]

Thisspecifiesthetempo.Thissettingisusedfor 89b: Common FX LFO2
controllingeffects,etc. TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforCommonFX
LFO1.
666
Sampling P8: Insert Effect 89: Common FX LFO

commandsonpage 142.
667
Sampling mode
Sampling P9: Master/Total Effect

Hereyoucanselecttheeffecttypesforthemaster Note:Whenyousample,MFX1On/Off,MFX2On/Off,
effectsandtotaleffects,andturnthemon/off. TFX1On/Off,andTFX2On/Offareautomatically
ThemastereffectsareoutputtotheL/Rbus.Thetotal turnedoff.Thisisdonesothattheeffectwillnotbe
effectsareinsertedintheL/Rbus.Ifyouwanttouse appliedagain(i.e.,asecondtime)whenyouplayback
thesewhilesampling,setSourceBustoL/R. thesamplethatwasresampledwiththeMFX1/2and
TFX1/2.(Inthesameway,theBusSelect(AllOSCsto)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseetheEffectGuide, parameterwillautomaticallybesettoL/R.)Beaware
beginningonpage 787. ofthisifyouwanttosampleagain.
91: Routing
85b 91PMC
91a
91c
91b
selectaneffectwithinthatcategory.PresstheOK
91a: MFX buttontoexecuteyourselection,orpresstheCancel
Themastereffectdoesnotoutputthedirectsound buttontocancel.
(Dry).AdjusttheReturn1andReturn2levelsto
returnthesignaltotheL/RbusandmixitwiththeL/R
bussignal.
Themastereffectsarestereoin/out,butdependingon
theselectedeffecttype,theoutputmaybemonaural.
SeeIn/Outonpage 794. Switchesthemastereffects1on/off.Whenoff,the
outputwillbemuted.Thiswillalternatebetweenon
MFX1 andoffeachtimeitispressed.
Separatelyfromthesettingshere,youcanuse
MFX1 [000185] controlchange#94toturnmastereffects1and2off.
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1.Choose Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127
from000:NoEffect185:Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly. restoretheoriginalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannel
Ifyouchoose000:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemaster specifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)isused
effectismuted. forthismessage.
Category/MFX Select menu Return 1 [000127]

Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/MFX Thisspecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffectto
Selectmenuwillappear,lettingyouselecteffectsby theL/Rbus(afterwhichitpassesthroughTFX1and2,
category.Usethetabstoselectacategory,andthen andissentfromL/MONOandR).
668
Sampling P9: Master/Total Effect 91: Routing
MFX2 Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanusecontrol
change#95toturnbothtotaleffectsoff.Avalueof0
MFX2 [000185] turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restorethe
originalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
MFX2 On/Off [Off, On] byMIDIChannel(Global11a)isusedforthis
message.
Return 2 [000127]
Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeformaster TFX2
effect2,itson/offstatus,andthereturnlevelfrom
mastereffect2totheL/Rbus.SeeMFX1onpage 668. TFX2 [000185]
Chain TFX2 On/Off [Off, On]

Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeandon/off
Chain On/Off [Off, On] statusfortotaleffect2.SeeTFX1,above.
On(checked):Chain(seriesconnection)willbeturned
onforMFX1andMFX2.
91c: Master Volume
SpecifiesthedirectionoftheconnectionwhenMFX1
andMFX2arechained. Thisspecifiesthefinalleveloftheaudiooutputthat
haspassedthroughtotaleffects1and2,andoutput
MFX1MFX2:ConnectfromMFX1toMFX2. fromAUDIOOUTPUT(MAINOUT)L/MONOandR.
MFX2MFX1:ConnectfromMFX2toMFX1. Note:Youcancontrolthemastervolumefromthe
Chain Level [000127] controlsurface.Youcanalsocontrolthissettingfrom
theP0ControlSurfacepage.
WhenchainisOn,thissetsthelevelatwhichthe
soundissentfromthefirstmastereffecttothenext 1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXERAUDIO
mastereffect. switchtoturniton(lit).
2. UsetheMASTERslidertocontrolthelevel.
91b: TFX1, 2
Thesearetheparametersfortotaleffect1and2,which
areplacedatthefinalstageoftheL/Rbus.After ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
passingthroughthetotaleffects,thesoundisoutputto numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
AUDIOOUTPUT(MAINOUT)L/MONOandR. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Forthetotaleffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways commandsonpage 142.
stereoin/out.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe 0:CopyMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
effectsound(Wet)willdependontheselectedeffect CopyMFX/TFXonpage 157.
type. 1:SwapMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
Thetotaleffectsarestereoinandstereoout,butthe SwapMFX/TFXonpage 158.
outputmaybemonauraldependingonthetypeof
effectyouselect.
TFX1
TFX1 [000185]
Thisselectstheeffecttypefortotaleffect1.Choose
from000:NoEffect185:Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly.
Category/TFX Select menu

Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/TFX
Selectmenuwillappear,lettingyouchooseeffecttypes
bycategory.Usethetabstoselectaneffectcategory,
andthenchooseaneffectwithinthatcategory.Press
theOKbuttontoexecuteyourchoice,orpressthe
Thisturnstotaleffect1on/off.Ifthisisoff,theinput
willbepasseddirectlythrough.Thesettingwill
alternatebetweenon/offeachtimeyoupressthis.
669
Sampling mode
92: MFX1
92PMC
92a
MFX1 Parameters
92a: MFX1
Hereyoucanedittheparametersofthemastereffect
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyou selectedintheP9Routingpage.
chooseforMFX1intheP9Routingpage.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeMasterEffects(MFX1,2)
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledon onpage 807.
theglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a).
MFX1 On/Off [Off, On] t 92: Page Menu Commands

Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Itislinkedwiththe commandsonpage 142.
on/offsettingintheP9:Master/TotalEffectRouting
page.
P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, ---------] 1:SwapMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
Thisletsyouselectpresetsforthecurrenteffect.For WriteFXPresetonpage 158.
moreinformation,pleaseseeP(EffectPreset)on
page 665.
93: MFX2
94: TFX1
95: TFX2
ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofMaster 91:Routingonpage 668.
effectstypes,usetheRoutingpage,asdescribedunder
670
Sampling P9: Master/Total Effect 95: TFX2
TheparametersforMFX2,TFX1,andTFX2arethe
sameasforMFX1.Formoreinformation,see92:
MFX1onpage 670.
671
Sampling mode
Sampling: Page Menu Commands

ENTER + 0-9: shortcuts for menu commands Thereisnocomparefunctionthatletsyoureturn
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,which theeditedresulttothestatebeforeediting.Ifyou
provideaccesstodifferentutilities,commands,and wishtopreservetheuneditedsample,uncheckthe
options,dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon. Overwrite*1iteminthedialogboxofeachpage
Youcanusethemenucommandsentirelyfromthe menucommandbeforeyouexecute.
touchscreen,bypressingthemenubuttoninthe Note:ToedittheStart,LoopStart,orEndpoints,use
upperrighthandcornerofthescreenandthen P2:LoopEdit.
selectinganoptionfromthemenuthatappears. Iftheaboveparametersarelocatedwithinanareaof
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownunique sampleaddressesthataredeletedormovedbyyour
menucommands,themenusarestandardizedasmuch editing,theywillautomaticallybemoved.
aspossible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthe TheLoopStartandEnd(21d)mustbeatleast
firstmenuiteminProgram,Combination,and eightsamplesapart.IfyoutrytousetheTruncate,
Sequencemodes. Cut,orRateConvertcommands,buttheresultsof
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationby thecommandswouldcausetheLoopStartandEnd
usingashortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenu tobeseparatedbylessthaneightsamples,youllsee
items: theerrormessageSamplelengthisshorterthan
1. HolddowntheENTERkey. minimum.PleasesettheStartandEnd
appropriately.
selectthedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0. About Overwrite
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1for WhenOverwriteisunchecked:Whenthecommandis
thesecond,andsoon. executed,theeditedsamplewillbesavedinadifferent
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff samplenumber.Theuneditedsamplewillremain
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthe withoutchange.
commandcallsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappear WhenOverwriteischecked:Whenthecommandis
ontheLCD,andyoucanproceedjustasifyoud executed,theeditedsamplewillbeoverwrittenonto
selectedthecommandfromthetouchscreen. theoriginalsample(number).Theoriginalsamplewill
bemodified.
Remarks on editing stereo samples
Note:Normally,youwillleaveSavetoNo.atits
Forstereosamples,theLchannelandRchannel defaultsetting,andexecutewithoutchecking
samplesareeditedsimultaneously.Ifyouwishto Overwrite.Whenyouexecute,boththedatabefore
editonlytheLchannelorRchannel,selectamono andaftereditingwillbepreserved,andthesample
multisample,andselecteithertheLchannelorR numberoftheediteddatawillbeassignedasthe
channelsampleforediting. sampleofthatindex.
Forstereosamples,thedisplaywillindicateSave
toNo.(L)and(R).Theserespectivelyspecifythe
writingdestinationsamplenumbersfortheLand Delete Sample
Rchannels. Thiscommanddeletesallsamples,thecurrently
IfyouCopyamonosampleintothebuffer,and selectedsample,orunusedsamples(samplesnot
thenInsert,Mix,orPasteittoastereosample,the mappedtoamultisample).
datawillbeinserted,mixed,orpastedintoboththe 1. SelectDeleteSampletoopenthedialogbox.
LandRsides.(Theresultisthatastereosample
willbecreated.)
IfyouCopyastereosampleintothebuffer,and
thenInsert,Mix,orPasteittoamonosample,the
LandRsidedatainthebufferwillbemixedto
mono,andtheninserted,mixed,orpasted.(The
resultisthatamonosamplewillbecreated.)
Youcanalsousethesecommandsifyouwishto
monomixastereosampleanduseitasamono
sample.However,beawarethatonceasamplehas
beenmixedtomono,itisnolongerpossibleto 2. Usetheradiobuttonstospecifywhichsamples
returnittoastereosample. willbedeleted.
Selected:Thecurrentlyselectedsamplewillbe
Start and End settings deleted.ThesampleassignmentforIndex(01b)
WhenusingtheP1:SampleEditparametersTruncate willchangeto
VolumeRampandtheP2:LoopEditparameter NoAssign.
Truncatetoeditthewaveformdataofasample,you UnmappedSamples:Allsamplesthatarenot
mustfirstuseStartandEndtospecifytheregionthat mapped(used)inamultisampleordrumkitwillbe
youwanttoedit,andthenselectandexecuteapage deleted.
menucommand.
672
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Copy Sample
AllSamples:Allsamplesinmemorywillbe Sample Memory

deleted.Thesampleassignmentsofall
0000: NewSample_0000 Sample Data
multisampleswillchangeto "Copy Sample"
with Sample Data
NoAssign. 0001: NewSample_0001 Sample Data
3. ToexecutetheDeleteSamplecommand,pressthe
Ifthesampledata(waveformdata)ofthesample
youdeleteisbeingusedbyanothersample,the Sample Memory
sampledataitselfwillnotbedeleted.Onlythe
0000: NewSample_0000 Sample Data
samplewillbedeleted. "Copy Sample"
0001: NewSample_0001
Copy Sample
Thiscommandcopiesthecurrentlyselectedsampleto
anothersample. 5. ToexecutetheCopySamplecommand,pressthe
Note:Thecopydestinationsamplenumberwill OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
automaticallybeincludedintheresultingsample
name.Ifnecessary,usetheRenameSamplemenu
commandtorenameit.Whendoingso,makesurethat Rename Sample
thenameisnotidenticaltoanyothersamplename.For
Thiscommandletsyoumodifythenameofthe
moreinformation,pleaseseeAboutstereo
currentlyselectedsample.
multisamplesandstereosamplesonpage 627.
1. UseSampleSelect(01b)toselectthesample
1. UseSampleSelect(01b)toselectthecopysource
whosenameyouwanttoedit.
sample.
2. SelectRenameSampletoopenthedialogbox.
2. SelectCopySampletoopenthedialogbox.
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetextedit
dialogbox,andinputthedesiredsamplename(up
to24characters).
3. Specifythesamplenumberofthecopy
destination. Ifthemultisampleisstereoandastereo
sampleisselected,youcaninputupto22characters
Whencopyingastereosample,specifyboth
forthesamplename.Thisisbecausethelasttwo
theLandRchannelsforthecopydestination
charactersarereservedforLandR.Ifyourename
samplenumber.
upto22charactersofthesampleofeithertheLor
4. IfyoucheckwithSampleData:Executingthe theRchannel,theothersamplewillautomatically
copywillsimultaneouslycopythesampledata berenamed.
(waveformdata)aswell.
4. ToexecutetheRenameSamplecommand,press
Thecopysourceandcopydestinationsampleswill theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
existascompletelyindependentsamples.For
example,youwouldusethiswhenyouwishtostart
withthesamesampledata,andedititseparatelyin Move Sample
P1:SampleEdittocreatetwoormoredifferent
typesofsample. Thiscommandletsyoumovethecurrentlyselected
sampletothespecifiednumber(i.e.,tochangethe
IfyoudonotcheckwithSampleData:Executing
samplenumber),ortorearrangethesamplenumbers
thecopywillnotcopythesampledata(waveform
sothattheystartfrom0000aftersampleshavebecome
data).Thenewlycreatedsamplewillsharethe
discontinuousasaresultofcreatingorediting.(See
sampledataofthecopysourcesample.For
diagrambelow)
example,youwouldusethiswhenyouwishtouse
P2:LoopEdittocreatetwoormoreversionsofthe Whenyoureassignthesamplenumbers,thesample
samesampledatawithdifferentloopaddresses. numberswithinthemultisamplesanddrumkits
Samplememoryareawillnotbeconsumedbythis (accordingtothesettingofstep4)thatusethese
typeofcopy.IfyouuseP1:SampleEdittoeditthe samplewillalsobeautomaticallyreassigned.(This
sampledata,theresultswillaffectallsamplesthat meansthatthesamplesofthemultisamplesanddrum
sharethissampledata. kitsneednotbereassignedfollowingthisoperation.)
673
Sampling mode
Sample Mono To Stereo

(Change Sample Type)
Thiscommandconvertsamonosampletostereo.This
canbeexecutedwhenamonosampleisselected.
1. UseSampleSelect(01b)toselectthesamplethat
youwanttochangetostereo.
2. SelectSampleMonoToStereotoopenthedialog
1. UseSampleSelect(01b)toselectthecopysource box.
sample.
2. SelectMoveSampletoopenthedialogbox.
3. ToexecutetheChangeSampleTypecommand,
button.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thesampletype
willchangeasfollows.
Theselectedsamplewillbechangedtostereo.The
3. UseToSampletospecifythemovedestination
lasttwocharactersofthesamplenamewillbe
samplenumber.
overwrittenasL.
Whenmovingastereosample,youmust
movethesamplesindividually. Anewsamplewillbecreatedwiththesamename
exceptthatthelasttwocharactersofthesample
Ifyouwishtoreassign(pack)allsamplenumbers namewillbeR.
startingat0000,checkOptimizeEmptySampleNo. Also,iftheselectedmultisampleismono,itwill
4. IfAdjustSampleAssigninDrumKitis changetostereo.
checked,andifthesamplesbeingmovedare
Thelasttwocharactersofthemultisamplename
mappedto(usedby)adrumkit,thosesample
willbeoverwrittenasL.
numberswillalsobeautomaticallymodified.
Normallyyouwillleavethischecked. Anewmultisamplewillbecreatedwiththesame
name,butwhoselasttwocharactersareR.
Samplesmappedto(usedby)multisampleswillbe
automaticallychangedtothenewsamplenumbers Thestereosamplethatwascreatedwillbeassigned
regardlessofthissetting. automatically.
5. ToexecutetheMoveSampleoperation,pressthe
Cancelbutton. Delete MS (Delete Multisample)
Example)Ifdataalreadyexistsatthemovedestination Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselected
samplenumber,thesamplewillnotbeoverwritten; multisampleorallmultisamples.
instead,allsubsequentsampleswillberenumbered 1. UseMultisampleSelect(MS)(01a)toselectthe
upward. multisamplethatyouwanttodelete.
2. SelectDeleteMStoopenthedialogbox.
Move 0003 to 0001
Example)Ifthereisnoemptysamplenumberand
forwardmovementisnotpossible,sampleswillbe
renumbereddownward.
3. AllMultisamples:Checkthisifyouwishtodelete
allmultisamples.
4. DeleteSamplestoo?:Checkthisifyoualsowish
todeletethesamplesincludedinthedeleted
multisample(s).
However,samplesthataremappedto(usedby)
Move 3996 to 3999
othermultisamplesordrumkitswillnotbedeleted.
674
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Copy MS (Copy Multisample)
5. ToexecutetheDeleteMultisamplecommand, 3. Pressthetexteditbuttontomovetothetextedit
presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancel dialogbox,andinputamultisamplenameofupto
button. 24characters.
Evenifyoualsochoosetodeletethesamplesthat Iftheselectedmultisampleisstereo,upto22
areincludedinthedeletedmultisample(s),any characterscanbeinputasthemultisamplename.
sampledata(waveformdata)usedbythesesamples Thisisbecausethelasttwocharactersarereserved
thatissharedwithothersampleswillnotbe forLandR.Ifyourenameupto22charactersof
deleted.Onlythesampleitselfwillbedeleted. themultisampleofeithertheLortheRchannel,the
othermultisamplenamewillautomaticallybe
renamed.
Copy MS (Copy Multisample) 4. ToexecutetheRenameMultisamplecommand,
Thiscommandcopiestheselectedmultisampleto presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancel
anothermultisample. button.
Note:Thecopydestinationmultisamplenumberwill
automaticallybeincludedintheresultingmultisample Convert MS (Multisample) To Program
name.Ifnecessary,usetheRenameMSmenu
commandtorenameit.Whendoingso,makesurethat Thiscommandconvertstheselectedmultisampleinto
thenameisnotidenticaltoanyothermultisample aprogram.
name.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAboutstereo Ifyouhaverecordedasampleorcreateda
multisamplesandstereosamplesonpage 627. multisampleandwouldliketoplayitinProgram
1. UseMultisampleSelect(MS)(01a)toselectthe mode,Combinationmode,orSequencermode,you
copysourcemultisample. mustcreateaprogramthatusesthatmultisamplefor
itsoscillator.
2. SelectCopyMStoopenthedialogbox.
IfyouvecreatedamultisampleinSamplingmodeand
wanttouseitasaprogram,gotoProgramP2:OSC
PitchandsettheOSC1Multisample/WaveSequence
andOSC2Multisample/WaveSequenceBank
parameters(ifType=Multisample)toRAMMonoor
RAMStereo.Amultisamplethatyoucreatedin
Samplingmodecanbeusedintheprogram,andthen
tomakeprogramsettingstospecifyhowthe
3. Specifythecopydestinationmultisamplenumber. multisamplewillbesounded.
Whencopyingastereomultisample,copy HoweverbyexecutingtheConvertMSToProgram
boththeLandRchannelsofthecopydestination command,youcanquicklyandeasilyconvertthe
multisamplenumber. Samplingmodesettingsintoanewprogram,without
havingtomakeanyProgrammodesettingsas
4. ToexecutetheCopyMultisamplecommand,press
describedabove.
theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
1. UseMultisampleSelect(MS)(01a)toselectthe
Whenamultisampleiscopied,thesamples
multisamplethatyouwanttoconverttoa
assignedtothemultisamplewillalsobecopiedat
program.
thesametime.Atthistime,theywillbe
automaticallycopiedtovacantsamplenumbers. 2. SelectConvertMSToProgramtoopenthedialog
Thesampledata(waveformdata)willbeshared box.
betweenthecopysourceandcopydestination.
(Additionalsamplememoryareawillnotbe
consumed.)
Rename MS (Rename Multisample)

Thiscommandmodifiesthenameofthecurrently
selectedmultisample.
multisamplewhosenameyouwanttoedit. 3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetextedit
dialogbox,andinputanewprogramname(upto
2. SelectRenameMStoopenthedialogbox.
24characters).
Bydefault,themultisamplenamewillbeused.
4. IfUseDestinationProgramParametersis
unchecked:
Executingthecommandwillreplacethe
multisampleoftheconvertdestinationprogram
withthemultisampleselectedhere,andwill
initializetheremainingprogramparameters.
675
Sampling mode
Themultisamplewillbeconvertedintoasingle Monosamplesassignedtotheoriginalmultisample
oscillatorProgram. willbeassignedtobothLandRmultisamples.
IfUseDestinationProgramParametersischecked: Ifsamplesassignedtotheoriginalmultisampleare
Executingthiscommandwillreplacethe partofastereopairofsamples,theLandR
multisampleofthedestinationprogramwiththe sampleswillbeassignedtotheLandR
multisampleselectedhere,andwillnotinitializethe multisamples.
remainingprogramparameters.Usethissettingif
: MS Stereo To Mono
youwishtousetheparametersettingsofanexisting
presetprogram,etc. Theselectedmultisamplewillbeconvertedto
mono.TheLorRattheendofthemultisample
Note:UseDestinationProgramParameters
namewillbedeleted.
requiresthattheOscillatorModeofthedestination
programbeSingle.IfitisaDoubleorDrum Multisamplesthatarestereopairsoftheselected
program,themessageOscillatorModeconflicts multisamplewillbedeleted.
willappear.
5. InToProgram,selecttheconvertdestination
Move MS (Move Multisample)
program.
Whentheeditcellisselected,youcanusethe Thiscommandletsyoumovethecurrentlyselected
numerickeys09,theVALUEdial,theVALUE multisampletothespecifiednumber(i.e.,tochange
slider,and / switchestomakeaselection. themultisamplenumber),ortorearrangethe
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theProgram multisamplenumberssothattheystartfrom000after
Selectmenuwillappear.Hereyoucanselecta multisampleshavebecomediscontinuousasaresultof
programbybank. creatingorediting.(Seediagrambelow)
ItisrecommendedthatyouuseUSERBasthe Whenyoureassignthemultisamplenumbers,the
programbankforSamplingmode. multisamplenumberswithintheprogramsthatuse
thesemultisampleswillalsobeautomatically
6. ToexecutetheConvertMultisampleToProgram
reassigned(accordingtothesettingofstep4).(This
meansthatyoudonotneedtoreselectthe
theCancelbutton.
multisamplesinProgrammodefollowingthis
operation.)
MS Mono To Stereo/MS Stereo To Mono
(Change Multisample Type)
Thiscommandconvertsamonomultisampletostereo,
orastereomultisampletomono.Iftheselected
multisampleismono,thedialogboxwillallowyouto
executeMSMonoToStereo.Iftheselected
multisampleisstereo,thedialogboxwillallowyouto
executeMSStereoToMono.
multisamplethatyouwishtomove.
multisamplethatyouwanttochangetostereoor
mono. 2. SelectMoveMStoopenthedialogbox.
2. ChooseeitherMSMonoToStereoorMSStereoTo
Monotoopenthedialogbox.
3. ToexecutetheChangeMultisampleType
3. InTo Multisample,specifythemovedestination
theCancelbutton.
multisamplenumber.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,themultisample
Whenmovingastereomultisample,youwill
typeandsampleassignmentwillchangeasfollows.
needtomoveeachpartseparately.
MS Mono To Stereo Ifyouwishtorearrangeallmultisamples
Theselectedmultisamplewillbeconvertedto consecutively,checkOptimizeEmptyMultisample
stereo.Thelasttwocharactersofthemultisample No.
namewillbeoverwrittenasL. 4. IfAdjustMultisampleAssigninProgramis
Anidenticalmultisamplewillbenewlycreated,but checkedandifthemultisamplesbeingmovedare
withthelasttwocharactersofthemultisample usedinprograms,themultisamplenumbersofthe
nameoverwrittenasR. programswillalsobereassignedautomatically.
Normallyyouwillleavethischecked.
676
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Optimize RAM
5. ToexecutetheMoveMultisamplecommand,click
theOKbutton.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,click
theCancelbutton.
Example:Ifdataalreadyexistsatthemovedestination
multisamplenumber,themultisamplewillnotbe
overwritten;instead,allsubsequentmultisampleswill
berenumberedupward.
Move 003 to 001 Drive Select
Example:Ifthereisnoemptymultisamplenumber 2. UseDriveSelecttoselectthediskintowhichthe
andforwardmovementisnotpossible,multisamples datawillbewrittenduringsampling.
willberenumbereddownward. 3. UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontomove
betweendirectories.
4. IntheNamefield,specifyanamefortheWAVE
filethatwillbewrittenduringsampling.
IfyoucheckTakeNo.,atwodigittakenumber
willbeaddedattheendofthefilenamewhenitis
Move 996 to 999 saved.Thenumberwillautomaticallyincrement
eachtimeyousample.Whensamplingrepeatedly,
thisisconvenientsinceitallowseachfiletobe
Optimize RAM savedwithadifferentfilename.
IfTakeNo.isnotchecked,uptoeightcharacters
ThiscommandoptimizestheRAMmemory. canbeenteredintheNamefield.IfTakeNo.is
Whenyouexecutetheoptimizecommand,any checked,uptosixcharacterscanbeentered.
memoryareascontainingunuseddatawillbe 5. PresstheDonebuttontocompletethesettings.
rearranged,allowingyoutoutilizealloftheremaining
memory. Playing back a WAVE file
Ifyourunoutofmemory,tryusingOptimizeRAM. 1. ChooseSelectDirectorytoopenthedialogbox.
TheremainingamountofRAMcanbecheckedunder 2. UseDriveSelect,theOpenbutton,andtheUp
01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locations,asdescribed buttontoselectthediskanddirectory,andselect
onpage 630. theWAVEfilethatyouwanttoplay.
1. SelectOptimizeRAMtoopenthedialogbox. Note:youcanonlyplay48kHzWAVEfiles.
3. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchor
Playbutton.
TheselectedWAVEfilewillplay.
4. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchonce
againtoStopbutton.
2. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheoptimize IftheWAVEfileismono,thesamesoundwillbe
command,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel outputtoLandR.
withoutexecuting.
Note:IfAutoOptimizeRAM(Global01d)ischecked,
RAMwillbeoptimizedautomatically. Auto Sampling Setup
Thiscommandautomaticallysetsvarioussampling
relatedparametersforSamplingmodeoperations.You
Select Directory canusethiscommandwhenyouwanttosamplean
Thiscommandletsyouspecifythesavedestination externalaudiosource,orwhenyouwanttoapplyan
disk,directory,andfilenamefortheWAVEfilethatwill effecttoasampleandresampleit.Youcanalsousethis
becreatedbysampling. commandtoinitializethesettings.
YoucanalsousethisSelectDirectorycommandto Whenyouexecutethiscommand,theapplicable
listentoaudiofromaWAVEfilethatwassavedto parameterswillbesetautomatically.Youcannotuse
disk. theCOMPAREswitchtorecalltheprevious
settings.
TheSelectDirectorycommandisavailablewhenSave
toissettoDISK.
Specifying the save-destination for a WAVE file

1. ChooseSelectDirectorytoopenthedialogbox.
677
Sampling mode
Thesettingsareautomaticallymadeforthemost MonoL:SettingswillbemadeforsamplingtoL
typicalapplications.Afterexecutingtheautosetup MONOfromInput1(ifyouveselectedAnalog1/2)
operation,youcanfurtheradjustanyofthesettings orfromInput3(ifyouveselectedAnalog3/4).
tosuityourneedsasdescribedintheNote: MonoR:SettingswillbemadeforsamplingtoR
paragraphsofeachsection. MONOfromInput2(ifyouveselectedAnalog1/2)
1. SelectAutoSamplingSetuptoopenthedialog orfromInput4(ifyouveselectedAnalog3/4).
box. Stereo:Settingswillbemadeforsamplinginstereo
fromInput1/2or3/4.
3)UseSavetotospecifythedestinationtowhich
thesampleddatawillbewritten.RAMwritesthe
dataintoRAMmemory.DISKcreatesaWavefile
fromthesampleddataandsavesittodisk.
4)Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffecttothe
externalaudioinputsourcewhileitisbeing
sampled,useIFXtospecifytheinserteffectthat
youwanttouse.Ifyoudontwanttouseaninsert
effect,setthisOff.
5)PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheRECAudio
2. Usetheradiobuttonstoselectthetypeofsettings Inputcommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonifyou
youwanttomake. decidenottoexecute.
Initialize:Initializethesamplingrelated Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoSampling
parameterstotheirdefaultvalues. Setup:Automaticallysetparametersandtheir
RECAudioInput:Makesettingsforsamplingan valuesonpage 679.
externalaudiosource. Note:Whenyouarereadytosample(afterexecuting
AutoResamplethroughIFX:Makesettingsfor RECAudioInput),presstheSAMPLINGRECswitch
applyinganeffecttoasampleandresamplingit. andthentheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtobegin
sampling.(ThisisbecauseTriggerissettoSampling
3. Specifytheconditions.Thesewilldependonwhat STARTSW.)Whenyouvefinishedperforming,press
youselectinstep2. theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostopsampling.
IfyouselectInitialize:
Note:Hereshowtocheckthedatayoujustsampled.
PresstheOKbuttontoinitializethesettings,or IfyouspecifiedSavetoRAM,playtheC2noteofthe
presstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidenottoexecute. keyboardtohearthesample.IfyouspecifiedSaveto
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoSampling DISK,usethemenucommandSelectDirectorytohear
Setup:Automaticallysetparametersandtheir thesample.
valuesonpage 679.
Note:IfyouspecifiedSavetoDISKandwanttochange
IfyouselectRECAudioInput: thesavedestinationfortheWavefiles,usethemenu
commandSelectDirectory.
Note:Ifyouwanttochangethewayinwhichsampling
isinitiated,changetheTriggersetting.
Note:IfyouselectedS/P DIFforSourceAudio,use
SystemClock(Global01d)tochangethesystem
clock.
IfyouselectAutoResamplethroughIFX:
1)UseSourceAudiotoselecttheexternalaudio
inputsource.
Analog1/2:Ananalogaudiosourcesuchasa
musicalinstrumentconnectedtotheAUDIO
INPUT1and2jackswillbeinputtotheOASYS.
Analog3/4:Ananalogaudiosourcesuchasa
musicalinstrumentconnectedtotheAUDIO
INPUT3and4jackswillbeinputtotheOASYS.
S/P DIF:Selectsthedigitalaudiooutputfroman 1)UseIFXtoselecttheeffectthatyouwantto
instrumentorDATetc.connectedtotheS/P DIFIN applytothesample.
jack.(08aAudioInput) 2)PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteAutoSampling
2)UseMonoL/MonoR/Stereotoselecttheinput Setup(AutoResamplethroughIFX),orpressthe
source,andeithermonoorstereoasthenumberof Cancelbuttonifyoudecidenottoexecute.Formore
channelsthatwillbesampled. information,pleaseseeAutoSamplingSetup:
678
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Auto Sampling Setup
Automaticallysetparametersandtheirvalueson (ThisisbecauseTriggerissettoSamplingSTART
page 679. SW.)Thesamplewillplay,andwhenplaybackends,
Note:Whenyouarereadytoresample(afterexecuting itwillberesampled.
AutoResamplethroughIFX),performthefollowing Note:Tochecktheresampleddata,playthenoteyou
steps. specifiedintheKeyparameter.
1)UseKey(08c)tospecifythekeytowhichthe Topreventtheinserteffectfrombeingappliedin
sampleyouwanttoresampleisassigned. duplicatewhenyoulistentotheresampleddata,
2)UseP8:InsertEffecttomakeeffectsettings.To BusSelectAllOSCsto(81b)willautomatically
hearthesound,playthenoteyouspecifiedinKey. besettoL/Rwhenresamplingends.Ifyouwantto
applyIFXandresampleonceagain,youwillneed
3)Tobeginresampling,presstheSAMPLINGREC
tochangethissettingbacktothesameIFX.
keyandthentheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.
Auto Sampling Setup: Automatically-set parameters and their values

[Auto Resampling through
[Initialize] [REC Audio Input]
IFX]
Input1, 2, 3, 4 Input1, 2, 3, 4
Input (Input Source)*1 [Source Audio]*2
S/P DIF S/P DIF
Bus Select Off [IFX]*3 Off
FX Ctrl Bus Off Off Off
REC Bus Off Off Off
Input1, 3, S/P DIF-L
Send1/2 000 000 000
Pan L000 L000 L000
Level 127 127 127
Bus Select Off [IFX]*3 Off
FX Ctrl Bus Off Off Off
REC Bus Off Off Off
Input2, 4, S/P DIF-R
Send1/2 000 000 000
Pan R127 R127 R127
Level 127 127 127
Source Bus L/R L/R L/R
Source Direct Solo (N/A) (N/A) (N/A)
Sampling Setup Trigger Sampling START SW Sampling START SW Sampling START SW

(Name) Metronome Precount (N/A) (N/A) (N/A)
Pre Trigger REC
Resample Manual Manual Auto
Save to RAM [Save to] RAM
Mode Stereo [Source Audio]*4 Stereo
REC Sample Setup Rec Level +0.0 +0.0 +0.0
Auto +12dB On On On*5 On
Auto Loop On On
Select Directly
Bus Select (All OSCs to) L/R [IFX]
FX Crtl Bus Off Off
Routing
REC Bus Off Off
Send1/2 127 000
Insert FX Bus Select (Post IFX) L/R*6 L/R*6
:Notsetautomatically *4LMonoiftheSourceAudioisMonoL,RMonoif
[]:Setautomaticallyaccordingtotheparameter itisMonoR,andStereoifitisStereo
settingsinthedialogbox *5WhenSaveto=RAM
*1Editsamplingmodeparameters *6SpecifytheBUSSelectofthatIFX112.Ifeffects
*2UsestheinputsourcespecifiedasSourceAudio. arechained,specifythelastIFXinthechain.
*3:IfIFXisOffthiswillbeL/R.IfIFX112is
selectedthiswillbeIFX112.
679
Sampling mode
Truncate (for Sample Edit)

Thiscommanddeletesunwanteddatathatliesoutside
theStartandEndpoints.Usethiscommandwhenyou
wishtodeletesilenceatthebeginningorendofthe
sample. 1. UseSampleSelect(11b)toselectthesamplethat
youwishtoedit,anduseStartandEndtospecify
Note:Ifyouwishtodeleteunneeded(unplayed) theeditingrange.
sampledataaftersettingtheStart,LoopStart,andEnd
YoucanpresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch
(21d),usetheTruncate(forLoopEdit)pagemenu
orPlaybuttontoheartheportionthatwillbe
commandfoundinP2:LoopEdit.
deletedbytheCutcommand.
2. SelectCuttoopenthedialogbox.
theeditingrange.
orPlaybuttontoheartheportionthatwillbeleftby
theTruncatecommand.
3. TherangetobeeditedisshownbyRangeStart
2. SelectTruncatetoopenthedialogbox. andEnd.
4. InSavetoNo.,specifythesavedestinationsample
number.Bydefault,anunusedsamplenumber
willbeselected.
IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe
fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged.
SeeAboutOverwriteonpage 672.
Forstereosamples,useSavetoNo.(L)and
(R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR
channels.
3. TheeditingrangewillbeshowninRangeStart
andEnd. 5. ToexecutetheCutcommand,presstheOKbutton.
Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
4. Usetheradiobuttonstoselecttheportionthatwill
bedeleted.
Front&End:Thesampledatathatliesbeforethe Clear
StartandaftertheEndwillbedeleted.
ThiscommandconvertsthedatabetweentheStartand
Front:ThesampledatathatliesbeforetheStartwill Endpointstozerovalues.Sampledatabeforeandafter
bedeleted. theeditedrangewillnotmove.
End:ThesampledatathatliesaftertheEndwillbe
deleted.
number.
Bydefault,anunusedsamplenumberwillbe
selected. 1. UseSampleSelect(11b)toselectthesamplethat
IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe youwishtoedit,anduseStartandEndtospecify
fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged. theeditingrange.
SeeAboutOverwriteonpage 672. YoucanpresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch
Forstereosamples,useSavetoNo.(L)and orPlaybuttontoheartheportionthatwillbe
(R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR changedtozerolevelbytheClearcommand.
channels. 2. SelectCleartoopenthedialogbox.
6. ToexecutetheTruncatecommand,presstheOK
Cut
ThiscommanddeletesthedatabetweentheStartand
Endpoints.Sampledatalocatedafterthedeleted
portionwillbemovedtowardthebeginningofthe
sample.
680
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Copy
3. TherangetobeeditedisshownbyRangeStart 1. UseSampleSelect(11b)toselectthesamplethat
andEnd. youwishtoedit,andsetStarttospecifythe
4. InSavetoNo.,specifythesavedestinationsample startingaddress.TheEndsettingisignored.
number.Bydefault,anunusedsamplenumber 2. SelectInserttoopenthedialogbox.
willbeselected.
channels.
5. ToexecutetheClearcommand,presstheOK
3. ToStartwillindicatethestartingaddressatwhich
thedatawillbeinserted.
Copy 4. InSavetoNo.,specifythesavedestinationsample
Thiscommandcopiesthesampledatafromthearea number.Bydefault,anunusedsamplenumber
betweentheStartandEndpointsintothesampledata willbeselected.
buffer.ThisdatacanthenbeusedbytheInsert,Mix, IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe
orPastecommands. fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged.
WhenyouexecuteCopy,thedatathatiscopiedinto SeeAboutOverwriteonpage 672.
thebufferactuallyconsistsonlyofthesource Forstereosamples,useSavetoNo.(L)and
samplenumberandtheStartandEndlocationsnot (R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR
thedataitself.Donotdeletethesourcesampleuntil channels.
youfinishexecutingtheInsert,Mix,orPaste 5. ToexecutetheInsertcommand,presstheOK
command. button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
IfthebufferintowhichdatawasplacedbytheCopy
commandcontainsnodata,thedisplaywillshow
themessage,Sourcesampleisempty.
youwishtoedit,anduseStartandEndtospecify Mix
theeditingrange. Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thesampledata
YoucanpresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch placedinthebufferbyexecutingCopyintheSampling
orPlaybuttontoheartheportionthatwillbe modeSampleEditpagewillbemixedwiththeselected
copiedbytheCopycommand. sampledata,startingattheStartaddress.
2. SelectCopytoopenthedialogbox. From the buffer
youwishtoedit,andsetStarttospecifythe
startingaddress.TheEndsettingisignored.
3. TherangetobecopiedisshownbyRangeStart
2. SelectMixtoopenthedialogbox.
andEnd.
4. ToexecutetheCopycommand,presstheOK
Insert
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thesampledata
placedinthebufferbyexecutingCopyintheSampling
modeSampleEditpagewillbeinsertedattheStart
address.Thedatathatfollowsthisaddresswillbe
movedtowardtheendofthesample.
3. ToStartwillindicatethestartingaddressatwhich
From the buffer thedatawillbemixed.
willbeselected.
681
Sampling mode
IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe Ifyouselect:NoAssignforSampleSelect
fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged. andthenopenthedialogboxforthiscommand,a
SeeAboutOverwriteonpage 672. vacantsamplenumberwillbeselected
Forstereosamples,useSavetoNo.(L)and automatically.
(R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR TheStartandEndsettingswillbeignored,andwill
channels. havenoeffect.Thebeginningofthesamplewillbe
5. ToexecutetheMixcommand,presstheOK placedataddress0.
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. 2. SelectPastetoopenthedialogbox.
commandcontainsnodata,thedisplaywillindicate
Sourcesampleisempty.
Paste
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thesampledata
placedinthebufferbyexecutingCopyintheSampling
modeSampleEditpagewillbeplacedinthesample
startingattheStartaddress.Theoriginaldatawillbe 3. InSavetoNo.,specifythesavedestinationsample
deleted,andoverwrittenbythesampledatafromthe number.Ifyouwishtochangeit,respecifythe
buffer. desirednumber.
Youcanalsoplacesampledataintoablanksample. Forstereosamples,useSavetoNo.(L)and
ThisisconvenientwhenyouwishtoCopypartofa (R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR
sampleandcreateanewsamplebasedonit. channels.
Pastingtoasamplethatcontainssampledata 4. ToexecutethePastecommand,presstheOK
From the buffer button.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Insert Zero
youwishtoedit,andsetStarttospecifythe Thiscommandinsertszerolevelsampledata(silence),
startingaddress.TheEndsettingisignored. beginningattheStartaddress.Thedatathat
previouslyoccupiedthatlocationwillbemoved
2. SelectPastetoopenthedialogbox.
towardtheendofthesample.
Size
youwishtoedit,andsetStarttospecifythe
startingaddress.TheEndsettingisignored.
3. ToStartwillindicatethestartingaddressatwhich 2. SelectInsertZerotoopenthedialogbox.
thedatawillbepasted.
willbeselected.
channels. 3. ToStartwillindicatethestartingaddressatwhich
thedatawillbeinserted.
5. ToexecutethePastecommand,presstheOK
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. 4. InSize,specifythelengthofthedatathatwill
beinserted.
commandcontainsnodata,thedisplaywillindicate 5. InSavetoNo.,specifythesavedestinationsample
Sourcesampleisempty. number.Bydefault,anunusedsamplenumber
willbeselected.
Pasting to a sample that contains no sample data
1. Selectthevacantsamplenumberthatyouwishto fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged.
paste. SeeAboutOverwriteonpage 672.
682
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Normalize/Level Adjust
Forstereosamples,useSavetoNo.(L)and Also,ifexecutingLevelwithnegative()settings
(R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR causesanyportionofthesampledatatoreacha
channels. zerolevel,thezerodatawillnotreturntoits
6. ToexecutetheInsertZerocommand,presstheOK originalstateevenifyoureexecuteLevelwith
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. positive(+)settings.
Normalize/Level Adjust willbeselected.
Thiscommanduniformlymodifiesthedatavalues IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe
(volume)ofthedatabetweentheStartEnd. fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged.
Normalizewillamplifythelevelofthesampledataas SeeAboutOverwriteonpage 672.
faraspossiblewithoutallowingittoclip(distort).If Forstereosamples,useSavetoNo.(L)and
thelevelofthesampleddataistoolow,youcan (R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR
executethiscommandtoincreasethedynamicrange. channels.
Levelallowsyoutoraiseorlowerthelevelasdesired. 6. ToexecutetheNormalize/LevelAdjustcommand,
Normalize presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancel
button.
Beawarethatifsampledataofanextremelylow
levelisnormalized,anynoiseincludedinthe
Level Adjust 6dB
samplewillalsobeamplified.
Volume Ramp
Thiscommandmodifiesthedatavalues(volume)
1. UseSampleSelect(11b)toselectthesamplethat betweentheStartandEnd.Youcanmakethevolume
youwishtoedit,anduseStartandEndtospecify graduallyincrease(FadeIn)ordecrease(FadeOut)
theeditingrange. fromtheStarttotheEnd.
YoucanpresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch Fade In
orPlaybuttontoheartheportionthatwillbe
normalizedorleveladjusted.
2. SelectNormalize/LevelAdj.toopenthedialog
box.
Fade Out
theeditingrange.
3. TherangetobeeditedisshownbyRangeStart orPlaybuttontoheartheportiononwhich
andEnd. VolumeRampwillbeexecuted.
4. IfyoucheckNormalizeandexecute,thedatawill 2. SelectVolumeRamptoopenthedialogbox.
benormalized.Inthiscase,theLevelsettingwill
beignored.
IfyouwishtospecifyLeveltomodifythelevelof
thesampledata,donotcheckNormalize.
Eachincreaseof+6dBwillapproximatelydouble
theheightofthewaveformshownintheLCD.
+12 dBwillbeanincreaseofapproximately4X,and
+18dBwillbeapproximately8X.Conversely,each
decreaseof6dBwillhalvethelevel,sothat6dB
willbe1/2Xand12dBwillbeapproximately1/4X.
ExecutingtheLevelcommandwithpositive(+)
settingsmaycausethesoundtoclip(i.e.,distortat 3. TherangetobeeditedisshownbyRangeStart
thepointthatamplificationbeyondthemaximum andEnd.
levelisimpossible).Oncethesampledatahasbeen 4. Usetheradiobuttonstoselectthetypeofvolume
boostedbeyondtheclippingpoint,reexecutingthis ramp.
commandwithnegative()settingsofLevelwill FadeIn:ThevolumeatRangeStartwillbezero,
simplylowertheoverallleveloftheclippedsignal andwillgraduallyincreasetowardEnd.
thewaveformwillremaindistorted.
683
Sampling mode
FadeOut:Thevolumewillgraduallydecreasefrom 5. ToexecutetheInsertZerocommand,presstheOK
theRangeStartvolumeuntilitreacheszeroatEnd. button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
5. InCurve,specifythewayinwhichthevolume Thiscommandcannotbeexecutedonasample
willchange. whosesamplingrateis192Hzorless.
Linear:Thevolumewillchangelinearly.Fornormal TheleftandrightchannelsofaStereosamplemust
fadeinorfadeout,selectLinear. havethesamesamplingrate.Althoughitispossible
Power:Thevolumewillchangenonlinearly.When toselectmonomultisamplesforLandRand
youusetheMixmenucommandtocombinea converttheirsamplingrateseparately,thesystem
fadedinwaveformwithadifferentfadedout willthennolongerbeabletohandlethepairasa
waveform(i.e.,crossfade),usingaLinearfade stereosample.
in/outmayproduceanimpressionthatthevolume
hasdroppedinthemiddleofthecurve.Insuch
cases,usePowertoperformthefadein/out. Reverse
6. InSavetoNo.,specifythesavedestinationsample Thiscommandreversesthesampledata(i.e.,
number.Bydefault,anunusedsamplenumber exchangesthebeginningandend).
willbeselected.
TheReversecommandisalwaysexecutedonall
IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe waveformdataoftheselectedsample,regardlessofthe
fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged. StartandEndsettings.
channels.
7. ToexecutetheVolumeRampcommand,pressthe
OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. 1. UseSampleSelect(11b)toselectthesamplethat
youwishtoedit.
2. SelectReversetoopenthedialogbox.
Rate Convert
Thiscommandlowersthesamplingrate(frequency)of
thesampleddataby2/3,1/2,1/3,1/4,or1/6.Youcan
usethiscommandtocreatedownsamplingeffects.
Thesampledataisthinnedtoconvertittothelower
samplingfrequency.
TheRateConvertcommandisalwaysexecutedonall
waveformdataoftheselectedsample,regardlessofthe
StartandEndsettings. 3. InSavetoNo.,specifythesavedestinationsample
1. UseSampleSelect(11b)toselectthesamplethat number.Bydefault,anunusedsamplenumber
youwishtoedit. willbeselected.
2. SelectRateConverttoopenthedialogbox. IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe
channels.
4. ToexecutetheReversecommand,presstheOK
Note:Whenyouexecutethiscommand,allofthe
3. Thesamplingrateoftheselectedsampleisshown sampledatawillberewrittentoreverseitsdirection.
attherightofRate.Attherightoftheyou TheP2:LoopEditalsocontainsaReverse(21d)
canselectthedesiredamountofthesamplingrate command,whichsimplyreversestheplayback
conversion:2/3,1/2,1/3,1/41/6.Thesamplingrate directionwithoutaffectingthesampledataitself.
followingconversionwillbedisplayedinHz.
Link
willbeselected. Thiscommandconnectsthecurrentlyselectedsample
IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe withanothersample.
channels.
684
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Link
SOUND A SOUND B andtheothersideofthesamplewillalsobe

processedbytheLinkcommand.
IftheFrontSampleismonoandtheRearSampleis
stereo,theLandRoftheRearSamplewillbemixed
LINK tomonobeforelinking.
IftheFrontSampleisstereoandtheRearSampleis
mono,theidenticalsamplewillbeplacedinLandR
SOUND A SOUND B
oftheRearSamplebeforelinking.
4. UseRearSampleNo.toselectthesamplenumber
thatwillbelinked.
Whenthecommandisexecuted,thissamplewillbe
placedinback.
Thevolumeofthetwosamplescanbechanged 5. InCrossfadeLength,specifythelengthover
graduallyatthetransitiontograduallymixthe whichthecrossfadewilloccur.
sampleswitheachother.Thisiscalledcrossfade,and
canbeusedtoproduceanaturalsoundingtransition Ifyouspecifya%value,theproportioninrelation
betweenthetwosounds. totheentireFrontSamplewillbecalculated
automatically.Ifyouspecify50%,thelasthalfofthe
SOUND A SOUND B FrontSamplewillcrossfaded.
Iftherearsampleisshort,theCrossfadeLength
cannotbesetanylongerthanthelengthoftheRear
sample.Inthiscase,itwillnotbepossibletospecify
CROSSFADE LINK avalueupto100%.
Volume
SOUND A SOUND B
Time
Crossfaded portion
(Sound A gradually diminishes,
and sound B gradually increases)
Afterselectingasampleinstep1,youcansetStart
Crossfaded portion
andspecifythebeginningofthecrossfadewhile
(This is called the Crossfade Length) viewingthewaveform.SetEndtotheendofthe
sample.Ifyouspecifythese,CrossfadeLengthwill
indicatethelengthdeterminedbyStartandEnd.
Linkwillbeexecutedforalloftheselectedsample
6. InCurve,specifyhowyouwantthevolumeto
data,regardlessoftheStartandEndsettings.
changeinthecrossfadedportion.
1. UseSampleSelect(11b)toselectthesamplethat Linear:Thevolumewillchangelinearly.
willbeplacedinfrontbytheLinkcommand.
Power:Thevolumewillchangenonlinearly.In
2. SelectLinktoopenthedialogbox. somecases,Linearmaysoundasthoughthe
volumediminishesinthemiddleofthecurve.Ifthis
occurs,usePower.
number.
Anunusedsamplenumberwillbeselectedby
default.
channels.
8. ToexecutetheLinkcommand,presstheOK
3. ThesamplenumberselectedforFrontSampleNo.
button.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,pressthe
willbedisplayed.Whenthecommandisexecuted,
Cancelbutton.
thissamplewillbeplacedinfront.
Ifyouselectonesideofastereosample,it
willautomaticallybedetectedasastereosample,
685
Sampling mode
Ifyoulinksamplesofdifferentsamplingrates(such
ascreatedbyRateConvert),thenewlycreated Time Slice
samplewillhavethesamplingrateoftheFront TimeSliceletsyouconvertamonoorstereorhythmic
sample. sample,suchasadrumloop,intoasetofindividual
OnevacantsampleisusedinordertoexecuteLink. hitsandmatchingsequencerdata.Youcanthen:
Beawarethatiftherearenovacantsamples,an Recreatetheloopbyplayingthesequencerdata
errorwilloccur.
Changethetempooftheloop,withoutalteringthe
pitch
Truncate (for Loop Edit) Changethepitchofthesamples,withoutaltering
thetempo
Thiscommanddeletesunwanteddatathatliesoutside
oftheStart,LoopStart,andEndpoints(21d).After Changetherhythmicfeelbyalteringquantization,
settingthestartaddress,loopstartaddress,andend swing,etc.
addressofthesample,usethiscommandtodelete Changethepatternoftheloopbyswappingor
unwantedsampledata. deletingindividualhits,orotherwiseeditingthe
sequencerorsampledata
Indetail,TimeSlicedoesthefollowing:
Detectstheindividualbeatsintheoriginalloop
Splitseachbeatintoaseparatesample
1. UseSampleSelect(21b)toselectthesamplethat CreatesaMultisamplewiththeoriginallooponthe
youwanttoedit,andusetheStartorLoopStart noteC2,andtheindividualbeatsonseparatekeys
pointsandtheEndpointtospecifytheregionthat startingonD2
youwanttoedit.
CreatesaProgramwhichusesthenewMultisample
2. SelectTruncatetoopenthedialogbox.
CreatesSequencerdatatorecreatethesoundofthe
originalloopbyplayingtheindividualhits
Original rhythm sample: Sample0
120BPM
Kick Snare Kick Kick Snare
Execute the Time Slice command
3. RangeStartandEndwillshowtherangeofdata
thatwillbeedited.
4. Usetheradiobuttonstoselecttheportionthatwill
bedeleted.
Sample1 Sample2 Sample3 Sample4 Sample5
Front&End:Thesampledatathatliesbeforethe
RangeStart(startaddressorloopstartaddress)and
aftertheRangeEnd(endaddress)willbedeleted.
Front:ThesampledatathatliesbeforetheRange
Start(startaddressorloopstartaddress)willbe
deleted. A multisample and program will be
created automatically
End:ThesampledatathatliesaftertheRangeEnd
(endaddress)willbedeleted. C2
Play in Sequencer mode
120BPM
willbeselected.
channels.
6. ToexecutetheTruncatecommand,presstheOK
686
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Time Slice
SourceBPM.IfyoudonotknowtheBPM,specify
150BPM
BeatandtheBPMwillbecalculatedautomatically.
Thesettingyoumakeherewillbeusedasthe
referencevaluewhendetectingtheattack,when
Played closer together,
90BPM but pitch is unchanged performingTimeStretchinstep9b,andwhen
savingthesequencedatainstep10.
Beat:Specifiesthenumberofquarternotebeats.
WhenyouspecifyBeat,theSourceBPMwill
indicatetheplaybackBPMattheoriginalkey.This
BPMvaluewillautomaticallybecalculatedfromthe
startaddresstotheendaddress(ifloopisoff)or
Played further apart, but pitch is unchanged fromtheloopstartaddresstotheendaddress(if
* You can also use the Time Stretch command to control the compression of
loopison)oftheselectedsample.Ifyouknowthe
each sample to optimize the spacing to match the tempo. step 9 BPManditisdifferentthanthedisplayedvalue,
changeSourceBPMtothecorrectvalue.
Forexampleinthecaseofa120BPMsampleofone
measureof4/4time,setBeatto4.TheSourceBPM
willbecalculatedautomatically.IftheSourceBPM
isnotsetto120.00,duetoinaccuraciesinthestart
address(orloopstartaddress)andendaddress,
changetheSourceBPMto120.00.
Edit the performance data
SourceBPM:Specifiesthetempoattheoriginalkey
ofthesourcewaveform.
4. ToexecuteTimeSlice,presstheOKbutton.To
cancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton.
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theattackswillbe
detected,thesamplewillautomaticallybesliced,
Note:AsanalternativetotheTimeSlicecommand,the andadialogboxwillappear.
TimeStretchmenucommandisanotherwayto InthecaseofastereosampleinwhichLand
changethetempoofarhythmlooporsimilarsample. Rhavedifferentlengths,silentdatawill
Youmaywishtousethisifyoudontneedtodivide automaticallybeaddedtotheendoftheshorter
thesampleandcreatesongperformancedataforthe samplesothatthetwosampleswillbethesame
dividedsamples. length.
1. SelectthesampleintheSampleSelect(21b)for IfyouwanttoresetBeatandSourceBPMafter
whichyouwishtoexecuteTimeSlice. pressingtheOKbutton,youcandosoinstep9a).
5. Listentothesamplesthatweredividedby
detectingtheirattacks.
ThesamplebeforeslicingisassignedtotheC2note
2. SelecttheTimeSlicetoopenthedialogbox. ofthekeyboard,andtheslicedsamplesareassigned
tonotesD2andabove.WhenyouchangetheIndex,
thecorrespondingdisplaywillbehighlighted,
allowingyoutoviewtheslicedwaveforms.
ENTERswitchandpressinganoteonthekeyboard.
Theindexthatisassignedtothenoteyoupressed
willbeselected.
Toheartheslicedsounds,youcaneitherpressthe
3. Specifythenumberofquarternotebeatsand correspondingnoteonthekeyboard,orchangethe
tempoofthecurrentlyselectedsample.Ifyou indextoselectthedesiredsampleandthenpress
knowtheBPMoftheoriginalwaveform,set theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.Whenyou
687
Sampling mode
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch,the Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thismultisamplewill
soundbetweenthespecifiedStartandEndwillbe sound.Itwillbehaveinthesamewayasinnormal
playedattheoriginalkey. pages(suchastheRecordingpage).(01a)
Keyboard&Pads:Thisshowsthemultisamplethat Inthecaseofastereosample,astereo
isbeingusedtemporarilyinthisdialogbox. multisamplewillbetemporarilyused.Thesample
ateachindexwillsoundinstereo.
TimeSlicestep4
Index [Source, xxx(001090)/yyy(001090)] attackportionofthefollowingsamplehas

Selectsthesampleindex. overlappedintotheendofthesample,orifthe
samplecontainstwosounds,makeadjustmentsin
IfthisissettoSource,theoriginalwaveformbefore step7.
timeslicingwillbeselected.
7. Makeadjustmentswheretheautomaticattack
Byselectingxxx/yyyyoucanspecifyindividual detectiondidnotoccurcorrectly.
samplesthatweresliced.xxxindicatestheselected
sample,andyyyindicatesthetotalnumberof ChangeIndextoselectthesamplethatyouwishto
samplesthatweresliced.Amaximumof90samples adjust.MakeadjustmentsbychangingStartand
canbeassignedtothekeyboard.Ifmorethan90 End,andbyexecutingDivideorLinktoadjustthe
samplesweresliced,thiswilldisplay90. slicelocation.
Samplewaveformdisplay:Graylinesindicatethe Start:Specifythestartaddressforthesampleofthe
locationsatwhichthesampleissliced.Redandblue currentlyselectedIndex.Atthesametime,theend
linesindicatetheStartandEndaddresses addressofthesamplefortheprecedingIndexwill
respectively.WhenIndexisxxx/yyy,thesampleof alsobeadjusted.
theselectedindexwillbehighlighted. End:Specifytheendaddressforthesampleofthe
Inthecaseofastereosample,theLchannel currentlyselectedIndex.Atthesametime,thestart
sampledatawillbedisplayedabove,andtheR addressofthesampleforthenextIndexwillalsobe
channelsampledatawillbedisplayedbelow. adjusted.
ZOOM:Youcanzoominandzoomoutinthe WhenadjustingtheStartandEndaddressesofthe
verticalandhorizontaldimensionsofthewaveform dividedsamples,useZOOMtoincreasethe
showninthesamplewaveformdisplay.(11f) magnification(1ormore)sothatthesample
waveformisdisplayedaccuratelywhenyoumake
6. Iftheslicelocationsarenotappropriate,youcan adjustments.(11f)
adjustSensitivitytochangethesensitivityat
whichtheattacksaredetected,inordertochange IfIndexissettoSource,theaddressoftheoriginal
theslicelocations. waveformwillbemodified.Ifyouchangethestart
address,theloopstartaddresswillalsobechanged
Sensitivity [0030] atthesametime.
Adjuststhesensitivityatwhichtheattacksare UseZero:(11d)
detected.Byincreasingthisvalue,youcandetect IfyouwishtoadjusttheStartorEndofadivided
attacksatevenlowerlevels,tocreatemorefinite sample,itisbesttofirstcheckUseZero.Ingeneral,
slices. usingzerocrosspointstospecifysampleaddresses
TheLevelinthiscasedoesnotnecessarily willmakeitlesslikelythatclicksorpopswilloccur,
correspondtothewaveformlevel. particularlyattheEnd.
Dependingonthesample,thedesiredslicingmay Divide:Thissplitsthesampleofthecurrently
notoccurevenifyouincreasetheSensitivity.Ifthe selectedIndexintotwo.Usethiswhenyouwishto
688
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Time Slice
addanotherlocationtoslicethesample.Modify inconspicuousaspossible,andalsothatthehihat
EndorStarttoadjustthedividedsample. attackisheardcleanly.
Payattentiontothesepointsasyouadjust
Sensitivity.Ifnecessary,usethemethodsdescribed
abovetoediteachsample.
ThenoiseoccurringattheendofthesampleinC.
willbeautomaticallyreducedwhenyouexecute
steps8andfollowing.YoushouldadjustSensitivity
Link:Thisjoinsthesampleofthecurrentlyselected
whilepayingparticularattentiontosectionsA
IndextothesampleofthenextIndex.Usethis
andB,andthenexecutestep9.Ifthenoiseisstill
whenyouwishtomergetogethertwosliced
obtrusive,thenyoucanadjusttheendaddress.
locations.
8. Savetheslicedsamplestothemultisampleto
whichtheyhavebeenassigned.
WhenyoupresstheSavebutton,theSaveSamples
&MSdialogboxwillappear.
WhenyouuseTimeSliceonarhythmloopsample,
thequalityoftheplaybackinSequencermodewill
dependlargelyonthecutoffofeachpercussion
instrumentsoundthatwassliced.
BeawarethatifyouchangetheSensitivityafter
adjustingtheslicelocation,theattackswillbere
detectedandthesamplewillautomaticallybesliced
again.
What kind of slices will produce the best result?
A.Dividetheseparatepercussioninstrumentnotes
asfinelyaspossible
Forexampleinthecaseofasamplewherethedecay
ofthekickisoverlappedbythehihat,theattack
soundofthekickandtheattacksoundofthehihat 9. UseTimeStretchtoadjustthelengthofthesliced
shouldbeslicedtocreatetwosamples.Ifthese samples.
soundsareleftasonesample(containingbothkick WhenyoupresstheStretchbutton,TimeStretch(a
andhihat),theirrhythmmaybecomeincorrect functionthatexpandsorshrinksthelengthofa
whenthesampleisplayedatadifferenttempo. samplewithoutaffectingitspitch)willbeappliedto
Kick+Hihatkick/Hihat theslicedsample.
Ifyouwishtosavetheslicedsampleasitis,proceed
tostep10withoutexecutingTimeStretch.
Sometimeswhenaslicedsampleisplayedin
Sequencermodeandthetempoissloweddown,the
silentportionbetweensamplesmaybecome
obviousornoisemaybemoreapparent,producing
Ifthesampleisnotslicedappropriatelyevenafter anunnaturalsoundingresult.Toavoidthis,youcan
youadjusttheSensitivityuseDividetodividethe useTimeStretchtoadjustthelengthofthe
sampleintohalves,andadjustEndandStartas individualsamples.Thelengthofthesampleswill
needed. automaticallybeoptimizedaccordingtotheRatio
B.Makesurethateachdividedsamplehasaclear andNewBPMsettings.
attack
Theattackportionisvitalforpercussionsounds. Time Stretch Time Stretch
Slicethesampleatapointwheretheattackwillbe
soundedcrisply.
C.Avoidthenoisethatcanoccurtowardtheendof
eachdividedsample
Noise
Forexampleasshownintheaboveright Silent
illustration,noisecanbepresentattheendofthe
kicksample.Adjusttheendaddressofthekick
Not stretched Stretched with Ratio Not stretched Stretched with
samplesothatthenoiseisnotobtrusive. 150% Ratio 50%
Inthiscase,adjustingtheendaddresswillalso
affectthestartaddressofthehihatsample.While IfyouexecuteTimeStretchat100%,thesample
listeningtothetwosamples,makeadjustmentsso lengthwillnotchangebuttheendofthesample
thatthenoiseattheendofthekicksampleisas willbefadedout,reducingthenoise.
689
Sampling mode
a)SetBeatandSourceBPM.Themethodisthe Thetrackdatathatiscreatedwillstartatthe
sameasinstep3.Ifyouwishtochangethevalue measurespecifiedbyStartMeasure,andwillrepeat
yousetinstep3,youcanchangeithere. forthenumberoftimesspecifiedbyTime.
b)Specifythelengthofthesamplethatwillbe Whentrackdataiscreated,anydatathathad
createdbyTimeStretch. existedwithinthespecifiedrangeofmeasureswill
Tospecifythelengthasaratio beerased.Dataoutsidethisrangewillnotbe
erased.
SetRatio.Theavailablerangeis50.00200.00%.If
youspecify50.00%,thesamplelengthwillbe IfyoucheckbothProgramandSeq.Eventandselect
halved.(Thetempowilldouble.)Ifyouspecify theTrack,thesongparameterProgramSelect
200.00%,thesamplelengthwilldouble.(Thetempo (Sequencer01b)willautomaticallybespecifiedif
willbehalved.) theStartMeasureis001.Also,aprogramchange
willbecreatedattheStartMeasurelocation.In
TomatchanexistingBPMtempovalue
Sequencermodeyoucanselectthesongandplayit
UseNewBPMtospecifytheBPMvalueofthe backtoheartheresultimmediately.Normallyyou
sampleyouwishtocreate.TheRatiowill willcheckbothoftheseboxes.
automaticallybecalculatedfromtheSourceBPM
andtheNewBPMvalues.
Itisnotpossibletomakesettingsthatwouldcause
SourceBPMorNewBPMtoexceedtherangeof
40.00480.00.
Ratiotoexceedtherangeof50.00200.00.
PresstheStretchbuttontoexecuteTimeStretch.
Whenyouexecutethecommand,thetimestretched
sampleswillautomaticallybeassignedtonotesD2 IfyouchoosethePatternradiobutton,patterndata
andaboveofthekeyboard,allowingyouto willbecreated.
auditionthesound.YoucanchangeRatioandNew UseSong,Pattern,andMetertospecifythesong
BPMasmanytimesasdesiredandcontinue number,patternnumber,andtimesignatureofthe
auditioningtheresult. datathatwillbecreated.
Whenyouauditionthetimestretchedsamples,the RPPR:Ifyoucheckthecheckbox,patterndatato
soundyouhearisthesoundofeachdividedsample playtheslicedsampleswillbeassignedtoRPPR
asitwillbeplayedinSequencermode.Ifthereis whenyousave.UseKeyandTracktospecifythe
obtrusivenoiseoriftheattackisnotsoundcleanly, keyandtrackthatwillbecreated.
returntostep7andadjusttheStartandEnd
addresses,etc. IfProgram,Seq.Event,andRPPRareallchecked,
thesongparametersProgramSelect(Sequencer0
10.SetSavewithtospecifythedatathatwillbe 1c/2c)andRPPRON/OFF(Sequencer01a)will
createdsimultaneouslywhenyoupresstheSave bothbespecifiedautomatically.RPPRON/OFFwill
buttontosavethesamples beturnedon.
Program:Ifthischeckboxischecked,the InSequencermodeyoucanselectthesongand
multisamplewillbeconvertedtoaprogramwhen patterntoplaybacktheresultsimmediately.If
yousaveit.Specifythedestinationprogram RPPRischecked,pressingthespecifiedkeywill
number. playthepattern.Normallyyouwillcheckbothof
Seq.Event:Ifthischeckboxischecked,sequence theseboxes.
datatoplaytheslicedsampleswillautomaticallybe Note:Insomecases,thesampleEndaddresssetting
createdafterthedataissaved. etc.mayincreasethenumberofmeasuresinthe
Youcanspecifywhetherthesequencedatatoplay pattern,sothatitnolongerloopsprecisely.Insuch
backtheslicedsampleswillbecreatedastrackdata cases,respecifytheLengthintheSequencermode
oraspatterndata.Ifpatterndataiscreated,youcan PatternParametermenucommand.
alsoassignthepatterntoRPPR. Note:IfyouuseSeq.EventandStartMeasure001,
theTempo(01c)ofthetrackdataorpatterndata
thatiscreatedwillbethevaluespecifiedbyNew
BPMifyouexecutedTimeStretch.Ifyoudidnot
executeTimeStretch,thetempowillbethevalue
specifiedforSourceBPM.
IfyousetStartMeasureto001andcreateatrack,
andifatempoeventexistsonlyatthebeginningof
themastertrack,thetempoofthateventwillalsobe
thevaluethatyouspecifiedasNewBPMorSource
IfyouchoosetheTrackradiobutton,trackdatawill BPM.
becreated.UseSong,Track,andMetertospecify
thesongnumber,tracknumber,andtimesignature
ofthedatathatwillbecreated.
690
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Time Stretch
Ifyousavetoasongthatalreadycontainsdata,the Note:Itispossibletochangethepitchwhenyouadjust
timeslicedsamplesmaynotplaybackinthesame thetempoofarhythmlooporsimilarsample,using
wayasoriginalsampleifthetimesignatureis theDetuneBPMAdjustmenucommand.Youcan
different.Youmustsetamatchingtimesignaturein createinterestingeffectsbyraisingorloweringthe
themastertrack. pitchofadrumsound.Formoreinformation,see
11.Ifyouwishtosave,presstheSavebutton.Ifyou DetuneBPMAdjustonpage 464.
decidenottosave,presstheCancelbutton.When Using Time Stretch (Sustaining)
yousave,thesamplesandmultisamplewill
automaticallybesavedtovacantsamplesand 1. Selectthesamplethatyouwishtotimestretch
multisamples. usingtheSustainingmethod.
Inthecaseofstereosamples,thesamplesand
multisamplewillbesavedinstereo.
12.Byrepeatingsteps611youcancreateasmany
samplesandmultisamplesasdesired.
13.PresstheExitbuttontoexittheTimeSlice
command.
IfyouexitTimeSlicewithoutusingtheSavebutton
tosavethesamplesandmultisamples,beawarethat
thesamplesandmultisamplesyoucreatewillbe
lost.
BeforeexecutingTimeSliceonalongsample,you
shouldfirstdividethesampleintomeasures.In
somecases,itmaynotbepossibletoassignthe
sampletothekeyboardorcreatesequencedata.
TimeSlicesrequiresvacantsamples,multisamples, 2. SelecttheTimeStretchcommandtoaccessthis
andrelativeparametersinordertoexecute.Besure dialogbox,whereyoucanselectthedesiredtime
thatthereissufficientfreeareabeforeyouexecute. stretchmethod.
Ifthereisinsufficientfreearea,anerrorwilloccur.
Note:IfyouopentheTimeSlicedialogboxonthe
samesample,itwillbeslicedinthesamewayas
previously.Theseslicelocationswillalsobeusedif
youexecuteSliceintheTimeStretchmenu
command,sothatyoudonthavetomakethe
settingsagain.
Ifyouwishtodetecttheattacksagainortoredothe 3. UsetheradiobuttonstoselectSustaining.Then
operation,changetheSensitivityafteryouopenthe presstheOKbuttontoexecute,ortheCancel
dialogbox. buttontocancelwithoutexecuting.
IftheLandRofastereosamplearedifferent
Time Stretch inlength,blankdatawillautomaticallybeaddedto
theendoftheshortersamplesothatitmatchesthe
TimeStretchlengthensorshortensasamplewithout longerside.
changingitspitch.Thisisconvenientwhenyouwish 4. TheTimeStretchdialogboxwillappear.
tochangethetempoofarhythmloop(drums)ora
melodicsample(e.g.,vocal,strings,winds)tomatch
thetempoofanothersampleorofthesequencer.The
OASYSprovidestwowaysinwhichTimeStretchcan
beexecuted.
Thiscommandalsosupportsstereosamples.
Sustaining
Thistypeissuitableforsustainedsoundssuchasvocal
orinstruments.Usingittochangethetempoof 5. SetQualitytospecifythedesiredaudioqualityof
phrasessuchasguitarorpianowillalsoproducegood thesampleproducedbyTimeStretch.
results.
Therangeis07.Highersettingswillgenerally
Slice producebetterresults(dependingonthesample
beingprocessed),butwillalsoincreasethe
Thistypeissuitablefordecaytypeinstrumentssuch
processingtime.
asdrums.Usingittochangethetempoofdrumor
percussionloopswillproducegoodresultswith Sinceyoucantrythisasmanytimesasyoulike,you
minimaleffectontheattack. shouldnormallystartwithabout4,andraiseor
lowerthesettinggradually.
691
Sampling mode
6. Settheproportionallengthofthesamplethatwill
becreatedbyTimeStretch.
Tospecifythelengthasaratio:
SettheRatiotothedesiredvalue.Theavailable
rangeis50.00%200.00%.
50.00%reducesthesampletohalfofitsoriginal
length,doublingthetempo.
200.00%increasesthesampletodoubleitsoriginal
length,slowingthetempotohalfspeed.
Thetempooftheresultingsamplewillbecalculated
automaticallybasedontheRatioandSourceBPM,
anddisplayedinNewBPM. 8. AuditionthesamplethatwascreatedbyTime
TomatchanexistingBPMtempovalue: Stretch.
SetBeatasthenumberofquarternotebeats.When Thesamplebeforebeingtimestretchedisassigned
youchangeBeat,theSourceBPMvaluewillbe totheC2noteofthekeyboard,andthesamplethat
changedautomatically. wastimestretchedisassignedtoC#2.Youcan
SourceBPMwillindicatetheplaybackBPMvalue changetheIndextocheckthewaveform.
attheoriginalkey.ThisBPMvalueisautomatically Keyboard&Pads:Thisshowsthemultisamplethat
calculatedaccordingtothelengthfromthestart isusedtemporarilyinthisdialogbox.
addresstotheendaddress(ifloopisoff)orfrom Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thismultisamplewill
theloopstartaddresstotheendaddress(ifloopis sound.Itwillbehavejustasinnormalpages(e.g.,
on).IfyoualreadyknowtheBPMvalueandthe theRecordingpage).(01a)
calculatedvalueisincorrect,changeittothecorrect
Inthecaseofastereosample,astereo
value.
multisamplewillbeusedtemporarily.Thesample
UseNewBPMtospecifytheBPMvalueofthe ateachindexwillsoundinstereo.
sampleyouwishtocreate.Ratiowillautomatically
becalculatedfromtheSourceBPMandNewBPM Index [Source, Result]
values. Selectstheindexforthesamplewhosewaveform
Forexampleifyouhaveaonemeasure120BPM youwishtodisplay.
samplein4/4time,andwouldliketochangeitto IfyouselectSource,theoriginalwaveformbefore
150BPM,youwouldsetBeatto4.TheSourceBPM timestretchingwillbeselected.
willbecalculatedautomatically.IftheSourceBPM
IfyouselectResult,thetimestretchedsamplewill
isnotcalculatedas120.00duetoinaccuraciesinthe
beselected.
startaddress(orloopstartaddress)orendaddress,
adjustSourceBPMtothecorrectvalueof120.00. Youcanalsoselecttheindexbyholdingdownthe
ENTERswitchandpressinganoteonthekeyboard.
Next,setNewBPMto150.00.TheRatiowillbe
Theindexthatincludesthatnotewillbeselected.
calculatedautomatically.
Samplewaveformdisplay:Thisshowsthe
Itisnotpossibletomakesettingsthatwouldcause waveformoftheselectedsample.Asin21:Loop
SourceBPMorNewBPMtoexceedtherangeof Edit,theStart,LoopStart,andEndaddressesare
40.00480.00. shownbyasolidline.
Ratiotoexceedtherangeof50.00200.00. Inthecaseofastereosample,theLchannel
sampledatawillbedisplayedabove,andtheR
Dependingonthesample,thelengthmaynotbe channeldatabelow.
exactlyasyouspecify,duetolimitationsin
ZOOM:Thiscontrolshorizontalandverticalzoom
processingaccuracy.
in/outforthewaveformshownintheSample
7. ToexecutetheTimeStretchoperation,pressthe waveformdisplay.(11f)
Start:
Cancelbutton.
End:
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theTimeStretch
dialogboxwillappear. Specifythestartaddressandendaddressofthe
sampleforthecurrentlyselectedindex.
WhenyouexecuteTimeStretch,theaddresseswill
bespecifiedautomatically,buttheplaybackmaybe
slightlyskewedduetoinaccuraciesintheend
address,etc.Ifthisoccurs,youcancorrectthe
addressesmanually.
Whenyouchangethestartaddress,theloopstart
addresswillalsobechangedsimultaneously.Ifyou
wishtoindependentlyadjustthestartaddressand
loopstartaddress,savethedatainstep10,andthen
makesettingsintheP2:LoopEditpage.
692
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Time Stretch
Toauditionthesoundinthespecifiedrange,play
thekeyboardorpresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
switch.WhenyoupresstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitch,thesampleintherange
specifiedbyStartandEndwillsoundattheoriginal
key.
UseZero:(11d)
3. UsetheradiobuttonstoselectSlice.Thenpress
9. IfyoupresstheStretchbutton,theTimeStretch
theOKbuttontoexecute,ortheCancelbuttonto
dialogboxwillappear,andyoucanredothetime
cancelwithoutexecuting.
stretchonceagain.ExecuteTimeStretchas
describedinstep6. IftheLandRofastereosamplearedifferent
inlength,blankdatawillautomaticallybeaddedto
10.Savethesamplethatyoucreated.PresstheSave
theendoftheshortersamplesothatitmatchesthe
button,andtheSavedialogboxwillappear.
longerside.
4. AdialogboxforexecutingTimeStretchwill
appear.
InToSampleNo.,specifythesavedestination
samplenumber.Bydefault,anunusedsample
numberwillbeselected.IfOverwriteischecked,
thiscannotbeselected. 5. Specifythenumberofquarternotebeatsand
tempoofthecurrentlyselectedsample.
fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged. IfyoualreadyknowtheBPMvalue,setSource
SeeAboutOverwriteonpage 672. BPM.IfyoudonotknowtheBPM,settingBeatwill
causetheBPMtobecalculatedautomatically.The
settingsherearealsousedasthereferencevalues
whendetectingtheattacksatwhichthesampleis
channels.
divided.
ToexecutetheSaveoperation,presstheOKbutton.
Beat:Specifythenumberofquarternotebeats.
TocancelwithoutsavingpresstheCancelbutton.
WhenyouchangeBeat,theSourceBPMwill
11.Byrepeatingsteps910youcancreatemore indicatetheBPMvalueforplaybackattheoriginal
samplesasdesired. key.ThisBPMvalueisautomaticallycalculated
12.PresstheExitbuttontoexittheTimeStretch accordingtothelengthfromthestartaddresstothe
operation. endaddress(ifloopisoff)orfromtheloopstart
Theindexwillspecifythelastsavedsample addresstotheendaddress(ifloopison).Ifyou
number. alreadyknowtheBPMvalueandthecalculated
valueisincorrect,changeSourceBPMtothecorrect
Note:IfyoutousethesavedsampleinProgram value.
modeorSequencermode,youcanusetheConvert
MSToProgrammenucommand,oryoucanselect Forexampleifyouhaveaonemeasure120BPM
thatmultisampleforthe21c:OSC1 samplein4/4time,youwouldsetBeatto4.The
Multisample/WaveSequenceor25:OSC2Basic SourceBPMwillbecalculatedautomatically.Ifthe
parametersMS1M4(ifType=Multisample) SourceBPMisnotcalculatedas120.00dueto
andcreateaprogram. inaccuraciesinthestartaddress(orloopstart
address)orendaddress,adjustSourceBPMtothe
BeawarethatifyouexitTimeStretchwithoutusing correctvalueof120.00.
theSavebuttonthenpresstheOKbuttontosavethe
SourceBPM:Specifythetempoattheoriginalkey
sample,thesample(s)youcreatedwillbelost.
oftheoriginalwaveform.
TimeStretchrequiresvacantsamples,
SourceBPMcannotbesetordisplayedoutsidethe
multisamples,andrelativeparametersinorderto
rangeof40.00480.00.
execute.Beforeyouexecute,makesurethatthereis
sufficientfreespace.Ifthereisnot,anerrorwill 6. Settheproportionallengthofthesamplethatwill
occur. becreatedbyTimeStretch.
To use Time Stretch (Slice) Tospecifythelengthasaratio:
1. Selectthesamplethatyouwishtotimestretch SettheRatiotothedesiredvalue.Theavailable
usingtheSlicemethod. rangeis50.00%200.00%.
50.00%reducesthesampletohalfofitsoriginal
length,doublingthetempo.
2. SelecttheTimeStretchcommandfromthePage
Menutoaccessthisdialogbox,whereyoucan 200.00%increasesthesampletodoubleitsoriginal
selectthedesiredtimestretchmethod. length,slowingthetempotohalfspeed.
693
Sampling mode
Thetempooftheresultingsamplewillbecalculated Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thismultisamplewill
automaticallybasedontheRatioandSourceBPM, sound.Itwillactinthesamewayasinnormal
anddisplayedinNewBPM. pages(e.g.,theRecordingpages).(01a)
TomatchadesiredBPMtempovalue: Inthecaseofastereosample,astereo
SetNewBPMtothedesiredBPMvalueofthe multisamplewillbeusedtemporarily.Thesample
samplethatwillbecreated.Ratiowillautomatically ofeachindexwillsoundinstereo.
becalculatedfromtheSourceBPMandNewBPM Samplewaveformdisplay:Thisdisplaysthe
values. waveformoftheselectedsample.IftheIndexis
ItisnotpossibletosetordisplayNewBPMoutside otherthanResult,thelocationsatwhichthesample
therangeof40.00480.00.Itisnotpossibletosetor isslicedwillbeindicatedbyagraycoloredline.If
displayRatiooutsidetherangeof50.00200.00. Indexissettoxxx/yyy,thesampleoftheselected
indexwillbehighlighted.IfIndexisotherthan
7. ToexecuteTimeStretch,presstheOKbutton.To xxx/yyy,theStart,LoopStart,andEndaddresses
cancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton. willbeindicatedbyred,green,andbluecolored
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theattackswillbe lines,respectively.
detectedandthesamplewillbedivided
automatically,andtimestretchwillbeperformed. Inthecaseofastereosample,theLchannel
sampledatawillbedisplayedabove,andtheR
TheTimeStretchdialogboxwillappear. channelsampledatawillbedisplayedbelow.
ZOOM:Thisletsyouzoomthewaveformdisplay,
inorout,verticallyandhorizontally.
9. Iftheslicelocationsarenotappropriate,use
Sensitivitytomodifythesensitivityatwhichthe
attacksaredetected,thuschangingtheslice
locations.
Sensitivity [0030]
ForinformationabouttheStart,End,UseZero,
Divide,andLinkparameters,seeTimeSliceon
page 686,steps6and7.
10.WhenyoupresstheStretchbutton,theTime
8. AuditiontheresultsthatwerecreatedbyTime
Stretchdialogboxwillappear,andyoucanredo
Stretch.
thetimestretch.
Thesamplebeforebeingtimestretchedisassigned
ExecuteTimeStretchusingthesameprocedureas
totheC2noteofthekeyboard.Thetimestretched
instep5.Ifthesampleslicelocationsarenot
sampleisassignedtoC#2.Sliced(divided)samples appropriate,thiswillalsoaffecttheresultofTime
willbeassignedconsecutivelyupward,starting
Stretch.Fordetailsonsettingtheslicelocations,see
fromD2onthekeyboard. TimeSliceonpage 686,steps6and7.
Index [Source, Result, 11.Savethesampleyoucreated.PresstheSave
xxx(001090)/yyy(001090)]: button,andtheSavedialogboxwillappear.
Selectstheindexforthesamplewhosewaveform
youwishtodisplay.
IfyouselectSource,theoriginalwaveformbefore
timestretchingwillbeselected.
IfyouselectResult,thetimestretchedsamplewill
beselected.
Ifyousetthistoxxx/yyy,anindividuallysliced
samplewillbeselected.xxxistheselectedindex,
InToSampleNo.,specifythesavedestination
andyyyindicatesthetotalnumberofsliced
samplenumber.Bydefault,anunusedsample
samples.Amaximumof90samplescanbeassigned
numberwillbeselected.IfOverwriteischecked,
tothekeyboard.Ifthesamplewasslicedintomore
thiscannotbeset.
than90samples,thiswillbedisplayedas90.
Ifyouwishtodeletetheoriginalsampledataand
overwriteitwiththeeditedsample,check
Overwrite.
Theindexthatincludesthatnotewillbeselected.
IfyouexecutethiscommandwithOverwrite
WhenyouexecuteTimeStretch,theaddresseswill
checked,theoriginalsampledatawillbedeleted,
bespecifiedautomatically.However,playbackmay
andoverwrittenbytheeditedsampledata.Thus,in
beslightlyoffsetduetoinaccuraciesintheend
theTimeStretchdialogboxthatappearsafter
address,etc.Ifthisoccurs,setIndextoResult,and
execution,theeditedsampledatawillautomatically
useStartandEndtorespecifytheaddresses.
haveitsattacksdetectedandsliced,anddisplayed
Keyboard&Pads:Thisshowsthemultisamplethat inIndexSource.
istemporarilyusedinthisdialogbox.
694
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Crossfade Loop
Forstereosamples,useSavetoNo.(L)and Atthistime,thewaveformleveloftheportion
(R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR immediatelybeforetheend(thelengthspecifiedby
channels. CrossfadeLength)willgraduallydecrease,andthe
ToexecutetheSave,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel waveformlevelimmediatelybeforethebeginningof
withoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton. theloopwillgraduallyincreaseasthetwoaremixed.
12.Byrepeatingsteps1011youcancreatemore Loop Loop Loop Loop
samplesasdesired. Start End Start End
13.PresstheExitbuttontoendtheTimeStretch
operation.
Thelastsavedsamplenumberwillbesetforthe
index.
Note:IfyoutousethesavedsampleinProgram Crossfade
modeorSequencermode,youcanusetheConvert Length
MSToProgrammenucommand,oryoucanselect
thatmultisampleforthe21c:OSC1Multisample/
WaveSequenceor25:OSC2Basicparameters
MS1M4(ifType=Multisample)andcreatea
program. 1. SelectthesamplethatyouwishtoCrossfadeLoop.
BeawarethatifyouexitTimeStretchwithoutusing 2. SelectCrossfadeLooptoopenthedialogbox.
theSavebutton,andthenpresstheOKbuttonto
savethesample,thesample(s)youcreatedwillbe
lost.
BeforeexecutingtheSliceonalongsample,you
shouldfirstdividethesampleintomeasures.In
somecases,itmaynotbepossibletoassignthe
sampletothekeyboardoredittheslicelocations.
TimeStretchrequiresvacantsamples,
multisamples,andrelativeparametersinorderto
execute.Beforeyouexecute,makesurethatthereis 3. InCrossfadeLength,specifythelengthofthe
sufficientfreespace.Ifthereisnot,anerrorwill samplethatyouwishtocrossfade.
occur. Ifyousetthisas%,CrossfadeLengthwillbe
Note:Ifyouopenthetimeslice(Slice)dialogboxon calculatedautomatically.Specifytheproportionof
thesamesample,itwillbeslicedinthesamewayit theCrossfadeLengthrelativetothelengthbetween
previouslywas.Theseslicelocationswillalsobe theloopstartandloopend.Ifyousetthisto50%,
usedifyouusetheTimeSlicemenucommand,so crossfadewillbeperformedonthesecondhalfof
thatyoudonthavetomakethesettingsagain. theregionbetweenloopstartandloopend.
Ifyouwishtodetecttheattacksagainortoredothe Ifthelengthfromthebeginningofthesampletothe
operation,changetheSensitivityafteryouopenthe loopstartisshorterthanthelengthfromtheloop
dialogbox. starttotheloopend,CrossfadeLengthcanbeset
onlyuptothelengthfromthebeginningofthe
sampletotheloopstart.Inthiscase,asettingof
Crossfade Loop 100%willnotbepossible.
Whenloopingapitchedinstrumentsampleofa 4. SetCurvetospecifyhowthevolumewill
complexsoundsuchasstringsorwoodwindstomake changeinthecrossfadedregion.
thesoundsustain,itisnecessarytocreatealongloop
Linear:Thevolumewillchangelinearly.
topreservetherichcharacterofthesound.Crossfade
Loopcanbeusedtominimizethedifferenceinsound Power:Thevolumewillchangenonlinearly.
betweenthetworegionstocreateanaturalsounding SometimesasettingofLinearwillproducethe
loop. impressionthatthevolumehasdroppedinthe
middleofthecurve.Insuchcases,usePower.
Inordertosolvesuchproblems,CrossfadeLoop
causesthesoundtochangegraduallyfromtheendto 5. InSavetoNo.,specifythesavedestinationsample
thebeginningoftheloop. number.Bydefault,anunusedsamplenumber
willbeselected.
Sound IfOverwriteischecked,thesamplenumberwillbe
Playback Repeated playback fixedtothecurrentsample,andcannotbechanged.
(first half of loop) (second half of loop) SeeAboutOverwriteonpage 672.
Gradually changes to first half (R)tospecifythesavedestinationoftheLandR
Inactuality,thesampledataiscreatedasfollows. channels.
Aspecificlength(theCrossfadeLength)ofthe 6. ToexecuteCrossfadeLoop,presstheOKbutton.
waveformimmediatelybeforethebeginningofthe Tocancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancel
loopistakenandmixedwiththeendportion. button.
695
Sampling mode
Pitch BPM Adjust

ThiscommandsetsthePitch(31b)oftheselected
indexonthebasisofaBPMvalue.Raisingthepitchof
sampleplaybackwillincreasetheplaybackspeed.
Loweringthepitchwillslowdowntheplayback
speed.Thiscanbeusedtomatchthelooplengthetc.of
thesampletoatempoofthedesiredBPMvalue.
1. SelectPitchBPMAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
3. InSampleNo.(L)andSampleNo.(R),specify
thedestinationtowhichthestereosampledata
createdbyrippingwillbewritten.
Bydefault,thelowestnumberedvacantsamplewill
bedisplayed.Normallyyouwillleavethisdefault
2. SpecifyBeat.Thisisspecifiedinquarternote settingunchanged.
beats. 4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteripping,orpress
3. CurrentBPMwillshowtheBPMvalueatthebase theCancelbuttontocancelwithoutexecuting.
key(displayedinblue).ThisBPMvalueis
calculatedautomaticallyfromthestartaddressto Ripping to the disk
theendaddressofthesample(ifloopingisoff)or 1. SelectDestinationtoopenthedialogbox.
fromtheloopstartaddresstotheendaddress(if 2. IntheTofield,selectDISK.
loopingison).
Forexampleifthestartandendaddressofthe
samplearetwosecondsapart,theoriginalkeyis
specifiedasthebasekey,andBeatissetto4,
CurrentBPMwouldbe120.00.IfBeatissetto2,the
displaywouldindicateCurrentBPMas60.00.
Itisnotpossibleforthisdisplaytoexceedtherange
of40.00480.00.
4. InNewBPMspecifytheBPMvaluethatwill
resultfromtheconversionoftheCurrentBPM
value.
5. ToexecutethePitchBPMAdjustcommand,press 3. SpecifyanamefortheWAVEfilethatwillbe
theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. saved.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thePitch(31b) 4. InDriveSelect,selectthedisktowhichthedata
valuewillbesetautomatically.Forexampleifyou willbesaved.
modifyaquarternote120BPMsampleto240BPM, 5. UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontoselectthe
thePitchwillbesetto+12.00. savedestinationdirectory.
ThiscalculationisperformedwithintheOASYSs 6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteripping,orpress
limitsofprecision.Minordiscrepanciesmayoccur theCancelbuttontocancelwithoutexecuting.
inthefinalBPMcalculation.
Copy Insert Effect

Destination (Audio CD Ripping)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyInsertEffect
Specifiesthewritingdataoftherippeddata,and onpage 153.
executesripping.
Rippingwillcreateastereo44,100Hzsample.Youcan
riptoRAMmemory,ordisk.IfyouselectDISK,a Swap Insert Effect
WAVEfilewillbecreated. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapInsertEffect
Beawarethatifyouplaythekeyboardor onpage 154.
controllerswhileripping,thevibrationmaycause
dataskipsorreaderrors,makingitimpossibletorip
successfully. Insert IFX Slot
Ripping to RAM memory Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertIFXSloton
page 154.
1. SelectDestinationtoopenthedialogbox.
2. IntheTofield,selectRAM.
696
Sampling: Page Menu Commands Cut IFX Slot
Cut IFX Slot

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCutIFXSloton
page 155.

Routingsonpage 156.
Copy Master/Total Effect

Thiscopiestheeffectsettingsfromadesiredprogram,
combination,song,orSamplingmode.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyMFX/TFXon
page 157.
Swap Master/Total Effect

Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXon
page 158.
Write FX Preset
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 158.
697
Sampling mode
698
Global mode
Global P0: Basic Setup

InGlobalmodeyoucanmakesettingsthataffectthe settings,usethepagemenucommandsWrite
entireinstrument,suchasmastertuning,MIDI,and GlobalSetting,WriteDrumKit,orWriteWave
memoryprotect. Sequence.
Youcanalsoedituserscales,drumkitsetups,and TheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchcanalsobe
wavesequencepatterns. usedtoaccessUpdateGlobalSetting,Update
IfyouwantthesettingsyoumakeinGlobalmodeto DrumKit,andUpdateWaveSequence.
bebackedupwhenthepoweristurnedoff,you Simultaneously,theeditedcontentwillbewritten.
mustwritethemintomemory.Towriteyour
01: Basic Setup

01PMC
01b 01c
01a
01d
01e
Inthispageyoucanadjustthemastertuning,turnall Key Transpose [12+00+12]

effectson/off,makeoverallsystemsettingssuchas Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitonestepsovera1
bankmapandsystemlock,andmakememoryprotect octaverange.
settings.
Thissettingisappliedatthelocation(PreMIDIor
PostMIDI)specifiedbyConvertPosition(11a).
01a: Basic
Keys/Transpose 12 0 +12
Master Tune 1691 28103 40115
76 keys
[50cent (427.47Hz)+50cent (452.89Hz)] (E0G6) (E1G7) (E2G8)
ThisadjuststheoveralltuningoftheentireOASYSin 996 21108 33120
88 keys
onecentunits(semitone=100cents)overarangeof (A1C7) (A0C8) (A1C9)
50cents.Withasettingof0,thefrequencyofA4will
be440Hz. Note:IfConvertPositionissettoPreMIDI,thenote
TheA4pitchgivenhereiswhenEqual numberstransmittedfromtheOASYSwillbeaffected
Temperamentisselectedasthescale.Ifadifferent byKeyTransposesetting.
scaleisselected,A4maynotbe440Hz. MasterTunecanbecontrolledbytheMIDI
universalsystemexclusivemessageMasterFine
Tuning(F0,7F,nn,04,03,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDI
channel,vv/mm=value).
699
Global mode
KeyTransposecanbecontrolledbytheMIDI 8:Thiscurveproducesthemostregulareffect.This
universalsystemexclusivemessageMasterCoarse settingissuitablewhenyoudonotneedvelocity
Tuning(F0,7F,nn,04,04,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDI sensitivity,orwhenyouwishtomakethenotesmore
channel,vv/mm=value). consistent.Howeverwiththiscurve,controlofsoftly
ThesemessagesarereceivedontheglobalMIDI playednoteswillbemoredifficult,sousethecurve
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(11a). thatismostappropriateforyourplayingstrengthand
style,andtheeffectthatyouwishtoproduce.
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,
MIDIRPNmessagescanbereceivedtocontrolthe After Touch Curve [18]
tuningandtranspositionoftheprogramortimbre Thisspecifiesthewayinwhichthevolumeand/ortone
(Combinationmode)ortrack(Sequencermode). willchangeinresponsetovariationsinpressure(after
IncomingMIDIRPNFineTunemessageswillmake touch)appliedtothekeyboardwhileplayinganote.
relativeadjustmentstothetuningspecifiedbythe
MasterTunesetting. WhenConvertPosition(11a)isPreMIDI,variations
inaftertouchpressurewillaffecttheaftertoucheffect
MIDIRPNCoarseTunemessageswillmakerelative andthetransmittedaftertouchdataasshowninthe
adjustmentstothepitchspecifiedbytheKey lefthanddiagrambelow.
Transposesetting.InProgrammodethesemessages
willbereceivedontheglobalMIDIchannel Incomingdatawillautomaticallyusetheaftertouch
specifiedbyMIDIChannel(11a),andinother curvenumber3shownintherighthanddiagram.
modestheywillbereceivedontheMIDIchannel WithasettingofPostMIDI,variationsinaftertouch
specifiedforeachtimbreortrack.(Detune, pressure(andinthevalueofincomingaftertouch
TransposeCombination23a,Sequencer23a) data)willcreatechangeasshownintherighthand
diagram.
Velocity Curve [18] Forthetransmitteddata,theaftertouchcurvenumber
Thisspecifiesthewayinwhichthevolumeand/ortone 3showninthelefthanddiagramwillautomaticallybe
willchangeinresponsetovariationsinkeyboard selected.
playingdynamics(velocity).
For a setting of PreMIDI For a setting of PostMIDI
WhenConvertPosition(11a)isPreMIDI,variations After Touch (KBD MIDI Out) After Touch (MIDI In TG)
127 MAX
inkeyboardplayingdynamicswillaffectthevelocity
effectandthetransmittedvelocitydataasshowninthe
8:RANDOM 5
lefthanddiagrambelow. Aftertouch
5 4
4
effect 7
Incomingdatawillautomaticallyusethevelocity 3
3
2
6 8:RANDOM
7
curvenumber4shownintherighthanddiagram. 6 2
1 1
0
WithasettingofPostMIDI,variationsinkeyboard Soft Strong 0 127
playingdynamics(andinthevelocityofincoming
data)willrespondasshownintherighthanddiagram 1,2:Thiscurveproduceschangewhenstrongafter
below.IfyouareplayingOASYSstonegeneratorfrom touchpressureisapplied
anexternalkeyboardorsequencer,andtheoverall 3(Normal):Thenormalcurve
soundistoobrightortoodark,youcansettheConvert 4,5:Thiscurveproduceschangeevenwhenlight
PositionparametertoPostMIDIandselectthe pressureisapplied
appropriatevelocitycurvehere.
6,7:Thesecurvesproducechangein24or12steps
Forthetransmitteddata,thevelocitycurvenumber4 respectively,andareappropriateforwhenyouare
showninthelefthanddiagramwillautomaticallybe recordingaftertouchdataonthesequencerandwish
selected. toconservememory.(SettheConvertPositionto
PreMIDI.)Curvenumber7allowschangeovertwelve
For a setting of PreMIDI For a setting of PostMIDI
Velocity (KBD MIDI Out) Velocity (MIDI In TG)
steps,sowhenusingaftertouchtomodifythepitch,
127 MAX youcansettherangeofmodificationtooneoctave,
anduseaftertouchtovarythepitchinsemitonesteps.
6 7
7 5
8
8:Thisisarandomcurve.Usethiswhenyouwishto
8 Velocity
4 effect 6
5
createspecialeffects,ortouseaftertouchtoapply
3
2 4
3
unpredictablemodulation.
1 2
1
1 WhenConvertPosition(11a)isPreMIDI,the
Soft Strong 1 127
settingyoumakeherewillbeappliedimmediately
1,2,3:Aneffectwillbeobtainedforstronglyplayed afterthekeyboard,meaningthatitwillaffectthe
notes datatransmittedviaMIDI,butwillnotaffectthe
receiveddata.
4(Normal):Thenormalcurve
WithasettingofPostMIDI,thesettingyoumake
5,6:Aneffectwillbeobtainedevenifyoudonotplay
herewillbeappliedimmediatelybeforethe
verystrongly
OASYSsinternaltonegenerator,meaningthatit
7:Acertainamountofeffectwillbeobtainedevenfor willaffectthedatareceivedviaMIDI,butwillnot
softlyplayednotes affectthetransmitteddata.
700
Global P0: Basic Setup 01: Basic Setup
WhenyouusetheOASYSskeyboardtoplaythe
internalsounds,theConvertPositionsettinghasno 01d: System Preference
effect.
Bank Map [KORG, GM(2)]
Thisspecifiesthemappingofprogramsand
01b: Effect Global SW combinationsrelativetoBankSelectcontrolchange
messages(CC#0upperbyteandCC#32lowerbyte).
IFX112 Off [Off, On]
Thebankselectmessagesshowninthetablebelow
On(checked):AllinserteffectsIFX112willbeoff.
willbereceived(R)andtransmitted(T)forprogram
Off(unchecked):TheP8:InsertEffectsettingsforIFX1 banksAF,G,g(1)g(9),g(d),USERAGand
On/OffIFX12On/OffinProgram,Combination, CombinationbanksINTAG,andUSERAG.
Sequencer,andSamplingmodeswillbevalid.
Bank Bank Map: KORG Map: GM(2)
MFX1&2 Off [Off, On] INTA 00. 00 R/T 63. 00 R/T
On(checked):MasterEffect1and2(MFX1,2)willbe INTB 00. 01 R/T 63. 01 R/T
off.
INTC 00. 02 R/T 63. 02 R/T
Off(unchecked):TheP9:Master/TotalEffectsetting
MFX1On/Off,andMFX2On/Off,inProgram, INTD 00. 03 R/T 63. 03 R/T
Combination,andSequencermodeswillbevalid. INTE 00. 04 R/T 63. 04 R/T
TFX1&2 Off [Off, On] INTF 00. 05 R/T 63. 05 R/T
On(checked):Totaleffects1and2(TFX1,2)willbeoff. 121. 00 R/T, 56. 00 R,
INTG, 121. 00 R/T, 56. 00 R
00. 00 R
Off(unchecked):TheTFX1On/OffandTFX2On/Off
settingsintheP9:Master/TotalEffectpageofProgram, g(1)g(9) 121. 0109 R/T 121. 0109 R/T
Combination,Sequencer,orSamplingmodeswillbe
120. 00 R/T, 62. 00 R,
used. g(d) 120. 00 R/T, 62. 00 R
63. 127 R(Korg MUTE)
WhenIFX112On/Off,MFX1&2On/Off,or USERA 00. 08 R/T 63. 08 R/T
TFX1&2On/Offsettingsareswitched,control
changemessagesCC#92(effectcontrol2),CC#94 USERB 00. 09 R/T 63. 09 R/T
(effectcontrol4),andCC#95(effectcontrol5)willbe USERC 00. 10 R/T 63. 10 R/T
transmittedrespectively.Thetransmitteddatawill
USERD 00. 11 R/T 63. 11 R/T
be0foroff,and127foron.
USERE 00. 12 R/T 63. 12 R/T
01c: KARMA USERF 00. 13 R/T 63. 13 R/T

USERG 00. 14 R/T 63. 14 R/T
All KARMA Off [Off, On]
On(checked):AllKARMAfunctionalitywillbeoff. Thebanktypesareasfollows.
TheKARMAfunctionwillnotoperateevenifthe
KARMAON/OFFswitchison. Bank Bank Type
Off(unchecked):TheKARMAsettingsandKARMA INTAINTE HD-1 only
ON/OFFswitchsettingsinProgram,Combination,and INTF EXi only
Sequencermodeswillbeused.
GM2 program banks (HD-1)
INTG, g(1)g(9), G: GM2 capital programs
Load KARMA settings when changing g(d) g(1)g(9): GM2 variation programs
g(d): GM2 drum programs
Programs [Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchprograms,the USERA, B, G Either HD-1 or EXi (default is HD-1)
KARMAModulesettingsstoredinthatprogramwill USERCUSERF Either HD-1 or EXI (default is EXi)
beused.NormallyyouwillusetheOnsetting.
Off(unchecked):TheKARMAModulesettingswill TospecifythetypeforbanksUSERAG,usethepage
notchangeevenifyouswitchprograms.Usethis menucommandSetProgramUserBankType.
settingifyouwanttoswitchProgramsoundswithout BeawarethatinDiskmodeifyouloaddataofa
changingthephrasesfromtheKARMAModule. differingbanktypefromaPCGfileintoUSERAG
bank,theexistingdatawillbeoverwritten.
Combinations [Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchcombinations,the WhenMIDISystemExclusivemessagesorprogram
KARMAModulesettingsstoredinthatcombination datadumpsarereceived,onlydataofthesame
willbeused.NormallyyouwillusetheOnsetting. banktypeisreceived.Dataofadifferingbanktype
willnotbereceived.UseSetProgramUserBank
Off(unchecked):TheKARMAModulesettingswill Typetochangethebanktypebeforeyoureceivea
notchangeevenifyouswitchcombination.Usethis datadump.
settingifyouwantonlytoswitchcombinationsounds
withoutchangingthephrasesfromtheKARMA
Module.
701
Global mode
System Clock [Internal, Word Clock, S/P DIF] toworryaboutturningdowntheoscillatorlevelbefore

Thissetsthesystemclock,orwordclock,ofthe enteringahighlyresonantfilter,orbetooconcerned
OASYS. aboutmaximizingeverygainstage.
Whenconnectingmultipledigitalaudiodevicessuch Audioinputandoutput,ontheotherhand,uses
astheOASYS,anADATcompatiblesystem,anda industrystandard24bitfixedpointA/DandD/A
S/P DIFdeviceitisimportantthatthewordclocksof converters.Aswithallsuchconverters,thesehavea
thedevicesbelockedtogether.Iftheclocksarenot theoreticalmaximumdynamicrangeof144dB,andthe
locked,theaudiomaybemarredbypopsandclicks. loudestleveltheycanproduceisreferredtoas0dBfs.If
theytrytoproducealoudersignal,theywillclipat
TheOASYScanlocktoincomingclocksfromanyofits 0dBfs(andsoundbad!).
digitalinputs,oritcangenerateitsownclock.
TheInternalHeadroomparameterhelpstocontrolthe
Internal:TheOASYSwilluseitsowninternalclock. wayinwhichtheinternal1,500dBdynamicrange
Thisisthedefaultsetting. interactswiththeaudioI/Ostheoretical144dB
WordClock:TheOASYSwillusetheoptionalEXB dynamicrange.
DIsBNCWORDCLOCKINasthemasterclock.The Topreventinternalsignallevelsfrombecomingso
incomingclockmustbeat48kHz. highthattheycompletelysaturatetheD/Aconverters,
NotethatthisisvalidonlywhentheoptionalEXBDI thesystemintentionallylimitsthemaximumsignal
isinstalled.FormoredetailsontheEXBDI,pleasesee levelattheinputstoIFX112,MFX1/2,andTFX1/2.
EXBDIoptiononpage 1094. InternalHeadroomsetsthevolumelevelatwhichthis
limitinghappens,relativetotheD/Asmaximumlevel
S/P DIF:TheOASYSwillusetheS/P DIFINasthe
of0dBfs.
masterclock.Either48kHzor96kHzwordclocksare
supported,accordingtotheS/P DIFSampleRate WhenthisissettoStandard,signalsintheFXBusses
setting. arelimitedtotheclippointoftheD/As.Toavoid
internalclipping,youcanturndowntheoutputofthe
IfSystemClockissettoS/P DIForWordClock,
voice(usingEQInputTrim,forinstance),orturndown
buttheOASYSisnotdetectingavalidclocksignal,
theinputsoroutputsofindividualeffects.
youllseethemessageClockError!atthetopof
thedisplay.Moreimportantly,theOASYSwillnot WhenInternalHeadroomissetto+12dB,+24dB,
soundcorrectly. +36dB,or+48dB,theFXBussignalsareallowedtobe
higherthanthemaximumD/Alevels.Thismeansthat
Ifthisoccurs,checkthefollowing:
thereislesschanceofclippinginternally,sothatyou
Makesurethatthewordclocksettingsofall dontneedtobeasconcernedaboutgainstaging
connecteddevicesaresetupcorrectly,andthat betweenindividualeffects.However,youstillneedto
thereisoneandonlyonedeviceconfiguredtobe makesurethatthesignallevelis0dBfsorbelowbefore
thewordclockmaster. reachingthefinaloutputs.
Makesurethatthedeviceprovidingthemaster
S/P DIF Sample Rate [48kHz, 96kHz(Normal),
clockispoweredon.
96kHz(Hi Enhanced)]
Makesurethatallcablesareundamaged,andare
Specifiesthesamplerate(samplingfrequency)ofthe
connectedproperly.Ifpossible,tryusingdifferent
S/P DIFinputandoutput.
cables.
48kHz:Digitalaudiowillbeinput/outputat48kHz.
Note:TheSystemClocksettingcanbestoredbythe
AlldigitalsignalswithintheOASYSareprocessedata
WriteGlobalSettingpagemenucommand.
samplingfrequencyof48kHz.
Power On Mode [Reset, Memorize] Theinternaldigitalsignalswillbetransmittedtoand
Specifiestheconditionatpoweron. receivedfromexternaldigitalaudiodeviceswithout
anychangeinthesamplingrate.
Reset:TheOASYSwillbeinCombinationmodeP0:
Play,andCombinationINTA000willbeselected. 96kHz(Normal):Digitalaudiowillbeinput/outputat
96kHz.The48kHzinternaldigitalsignalswillbe
Memorize:Thelocation(modeandpage)whereyou
convertedinto96kHzforoutput.Digitalsignalsfrom
werewhenthepowerwaslastturnedoff,andthelast
a96kHzexternaldigitalaudiodevicewillbe
selectedprogramorcombinationnumberwillbe
convertedinto48kHzforinput.
selected.
96kHz(HiEnhanced):Digitalaudiowillbe
Thisfunctiondoesnotmemorizethecontentsofany
input/outputat96kHzjustasforthe96kHz(Normal)
parametersthatwereedited.Beforeturningoffthe
setting.However,96kHz(HiEnhanced)usesaspecial
power,besuretowriteyourdataorsaveitinDisk
algorithmonlyonthetransmitteddata,todynamically
mode.
emphasizethehighfrequencydataabove
Internal Headroom [Standard, +12dB, +24dB, approximately20kHzforoutput.
+36dB, +48dB]
OASYSuses32bitfloatingpointprocessing,resulting
inanoutstandinginternaldynamicrangeofabout
1,500dB.Thismeansthatinternalsignalscangetboth
veryloudandverysoftwithoutanynoticeable
decreaseinaudioquality.Forinstance,youdontneed
702
Global P0: Basic Setup 01: Basic Setup
Conceptual frequency response of the audio data transmitted with each setting Example: Switching to a combination in which
Gain
timbre 01 Volume is set to 64
These diagrams indicate the
conceptual frequency response, and 1. Selectadifferentcombination,andpressthe
do not accurately portray the actual
S/P DIF Sample Rate frequency response. CONTROLASSIGNMIXERTIMBRE/TRACK
= 48kHz
switchtomake18light.
Gain
24kHz Frequency Raiseslider1tothemaximumposition,setting
timbre01Volumeto127.
S/P DIF Sample Rate 2. Switchtothecombinationdescribedinthe
= 96kHz (Normal)
example.Inthenewlyrecalledcombination,the
24kHz 48kHz Frequency timbre01Volumevalueis64(indicatedbythe
Gain LED).
Emphasis of the high-frequency
component is controlled dynamically Slider1isatthemaximumposition(127),meaning
S/P DIF Sample Rate according to the output audio signal.
= 96kHz (Hi Enhanced) thattheactualvaluedoesnotmatchtheslider
position.
24kHz 48kHz Frequency
3. TheKnob/SliderModesettingJumporCatch
specifiesthepointatwhichthevaluewillbegin
AUDIO OUTPUT
changingwhenyoumoveslider1.
Output S/P DIF Sample Rate DAC (L/MONO, R)
L/R
Fs = 48kHz 48kHz (Digital to Analog Converter) Jump:Thevaluewillimmediatelychangetothe
96kHz (Normal)
Fs = 48kHz or 96kHz
S/P DIF OUT (L, R) controllerlocationassoonasyoumovethecontrol
48kHz to 96kHz (Normal) 96kHz
Conversion (Hi Enhanced) surfacecontroller.
48kHz to 96kHz (Hi
Enhanced) Conversion Intheaboveexample,thevaluewillrespond
ADAT OUT
(1 - 8) [EXB-DI]
immediatelywhenyoumoveslider1slightlybelow
127(forexample,to125).Thedisadvantageofthis
Indiv.1, 2, 3, 4 AUDIO OUTPUT
DAC
5, 6, 7, 8 Fs = 48kHz (INDIV.1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) settingisthatthevaluewilljumpabruptlytothe
(Digital to Analog Converter)
currentvalue,meaningthatcontrolwillbe
Input
(Analog to Digital Converter) discontinuous.Howevertheadvantageisthatthe
Input (Analog) Fs = 48kHz ADC AUDIO INPUT (1, 2, 3, 4) valuewillrespondimmediatelywhenyoumovethe
44.1kHz to 48kHz Audio CD (L, R) controller.
Conversion [CDRW-1]
Input (S/P DIF)

Fs = 48kHz 48kHz Catch:Thevaluewillbeginchangingonlywhenyou
96kHz (Normal)
96kHz to 48kHz Fs = 48kHz or 96kHz
S/P DIF IN (L, R)
havemovedthecontrollersurfacecontrollertothe
Conversion 96kHz (Hi Enhanced)
positionthatmatchesthecurrentvalue.
Intheaboveexample,theVolumewillnot
immediatelychangefromthecurrentvalueof64when
Note:ADATOUT(iftheEXBDIisinstalled)channels youbeginloweringslider1.Asyoulowerslider1
18correspondtoIndiv.18.Ifyouwanttooutputvia through127640,thevaluewillchange6464
L/R,usetheL/RBusIndiv.Assign(02b)setting. 0.Inotherwords,thevaluewillbeginresponding
Thissettingwillalsoaffecttonalcharacterofthe onlyafteryouCatchit.Thissettingcanbe
analogaudiofromthemainstereooutputs advantageouswhenyouwanttoadjustthevolume
(L/MONOandR)andtheheadphoneoutput. smoothlywithoutcausingabruptjumps.Howeverthe
IfthesignalattheS/P DIFinputdoesnotmatchthe disadvantageisthatthecontrollerwillnotrespond
selectedsamplerate,theupperpartoftheLCDwill untilyouhavecaughtthevalue.
indicateS/P DIFCLOCKERROR !. Operate
When selected
Knob/Slider Mode [Jump, Catch] 127
Thisspecifieshowthefrontpanel(controlsurface) 096
MIXERsliders18,masterslider,andknobs18will 064 Setting

operate.
032
Whenyouswitchprograms,combinations,orsongs, 000
thewrittenvaluesordefaultvalueswillberecalledto
127
theOASYSsslidersandknobs,andtheLEDswill
096
showthosevalues.Inthesameway,whenyouuse
CONTROLASSIGNtoswitchthefunctionofthe 064 "Jump"
slidersandknobs,thevalueofthesefunctionswillbe 032
recalledandshown.Atthistime,theactualsliderand 000
knoblocationsmaynotnecessarymatchtherecalled 127
values(shownbytheLEDs).TheKnob/SliderMode 096
settingspecifiesthepointatwhichthevaluewillbegin
064 "Catch"
changingwhenyoumoveasliderorknobinsucha
032
situation.
000
703
Global mode
Beep Enable [Off, On] However,whenthepoweristurnedoff,thesongdata

On(checked):Abeepwillbeheardwhenyoupressan insongmemorywillbelostregardlessofthissetting.
objectintheLCDscreen. On(checked):Internalsongmemorywillbeprotected,
andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbe
Auto Optimize RAM [Off, On] performed.
IfRAMisspecifiedasthedatawritingdestinationfor Recordingtothesequencer
sampling,thisparameterspecifieswhetherthesample
memory(RAM)willbeoptimizedafterdataiswritten. Loadingsongdatafromdisk
Optimizationrearrangesanyunusedmemoryareasso ReceivingsongdataviaMIDIdatadump
thatalloftheremainingmemorycanbeused. Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernalsong
On(checked):RAMwillautomaticallybeoptimized memory.
whensamplingends.
Drum Kit [Off, On]
Withthissetting,youwillalwaysbeabletosample Thissettingprotectstheinternaldrumkitmemory.
withoutwastingRAM,butthesoundwillstopwhen
samplingends.IfasongwasplayinginSequencer On(checked):Internaldrumkitmemorywillbe
mode,theplaybackwillstop. protected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannot
beperformed.
Off(unchecked):RAMwillnotbeoptimizedwhen
samplingends.Sincethesoundwillnotstopwhen Writingadrumkit
samplingends,thissettingisconvenientwhenyou Loadingdrumkitdatafromdisk
wanttoconsecutivelysampleseveralsectionswhilea
ReceivingdrumkitdataviaMIDIdatadump
songplaysorwhilelisteningtoaninputsourcesuchas
aCD. Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernaldrum
kitmemory.
IfAutoOptimizeRAMisturnedOff(unchecked)
andunusedareashaveaccumulatedinmemory,you Wave Sequence [Off, On]
canusethepagemenucommandOptimizeRAMto
Thissettingprotectstheinternalwavesequence
performthesamefunctionmanually.Formore
memory.
information,seeOptimizeRAMonpage 143.
On(checked):Theinternalwavesequencememory
Theremainingamountofsamplememory(RAM)can
willbeprotected,andthefollowingoperationswillnot
becheckedinSamplingmode.Formoreinformation,
bepossible.
see01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationson
page 630 Writingawavesequence
Loadingwavesequencedatafromdisk
01e: Memory Protect ReceivingwavesequencedataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Youwillbeabletowritetointernal
Program [Off, On]
wavesequencememory.
Thissettingprotectstheinternalprogrammemory.
KARMA GE [Off, On]
On(checked):Internalprogrammemorywillbe
protected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannot ThissettingprotectstheinternalKARMAGEmemory.
beperformed. On(checked):TheinternalKARMAGEmemorywill
Writingaprogram beprotected,andthefollowingoperationswillnotbe
possible.
Loadingprogramdatafromdisk
LoadingKARMAGEdatafromdisk
ReceivingprogramdataviaMIDIdatadump
ReceivingKARMAGEdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernal
programmemory. Off(unchecked):Youwillbeabletowritetointernal
KARMAGEmemory.
Combination [Off, On]
Internal HDD Save [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalcombinationmemory.
Thissettingprotectstheinternalharddisk.
On(checked):Internalcombinationmemorywillbe
protected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannot On(checked):Theinternalharddiskwillbeprotected,
beperformed. andthefollowingoperationswillnotbepossible.
Writingacombination Saving,copying,ordeletinginternalharddiskdata
inDiskmode
Loadingcombinationdatafromdisk
RecordingaudiotracksinSequencermode
ReceivingcombinationdataviaMIDIdatadump
SamplingtoDISKineachmode
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernal
combinationmemory. RippingaudioCDsinSamplingmode
Off(unchecked):Youwillbeabletowritedatatothe
Song [Off, On]
internalharddisk.
Thissettingprotectstheinternalsongmemory.
704
Global P0: Basic Setup 02: Audio Input
3:TouchPanelCalibration.Formoreinformation,
t 01: Page Menu Commands seeTouchPanelCalibrationonpage 740.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 4:HalfDamperCalibration.Formoreinformation,
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese seeHalfDamperCalibrationonpage 741.
5:PadCalibration.Formoreinformation,seePad
commandsonpage 142.
Calibrationonpage 741.
0:WriteGlobalSetting.Formoreinformation,see
6:LCDSetup.Formoreinformation,seeLCD
WriteGlobalSettingonpage 740.
Setuponpage 741.
1:SetProgramUserBankType.Formore
7:UpdateSystemSoftware.Formoreinformation,
information,seeSetProgramUserBankTypeon
seeUpdateSystemSoftwareonpage 742.
page 740.
8:ExpansionSampleSetup.Formoreinformation,
2:Changeallbankreferences.Formore
seeExpansionSampleSetuponpage 742.
information,seeChangeallbankreferenceson
page 740. 9:DisplayPublicID.Formoreinformation,see
DisplayPublicIDonpage 742.
02: Audio Input

02PMC
02a
02b
Hereyoucanselecttheanalog/digitalaudiosignal
inputsources,andspecifytheirinputlevel,bus,and 02a: Audio Input
mastereffectsends.
Input1, Input2, Input3, Input4
Thesettingsyoumakeinthispagearevalidinthe
followingsituations: Thesearethesettingsforinputtinganalogaudio
sourcessuchasmicsorinstrumentsconnectedtothe
Whenthispageisopen.
INPUT14jacks.
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,if
youvecheckedUseGlobalSetting(Program, S/P DIF L, S/P DIF R
Combination,Sequencer08a).
Thesearethesettingsforinputtingadigitalaudio
InotherpagesofGlobalmode,ifthemodein sourcesuchasaDATconnectedtotheS/P DIFINjack.
whichyouwereimmediatelypriortoentering
TheS/P DIFinputandoutputsupport48kHzand96
Globalmodewasinstate2(above).
kHzsamplerates.MakethisselectioninS/P DIF
InDiskmode,ifthemodeinwhichyouwere SampleRate(01d).
immediatelypriortoenteringDiskmodewasin
WhenusingtheS/P DIFinputs,makesurethatthe
state2(above).
SystemClockparameterissetappropriately.For
moreinformation,seeSystemClockonpage 702.
705
Global mode
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.) [L/R, IFX112, 18, ADconvertersintotheOASYSevenifthereisno

1/27/8, Off] audioinput,anddependingonthesettings,maybe
outputfromtheAUDIOOUTPUTL/R,18jacks.If
Thisspecifiesthemainbusroutingfortheinputsignal.
youwanttoperformusingonlyinternalsounds
L/R:TheinputsignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus. suchasprograms,combinations,andsongs,andare
IFX112:TheinputsignalwillbesenttotheIFX112 notusingexternalaudioinputs,youshouldsetBus
bus.Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyouwanttoapply Select(IFX/Indiv.)toOff,orsetLevelto0.
aninserteffectwhilesampling. AswithRECBusandFXControlBus,turnthisoff
18:Theinputsignalwillbesenttothespecified ifyourenotusingit.
INDIVIDUALOUTPUTinmonaural.ThePansetting
PLAY/MUTE [(Off, On)]
willbeignored.
ThisindicatesthePLAYorMUTEstatusofeach
1/27/8:Theinputsignalwillbesentinstereo
externalaudiosignalinput.Thesettingscanbe
(includingtheeffectofthePancontrol)tothespecified
switchedfromthecontrolsurface.
INDIVIDUALOUTPUTpair.
PLAY:Theexternalaudiosignalwillbeinputas
Off:Theinputsignalwillnotberouteddirectlytothe
specifiedbythevariousparameters.
outputsorInsertEffects.However,itmaystillbe
routedtoanFXControlBusorRECBus. MUTE:Theexternalaudiosignalwillbemuted
(silent),andwillnotbeinput.
Note:YoucancontrolPLAY/MUTEfromthecontrol
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltoanFX surface.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefront
Controlbus(twostereochannels;FXCtrl1and2). panelmixersectionorfromtheP0ControlSurface
Fordetails,see81d:FXControlBusonpage 128. pageoftheLCD.
REC Bus [Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1/2, 3/4] SOLO ON/OFF

ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio
buses(fourmonochannels;1,2,3,4). signalinput.Thesettingscanbeswitchedfromthe
controlsurface.
UsetheRECbuseswhenyouwanttosamplein
variousmodesortorecordaudiotracksinSequencer Soundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelswhosestatus
mode.Thesearededicatedbusesforrecording. isSOLOON.Otherchannelswillbemuted.
Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttothe InProgrammode,oscillatorswillbesoloed.In
RECbuses.NormallyyouwillusetheOffsetting. Combinationmode,timbreswillbesoloed.In
Sequencermode,MIDItracksandaudiotrackswillbe
1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto
soloed.
thespecifiedRECbus.ThePansettingisignored,and
thesignalissentinmonaural. TheoperationwilldependontheExclusiveSolopage
menucommandsettingineachmode.
1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin
stereotothespecifiedpairofRECbuses.ThePan ExclusiveSoloOff:Multiplechannelscanbesoloed.
settingsendsthesignalinstereotobuses1and2or ThesolostatuswillchangeeachtimeyoupressSOLO
buses3and4. ON/OFF.
ExclusiveSoloOn:WhenyoupressSOLOON/OFF,
Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]
onlythatchannelwillbesoloed.
Send2 (to MFX2) [000127] Note:YoucancontrolSOLOON/OFFfromthecontrol
Theseadjustthelevelsatwhichtheexternalaudio surface.Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefront
inputsignalissenttothemastereffects. panelmixersectionorfromtheP0ControlSurface
pageoftheLCD.
TheSOLOsettingisnotmemorizedwhenyou
Write.
ThissettingisignoredifBusSelectisotherthanL/Ror
Off. Pan [L000C064R127]
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettoIFX112,thesend Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheexternalaudioinput
levelstothemastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX112 signal.Wheninputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill
Send1andSend2(Program,Combination,Sequencer normallysettheinputstoL000andR127respectively.
85a). Note:YoucancontrolPanfromthecontrolsurface.You
Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1 canalsomakethissettingfromthefrontpanelmixer
(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2).Youcanalsomake sectionorfromtheP0ControlSurfacepageofthe
thissettingfromthefrontpanelmixersectionorfrom LCD.
theP0ControlSurfacescreenoftheLCD.
Level [000127]
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettootherthanOff, Specifiestheleveloftheexternalaudiosignalthatwill
andyouraisetheLevelsetting,theexternalaudio beinput.Normallyyouwillsetthisat127.
sourcewillbeinputtotheOASYS.Atthistimeif
audiocablesareconnectedtotheAUDIOINPUT1
4jacks,thenoisecomponentwillbeinputviathe
706
Global P0: Basic Setup 02: Audio Input
Note:Youcancontrolvolumefromthecontrolsurface. 3. Usethebuiltinheadphoneoutputforlisteningto
Youcanalsomakethissettingfromthefrontpanel OASYSasyouselectoreditsounds.
mixersectionorfromtheP0ControlSurfacepageof Asanalternative,youcanconnectthemainL/R
theLCD. outputstoyourpersonalmonitormixer.
TheanalogaudiosignalsfromtheAUDIOINPUT14 4. Whenyourereadyforotherstoheartheresults,
jacksareconvertedbyaADconverterfromanalogto setL/RBusIndiv.Assignto1/2.
digitalsignals.Thisparametersetsthelevelofthe
Now,theOASYSstereomixwillgotothemainboard.
signalimmediatelyafterithasbeenconvertedinto
digitalform.Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhoughthis
levelsettingisverylow,itispossiblethatthesoundis
distortingearlierthantheADconverter.Tryadjusting
Sub Monitor
theMIC/LINEgainswitch,LEVELknob(AUDIO (INDIV.) (MAIN)
INPUT1,2)ortheoutputleveloftheexternalaudio 2 1 R L
source. 1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
MON
2
AUX
00
U
U
+15
1
2
00
U
+15
U
STEREO AUX RETUNES
2
L
C
C
R
1
2
Power Amplifier
INPUT
00 +15 L R 3
00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15
U U U U U U U U U U U U U C
3 5 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 3 4
00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 L R MONO
U 3 U U U U U U U U U U U U C
4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 4 AUX
SOLO
00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 00 +15 L R
5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6
SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT LEVEL BALANCE
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI
CR1604
-15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 16 CHANNEL MIC/LINE MIXER
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MID MID MID MID MID MID MID MID MID MID MID MID
CLIP
+8 ALT PREVIEW
-12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 -12 +12 +4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Power Amplifier
0 0 0 0 0 LO
+2
LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO
0
MAIN OUTPUT
MUTE
02b: Audio Output

-4
-15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -15 +15 -8
EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ
-12 SOLO
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TO
-16 MAIN
-20
L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R
POWER
PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO
LEVEL
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE
ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4 ALT 3/4
1/LEFT 2/RIGHT LEVEL
OL OL OL OL OL OL OL OL OL OL OL OL SOLO/PHONES
+20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +10
U U U U U U U U U U U U
OUTPUT
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
L/R Bus Indiv. Assign (Assign to L/R and Indiv.Out)

[Off, 1/27/8]
ThisletsyousimultaneouslysendtheL/Routputto Sending the main mix to the EXB-DI ADAT outputs
anypairofindividualoutputs,inadditiontoL/R. IftheoptionalEXBDIisinstalled,theeightADAT
Itsdesignedfortwospecificapplications: outputchannelscorrespondtoIndividualOut18.
ThismeansthatyoucanuseL/RBusIndiv.Assignto
Instudioorliveperformancesituations,youcan sendtheL/RoutputtoanypairofADAToutputs.
usethisparametertomonitorsoundsinprivacy,
withoutchangesatthemainboard.
WiththeoptionalEXBDIinstalled,youcanroute t 02: Page Menu Commands
theL/RoutputtoanypairofADAToutput ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
channels. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Off:TheL/RoutputwillbesentonlytotheAUDIO shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
OUTPUTL(MONO)andRjacks,theHEADPHONE commandsonpage 142.
jack,andtheS/P DIFOUTjack.Thisisthenormal 0:WriteGlobalSetting.Formoreinformation,see
setting. WriteGlobalSettingonpage 740.
1/27/8:TheL/Routputwillbesenttothe 1:SetProgramUserBankType.Formore
correspondingpairofINDIVIDUALOUT18jacks,as information,seeSetProgramUserBankTypeon
wellastothemainL/Routputs,theHEADPHONE page 740.
jack,andtheS/P DIFOUTjack.
2:Changeallbankreferences.Formore
Post-TFX Individual Bus AUDIO OUTPUT
information,seeChangeallbankreferenceson
L R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
page 740.
L (MONO)
(MAIN)
R 3:TouchPanelCalibration.Formoreinformation,
1
seeTouchPanelCalibrationonpage 740.
2
4:HalfDamperCalibration.Formoreinformation,
3
4 seeHalfDamperCalibrationonpage 741.
(INDIVIDUAL)
5
6 5:PadCalibration.Formoreinformation,seePad
7
Calibrationonpage 741.
8
L/R Bus Indiv.
Assign = 1/2
6:LCDSetup.Formoreinformation,seeLCD
Setuponpage 741.
Private monitoring 7:UpdateSystemSoftware.Formoreinformation,
seeUpdateSystemSoftwareonpage 742.
Onstage,orinthestudio,itcanbeconvenientto
auditionsoundsormakeeditswithoutsendingthe 8:ExpansionSampleSetup.Formoreinformation,
signaltothemixer,ortothemainmonitors.Youcan seeExpansionSampleSetuponpage 742.
useL/RBusIndiv.Assigntodothis: 9:DisplayPublicID.Formoreinformation,see
1. ConnectIndividualOutputs1/2tothemixeror DisplayPublicIDonpage 742.
mainmonitors.DonotconnectthemainL/R
outputs.
Youcanactuallyuseanyofthefourindividualoutput
pairs,butwelltalkabout1/2inthisexample.
2. Whileyoureauditioningsoundsorediting,set
L/RBusIndiv.AssigntoOff.
707
Global mode
Global P1: MIDI
11: MIDI
11c 11PMC
11a
11b
HereyoucanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsthataffect InCombinationmode(P0:Play),programchanges
theentireOASYS.YoucanalsotransmitMIDISystem receivedontheglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchthe
Exclusivedatadumpsusingthepagemenucommands combination(11c:MIDIFilter).
inthispage.Hereyoucanalsospecifythefunctionof UsetheglobalMIDIchanneltoswitchIFX112
thesliders,knobs,andswitcheswhenthecontrol (CC#92),MFX1&2(CC#94)andTFX1&2(CC#95)
surfaceCONTROLASSIGNEXTERNALswitchison. on/off.
TocontrolthepanfollowingIFX,sends1/2,MFX1/2
11a: MIDI Setup andTFX1/2,usetheglobalMIDIchannelwheninthe
ProgramorSamplingmode;whileintheCombination,
Basic orSequencermodes,usethechannelspecified
separatelybyCtrlChforIFX112,MFX1&2,TFX1&2,
MIDI Channel (Global MIDI Channel) [116] andMEQ.BysettingCtrlChtoGch,youcancontrol
SetstheglobalMIDIchannel. theseparametersfromtheglobalMIDIchannel.
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedinthefollowingcases. MIDI output when playing OASYS
Whentransmittingandreceivingperformancedata InProgrammodeandSamplingmode,thisdatawill
inProgrammode(ProgramP0:Play)andSampling betransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel.In
mode. Combinationmode,datawillbetransmitted
WhenselectingcombinationsviaMIDIin simultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchannelandonthe
Combinationmode(CombinationP0:Play). MIDIchannelsoftimbreswhoseStatus(Combination
01b,21a)issettoEXTorEX2.
Whencontrollingtimbresoreffectsthathavebeen
settoGchinvariousmodes InSequencermode,musicaldatawillbetransmitted
onthechannelspecifiedforthecurrentlyselectedtrack
Whentransmittingandreceivingsystemexclusive
(Sequencer01a)(whoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2).
messages
MIDI received External mode

IneachmodewhenthecontrolsurfaceCONTROL
InProgrammode(P0:Play),MIDIdataisreceivedon
ASSIGNEXTERNALswitchison,youcanusethe
theglobalMIDIchannel,butinCombinationmode
mixersliders18,masterslider,knobs18,and
(P0:Play)orSequencermode,MIDIdataisreceivedon
switches116tocontrolaconnectedcomputerorMIDI
theMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbreortrack.
device.
708
Global P1: MIDI 11: MIDI
TheMIDICC#(controlchange)messagesare Knob/SliderMode:Toavoidpotentialproblemswhen
transmittedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedinthe LocalControlisOff,mostknobsandslidersbehaveas
GlobalP1External1andExternal2pages. iftheKnob/SliderModewassettoJump.The
exceptioniswhenControlAssignissettoExternal,in
Local Control On [Off, On] whichcasetheKnob/SliderModesettingisobserved.
LocalControlOn(Checked):TheOASYSsinternal Formoreinformation,seeKnob/SliderModeon
tonegeneratorwillbecontrolledbyitsownkeyboard, page 703.
joystick,SW1andSW2,andconnectedfootpedal.If
youareplayingtheOASYSbyitself,leavethissetting Local Control and the Control Surface: more detail
checked. TheinformationunderLocalControlandtheControl
LocalControlOff(Unchecked):TheOASYSs Surface,above,isallthatyoushouldneedtoknowin
keyboardandjoysticketc.willbedisconnectedfrom mostcases.Thefollowinginformationdetailshowthe
theinternaltonegenerator. systemworksinternally.Youllnoticetheresultsof
ThismeansthatoperatingtheOASYS(playingits theseinternaloperationsonlyifLocalControlisOff
keyboardandusingthejoystick,orplayingbackthe ANDthereisnoMIDIloopbackwhichisnota
sequencer)willnotsounditsinternaltonegenerator. recommendedconfiguration.
TurnLocalControlOffifloopbackfromanexternal Inthiscase,youllseethattheControlSurfaceworksin
sequencercausesduplicatenotes. slightlydifferentways,dependingontheControl
Assignsetting.
WhenControlAssignissettoTimbre/TrackorAudio:
Local Sequencer
Control
OFF
IfLocalControlisOff,mostoftheknobs,sliders,
Record
ON
Tone
Generator andswitcheswillonlyaffecttheinternalsounds
MIDI IN
whenMIDIisloopedbackintoOASYS.The
Enable KARMA Module
KARMA
to MIDI Out exceptionistheSelectswitches,whichalways
Enable MIDI In
to KARMA Module controltheselection.
OFF MIDI OUT
ON
WhenControlAssignissettoExternal:
TheControlSurfacewillfunctionproperly
While the internal sequencer is playing
(The playback of the internal sequencer will not be sent to the KARMA module.) regardlessoftheLocalControlsetting.
Play
WhenControlAssignissettoRealTime
Local Sequencer
Control
OFF
Knobs/KARMA:
Record
Tone
Generator
ON IfLocalControlisOff,theRealTimeKnobswill
MIDI IN onlyaffecttheinternalsoundswhenMIDIis
loopedbackintoOASYS.
MIDI OUT
TheKARMAslidersandswitcheswillfunction
properlyregardlessoftheLocalControlsetting.
IfLocalControlisOff,MIDItransmission/
receptionwilloccurnormally.Playingthekeyboard WhenControlAssignissettoToneAdjust:
willcausethecorrespondingnotedatatobe IfLocalControlisOff,theknobs,sliders,and
transmitted,andreceivednotedatawillplaythe switcheswillonlyaffecttheinternalsoundswhen
OASYSsinternalsounds. MIDIisloopedbackintoOASYS.
Local Control and the Control Surface LocalControlandtheControlSurface:systemdiagrams

TheControlSurfacegeneratesandreceivesMIDICCs Local Control On
andSystemExclusivemessages,sothatyoucanrecord Move the Control Surface's physical
knob,switch,andslidermovementsintoasequencer. knobs, switches, and sliders
Send MIDI output
Inordertoavoidfeedbackloopsandotherstrange (CCs and System Exclusive)
Use the touch-screen to edit
behavior,theControlSurfacereliesuponanexternal Control Surface parameters
Update internal parameters,
MIDIloopbackwhenLocalControlisturnedOff. update Control Surface page
Receive MIDI input on the touch-screen, and
Inotherwords: (CCs or System Exclusive) update Control Surface LEDs
IfLocalControlisOn,thephysicalControlSurface
willworkproperlyaslongasMIDIisnotbeing Local Control Off
loopedbackintotheOASYS. Move the Control Surface's physical
knobs, switches, and sliders
IfLocalControlisOff,youmustloopbackMIDI Send MIDI output
(CCs and System Exclusive)
intotheOASYSinorderforthephysicalControl Use the touch-screen to edit
Control Surface parameters
Surfacetoworkproperly. Update internal parameters,
update Control Surface page
on the touch-screen, and
RegardlessoftheLocalControlsetting,youcan Receive MIDI input
update Control Surface LEDs
(CCs or System Exclusive)
alwayseditControlSurfaceparametersviathe
touchscreen. AssignablePedals:Whenassignablepedalsarerouted
toduplicatethefunctionofaknob,theyactthesameas
thephysicalknob.
709
Global mode
Controller MIDI CC Assign

(Global P2: 21c setting)
CC#110
Pad1: MIDI CC#110
Pad2: MIDI CC#111
Pad3: MIDI CC#112
Pad4: MIDI CC#113
Pad5: MIDI CC#114
Pad6: MIDI CC#115
Pad7: MIDI Note#60
Pad8: Off
Pads MIDI Out
Pads Chord
Pad1 (Settings for each Program, Combination, Song) Pad CC/Note
PAD1 Pads
1: C3 / 127 MIDI Output
2: C4 / 100 C3, C4, E4, G4, B4 Chord Notes
3: E4 / 102 Note On & Off
4: G4 / 105
5: B4 / 064
6: Off
7: Off
8: Off
RESETCONTROLSbutton:LocalControldoesnot Thissettingwillnotaffectthedatathatistransmitted
changethewaythattheControlSurfaceinteractswith fromMIDIOUTorrecordedontheinternalsequencer
RESETCONTROLS.Forinstance,ifLocalControlis whenyouplaytheOASYSskeyboardorplaybackthe
Off,holdingRESETCONTROLSandmovingaknob sequence.
willstillresettheknob.
MIDI IN Velocity
OtherControlSurfacebuttons:theCONTROL Record Play
Curve
Sequencer
ASSIGNbuttons,theMIXERKNOBSbutton,andthe Aftertouch
Curve
SOLObuttonarenotaffectedbyLocalControl.
Tone
Convert Position [PreMIDI, PostMIDI] Scale Transpose
generator
Pitch change
Thissettingspecifiesthelocationatwhichthe MIDI OUT
Transpose,VelocityCurve,andAfterTouchCurve
settingswillbeapplied.Thissettingwillaffectthe
MIDIdatathatistransmittedandreceived,andthe Note Receive (Note Receive Filter) [All, Even, Odd]
datathatisrecordedontheinternalsequencer. Thissettingspecifieswhetherevennumbered,odd
WhenusingtheOASYSskeyboardtoplaytheinternal numbered,orallnotenumberswillbesoundedwhen
tonegenerator,theTranspose,VelocityCurve,and notedataisreceivedfromtheOASYSskeyboardor
AfterTouchCurvesettingswillalwaystakeeffect fromanexternalMIDIdevice.Byconnectingthe
regardlessofthissetting. OASYStoanotherOASYSandsettingoneinstrument
toEvenandtheothertoOdd,youcaneffectively
PreMIDI:VelocityCurve,AfterTouchCurve,and doublethepolyphonybydividingthenotesbetween
Transposewillbeappliedtothedatathatis thetwoinstruments.
transmittedfromtheOASYSskeyboard.
All:Allnotenumberswillbereceived.Normallyyou
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,AfterTouchCurve, willleavethissettoAll.
andTransposesettingswillaffectthedatathatis
transmittedfromMIDIOUTwhentheOASYSs Even:Evennumberednotes(C,D,E,F#,G#,A#)will
keyboardisplayed,andthedatathatisrecordedon sound.
theinternalsequencer. Odd:Oddnumberednotes(C#,D#,F,G,A,B)will
MIDIdatareceivedfromMIDIINorthedataplayed sound.
backbytheinternalsequencerwillnotbeaffected. ThissettinghasnoeffectontheMIDIdatathatis
MIDI IN
received.
Velocity
Curve
Record Play
Sequencer
Aftertouch MIDI OUT MIDI IN
Curve
Transpose Scale
Tone Another OASYS
generator
ODD EVEN
Note number
change
MIDI OUT
MIDI Clock
PostMIDI:VelocityCurve,AfterTouchCurve,and
Transposewillbeappliedtodatabeforeitentersthe MIDI Clock (MIDI Clock Source) [Internal, External
tonegenerator. MIDI, Auto]
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,AfterTouchCurve, UsethissettingtosynchronizetheOASYSsKARMA
andTransposesettingswillaffectthedatathatissent functionandinternalsequencerwithanexternalMIDI
totheinternaltonegeneratorwhenyouplaythe device(e.g.,sequencerorrhythmmachine).
OASYSskeyboard,whentheinternalsequenceris Internal:TheKARMAfunctionandtheinternal
playedback,orwhendataisreceivedfromMIDIIN. sequencerwilloperateaccordingtotheinternalclock.
710
SelecttheInternalsettingwhenusingtheOASYSby ThisparametercannotbesetifMIDIClockis
itself,orwhenyouwanttheOASYStobethemaster Internal.
(controllingdevice)sothatanotherconnectedexternal
MIDIdevicewillsynchronizetotheMIDIClock
messagestransmittedfromtheOASYS. 11b: MIDI Routing Setup
ExternalMIDI:TheKARMAfunctionandinternal Vector MIDI Out [Vector Joystick,
sequencerwilloperateinsynchronizationwithMIDI Vector CC Control]
ClockmessagesfromanexternalMIDIdevice
ThissettingspecifiestheMIDIoutputgeneratedby
connectedtotheMIDIINconnector.
vectorjoystickoperationsorvectorenvelope.
Auto:Normallytheoperationwillbethesameasthe
VectorJoystick:Whenyoumovethevectorjoystick,
Internalsetting.IfexternalMIDIClockmessagesare
thetwoMIDIcontrolchangemessagesspecifiedby
receivedfromtheMIDIINconnector,theOASYSwill
VECTORVJSXandVJSY(21c)willbe
automaticallyswitchtothesameoperationasExternal
transmitted.Bydefault,VJSXisCC#118andVJSY
MIDI.
isCC#119.
Note:IfyouselectAutowhenanexternalMIDI
NormallyyouwillusetheVectorJoysticksetting.In
sequencerisconnected,theOASYSwillautomatically
thiscase,thevectorenvelopewillnotgenerateMIDI
switchtoInternaloperationiftheexternalMIDI
output.Usethissettingifyouwanttocontrolan
sequencerisnottransmittingMIDIClockmessages,
externalMIDIdevicebymovingthevectorjoystick,or
allowingtheKARMAModulestooperateand
torecordvectorjoystickmovementsontheinternal
parametersforwhichMIDI/TempoSyncisturnedon
sequenceroranexternalsequencer.
tofunction.
VectorCCControl:TheOASYSwilltransmittheMIDI
Note:IfafterreceivingaMIDIClock,Start,orContinue
controlchangemessagesspecifiedbytheVectorCC
messagefromtheMIDIINconnector,nonewMIDI
Control+X,X,+Y,andYsettingsineach
Clockmessageisreceivedwithinanintervalof500ms,
program,combination,orsong.Usethissettingifyou
orifyoustarttheOASYSssequencerfromthefront
wantvectorjoystickoperationsorthevectorenvelope
panelwithouthavingreceivedaMIDIClock,Start,or
totransmitMIDIcontrolchangemessages.
ContinuemessagefromtheMIDIINconnector,the
OASYSwillautomaticallyswitchtoInternaloperation. Normallyyouwillusethistocontroltheinternaltone
generatororeffects,butyoucanalsouseittotransmit
Receive Ext. Realtime Commands [Off, On] messagestoanexternalMIDIdevice,ortorecordthese
Off(unchecked):EvenifMIDIClockissetto movementsontheinternalsequenceroranexternal
ExternalMIDI,orifsettoAutoandtheOASYSis sequencer.
synchronizedtoexternalMIDIClockmessages,MIDI
Pads MIDI Out [Pad CC/Note, Chord Notes]
CommonmessagesandRealtimemessages(Song
PositionPointer,Start,Continue,Stop)willnotbe ThissettingspecifiestheMIDImessagesthatare
received.(SongSelectmessageswillbereceived.) outputwhenyoustrikeapad.
Note:Usethissettingiftheabovemessagesfroman PadCC/Note:Whenyoustrikeapad,theMIDInote
externalMIDIsequencerareunnecessarilyresetting numberorMIDIcontrolchangemessagespecifiedby
theOASYSssongsettings. thePadPad1Pad8(21c)settingwillbe
transmitted.
On(checked):TheaboveCommonmessages
Ifthesettingisoff,noMIDImessagewillbe
(includingSongSelect)andRealtimemessageswillbe
transmitted.
received.

Vector MIDI Out
Global Controllers Vector Joystick

Defaults: X=118, Y=119 Vector CC MIDI Output
Vector CC Control
Vector Joystick
MIDI In
Vector CC Control
scale X+/- and Y+/- Vector CC Modulation of

Vector EG VJS X and Y modes
CC Assignments Program and FX Parameters
Program switch:
Enable CC control
Vector Volume Control
Osc 1/2 Center Volume Vector Modulation of

and Equal Power settings Oscillator Volume
Program switch:
711
Global mode
ChordNotes:Whenyoustrikeapad,the(uptoeight) EnableKARMAModuletoMIDIOutOn
MIDInoteon/offmessages(andvelocities)specified EnableMIDIIntoKARMAModuleOff
bythePadPad1Pad8(19)settingofeach (LocalControlOnOn)
program,combination,orsongwillbetransmitted.If IfyouwantMIDIinputfromanexternalMIDI
allnotesareturnedoff,noMIDImessageswillbe devicetotriggertheKARMAModule
transmitted.
IfyouwantonlytheOASYSkeyboardeventsthat
KARMA External Routing triggertheKARMAModuletobesentfromMIDI
OUTforrecordingonanexternalsequencer,and
Enable KARMA Module to MIDI Out [Off, On] echobackorplaybacktheseeventsviaMIDIINto
ThissettingspecifieswhethertheKARMAModule triggertheKARMAModule:
willtransmitMIDImessages. EnableKARMAModuletoMIDIOutOff
On(checked):TheKARMAModulewilltransmit EnableMIDIIntoKARMAModuleOn
MIDImessages. (LocalControlOnOff)
YoucanalsomakethesesettingsfromtheSetup
Off(unchecked):TheKARMAModulewillnot
KARMAExternalMIDIRouting(o)pagemenu
transmitMIDImessages.MIDIeventsgeneratedbythe
command.
KARMAModulewillsoundtheinternaltone
generator,butMIDImessageswillnotbeoutput. IfbothEnableKARMAModuletoMIDIOutand
EnableMIDIIntoKARMAModuleareturned
Enable MIDI In to KARMA Module [Off, On] On,thereisapossibilityofaMIDILoopoccurring,
ThissettingspecifieswhetherMIDImessagesfromthe dependingonthesettingsoftheexternaldevices
MIDIINconnectorwillbesenttotheKARMA thatyouareconnectedto.Ifthishappens,disable
Module. theEchoThrusettingsoftheexternaldevices,or
setoneoftheseKARMAMIDIsettingstoOff.See
On(checked):MIDImessageswillbesenttothe
SetUpKARMAExternalMIDIRoutingon
KARMAModule.
page 744.
Off(unchecked):MIDImessageswillnotbesentto
theKARMAModule. Start/Stop (Realtime) Out
Enable Start/Stop Out in Prog/Combi [Off, On]
Sequencer
Local
Control
InProgramandCombinationmodes,thisfunction
OFF Record
ON
Tone
Generator
transmitsaMIDIstartmessagewhenyoutriggerthe
KARMAfunction,andaMIDIstopmessagewhenyou
MIDI IN Enable KARMA Module
KARMA
to MIDI Out turnitoff.ThisletsyoumakeanexternalMIDI
Enable MIDI In
to KARMA Module
sequencerorrhythm/groovemachinestartplayingat
OFF MIDI OUT themomentthattheKARMAfunctionbeginsplaying.
ON
Off(unchecked):NormallyyouwillleavethisOff.
While the internal sequencer is playing
(The playback of the internal sequencer will not be sent to the KARMA module.)
On(checked):MIDIsystemrealtimemessagesStart
Play andStopwillbetransmittedinProgramand
Local Sequencer Combinationmode.IfMIDIClock(11a)issetto
Control
OFF Record
Tone InternalorAuto(andoperatingasInternal),thestart
ON Generator
andstopmessageswillbetransmittedunderthe
MIDI IN conditionsdescribedbelow.Thiscanbeusedto
MIDI OUT
simultaneouslystartanexternalMIDIsequenceror
rhythm/groovemachineatthemomenttheKARMA
functionbeginsplaying.
Example settings Start:IftheKARMAON/OFFswitchison,theMIDI
computer systemrealtimemessageStartwillbetransmittedat
MIDI interface
themomentyouusethekeyboardorpads18keysto
triggertheGEselectedforaKARMAModule.
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
Note:Startwillbetransmittedatthemomentthatthe
GEphraseorpatternistriggeredaccordingtothe
KARMAKeyZone(Program71a,Combination7
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
1b)settingforthatKARMAModule.
Stop:IfStarthasbeenpreviouslytransmitted,the
MIDIsystemrealtimemessageStopwillbe
transmittedatthemomentyouturnofftheKARMA
ON/OFFswitch.
Ifyouwantphrasesetc.generatedbytheOASYSs
KARMAModuletobesentviaMIDItocontrolan
externalMIDIdeviceorrecordedonanexternal
MIDIsequencer:
712
Off(unchecked):BankSelectmessageswillnotbe
transmittedorreceived.
Whenrecordingontheinternalsequencer,bankselect
Clock: External
messageswillberecordedregardlessofthissetting.
MIDI IN
Howeverforplayback,thissettingwillapply.
Combination Change [Off, On]

MIDI Clock: Internal
Enable Start/Stop Out On(checked):WheninCombinationP0:Play,an
MIDI OUT in Prog/Combi: On
incomingprogramchangemessageontheglobalMIDI
channelsetbyMIDIChannel(11a)willswitch
combinations.
ThisisvalidwhenEnableProgramChangeis
checked.
Anincomingprogramchangeonachannelotherthan
Formoreinformation,seeConnectingMIDIdevices
theglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramof
&computersonpage 1055,Synchronizingthe
anytimbrethatmatchesthatMIDIchannel.
playbackoftheKARMAfunctionorsequenceron
page 1065,andSynchronizingtheKARMAfunction Off(unchecked):Anincomingprogramchange
onpage 217oftheOperationGuide. messageontheglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchthe
programofanytimbrewhoseMIDIChannel
(Combination21a)matchestheglobalMIDIchannel.
11c: MIDI Filter Thecombinationwillnotbeswitched.
Enable Program Change [Off, On] Theprogramchangesforeachtimbrewillbeaffected
bythesettingoftheEnableProgramChange
On(checked):Programchangeswillbetransmitted
parameter(Combination31a).
andreceived.
InProgrammode(P0:Play),theprogramwillbe Enable After Touch [Off, On]
switchedwhenaprogramchangemessageisreceived On(checked):MIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
ontheglobalMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDI transmittedandreceived.
Channel(11a).Whenyouswitchprograms,a
Off(unchecked):MIDIaftertouchmessageswill
programchangemessagewillbetransmittedonthe
neitherbetransmittednorreceived.
globalMIDIchannel.
Whenrecordingsoundsthatdonotrequiretheuseof
InCombinationmode(P0:Play),thecombinationwill
aftertouch,youcanuncheckthisparametertosave
beswitchedwhenaprogramchangemessageis
memory.
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannel.However,itis
possibletosettheEnableCombinationChange Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
parametersothatthecombinationisnotswitched. sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwas
Whenaprogramchangeisreceivedonthechannel recordedwithaftertouchdata;i.e.,aftertouchwillbe
specifiedforeachtimbrebyMIDIChannel transmittedviaMIDI.
(Combination21a),theprogramofthattimbrewillbe TheOASYSskeyboardtransmitsonlychannelafter
switched.However,theprogramchangesforeach touch;itdoesnottransmitpolyphonicaftertouch.
timbrewillbeaffectedbythesettingoftheEnable However,sincetheOASYSdoessupportpolyphonic
ProgramChangeparameter(Combination31a). aftertouchasanAlternateModulationSource(AMS),
Whenyouswitchcombinations,aprogramchange itcanreceivepolyphonicaftertouchtocontrol
messagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI individualnotes.
channel,andalsotransmittedsimultaneouslyonthe
channeloftimbreswhoseStatus(Combination01b, Enable Control Change [Off, On]
21a)issettoEXTorEX2. On(checked):Controlchangemessageswillbe
transmittedandreceived.
InSequencermode,incomingprogramchange
messagesonachannelthatcorrespondstoatrack Off(unchecked):Controlchangemessageswill
whoseStatus(Sequencer21a)issettoINTorBTH neitherbetransmittednorreceived.
willswitchprogramsonthattrack.Whenyouselecta Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
songorplaybacksequencerdata,programchanges sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwas
willbetransmittedonthechannelsoftrackswhose recordedwithcontrolchangedata;i.e.,thecontrol
StatusissettoBTH,EXT,orEX2. changespreviouslyrecordedintothesequencerwillbe
Off(unchecked):Programchangeswillnotbe transmittedviaMIDI.
transmittedorreceived.
Enable Exclusive [Off, On]
Bank Change [Off, On] On(checked):Systemexclusivedatawillbe
On(checked):TheBankSelectcontrolchangemessage transmittedandreceived.
willbetransmittedtogetherwithprogramchange CheckthisifyouwanttoedittheOASYSfroma
messages.ThisisvalidwhenEnableProgram connectedcomputer,orifyouwanttoallowbi
Changeischecked. directionalediting.
713
Global mode
Off(unchecked):Systemexclusivedatawillnotbe 2:DumpCombination.Formoreinformation,see
transmitted.Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked. DumpCombinationonpage 743.
However,systemexclusivedatawillbetransmitted 3:DumpDrumKit.Formoreinformation,see
andreceivedwhilethepagemenucommands(Dump DumpDrumKitonpage 743.
ProgramDumpAll)ofthispagearedisplayed. 4:DumpWaveSequence.Formoreinformation,
seeDumpWaveSequenceonpage 743.
t 11: Page Menu Commands 5:DumpGlobalSetting.Formoreinformation,see
DumpGlobalSettingonpage 743.
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese 6:DumpSequencer.Formoreinformation,see
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu DumpSequenceronpage 743.
commandsonpage 142. 7:DumpKARMAUserGE.Formoreinformation,
0:WriteGlobalSetting.Formoreinformation,see seeDumpKARMAUserGEonpage 743.
WriteGlobalSettingonpage 740. 8:SetupKARMAExternalMIDIRouting.For
1:DumpProgram.Formoreinformation,see moreinformation,seeSetUpKARMAExternal
DumpProgramonpage 742. MIDIRoutingonpage 744.
9:ResetExternalSetup.Formoreinformation,see
ResetExternalSetuponpage 745.
12: External 1
12PMC
12a
12b
Thispageletsyousetuptheknobs,sliders,and TheseExternalSetupsarecompletelyseparatefrom
switchesfortheControlSurfacesEXTERNALmode. theProgram.YoucanthinkofExternalmodeasbeing
Inthismode,eachslider,knob,andswitchcanbe aseparatecontrolsurfacewhichjusthappenstoshare
assignedtoaseparateMIDIcontrollerandMIDI OASYSssliders,knobs,switches,anddrumpads.
channel. WhenyouselectanExternalSetup,itstaysselected
Theeightdrumpadsalsohaveseparatesettingswhich evenwhenyouchangePrograms,orswitchtoCombi
applyonlywhenControlAssignissettoExternal;for orSequencermodes.Thismakesiteasytoselect
moreinformation,see13:External2onpage 716. differentOASYSsoundswithoutdisruptingany
Youcancreateupto128differentExternalSetups.For externalMIDIcontrol,andviceversa.
instance,youmightmakeonesetupforcontrolling Note:Aftereditingthesetups,makesuretosaveyour
severaldifferentpiecesofMIDIgearonstage,another editsusingthepagemenusWriteGlobalcommand.
forcontrollingasoftwaresynthesizer(suchasoneof Youcanalsocallupthismenucommandbyholding
KorgsLegacyCollectionsynths),andsoon. ENTERandpressing0onthenumerickeypad.
714
Global P1: MIDI 12: External 1
5:DumpGlobalSetting.Formoreinformation,see
12a: External Mode Setup DumpGlobalSettingonpage 743.
Setup [000127] 6:DumpSequencer.Formoreinformation,see
DumpSequenceronpage 743.
ThisselectstheGlobalsetuptoedit.
7:DumpKARMAUserGE.Formoreinformation,
seeDumpKARMAUserGEonpage 743.
12b: Knobs/Switches/Sliders
8:SetupKARMAExternalMIDIRouting.For
Knobs 18 moreinformation,seeSetUpKARMAExternal
MIDIRoutingonpage 744.
MIDI Channel (18) [116, Gch] 9:ResetExternalSetup.Formoreinformation,see
ThissetstheMIDIChannelfortheknob.Eachcansend ResetExternalSetuponpage 745.
onadifferentchannel,ifdesired.
MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.Thisallowsyou
toredirectanynumberofsliders,knobs,switches,and
padstoadifferentchannelatonce,withouteditingthe
individualcontrols.
CC# Assign (18) [Off, 00119]

ThissetstheMIDICCsentbytheknob.
Switches 116
MIDI Channel (116) [116, Gch]
ThissetstheMIDIChannelfortheswitch.Eachcan
sendonadifferentchannel,ifdesired.
Whentheswitchisturnedon,itsendsavalueof127;
whenitisturnedoff,itsendsavalueof0.
CC# Assign (116) [Off, 00119]

ThissetstheMIDICCsentbytheswitch.
Sliders 18 and Master

MIDI Channel (18) [116, Gch]
ThissetstheMIDIChannelfortheslider.Eachcan
sendonadifferentchannel,ifdesired.
CC# Assign (1-8) [Off, 00119]

ThissetstheMIDICCsentbytheslider.

commandsonpage 142.
1:DumpProgram.Formoreinformation,see
DumpProgramonpage 742.
2:DumpCombination.Formoreinformation,see
DumpCombinationonpage 743.
3:DumpDrumKit.Formoreinformation,see
DumpDrumKitonpage 743.
4:DumpWaveSequence.Formoreinformation,
seeDumpWaveSequenceonpage 743.
715
Global mode
13: External 2
13PMC
13a
13b
Thispageletsyousetupthedrumpadassignmentsfor Thisletsyousetthepadsfixedvelocity.
theControlSurfacesEXTERNALmode.Eachpadcan
playanote,orsendaControlChange(CC)message,
onanyoftheMIDIchannels.Formoreinformation, t 13: Page Menu Commands
see12:External1onpage 714. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
13a: Setup select
commandsonpage 142.
Setup [000127] 0:WriteGlobalSetting.Formoreinformation,see
ThisselectstheGlobalsetuptoedit. WriteGlobalSettingonpage 740.
1:DumpProgram.Formoreinformation,see
DumpProgramonpage 742.
13b: Pads 18
2:DumpCombination.Formoreinformation,see
MIDI Channel (18) [116, Gch] DumpCombinationonpage 743.
ThissetstheMIDIChannelforthepad.Eachcansend 3:DumpDrumKit.Formoreinformation,see
onadifferentchannel,ifdesired. DumpDrumKitonpage 743.
GchmeansthatthepadwilltransmitontheGlobal 4:DumpWaveSequence.Formoreinformation,
MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.Thisallowsyou seeDumpWaveSequenceonpage 743.
toredirectanynumberofsliders,knobs,switches,and
5:DumpGlobalSetting.Formoreinformation,see
padstoadifferentchannelatonce,withouteditingthe
DumpGlobalSettingonpage 743.
individualcontrols.
6:DumpSequencer.Formoreinformation,see
Assign (18) [Off, C-1G9, CC#00119] DumpSequenceronpage 743.
EachpadcansendeitheraMIDInoteoraMIDICC 7:DumpKARMAUserGE.Formoreinformation,
message.WhenassignedtoaCC,thepadsendsa seeDumpKARMAUserGEonpage 743.
valueof127whenitispresseddown,andavalueof0
whenitisreleased. 8:SetupKARMAExternalMIDIRouting.For
moreinformation,seeSetUpKARMAExternal
Velocity (18) [1127] MIDIRoutingonpage 744.
ThefrontpanelPADMODEbuttonswitchesthepads 9:ResetExternalSetup.Formoreinformation,see
betweenbeingvelocitysensitive(sothattheloudness ResetExternalSetuponpage 745.
variesdependingonhowhardyouhitthepad)and
playingasingle,fixedvelocityforeachnote(handyif
youwantthesameresultseverytime,regardlessof
howhardyouplay).
716
Global P2: Controller/Scale 21: Controller
Global P2: Controller/Scale
21: Controller
21PMC
21a
21b
21c
Foot Switch Polarity [() KORG Standard, (+)]

21a: Foot Switch & Pedal/Damper
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthefootswitch
Foot Switch Assign [OffSW 2] connectedtotheASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.Ifthe
polaritydoesnotmatch,operatingthedamperpedal
Thisselectsthefunctionthatwillbecontrolledbya
willnotproducethecorrectresult.Ifnodamperpedal
pedalswitch(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1)
isconnected,setthisto()KORGStandard.
connectedtotheASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
()KORGStandard:Usethissettingforopentype
Foracompletelistofpossibleassignments,pleasesee
footswitches,suchastheoptionalKorgPS1.
FootSwitchAssignmentsonpage 1035.
(+):Usethissettingforclosedtypepedals.
Foot Pedal Assign [OffKnob 4]
Selectsthefunctionthatwillbecontrolledbyafoot
volumepedal(XVP10orEXP2option[sold
21b: MIDI CC# Assign
separately])connectedtotheASSIGNABLEPEDAL KARMA Controllers
jack. Hereyoucanassigncontrolchangemessagestothe
Foracompletelistofpossibleassignments,pleasesee KARMAswitchesandsliders.
FootPedalAssignmentsonpage 1036. Whenyouoperateaswitchorslider,theassigned
Damper Polarity [() KORG Standard, (+)] controlchangemessagewillbetransmittedfromthe
MIDIOUTconnector.
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthedamperpedal
connectedtotheDAMPERjack.Ifthepolaritydoesnot Theassignedcontrolchangemessagescanalsobe
match,operatingthedamperpedalwillnotproduce receivedfromanexternalMIDIdeviceconnectedto
thecorrectresult.Ifnodamperpedalisconnected,set theMIDIINconnector,andusedtocontrolthe
thisto()KORGStandard. correspondingKARMAfunction.
()KORGStandard:Usethissettingforopentype Thedefaultsettingsofeachparameterareasshownin
damperpedals,suchastheoptionalKorgDS1H. theLCDdisplayabove.
(+):Usethissettingforclosedtypepedals. KARMA ON/OFF [Off, MIDI CC#00119]

ThisassignsacontrolchangemessagetotheKARMA
ON/OFFswitch.
717
Global mode
KARMA SCENE [Off, MIDI CC#00119] NotethatifyousetthesetoOff,thevectorjoystickwill

ThisassignsacontrolchangemessagetotheKARMA trulybeoff;itwillneithersendMIDI,noraffectthe
SCENEswitch. internalsounds.
KARMA LATCH [Off, MIDI CC#00119] Pads 1-8 [Off, Note C-1G9,
MIDI CC#00#119]
ThisassignsacontrolchangemessagetotheKARMA
LATCHswitch. Theseassignnotenumbersorcontrolchangemessages
topads18.Formoreinformation,seePadsMIDI
KARMA Sliders 1-8 [Off, MIDI CC#00119] Outonpage 711.
Theseassigncontrolchangemessagestoeachofthe
KARMACONTROLsliders. t 21: Page Menu Commands
KARMA Switches 1-8 [Off, MIDI CC#00119] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Theseassigncontrolchangemessagestoeachofthe numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
KARMASWITCHES. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
21c: MIDI CC# Assign 0:WriteGlobalSetting.Formoreinformation,see

Vector Joystick / Pads
1:ResetControllerMIDIAssign.Formore
VJS X [Off, MIDI CC#00119] information,seeResetControllerMIDIAssignon
page 745.
VJS Y [Off, MIDI CC#00119]
TheseassigncontrolchangemessagestotheXaxisand
Yaxisofthevectorjoystick.Formoreinformation,see
11b:MIDIRoutingSetuponpage 711.
22: User Scale

22PMC
22a
22b
HereyoucanmakesettingsforsixteendifferentUser Ifyouwishtokeepanediteduserscaleafterthe
OctaveScalesandoneUserAllNotesscale. poweristurnedoff,besuretowrite(save)your
Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeselectedfromthe settings.
followingpages. UsethepagemenucommandWriteGlobalSetting
HD1ProgramP1ProgramBasic orpresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchto
openthedialogbox,andwritethedata.
EXiProgramCommonP1ProgramBasic
CombinationP2Pitch
SequencerP2Pitch
718
Global P2: Controller/Scale 22: User Scale
22a: User Octave Scale

User Octave Scale [User Octave Scale 0015]
SelectstheUserOctaveScalethatyouwanttoedit.
Tune [99+99]
Makespitchsettingsforeachnoteintheoctave.
Whenyouadjustthepitchofeachnoteintheoctave
(CB)inonecentsteps,yoursettingswillbeappliedto
alloctaves.Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequal
temperament.
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelya
semitonebelownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelya
semitoneabovenormalpitch.
Thenotecanalsobeselectedbyholdingdownthe
ByexecutingthepagemenucommandCopyScale,
youcancopysettingsfromapresetscale(otherthan
Stretch)orfromanotheruserscale.
22b: User All Notes Scale

Tune [99+99]
Makesindependentpitchsettingsforeachofthe128
notes.
Adjustthepitchofeachofthe128notes(C1G9)in
onecentsteps.Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequal
temperament.
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelya
semitonebelownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelya
semitoneabovenormalpitch.
Usethehorizontalscrollbartomovetothekeyrange
thatyouwanttoset,andselectthekeythatyouwant
tospecify.
Note:Thenotecanalsobeselectedbyholdingdown
theENTERswitchandplayinganoteonthekeyboard.
ByexecutingthepagemenucommandCopyScale,
youcancopysettingsfromapresetscale(including
Stretch)oranotheruserscale.

commandsonpage 142.
1:CopyScale.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Scaleonpage 746.
719
Global mode
Global P3: Category Name

Programs,Combinations,andKARMAGEsare Onthesepages,youcan:
organizedintocategoriesandsubcategories. Changethenamesofanyofthecategoriesandsub
Categoriesmakeiteasytofindaparticulartypeof categories,includingboththefactoryanduser
sound,suchaskeyboards,bass,ordrums,oraspecific categories
typeofKARMAGE,suchasarpeggiosorgated
patterns. Addsubcategoriestothefactorycategories(upto
thelimitof8)
Eachmaincategoryalsohasupto8subcategories,for
finerdegreesoforganization.Forinstance,the YoucanassignaProgramorCombinationtoa
Programkeyboardcategoryhassubcategoriesfor categoryandsubcategoryduringtheWriteprocess.
acousticpianos,realelectricpianos,synthelectric Formoreinformation,seeWriteProgramon
pianos,andclavsandharpsichords. page 142,andWriteCombinationonpage 461.
AnywherethatyoucanselectPrograms, Tosavechangestocategorynames,youllneedto
Combinations,orKARMAGEsbybankandnumber, writetheGlobalsettings.Todoso,usethemenu
youcanalsoselectthemfromthecategorypopup. commandWriteGlobalSetting.Formore
information,seeWriteGlobalSettingonpage 740.
Whenshippedfromthefactory,thereare16preset
ProgramandCombinationcategories,with2moreleft
openforyouruse(initiallynamedUser16andUser17).
Therearealso12presetKARMAGEcategories.
31: Program Category

31PMC
31a
31b
31a: Main Category 31b: Sub Category

Main Category 0017 Main Category select [0017]
Hereyoucanselectthemaincategoryforwhichyou
Main Category Edit [(Text Editor)] willeditsubcategorynames.
Hereyoucaneditthemaincategorynamesfor
programs. Sub Category 0007
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetexteditdialog Sub Category Edit [(Text Editor)]
box,andenteraname.Youcanenterupto24
characters.(SeeOGp.57) Hereyoucaneditthesubcategorynamesfor
programs.
Youcannameeachoftheeighteencategories.
720
Global P3: Category Name 32: Combi Category
UseMainCategorySelecttoselectthemaincategory
thatincludesthesubcategorynameyouwanttoedit. t 31: Page Menu Commands
ThenpresstheSubCategorySelecttexteditbutton ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
toopenthetexteditdialogbox,andenteraname.You numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
canenterupto24characters.(SeeOGp.57) shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Youcannameeachoftheeightcategories. commandsonpage 142.
32: Combi Category
33: KARMA Category

Thesepagesletyouassignthemaincategoryandsub
categorynamestoCombinationsandKARMA.Note
thatcurrently,youcanrenametheexistingKARMA
categories,butyoucannotassignaGEtoadifferent
category.Formoreinformation,pleasesee31:
ProgramCategoryonpage 720.
721
Global mode
Global P4: Wave Sequence

WaveSequencesplaybackaseriesofdifferent Rhythmic Wave Sequences
Multisamplesovertime.Youcanusethistocreatea RhythmicWaveSequencesuseshortorabrupt
varietyofuniquetimbralandrhythmiceffects,as crossfades,sothattransitionsbetweenthedifferent
describedbelow. Multisamplescreatearhythmicphrase.Flexibleswing
LikeDrumKits,WaveSequencesareeditedinGlobal amount,rests,andtiesletyoubuildcomplexpatterns,
mode,andthenusedwithinHD1Programs.Formore whichyoucanthensynctoKARMAandthesystem
informationonusingWaveSequencesinPrograms,see tempo.
21c:OSC1Multisample/WaveSequenceonpage 50.
Crossfading Wave Sequences
WheneditingWaveSequences,youllhearthemasif
theywerebeingplayedthroughtheparametersettings Byusinglongdurationsandcrossfadetimes,Wave
ofthepreviouslyselectedProgramorCombination. Sequencescanproducecomplex,evolvingtimbres.
Thisincludesfiltersettings,envelopes,etc.So,before ModulatingtheStartStep,Position,andDuration
youbegin,itsbesttofirstselectasuitablesoundin makesthesoundevenmoreorganic,sothateverynote
Programmode,andthenenterGlobalmode. canplaytheWaveSequencealittledifferently.
Fordetailedstepbystepinstructionsoncreatingand Velocity-Switching Wave Sequences

editingWaveSequences,pleaseseeUsingWave BysettingeachstepsdurationtoGATE,andthen
Sequencesonpage 156oftheOperationGuide. modulatingtheStartStepbyvelocity,youcancreatea
soundwithupto64velocityswitches.Forinstance,
youcanusethistoswitchbetweenalargenumberof
differentattacktransients.
41: Sequence Parameters

41PMC
41a
41b
41c
41d
ThispagecontainsparametersfortheselectedWave UAthroughUGareuserbanks.Youcanusethese
Sequenceasawhole. forstoringsoundsthatyoucreateyourself,optional
soundbanksfromKorg,orthirdpartysoundlibraries.
EachUserbankcontains32WaveSequences.
41a: Basic
Mode [Time, Tempo]
Wave Sequence [I000149, UA00UG31]
ThisswitchesbetweenTimemode(forcrossfading
The150WaveSequencesintheInternalbank(I000 WaveSequences)andTempomode(forrhythmic
throughI149)arethebuiltinfactorysounds.You WaveSequences).
canoverwritethemifyouwish,butdoingsomay
changethesoundsoftheProgramsandCombisin
banksINTAE.
722
Global P4: Wave Sequence 41: Sequence Parameters
InTimemode,stepdurationsarespecifiedin UseSwingtoaddasenseofswingtotherhythm.For
milliseconds,andarenotaffectedbythesystem example,Swingprovidesaneasywaytoturna
tempo. squarerhythmintoashufflegroove.
InTempomode,stepdurationsarespecifiedin Swingadjuststhepositionoftheupbeats,relativeto
rhythmicvalues,andaresynchronizedtothesystem theWaveSequencesResolutionsetting.Forinstance,if
tempo. theResolutionissetto1/8,Swingaffectseveryother
Eachstepstoresseparatevaluesforthetwomodes,so 8thnote.
thatyoucanswitchbackandforthwithoutlosingany WhenSwingissetto+100%,thesenoteswillbemoved
data. onethirdofthewaytowardthenextdownbeat.Ifthe
Crossfadetimesarealwaysspecifiedinmilliseconds, Resolutionis1/8,forexample,+100%changesstraight
regardlessoftheModesetting. 8thnotesinto8thnotetriplets.
WhenSwingissetto+300%,upbeatswillbemoved
q = (Tempo) [040.00240.00 BPM] allthewaytothenextdownbeat.Atthispoint,the
Thisisthecurrentsystemtempo. notesontheupbeatswillnotbeheardatall.
IftheGlobalmodeMIDIClockparameterissetto Positivevaluesmaketheupbeatslater,andnegative
Internal,youcanadjustthetempodirectlyfromthis valuesmakethemearlier.
parameter,aswellasusingtheTapTempobuttonor TheSwingparameteronthispageaffectstheway
theTempoknob. thattheWaveSequenceplaysbackduringediting,
IfMIDIClockissettoExternal,thiswillsimply butisnotstoredwiththeWaveSequenceitself.
displayEXT. Instead,eachProgram,eachCombiTimbre,and
TheTempoparameteronthispageaffectstheway eachTrackinaSonghasitsownSwingsetting.
thattheWaveSequenceplaysbackduringediting, WaveSequenceSwing
butisnotstoredwiththeWaveSequenceitself.
Swing Resolution =
Instead,eachProgram,Combi,andSonghasits
ownstoredtempo. Beat 1
3 3
Beat 2
3 3
Swing %
Run [Off, On] 0%

+100
WhenthisisOn,theWaveSequencewillmove
+100%
throughitsstepsautomatically,accordingtothe 100
DurationandCrossfadesettingsforeachstep. 100%
+200
WhenthisisOff,theWaveSequencewillnotmove
+200%
fromsteptostepautomatically,andthesteps
DurationandCrossfadesettingswillbeignored.You +300%
canthen: +300
UsePositionModulationtosweepthroughthe
stepsmanually Quantize Triggers [Off, On]
UseNoteOnAdvancetoincrementthestepwith ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheModeissetto
eachnewnote Tempo.
UseStartStepAMStoplayadifferentstepwith ItallowsyoutoforcemostTempomodeWave
eachnote,modulatedbyvelocityorotherAMS Sequencenoteonstobeinsync,makingiteasierto
sources playalongwithotherrhythmicelements.
WhenQuantizeTriggersisOn,noteonsarequantized
Key Sync [On, Off]
to8thnotesusingthecurrenttemporeference.(See
On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,eachnotesWave belowforafewmoredetails.)
Sequence(s)willprogressindependently,sothateach
Thetemporeferencecancomefromdifferentsources,
onecanbeonadifferentstep,ormovingatadifferent
dependingonthecurrentmode,andwhetherornot
rate.
KARMAison:
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,allofthe
InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAisoff,
WaveSequenceswillbesynchronizedonthesame
noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesounding
step.Thereisoneexceptiontothis,however:if
TempomodeWaveSequence,ifany.
Durationismodulatedwithvelocityornotenumber,
theWaveSequencescanstillprogressatdifferentrates. InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAison,
noteonsaresynchronizedwithKARMA.
TheKeySyncparameteronthispageaffectsthe
waythattheWaveSequenceplaysbackduring InSequencermodeduringplaybackorrecording,
editing,butisnotstoredwiththeWaveSequence noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesequence.
itself.Instead,eachProgram,eachCombiTimbre, InSequencermode,whilethesequencerisstopped,
andeachTrackinaSonghasitsownKeySync noteonsaresynchronizedwithRPPRand
setting. KARMA.
Swing [300%+000+300%] On(checked):Noteonswillbequantized.
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheModeissetto Off(unchecked):Noteonswillbeplayedinstantly,the
Tempo. momentthatyouplaythekeyboard.
723
Global mode
TheQuantizeTriggersparameteronthispage Solo [Off, On]

affectsthewaythattheWaveSequenceplaysback Thisbuttonsolosthecurrentstep,sothatyoucanhear
duringediting,butisnotstoredwiththeWave itquicklyandeasily.WhenSoloisOn,theWave
Sequenceitself.Instead,eachProgram,eachCombi Sequencewillplayonlythecurrentstep,includingthe
Timbre,andeachTrackinaSonghasitsown fadeinandfadeout.
QuantizeTriggerssetting.
How Quantize Triggers works 41c: Wave Sequence

TheQuantizeTriggersfeaturetriestomakeagood
guessatwhereyouintendedthenotetobe.Ifyouplay Start Step [164]
thenotejustabitlatewithina32ndnoteofthe8th ThisisthesteponwhichtheWaveSequencestarts.
noteitwillassumethatyoumeantthenotetosound YoucanmodulatethisviaAMS.
onthebeatthatjustpassed.Inthiscase,thenotewill
Note:WhenNoteOnAdvanceisOn,StartStep
playimmediately.
modulationisdisabled.Formoreinformation,see
Ontheotherhand,ifyouplaythenoteuptothree NoteOnAdvanceonpage 725.
32ndnotesearly,itwillassumethatyoureintending
thenotetosoundonthenextbeat.Inthiscase,the AMS [List of AMS Sources]
noteonisdelayeduntilthenext8thnote. ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheStart
QuantizeTriggers Step.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
Intensity [63+63]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheStartStep
Note-On
modulation.NegativemodulationmovestheStartStep
Wave Sequence Rhythm
earlierinthesequence,tothelimitofStep1.Positive
modulationmovestheStartSteplaterinthesequence,
Quantize
Triggers
tothelimitoftheEndStep.
End Step [164]

Quantize
Triggers ThissetsthenumberofstepsintheWaveSequence.
Note-On Length (Read Only) [164]

Thisreadonlydisplayshowsthetotalnumberofsteps
intheWaveSequence,basedontheStartStepandEnd
Quantize Step.
Triggers
Swing Resolution [r3q ]
Quantize
Triggers Thissetstheresolutionwhichwillbeusedforswing.If
aProgramcontainsmultipleWaveSequenceswith
differentSwingResolutionsettings,theProgramwill
usethefinestvalue.Forinstance,ifoneWaveSequence
41b: Graphic issetto1/8andtheotherissetto1/16,theProgramwill
use1/16.
ThegraphicgivesyouavisualoverviewoftheWave
Sequence: WhiletheresolutionisstoredintheWaveSequence,
theswingamountissetintheProgram,Combi
Thecurrentstepismarkedbyaredarrow. Timbre,orSongTrack.ThisletsyouuseasingleWave
RedboxesareMultisamplesteps. SequenceindifferentPrograms,Combis,andSongs,
eachwithdifferentamountsofswing.
GreenboxesareTiesteps.
WhiteboxesareReststeps. Loop Parameters
ThelengthoftheWaveSequence,fromtheStart WaveSequencescanloop,sothatsomeorallofthe
SteptotheEndStep,isshownbyarectangular stepsareplayedrepeatedlylikeadrumloop,oraloop
outline. inasequencer.
TheLoopishilightedinblue. Youcansetthestartandendoftheloopseparately
fromthestartandendoftheWaveSequenceitself.The
Step [164] loopcaneitherplayforaslongasthenoteisplayed,or
Thisselectsthecurrentstep.Thisisconvenientwhen repeataspecifiednumberoftimes.Finally,youcan
settingtheStart,End,LoopStart,orLoopEndsteps. choosewhethertheloopplaysforwards,plays
backwards,oralternatesbetweenbackwardsand
Multisample (Read-Only) [Bank, Number, forwards.
and Name]
Thisshowsthebank,number,andnameofthecurrent Loop Start Step [164]
stepsMultisample. Thisisthesteponwhichtheloopstarts.
724
Global P4: Wave Sequence 41: Sequence Parameters
Loop End Step [164] 9thnote:5,6

Thisisthesteponwhichtheloopends.Itmustbeafter 10thnote:6
theLoopStart. 11thnote:2,3,4,5,6
Direction [Forwards, Backwards/Forwards, etc
Backwards] IfRepeatTimesis1,NoteOnAdvancewillmakethe
Thissetsthedirectioninwhichtheloopisplayed. WaveSequenceplayasfollows:
ForwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptotheLoopEnd, firstnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,6
andthenskipsbacktotheLoopStart. 2ndnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,6
Backwards/ForwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptothe 3rdnote:4,5,3,4,5,6
LoopEnd,thenbackwardsfromtheLoopEndtothe
LoopStart,andthenforwardsagaintotheLoopEnd, 4thnote:5,3,4,5,6
andsoon. 5thnote:3,4,5,6
BackwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptotheLoopEnd, 6thnote:4,5,6
thenbackwardsfromtheLoopEndtotheLoopStart,
7thnote:5,6
andthenskipsbacktotheLoopEnd,andsoon.
8thnote:6
Forinstance.letssaythatRepeatTimesissetto1,
LoopStartissetto2,andLoopEndissetto4.Inthis 9thnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,6
case,thedifferentLoopDirectionsworkasshown 10thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,6
below.Theloopitselfisshowninbolditalictype.
11thnote:4,5,3,4,5,6
Forwards:1,2,3,4,2,3,4,5,6.
12thnote:5,3,4,5,6
Backwards:1,2,3,4,3,2,5,6.
13thnote:3,4,5,6
Backwards/Forwards:1,2,3,4,3,2,3,4,5,6.
14thnote:4,5,6
Repeat Times [Off, 1127, INF] 15thnote:5,6
Thissetshowmanytimestheloopisrepeated. etc
OFFmeansthattheLoopStart,LoopEnd,andLoop Finally,ifRepeatTimesis1,NoteOnAdvancewill
Directionparametershavenoeffect.TheWave maketheWaveSequenceplayasfollows.Notethatthe
SequencewillplayfromtheStartSteptotheEndStep, WaveSequenceneverreturnstothestartstep,sinceits
andthenstayattheEndStepfortheremainderofthe outsideoftheloop:
note.
firstnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
Whenthisissetbetween1and127,theloopwillrepeat
thespecifiednumberoftimes.Oncetherepeatshave 2ndnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
finished,itwillplaythroughtotheEndStep,andthen 3rdnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
staytherefortheremainderofthenote. 4thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
INFmeansthattheloopwillrepeatcontinuouslyfor 5thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
thedurationofthenote.
6thnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
Note-On Advance [Off, On] 7thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5
Thisparameterletsyouadvancethestartpointofthe
8thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5
WaveSequencebyonestepwitheachnewnoteon.If
RepeatTimesisnotsettoOff,thiswillstepthrough 9thnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
theloop,payingattentiontotheloopdirectionand 10thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5
numberofrepeats.
etc
Forinstance,letssaythattheWaveSequenceStart
Note:WhenNoteOnAdvanceisOn,StartStep
Stepis2,andtheEndStepis6.Also,theLoopStartis
modulationisdisabled.
setto3,theLoopEndissetto5,andtheLoop
DirectionissettoForward. Note-On Advance and Key Sync
IfRepeatTimesisOff,NoteOnAdvancewillmake NoteOnAdvanceisalsoaffectedbythesettingofthe
theWaveSequenceplayasfollows: KeySyncparameter.
1stnote:2,3,4,5,6 IfKeySyncisOn,thestartpointwilladvancebyone
2ndnote:3,4,5,6 stepforeachnote.
3rdnote:4,5,6 IfKeySyncisOff,thestartpointwilladvancebyone
stepforeachnewphrase.Formoreinformation,see
4thnote:5,6
KeySync,onpage 723.
5thnote:6
6thnote:2,3,4,5,6
7thnote:3,4,5,6
8thnote:4,5,6
725
Global mode
41d: Modulation
Position
ThisselectsamodulationsourcetooffsettheWave
Sequencefromitscurrentposition.TheWave
Sequencewillcontinuetoprogressthroughitssteps
duringpositionmodulation.Tosweepthrougha
sequencemanually,setRun,above,toOff.
IfPositionAMSchangesbyalargevalueoverasmall
amountoftime,itwillskipintermediatestepsif
necessary.
Intensity [63+63]
modulation.Negativemodulationmovestheposition
earlierinthesequence,tothelimitofStep1.Positive
modulationmovesthepositionlaterinthesequence,to
thelimitoftheEndStep.
Position modulation and loops

PositionAMSaffectsonlythecurrentstep,anddoes
notchangetheloopstartorloopend.Thismeansthat
PositionAMScanmaketheWaveSequencejumpinto
themiddleoftheloop,orjumpbackoutoftheloop
again.
Duration
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthestep
durationandcrossfadetimes.Youcanspeedupor
slowdowntheWaveSequencesothatitrunsbetween
1%and400%oftheoriginalrate.Thiscanbevery
usefulformakingacrossfadedWaveSequencesound
moreorganic.
Intensity [1400%]
ThiscontrolstheamountofDurationmodulation.
1%meansthat,atthemaximumAMSvalue,step
durationsandcrossfadetimeswillbe100timesshorter
thantheirprogrammedsettings.
400%meansthat,atthemaximumAMSvalue,step
durationsandcrossfadetimeswillbefourtimeslonger
thantheirprogrammedsettings.
Putanotherway,values99%andlowermaketheWave
Sequencegofaster,andvalues101%andhighermake
itgoslower.

commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteWaveSequence.Formoreinformation,see
WriteWaveSequenceonpage 746.
726
Global P4: Wave Sequence 42: Per-Step Parameters
42: Per-Step Parameters

42PMC
41a
42a
42b
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwing,on
42a: Basic page 723.
Wave Sequence [I000149, UA00U-G31] Quantize Triggers [Off, On]
Thisisthebank,number,andnameofthecurrent ThisparameterallowsyoutoforcemostTempomode
WaveSequence.Formoreinformation,pleasesee WaveSequencenoteonstobeinsync,makingiteasier
WaveSequence,onpage 722. toplayalongwithotherrhythmicelements.Itapplies
onlywhentheModeissettoTempo.Formore
Mode [Time, Tempo]
information,pleaseseeQuantizeTriggers,on
ThisswitchesbetweenTimemode(forevolving, page 723.
crossfadedWaveSequences)andTempomode(for
rhythmicWaveSequences).Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeMode,onpage 722. 42b: Graphic
q = (Tempo) [040.00240.00 BPM] ThegraphicgivesyouavisualoverviewoftheWave
Sequence.Theresoneadditionfromthegraphic
Thisisthecurrentsystemtempo.Formore shownontheotherpage:ascrollbaroverthetopof
information,pleaseseeTempo,on723. thegraphicshowsthe8currentlydisplayedsteps.
Run [Off, On] Formoreinformation,pleasesee41b:Graphic,on
ThisdetermineswhetherornottheWaveSequence page 724.
willmovethroughitsstepsautomatically.Formore
Step [164]
information,pleaseseeRun,onpage 723.
Thisselectsthecurrentstep,whichappliestotheCut,
Key Sync [On, Off] Copy,Paste,andInsertcommands.
ThisdetermineswhethereachnotewillplayitsWave
Multisample (Read-Only) [Bank, Number,
Sequenceseparately(KeySyncOn),orwhetherallof
and Name]
thenoteswillplaytogether(KeySyncOff).Formore
information,pleaseseeKeySync,onpage 723. Thisshowsthebank,number,andnameofthecurrent
stepsMultisample.
Swing [300%+000+300%]
Solo [Off, On]
Swingadjuststhepositionoftheupbeats,relativeto
theWaveSequencesResolutionsetting.This Thisbuttonsolosthecurrentstep,sothatyoucanhear
parameterappliesonlywhentheModeissetto itquicklyandeasily.WhenSoloisOn,theWave
Tempo. Sequencewillplayonlythecurrentstep,asifRun
wereOff.
727
Global mode
SomeROMandEXsMultisamplesmayhavefewer
42c: Step parameters than8preprogrammedpoints,inwhichcaseonlythe
Thislistshowstheparametersforeightstepsatatime. availablepointscanbeselected.
Usethescrollbarattherightofthescreentochange
whichstepsareinview.
WithRAMMultisamples,onlyOffand1stare
Type [Multisample, Rest, Tie] available.Offusesthenormalstartpoint,and1stuses
Thissetsthesteptooneofthreebasictypes. theloopstartinstead.2ndthrough8thwillbegrayed
out.
Multisamplemeansthatthestepwillsoundanew
Multisample,assetbytheMultisampleSelect Rev. (Reverse) [Off, On]
parameter,below. ThisletsyouplaytheselectedMultisamplebackwards,
Restmeansthatthestepwillbesilent. withoutlooping.
Tieisanalternatewayofcreatingrhythmicvalues, Note:IftheindividualsampleswithintheMultisample
whichmaysometimesbemoreconvenientthanusing arealreadysettoReverse,theywillstillplayin
theBaseNoteandx(MultiplyBaseNoteBy) reverse,regardlessofthissetting.
parameters.StepssettoTiesimplyextendtheduration On(checked):TheMultisamplewillplaybackin
ofthepreviousstep;allparametersotherthan reverse.
Duration,Crossfade,andFadeOutShapewillbe
grayedout. Off(unchecked):TheMultisamplewillplayback
normally.
Additionally,theCrossfadeandFadeOutShape
settingsofthepreviousstephavenoeffect. Trans. (Transpose) [+/- 24 semitones]
Multisample Select [List] Thiscontrolsthestepscoarsetuning,insemitones.
ThismenuselectsthestepsMultisample. Tune [+/- 1200 cents]
SomeMultisamplesmayhaveanupperlimitto Thissetsthestepsfinetuning,incents(1/100ofa
theirkeyboardrange,abovewhichtheymaynot semitone).
produceanysound.
Level [0-127]
Bank (Multisample) [ROM monoEXs stereo] Thissetsthevolumelevelforthestep.
ThismenuwillappeariftheTypeissetto
Multisample. Duration: Mode = Time
TherearethreemaintypesofBanks:ROM,RAM,and TheformatforsettingtheDurationwillbedifferent
EXs.Foreachtype,youcanalsochoosebetween dependingonwhethertheWaveSequenceModeisset
lookingatmonoandstereoMultisamples.Notethat toTimeorTempo.
stereoMultisampleswillrequiretwiceasmanyvoices Duration [0ms10 sec, GATE]
asmonoMultisamples.
Thissetsthedurationofthestep,inmillisecondsor
ROMMultisamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds, seconds.InTimemode,thedurationisnotaffectedby
andarealwaysavailable. thesystemtempo.
RAMMultisamplesincludeAkai,AIFForWAVfiles WhensettoGATE,thesequencepausesatthestep
loadedfromdisk,andsamplescreatedinSampling untilnoteoff,andthenthesequencecontinues.
mode. MultiplestepscanbesettoGATE,formodulationvia
EXsMultisamplebanksarePCMexpansionsets StartStepAMS,PositionAMS,orNoteOnAdvance.
uniquenumber;forinstance,apianoexpansionmight Duration: Mode = Tempo
beEXs4,andanorchestralexpansionmightbeEXs7. Inthismode,theWaveSequencesynchronizestothe
OnlythecurrentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearon systemtempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDI
thismenu. Clock.ThestepdurationsarecontrolledbytheBase
NoteandMultiplyparameters,below
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthe (Base Note) [r w, GATE]
beginning,ROMandEXsMultisamplescanhaveupto Thissetsthebasicdurationofthestep,relativetothe
8differentpreprogrammedalternatestartingpoints, systemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoa
calledStartOffsets. wholenote,includingtriplets.
Similarly,RAMMultisamplescanplayeitherfromthe GATEworksthesameasinTimemode.
point. x (Multiply Base Note by) [0132]
Start Offsets: ROM and EXs Multisamples instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
WithROMandEXsMultisamples,theStartOffset Timesissetto3,thestepsdurationwillbeadotted
specifieswhethertousethenormalstartpoint(Off),or eighthnote.
touseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st8th).
728
Global P4: Wave Sequence 42: Per-Step Parameters
Xfade [0ms10 sec] Expmeansthatthestepwillfadeoutquicklyatfirst,

Thisdeterminesthetimeittakestofadeintothenext andthenfadeoutmoreslowlyasitnearstheendofthe
step.Forexample,Step1sCrossfadedeterminesthe crossfade.
timetofadebetweenStep1andStep2. Fade-In Shape [Off, Log, -126-1,
CrossfadesusemillisecondunitsforbothTimeand Linear, +1126, Exp]
Tempomodes. Thissetstheshapeforthesecondstepsfadeinwithin
Note:InTimemode,theXfadetimecannotexceedthe thecrossfade.
totaldurationofthetwostepsbeingcrossfaded;in Offmeansthatthestepwillstarttosoundatfull
Tempomode,itcannotexceedtwicethedurationof volumeattheverybeginningofthecrossfade.
theshorterofthetwosteps.
Logmeansthatthestepwillfadeinquicklyatfirst,
TheFadeInandFadeOutShapeparameters,below, andthenmovemoreslowlyasitnearstheendofthe
allowlinear,equalpower,andcustomcrossfades. crossfade.
Fade-Out Shape [Off, Log, -126-1, Linearmeansthatthestepwillfadeinsteadilyover
Linear, +1126, Exp] thedurationofthecrossfade.
Thissetstheshapeforthefirststepsfadeoutwithin Expmeansthatthestepwillfadeinslowlyatfirst,and
thecrossfade. thenmovedmorerapidlyasitnearsendofthe
Offmeansthatthestepwillcontinuetosoundatfull crossfade.
volumeforthefulldurationofthecrossfade,andthen AMS Output 1 [0127]
cutoffabruptly.
SetsthestepsfirstAMSoutput.Youcanusethisasa
Logmeansthatthestepwillfadeoutslowlyatfirst, modulationsourceforanyAMSdestinationfor
andthenmovemorerapidlyasitapproachestheend instance,tochangethefiltercutofforpanpositionfor
ofthecrossfade.Youcancreateanequalpower eachstep.Formoreinformation,seeModulating
crossfadebyusingthisshapeforboththefadeoutof Programparameterspersteponpage 158ofthe
onestepandthefadeinofthenextstep. OperationGuide.
Linearmeansthatthestepwillfadeoutsteadily,ata
constantrate,overthedurationofthecrossfade. AMS Output 2 [0127]
ThissetsthestepssecondAMSoutput.
WaveSequencestepDurations,Crossfadetimes,andFadeInandFadeOutshapes
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

Duration Duration Duration Duration
Volume
Time
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

Crossfade Crossfade Crossfade Crossfade
Xfade In = Log Xfade Out = Exp Xfade In = Off Xfade Out = Off
Xfade In = Lin Xfade Out = Log
Copy
42d: Command buttons
Thiscommandcopiescurrentstep.YoucanthenPaste
Insert orInsertthestepintoanotherlocation.
ThiscommandinsertsthepreviouslyCutorCopied Paste
stepbeforethecurrentstep.
Thiscommandreplacesthecurrentstepwiththe
Cut previouslyCutorCopiedstep.
Thiscommandremovesthecurrentstepfromthe
WaveSequence,andmovesthesubsequentsteps
forward.TheremovedstepcanthenbePastedor
Insertedintoanotherlocation,ifdesired.
729
Global mode
Exp/Comp (Mode = Time)

ThiscommandappearsonlywhentheModeissetto
Time.Itbringsupadialogbox,whichallowsyouto
expandorcompressallofthedurationandcrossfade
timesbyaspecifiedpercentage.
DurationTimedialogbox
Expand/Compress [%] [0100,000]

100%meansthecurrentdurationandcrossfadetimes.
Values99andbelowmakethetimesshorter,and
values101andabovemakethemlonger.
/2 (Mode = Tempo)
ThiscommandappearsonlywhentheModeissetto
Tempo.Itcutsthestepdurationsand/orMultiply
BaseNotesettingsinhalf,sothat1/4notesbecome1/8
notes,1/8notesbecome1/16notes,andsoon.
x2 (Mode = Tempo)
ThiscommandalsoappearsonlywhentheModeisset
toTempo.Itmultipliesthestepdurationsand/or
MultiplyBaseNotesettingsbytwo,sothat1/8notes
become1/4notes,1/4notesbecome1/2notes,andso
on.

commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteWaveSequence.Formoreinformation,see
WriteWaveSequenceonpage 746.
730
Global P5: Drum Kit 51: Sample Setup
Global P5: Drum Kit

Hereyoucancreatedrumkitsbyassigningadrum EvenifaprogramwithanOscillatorModeofSingle
instrument(drumsample)toeachkey. orDoubleisselectedinProgrammode,theprogram
Adrumkityoueditherecanbesentthroughthefilter, willsoundusingitsownfilterandampsettingsetc.
amp,andeffectsandplayedinthesamewayas Effectswillsoundaccordingtothesettingsofthe
oscillatorsformultisamplesorwavesequences(if programyouselected.
OscillatorModeisSingleorDouble).Todoso,goto UseWriteDrumKittowriteanediteddrumkit
theProgrammode(HD1)P1ProgramBasicpageand intointernalmemory.Ifyouturnoffthepoweror
setOscillatorModetoDrums,andselectitasan selectanotherdrumkitbeforewriting,youredits
oscillatorintheP1OSC1Basicpage. cannotberecovered.ExecutetheWriteDrumKit
Whenyouwishtoeditadrumkit,enterProgram pagemenucommandorpresstheSEQUENCER
mode,selectaprogramthatusesadrumkit(i.e., REC/WRITEswitchtoopenthedialogbox,and
whoseOscillatorModeisDrums),andthenmoveto writetheediteddrumkit.Whenyoueditadrum
thispage.Aprogramthatusesadrumkitwillalready kit,allprogramsthatusethatdrumkitwillbe
havefilter,amp,andeffectsettingsetc.suitablefor affected.
drumsounds.(ProgramsintheseparateVNLthat IfEnableExclusive(11c)ischecked,thedrumkit
useadrumkitareindicatedbyasymbol.) canbeeditedusingexclusivedata.
YoumustsetOctave(Program21d)to+0[8].With Fordetailedstepbystepinstructionsoncreating
anysettingotherthan+0[8],thekeylocationsand drumkits,pleaseseeUsingDrumKitsonpage 164
drumsoundswillnotcorrespondcorrectly. oftheOperationGuide.
51: Sample Setup

51PMC
51a
51b
HereyoucanselectadrumkitandspecifyDS14 Note:GM0GM8areGM2compatiblepresetdrum
(Drumsample14)asthedrumsamplesassignedto kits,andaswithGMbankprograms,cannotbeedited
eachkey.Hereyoucanalsoeditdrumsample directly.Howeverifyouwriteoneoftheseprograms
parametersforeachDS. asauserdrumkit,itcanthenbeedited.
KEY [C1G9]
51a: Drum Kit, Key Select, Assign Selectsthekeytowhichthedrumsample(andits
Drum Kit [INT00USERG15] settings)willbeassigned.
Selectsthedrumkitthatyouwishtoedit. UsetheVALUEcontrollertospecifythekey.Youcan
alsoselectthekeybyholdingdowntheENTERswitch
INT00INT031 OASYS preloaded drum kits andplayinganoteonthekeyboard.Youcanassign
USERA00USERG15 User drum kits fourdrumsamples(DS1,2,3,4)toeachkey,and
switchbetweenthembyvelocity.
731
Global mode
DrumKit,KeySelect,Assign
Keys to which drum samples are

assigned are shown in red.
C4 key
Keyboard range
KEY: The selected key is shown in blue.
You can select a key by holding down the ENTER switch and playing the
desired note.
IfyoucheckAssignforthekeyyouselecthere,the Bank [ROM mono, ROM stereo, RAM mono,

DS14,VoiceAssignMode,andMixerparameters(see RAM stereo, EXs* mono, EXs* stereo]
below)willbeused.
Drumsample Select [000416, 00003999,
Assign [Off, On] 000]
On(checked):Thedrumsamplesyouassignedfor SpecifytheDS1drumsamplebybankanddrum
DS14willsound.Normallyyouwillcheckthis samplenumber.
parameter.
Thebanksareorganizedintothreemaintypes;ROM,
Off(unchecked):Theselecteddrumsampleswillbe RAM,andEXs.Foreachtype,youcanchooseeither
invalid,andthedrumsamplesofthekeytotheright monoorstereomultisamples.However,stereo
willsound.Atthistime,thepitchwillbeasemitone multisamplesuseuptwiceasmanyvoicesasmono
lowerthanthepitchofthekeytotheright.Uncheck multisamples.
thisparameterwhenyouwishtoplayadrumsample
atdifferingpitches. ROM:ThesearetheOASYSsstandardpresetdrum
samples.
RAM:Theseareusersamples.Youcanchoosesamples
51b: Drumsample youcreatedinSamplingmodeorloadedinDiskmode.
Youcanspecifyuptofourdrumsamples.Theprocess InDiskmode,youcanloadnotonlyKORGformat
isthesameasfortheSingleorDoublemultisample samplefiles,butalsoAKAIS1000/S3000format,AIFF
settingsinProgrammode(HD1).BottomVelocity format,andWAVEformatdataassamples,anduse
andXfadeRangespecifythevelocityzoneinwhich themasdrumsamples.
DS1,2,3,and4willsound. EXs*:ThesearetheOASYSsstandardEXsdrum
samples.Inaddition,ifyouhaveinstalled/loaded
DS1 (High): (Drumsample1 High) EXCDSNDseriesOASYSPCMExpansionOption
Thesearethesettingsforthefirst(High)velocityzone. CDs,thesewillbedisplayedwiththeirtypeshownin
the*area,andcanbeselected.Thenumberofdrum
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupusingonlyone
sampleswilldifferdependingontheEXs.
drumsample,maketheappropriatesettingsinDS1,
andthensetBottomVelocityto1andXfadeRange ROM mono, ROM stereo Select menu
toOff.
WhenyoupresstheDrumsampleSelectpopup
DS1(High) On/Off [Off, On] buttonadrumsamplelistwillappear,allowingyouto
choosedrumsamplesfromthelist.
On(checked):CheckthisifyouwanttouseDS1
(High).Theselecteddrumsamplewillsound. Usethetabstochooseacategory,andthenchoosea
drumsamplefromwithinthecategory.PresstheOK
Off(unchecked):DS1(High)willnotbeused.The
buttontoexecute,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
drumsamplewillnotsound.
Itisnotpossibletoeditthecategorynamesofdrum
Note:Normally,youwillstartbyusingDS1(before
samples,ortoreassignthecategory.
usingDS24).Ifyoudontwanttoswitchdrum
samplesbyvelocity,turnononlyDS1.Ifyoureusing IfyouchooseBankROMMono:
multiplevelocityswitcheddrumsamples,make Monodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.TheLchannel
settingsasfollows. orRchannelofthestereodrumsamplesselectablevia
Bank:ROMStereocanalsobeselectedasmonodrum
Onevelocityzone
samples.Inthesecases,LorRisshownfollowingthe
DS1:On,DS2:Off,DS3:Off,DS4:Off
drumsampleofthesamename.
Twovelocityzones
IfyouchooseBankROMStereo:
DS1:On,DS2:On,DS3:Off,DS4:Off
Onlystereodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.
Threevelocityzones
DS1:On,DS2:On,DS3:On,DS4:Off
Fourvelocityzones
DS1:On,DS2:On,DS3:On,DS4:On
732
Global P5: Drum Kit 51: Sample Setup
RAM mono, RAM stereo Select menu Keysforwhichavalueof99isspecifiedwillnot

Usethetabstoselectagroupofonethousand,and sound.
thenchooseaRAMsamplewithinthatgroup.Press Attack (Amp EG Attack) [64+63]
theOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancelbuttonto
cancel. Adjuststheattacktimeofthevolume(Amplifier).The
attacktimeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthis
IfyouchooseBankRAMmono: valuetotheampEGAttackTimeoftheprogramthat
Monodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.TheLchannel usesthisdrumkit.
orRchannelofstereodrumsamplescanalsobe
selectedasmonodrumsamples.Inthesecases,LorR Decay (Amp EG Decay) [64+63]
isshownfollowingthedrumsampleofthesamename. Adjuststhedecaytimeofthevolume(Amplifier).The
IfyouchooseBankRAMstereo: decaytimeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthis
Onlystereodrumsampleswillbedisplayed,usingthe valuetotheampEGDecayTimeoftheprogramthat
samenumbersandnamesasthemonosamples.The usesthisdrumkit.
samestereosamplewillbespecifiedregardlessof
whetheryouselectLorR. Transpose [64+63]
Adjuststhepitchinsemitonesteps.
+12isoneoctaveup,and12isoneoctavedown.
beginning,ROMandEXsdrumsamplescanhaveup Tune [99+99]
to8differentpreprogrammedalternatestarting Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1
points. octave.Acentis1/100ofasemitone.
Similarly,RAMdrumsamplescanplayeitherfromthe
beginningofthewaveform,orfromtheloopstart Bottom Velocity [1127]
point. Thissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichthedrumsample
willsound.DS1sBottomVelocitycanbeequalto,but
ROM and EXs samples notlowerthan,thanthatofDS2.
WithROMandEXsdrumsamples,theStartOffset
specifieswhethertousethenormalstartpoint(Off),or Xfade Range [Off, 1127]
touseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st8th). ThisspecifiesthevelocityrangestartingatBottom
VelocityoverwhichDS1willfadeoutandDS2will
SomeROMandEXsdrumsamplesmayhavefewer
fadein.
than8preprogrammedpoints,inwhichcaseonlythe
availablepointscanbeselected. Forinstance,iftheBottomVelocityissetto64,andthe
XfadeRangeissetto20,DS2willstarttofadeinat
RAM samples velocitiesof84andbelow.
WithRAMdrumsamples,onlyOffand1stare WhenvelocitiesarewithintheXfadeRange,the
available.Offusesthenormalstartpoint,and1stuses Oscillatorwillusetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasit
theloopstartinstead.2ndthrough8thwillbegrayed wouldnormally.
out.
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
Reverse [Off, On]
Thisletsyouplaytheselecteddrumsample
Select
backwards,withoutlooping. Xfade
On(checked):Thedrumsamplewillplaybackin Range/Curve
reverse.
Bottom
Thelocationatwhichreverseplaybackstartsandends Velocity
isalreadyspecifiedforeachdrumsample.Inthecase
ofRAMbanksampleswhoseStartandEnd
(Sampling21d)arespecified,thesamplewillplay
(backward)fromEndtoStart.
Off(unchecked):Thedrumsamplewillplayback
normally.
Thisparameterwillnotchangetheplayback
directionofasampleforwhichReverse
Curve [Linear, Power, Layer]
(Sampling21d)ischecked. Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linear
andPower(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetune
Level (Amp Level) [99+99] thewaythatthetwodrumsamplesmixtogether;one
Specifiesthevolume. ortheothermaybemoreappropriateforagivenpair
ofdrumsamples.Layer,truetoitsname,letsyoulayer
Keysforwhichavalueof+99isspecifiedwillsoundat
thetwodrumsamplestogetherwithoutany
avolumetwiceashighastheampleveloftheprogram
crossfading.
whichusesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof0is
specifiedwillsoundatthevolumeoftheamplevelof
theprogramwhichusesthatdrumkit.
733
Global mode
Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50% 0:WriteDrumKit.Formoreinformation,see
oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade. WriteDrumKitonpage 747.
Sometimes,thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;if 1:CopyKeySetup.Formoreinformation,see
so,tryusingPowerinstead. CopyKeySetuponpage 747.
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwo 2:SwapKeySetup.Formoreinformation,see
sampleswilleachbeataround70%oftheirfull SwapKeySetuponpage 747.
volumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,this
maycreateabumpinthevolumelevel,inwhichcase
youmighttryselectingLinearinstead.
Layermeansthatthetwodrumsampleswillbe
layeredtogether,bothatfullvolume,fortheentire
rangeofthecrossfade.
CrossfadeCurves
Linear
DS2
DS1
Volume
Xfade
Velocity
Power
DS2
DS1
Volume
Xfade
Velocity
Layer
DS2
DS1
Volume
Xfade
Velocity
DS2(Mid Hi): (Drumsample2 Mid High)

DS3(Mid Lo): (Drumsample3 Mid Low)
DS4(Low): (Drumsample4 Low)
velocityzones.TheparametersforDS2(MidHi)and
DS3(MidLo)areexactlythesameasthoseforDS1,as
describedabove.
TheparametersforDS4(Low)arealsosimilartothose
forDS1,exceptthatDS4(Low)hasnosettingsfor
BottomVelocity(whichisalwaysfixedat1),Xfade
Range,orCurve.

commandsonpage 142.
734
Global P5: Drum Kit 52: Sample Parameters
52: Sample Parameters

52PMC
51a
52a
Hereyoucaneditthefiltercutoff,resonance,and Low Boost (Driver Low Boost) [99+99]

threebandEQgainforeachdrumsample.These Thisadjuststhelowboostlevelofthedriver.Thislow
settingsareoffsetsthatareappliedtothesettingsof boostsettingforeachkeyanddrumsampleisapplied
theprogram. tothedriverLowBoost(Program41a)settingofthe
programsthatusethisdrumkit.
52a: Drumsample Parameters 3 Band Parametric EQ [dB]
DS1 (High): (Drumsample 1 High) Low [36.0+36.0]
DS1(High) On/Off [Off, On] Mid [36.0+36.0]
On(checked):CheckthisifyouwanttouseDS1
High [36.0+36.0]
(High).Theselecteddrumsamplewillsound.
Theseparametersadjustthegainforeachbandofthe
Off(unchecked):DS1(High)willnotbeused.The
threebandparametricEQ.Thegainsettingsforeach
drumsamplewillnotsound.
keyanddrumsampleareappliedtotheLowGain,
Filter Cutoff [64+63] MidGain,andHighGain(Program49a)settings
oftheprogramsthatusethisdrumkit.
Adjustthecutofffrequencyofthefilter.Thecutoff
frequencyforeachkeyanddrumsampleis DS2(Mid Hi): (Drumsample2 Mid High)
determinedbyaddingthisvaluetothefilter
Frequency(Program31b)oftheprogramthatuses DS3(Mid Lo): (Drumsample3 Mid Low)
thisdrumkit.
Resonance (Filter Resonance) [64+63] DS4(Low): (Drumsample4 Low)

Thisadjuststhefilterresonance.Thisoffsetvaluefor Hereyoucaneditthesampleparametersforthe
eachkeyanddrumsampleisappliedtothefilter second,third,andfourthdrumsamples.The
Resonance(Program31b)oftheprogramsthatuse parametersarethesameasforDS1,asdescribed
thisdrumkit. above.SeeDS1(High):(Drumsample1High).
Driver Drive [99+99]

Thisadjuststhedrivelevel.Thisoffsetvalueforeach
keyanddrumsampleisappliedtothedriverDrive ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
(Program41a)settingoftheprogramsthatusethis numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
drumkit. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
735
Global mode
0:WriteDrumKit.Formoreinformation,see 2:SwapKeySetup.Formoreinformation,see
WriteDrumKitonpage 747. SwapKeySetuponpage 747.
1:CopyKeySetup.Formoreinformation,see
CopyKeySetuponpage 747.
53: Voice Assign/Mixer

53PMC
51a
53a
53b
Specifythevoiceassign,pan,andeffectroutingetc.for Enable Note Off Receive [Off, On]

eachkeyofthedrumkit. On(checked):Noteoffmessageswillbereceived.
Normallyyouwilluncheckthis.Thisparameteris
53a: Voice Assign Mode validwhenHold(Program11d)ischecked(Hold
On).Inthecaseofadrumprogram,youwillnormally
Single Trigger [Off, On] selectHoldOn.InthiscaseifEnableNoteOff
On(checked):Evenwhenthesamekey(note)is Receiveischecked,noteoffmessageswillbe
playedrepeatedly,thepreviousnotewillbehalted received,andthesoundwillstop(thereleasesegment
beforethenewnoteisbegun,sothatthenoteswillnot oftheEGwillbegin)whenthekeyisreleased.
overlap.Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked.
Exclusive Group (Exclusive Assign)[Off, 001127] 53b: Mixer

001127:Thisallowsyoutoassignkeystoanyof127 Drumkitswillsoundusingthesettingsofthe
groups.Keysassignedtothesamegroupwillbe programthatisselectedinProgrammode.Panis
treatedasasinglegroup,andwillbeplayed validifUseDKitSetting(Program41c)is
monophonicallywithlastnotepriority.Forexample checked.BusSelect,FXControlBus,andSend
youmightassignclosedandopenhihatsoundstothe 1/2arevalidifUseDKitSetting(Program81b)
samegroupsothattwoormorehihatsoundscannot ischecked.Beawarethatwhileeditingadrumkit,
soundsimultaneously. theeditedresultswillnotbereflectedunlessthese
settingshavebeenmade.
Off:Keyswillnotbegrouped.Thisisthedefault
setting. Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.Out Assign)
[L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off]
Enable Note On Receive [Off, On]
Foreachkey,specifythebustowhichthesoundwill
On(checked):Noteonmessageswillbereceived.
besent.
Normallyyouwillcheckthis,butyoucanuncheckitif
youdonotwantspecificnotestosound. Forexample,youmightsendSnaresoundstoIFX1and
KicksoundstoIFX2toapplyseparateinserteffects,
andsendtheremainingsoundstoL/Rwithout
applyinginserteffects.
736
Global P5: Drum Kit 53: Voice Assign/Mixer
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowing Compressorandgatetypeeffects:
typesofdruminstrumenthavethesameBusSelect 002:StereoCompressor
settings.
003:StereoExpander
Tip:Mostofthepreloadeddrumkitsusethesame
basicBusSelectsettings,asshownbelow: 005:StereoLimiter
SnaresIFX1 009:StereoGate
KicksIFX2 010:StereoNoiseReduction
TomsIFX3
Example:GatedReverb
CymbalsIFX4
Percussionetc.IFX5 Thisisanexampleofapplyingagatedreverbtoonlya
specificsnaresound.Whenusingagateeffecton
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2] reverb,youmaynotbeabletocontrolthegating
Foreachkey,youcanselectwhetherthesignalwillbe timingcorrectlyifyouusetheextendedreverberant
senttoFXControlbus(stereotwochannel)FXCtrl1or soundtocontrolthegate.Normally,youwillcontrol
2. thegateusingsoundfrombeforereverbisapplied.
Normallyyouwillleavethisoff,butyoucanusethis Forthekeyforwhichyouveselectedthesnaresample,
settingifyouwanttocontrolaneffectbyplayinga setBusSelecttoIFX6.AlsouseFXControlBusSelect
specifickey. tosendthesignaltoFXControlBus1.InIFX7:Stereo
Gate,chooseFXControl1astheEnvelopeSource.
Youcanusethiswiththefollowingeffects:
Nowyoucanuseasignalotherthantheinput
Vocoders: (reverberantsound)tocontrolthegate.
026:Vocoder
Gated Reverb Example
Global P5: Drum Kit Program P4, P8: Use DKit Setting = On
Bus Select IFX6 Chain to IFX7 Bus Select

: IFX6 : IFX6 : L/R
KEY: D3 101: Reverb Hall 009: Stereo Gate
(Snare) Envelope Source
: FX Control 1
FX Control Bus: 1
(FX Control Bus1)
Pan [Random, L001C064R127] 2:SwapKeySetup.Formoreinformation,see

Specifiesthepanningforeachkey. SwapKeySetuponpage 747.
L001placesthesoundatfarleft,andR127placesthe
signalatfarright.WithasettingofRandom,thedrum
samplewillbepannedrandomlyateachnoteon.
Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]

Send2 (to MFX2) [000127]
Foreachkey,specifythesendlevelstomastereffects1
and2.
ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBusSelect(53b)isset
toL/RorOff.IfBusSelectissettoIFX112,thesend
leveltomastereffects1and2willbedeterminedby
theProgram,Combination,orSequencermodeP8:
InsertFXpageparametersSend1andSend2whichare
locatedafterthesoundpassesthroughIFX112.

commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteDrumKit.Formoreinformation,see
WriteDrumKitonpage 747.
1:CopyKeySetup.Formoreinformation,see
CopyKeySetuponpage 747.
737
Global mode
Global P6: Plug-in Info
61a
61b
ThispageletsyoumanageyourinstalledEXi,EXf,and soundwhichusesthepluginwillfadeout
EXsplugins.Here,youcan: periodically.Formoreinformation,seeAuthorizing
Viewinformationonallinstalledpluginsand plugins,below.
pluginbundles Authorizedpluginsarefullyfunctional.Someplug
Authorizepluginswithcodespurchasedfrom ins,suchasEXs1,EXs2,andtheSTR1,mayalreadybe
www.korguser.net/oasys/exi,orfromyourKorg authorizedbydefault.
distributor Get Info button
PressingtheGetInfobuttoncallsupawindow
61a: Public ID containinginformationfortheselectedpluginor
pluginbundle.Forinstance,itshowsallindividual
Public ID [nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn] EXi,EXf,and/orEXswithinabundle.
Thisisauniqueidentifier,likeaveryspecificname;it
isdifferentforeachandeveryOASYS.ThePublicIDis Authorize Selected button
16characterslong,andusesonlythecharacters09and Onceyouvepurchasedanauthorizationcode,select
AF.YoullneedthisIDwhenregisteringon thepluginfromthelist,andpressthisbuttontoenter
korguser.net,whichisrequiredforpurchasingplug thecodeintotheOASYS.Formoreinformation,see
ins. Authorizingplugins,below.
61b: Installed Plug-ins Authorizing plug-ins

Thissectionshowsalloftheinstalledpluginsorplug AuthorizingOASYSpluginsissimple.First,youll
inbundles,includingEXi,EXf,andEXs,andwhether purchaseanauthorizationcode;then,youllenteriton
theyareauthorizedorindemomode. thispage.Todoso:
Someplugins,liketheLegacyAnalogCollection,may 1. WritedownthePublicID.Makesurethatyouve
bebundlesofmultipleEXi,EXf,and/orEXs.Inthis copieditaccurately.
case,thelistwillshowthenameofthebundle.Tosee 2. Ifyouhaveaccesstotheinternet,followthe
alloftheEXi,EXf,andEXsinthebundle,selectthe instructionsunderPurchasingpluginlicenses
bundleinthelistandpresstheGetInfobutton. viakorguser.net,below.
Demopluginsareinstalledonthesystem,buthave or:
notyetbeenpurchasedandauthorized.Whenaplug Ifyoudonothaveinternetaccess,followthe
inisindemomode,youcanplay,edit,andsave instructionsunderPurchasingpluginlicenses
Programs,Combis,andSongswhichuseitbutuntil fromyourKorgdistributor,below.
youpurchaseandenteranauthorizationcode,any
Purchasing plug-in licenses via korguser.net
1. Gotohttp://www.korguser.net/oasys/exi
738
Global P6: Plug-in Info 53: Voice Assign/Mixer
2. Loginunderyourregisteredmembername.
Ifyouarentalreadyregistered,followtheonline
instructionsforregisteringasamemberof
korguser.net.Afterregisteringasamember,register
yourOASYS.
3. Purchasetheauthorizationcodeforthedesired
plugin.
Afterpurchasing,youllreceiveanemailfromKORG
withyourauthorizationcode.Notethatthiscodeis
tiedtoyourPublicID,andwillnotworkonother
OASYSsystems.IfyouhavemorethanoneOASYS,
youllneedtopurchaseauthorizationsforeachone
separately.
4. Onceyouhavetheauthorizationcode,followthe
instructionsunderAuthorizingpluginsonthe
OASYS,below.
Purchasing plug-in licenses from your Korg

distributor
Ifyoudonothaveaccesstotheinternet,yournational
Korgdistributorwillbehappytoassistyouin
purchasingpluginauthorizationcodes.
1. WritedownyourOASYSPublicID.
2. ContactyourKorgdistributor,andaskthemfor
assistancewithpurchasingpluginauthorizations
forOASYS.
YoucanfindcontactinformationforyourKorg
distributorbycontactingyourKorgdealer,orfromthe
followingpageontheKorgwebsite:
http://www.korg.co.jp/English/index.html
3. Afteryoupurchasetheauthorizationcode(s),
proceedtoAuthorizingpluginsontheOASYS,
below.
Authorizing plug-ins on the OASYS

1. GototheGlobalPluginInfopage.
2. Selecttheplugintoauthorizefromthelistof
InstalledPlugins.
3. PresstheAuthorizeSelectedbutton.
TheAuthorizeSelectedwindowwillappear.Youllsee
thenameoftheselectedpluginorpluginbundleat
thetopofthewindow.Thewindowalsoincludesan
onscreenkeyboard,sothatyoucanenteryour
authorizationcode.
4. Entertheauthorizationcode.
5. PressOK.
Providedthatyouenteredavalidauthorizationcode,
thelistwillnowshowthepluginorpluginbundleas
Authorized,andtheaudiolimitationsofDemomode
willberemoved.

commandsonpage 142.
739
Global mode
Global: Page Menu Commands

evenifyouhavespecifiedthesamebanktypeas
Write Global Setting before.Ifyouwanttokeepyourdata,youmustfirst
ThiscommandwritesGlobalmodesettings(exceptfor useSaveAllorSavePCGtosaveit.
DrumKitsandWaveSequences). 3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancel
1. SelectWriteGlobalSettingtoopenthedialogbox. buttontocancel.Adialogboxwillaskyouto
confirmtheoperation.
4. Verifythesettings.ThenpresstheOKbuttonto
execute,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
Change all bank references

Thiscommandchangesallprogrambanksspecified
2. Towritethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel fortimbresincombinationsortracksofsongs.
withoutwriting,presstheCancelbutton.
1. SelectChangeallbankreferencestoopenthe
YoucanalsousetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE
dialogbox.
switchtowritedatainthesamewayastheWrite
GlobalSettingcommand.
PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchto
accesstheUpdateGlobalSettingdialogbox,and
presstheOKbuttontowritethedata.
Note:TowriteaDrumKitsorWaveSequences,
executetheappropriatepagemenucommand.
(t: WriteDrumKits,s: WriteWaveSequences)
Set Program User-Bank Type

ThisspecifiesthebanktypeforProgrammode
programbanksUSERAthroughG.Whenyouexecute
this,theprogramswithinthebankwillbeinitializedto
programsofthespecifiedbanktype.
Beforeyouexecute,uncheckPrograminMemory
Protect(01e).Ifyouexecutewiththisitemstill
checked,amessageofMemoryProtectedwill
appear,andthedatawillnotbeloaded. 2. Ifyouwishtochangebankreferencesfor
combinations,checkCombination.
1. ChooseSetProgramUserBankTypetoopenthe
dialogbox. Ifyouwishtochangebankreferencesforsongs,
checkSong.
3. InProgramBank,specifythereplacementfor
eachbank.
4. ToexecutetheChangeAllBankReferences
theCancelbutton.
Ifyouchangetwoormoredifferentbankstothe
samebank,itwillnotbepossibletousethis
functiontochangethembacktodifferentbanks.Be
carefulthatthechangedestinationbanksdonot
overlap.
Touch Panel Calibration

IfinputviatheLCDscreendoesnotworkasyou
Thisindicatesthecurrenttypeforeachuserbank.
expect,oriftheeditcellmovestoalocationotherthan
2. Specifythebanktypeforeachbank. whereyoupressedtheLCDscreen,usethiscommand
NoChange:Thebanktypewillnotbechanged.The toadjustthesensitivityoftheLCDscreen.
datawillremainunchanged. 1. SelectTouchPanelCalibrationtoopenthe
HD1:ThebanktypewillbesettoHD1. dialogbox.
EXi:ThebanktypewillbesettoEXi.
Note:IfyouexecutewithasettingotherthanNo
Change,alldatainthatbankwillbeinitialized
740
Global: Page Menu Commands Half Damper Calibration
Pad Calibration
Thisadjuststhevelocitysensitivityofthepads.
1. SelectPadCalibrationtoopenthedialogbox.
2. Pressthecenterofeachpadaslightlyaspossible.
3. PresstheDonebutton.
2. Ifyouareunabletoselectthiscommandfromthe Ifthecalibrationcouldnotbeperformedcorrectly,an
pagemenu,gotothemainGlobalpageasnormal, errormessagewillappear.Pleaseperformthe
andthenholddowntheENTERbuttonandpress procedureagain.
3onthenumerickeypad.Thiswillcallupthe
calibrationdialog.
3. PressthesquareintheupperleftoftheLCD.
LCD Setup
Whenyourtouchhasbeendetectedcorrectlythe Thisadjuststhecolor,contrast,andbacklight
squarewillbehighlighted. brightnessoftheLCDscreen.
4. PressthesquareinthelowerrightoftheLCD. 1. ChooseLCDSetuptoopenthedialogbox.
Whenyourtouchhasbeendetectedcorrectlythe
squarewillbehighlighted.
5. PresstheDonebutton.
Ifyourtouchwasnotdetectedcorrectly,anerror
messagewillappear.Pleaseperformtheprocedure
onceagain.
Half Damper Calibration

Ifadamperpedalthatsupportshalfdamper(theDS
1Hoption)isconnectedtotheDAMPERjack,heres
howyoucanadjustthesensitivityifthedampereffect
isnotappliedappropriately.
Sincethehalfdamperpedalishighlysensitive,
pleaseusetheoptionalDS1H.Otherpedalsmay 2. Adjusttheparameters.
notproducetheappropriateeffect,ormaybe Contrast:0255(64isthedefault)
impossibletocalibratecorrectly. AdjuststhecontrastoftheLCDscreen.
1. ConnectahalfdamperpedaltotheDAMPER Brightness:063(63isthedefault)
jack. Adjuststhebrightnessofthedisplaysbacklight.
2. SelectHalfDamperCalibrationtoopenthe BlackLevel:0255(0isthedefault)
dialogbox. AdjuststheblackleveloftheLCDscreen.
ColorTemperature:UserRGB,4200K,5000K,
5400K,6500K,7500K,9300K
AdjuststhecolortemperatureoftheLCDscreen.
Thiswillaffectthehue.
UserRGB
ThesesettingsareusedifyouchooseUserRGBfor
ColorTemperature.
3. Pressthehalfdamperpedal,andthenreleaseyour R,G,B:Adjusteachcolorinarangeof1024
footfromthepedal. +1023.(255isdefault)
ThespecifiedcolorsettingswillbeusedifColor
4. PresstheDonebutton. Temperature=UserRGB.
Iftheadjustmentcouldnotbeperformedcorrectly, 3. PressingtheResetbuttonwillresetthesettingsto
anerrormessagewillbedisplayed.Pleaseperform thedefaultvalues.
theprocedureonceagain.
4. ToexecutetheLCDSetup,presstheOKbutton.To
cancel,presstheCancelbutton.
741
Global mode
Update System Software

Beforeyoubeginupdatingthesystem,backup
importantdataonexternalUSBstoragemedia.
1. InserttheCDR/RWdisccontainingthesystem
fileintotheCDR/RWdrive.
2. AccesstheGlobalP0BasicSetuppage.
PresstheMODEGLOBALswitchtoenterGlobal 2. ChecktheboxesfortheEXsthatyouwanttoload,
mode,andpresstheEXITswitchuptofourtimes. andunchecktheboxesfortheonesthatyoudo
3. ChoosethepagemenucommandUpdateSystem not.
Softwaretoopenthedialogbox. ToloadbothEXs1andEXs2atthesametime,you
mustfirstexpandtheinstalledRAMtoatleast1.5
GB.
Forinformationoninstallingadditionalmemory,
seeInstallingmemoryonpage 1092.
3. PresstheOKbutton.
AfterpressingOK,theEXsconfigurationwillbe
adjustedimmediately,andsampleswillbeloaded
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheupdate. orunloadedasnecessary.Loadingsamplesmay
takesometime.
Adialogboxwillaskyouforconfirmation.Press
theOKbuttontobeginupdatingthesystem TheselectedEXswillalsobeloadedautomatically
software. atpoweron.
Whilethesystemisbeingupdated,donottouchthe IfthereisntenoughfreesampleRAMforyour
OASYSswitches,andneverturnoffthepower.If selection,amemoryfullmessagewillappear,and
thepowerisaccidentallyturnedoffwhilethe theoperationwillbecancelled.Thismightoccurif
systemisbeingloaded,theOASYSmaybecome insufficientRAMisinstalled,orifalargeamountof
inoperable.Ifthisoccurs,pleasecontactyourlocal RAMsampleshavealsobeenloaded.
Korgdistributor.
5. Whentheupdatehasbeencompleted,adialogbox Display Public ID
withthefollowingmessagewillappear.
ThePublicIDisauniqueidentifier,likeaveryspecific
name;itisdifferentforeachandeveryOASYS.Its16
characterslong(notcountingthedashesbetweeneach
pairofcharacters),andusesonlythecharacters09and
AF.
YoullneedtoknowtheinstrumentsPublicIDwhen
purchasingOASYSsoftwareoptions,orifyouhaveto
reauthorizetheOASYSsoftware.
Thesystemupdatehasnowbeeninstalled.To
ThissimpledialogdisplaystheinstrumentsPublicID.
completetheprocess,youmustnowrestartthe
OASYS.Pleaseturnthepoweroff,andthenon 1. SelectDisplayPublicIDtoopenthedialogbox.
again. 2. Writedownthe16characterPublicID,as
6. PowerofftheOASYS.Waitapproximatelyten displayedonthescreen.
seconds,andthenturnthepoweronagain. 3. PressOKtoclosethedialogbox.
Thesystemversionnumberisshowninthelower
leftoftheopeningscreen.Verifythatitiscorrect.
Dump Program
Thiscommandletsyousendtheinternalmemorys
Expansion Sample Setup ProgramdataasaSystemExclusivedatadump.You
YoucanchangewhichEXsareloadedatanytime,as canchoosetosendalloftheProgramsfromallofthe
longasthereisenoughRAMtoaccommodatethem. banks,alloftheProgramsfromasinglebank,ora
TheOASYSrememberswhichEXsyouveselected, singleProgram.
andwillautomaticallyloadthematstartup.Toselect Formoreinformation,seeSystemExclusiveData
whichEXsareloaded: Dumps,below.
1. SelectExpansionSampleSetuptoopenthedialog
box.
TheExpansionSampleSetupdialogboxwill
appear.EachinstalledEXswillbeshown,witha
checkboxnexttoitsname;fromthefactory,this
includesEXs1andEXs2.
742
Global: Page Menu Commands Dump Combination
Dump Combination Programs of all banks, programs of one

Dump Program
bank, one program
Dump Combinations of all banks, combinations
CombinationdataasaSystemExclusivedatadump. Combination of one bank, one combination
YoucanchoosetosendalloftheCombinationsfrom
allofthebanks,alloftheCombinationsfromasingle All drum kits, drum kits of one bank, one
Dump Drum Kit
bank,orasingleCombination. drum kit
Formoreinformation,seeSystemExclusiveData Dump Wave All wave sequences, wave sequences of

Dumps,below. Sequence one bank, one wave sequence
Global settings (except for the Drum Kits
Dump Global and User Wave Sequences of Global
Dump Drum Kit mode)
Thiscommandletsyousendtheinternalmemorys Dump Sequencer All song data and region data

DrumKitdataasaSystemExclusivedatadump.You All: Dump all user GEs and user
canchoosetosendalloftheDrumKitsfromallofthe templates.
banks,alloftheDrumKitsfromasinglebank,ora GE Bank: All will dump all user GEs,
singleDrumKit. and USER-A USER-L will dump
Dump KARMA individual banks.
Formoreinformation,seeSystemExclusiveData User GE GE Single: Dump an individual GE.
Dumps,below. User Template: Dump user templates used
by user GEs. All will dump data for all
four user templates, and USER-A...USER-
Dump Wave Sequence D will dump individual template banks.
Sending SysEx data dumps
WaveSequencedataasaSystemExclusivedatadump.
YoucanchoosetosendalloftheWaveSequencesfrom DonottouchtheOASYSsswitchesorturnoffthe
allofthebanks,alloftheWaveSequencesfroma powerwhiledataisbeingtransmitted.
singlebank,orasingleWaveSequence. 1. ConnecttheOASYStothedevicethatwillreceive
Formoreinformation,seeSystemExclusiveData thedatadump.
Dumps,below. Ifyoureusingacomputerthatisabletoreceive
MIDISystemExclusivemessages,connecttheMIDI
INconnectorofyourcomputersMIDIinterfaceto
Dump Global Setting theOASYSsMIDIOUTconnector.
Thiscommandletsyousendtheinternalmemorys IfyouareusingaMIDIdatafiler,connectthe
GlobalSettingsdataasaSystemExclusivedatadump. OASYSsMIDIOUTconnectortotheMIDIIN
Formoreinformation,seeSystemExclusiveData connectoroftheMIDIdatafiler.
Dumps,below. 2. SelectGlobalP1:MIDI.
3. Thefollowingillustrationshowsthedialogbox
thatwillappearwhenDumpProgramis
Dump Sequencer selected.
Thiscommandletsyousendtheinternalmemorys IfTodumponebankselectBank,ortodumpone
Sequencerdata,includingallSongsinmemory,asa programselectSingle.
SystemExclusivedatadump.
4. PresstheOKbuttontotransmitthedata.
Formoreinformation,seeSystemExclusiveData Whilethedataisbeingtransmitted,thedisplaywill
Dumps,below. indicateNowTransmittingMIDIData.
Thesizeofthedataandthetimerequiredfor
Dump KARMA User GE transmissionwilldependonthetypeofdata.
Thefollowingtableshowsthesizeofeachdatadump,
Thiscommandletsyousendtheinternalmemorys andthetimerequired.
KARMAGEdataasaSystemExclusivedatadump.
YoucansendallGEdataandtemplates,banksofGE Type of data to be Data size Time required
dataortemplates,orindividualGEs.Formore dumped (Bytes) (Sec.)
information,seeSystemExclusiveDataDumps. 6467584 2213.9
Program All
7571456 2589.5
System Exclusive Data Dumps Program Bank (HD-1) 485376 165.1

Program Bank (EXi) 643072 218.8
ThesecommandsallowtheOASYSinternaldatatobe
transmittedtoanotherOASYS,MIDIdatafilter,or Program Single (HD-1) 3792 1.2
computerintheformofMIDISystemExclusivedata. Program Single (EXi) 5024 1.7
Selectthedesiredcommand(refertothefollowing Combination All 15925504 5433.5
table),andadialogboxwillappear.Then,selectthe
bankortimbreetc.ofthedatatobedumped,andpress Combination Bank 1137536 387.1
743
Global mode
Type of data to be Data size Time required Whenreceivingadatadumpforabankorasingle

dumped (Bytes) (Sec.) program,andthebanktypeofthereceived
programisdifferent,amessageofProgramBank
Combination Single 8887 3.0 TypeConflictswillappear,andthedatawillnot
Drum Kit All 1962624 675.8 bereceived.FortheUSERAthroughGbanks,use
GlobalSetProgramUserBankTypetospecify
Drum Kit Bank (INT) 516480 175.7
theappropriatebank,andthenreceivethedata
Drum Kit Bank (U-AU-G) 206592 70.3 again.
Drum Kit Single 12912 4.4 WhenreceivinganAllProgramsdatadump,only
Wave Sequence All 513876 172.7
bankdatawhosebanktypematcheswillbe
received.Ifbanksofadifferentbanktypeare
Wave Sequence Bank (INT) 206100 60.0 received,amessageofProgramBankType
Wave Sequence Bank Conflictswillbedisplayed.
43968 15.0
U-AU-G)
Data dump reception procedure
Wave Sequence Single 1374 0.5
1. Ifyoureusingacomputerthatisabletoreceive
Global Setting 28146 9.5 MIDISystemExclusivemessages,connectthe
24265 MIDIOUTconnectorofyourcomputersMIDI
Sequencer 6.41651.5 interfacetotheOASYSsMIDIINconnector(see
6065067
p.258).
User GE All 4789804 1596.6
IfyouareusingaMIDIdatafiler,connectthe
User GE Bank 373640 124.5 OASYSsMIDIOUTconnectortotheMIDIIN
User GE Single 2927 1.0 connectoroftheMIDIdatafiler.
User Template Bank 76531 25.5 2. SettheMIDIchanneloftheMIDIdevicetomatch
theglobalMIDIchannel(11a)oftheOASYS.
* Moretimewillberequiredifthesongdata IfyouwanttheOASYStoreceivedatathatwas
containsSystemExclusiveevents,sincethesemust previouslytransmittedtoaMIDIdevice,youmust
beconverted. settheglobalMIDIchanneloftheOASYStothe
WhenperformingadatadumpfromtheOASYS sameglobalMIDIchannelthatwasusedwhenthe
ontoaMIDIdatafiler,donottransmitmultipledata datawastransmitted.
dumpstogether.Ifmultipledataissavedtogether, TosettheMIDIchannelofthetransmittingdevice,
theOASYSwillhavelessthantherequiredtime refertotheownersmanualforthatdevice.
(rightcolumninthetableabove)towritethedata 3. EithercheckEnableExclusive(11c),ordisplay
intomemory,andwillbeunabletoreceiveallofthe oneofthepagemenucommandsofthispage.
datacorrectly.
Whenoneofthesepagemenucommandsis
Receiving SysEx data dumps displayed,datadumpscanbereceivedregardlessof
theEnableExclusivesetting.
DonottouchtheOASYSsswitchesorturnoffthe
powerwhiledataisbeingreceived. 4. Transmitthedatafromtheotherdevice.Forthe
procedure,refertotheownersmanualforthe
BeforereceivingMIDIdata,werecommendthat deviceyouareusing.
youcloseanyopendialogboxormenu,withthe
Whilethedataisbeingreceived,thedisplaywill
exceptionoftheDiskpagemenucommandSave
indicateNowreceivedMIDIdata.
Exclusive(ReceiveandSaveMIDISystemExclusive
Data)dialogbox.
Afteradatadumpisreceived,theOASYSwill Set Up KARMA External MIDI Routing
requireapproximatelyonesecondtoprocessthe
dataandwriteitintomemory.Duringthistime,the WhenusingtheKARMAfunctioninconjunctionwith
displaywillshowthemessage,Nowwritinginto anexternalsequencer,youcanexecutethiscommand
internalmemory.Whilethismessageisshown, withtheappropriatesettingtoautomaticallymake
youmustundernocircumstancesturnoffthe settingsforGlobalmodeEnableKARMAModuleto
poweroftheOASYS.Ifthepoweristurnedoff MIDIOut,EnableMIDIIntoKARMAModule,and
duringthistime,theOASYSmayfailtooperate LocalControlOn(11a).
correctlywhenthepoweristurnedonagain. 1. ChooseSetupKARMAExternalMIDIRouting
TransmissionandreceptionofMIDIdataisalso toopenthedialogbox.
impossibleduringthistime.Whenreceiving 2. Selectthedesiredrouting.
multipledatadumpsinsuccession,youmustallow SendtheoutputofKARMAtoexternal
enoughtimebetweeneachdatadumpforthe device/sequencer
messagetodisappearfromthescreen.
Choosethisifyouwantthephrasesgeneratedby
MIDIcannotbetransmittedorreceivedwhiledata theOASYSsKARMAModuletobesentviaMIDIto
isbeingwrittenintointernalmemory.Also, controlyourexternalMIDIdeviceortoberecorded
transmissionofActiveSensing(FEh)fromtheMIDI onyourexternalMIDIsequencer.
OUTconnectorandUSBconnectorwillbehalted.
CautionswhenreceivingProgramdata
744
Global: Page Menu Commands Reset External Setup
Beawarethatinsomecases,thephrasesgenerated
bytheKARMAModulewillpassthroughthe
externalMIDIdevice(MIDIsequencer)andre
triggertheKARMAModuleproducingaMIDI
feedbackloopthatmaycauseundesiredoperation.
YouwillneedtomanagetheMIDIsignalroutingto
ensurethatMIDIfeedbackdoesnotoccur,for
examplebydisablingMIDIINOUTechobackin
yourMIDIsequencer.
Local MIDI Sequencer

OFF (Echo back Off)
control Tone
ON Generator Recording
Enable MIDI OUT MIDI IN

KARMA Module
to MIDI Out
KARMA
Enable MIDI In
to KARMA Module
MIDI IN
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSetupKARMA
MIDI OUT
ExternalMIDIRoutingcommand,orpressthe
Local MIDI Sequencer
OFF
control Tone
ON Generator Playback
Enable
KARMA Module
to MIDI Out
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
Reset External Setup
KARMA
Enable MIDI In
to KARMA Module
MIDI IN Thiscommandinitializestheexternalcontroller
MIDI OUT settings.
TriggerKARMAgenerationfromexternal AllsettingsforKnob18,Switch116,Slider18,
device/sequencer MasterSlider,andPad18willbeinitializedforthe
selectedsetupnumber.
ChoosethisifyouwanttheKARMAModuletobe
triggeredbyMIDIinputfromanexternalMIDI Channel=Gch
deviceorMIDIsequencer. Assign=Off
PadOnlyVelocity=127
Youcanalsoselectthisifyouwantonlythe
OASYSskeyboardperformancethattriggersthe 1. Selectthesetupnumberthatyouwanttoreset.
KARMAModuletobesentasMIDIoutputand 2. ChooseResetExternalSetuptoopenthedialog
recordedonanexternalsequencer,andthenusethe box.
echobackorplaybackfromtheexternalsequencer
etc.totriggertheKARMAModule.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteResetExternal
Setup,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
Reset Controller MIDI Assign

MIDI Sequencer
Local
control
OFF (Echo back On) ThiscommandresetstheMIDIcontrolchange(CC)
Tone
Recording
ON Generator
assignmentsfortheKARMASlidersandSwitches,the
Enable MIDI OUT MIDI IN
KARMA Module 8pads,andtheVectorJoystick.Youcanusethis
to MIDI Out
KARMA
Enable MIDI In
to KARMA Module
commandtorestorethestandardsettings,andthen
MIDI IN
adjustanyoralloftheassignmentsmanually,ifyou
MIDI OUT
like.
MIDI Sequencer
Formoreinformationonthesesettings,see21:
Local
OFF
control Tone
Generator Playback
Controlleronpage 717.
ON
Enable
KARMA Module
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
1. ChooseResetControllerMIDIAssigntoopen
to MIDI Out
Enable MIDI In
KARMA thedialogbox.
to KARMA Module
MIDI IN
2. SettheTofieldtothedesiredresetmethod.
MIDI OUT
AllOff:AllsettingswillbeOff.
Both(note:possibilityofMIDIfeedbackloop) DefaultSetting:TheKARMAcontrolsandpads
Choosethisifyouwanttomakebothoftheabove willallbesettoOff;theVectorJoystickwillbesetto
settings. itsdefaultCCs.
745
Global mode
CCDefault:Theparameterswillberesettothe
typicalsettings,includingthestandardsettingsfor
thepadsandtheKARMAslidersandswitches.The
defaultvaluesareshowninthetablebelow.
IfyouwanttorecordKARMAcontrollersin
Sequencermode,orusethecontrollerstocontrolan
externalMIDIdevice,werecommendusingthis
setting.
(YouarealsofreetoassigndifferentMIDIcontrol
changemessagestothecontrollers,ifyouwish.) 2. UseFromtoselectthecopysourcescale.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheresetcommand, IfyouselectPureMajororPureMinor,specifythe
orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel. Key(locatedattheright)aswell.
ResetControllerMIDIAssignDefault StretchcannotbeselectedifToisUserAllNotes
Scale.
OASYS Controls CC Default Default Setting
3. InTo,selectsthecopydestinationscale.
ON/OFF CC#14
4. ToexecutetheCopyScalecommand,presstheOK
KARMA SCENE CC#30 button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
LATCH CC#31
1 CC#22 Write Wave Sequence
2 CC#23 Adialogboxforsavingawavesequencewillappear.
3 CC#24 Youcanselectanewlocation,andeditthenameofthe
wavesequence.
KARMA 4 CC#25
Sliders Youmustwriteaneditedwavesequenceifyouwantto
5 CC#26
keepit.Aneditedwavesequencecannotberecovered
6 CC#27 ifyouturnoffthepowerorselectadifferentwave
7 CC#28
sequencebeforewritingit.
1. ChooseWriteWaveSequencetoopenthedialog
8 CC#29
box.
1 CC#102
2 CC#103
3 CC#104 Off
KARMA 4 CC#105
Switches 5 CC#106
6 CC#107
7 CC#108
8 CC#109
1 CC#110
2 CC#111 2. Theupperlineshowsthewavesequencename.If
youwanttoeditthewavesequencename,input
3 CC#112 thedesirednameinthetexteditbox.
4 CC#113 3. UsethelowerlineToWaveSequencetoselect
Pads
5 CC#114 thewritingdestination.
6 CC#115 Youcanalsopressthepopupbuttonandchoosethe
writingdestinationfromtheWaveSequence
7 CC#116 Selectmenu.IfyouselecttheWaveSequence
8 CC#117 Selectmenu,presstheOKbuttontoconfirmor
presstheCancelbuttontocancelyourselection.
Vector VJS X CC#118 CC#118
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheWriteWave
Joystick VJS Y CC#119 CC#119 Sequencecommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonto
cancelwithoutexecuting.
Note:YoucanalsousetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE
Copy Scale switchtowriteinthesamewayastheWriteWave
Thiscommandcopiesdatafromapresetscaleor Sequencecommand.PresstheSEQUENCER
betweenuserscales.Fordetailsonthepresetscales, REC/WRITEswitchtoaccesstheUpdateWave
refertoType(Program11e). Sequencedialogbox,andwritethewavesequence.In
thiscase,thedatawillbewrittentothecurrently
1. SelectCopyScaletoopenthedialogbox.
selectedwavesequence.
746
Global: Page Menu Commands Write Drum Kit
3. InToKey,selectthecopydestinationkey.Ifyou
Write Drum Kit selectedtwoormorekeysinFromKey,their
Thiscommandwritesanediteddrumkitintointernal settingswillbecopiedtothekeysstartingatTo
memory. Keyandcontinuingupward.
Youmustwriteanediteddrumkitifyouwanttokeep 4. ToexecutetheCopyKeySetupcommand,press
it.Anediteddrumkitcannotberecoveredifyouturn theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
offthepowerorselectadifferentdrumkitbefore
writingit.
Swap Key Setup
1. ChooseWriteDrumKittoopenthedialogbox.
Thiscommandexchanges(swaps)thesettingsofone
keywiththesettingsofanotherkey.
1. ChooseSwapKeySetuptoopenthedialogbox.
2. Theupperlineshowsthedrumkitname.Ifyou
wanttoeditthedrumkitname,inputthedesired
nameinthetexteditbox.
3. UsethelowerlineToDrumKittoselectthe
writingdestination.
Youcanalsopressthepopupbuttonandchoosethe
writingdestinationfromtheDrumKitSelect
menu.IfyouselecttheDrumKitSelectmenu,
presstheOKbuttontoconfirmorpresstheCancel 2. UseSource1andSource2tospecifythekeys
buttontocancelyourselection. whosesettingsyouwanttoswap.
Note:YoucantwritetoGM0throughGM8.If 3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSwapKey
youveeditedoneofthesedrumkitsandwantto Setupcommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonto
writeit,writethedrumkittoINT00through cancel.
USERG15.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheWriteDrumKit
command,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel
withoutexecuting.
Note:YoucanalsousetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE
switchtowriteinthesamewayastheWriteDrum
Kitcommand.PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE
switchtoaccesstheUpdateDrumKitdialogbox,and
writethedrumkit.Inthiscase,thedatawillbewritten
tothecurrentlyselecteddrumkit.
Copy Key Setup

Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanindividualkey
toanotherkey.Youcanalsocopysettingsfromtwoor
morecontiguouskeysatonce.
1. SelectCopyKeySetuptoopenthedialogbox.
2. InFromKey,selecttherangeofkeysthatyou
wishtocopy.
747
Global mode
748
Disk mode
Topreventdataerrors,youmustbecarefulnotto Extension Type

subjecttheOASYStophysicalimpactorvibration
whilewritingdatatotheinternalCDR/RWdrive .KGE KARMA Generated Effects file
(orwhileformattingadisc). Korg Multisample Parameter file Songs and
.KMP
Diskmodeiswhereyoucansavedatafrominternal regions (OASYS format)
memoryorsampleRAMtotheinternalharddisk, .KSF Korg Sample File (Korg format)
internalCDR/RWdrive,oranexternalUSBconnected
.KSC Korg Script File (Korg format)
device,orloaddatafrommediaintointernalmemory
orsampleRAM.Youcanalsocopyordeletefiles,or .AIF AIFF file
formatmedia. .WAV WAVE file
Finally,youcancreateaudioCDsfromWAVEfiles, .KCD Audio CD track list (OASYS format)
usingeithertheinternalCDR/RWorexternalUSB
CDR/RWdrives. .KFX Effect preset (OASYS format)
InadditiontotheinternalharddriveandCDR/RW, WhenOASYSdataissaved,oneofthesefilename
OASYSsupportsmostUSBstoragedevices,including: extensionswillbeaddedautomatically,accordingto
Harddiskdrives thetypeofdata.Ifthesefilenameextensionsare
modifiedonacomputer,thefilewillbetreatedasan
Removablediskdrives
undefinedfilewhenitisreloadedbackintothe
USBflashmedia OASYS,andwillbehandledasaStandardMIDIFile.
CDR/RWdrives ThediagramonthenextpageshowshowtheOASYS
Withexternaldrivesandflashmedia,theOASYS handlesfiles.
supportsMSDOSFAT16andFAT32diskformats.FAT Since.PCG,.SNG,and.KFXfilescanbeopenedto
16supportsupto4GB;FAT32supportsupto2 dividetheircontents,theyaredisplayedasdirectory
Terabytes(2,000GB). icons.Differentcolorsareusedtoindicatedifferent
CDR/RW typesoffile.
TheOASYScanreadandwriteUDFformatCDR/RW
disks.Formoreinformation,seeCDR/RWdiskson
theOASYS:UDFandpacketwritingonpage 1086.
CDDA(audiodata)canberecorded/played,and
ISO9660(level1)formatcanberead.
Files, directories, and icons

TheOASYSmanagesdataondisksandothermediain
ahierarchicalmanner,usingfilesanddirectories.The
contentsofafile(whetheritisafileoradirectory)are
indicatednotonlybythenamebutalsographicallyby
anicon.Filesanddirectorieshavedifferentlyshaped
icons.
TheOASYScollectivelyreferstofilesanddirectories
recognizablebyMSDOS(readablebyaMSDOS
computer),andUDFformatandISO9660formatfiles
anddirectoriesasDOSfilesandDOSdirectories.
DifferenttypesofDOSfilearedistinguishedbythe
extensionaddedtotheirfilename.
InthecaseofaDOSfilewithanextensionotherthan
listedbelow,selectingLoadselectedtoopenthe
dialogboxwillcausethefiletobeconsideredtobea
StandardMIDIFile(SMF).However,inthiscasenon
SMFfilescannotbeloaded.
Extension Type
Program, combination, drum kit, wave sequence,
.PCG
global settings (OASYS format)
.SNG Songs and regions (OASYS format)
.MID Standard MIDI File (SMF)
.EXL MIDI System Exclusive data
749
Disk mode
FilesavailableinDiskMode
DOS file
(Grey)
.PCG file All programs 1 program 1 program DOS directory
bank I-A...F, U-A...G
(Red)
All combinations 1 combination 1 combination DOS directory (created by Save SEQ on the OASYS)
bank I-A...G, U-A...G
(Purple)
All drum kits 1 drum kit 1 drum kit DOS directory
(User) bank INT, U-A...G (created by Save Sampling Data on the OASYS)
(Grey)
All wave sequences 1 wave sequence 1 wave sequence Undefined DOS file
bank INT, U-A...G
Global settings
(Blue)
.SNG file 1 song Track

(000-199)
User pattern
(U00...99)
DOS file
All regions Region (Red)
.MID file
.KFX file All effects 1 effect 1 effect

All presets (P) All presets (P) preset (P)
.EXL file
All effects 1 effect 1 effect

All presets (U) All presets (U) preset (U)
.KCD file
.KGE file All GE 1 GE 1 GE

USER-A...USER-L
All Template 1 GE bank Template .SYX file

USER-A...USER-D (Grey)
Partition Volume AKAI format .KMP file .WAV file

Program file
AKAI S1000/S3000
AKAI format .KSF file .AIF file
Sample file (Purple)
.KSC file
750
Disk P0: File 01: Load
Disk P0: File
01: Load
01PMC
01b
01c
01a
Thispageletsyouloadaselectedfileordirectoryinto 5. Playthesoundfromthekeyboard.
internalmemory.UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttons WhenauditioningaCombination,theTimbreswilluse
toselectthedesiredfileordirectory,andpressthe theProgramscurrentlyloadedintointernalmemory
Loadbuttontoloadit.Youcanalsoloaddatabyusing whichmaybedifferentfromtheProgramsstoredin
theLoadselectedpagemenucommand. thePCGfile.
Auditioning Drum Kits and Wave Sequences

Mounting USB devices
WhenauditioningDrumKitsorWaveSequences,
BeforeyoucanloadfromorsavetoaUSBdevice,such youllhearthemasiftheywerebeingplayedthrough
asharddrivesorflashmedia,youneedtomountthe theparametersettingsofthepreviouslyselected
device.Todoso: ProgramorCombination.Thisincludesfiltersettings,
1. GototheMediaInfopage. envelopes,etc.So,beforeyoustartauditioningsounds,
itsbesttofirstselectasuitablesoundinProgram
2. SelecttheScandevicecommandfromthepage
mode,andthenreturntoDiskmode.
menu.
TheUSBdevicewillnowappearintheDriveSelect Auditioning sounds which use RAM or EXs samples
menu. Whenauditioningsoundsfromdisks,thesystemcan
onlyusesamplesandmultisampleswhicharealready
Auditioning sounds from disk loaded.IfaProgram,DrumKit,orWaveSequence
usesRAMorEXssampleswhicharenotloaded,itwill
WheneveryouveselectedanindividualProgram, notsoundcorrectwhenauditionedfromdisk.
Combination,DrumKit,orWaveSequencefrom
withinaPCGfile,youcanplayitfromthekeyboard Auditioning WAVE files
immediatelynoneedtoloaditintomemory! Youcanalsoaudition48kHzWAVEfilesdirectlyfrom
Todothis: disk.Formoreinformation,seePlay(WAVE
Preview)onpage 752.
1. SelectaPCGfileonthedisk.
2. UsetheOPENbuttontoopenthePCGfile,sothat
youcanseeitscontents. 01a: Drive Select, Command buttons
3. ContinuetousetheOPENbuttontonavigate Drive Select [HDD:INTERNAL HD,
throughthefolders,untilyouvecanseethename CDD, HDD, RDD: name]
ofthesoundyoudliketoaudition.
Selectsthedevice(harddisk,CD,etc.)thatyouwilluse
4. Touchthenameofthesound. forloading/saving.
751
Disk mode
Thevolumelabelassignedtothemediawillbe
displayed.
NotethatUSBdeviceswillnotappearuntilyouhave
mountedthem;formoreinformation,seeMounting
USBdevices,above.
Drive types
HDD:INTERNALHD:Internalharddiskdrive
CDD:InternalCDR/RWdrive,oraUSBconnected
CDROMorCDR/RWdrive
HDD:USBconnectedharddiskdrive
RDD:Removablemediasuchasflashmediareadersor Chooseoneofthefollowingsortingorders.
MO(MagnetoOptical)drives Noorder:Unsorted
Volume label Name(Ascendingorder),DirectoriesFirst:Sortin
alphabeticalorder,firstdirectoriesandthenfiles
NoLabel:Mediathathasnovolumelabel
Name(Ascendingorder):Sortalphabetically
Unformatted:Mediathathasnotbeenformatted
Name(Descendingorder),DirectoriesFirst:Sortin
NoDisc:MediaisnotinsertedintheCDROMorCD
reversealphabeticalorder,firstdirectoriesandthen
R/RWdrive
files
NoMedia:Mediaisnotinsertedintheremovable
Name(Descendingorder):Sortinreversealphabetical
mediadrive(otherthanaCDROMorCDR/RW
drive) Size(Ascendingorder):Sortinascendingorderofsize
ThevolumelabeldisplayofaCDR/RWdrivewill Size(Descendingorder):Sortindescendingorderof
dependontheinsertedmediaandthepage. size
BlankDisc:Blankmedia.(Ifyouwanttousethisdisc Date(Ascendingorder):Sortinascendingorderof
asapacketwritingcompatibledisc,youmustformat date
it.IfyouwanttousethisdisctocreateanaudioCD, Date(Descendingorder):Sortindescendingorderof
youdonotneedtoformatit.) date
Mediavolumelabel:Mediathatcontainsdata
Play (WAVE Preview)
AudioCD:AudioCD
IntheLoad,Save,andUtilitypagesanddialogboxes,
Unfinalized:AnaudioCDthathasnotbeenfinalized youcanaudition48kHzWAVEfilesdirectlyfromthe
AudioCDormediavolumelabel:Mediathatcontains disk.
bothdataandaudio.Inthiscase,AudioCDwillbe Whenyouselecta48kHzWAVEfile,thePLAYbutton
displayedinboththeMakeAudioCDpageandthe willbecomeactive;simplypressittoauditionthefile.
PlayAudioCDpage,andthevolumelabelofthe
mediawillbedisplayedinallotherpages. Load
Thisloadstheselectedfileordirectoryintointernal
Multiple Select [Off, On]
memory.
Ifthisischecked,youwillbeabletoselectmorethan
WhenyoupresstheLoadbutton,adialogboxwill
onefileordirectory.Thecheckmarkwillturnonoroff
appear.Thespecificcontentsofthedialogboxwill
eachtimeyoupressit,enablingordisablingmultiple
dependonthefileyouareloading.Thisisthesame
selection.Usethiswhenyouwanttoloadorcopy
functionastheLoadselectedpagemenucommand.
multiplefilesinasingleoperation.
Formoreinformation,seeLoadselectedon
Open page 761.
WhenyoupresstheOpenbutton,thedirectorywill
open,andthecurrentdirectorywillmoveonelevel
downward.
01b: Current Directory
Thiscanbeusedwhenadirectoryhasbeenselectedin Current Directory
thedirectorywindow. Thedirectorycurrentlyselectedforprocessingis
referredtoasthecurrentdirectory.
Up
WhenyoupresstheUpbutton,thedirectorywillmove TheLCDscreenwillshowthefullpathnameofthe
onelevelupward. directory.Aslash/characterisusedasthedelimiter
betweendirectorylevels.Tochangethecurrent
Sort [Off, On] directory,usetheOpenbuttonandUpbutton(01a).
Thisfunctionsortsthefilesinthecurrentdirectory.
Pressthebuttontoopenthedialogbox,andusethe 01c: Directory Window
radiobuttonstoselectthesortingmethod.Thenpress
Thisshowsfileinformationforthecurrentdirectory.
theOKbuttontoexecute.
Youcanselectafileordirectoryinthiswindow.
752
Disk P0: File 02: Save
Type TosetthecurrentdateandtimefortheOASYSsystem,
Thisiconindicatesthetypeoffile. usetheUtilitypagemenucommandSetDate/Time.
Formoreinformation,seeSetDate/Timeon
Fordetailsonhowtheiconscorrespondtothe page 782.
differentfiletypes,refertothediagramFilesavailable
inDiskModeonpage 750.
Lock [Off, On]
Filesanddirectorieswiththissymbolarelocked,and
cannotbeoverwritten,copied,ordeleted.Usethe
Lock/Unlockpagemenucommandtolockorunlock
commandsonpage 142.
afileordirectory.
0:Hideunknownfiles.Formoreinformation,see
File Hideunknownfilesonpage 761.
WhenthemenucommandTranslationisoff(not 1:Translation.Formoreinformation,see
checked),thiswillshowthelowlevelDOSfilenames. Translationonpage 761.
WhenTranslationison(checked),youllseethefull 2:Lock/Unlockselected.Formoreinformation,see
namesoftheMultisampleandSamplefiles(.KMPand Lock/Unlockselectedonpage 761.
.KSF),insteadoftheabbreviatedDOSnames.
3:Loadselected.Formoreinformation,seeLoad
Size selectedonpage 761.
Thisisthesizeofthefile,inbytes. 4:LoadPCG(RAM)andSamples.Formore
information,seeLoadPCG(RAM)andSamples
Date onpage 774.
Thisisthedateandtimeatwhichthefilewassaved.
Fromtheleft,thisistheyear,month,day,hour,minute,
andsecond.
02: Save
02PMC
01b
01c
01a
Hereyoucansavedatafrominternalmemoryto Mounting USB devices

internalorexternaldisks,CDR/RW,flashmedia,etc. BeforeyoucanloadfromorsavetoaUSBdevice,such
UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontomovetothe asharddrivesorflashmedia,youneedtomountthe
desireddirectory(i.e.,changethecurrentdirectory), device.Todoso:
andthenselectthedesiredpagemenucommand. 1. GototheMediaInfopage.
WhenyouexecuteaSaveoperation,thedatawillbe
savedinthesamelevelofthediskhierarchyasthefiles 2. SelecttheScandevicecommandfromthepage
thataredisplayed. menu.
753
Disk mode
TheUSBdevicewillnowappearintheDriveSelect 3:SaveAll.Formoreinformation,seeSaveAll
menu. (PCG,SNGandKSC)onpage 776.
File date and time 4:SavePCG&SEQ.Formoreinformation,see

SavePCG&SEQonpage 777.
TheOASYScontainsaninternalcalendarandclock.
Whenyousaveafile,thedateandtimewillbe 5:SavePCG.Formoreinformation,seeSave
assignedautomatically. PCGonpage 777.
TosetthecurrentdateandtimefortheOASYSsystem, 6:SaveSEQ.Formoreinformation,seeSaveSEQ
usetheUtilitypagemenucommandSetDate/Time. onpage 777.
Formoreinformation,seeSetDate/Timeon 7:SaveSamplingData.Formoreinformation,see
page 782. SaveSamplingDataonpage 778.
8:SavetoStandardMIDIFile.Formore
t 02: Page Menu Commands information,seeSavetoStandardMIDIFileon
page 779.
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese 9:SaveExclusive.Formoreinformation,seeSave
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu Exclusiveonpage 779.
commandsonpage 142. 10:SaveEffectPreset.Formoreinformation,see
0:Hideunknownfiles.Formoreinformation,see SaveEffectPresetonpage 779.
Hideunknownfilesonpage 761. 11:ExportSampleasAIF/WAV.Formore
1:Translation.Formoreinformation,see information,seeExportSamplesasAIF/WAVon
Translationonpage 761. page 780.
2:Lock/Unlockselected.Formoreinformation,see 12:SaveAudioCDTrackList.Formore
Lock/Unlockselectedonpage 761. information,seeSaveAudioCDTrackListon
page 780.
03: Utility
03PMC
01b
01c
01a
Hereyoucanrename,copy,ordeletetheselecteddisk
orfile,createanewdirectory,format,andsetthedate t 03: Page Menu Commands
andtime. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Afterselectingadiskorfile,selectthedesiredpage numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
menucommand. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:Hideunknownfiles.Formoreinformation,see
Hideunknownfilesonpage 761.
754
Disk P0: File 09: Media Information
1:Translation.Formoreinformation,see 7:CreateDirectory.Formoreinformation,see
Translationonpage 761. CreateDirectoryonpage 782.
2:Lock/Unlockselected.Formoreinformation,see 8:SetDate/Time.Formoreinformation,seeSet
Lock/Unlockselectedonpage 761. Date/Timeonpage 782.
3:Rename.Formoreinformation,seeRenameon 9:Format.Formoreinformation,seeFormaton
page 781. page 782.
4:Copy.Formoreinformation,seeCopyon 10:ConverttoISO9660Format.Formore
page 781. information,seeConverttoISO9660Formaton
5:Delete.Formoreinformation,seeDeleteon page 783.
page 781. 11:RateConvert.Formoreinformation,seeRate
6.DeleteUnusedWAVFiles.Formore Convertonpage 783.
information,seeDeleteUnusedWAVFileson 12:CheckMedium.Formoreinformation,see
page 782. CheckMediumonpage 783.
09: Media Information

09PMC
09a
01a
Thisscreenshowsinformationaboutthemedia.Use SupportsRemovable:ThiswillindicateYesifthe
DriveSelect(01a)toselectthemedia. mediaoftheselecteddevicecanberemoved(e.g.,
CompactFlash,CDR/RWdisc,MOdisc,removable
harddisk).Ifthemediaisfixed,thiswillbeNo.
09a: Media Information
Drive Select
VolumeLabel:Thevolumelabelofthemedia.
Selectsthedrive.(01a)
Drive:Thisisthespecifieddrive.
DeviceType:Thetypeofmedia.
ProductID:ThevendorID,product,andproduct
version,etc. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
FormatType:Thetypeofformat.Ifnotformatted,this
willindicateUnformatted.
commandsonpage 142.
TotalSize:Thecapacityofthemedia(inbytes).
0:Scandevice.Formoreinformation,seeScan
FreeSize:Thefreecapacityofthemedia(inbytes). deviceonpage 784.
WriteProtect:Thewriteprotectstatusofthemedia.
ThiswillindicateOnifprotected,orOffifnot
protected.
755
Disk mode
Disk P1: Audio CD
11: Make Audio CD

11PMC
11a
11b
11c
HereyoucanusetheinternalCDR/RWdriveora
USBconnectedCDR/RWdrivetocreateanaudioCD. 11a: Track, Total, Free
TocreateanaudioCD,youwilluseWAVEfilesthat Track (Track Select) [0199, --]
youresampledfromtheOASYSssequencerplayback
Specifiesthetracknumberthatwillbedisplayedatthe
etc.UsetheInsertbuttonandCutbuttontoarrangethe
topoftheaudioCDtracklist.
filesintheaudioCDtracklist,andusetheWriteto
CDpagemenucommandtowritethemasanaudio Ifunfinalizedmediaisinserted,thisfieldwillindicate
CD. thenumberthatfollowsthelasttracknumberonthat
media.ForexampleifdatauptoTrack(TrackSelect)
AnaudioCDcanbecreatedfromeither44.1kHzor48
05hasalreadybeenwritten,thiswillindicate06and
kHzWAVEfiles.48kHzfileswillbeautomatically
following(upto99).
convertedto44.1kHzduringtheCDwritingprocess.
IfWAVEfile====End====isatthetop,thiswill
Note:WhenthenameofaWAVEfileishighlighted,
indicate.
youcanplaythatfilebypressingthePlaybuttonorthe
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.Thisisaconvenient Upto99trackscanberegisteredusingtheInsert
waytoauditionthesound. button.
What is Finalize? Total [00:00]

InorderforanaudioCDtobeplayableona DisplaysthetotaltimeofallWAVEfilesintheaudio
conventionalCDplayer,ortobeplayedontheOASYS CDtracklist.
(Disk:AudioCDpage,SamplingP5:AudioCDpage), IftheTotaltimeisgreaterthanFree,writingto
theFinalizeoperationmustbeexecutedafterallthe CDR/RWmediawillnotbepossible.
desiredaudioCDtrackshavebeenwrittentotheCD
R/RWdisc. Free [00:00, --:--]
OntheOASYS,thepagemenucommandWriteto Displaysthetimethatremainsonthemediainsertedin
CDallowsyoutosimplywritetheaudioCDtracks theCDR/RWdriveselectedbyDriveSelect.
withoutfinalizingthedisc,andthismeansthatother IfaCDR/RWdriveisnotconnected,orifitcontains
audioCDtrackscanbeaddedtothatCDR/RWdiscat nomedia,oriftheinsertedmediahasalreadybeen
alatertime. finalized,thiswilldisplay:.
NomoreaudioCDtrackscanbeaddedtoadisconce
thatdischasbeenfinalized,sobesurethatalldesired
audioCDtrackshavebeenwrittenbeforeyoufinalize.
756
Disk P1: Audio CD 11: Make Audio CD
UseDriveSelecttoselectthedrivecontainingthefile
11b: Audio CD Track List youwanttoadd,usetheOpenbuttonandUpbutton
tonavigatetotheappropriatedirectory,andselectthe
Track [(0199)]
Wavefile.
DisplaysthetracknumbersoftheWAVEfilesarranged
Insert:Addstheselected(highlighted)WAVEfile.
intheaudioCDtracklist.(11aTrack(TrackSelect))
Note:IftheMultipleSelect(01a)boxischecked,you
WAVE File [List of files] canselectmultipleWAVEfilesandinsertthemina
singleoperation.
DisplaysthenamesoftheWAVEfiles.
InsertAll:AddsallWAVEfilesintheselected
ToaddaWAVEfile,placethecursorattheWAVEfile
directorywhosesamplingfrequencyis44.1kHzor48
oftheaudioCDtrackthatfollowstheaudioCDtrack
kHz.Thefileswillbeaddedintheorderinwhichthey
youwanttoadd,andpresstheInsertbutton.Todelete
aredisplayed.
anaudioCDtrack,placethecursorattheaudioCD
trackthatyouwanttodelete,andpresstheCutbutton. WhenyouexecuteInsertorInsertAll,theWAVEfile(s)
willbeadded,andanysubsequentaudioCDtracks
Note:WhenyouselectaWAVEfile(highlighted)and
willbemovedtowardtheendofthelist.
pressthePlaybutton,orSAMPLINGSTART/STOP
switch,theWAVEfilewillplayback. IfyoupresstheExitbutton,thedialogboxwillclose,
andnofurtherWAVEfileswillbeadded.
Size, Rate, Time YoucancontinueaddingasmanyWAVEfilesas
ThisareadisplaysinformationontheWAVEfilesin desireduntilyoupresstheExitbutton.
theaudioCDtracklist.
Cut
Size:Datasize(bytes)
DeletestheaudioCDtrack.
Rate:Samplingfrequency(Hz)
WhenyouplacethecursoratWAVEFileoftheaudio
Time:Time(minutes:seconds) CDtrackthatyouwanttodelete,andpresstheCut
Thisinformationwillnotbedisplayedifyouused button,thataudioCDtrackwillbedeleted.Any
Load.KCDetc.toloadanaudioCDtracklist,and subsequentaudioCDtrackswillbemovedforward.
theWAVEfileisnotfoundinthespecifieddirectory.
Clear
Inthiscase,usetheCutbuttontodeletethataudio
CDtrack,orcheckwhetherthemediaisconnected ThisclearstheaudioCDtracklist.
correctly. Note:UseSaveAudioCDTrackListtosave
importantaudioCDtrackliststotheinternalharddisk
orothermedia.
11c: Drive Select, Command buttons
Play
Drive Select [CDD: Name]
Whenyouselecta48kHzWAVEfileandpressthe
SelectstheCDR/RWdrivethatcontainsthemediathat
Playbutton,thatfilewillplayback.
youwillusetocreateanaudioCD.(01a)
ThefilewillalsoplayifyoupresstheSAMPLING
OnlyCDROM/R/RWdrivescanbeselected.
START/STOPswitch.
Command buttons
Insert
AddsanaudioCDtracktotheaudioCDtracklist. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
HighlighttheWAVEFileeditcellfollowingthe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
audioCDtrackyouwanttoadd,andpresstheInsert commandsonpage 142.
buttontoopenthedialogbox.
0:SwapTrack.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Trackonpage 784.
1:WritetoCD.Formoreinformation,seeWriteto
CDonpage 784.
2:FinalizeAudioCD.Formoreinformation,see
FinalizeAudioCDonpage 784.
3:EraseCDRW.Formoreinformation,seeErase
CDRWonpage 785.
757
Disk mode
12: Play Audio CD

12b 12PMC
12a
ThispageletsyouplayaudioCDsfromanyCDR/RW
drive,internalorexternal.Amongotherthings,this 12a: Audio CD Play
letsyouverifyCDscreatedusingtheMakeAudioCD
Location [00:00.0]
page.
DisplaysthecurrentlocationoftheaudioCDtrackthat
AudioCDsmustbefinalizedbeforetheycanbe
isplaying.Whenstopped,thisspecifiesthelocationat
played.
whichplaybackwillbegin.
YoucanusetheSEQUENCERswitchestoplayorstop
AfteraTrackorIndexhasbeenselected,thiswillbe
theCD.Audioisplayedusingthedigitalaudiosignal
resetto00:00.0.
fromtheCDR/RWdrive.
Drive Select [CDD: Name]
Playing a CD
SpecifiesthedrivetoplaytheaudioCD.OnlyCD
ToplayanaudioCD:
ROM/R/RWdrivescanbeselected.
1. UseDriveSelecttoselecttheCDR/RWdrive.
Track [01]
2. SetthedesiredlevelusingtheVolumeslider.The
defaultis64. SelectstheaudioCDtracktoplay.
NotethatsomeUSBCDdrivesmaynotsupportthis Index [01]
control.Inthiscase,usetheindividualleftandright
AudiotracksonCDscanhaveindexes,whichmark
Levelcontrolsontherightsideofthescreen,instead.
pointswithinthetrack.SomesampleCDsmay
3. SelectthedesiredTrack,usingthepopupmenu. supportindexes,forinstance.
4. ControltheCDusingtheSEQUENCERswitches, IftheselectedTrackhasindexes,thisletsyouselect
asshownbelow. them.
SEQUENCER NotethatmanyCDswillnothaveindexes.Also,some
START/STOP switch Play/Stop
CDR/RWdrivesmaynotsupportindexes.
FF>> switch Fast-forward Volume [000127]

<<REW switch Rewind ThiscontrolstheCDR/RWdrivesbuiltinvolume.
PAUSE switch Pause NotethatsomeUSBCDR/RWdrivesmaynotsupport
directcontrolofvolume.Inthiscase,usetheLevel
LOCATE switch Return to the beginning of the track controlsunder12b:CDR/RWDriveAudioInput,
below.
Ifyouplaythekeyboardorcontrollerswhilethe
internalCDR/RWdriveisplaying,theimpactmay
causeskipsorreaderrorstooccurintheplayback.
758
Disk P1: Audio CD 12: Play Audio CD
Pan [L000C064R127]
12b: CD-R/RW Drive Audio Input
Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheaudiosignalfromthe
Thisspecifiestheoutputdestinationforthesignal CDR/RWdrive.NormallyyouwillsetLeftandRight
fromanaudioCDplayedbackontheinternalCD toL000andR127respectively.
R/RWdriveoraUSBconnectedCDR/RWdrive.Make
settingsfortheLandRchannels. Level [000127]
Note:TheCDR/RWDriveAudioInputsettingsare Thisspecifiestheleveloftheaudiosignalsentfromthe
linkedwiththeSamplingmode51b:CDR/RW CDR/RWdrive.Normallyyouwillsetthisto127.
DriveAudioInputsettings. Tosummarize,thenormalsettingsareasfollows.
LEFT:BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)L/R,RECBusOff,FX
LEFT
CtrlBusOff,Send1000,Send2000,Level127,Pan
L000
RIGHT
RIGHT:BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)L/R,RECBusOff,FX
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.) CtrlBusOff,Send1000,Send2000,Level127,Pan
[L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off] R127
L/R:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrivewillbe
senttotheL/Rbus.NormallyyouwillusetheL/R
setting.ThesignalcanbemonitoredfromtheL/R
outputsandfromheadphones.
IFX112:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrive
willbesenttotheIFX112bus.Choosethissettingif
youwanttoapplyaninserteffect.
18:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrivewillbe
sentinmonauraltoINDIVIDUAL1,2,3,4,5,6,7,or8.
1/27/8:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrive
willbesentviathePansettingstoINDIVIDUAL1and
2,3and4,5and6,or7and8instereo.
Off:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrivewillnot
beinput.

ThissendstheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdriveto
theFXControlbuses(twostereochannels;FXCtrl1,2).
REC Bus [Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1/2, 3/4]

ThissendstheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdriveto
theRECbuses(fourmonochannels1,2,3,4).
Off:TheaudiosignalwillnotbesenttotheRECbus.
NormallyyouwillusetheOffsetting.
1,2,3,4:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrive
willbesenttothecorrespondingRECbus.ThePan
settingwillbeignored,andthesignalwillbesentin
monaural.
1/2,3/4:TheaudiosignalfromtheCDR/RWdrivewill
besenttothecorrespondingRECbuses.Thesignal
willbesentviathePansettingtobuses1and2or3
and4instereo.
Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]

Send2 (to MFX2) [000127]
Thesespecifythelevelatwhichtheaudiosignalfrom
theCDR/RWdriveissenttothemastereffects.
ThesesettingsareignoredifBusSelectisotherthan
L/Roroff.
levelstothemastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX112
Send1andSend2.
759
Disk mode
19: Media Information

19PMC
19a
19b
Thisscreenshowsinformationaboutthemediainthe
CDR/RWdrive.UseDriveSelect(19b)toselectthe
drive/media.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee09:Media
Informationonpage 755.

commandsonpage 142.
0:Scandevice.Formoreinformation,seeScan
deviceonpage 784.
760
Disk: Page Menu Commands Hide unknown files
Disk: Page Menu Commands
Hide unknown files

IfyouselectHideunknownfiles,acheckmarkwill
appearattheleftofHideunknownfiles.Inthisstate,
undefinedfileswillnotbeshowninthedirectory
window.However,thisisvalidonlyifthereareDOS
filesinthecurrentdirectory.
Translation
WhenTranslationison(checked),youllseethefull
Thiswillappearinthefollowingcases.
namesoftheMultisamplesandSamplesonthedisk,
insteadoftheabbreviatedDOSnames. Ifwhenloadinga.KSCfile,a.KMPfileusedbyit
cannotbefound.
Notethatondisk,Multisamplesarestoredas.KMP
(KorgMultisampleParameter)files,andSamplesare Ifwhenloadinga.KMPfile,a.KSFfilecannotbe
storedas.KSF(KorgSampleFormat)files. found.
IfwhenloadinganS1000/S3000formatProgram
file,aSamplefilecannotbefound.
Lock/Unlock selected
Ifloadinga.KSFfilethatwaslargerthanthemedia
Thislocks/unlocksthefileordirectorythatsselectedin capacityandwasthereforesavedonmultiple
thedirectorywindow(01c).Ifyoulockthefileor media,whenthefirstmediahasbeenloadedand
directory,thelockicon(Lock)willappear,and thesecondmedianeedstobespecified.
overwriting,copying,ordeletingwillnotbepossible.
Whenloadinga.PCGfilethatwassplitacrosstwo
1. Inthedirectorywindow(01c),selectthefileor ormorevolumesofmedia,whenthefirstvolume
directorythatyouwanttolockorunlock. hasbeenloadedandthesecondmediaisnow
2. SelectLock/Unlock;theselectedfileordirectory required.
willalternatelybelockedorunlocked. Whenloadinga.PCGfileandalsosimultaneously
loadinga.SNGfile,iftheidenticallynamed.SNG
fileisnotfoundinthecurrentdirectoryafter
Load selected loadingthe.PCGfile.
Thisloadsthefileordirectoryselectedinthedirectory Ifthisdialogboxappears,takethefollowingaction.
window(01c)intointernalmemory. 1. Selectthedirectorythatcontainsthefileindicated
1. Inthedirectorywindow(01c),selectthefileor byWhereisa
directorythatyouwanttoload. Ifthespecifiedfileislocatedonanothermedia,
2. SelectLoadselected. exchangemedia.Thenpressthedirectorywindow
Adialogboxwillappear.Thedialogboxthat intheLCDscreentomaketheOASYSrecognizethe
appearswilldependonthefileyouareloading.For media,andselecttheappropriatedirectory.
moreinformation,pleaseseepage761. Itisnotpossibletoopen.PCG,.SNG,or.KFXfilesin
Specifythevariousitemsasnecessary. theWhereisadialogbox.TheOpenbutton
3. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Ifyou cannotbeusedfor.PCG,.SNGor.KFXfiles.
decidetocancel,presstheCancelbutton. 2. PresstheSelectbuttontoresumeloading.
If a file to be loaded cannot be found, or when LoadingwillbeabortedifyoupresstheCancel
loading a file that was saved across media button.Ifyouwanttoaborttheloadingprocess,
presstheOKbutton.IfyoupresstheSkipbutton,
Ifanecessaryfilecannotbefoundinthecurrent theindicatedfilewillbeskipped,andthenextfile
directoryorinalowerdirectorywhenloading willbeloaded.
multisamples,sampledata,.PCG,or.SNGfiles,a
dialogboxlikethefollowing(Whereisa)will Exceptforspecialsituationssuchaswhenthemedia
appear. containingtheindicatedfilehasbeendamagedor
cannotbefound,youshouldusetheSelectbuttonto
continuetheloadingprocess.
Load .PCG
Datainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
761
Disk mode
memory.Thesongdatawithinthe.SNGfilethatis
beingloadedwillbepackedintotheavailable
locations.(Seediagrambelow)
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoloadsongdata
fromdiskwithouterasingthesongdatathatis
alreadyinmemory.
Theregiondatausedbythesongsaudiotrackswill
beloadedfollowingthelastexistingregionnumber,
withvaliddatapackedintoeachconsecutive
location.(Seediagrambelow)Atthistime,the
1. UsetheLoad******.SNGtoo,Load******.KSC regionnumbersofthesongwillbereassignedso
tooLoad******.KGEtooandcheckboxesto thatthesongsinthe.SNGfilethatuseregiondata
selectthe.SNGfileand.KSCfile. willcorrespondcorrectlytotheregiondata.
Ifthisfiledoesnotexistinthecurrentdirectory, Clear:Songdataalreadyininternalmemorywillbe
loaditasdescribedunderIfafiletobeloaded completelyerased,andthesongdatawillbeloaded
cannotbefound,onpage 761. intheconfigurationthatexistedwhenitwassaved.
(Seediagrambelow)
2. In.PCGContents,specifythedatatobeloaded.
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoreproducethesaved
All:Loadalldatafromthe.PCGfile.
stateimmediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
BankINTA~INTG,USERA~USERG:Load
.SNGAllocation
dataofthespecifiedbank.Inthiscase,useToto
specifytheloaddestinationbank.Whenyou
.SNG file to load Internal memory of the Internal memory of the
executetheload,thecombinations,programs,drum OASYS after loading OASYS before loading
kits,andwavesequencedataofonlythespecified SNG000 SNG000 SNG000

SNG001
bankwillbeloadedtotheloaddestinationbank. SNG002 SNG002
SNG003 SNG003
Globalsettingswillnotbeloaded. Append
SNG004
SNG003
SNG005 SNG005
Theprogrambanksusedbythecombinationsand SNG006
thedrumkitandwavesequencenumbersusedby SNG007
theprogramswillbeadjustedautomaticallysothat
theycorrespondcorrectly. SNG000 SNG000 SNG000
SNG001 SNG001
Similarlyifa.SNGfileisloadedsimultaneously,the SNG002
Clear SNG003 SNG003 SNG003
bankoftheprogramsusedbytracksoftheSong(or
iftherearetrack/patternevents,thebankofthe SNG005 SNG005
programwithintheevent)willbecorrected
automaticallysothattheyareappropriate.
Note:ProgrambanksINTA INTEarebanktype
HD1,andtheINTFbankisbanktypeEXi.The 4. Select.KSCAllocationisvalidifLoad
banktypesforthesebanksarefixed;youcannotset ********.KSCtoohasbeenchecked.
theTofieldtoabankwhosetypediffersfromthe Thisspecifieshowthemultisamplesandsamplesin
dataselectedforloading. the.KSCfilewillbeloaded.
ProgrambanksUSERAUSERGcanbefreely Append:Sampleswillbeloadedstartingatthefirst
specifiedaseitherHD1orEXi(usingtheGlobal unoccupiednumberfollowingthelastmultisample
menucommandSetProgramUserBankType). orsamplethatcurrentlyexistsinmemory(i.e.,by
Youcanload.PCGfilesofabanktypethatdiffers havingbeensampledorloaded).Atthistime,only
fromtheOASYSscurrentbanktypesetting.This thevalidmultisamplesorsampleswillbeloaded,
willautomaticallysetthebanktypeappropriately. andtheywillbeorganizedinnumericalorder.(See
diagrambelow)
Ifdataofthespecifiedbankiscompletelyabsent
fromthe.PCGfile,anerrorofNoreadabledata Atthesametime,programsorwavesequences
willbedisplayed,andtheloadoperationwillbe withinthe.PCGfilethatusemultisamplesfromthe
halted. .KSCfilewillautomaticallyhavethemultisample
settingsfortheiroscillatorsrewrittensothateach
Iftheprogramdataofthespecifiedbankisnot
programorwavesequenceusesthecorrect
foundinthe.PCGfile,theprogrambanksofthe
multisample.Drumkitsinthe.PCGfilethatuse
combinationormultitimbres/trackswillnotbeset.
samplesfromthe.KSCfilewillautomaticallyhave
Ifthedrumkitsandwavesequencesofthespecified thesamplesettingsforthedrumkitrewrittenso
bankarenotinthe.PCGfile,theprogramsdrumkit thatthedrumkitusesthecorrectsamples.
numbersandwavesequencenumberswillnotbe Clear:Allmultisamplesandsamplescurrentlyin
automaticallyset. memorywillbeerased,andthemultisamplesand
3. IfLoad******.SNGtooischecked,youcanuse sampleswillbeloadedinthesameconfigurationin
Select.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowsongdata whichtheyweresaved.(Seediagrambelow)
withinthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded. Ifmemoryalreadycontainsmultisamplesor
Append:Themultidatawillbeloadedstartingat samplesthatyouwishtokeep,andyouwishtoload
thenumberthatfollowsthelastsongdatain
762
Disk: Page Menu Commands Load selected
additionalmultisamplesorsamplesfrommedia, Note:IfMultipleSelect(01a)ischeckedandyouve
selectAppend. selectedmorethanonebank,thedatawillbeloaded
Ifthepowerhasjustbeenturnedon,oryouwantto startingwiththebankyouspecifiedintheTofield.
reproducethestatethatwassaved,selectClear. Inthiscase,ifyouattempttoloadabankofadiffering
banktypeintoINTAINTE(fixedatHD1)orINTF
.KSCAllocation
(fixedatEXi),INTAINTFbankswillbeskipped,and
.KMP file to load Internal memory of the Internal memory of the thedatawillbeloadedstartingfromUSERA.
OASYS after loading OASYS before loading
KMP000 KMP000 KMP000

KMP001
KMP003
KMP002
KMP003
KMP002
KMP003
Load a Program
Append
KMP004
KMP005 KMP005 Datafortheselectedprogramwillbeloadedintothe
KMP006
KMP007
programnumberyouspecify.
KMP000 KMP000 KMP000

KMP001 KMP001
KMP002
Clear KMP003 KMP003 KMP003
KMP005 KMP005
5. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadaprogramotherthantheone
alreadyselected,useProgram(upperline)to
selecttheprogramthatyouwishtoload.
Load Programs
Note:Wheneveryouveselectedanindividual
Allprogramdatafroma.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Program,Combination,DrumKit,orWave
SequencefromwithinaPCGfile,youcanplayit
fromthekeyboardimmediatelynoneedtoloadit
intomemory!Formoreinformation,see
Auditioningsoundsfromdiskonpage 751.
2. InToProgram,(lowerline)selectthebankand
programintowhichthedatawillbeloaded.When
1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel youpressthepopupbutton,theBank/Program
withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton. Selectwindow(Program01a)willappear.
Note:YoucannotsettheTofieldtoabankwhose
typediffersfromtheselectedprogram.
Load Program Bank Note:IfMultipleSelect(01a)ischeckedand
[Bank INT-AINT-F, Bank USER-AUSER-G] youveselectedmorethanoneprogram,thedata
willbeloadedstartingwiththeprogramyou
Allprogramdataoftheselectedbankwillbeloaded specifiedintheTofield.
intothebankyouspecify.
Load Combinations
Allcombinationsinthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
1. InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationbank.
Note:ProgrambanksINTAINTEarebanktype
HD1,andtheINTFbankisbanktypeEXi.The
banktypesofthesebanksarefixed;youcannotset 1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
theTofieldtoabankwhosetypediffersfromthe withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
dataselectedforloading.
ProgrambanksUSERAUSERGcanbefreely
specifiedaseitherHD1orEXi(SetProgramUser Load Combination Bank
BankType.Youcanload.PCGfilesofabanktype
thatdiffersfromtheOASYSscurrentbanktype [Bank INT-AINT-G, Bank USER-AUSER-G]
setting.Thiswillalsooverwritethebanktype. Allcombinationsintheselectedbankwillbeloaded
intothebankyouspecify.
763
Disk mode
Load Drum Kit Bank

[INT, USER-AUSER-G]
Thisloadsalldrumkitdataoftheselectedbankinto
theloaddestinationbankyouspecify.
1. InTo,specifytheloadingdestinationbank.
Note:IfMultipleSelect(01a)ischeckedandyouve
selectedmorethanonebank,thedatawillbeloaded
startingwiththebankyouspecifiedintheTofield. 1. UsetheTofieldtoselecttheloaddestination
bank.
Load a Combination withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
ThisloadstheselectedCombinationintoaspecified Note:IfMultipleSelect(01a)ischeckedandyouve
Bankandnumberininternalmemory. selectedmorethanonebank,thedatawillbeloaded
startingwiththebankyouspecifiedintheTofield.
IfyouveselectedUSERAUSERGastheload
destinationfortheselecteddrumkitbank(INT),
INT000INT015willbeloaded.Ifyouve
selectedINTastheloaddestinationforUSERA
USERG,thedatawillbeloadedintoINT000
INT015.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadacombinationotherthanthe Load a Drum Kit

onealreadyselected,useCombination(upper Theselecteddrumkitwillbeloadedintothedrumkit
line)toselectthecombinationthatyouwishto numberyouspecify.
load.
Note:Theselectedcombinationcanbeplayedfrom
thekeyboardevenbeforeyouloadit.Thisis
convenientwhenyouwanttoauditionthe
combinationtobeloaded.(SeeAuditioningsounds
fromdiskonpage 751)
2. InToCombination(lowerline),selectthebank
andcombinationintowhichthedatawillbe
loaded.
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,the 1. Ifyouwishtoloadadrumkitotherthantheone
Bank/CombinationSelectwindowwillappear. alreadyselected,useDrumKit(upperline)to
3. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel selectthedrumkityouwishtoload.
withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton. Note:Wheneveryouveselectedanindividual
Note:IfMultipleSelect(01a)ischeckedandyouve Program,Combination,DrumKit,orWave
selectedmorethanonecombination,thedatawillbe SequencefromwithinaPCGfile,youcanplayit
loadedstartingwiththecombinationyouspecifiedin fromthekeyboardimmediatelynoneedtoloadit
theTofield. intomemory!Formoreinformation,see
Auditioningsoundsfromdiskonpage 751.
2. InToDrumKit(lowerline),selecttheloading
Load Drum Kits destinationdrumkit.
Alldrumkitsinthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded. 3. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
startingwiththedrumkityouspecifiedintheTo
field.
1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel Load Wave Sequences

Allwavesequencedataofthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
764
selectedmorethanonewavesequence,thedatawillbe
loadedstartingwiththewavesequenceyouspecified
intheTofield.
Load Global Setting
Globalsettingdatainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Load Wave Sequence Bank
[INT, USER-AUSER-G]
Allwavesequencedataoftheselectedbankwillbe
loadedintothebankyouselectastheloaddestination.
ThisincludesmostoftheGlobalmodeparameters,
exceptforthefollowing:
DrumKits
WaveSequences
1. UsetheTofieldtoselecttheloaddestination MemoryProtectsettings
bank.
SystemClocksetting
withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton. 1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
startingwiththebankyouspecifiedintheTofield.
Load .SNG
IfyouveselectedUSERAUSERGastheload Alldatainthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
destinationfortheselectedwavesequencebank
(INT),INT000INT031willbeloaded.Ifyouve
selectedINTastheloaddestinationforUSERA
USERG,thedatawillbeloadedintoINT000
INT031.
Load a Wave Sequence

Theselectedwavesequencedatawillbeloadedinto
thewavesequencenumberyouselectastheload
destination.
1. UseSelect.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowthe
songdatafromthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Append:Thesongwillbeloadedafterthelastsong
datathatalreadyexistsininternalmemory.Atthis
time,thesongdatainthe.SNGfilebeingloaded
willbepackedforward.(Seethediagram.SNG
Allocationonpage 762)
1. Ifyouwanttoloadawavesequenceotherthanthe
selectedwavesequence,useWaveSequence Selectthiswhenyouwanttoaddsongdatafrom
(theupperline)toreselectthewavesequenceto diskwithouterasingthesongdatathatcurrently
beloaded. existsininternalmemory.
Note:Wheneveryouveselectedanindividual Theregiondatausedbythesongsaudiotrackswill
Program,Combination,DrumKit,orWave alsobeloadedfollowingthelastregionnumber
SequencefromwithinaPCGfile,youcanplayit existingininternalmemory,withvaliddatapacked
fromthekeyboardimmediatelynoneedtoloadit intoeachconsecutivelocation.Atthistime,the
intomemory!Formoreinformation,see regionnumbersofthesongwillbereassignedso
Auditioningsoundsfromdiskonpage 751. thatthesongsinthe.SNGfilethatuseregiondata
willcorrespondcorrectlytotheregiondata.
2. UseToWaveSequence(thelowerline)toselect
theloaddestinationwavesequence. Clear:Songdataalreadyininternalmemorywillbe
completelyerased,andthesongdatawillbeloaded
765
Disk mode
intheconfigurationthatexistedwhenitwassaved.
(Seethediagram.SNGAllocationonpage 762)
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoreproducethesaved
stateimmediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
2. Ifanidenticallynamed.PCG,.KSC,or.KGEfile
existsinthecurrentdirectory,youllbeableto
selecttheLoad********.PCGtoo,Load
********.KSCtoo,andLoad********.KGEtoo 1. InSong,specifytheloadingdestinationsong.
checkboxes.
2. IfyouveenabledthewithRegionDatacheck
Ifthisfiledoesnotexistinthecurrentdirectory, box,theregiondatausedbythesongtracksbeing
loaditasdescribedunderIfafiletobeloaded loadedwillalsobeloadedfollowingthelast
cannotbefound,onpage 761. regionnumberexistingininternalmemory,with
IfyoucheckLoad********.PCGtoo,use.PCG datapackedintoeachconsecutivelocation
Contentstospecifythebankwithinthe.PCGfile. (Appendload).
Formoreinformation,seeIn.PCGContents, Atthistime,theregionnumbersofthetracksinthe
specifythedatatobeloaded.onpage 762. songwillbereassignedsothattheycorrespond
IfyoucheckLoad********.KSCtoo,useSelect correctlytotheregiondata.
.KSCAllocationtospecifyhowthemultisamples 3. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
andsampleswithinthe.KSCfilewillbeloaded. withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
Formoreinformation,seeSelect.KSCAllocation
isvalidifLoad********.KSCtoohasbeen
checked.onpage 762.
Load Pattern Data
3. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthedata,orpressthe Theselecteduserpatternwillbeloadedintoauser
Cancelbuttontocancelwithoutloading. patternoftheselectedloadingdestinationsong.
However,itisnotpossibletospecifyanuncreated
songastheloadingdestination.
Load a Song
Datafortheselectedsongwillbeloadedintothesong
numberyouspecifiedastheloaddestination.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadauserpatternotherthanthe
onealreadyselected,usePattern(upperline)tore
selecttheuserpatternthatyouwishtoload.
2. InToSongandPattern(lowerline),selectthe
1. Ifyouwishtoloadasongotherthantheselected loadingdestinationsonganduserpattern.
song,useSong(upperline)toreselectthesongto
beloaded.
2. InToSong(lowerline),selecttheloading
destinationsong.
3. IfyouveenabledthewithRegionDatacheck Load Regions
box,theSongsregiondatawillbeloaded Allregiondatawillbeloadedfromthe.SNGfile.
followingthelastregionnumberexistingin
internalmemory,withdatapackedintoeach
consecutivelocation(Appendload).
Atthistime,theregionnumbersofthesongwillbe
reassignedsothattheycorrespondcorrectlytothe
regiondata.
1. UseSelectRegionsAllocationtospecifyhow
thesongdatainthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Load Tracks Append:Thedatawillbepackedintoeach
Theeventdataofalltracksintheselectedsongwillbe consecutivelocationfollowingthelastregion
loadedintothesongyouspecifyastheloading numberexistingininternalmemory.Choosethis
destination.However,itisnotpossibletospecifyan methodwhenyouwanttoloadadditionalregion
uncreatedsongastheloadingdestination.
766
datafromthediskwithouterasingtheregiondata
alreadyininternalmemory.
Clear:Allregiondataininternalmemorywillbe
erased,andtheregiondatawillbeloadedinthe
configurationthatexistedwhenitwassaved.
Choosethismethodwhenyouwanttoreplicatethe
configurationthatyousaved,suchasimmediately 1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
afterturningthepoweron. withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
IfyouloadusingAppend,theregionnumbersused
bythesongmaynolongercorrespondcorrectly.If
so,youwillneedtoreselecttheregionnumbers Load All Presets (U00U15)
usedbythesong.Whenloadingsongdata,youwill Alluserdatafromthe.KFXfilewillbeloaded.All
normallyuseLoad.SNGorLoadaSongandcheck preset(user)data(U0115)foralleffectswillbe
thewithRegionDatasetting.Evenifyouload loaded.
usingAppend,theregionnumbersofthesongwill
automaticallyberespecifiedsothatthesongwill
correspondtothecorrectregiondata.
Load a Region 1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel

Thisloadstheselectedregiondataintotheregion
numberyouselectastheloaddestination.
Load Presets (P0115)
Preset(preset)data(P0115)fortheselectedeffectwill
beloaded.
LoadPresets(P01P15)inStereoDynaCompressor
1. Ifyoureloadingregiondataotherthanthe
selecteddata,useRegion(theupperline)to
reselecttheregiondatayouwanttoload. 1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
2. UseToRegion(thelowerline)toselecttheload withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
destinationregion.
Load Presets (U0015)
Preset(user)data(U0015)fortheselectedeffectwill
beloaded.
Load .KFX LoadPresets(U00U15)inStereoDynaCompressor
Alldatafromthe.KFXfilewillbeloaded.Allpreset
data(P0115)anduserdata(U0015)foralleffectswill
beloaded.
withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton. Load a Preset (P)
Theselectedeffectpresetdata(P0115)willbeloaded
intotheloaddestinationeffectpresetnumber(P0115,
Load All Presets (P01P15) U00U15)youspecify.
Allpresetdatafromthe.KFXfilewillbeloaded.All
preset(preset)data(P0115)foralleffectswillbe
loaded.
767
Disk mode
LoadaPresetinStereoDynaCompressor specifiedastheloadingdestination.Howeverifthe
fileformatisinappropriate,theoperationwillbe
invalidandanerrormessagewillbedisplayed.
Theprogrambankandprogramnumbersloaded
intothesongwillfollowtheBankMap(Global0
1d)setting.IfBankMapisKORG,bankAwillbe
selectedforbankselect00.00(MSB.LSB).IfBank
MapisGM(2),bankGwillbeselected.
1. Ifyoureloadinganeffectpresetotherthanthe Load and Transmit MIDI SysEx Data

selectedone,usePreset(theupperline)tore Alldatafromthe.EXLfilewillbeloadedand
selecttheeffectpresetthatwillbeloaded. transmittedfromtheMIDIOUTconnector.
2. UseToPreset(thelowerline)toselecttheload
destinationeffectpreset.
selectedmorethanoneeffectpreset,thedatawillbe
loadedstartingwiththeeffectpresetyouspecifiedin
theTofield. 1. Ifthe.EXLfilecontainstwoormoreexclusivedata
items,useTransmitIntervalTimetospecifythe
timeintervalthatwillbeinsertedbetweeneach
27) Load a Preset (U) itemofexclusivedata.
Theselectedeffectpresetdata(U0015)willbeloaded IfyouaretransmittingthedatatoanotherOASYS,
intotheloaddestinationeffectpresetnumber(P0115, therequiredtimeintervalwilldependonthetype
U00U15)youspecify. ofdata.Aftertransmittingallprogramdata,you
SeeLoadaPreset(P). mustallowanintervalofapproximately2seconds.
FordetailsrefertotheGlobalmodesectionon
Dump.ForotherMIDIdevices,refertotheir
Load Standard MIDI File ownersmanual.
TheselectedStandardMIDIFilewillbeloadedintothe 2. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
songnumberyouselectastheloadingdestination. withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
LoadStandardMIDIFile********.MIDto Themaximumdatasizethatcanbetransmittedis
1,048,576bytes.
Load .KCD
Theselected.KCDfilewillbeloaded.
1. InSong,selecttheloadingdestinationsong.
2. IfyouturnExclusiveOff(unchecked),any
systemexclusivemessagesoruniversalexclusive
messagesincludedintheSMFdatawillnotbe 1. PresstheOKbuttontoload,orpresstheCancel
loaded. buttontocancelwithoutloading.
IfthisisOn(checked),systemexclusivemessages TheloadedcontentswillbedisplayedintheMake
anduniversalexclusivemessagesincludedinthe AudioCDpage(11).Asthedataisbeingloaded,
SMFdatawillbeloadedasSystemExclusiveevents. theWAVEfilesinthelistwillbechecked,andifa
TheGS/XGsoundmapsandmessagesarenot filedoesnotexist,amessageofFile/Pathnot
supported.Dependingonthecontentofthedata,it foundwillbedisplayed.
maynotplaybackcorrectly,butthedataitselfwill
bemaintainedifExclusiveischecked. Load DX-format .SYX file
TheOASYScanloadsoundscreatedforthevintage
YamahaDX7.Thesesoundswillbeconvertedinto
MOD7Programs.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
IfyouselectanundefinedfileandchooseLoad LoadingDXsoundsonpage 329.
selected,thefilewillbeassumedtobeaStandard
MIDIFile,andtheLoadStandardMIDIFile
dialogboxwillappear.Whenyouexecuteloading,
thefilewillbeloadedintothesongthatwas
768
Loading sample data Byspecifying*or?aswildcardsintheselected

TheexplanationsunderLoad.KSC,Load.KMP,and filename,multiplesamplefilesthathavethesame
Load.KSF,below,explainhowKorgformatPCMdata filenameextension(samefileformat)andexistinthe
filesareloadedintotheOASYSsampleRAM. selecteddirectorycanbeloadedsimultaneously.
About sample RAM

TheamountofRAMavailableforRAMsampleswill
vary,dependingonboththeamountofphysicalRAM,
andwhich(ifany)EXsarecurrentlyinstalled.For
moreinformation,seeSamplingandRAMon
page 621.
Example)Afoldercontainsthefollowingfiles,and
Maximum numbers of Samples and Multisamples youselectSFX_A_00.WAVandspecifywildcardsto
that can be loaded loadmultiplefilessimultaneously
Multisamples:upto1,000 PIANO.WAV
Samples:upto4,000 SFX_A_00.WAV
Samplesusedbymultisamples:upto4,000 SFX_A_01.WAV
SFX_B_00.WAV
About Korg format PCM data files
SFX_B_01.WAV
SFX_C_00.WAV
KSC files
FileswithanfilenameextensionofKSC(KorgScript)
containthenamesof.KMPand.KSFfiles.
Whena.KSCfileisloaded,the.KMPand.KSFfiles
whosenamesitcontainswillalsobeloaded.Thisisa
convenientwaytoloadmultiplemultisamplesand
samplesatonce.
Whensaving,a.KSCfileandadirectorywiththesame
nameasthe.KSCfilewillbecreated.The.KMPfiles
and.KSFfileslistedinthe.KSCfilewillbesavedin
thisdirectory.
KMP files
FileswithafilenameextensionofKMP(Korg
MultisampleParameter)containtheparameterswhich
SelectSFX_A_00.WAV,andchooseLoadselected
makeupasinglemultisample.Theseparametersalso
toopenthedialogbox.
includethefilenameofthe.KSFfilesthatareusedby
thatmultisample,sowhena.KMPfileisloaded,the
necessary.KSFfileswillalsobeloadedatthesame
time.
Whensaving,a.KMPfileandadirectorywiththe
samenamewillbecreated,andthe.KSFfilesusedby
themultisamplewillbesavedinthisdirectory.
Pressthetexteditbutton( )toaccessthetextinput
dialogbox,andspecifythedesiredwildcards.(Forthe
KSF files renamingprocedure,seeOGp.115)
FileswithafilenameextensionofKSF(KorgSample
File)containtheparametersandwaveformdatawhich
makeupasinglesample.
A.KSFfilecanbeusedasoneofthesamplesusedbya
multisample.A.KSFfilecanalsobeselectedandused
asadrumsampleforadrumkit.
Loading multiple files at once

Youcanusewildcardstospecifymultiple.KMP,.KSF,
.AIF,.WAV,AKAIProgram,andAKAISamplefiles,
andloadthemsimultaneously.
Note:IfMultipleSelect(01a)ischecked,youcan
selectmorethanonefileinthedirectoryandloadthem *specifiesthesubsequentcharactersasawild
inasingleoperation. card.
IntheLoaddialogbox,pressthetexteditbuttonto ?specifiesonlyonecharacterasawildcard.
accessthetextinputdialogbox.
769
Disk mode
1. IfyouspecifySFX_A*andexecuteloading,the .PCGfilethatusemultisamplesfromthe.KSCfile
followingfileswillbeloaded. willautomaticallyhavethemultisamplesettingsfor
SFX_A_00.WAV theiroscillatorsrewrittensothateachprogramand
wavesequenceusesthecorrectmultisample.Drum
SFX_A_01.WAV
kitsinthe.PCGfilethatusesamplesfromthe.KSC
2. IfyouspecifySFX_?_00andexecuteloading,the filewillautomaticallyhavethesamplesettingsfor
followingfileswillbeloaded. thedrumkitrewrittensothatthedrumkitusesthe
SFX_A_00.WAV correctsamples.
SFX_B_00.WAV Clear:Allmultisamplesandsamplescurrently
SFX_C_00.WAV existinginsampleRAMwillbecleared,andthe
multisamplesandsampleswillbeloadedinthe
3. IfyouspecifySFX_*_00,theresultwillbethe sameconfigurationaswhentheyweresaved.(See
sameasifyouspecifySFX_*,andthefollowing diagramin.KSCAllocationonpage 763)
fileswillbeloaded.
ChooseAppendifsampleRAMalreadycontains
SFX_A_00.WAV multisamplesandsamplesthatyoudonotwantto
SFX_A_01.WAV erase,andyouwouldliketoloadadditional
SFX_B_00.WAV multisamplesandsamplesfrommedia.
ChooseClearifyouwanttoreproducethestatein
SFX_B_01.WAV
whichthedatahadbeensaved,forexample
SFX_C_00.WAV immediatelyafterpoweron.
4. Ifyouspecify*andexecuteloading,allofthe 2. Ifthecurrentdirectorycontainsa.PCGfile,and
WAVEfileswillbeloadedasfollows. .SNGfileofthesamefilename,youcanselectthe
PIANO.WAV Load********.PCGtoocheckbox,theLoad
SFX_A_00.WAV ********.SNGtoocheckbox,andtheLoad
********.KGEtoocheckbox.
SFX_A_01.WAV
(SeeLoad:.PCG:1)
SFX_B_00.WAV
IfyoucheckLoad********.PCGtoo,the.PCGfile
SFX_B_01.WAV
ofthesamenameasthe.KSCfilewillalsobe
SFX_C_00.WAV loaded.(SeeLoad.PCG:2)
IfyoucheckLoad********.SNGtoo,the.SNGfile
ofthesamenameasthe.KSCfilewillalsobe
Load .KSC
loaded.(SeeLoad.PCG:3)
The.KMPfilesand.KSFfileslistedinthe.KSCfilewill
beloadedasmultisamplesandsamplesrespectively. 3. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
Ifthe.KSFfilesusedbythe.KMPfilearenotinthe
currentdirectoryorbelowit,adialogboxwill
appear,allowingyoutospecifythedirectory.Use
theprocedureIfafiletobeloadedcannotbe
found,(page 761)toloadtherequired.KSFfiles.
SinceoverflowcheckingofsampleRAMis
performedwhenloadingeachindividual.KSFfile,
itispossiblethatanoverflowmayoccurinthe
middleoftheloadingprocess.
Load .KMP
Theselected.KMPfilewillbeloadedasamultisample.
The.KMPfilesand.KSFfileslistedinthe
The.KSFfilesusedbythe.KMPwillalsobeloadedas
.KSCfilearesavedinadirectoryofthesame
samples.
namethatiscreatedautomaticallyatthesame
timeasthe.KSCfile.
1. Select.KSCAllocationallowsyoutospecify
howthemultisamplesandsamplesinthe.KSC
filewillbeloaded.
Append:Thedatawillbeloadedintothenumbers
afterthelastmultisampleorsamplenumber
currentlyexistinginsampleRAM(i.e.,thatwere The.KSFfilesusedbythe.KMPfilewillbe
previouslysampledorloaded).Inthiscase,onlythe savedinanidenticallynameddirectorythat
validmultisamplesandsampleswillbepackedand iscreatedautomaticallywhenthe.KMPfileis
loaded.(Seediagramin.KSCAllocationon created.
page 763) 1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
IfLoad********.PCGtooischeckedwhenyouload withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton.
thedata,programsandwavesequenceswithinthe
770
Sampleswillbeloadedstartingatthefirst Thesamplewillbeloadedafterthelastsamplethat
unoccupiednumberfollowingthelastmultisample currentlyexistsinthesampleRAM(Appendload).
orsamplethatcurrentlyexistsinthesample Note:Youcanloadmultiplefileswithinthedirectory.
memory.Onlyvalidmultisamplesorsampleswill (SeeMultipleSelectonpage 752,Loadingmultiple
bepackedandloaded(Appendload). filesatonceonpage 769)
Ifthe.KSFfilesusedbythe.KMPfilearenotinthe
currentdirectoryorbelowit,adialogboxwill
appear,allowingyoutospecifythedirectory.Use Load .WAV
theprocedureIfafiletobeloadedcannotbe TheselectedWAVEfilewillbeloadedasasample.
found,(page 761)toloadtherequired.KSFfiles.
SincesampleRAMoverflowcheckingisperformed
whenloadingeach.KSFfile,anoverflowmayoccur
duringtheloadingprocess.
Load .KSF
Theselected.KSFfilewillbeloadedasasample.
Thesamplewillbeloadedafterthelastsamplethat
currentlyexistsinthesampleRAM(Appendload).
Note:Youcanloadmultiplefileswithinthedirectory.
(SeeMultipleSelectonpage 752,Loadingmultiple
filesatonceonpage 769)
1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel Loading AKAI S1000/S3000 format Sample files,

withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton. Program files, or Volumes
Thesamplewillbeloadedafterthelastmultisample TheOASYScanloadAKAIS1000/S3000formatSample
orsamplethatcurrentlyexistsinthesampleRAM files,Programfiles,andVolumes.Samplefiledatayou
(Appendload). loadcanbeusedasRAMsamples.
Loading AIFF files and WAVE files WhenyouloadProgramfiledata,settingssuchas

keygroup,keygroupzone,oscillator,pitch,filter,
TheOASYScanloadAIFFformatorWAVEformat amp/pan,andEGaresupported,andcanbe
files,whichareformatsusedtosaveaudiodataon convertedintoaOASYSprogram,orprograms+
personalcomputersetc.Whenthisdatathathasbeen combination.
loaded,itcanbeusedasasampleoradrumsample.
WhenyouloadaVolume,allProgramfilesand
Fileswithanextensionofotherthan.AIF/.WAV SamplefilesincludedintheVolumecanbeloaded
cannotberecognizedasAIFF/WAVEfiles.Inthis together.
case,usetheUtilityRenamemenucommandto
changethelastfourcharactersofthefilenameto AKAIS1000/S3000formatstereoSamplefilesand
.AIF/.WAV ProgramfileswhosenamesendinLandR
canbeloadedintotheOASYSasstereosamples
Ifthedatathatisloadedasasamplecontainsaloop andmultisamples.
point,youcansetStartOffset(Program12a)on Whentheabovefilesareloaded,LandRwill
theOASYSsothatthesoundwillbeginfromthe automaticallybemovedtotheendofthesample
looppoint. nameormultisamplename(23and24character)so
Ifdatawhosesamplesizeis8bitsorlessisloaded, thattheycanautomaticallyberecognizedasstereo
itwillbeconvertedinto16bitdatainsidethe samplesormultisamples.
OASYS.Thiswillmeanthattheamountofinternal
memoryconsumedwillbeapproximatelytwiceas Load AKAI Sample File
largeasthefilesize.Theincreaseinsizeresulting TheselectedSamplewillbeloadedasasample.
fromthisconversionmaymeanthatitisimpossible
tosavethatdataonamedia.
Load .AIF
TheselectedAIFFfilewillbeloadedasasample.
Thesamplewillbeloadedafterthelastsamplethat
currentlyexistsinthesampleRAMbyhavingbeen
sampledorloaded(Appendload).Iftheloaded
dataisthensavedtostoragemedia,itwillbesaved
1. Toloadthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel asaKorgformat.KSFfile.(possibletoexportasa
withoutloading,presstheCancelbutton. .AIF,.WAVformat,ExportSamplesasAIF/WAV)
771
Disk mode
Note:Youcanloadmultiplefileswithinthedirectory. Whenyouexecutethecommand,thecombinations
(SeeMultipleSelectonpage 752,Loadingmultiple thatarecreatedwillbeloadedstartingatthebank
filesatonceonpage 769) andnumberyouspecifyhere.
Ifthedatathatisloadedasasamplecontainsaloop 5. IfyoucheckedAdvancedConversionLoad,use
point,youcansetStartOffset(Program21c)onthe Appendto:Programtospecifythedestination
OASYSsothatthesoundwillbeginfromtheloop bankandnumberoftheprogramthatwillbe
point. createdbytheconvertloadoperation.
Note:Iftheend(19and20characters)ofthesample Whenyouexecutethecommand,theprogramsthat
nameisLandR,theLandRwill arecreatedwillbeloadedstartingatthebankand
automaticallybemovedtotheendoftheOASYSs numberyouspecifyhere.
samplename(23and24characters). Note:Themultisamplesandsamplesthatareloaded
Whenyouloadtwofileswhosesamplenamesare willbeloadedafterthelastmultisampleandsample
identicalexceptforendinginLandR,and currentlyexistinginsampleRAM.TheProgramfiles
assignthemtoastereomultisampleinSampling andSamplefilesloadedatthistimewillbepackedinto
mode,theywillberecognizedasastereosample. availablespaces(Appendload),loadingonlythevalid
data.
Akai S1000/S3000 Loop Conversion
Note:IftheSamplefilesusedbytheProgramfileare
Inrarecases,loopsfromAkaisamplesmayneedtobe
notinthecurrentdirectoryorbelowit,adialogbox
changedwhenloadedintotheOASYS:
willappear,allowingyoutospecifythedirectory.Use
SomeAkaisamplesmaycontainmultipleloops.If theprocedureIfafiletobeloadedcannotbe
thisisthecase,OASYSwillusethefirstHOLD found,(page 761)toloadtherequiredSamplefiles.
loop,ifpresent.IfthereisnoHOLDloop,OASYS
SincesampleRAMoverflowcheckingisperformed
willusethelongestloop.
whenloadingeachsamplefile,anoverflowmay
SomeAkaisamplesmayhavelooplengthswitha occurduringtheloadingprocess.
resolutionoflessthanasinglesample.Inthiscase,
Note:Ifaloadedmultisampleisassignedsamples
OASYSwillroundthelooptothenearestsample.
whosesamplenamesendinLandR,anL
andRwillautomaticallybeaddedtotheend(23
and24characters)ofthemultisamplename.
Load AKAI Program File
Note:Whenyouloadtwomultisampleswhose
TheselectedProgramfilewillbeloadedasaOASYS
multisamplenamesareidenticalexceptforendingin
program,orconvertedandloadedasprograms+
LandR,theywillberecognizedinSampling
combination.Youalsohavetheoptionofloadingonly
modeasastereomultisample.
asmultisamplesandsamples.
DependingonthestructureoftheAKAIProgram,
1. SelectanAKAIProgramfileinthedirectory
thedatamaybeconvertedintotwoormore
window.
programsandonecombinationwhenitisloaded.In
2. SelectthepagemenucommandLoadselectedto thiscase,thenumberofprogramscreatedislimited
openthedialogbox. toamaximumofsixteen(themaximumnumberof
programsusableinacombination),andthe
messageExceeded16Programsmayappear.
Pleasebeawareofthiswhenloadingcomplex
AKAIProgramdata.
Iftheloadingdestinationbankandnumberexceed
USERG127,loadingwillautomaticallystop.
Thedatainthelocationsfollowingthespecified
bank/numberwillberewrittenwhenyouload.If
youwanttokeepthisdata,useSaveAllorSave
PCGbeforeyouloadtheAKAIProgramdata.
3. InAdvancedConversionLoad,selecthowthe
AKAIProgramfilewillbeloaded. Load AKAI Volume
On(checked):Programfileparameterssuchaskey
YoucanloadProgramfilesandSamplefilesinasingle
group,keygroupzone,oscillator,pitch,filter, operationfromaVolumeonanAKAIS1000/S3000
amp/pan,LFO,andEGwillbeconvertedintoa
formatsampleCD.OnAKAIS1000/S3000format
OASYSprogramorprogramsandcombination.
sampleCDs,theProgramfilesandSamplefilesare
Off(unchecked):TheselectedProgramfilewillbe organizedintoPartitionsandVolumes(Seepage 749,
loadedasamultisample.Onlythekeymaprelated diagram)
parameterswithintheProgramfilewillbeloadedto
1. Inthe01:Loadpage,useDriveSelecttoselect
createthemultisample.
theAKAIS1000/S3000formatmedia.
4. IfyoucheckedAdvancedConversionLoad,use
2. Inthedirectorywindow,selectthedesiredAKAI
Appendto:Combinationtospecifythe
S1000/3000formatvolume.
destinationbankandnumberofthecombination
thatwillbecreatedbytheconvertloadoperation. 3. SelectthepagemenucommandLoadselectedto
openthedialogbox.
772
1. Ifyouwanttoloadthe.PCG,.SNG,and.KSCfile
ofthesamenameasthe.KGEfilealongwiththe
.KGEfile,selecttheLoad********.PCGtoo,
Load********.SNGtoo,andLoad********.KSC
toocheckboxes.
IfLoad********.PCGtooisselected,use.PCG
Contentstospecifythebankwithinthe.PCGfile.
(>see1)Load.PCG:step2)
IfLoad********.SNGtooisselected,useSelect
.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowthesongdata
4. IfyoucheckAdvancedConversionLoad,all withinthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.(>see1)Load
Samplefilesincludedintheselectedvolumewill .PCG:step3)
beloadedassamples. IfLoad********.KSCtooisselected,useSelect
Programfilesettingssuchaskeygroup,keygroup .KSCAllocationtospecifyhowthemultisamples
zone,oscillator,pitch,filter,amp/pan,andEGwill andsampleswithinthe.KSCfilewillbeloaded.(
beconvertedintoaOASYSprogram,orinto >see1)Load.PCG:step4)
programsandacombination.(Multisampleswill 2. PresstheOKbuttontoload,orpresstheCancel
alsobeconvertloaded.) buttonifyoudecidenottoload.
Ifyoudontcheckthis,allSamplefilesincludedin
theselectedvolumewillbeloadedassamples,and
theProgramfilewillbeloadedasamultisample. Load GEs
Onlythekeymaprelatedparametersfromthe ThiscommandloadsallGEdatafromthe.KGEfile.
Programfilewillbeloadedtocreateamultisample.
5. IfyoucheckedAdvancedConversionLoad,use
Appendto:Combinationtospecifythe
destinationbankandnumberofthecombination
thatwillbecreatedbytheconvertloadoperation.
Whenyouexecutethecommand,thecombinations
thatarecreatedwillbeloadedstartingatthebank
andnumberyouspecifyhere. 1. PresstheOKbuttontoload,orpresstheCancel
6. IfyoucheckedAdvancedConversionLoad,use buttonifyoudecidenottoload.
Appendto:Programtospecifythedestination
bankandnumberoftheprogramthatwillbe
createdbytheconvertloadoperation. Load GE Bank
Whenyouexecutethecommand,theprogramsthat ThiscommandloadsallGEdatafroma.KGEfile.
arecreatedwillbeloadedstartingatthebankand
numberyouspecifyhere.
USERG127,loadingwillautomaticallystop.
bank/numberwillberewrittenwhenyouload.If
youwanttokeepthisdata,useSaveAllorSave
PCGbeforeyouloadtheAKAIVolumedata. 1. UsetheTofieldtospecifytheloaddestination
bank.
2. PresstheOKbuttontoload,orpresstheCancel
Load .KGE buttonifyoudecidenottoload.
Thiscommandloadsalldatafromthe.KGEfile. Note:IfyoucheckMultipleSelect(01a)andselect
morethanonebank,theywillbeloadedstartingatthe
bankspecifiedbytheTofield.
Load a GE
ThiscommandloadstheselectedGEdataintotheGE
numberyouspecifyastheloaddestination.
773
Disk mode
Theprograms,wavesequences,anddrumkitsthatuse
RAMsamplesandthecombinationsorsongsthatuse
theseprogramswillbeloadedfromthe.PCGfile.All
programsincludedintheloadedcombinationsand
songscanalsobeloaded.
Theapplicableprogramsandcombinationswill
automaticallybeloadedinorderfromthebankand
numberyouspecify.Whenloading,samplenumbers
andprogramnumberswillautomaticallybeadjusted
1. IfyouwanttoloadaGEotherthantheselected sothattheycorrespondcorrectly.
one,usetheGEfield(upperline)toreselectthe
programtobeloaded.Pressthepopupbutton,and Content that will be loaded from the .PCG file
GESelectwillappear. 1. DrumKit:DrumkitsinwhichRAMisselectedfor
2. UsetheToGEfield(lowerline)toselectthe theDrumsampleDS1,2,3,4Bank(Global51b)
loaddestinationbankandprogram.Pressthe ofatleastonekey.
popupbutton,andGESelectwillappear. 2. WavesequencesforwhichtheResourcesBank
Note:IfyoucheckMultipleSelect(01a)andselect (Multisample)(42c)settingofthewave
morethanoneGE,theywillbeloadedstartingatthe sequenceissettoRAMforatleastonestep.
GEspecifiedbytheTofield. 3. Program:ProgramswhoseOscillatorMode
3. PresstheOKbuttontoload,orpresstheCancel (Program11b)issettoDrumsandwhoseDrum
buttonifyoudecidenottoload. Kit(Program21f)meetstheconditions
describedabovein1.
4. ProgramswhoseOscillatorModeissettoeither
Load Templates SingleorDoubleandwhoseOSC1/2
Thiscommandloadsalltemplatedatafromthe.KGE MultisampleMS1,2,3,4Bank(Program21c)
file.Thisisusertemplatedatasuchastherhythm specifies(inatleastonelocation)awavesequence
patternsandCCpatternsusedbyuserGEs. describedaboveinitem2.
5. ProgramswhoseOscillatorModeissettoSingle
orDoubleandwhoseOSC1/2MultisampleMS1,
2,3,4Bank(Program21c)issettoRAMinat
leastonelocation.
6. Combination:CombinationswhoseProgram
Select(Combination01b)issettoaprogramthat
meetstheconditionsdescribedabovein3,4,or5.
1. PresstheOKbuttontoload,orpresstheCancel
buttonifyoudecidenottoload.
Content loaded from the .SNG file
1. Song:SongswhoseProgramSelect(Sequencer
01b)usesprogramsthatmeettheconditions
Load Template Bank describedaboveinparagraphs3,4,or5.of
Contentthatwillbeloadedfromthe.PCGfile
Thiscommandloadsthetemplatedatafromthe
willbeloadedintovacantnumbersstartingfrom
selectedbankintothebankyouspecifyastheload
thenumberafterthelastsongdataininternal
destination.
memory.
Thedatawillbeloadedintovacantlocations
startingafterthelastsongnumber.(See.SNG
Allocationonpage 762)
Numbers that will be reassigned after loading so

that data references correspond correctly:
RAMsamplenumbersusedbyMultisamplesand
1. UsetheTofieldtospecifytheloaddestination DrumKits
bank.
RAMmultisamplenumbersusedbyProgramsand
2. PresstheOKbuttontoload,orpresstheCancel WaveSequences
buttonifyoudecidenottoload.
WaveSequencenumbersusedbyPrograms
Note:IfyoucheckMultipleSelect(01a)andselect
morethanonebank,theywillbeloadedstartingatthe DrumKitnumbersusedbyPrograms
bankspecifiedbytheTofield. Programbanks/numbersusedbyCombinations
Load PCG (RAM) and Samples Programbanks/numbersusedbySongs(ifthereare
patterneventsinatrack,theprogrambank/number
LoadPCG(RAM)andSamplesloadsfroma.PCG
withintheevent)
fileonlytheprograms,wavesequences,drumkits,
combinations,andsongsthatuseRAMsamples.This 1. Selecta.PCGfileinthedirectorywindow.
isusefulwhenyouareeditingprogramsand
combinationsthatuseRAMsamples.
774
Whenyouexecute,onlytheapplicable
combinationswillbeloadedintoconsecutive
numbersstartingatthebankandnumberyou
specifyhere.
6. UseAppendto:Programtospecifytheloading
destinationbankandnumberoftheprogramsin
the.PCGfile.
Whenyouexecute,onlytheapplicableprograms
willbeloadedintoconsecutivenumbersstartingat
thebankandnumberyouspecifyhere.
N127,loadingwillautomaticallystop.
Iftheloaddestinationbankandnumberinsteps5
and6exceedsUSERG127,theloadoperationwill
endautomatically.
2. Selectthiscommandtodisplaythedialogbox.
7. UseAppendto:DrumKittospecifytheloading
Thiscommandwillbeavailableonlyifyouve destinationnumberforthedrumkitsinthe.PCG
selecteda.PCGfile. file.
Whenyouexecute,onlytheapplicabledrumkits
willbeloadedintoconsecutivenumbersstartingat
thenumberyouspecifyhere.
8. UsetheAppendtoWaveSequencefieldto
specifytheloaddestinationnumberforthewave
sequencesinthe.PCGfile.
Whenyouexecutethecommand,onlythevalid
wavesequenceswillbeloadedstartingatthe
numberyouspecify,andoccupyingeach
consecutivenumber.
Iftheloaddestinationbankandnumberinsteps7
and8exceedsUSERG15USERG31respectively,
theloadoperationwillendautomatically.
3. Ifyoualsowanttoloadthe.SNGfileofthesame bank/numberwillberewrittenwhenyouload.If
nameasthe.PCGfile,checktheLoad youwanttokeepthisdata,useSaveAllorSave
********.SNGtoocheckbox. PCGbeforeyouloadthenewdata.
Note:The.KSCfileofthesamefilenameasthe.PCG
9. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthedata.Ifyoudecide
filewillbeloadedtogetherwiththe.PCGfile.Ifthe
nottoload,presstheCancelbutton.
filedoesnotexistinthecurrentdirectory,loadthe
fileasdescribedinIfafiletobeloadedcannotbe Cautions regarding Save
found,orwhenloadingafilethatwassavedacross
mediaonpage 761. WhensavingcombinationswithSaveAll,Save
PCG&SNG,orSavePCG,youshouldalsotryto
4. IfyoucheckLoadROMPrograminCombi/Song
savetheprogramsusedbyeachtimbre(andthe
too,ROMbasedprogramsinthe.PCGfile
drumkits,wavesequencesusedbytheprograms)at
combinationsor.SNGfilesongswillbeloaded
thesametime.
togetherwiththeRAMbasedprograms.
Similarly,whensavingprograms,youshouldalso
Choosethissettingifthecombinationsorsongs
savethedrumkit,wavesequenceusedbythe
beingloadeduseuserprogramsaswellasthe
programandthewavesequenceatthesametime.
preloadedprograms.
Ifyouleavethisunchecked,onlyRAMusing IfmultisamplesorsamplescreatedinSampling
programsinthe.PCGfilecombinationsand.SNG modeareusedinaprogramordrumkit,we
filesongswillbeloaded.Normallyyouwillnot recommendthatyousavethedataasSaveAll.
checkthisifyouareusingpreloadedprogramsin AlsowhenusingSavePCGorSaveSampling
additiontoRAMusingprograms. Datatosaveanindividualprogram,drumkit,or
multisampleorsamplecreatedinSamplingmode,
Note:AllROMbasedprogramsusedbytheloaded werecommendthatyousavethedatainthesame
combinationsandsongswillbeloaded. directorywiththesamefilename.
ProgramdatawhosebanktypeisEXiwillnotbe WhenusingLoadPCGtoloada.PCGfile,the
loaded. .KSCfileofthesamenamewillbeloadedatthe
5. UseAppendto:Combinationtospecifythe sametimesothatthemultisamples/samplesthat
loadingdestinationbankandnumberforthe weresavedwiththeprogramordrumkitwill
combinationsinthe.PCGfile. correspondcorrectly.
775
Disk mode
If the data being saved does not fit on one volume SaveAll(PCG,SNGandKSC)
of media
Whensavinga.PCG,.KSC,.KMP,or.KSFfile,andthe
datadoesnotfitononevolumeofmedia,thedisplay
willaskNospaceavailableonmedium.
2. Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinput
1. Tosavethedataasadividedfileacrosstwoor
dialogbox,andspecifythefilename.
morevolumesofmedia,makesurethatyouhave
therequirednumberofdiscs,andthenpressthe ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecute
OKbuttonintheNospaceavailableonmedium thesavecommand,filesnamedNEWFILE.PCG,
dialogbox.Savingwillbegin. NEWFILE.SNG,NEWFILE.KSC,and
NEWFILE.KGEwillbesavedtothemedia.
Ifyoudecidethatyoudontwanttosaveadivided
file,presstheCancelbutton,andsaveyourdatato 3. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave.
mediathathasmoreavailablespace. Programs,combinations,drumkits,wave
2. Whenavolumeofmediafillsupduringthesave, sequences,anduserGEcanbesavedinunitsof
thefollowingdialogboxwillappear. banks.Informationonthebanktobesavedis
displayedbeloweachSelectionbutton.Banksthat
InsertthenextvolumeofmediaandpresstheLCD
arecheckedwillbesaved.
screentomaketheOASYSdetectthemedia,oruse
DriveSelect(01a)tospecifythesavedestination Ifyouwanttomodifytheselections,pressthe
media. Selectionbuttontoopenthedialogbox,andcheck
thecheckboxesforthedatayouwanttosave.
Example:whentheSelectionbuttonforProgramispressed
IfyoupresstheAllbutton,allbankswillbe
3. PresstheSelectbuttontocontinuesaving.Ifthe checked.
Nospaceavailableonmediumdialogbox
appearsagain,repeatsteps13. IfyoupresstheNothingbutton,allbankswillbe
unchecked.
SavingwillbehaltedifyoupresstheCancelbutton.
Ifyouthenwanttoabortthesaveoperation,press PresstheOKbuttontochangetheselectionsas
theOKbuttoninthedialogbox. specified,orpresstheCancelbuttontodiscardyour
IfyoupresstheSkipbutton,theindicatedfilewill changes.
beskipped,andthenextfilewillbesaved. TospecifywhetherGlobalSettingswillbesaved,
usethecheckboxinstep1.
4. Tosavethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
Save All (PCG, SNG and KSC) withoutsaving,presstheCancelbutton.
Hereshowtosavethefollowingdatafrominternal IfNospaceavailableonmediumdialogboxwill
memorytomedia. appear.RefertoIfthedatabeingsaveddoesnotfit
.PCGfile:Programs,combinations,drumkits,wave ononevolumeofmedia,andusetheprocedure
sequences,globalsettings giventheretosavethedata.
Whenyousave,fileswillbecreatedinthecurrent
.SNGfile:Songs,regiondata
directory.Ifthedatayousaveextendsacrosstwoor
.KSCfile:Multisamplesandsamplescreatedin moremedia,thesefileswillbedivided.Inaddition
Samplingmode tothe.PCG,.SNG,and.KSCfilesthatwillbe
.KGEfile:UserGEs createdwiththespecifiedfilename,onedirectory
willalsobecreated.Thefileslistedin
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectory
NEWFILE.KSCwillbesavedinthisdirectory.
isaDOSdirectory.
Inadditiontothe.PCG,.SNG,.KSC,and.KGEfiles
1. SelectSaveAlltoopenthedialogbox. createdwiththespecifiedfilename,twodirectories
willalsobecreated.
776
Disk: Page Menu Commands Save PCG & SEQ
Onedirectorywillhavethespecified Adirectorywillbecreatedinadditiontothe.PCGand
filenameasitsdirectoryname,andwill .SNGfilescreatedwiththespecifiedfilename.
containthefileslistedin.KSC.(File: Thedirectorywillhave(specified
purple) filename)_Aasitsdirectoryname,andwill
Theotherdirectorywillhave(specified containtheWAVEfilesusedbytheregionsof
filename)_Aasitsdirectoryname,and eachaudiotrackineachsong.(File:red)(See
willcontaintheWAVEfilesusedbythe SaveAll)
regionsofeachaudiotrackineachsong.
(File:red)
Save PCG
Thiscommandsavesallinternalmemoryprograms,
(SNG Name SONG000 ATRACK01 combinations,drumkits,wavesequences,andglobal
6th characters)_A ... ... settingsasa.PCGfile.
SONG000 ATRACK16
isaDOSdirectory.
1. SelectSavePCGtoopenthedialogbox.
SavePCGData
Save PCG & SEQ ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecute
Thiscommandsavesallinternalmemoryprograms, thesavecommand,afilenamedNEWFILE.PCG
combinations,drumkits,wavesequences,andglobal willbesavedtothemedia.
settingsasa.PCGfile,andsavessongsandregions 3. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave.
datatoa.SNGfileonthespecifiedmedia. (Fortheprocedure,see02:SaveAll3)
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectory 4. Tosavethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
isaDOSdirectory. withoutsaving,presstheCancelbutton.
1. SelectSavePCG&SEQtoopenthedialogbox.
SavePCG&SEQData
Save SEQ
Thiscommandsavesallsongsandregionsdatafrom
internalmemoryasa.SNGfile.
isaDOSdirectory.
1. SelectSaveSEQtoopenthedialogbox.
SaveSongsandRegionsData
ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecute
thesavecommand,filesnamedNEWFILE.PCGand 2. Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinput
NEWFILE.SNGwillbesavedtothemedia. dialogbox,andspecifythefilename.
3. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave. ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecute
thesavecommand,afilenamedNEWFILE.SNG
(Fortheprocedure,see02:SaveAll3) willbesavedtothemedia.
4. Tosavethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel 3. Tosavethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
withoutsaving,presstheCancelbutton. withoutsaving,presstheCancelbutton.
777
Disk mode
Adirectorywillbecreatedinadditiontothe.SNGfile Thefilenamewillbethe.KMPfilenameandthe
createdwiththespecifiedfilename. directoryname.
Thedirectorywillhave(specified Initially,thefilenamewillautomaticallybesettothe
filename)_Aasitsdirectoryname,andwill firstfivecharacters(uppercase)ofthesixteen
containtheWAVEfilesusedbytheregionsof charactermultisamplename+themultisample
eachaudiotrackineachsong.(File:red)(See number.
SaveAll) Examples)
000:NewMS______000NEWMS000.KMP
Save Sampling Data 001:108bpmDrLoop00108BP001.KMP
OneSample:Theselectedsamplewillbesavedasa
Whenthiscommandisexecuted,thefollowinglistof
.KSFfile.
multisampleandsampledatawillbesavedtomediaas
Korgformat.KMPfiles,.KSFfiles,anda.KSCfilethat Thefilenamewillbethe.KSFfilenamename.
collectsthesefiles. Initially,thefilenamewillautomaticallybesettothe
ThisisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectoryisaDOS firstfourcharacters(uppercase)ofthesixteen
directory. charactersamplename+thesamplenumber.
Examples)
Multisampleandsampledatarecordedoredited
0000:NewSample_0000NEWS0000.KSF
MultisampleandsampledataloadedinDiskmode
0001:C#3EGuitarC#30001.KSF
Multisampleandsampledataininternalsample
RAM Note:IfyouwishtoexportthedatainAIFF(.AIF)or
WAVE(.WAV)format,selecttheUtilityExport
1. SelectSaveSamplingDatatoopenthedialog SamplesasAIF/WAV.
box.
SaveMultisamplesandSamplesData withoutsaving,presstheCancelbutton.
Note:IfthepagemenucommandTranslationis
turnedon,thenamesof.KMPfilesand.KSFfilesyou
savewillbedisplayedasthemultisamplenameor
samplename.Thisisconvenientwhenyouare
searchingforthedesiredfilesonmedia.
Save User GE
ThiscommandsavesalluserGEsandusertemplate
datafrominternalmemorytomediaasa.KGEfile.
2. Pressthetexteditbuttontomovetothetextdialog
box,andspecifythefilename(OGp.115). ThisisavailableonlyifthecurrentdirectoryisaDOS
3. UseTotospecifythecontentsthatwillbesaved. directory.
(AllcontentwillbesavedinKorgformat.)Usethe 1. ChooseSaveUserGEtoaccessthedialogbox.
followingfiveradiobuttonstomakeyour
selection.
All:Allmultisamplesandsamplesfromthesample
RAMwillbesavedas.KMPfilesand.KSFfiles.
Simultaneously,a.KSCfileandadirectoryto
containthesefileswillalsobecreatedandsaved.
Thefilenamewillbethe.KSCfilenameandthe
directoryname.
AllMultisamples:Allmultisamplesandsamples
2. Usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextentry
(i.e.,samplesusedbythemultisamples)willbe
dialogbox,andspecifyafilename.
savedas.KMPfilesand.KSFfiles.Simultaneously,a
.KSCfileandadirectorytocontainthesefileswill ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethe
alsobecreatedandsaved. save,thefileNEWFILE.PCGwillbesavedtomedia.
Thefilenamewillbethe.KSCfilenameandthe 3. SelecttheGEandtemplatebanksthatyouwantto
directoryname. save.(Fordetails,refertoSaveAll,step3.)
AllSamples:Allsampleswillbesavedas.KSFfiles.
Simultaneously,a.KSCanddirectorytocontain
thesefileswillalsobecreatedandsaved.
Thefilenamewillbethe.KSCfilenameandthe
directoryname.
OneMultisample:Theselectedmultisamplewillbe
savedasa.KMPfile.Simultaneously,adirectory
willalsobecreated,andthesamplesusedbythe
multisamplewillbesavedinthatdirectory.
778
Disk: Page Menu Commands Save to Standard MIDI File
4. PresstheOKbuttontosave,orpresstheCancel 1. WhenyouselectSaveExclusive,theOASYS
buttonifyoudecidenottosave. willwaitforexclusivedatatobereceived.The
followingdialogboxwillappear.
ReceiveandSaveMIDISystemExclusiveData
Save to Standard MIDI File
Thiscommandsavestheselectedsongfrominternal
memorytostoragemediaasa.MIDfile(Standard
MIDIFile).
(ThisappliesonlytoMIDItrackdata.Audiotrackdata
willnotbesaved.)
isaDOSdirectory.
1. SelectSavetoStandardMIDIFiletoopenthe
dialogbox. 2. Transmittheexclusivedatathatyouwishtosave
totheOASYS.
SaveSongasStandardMIDIFile
Whilethedataisbeingreceived,thedisplaywill
indicateStatus=RECEIVINGMIDIDATA.When
receptionends,thesizeofthereceiveddataandthe
sizeoftheremainingfreeareawillberewritten.The
displaywillchangetoStatus=AWAITINGMIDI
DATA,andyoucancontinuetransmitting
exclusivedatatotheOASYS.Duringreception,the
CancelbuttonandtheOKbuttoncannotbepressed.
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinput
withoutsaving,presstheCancelbutton.
2. InSong,sothesongthatyouwishtosave.
3. IfExclusiveisOn(checked),SystemExclusive Save Effect Preset
eventsandUniversalExclusiveeventsincludedin
thesongdatawillbesavedasexclusivemessages. Effectpresetdatawillbesavedtomediaasa.KFXfile.
IfthisisOff(unchecked),systemexclusiveevents ThisisvalidonlyifthecurrentdirectoryisaDOS
anduniversalexclusiveeventsincludedinthesong directory.
datawillnotbesaved. 1. SelectSaveEffectPresettoopenthedialogbox.
4. Usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinput SaveEffectPreset
dialogbox,andspecifythefilename.Bydefault,
thefirsteightcharacters(uppercase)ofthesong
namewillbeassignedautomatically.
5. Usetheradiobuttonstospecifytheformat.
Format0willsavesixteenchannelsofMIDIdata
togetherinasingletrack.
Format1willsaveeachMIDIchanneltoaseparate
track.
6. Tosavethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,
presstheCancelbutton.
Thesongdata(MIDItrackdata)yousaveherecan 2. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetextinput
beplayedbackonadevicethatsupportsStandard dialogbox,andspecifyafilename.
MIDIFiles.Howeverifyouintendtoplaybackthe
ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandthen
dataontheOASYS,werecommendthatyouuse
execute,NEWFILE.KFXwillbesavedtomedia.
SaveSEQtosavethedata,sincethiswillallowa
higherdegreeofreproducibility. 3. Specifythecontentsthatwillbesaved.Choose
oneofthefollowingfiveradiobuttons.
All:Presetdata(P01P15andU00U15)forall
Save Exclusive effectswillbesavedasa.KFXfile.
Accumulatesthereceivedexclusivedataininternal AllPreset:PresetdataP01P15foralleffectswillbe
memory,andthensavethedatatomediaasan.EXL savedasa.KFXfile.
file. AllUser:PresetdataU01U15foralleffectswillbe
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectory savedasa.KFXfile.
isaDOSdirectory. OneEffect:Onlythepresetdataoftheselected
effectwillbesavedasa.KFXfile.Ifyoucheck
779
Disk mode
Preset,P01P15willbesaved;ifyoucheckUser, Itwillnotbepossibletospecifythefilename.The
U01U15willbesaved. filenamewillautomaticallybeassignedasthefirst
4. PresstheOKbuttontosavethedata,orpressthe fourcharacters(uppercase)ofthesixteencharacter
Cancelbuttontocancelwithoutsaving. samplename+thesamplenumber.
Examples)
0000:NewSample_0000NEWS0000.AIF
Export Samples as AIF/WAV
0001:C#3EGuitarC#30001.WAV
SampledatainsampleRAMthatwasrecordedor SamplesinOneMS:Allsamplesusedbythe
editedinSamplingmode,orloadedinMediamode, selectedmultisamplewillbeexported.
canbeexported(written)tomediaasanAIFFor
Onlyfivecharactersofthefilenamecanbespecified.
WAVEformatsamplefile.
Thefivecharacterfilename+theindexnumber
ThisisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectoryisaDOS (001128)inthemultisamplewillbeassigned
directory. automatically.
Note:Normally,itisrecommendedthatyouuseSave Initially,thefilenamewillautomaticallybesettothe
AllorSaveSamplingDatatosavesampledatainKorg firstfivecharacters(uppercase)ofthesixteen
format(.KSC,.KMP,.KSF).Thiswillallowyoutosave charactermultisamplename.
thedatainawaythatpreservesthestateofthe Examples)
multisamples(andthesamplesthattheyuse)asthey
existinsampleRAM. 000:NewMS___000:
Sampleselectedforindex001MS000001.AIF
UseExportSamplesasAIF/WAVifyouwishtouse
anAIFForWAVEformatcompatibleapplicationon Sampleselectedforindex002MS000002.AIF
yourcomputertoworkwithsamplesthatwere 001:108bpmDrLoop00:
recordedoreditedontheOASYS. Sampleselectedforindex001MS001001.AIF
ExportSamplesasAIF/WAVdoesnotexport
multisamplefiles.TheexportedAIFForWAVEformat Sampleselectedforindex002MS001002.AIF
samplescanbereloaded,butifthesamplenumber WhenexportingAllSamplesorSamplesinOneMS,
whensavingisdifferentthanthesamplenumberwhen andallofthesampledatadoesnotfitonone
loading,youmayneedtoremakecertainsettings, volumeofmedia,anotherdialogboxwillappear,
suchasselectingthesampleforeachindexofa directingyoutospecifythenextmedia.(SeeIfthe
multisample. databeingsaveddoesnotfitononevolumeof
Furthermore,thefollowingparameterssetinSampling mediaonpage 776)Howeveratthistimeifasingle
modearelostbyExportSamplesasAIF/WAV. sampleislargerthanthecapacityofthemedia,the
samplecannotbeexported.Eitherspecifymedia
SampleName withalargercapacity,orpressSkipbuttontoomit
LoopTune(Sampling21d,LoopTune) exportingthatsampleandproceedtoexportingthe
nextsample.
Reverse(Sampling21d,Reverse)
OneSample:Thesingleselectedsamplewillbe
+12dB(Sampling21d)
exported.
SamplesthatarehandledbytheOASYSasstereowill
Thefilenamewillbethefilenameofthe.AIFor
beexportedastwoindependentLandRfiles.
.WAVfile.Initially,thefilenamewillautomatically
1. SelectExportSamplesasAIF/WAVtoopenthe besettothefirstfourcharacters(uppercase)ofthe
dialogbox. sixteencharactersamplename+thesample
ExportSamplesasAIFF/WAVE number.
WhenexportingOneSample,itisnotpossibleto
exportsampledatathatwillnotfitononevolume
ofmedia.
5. Toexportthedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
withoutexporting,presstheCancelbutton.
Save Audio CD Track List

ThiscommandsavesanaudioCDtracklistthatyou
createdintheMakeAudioCDpage.Thedriveand
directorylocationsthatcontaineachWAVEfile,and
2. InFormat,selecteitherAIFForWAVEasthefile thenamesoftheWAVEfileswillbesaved.
formatforexport. Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectory
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontomovetothetextdialog isaDOSdirectory.
box,andspecifythefilename. 1. SelectSaveAudioCDTrackListtoopenthe
4. InTo,specifythecontentthatwillbeexported. dialogbox.
AllSamples:Allsampleswillbeexported.
780
Disk: Page Menu Commands Rename
(Canuse*/?asWildcard):Whenyouusethetext
editbuttontoaccessthetextinputdialogboxand
specifythenameofthefileordirectorytobecopied,
youcanuse*and?charactersaswildcards.For
example,ifintheaboveexampleyouspecify
PRELOAD1.*(insteadofPRELOAD1.PCG),all
filenamesofPRELOAD1.withanyfilename
extensionwillbecopiedatthesametime:i.e.,
PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD1.SNG,
ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandsave, PRELOAD1.KSC,
NEWFILE.KCDwillbesavedtothemedia.
Example)
3. PresstheOKbuttontosave,orpresstheCancel
PRELOAD1.*:PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD1.SNG,
buttontocancelwithoutsaving.
PRELOAD1.KSC,
PRELOAD?.PCG:PRELOAD1.PCG,
Rename PRELOAD2.PCG,PRELOAD3.PCG,
Whenwildcardsareused,onlyfileswillbesubject
Thiscommandrenamestheselectedfileordirectory.
tocopying.Directorieswillnotbecopied.
ThiscommandisvalidonlywhenaDOSfileoraDOS
directoryisselected.
selectmorethanonefileandloadtheminasingle
1. Selectthefileordirectorywhosenameyouwant operation.
toedit.
4. UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontoselectthe
2. SelectRenametoopenthedialogbox. copydestinationdirectory.
IfyouwishtospecifyadifferentUSBdevice,use
DriveSelect(01a)toselectit.
5. Ifyouwishtocopythefileordirectorywitha
differentname,usethetexteditbutton(inthe
lowerline)toaccessthetextinputdialogbox,and
specifythenamewithwhichthefileordirectory
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinput willbecopied.
dialogbox,andmodifythename. Youcantchangethefilenamesifyoureusingwild
4. Torenamethefileordirectory,presstheOK cardsortheMultipleSelectfunctiontocopytwoor
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. morefilessimultaneously.
6. Tocopythedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
withoutcopying,presstheCancelbutton.
Copy
Note:Ifyoudecidenottocopy,presstheAbortbutton.
ThiscommandisvalidonlywhenaDOSfileoraDOS
IfthedrivethatyouselectedinDriveSelectis
directoryisselected.
removabledisk(floppydisk,CDR/RW,MOdisc,
1. Selectthefileordirectorythatyouwanttocopy. removableharddisketc.),itisnotpossibletocopy
2. SelectCopytoopenthedialogbox. todifferentmediaonthesamedrive.
Delete
Thiscommanddeletestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlyifaDOSfileordirectoryis
selected.
1. Selectthefileordirectorythatyouwanttodelete.
2. SelectDeletetoopenthedialogbox.
3. Copywillshowthenameoftheselectedfileor
directory. 3. Deletewillindicatethenameoftheselectedfile
ordirectory.
Ifyouwishtochangethefileordirectorythatwill
becopied,usethetexteditbuttontomovetothe Ifyouwishtochangethefileordirectorythatisto
textinputdialogbox,andspecifythefilenamethat bedeleted,usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetext
youwishtocopy. inputdialogbox,andspecifythenameofthefileor
directorythatyouwishtodelete.
781
Disk mode
(Canuse*/?asWildcard):Whenyouusethetext 1. SelectSetDate/Timetoopenthedialogbox.
editbuttontoaccessthetextinputdialogboxand
specifythenameofthefiletobedeleted,youcan
usethe*or?charactersaswildcards.This
allowsyoutosimultaneouslydeletemultiplefiles
withidenticalfilenamesanddifferentextensions,or
fileswhosenamesarepartiallyidentical.
Whenwildcardsareused,onlyfileswillbesubject
todeletion.Directorieswillnotbedeleted.
2. Seteachparameter.
selectmorethanonefileanddeletetheminasingle Year 19802037
operation. Month 112
4. Todeletetheselectedfileordirectory,pressthe Day 131
OKbutton.Tocancelwithoutdeleting,pressthe Hour 023
Cancelbutton. Minute 059
Second 059
3. Tosetthedateandtime,presstheOKbutton.To
Delete Unused WAV Files cancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Allsounds(WAVEfiles)notusedbythe.SNGfilewill
bedeletedfromtheharddiskorothermedia,andthe
regiondataofthe.SNGfilewillalsobedeleted.By Format
executingthiswhenyouarerunninglowonharddisk Thiscommandformatstheselectedmedia.The
space,youcanfreeupspacebydeletingunusedfiles. volumelabel(anamefortheentiremedia)youspecify
1. Selectthe.SNGfileforwhichyouwanttodelete willbeassignedtothemedia.Thevolumelabelyou
unusedsounds. assignherewillbedisplayedinDriveSelect(01a).
2. AccesstheDeleteUnusedWAVFilesdialogbox. Thevolumelabelcanbeamaximumofeleven
characters.
Whenyouformat,alldatasavedonthatmediawill
beerased.Ifyouhadusedacomputeretc.tosetup
thatdrivesothatitcanbeusedasmultipledrives
(partitions),thisdatawillalsobeerased.Besureto
doublecheckbeforeyouformat.
Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe
3. Toexecutethedeletionofunusedsounds,press COMPAREswitchtoreturntothepreviousstate.
theOKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,press
1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis
theCancelbutton.
inserted.
Youcannotreverttothepriorstatebypressingthe
2. UseDriveSelecttoselectthemediathatwillbe
COMPAREswitchafterexecutingthisoperation.
formatted.
3. SelectFormattoopenthedialogbox.
Create Directory
Thiscommandcreatesanewdirectorywithinthe
currentdirectory.
1. SelectCreateDirectorytoopenthedialogbox.
4. InVolumeLabel,usethetexteditbuttonto
accessthetextinputdialogbox,andspecifythe
volumelabel.
2. Usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinput
Thepreviouslyspecifiedvolumelabelwillbe
dialogbox,andspecifythenameofthenew
displayed.Ifnovolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedfor
directory.
themedia,orifanonDOSmediawasinserted,this
3. Tocreatethedirectory,presstheOKbutton.To willindicateNEWVOLUME.
cancelwithoutcreatingthedirectory,pressthe
5. Specifytheinitializationformat.
Cancelbutton.
QuickFormat:NormallyyoushoulduseQuick
Formattoinitializethemedia.
Set Date/Time Selectthisifthemediahasalreadybeenphysically
ThiscommandsetsthedateandtimeoftheOASYSs formatted,orifyouwanttoformatmediathathas
internalcalendar. beenUDFformattedbytheOASYS.Sinceonlythe
782
Disk: Page Menu Commands Convert to ISO9660 Format
systemareaofthemedianeedbeformatted,this WhenyouusetheMakeAudioCDpagetowritea
willrequirelesstime. WAVEfiletoanaudioCD,48kHzfileswill
FullFormat:Selectthiswhenformattingmediathat automaticallybeconvertedto44.1kHz.
hasnotbeenphysicallyformatted,ormedia(CD 1. Selectthefileordirectorywhosesamplingrate
RW)thathasnotbeenUDFformatted. (frequency)youwanttoconvert.
Note:Fortheinternalharddiskyoucanonlyselect 2. SelectRateConverttoopenthedialogbox.
QuickFormat.Also,thefilesystemselectionof
FAT16orFAT32instep6isnotavailable.
Note:Normally,itisnotnecessarytoperformaFull
Formatonmediathathasbeenphysicallyformatted
at512bytes/block.ExecutetheQuickFormatfor
suchmedia.
Note:YouwillnormallyselectFullFormatforCD
RWmediaetc.thathasnotbeenUDFformatted.If
anerrormessageofMedianotformattedappears,
executeFullFormat.Dependingonthecapacityof
themedia,executingFullFormatmayrequirea
substantiallengthoftime.
6. Specifythefilesystem.
FAT16canformatamaximumof4Gigabytes.Ifyou
areusingmedialargerthanthis.,useFAT32format RateConvertwillindicatethenameofthe
instead.(FAT32sthetheoreticalmaximumis2 selectedfile.
Terabytes,or2,000Gigabytes.)
3. UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontoselectthe
7. Toformatthemedia,presstheOKbutton.To savedestinationdirectory.
cancelwithoutformatting,presstheCancel
IfyouwanttospecifyanotherUSBdevice,use
button.
DriveSelecttospecifyit.
Note:IfyouwanttouseaCDR/RWforwriting
4. Ifyouwanttochangethefilenameforsaving,
packetdata,youmustformatit.Ifyouwillbeusing
pressthetexteditbuttoninthelowerlinetoaccess
itasanaudioCD,formattingisnotnecessary.
thetextinputdialogbox,andspecifythefilename
forsaving.
Convert to ISO9660 Format 5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheRateConvert
ThiscommandconvertsUDFformatCDRmediato withoutexecuting.
ISO9660format.
IfafilethatwassavedbytheOASYStoCDRistobe
loadedbyanotherdevice,youmustexecutethis Check Medium
commandtoconvertittoISO9660format. ThiscommandcheckstheselectedMSDOSformat
Thisconversiontemporarilyusesmemoryspaceonthe mediaforerrors,andcorrectsthem.Executethis
harddisk. commandifyoufrequentlyexperiencemessagessuch
1. SelectConverttoISO9660Formattoopenthe asErrorinwritingtomediumwhilewritingto
dialogbox. media,orBufferoverrunerroroccurredwhile
samplingtomedia.
Note:Executingthiscommandonmediathatusesflash
memory(e.g.,CompactFlashorSmartMedia,butnota
Microdrive)willhavenoeffect.
1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttocheckhas
2. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheconversion,or beeninserted.
presstheCancelbuttontocancelwithout 2. UseDriveSelecttoselectthemediathatyou
executing. wanttocheck.
EvenifdataisconvertedintoISO9660format,some 3. SelectCheckMediumtoopenthedialogbox.
filesmaynotbereadablebycertaindevices.
Rate Convert
Thiscommandconvertsthesamplingrate(frequency)
oftheselectedWAVEfilefrom48kHzto44.1kHzor
44.1kHzto48kHz.
Thisisvalidonlywhena48kHzor44.1kHzWAVEfile 4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecheck,orpress
isselected. theCancelbuttontocancel.
783
Disk mode
5. Whencheckinghasbeencompleted,therecovered 3. UseSpeedtospecifythewritingspeed.The
contentwillbedisplayed. writingspeedssupportedbyyourCDR/RWdrive
Note:Ifyouwanttostopthecheckingprocessbefore willbedisplayed.
ithasbeencompleted,presstheAbortbutton. Beawarethatifyoursystemhasaslowerdata
Checkingwillrequireapproximately80minutesfor transferrate,usinganexcessivelyfastwritingspeed
20Gigabyte(FAT32)media,butthetimerequired willproducewritingerrors.Dependingonthedrive
willvarydependingonthemediacapacityandon youareusing,problemswiththespeedmaymakeit
thenumberoferrorsthatarefound. impossibletowrite,butyoucanperformatest
beforehandtoidentifysuchproblems.Itisagood
ideatoperformatestwritewhenyouwriteforthe
Scan device firsttime,toverifythespeedlimitationsofyour
drive.
ThiscommandmountsaUSBdevice.
IftheaudioCDtracklistcontainsWAVEfiles
1. SelectScandevice.
locatedonanexternalUSB1.1typeharddisk,
ThecurrentlyconnectedUSBdeviceswillbere writingerrorsmayoccurevenifyouspecifythe
scanned.Oncescanningiscompleted,anyvalid slowestwritingspeed.Ifthisoccurs,copythe
USBdevicecanbeselectedinDriveSelect. WAVEfilestotheinternalharddisk,andchangethe
audioCDtracklistsothatitusesthecopiedWAVE
filelocatedontheinternalharddisk.
Swap Track
UseModetospecifythewritingmethod.
Thiscommandexchanges(swaps)theorderoftwo
Test:Testswhetherthedatacanbewrittencorrectly.
audioCDtracks.
DatawillnotactuallybewrittentotheCDR/RW
1. SelectSwapTracktoopenthedialogbox. media,butallotherprocessingwilloccurjustasif
datawereactuallybeingwritten.Usethiswhenyou
wanttocheckwhetherwritingcanbeperformed
correctly.Ifanerroroccurs,thedisplaywillindicate
Errorinwritingtomedium.
TestandWrite:Atestwritewillbeperformed,and
ifthetestissuccessful,thediscwillactuallybe
written.Werecommendthatyouusethismethod
2. UseSource1andSource2toselectthetwo
forfastwritingspeeds.
audioCDtracksthatyouwanttoexchange.
Write:Themediawillonlybewritten.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSwapTrack
operation,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel 4. SpecifywhethertheCDR/RWmediawillbe
withoutexecuting. finalizedaftertheaudioCDtrackshavebeen
writtentoit.
IfExecutefinalizetooischecked,thediscwillbe
Write to CD finalized.
Whenthiscommandisexecuted,theWAVEfiles Ifthisisnotchecked,thediscwillnotbefinalized.
specifiedintheaudioCDtracklistwillbewrittenas Note:Ifyouwantonlytofinalizethedisc,use
audioCDtracks.Ifdesired,youcanalsofinalizethe FinalizeAudioCD.
discatthistime. 5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutewritingortest
WhenwritingdatatoCDR/RWmedia,themedia writingtotheCDR/RWmedia,orpressthe
containingtheWavefilesmusthavefreespace Cancelbuttontocancelwithoutexecuting.
equalinsizetotheWavefilesyouarewriting. WAVEfileswitha48kHzsamplingfrequencywill
Beforeyouexecutethisoperation,makesurethat beconvertedto44.1kHzwhentheyarewritten.
thedrivecontainingtheWavefilescontainsenough
freespace. Inorderforthisprocessingtobeperformed,free
spaceofapproximatelythesamesizeastheWAVE
1. CreateanaudioCDtracklist,useDriveSelectto filetobeconvertedwillberequiredonthedrive
selecttheCDR/RWdrive,andmakesurethatCD thatcontainstheWAVEfile.Beforeexecuting,
R/RWmediaisinsertedinthedrive. pleasemakesurethatthedrivecontainingthe
2. SelectWritetoCDtoopenthedialogbox. WAVEfilehasenoughfreespace.
Note:Ifthetrackisshorterthan4seconds,silencewill
beautomaticallyaddedtoincreasethelengthto4
seconds.
Note:Twosecondsofsilencewillbeaddedtotheend
ofeachtrackexceptthelasttrack.
Finalize Audio CD
ThiscommandfinalizesCDR/RWmediatowhich
audioCDtrackshavealreadybeenwritten.
784
Disk: Page Menu Commands Erase CD-RW
1. UseDriveSelecttoselectthedrive,andmake
surethatthedrivecontainsvalidmedia.
2. SelectFinalizeAudioCDtoopenthedialog
box.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheFinalize
withoutexecuting.
Erase CD-RW
ThiscommanderasestheaudioCDtracksfromCD
RWmedia.
1. UseDriveSelecttoselectthedrive,andmake
surethatitcontainsdata.
2. SelectEraseCDRWtoopenthedialogbox.
3. SelectthemodebywhichtheaudioCDtrackswill
beerased.
QuickErase:Normallyyouwillselectthis.
FullErase:Thedatawillbeerasedcompletely.
Substantialtimewillberequiredfortheerasure.
WhenyouexecuteQuickErase,thefilesanddata
willappeartobegone,butthedataitselfwill
remainonthediscuntilitisoverwritten.Ifyou
wanttoerasedatathatshouldnotbeseenby
someoneelse,executeFullErasetoerasethedata
completely.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheErase
operation,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel
withoutexecuting.
785
Disk mode
786
Effect Guide
Overview
TheOASYSprovides12inserteffects,twomaster Cho/Fln/Phs: Pitch and phase modulation effects such as
effects,andtwototaleffects,togetherwithamixer 040054 chorus and flanger
sectionthatcontrolstheroutingoftheseeffects.
Mod/P.Shift: Other modulation effects such as tremolo and
Foreachoftheseeffectprocessors,youcanchoose 055076 rotary speaker, and pitch shifters
from185differenttypesofeffects,groupedintothe
followingcategories: Delay:
Delays
077099
Effects categories
Reverb/ER:
Reverb and early reflections
Dynamics: Dynamics-type effects such as compressor and 100108
000010 limiter
Mono-Mono: Mono & Mono chain effects that internally
EQ/Filter: 109140 connect two mono effects in series
Filter-type effects such as EQ, exciter, and wah
011026
Mono & Mono parallel effects that allow two
Mono/Mono:
OD/Amp/Mic: Overdrive effects and modeling effects such as mono effects to be applied to L and R
141185
027039 guitar/bass amps and mics independently
About effects resources

Note:thedisplayedvaluesareroundedtotheclosest
Background information 1%,buttheinternalvalueshaveamuchfiner
Mosthardwaresynthesizersofferasingle,fixed resolution.Thismeansthatyoumaysometimesaddan
methodofsynthesis,apredeterminednumberof effect,butseenochangeintheresourcemeter.
voices,andafixedamountofeffectsprocessingpower.
FX
OASYSisdifferent;ithasnofixedsynthesismethod,
anditsharesitsprocessingpowerbetweenvoicesand Thisshowsthepercentageofthetotalprocessing
effects. powerbeingusedfortheIFX,MFX,andTFX.Thiswill
varydependingonthespecificeffectsbeingused.
Thisflexibilitymeansthatthesystemcandeliver
powerwhereyouneeditthemost.Forinstance,one IfaneffecthasbeenassignedtoanIFX,MFX,orTFX,it
Programmayneedabunchofvoiceslayeredtogether, willtakeupthesameamountofprocessingresources
butnotmanyeffects;anothermightneedcomplex evenifitisturnedOfforbypassed.Ifyouwanttofree
effectsprocessing,butnotasmanyvoices.Inboth uptheprocessingresources,changetheselectionto
cases,OASYSwillautomaticallydivideitsprocessing 000:NoEffect.
powerappropriately.
EXi FIXED
Unlikemostcomputerbasedsystems,OASYSalso Thisshowsthepercentageofthetotalprocessing
monitorstheoverallprocessingpower,reducingthe powerusedforthefixedcomponentsofEXi
overallnumberofvoicesifnecessary,tomakesurethat instruments.FixedmeansthatpartoftheEXistarts
thereareneverproblemswiththeaudio. usingprocessingpowerassoonastheEXiisloaded,
Normally,youshouldntneedtothinkaboutthisatall; beforeplayinganynotes;thisincludesthebuiltin
itwilljusthappenautomatically.Sometimes,however, effectsoftheCX3,forexample.
itcanbeconvenienttoknowhowthesystemis OnlysomeEXiincludefixedcomponents;forinstance,
allocatingitsresources.TheEffect/EXiResourceMeter, theCX3andSTR1do,buttheAL1doesnot.For
shownontheP8:InsertEffectInsertFX,TrackView informationonotherEXi,seetheirindividual
andP9:MasterEffectRoutingpagesofeachmode, documentation.
providesthisinformation.
FormoreinformationonEXifixedresources,please
seeCX3&STR1:LimitationsonEXifixedresources
Effect/EXi Fixed Resource Meter onpage 382.
FREE FOR VOICES

Thisshowsthepercentageofthetotalprocessing
powerremainingaftertheFXandEXifixed
TheresourcemetershowshowtheOASYSprocessing components.Thispowerisavailableforplaying
powerisbeingused,asanapproximatepercentageof synthesizervoices.
thetotalavailablepower.Therearethreemain
categories:FX,EXiFixed,andFreeforVoices.
787
Effect Guide
WhenFREEFORVOICESisat100%,youcanachieve Note:Aswiththemeterasawhole,thenumbershown
themaximumpolyphonyforinstance,172voicesof inFREEFORVOICESisonlyanapproximation.For
theHD1,96voicesoftheAL1,or172voicesofthe example,ifFREEFORVOICESisshowing98,the
CX3.WhenmoreeffectsorEXifixedresourcesare maximumpolyphonyfortheHD1maynotbeexactly
beingused,polyphonywillbereducedaccordingly. 172 0.98(approximately168).
Themaximumpolyphonywillalsodependonvarious
otherparameters;formoreinformation,seeAnote
aboutpolyphonyonpage 33.
Effects in each mode

Program mode Thenyoucanusethemastereffectstocreateoverall
ambience,andusethetotaleffectstomakefinal
WithHD1Programs,youcanuseinserteffectsto adjustments.
processthefinalsoundinthesamewaythatyouuse
theFilter,Driver,Amplifier,andEQ(equalizer)to InCombinationmodeyoucanmakethesesettingsfor
processthesoundfromtheoscillators(OSC1&2). eachcombination,andinSequencermodeyoucan
Thenthemastereffectsareusedtocreateoverall makethemforeachsong.
ambiencesuchasreverb,andusethetotaleffectsto InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor
makefinaladjustments.Allofthesesettingscanbe modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges,
madeindependentlyforeachprogram.EXiPrograms sothateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffect
haveadifferentfilterandampstructureforeachtype, parameterswillbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesong
butyoucanalsoapplyinserteffects,mastereffects, playsback.
andtotaleffectstotheoscillators(EXi1&2),justasfora
PCMprogram. Sampling mode
InSamplingmode,externalaudiosourcesfrom
Combination, Sequencer mode
AUDIOINPUT1,2,3,4,andS/P DIFINjacksorthe
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusethe playbackfromtheinternalCDR/RWdriveoraUSB
trackEQandinserteffectstoprocesstheprogram connectedCDdrivecanbeprocessedbyinserteffects,
sound(andaudiotracksound)ofeachtimbre/track. mastereffects,andtotaleffects,andthensampled.Use
Programmode:BankTypePCM
Send Return
Oscillator1 Filter1 Driver1 Amplifier1 Master Effect 1, 2
OUTPUT
Oscillator2 Filter2 Driver2 Amplifier2 EQ Insert Effect 112 Total Effect 112
L/MONO, R
Combinationmode,Sequencermode
Send Return
Master Effect 1, 2
OUTPUT
Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1 EQ Insert Effect 112 Total Effect 112
L/MONO, R
Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16 EQ
Audio Track 1 EQ
Audio Track 16 EQ
Samplingmode
Send Return
Master Effect 1, 2
AUDIO INPUT (1, 2,3, 4) Sample

Insert Effect 112 Total Effect 112
Recording
S/P DIF IN (L, R)
Audio CD
Send Return
Master Effect 1, 2
Oscillator EQ Insert Effect 112 Total Effect 112 Resampling
788
Overview Dynamic modulation (Dmod) and Tempo Synchronization
AudioInput(settoProgrammode)
Send Return
Oscillator1 Filter1 Driver1 Amplifier1 Master Effect 1, 2
OUTPUT
Oscillator2 Filter2 Driver2 Amplifier2 EQ Insert Effect 112 Total Effect 112
L/MONO, R
AUDIO INPUT (1, 2, 3, 4)

S/P DIF IN (L, R)
theP0:RecordingAudioInputpagetomakeaudio InSequencermodeyoucanalsousetheeffectswhen
inputsettingsforSamplingmode.Thesesettingsapply recordingexternalaudiosourcestoaudiotracks.
onlytoSamplingmode. Wheneffectsareappliedtotheexternalinputsound
Samplesthatyouveassignedasamultisamplecan fromtheAUDIOINPUT1,2,3,4,andS/P DIFIN
alsobeprocessedbytheinserteffects,mastereffects, jacks,certaineffecttypesorparametersettingsmay
andtotaleffects,andthenresampled. causeoscillationtooccur.Ifthisoccurs,adjustthe
inputlevel,outputlevel,oreffectparameters.Please
Audio Input beawareofthisparticularlywhenusinganeffect
YoucanalsoinputaudiosourcesfromAUDIOINPUT thathasahighgain.
1,2,3,4,andS/P DIFINjacksinmodesotherthan UsetheP0AudioInput/Samplingpageofeachmode
Samplingmode(i.e.,inProgram,Combination,and tomakeaudioinputsettings.Alternatively,youcan
Sequencermodes). checkUseGlobalSettingandmakethesesettingsin
Youcanapplytheinserteffects,mastereffects,and theGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetupAudiopage.
totaleffectstoexternalaudiosourcesfromthesejacks NormallyyouwillleaveUseGlobalSettingchecked.
andsamplethem,orusetheOASYSasa6in(AUDIO Uncheckthisifyouwantprogramsandcombinations
INPUT1,2,3,4,S/P DIFINL,R)10outeffect tousetheirownsettingsforexample,whenwritinga
processor.Youcanalsouseanexternalmicinputto programtouseasavocodereffect.
controlavocodereffect(026:Vocoder)appliedto
internalsounds.
Dynamic modulation (Dmod) and Tempo Synchronization

TosettheLFOtoaspecifictempo,separatefromthe
Dynamic modulation (Dmod) systemclock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between
Dynamicmodulationletsyoucontrolcertaineffects 40and240BPM).
parametersinrealtime,usingeitherthebuiltin 3. UsetheBaseNoteandTimes(x)parameterstoset
controllersorMIDI.Theseeffectparametersare therhythmicvalueoftheLFO.
markedwiththelogo . Forinstance,ifyousetBaseNoteto1/8andTimes(x)
Formoreinformation,seeDynamicModulation to2,eachcycleoftheLFOwilllastforaquarternote
Sources(Dmod)onpage 1030. (twoeighthnotes).
BPM/MIDI Sync: LFO

Tempo Synchronization LFO
Youcansynchronizesomeeffectsparameters,suchas
LFOspeedsanddelaytimes,tothesystemtempo.This
letsyousynctheeffectstoProgramLFOs,step
sequencers,WaveSequences,VectorEnvelope,
KARMA,theinternalsequencer,andexternalMIDI
clocks. Synchronizing Delay Times
DelayswithBPMintheirtitlewillsynctotempo.
Theseeffectsparametersaremarkedwiththelogo
. Forinstance,youmightsetupeffect093:StereoBPM
Delayasfollows:
Synchronizing LFOs
1. SetLDelayBaseNoteto1/8,andTimes(x)to1
MosteffectswithLFOs,suchas016:StereoWah/Auto
2. SetRDelayBaseNoteto1/16,andTimes(x)to3
Wah,canbesynchronizedtotempo.Thisappliestothe
individualeffectsLFOs,andalsotheCommonFX Thismeansthattheleftchannelwillbedelayedbyan
LFO. eighthnote,andtherightchannelwillbedelayedbya
dottedeighthnote(threesixteenthnotes).
TosetupLFOstosynchronizetotempo:
1. SetMIDI/TempoSynctoOn.
2. SettheBPMasdesired.
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI.
789
Effect Guide
Tosetthedelaystoaspecifictempo,separatefromthe
BPM/MIDI Sync: Delay Time
Dry Wet systemclock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between
40and240BPM).
Lch
Ifthecombinationofthetempo,BaseNote,andTimes
Dry Wet
(x)settingsinconjunctionwouldexceedthemaximum
delaytime,awarningsuchasTimeOver?>OVER!
Rch
willappearinthedisplay.Ifthishappens,justreduce
thedelaytime.Notethatthemaximumdelaytime
dependsonwhichdelayeffectyoureusing.For
3. SettheBPMasdesired. instance,themaximumdelaytimefor093:StereoBPM
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI. Delayis1,360msec,whilethemaximumdelaytimefor
094:StereoBPMLongDelayis2,730msec.
Common FX LFOs
Normally,LFObasedeffectssuchaschoruses, LFOspeedsetbyeitherfrequencyortempo
flangers,phasers,filters,andautopaneachhavetheir ResetfromDmodsources,foreitherrealtime
ownindependentLFO.TheOASYSeffectssupportthis performanceorsynchronizingtoadownbeatina
standardmechanism,butaddanewone:CommonFX sequence
LFOs.
WhenusingtheCommonFXLFOs,youcanstill
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize controltheLFOphaseindividuallyforeacheffect,and
multipleLFObasedeffectstogether.Theyreavailable oftenchangethewaveformindividuallyaswell.
inmostLFObasedeffects,inadditiontothe
individualLFOs,providing: YoucanedittheCommonFXLFOparametersonthe
P8CommonFXLFOpagesofProgram,Combination,
MastersourcesoffrequencyandphaseforallLFO Sequencer,andSamplingmodes.
basedeffects
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1
Common FX LFO1 Stereo Flanger
Frequency[Hz] Waveforem = Triangle

Reset Generate original LFO waveform Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Stereo Phaser
Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Stereo Auto Pan
Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = +90 [deg]
FX Control Buses
TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffects 010:StereoNoiseReduction
sidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffectwith
oneaudiosignal(thesidechain),whiletheeffect
processesacompletelydifferentaudiosignal.Thisis Gated Reverb (Program mode)
convenientforusewithvocoders,compressorsand Theclassicgatedreverbsoundiscreatedusinga
limiters,gates,etc. sidechain:
OASYSincludestwostereoFXControlBuses,which Dryaudiogoesthroughareverbeffect
canbeusedwiththefollowingeffects:
Theoutputofthereverbgoestoagateeffect
Vocoder Theopeningandclosingofthegateiscontrolledby
026:Vocoder theoriginaldryaudio,throughasidechain
TocreatethisontheOASYS,inProgrammode:
Compressor, limiter, and gate effects
002:StereoCompressor 1. OntheIFXRoutingpage,setBusSelecttoIFX1.
2. SetFXControlBustoFXControl1.
003:StereoExpander
3. OntheIFXInsertEffectspage,setIFX1to101:
005:StereoLimiter
ReverbHall.
009:StereoGate 4. SetIFX2to009:StereoGate.
790
Overview FX Control Buses
5. EnableChainforIFX1,andsetChainTotoIFX2. Now,thegatewillaffecttheoutputofthereverb,but
6. IntheStereoGateeffect,settheEnvelopeSource thegatewillbecontrolledbytheprereverbdrysignal.
toFXControl1.
Gated Reverb (Program)
IFX1 IFX2
Bus Select = IFX1 Chain to = IFX2 Bus Select = L/R
OSC1&2 101: Reverb Hall 009: Stereo Gate
Envelope Source = FX Control 1
FX Control Bus = FX Ctrl1
1. SetuptheTimbresandeffectsasshowninthe
Compressor (Combination mode) diagrambelow.
Compressors,limiters,andgatesusethelevelofthe 2. SetIFX2sCtrlBustoFXCtrl1.
audioinputtocontroltheleveloftheaudiooutput.For ThissendstheoutputofIFX2toFXControlBus1.
theseeffects,theenvelopedetectionsourcecanbe
eithertheaudioinputitself(theusualmethod)orFX 3. InIFX1:StereoCompressor,settheEnvelope
ControlBus1or2. SourcetoFXCtrl1.
Now,thecompressorwillstillprocesstheinputfrom
ThediagrambelowshowsasplitCombination,witha
thepad,buttheamountofcompressionwillbe
padonthebottomofthekeyboardandadistorted
controlledbytheguitar(throughIFX2).
guitaronthetop.TheoutputoftheOD/HighGain
Waheffectcontrolstheactionofthepadscompressor,
sothatwhentheguitarisplayed,thelevelofthepad
decreasesautomatically.Todothis:
Compressor (Combination)
IFX1
Timbre1 Bus Select = IFX1 Bus = L/R
Pad 002: Stereo Compressor
Program Program Envelope Source = FX Control 1
A B
IFX2 Ctrl Bus = FX Ctrl 1

split Timbre2 Bus Select = IFX2 027: OD/
Guitar Hi-Gain Wah
Bus Select = L/R
Vocoder (Program mode)

Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundby
usinganaudiosignal(themodulator)tomodulatea
differentaudiosignal(thecarrier).Inthediagram,the
outputofOSC1and2arethecarrier,andtheaudio
inputfromamicisusedasthemodulatortoproducea
speakinginstrumenttypeofeffect.Todothis:
1. IntheProgram,setBusSelecttoIFX1.
ThissendstheoutputoftheProgramtotheVocoder.
2. FortheAudioInput,settheFXControlBus(08c)
toFXControl1.
ThissendstheaudioinputtoFXControlBus1.
3. InIFX1:Vocoder,settheModulatorSourcetoFX
Control1.
Now,throughFXControlBus1,theaudioinputisthe
modulatorforthevocoder.
791
Effect Guide
Vocoder (Program)
IFX1
Bus Select = IFX1 Bus Select = L/R
OSC1&2 026: Vocoder
(Carrier)
Modulator Source = FX Control 1
(Modulator)
Audio
Input1 FX Control Bus = FX Ctrl1
Mic
1. ForTimbre1(thecarrier),setBusSelecttoIFX1.
Rhythmic Vocoder (Combination mode)
ThissendsthesignaltotheVocoder,asthecarrier.
Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundby 2. ForTimbre2(thedrumprogramwereusingasthe
usinganaudiosignal(themodulator)tomodulatea modulator),setFXControlBustoFXCtrl1.
differentaudiosignal(thecarrier).Althoughthemost
commonapplicationofavocoderistouseaudiofrom ThissendsthesignalfromTimbre2toFXControlBus
amicasthemodulator,youcanalsouseadrum 1.
patternorsimilarsignalasthemodulator,producinga 3. InIFX1:Vocoder,settheModulatorSourcetoFX
rhythmiceffect. Control1.
Intheexampleshowninthediagram,adrumpattern Now,throughFXControlBus1,Timbre2isthe
generatedbyKARMAissenttoanFXControlbusand modulatorforthevocoder.
usedasthemodulatorforthevocoder.Todothis:
Rhythmic Vocoder (Combination)
IFX1
Timbre1: Bus Select = IFX1 Bus Select = L/R
Pad 026: Vocoder
(Carrier)
Modulator Source = FX Control 1
(Modulator)
KARMA Timbre2: FX Control Bus = FX Ctrl1

Drum pattern Drums
4. IntheStereoCompressor,settheEnvelopeSource
Parallel Effects routing totheFXControlBusfromstep2.
YoucancreateparalleleffectspathsusingtheFX 5. AlsointheStereoCompressor,enablethecheck
ControlBuses.YoullneedtouseoneIFXslottodoso, boxlabeledSideChainMonitor.
however. EnablingSideChainMonitormeansthat,insteadof
1. Routethesignal(program,IFXoutput,etc.)toan hearingtheoutputofthecompressor,youllhearthe
outputorIFXbusasnormal. FXControlBusinput.Youcansavetheeffectinthis
2. Inadditiontothenormalbus,assignittooneof state.
theFXControlBuses. Atthispoint,thecompressorissimplyservingasa
3. PlaceaneffectwhichusestheFXControlBuses waytoaccesstheFXControlBus,andyoucanuseitto
theStereoCompressor,forinstanceonanyIFX. starttheparallelbranchoftheeffectschain.
Effect I/O
Toachievethebesttonalquality,signalssenttothe Thefollowingtableshowstheparametersrelatedto
effectsshouldbeatthemaximumlevelbelowclipping. thelevelsettings:
Also,usetheWet/DryparameterfortheInsertEffects,
TotalEffectsandtheOutputLevelorReturn1,2
parameterfortheMasterEffectstoadjusttheeffect
outputlevel.
Iftheinputlevelistoolow,theSNratiomay
decrease.Ontheotherhand,iftheinputlevelistoo
high,clippingmayoccur.
TheGlobalInternalHeadroomsettingwillalso
changethemaximuminputleveloftheeffect.
792
Overview Effect I/O
Programmode(HD1) AUDIO INPUT LEVEL on the rear panel

OSC1/2 MS1, 2, 3, 4 Level (P2) Input Level (P0)
Filter1/2 Input Trim (P3) Send1/2 (P0)
Filter1/2 Output Level (P3)
*1
Someeffectsmaynothavetheseparameters.
Driver1/2 Drive (P4)
*2
Input Thesesettingsaremadeseparatelyforprograms,
Amp1/2 Amp Level (P4) combinations,andsongs(Sequencer).IfUse
EQ Input Trim (P4) GlobalSettingischecked,thesesettingsaremade
inGlobalmodeP0.
Send1/2 (P8)
Effect Trim parameter *1 (P8, P9)
Effect Wet/Dry parameter (P8, P9)
Output Return1, 2 (P9)
Master Volume (P9)
Programmode(EXi:Common)
EQ Input Trim (P6)
Input Send1/2 (P8)
Output Return1, 2 (P9)
Master Volume (P9)
Programmode(AL1)
OSC Mixer Level (OSC1, OSC2, Sub OSC, Ring
Mod., Noise) (P4)
Filter1/2 Input Trim (P3)
Input
Filter1/2 Output Level (P3)
Driver1/2 Drive (P4)
Amp1/2 Amp Level (P4)
Programmode(CX3)
Expression Minimum, Level (P4)
Input Drawbar (P5)
Output Level (P7)
Combinationmode/Sequencermode
Volume (P0)
Timbre EQ Input Trim (P1)
Input
Send1/2 (P8)
Output
Return1, 2 (P9)
Samplingmode
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL on the rear panel
Audio Input Level (P0, P5)
Input
Send1/2 (P0, P5, P8)
Output
Return1, 2 (P9)
793
Effect Guide
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX12)
In/Out
InsertEffects(IFX112)haveastereoinputanda PressingtheON/OFFbuttonofIFX1IFX12intheP8:
stereooutput.IfyousettheWet/Dryparameter(P8 InsertFXpagesineachmodewilltogglebetweenON
IFX112page)toDry(noeffect),theinputsignalwill andOFF.WhenOFFisselected,theeffectwillbe
bepassedthrough,instereo,withoutbeingprocessed bypassed,andthestereoinputsignalwillbeoutputin
bytheeffect.IfyouselectWet(effectapplied),the stereowithoutbeingprocessed.
processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowing TheOASYScanalsoturnIFX1IFX12offseparately
ways: fromthesettingoftheON/OFFbuttonbyreceiving
MIDIcontrolchangemessageCC#92.Value0will
Mono In - Mono Out + Effect turnthemoff,andvalue1127willturnthemon.
YoucanalsouseEffectGlobalSWtoturnIFX112
Wet Mono In - Stereo Out + Effect
onandoff.ThisMIDIcontrolisperformedonthe
Effect
globalMIDIchannel.
Stereo In - Stereo Out Effect
IFX1:148:P4EQ//Phaser
MonoMono Parallel Effects

141:P4EQ//P4EQ185:Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly
Mono In/Out Effect Pan
Mono In/Out Effect Pan
Theseeffectsaretypicallystereoin/stereoout,butthey
haveaspecialstructure.TheLchannelandRchannel
ofthestereoinputeachhavetheirownindependent
monoeffect.Eachmonooutputcanthenbepannedto
thedesiredpositioninthestereofield.
Track1:Piano,Pan=L001,BusSelect=IFX1
Track2:E.Piano,Pan=R127,BusSelect=IFX1
Sothatyoudontmixthesoundofthetwotracksthat
arebeinginput,settheP0:Play/RECPanparameterto
L001andR127respectively.
Example: IFX1: 148: P4EQ // Phaser

Track1:PianoissenttotheLchannelP4EQ,andTrack
2:E.PianoissenttotheRchannelPhaser.UsetheP8
IFXpagePanparametertosettheoutputpositionof
eachsound.Inthisexample,botharesettoC064.See
thediagrambelow.
Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,stereoinputsignalsare
outputinstereowithoutbeingprocessed.
Routing
Youcanuseuptotwelvechannels(IFX112)forthe 18,1/27/8:ThesignalissenttoAUDIOOUTPUT
InsertEffectsinanymode. (INDIVIDUAL)18bus.Formoreinformation,please
seeIndividualOutputsonpage 815.
Program mode Off:TheoutputwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus,IFX112
buses,orIndividual18buses.ChoosetheOffsetting
UseBusSelect(Program81c)tosetthedestination ifyouwanttoconnecttheoscillatoroutputtoamaster
busoftheoscillatoroutput. effectinseries.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
L/R:SendtheoutputtotheL/Rbus.Instead,itissent MFX2)toadjustthesendlevel.
toAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOandRafterthe UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)(Program
TFX1and2. 81f)tospecifythesendlevelfortheMasterEffects.
IFX112:ThesignalissenttoInsertEffectsIFX112. ThissettingiseffectiveifBusSelect(Program81c)is
settoL/RorOff.
794
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX12) Routing
IfBusSelectissettoIFX112,useSend1andSend2 Ifyoucheckthisbox,BusSelectFXControlBus,
(Program85a)tospecifythesendlevelofthepostIFX Send1,andSend2 (Global53b)foreachkeyofthe
signal. selectedDrumKitbecomeseffective.Forexample,you
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto cansendasnaresoundtoIFX1toapplytheGateeffect,
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthe akicksoundtoIFX2toapplyEQ,andothersoundsto
valueoftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1 AUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOandRwithout
and2,multipliedbytheSend1and2values applyinganyInsertEffects.
receivedviaMIDI. Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowing
Intheexampleshowninthediagram(Fig.21a), typesofdruminstrumenthavethesameBusSelect
Oscillators1and2outputsbeingsenttoIFX1. settings.
IfyouareconnectingtheInsertEffectsinseries,check SnaresIFX1
theChainbox(Program85a).UseChainto(Program KicksIFX2
85a)tospecifythedestinationtowhichthesignalwill TomsIFX3
bechained. CymbalsIFX4
Percussionetc.IFX5
IfyouchecktheIFX1checkbox,theoutputofIFX1will
besenttotheinputoftheIFXyouspecifyinChain Ifyoudeselectthebox,alldruminstrumentoutputs
to.Effectscanbechainedonlyinascendingorderof aresenttothebusspecifiedbyBusSelect(Program8
theirnumber;forexampleIFX1canbechainedtoIFX2 1c).YoumayapplyanyInsertEffectstoalldrum
throughIFX12,andIFX2canbechainedtoIFX3 instruments,regardlessoftheDrumKitsettings.
throughIFX12.Youcancreateachainofuptotwelve
inserteffectsinseries,IFX1throughIFX12.
WhentheInsertEffectsareconnectedinseries,the
valuesofthePan(CC#8),BusSel.,RECBus,Send1,
andSend2parametersforthepostIFXsignalwillbe
used.
Intheexampleshowninthediagram(Fig.21b),the
Chaincheckboxischecked,andeachChainto
parameterissettothesubsequenteffect,creatinga
seriesconnectionofIFX1IFX2IFX3IFX4
IFX5IFX6IFX7IFX8IFX9IFX10IFX11
IFX12.ThepostIFX12settingsforPan(CC#8),Bus
Select,RECBus,Send1,andSend2willbeused.
Settings for drum programs

IfyouhaveselectedDrumsforOscillatorMode
(Program11b)ofaProgram,theUseDKitSetting
box(Program81b)becomesavailable.Formore
information,pleaseseediagramFig.21c.
Fig.21a
795
Effect Guide
Fig.21b
Fig.21c
Combination and Sequencer modes

UseBusSelect(P8:Routing1and2pageineach
mode)fortimbres(Combination)andtracks
(Sequencer)toselectanInsertEffecttoapplytothe
correspondingtimbresandtracks.Youcanroute
multipletimbresandtrackstoasingleInsertEffect.
Tip:Youcanuseeachtimbre/tracksBusSelect,post
IFXChaintoandChainparameters(P8InsertFX
pageofeachmode)tocreateavarietyofroutings.
796
Example:InsertingoneIFXintotwoormoretimbres
Example:InsertingaseparateIFXintoeachtimbre,and
insertinganotherIFXlater
Example:SharingpartofatimbresIFXchainwithanother
timbre
AswithProgrammode,selectL/R,IFX112,18,1/2
7/8,orOffforeachtimbreandtrack.
Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)become
availableifBusSelecthasbeensettoL/RorOff.If
youvesetBusSelecttoIFX112,useSend1andSend2
(P8InsertFXpage)followingtheinserteffecttoadjust
thesendlevels.
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthe
valueoftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1
and2ofthePrograms(selectedforthetimbresand
tracks),multipliedbytheSend1and2values
receivedviaMIDI.
Thefollowingdiagram(Fig.22a)showsanexample
ofCombinationmode.TheTimbre1outputissentto
IFX1andtheTimbre2outputissenttoIFX2according
totheBusSelectsetting.OthertimbresaresenttoL/R.
TheoutputsignalpassesthroughtheTFX1and2,then
goestoAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOandR.
797
Effect Guide
Fig.22a
Inthediagram(Fig.22b),IFX1sChaincheckboxis Flangereffects.Timbre2isbeingprocessedbythe
checkedandChaintosettoIFX2,sendingtheoutput IFX2:048:StereoFlangereffect.TheRoutingMaparea
ofIFX1toIFX2.Timbre1isbeingprocessedbyIFX1: ofthediagram(Fig.21a)showsthesesettings.(With
001:StereoDynaCompressorandIFX2:048:Stereo thesesettings,IFX312arenotbeingused.)
Fig.22b
sent.ForexampleyoucansendsnaresoundstoIFX1,
Drum Programs in Combination and kicksoundstoIFX2,andotherdrumsoundsto
Sequencer modes L/MONOandR.
Ifadrumprogram(OscillatorMode=Drums)is Ifthischeckboxisunchecked,alldruminstruments
selectedforatimbre(Combination)ortrack willbeoutputaccordingtotheBusSelectsettingof
(Sequencer),theDKitcheckboxisavailable(Fig.22c). eachtimbre/track(theP8Routingpageofeach
mode).Thisletsyouapplyaninserteffecttoallofthe
CheckingthischeckboxwillenabletheBusSelect
druminstrumentsinthatdrumkit.
settingsetc.ofeachkeyinthedrumkit,lettingyou
specifythebustowhicheachdruminstrumentwillbe
798
Fig.22c
Drum Kit IFX Patch Fig.22d:DrumKitIFXPatchdialog

IfBusSelectDKitischecked,youcanselectthe
DrumKitIFXPatchpagemenucommandbyselecting
atimbreparameterorbypressingTimbreNumber(the
blueareainthedisplayforeachtimbre).
Thisoptionallowsyoutochangetheroutingofthe
InsertEffectstemporarilybychangingBusSelectfor
eachkey.
Forexample,assumethattheDrumKitkeyassignment
issetsothatasnaresoundisroutedtoIFX1andakick
soundisroutedtoIFX2etc.,IFX15.Inthiscase,ifyou
wishtoassignIFX1and2totheProgramsusedby
othertimbresandtracks,youcanviewtheroutingso
thattheseDrumKitsoundsareroutedtoIFX3andIFX7
UsetheDrumKitIFXPatchpagemenucommandif
respectively.
youwantthedrumprogramtouseeffectsotherthan
PatchingispossibleonlyiftheBusSelect(Global5 timbres2and3.ChooseDrumKitIFXPatchfromthe
3b)settingofeachkeyinthedrumkitisassignedtoan pagemenu,andtemporarilysendthedrumkitIFX1to
inserteffect.Thestateofthesesettingsisalsoshownin IFX3,IFX2toIFX4,IFX3toIFX5,IFX4toIFX6,andIFX5
theRoutingMap.Makethedesiredsettingsfor toIFX7(Fig.22d).Executingwiththesesettingswill
DrumKitIFXPatch,andpresstheOKbuttonto temporarilychangetheeffectstowhichthedrumkitis
execute. beingsent(Fig.22e).
Ifyouwanttoreverttotheoriginalsettingsofthe
drumkit,executeDrumKitIFXPatchwiththe
settingsIFX1IFX1,IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4
IFX4,IFX5IFX5,IFX6IFX6,IFX7IFX7,IFX8
IFX8,IFX9IFX9,IFX10IFX10,IFX11IFX11,
andIFX12IFX12.Youcanalsoreverttotheoriginal
settingsbypressingtheRESETbutton.
Inthefollowingdiagram(Fig.22c),DrumProgramis
assignedtoTimbre1,andnormalProgramsare
assignedtoTimbres2and3.BusSelectissettoDKit
forTimbre1,IFX1forTimbre2,andIFX2forTimbre3.
WithTimbre1,theBusSelect(Global52b)for
DrumKitsettingbecomeseffective.
799
Effect Guide
Fig.22e
Sampling mode
TheexternalinputsoundsfromtheAUDIOINPUT1,
2,3,4,andS/P DIFINjackscanbeprocessedbythe
inserteffects,mastereffects,ortotaleffectsthen
sampled.Youcanalsoapplyinserteffectstothe
samplesassignedtoamultisample,andresamplethe
result.
TheBusSelectsettingsintheP0AudioInputpage
specifythebusestowhichtheexternalinputswillbe
sent.YoucanchoosefromL/R,IFX112,18,1/27/8,or
Off.Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffectwhile
sampling,chooseIFX112.
UsingeithertheinternalCDR/Wdrive,oraUSBCD
drive,youcanalsosamplefromanaudioCDwhile
applyinginsert,master,ortotaleffects.UsetheCD
R/WDriveAudioInput(51b)settingintheP5:Audio
CDRippingpagetosetuptheeffectsbusing.
Intheexampleshowninthediagram(Fig.23a),the
signalfromAUDIOINPUT1and2isbeingsentto
IFX1.UsetheP8:InsertEffectpagetoselectaninsert
effect,andedititsparameters.
Thefollowingdiagram(Fig.23b)showsanexample
ofbussettingsinwhichthesamplesassignedtoa
multisampleareresampledwithIFX1applied.SetBus
Select(Sampling81b)toIFX1.
Whensamplingends,L/Rwillautomaticallybe
selectedastheBusSelectsetting.Pleasebeawareof
thisifyoucontinuesampling.
Formoredetailsonanyofthesesamplingmethods,
pleaseseeSampling(OpenSamplingSystem)on
800
Fig.23a
Fig.23b
Ineachmode,useAudioInput(P0Audio
Audio Input, S/P DIF IN Input/Samplingpage)tomakesettingsforexternal
InProgram,Combination,Sequencer,andDiskmodes, inputfromtheAUDIOINPUT1,2,3,4,andS/P DIFIN
externalaudiosourcesfromtheAUDIOINPUT1,2,3, jacks.Alternatively,youcancheckUseGlobal
4,andS/P DIFINjackscanbeprocessedbyinsert SettingsandusetheGlobalmodeAudiosettings.
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectsjustastheycan SetBusSelecttospecifythebustowhichtheexternal
inSamplingmode. audioinputwillbesent.YoucanselectL/R,IFX112,
YoucansamplewhileapplyingtheOASYSseffectsto 18,1/27/8,orOff.Ifyouwanttoapplyaninsert
theexternalaudiosourcesfromthesejacks,orusethe effect,selectIFX112.
OASYSasa6in(AUDIOINPUT1,2,3,4,S/P DIFIN Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)become
L,R)10outeffectprocessor.Youcanalsousean effectiveonlywhenBusSelectissettoL/RorOff.If
externalmicinputtocontrolavocodereffect(026: IFX112isselected,useP8:InsertEffectpageSend1
Vocoder)appliedtointernalsounds. andSend2forthepostIFXsignal.
InSequencermodeyoucanalsousetheeffectswhen
recordingexternalaudiosourcestoaudiotracks.
801
Effect Guide
Thediagram(Fig.24a)showsanexampleinwhich InDiskmode,effectswillusethesettingsofthe
theinputfromINPUT1and2ispannedtoleftand modeinwhichyoupreviouslywere.
right,andsenttoinserteffect1.
Fig.24a
Audio CD
InSamplingmode,thesoundfromanaudioCDinthe
internalCDR/RWdriveoraUSBexternalCDdrive
canbeprocessedbytheinserteffects,mastereffects,
andtotaleffects.
UsetheBusSelectsettingintheP5:AudioCD
RippingpagetospecifythebustowhichtheCDaudio
willbesent.YoucanchoosefromL/R,IFX112,18,
1/27/8,orOff.Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffect,
chooseIFX112.
TheSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)settings
whichspecifythesendlevelstothemastereffectsare
validifBusSelectissettoL/RorOff.IfBusSelectis
settoIFX112,usethepostIFXSend1andSend2
settingstospecifythesendlevels.
Thediagram(Fig.25a)showsanexampleinwhich
theinputfromtheinternalCDR/RWdriveroraUSB
connectedexternalCDdriveispannedtoleftand
right,andsenttoinserteffect1.
802
Fig.25a
Disk mode
InDiskmodeP1:PlayAudioCDaswellyoucanplay
backanaudioCDandprocessthesoundthroughthe
inserteffects,mastereffects,andtotaleffects.Bus
Select,Send1,Send2,FXCtrlBus,RECBus,Pan,and
LevelarelinkedwiththesettingsofSamplingmode.
InDiskmode,effectswillusethesettingsofthe
modeinwhichyoupreviouslywere.
803
Effect Guide
Mixer
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,the ignored,andtheyaresettoCenter.UsethePan
P8InsertFXpageletsyousetPan(CC#8)(postIFX (CC#8)parameter(P8:InsertFXpage)tosetthe
panning),BusSel.(BusSelect),CtrlBus(FX pan.L000ishardleft,andR127ishardright.
controlbus),RECBus,andSend1andSend2levelsto Formoreabouteffecttypessuchasstereoin/stereo
themastereffects. out,seeIn/Outonpage 794.
IfyouhavecheckedtheChaintoconnecttheInsert YoucancontroltheseparametersviaCC#8.
Effectsinseries,theseparametersPan(CC#8)
Send2forthepostIFX(lastInsertEffectinthechain)
signalbecomeeffective. Bus Sel. (Bus Select)
Thisparameterenablesyoutospecifythedestination
Pan (CC#8) busforthepostIFXsignals.
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthepanofthepost L/RisacommonsettingtosendsignalstotheTotal
IFXsignal. Effects(TFX1,TFX2)beforetheyareroutedtothe
OUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOandRoutputs.
Ifyouareusingthestereoin/stereooutInsertEffects,
setthisparametertoC064toenablethePansettings Select18or1/27/8toroutethesignalstoOUTPUT
fortheoscillators(Program41c,45),timbres (INDIVIDUAL)18(IndividualOutputs).Ifthisis
(Combination01b),tracks,andaudioinputs. setto18,theoutputwillbemonaural.Ifsetto1/27/8,
thepostIFXpansettingswillbevalid,andtheoutput
Ifyouareusingmonoin/stereooutormono willbestereo.IfsettoOff,thesignalwillnotbesentto
in/monooutInsertEffects,thePansettingsforthe theL/Rbusorbuses18.Choosethissettingifyou
oscillators,timbres,tracksandaudioinputsare
Insert Effect = Stereo In - Stereo Out Insert Effect = Mono In - Stereo Out
Mono In - Mono Out
OSC1 OSC2 OSC1 OSC2

OSC1: Amp1 Pan=L001 OSC1: Amp1 Pan=L032 OSC1: Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2: Amp2 Pan=R127 OSC2: Amp2 Pan=R096 OSC2: Amp2 Pan=R127
Left Center Right Left Center Right Left Center Right
Post IFX Pan(CC#8) Post IFX Pan(CC#8) Post IFX Pan(CC#8)
C064 C064 C064
L032 L032 L032
L001 L001 L001
R096 R096 R096
R127 R127 R127
Left Center Right Left Center Right Left Center Right
804
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX12) Controlling the Insert Effects via MIDI
wanttousetheSend1orSend2levelstoroutethe
signalthroughamastereffectinseries(i.e.,notasa REC Bus
sendeffect). OASYSprovidestwostereorecording(REC)buses:
REC1/2andREC3/4.
Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) UsingtheRECbusses,youcanisolateoneormore
soundsforrecordingorsamplingevenifthesounds
ThisspecifiestheFXControlbusthatfollowstheinsert
arealsobeingmixedintothemainoutputs.For
effect.TheFXControlbuses(FXControl1,2)arestereo
example,youcanplayaguitarthroughOASYSIFX
twochannelbuses.
whilelisteningtoaKARMAdrumphrase,andrecord
TheOASYSprovidestwo(stereotwochannel)effect theprocessedguitarwithoutrecordingthedrums.
controlbuses,givingyouawiderangeofwaysto
IndividualPrograms,CombiTimbres,Sequencer
controleffects.
Tracks(bothMIDIandAudio),audioinputs,and
FXControlbusescanbeusedwithvocoder, InsertEffectscanallberoutedtotheRECbusses,in
compressor,andgatetypeeffects. additiontotheirmainoutput/IFXbussettings.
FordetailsontheeffectsthatbeusedwithFXControl IfyoudontneedtousetheRECbusforaparticular
buses,seeFXControlBusesonpage 790. sound,turnitOff.
Asanexample,hereshowyoucanusetheFXControl SettingtheRECbusto1,2,3,or4letsyourecordupto
busfollowinganinserteffect. fourmonosignalssimultaneously.Settingitto1/2or
Example:GatedReverb 3/4letsyourecordstereosignals,includingtheeffects
ofthePan(CC#08)setting.
Whenusingagateeffectwithreverberantsound,
usingthereverberantsoundtocontrolthegatemay
notproducethedesiredresultsbecausethereverb Send1, Send2
extendsthedurationofthesound.Normally,youwill
Theseparametersenableyoutosetthesendlevelof
usetheunreverberatedsoundtocontrolthegate,as
thesignalsroutedtoMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2.
showninthediagrambelow.
ThesignalissentinstereotomastereffectsMFX1and
Inthisexample,wesendthesoundfromtheOSCetc. MFX2.ThisisvalidwhenBusSelectisL/RorOff.
toIFX1andprocessitthroughanequalizer.IFX1is
IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffects,useSend1and
sentviaChaintoIFX2andalsosentviaCtrlBus(FX
Send2oftheP8:RoutingpageinProgram,
ControlBus)toFXControl1.TheEnvelopeSourceof
Combination,Sequencer,andSongplaymodestoset
IFX3:StereoGateissettoFXControl1.Thisallowsthe
theMasterEffectsendlevel(UsetheP0:AudioInput
gattobetriggeredbyasignalotherthanitsinput(the
(/Sampling)pageineachmodetosetthesendlevelfor
reverberantsound).
theaudioinputs.).
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondsto
CC#91.
Gated Reverb Example
Bus Select IFX1 Chain to IFX2 Chain to IFX3 Bus Select

OSC1&2 : IFX3 : L/R
: IFX1 : IFX2
Timbre/Track 012: Stereo 101: Reverb Hall 009: Stereo Gate
Audio Inputs Graphic 7EQ Envelope Source
: FX Ctrl1
FX Control Bus
: FX Ctrl1
(FX Control Bus1)
Controlling the Insert Effects via MIDI

UsingtheDynamicModulation(Dmod)function
enablesyoutocontrolalleffectparametersinrealtime Combination mode
duringperformancefromthecontrollersoftheOASYS TheP8IFX112pageletsyouspecifythecontrol
oraconnectedMIDIsequencer.Youcanalsocontrol channel (ControlChannel)forIFX112.Youcan
thePan(CC#8),Send1,andSend2parametersinthe choosefromCH0116,Gch,orAllRouted.
sameway.
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleach
inserteffectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbol
Program and Sampling modes willbedisplayedattherightoftheMIDIchannel
Ch0116ofthetimbrethatisroutedtoeachinsert
YoucancontroltheparametersontheglobalMIDI
effect.IftheroutedtimbreshavedifferentMIDI
channel.
channelsettings,thisparameterisusedtospecifythe
channelthatwillcontroltheinserteffect.
805
Effect Guide
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontrolthe
parametersontheglobalMIDIchannel.Thisisa
commonsetting.
AllRouted:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparameters
onallthechannels(channels116thathavea*
mark)thatareroutedtothecorrespondingInsert
Effects.
IfyouvecheckedBusSelectDKit(81c)fora
timbreforwhichadrumprogramisselected,the
MIDIchannelofthattimbrewillbevalidifany
IFX112issettoAllRouted,regardlessofthedrum
kitsBusSelectsettingsandthesettingsofthe
DrumKitIFXPatchpagemenucommand.
Sequencer mode
UseChparametersoftheP8IFX112pagestoset
upthecontrolchannelsforIFX112.Selectan
appropriateoptionfromCh0116andAllRouted.
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleach
inserteffectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbol
willbedisplayedattherightoftheMIDIchannel
Ch0116ofthetrackthatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.
IftwoormoretrackswithdifferingMIDIchannels
Ch0116arebeingsenttoasingleinserteffect,this
parameterisusedtospecifytheonetrackthatwill
controltheinserteffect.
AllRouted:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparameters
onallthechannels(channels116thathavea*
mark)thatareroutedtothecorrespondingInsert
Effects.AllRoutedisatypicaloption.Ifyouwishto
controltheparametersonasinglechannel,youmay
selectitfromCh0116.
IfyouvecheckedBusSelectDKitforatrackfor
whichadrumprogramisselected,theMIDI
channelofthattrackwillbevalidifanyIFX112is
settoAllRouted,regardlessofthedrumkitsBus
SelectsettingsandthesettingsoftheDrumKitIFX
Patchpagemenucommand.
Note:SinceSequencermodeletsyourecordandplay
exclusivemessagesandedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents,youcanusethemtoswitcheffectsor
modifyeffectparametervaluesduringsongplayback.
806
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) In/Out
Master Effects (MFX1, 2)
In/Out
TheI/OsofMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereo MonoMono Parallel

in/stereoout.Send1andSend2determinethesend 141:P4EQ//P4EQ185:Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly
leveltotheMasterEffects.(ForSend1and2,see
RoutingandMixer.)
MastereffectswillnotoutputtheDry(unprocessed) Mono In/Out Effect Pan
signalspecifiedinWet/Dry(P9MFX1,2page).Only Mono In/Out Effect Pan

theWet(processed)signalwillbeoutput.Theoutput
signalsfromtheMasterEffectsareroutedtotheL/R
buswiththeoutputlevelspecifiedbyReturn1and Theseeffectsaretypicallystereoin/stereoout,butthey
Return2.Theseoutputsignalsaremixedwiththe haveaspecialstructure.TheLchannelandRchannel
outputsignalsfromthebusspecifiedbyBusSelect ofthestereoinputeachhavetheirownindependent
(P8:Routingpageineachmode)L/R,orwiththe monoeffect.Eachmonooutputcanthenbepannedto
outputsignalsfromthebusspecifiedbyBusSelect thedesiredpositioninthestereofield.Normally,you
(InsertFXpageineachmode)L/R,thenroutedtothe willusetheseasinserteffects,butyoucanalsouse
MasterEQ. themasmastereffects.Fordetails,seeMonoMono
Selecting000:NoEffectwillmutetheoutput.The ParallelEffectsonpage 794.
processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowing PressingtheON/OFFbuttonforMFX1and2oftheP9:
ways,accordingtothetypeofeffects001185. RoutingpageineachmodewilltogglebetweenON
andOFF.WhenOFFisselected,theoutputsignalswill
Mono In - Mono Out + Effect bemuted.
SeparatelyfromthesettingofthisON/OFFbutton,
Wet Mono In - Stereo Out + Effect MFX1andMFX2canbeswitchedoffbyreceivinga
MIDIcontrolchangeCC#94.Value0willturnthem
Effect
Stereo In - Stereo Out Effect off,andvalue1127willturnthemon.Youcanalso
useEffectGlobalSW(Global01b)toturnMFX1
and2onandoff.ThisMIDIcontrolisperformedon
theglobalMIDIchannel.
Routing
MastereffectsMFX1andMFX2canbothbeusedin
anymode.IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffectsinany
mode,theMasterEffectssendlevelsaredeterminedby
807
Effect Guide
theSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)parameters Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondsto
specifiedindependentlyfortheoscillators CC#91ontheglobalMIDIchannel.Atthistime,the
(Program/Samplingmode),timbres(Combination actualsendlevelusesthevalueoftheSend1and2
mode),tracks(Sequencermode),andaudioinputs(in settingsforOscillators1and2,multipliedbythe
allmodes). Send1and2valuesreceivedviaMIDI.
Forexample,sinceyoucanadjustthemastereffect IfyouhaveselectedDrumsforOscillatorMode
sendlevelsforeachtimbre/track,youcanmake (Program11a)ofaProgram,theUseDKitSetting
settingssothatreverbisapplieddeeplytothepiano, box(Program81b)becomesavailable.Ifyoucheck
lightlytothestrings,andnotatalltothebass. thisbox,Send1andSend2levelsforeachkeyofthe
Ifyoureusinginserteffects,usethepostIFXSend1 selectedDrumKitbecomeeffective.IfBusSelectisset
andSend2toadjustthesendamounts. toL/RorOffforadruminstrumentkey,Send1(to
MFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)becomeeffective.
IfBusSelectissettoIFX112,thepostIFX112Send1
Program mode andSend2(Program85a)becomeeffective.
UsetheSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2) Ifthisisunchecked,Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
parametersoftheP8:Routingpage,ortheSend1 MFX2)(Program81f),andthepostIFX112Send1
andSend2parametersoftheP8:InsertFXpagefor andSend2(Program85a)willbevalidforalldrum
thepostIFX112signals,tosettheMasterEffectsend instruments,inthesamewayaswhenOscillator
level. ModeisSingleorDouble,orforEXiprograms.
IfyouhavesetBusSelecttoL/RorOff,Send1(to
MFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)oftheRoutingpageare
effective.Theseparameterscanbesetforoscillators1
and2individually.(Fig.21a) UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)(P8:
Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1 Routingpage)fortimbres(Combination)andtracks
and2.Fordetails,see81f:OSCMFXSendon (Sequencer)tosettheSend1and2levelsforeach
page 129. timbreandtrack.AswithProgrammode,ifBusSelect
issettoL/RorOff,Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
IfyouhavesetBusSelecttoIFX112,Send1and MFX2)becomeeffective.
Send2oftheInsertFXpageforthepostP8IFX112
signalsareeffective.IfyouareusingtheInsertEffects TheactuallevelsusetheseSend1and2levelvalues,
inchain(series),theSend1andSend2parametersfor multipliedbythesendlevelvaluesofoscillators1and
thepostIFX(lastIFX)areeffective(Fig21b,21c). 2oftheProgramP8:Routingpage.
IfyouhavesetBusSelectto18,or1/27/8,the Send level

oscillatorsignalsareoutputdirectlytoAUDIO ForexampleifyousettheprogramsOSC1Send1(to
OUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)18. MFX1)to127,Send2(toMFX2)to064,OSC2Send1(to
InthiscasetheSend1andSend2settingsareignored, MFX1)to064,Send2(toMFX2)to127,andthe
andtheMasterEffectswillnotbeapplied.(page 815) combinationsSend1(toMFX1)to064andSend2(to
MFX2)to127,theactualsendlevelsofthecombination
willbeasfollows.
Fig.21a
808
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) Routing
Fig.21b
Fig.21c
OSC1/EXi1Send1=127(100%)*064(50%)=064(50%) Send2parametersforthepostIFX112signalsare
OSC1/EXi1Send2=064(50%)*127(100%)=064(50%) effective,theycanbecontrolledontheMIDI
channelsassignedtoIFX112.
OSC2/EXi2Send1=064(50%)*064(50%)=032(25%)
OSC2/EXi2Send2=127(100%)*127(100%)=127(100%) and2.Fordetails,see81f:OSCMFXSendon
IfIFX112isselectedforBusSelect,usetheSend1and page 129.
Send2parametersforthepostIFXsignals.If18,or AnexampleforCombinationmodeisgivenbelow.In
1/27/8isselectedinstead,theseSend1and2settings theupperfigure(Fig.22a),BusSelectissetsothat
areignoredandtheMasterEffectisnotapplied. Timbre1isroutedtoIFX1,Timbre2toIFX2,Timbre3
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto toIFX3,Timbre4toIFX4,Timbres5and6toIFX5,and
CC#91.IfSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(MFX2)for Timbres7and16toL/R.Inthiscase,useSend1and
eachtimbre/trackareeffective,theparameterwill Send2forthepostIFX1(001:St.DynaCompressor)
becontrolledontheMIDIchannelssetforthe signaltosetthesendleveloftheTimbre1routedtothe
correspondingtimbresandtracks.IftheSend1and MasterEffect.(Inthisexampletheyaresetto032and
127.)Inthesameway,useSend1andSend2forthe
809
Effect Guide
postIFX2,3,and4signalstosetthesendlevelsof
Timbres2,3,and4,andusetheSend1andSend2 Sampling mode
parametersforthepostIFX5signaltosetthesend Youcanapplyinserteffects,mastereffects,andtotal
levelsofTimbres5and6.ForTimbres7and16,the effectstoanexternalaudiosourcefromtheAUDIO
settingsofSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)will INPUT1,2,3,4,orS/P DIFINjacks,andsamplethe
beeffective.(Atthistime,theactualsendlevelsuse result.Youcanalsoapplyinserteffects,mastereffects,
theseSend1and2valuesmultipliedbytheSend1and andtotaleffectstosamplesassignedtoamultisample,
2settingsforProgramoscillators1and2.) andresampletheresult.
BusSelectDKitisvalidifyouveselectedadrum UsetheP0AudioInputpagetomakesettingsfor
trackforaTimbre(Combination)orTrack(Sequencer). externalaudiosourcesfromtheAUDIOINPUT1,2,3,
Fig.22a 4,orS/P DIFINjacks.
TheBusSelectsettingforeachjackspecifiesthebusto
whichtheexternalinputsourcewillbesent.Youcan
choosefromL/R,IFX112,18,1/27/8,orOff.IfBus
SelectissettoL/RorOff,useSend1(toMFX1)and
Send2(toMFX2)toadjustthesendlevelstothemaster
effects.IfBusSelectissettoIFX112,usethepostIFX
Send1andSend2toadjustthesendlevelstothe
mastereffects.
Ifyouwanttoapplythemastereffectstothesamples
ofamultisampleandplayorresampletheresult,use
theP8RoutingpagesettingsSend1(toMFX1)and
Send2(toMFX2)ortheP8InsertFXpagesettings
postIFX112Send1andSend2settingstoadjustthe
sendlevelstothemastereffects.
Send1canbecontrolledbyreceivingCC#93,and
Send2byreceivingCC#91.Theseparametersare
IfyouselectDKit,theBusSelectsettingsforeachkey controlledontheglobalMIDIchannel.
becomeeffective,andeachdruminstrumentsound
willberoutedtothecorrespondingbuses.Atthistime, Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1
theactualsendlevelsusetheseSend1and2values, and2.Fordetails,see81f:OSCMFXSendon
multipliedbytheSend1and2settingsforeach page 129.
DrumKitkey.
IfadrumkitsBusSelectissettoL/RorOff,thelevels Audio Input, S/P DIF IN
willbetheseSend1and2settingsmultipliedbythe
InProgram,Combination,Sequencer,andDiskmodes,
sendlevelsyouspecifyinProgramP8:Routingpage
externalaudiosourcesfromtheAUDIOINPUT1,2,3,
forOSC1Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)
4,andS/P DIFINjackscanbeprocessedbyinsert
(Program81d),justasinothercases(OscillatorMode
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectsjustastheycan
SingleorDouble).
inSamplingmode.
IfBusSelectissettoIFX112,useSend1andSend2
IntheP0AudioInput/Samplingpageofeachmode,
forthepostIFXsignal.IfBusSelectissetto18,or
theUseGlobalSettingsparametermakessettingsfor
1/27/8,theSend1and2settingswillbeignored.
externalinputfromtheAUDIOINPUT1,2,3,4,and
Fig.22b S/P DIFINjacks.
SetBusSelecttospecifythebustowhichtheexternal
audioinputwillbesent.YoucanselectL/R,IFX112,
18,1/27/8,orOff.IfBusSelect(GlobalP0:03a)isset
toL/RorOff,adjustthesendlevelstothemaster
effectsusingSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2).If
BusSelectissettoIFX112,usethepostIFXSend1
andSend2.Ifthisissetto18or1/27/8,thesignalwill
notbesenttothemastereffects.
InDiskmode,effectswillusethesettingsofthe
modeinwhichyoupreviouslywere.
and2.Fordetails,see81f:OSCMFXSendon
page 129.
810
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) Mixer
SelectissettoIFX112,adjustthepostIFXSend1and
Audio CD Send2.IfBusSelectissetto18or1/27/8,theCD
InSamplingmodeyoucanapplytheinserteffects, audiowillnotbesenttothemastereffect.
mastereffects,andtotaleffectstothesoundofan
audioCDfromtheinternalCDR/WoraUSB Disk mode
connectedexternalCDdrive.
IntheDiskmodeP1PlayAudioCDpageaswell,you
IntheP5:AudioCDpage,useDriveSelecttoselect
canplaybackanaudioCDandapplytheinserteffects,
thedrivefromwhichyouwanttoinputCDaudio,and
mastereffects,andtotaleffectstotheplayback.Bus
useBusSelecttoselectthebustowhichyouwantto
Select,Send1(toMFX1),Send2(toMFX2),FXCtrl
sendtheCDaudio.YoucanchoosefromL/R,IFX112,
Bus,RECBus,Pan,andLevelarelinkedwiththe
18,1/27/8,andOff.IfyouwanttosendtheCDaudio
settingsofSamplingmode.
tothemastereffectsandBusSelectissettoL/RorOff,
adjustSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2).IfBus InDiskmode,effectswillusethesettingsofthe
previouslyselectedmode.
Mixer
Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaredetermined
bythesendlevels.IntheP9:Routingpageofeach
mode,youcanspecifytheoutputlevelandchaining
(seriesconnection)betweenthetwomastereffects.
32
33
34
31
Forexample,withMFX1Wet/Drysetto50:50(50%)
Return1, Return2 andReturn1setto64(50%),theresultanteffectlevel
Theseadjusttheamountofsignalthatisreturnedfrom willbe25%.Theeffectlevelismaximum(100%)when
themastereffectsMFX1andMFX2outputstotheL/R Wet/DryissettoWetandReturn1issetto127.
bus.
TheleftsidevalueoftheWet/Dryparameterforthe Chain check box
MFX1or2effectistheoutputlevelofthatmaster
PressthisboxtochainMFX1andMFX2toeachother.
effect.(InotherwordsifWet/Dryis25:75,theoutput
levelis75%.Itis100%ifWet,and0%ifDry.)The Intheexampleshownintheprecedingpage,the
Wet/DryvaluemultipliedbytheReturn1orReturn2 outputofMFX1(StereoChorus)isaddedtotheinput
valueissenttotheL/RbusandmixedwiththeP8 ofMFX2(ReverbHall).
RoutingpageBusSelectL/RorInsertFXpageBus
SelectL/Routput.
811
Effect Guide
Chain Direction Chain Level

IfyouhavecheckedtheChainbox,youcansetthe Thisparameterdeterminesthelevelofsignalsrouted
directionoftheconnectionhere.Youcanalsovisually fromoneMFXtotheotherMFXinachainconnection.
confirmthedirectionontheLCD.
Controlling the Master Effects via MIDI

Inthesamewayasforinserteffects,parametersofthe
mastereffectscanalsobecontrolledinrealtimevia
DynamicModulation(Dmod)fromtheOASYSs
controllersoranexternalMIDIdeviceduring
performanceorfromthesequencer.
Program and Sampling modes

EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel.

InCombinationandSequencermodes,thecontrol
channelforMFX1andMFX2arespecifiedbythe
(ControlChannel)settingintheMFX1and2pages.
YoucanchooseCh0116orGch.
Ch0116:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontrolthe
parametersforeachMasterEffectondifferent
channels.
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontrolthe
parametersontheglobalMIDIchannel.Thisisthe
normalsetting.
Note:SinceSequencermodeletsyourecordandplay
exclusivemessagesandedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents,youcanusethemtoswitcheffectsor
modifyeffectparametervaluesduringsongplayback.
812
Total Effects (TFX1, 2) In/Out
Total Effects (TFX1, 2)
In/Out
ThetotaleffectsTFX1andTFX2arestereoinand Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,thestereoinputwillbe
stereoout.TheDry(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dry passedtothestereooutputwithoutanyprocessing.
parametersendsthestereoinputsounddirectlytothe Youcanswitchtheeffectson/offusingtheMFX1or2
stereooutput.ThewayinwhichtheWet(processed) ON/OFFbuttonsortheP9Routingsettingsineach
sideisoutputdependsonthetypeofeffect,asfollows. mode.Whenoff,theeffectwillbebypassed.Thestereo
inputwillbepassedtothestereooutputwithoutany
processing,justasif000:NoEffectisselected.
Mono In - Mono Out + Effect
SeparatelyfromthisON/OFFbutton,MIDIcontrol
Wet Mono In - Stereo Out + Effect changeCC#95canbereceivedtoturnTFX1and
TFX2off.Acontrolchangevalueof0turnsthemoff,
Effect andavalueof1127restoresthemtotheprior
Stereo In - Stereo Out Effect
setting.YoucanalsouseEffectGlobalSWtoturn
offTFX1andTFX2inthesameway.Thisis
MonoMono Parallel controlledontheglobalMIDIchannel.
141:P4EQ//P4EQ185:Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly
Fordetails,seeMonoMonoParallelEffectson
page 794.
Routing
ThetotaleffectsTFX1andTFX2areplaced
immediatelybeforetheAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)
L/MONOandRoutputs.Botheffects(TFX1and2)are
availableinallmodes.
IftheBusSelectsettingforanoscillator ThesoundfromMFX1and2isroutedthroughTFX1
(Program/Samplingmodes),timbre(Combination andTFX2,andthenoutputtoAUDIOOUTPUT
mode),track(Sequencermode),oraudioinput(inall (MAIN)L/MONOandR.
modes)orthepostinsertBusSelectissettoL/R,the
signalwillbeoutputfromtheAUDIOOUTPUT
(MAIN)L/MONOandRjacks.
813
Effect Guide
Mixer
Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthe
Master Volume mastervolume.Mastervolumecanalsobecontrolled
Thissetsthelevelofthefinaloutputafterpassing fromtheP0ControlSurfacepage.
throughthetotaleffects.
Using MIDI to control the Total Effects

InthesamewayasforInsertandMasterEffects,the
TotalEffectscanbecontrolledinrealtimeviaDynamic
Modulation(Dmod).Youcanuseeitherthebuiltin
OASYSscontrollersoranexternalMIDIdevice,
duringliveperformanceorfromasequencer.
Program and Sampling modes

EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel.

InCombinationandSequencermodes,thecontrol
channelforTFX1andTFX2arespecifiedbythe
(ControlChannel)settingintheTFX1and2pages.You
canchooseCh0116orGch.
Ch0116:Choosefromthesesettingsifyouwantto
controleachtotaleffectonaseparatechannel.
Gch:Choosethissettingifyouwanttocontrolthetotal
effectsontheglobalMIDIchannel.
Note:InSequencermode,youcanrecordandplayback
exclusivemessages,andedittracksthatinclude
SystemExclusiveevents.Thisletsyouswitcheffectsor
varythevalueofeffectparameterswhileasongplays.
814
Outputs Main Outputs
Outputs
Main Outputs
ThemainL/MONOandRoutputsoftheOASYSare
outputfromtheAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO
andRjacks,theS/P DIFOUT(MAIN)jack,andthe
headphonejack.
Individual Outputs
TheOASYSisequippedwitheightindividualaudio
outputs,whichcanbeusedasindividualmono
outputs,stereopairs,oranycombinationofthetwo.
Signalssenttotheseoutputsarealsomirroredonthe
ADAToutputsoftheoptionalEXBDI,ifinstalled.
Almostanysignalsourcecanberoutedtothese
outputs,including:
EachnoteinaDrumKit
InsertEffectoutputs
EachPrograminaCombinationorSong
Audiotracks
Audioinputs
Youcanusethesetoisolateorgrouptogethersounds
forrecording,orforcomplexliveperformancesetups.
Ifthesignalisgoingthroughoneormoreinserteffects,
theoutputissetatthelastIFXinthechain,viatheBus
SelectparameterontheP85InsertEffectspage.
IfaProgram,Timbre,orTrackisnotgoingthroughany
inserteffects,theoutputissetusingtheBusSelect
parametersontheP81or82Routingpage.
Toassignaudioinputsdirectlytooutputs,useBus
SelectparametersintheP0AudioInput(Sampling)
page.
InGlobalmode,theAudiopageL/RBusIndiv.Assign
settingletsyoumirrortheMAINstereoL/Routputon
anypairofindividualoutputs.Youcanusethisto
createaprivatemonitoringsetupinliveandstudio
environments,ortosendthemainoutputstothe
optionalEXBDIsADAToutput.Formore
information,seeL/RBusIndiv.Assign(AssigntoL/R
andIndiv.Out)onpage 707oftheParameterGuide.
Note:YoucantusetheVOLUMEslidertoadjustthe
volumeoftheindividualoutputs.
815
816
Effect / Mixer Block Diagram in Program Mode
P8: Insert Effect P9: Master/Total Effect
Pan Bus Select stereo Send1 Send2 L/R Bus

Effect Guide
Programmode
Oscillator/EXi 1
Bus Select
= IFX1
Oscillator/EXi 2
Program P0: Audio Input/Sampling
Analog Input 1 Bus Select

= L/R
= IFX5

= L/R
= L/R
S/P DIF IN L Bus Select

= IFX10
S/P DIF IN R Bus Select
= IFX10
Program P0: Audio Input/Sampling
Select from: "Input" (Send1, Send2) Total Effects Master Level
L/R 1 AUDIO OUTPUT
IFX1 2 Chain & Post IFX Post IFX stereo
Post IFX TFX1 TFX2 (MAIN) L/Mono, R
IFX2 3 Chain to Insert Effects Pan (CC#8) Bus Select
Send1 / 2
IFX3 4
stereo
IFX4 5 IFX1 Bus IFX1
IFX5 6
IFX6 7 stereo
IFX2 Bus IFX2
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams
IFX7 8
IFX8 1/2 stereo
IFX9 3/4 IFX3 Bus IFX3
IFX10 5/6
stereo Bus Select
IFX12 Off = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX5 Bus IFX5 =1
stereo BUS Select
IFX6 Bus IFX6 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX7 Bus IFX7 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX8 Bus IFX8 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX9 Bus IFX9 = L/R
stereo
IFX10 Bus IFX10
stereo
IFX11 Bus IFX11
stereo Bus Select
IFX12 Bus IFX12 = L/R
Select from:
L/R 1/2
Chain Master Effects Return1 / 2
1 3/4
2 5/6
3 7/8 stereo
MFX1
stereo
4 Off
6
7 MFX2
8 stereo
stereo
mono x 8 (stereo x 4)
AUDIO OUTPUT
(INDIVIDUAL)1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
Sampling REC Bus mono x 4 (stereo x 2)
Source Bus
stereo x 2 FX Control Bus
Effect / Mixer Block Diagram in Comination/Sequencer Mode

Bus Select
Timbre/Track 1 = L/R
Timbre/Track 2 Bus Select

= IFX1
Bus Select
Timbre/Track 3 = IFX6
Timbre/Track 4 Bus Select

= Off
Bus Select
Timbre/Track 16 = 1/2
/Audio Trk 1 Bus Select

= L/R
Combinationmode,Sequencermode
Bus Select
/Audio Trk 16 = IFX7
Combi/Seq P0: Audio Input/Sampling

= L/R
= IFX5

= L/R
= L/R

= IFX10
= IFX10
Combi/Seq P0: Audio Input/Sampling
Select from: "Input" (Send1, Send2) Total Effects Master Level
L/R 1 AUDIO OUTPUT
IFX1 2 Chain & Post IFX Post IFX stereo
Pan(CC#8) Post IFX TFX1 TFX2 (MAIN) L/Mono, R
IFX2 3 Chain to Insert Effects Bus Select
Send1 / 2
IFX3 4
stereo
IFX5 6
IFX6 7 stereo
IFX2 Bus IFX2
IFX7 8
IFX8 1/2 stereo
IFX10 5/6
stereo Bus Select
IFX12 Off = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX5 Bus IFX5 =1
stereo Bus Select
IFX6 Bus IFX6 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX7 Bus IFX7 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX8 Bus IFX8 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX9 Bus IFX9 = L/R
stereo
IFX10 Bus IFX10
stereo
IFX11 Bus IFX11
stereo Bus Select
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams
Select from:
L/R 1/2
1 3/4
2 5/6
3 7/8 stereo
MFX1
stereo
4 Off
6
7 MFX2
8 stereo
stereo
mono x 8 (stereo x 4)
Audio Track AUDIO OUTPUT
REC Source (INDIVIDUAL)1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
Source Bus
Individual Outputs
817
818
Effect / Mixer Block Diagram in Sampling Mode

Effect Guide
Bus Select
Samplingmode
Mono Sample = IFX1
Stereo Sample L
Bus Select
= IFX1
Stereo Sample R
Sampling P0: Audio Input/Sampling

= L/R
= IFX5

= L/R
= L/R

= IFX10
= IFX10
Sampling P0: Audio Input/Sampling
Sampling P5: Audio CD "Input" (Send1, Send2)
Audio CD L Bus Select

= L/R
Audio CD R Bus Select
= L/R
Sampling P5: Audio CD Total Effects Master Level
Select from: "Audio Input" (Send1, Send2)
L/R 1 AUDIO OUTPUT
2
Chain & Post IFX Post IFX stereo
IFX1 Post IFX TFX1 TFX2
Chain to Insert Effects Pan(CC#8) Bus Select (MAIN) L/Mono, R
IFX2 3
Send1 / 2
IFX3 4 stereo
IFX5 6
IFX6 7 stereo
IFX2 Bus IFX2
IFX7 8
IFX8 1/2 stereo
IFX10 5/6
stereo Bus Select
IFX12 Off = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX5 Bus IFX5 =1
stereo Bus Select
IFX6 Bus IFX6 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX7 Bus IFX7 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX8 Bus IFX8 = L/R
stereo Bus Select
IFX9 Bus IFX9 = L/R
stereo
IFX10 Bus IFX10
stereo
IFX11 Bus IFX11
stereo Bus Select
Select from:
L/R 1/2
1 3/4
2 5/6
3 7/8 stereo
MFX1
stereo
4 Off
6
7 MFX2
8 stereo
stereo
mono x 8
AUDIO OUTPUT
(INDIVIDUAL)1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
Source Bus
Dynamics 000: No Effect
Dynamics
000: No Effect
Choosethisoptionwhenyouarenotusingtheselected InsertEffectsandTotalEffectspassthroughthe
effectsslot.Thisfreesupprocessingresourcesforother dry,unprocessedsignal
effectsand/orsynthvoices. MasterEffectsmutetheiroutputs
WhenaslotissettoNoEffect:
001: Stereo Dyna Compressor

Onscreengraphic,001StereoDynaCompressor
Input Level
(pre-Compressor)
Gain Reduction
(controlled by Sensitivity
and input level)
Output Level
(post-Compressor)
Thiseffectreducesthedynamicrangeoftheinput
signal,toregulatethelevelandgiveapunchyeffect. Pre EQ
Itisusefulforguitar,piano,anddrumsounds.Thisisa
Trim [0100]
truestereoeffect;youcanlinktheleftandright
channels,oruseeachchannelseparately. ThissetstheinputlevelfortheEQ.
LEQ Fc [Low, Mid-Low]

Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
SelectsthefrequencyoftheEQslowband.
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Compressor
Output Level LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Envelope - Control SetsthegainoftheLowEQ.
Output Level
Compressor
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ HEQ Fc [High, Mid-High]
Right
Wet / Dry SelectsthefrequencyoftheEQshighband.
HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]

ENVELOPE SetsthegainoftheHighEQ.
Select [L/R Mix, L/R Individually]

Thisdetermineshowtheleftandrightchannelsofthe
COMPRESSOR
selectedSourceareusedforcontrollingthe Sensitivity [1100]
compressor.Notethatthisappliesonlytothecontrol
Thiscontrolstheamountofcompression.Increasing
signal;theeffectalwaysprocessesbothchannelsofthe
thevalueboostslowerlevelsounds,andraisesthe
inputsignalinstereo.
overallvolume.
L/RMixisgenerallythebestchoiceforstereosignals;
Toadjustthefinalvolume,usetheOutputLevel
thiscompressesbothchannelsequally,basedonthe
parameter.
combinedvolumesoftheleftandrightchannels.
L/RIndividuallysplitstheeffectintotwoseparately
controlledmonocompressors.Whenprocessingstereo
signals,thiswillcausethestereoimagetoshift.
819
Effect Guide
Dyna Compressor - Sensitivity Output Level [0100]

Level
Wet
Setstheoutputlevelofthecompressor.
Sensitivity=100
Source [OffTempo]
Louder
Dry Sensitivity=40
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheOutputLevel.
Time
Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountfortheOutputLevel.
Attack [1100]
Thiscontrolstheonsettimeofthecompressor. OUTPUT
Dyna Compressor - Attack
Level Wet/Dry [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet]
Attack=80
Setsthebalancebetweenthewetprocessedsound
Attack=20
Wet andthedryinput.
Dry
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
Time
Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry.
002: Stereo Compressor

Onscreengraphic,002StereoCompressor
The yellow line shows the output level, relative to the input level.
This will change according to the Ratio, Threshold, and Soft Knee Width.
This meter shows the amount of gain reduction,

in real-time. To show that the gain is being
reduced, the meter moves in the opposite
direction from the Input meter.
The red marks show the Threshold setting.
The light gray area shows the Soft Knee Width.

Notice how the slope of the yellow line changes
as it passes through this range.
These lights show the relation of the control input to the Threshold and Soft Knee, in real-time.
Under (green) means the input is below the Soft Knee area, and so no compression is occurring.
Knee (yellow) means that the input is within the Soft Knee range. Within this range, as the signal
gets louder, the amount of compression will gradually increase towards the Ratio setting.
Over (red) means that the input is above the Soft Knee range, and the full Ratio is being applied.
Thisisasophisticatedstereocompressorthatallows
youtomakedetailedsettings,suchasthelevel Left
Wet / Dry
detectionmethodandthecompressioncurve. Gain Adjust
Delay Compressor
Side EQ
Envelope - Control
+ Side Chain Monitor
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Delay Compressor
Envelope Source
Gain Adjust
Right
Wet / Dry
FX Control BUS 1 Detection Mode
FX Control BUS 2 Lookahead
820
Dynamics 002: Stereo Compressor
Side Chain Monitor [Check-box]

ENVELOPE
WhenthisisOn,youllhearthecontrolsignal(as
Source [Input, FX Control 1, FX Control 2] selectedbytheSourceparameter)throughthe
sidechainEQ,insteadoftheoutputofthelimiter.This
Theactionofthecompressoriscontrolledbythelevel
canbehelpfulwhenyouretuningtheEQto
oftheselectedSource.
emphasizeordeemphasizespecificfrequencies.
Inputisthenormalsetting,inwhichthelevelofthe
Toheartheoutputofthelimiter,setthistoOff.
inputsignalcontrolsthecompressor.
FXControl1or2letyouprocesstheinputsignalwith
thecompressor,whileusingacompletelydifferent SIDE CHAIN EQ
signaltocontrolit.Forinstance,youmightusea Thismultimodefilterappliesonlytothecontrolsignal,
differentTimbreorTracktoducktheinputsignal.For andnottothemainaudiopath.Useittoalterthe
moreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuseson responseofthecompressorsothatitreacts(ordoesnot
page 790. react)onlytospecificfrequencies.
Select [L/R Mix, Left, Right, L/R Individually] Forinstance,ifyouwantthecompressortoignore
Thisdetermineshowtheleftandrightchannelsofthe cymbalcrashes,adjustthesidechainEQtoreducethe
selectedSourceareusedforcontrollingthe gainoffrequenciesspecifictothecymbals.While
compressor.Notethatthisparameterappliesonlyto doingso,itmayhelptoturnontheSideChain
thecontrolsignal;theeffectalwaysprocessesboth Monitorswitch,sothatyoucanlistenasyouhonein
channelsoftheinputsignalinstereo. onthedesiredfrequencies.
L/RMixisgenerallythebestchoiceforstereosignals; EQ On [Check-box]
thiscompressesbothchannelsequally,basedonthe SwitchestheEQonandoff.
combinedvolumesoftheleftandrightchannels.
LOnlyandROnlyuseonlytheselectedchannelfor Type[Low Pass, Band Pass, High Pass, Band Reject]
controllingthelimiter;theotherchannelisignored. Selectsthetypeoffilterforthesidechain.Formore
L/RIndividuallysplitstheeffectintotwoseparately information,seeFilterTypeonpage 62.
controlledmonocompressors.Whenprocessingstereo Frequency [Hz] [2020.00k]
signals,thiswillcausethestereoimagetoshift.
Setsthefilterscutofffrequency.
Fx Control Trim [0100]
Q [0.510.0]
ThisadjuststheleveloftheFXControlBusinputs.
SetsthebandwidthoftheEQ.
Detection Mode [RMS, Peak]
RMSbasestheamountofcompressionontheaverage COMPRESSOR
level,whichtendstosoundmorenaturalinmostcases.
Peakdoesnotdothisaveraging,andsothe Ratio [1.0:150.0:1, Inf:1]
compressorrespondsmorequicklytosuddenjumpsin Thisdetermineshowstrongtheeffectofthe
level. compressorwillbe,expressedbyhowmanydBin
ChooseRMSifyouwanttomaketheoverallvolume inputlevelovertheThresholdisrequiredfora1dB
moreconsistent,orchoosePeakifyouwanttobesure changeinoutputlevel.
thatevensuddenpeaksaresuppressed. At1.0:1,thecompressorhasnoeffect.At20.00:1,a
20dBincreaseintheinputlevel(overtheThreshold)
Envelope Detection Mode
resultsinonlya1dBchangeinoutput.AtInf:1,the
Input compressorbecomesabrickwalllimiter;oncethe
Output Envelope signalhitstheThreshold,theoutputlevelwillno
longerincrease,regardlessoftheinputlevel.
Envelope Detection Mode = RMS
Output Envelope
Input
Envelope Detection Mode = Peak
821
Effect Guide
Compressor/Limiter - Threshold and Ratio Compressor/Limiter - Attack & Release
Ratio=1.0 : 1 Threshold
Output Level
Ratio=2.0 : 1 Dry
Threshold Ratio=4.0 : 1
Ration=Inf : 1
Louder
Ratio=Inf : 1
Wet Attack=1
Louder Release=1
Input Level
Level Dry Ratio=1.0 : 1

Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Ratio=Inf : 1
Wet Attack=100
Threshold
Release=100
Release
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack
Time
Threshold [dB] [400] Lookahead [Check-box]

Compressionhappensonlywhentheinputsignal Ifthisison,theinputsignaltothecompressoris
exceedsthislevel.Inputlevelsabovethethresholdwill delayedsothatthelevelwillbedetectedfromthe
becompressed,andinputlevelsbelowthethreshold triggerinputbeforetheinputsignalisactually
willnotbecompressed. processed.Thisallowscompressiontoaccurately
followchangesinthetriggerinput.
Soft Knee Width [dB] [030]
Gain Adjust [dB] [Inf, 38+24]
Increasingthisvaluewillproduceamoregentle
volumechangearoundtheThresholdlevel. Setstheoutputgain.Itsoftenusefultoincreasethe
gain,sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobe
Soft Knee Width
reduced.
Source [OffTempo]
Output Level
Soft Knee Width = 0 dB

Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputgain.
Soft Knee Width = 30 dB
Amount [63+63]
Threshold Setstheamountofoutputgainmodulation.
OUTPUT
Soft Knee Width
Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Input Level
modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Attack [msec] [0.45500.0]
Thisdetermineshowquicklythecompressorwilltake
affectafterthesignalcrossesabovethethreshold.
Release [msec] [55000]

Thiscontrolshowquicklythecompressorwillstop
reducingvolumelevelafterthesignalfallsbelowthe
threshold.
822
Dynamics 003: Stereo Expander
003: Stereo Expander

Onscreengraphic,003StereoExpander
The yellow line shows the output level, relative to the input level. This will change
according to the Ratio, Threshold, and Soft Knee Width.
The expander lowers the level when the input signal is below the Threshold, to the left of
the gray area. In the example shown here, a 30 dB input results in 40 dB output, while
a -5dB input passes through unchanged.
Please see the description of the Stereo

Compressor for more information on the
graphic display.
The light gray area shows the Soft Knee Width.

Notice how the slope of the yellow line changes
as it passes through this range.
Anexpanderisliketheoppositeofacompressor:it
makesquietsignalsmorequiet.Youcanusethisto EXPANDER
increasedynamicrange,emphasizingthedifferences
Ratio [1.0:110.0:1]
betweensoftandloud.
Setsthesignalcompressionratio.
Left
Wet / Dry
Threshold [dB] [400]
Gain Adjust
Delay Expander Setsthelevelabovewhichthecompressorisapplied.
Side EQ
Envelope - Control Formoreinformation,seeThreshold[dB]on
+ Side Chain Monitor
Envelope - Control page 822.
Envelope Select
Delay Expander
Soft Knee Width [dB] [030]
Envelope Source
Gain Adjust
Right
Wet / Dry
FX Control BUS 1 Detection Mode
Setsthecurveatwhichcompressionisapplied.p.822.
FX Control BUS 2 Lookahead

Setstheattacktime.Formoreinformation,seeAttack
[msec]onpage 822.
ENVELOPE
Thispartoftheeffectallowyoutoselectandlistento Release [msec] [55000]
thecontrolsignal,adjusttheinputleveloftheFX Setsthereleasetime.Formoreinformation,see
ControlBuses,andselectbetweenRMSandPeak Release[msec]onpage 822.
detectionmodes.Theparametersarethesameasfor
theStereoCompressor;formoreinformation,see Lookahead [Check-box]
ENVELOPEonpage 821. Switchesleveldetectionlookahead(expanderinput
delay)on/off.Formoreinformation,seeLookahead
onpage 822.
SIDE CHAIN EQ
Thismultimodefilterappliesonlytothecontrolsignal,
andnottothemainaudiopath.Useittoalterthe Setstheoutputgain.
responseoftheexpandersothatitreacts(ordoesnot
react)onlytospecificfrequencies.Theparametersare
Source [OffTempo]
thesameasfortheStereoCompressor;formore Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputgain.
information,seeSIDECHAINEQonpage 821.
Amount [63+63]
Setsthemodulationamountoftheoutputgain.
823
Effect Guide
OUTPUT
004: St.Multiband Compressor

Onscreengraphic,004St.MultibandCompressorcrossover
Crossover between bands 3 and 4
This shows an approximation of each

bands frequency response.
Red lines indicate the crossover points.
Vertical axis: Gain (dB)

Horizontal axis: Cutoff frequency (Hz)
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4
Thisstereoeffectdividestheinputsignalintofour
bands,lowthroughhigh,withseparatedynamics ADJUST
controlofeachband.Whileitsnamedacompressor,
Knee [Soft, 0.010.74, Hard]
itsactuallymuchmorethanthat.Itcanbeusedasa
compressor,expander,gate,orEQwitheachband Thiseffectivelycontrolsboththeonset/offsetshapeof
performingadifferentfunction,ifdesired. thedynamicsprocessing,and(inconjunctionwith
Range),thecompression/expansionratio.
Thedynamicsprocessingworkssomewhatdifferently
thanastandardcompressor/expander.Formore Formoreinformation,seeRange[dB],below.
information,seeRange[dB],below.
Output Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]
Setstheoveralloutputgain.
Left
Wet / Dry
4-way Crossover
Compressor
Compressor Bands 1-4
Compressor
Compressor Eachofthefourbandshasidenticalparameters.
+ Envelope Control Gain
+ Envelope Control
+ Envelope Control
4-way Crossover
+ Envelope Control
Compressor
Compressor
Compressor These meters show the bands
Compressor input level and gain reduction, in
Right
Wet / Dry real-time. The red mark shows
the Threshold setting.
XOVER FILTER
Slope [6dB Oct, 12dB Oct, 18dB Oct, 24dB Oct]
Selectsthesteepnessofthecrossoverfilters.
Frequency 1-2 [Hz] [40240] Solo [Check-box]

Setsthefrequencyatwhichbands1and2aredivided. Usethissettingtoauditiontheprocessedsoundof
Frequency 2-3 [Hz] [1006.00k] eachband.
Setsthefrequencyatwhichbands2and3aredivided. IfthisisOn,theoutputofotherbandswillbemuted.If
thisisOnformorethanoneband,onlythebandsfor
Frequency 3-4 [Hz] [2.00k16.00k] whichthisisOnwillbeheard.Normally,thisshould
Setsthefrequencyatwhichbands3and4aredivided. beturnedOffforallbands.
Bypass [Check-box]
Youcanbypasscompressionforeachband
individually.
WhenthisisOn,youllhearthebandsuncompressed
signal.
824
Dynamics 004: St.Multiband Compressor
Threshold [dB] [80.00.0]

OUTPUT
Thecompression/expansionfunctionsonlyinarange
aroundtheThresholdlevel.Signalsoutsideofthis Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
rangearenotaffected. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Formoreinformation,seeRange[dB],below.
Range [dB] [24.0+18.0]

ThecombinationofThresholdandRangecontrolsthe
bandsbasicfunctionality(traditionalcompressor,low
levelexpander,etc.),andthecombinationofRange
andKneecreatesthebandscompression/expansion.
Tocreateatraditionalcompressoraction,setthe
Thresholdaround0.0,andtheRangetoanegative
value.
Tocreatealowlevelexpander(raisinglowervolume
levels,whileleavinghigherlevelsuntouched),setthe
Thresholdtoalowlevel,andtheRangetoapositive
value.
Youcanalsocreatespecialcompressioneffects,suchas
compressing(orexpanding)onlythemiddlerangeof
levels.Formoreinformation,seethediagrambelow.
Range / Knee
0 dB
Range
Output Level [dB]
Range = 0
Range > 0 Range < 0
Threshold
Input Level [dB]

0 dB
0 dB
Output Level [dB]
Knee = Hard
Threshold
Knee = Soft
Input Level [dB]

0 dB

Setsthebandsattacktime.Formoreinformation,see
Attack[msec]onpage 822.
Release [msec] [55000]

Setsthebandsreleasetime.
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]

Setsthebandsoutputgain.
825
Effect Guide
005: Stereo Limiter

Onscreengraphic,005StereoLimiter
This will change according to the Ratio and Threshold settings.
Input above the Threshold will be compressed. In the example shown
here, a 10 dB input will result in 20 dB output.
This meter shows the amount of gain reduction,

in real-time. To show that the gain is being
reduced, the meter moves in the opposite
direction from the Input meter.
This meter shows the output level, in real-time.
Vertical axis: Output from the limiter

Horizontal axis: Input to the envelope control
This meter shows the control signal, in real-time,

including the effect of the Side Chain EQ.
These lights show the relation of the control input to the Threshold, in real-time.
Under (green) means the input is below the Threshold, and so the signal will pass through unchanged.
Over (red) means that the input is above the Threshold, and so the signal will be limited.
TheLimiterregulatestheinputsignallevel.Itissimilar Select [L/R Mix, L Only, R Only, L/R Individually]

totheCompressor,exceptthattheLimitercompresses Thisdetermineshowtheleftandrightchannelsofthe
onlysignalsthatexceedthespecifiedleveltolower selectedSourceareused.Notethatthisparameter
unnecessarypeaksignals.TheLimiterappliesa appliesonlytothecontrolsignal;theeffectalways
peakingtypeEQtothetriggersignal(whichcontrols processesbothchannelsoftheinputsignalinstereo.
thedegreeoftheLimitereffect),allowingyoutoset Formoreinformation,seeSelectonpage 821.
anybandwidthtobecovered.Thisisatruestereo
effect;youcanlinkleftandrightchannels,oruseeach L/RMixisgenerallythebestchoiceforstereosignals;
channelindividually. thiswillcausethelimitingtobeappliedequallyto
bothchannels,basedonthecombinedvolumesofthe
leftandrightchannels.
Left
Gain Adjust
Wet / Dry LOnlyandROnlyuseonlytheselectedchannelfor
Limiter controllingthelimiter;theotherchannelisignored.
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
+
Trigger Monitor
L/RIndividuallyessentiallysplitsthestereolimiter
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select intotwoseparatelycontrolledmonolimiters.When
Limiter
Envelope Source
Gain Adjust processingstereosignals,thiswillcausethestereo
Right
Wet / Dry imagetoshift.
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
FX Control Trim [0100]
ENVELOPE Side Chain Monitor [Check-box]

Thisletsyoulistendirectlytothecontrolsignal(as
Source [Input, FX Control 1, FX Control 2] selectedbytheSourceparameter)throughthe
Thisselectsthecontrolsignalforthelimiter:theinput sidechainEQ.SeeSideChainMonitoronpage 821.
signal,FXControlBus1,orFXControlBus2.Formore
information,seeSourceonpage 821.
SIDE CHAIN EQ
ThisEQappliesonlytothecontrolsignal,andnotto
themainaudiopath.Useittoaltertheresponseofthe
limitersothatitreacts(ordoesnotreact)onlyto
specificfrequencies.
826
Dynamics 006: Multiband Limiter
Forinstance,ifyouwantthelimitertoignorecymbal Threshold [dB] [400]

crashes,adjustthesidechainEQtoreducethegainof Setsthelevelabovewhichthecompressorisapplied.
frequenciesspecifictothecymbals.Whiledoingso,it Formoreinformation,seeThreshold[dB]on
mayhelptoturnontheSideChainMonitorswitch,so page 822.
thatyoucanlistenasyouhoneinonthedesired
frequencies. Attack [1100]
Side PEQ On [Check-box] Setstheattacktime.Formoreinformation,seeAttack
[msec]onpage 822.
ThisletsyouenableanddisablethesidechainEQ
handyforcomparingitseffect. Release [1100]
Fc [Hz] [2012.00k] Setsthereleasetime.Formoreinformation,see
Release[msec]onpage 822.
SetstheEQcenterfrequencyforthecontrolsignal.
Q [0.510.0]
Setstheoutputgain.Formoreinformation,seeGain
SetstheEQbandwidthforthecontrolsignal. Adjust[dB]onpage 822.
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0] Source [OffTempo]
SetstheEQgainforthecontrolsignal. Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputgain.
Amount [63+63]
LIMITER
Ratio [1.0:150.0:1, Inf:1]
Setsthesignalcompressionratio.Formore OUTPUT
information,seeRatioonpage 821.
006: Multiband Limiter

Onscreengraphic,006MultibandLimiter
This will change according to the Ratio and Threshold settings.
The red line shows the Threshold.
The top meter shows the frequency

bands input level, in real-time.
The bottom meter shows the

frequency bands gain reduction,
in real-time.
Thismonoeffectprovidesseparatelimitersforthelow, overallThresholdparameter,eachbandhasa
mid,andhighfrequencies.Youcancontrolthe thresholdOffset,whichmakesthebandmoreorless
dynamicsforeachrangetoadjusttherelativelevelsof sensitivetotheinputsignal.
thelow,mid,andhighranges,withverydifferent Forexample,ifyoudonotwanttoapplylimitingto
resultsfromEQ. thehighrange,reducetheHighOffsetsothatitis
Threshold Offsets lowerthantheThreshold.Thismeansthatthehigh
rangelimiterwillnotrespond,andsothehighband
Thethreebandssharecommonsettingsforratio, willpassthroughunaffected.
attackandreleasetimes,andoutputgainadjust.The
differenceisinthethresholdsettings.Inadditiontothe
827
Effect Guide
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out

Left
Band-Pass Filters
Wet / Dry Setstheoutputgain.Formoreinformation,seeGain
Low
Limiter Adjust[dB]onpage 822.
Envelope - Control
+ Mid Low Offset

Limiter Source [OffTempo]
Envelope - Control Gain Adjust
High Mid Offset
Limiter Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputgain.
Envelope - Control
High Offset
Right
Wet / Dry Amount [63+63]
LIMITER
LOW
Ratio [1.0:150.0:1, Inf:1]
Offset [dB] [400]
Setsthesignalcompressionratio.Formore
ThisadjuststheThresholdlevelforthelowrange.

MID
Setstheoveralllevelabovewhichthelimiteris
applied.EachbandsOffsetparameterthenworksas Offset [dB] [400]
anoffsetforthisparameter. ThisadjuststheThresholdlevelforthemidrange.
Formoreinformation,seeThreshold[dB]on
page 822.
HIGH
Attack [1100]
Offset [dB] [400]
[msec]onpage 822. ThisadjuststheThresholdlevelforthehighrange.
Release [1100]
OUTPUT
Setsthereleasetime.Formoreinformation,see
Release[msec]onpage 822. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
007: Stereo Multiband Limiter

Thisisatruestereomultibandlimiter.Formore Release [1100]
information,seethemonoversion,006:Multiband Setsthereleasetime.p.822.
Limiter,above.
Left
Band-Pass Filters Setstheoutputgain.p.822.
Low Wet / Dry
Limiter
Source [OffTempo]
Envelope - Control
Mid
Limiter
Envelope - Control Gain Adjust
High
Envelope - Control
Limiter Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputgain.
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Low
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Amount [63+63]
Mid
Envelope - Control
High
Limiter Setsthemodulationamountoftheoutputgain.
Right
Wet / Dry
Offset
LOW
LIMITER Offset [dB] [400]
Ratio [1.0:150.0:1, Inf:1] ThisadjuststheThresholdlevelforthelowrange.For
moreinformation,seeThresholdOffsetson
page 827.
Threshold [dB] [400] MID

Setsthelevelabovewhichthecompressorisapplied.
Formoreinformation,seeThreshold[dB]on Offset [dB] [400]
page 822. ThisadjuststheThresholdlevelforthemidrange.
Attack [1100]
[msec]onpage 822.
828
Dynamics 008: Stereo Mastering Limiter
HIGH OUTPUT
Offset [dB] [400] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
ThisadjuststheThresholdlevelforthehighrange.
008: Stereo Mastering Limiter

Thisstereolimiterisoptimizedformasteringfull Important:Thelookaheaddelaywillcausephasing
mixes.Itusesashortlookaheaddelay(1.3ms)for effectsifthisissettoanyinbetweenvalues
zeroovershootperformance,andautomatically (1:9999:1).OnlycompletelyWetorDrywillsound
optimizestheoutputleveltoaspecifiedmaximum. correct.
Foradescriptionoftheonscreengraphics,see005: Source [OffTempo]
StereoLimiteronpage 826.
Left
Amount [+/100]
Wet / Dry
Out Ceiling
Limiter
+ Envelope - Control
Using the Stereo Mastering Limiter
Limiter
Out Ceiling
Carefulcompressionandlimitingaregreatmastering
Right
Wet / Dry
tools.Herearesomesimpleinstructionswhichshould
producegoodresultswithmostmaterial:
1. GototheTFX/MFXpage.
LIMITER
2. ForTFX2,select008:StereoMasteringLimiter
Threshold [dB] [30.00.0] Thelimitershouldbethelasteffectbeforetheoutput.
Thisaffectsboththelimitingthresholdandtheoutput 3. SettheOutCeilingtoavaluebetween0.3dBand
gain. 3dB.
SignalsabovetheThresholdwillbelimited;signals 4. LeavetheReleaseatthedefaultsetting.
belowthislevelwillnotbelimited,butwillstillbenefit 5. MakesurethatWet/DryissettoWet,withno
fromanyincreaseinoutputgain(seebelow). modulation.
Theoutputgainisautomaticallyincreasedbythe 6. Gototheloudestpartofthesong.
differencebetweentheThresholdandtheOut
7. Whileplayingthesong,adjusttheThreshold,and
Ceiling.Forinstance,iftheThresholdis9.0dBand
watchthegainreductionmeter.SettheThreshold
theOutCeilingis3.0dB,gainwillbeincreasedby
sothatthegainreductionmeterrarelyifever
6dB.
showsmorethan6dBoflimiting.
Out Ceiling [dB] [30.00.0] YoucouldalsouseacompressorinTFX1,beforethe
Thiscontrolsthemaximumoutputlevel.Ingeneral,its limiter,suchas002:StereoCompressoror004:St.
besttosetthisslightlybelow0.0,inorderto MultibandCompressor.
accommodatethelessthanoptimaloutputstages Aboveall,remembertobegentle;themoreyou
whicharesometimesfoundinconsumeraudio increasethevolume,themorelikelyyouaretoadd
devices. distortion.
Anaggressivesettingwouldbe0.3dB;aconservative
setting,toavoidclippingonsomeolderCDplayers,
wouldbe3dB.
Release [msec] [0.651000.0]

Thiscontrolshowlongittakesthelimitertoallowthe
gaintoriseagainafterthesignalisnolongerabovethe
threshold.Generally,settingsbetween1.0and5.0
millisecondswillbemosteffective.Formore
information,seeRelease[msec]onpage 822.
OUTPUT
Wet/Dry [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet]
Setsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedryinput.
829
Effect Guide
009: Stereo Gate

Onscreengraphic,009StereoGate
The red mark shows the Threshold setting.
These lights show the relation of the control input to the

Threshold, in real-time.
Under (green) means the input is below the Threshold, and
Over (red) means that it is above the Threshold. Going
above the Threshold may make the gate open or close,
depending on the Polarity setting.
Thiseffectmutestheinputsignalwhenitfallsbelowa
specifiedlevel.Youcanalsoinverttheon/offstatusof GATE
thegate,orusenoteon/offmessagestoturnthegate
Threshold [0100]
on/offdirectly.
Setsthelevelatwhichgatingisapplied.
Stereo In - Stereo Out NotethatthisdoesnotapplywhentheENVELOPE
Left
Gain Adjust
Wet / Dry SourceissettoDmod.
Envelope Source Delay Gate
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control Trigger Monitor Gate - Threshold
+
Envelope - Control
Output Level
Envelope Select
Delay Gate
D-mod Gain Adjust
Right Threshold
Wet / Dry
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Louder
Louder
ENVELOPE Input Level
Source [Dmod, Input, FX Control 1, FX Control 2]

Attack [1100]
Selectsthesourcetocontrolthegate:Dmodcontrol,or
Setstheattacktime.
usetheinputsignalorFXControlBus1or2asa
trigger.SeeSourceonpage 821. Release [1100]
Dmod Control [OffTempo] Setsthereleasetime.
Selectsthesourcethatwillcontrolthegatewhen
Gate - Attack / Release
EnvelopeSource=Dmod.
Threshold
Select [L/R Mix, L Only, R Only]
Dry
Selectsthecontrolsignal:leftandrightlinked,leftonly,
orrightonly.SeeSelectonpage 821.

Wet Attack=1
ThisadjuststheleveloftheFXControlBusinputs. Release=1
Side Chain Monitor [Check-box]

Switchesbetweenmonitoringtheeffectoutputandthe Wet Attack=100
triggersignal.Formoreinformation,seeSideChain Release=100
Monitoronpage 826. Attack Release
SIDE CHAIN EQ Delay Time [msec] [0100]

ThisbandoffullyparametricEQappliesonlytothe Thissetsthedelaytimefortheinputtothegate.When
controlsignal,andnottothemainaudiopath.Useitto usingshorterAttackTimesettings,youcanlengthen
altertheresponseofthelimitersothatitreacts(ordoes theDelayTimesothatthesoundisinputafterthegate
notreact)onlytospecificfrequencies.Itsparameters opens.
areidenticaltothoseintheStereoLimiter;formore
information,seeSIDECHAINEQonpage 826.
830
Dynamics 010: Stereo Noise Reduction
Polarity [+, ] With,thedirectioninwhichthemodulationsource

Thiscontrolsthewaythatthegateopensandclosesin opensorclosesthegateisreversedaswell.
responsetotheinputsignal.
+:Thisisthedefaultsetting,fornormalgatebehavior. OUTPUT
Thegatewillopenwhentheinputisabovethe
Threshold,andclosewhentheinputfallsbelowit.
:Thisreversesthenormaloperation.Thegatewill information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
closewhentheinputisabovetheThreshold,andopen
whentheinputfallsbelowit.
010: Stereo Noise Reduction

Thiseffectminimizesobtrusivenoisebyreducingthe Onscreengraphic,010StereoNoiseReduction
volumewhenthesignalisatalowlevel.Youcanuse
thisifaguitarormicsignalfromtheaudioinput
containsnoise.

Left
Wet / Dry
+
Envelope Select
Envelope - Control Trigger Monitor
Envelope Source
This is a realtime indication of the control input signal level (Input),
Right
Wet / Dry the gain reduction produced by the control input signal (Gain
FX Control BUS 1 Reduce), and the output signal level (Output).
FX Control BUS 2 Noise Reduction reduces the noise level below the Threshold.
ENVELOPE
Envelope Source [Input, FX Control 1, FX Control 2]
Selectsthetriggersourcetouse:theinputsignal,FX
ControlBus1,orFXControlBus2.p.821.
Envelope Select [L/R Mix, Left, Right]

Selectswhetherthecompressorislinkedbetween
left/right,controlledonlybytheleftsignal,onlybythe
rightsignal,orindependentlyforleftandright.p.821.

NOISE REDUCTION
Trigger Monitor [Check-box]
Switchesbetweenmonitoringtheeffectoutputandthe
triggersignal.p.826.
Threshold [dB] [72.022.0]

Setsthenoiselevel
OUTPUT
831
Effect Guide
EQ and Filters
011: Stereo Parametric 4EQ

Onscreengraphic,011StereoParametric4EQ
Purple area:
Shows the combined
frequency response
of all 4 bands.
The effect of Trim is not shown.
The currently selected band
is shown by a thick red line.
Horizontal axis: Cutoff frequency (Hz)
Red lines show the frequencies of bands 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Thisisastereo4bandparametricequalizer.Bands1 Band4 Type [Peaking, Shelving-High]

and4canbesettoeitherpeakingorshelvingmodes, SelectstheEQtypeforBand4.SeeBand1Type,
andyoucanmodulatethegainofBand2inrealtime. above.
Stereo In - Stereo Out Band1 Fc [Hz] [201.00k]
Left
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Wet / Dry
PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand1.
Trim
LEQ HEQ
Q [0.510.0]
Trim
LEQ HEQ SetsthebandwidthofBand1.Thehigherthevalue,the
PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ narrowerthebandbecomes.
Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]

SetsthegainofBand1.
PARAMETRIC EQ Band2 Fc [Hz] [5010.00k]

SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand2.
Trim [0100]
Q [0.510.0]
Setstheinputlevel.
SetsthebandwidthofBand2.
Band1 Type [Peaking, Shelving-Low]
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]
Peakingcreatesabellshapearoundacenterfrequency.
SetsthegainofBand2.
Shelvingcreatesaslopeuptoashelf,whichthen
extendsallthewaytothebottomortopofthe Band3 Fc [Hz] [30010.00k]
frequencyrange. SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand3.
Parametric 4EQ - Band1, Band4 Type
Q [0.510.0]
3dB
+Gain
Band4 Type=Shelving High SetsthebandwidthofBand3.
Band4 Type=Peaking
0dB Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]

Band1 Type=Shelving Low SetsthegainofBand3.
Gain Band1 Type=Peaking
3dB
Band4 Fc [Hz] [50020.00k]
Band1 Cutoff Band4 Cutoff
832
EQ and Filters 012: Stereo Graphic 7EQ
Q [0.510.0] Band2 Source [OffTempo]

SetsthebandwidthofBand4. SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheBand2gain.
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0] Amount [dB] [18.0+18.0]

SetsthegainofBand4. SetsthemodulationamountfortheBand2gain.
GAIN MOD OUTPUT

Parametric 4EQ - Band2 Gain Mod Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
+15dB D -mod
Band2 Cutoff
+6dB +6dB
0dB 0dB
Band2 Cutoff
9dB
D-mod
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0 Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0
Band2 Gain Mod Amount[dB]= +9.0 Band2 Gain Mod Amount[dB]= 15.0
012: Stereo Graphic 7EQ

Onscreengraphic,012:StereoGraphic7EQ
Purple area: This shows the frequency response Red lines show the center frequencies of each band.
after passing through all of the bands.
The selected band

is indicated by a
thick red line.
Green line: Shows

the frequency response
of the selected band
alone, without the results
Horizontal axis: of the other bands.
Frequency (Hz)
These sliders adjust the

gain (dB) of each band.
This line shows the center

frequencies of the selected Type.
Thisisastereo7bandgraphicequalizer.Thebar 7:Low, 8:Wide Low, 9:Mid, 10:Wide Mid,

graphofthegainsettingforeachbandgivesyoua 11:High, 12:Wide High]
clear,visualideaoffrequencyresponses.Youcan
Thisparameterselectsacombinationofcenter
selectacenterfrequencysettingforeachbandfrom
frequenciesforeachband.Eachcenterfrequencyis
twelvetypes,accordingtothesound.
shownonthebottomoftheGainslider.
Youcanconfigurea21BandGraphicEQrangingfrom
Left
Wet / Dry
80Hzto18kHzifyouroutethreeGraphic7BandEQ
effectsinseries,withasettingof7:Low,9:Mid,and
Trim Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7 11:HighforeachEQ.
Trim Trim [0100]
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7
Right
Setstheinputlevel
Wet / Dry
(Band18 Gain [dB]) [18.0+18.0]

Thesecontrolssetthegainforeachoftheeightbands.
GRAPHIC EQ
Type [1:Wide 1, 2:Wide 2, 3:Wide 3,
4:Half Wide 1, 5:Half Wide 2, 6:Half Wide 3,
833
Effect Guide
OUTPUT
013: Stereo Master 3EQ

Thisisastereothreebandequalizer,withsweepable High Source [OffTempo]
lowandhighshelvingandafullyparametricmid SelectsthesourcethatwillmodulatetheHighGain.
band.Thelowandhighgainscanbecontrolledinreal
time.YoucanusethisasaTFXtomakefinal Amount [dB] [36.5+36.0]
adjustmentstothesound. SetstheamountbywhichtheHighGainwillbe
ForadescriptionoftheonscreenEQgraphic,see011: modulated.
StereoParametric4EQonpage 832.

OUTPUT
Left
Low Mid High Wet / Dry
LEQ PEQ HEQ
Trim modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod
D-mod
PARAMETRIC EQ
Trim [0100]
Setstheinputlevel.
Low Fc [Hz] [0980]

SetsthecutofffrequencyoftheLowEQ(shelving
type).
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]

SetsthegainoftheLowEQ.
Mid Cutoff [Hz] [10010.00k]

SetsthecutofffrequencyoftheMidEQ(peakingtype).
Q [0.510.0]
SetsthebandwidthoftheMidEQ
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]

SetsthegainoftheMidEQ.
High Cutoff [Hz] [50020.00k]

SetsthecutofffrequencyoftheHighEQ(shelving
type).
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]

SetsthegainoftheHighEQ.
GAIN MOD
Low Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthesourcethatwillmodulatetheLowGain.
Amount [dB] [36.5+36.0]

SetstheamountbywhichtheLowGainwillbe
modulated.
834
EQ and Filters 014: Stereo Exciter/Enhncr
014: Stereo Exciter/Enhncr

ThiseffectisacombinationoftheExciter,whichaddsa
punchtothesoundandtheEnhancer,whichadds ENHANCER
spreadandpresence.
L Delay Time [msec] [0.050.0]
Stereo In - Stereo Out TheLandRDelayTimeparameterssetthedelaytimes
Left
Wet / Dry fortheEnhancersleftandrightchannels.Specifying
LEQ HEQ
Exciter slightlydifferentdelaytimesfortheleftandright
EQ Trim Delay
channelswilladdastereoimage,depth,andwidthto
Depth
EQ Trim Delay
thesound.
Exciter
Enhancer R Delay Time [msec] [0.050.0]
Right
Wet / Dry
SetsthedelaytimefortheEnhancersrightchannel.
D-mod
Formoreinformation,seeLDelayTime[msec],
above.
Pre EQ Depth [0100]

SetsthedeterminestowhatdegreetheEnhancereffect
Trim [0100]
isapplied.
Setsthe2bandEQinputlevel.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourceoftheEnhancerwidth.
Selectsthecutofffrequency(lowormidlow)ofthe
lowrangeequalizer. Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountoftheEnhancerwidth.
LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]
OUTPUT
HEQ Fc [High, Mid-High]
Selectsthecutofffrequency(highormidhigh)ofthe modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
highrangeequalizer. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]
EXCITER
Emphasis Frequency [070]
Thisparametersetsthefrequencytobeemphasized.
Highervalueswillemphasizelowerfrequencies.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheEmphasis
Frequency.
Amount [70+70]
Setstheamountofmodulationofthefrequencytobe
emphasized
Blend [+/100]
Thisparametersetsthedepth(intensity)oftheExciter
effect.Positivevaluesgiveafrequencypattern(tobe
emphasized)differentfromnegativevalues.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheExciterintensity.
Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountfortheExciterintensity.
835
Effect Guide
015: Stereo Isolator

Thisisastereoeffectthatseparatestheinputsignal
intolow,mid,andhighfrequencybands,andcontrols ISOLATOR
thevolumeofeachbandindependently.Forexample
Low Gain [dB] [Inf, 59+12]
youcanseparatelyboostorcutthekick,snare,andhi
hatsoundsfromadrumsignalinrealtime. Setsthelowfrequencygain.

Source [OffTempo]
Left
Low Wet / Dry
Selectsthesourcethatwillmodulatelowfrequency
Mid gain.
Trim High
Isolator
Amount [72+72]
Low
Mid
Setstheamountbywhichthelowfrequencygainwill
Trim High
bemodulated.
Right
Wet / Dry
Mid Gain [dB] [Inf, 59+12]
D-mod
D-mod Setsthemidfrequencygain.
D-mod
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourceformidfrequencygain.
XOVER FILTER
ForadescriptionoftheonscreenCrossoverFilter Amount [72+72]
graphic,see004:St.MultibandCompressoron Setstheamountbywhichthemidfrequencygainwill
page 824. bemodulated.
Trim [0100] High Gain [dB] [Inf, 59+12]

Setstheinputlevel. Setsthehighfrequencygain.
Frequency Low-Mid [Hz] [100500] Source [OffTempo]

Setsthefrequencyatwhichthelowandmidbandsare Selectsthemodulationsourceforhighfrequencygain.
divided.
Amount [72+72]
Frequency Mid-High [Hz] [20006000] Setstheamountbywhichthehighfrequencygainwill
Setsthefrequencyatwhichthemidandhighbands bemodulated.
aredivided.
OUTPUT
016: Stereo Wah/Auto Wah

Thisstereowaheffectallowsyoutocreatesoundsfrom Automakesthesweepsfollowtheinputsignals
vintagewahpedalsimulationtoautowahsimulation, volumeenvelope.Autowahisfrequentlyusedfor
andmuchbroaderrangesettings. funkguitarpartsandclavsounds.

Dmodletsyoucontrolthefilterdirectlyviaa
Left
Wet / Dry
modulationsource,justlikeawahpedal.
Wah LFOusesanLFOtocreatecyclicsweeps.
Envelope Sens
Sweep Mode
+ Envelope Shape
D-mod
Response
Auto
D-mod Source [OffTempo]
LFO
LFO Selectsthemodulationsourceforthewahwhen
Wah
SweepModeissettoDmod.
Right
Wet / Dry
Response [0100]
SetstheresponsespeedwhenSweepModeissetto
CONTROL AutoorDmod.
Sweep Mode [Auto, Dmod, LFO] Envelope Sens [0100]

Thisparameterselectshowthewahwillbecontrolled. Thisparametersetsthesensitivityofautowah.
Increasethevalueiftheinputsignalistoolowto
sweep.Reducethevalueiftheinputsignalissohigh
thatthefilterisstoppedtemporarily.
836
EQ and Filters 016: Stereo Wah/Auto Wah
Envelope Shape [+/100] Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]

Thisparameterdeterminesthesweepcurveforthe Thisspecifiesthephasedifferencerelativetothe
autowah. selectedCommonFXLFO.ItappliesonlywhenType
issettoCommon1orCommon2.
Envelope Shape
Level
Envelope
WAH
Frequency Bottom [0100]
value = 0...+100
value = 0...100 Thissetsthewahfrequencywhenthemodulation
Time
signal(selectedbySweepMode)isatitsminimum
level.
Toreversethesweepdirection,youcansetthistobe
LFO higherthantheFrequencyTop,below.
Frequency
Sweep Mode=D-mod
Frequency Frequency
Higher
Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
Top=75 Wah
Bottom=60
Higher
Wah
ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen Woo
MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff. Bottom=25 Woo

Top=30
D-mod D-mod
Source [OffTempo] Zero
Higher
Max Zero
Higher
Max
ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency. Sweep Mode=Auto

Frequency Frequency
Amount [20.00+20.00] Top=75

Wah Bottom=75 Wah Wah
ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
Higher
Higher
Envelope
MIDI/Tempo Sync Bottom=25

Woo Woo
Top=25
Woo
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box] Envelope Time Envelope Time
On(checked):WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn,theLFO
willsynchronizetotempoassetbyBPM,below.The Frequency Top [0100]
LFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNoteand Thissetsthewahfrequencywhenthemodulation
Timesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFrequency signal(selectedbySweepMode)isatitsmaximum
andFrequencySourceandAmountwillbeignored. level.
Off(unchecked):WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOff,the
Frequencysettingswilldeterminethespeedofthe Resonance [0100]
LFO,andtheBPM,BaseNote,andTimessettingswill Setstheresonanceamount.
havenoeffect.
Low Pass Filter [Check-box]
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00] Switchesthewahlowpassfilteronandoff.
MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo.40240setsthetempo
manuallyforthisindividualeffect. Output Level [0100]
Setstheoutputleveloftheeffectsound.
Base Note [r w ]
ThissetsthebasicspeedoftheLFO,relativetothe Source [OffTempo]
BPMsetting.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoa Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillcontrolthe
wholenote,includingtriplets. effectoutputlevel.
Times [x1x32] Amount [+/100]

ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For Setsthemodulationamountoftheeffectoutputlevel.
eighthnote.
OUTPUT
LFO Type modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
Individual:theLFOusestheFrequencyand
MIDI/TempoSyncparameters,above.
Common1or2:theLFOusesthefrequencyortempo
syncoftheselectedCommonLFO,sothatyoucan
synchronizemultipleLFObasedeffectstogether.
Formoreinformation,seeCommonFXLFOson
page 790.
837
Effect Guide
017: St. Vintage/Custom Wah

Thiseffectmodelsthetonalcharacterofavintagewah Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
pedal.Youcancustomizethetoneandrangesettings. WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
Left
Wet / Dry
Envelope Sens Sweep Mode

Wah WAH
+ Auto Shape / Invert
Mode [Preset, Custom]
Response Mode
D-mod Preset Setting
D-mod LFO
LFO Custom Parameters
Wah Selectseitherpresetorcustomsettings.
Right
Wet / Dry Frequency Bottom [0100]
Setsthelowerlimitofthewahcenterfrequencywhen
ModeissettoCustom.p.837.
CONTROL
Frequency Top [0100]
Sweep Mode [Auto, Dmod, LFO]
Setstheupperlimitofthewahcenterfrequencywhen
Selectsthecontrolfromautowah,modulationsource, ModeissettoCustom.p.837.
andLFO.Formoreinformation,seeSweepModeon
page 836. Resonance Bottom [0100]
SetsthelowerlimitofresonanceamountwhenMode
Source [OffTempo]
issettoCustom.
Selectsthemodulationsourceforthewahwhen
SweepModeissettoDmod. Resonance Top [0100]
SetstheupperlimitofresonanceamountwhenMode
Manual [0100]
issettoCustom.
SetsthecenterfrequencywhenSweepModeissetto
DmodandSourceissettoOff. Shape [+/100]
Thisparameterspecifiesthesweepcurveofthewah.It
Response [0100]
appliestoallcontrolviaautowah,Dmod,andLFO,
SetsthespeedofresponsewhenSweepModeissetto andletsyouadjustsubtlenuancesofthewaheffect.
AutoorDmod.
Invert [Check-box]
Envelope Sens [0100]
Invertsthepolarityofthesweep.
Setstheautowahsensitivity.
Output Level [0100]
Setstheoutputleveloftheeffectsound.
LFO
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillcontrolthe
ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
effectoutputlevel.
MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
Amount [+/100]
Source [OffTempo]
Setsthemodulationamountoftheeffectoutputlevel.
ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
Amount [20.00+20.00] OUTPUT

MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Base Note [r w ]
Times [x1x32]
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn,theLFOspeedisset
byBPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.
Formoreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
page 837.

Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
838
EQ and Filters 018: Stereo Random Filter
018: Stereo Random Filter

ThisstereobandpassfilterismodulatedbyanLFO, Phase [degrees] [18+18]
usingeitherastepshapewaveformandorasample ThissetstheLFOphasedifferencebetweentheleftand
andholdshape.Thefilterwillalsoselfresonate,for right,instepsof10degrees.Offsettingtheleftand
creatingspecialeffects. rightphasesaltershowmodulationisappliedtothe
leftandrightchannels,creatingaswellingeffect.
Left
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
0 +90 +180 [degree]
Filter
Filter
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Step-Tri/Random 180 90 0 [degree]
FILTER
Manual [0100]
Setsthefilterscenterfrequency,beforeLFO Frequency
modulation.
TheseparametersapplywhenMIDI/TempoSyncis
Depth [0100] Off(unchecked).
TheLFOmodulatesthefiltersfrequency;thissetsthe
intensityoftheLFOmodulation.
Thissetsthespeedofthetrianglewaveform,inHz.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsasourcetomodulatetheLFODepth.
Step Frequency [Hz] [0.0550.00]
Thissetsthespeedofthesteps,inHz.
Amount [+/100]
SetstheintensityoftheDepthmodulation.
Source [OffTempo]
Thisselectsamodulationsourceforboththe
Resonance [0100] FrequencyandtheStepFrequency.Youcansetthe
Resonanceemphasizestheaudioaroundthefilters modulationamountsindividually,below.
centerfrequency.
Amount [20.00+20.00]
At0,thereisnoemphasis,andfrequenciesoutsidethe
SetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
centerwillsimplydiminishsmoothly.
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbre Step Amount [50.00+50.00]
ofthefilter,makingitsoundmorenasalorextreme. SetstheStepFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
separate,whistlingpitch.At100,thefilterwillself MIDI/Tempo Sync
oscillate(afterbeingfedaninitialburstofinput).
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
Whenthisison,theLFOspeedissetbyBPM,Base
LFO Note,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.Formore
information,seeMIDI/TempoSynconpage 837.
Waveform and Phase
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Waveform [Step-Tri, Random] MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo.40240setsthetempo
StepTricreatesasteppytrianglewaveform(seethe manuallyforthisindividualeffect.
diagrambelow).TheLFOFrequencyparametersets
theoriginaltrianglewaveformspeed,andtheLFO Base Note [r w ]
StepFreqparameteradjuststhewidthofthesteps.
Times [x1x32]
Randomproducesasampleandholdwaveform,with
Thesesettrianglewaveformsbasenoteandmultiplier.
thespeedcontrolledbytheStepFreq.
Formoreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
Random Filter LFO page 837.
LFO Frequency
Step Note [r w ]
Times [x1x32]
Step Frequency
Thesesetthestepsbasenoteandmultiplier.Formore
Step Frequency
Step-Tri Random
information,seeMIDI/TempoSynconpage 837.
839
Effect Guide
Step LFO type OUTPUT

Type (Step) [Individual, Common1, Common2]
Wet/Dry [Wet, 99:11:99,
ThiscontrolstheLFOsourceforthesteps.Itdoesnot Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet]
affectthetriangleLFO.
Thissetsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedry
Individual:thestepsusetheFrequencyand input.FromWetto1:99,theeffectsoundsphasewill
MIDI/TempoSyncparameters,above. bereversed.
Common1or2:thestepsusethefrequencyortempo
syncoftheselectedCommonLFO,sothatyoucan
Source [OffTempo]
synchronizemultipleLFObasedeffectstogether. ThisselectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180] Amount [+/100]

SetsthephaseoffsetwhenType=Common1or ThissetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry.
Common2.p.837.
019: Multi Mode Filter

Thismultimodefilterincludeslowpass,highpass, Amount [+/100]
bandpass,andbandrejectmodes.Youcanmodulate Setstheamountbywhichtheresonancewillbe
thecutofffrequencyandresonancefromeitheranLFO modulated.
ordynamicmodulation.
Stereo In - Stereo Out DRIVER

Left
Wet / Dry
Multimode Filter Driver Bypass [Check-box]

Trim Output
LPF Switchesdistortionon/offwithinthefilter.
HPF
BPF
Filter Type
Gain [0100]
BRF
Setsthedistortionamount.
Multimode Filter Driver
Trim Output
Right
Low Boost [0100]
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase Setstheamountoflowrangeboost.
LFO: Tri / Sine LFO Shape
Output [0100]
Setstheoutputlevel.
MULTIMODE FILTER
Trim [0100] LFO
Setstheinputlevel. Waveform [Triangle, Sine]
Type [LPF, HPF, BPF, BRF] SelectstheLFOWaveform.
Selectsthetypeoffilter.Formoreinformation,see Shape [+/100]
FilterTypeonpage 62.
ThischangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform,
Cutoff Frequency [0100] whichemphasizesordeemphasizesthepeaks,as
Setsthecutofffrequency(centerfrequency). shownbelow.
LFO Shape
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourceofthecutoff. LFO Shape = 0...+100 LFO Shape = 0...100
Amount [+/100]
LFO Waveform=Sine
Setsthemodulationamountofthecutoff.
Depth [0100]
SetsthedepthtowhichtheLFOwillmodulatethe
cutofffrequency. Phase [degrees] [180+180]
SetstheLFOphasedifferencebetweentheleftand
Resonance [0100] right.SeePhase[degrees]onpage 839.
Setstheresonanceamount.
Source [OffTempo] ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
Selectsthesourcethatwillmodulatetheamountof MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
resonance.
840
EQ and Filters 020: Stereo Sub Oscillator
Source [OffTempo] Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]

ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency. Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
Amount [20.00+20.00] information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box] WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Base Note [r w ]
OUTPUT
Times [x1x32] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
page 837.
020: Stereo Sub Oscillator

Thiseffectaddsverylowfrequenciestotheinput Note Interval [480]
signal.Itsusefulforcreatingpowerfulsubbasseffects, ThissetsapitchoffsetfromthereceivedMIDInote
suchasdeep,rumblingdrumsounds.Youcanalso number,insemitones.ItappliesonlywhenOSCMode
adjusttheoscillatorfrequencytofollowincoming issettoNote(KeyFollow).
MIDInotes,foruseasanoctaver.
Note Fine [+/100]
Thisadjuststhefrequencyincents(1/100ofa
Left
Envelope Shape
Wet / Dry
semitone).ItappliesonlywhenOSCModeissetto
Envelope Sens Pre LPF Note(KeyFollow).
Fixed Sine Oscillator
D-mod Fixed Frequency
Note No. Note Interval, Fine

OSC Mode Pitch Fixed Frequency [Hz] [10.080.0]
Note (Key Follow)
Envelope Sens Pre LPF

SetstheoscillatorfrequencywhenOSCModeissetto
Envelope Shape Fixed.
Right
Wet / Dry
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoscillator
ENVELOPE frequencywhenOSCModeissettoFixed.
Pre LPF [1100] Amount [80+80]

Thisparametersetstheupperlimitofthefrequency Setstheoscillatorfrequencymodulationamountwhen
rangetowhichverylowharmonicsareadded.Adjust OSCModeissettoFixed.
thisparameterifyoudonotwanttoaddlower
harmonicstothehigherrange.
OUTPUT
Sensitivity [0100] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Setsthesensitivitywithwhichverylowharmonicsare modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
added. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Shape [+/100]
Setstheoscillatorsvolumeenvelopecurve.
SUB OSCILLATOR
OSC Mode [Note (Key Follow), Fixed]
Thisdetermineswhethertheoscillatorfrequency
followsthenotenumber,orstaysatafixedvalue.
Note(KeyFollow):Theoscillatorsfrequencyisbased
onMIDInotenumber(ontheeffectsMIDIchannel),
allowingyoutouseitasanoctaver.TheNoteInterval
parameter,below,setsthepitchoffsetfromtheoriginal
note,insemitones.
Fixed:theoscillatorusesthemanuallysetFixed
Frequency,below.
841
Effect Guide
021: Talking Modulator

Thiseffectaddsanunusualcharacter,likeahuman Voice Center [A, I, U, E, O]
voice,totheinputsignal.Modulatingthetonevia Selectsavowelsoundatthecentermodulationvalue.
dynamicmodulation,youcancreateaninteresting
effectthatsoundsasiftheguitarorsynthesizeris Voice Bottom [A, I, U, E, O]
talking. Selectsavowelsoundattheminimummodulation
value.
Formant Shift [+/100]

Left
Wet / Dry
Setsthefrequencytowhichtheeffectisapplied.
+ Talking Modulator A-I-U-E-O
Thisparameteradjuststhefrequencyleveltowhich
theeffectisapplied.Ifyouwishtoapplytheeffecttoa
Right
higherrangesound,setthisparametertoahigher
Sweep Mode Voice Top: A
Wet / Dry
value;toapplytheeffecttoalowerrangesound,set
D-mod D-mod
Voice Center: I
Voice Bottom: U thistoalowervalue.
LFO
LFO
Resonance [0100]
SetstheLevelofresonanceofthevoicepattern.This
CONTROL parametersetstheintensityofresonanceforthevoice
pattern.Alargervaluewilladdmorecharactertothe
Sweep Mode [Dmod, LFO]
sound.
SwitchesbetweenmodulationsourcecontrolandLFO
control.
LFO
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrolsthevoice Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
pattern. ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
Manual Voice Control [Bottom, 149, Center,
5199, Top] Source [OffTempo]
Voicepatterncontrol. ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
Amount [20.00+20.00]
TALKING MODULATOR ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
TheVoiceTop,Center,andBottomparametersassign MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
vowelstothetop,center,andbottompositionsofthe
DmodcontrollerorLFO. BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Forinstance,whenVoiceTopissettoA,VoiceCenter
Base Note [r w ]
issettoI,andVoiceBottomissettoU:
IfSweepModeissettoDmodandRibbonisselected Times [x1x32]
asthemodulationSource,movingyourfingerfrom WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
therighttoleftoftheribboncontrollerwillchangethe BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
soundfromatoi,thenu. moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
IfSweepModeissettoLFO,thesoundwillchange page 837.
cyclicallyfromatoi,u,i,thena.
Talking Modulator Control Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
Voice Bottom Voice Center Voice Top
A A information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
I
U
WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
E youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
O
D-mod JS X
Ribbon Max Zero
+ Max
OUTPUT
JS +Y
JS Y Zero
+ Max Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
etc
Voice Top [A, I, U, E, O]
Selectsavowelsoundatthemaximummodulation
value.
842
EQ and Filters 022: Stereo Decimator
022: Stereo Decimator

Thiseffectcreatesaroughsoundlikeacheapsampler Output Level [0100]
byloweringthesamplingfrequency,reducingthebit Setstheoutputlevel.
depth,andcreatingaliasing.
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputlevel.
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Output Level
Amount [+/100]
Pre LPF Resolution
Decimator
D-mod Sampling Frequency Setsthemodulationamountoftheoutputlevel.

LFO
Decimator
Right
Pre LPF Resolution High Damp Output Level
LFO
Wet / Dry

DECIMATOR MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
Pre LPF [Check-box] Source [OffTempo]
Ifasampler(orotherdigitalaudiodevice)triesto ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
recordapitchhigherthanhalfthesamplingfrequency,
thisgeneratesaparticularkindofpitchednoise,called Amount [20.00+20.00]
aliasing.Reducingthesamplingfrequencywilltendto ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
increasetheamountofaliasing.
SetPreLPFtoONtopreventaliasing,orleaveitOFF
tocreatealiasingartifacts. BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Tocreateasoundsimilartoaringmodulator,setthe
SamplingFreqtoabout3kHzandsetPreLPFtoOFF. Base Note [r w ]
Sampling Frequency [Hz] [1.00k48.00k] Times [x1x32]

Setsthesamplingfrequency. WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
Source [OffTempo] moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
Selectsthemodulationsourceofthesampling page 837.
frequency. Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
Amount [48.00k+48.00k] Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
Setsthemodulationamountofthesampling LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
frequency. information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
Depth [0100] Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]

SetsthedepthofthesamplingfrequencyLFO WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
modulation. youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
Source [OffTempo]
OUTPUT
SelectstheLFOmodulationsourceofthesampling
frequency. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Amount [+/100] information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
SetstheLFOmodulationamountofthesampling
frequency.
High Damp [%] [0100]

Setstheratioofcutofthehighrange.
BIT SHAPE
Resolution [bits] [424]
Setsthedatabitlength.Withlowersettings,thesound
maybedistorted,andthevolumemayincrease.You
canusetheOutputLevelparameter,below,toadjust
thevolumeasnecessary.
843
Effect Guide
023: Stereo Analog Record

Thiseffectsimulatesthenoisecausedbyscratchesand
dustonanalogrecords.Italsoreproducessomeofthe NOISE
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
Density [0100]
Setsthenoisedensity.
Left
EQ Trim Pre EQ Analog Record

Wet / Dry
Tone [0100]
Simulation
Setsthenoisetone.
Level [0100]
EQ Trim Pre EQ
Setsthenoiselevel.
Right
Wet / Dry
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourceforthenoiselevel.
Pre EQ
Amount [+/100]
Trim [0100] Setsthemodulationamountofthenoiselevel.
SetstheEQinputlevel.
Fc [Hz] [30010.00k] CLICK

SetstheEQcenterfrequency. Level [0100]
Q [0.510.0] Thisparameterenablesyoutosettheleveloftheclick
noisethatoccursonceeveryrotationoftheturntable.
SetstheEQbandwidth.
Thissimulationreproducesrecordnoise,andthenoise
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0] generatedafterthemusiconavinylrecordfinishes.
SetstheEQgain. Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheclicknoiselevel.
ANALOG RECORD
Amount [+/100]
Speed [RPM] [33 1/3, 45, 78] Setsthemodulationamountoftheclicknoiselevel.
Setstherotationspeedoftherecord.
Flutter [0100] OUTPUT

Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedepthofthe Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
024: Stereo Wave Shaper

Thisisastereoeffectthatreshapesthewaveformofthe WaveShapeTables
inputsignal,generatingnumerousovertonesthatwere
Sine 2 Cycle Frequency3 Frequency7
notpresentintheoriginalsignal.

Left
Wave Shape Table Wet / Dry
Scale Pre LPF LEQ HEQ Output Level
10 Cycle Cocoon Double Sine Phase
Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod
D-mod
D-mod
20 Cycle Attack Up Symmetry Frequency8
WAVE SHAPER
Wave Shape Table [SineWurly]
Thetabledeterminesthebasictimbreoftheeffect.
844
EQ and Filters 024: Stereo Wave Shaper
Resonant1 Resonant2 Zinger GeoGraphic Take6 Exciter Booster Claver
Reptile SyncSter Profile Star Soft Road Rubber Parabola Wurly
Take1 Vital Signs Forest Zigzag Pre LPF [0100]

Setsthedampingamountinthehighrange.
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthesourcethatwillmodulatetheamountof
highrangedamping.
High Pass Line Sine1 WS Bass Soft Curve
Amount [+/100]
Setsthedepthbywhichtheamountofhighrange
dampingwillbemodulated.
Scale [dB] [36+36]

Smoothy Log Sine1 Take2 Take3 Thissetstheinputleveltothewaveshapetable.Even
forthesamewaveform,changingtheinputlevelwill
dramaticallymodifytheoutputwaveformandthe
tone.
Wave Shaper - Scale
Table : "CLICK1"
Take4 Take5 Experiment Real Steep Out
+1.0
In
Scale
-1.0
In
Out
Pulse5 BowwBass Pulse Octave Inverter1
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheScale.
Integers Super Square Line Sine2 Comb Amount [72+72]

SelectsthemodulationamountfortheScale.
EQ
Snake Rezzo Super Resonant Accordion
lowrangeequalizer.
LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]

Triangles Inverter2 7th Resonant Waves
Selectsthecutofffrequency(highormidhigh)ofthe
highrangeequalizer.
HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]

Output Level [0100]

Setstheoutputlevel.
845
Effect Guide
Source [OffTempo]
OUTPUT
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheOutputLevel.
Amount [+/100] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
SetsthemodulationamountfortheOutputLevel. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
025: Piano Body/Damper

Thiseffectsimulatestheresonanceofthepianosound Source [OffTempo]
boardcausedbythestringvibration,andalso Selectsthemodulationsourceofdampereffect.
simulatestheresonanceofotherstringsthatarenot
beingplayedwhenyoupressthedamperpedal.Itwill Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulation
createaveryrealisticsoundwhenappliedtoacoustic sourcespecifiedfortheSourceparameteris63or
pianosounds. smaller,andtheeffectisonwhenthevalueis64or
higher.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
TONE
Left
Wet / Dry
+
Tone [1100]
Piano
Body/Damper
Simulation
Thiscontrolsthebrightnessofthesoundboard
resonance.
Right
Mid Shape [036]

Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Damper
Thiscontrolsthemidrangefrequenciesofthe
resonance.Highervaluesdecreasetheamountofmid
rangefrequencies.
SOUND BOARD
Tune [50+50]
Depth [0100]
Thiscontrolsthefinetuningoftheresonance.Since
Thisparametersetstheintensityofthesoundboards thiseffectsimulatestheresonanceofthestrings,the
resonance. soundvariesdependingonthepitch.Ifyouhave
changedtuningusingtheMasterTune(GlobalP0),
DAMPER adjustthisparametervalue.
Depth [0100] OUTPUT

Thisparametersetstheresonanceintensityoftheother
stringscreatedwhenthedamperpedalispressed.The Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Sourceparameter,below,selectsthemodulation modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
sourcefromwhichthedampereffectisapplied. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Usually,selectDamper(CC#64).
026: Vocoder
Thisisonlypartoftheeffectspotential,however.You
Wet: Stereo In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
canusevocoderstocombinepracticallyanytwo
Wet / Dry
Carrier Trim sounds,aslongasthefrequencyrangesoverlap
+ +
+
sufficiently.Drumsmakeparticularlygood
Envelope
Modulator Trim
modulators,forinstance.
+
Band Pass Filter
Modulator Select Avocoderisessentiallyacombinationofamultiband

Modulator Source
Modulator High Mix frequencyanalyzerandamultibanddynamicEQ.The
Right
Wet / Dry modulatorsignalisdividedupintoanumberof
FX Control BUS 1 Noise Level
Noise
FX Control BUS 2
Generator
frequencybands,andthelevelsofeachofthesebands
aremeasuredinrealtime.AmultibanddynamicEQis
slavedtotheanalyzer,followingthechangesineach
bandofthemodulatorwithsimilarchangesintheEQ
Vocoder overview ofthecarrier.Thiscausesthecarriertoassumesomeof
thetimbreofthemodulator.
Vocodereffectssuperimposethetimbreofonesignal
(themodulator)ontothatofasecondsignal(the Itsbestforthecarriertocontainawiderangeof
carrier).Thefirstvocoderswereintendedmostlyfor frequencies.Ifthereislittleornomaterialinsomeof
speecheffects.Forinstance,youcanproducethe thebandstobeginwith,theEQwillhavenothingto
classictalkingsynthesizersoundbyusingavoiceas alter,andthevocoderseffectwillbelessdistinct.If
amodulatorandabrightsynthesizerpadasacarrier. youwanttouseaparticularsoundasthecarrier,butit
846
EQ and Filters 026: Vocoder
doesntseemtohaveasufficientfrequencyrange,try Source [Input, FX Control 1, FX Control 2]

usingtheNoiseLevelparametertomixinsomeofthe SelectsthesignaltouseastheModulatorinput.
vocodersbuiltinnoisegenerator.
InputusestheinputtotheVocodereffect.Thisisgood
Forinstance,brightsynthesizersounds,distorted whenyouwanttheinputtovocodeitself.
guitars,noise,orstringsallmakegoodcarriersignals.
FXControl1and2usethesignalfromtheFXControl
Buses.Forclassicvocodingeffects,suchasamicinput
Using the vocoder with a mic input asthemodulatorandasynthasthecarrier,youmust
useoneofthesebuses.
Touseavoicefromamicrophoneasamodulator:
1. ConnectamictoAudioInput1or2,andsetthe Select [L/R Mix, L Only, R Only]
InputsLEVELswitchtoMIC. Selectswhethertousetheleft/rightmix,onlytheleft
2. Go to the Global P0: Basic Setup-Audio page. channel,oronlytherightchanneloftheModulator
3. FortheAudioInputtowhichyouconnectedthe input.
mic,temporarilysetBusSelecttoL/R.
Thisletsyoulistentothemicinputwhileadjustingthe VOCODER
LEVELcontrol.
4. Whiletalkingintothemic,usetheLEVELknobto Formant Shift [2+2]
adjustthelevelashighaspossiblewithout ThisletsyouoffsettheCarrierfilters,sothattheyare
distortion. eitherhigherorlowerthantheModulatorfilters.This
AfteradjustingtheLEVEL,youcanchangethebus produceseffectssimilartotransposingasample,and
settingsforusewiththevocoder: producessignificantchangesintheoverallcharacter.
5. FortheAudioInputtowhichyouconnectedthe Response [0100]

mic,turnBusSelectOff,andsetFXCtrlBusSelect Thiscontrolshowquicklythevocoderrespondsto
to1. changesintheModulator.Thedefaultof60generally
6. IntheVocodereffect,settheMODULATOR workswellformostpurposes.
SourcetoFXControlBus1. Lowervaluesproduceslowerresponsetimes,which
7. RouteasynthsoundintotheVocodereffect. canproduceinterestingsweepingeffects.Higher
Withthesesettings,thesoundfromthemicwillbe valuesareusefulforpercussion,butcancausejittery
usedasthemodulator.Whileyouplay,speakintothe responsewithsmootherModulatorsignals.
mic;itwillsoundasthoughtheinstrumentistalking.
Low Gain [dB] [12+12]
Ifthesoundisdistorted,adjusttheCARRIERTrim
Setsthelowrangeoutputlevelofthevocoder.
and/orMODULATORTrim.
High Gain [dB] [12+12]
CARRIER Setsthehighrangeoutputlevelofthevocoder.
Notethattheleftandrightinputsarealwayssummed Modulator High Mix [0100]

intotheCarrier,regardlessoftheMODULATOR Thisletsyoumixahighpassfilteredversionofthe
Selectparameterbelow.Touseaseparatesignal(such Modulatordirectlytotheoutput,bypassingthemain
asamicinput)astheModulator,routeitthroughFX vocodereffect.Whenusingavoiceasthemodulator,
ControlBus1or2. thiscanincreaseintelligibility.
Trim [0100]
SetstheCarrierinputlevel. OUTPUT
Noise Level [0100] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Thiscontrolsthelevelofthebuiltinnoisegenerator.
YoucanmixthiswiththeCarrierinput,orsetthe
CarrierTrimto0anduseonlythenoise,ifdesired.You
canalsomodulatetheNoiseLevelusingDmod,
controlledbytheSourceandAmountparameters
below.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheNoiseLevel.
Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountfortheNoiseLevel.
MODULATOR
Trim [0100]
ThiscontrolstheinputleveloftheModulator.
847
Effect Guide
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models
027: OD/Hi-Gain Wah

Thisversatileeffectofferstwodifferentsounding
distortionmodes(OverdriveandHiGain),a DRIVE
modulatablewahwahfilter,aspeakersimulation,and
Pre Low-cut [010]
3bandEQ.Itssuitableforguitars,organs,andgeneral
sonicmayhem. Thisattenuateslowfrequenciesbeforethesignalenters
thedistortion.Usethistocreateasharpertone.
ForadescriptionoftheonscreenEQgraphic,see011:
StereoParametric4EQonpage 832. Drive Mode [Overdrive, Hi-Gain]
Thisswitchesbetweentwodifferentdistortiontimbres:
Left
Wet / Dry
overdriveandhigaindistortion.
Mode: Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Drive Drive [1100]
Pre Low-cut 3 Band PEQ
+ Wah Driver Amp Simulation Theamountofdistortionisdeterminedbythe
Output Level
combinationoftheinputlevelandtheDrivesetting.
Direct Mix
Higherinputlevels,and/orhigherDrivesettings,
Right
Wet / Dry meanmoredistortion.
D-mod
RaisingtheDrivesettingwillalsoincreasethevolume;
youcancompensateforthisbyloweringtheOutput
Levelparameter,below.
WAH
Direct Mix [050]
Wah Switch Setstheamountofthedrysoundmixedtothe
distortion.
Wah Switch [Off, On]
ThisturnstheWaheffectonandoff. Speaker Simulation [Check-box]
Switchesthespeakersimulationon/off.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcethatswitchestheWah Output Level [050]
onandoff. ThiscontrolstheoutputvolumefromtheDrivesection
intothe3bandEQ.Youcanusethistoreducethe
Mode [Toggle, Moment]
volumetocompensateforhighDrivesettings,orto
Thisparametercontrolshowthemodulationsource preventclippingintheEQ.
switchestheoverdriveonandoff.
WhenMode=Toggle,theoverdriveturnsonoroff
Source [OffTempo]
eachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputlevel.
MIDI,overdriveturnsonoroffeachtimethe
modulationamountexceeds64.
Amount [50+50]
Setsthemodulationamountfortheoutputlevel.
WhenMode=Moment(shortforMomentary),the
overdriveisnormallyoff,andturnsononlywhenyou
pressthepedalormovethejoystick.ViaMIDI, EQ
modulationvaluesabove64turniton,andvalues
below64turnitoff. Low Fc [Hz] [201.00k]
SetsthecenterfrequencyforLowEQ(shelvingtype).
Wah Sweep
Gain [dB] [18+18]
Sweep Range [10+10]
ThiscontrolsthewidthoftheWahssweep,fromthe
minimumtomaximumvaluesofthemodulation Mid1 Fc [Hz] [30010.00k]
Sourceselectedbelow. SetsthecenterfrequencyforMidEQ1(peakingtype).
Negativevaluesreversethesweepsdirection,from
hightolowinsteadoflowtohigh.
Q [0.510.0]
SetsthebandwidthofMidEQ1.p.832.
Source [OffTempo]
ThisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheWah.
Gain [dB] [18+18]
SetsthegainofMidEQ1.
Mid2 Fc [Hz] [50020.00k]

SetsthecenterfrequencyforMidEQ2(peakingtype).
848
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models 028: OD/HyperGain Wah
Q [0.510.0]
OUTPUT
SetsthebandwidthofMidEQ2. p.832.
Gain [dB] [18+18] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
SetsthegainofMidEQ2. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
028: OD/HyperGain Wah

Thisdistortioneffecthastwomodes:overdriveand Source [OffTempo]
hypergainthatproducesastrongdistortion.Ahigher Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputlevel.
highgainsettingisrequiredforthiseffectrelativetoa
normalsizeeffect. Amount [50+50]
Setsthemodulationamountoftheoutputlevel.
Left
Wet / Dry
Mode: Overdrive / Hyper-Gain

Drive EQ
Pre Low-cut 3 Band EQ
+ Wah Driver Amp Simulation
Output Level Low Fc [Hz] [201.00k]
Direct Mix
SetsthecenterfrequencyforLowEQ(shelvingtype).
Right
Wet / Dry
Gain [dB] [18+18]
D-mod
Mid1 Fc [Hz] [30010.00k]

WAH
SetsthecenterfrequencyforMid/HighEQ1(peaking
Wah Switch [Off, On] type).
Source [OffTempo] Q [0.510.0]

SetsthebandwidthofMid/HighEQ1.SeeQon
Mode [Toggle, Moment] page 832.
TheseparametersletyouturntheWahonandofffrom
eithertheLCDoracontroller,anddeterminehowthe Gain [dB] [18+18]
controllerworks.Formoreinformation,seeWah SetsthegainofMid/HighEQ1.
Switchonpage 848.
Mid2 Fc [Hz] [50020.00k]
Sweep Range [10+10] SetsthecenterfrequencyforMid/HighEQ2(peaking
type).
Source [OffTempo]
Theseparameterssetthemodulationsourceand Q [0.510.0]
amountfortheWah.Formoreinformation,seeWah SetsthebandwidthofMid/HighEQ2.
Sweeponpage 848.
Gain [dB] [18+18]
DRIVE SetsthegainofMid/HighEQ2.
Pre Low-cut [010]

OUTPUT
Thisattenuateslowfrequenciesbeforethesignalenters
thedistortion.Usethistocreateasharpertone. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Drive Mode [Overdrive, Hyper-Gain] information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Switchesbetweenoverdriveandhypergainmode.
Drive [1120]
Setsthedegreeofdistortion.Formoreinformation,see
DRIVEonpage 848.
Direct Mix [050]

Amountofthedrysoundmixedtothedistortion.
Speaker Simulation [Check-box]

Speakersimulationon/off.
Output Level [050]

Setstheoutputlevel.Formoreinformation,see
DRIVEonpage 849.
849
Effect Guide
029: Stereo Guitar Cabinet

Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofaguitar Type [TWEED 1x12, TWEED 4x10, BLACK 2x10,
ampsspeakercabinet. BLACK 2x12, AC15, AC30, AD412,
UK H30, UK T75, US V30]
Left
Selectsthetypeofthecabinet.See031:GuitarAmp
Wet / Dry
Model+Cabinetonpage 851.
Cabinet Simulator
Trim
Air [0100]
Trim Setsthemicposition.
Cabinet Simulator
Right
Wet / Dry
OUTPUT
CABINET SIMULATOR modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Trim [0100]
Setstheinputlevel.
030: Guitar Amp Model +P4EQ

Thiscombinesaguitarampsimulation(whicheven Middle [0100]
faithfullyreplicatesthedistortionandtonecontrol Setsthemiddle(midrange)level.
circuitry)withafourbandequalizer.
ForadescriptionoftheEQgraphic,see011:Stereo Treble [0100]
Parametric4EQonpage 832. Setsthetreble(highrange)level.

Cut / Presence [0100]
Left
Wet / Dry Thiscontrolsthehighfrequencytone.
Volume
IftheTypeisAC15AC30TB,theCut(highfrequency
+ Guitar Amp Model attenuation)parameterisavailable.ForotherType
Parametric 4Band EQ settings,thePresence(highfrequencyboost)
parameterisavailable.
Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod
PARAMETRIC EQ
Band1 Fc [Hz] [201.00k]
GUITAR AMP MODEL SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand1.
Type [AC15, AC15TB, AC30, AC30TB, UK BLUES, Q [0.510.0]

UK 70'S, UK 80'S, UK 90'S, UK MODERN, US SetsBand1sbandwidth.
MODERN, US HIGAIN, BOUTIQUE OD, BOUTIQUE
Gain [dB] [18+18]
CL, BLACK 2x12, TWEED 1x12, TWEED 4x10]
SetsthegainofBand1.
Selectsthetypeoftheamplifier.Formoreinformation,
seeTypeonpage 851. Band2 Fc [Hz] [505.00k]
Gain [0100] SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand2.
Setstheinputgain. Q [0.510.0]
Volume [0100] SetsBand2sbandwidth.
Setstheoutputlevel. Gain [dB] [18+18]
Source [OffTempo] SetsthegainofBand2.
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputlevel. Band3 Fc [Hz] [30010.00k]
Amount [+/100] SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand3.
Setsthemodulationamountoftheoutputlevel. Q [0.510.0]
Bass [0100] SetsBand3sbandwidth.
Setsthebass(lowrange)level. Gain [dB] [18+18]
SetsthegainofBand3.
850
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models 031: Guitar Amp Model +Cabinet
Band4 Fc [Hz] [50020.00k]

OUTPUT
Q [0.510.0] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
SetsBand4sbandwidth. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Gain [dB] [18+18]

SetsthegainofBand4.
031: Guitar Amp Model +Cabinet

Thissimulatesaguitarampandspeakercabinet. Gain [0100]
Setstheinputgain.
Left
Wet / Dry Volume [0100]
Volume
Setstheoutputlevel.
+ Guitar Amp Model Cabinet Simulator
Source [OffTempo]
Right
Wet / Dry
Amount [+/100]
D-mod
Bass [0100]
GUITAR AMP MODEL Setsthebass(lowrange)level.
Type [AC15, AC15TB, AC30, AC30TB, UK BLUES, Middle [0100]
UK 70'S, UK 80'S, UK 90'S, UK MODERN, US
Setsthemiddle(midrange)level.
MODERN, US HIGAIN, BOUTIQUE OD, BOUTIQUE
CL, BLACK 2x12, TWEED 1x12, TWEED 4x10] Treble [0100]
Selectsthetypeoftheamplifier.Formoreinformation, Setsthetreble(highrange)level.
seeRecommendedCombinationsofGuitarAmp
ModelsandCabinetSimulatorsonpage 852. Cut / Presence [0100]
AC15:VOXAC15manufacturedin1962. Setsthepresence(highfrequencytone).p.850.
AC15TB:VOXAC15TB(anAC15modifiedbythe Cabinet Sim SW [Check-box]
additionofatopboostcircuit).
Switchesthecabinetsimulatoron/off.
AC30:NormalchannelofaVOXAC30TB.
AC30TB:BrilliantchannelofaVOXAC30TB. CABINET SIMULATOR
UKBLUES:UKmanufacturedvintagestackamp
head. Type [See Below]
UK70S:HightreblechannelofaUKmanufactured Selectsthetypeofthecabinet.p.852.
100Wampheadfrom1969. TWEED1x12:Openbackcabinetwithone12
UK80S:UKmanufactured100Wattheadfrom1983. speaker,typicallyusedforblues.
UK90S:Leadchannelofa100Wdualchannelhead. TWEED4x10:Openbackcabinetwithfour10
speakers.
UKMODERN:UKmanufactured100Wmodernamp.
BLACK2x10:Openbackcabinetwithtwo10
USMODERN:Highgainampwithmetalplate. speakers.
USHIGAIN:1991model100Wampheadcoveredin BLACK2x12:Americanopenbackcabinetwith
snakeskin. two12speakers.
BOUTIQUEOD:Overdrivechannelofahighend AC15:Voxopenbackcabinetwithone12Blue
100Whandmadeamp. speaker.
BOUTIQUECL:Cleanchannelofahighend,hand AC30:Voxopenbackcabinetwithtwo12Blue
made100Wamp. speakers.
BLACK2x12:2x12comboampindispensablefor AD412:VOXAD412closedbackcabinetwithfour12
countryorbluesplayers. speakers.
TWEED1x12:Comboampcoveredintweedcloth. UKH30:Closedbackclassiccabinetwithfour30W12
TWEED4x10:4x10comboampdesignedforbass speakers.
guitar. UKT75:Closedbackcabinetwithfour75W12
speakers.
851
Effect Guide
USV30:Closedbackcabinetwithfour30W12 AMP MODEL CABINET

speakers.
UK 90'S UK T75
Air [0100]
UK MODERN UK T75, US V30
Setsthemicposition.
US MODERN US V30
US HIGAIN US V30, UK T75
OUTPUT
BOUTIQUE OD UK H30
modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore BOUTIQUE CL UK H30
information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820. BLACK 2x12 BLACK 2x12
TWEED 1x12 TWEED 1x12
Recommended Combinations of Guitar TWEED 4x10 TWEED 4x10
Amp Models and Cabinet Simulators
AMP MODEL CABINET

AC15 AC15
AC15TB AC15
AC30 AC30
AC30TB AC30
UK BLUES UK H30
UK 70'S UK H30
UK 80'S UK T75
032: Stereo Bass Cabinet

Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofabassamps Type [LA 4x10, MDN 4x10, MTL 4x10,
speakercabinet. CLS 8x10, UK 4x12, STD 1x15,
JAZ 1x15, AC 2x15, US 2x15,
Left
UK 4x15, LA 1x18, COMBI]
Wet / Dry
Selectsthecabinettype.See034:BassAmpModel
Cabinet Simulator
Trim +Cabinetonpage 853.
Trim
Cabinet Simulator OUTPUT
Right
Wet / Dry Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
CABINET SIMULATOR
Trim [0100]
Setstheinputlevel.
033: Bass Amp Model

Thissimulatesabassamp.
BASS AMP MODEL
Left
Type [LA STUDIO, JAZZ, GOLD PANEL,
SCOOPED, VALVE2, VALVE, CLASSIC]
Wet / Dry
Volume Selectsthetypeoftheamplifier.Formoreinformation,
+ Bass Amp Model
see034:BassAmpModel+Cabinetonpage 853.
Volume [0100]
Right
Wet / Dry
Setstheoutputlevel.
D-mod
852
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models 034: Bass Amp Model +Cabinet
Source [OffTempo] Treble [0100]

Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputlevel. Setsthetreble(highrange)level.
Amount [+/100] Presence [0100]

Setsthemodulationamountoftheoutputlevel. Setsthepresence(highfrequencytone).
Bass [0100]
Setsthebass(lowrange)level. OUTPUT
Middle [0100]
Setsthemiddle(midrange)level. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Mid Range [04]
Setsthemidfrequencyrange.
034: Bass Amp Model +Cabinet

Thissimulatesabassampandspeakercabinet. Mid Range [04]
Setsthemidfrequencyrange.
Left
Wet / Dry Treble [0100]
Volume
Setsthetreble(highrange)level.
+ Bass Amp Model1 Cabinet Simulator
Presence [0100]
Setsthepresence(highfrequencytone).
Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod
CABINET SIMULATOR
Cabinet Sim SW [Check-box]
BASS AMP MODEL Switchesthecabinetsimulatoron/off.
Type [LA STUDIO, JAZZ, GOLD PANEL, Type [LA 4x10, MDN 4x10, MTL 4x10,
SCOOPED, VALVE2, VALVE, CLASSIC] CLS 8x10, UK 4x12, STD 1x15, JAZ 1x15, AC
Selectstheamplifiertype.SeeRecommended 2x15, US 2x15, UK 4x15, LA 1x18, COMBI]
CombinationsofBassAmpModelsandCabinetson Selectsthecabinettype.SeeRecommended
page 854. CombinationsofBassAmpModelsandCabinetson
LASTUDIO:AnamptypicaloftheLAsound. page 854.
JAZZ:Acomboampfavoredbyjazzbassists. LA4x10:Four10speakers;LAsound.
GOLDPANEL:Anampdistinctiveforitseyecatching MDN4x10:Four10speakers;moderncabinet.
goldpanelandcleansound. MTL4x10:Four10aluminumconespeakers;modern
SCOOPED:Anamptypicalof80ssounds. cabinet.
VALVE2:Atubeampsuitableforrock. CLS8x10:Eight10speakers;classiccabinet.
VALVE:AtubeampwiththeULTRALOswitch UK4x12:Four12speakers;UKmanufactured
turnedON. cabinet.
CLASSIC:Atubeampwhosebasiccharacterchanges STD1x15:One15speaker;studiocombocabinet.
accordingtothesettingofthevaluedial. JAZ1x1:One15speaker;jazzcombocabinet.
Volume [0100] AC2x15:Two15speakers;cabinetforAC100.
Setstheoutputlevel. US2x15:Two15speakers;USmanufacturedcabinet.
Source [OffTempo] UK4x15:Four15speakers;UKmanufactured

cabinet.
LA1x18:One18speaker;LAsound.
Amount [+/100] COMBI:One12andone18speakercombination
Setsthemodulationamountoftheoutputlevel. cabinet.
Bass [0100]
Setsthebass(lowrange)level. OUTPUT
Middle [0100]
Setsthemiddle(midrange)level. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
853
Effect Guide
Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp

Models and Cabinets
AMP MODEL CABINET
LA STUDIO LA 4X10 or LA 1X18
JAZZ JAZ 1X15
GOLD PANEL MDN 4X10
SCOOPED MTL 4X10
VALVE2 CLS 8X10
VALVE CLS 8X10
CLASSIC COMBI
035: Bass Amp TubeDrive +Cab

Thissimulatesabassamp(withgainanddrive)and
speakercabinet. CABINET SIMULATOR
Cabinet Sim SW [Check-box]
Left
Wet / Dry
Switchesthecabinetsimulatoron/off.
Volume
Cabinet Type [LA 4x10, MDN 4x10, MTL 4x10,
+ Bass Amp Model2 Cabinet Simulator CLS 8x10, UK 4x12, STD 1x15, JAZ 1x15, AC
2x15, US 2x15, UK 4x15, LA 1x18, COMBI]
Drive
Right
Selectsthecabinettype.See034:BassAmpModel
Wet / Dry
+Cabinetonpage 853,andRecommended
D-mod
CombinationsofBassAmpModelsandCabinetson
page 854.
BASS AMP MODEL

OUTPUT
Amplifier Type [STUDIO, AC100, UK MAJOR]
Selectsthetypeoftheamplifier.p.854. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
STUDIO:AtubecomboidealfortheMotownsound. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
AC100:A100WtubeampmadebyVox.
UKMAJOR:A200WtubeampmadeintheUK. Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp
Models and Cabinets
Gain [0100]
AMP MODEL CABINET
Setstheinputgain.
STUDIO STD 1X15
Volume [0100]
AC100 AC 2X15
Setstheoutputlevel.
UK MAJOR UK 4X15, UK 4X12
Source [OffTempo]
Amount [+/100]
Bass [0100]
Setsthebass(lowrange)level.
Middle [0100]
Setsthemiddle(midrange)level.
Treble [0100]
Setsthetreble(highrange)level.
Presence [0100]
Setsthepresence(highfrequencytone).
854
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models 036: Tube PreAmp Modeling
036: Tube PreAmp Modeling

Thiseffectsimulatesatwostagevacuumtubepreamp. Phase [Normal, Wet Invert]
Youcanmakeindividualsettingsfortwovacuum Turnsphasereversalon/off.
tubesconnectedinseries.Thisletsyoucreatethewarm
soundtypicalofvacuumtubes. WiththeWetInvertsetting,thephaseofthesignalwill
beinvertedbetweenstage1andstage2.SinceBiasis
appliedtotheinvertedsignalinstage2,thiswill
Left
Wet / Dry
changethetonalcharacter.
+ Tube Pre Amp1

Invert
+
Tube Pre Amp2
TUBE PREAMP2

Output Level
Low Cut [Hz] [Thru, 218.00k]

Right
Wet / Dry High Cut [Hz] [5320.00k, Thru]
Gain [dB] [24.0+24.0]
TUBE PREAMP1 Saturation [%] [0100]
Low Cut [Hz] [Thru, 218.00k] Bias [0100]
Setsthecutofffrequencyforthelowcutfilterofstage TheseparametersareidenticaltothoseforTUBE
1. PREAMP1,above.
High Cut [Hz] [5320.00k, Thru] Output Level [dB] [48.0+0.0]
Setsthecutofffrequencyforthehighcutfilterofstage Setstheoutputlevel.
1.
Gain [dB] [Inf, 38+24] OUTPUT

Setstheinputgainforstage1.
Saturation [%] [0100] Setsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedryinput.
Setstheinput/outputresponseforstage1.See
Saturation[%]onpage 856. Source [OffTempo]
Bias [0100]
Setsthebiasvoltageforstage1.SeeBiason Amount [+/100]
page 856. SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry.
037: St. Tube PreAmp Modeling

Left
Wet / Dry
+
Tube Pre Amp1 Tube Pre Amp2

Invert Output Level
+
Tube Pre Amp1 Tube Pre Amp2

Right
Wet / Dry
Thisissimilarto036:TubePreAmpModeling,butin
stereo.
Formoreinformation,see036:TubePreAmp
Modelingonpage 855.
855
Effect Guide
038: Mic Modeling +PreAmp

Thiseffectsimulatesamicandvacuumtubepreamp. Athighersettings,thewaveformwillchangeathigh
Youcanchoosefromvarioustypesofmicand gainlevels,tendingtocausedistortion.Lowersettings
positionstocreatedifferingsoniccharacters. willproducelinearresponse.
Mic/Pre Amp - Saturation
Left
Out
Wet / Dry
Saturation = 0
Saturation = 50
Saturation = 100
+ Mic Simulation Tube Pre Amp
Output Level In
Right
Wet / Dry
Bias = 0
MIC SIMULATOR Bias [0100]

Type [Vnt.Dy/55SH, Mlt.Cn/C414, Pc.Cn/C451, Thisexpressestheeffectthatchangesinvacuumtube
Whale/MD421, Vo.Dy/SM58, Mlt.Dy/SM57, biashaveonthedistortionofthewaveform.Higher
Vo.Cn/U87, Vo.Tube/U47, BDr.Dy/RE20] settingsofthisvaluewillproducedistortionevenat
lowgainlevels.Sincethiswillalsochangetheovertone
Selectsthetypeofmic.
structure,youcanuseittocontrolthetonalcharacter.
Position [Close, On, Off, Far] Mic/Pre Amp - Bias
Thisexpressestheeffectthatthemicpositionhason Out
thesound.TheClosesettingistheclosestmicposition, Bias = 100
Bias = 50
andtheFarsettingisthefarthest. Bias = 0
In
TUBE PREAMP
Low Cut [Hz] [Thru, 218.00k]
Satulation = 50
Setsthefrequencyofthelowcutfilter.
High Cut [Hz] [5320.00k, Thru]

Output Level [dB] [48.0+0.0]
Setsthefrequencyofthehighcutfilter.
Setstheoutputlevelofthepreamp.
Gain [dB] [24.0+24.0]
Setstheinputgaintothevacuumtubepreamp. OUTPUT
Saturation [%] [0100] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Setstheinput/outputresponseofthepreamp. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
039: St. Mic Modeling +PreAmp

Left
Wet / Dry
Mic Simulation Tube Pre Amp
Output Level
Mic Simulation Tube Pre Amp
Right
Wet / Dry
Thisissimilarto038:MicModeling+PreAmp,butin
stereo.Forexample,youmightusethistosimulate
micingofastereosourcesuchasarotaryspeaker.
Formoreinformation,see038:MicModeling
+PreAmponpage 856.
856
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser 040: Stereo Chorus
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser
040: Stereo Chorus

Thiseffectaddsthicknessandwarmthtothesoundby MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
modulatingthedelaytimeoftheinputsignal.Youcan
addspreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseofthe BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
leftandrightLFOsfromeachother.
Base Note [r w ]
Left
Times [x1x32]
Wet / Dry
LEQ HEQ WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
Chorus
EQ Trim BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
LEQ HEQ
Chorus
page 837.
EQ Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Pre EQ Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
Trim [0100] WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
LEQ Fc [Low, Mid-Low] CHORUS

lowrangeequalizer. L Pre Delay [msec] [0.050.0]
Setsthedelaytimefortheleftchannel.Settingtheleft
LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0] andrightdelaytimestoslightlydifferentvaluesallows
SetsthegainoftheLowEQ. youtocontrolthestereoimage.
HEQ Fc [High, Mid-High] R Pre Delay [msec] [0.050.0]
Selectsthecutofffrequency(highormidhigh)ofthe Setsthedelaytimefortherightchannel.
highrangeequalizer.
Depth [0100]
HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0] SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheLFOmodulation
LFO depth.
Waveform [Triangle, Sine] Amount [+/100]
SelectstheLFOWaveform. SetsthemodulationamountoftheLFOmodulation
Phase [degrees] [180+180] depth.
right.SeePhase[degrees]onpage 839. OUTPUT
Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Source [OffTempo]
Amount [20.00+20.00]
857
Effect Guide
041: Stereo Harmonic Chorus

Thiseffectapplieschorusonlytohigherfrequencies. Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
Thiscanbeusedtoapplyachoruseffecttoabass ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
soundwithoutmakingthesoundthinner.Youcanalso MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
usefeedbacktoturnthechorusintoaflanger.
Source [OffTempo]
Left
Low Level Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger High Level

Amount [20.00+20.00]
High Damp
High/Low Split Point Feedback ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
High Damp
High Level
Chorus/Flanger
Low Level
Right
Wet / Dry
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
LFO Phase
Base Note [r w ]
LFO: Tri / Sine
Times [x1x32]
CHORUS WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
Pre Delay [msec] [0.050.0]
Setsthedelaytimefromtheoriginalsound. page 837.
Depth [0100] Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation. Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourceoftheLFOmodulation
depth. Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountoftheLFOmodulation
depth.
OUTPUT
Feedback [+/100]
Setsthefeedbackamountforthechorus.Increasingthe
feedbackturnsthechorusintoaflanger.
Setsthehighrangedampingamountofthechorus
block.
High/Low Split Point [1100]

Thissetsthefrequencysplitpointbetweenthelowand
highranges.Onlythehighrangewillbeprocessed
throughthechorus.
Low Level [0100]

Setsthelowrangeoutputlevel.
High Level [0100]

Setsthehighrange(chorus)outputlevel.
LFO
Waveform [Triangle, Sine]
SelectstheLFOWaveform.
Phase [degrees] [180+180]

right.SeePhase[degrees]onpage 839.
858
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser 042: St. Bi-phase Modulation
042: St. Bi-phase Modulation

ThisstereochoruseffectaddstwodifferentLFOs LFO2 Waveform [Triangle, Sine]
together.YoucansettheFrequencyandDepth SelectsthewaveformforLFO2.
parametersforeachLFOindividually.Dependingon
thesettingoftheseLFOs,verycomplexwaveforms Phase Sw [0 degree, 180 degree]
willcreateananalogtype,unstablemodulatedsound. ThisletsyouinverttheLFOphasebetweentheleftand
rightchannels.
Left
Wet / Dry
LFO1 Frequency [Hz] [0.0230.00]
Chorus/Flanger
High Damp ThissetsthespeedofLFO1,inHz.
Feedback
High Damp LFO2 Frequency [Hz] [0.0230.00]

Chorus/Flanger
ThissetsthespeedofLFO2,inHz.
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO1: Tri / Sine

180 [degree]
Source [OffTempo]
LFO2: Tri / Sine
SelectsasourcetomodulatethespeedsofLFO1&2.
LFO1 Amount [30.00+30.00]

MODULATION ThissetstheLFO1Frequencymodulationamount,in
Hz.
L Pre Delay [msec] [0.050.0]
Setsthedelaytimefortheleftchannel.p.857. LFO2 Amount [30.00+30.00]
ThissetstheLFO2Frequencymodulationamount,in
R Pre Delay [msec] [0.050.0] Hz.
Setsthedelaytimefortherightchannel.p.857.
LFO1 Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
Depth1 [0100] Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
SetsthedepthofLFO1modulation. LFO1,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
Depth2 [0100]
SetsthedepthofLFO2modulation. Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
Source [OffTempo] youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
SelectsthemodulationsourceofLFO1&2modulation
depth. LFO2 Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
Amount1 [+/100] LFO2,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
SetsthemodulationamountofLFO1modulation information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
depth.
Amount2 [+/100] WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
SetsthemodulationamountofLFO2modulation youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
depth.
Feedback [+/100] OUTPUT

Setsthefeedbackamount.SeeFeedbackon Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
page 858. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
LFO1/2
Bi-Phase Modulation LFO
LFO1
Depth1
+
LFO2
Depth2
LFO1 Waveform [Triangle, Sine]

SelectsthewaveformforLFO1.
859
Effect Guide
043: Multitap Cho/Delay 4Taps

Thiseffecthasfourchorusblocks,eachwithadifferent Pan 14 [L6L1, C, R1R6]
LFOphase.Youcancreateacomplexstereoimageby Thissetsthetapsstereoposition.
settingeachblocksdelaytime,depth,outputlevel,
andpanindividually.Youcanalsofixsomeofthe Tap 1 Feedback
chorusblockstocombinethechorusanddelayeffects.
Tap1 Feedback [+/100]
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In -Stereo Out
Left
SetstheTap1feedbackamount.
Feedback Wet / Dry
Tap1 Delay
Level Pan
Source [OffTempo]
Tap2 Delay
+ Level Pan SelectsthemodulationsourceofTap1feedback
Tap3 Delay
Tap4 Delay
Level Pan amountandeffectbalance.
Level Pan
Right
0 [degree] Wet / Dry
Amount [+/100]
180 [degree]
90 [degree]
270 [degree] SetstheTap1feedbackamountandmodulation
LFO: Triangle
amount.
MOD DELAY LFO
Taps 1-4 Frequency [Hz] [0.0213.00]

ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.
Therearefourdelaytaps,eachwithseparatesettings
fordelaytime,chorusdepth,level,andpan.The LFO Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
chorusLFOphasesaredifferentforeachtap:
Tap1=0degrees LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
Tap2=180degrees information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
Tap3=90degrees Common LFO Phase Ofs [deg] [180+180]

Tap4=270degrees WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
Tap 14 [msec] [01000]
Thissetsthetapsdelaytime.
OUTPUT
Depth 14 [030] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Thissetsthetapschorusdepth. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Level 14 [030]
Thissetsthetapsoutputlevel.
044: Multitap Cho/Delay 6Taps

ThiseffecthassixchorusblockswithdifferentLFO
phases.Youcanproduceacomplexstereoimageby MODULATION DELAY
settingadifferentdelaytimeanddepthforeachblock.
Youcancontrolthedelayoutputlevelviaa Taps 1-6
modulationsource. Therearesixdelaytaps,eachwithseparatesettingsfor
delaytime,chorusdepth,andon/off/modulation
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In -Stereo Out status.ThechorusLFOphasesaredifferentforeach
Left
Feedback Wet / Dry tap:
Tap1 Delay
Tap2 Delay Tap1=0degrees
Tap3 Delay
+
Tap4 Delay Tap2=180degrees
Tap5 Delay
Tap6 Delay
Tap3=60degrees
Right
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
Wet / Dry Tap4=240degrees
Panning Preset
60 [degree]
240 [degree]
120 [degree]
Tap5=120degrees
300 [degree]
LFO: Triangle Tap6=300degrees
D-mod On/Off Control
Tap 16 [msec] [02000]

Thissetsthetapsdelaytime.
860
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser 045: Bi Chorus
Depth 16 [030] Source [OffTempo]

Thissetsthetapschorusdepth. Thisselectsamodulationsourcetomodulatethetap
outputlevels(assetbyStatus,above)andtheTap1
Status 16 [Always On, Always Off, Feedbackamount.
OnOff (Dmod), OffOn (Dmod)]
Thisturnsthetaponoroff,orallowsitsoutputlevelto Amount [+/100]
bemodulatedbytheselectedDmodsource. SetsthemodulationamountfortheTap1Feedback.
AlwaysOn:Outputisalwayson.(Nomodulation) Panning Preset [1: L 1 2 3 4 5 6 R, 2: L 135 246 R,
AlwaysOff:Outputisalwaysoff.(Nomodulation) 3: L 1 3 5 2 4 6 R, 4: L 1 4 5 6 3 2 R]
OnOff(Dmod):Outputlevelfadesfromontooffvia Thisselectscombinationsofstereopanningpatterns
themodulationsource. forthetapoutputs.
OffOn(Dmod):Outputlevelfadesfromofftoonvia
themodulationsource. LFO
Combiningtheseparameters,youcanchangefrom4
phasechorustotwotapdelaybycrossfadingthem
graduallyviathemodulationsourceduringa ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.
performance.
Tap 1 Feedback OUTPUT

Tap1 Feedback [+/100] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
SetstheamountoffeedbackfromTap1. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
045: Bi Chorus
Thiseffectletsyouplacetwoindependent
chorus/flangerunitsinseriesorinparallel.Ifplacedin CHORUS2
series,feedbackcanbeappliedtothesoundthathas
Manual [0100]
passedthroughthetwochorusmodules,creatingeven
morecomplexmodulation. Setsthedelaytimeforchorus2.
LFO2 Depth [0100]

Left
Wet / Dry SetstheLFOmodulationdepthforchorus2.
Output Level1
Amount [+/100]
Feedback
+ Chorus
Dual
Mode
Serial
Setstheamountbywhichthechorus2LFO
LFO1 + Output Mode
LFO2
Phase Lock
modulationdepthwillbecontrolled.
Feedback
Chorus
Output Level2
Feedback [0100]
Right
Wet / Dry Setsthefeedbackamountforchorus2.WhenRouting
issettoSerial,thisfeedsbackintoChorus1,and
Chorus1sownFeedbacksettingisignored.
CHORUS1
LFO1/2
Manual [0100]
Setsthedelaytimeforchorus1. LFO1/2 Lock [Unlock, Lock-LFO1,
Lock-Common1, Lock-Common2]
LFO1 Depth [0100]
ThisselectstheLFO(s)usedbythetwochoruses.
SetstheLFOmodulationdepthforchorus1.
Unlock:LFO1andLFO2willoperateindependently.
Source [OffTempo] LockLFO1:bothchoruseswilluseLFO1,withan
SelectsthemodulationsourcethatwillcontrolLFO optionalphaseoffsetforLFO2(seeLFO2Phase
modulationdepth. [degrees],below).
Amount [+/100] LockCommon1orLockCommon2:bothchoruses

willusetheselectedFXCommonLFO,withan
Setstheamountbywhichthechorus1LFO optionalphaseoffsetforLFO2.
Feedback [0100]
Setsthefeedbackamountforchorus1.
861
Effect Guide
LFO 1/2 Lock / LFO2 Phase Output Mode [Mono, Stereo]

LFO 1/2 Lock: Unlock LFO 1/2 Lock: Lock - LFO1 ThisappliesonlywhenRoutingissettoDual.
LFO1 Chorus1 LFO1 Chorus1 Mono:Theoutputsofbothchorus1and2aresummed
LFO2 Chorus2 LFO2 Phase Chorus2 togetherandpannedtothecenter.
Stereo:Chorus1goestotheleftoutput,andchorus2
LFO 1/2 Lock: Lock - Common1 LFO 1/2 Lock: Lock - Common2
goestotherightoutput.
Common FX LFO1 Chorus1 Common FX LFO2 Chorus1
LFO2 Phase Chorus2 LFO2 Phase Chorus2 Chorus1 Output Level [0100]
Setstheoutputlevelforchorus1.
LFO2 Phase [degrees] [180+180]
Chorus2 Output Level [0100]
SetsthephasedifferencebetweenLFO1andLFO2,
Setstheoutputlevelforchorus2.
whenLFO1/2Lockissettoanythingotherthan
Unlock.
OUTPUT
SetstheLFO1speed.ThisappliesonlyifLFO1/2Lock Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
issettoUnlockorLockLFO1. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
SetstheLFO2speed.ThisappliesonlyifLFO1/2Lock
issettoUnlock.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsasourcetomodulatethespeedsofLFO1&2.
LFO1 Amount [20.00+20.00]

Hz.
LFO2 Amount [20.00+20.00]

Hz.

BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
LFO1 Note [r w ]
Times [x1x32]
LFO2 Note [r w ]
Times [x1x32]
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedsareset
byBPM,Note,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.The
twoLFOseachhavetheirownsettingsforNoteand
Times.Formoreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSync
onpage 837.
MODE
Chorus1and2areconnectedasshowninthediagram.
Routing / Output Mode / Output Level 1/2
Routing: Dual Routing: Dual Routing: Serial

Output Mode: Mono Output Mode: Stereo
Output Level1/2 Output Level1/2
Routing [Dual, Serial]

Selectsparallelorserialconnectionforchorus1and2.
IfRoutingissettoSerial,theChorus1OutputLevel,
Chorus2OutputLevel,andChorus2Feedback
settingsareignored.
862
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser 046: Ensemble
046: Ensemble
ThisEnsembleeffecthasthreechorusblocksthatuse
LFOtocreatesubtleshimmering,andgivesthree LFO
dimensionaldepthandspreadtothesound,because
Speed [1100]
thesignalisoutputfromtheleft,right,andcenter.
SetstheLFOspeed.
Left
Wet / Dry
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsamodulationsourceforLFOspeed.
+ Ensemble Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountofLFOspeed.
Right
Wet / Dry Shimmer [0100]
Shimmer
LFO
Thisparametersetstheamountofshimmeringofthe
LFOwaveform.Increasingthisvalueaddsmore
shimmering,makingthechoruseffectmorecomplex
ENSEMBLE andricher.
Ensemble LFO
Depth [0100] Level
SetsthedepthoftheLFOmodulation.
Shimmer
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheLFOdepth.
Amount [+/100] Time
depth.
OUTPUT
047: Polysix Ensemble

Thismodelstheensembleeffectbuiltintotheclassic
KorgPolySixprogrammablepolyphonicsynthesizer. OUTPUT
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Left
Wet / Dry information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Polysix
+
Ensemble
Right
Wet / Dry
POLYSIX ENSEMBLE
Depth [0100]
Setsthedepthoftheeffect.
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillcontrolthe
effectdepth.
Amount [+/100]
Setstheamountbywhichtheeffectdepthwillbe
modulated.
863
Effect Guide
048: Stereo Flanger

Thiseffectgivesasignificantswellandmovementof MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
pitchtothesound.Itismoreeffectivewhenappliedto
asoundwithalotofharmonics.Thisisastereo BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
flanger.Youcanaddspreadtothesoundbyoffsetting
Base Note [r w ]
thephaseoftheleftandrightLFOsfromeachother.
Times [x1x32]
Left
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
Wet / Dry
Flanger
Feedback page 837.
High Damp
Flanger Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
Right
Wet / Dry Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
LFO Phase

FLANGER WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
Delay Time [msec] [0.050.0] youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
Setsthedelaytimefromtheoriginalsound.
OUTPUT
Depth [0100]
SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation. Wet/Dry [Wet1:99, Dry, 1: 99Wet]
Feedback [+/100] andthedryinput.Negativevaluesinvertthephaseof
Thiscontrolstheintensityoftheflangereffect.Positive thewetsignal.ThisinteractswithFeedback;formore
andnegativevaluescreatedifferenttimbres. information,seeFeedbackonpage 864.
MixingtheprocessedanddrysignalsviaWet/Drywill
Source [OffTempo]
enhancetheeffect.Formaximumintensity,set
FeedbackandWet/Drysothattheyareeitherboth SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
positiveorbothnegative;thisemphasizestheflangers
Amount [+/100]
harmonicpeaks.
Thissetstheamountofhighfrequencydampinginthe
flangersfeedbackloop.Increasingthevaluewill
reducehighfrequencyharmonics.
LFO
Shape [+/100]
ChangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform.p.840.


Source [OffTempo]
Amount [20.00+20.00]
864
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser 049: Stereo Random Flanger
049: Stereo Random Flanger

Thestereoeffectusesastepshapewaveformand High Damp [%] [0100]
randomLFOformodulation,creatingaunique Setsthefeedbackdampingamountinthehighrange.
flangingeffect. p.864.

Left
Wet / Dry LFO
Flanger
Theseparameterscontroltheshapeandspeedofthe
Feedback stepLFO.TheyareidenticaltothoseintheStereo
High Damp RandomFilter;formoreinformation,seeLFOon
Flanger
page 839.
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
OUTPUT
Wet/Dry [Wet1:99, Dry, 1: 99Wet]
FLANGER Setsthebalancebetweenthewetprocessedsound
andthedryinput.Negativevaluesinvertthephaseof
Delay Time [msec] [0.050.0] thewetsignal.ThisinteractswithFeedback;formore
Setsthedelaytimefromtheoriginalsound. information,seeFeedbackonpage 864.
Depth [0100] Source [OffTempo]

SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation. SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
Feedback [+/100] Amount [+/100]

Thiscontrolstheintensityoftheflanger.Formore SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry.
information,seeFeedbackonpage 864.
050: Stereo Envelope Flanger

ThisFlangerusesaMIDItriggerableenvelope Source [OffTempo]
generatorformodulation.Thisletsyoucreate SelectsthemodulationsourcethattriggerstheEG
sequenceswithflangersweepswhichalwayshappen (whenSweepMode=EG),orthemodulationsource
onthesamebeat,forinstance.Youcanalsocontrolthe thatcausestheflangertosweep(whenSweepMode=
Flangerdirectlyusingamodulationsource. Dmod).
Left
Wet / Dry EG
Flanger
Attack [1100]
Feedback
High Damp
SetstheEGattacktime.FormoreinformationAttack
Flanger andRelease,seethegraphicunderAttack[msec]on
Right page 822.
Wet / Dry
D-mod
D-mod
EG Attack/Decay
EG
Sweep Mode Decay [1100]
SetstheEGdecaytime.
CONTROL
FLANGER
Sweep Mode [EG, Dmod]
L Delay Bottom [msec] [0.050.0]
WhenSweepModeissettoEG,theenvelope
generatorcontrolstheflanger.Notethatthisisthe Setsthelowerlimitoftheleftchanneldelaytime.For
effectsownEG,andisntrelatedtotheProgramsother moreinformationontheBottomandTopsettings,see
EGs(Filter,Amp,etc.). thegraphicunderFrequencyBottomonpage 837.
TheSourceparameter,below,selectsthesourcethat L Delay Top [msec] [0.050.0]

startstheenvelopegenerator.IfyouselectGate,for Setstheupperlimitoftheleftchanneldelaytime.
example,theenvelopewillbetriggeredbynoteons.
TheEGistriggeredwhentheMIDIsourcesvalue
R Delay Bottom [msec] [0.050.0]
changesfrom63orsmallerto64orhigher. Setsthelowerlimitoftherightchanneldelaytime.
WhenSweepModeissettoDmod,themodulation R Delay Top [msec] [0.050.0]
sourcedirectlycontrolstheflanger.Selectthe
Setstheupperlimitoftherightchanneldelaytime.
modulationsourceusingtheSourceparameter,below.
865
Effect Guide
Feedback [+/100]
OUTPUT
Thiscontrolstheintensityoftheflanger.Formore
information,seeFeedbackonpage 864. Wet/Dry [Wet1:99, Dry, 1: 99Wet]
High Damp [%] [0100] Setsthebalancebetweenthewetprocessedsound
thewetsignal.ThisinteractswithFeedback;formore
flangersfeedbackloop.Increasingthevaluewill
information,seeFeedbackonpage 864.
Source [OffTempo]
Amount [+/100]
051: Stereo Phaser

Thiseffectcreatesaswellbyshiftingthephase.Itis
veryeffectiveonelectricpianosounds.Youcanadd LFO
spreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleft
andrightLFOsfromeachother
Left
Shape [+/100]
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Resonance Phase [degrees] [180+180]

Phaser
High Damp SetstheLFOphasedifferencebetweentheleftand
Right
Wet / Dry

LFO Phase
PHASER Source [OffTempo]
Manual [0100] ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
Setsthephaserscenterfrequency. Amount [20.00+20.00]
Depth [0100] ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation. MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
Source [OffTempo] BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheLFOmodulation
depth. Base Note [r w ]
Amount [+/100] Times [x1x32]

SetsthemodulationamountoftheLFOmodulation WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
depth. BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
Resonance [+/100] page 837.
Thiscontrolstheintensityofthephasereffect.Positive
andnegativevaluescreatedifferenttimbres.
ResonanceandWet/Drysothattheyareeitherboth
positiveorbothnegative;thisemphasizesthephasers Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
harmonicpeaks.
High Damp [%] [0100] youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
phasersfeedbackloop.Increasingthevaluewill
866
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser 052: Stereo Random Phaser
Source [OffTempo]
OUTPUT
Amount [+/100]
thewetsignal.ThisinteractswithResonance;formore
information,seeResonanceonpage 866.
052: Stereo Random Phaser

Thisisastereophaser.Theeffectusesastepshape MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
waveformandrandomLFOformodulation,creatinga
uniquephasingeffect. BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Base Note [r w ]
Left
Wet / Dry Times [x1x32]
Phaser
Step Note [r w ]
Resonance
Phaser
High Damp Times [x1x32]
Right
TheseparameterscontrolthespeedoftheLFOwhen
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
MIDI/TempoSyncisOn.Formoreinformation,see
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
Frequencyonpage 839.
Type (Step) [Individual, Common1, Common2]

PHASER Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
Manual [0100] TheseparameterscontroltheLFOsourceforthesteps;
theydonotaffectthetriangleorsineLFOs.Formore
Setsthefrequencytowhichtheeffectisapplied.
information,seeStepLFOtypeonpage 840.
Depth [0100]
SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation. OUTPUT
Resonance [+/100] Wet/Dry [Wet1:99, Dry, 1: 99Wet]
Thiscontrolstheintensityofthephaser.Formore Setsthebalancebetweenthewetprocessedsound
information,seeResonanceonpage 866. andthedryinput.Negativevaluesinvertthephaseof
phasersfeedbackloop.Increasingthevaluewill Source [OffTempo]
reducehighfrequencyharmonics. SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
Amount [+/100]
LFO
Waveform [Step-Tri, Step-Sin, Random]
SelectstheLFOWaveform.Formoreinformation,see
Waveformonpage 839.


Step Frequency [Hz] [0.0550.00]
Source [OffTempo]
Amount [20.00+20.00]
Step Amount [50.00+50.00]
TheseparameterscontrolthespeedoftheLFOwhen
MIDI/TempoSyncisOff.Formoreinformation,see
Frequencyonpage 839.
867
Effect Guide
053: Stereo Envelope Phaser

Source [OffTempo]
Left
Wet / Dry SelectsthemodulationsourcethattriggerstheEG
Phaser (whenEGisselectedforSweepMode),ormodulation
sourcethatcausesthephasertosweep(whenDmodis
Resonance
selectedforSweepMode).p.865.
High Damp
Phaser
Right
D-mod
Wet / Dry EG
D-mod
EG Attack/Decay Sweep Mode
EG
Attack [1100]
Thisstereophaserusesanenvelopegeneratorfor SetstheEGattacktime.FormoreinformationAttack
modulation.Youwillobtainthesamepatternof andRelease,seethegraphicunderAttack[msec]on
phasingeachtimeyouplay.Youcanalsocontrolthe page 822.
Phaserdirectlyusingthemodulationsource.
Decay [1100]
SetstheEGdecaytime.
PHASER
L Manual Bottom [0100] PHASER
Setsthelowerlimitoftheleftchannelphaserssweep.
Resonance [+/100]
FormoreinformationontheBottomandTopsettings,
seethegraphicunderFrequencyBottomon Thiscontrolstheintensityofthephaser.Formore
page 837. information,seeResonanceonpage 866.
L Manual Top [0100] High Damp [%] [0100]

Setstheupperlimitoftheleftchannelphaserssweep. Thissetstheamountofhighfrequencydampinginthe
phasersfeedbackloop.Increasingthevaluewillcut
R Manual Bottom [0100] highrangeharmonics.
Setsthelowerlimitoftherightchannelphasers
sweep. OUTPUT
R Manual Top [0100] Wet/Dry [Wet1:99, Dry, 1: 99Wet]
Setstheupperlimitoftherightchannelphasers Setsthebalancebetweenthewetprocessedsound
sweep. andthedryinput.Negativevaluesinvertthephaseof
CONTROL information,seeResonanceonpage 866.
Sweep Mode [EG, Dmod] Source [OffTempo]

Determineswhetherthephaseriscontrolledbythe SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
envelopegeneratororbythemodulationsource.p.865. Amount [+/100]
054: Bi Phaser
Thiseffectprovidestwoindependentphasersthatcan
beconnectedinseriesorinparallel. PHASER1
Manual [0100]
Left
Wet / Dry Setsthefrequencyofphaser1.
Output Level1
LFO1 Depth [0100]

Resonance
+ Phaser
Dual
Mode
Serial
SetstheLFOmodulationdepthofphaser1
LFO1 + Output Mode
Phase Lock
LFO2
Source [OffTempo]
Resonance
Phaser
Output Level2 SelectsasourcetocontrolLFOmodulationdepthof
Right
Wet / Dry bothphasers.
Amount [+/100]
Setstheamountbywhichthephaser1LFO
868
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser 054: Bi Phaser
Resonance [0100]
OUTPUT
ThiscontrolstheintensityofPhaser1.Formore
information,seeResonanceonpage 866. Wet/Dry [Wet1:99, Dry, 1: 99Wet]
PHASER2 andthedryinput.Negativevaluesinvertthephaseof
Manual [0100] information,seeResonanceonpage 866.
Setsthefrequencyofphaser2.
Source [OffTempo]
LFO2 Depth [0100] SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
SetstheLFOmodulationdepthofphaser2.
Amount [+/100]
Amount [+/100] SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry.
Setstheamountbywhichthephaser2LFO
Resonance [0100]
ThiscontrolstheintensityofPhaser1.Formore
LFO1/2
ThesearetheparametersforthetwoLFOs,whichare
identicaltothoseintheBiChoruseffect.Formore
information,seeLFO1/2onpage 861.
MODE
Routing [Dual, Serial]
Selectswhetherthephasersareconnectedinparallelor
inseries.IfRoutingissettoSerial,thePhaser1
OutputLevelandPhaser2OutputLevelsettingsare
ignored.
Output Mode [Mono, Stereo]

Selectswhetherphaser1and2willberouted
separatelytotheleftandrightchannels,orsummedto
mono.
Routing / Output Mode / Output Level 1/2
Routing: Dual Routing: Dual

Output Mode: Mono Output Mode: Stereo
Output Level1/2 Output Level1/2
Routing: Serial
Phaser1 Output Level [0100]

Setstheoutputlevelforphaser1.Thisappliesonlyif
RoutingissettoDual.
Phaser2 Output Level [0100]

Setstheoutputlevelforphaser2.Thisappliesonlyif
RoutingissettoDual.
869
Effect Guide
Modulation and Pitch Shift
055: Stereo Vibrato

Thiseffectmodulatesthepitchoftheinputsignalto LFO Frequency Mod [Dmod, AUTOFADE]
createashimmeringtimbre.AutoFadeallowsyouto ThisselectswhethertheLFOwillbemodulatedbythe
increaseordecreasethevibratospeed. normalFrequencyDmodsource,orbytheAutofade
envelope.
Left
Wet / Dry
Vibrato VIBRATO
Depth [0100]
Vibrato SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation
Right

Wet / Dry
Source [OffTempo]
AutoFade Fade-In Delay LFO Frequency SelectsthemodulationsourceoftheLFOmodulation
depth.
AUTOFADE Amount [+/100]

AutofadeletsyoumodulatetheLFOFrequencyviaa depth.
simpleenvelope,triggeredbyaDmodsource.Thisis
enabledbysettingLFOFrequencyModto
AUTOFADE,andcanonlybeusedwhenBPM/Tempo LFO
SyncisOff.
Theintensityoftheautofadeseffectiscontrolledby
thenormalAmountparameter,underFrequency. SelectstheLFOWaveform.
Autofade example Shape [+/100]

Thediagrambelowshowsasetupwithnoteons ChangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform.Formore
triggeringtheautofade,causingtheLFOtospeedup information,seeShapeonpage 840.
from1.0Hzto4.0Hz. Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
TheAUTOFADESourceissettoGate1,LFO ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
FrequencyModissettoAUTOFADE,LFOFrequency MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
[Hz]issetto1.0,andthemodulationAmountissetto
3.0. Source [OffTempo]
AUTOFADE AutoFade ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
Source=Gate1
LFO Freq. Mod=AUTOFADE Amount [20.00+20.00]
Gate1 Signal LFO Frequency[Hz]=1.0
Amount=+3.0 ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
Note On All Note Off
LFO Frequency
AUTOFADE
Fade-In Rate =1.0+3.0=4.0Hz BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Fade-In Dealy
LFO Frequency
=1.0Hz Base Note [r w ]
Times [x1x32]
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthetriggersourcefortheAutofade. BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
AutoFadeistriggeredwhentheDmodvaluechanges moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
from63orsmallerto64orhigher,andturnsoffagain page 837.
whentheDmodvaluegoesbelow64.
Rate [1100] Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
Setsthespeedofthefadein.Highervaluesarefaster. LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
Fade-In Delay [msec] [002000]
Thissetsthetimefromthetriggersourceturningon Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
(goingaboveavalueof63)untilthefadeinstarts. WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
870
Modulation and Pitch Shift 056: Stereo Auto Fade Mod.
OUTPUT
056: Stereo Auto Fade Mod.

Thisstereochorus/flangereffectenablesyoutocontrol High Damp [%] [0100]
theLFOspeedandeffectbalanceusingautofade,and Setsthefeedbackdampingamountinthehighrange.
youcanspreadthesoundbyoffsettingthephaseofthe SeeHighDamp[%]onpage 864.
leftandrightLFOsfromeachother.
Stereo In - Stereo Out LFO

Left
Wet / Dry
Delay
Feedback
Delay
High Damp
Shape [+/100]
Right
ChangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform.Formore
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase information,seeShapeonpage 840.
AutoFade LFO Frequency

Wet / Dry
AUTOFADE Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
FormoreinformationontheAutofadeparameters,see ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.
AUTOFADEonpage 870.
Source [OffTempo]
Source [OffTempo] ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
SelectsthemodulationsourcethatstartsAutoFade.
Amount [20.00+20.00]
Rate [1100] ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
Setstherateoffadein.
Fade-In Delay [msec] [002000] Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
Setsthefadeindelaytime. LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
LFO Frequency Mod [Dmod, AUTOFADE]
SwitchesbetweenDmodandAUTOFADEfortheLFO Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
frequencymodulation. WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
Wet/Dry Mod [Dmod, AUTOFADE]
SwitchesbetweenDmodandAUTOFADEforthe
effectbalancemodulation. OUTPUT
MOD DELAY modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Setstheleftchanneldelaytime.
R Delay Time [msec] [0.0500.0]

Setstherightchanneldelaytime.
Depth [0200]
SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation.
Feedback [+/100]
Setsthefeedbackamount.SeeFeedbackon
page 858.
871
Effect Guide
057: 2-Voice Resonator

Thiseffectincludestwoindependentresonators, MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
whicheachresonateataspecifiedpitchinresponseto
theinputsignal.Youcanusethistoaddaunique BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
charactertoastringsoundbyemphasizingcertain
Base Note [r w ]
harmonics,forinstance,ortointroduceapitched
elementintoadrumloop.Theresonanceintensitycan Times [x1x32]
becontrolledviaanLFOorDmod.
Left
High Damp
Wet / Dry page 837.
Resonator
Level
Trim Pan
+ Resonance
Resonator
Selectseither(individual)LFO,CommonFXLFO1,or
Level Pan
Right
Trim
High Damp
CommonLFO2.SeeLFOTypeonpage 837.
Wet / Dry
D-mod Invert: On/Off

Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees]
[180+180]
LFO Pitch, Fine [cent]
Control Mode
Manual
SetsthephaseoffsetwhenType=Common1or
Common2.SeeCommonLFOPhaseOffset
[degrees]onpage 837.
CONTROL
Trim [0100] VOICE1
Thissetstheinputlevelfortheeffect.
Pitch [C0B8]
Control Mode [Manual, LFO, Dmod] ThissetsthetuningofVoice1,bynotename.
ThissetsthewaythattheResonanceiscontrolled.
Fine [cents] [50+50]
Manual:theResonanceparametercontrolsthe ThisadjuststhefinetuningofVoice1,incents.
intensityoftheeffect.
LFO:theintensityofresonanceiscontrolledbythe Resonance [+/100]
LFO.AstheLFOswaysbetweenpositiveandnegative ThisappliesonlywhenControlModeissetto
values,theresonatorsalternatebetweenoctavesofthe Manual.
specifiedpitch. Negativesettingschangetheharmoniccontent,and
Dmod:theresonanceiscontrolledbythedynamic alsomaketheresonanceoneoctavelower.
modulationsource.Ifyouuseabipolarmodulation
source,suchasJSXorRibbon,youcanmodulatethe High Damp [%] [0100]
resonancesothattheresonancesoundsinboththe Thissetstheamountofdampingforthehigh
highandlowoctaves,similartotheLFO. frequenciesoftheresonantsound.Lowervaluesmean
lessdamping,creatingametallicsoundwithstronger
LFO/Dmod Invert [Check-box] harmonics.
ThisappliesonlywhenControlModeissettoLFOor
Dmod. Level [0100]
EnablingLFO/DmodInvertreversestheResonance ThissetstheoutputlevelforVoice1.
modulationforVoice2.AstheDmodorLFOincreases, Pan [L6L1, C, R1R6]
Voice1sResonancewillbepositive,butVoice2swill
benegative(andthusresonateattheloweroctave). ThissetsthestereopositionofVoice1.
Source [OffTempo]
VOICE2
SelectsamodulationsourcetocontrolResonance
intensity. TheparametersforVoice2arethesameasthosefor
VOICE1,above.
Modulation Depth [+/100]
Setstheamountofresonanceintensitymodulation. OUTPUT
ThisappliestobothLFOandDmod.
LFO information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
872
Modulation and Pitch Shift 058: Doppler
058: Doppler
ThiseffectsimulatestheDopplereffectofamoving WhenModeissettoLoop,andDmodSyncissetto
soundwithachangingpitch,likethesirenofapassing On,youcanresettheLFOviaDmod(asspecifiedby
ambulance.Mixingtheeffectsoundwiththedry theSourceparameter,below).
soundwillcreateauniquechoruseffect. WhenModeissetto1Shot,theDopplereffect
happensonlyoncewhentriggered,andthenstops
Left
Wet / Dry
untilitistriggeredagain.Thetriggersourceis
specifiedbytheSourceparameter,below.Notethat
thisrequiresyoutomanuallytriggertheeffect;
+ Doppler
Pan Depth
otherwise,youwontheartheDoppleratall.
Dmod Sync [Check-box]

Right
Wet / Dry WhenthisisOn,andModeissettoLoop,youcan
LFO
resettheLFOviaDmod(asspecifiedbytheSource
D -mod
Trigger LFO Mode = 1-Shot
parameter,below).
Source [OffTempo]
DOPPLER SelectstheLFOresetmodulationsource.
Pitch Depth [0100] TheeffectistriggeredwhentheMIDIvaluechanges
WiththeDopplereffect,thepitchisraisedasthesound from63orsmallerto64orhigher.
approaches,andthepitchisloweredasthesoundgoes Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
away.Thisparametercontrolstheamountofthispitch
variation. ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
Doppler - Pitch / Pan Depth
Pitch
Source [OffTempo]
Higher
Pan Depth Pan Depth ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.

= (+) value = () value
Original Pitch Pitch Depth
Amount [20.00+20.00]
Lower
Left Center Right
Pan Depth
< <
Louder
< < < <<<<<< >>>>>> > >
Volume
> >
Louder
>
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Base Note [r w ]
Source [OffTempo]
Times [x1x32]
Selectsthemodulationsourceofpitchvariation.
Amount [+/100] BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
Setsthemodulationamountofpitchvariation. moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
page 837.
Pan Depth [+/100]
Thissetsthewidthofthestereoimageoftheeffect
sound.Withlargervalues,thesoundseemstocome Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
andgofrommuchfurtheraway.Withpositivevalues, LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
thesoundmovesfromlefttoright;withnegative information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
values,itmovesfromrighttoleft.
Source [OffTempo] WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
Selectsthemodulationsourceofpanning. youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
Amount [+/100]
OUTPUT
Setsthemodulationamountofpanning.
LFO information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Mode [Loop, 1-Shot]
ThisselectswhethertheDopplereffectrepeats
continuously(Loop),orcyclesonceandthenstops(1
Shot).
873
Effect Guide
059: Scratch
Thiseffectsimulatesthesoundofscratchingona
turntable,byrecordingtheinputandthenmodulating PLAYBACK
theplayback.
Scratch Source [OffTempo]
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out Thisselectsthemodulationsourceforthescratch.
Left
Wet / Dry Themodulationvaluecorrespondstotheplayback
position.
Direct
+ Scratch Mix Scratch Source
Rec Control Scratch
Start Playback Position End

Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod
D-mod Envelope Control Recorded Sound
Input
Envelope Select
D-mod
Scratch Source Scratch!

JS X
RECORD D-mod Ribbon Max Zero + Max
JS+Y
Envelope Select [Dmod, Input] JSY
etc
Zero + Max
Selectswhetherthestartandendofrecordingis
controlledviathemodulationsourceortheinput Response [0100]
signallevel. Thiscontrolshowfasttheeffectrespondstothe
Dmod:theinputsignalwillberecordedonlywhenthe ScratchSource.
modulationvalueis64orhigher.
Direct Mix [Always On, Always Off, Cross Fade]
Input:theinputsignalwillberecordedonlywhenits
levelisovertheThresholdvalue. Thiscontrolshowthedrysoundismixedwiththe
effectedsound.Tousethisparametereffectively,set
Themaximumrecordingtimeis2,730msec.Ifthisis Wet/DrytoWet.
exceeded,therecordeddatawillstartbeingerased
fromthetop. AlwaysOn:Thedrysoundisalwaysheardatthe
output,andthescratcheffectislayeredontop.
Source [OffTempo] AlwaysOff:Onlythescratcheffectisheardatthe
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrolsrecording output.Ifyourenotscratching,therewontbeany
whenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod. sound.
Threshold [0100] CrossFade:Normally,thedrysoundisheardatthe

output.Whenyoustarttoscratch,thedrysoundis
SetstherecordingstartlevelwhenEnvelopeSelectis muted;whenyoustopscratching,thedrysound
settoInput. reappears.
Response [0100]
Thissetsthespeedoftheresponsetotheendof OUTPUT
recording.Setasmallervaluewhenyouarerecording
aphraseorrhythmpattern,andsetahighervalueif
youarerecordingonlyonenote.
060: Grain Shifter

Thiseffectcutsextremelyshortsamples(grains)
fromtheinputsignalwaveformandplaysthem GRAIN SHIFTER
repeatedly,givingamechanicalcharactertothesound.
Duration [0100]
Durationsetsthelengthofthesampledgrain,andthe
Left
Wet / Dry
LFOSampleCyclecontrolshowoftenanewgrainis
sampled.InbetweenSampleCycles,thecurrentgrain
isrepeatedcontinuously.
+ Grain Shifter
Sample Cycle
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
D-mod Trigger
874
Modulation and Pitch Shift 061: Stereo Tremolo
Sample Cycle / Duration Source [OffTempo]

Sample Cycle SelectsamodulationsourceforLFOspeed.
Duration
Amount [20.00+20.00]
In
SetsthemodulationamountofLFOspeed.

BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Out
Base Note [r w ]
Times [x1x32]
Source [OffTempo] WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
Selectsthesourcethatwillmodulatethedurationof BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
thegrain. moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
page 837.
Amount [+/100]
Setstheamountbywhichthegraindurationwillbe
modulated. Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
LFO
Sync Source [OffTempo] WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
SelectsthemodulationsourcethatwillresettheLFO. youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
Sample Cycle [Hz] [0.0220.00]
Setsthefrequencyatwhichthegrainwillbeswitched. OUTPUT
Formoreinformation,seeDuration,above. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
061: Stereo Tremolo

Thiseffectmodulatesthevolumeleveloftheinput
signal.Theeffectisstereo,andoffsettingtheLFOof LFO
theleftandrightphasesfromeachotherproducesa
Waveform [Triangle, Sine, Vintage, Up, Down]
tremoloeffectbetweenleftandright.
ThisparametersetsthebasicshapeoftheLFO.The
Vintagewaveformmodelsclassicguitaramptremolo.
Left
Wet / Dry
Tremolo - LFO Waveform
Tremolo
Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down
Tremolo
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down LFO Shape
Shape [+/100]
TREMOLO ChangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform.p.840.
Depth [0100] Phase [degrees] [180+180]

SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation. Thisparameterdeterminesthedifferencebetweenthe
leftandrightLFOphases.Highervaluescreatean
Source [OffTempo] autopaneffect,thesoundmovingbetweenleftand
Selectsthemodulationsourceofthedepthof right.
modulation. Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
Amount [+/100] ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
Setsthemodulationamountofthedepthof MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
modulation. Source [OffTempo]
875
Effect Guide
Amount [20.00+20.00] Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]

ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz. Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box] information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00] Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
Base Note [r w ] WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
Times [x1x32]
OUTPUT
moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
062: Stereo Envelope Tremolo

Thiseffectusestheinputsignalleveltomodulatea
Tremolo
stereotremolo(LFOvolumemodulation).Forinstance,
Level Input Volume LFO Frequency[Hz]=8.0
youcancreateatremoloeffectthatbecomesdeeper Envelope Amount[Hz]= 7.0Hz
andfasterastheinputgetsmorequiet. Depth=100
Louder
Envelope Amount= 100

Left
Wet / Dry
Time
Tremolo
Tremolo LFO
Right
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Waveform [Triangle, Sine, Vintage]
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage LFO Shape
+ Envelope Envelope Shape
Envelope Sens Shape [+/100]
ENVELOPE Phase [degrees] [180+180]

Sensitivity [0100]
right.p.875.
Setstheenvelopessensitivitytotheinputsignal.
Shape [+/100]
SetsinitialspeedoftheLFO.p.876.
Setstheenvelopescurvature.
Envelope Amount [Hz] [20.00+20.00]
TREMOLO Setstheamountaddedtoorsubtractedfromthe
Frequencywhentheenvelopeisatmaximum.p.876.
Depth [0100]
Setstheinitialamountoftremolo. OUTPUT
Envelope Amount [+/100] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
SetstheamountaddedtoorsubtractedfromtheDepth modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
whentheenvelopeisatmaximum. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Modulation Example
Thegraphicbelowshowsanexampleoftremolo
modulationwithnegativemodulationofbothDepth
andFrequency.Atthestartofthenote,theinputisat
maximumvolume.ThisslowsdowntheLFO
Frequencyto1.0Hz,butalsomodulatestheDepthto
0sothetremolodoesnthaveanyeffect.
Astheinputvolumediesdown,theFrequencyspeeds
up;theDepthalsoincreases,makingthetremoloeffect
increasinglyaudible.Whentheinputvolume
approachessilence,theDepthisatitsmaximum(100)
andFrequencyisat8Hz.
876
Modulation and Pitch Shift 063: Stereo Auto Pan
063: Stereo Auto Pan

Left
Wet / Dry ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
Pan MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
Depth
Source [OffTempo]
Pan ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
Amount [20.00+20.00]
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sin LFO Shape ThissetstheFrequencymodulationamount,inHz.
Thisisastereoin,stereooutautopanner.ThePhase MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]

andShapeparametersletsyoucreatevariouspanning
effects,suchasmakingtheleftandrightinputsseem BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
tochaseeachotheraroundthestereofield. Base Note [r w ]
Times [x1x32]
AUTO PAN
Depth [0100] BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation. moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
page 837.
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourceofthedepthof
modulation. Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
Amount [+/100] information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
Setsthemodulationamountofthedepthof Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
modulation.
LFO
Waveform [Triangle, Sine] OUTPUT
SelectstheLFOWaveform. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Shape [+/100] information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
ThischangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform,
whichcontrolsthewaythattheaudiomovesaround
thestereofield.

Thisdeterminesthephasedifferencebetweentheleft
andrightLFOs.Whenyougraduallychangethevalue
awayfrom0,thesoundsfromtheleftandright
channelswillseemtochaseeachotheraround.Ifyou
settheparameterto+180or180,thesoundsfromeach
channelwillcrossovereachother.
Youllonlyheartheeffectofthisparameteriftheinput
istruestereo,withdifferentsignalsintheleftandright
channels.
Stereo Auto Pan - LFO Phase
LFO Phase = 0 degrees LFO Phase = 90 degrees LFO Phase = 180 degrees
L-In L-In L-In
R-In R-In R-In
L-In L-In L-In
R-In R-In R-In
L-In L-In L-In
R-In R-In R-In
L-In L-In L-In
R-In R-In R-In
L-In L-In L-In
R-In R-In R-In
Left Center Right

Output Stereo Image
877
Effect Guide
064: Stereo Phaser+Tremolo

Thiseffectcombinesastereophaserandtremolo,with PhaserTremolo,PhaserTremoloSpin,Phaser
linkedLFOs.Swellingphasermodulationandtremolo TremoloLR,PhaserLRTremolo,PhaserLRTremolo
effectssynchronizewitheachother,creatingasoothing Spin,PhaserLRTremoloLR.
modulationeffectparticularlysuitableforelectric
piano. Phaser/Tremolo Phase [degrees] [180+180]
Setsthephasedifferencebetweenthetremoloand
phaserLFOs.p.878.
Left
Wet / Dry
Phaser Tremolo Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]

Phaser Wet / Dry
Resonance
Phaser Wet / Dry MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
Phaser Tremolo
Right
Source [OffTempo]
Wet / Dry
LFO Type ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
LFO LFO Shape
LFO Phase
Amount [20.00+20.00]
PHASER
Manual [0100]
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Setsthephaserfrequencyrange.
Base Note [r w ]
Depth [0100]
Setsthephasermodulationdepth. Times [x1x32]
Source [OffTempo] BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
Selectsthemodulationsourceforthephaser moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
modulationdepth. page 837.
Amount [+/100] Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]

Setsthemodulationamountforthephasermodulation Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
depth. LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
Resonance [+/100]
Setsthephaserresonanceamount. Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
Wet/Dry [Wet, 2:98Dry2:98, Wet] youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
Setsthebalancebetweenthephasereffectanddry
sounds.p.878.
OUTPUT
TREMOLO modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Shape [+/100] information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
SetsthedegreeofthetremoloLFOshaping.p.840. LFO: L/R Phase Type and Phaser/Tremolo Phase
Depth [0100] [degrees]
SelectthetypeofphaserLFOandtremoloLFOforthe
Setsthetremolomodulationdepth.
L/RPhaseTypeparameter.Howtheeffectsound
Source [OffTempo] movesorrotatesdependsonthetypeofLFO.Selecting
Phaser/TremoloPhaseenablesyoutooffsetthe
Selectsthemodulationsourceforthetremolo
timingofthephaserpeakandcontrolasubtle
modulationdepth.
movementandrotationofthesound.
Amount [+/100]
PHASER: Wet/Dry and OUTPUT: Wet/Dry
Setsthemodulationamountofthetremolomodulation PHASERWet/Drysetsthebalancebetweenthephaser
depth. outputandthedrysound.OUTPUTWet/Drysetsthe
balancebetweenthefinalphaserandtremolooutput
LFO levelandthedrysound.
L/R Phase Type [Phaser - Tremolo,

Phaser LR - Tremolo LR]
SelectsthetypeofthetremoloandphaserLFOs.p.878.
878
Modulation and Pitch Shift 065: Stereo Ring Modulator
065: Stereo Ring Modulator

Thiseffectcreatesametallicsoundbyapplyingthe Note Fine [+/100]
oscillatorstotheinputsignal.UsetheLFOorDynamic Thisadjuststhefrequencyincents(1/100ofa
Modulationtomodulatetheoscillatortocreatea semitone).ItappliesonlywhenOSCModeissetto
radicalmodulation.Matchingtheoscillatorfrequency Note(KeyFollow).
withanotenumberwillproducearingmodulation
effectinspecifickeyranges. LFO Depth [0100]
SetsthedepthofLFOmodulationfortheoscillator
Left
frequency.
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourceofthedepthof
Pre LPF modulation.
Ring Modulator
Right Amount [+/100]

Wet / Dry
Fixed Sine Oscillator
Fixed Frequency
OSC Mode Pitch
Setsthemodulationamountofthedepthof
Note No. Note Offset, Fine
Note (Key Follow) modulation.
LFO
LFO
RING MODULATOR Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
Pre LPF [0100] ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
Iftheinputisverybright,theringmodulatormay MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
soundharshornoisy.Ifthisoccurs,youcansmooth Source [OffTempo]
outtheeffectbyincreasingthePreLPF(LowPass
Filter)setting,tocutoutsomeoftheinputshigh ThisselectsamodulationsourcefortheFrequency.
frequencies.Thehigherthesetting,themorethehigh Amount [20.00+20.00]
frequencieswillbecut.
OSC Mode [Fixed, Note (Key Follow)]
Thisdetermineswhethertheoscillatorfrequency
followsthenotenumber,orstaysatafixedvalue. BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Note(KeyFollow):Theoscillatorsfrequencyisbased
Base Note [r w ]
onMIDInotenumber(ontheeffectsMIDIchannel),
allowingyoutouseitasanoctaver.TheNoteInterval Times [x1x32]
parameter,below,setsthepitchoffsetfromtheoriginal
note,insemitones.Matchingtheoscillatorfrequency
withthenotenumberproducesamoregentlering
modulationeffect,inthecorrectkey.
page 837.
Fixed:theoscillatorusesthemanuallysetFixed
Frequency,below. Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
Fixed Frequency [Hz] [012.00k] LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
ThiscontrolstheoscillatorfrequencywhenOSCMode information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
issettoFixed.
Source [OffTempo] WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoscillator youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
frequencywhenOSCModeissettoFixed.
Amount [12.00k+12.00k] OUTPUT

Setstheoscillatorfrequencymodulationamountwhen Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
OSCModeissettoFixed. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Note Offset [48+48]
ThissetsapitchoffsetfromthereceivedMIDInote
number,insemitones.ItappliesonlywhenOSCMode
issettoNote(KeyFollow).
Tryusingoffsetsofoctaves(+/12,24,etc.)orfifths(+7,
+19,5,etc.).
879
Effect Guide
066: Stereo Frequency Shifter

Thisisastereoeffectthatshiftsthefrequencyofthe MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
inputsignal.YoucanuseLFOmodulationanddelayto
produceawiderangeofpitchchangeeffects. BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Base Note [r w ]
Left
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Times [x1x32]
Post-Delay
High Damp HPF

Frequency Shifter Delay WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
Pre-Delay
LFO
Output Select
High Damp HPF moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
Frequency Shifter Delay
Feedback
page 837.
Right
Wet / Dry Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
FREQUENCY SHIFTER information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
High Damp [%] [099] Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
Setsthehighfrequencyattenuationofthedelayed WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
sound. youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO.
HPF Fc [Hz] [2011.90k]

Setsthecutofffrequencyforthehighpassfilter. DELAY
Frequency Shift [Hz] [6.00k+6.00k] Delay Time [msec] [0.02730.0]
Setstheamountoffrequencyshift. Setsthedelaytime.
Source [OffTempo] Feedback [+/100]

Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillcontrol Setsthefeedbackamount.
frequencyshift. Source [OffTempo]
Amount [6.00k+6.00k] Selectsthemodulationsourceoffeedbackamount.
Setsthemodulationamountforcontrollingfrequency Amount [+/100]
shift.
Setsthedepthbywhichfeedbackamountwillbe
LFO Depth [Hz] [6.00k+6.00k] modulated.
SetsthedepthbywhichtheLFOwillmodulatethe Output Select [pre-delay, post-delay]
frequencyshift.
Selectswhetherthepredelayorthepostdelaysound
Source [OffTempo] willbeoutput.
SelectsthemodulationsourcethatwillcontrolLFO
modulationoffrequencyshift. OUTPUT
Amount [6.00k] +6.00k Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Setstheamountbywhichthemodulationsourcewill modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
controlLFOmodulationofthefrequencyshift. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
LFO
Source [OffTempo]
Amount [20.00+20.00]
880
Modulation and Pitch Shift 067: Detune
067: Detune
Thiseffectoffsetsthepitchslightlyfromtheinput
signal.Comparedtoachorus,thiscanbeusedtocreate PITCH SHIFTER
amoresubtlethickeningeffect,
Pitch Shift [cents] [+/100]
Setsthepitchdifferencefromtheinputsignal.
Left
Wet / Dry
Source [OffTempo]
Input Level
High Damp Selectsamodulationsourceforpitchshift.
+ Detune Delay
Feedback
Amount [+/100]
Input Level
Setsthemodulationamountforpitchshift.
Right
Wet / Dry
DELAY
INPUT Delay Time [msec] [01000]
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Setsthedelaytime.
Setsthemodulationamountfortheinputlevel. Feedback [+/100]
Source [OffTempo] Setsthefeedbackamount.
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel. High Damp [%] [0100]
Input Level Input Level
Input Level Dmod
x1.0 x1.0 Input Level Dmod= 50
Input Level Dmod= 100
Input Level Dmod= +50 OUTPUT

Louder
Louder
x0.5 Input Level Dmod= +100 x0.5
Higher D-mod Higher D-mod modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Zero Max Zero Max
068: Pitch Shifter

Fastprovidesaquickresponsetime,butmaychange
Left thetone.ThisgenerallyworksbestwithextremePitch
Wet / Dry
Shiftsettings.
Input Level
High Damp Mediumisinbetweenthesetwo.
+ Pitch Shifter Delay
Post
Pre
Feedback Position Feedback Pitch Shift [1/2 steps] [24+24]
Input Level
Right
Thissetsthebasicamountofpitchshifting,in
Wet / Dry
semitones.Youcanalsomakepreciseadjustments
usingFine[cents],below.
Thiseffectchangesthepitchoftheinputsignal.The
builtin2seconddelaycanbefedbackthroughthe Fine [cents] [+/100]
pitchshifter,forclassic,spiralingeffects.
Thisadjuststhepitchshiftincents(1/100ofa
semitone).
INPUT
Source [OffTempo]
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] ThisselectsthemodulationsourceforPitchShift.As
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.See withPitchShiftitself,youcansettheamountof
InputLevelDmod[%]onpage 881. modulationinbothsemitonesandcents.
Source [OffTempo] Pitch Shift Amount [24+24]

Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel. Thissetsthebasicamountofmodulation,insemitones.
YoucanalsomakepreciseadjustmentsusingFine
Amount,below.
PITCH SHIFTER
Fine Amount [+/100]
Mode [Slow, Medium, Fast]
Thisadjuststheamountofmodulationincents(1/100
Thiscontrolsthebasicoperationofthepitchshifter. ofasemitone).
Slowpreservesthetonalqualityoftheinput,butadds
afixedamountofdelay.Thisgenerallyworksbestwith
moderatePitchShiftsettings.
881
Effect Guide
Feedback [+/100]
DELAY
Setsthefeedbackamount.
Delay Time [msec] [02000]
Setsthedelaytime.
Setstheamountofhighfrequencydampinginthe
Feedback Position [Pre, Post] feedbackloop.
Prefeedsthedelaybackthroughthepitchshifter.Each
timethefeedbackrepeats,thepitchwillget OUTPUT
increasinglylowerorhigher.
Postmeansthatthefeedbackdoesnotgothroughthe modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
pitchshifter,sothatthepitchstaysthesamethrough information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
successiverepeats.
069: Stereo Pitch Shifter

Fine [cents] [+/100]
Left
Wet / Dry Thisadjuststhepitchshiftincents(1/100ofa
High Damp
Pitch Shifter Delay semitone).
Input Level Post
Pre
Feedback Position Feedback Spread Source [OffTempo]
Input Level Pre Post
Pitch Shifter Delay ThisselectsthemodulationsourceforPitchShift.As

High Damp
Right
withPitchShiftitself,youcansettheamountof
Wet / Dry
modulationinbothsemitonesandcents.
Thisisastereopitchshifter.Thepitchshiftamountfor Pitch Shift Amount [24+24]
theleftandrightchannelscanbereversedfromeach
Thissetsthebasicamountofmodulation,insemitones.
other.
YoucanalsomakepreciseadjustmentsusingFine
Amount,below.
INPUT
Fine Amount [+/100]
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Thisadjuststheamountofmodulationincents(1/100
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.See ofasemitone).
InputLevelDmod[%]onpage 881.
Source [OffTempo] DELAY

Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel. L Delay Time [msec] [02000]
Setsthedelaytimefortheleftchannel.
PITCH SHIFTER
R Delay Time [msec] [02000]
Mode [Slow, Medium, Fast] Setsthedelaytimefortherightchannel.
Thiscontrolswhetherthepitchshiftwillpreservetonal
qualitybuthavealongerdelaytime(Slow),orbefast
Feedback Position [Pre, Post]
butwithlowerquality(Fast).Fordetails,seeMode Prefeedsthedelaybackthroughthepitchshifter.Each
onpage 881. timethefeedbackrepeats,thepitchwillget
increasinglylowerorhigher.
L/R Pitch [Normal, Up/Down]
Postmeansthatthefeedbackdoesnotgothroughthe
DetermineswhetherornottheL/Rpitchshiftamount pitchshifter,sothatthepitchstaysthesamethrough
isinverted. successiverepeats.
Normal:Thepitchesoftheleftandrightchannelsshift
together.
Feedback [+/100]
Up/Down:thepitchshiftamountfortherightchannel
willbereversed.Ifthepitchshiftamountispositive, High Damp [%] [0100]
thepitchoftheleftchannelisraised,andthepitchof
Setstheamountofhighfrequencydampinginthe
therightchannelislowered.
feedbackloop.
Pitch Shift [1/2 steps] [24+24]
Spread [+/100]
Thissetsthebasicamountofpitchshifting,in
Setsthewidthofthestereoimageoftheeffectsound.
semitones.Youcanalsomakepreciseadjustments
SeeSpreadonpage 891.
usingFine[cents],below.
882
Modulation and Pitch Shift 070: Pitch Shifter BPM
OUTPUT
070: Pitch Shifter BPM

Thispitchshifterenablesyoutosetthedelaytimeto Time Over?> [---, OVER!]
matchthesongtempo. Themaximumdelaytimeis2,000msec.Ifthechannels
combinationofBPM,BaseNote,andTimesexceeds
Left
thislimit,theerrormessageOVER!willappear.If
Wet / Dry
thisoccurs,changethedelaytimeparameterssothat
Input Level thismessagenolongerappears.
High Damp
+ Pitch Shifter Delay
Pre
Post Base Note [r w ]
Feedback Position Feedback
Input Level Thissetsthebasicdelaylength,relativetotheBPM
Right
Wet / Dry
setting.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoawhole
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
note,includingtriplets.
BPM
Times [x1x32]
INPUT instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
Timesissetto3,resultwillbeadottedeighthnote.
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100]
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.See Feedback Position [Pre, Post]
InputLevelDmod[%]onpage 881. Switchesthefeedbackconnection.p.882.
Source [OffTempo] Feedback [+/100]
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel. Setsthefeedbackamount.p.882.

PITCH SHIFTER
Thiscontrolswhetherthepitchshiftwillpreservetonal OUTPUT
qualitybuthavealongerdelaytime(Slow),orbefast
butwithlowerquality(Fast).Fordetails,seeMode Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
onpage 881. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Setsthepitchshiftamountinstepsofasemitone.p.881
Fine [cents] [+/100]

Setsthepitchshiftamountinstepsofonecent.p.881
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourceforbothPitchShiftand
Fine.
Pitch Shift Amount [24+24]

SetsthemodulationamountforPitchShift.
Fine Amount [+/100]

SetsthemodulationamountforFine.
DELAY
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo
manuallyforthisindividualeffect.
883
Effect Guide
071: Stereo Pitch Shifter BPM

Thisstereopitchshifterenablesyoutosetthedelay Time Over? R > [---, OVER!]
timetomatchthesongtempo. Displaytheerrormessageiftherightchanneldelay
timeexceedstheupperlimit.p.883.
Left
High Damp
Wet / Dry L Base Note [r w ]
Pitch Shifter
Input Level
Delay
Post
Selectsthetypeofnotestospecifytheleftchannel
Pre
Feedback Position Feedback Spread delaytime.p.883.
Input Level Pre Post
Pitch Shifter Delay

High Damp
Times [x1x32]
Right
Wet / Dry
Setsthenumberofnotestospecifytheleftchannel
Tempo
BPM
delaytime.p.883.
BPM Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
R Base Note [r w ]
Selectsthetypeofnotestospecifytherightchannel
INPUT delaytime.p.883.
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Times [x1x32]

Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.p.881. Setsthenumberofnotestospecifytherightchannel
delaytime.p.883.
Source [OffTempo]
Feedback Position [Pre, Post]
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel.p.881.
Switchesthefeedbackconnection.p.882.
PITCH SHIFTER Feedback [+/100]

Setsthefeedbackamount.p.882.
SwitchesPitchShiftermode.p.881. High Damp [%] [0100]
L/R Pitch [Normal, Up/Down]
DetermineswhetherornottheL/Rpitchshiftamount Spread [+/100]
isinverted.p.882. Setsthewidthofthestereoimageoftheeffectsound.

Setsthepitchshiftamountinstepsofasemitone.p.881 OUTPUT
Fine [cents] [+/100] information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Setsthepitchshiftamountinstepsofonecent.p.881
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourceofpitchshiftamount.
p.881.
Pitch Shift Amount [24+24]

Setsthemodulationamountofpitchshiftamount.
p.881.
Fine Amount [+/100]

SetsthemodulationamountofpitchshiftamountSets
themodulationamountofpitchshiftamount.p.881.
DELAY
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
manuallyforthisindividualeffect.p.883.
Time Over? L > [---, OVER!]

Displaytheerrormessageiftheleftchanneldelaytime
exceedstheupperlimit.p.883.
884
Modulation and Pitch Shift 072: Pitch Shift Mod.
072: Pitch Shift Mod.

ThiseffectusesanLFOtomodulatethepitchshift Amount [20.00+20.00]
amount,andletsyouadjustthepanningandstereo SetsthemodulationamountofLFOspeed.
widthbetweentheeffectedanddrysounds.
Left
Wet / Dry BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Base Note [r w ]
+ Pitch Shifter
Times [x1x32]
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sqr
page 837.
PITCH SHIFTER LFO Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]

Selectseither(individual)LFO,CommonFXLFO1,or
Pitch Shift [cents] [+/100] CommonLFO2.p.837.
Setsthepitchdifferencefromtheinputsignal.
Depth [+/100] SetsthephaseoffsetwhenType=Common1or
SetstheLFOmodulationdepthforpitchshiftamount. Common2.p.837.
Pitch Shift Mod - Pitch Shift / Depth
Pitch OUTPUT
LFO Waveform=Triangle
Higher
Depth (+value)
Original Pitch
Pitch Shift (+ value) Setsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedryinput.
Unlikemosteffects,whenthisissettoWet,thedryand
Lower
LFO Waveform=Square
Depth (value)
effectedsignalswillbeheardatequalvolume.
Source [OffTempo]
Source [OffTempo] SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
Selectsthemodulationsourceofthedepthof Amount [+/100]
modulation.
Amount [+/100]
Setsthemodulationamountofthedepthof
modulation.
Pan [L, 1:9999:1, R]

Thissimultaneouslycontrolsthepanningandstereo
widthforthepitchshiftedanddrysounds.Thevalue
isshownforthepitchshiftedsignal,andthedrysignal
isalwaysattheoppositesideofthestereofield.
Forinstance,whenPanissettoL,theeffectedsoundis
pannedallthewaytotheleft,andthedrysoundis
pannedallthewaytotheright.WhenPanissettoR,
thepanningisreversed.
Intermediatevaluesdecreasethestereowidth,sothat
at50:50,bothsoundsarecentered.
LFO
Waveform [Triangle, Square]

SetstheLFOspeed,inHz.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsamodulationsourceforLFOspeed.
885
Effect Guide
073: Organ Vibrato/Chorus

Thiseffectsimulatesthechorusandvibratocircuitryof
avintageorgan.Themodulationspeedanddepthcan CUSTOM
becustomized.
Mix [0100]
ThiseffectworksthesameastheChorus/Vibrato
Setsthemixlevelofthedirectsoundwhen
includedintheCX3.Formoreinformation,see71c:
Mode=Preset.
Vibrato/Chorusonpage 230.
Source [OffTempo]
Left
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillcontrolthemix
Wet / Dry
levelofthedirectsound.
+ Vibrato/Chorus
Amount [+/100]
Preset Setting
Setsthemodulationamountforcontrollingthemix
Custom Parameters Mode levelofthedirectsound.
Right
Wet / Dry
Depth [0100]
Setsthevibratodepth.
CONTROL Source [OffTempo]
Input Trim [0100] Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillcontrolvibrato
depth.
Setstheinputlevel.
Amount [+/100]
Mode [Preset, Custom]
Setsthemodulationamountforcontrollingthevibrato
Selectseitherpresetorcustomsettings.
depth.
PRESET Speed [Hz] [0.0220.00]

Setsthevibratospeed.
Type [V1, C1, V2, C2, V3, C3]
Source [OffTempo]
SelectstheeffecttypewhenMode=Preset.
Selectsthemodulationsourceforcontrollingthe
V1/V2/V3arevariationsofvibrato,andC1/C2/C3are
vibratospeed.
variationsofchorus.
Amount [20.00+20.00]
Source [OffTempo]
Setsthemodulationamountforcontrollingthevibrato
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillchangethe
speed.
effecttype.
Amount [5+5] OUTPUT

Setsthemodulationamountforchangingtheeffect
type.
074: Rotary Speaker

Thiseffectsimulatesarotaryspeaker,andobtainsa
morerealisticsoundbysimulatingtherotorinthelow CONTROL
rangeandthehorninthehighrangeseparately.The
Mode Switch [Rotate, Stop]
effectalsosimulatesthestereomicrophonesettings.
Switchesbetweenspeakerrotationandstop.
Left
Wet / Dry
Source [OffTempo]
Horn SelectsamodulationsourceforRotate/Stop.
+ Rotary Speaker Horn/Rotor
Balance
Mic Distance
Mic Spread Mode [Toggle, Moment]
Rotor
Thisparametercontrolshowthemodulationsource
Right
Speaker Simulation switchesbetweenrotationandstop.
Wet / Dry
D-mod Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop WhenMode=Toggle,thespeakerrotatesorstops
D-mod Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
alternatelyeachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethe
D-mod Manual Speed Control
joystick.ViaMIDI,rotationwillswitchbetweenstart
andstopeachtimethemodulationamountexceeds64.
886
Modulation and Pitch Shift 074: Rotary Speaker
WhenMode=Moment,thespeakerrotatesbydefault, Rotary Speaker - Mic Placement

andstopsonlywhenyoupressthepedalormovethe Mic Spread
Microphone Microphone
joystick.ViaMIDI,modulationvaluesabove64make
thespeakerrotate,andvaluesbelow64makeitstop.
Mic Distance Mic Distance
Speed Switch [Slow, Fast]
Switchesthespeakerrotationspeedbetweenslowand
fast.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsamodulationsourceforSlow/Fast.
Rotary Speaker (Top View)

Thisparametercontrolshowthemodulationsource Distance [0100]
switchestherotationspeedbetweenslowandfast.
Thisadjuststhedistancebetweentherotaryspeaker
WhenMode=Toggle,thespeedwillswitchbetween andthemicrophones.Lowervaluesbringthemics
slowandfasteachtimeyoupressthepedalormove closertothespeaker.
thejoystick.ViaMIDI,thespeedwillswitcheachtime
themodulationamountexceeds64. Spread [0100]
WhenMode=Moment(shortforMomentary),the Setstheanglebetweentheleftandrightmicrophones.
speedisusuallyslow.Itbecomesfastonlywhenyou Highersettingscreateawiderstereoeffect.
pressthepedalormovethejoystick.ViaMIDI,
modulationvaluesabove64setthespeedtoFast,and
OUTPUT
valuesbelow64setittoSlow.
Manual Speed [OffTempo] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Thisletsyoucontroltherotationspeedmanuallyfrom information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
aselectedmodulationsource,insteadofjustswitching
betweenSlowandFast.Ifyoudontwanttouse
manualcontrol,setthistoOff.
HORN
Ratio [Stop, 0.502.00]
Adjuststhehornrotationspeed,whichaffectsthehigh
frequencies.1.00isthedefaultsetting.SelectingStop
willstoptherotation.
Acceleration [0100]
Onarealrotaryspeaker,therotationacceleratesor
deceleratesgraduallywhenyouswitchbetweenslow
andfast,orstopandstart.Thisparameteradjustshow
quicklytheHornspeedsupandslowsdown.
ROTOR
Ratio [Stop, 0.502.00]
Adjuststherotorspeed,whichaffectsthelow
frequencies.1.00isthedefaultsetting.SelectingStop
willstoptherotation.
Acceleration [0100]
ThisparameteradjustshowquicklytheRotorspeeds
upandslowsdown;seeAcceleration,above.

Setsthelevelbalancebetweenthehighfrequencyhorn
andlowfrequencyrotor.SeeAccelerationon
page 887.
MIC
Thesesettingsmodelapairofstereomicrophones,
recordingtherotaryspeaker.
887
Effect Guide
075: Rotary Speaker Pro OD

Thisisastereorotaryspeakermodel,includingamp
overdriveandspeakersimulation. ROTOR
Theseparameterscontrolthespeedandaccelerationof
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out therotor,thevolumebalancebetweenthehornand
Left
Wet / Dry
rotor.TheyareidenticaltothoseoftheRotarySpeaker
Horn
effect;formoreinformation,seeROTORon
+ Overdrive Rotary Speaker Horn/Rotor
Balance
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
page 887.
Rotor
Right
Speaker Simulation Speaker Simulator
Wet / Dry
D -mod
On/Off
D-mod Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop Speaker Simulator [Check-box]

D-mod Manual Speed Control Thispartoftheeffectmodelsthespeakersthemselves,

creatingaslightlywarmertone.Usethecheckboxto
turnthespeakersimulationonoroff.
CONTROL
Theseparameterssetupmodulationtostartandstop
MIC
therotaryspeaker,andtochangeitsspeed.This Thesesettingsmodelapairofstereomicrophones
sectionisidenticaltothatoftheRotarySpeakereffect; recordingtherotaryspeaker.Theyareidenticalto
formoreinformation,seeCONTROLonpage 886. thoseoftheRotarySpeakereffect;formore
information,seeMIConpage 887.
OVERDRIVE
OUTPUT
Switch [Off, On]
Switchesoverdriveon/off.
Source [OffTempo] information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Selectsamodulationsourcetoswitchoverdriveon/off.

Thisparametercontrolshowthemodulationsource
switchestheoverdriveonandoff.
WhenMode=Toggle,theoverdriveturnsonoroff
eachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,overdriveturnsonoroffeachtimethe
modulationamountexceeds64.
WhenMode=Moment(shortforMomentary),the
overdriveisnormallyoff,andturnsononlywhenyou
pressthepedalormovethejoystick.ViaMIDI,
modulationvaluesabove64turniton,andvalues
below64turnitoff.
Gain [0100]
Determinesthedegreeofdistortion.
Level [0100]
Setstheoverdriveoutputlevel.
Tone [015]
Setsthetonalqualityoftheoverdrive.
HORN
Theseparameterscontrolthespeedandaccelerationof
thehorn.TheyareidenticaltothoseoftheRotary
Speakereffect;formoreinformation,seeHORNon
page 887.
888
Modulation and Pitch Shift 076: Rotary Speaker Pro CX
076: Rotary Speaker Pro CX

Thiseffectmodelsavintagerotaryspeaker,with Fast Override Stop
detailedcontroloverbothtimbreandbehavior.This Fast Override Stop: Off Fast Override Stop: On

effectprovidesthesameperformanceastheRotary
Stop Rotate Stop Rotate
SpeakerincludedintheCX3.Formoreinformation, Slow Slow Slow Slow
see72:RotarySpeakeronpage 232. Slow Stop Slow
Stop
Stop Rotate Stop Rotate
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out Fast Fast Fast Fast
Left Fast Fast
Wet / Dry
Horn
Speed Switch Mode Switch
Rotary Speaker Horn/Rotor Mic Distance
+ Balance Mic Spread
Rotor
Horn Stop Phase [degrees] [Free, 180+180]
Speaker Simulation
Right
Wet / Dry WhentheModeSwitchissettoStop,theHorn
D-mod Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop
graduallycomestorestpointingonewayoranother.
Thisallowsyoutocontrolwhereitwillstop.
Freeletsitcometorestnaturally,atamoreorless
CONTROL randomspot.Theothersettings,180to+180,letyou
forceittolandinaspecificposition.
Mode Switch [Rotate, Stop] Thespeakerpositionhasadramaticeffectonthetone,
ThisletsyoustopthemotionoftheRotarySpeaker. sospecifyingafixedpositionallowsyoutoachieve
Evenwhenstopped,thespeakerwillstillaffectthe consistenttimbralresults.
timbre.
Rotor Stop Phase [degrees] [Free, 180+180]
Thehornandrotorcaneachtakedifferentamountsof
ThisdetermineswheretheRotorwilllandwhenthe
timetostartandstoptheirrotation.Formore
ModeSwitchissettoStop.Formoredetails,seeHorn
information,seetheStartAccelerationandStop
StopPhase[degrees],above.
DecelerationparametersunderHORN,below.
Source [OffTempo]
HORN
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetostartandstopthe
RotarySpeaker. Thehorncarriestheeffectshighfrequencies,whilethe
rotorcarriesthelowfrequencies.
Fast Speed [0100]
ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheModeSwitch.For
moreinformation,seeModeonpage 886. ThisspecifiesthespeedoftheHornwhentheSpeed
SwitchissettoFast.
Speed Switch [Slow, Fast]
Slow Speed [0100]
Switchesthespeakerrotationspeedbetweenslowand
fast ThisspecifiesthespeedoftheHornwhentheSpeed
SwitchissettoSlow.
Source [OffTempo]
Acceleration [0100]
SelectsamodulationsourceforSlow/Fast.
ThissetshowlongittakestheHorntochangefromthe
Mode [Toggle, Moment] SlowspeedtotheFastspeed.
ThisdeterminesthebehavioroftheSpeedSwitch.For Deceleration [0100]
moreinformation,seeModeonpage 887.
ThissetshowlongittakestheHorntochangefromthe
Fast Overrides Stop [Check-box] FastspeedtotheSlowspeed.
On(checked):settingtheSpeedSwitchtoFastwill Start Acceleration [0100]
maketherotorsspeedup,eveniftheModeSwitchis
settoStop. ThissetshowlongittakestheHorntocomeupto
speedaftertheModeSwitchhaschangedfromStopto
Off(unchecked):iftheModeSwitchissettoStop, Rotate.
therotorswillalwaysstaystopped,regardlessofthe
SpeedSwitch. Stop Deceleration [0100]
Thissetshowlongittakesthehorntocometorest
aftertheModeSwitchhaschangedfromRotateto
Stop.
889
Effect Guide
ROTOR
TherotorcarriesthelowfrequenciesoftheRotary
Speaker.Itsparametersareidenticaltothoseofthe
Horn,above.
Fast Speed [0100]

Slow Speed [0100]
Acceleration [0100]
Deceleration [0100]
Start Acceleration [0100]
Stop Deceleration [0100]
Balance and Tone

Setsthevolumebalancebetweenthehighfrequency
hornandlowfrequencyrotor.
Speaker Simulator [Check-box]

Switchesspeakersimulationon/off.
Match CX-3 Tone [Off, Amp 1, Amp 2]

WhenusingthiseffectonaCX3Program,thissetting
willadjustthetoneappropriatelyfortheCX3sAmp
Type.IfAmpType=Type1or2,usethecorresponding
Amp1or2setting.IfAmpType=PreAmp,turnthis
parameterOff.
IfyourelayeringtwoCX3stogether,youmaywishto
use133:RotarySpeakerasanIFX(inserteffect)for
bothProgramstogether,insteadofusingtheRotary
SpeakerswithintheindividualPrograms.Usethis
parametertoadjustthetoneinsuchcases.
MIC
Thesesettingsmodeltwopairsofstereomicrophones
recordingtherotaryspeakeronepaireachforthe
hornandrotor.Intherealworld,thiswouldrequirean
elaboratesetup,orevensplittingtherotaryspeaker
intotwobutitsrelativelyeasyinthesoftwareworld
oftheOASYS,anditgivesyouseparatecontrolover
thetoneandstereospreadofthehighandlow
frequencies.
Theotherrotaryspeakereffectshaveonlyonepairof
mics,butareotherwisesimilar;formoreinformation,
seeMIConpage 887.
Horn Distance [0100]

Horn Spread [0100]
Rotor Distance [0100]
Rotor Spread [0100]
OUTPUT
890
Delay 077: L/C/R Delay
Delay
077: L/C/R Delay

ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstothe Level [050]
left,right,andcenterrespectively.Youcanalsoadjust SetstheoutputleveloftheRightDelay.
thestereowidthofthedelays.
Feedback (C Delay) [+/100]
Left
SetsthefeedbackamountoftheCenterDelay
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod L Delay

Level
Source [OffTempo]
+ High Damp Low Damp
C Delay Spread SelectsthemodulationsourceoftheCenterDelay
Level
Feedback
feedbackamount.
Input Level D-mod R Delay
Right
Level
Amount [+/100]
Wet / Dry
SetsthemodulationamountoftheCenterDelay
feedbackamount.
INPUT High Damp [%] [0100]
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Thiscontrolsalowpassfilterinthefeedbackloop,
whichdamps(reduces)highfrequencies.Higher
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.p.881.
settingsmeanmoredamping,resultinginincreasingly
Source [OffTempo] darkertimbresasthefeedbackcontinues.
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel.p.881. Low Damp [%] [0100]
Thiscontrolsahighpassfilterinthefeedbackloop,
DELAY whichdamps(reduces)lowfrequencies.Higher
settingsmeanmoredamping,resultinginincreasingly
L Delay Time [msec] [02730] highpassed,lightertimbresasthefeedbackcontinues.
SetsthedelaytimeoftheLeftDelay.
Spread [050]
Level [050] Thiscontrolsthestereowidthoftheeffect.Thestereo
SetstheoutputleveloftheLeftDelay. imageiswidestwithavalueof50,andnarrowsto
monowithavalueof0.
C Delay Time [msec] [02730]
SetsthedelaytimeoftheCenterDelay. OUTPUT
Level [050] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
SetstheoutputleveloftheCenterDelay. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
R Delay Time [msec] [02730]
SetsthedelaytimeoftheRightDelay.
078: L/C/R Long Delay

ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstoleft, Source [OffTempo]
rightandcenterrespectively.Youcansetamaximum Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel.p.881.
of5,460msecforthedelaytime.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In -Stereo Out DELAY

Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod

L Delay L Delay Time [msec] [05460]
Level
+ C Delay Spread
SetsthedelaytimeoftheLeftDelay.
High Damp Low Damp
Level
R Delay
Feedback
Level [050]
Input Level D-mod
Level
Right SetstheoutputleveloftheLeftDelay.
Wet / Dry
C Delay Time [msec] [05460]

SetsthedelaytimeoftheCenterDelay.
INPUT
Level [050]
SetstheoutputleveloftheCenterDelay.
891
Effect Guide
R Delay Time [msec] [05460] High Damp [%] [0100]

SetsthedelaytimeoftheRightDelay. Thiscontrolsthehighfrequencydampinginthe
feedbackloop.SeeHighDamp[%]onpage 891.
Level [050]
SetstheoutputleveloftheRightDelay. Low Damp [%] [0100]
Thiscontrolsthelowfrequencydampinginthe
Feedback (C Delay) [+/100] feedbackloop.SeeLowDamp[%]onpage 891.
SetsthefeedbackamountoftheCenterDelay.
Spread [050]
Source [OffTempo] Thiscontrolsthestereowidthoftheeffect.Thestereo
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheCenterDelay imageiswidestwithavalueof50,andnarrowsto
feedback. monowithavalueof0.
Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountoftheCenterDelay OUTPUT
feedback. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
079: Stereo/Cross Delay

Thisisastereodelaywithadjustablefeedbackrouting, L Amount [+/100]
highandlowdamping,modulatablefeedbackand Setsthemodulationamountoftheleftchannel
inputlevel,andupto1,360msecofdelaytime. feedback.
Stereo In - Stereo Out R Amount [+/100]

Left
High Damp Low Damp
Wet / Dry
Setsthemodulationamountoftherightchannel
Input Level D-mod
Delay feedback.
Stereo/Cross Feedback Spread
Input Level D-mod High Damp Low Damp

Delay
Stereo/Cross Thiscontrolsthehighfrequencydampinginthe
Right
Wet / Dry
Low Damp [%] [0100]

INPUT feedbackloop.SeeLowDamp[%]onpage 891.
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Spread [50+50]
Thiscontrolsthestereowidthoftheeffect.Thestereo
Source [OffTempo] imageiswidestwithavalueof50,andnarrowsto
monowithavalueof0.
OUTPUT
DELAY
Stereo/Cross [Stereo, Cross] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Switchesbetweenstereodelayandcrossfeedback information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
delay.

R Delay Time [msec] [0.01360.0]

Setsthedelaytimefortherightchannel.
L Feedback [+/100]
Setsthefeedbackamountfortheleftchannel.
R Feedback [+/100]
Setsthefeedbackamountfortherightchannel.
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourceoffeedbackamount.
892
Delay 080: Stereo/Cross Long Delay
080: Stereo/Cross Long Delay

Thisisastereodelaywithadjustablefeedbackrouting, R Delay Time [msec] [0.0] 2730.0
highandlowdamping,modulatablefeedbackand Setsthedelaytimefortherightchannel.
inputlevel,andupto2,730msecofdelaytime.
L Feedback [+/100]
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod

Delay R Feedback [+/100]
Stereo/Cross Feedback Stereo/Cross Spread Setsthefeedbackamountfortherightchannel.
Delay Source [OffTempo]
Right
Wet / Dry
L Amount [+/100]
INPUT Setsthemodulationamountoftheleftchannel
feedback.
R Amount [+/100]
Setsthemodulationamountfortheinputlevel.For
Setsthemodulationamountoftherightchannel
moreinformation,seeInputLevelDmod[%]on
feedback.
page 881.
Source [OffTempo]
Thiscontrolsthehighfrequencydampinginthe
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel.For
moreinformation,seeSourceonpage 881.
Low Damp [%] [0100]
DELAY Thiscontrolsthelowfrequencydampinginthe
feedbackloop.SeeLowDamp[%]onpage 891.
Stereo/Cross [Stereo, Cross]
Thischangesthefeedbackrouting.
Spread [50+50]
Stereomeansthattheleftandrightchannelsfeedback
imageiswidestwithavalueof50,andnarrowsto
intothemselves,preservingthestereoimage.
monowithavalueof0.
Crossmakestheleftchannelfeedsbackintotheright,
andviceversa.
OUTPUT
L Delay Time [msec] [0.0] 2730.0
Setsthedelaytimefortheleftchannel. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
081: Stereo Multitap Delay

TheleftandrightMultitapDelayshavetwotaps Source [OffTempo]
respectively.Changingtheroutingoffeedbackandtap Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel.p.881.
outputallowsyoutocreatevariouspatternsof
complexeffectsounds.
DELAY
Left
Wet / Dry
Mode [Normal, Cross Feedback,
Feedback
Cross Pan1, Cross Pan2]
Delay
(2)
Input Level D-mod High Damp Low Damp (1)
Mode Tap1 Level Mode Spread Tap1=(1) Thisletsyoualterthestereoimagebyswitchingthe
Tap2=(2)
(2) inputsandfeedbackpathsoftheleftandrightdelays,
Delay
asshowninthefigurebelow.Inorderforthistobe
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
effective,theinputneedstobeatruestereosignal.
INPUT
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel. p.881.
893
Effect Guide
Tap1 Level [0100]

Mode: Normal Mode: Cross Feedback
ThisletsyouadjusttherelativevolumeofTap1,
comparedtoTap2(whichisalwaysatthemaximum
volume).SettingalowervolumeforTap1canhelpto
createinterestingaccentpatterns.
Mode: Cross Pan1 Mode: Cross Pan2

Thiscontrolsthehighfrequencydampinginthe
Tap1 Time [msec] [0.01360.0] Low Damp [%] [0100]

SetstheTap1delaytime. Thiscontrolsthelowfrequencydampinginthe
Tap2 Time [msec] [0.01360.0]
SetstheTap2delaytime. Spread [+/100]
Feedback (Tap2) [+/100] imageiswidestwithavalueof50,andnarrowsto
SetstheTap2feedbackamount. monowithavalueof0.
Source [OffTempo] Source [OffTempo]

SelectsthemodulationsourceoftheTap2feedback SelectsthemodulationsourceforSpread.
amount.
Amount [+/100]
Amount [+/100] SetsthemodulationamountforSpread.
SetsthemodulationamountoftheTap2feedback
amount.
OUTPUT
082: Stereo Modulation Delay

ThisstereodelayusesanLFOtosweepthedelaytime.
Thepitchalsovaries,creatingadelaysoundwhich LFO
swellsandshimmers.Youcanalsocontrolthedelay
timeusingamodulationsource.
Left
Wet / Dry
Shape [-100+100]
Delay ChangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform.p.840.
Feedback
L LFO Phase [degrees] [180+180]
Delay SetsthephaseobtainedwhentheleftLFOisreset.
Right
p.895.
Wet / Dry
D-mod Response L/R: +/+ +/

D-mod
R LFO Phase [degrees] [180+180]
LFO Sync LFO: Tri / Sine LFO Shape
LFO SetsthephaseobtainedwhentherightLFOisreset.
LFO Phase Modulation Mode
p.895.
Dmod Sync [Check-box]

CONTROL SwitchesLFOresetoff/on.p.895.
Modulation Mode [LFO, Dmod] Source [OffTempo]
SwitchesbetweenLFOmodulationcontroland SelectsthemodulationsourcethatresetstheLFO.
modulationsourcecontrol.
Dmod Modulation [L/R:+/+, L/R:+/]
ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.
ReversedL/Rcontrolbymodulationsource.p.895.
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrolsdelaytime.
Response [030]
Setstherateofresponsetothemodulationsource.
894
Delay 083: Stereo Dynamic Delay
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box] L Feedback [+/100]

Setsthefeedbackamountofleftdelay.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Base Note [r w ] R Feedback [+/100]
Setsthefeedbackamountofrightdelay.
Times [x1x32]
OUTPUT
moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual CONTROL: Dmod Modulation
LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore Whenthemodulationsourceisusedforcontrol,this
information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837. parameterreversestheleftandrightmodulation
direction.
WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets LFO: L LFO Phase [degrees], R LFO Phase [degrees],
youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO. Dmod Sync, and Source
IfDmodSyncisOn,theLFOwillberesetbythe
modulationsourcethatisreceived.
MOD DELAY
TheSourceparametersetsthemodulationsourcethat
L Delay Time [msec] [0.01000.0] resetstheLFO.Forexample,youcanassignGateasa
modulationsourcesothatthesweepalwaysstarts
fromthespecifiedpoint.
R Delay Time [msec] [0.01000.0] LLFOPhaseandRLFOPhasesetthephaseobtained
Setsthedelaytimefortherightchannel. whentheleftandrightLFOsarereset.Inthisway,you
cancreatechangesinpitchsweepfortheleftandright
L Depth [0200] channelsindividually.
SetsthedepthoftheleftLFOmodulation. Theeffectisoffwhenavalueofthemodulation
sourcespecifiedintheSourceparameteris63or
R Depth [0200]
smaller,andtheeffectisonwhenthevalueis64or
SetsthedepthoftherightLFOmodulation. higher.TheLFOistriggeredandresettotheLLFO
PhaseandRLFOPhasesettingswhenthevalue
changesfrom63orsmallerto64orhigher.
083: Stereo Dynamic Delay

Thisstereodelayusestheinputsignalleveltocontrol
eitherthewet/drymixorthefeedbacklevel.Youcan CONTROL
usethistocreate:
Target [None, Output Level, Feedback]
Duckeddelays,inwhichthedelaysgetsofterwhen
Thisselectsthemodulationtargetfortheinputsignal.
theinputisloud(thedelaysducktogetoutof
theway). OutputLevelmodulatestheWet/Drymix.
Gateddelays,inwhichthedelaysarelouderwhen FeedbackmodulatestheFeedbackamount.
theinputisloud.Forinstance,youcancreatea
Polarity [+, ]
thick,layeredleadsoundusingdelays,andthen
makethelevelorfeedbackofthedelaysreduce +(positive):Themodulationappliesonlywhenthe
automaticallywhenyoustopplaying. inputsignalisbelowtheThreshold.Usethistolower
theeffectlevelwhentheinputsignalisquiet.
Left
(negative):Themodulationappliesonlywhenthe
High Damp Low Damp
Wet / Dry
inputsignalisabovetheThreshold.Usethistolower
Delay theeffectlevelwhentheinputsignalisloud(for
Feedback Spread ducking).
High Damp Low Damp
Delay Offset [0100]
Right
FB Out Wet / Dry
ThiscontrolstheamountofmodulationfortheTarget
+ Envelope Attack, Release Control Target
parameter(eitherOutputLevelorFeedback),asa
Threshold
percentageoftheparametersvalue.
Threshold [0100]
Thissetstheinputsignallevelatwhichtheduckingor
gatingoccurs,accordingtothePolaritysetting.
895
Effect Guide
Attack [1100]
DELAY
Thiscontrolshowfastthegatingorduckingstartsafter
theThresholdiscrossed. L Delay Time [msec] [0.01360.0]
Release [1100] Setsthedelaytimefortheleftchannel.
Thiscontrolshowfastthegatingorduckingstops, R Delay Time [msec] [0.01360.0]
aftertheThresholdiscrossedintheoppositedirection.
Setsthedelaytimefortherightchannel.
Level
Dynamic Delay Feedback [+/100]
Dry
Threshold
Release Thiscontrolsthehighfrequencydampinginthe
Envelope
Attack feedbackloop.SeeHighDamp[%]onpage 891.
Low Damp [%] [0100]

Wet (Ducking Delay)
Target=Output Level
Polarity= () feedbackloop.SeeLowDamp[%]onpage 891.
Delay Time
Wet Spread [+/100]

Target=Output Level Setsthewidthofthestereoimageoftheeffectsound.
Polarity= (+)
Time
p.891.
OUTPUT
084: Stereo Auto Panning Delay

Thisstereodelayeffectpansthedelaysoundleftand Low Damp [%] [0100]
rightusingtheLFO. Thiscontrolsthelowfrequencydampinginthe
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Delay Pan LFO
Feedback Depth
Delay Pan
High Damp Low Damp
Right
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Shape [+/100]
LFO: Tri / Sin LFO Shape
ChangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform.See
Shapeonpage 840.
DELAY Phase [degrees] [180+180]

L Delay Time [msec] [0.01360.0] right.SeePhase[degrees]onpage 875.
R Delay Time [msec] [0.01360.0] ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen
Setsthedelaytimefortherightchannel. MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
L Feedback [+/100] MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]

Setsthefeedbackamountfortheleftchannel. BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
R Feedback [+/100] Base Note [r w ]
Times [x1x32]
High Damp [%] [0100] WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
Thiscontrolsthehighfrequencydampinginthe BPM,BaseNote,andTimes,insteadofFrequency.For
feedbackloop.SeeHighDamp[%]onpage 891. moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
page 837.
896
Delay 085: Tape Echo
Type [Individual, Common1, Common2] Source [OffTempo]

Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual Selectsthemodulationsourceforthepanningwidth.
information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837. Amount [+/100]
Setthemodulationamountofthepanningwidth.
youoffsetthephasefromthemasterLFO. OUTPUT
AUTO PAN
Depth [0100]
Setsthepanningwidth.
085: Tape Echo

Thiseffectmodelsatapeechounitwiththreeplayback Source [OffTempo]
heads,includingthedistortionandtonalchanges Selectsthemodulationsourceforthedelaytime.
typicalofmagnetictape.
Amount [2700] +2700
Left
Setsthemodulationamountforthedelaytime.
Wet / Dry
Feedback (3) Tap2 Position [%] [0100]

(2)
(1)
SetsthedelaytimeofTap2,asapercentageofTap1s
Feedback Amt Level Pan
Tape Delay
delaytime.
+ Saturation
Trim Pre Tone High / Low Damp
Wow/Flutter
Tap2/3
Position
Tap3 Position [%] [0100]
Right
D -mod
Delay Time
Wet / Dry SetsthedelaytimeofTap3,asapercentageofTap1s
delaytime.
INPUT Level and Pan 13

Eachtaphasitsowncontrolsforlevelandpan.
Trim [0100]
Setstheinputgain. Tap13 Level [0100]
Setsthetapsoutputlevel.
Pre Tone [0100]
Thismodelsthereducedhighfrequenciesofananalog Pan [L, 199, R]
tapedelay,beforethesaturationstage.Lowersettings Setsthetapsstereoposition.
createadarkertone.
Feedback
WOW & FLUTTER Tap13 Feedback Amount [+/100]
Thissectionmodelstheinstabilityofthetape Setstheindividualtapsfeedbacklevel.Negative
machinesmotors.Asthespeedofthemotorfluctuates, valuesinvertthephase.Theseindividuallevelsare
thepitchchangesslightly.Thisintroducesapleasant summedtogether,andthenthefinalleveliscontrolled
choruslikeeffect. byFeedbackLevel,below.
Frequency [Hz] [0.021.00] Feedback Level [0100]

Setsthefrequencyatwhichpitchvariationoccurs. Setstheoverallleveloffeedback.
Depth [0100] Source [OffTempo]

Setsthedepthofthepitchchange. SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheFeedbackLevel.
Amount [+/100]
TAPE ECHO SetsthemodulationamountfortheFeedbackLevel.
Delay Time Tone

Delay Time(Tap1) [msec] [02700] High Damp [%] [0100]
ThisparametersetsthedelaytimeofTap1. Thiscutsthehighfrequenciesinboththemainoutput
Also,Taps2and3arespecifiedasapercentage(%)of andthefeedback.Highersettingscreateadarkertone.
thisdelaytime.Taps2and3alwaysstayinproportion
toTap1,evenwhenthedelaytimeismodulated.
897
Effect Guide
Low Damp [%] [0100]

OUTPUT
Thiscutsthelowfrequenciesinboththemainoutput
andthefeedback.Highersettingsmeanlesslowend. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Saturation [0100] information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Thismodelsthedistortionofananalogtapedelay.
086: Multiband Mod. Delay

Thiseffectdividestheinputsignalintolow,mid,and Feedback Src (Source) [Band1, Band2, Band3,
highfrequencybands,andappliesamodulationdelay Band4]
toeachband.
Selectsthefeedbacksourceforband1.Thisletsyou
connectthefeedbackofeachbandtootherbands.
Left
Feedback Feedback Source Wet / Dry Time [msec] [0.01200.0]
Input Source
Level Pan
Delay
High Damp Low Damp
Setsthedelaytimefortheband1.
LFO Feedback Source
4-way Crossover
Delay Pan [L, 199, R]

LFO Feedback Source
+ Setsthepanningforband1.
Delay
LFO Feedback Source
Feedback [+/100]
Delay
LFO Setsthefeedbackamountforband1.
Right
Wet / Dry
Amt (Feedback Amount) [+/100]
Setstheamountofmodulationfortheband1feedback.
Dmod Low Damp [%] [0100]

Setstheamountoflowfrequencyattenuationforband
Input Level [%] [+/100]
1.
Src (Source) [OffTempo]
Setstheamountofhighfrequencyattenuationfor
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel.p.881. band1.
Feedback Src (Source) [OffTempo] Output Level [0100]
Selectsthemodulationsourceoffeedbackamount. Setstheoutputlevelforband1.
Output Level Src (Source) [OffTempo] Amt (Output Level Amount) [+/100]
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputlevel. Setstheamountofmodulationforband1soutput
level.
XOVER FILTER
ForadescriptionoftheonscreenCrossoverFilter BAND2 DELAY
graphic,see004:St.MultibandCompressoron Band2hasthesameparametersastheBAND1
page 824. DELAY,above.
1-2 [Hz] [2020.00k]
Setsthefrequencyatwhichbands1and2aredivided. BAND3 DELAY
2-3 [Hz] [2020.00k] Band3hasthesameparametersastheBAND1
DELAY,above.
Setsthefrequencyatwhichbands2and3aredivided.
3-4 [Hz] [2020.00k] BAND4 DELAY

Setsthefrequencyatwhichbands3and4aredivided.
Band4hasthesameparametersastheBAND1
DELAY,above.
BAND1 DELAY
Input [Xover, Direct] BAND1 LFO
Selectstheinputforband1:eitherthesignalfromthe Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
crossover,orthedirectsignal.
SetstheLFOspeedforband1.
Depth [0187]
SetstheLFOmodulationdepthforband1.
898
Delay 087: Reverse Delay
Type [Indiv., Cmn1, Cmn2]

BAND3 LFO
SelectsLFO,CommonFXLFO1,orCommonLFO2for
band1.p.837. Band3sLFOhasthesameparametersastheBAND1
LFO,above.
Cmn LFO [deg] (Common LFO Phase Offset
[degrees]) [180+180]
BAND4 LFO
SetsthephaseoffsetwhenType=Common1or
Common2.p.837. Band4sLFOhasthesameparametersastheBAND1
LFO,above.
BAND2 LFO
OUTPUT
Band2sLFOhasthesameparametersastheBAND1
LFO,above. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
087: Reverse Delay

Thisisadelaythatplaysbacktheinputsignalin Feedback Mode [Reverse, Reverse/Forward]
reverse.Youcanalsocontinuefeedbackwhile Reverse:thefeedbackplaysinreverse.
alternatingplayingthesignalinreverseandforward
directions. Reverse/Forward:thefeedbackalternatesbetween
playingbackwardsandforwards,asshownbelow.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out Feedback Mode
Left
Feedback Mode Wet / Dry
Feedback Input
Feedback
+ Reverse Delay
Trim Sync High Damp
Feedback Mode: Revese
Level
wet
Right
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Trigger
Feedback Mode: Revese/Forward
wet
INPUT
Time
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel. Feedback [+/100]
Source [OffTempo] Setsthefeedbackamount.
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel. Source [OffTempo]

REVERSE DELAY Amount [+/100]
Reverse Time [msec] [0900] Setsthefeedbackamount.
Setsthelengthofreverseplayback(=delaytime). High Damp [%] [0100]
p.900.
Level [0100]
Sync Source [OffTempo]
Setstheoutputlevelofthereverseplayback.
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillresetthepoint
L Post-Delay Time [msec] [0900] atwhichthesoundiscapturedforreverseplayback.
SetsthedelaytimeoftheLeftTap. p.900.
Level [0100]
OUTPUT
SetstheoutputleveloftheLeftTap.
R Post-Delay Time [msec] [0900] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
SetsthedelaytimeoftheRightTap. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Level [0100]
SetstheoutputleveloftheRightTap.
899
Effect Guide
REVERSE DELAY: Reverse Time and Sync Source IfyousetSyncSourcetoGate1,thedelaywillbereset

Thesoundwillbeplayedinreversefortheduration ateachnoteon.Thismeansthatyouwillalwayshear
specifiedbyReverseTime.Youcanresetthedividing thereverseplaybackofthesoundthatoccursbetween
pointforreverseplaybackbyspecifyingamodulation thenoteonandthespecifiedReverseTime.
sourceforSyncSource. IfyoudontspecifyaSyncSource,thelocationat
Reverse Time/Sync whichreverseplaybackstartswillbeindeterminate.
Reverse Time Sync Note:resettingthedelay(usingSyncSource)while
reverseplaybackisstillbeingheardmaycausenoise
Input artifacts.
Fordrumsorshortphrases,youllneedtoadjust
ReverseTimeappropriatelyinordertousethis
effectively.
wet
Reverse Time reset

Time
088: Hold Delay

Source [OffTempo]
Left
Wet / Dry ThisselectsamodulationsourceforReset.Modulation
valuesof64orhigherwillstarttheReset;valuesof63
+ Delay
orlowerhavenoeffect.Youdonthavetoholdthe
Pan modulationfortheentiredurationoftheloop,butdo
Loop Time: Auto/ ...5400ms makesuretoholditforabouthalfasecond,toensure
Right thattheloopiscompletelycleared.
Wet / Dry
D -mod
REC Control Tempo Manual Reset Control [Check-box]
BPM
Base Note x Times
D-mod RST Control BPM
Thischeckboxmanuallyresetstheloop.
Thiseffectrecordstheinputsignalandplaysitbackas
aloop,withoverdubrecordingforcreatingmultiple HOLD DELAY
layers.Youcanusemodulationsourcestorecordand
cleartheloop,forsimplerealtimeperformance.The Loop Time [msec] [Auto, 15400]
delaycansynctothesystemtempo,andislong ThisappliesonlywhenMIDI/TempoSyncisoff.
enoughfor2measuresof4/4at90bpm.
WithAuto,thelooptimeisautomaticallysettothe
lengthoftherecordedphrase,uptoamaximumof
REC CONTROL 5,400msec.
YoucanstartrecordingbyusingaDmodsource,orby 15400setsaspecifictimeinmilliseconds.
manuallypressingtheonscreenManualRecControl
checkbox.Recordingalwaysoverdubswiththe
existingloop;tocleartheloop,useRESET Thisspecifieswhetherdelaytimeissetinmilliseconds,
CONTROL,below. orasanotevaluerelativetotempo.
Source [OffTempo] BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]

Thisselectsamodulationsourcetoenableanddisable MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo
recording.Modulationvaluesof64orhigherturn manuallyforthisindividualeffect.
recordingon;valuesof63orlowerturnitoff.
Time Over? > [---, OVER!]
Manual Rec Control [Check-box] Themaximumdelaytimeis5,400msec.Ifthe
Thischeckboxletsyouturnonrecordingmanually, combinationofBPM,BaseNote,andTimesexceeds
withoutusingacontroller.Justchecktheboxtostart thislimit,theerrormessageOVER!willappear.If
recording,anduncheckittostop. thisoccurs,changethedelaytimeparameterssothat
thismessagenolongerappears.
RESET CONTROL Base Note [r w ]

Resettingerasestheaudiofromtheloop,makingit Thissetsthebasiclengthoftheloop,relativetothe
silentandlettingyoustartagainfromscratch.Aswith BPMsetting.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoa
recording,youcanresetusingaDmodsourceoranon wholenote,includingtriplets.
screencheckbox.
IftheLoopTimeissettoAuto,itwillberesetaswell.
900
Delay 089: Auto Reverse
Times [x1x32] ResetSource:JSY:CC#02

ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For ManualRecControl:Off
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoawholenote,and ManualResetControl:Off
Timesissetto32theloopwilllastfortwomeasures.
LoopTime[msec]:Auto
Pan [L100L1, C, R1R100] MIDI/TempoSync:Off
Setsthestereopositionoftheeffectoutput.
2. Pushthemainjoystick(nottheVectorJoystick)in
Source [OffTempo] the+Ydirection(awayfromyou).
SelectsthemodulationsourceforPan. Thisstartstherecording.
3. Playaphrase.
Amount [+/100]
4. Releasethejoysticktoitsoriginalposition.
SetsthemodulationamountforPan.
Thisstopstherecording.Thephrasewillnowstartto
loop.SinceLoopTimeissettoAuto,theloops
OUTPUT durationwillmatchthatoftherecording.
Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with 5. Pushthemainjoystickinthe+Ydirectionagain.
modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore 6. Playanotherphrase,overtheloop.
information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820. 7. Releasethejoysticktoitsoriginalposition.
Now,youshouldhearwhatyoujustplayedlayered
Using the Hold Delay overthefirstloop.Youcanoverdubasmanypassesas
youlike.
RecordinglayeredloopswiththeHoldDelayiseasy.
Todoso: Tocleartheloopandstartover:
1. OntheIFXInsertFXpage,selecttheHoldDelay 8. PullthejoystickintheYdirection(towardsyou).
effect.
Hold Delay is mono
Thisisaneasywaytogettothedefaulteffectssettings,
whichwellbeusing: TheHoldDelayusesasingle,long,monodelayline
(althoughyoucancontrolthepanofthedelay).For
RECSource:JS+Y:CC#01 bestresultswithstereoeffects,suchaschorusand
reverb,usethestereoeffectsaftertheHoldDelay.
089: Auto Reverse

Thiseffectrecordstheinputsignalandautomatically Source [OffTempo]
playsitinreverse(theeffectissimilartoatapereverse Selectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrolsrecording
sound). whenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out Threshold [0100]
Left
Wet / Dry
SetstherecordingstartlevelwhenEnvelopeSelectis
Direct
settoInput.
+ Auto Reverse Mix
Rec/Reverse Play
Control Response [0100]
Right
Wet / Dry
Thissetsthespeedoftheresponsetotheendof
D-mod
D-mod
Input
Envelope Control recording.Setasmallervaluewhenyouarerecording
Envelope Select aphraseorrhythmpattern,andsetahighervalueif
youarerecordingonlyonenote.
CONTROL REVERSE
Envelope Select [Dmod, Input]
Mode [Single, Multi]
Thisselectswhetherthestartandendofrecordingis
WhenModeissettoSingle,youcansetupto
controlledviathemodulationsourceortheinput
2,640msecforReverseTime.Ifrecordingstartsduring
signallevel.Afterrecordingiscompleted,thereverse
thereverseplayback,theplaybackwillbeinterrupted.
playbackstartsimmediately.
WhenModeissettoMulti,youcanmakeanother
Dmod:theinputsignalwillberecordedonlywhenthe
recordingduringthereverseplayback.However,the
valueofthespecifiedmodulationSourceis64or
maximumReverseTimeislimitedto1,320msec.
higher.
Ifyouwishtousethiswithlongerphrasesorrhythm
Input:theinputsignalwillberecordedonlywhenits
patterns,setModetoSingle.Ifyoudontneedalong
levelexceedstheThresholdlevel.
playbacktime,andwantplaybackandrecordto
overlap,setModetoMulti.
901
Effect Guide
Mode/Reverse Time Reverse Time [msec] [202640]

Rec Reverse Rec Reverse Envelope Select = Input
Thisspecifiesthemaximumtimeofthereverse
playback.Forshort,singlenoteslapbackeffects,set
Input
theReverseTimetoalowvalue.
Time
Direct Mix [Always On, Always Off, Cross Fade]
Mode = Single Selectshowthedrysoundismixed.Formore
information,seeDirectMixonpage 874.
Mode = Multi
OUTPUT
Reverse Time Reverse Time
090: Sequence BPM Delay

Thisfourtapdelayenablesyoutoselectatempoand Feedback [+/100]
rhythmpatterntosetupeachtap. Setsthefeedbackamount
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In -Stereo Out Source [OffTempo]
Left
Wet / Dry
Pan Selectsthemodulationsourceoffeedbackamount.
Input Level D-mod
Amount [+/100]
+ Delay Setsthefeedbackamount.
High Damp Low Damp
Feedback High Damp [%] [0100]

Input Level D-mod
Right
Setsthedampingamountinthehighrange.p.891.
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Low Damp [%] [0100]
Rythm Pattern Setsthedampingamountinthelowrange.p.891.
OUTPUT
INPUT
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Source [OffTempo] DELAY: BPM and Rhythm Pattern

Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel.p.881. WiththetempospecifiedbytheBPMparameter(or
theMIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI),the
lengthofonebeatequalsthefeedbackdelaytime,and
DELAY theintervalbetweentapsbecomesequal.Selectinga
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00] rhythmpatternwillautomaticallyturnthetapoutputs
onandoff.
WhenBPMissettoMIDI,theminimumtempois
44BPM.
Rhythm Pattern [xeee3]

Selectsarhythmpattern.p.902.
Tap1 Pan [L, 199, R]

SetsthepanningofTap1.



902
Delay 091: L/C/R BPM Delay
091: L/C/R BPM Delay

TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytime Level [050]
withthesongtempo.Youcanalsosynchronizethe SetstheoutputleveloftheCenterDelay.
delaytimewiththearpeggiatororsequencer.Ifyou
programthetempobeforeperformance,youcan R Delay Base Note [r w ]
achieveadelayeffectthatsynchronizeswiththesong This sets the basic length of the Right Delay, relative
inrealtime.Delaytimeissetbynotes. to the BPM setting.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In -Stereo Out Times [x1x32]
Left
Wet / Dry ThismultipliesthelengthoftheRightDelaysBase
Input Level D-mod L Delay
Level
Note.
+ High Damp Low Damp C Delay
Level
Spread
Level [050]
Feedback
Level
SetstheoutputleveloftheRightDelay.
Right
Tempo
Wet / Dry
BPM
Base Note x Times
SetstheamountoffeedbackfromtheCenterDelay.
Base Note x Times
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheCenterDelay
INPUT feedback.
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Amount [+/100]

Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.p.881. SetsthemodulationamountoftheCenterDelay
feedback.
Source [OffTempo]
DELAY Low Damp [%] [0100]

Setsthedampingamountinthelowrange.p.891.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo Spread [050]
manuallyforthisindividualeffect. Setsthewidthofthestereoimageoftheeffectsound.
p.891.
Time Over?>. [---, OVER!]
Themaximumdelaytimeis2,730msec.Ifthe
combinationofBPM,BaseNote,andTimesexceeds OUTPUT
thislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
display.Ifthisoccurs,changethedelaytime modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
parameterssothatthismessagenolongerappears. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
L Delay Base Note [r w ]
ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheLeftDelay,relativeto
theBPMsetting.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnoteto
awholenote,includingtriplets.
Times [x1x32]
Timesissetto3,thedelaylengthwillbeadotted
eighthnote.
Level [050]
SetstheoutputleveloftheLeftDelay.
C Delay Base Note [r w ]

ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheCenterDelay,relative
totheBPMsetting.
Times [x1x32]
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheCenterDelaysBase
Note.
903
Effect Guide
092: L/C/R BPM Long Delay

TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytime R Delay Base Note [r w ]
withthesongtempo.Youcansetthedelaytimeupto ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheRightDelay,relativeto
5,460msec theBPMsetting.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In -Stereo Out Times [x1x32]
Left
Wet / Dry
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheRightDelaysBase
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
Level Note.
+ High Damp Low Damp C Delay Spread
Level
Feedback
Level [050]
Level SetstheoutputleveloftheRightDelay.
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times SetsthefeedbackamountoftheCenterDelay.
Base Note x Times
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsasourcetomodulatetheCenterDelay
INPUT feedback.
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Amount [+/100]
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.p.881. SetstheCenterDelayfeedbackmodulationamount.
Source [OffTempo] High Damp [%] [0100]
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel.p.881. Setsthedampingamountinthehighrange.p.891.
Low Damp [%] [0100]

DELAY
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Spread [050]
manuallyforthisindividualeffect.
p.891.
Time Over?> [---, OVER!]
Themaximumdelaytimeis5,460msec.Ifthe OUTPUT
thislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
display.Ifthisoccurs,changethedelaytime modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
parameterssothatthismessagenolongerappears. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.

Times [x1x32]
eighthnote.
Level [050]
SetstheoutputleveloftheLeftTap.
C Delay Base Note [r w ]

ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheCenterDelay,relative
totheBPMsetting.
Times [x1x32]
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheCenterDelaysBase
Note.
Level [050]
SetstheoutputleveloftheCenterDelay.
904
Delay 093: Stereo BPM Delay
093: Stereo BPM Delay

Thisstereodelayenablesyoutosetthedelaytimeto Adjust [%] [2.50+2.50]
matchthesongtempo.Fineadjustmentletsyou Fineadjusttherightchanneldelaytime.
changetherhythmicfeelofthedelays.
L Feedback [+/100]
Left Setsthefeedbackamountfortheleftchannel.
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod

Feedback Setsthefeedbackamountfortherightchannel.
Delay
Source [OffTempo]
Right
Wet / Dry Selectsthemodulationsourceoffeedbackamount.
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Adjust [%]
L Amount [+/100]
Setsthemodulationamountoftheleftchannel
feedback.
INPUT
R Amount [+/100]
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Setsthemodulationamountoftherightchannel
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.p.881. feedback.

Low Damp [%] [0100]

DELAY Setsthedampingamountinthelowrange.p.891.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo OUTPUT
manuallyforthisindividualeffect. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Time Over? L > [---, OVER!]
Time Over? R > [---, OVER!]
Themaximumdelaytimeis1,360msecperchannel
(leftandright).IfthechannelscombinationofBPM,
BaseNote,andTimesexceedsthislimit,theerror
messageOVER!willappear.Ifthisoccurs,change
thedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessageno
longerappears.

Times [x1x32]
eighthnote.
Adjust [%] [2.50+2.50]

Thisadjuststheleftchanneldelaytimebyupto2.5%
ineitherdirection,forsubtlecontroloverthefeelofthe
delay.
R Delay Base Note [r w ]

ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheRightDelay,relativeto
theBPMsetting.
Times [x1x32]
Note.
905
Effect Guide
094: Stereo BPM Long Delay

Thestereodelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytime Adjust [%] [2.50+2.50]
withthesongtempo.Youcansetthedelaytimeupto Fineadjusttherightchanneldelaytime.
2,730msec.
L Feedback [+/100]
Left Setsthefeedbackamountfortheleftchannel.
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod

Feedback Setsthefeedbackamountfortherightchannel.
Delay
Source [OffTempo]
Right
Wet / Dry Selectsthemodulationsourceoffeedbackamount.
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Adjust [%]
L Amount [+/100]
Setsthemodulationamountoftheleftchannel
feedback.
INPUT
R Amount [+/100]
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Setsthemodulationamountoftherightchannel
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel.p.881. feedback.

Low Damp [%] [0100]

DELAY Setsthedampingamountinthelowrange.p.891.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo OUTPUT
manuallyforthisindividualeffect.p.883. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Time Over? L > [---, OVER!] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Time Over? R> [---, OVER!]
Themaximumdelaytimeis2,730msecperchannel
thedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessageno
longerappears.

Times [x1x32]
eighthnote.
Adjust [%] [2.50+2.50]

Thisadjuststheleftchanneldelaytimebyupto2.5%
ineitherdirection,forsubtlecontroloverthefeelofthe
delay.

theBPMsetting.
Times [x1x32]
Note.
906
Delay 095: Stereo BPM Multitap Delay
095: Stereo BPM Multitap Delay

Thisfourtapdelayenablesyoutoselectatempoand Source [OffTempo]
rhythmpatterntosetupeachtap. SelectsthemodulationsourceoftheTap2feedback
amount.
Left
Feedback
Wet / Dry Amount [+/100]
Delay
(2) SetsthemodulationamountoftheTap2feedback
Mode Tap1 Level Mode Spread Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
amount.
(2)
Delay
Tap1 Level [0100]
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry SetstheTap1outputlevel.p.894.
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
INPUT Low Damp [%] [0100]

Spread [+/100]
Source [OffTempo] p.891.
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourceoftheeffectsounds
DELAY stereoimagewidth.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00] Amount [+/100]
MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo Setsthemodulationamountoftheeffectsoundsstereo
manuallyforthisindividualeffect.p.883. imagewidth.
Time Over?> [---, OVER!]
Themaximumdelaytimeis1,360msec.Ifthe OUTPUT
combinationofBPM,BaseNote,andTimesexceeds Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
thislimit,theerrormessageOVER!willappear.If modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
thisoccurs,changethedelaytimeparameterssothat information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Mode [Normal, Cross Feedback,

Cross Pan1, Cross Pan2]
Switchestheleftandrightdelayrouting.p.893.
Tap 1 Base Note [r w ]

ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheTap1,relativetothe
BPMsetting.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoa
wholenote,includingtriplets.
Times [x1x32]
eighthnote.
Tap 2 Base Note [r w ]

ThissetsthebasiclengthofTap2,relativetotheBPM
setting.
Times [x1x32]
ThismultipliesthelengthofTap2sBaseNote.
Feedback (Tap2) [+/100]

907
Effect Guide
096: Stereo BPM Mod. Delay

Thisisastereomodulationdelaythatletsyou MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]
synchronizethedelaytimetothetempoofthesong.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Left
Base Note [r w ]
Wet / Dry
Delay Times [x1x32]

Feedback WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
Delay
Right
Wet / Dry page 837.
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
D -mod Response L/R: +/+ +/
D-mod Thiscontrolswhethertheeffectusesitsindividual
LFO Sync LFO: Tri / Sine LFO Shape
LFO
LFO Phase Modulation Mode information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.

CONTROL WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
Modulation Mode [LFO, Dmod]
SwitchesbetweenLFOmodulationcontroland MOD DELAY
modulationsourcecontrol.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
Dmod Modulation [L/R:+/+, L/R:+/]
ReversedL/Rcontrolbymodulationsource.p.895. manuallyforthisindividualeffect.p.883.
Source [OffTempo] Time Over? L > [---, OVER!]
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrolsdelaytime.
Time Over? R> [---, OVER!]
Response [030] Themaximumdelaytimeis1,000msecperchannel
Setstherateofresponsetothemodulationsource. (leftandright).IfthechannelscombinationofBPM,
LFO thedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessageno
Waveform [Triangle, Sine] longerappears.
SelectstheLFOWaveform. L Delay Base Note [r w ]

Shape [+/100] ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheLeftDelay,relativeto
ChangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform.p.840. awholenote,includingtriplets.
L LFO Phase [degrees] [180+180] Times [x1x32]
SetsthephaseobtainedwhentheleftLFOisreset. ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For
p.895. instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
R LFO Phase [degrees] [180+180] Timesissetto3,thedelaylengthwillbeadotted
eighthnote.
SetsthephaseobtainedwhentherightLFOisreset.
p.895. R Delay Base Note [r w ]
Dmod Sync [Check-box] ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheRightDelay,relativeto
theBPMsetting.
SwitchesLFOresetoff/on.p.895.
Times [x1x32]
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourcethatresetstheLFO. Note.
Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00] L Depth [0200]
ThissetstheLFOspeed,inHz.Itappliesonlywhen SetsthedepthoftheleftLFOmodulation.
R Depth [0200]
SetsthedepthoftherightLFOmodulation.
908
Delay 097: St. BPM Auto Panning Dly
L Feedback [+/100]
OUTPUT
Setsthefeedbackamountofleftdelay.
R Feedback [+/100] modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Setsthefeedbackamountofrightdelay. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
097: St. BPM Auto Panning Dly

Thisstereoautopanningdelayenablesyoutosetthe High Damp [%] [0100]
delaytimetomatchthesongtempo. Setsthedampingamountinthehighrange.p.891.
Left
Low Damp [%] [0100]
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp Setsthedampingamountinthelowrange.p.891.
Delay Pan
Feedback Depth
LFO
Delay Pan
Right
High Damp Low Damp
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times LFO Phase Shape [+/100]
LFO: Tri / Sin LFO Shape

DELAY
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00] right.p.875.
MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
Time Over? L > [---, OVER!] MIDI/TempoSync,below,isOff.
Time Over? R > [---, OVER!] MIDI/Tempo Sync [Check-box]

Themaximumdelaytimeis1,360msecperchannel BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
BaseNote,andTimesexceedsthislimit,theerror Base Note [r w ]
thedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessageno Times [x1x32]
longerappears. WhenMIDI/TempoSyncison,theLFOspeedissetby
L Delay Base Note [r w ] moreinformation,seeMIDI/TempoSyncon
ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheLeftDelay,relativeto page 837.
awholenote,includingtriplets. Type [Individual, Common1, Common2]
Times [x1x32] LFO,oroneoftheCommonFXLFOs.Formore
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For information,seeLFOTypeonpage 837.
Timesissetto3,thedelaylengthwillbeadotted Common LFO Phase Offset [degrees] [+/180]
eighthnote. WhenTypeissettoCommonFXLFO1or2,thislets
theBPMsetting. AUTO PAN
Times [x1x32] Depth [0100]
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheRightDelaysBase Setsthepanningwidth.
Note. Source [OffTempo]
L Feedback [+/100] Selectsthemodulationsourceforthepanningwidth.
Amount [+/100]
R Feedback [+/100] Setthemodulationamountofthepanningwidth.
909
Effect Guide
OUTPUT
098: Tape BPM Echo

Thismodelsatapeechounitwiththreeplayback Delay(Tap1) Note [r w ]
headsbutwiththeabilitytosynctotempo.The ThissetsthebasicdelaytimeofTap1,relativetothe
distortionandtonalchangestypicalofmagnetictape systemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoa
arealsoreproduced. wholenote,includingtriplets.

Also,Taps2and3arespecifiedasapercentage(%)of
Left
Wet / Dry
thisdelaytime.Taps2and3alwaysstayinproportion
toTap1,evenwhenthedelaytimeismodulated.
Feedback (3)
Times [x1x32]
(2)
Feedback Amt (1) Level Pan
+ Tape
Saturation
Delay ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For
Trim Pre Tone High / Low Damp
Wow/Flutter Tap2/3 Position
Right Timesissetto3,thedelaytimewillbeadottedeighth
BPM Wet / Dry
Tempo Base Note x Times Delay Time
note.
BPM
D-mod Source [OffTempo]

SelectsthemodulationsourceforthedelayNoteand
Times.
INPUT
Dmod Max Note [r w ]
Trim [0100] Insteadofspecifyingamodulationintensity,youcan
Setstheinputgain. specifyanote(andmultiplier)tomaptothemaximum
modulationvalue.Notethatthesecaneachbeeither
Pre Tone [0100] longerorshorterthantheoriginalNoteandTimes.
Thismodelsthereducedhighfrequenciesofananalog
tapedelay,beforethesaturationstage.Lowersettings Times [x1x32]
createadarkertone. ThissetsthemultiplierfortheDmodMaxNote.

WOW & FLUTTER SetsthedelaytimeofTap2,asapercentageofTap1s
Thissectionmodelstheinstabilityofthetape delaytime.
machinesmotors.Asthespeedofthemotorfluctuates,
thepitchchangesslightly.Thisintroducesapleasant
choruslikeeffect. SetsthedelaytimeofTap3,asapercentageofTap1s
delaytime.
Setsthefrequencyatwhichpitchvariationoccurs. Level and Pan 13
Eachtaphasitsowncontrolsforlevelandpan.
Depth [0100]
Setsthedepthofthepitchchange. Tap13 Level [0100]
Setsthetapsoutputlevel.
TAPE ECHO Pan [L, 199, R]
Setsthetapsstereoposition.
Delay Time
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00] Feedback
MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo Tap13 Feedback Amount [+/100]
manuallyforthisindividualeffect.p.883. Setstheindividualtapsfeedbacklevel.Negative
Time Over? > [---, OVER!] valuesinvertthephase.Theseindividuallevelsare
summedtogether,andthenthefinalleveliscontrolled
Themaximumdelaytimeis2,700msec.Ifthe
byFeedbackLevel,below.
thislimit,theerrormessageOVER!willappear.If Feedback Level [0100]
thisoccurs,changethedelaytimeparameterssothat Setstheoverallleveloffeedback.
910
Delay 099: Reverse BPM Delay
Source [OffTempo] Low Damp [%] [0100]

SelectsthemodulationsourcefortheFeedbackLevel. Thiscutsthelowfrequenciesinboththemainoutput
andthefeedback.Highersettingsmeanlesslowend.
Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountfortheFeedbackLevel. Saturation [0100]
Thismodelsthedistortionofananalogtapedelay.
Tone
High Damp [%] [0100] OUTPUT
Thiscutsthehighfrequenciesinboththemainoutput Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
andthefeedback.Highersettingscreateadarkertone. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
099: Reverse BPM Delay

Thisisareverseplaybackdelaythatletsyou Level [0100]
synchronizethedelaytimetothetempoofthesong. Setstheoutputlevelofthereverseplayback.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out R Delay Base Note [r w ]
Left
Feedback Mode Wet / Dry
Feedback
theBPMsetting.
Feedback
+
Times [x1x32]
Reverse Delay
Trim Sync High Damp
Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Note.
D-mod Trigger
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
L Post-Delay Base Note [r w ]
Base Note x Times
BPM
Base Note x Times ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheLeftPostDelay,relative
totheBPMsetting.
Times [x1x32]
INPUT
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheLeftPostDelaysBase
Input Level Dmod [%] [+/100] Note.
Setsthemodulationamountoftheinputlevel. Level [0100]
Source [OffTempo] SetstheoutputleveloftheLeftPostDelay.
Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheinputlevel. R Post-Delay Base Note [r w ]
ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheRightPostDelay,
REVERSE DELAY relativetotheBPMsetting.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00] Times [x1x32]

MIDIsyncstothesystemtempo;40240setsthetempo ThismultipliesthelengthoftheRightPostDelays
manuallyforthisindividualeffect.p.883. BaseNote.
Time Over? > [---, OVER!] Level [0100]

Themaximumdelaytimeis900msec.Ifthe SetstheoutputleveloftheRightPostDelay.
thislimit,theerrormessageOVER!willappear.If Feedback Mode [Reverse, Reverse/Forward]
thisoccurs,changethedelaytimeparameterssothat Selectsthefeedbackmode:reverseplayback,or
thismessagenolongerappears. alternatingreverseandforwardplayback.p.899.
Reverse Base Note [r w ] Feedback [+/100]

ThissetsthebasiclengthoftheReverseDelay,relative Setsthefeedbackamount.
totheBPMsetting.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnote
toawholenote,includingtriplets. Source [OffTempo]
Times [x1x32]
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For Amount [+/100]
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and Setsthefeedbackamount.
eighthnote. High Damp [%] [0100]
911
Effect Guide
Sync Source [OffTempo]

Selectsthemodulationsourcethatwillresetthepoint
atwhichthesoundiscapturedforreverseplayback.
p.900.
OUTPUT
912
Reverb and Early Reflections 100: Overb
Reverb and Early Reflections
100: Overb
TheOVerbfeaturesahighquality,diffusionbased Diffusion1 [0100]
reverbcore.Inadditiontosettingthesizeoftheroom, Diffusion1and2softenthesoundbeforeitentersthe
youcanmodelitsshapeandmaterialsbyadjustingthe reverbcore,shapingthetimbreoftheinitial
diffusioncharacteristicsofboththeinitialreflections reflections.Settingbothdiffuserstoaround50
andthemainreverberantwash,andviaseparate generallyproducessufficientdiffusionforsmooth
controlsforthehigh,mid,andlowdecaytimes.TheO reverbs;extremelyhighlevelsmaycauseringing.
Verbalsoincludesrandomization,forricherand
smootherreverbtimbres. Somesourcematerial,suchasvocals,mayalsobenefit
fromlowersettingsofdiffusion,allowingformore
discreteechoes.
Left
Wet / Dry Diffusion1andDiffusion2differinhowthe
EQ Trim
reflectionsarespaced,andthebalancebetweenthese
twoparameterswillvarythecharacterofthereverb.
+ Pre EQ Pre Delay Input Diffuser Reverb
Diffusion2 [0100]
EQ Trim
Right Thisistheseconddiffuserfortheinitialreflections.For
Wet / Dry
LFO: Sine moreinformation,seeDiffusion1,above.
Size [5100]
Pre EQ Setsthesizeofthespace.
TherearetwofullyparametricbandsofpeakingEQ, Time [0100]

foradjustingthereverbtimbre.Theseaffectonlythe Thissetsthemainreverberationtime.TheDamping
reverb,andnotthedrysignal.Bothbandshave and(bass)Gainparameters,below,letyouadjustthe
identicalparameters. decaytimesseparatelyforthehighandlow
frequencies,respectively.
Trim [0100]
SetstheEQinputlevel. Diffusion [0100]
Thissetsthedensityofreflectionswithinthemain
Band 1 reverb.Lowsettingswillproducemorediscrete
echoes,andhighsettingswillproduceasmoother
Band1 [Check-box]
reverb.Extremelyhighsettingsmaycauseringing.
SwitchesthefirstbandofEQbandonandoff.
ReverbSize,Time,andDiffusion
Fc [Hz] [20020.00k] Size / Reverb Time / Diffusion
Q [0.510.0]
SetsthebandwidthofBand1.
Reverb Time: small large
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]
SetsthegainofBand1.
Band 2
Band2hasthesameparametersasBand1,above.
Size: small large
Rolloff
Rolloff [0100]
Thiscontrolsalowpassfilterontheoutputofthe
effect.Settingsaround68kHzaregoodforproducing
Diffusion: small large
awarm,smoothsound.
Damping [0100]
REVERB
Thissetsthecutoffofthehighfrequencydamping
Pre Delay [msec] [01360] filter.IfDampingissetto100,thehighfrequencies
Setsthedelaytimefromthedrysound. willdecayatthesamerateasthelowfrequencies;at0,
thehighfrequencieswilldecayalmostinstantly.
913
Effect Guide
Inrealacousticspaces,highfrequenciesgenerally
delaysomewhatfasterthanlowfrequencies,so MODULATION
moderateamountsofdampingwillcreateamore
Rate [0.025.00]
realisticsound.
TheOVerbincludesrandomizationinthereverberant
Bass Crossover [Hz] [2024.00k] wash,todiminishresonantpeaksandaddarich
SetsthecrossoverfrequencyfortheBassGain. charactertothesound.TheRatedeterminesthespeed
oftherandomization.
Gain [dB] [12.0+6.0]
Depth [0100]
Thisletsyoutailorthedecaytimeofthereverbslow
frequencies,usingthefrequencysetbytheBassXover. Thisdeterminestheintensityoftherandomization.
Negativesettingsmakethelowfrequenciesdecay
fasterthanthemainreverb;positivesettingsmake OUTPUT
themdecaymoreslowly.
101: Reverb Hall

Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationof
midsizeconcerthallsorensemblehalls.Fordetailed
explanationsoftheparameters,see104:ReverbDry
Plateonpage 914.
102: Reverb Smooth Hall

Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationof
largerhallsandstadiums,andcreatesasmooth
release.Fordetailedexplanationsoftheparameters,
see104:ReverbDryPlateonpage 914.
103: Reverb Wet Plate

Thisplatereverbsimulateswarm(dense)
reverberation.Fordetailedexplanationsofthe
parameters,see104:ReverbDryPlateonpage 914.
104: Reverb Dry Plate

Thisplatereverbsimulatesdry,lightreverberation. LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]
Left
Wet / Dry HEQ Fc [High, Mid-High]
Pre Delay Thru
EQ Trim Selectsthecutofffrequency(highormidhigh)ofthe
LEQ HEQ
+ Pre Delay Reverb highrangeequalizer.
EQ Trim HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]

Right
Wet / Dry
REVERB
Pre EQ
Reverb Time [sec] [0.110.0]
Trim [0100] Setsthereverberationtime.
LEQ Fc [Low, Mid-Low] Setsthedampingamountinthehighrange.
lowrangeequalizer. Pre Delay [msec] [0200]
Setsthedelaytimefromthedrysound.p.915.
914
Reverb and Early Reflections 105: Reverb Room
Pre Delay Thru [%] [0100] Reverb - Hall / Plate Type

Level Dry
Setsthemixratioofnondelaysound.p.915.
OUTPUT
Louder
Reverb
Pre Delay Thru
Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with Time
Pre Delay Reverb Time
Pre Delay [msec] and Pre Delay Thru [%]

ThePreDelaysetsthedelaytimetothereverbinput,
allowingyoutocontrolspaciousness.
UsingthePreDelayThruparameter,youcanmixthe
drysoundwithoutdelay,emphasizingtheattackofthe
sound.
105: Reverb Room

Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflections youtosimulatenuances,suchasthetypeofwallsofa
thatmakethesoundtighter.Changingthebalance room.Fordetailedexplanationsoftheparameters,see
betweentheearlyreflectionsandreverbsoundallows 106:ReverbBrightRoomonpage 915.
106: Reverb Bright Room

Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflections Pre Delay [msec] [0200]
thatmakethesoundbrighter.See056:ReverbRoom. Setsthedelaytimefromthedrysound.p.915.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out Pre Delay Thru [%] [0100]
Left
Wet / Dry
ER Level Setsthemixratioofnondelaysound.p.915.
ERs
EQ Trim
+
LEQ HEQ
Pre Delay
Pre Delay Thru
Reverb Reverb Level
ER Level [0100]
Setsthelevelofearlyreflections.p.915.
ERs
EQ Trim ER Level
Right Reverb Level [0100]

Wet / Dry
Setsthereverberationlevel.p.915.
Pre EQ OUTPUT
Trim [0100] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
SetstheEQinputlevel. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
ER Level and Reverb Level
Theseparameterssettheearlyreflectionleveland
lowrangeequalizer.
reverblevel.
LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0] Changingtheseparametervaluesallowsyouto
SetsthegainoftheLowEQ. simulatethetypeofwallsintheroom.Thatis,alarger
ERLevelsimulatesahardwall,andalargerReverb
HEQ Fc [High, Mid-High] Levelsimulatesasoftwall.
Reverb - Room Type
highrangeequalizer.
Level Dry ER
(Early Reflections)
HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]
Louder
Reverb
REVERB Time
Pre Delay Thru
Reverb Time [sec] [0.13.0] Pre Delay Reverb Time
Setsthereverberationtime.

915
Effect Guide
107: Early Reflections

Thiseffectisonlytheearlyreflectionpartofa
reverberationsound,andaddspresencetothesound. EARLY REFLECTIONS
Youcanselectoneofthefourdecaycurves.
Pre Delay [msec] [0200]
Setsthetimetakenfromtheoriginalsoundtothefirst
Left
Wet / Dry earlyreflection.
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
Type [Sharp, Loose, Modulated, Reverse]
+ Pre Delay Early Reflections
Thisparameterselectsthedecaycurvefortheearly
reflections.
EQ Trim
Right Early Reflections - Type

Wet / Dry
Pre EQ Sharp
Trim [0100]
SetstheinputlevelofEQappliedtotheeffectsound. Loose

Modulated
lowrangeequalizer.
LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]

SetsthegainoftheLowEQ. Reverse

Dry Pre Delay ER Time
highrangeequalizer.
HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0] ER Time [msec] [10800]

SetsthegainoftheHighEQ. Setsthetimelengthofearlyreflection.
OUTPUT
108: Early Reflections Hi Dens

Thisearlyreflectioneffecthasmorepreciseearly LEQ Fc [Low, Mid-Low]
reflectionswithtwicethemaximumlengthof107: Selectsthecutofffrequency(lowormidlow)ofthe
EarlyReflections.Youcancreateaverysmoothand lowrangeequalizer.
densesound.
LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]
Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
+ Pre Delay Early Reflections Selectsthecutofffrequency(highormidhigh)ofthe
highrangeequalizer.
EQ Trim
Right HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]

Wet / Dry
Pre EQ EARLY REFLECTIONS

Trim [0100] Pre Delay [msec] [0200]
SetstheinputlevelofEQappliedtotheeffectsound. Setsthetimetakenfromtheoriginalsoundtothefirst
earlyreflection.
916
Reverb and Early Reflections 108: Early Reflections Hi Dens
Type [Sharp, Loose, Modulated, Reverse]

Selectsthedecaycurvefortheearlyreflections.For
moreinformation,seeTypeonpage 916.
ER Time [msec] [101600]

Setsthetimelengthofearlyreflection.
OUTPUT
917
Effect Guide
Mono-Mono Serial
109:P4EQExciterthrough140:ReverbGateprovide
serialchainsofmonoeffects.Theseincludevarious MULTITAP DELAY
combinationsofEQ,Compressor,Limiter,Exciter,
Tap1 Time [msec] [0.01360.0]
Overdrive,Wah,Chorus/Flanger,Phaser,Multitap
Delay,Gate,andReverb,asdescribedbelow. SetstheTap1delaytime.
Tap2 Time [msec] [0.01360.0]

PARAMETRIC EQ SetstheTap2delaytime.
ForadescriptionoftheonscreenEQgraphic,see011: Tap1 Level [0100]
StereoParametric4EQonpage 832.
SetstheTap1outputlevel.Formoreinformation,see
Trim [0100] Tap1Levelonpage 894.
SetstheparametricEQinputlevel. Feedback (Tap2) [+/100]
Band1 Fc [Hz] [201.00k] SetstheTap2feedbackamount.
SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand1. High Damp [%] [0100]
Q [0.510.0] Setsthedampingamountinthehighrange.
SetsthebandwidthofBand1.Formoreinformation, Wet/Dry [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet]
pleaseseeQonpage 832.
Setsthemultitapdelayeffectbalance.Formore
Gain [dB] [18+18] information,seePanonpage 885.
SetsthegainofBand1. Source [OffTempo]
Band2 Fc [Hz] [505.00k] SelectstheWet/Drymodulationsourceforthemultitap
SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand2. delay.
Q [0.510.0] Amount [+/100]

SetsthebandwidthofBand2. SetstheWet/Drymodulationamountforthemultitap
delay.
Gain [dB] [18+18]
SetsthegainofBand2. COMPRESSOR
Band3 Fc [Hz] [30010.00k] FordetailsontheCompressorgraphics,see001:
SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand3. StereoDynaCompressoronpage 819.
Q [0.510.0] Sensitivity [1100]

SetsthebandwidthofBand3. Setsthesensitivity.Formoreinformation,see
Sensitivityonpage 819.
Gain [dB] [18+18]
Attack [1100]
SetsthegainofBand3.
Setstheattacklevel.Formoreinformation,see
Band4 Fc [Hz] [50020.00k] Attackonpage 820.
Output Level [0100]
Q [0.510.0] Setsthecompressoroutputlevel.Formore
SetsthebandwidthofBand4. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Gain [dB] [18+18]

LIMITER
SetsthegainofBand4.
FordetailsontheLimitergraphics,see005:Stereo
Limiteronpage 826.
EXCITER
Ratio [1.0:150.0:1, Inf:1]
Emphasis Frequency [070]
Setsthefrequencyrangetobeemphasized.Formore information,seeRatioonpage 821.
information,seeEmphasisFrequencyonpage 835.
Exciter Blend [+/100]
Setstheintensity(depth)oftheExcitereffect.Formore Formoreinformation,seeThreshold[dB]on
information,seeBlendonpage 835. page 822.
918
Mono-Mono Serial 108: Early Reflections Hi Dens
Attack [1100] Gain [dB] [18+18]

Setstheattacktime.Formoreinformation,seeAttack SetsthegainofMid/HighEQ1.
[msec]onpage 822.
Mid2 Fc [Hz] [50020.00k]
Release [1100] SetsthecenterfrequencyforMid/HighEQ2(peaking
Setsthereleasetime.Formoreinformation,see type).
Release[msec]onpage 822.
Q [0.510.0]
Gain Adjust [dB] [Inf, 38+24] SetsthebandwidthofMid/HighEQ2.Formore
Setsthelimiteroutputgain.Formoreinformation,see information,seeQonpage 832.
GainAdjust[dB]onpage 822.
Gain [dB] [18+18]
SetsthegainofMid/HighEQ2.
Pre EQ
Trim [0100] WAH
CONTROL
Pre LEQ Gain [dB] [15+15]
SetsthegainoftheLowEQ. Sweep Mode [Auto, Dmod, LFO]
Selectsthecontrolfromautowah,modulationsource,
Pre HEQ Gain [dB] [15+15] andLFO.SeeSweepModeonpage 836.
SetsthegainoftheHighEQ
Source [OffTempo]
SelectsthemodulationsourceforthewahwhenSweep
OD/HI-GAIN Mode=Dmod.
DRIVE LFO
Formoreinformationontheseparameters,see
DRIVEonpage 848. Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
SetstheLFOspeed.
Drive Mode [Overdrive, Hi-Gain]
Switchesbetweenoverdriveandhighgaindistortion. WAH
Drive [1100] Frequency Bottom [0100]
Setsthedegreeofdistortion. Setsthelowerlimitofthewahcenterfrequency.p.837.
Output Level [050] Frequency Top [0100]

Setstheoverdriveoutputlevel. Setstheupperlimitofthewahcenterfrequency.p.837.
Source [OffTempo] Resonance [0100]

Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoverdriveoutput Setstheresonanceamount.
level.
LPF [Check-box]
Amount [50+50] Switchesthewahlowpassfilteronandoff.
Setsthemodulationamountoftheoverdriveoutput
level. Wet/Dry [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet]
Setsthewaheffectbalance.
EQ
Source [OffTempo]
Low Fc [Hz] [201.00k] SelectstheWet/Drymodulationsourceforthewah.
Setsthecenterfrequencyforlowfrequencyshelving
EQ. Amount [+/100]
SetstheWet/Drymodulationamountforthewah.
Gain [dB] [18+18]
CHORUS/FLANGER
Mid1 Fc [Hz] [30010.00k] Thiseffectcanproduceeitherchorusingorflanging,
SetsthecenterfrequencyforMid/HighEQ1(peaking dependingonthesettings.
type).
Thedefaultsettingscreateflanging.
Q [0.510.0] Toproduceachoruseffectinstead,changethesettings
SetsthebandwidthofMid/HighEQ1.Formore asfollows:
information,seeQonpage 832. Frequency[Hz]:0.80
DelayTime[msec]:20.0
919
Effect Guide
Depth:70
PHASER
Feedback:+0
LFO
LFO
SetstheLFOspeed.
SetstheLFOspeed.
PHASER
FLANGER
Manual [0100]
Delay Time [msec] [0.01350.0]
Setsthephaserscenterfrequency.
Setsthedelaytime.
Depth [0100]
Depth [0100]
Resonance [+/100]
Feedback [+/100]
Thiscontrolstheintensityofthephasereffect.Positive
Thiscontrolstheintensityoftheflangereffect.Positive
andnegativevaluescreatedifferenttimbres.
andnegativevaluescreatedifferenttimbres.To
produceachoruseffectinsteadofflanging,setthisto MixingtheprocessedanddrysignalsviaWet/Drywill
+0. enhancetheeffect.Formaximumintensity,set
ResonanceandWet/Drysothattheyareeitherboth
positiveorbothnegative;thisemphasizesthephasers
harmonicpeaks.
FeedbackandWet/Drysothattheyareeitherboth
positiveorbothnegative;thisemphasizestheflangers Output Mode [Normal, Wet Invert]
harmonicpeaks.
Selectswhetherthephaseroutputismonoorpseudo
Output Mode [Normal, Wet Invert] stereo.Formoreinformation,seetheChorus/Flanger
OutputMode,above.
Normalsendstheoutputofthechorus/flangertoboth
outputswiththesamephase. Wet/Dry [Wet1:99, Dry, 1: 99Wet]
WetInvertflipsthephaseofthechorus/flangersright Setsthebalancebetweenthewetprocessedsound
channel.Thiscreatesapseudostereoeffect,adding andthedryinput.Negativevaluesinvertthephaseof
depthtothesound. thewetsignal.ThisinteractswithResonance,as
However,ifamonoinputeffectisconnectedafterthis describedabove.
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother, Note:139:PhaserChorus/Flangerdoesnotinclude
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffect. Wet/DrymodulationforthePhasersection.
SomeoftheMonoMonoSerialeffectsincludea Source [OffTempo]
Routingparameter,whichallowsyoutoswapthe
orderoftheeffects.WhentheRoutingissetsothatthe SelectstheWet/Drymodulationsourceforthephaser.
Chorus/Flangercomesfirst(suchasFlanger>Compor Amount [+/100]
Flanger>OD/HG),theOutputModewillbegrayed
out;internally,itwillactasifsettoNormal. SetstheWet/Drymodulationamountforthephaser.

thewetsignal.ThisinteractswithFeedback,as
describedabove.
Note:138:Cho/FlangerMultitapDlydoesnotinclude
Wet/DrymodulationfortheChorus/Flangersection.
Source [OffTempo]
SelectstheWet/Drymodulationsourceforthe
chorus/flanger.
Amount [+/100]
SetstheWet/Drymodulationamountforthe
chorus/flanger.
920
Mono-Mono Serial 109: P4EQ - Exciter
109: P4EQ - Exciter

Thiseffectcombinesamonofourbandparametric
equalizerandanexciter. PARAMETRIC EQ
Thisisa4bandparametricEQ.Fordetailed
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out information,seePARAMETRICEQonpage 918.
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ Exciter
EXCITER
+ Exciter
Trim
Fordetailedinformationontheeffectsparameters,see
EXCITERonpage 918.
Right
Wet / Dry
OUTPUT
110: P4EQ - Wah

equalizerandawah.Youcanchangetheorderofthe PARAMETRIC EQ
connection. Thisisa4bandparametricEQ.Fordetailed
information,seePARAMETRICEQonpage 918.
Left
Wet / Dry
WAH
Routing
Parametric 4Band EQ Wah/Auto Wah
+ Wah Fordetailedinformation,seeWAHonpage 919.

Trim
Right
OUTPUT
Sweep Mode Wet / Dry
Envelope
Auto
D-mod D-mod Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
LFO
LFO modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Routing
Routing [P4EQ > Wah, Wah > P4EQ]
Changestheorderoftheparametricequalizerandwah
connection.
111: P4EQ - Chorus/Flanger

equalizerandachorus/flanger. CHORUS/FLANGER
Thiseffectcanproduceeitherchorusingorflanging,
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out dependingonthesettings.Fordetailedinformation,
Left
Wet / Dry seeCHORUS/FLANGERonpage 919.
Parametric 4Band EQ Chorus/Flanger
+
Trim
Chorus/Flanger
+
Normal
OUTPUT
Output Mode

Wet Invert
Feedback
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
PARAMETRIC EQ
921
Effect Guide
112: P4EQ - Phaser

equalizerandaphaser. PARAMETRIC EQ
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out information,seePARAMETRICEQonpage 918.
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ Phaser
PHASER
+ Phaser
Normal
Trim
+ Output Mode Thisisamonophasereffect.Fordetailedinformation,

Resonance Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry
seePHASERonpage 920.
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
OUTPUT
113: P4EQ - Multitap Delay

equalizerandamultitapdelay. PARAMETRIC EQ
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ Multitap Delay
Feedback MULTITAP DELAY

+ Delay
(2)
Trim High Damp (1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry Thisisa2tapdelay.Fordetailedinformation,see
MULTITAPDELAYonpage 918.
Right
Wet / Dry
OUTPUT
114: Comp - Wah

Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandawah. COMPRESSOR
Youcanchangetheorderoftheconnection.
Fordetailedinformation,seeCOMPRESSORon
page 918.
Left
Routing Wet / Dry
Compressor
WAH
Wah/Auto Wah
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ

+ Comp Wah
Output Level Wet / Dry
Fordetailedinformation,seeWAHonpage 919.
Right
Envelope - Control
Sweep Mode
Envelope
Wet / Dry OUTPUT
Auto
D-mod
D -mod
LFO Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
LFO
Routing
Routing [Comp > Wah, Wah > Comp]
Switchestheorderofthecompressorandwah.
COMPRESSOR
Pre EQ
Fordetailedinformation,seePreEQonpage 919.
922
Mono-Mono Serial 115: Comp - Amp Sim
115: Comp - Amp Sim

Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. COMPRESSOR

Pre EQ
Left
Routing Wet / Dry Fordetailedinformation,seePreEQonpage 919.
Compressor Amp Simulation
+
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Comp Amp Simulation Filter
COMPRESSOR
Output Level
page 918.
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
AMP SIM
Amplifier Type [SS, EL84, 6L6]
Routing
Selectsthetypeofguitaramplifier.
Routing [Comp > Amp, Amp > Comp]
Switchestheorderofthecompressorandamp OUTPUT
simulation.
116: Comp - OD/HiGain

Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandan
overdrive/highgaindistortion.Youcanchangethe COMPRESSOR
orderoftheeffects. Fordetailedinformation,seeCOMPRESSORon
page 918.
Left
Wet / Dry
Compressor
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain OD/HI-GAIN
3 Band PEQ
+ Comp Driver
Fordetailedinformation,seeOD/HIGAINon
Output Level Output Level Wet / Dry page 919.
Drive
OUTPUT
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Routing information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Routing [Comp > OD/HG, OD/HG > Comp]

Switchestheorderofthecompressorandoverdrive.
117: Comp - P4EQ

Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandafour
bandparametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderof Routing
theeffects.
Routing [Comp > P4EQ, P4EQ > Comp]
Switchestheorderofthecompressorandparametric
Left EQ.
Routing Wet / Dry
Compressor Parametric 4Band EQ
+ Comp
COMPRESSOR
Trim
Output Level
page 918.
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
PARAMETRIC EQ
923
Effect Guide
OUTPUT
118: Comp - Chorus/Flanger

Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressoranda
chorus/flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. COMPRESSOR

Pre EQ
Left
Compressor Chorus/Flanger
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ COMPRESSOR

+ Comp Chorus/Flanger
Normal
Output Level +

Output Mode Fordetailedinformation,seeCOMPRESSORon
Feedback Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry page 918.
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control LFO: Tri / Sine
CHORUS/FLANGER
Routing dependingonthesettings.Fordetailedinformation,
seeCHORUS/FLANGERonpage 919.
Routing [Comp > Flanger, Flanger > Comp]
Switchestheorderofthecompressorand
chorus/flanger. OUTPUT
WhenRoutingissettoFlanger>Comp,the Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Chorus/FlangersOutputModewillbegrayedoutand modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
internallysettoNormal. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
119: Comp - Phaser

Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandaphaser.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. PHASER

Pre EQ
Left
Compressor Phaser
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ LFO and PHASER

+ Comp Phaser
Normal
Output Level +

Output Mode Thisisamonophasereffect.Fordetailedinformation,
Resonance Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry seePHASERonpage 920.
Right
Wet / Dry
OUTPUT
Routing modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Routing [Comp > Phaser, Phaser > Comp]
Switchestheorderofthecompressorandphaser.
WhenRoutingissettoPhaser>Comp,thePhasers
OutputModewillbegrayedoutandinternallysetto
Normal.
COMPRESSOR
page 918.
924
Mono-Mono Serial 120: Comp - Multitap Delay
120: Comp - Multitap Delay

Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressoranda
multitapdelay.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. Pre EQ
Left
COMPRESSOR
Routing Wet / Dry
Compressor Multitap Delay
+
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Comp
Feedback
Delay
(2)
High Damp (1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
page 918.
Output Level
MULTITAP DELAY
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Thisisa2tapdelay.Fordetailedinformation,see
Routing
Routing [Comp > Mt.Delay, Mt.Delay > Comp] OUTPUT
Switchestheorderofthecompressorandmultitap Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
delay. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
121: Limiter - P4EQ

Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe LIMITER
effects. Fordetailedinformation,seeLIMITERonpage 918.
PARAMETRIC EQ
Left
Routing Wet / Dry
Limiter Parametric 4Band EQ
+ Limiter
Trim
Gain Adjust
Right
OUTPUT
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Routing
Routing [Limiter > P4EQ, P4EQ > Limiter]
SwitchestheorderofthelimiterandparametricEQ.
122: Limiter - Chorus/Flanger

Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiteranda
chorus/flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. Routing
Routing [Limiter > Flanger, Flanger > Limiter]
Left Switchestheorderofthelimiterandchorus/flanger.
Routing Wet / Dry
Limiter Chorus/Flanger
WhenRoutingissettoFlanger>Limiter,the
Chorus/FlangersOutputModewillbegrayedoutand
+ Limiter Chorus/Flanger
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
+
Normal internallysettoNormal.
Output Mode
Gain Adjust
Feedback Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry LIMITER
Fordetailedinformation,seeLIMITERonpage 918.
925
Effect Guide
CHORUS/FLANGER OUTPUT
Pre EQ modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Fordetailedinformation,seePreEQonpage 919. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
LFO and FLANGER

dependingonthesettings.Fordetailedinformation,
123: Limiter - Phaser

Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser.You WhenRoutingissettoPhaser>Limiter,thePhasers
canchangetheorderoftheeffects. OutputModewillbegrayedoutandinternallysetto
Normal.
Left
Limiter
Routing
Phaser
Wet / Dry
LIMITER
+ Limiter Phaser
Normal
Gain Adjust + Output Mode

Wet Invert
PHASER
Resonance
Phaser Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control LFO: Tri / Sine Thisisamonophasereffect.Fordetailedinformation,
Routing OUTPUT
Routing [Limiter > Phaser, Phaser > Limiter] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Switchestheorderofthelimiterandphaser. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
124: Limiter - Multitap Delay

Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandamultitap
delay.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. OUTPUT
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Left
Limiter
Routing
Multitap Delay
Wet / Dry information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Feedback
+ Limiter Delay
(2)
Gain Adjust High Damp (1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Routing
Routing [Limiter > Mt.Delay, Mt.Delay > Limiter]
Switchestheorderofthelimiterandmultitapdelay.
LIMITER
MULTITAP DELAY
Thisisa2tapdelay.Fordetailedinformation,see
926
Mono-Mono Serial 125: Exciter - Comp
125: Exciter - Comp

Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandacompressor.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. EXCITER

Pre EQ
Left
Exciter Compressor
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ EXCITER

+ Exciter Comp
Output Level Fordetailedinformation,seeEXCITERonpage 918.
Right
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
COMPRESSOR
page 918.
Routing
Routing [Exciter > Comp, Comp > Exciter] OUTPUT
Switchestheorderoftheexciterandcompressor. Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
126: Exciter - Limiter

Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandalimiter.You
canchangetheorderoftheeffects. EXCITER

Pre EQ
Left
Exciter Limiter

+ Exciter Limiter
Gain Adjust Fordetailedinformation,seeEXCITERonpage 918.
Right
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
LIMITER
Routing
OUTPUT
Routing [Exciter > Limiter, Limiter > Exciter]
Switchestheorderoftheexciterandlimiter. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
127: Exciter - Chorus/Flanger

Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiteranda
chorus/flanger. EXCITER

Pre EQ
Left
Wet / Dry Fordetailedinformation,seePreEQonpage 919.
Exciter Chorus/Flanger

+ Exciter Chorus/Flanger
Normal
+

Output Mode Fordetailedinformation,seeEXCITERonpage 918.
Feedback Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Right
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
CHORUS/FLANGER
927
Effect Guide
OUTPUT
128: Exciter - Phaser

Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser. EXCITER
Fordetailedinformation,seeEXCITERonpage 918.
Left
Wet / Dry
Exciter Phaser
PHASER
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
+ Exciter Phaser Thisisamonophasereffect.Fordetailedinformation,
Normal
+ Output Mode
Resonance

Wet Invert seePHASERonpage 920.
Phaser Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
OUTPUT
EXCITER information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Pre EQ
129: Exciter - Multitap Delay

Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandamultitap EXCITER
delay.
Fordetailedinformation,seeEXCITERonpage 918.
MULTITAP DELAY
Left
Wet / Dry
Exciter Multitap Delay
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Feedback Thisisa2tapdelay.Fordetailedinformation,see

+ Exciter Delay
High Damp (1)
(2) MULTITAPDELAYonpage 918.
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry OUTPUT
EXCITER information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Pre EQ
130: OD/Hi Gain - Amp Sim

Thiseffectcombinesamonooverdrive/highgain
distortionandanampsimulation.Youcanchangethe Routing
orderoftheeffects.
Routing [OD/HG > Amp, Amp > OD/HG]
Switchestheorderoftheoverdriveandamp.
Left
Routing Wet / Dry
Overdrive / Hi-Gain Amp Simulation
3 Band PEQ
OD/HI-GAIN
+ Driver Amp Simulation Filter
Output Level Fordetailedinformation,seeOD/HIGAINon
Mode: Overdrive / Hi-Gain page 919.
Drive
Right
Wet / Dry
AMP SIM
928
Mono-Mono Serial 131: OD/Hi Gain - Cho/Flanger
OUTPUT
131: OD/Hi Gain - Cho/Flanger

WhenRoutingissettoFlanger>OD/HG,the
Left
Chorus/FlangersOutputModewillbegrayedoutand
Wet / Dry
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Routing
Chorus/Flanger
internallysettoNormal.
3 Band PEQ
+ Driver
Output Level
Chorus/Flanger
+
Normal
Output Mode
OD/HI-GAIN

Feedback Wet Invert
Drive Cho/Flng Wet / Dry Fordetailedinformation,seeOD/HIGAINon
Right
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry page 919.
Thiseffectcombinesamonooverdrive/highgain CHORUS/FLANGER
distortionandachorus/flanger.Youcanchangethe
orderoftheeffects. Thiseffectcanproduceeitherchorusingorflanging,
Routing
Routing [OD/HG > Flanger, Flanger > OD/HG] OUTPUT
Switchestheorderoftheoverdriveandchorus/ Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
flanger. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
132: OD/Hi Gain - Phaser

Thiseffectcombinesamonooverdrive/highgain WhenRoutingissettoPhaser>OD/HG,thePhasers
distortionandaphaser.Youcanchangetheorderof OutputModewillbegrayedoutandinternallysetto
theeffects. Normal.

Left
OD/HI-GAIN
Wet / Dry
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain Phaser
Fordetailedinformation,seeOD/HIGAINon
3 Band PEQ page 919.
+ Driver Phaser
Normal
Output Level + Output Mode
Wet Invert
PHASER
Mode: Overdrive / Hi-Gain Resonance
Drive Phaser Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Thisisamonophasereffect.Fordetailedinformation,
Routing OUTPUT
Routing [OD/HG > Phaser, Phaser > OD/HG] Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Switchestheorderoftheoverdriveandphaser. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
133: OD/Hi Gain - Multitap Dly

Thiseffectcombinesamonooverdrive/highgain
distortionandamultitapdelay Left
Wet / Dry
Overdrive / Hi-Gain Multitap Delay
3 Band PEQ Feedback

+ Driver Delay
(2)
Output Level High Damp (1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Drive
Right
Wet / Dry
929
Effect Guide
OD/HI-GAIN OUTPUT
Fordetailedinformation,seeOD/HIGAINon Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
MULTITAP DELAY
Fordetailedinformation,seeMULTITAPDELAYon
page 918.
134: Wah - Amp Sim

Thiseffectcombinesamonowahandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. WAH
Fordetailedinformation,seeWAHonpage 919.
Left
Routing Wet / Dry
Wah/Auto Wah Amp Simulation AMP SIM
+ Wah
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation Filter Amplifier Type [SS, EL84, 6L6]
Right
Sweep Mode Wet / Dry
Envelope
D
Auto
-mod D-mod
LFO
OUTPUT
LFO
Routing
Routing [Wah > Amp, Amp > Wah]
Switchestheorderofthewahandampsimulation.
135: Decimator - Amp Sim

Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects. BIT SHAPE
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out Resolution[bits]onpage 843.
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Decimator Amp Simulation Resolution [bits] [424]
+
Resolution Output Level
Amp Simulation Filter
Setsthedatabitlength.
Decimator
Pre LPF High Damp
Output Level [0100]
Right Setsthedecimatoroutputlevel.
Wet / Dry
AMP SIM
Routing
Routing [Decimator > Amp, Amp > Decimator] Selectsthetypeofguitaramplifier.
Switchestheorderofthedecimatorandamp
simulation.
OUTPUT
DECIMATOR Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Pre LPF [Check-box] information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
Turntheharmonicnoisecausedbyloweredsampling
onandoff.SeePreLPFonpage 843.
Sampling Frequency [Hz] [1.00k48.00k]

Setsthesamplingfrequency.

Setstheratioofhighrangedamping.
930
Mono-Mono Serial 136: Decimator - Comp
136: Decimator - Comp

Left
Routing
Wet / Dry
Setstheratioofhighrangedamping.
Decimator Compressor
+
Resolution
Decimator
Output Level
Comp BIT SHAPE
Pre LPF High Damp Output Level
Right
Resolution[bits]onpage 843.
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Resolution [bits] [424]
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatoranda Setsthedatabitlength.
compressor.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Output Level [0100]
Setsthedecimatoroutputlevel.
Routing
Routing [Decimator > Comp, Comp > Decimator] COMPRESSOR
Switchestheorderofthedecimatorandcompressor.
page 918.
DECIMATOR
Pre LPF [Check-box] OUTPUT
Enablesanddisablesafilterwhichpreventsaliasing Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
noise.SeePreLPFonpage 843. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Sampling Frequency [Hz] [1.00k48.00k]
Setsthesamplingfrequency.
137: Amp Sim - Tremolo

Thiseffectcombinesamonoampsimulationanda Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
tremolo. SetstheLFOspeed.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out TREMOLO

Left
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation Tremolo Depth [0100]
+ Amp Simulation Filter Tremolo
Right
OUTPUT
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down LFO Shape
AMP SIM
TREMOLO
LFO
Waveform [Triangle, Sine, Vintage, Up, Down]
SelectstheLFOWaveform.SeeWaveformon
page 875.
Shape [+/100]
ChangesthecurvatureoftheLFOWaveform.See
Shapeonpage 840.
931
Effect Guide
138: Cho/Flanger - Multitap Dly

Thiseffectcombinesamonochorus/flangeranda LFO and FLANGER
multitapdelay.
Left
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger Multitap Delay Note:UnliketheotherMonoMonoSerialeffects,this
Feedback Chorus/Flangerdoesnotincludemodulationof
+ Chorus/Flanger Delay (2)
EQ LEQ HEQ Cho/Flng (1) Mt.Dly
Wet/Dry.
Trim Wet / Dry High Damp Wet / Dry
Feedback
Right
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry MULTITAP DELAY
Fordetailedinformation,seeMULTITAPDELAYon
page 918.
CHORUS/FLANGER
OUTPUT
Pre EQ
Fordetailedinformation,seePreEQonpage 919. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
139: Phaser - Chorus/Flanger

Thiseffectcombinesamonophaseranda
chorus/flanger. CHORUS/FLANGER

Pre EQ
Left
Wet / Dry Fordetailedinformation,seePreEQonpage 919.
Phaser Chorus/Flanger
LFO and FLANGER

+ Phaser Chorus/Flanger
EQ LEQ HEQ Normal
Trim
Phaser
+

Output Mode Thiseffectcanproduceeitherchorusingorflanging,
Resonance Feedback Wet Invert
Wet / Dry
Cho/Flng dependingonthesettings.Fordetailedinformation,
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine LFO: Tri / Sine
OUTPUT
PHASER Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
Thisisamonophasereffect.Fordetailedinformation, modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
seePHASERonpage 920. information,seeOUTPUTonpage 820.
140: Reverb - Gate

Thiseffectcombinesamonoreverbandagate.
REVERB
Pre EQ
Left
Wet / Dry
Reverb
EQ Trim Trim [0100]

+ Pre Delay Reverb Gate
LEQ HEQ Reverb SetstheEQinputlevel.
Balance
Right LEQ Fc [Low, Mid-Low]

Wet / Dry
Input Reverb Mix Selectsthecutofffrequency(lowormidlow)ofthe

Input
Envelope - Control lowrangeequalizer.
Gate+Dmpr D-mod Envelope Select
Gate
LEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0]


highrangeequalizer.
932
Mono-Mono Serial 140: Reverb - Gate
HEQ Gain [dB] [15.0+15.0] Polarity [+, ]

SetsthegainoftheHighEQ. Thisletsyouinvertthegateon/offstate.SeePolarity
onpage 831.
REVERB
Pre Delay [msec] [0200] OUTPUT
Setsthedelaytimeofthereverbsoundandgate Thisisthestandardeffectsoutputsection,with
controlsignal. modulatablecontroloverwet/drybalance.Formore
Reverb Time [sec] [0.110.0]

Setsthereverberationtime.

Setsthereverbeffectbalance.
GATE
FordetailsontheGategraphics,see009:StereoGate
onpage 830.
CONTROL
Envelope Select [Dmod, Input]
Thischooseswhetherthegateistriggeredbythesignal
level,orcontrolleddirectlybytheselectedDmod
Source.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoInput,thegateis
controlledbyablendofthedryaudioinputandthe
reverboutput,assetbytheInputReverbMix.
Source [OffTempo]
Selectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrolsthegate
whenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod.
Input Reverb Mix [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet]

Thismixesthedryinputandreverboutputsignals,for
controllingthegate.
Normally,setInputReverbMixtoDry,sothatthe
gateiscontrolledonlybythedryinput.Ifyouwishto
extendthegatetime,increasetheInputReverbMix
valuetoincludesomeofthewetmixaswell,and
adjusttheThreshold.
GATE
Threshold [0100]
Setsthegatethresholdlevel.Whenthesignallevel
exceedsthethreshold,thegateopensandthereverb
soundisheard.
NotethatthisappliesonlywhenEnvelopeSelectisset
toInput.WhenthegateiscontrolledviaDmod,it
openswhentheDmodvalueis64orhigher,andcloses
whenthevalueis63orlower.
Attack [1100]
Setstheattacktime.SeeAttackonpage 830.
Release [1100]
Setsthereleasetime.SeeReleaseonpage 830.
933
Effect Guide
Mono/Mono Parallel
141:P4EQ//P4EQthrough185:Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPM Amount [+/100]
Dlyareparalleleffects,withtheleftinputgoing SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry.
throughoneeffect,andtherightgoingthroughthe
other.Theseprovidevariouscombinationsof4band
EQ,Compressor,Limiter,Exciter,Overdrive,Wah, Compressor
Chorus/Flanger,Phaser,andMultitapDelay,as
FordetailsontheCompressorgraphics,see001:
describedbelow.
StereoDynaCompressoronpage 819.
4 band EQ Pre EQ
ForadescriptionoftheonscreenEQgraphic,see011: Trim [0100]
StereoParametric4EQonpage 832. SetstheEQinputlevel.
PARAMETRIC EQ LEQ Gain [dB] [15+15]
Trim [0100] SetsthegainoftheLowEQ.
Setstheinputlevel. HEQ Gain [dB] [15+15]

Band1 Fc [Hz] [201.00k] SetsthegainoftheHighEQ.
SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand1. COMPRESSOR
Q [0.510.0] Sensitivity [1100]
SetsthebandwidthofBand1.SeeQonpage 832. Setsthesensitivity.SeeSensitivityonpage 819.
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0] Attack [1100]
SetsthegainofBand1. Setstheattacklevel.SeeAttackonpage 820.
Band2 Fc [Hz] [505.00k] Output Level [0100]
SetsthecenterfrequencyofBand2. Setstheoutputlevel.
Q [0.510.0]
OUTPUT
SetsthebandwidthofBand2.SeeQonpage 832.
Pan [L000C064R127]
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]
Setsthestereoimage.
SetsthegainofBand2.
Band3 Fc [Hz] [30010.00k]
Source [OffTempo]
Q [0.510.0]
Amount [+/100]
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]
SetsthegainofBand3.
Band4 Fc [Hz] [50020.00k] Limiter

FordetailsontheLimitergraphics,see005:Stereo
Q [0.510.0] Limiteronpage 826.
LIMITER
Gain [dB] [18.0+18.0]
Ratio [1.0:150.0:1, Inf:1]
SetsthegainofBand4.
Setsthesignalcompressionratio.SeeRatioon
OUTPUT page 821.

Pan [L000C064R127]
Setsthestereoimage.
SeeThreshold[dB]onpage 822.
Attack [1100]
Setstheattacktime.SeeAttack[msec]onpage 822.
Source [OffTempo]
934
Mono/Mono Parallel 140: Reverb - Gate
Release [1100] Drive Mode [Overdrive, Hi-Gain]

Setsthereleasetime.SeeRelease[msec]onpage 822. Switchesbetweenoverdriveandhighgaindistortion.
Gain Adjust [dB] [Inf, 38+24] Drive [1100]

Setstheoutputgain.SeeGainAdjust[dB]on Setsthedegreeofdistortion.
page 822.
Output Level [050]
OUTPUT Setstheoutputlevel.
Pan [L000C064R127] Source [OffTempo]

Setsthestereoimage. Selectsthemodulationsourcefortheoutputlevel.
Wet/Dry [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet] Amount [50+50]

Setsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedryinput. Setsthemodulationamountoftheoutputlevel.
Source [OffTempo] EQ
Low Fc [Hz] [201.00k]
Amount [+/100] SetsthecenterfrequencyforLowEQ(shelvingtype).
Gain [dB] [18+18]
Exciter
Mid1 Fc [Hz] [30010.00k]
Pre EQ SetsthecenterfrequencyforMid/HighEQ1(peaking
Trim [0100] type).
SetstheEQinputlevel. Q [0.510.0]
LEQ Gain [dB] [15+15] SetsthebandwidthofMid/HighEQ1.SeeQon
page 832.
Gain [dB] [18+18]
HEQ Gain [dB] [15+15]
SetsthegainofMid/HighEQ1.
Mid2 Fc [Hz] [50020.00k]
EXCITER SetsthecenterfrequencyforMid/HighEQ2(peaking
Emphasis Frequency [070] type).
Setsthefrequencyrangetobeemphasized.See Q [0.510.0]
EmphasisFrequencyonpage 835. SetsthebandwidthofMid/HighEQ2.SeeQon
Exciter Blend [+/100] page 832.
Setstheintensity(depth)oftheExcitereffect.See Gain [dB] [18+18]

Blendonpage 835. SetsthegainofMid/HighEQ2.
OUTPUT OUTPUT
Pan [L000C064R127] Pan [L000C064R127]
Setsthestereoimage. Setsthestereoimage.
Wet/Dry [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet] Wet/Dry [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet]
Setsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedryinput. Setsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedryinput.
Source [OffTempo] Source [OffTempo]
SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry. SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
Amount [+/100] Amount [+/100]
SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry. SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry.
OD/HI-GAIN
DRIVE
DRIVEonpage 848.
935
Effect Guide

WAH
SetstheLFOspeed.
CONTROL
FLANGER
Sweep Mode [Auto, Dmod, LFO]
Delay Time [msec] [0.01350.0]
Selectsthecontrolfromautowah,modulationsource,
Setsthedelaytime.
andLFO.SeeSweepModeonpage 836.
Source [OffTempo] Depth [0100]

SelectsthemodulationsourceforthewahwhenSweep
Mode=Dmod. Feedback [+/100]
LFO Setsthefeedbackamount.SeeFeedbackon
page 864.
LFO Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
SetstheLFOspeed.
OUTPUT
Pan [L000C064R127]
WAH
Setsthestereoimage.
Frequency Bottom [0100]
Setsthelowerlimitofthewahcenterfrequency.See
FrequencyBottomonpage 837.
Frequency Top [0100] Source [OffTempo]

Setstheupperlimitofthewahcenterfrequency.See
FrequencyBottomonpage 837. Amount [+/100]
Resonance [+0+100] SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry.
Setstheresonanceamount.
Low Pass Filter [Check-box]

Phaser
Switchesthewahlowpassfilteronandoff. LFO
OUTPUT Waveform [Triangle, Sine]
Pan [L000C064R127]
Setsthestereoimage. Frequency [Hz] [0.0220.00]
SetstheLFOspeed.
Setsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedryinput. PHASER
Source [OffTempo] Manual [0100]
SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry. Setsthefrequencytowhichtheeffectisapplied.
Amount [+/100] Depth [0100]
SetsthemodulationamountforWet/Dry. SetsthedepthofLFOmodulation.
Resonance [+/100]
Chorus/Flanger
Setstheresonanceamount.SeeResonanceon
Pre EQ page 866.
Trim [0100] OUTPUT

SetstheEQinputlevel. Pan [L000C064R127]
LEQ Gain [dB] [15+15] Setsthestereoimage.
SetsthegainoftheLowEQ. Wet/Dry [Dry, 1:9999:1, Wet]
HEQ Gain [dB] [15+15] Setsthebalancebetweentheeffectandthedryinput.
SetsthegainoftheHighEQ. Source [OffTempo]
LFO SelectsamodulationsourceforWet/Dry.
Waveform [Triangle, Sine] Amount [+/100]

936
Mono/Mono Parallel 141: P4EQ // P4EQ
Times [x1x32]
Multi-tap BPM Delay
Setsthenumberofnotestospecifythedelaytimefor
MT DELAY Tap2.SeeTimesonpage 883.
BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00] Tap1 Level [0100]

SetstheTap1outputlevel.
manuallyforthisindividualeffect.SeeBPMon Feedback [+/100]
page 883.
Time Over? > [---, OVER!]
Displaysanerrormessagewhenthedelaytime
Setsthedampingamountinthehighrange.SeeHigh
exceedstheupperlimit.SeeTimeOver?R>on
Damp[%]onpage 891.
page 905.
Tap1 Base Note [r w ] OUTPUT

Selectsthetypeofnotestospecifythedelaytimefor Pan [L000C064R127]
Tap1.SeeBaseNoteonpage 883.
Setsthestereoimage.
Times [x1x32]
Setsthenumberofnotestospecifythedelaytimefor
Tap1.SeeTimesonpage 883.
Tap2 Base Note [r w ] Source [OffTempo]

Selectsthetypeofnotestospecifythedelaytimefor
Tap2.SeeBaseNoteonpage 883. Amount [+/100]
141: P4EQ // P4EQ

ThiseffectconnectstwofourbandEQunitsinparallel.
Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry Pan
independentlyforeach. Left
Fordetailedinformationontheeffectsparameters,see Trim Parametric 4Band EQ
4bandEQonpage 934.
Trim Parametric 4Band EQ
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Parametric 4Band EQ
142: P4EQ // Comp

ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQandacompressor
inparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry Pan
4bandEQonpage 934andCompressoron
page 934. Output Level
Compressor
Trim LEQ HEQ
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Compressor
937
Effect Guide
143: P4EQ // Limiter

ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.934)anda
limiter(p.934)inparallel.Thepanandeffectbalance Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry Pan
canbeadjustedindependentlyforeach. Left
4bandEQonpage 934andLimiteronpage 934.

Gain Adjust
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Limiter
144: P4EQ // Exciter

ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQandanexciterin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry Pan
4bandEQonpage 934andExciteronpage 935.
Exciter
Trim LEQ HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Exciter
145: P4EQ // OD/Hi Gain

ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQandanoverdrive
inparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry Pan
4bandEQonpage 934andOD/HIGAINon
page 935. Output Level 3 Band PEQ
Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
146: P4EQ // Wah

ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQandawahin
Wet / Dry Pan
4bandEQonpage 934andWAHonpage 936.
Wah
Envelope
LFO Sweep Mode
Right
D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Wah / Auto Wah
938
Mono/Mono Parallel 147: P4EQ // Chorus/Flanger
147: P4EQ // Chorus/Flanger

ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQandachorus/
flangerinparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbe Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry Pan
adjustedindependentlyforeach. Left
4bandEQonpage 934andChorus/Flangeron
page 936. Feedback
Trim LEQ HEQ

Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
148: P4EQ // Phaser

ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQandaphaserin
Wet / Dry Pan
4bandEQonpage 934andPhaseronpage 936.

Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
149: P4EQ // Multitap BPM Dly

ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQandamultitap
BPMdelayinparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecan Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry Pan
beadjustedindependentlyforeach. Left
4bandEQonpage 934andMultitapBPMDelay
onpage 937. Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Tempo Base Note x Times Wet / Dry Pan
Multitap BPM Delay
150: Comp // Comp

Thiseffectconnectstwocompressorsinparallel.The
panandeffectbalancecanbeadjustedindependently Compressor
Wet / Dry Pan
foreach. Left
Envelope - Control
Fordetailedinformationontheeffectsparameters,see Trim LEQ HEQ
Compressor
Compressoronpage 934. Output Level
Output Level
Compressor
Trim LEQ HEQ
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Compressor
939
Effect Guide
151: Comp // Limiter

Thiseffectconnectsacompressorandalimiterin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Compressor
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressoronpage 934andLimiteronpage 934. Output Level
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Limiter
152: Comp // Exciter

Thiseffectconnectsacompressorandanexciterin
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressoronpage 934andExciteronpage 935. Output Level
Exciter
Trim LEQ HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Exciter
153: Comp // OD/Hi Gain

Thiseffectconnectsacompressorandanoverdrivein
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressoronpage 934andOD/HIGAINon Output Level

Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
154: Comp // Wah

Thiseffectconnectsacompressorandawahin
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressoronpage 934andWAHonpage 936. Output Level
Wah
Envelope
LFO Sweep Mode
Right
D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Wah / Auto Wah
940
Mono/Mono Parallel 155: Comp // Chorus/Flanger
155: Comp // Chorus/Flanger

Thiseffectconnectsacompressorandachorus/
flangerinparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbe Compressor
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressoronpage 934andChorus/Flangeron Output Level
page 936. Feedback
Trim LEQ HEQ

Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
156: Comp // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsacompressorandaphaserin
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressoronpage 934andPhaseronpage 936. Output Level
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
157: Comp // Multitap BPM Dly

ThiseffectconnectsacompressorandamultitapBPM
delayinparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbe Compressor
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressoronpage 934andMultitapBPM Output Level
Delayonpage 937. Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Multitap BPM Delay
158: Limiter // Limiter

Thiseffectconnectstwolimitersunitsinparallel.The
panandeffectbalancecanbeadjustedindependently Limiter
Wet / Dry Pan
foreach. Left
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiteronpage 934. Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Limiter
941
Effect Guide
159: Limiter // Exciter

Thiseffectconnectsalimiterandanexciterinparallel.
Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Limiter
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiteronpage 934andExciteronpage 935. Gain Adjust
Exciter
Trim LEQ HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Exciter
160: Limiter // OD/Hi Gain

Thiseffectconnectsalimiterandanoverdrivein
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Limiter
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiteronpage 934andOD/HIGAINon Gain Adjust

Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
161: Limiter // Wah

Thiseffectconnectsalimiterandawahinparallel.The
panandeffectbalancecanbeadjustedindependently Limiter
Wet / Dry Pan
foreach. Left
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiteronpage 934andWAHonpage 936. Gain Adjust
Wah
Envelope
LFO Sweep Mode
Right
D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Wah / Auto Wah
162: Limiter // Chorus/Flanger

Thiseffectconnectsalimiterandachorus/flangerin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Limiter
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiteronpage 934andChorus/Flangeron Gain Adjust
page 936. Feedback
Trim LEQ HEQ

Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
942
Mono/Mono Parallel 163: Limiter // Phaser
163: Limiter // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsalimiterandaphaserinparallel.
Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Limiter
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiteronpage 934andPhaseronpage 936. Gain Adjust
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
164: Limiter // Mtap BPM Dly

ThiseffectconnectsalimiterandamultitapBPMdelay
inparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Limiter
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiteronpage 934andMultitapBPMDelayon Gain Adjust
page 937. Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Multitap BPM Delay
165: Exciter // Exciter

Thiseffectconnectstwoexcitersinparallel.Thepan
andeffectbalancecanbeadjustedindependentlyfor Exciter
Wet / Dry Pan
each. Left

Exciter
Exciteronpage 935.
Exciter
Trim LEQ HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Exciter
166: Exciter // OD/Hi Gain

Thiseffectconnectsanexciterandanoverdrivein
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Exciter
Wet / Dry Pan

Exciter
Exciteronpage 935andOD/HIGAINon
Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
943
Effect Guide
167: Exciter // Wah

Thiseffectconnectsanexciterandawahinparallel.
Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Exciter
Wet / Dry Pan

Exciter
Exciteronpage 935andWAHonpage 936.
Wah
Envelope
LFO Sweep Mode
Right
D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Wah / Auto Wah
168: Exciter // Chorus/Flanger

Thiseffectconnectsanexciterandachorus/flangerin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Exciter
Wet / Dry Pan

Exciter
Exciteronpage 935andChorus/Flangeron
page 936. Feedback
Trim LEQ HEQ

Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
169: Exciter // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsanexciterandaphaserinparallel.
Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Exciter
Wet / Dry Pan

Exciter
Exciteronpage 935andPhaseronpage 936.
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
170: Exciter // Mtap BPM Dly

ThiseffectconnectsanexciterandamultitapBPM
delayinparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbe Exciter
Wet / Dry Pan

Exciter
Exciteronpage 935andMultitapBPMDelayon
page 937. Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Multitap BPM Delay
944
Mono/Mono Parallel 171: OD/Hi Gain // OD/Hi Gain
171: OD/Hi Gain // OD/Hi Gain

Thiseffectconnectstwooverdrivesinparallel.Thepan
andeffectbalancecanbeadjustedindependentlyfor Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry Pan
each. Left
Fordetailedinformationontheeffectsparameters,see Overdrive / Hi-Gain

Driver
OD/HIGAINonpage 935. Output Level 3 Band PEQ
Output Level 3 Band PEQ

Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
172: OD/Hi Gain // Wah

Thiseffectconnectsanoverdriveandawahinparallel.
Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry Pan

Driver
OD/HIGAINonpage 935andWAHonpage 936. Output Level 3 Band PEQ
Wah
Envelope
LFO Sweep Mode
Right
D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Wah / Auto Wah
173: OD/Hi Gain // Cho/Flanger

Thiseffectconnectsanoverdriveandachorus/flanger
inparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry Pan

Driver
OD/HIGAINonpage 935andChorus/Flangeron Output Level 3 Band PEQ
page 936. Feedback
Trim LEQ HEQ

Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
174: OD/Hi Gain // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsanoverdriveandaphaserin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry Pan

Driver
OD/HIGAINonpage 935andPhaseron Output Level 3 Band PEQ
page 936. Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
945
Effect Guide
175: OD/Hi Gain // Mt BPM Dly

ThiseffectconnectsanoverdriveandamultitapBPM
delayinparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbe Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry Pan

Driver
OD/HIGAINonpage 935andMultitapBPM Output Level 3 Band PEQ
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Multitap BPM Delay
176: Wah // Wah

Thiseffectconnectstwowahsinparallel.Thepanand
effectbalancecanbeadjustedindependentlyforeach. Wah / Auto Wah
D-mod
Fordetailedinformationontheeffectsparameters,see Left
Wet / Dry Pan
WAHonpage 936. LFO Sweep Mode

Envelope
Wah
Wah
Envelope
LFO Sweep Mode
Right
D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Wah / Auto Wah
177: Wah // Chorus/Flanger

Thiseffectconnectsawahandachorus/flangerin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Wah / Auto Wah
independentlyforeach. D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Left
Fordetailedinformationontheeffectsparameters,see LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
WAHonpage 936andChorus/Flangeron Wah
page 936.
Feedback
Trim LEQ HEQ

Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
178: Wah // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsawahandaphaserinparallel.The
panandeffectbalancecanbeadjustedindependently Wah / Auto Wah
foreach. D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Left
Envelope
WAHonpage 936andPhaseronpage 936. Wah
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
946
Mono/Mono Parallel 179: Wah // Multitap BPM Dly
179: Wah // Multitap BPM Dly

ThiseffectconnectsawahandamultitapBPMdelayin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Wah / Auto Wah
independentlyforeach. D-mod Wet / Dry Pan
Left
Envelope
WAHonpage 936andMultitapBPMDelayon Wah
page 937.
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Multitap BPM Delay
180: Cho/Flange // Cho/Flanger

Thiseffectconnectstwochorus/flangersinparallel.
Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Chorus / Flanger
Wet / Dry Pan
LFO: Tri / Sine
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flangeronpage 936. Trim LEQ HEQ
Feedback
Feedback
Trim LEQ HEQ

Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
181: Cho/Flange // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectsachorus/flangerandaphaserin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Chorus / Flanger
Wet / Dry Pan
LFO: Tri / Sine
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flangeronpage 936andPhaseron Trim LEQ HEQ
page 936. Feedback
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
182: Cho/Flange // Mt BPM Dly

Thiseffectconnectsachorus/flangerandamultitap
BPMdelayinparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecan Chorus / Flanger
Wet / Dry Pan
beadjustedindependentlyforeach. Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flangeronpage 936andMultitapBPM Trim LEQ HEQ
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Multitap BPM Delay
947
Effect Guide
183: Phaser // Phaser

Thiseffectconnectstwophasersinparallel.Thepan
andeffectbalancecanbeadjustedindependentlyfor Phaser
Wet / Dry Pan
each. Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Phaseronpage 936.
Resonance
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine

Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
184: Phaser // Mtap BPM Dly

ThiseffectconnectsaphaserandamultitapBPMdelay
inparallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Phaser
Wet / Dry Pan
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Phaseronpage 936andMultitapBPMDelayon
page 937. Resonance
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Multitap BPM Delay
185: Mt.BPM Dly // Mt.BPM Dly

ThiseffectconnectstwomultitapBPMdelaysin
parallel.Thepanandeffectbalancecanbeadjusted Multitap BPM Delay
independentlyforeach. BPM
Base Note x Times
Fordetailedinformationontheeffectsparameters,see Left
MultitapBPMDelayonpage 937. High Damp (1)

Delay (2)
Feedback
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp (1)
Right
Multitap BPM Delay
948
KARMA GE guide
About the KARMA GE guide

ThissectionofthemanualexplainstheGEparameters Furthermore,theKARMArelatedparametersinpages
oftheKARMAfunctionbuiltintotheOASYS, 7079ofeachmodemayalsofunctiondifferently,
organizedaccordingtothegroupsthatmakeupthe ornotatall,dependingonthesettingsoftheseGE
GeneratedEffects. parameters.
TheOASYSprovidesmorethantwothousandpreset SomeoftheinternalparametersofeachGEare
GEs(GeneratedEffects).ForeachGE,uptothirtytwo displayedintheVoiceNameList.
ofthemorethanfourhundredinternalGEparameters InordertoexplaintheGEs,someoftheexamplesin
havebeenselectedforoptimalcontrolfromthe thisdocumentmentiontheseinternalparameters,even
OASYS. thoughtheycannotbeviewedorchangedonthe
TheGEparametersandrangesthatcanbecontrolled OASYS.
willdifferforeachGE.
Illustrations in the GE guide
SomeGEparametersarerelatedtootherparameters,
andareaffectedbythem.Inthiscase,theparameters Someoftheillustrationsinthisdocumentinclude
thatareproducingtheeffectmaynotalwaysbe displaysofdata,suchaspatterngrids,whicharenot
displayed,sincetheymayalreadybepresetforthat shownontheOASYSLCDscreen.
GE.
How to read the GE Guide

TheGEs(GeneratedEffects)areorganizedintofifteen Forexampleinthecaseof01.Rhythm:Swing%,the
groups.EachgrouphasGEparameters.Formore groupisRhythmGroupandtheparameterisSwing
information,seeKARMAArchitecture(Diagram)on %.
page 952. TheexplanationforSwing%isgivenonp.13
The75:GERealTimeParameterspageshowsthe RhythmGroupSwing%.
groupname,parametername,andparametervalueof TheparametervalueisdisplayedbyValueatthe
theGEparameters. rightoftheparametername.
Youcanusethe75:GERealTimeParameterspageto TheRealTimeControlRange(minimumand
checkthegroupnameandparameternameoftheGE maximumvaluesthattheparametercanbevaried
parameteryouwishtolookup,andthenfinditinthe betweenbyrealtimecontrolordirectediting)is
GEGuide. displayedbyMinandMaxnexttotheValue
HeresanexamplefromProgrammode. field.
AccesstheProgram75:GERealTimeparameters WhenloadingaGE,thedefaultvalueandediting
page,anddisplaytheGEparametersintheLCD rangeoftheparameterispresetforeachGE.
screen.Formoreinformation,see75:GERealTime DependingontheselectedGE,thesameGEparameter
Parametersonpage 113. mayhaveadifferentdefaultvalueandadifferent
TheGEparametersdisplayedintheLCDscreenshow editingrange.
thegroupnameandparametername.
How GE parameter names are displayed

ForsomeGEparameters,thefollowinginformationis CCsGroup
showninadditiontotheparametername. WaveSeqGroup
Parameter name [Phase] Displayexample
ThisisshownformostGEparameterswithinthe
followinggroups(somethatarenotrelatedtophases [Phase]
willnotshowthisinformation):
PhaseGroup [1]:Phase1iscontrolled
RhythmGroup [2]:Phase2iscontrolled
DurationGroup [B]:Bothphases1and2arecontrolled
IndexGroup CCs: parameter name #No. #No.
ClusterGroup ParametersoftheCCsGroupalsoindicatetheMIDI
VelocityGroup messagethatarecontrolledbyCCAandCCB.
949
KARMA GE guide
Displayexample
[Phase] #No. #No.
000125:CC#000CC#125
PB:PitchBend
Env: parameter name [Env] #No. #No. #No.

ParametersoftheEnv(Envelope)Groupalsoindicate
thebeingcontrolledbythatGEparameter,and
indicatetheparameterorMIDImessagethatis
controlledbytheEnvelope.
Displayexample
[Env] #No.
[Env]:
[1]:Envelope1iscontrolled
[1,2]:Envelopes1and2arecontrolled
[A]:Envelopes1,2and3arecontrolled
#No.:
VE:Velocity
TA:TempoAbsolute
TR:TempoRelative
PB:PitchBend
DU:Duration
RT:RepeatTime
000121:CC#000121
Drum: parameter name [Pat]

ParametersoftheDrumGroupalsoindicatethedrum
patternbeingcontrolledbythatGEparameter.(Some
parametersintheDrumGroupthatarenotrelatedto
theindividualDrumPatternswillnotdisplaythis
information.)
Displayexample
[Pat]
[1]:Pattern1iscontrolled
[1,2]:Patterns1and2arecontrolled
[A]:Allpatternsarecontrolled
[B]:Patterns1and2(displayedonlyforLinktoNext)
arecontrolled
950
About KARMA Overview
About KARMA
Overview
KARMAstandsforKayAlgorithmicRealtimeMusic Forexample,youcancreatespectacularcascadesof
Architecture,namedafteritsinventor,StephenKay. complexinterweavingnotes,technoarpeggiosand
TheKARMAfunctiongeneratesMIDIdata,using effects,denserhythmicandmelodictextures,natural
manydifferentcomplexalgorithmsseamlessly soundingglissandosforacousticinstrumentprograms,
integratedtoprovideapowerfulmusicgeneration guitarstrummingandfingerpickingsimulations,
engine.Basedonthenotesandchordsyouplay, randomeffects,autoaccompanimenteffects,gliding
KARMAgeneratesphrasesandpatternsinrealtime, andswoopingportamentoandpitchbendeffects,and
generatingnotjustnotesbutMIDIcontroldataaswell. newsounddesignpossibilities.KARMAletsyou
TheKARMAarchitectureallowsthevarious producephrasesandpatternsfarbeyondthelevel
algorithmstobereconfiguredandvariedinrealtime, providedbyconventionalarpeggiatorsorpattern
asyouplaythem. playbackfunctions.
Theory Of Operation
Aperformanceofamusicalphrasecanbethoughtof thealgorithmiscalled.Ingeneral,thefirstmethodis
ashavingmanydifferentattributeswhichdetermine staticandrepetitive,whilethesecondmethodcannot
theoveralleffectoftheresultingmusic.Forexample,a bemodifiedinrealtime.
musicalphrasehasarhythmattribute,whichisthe KARMAcombinesthealgorithmicdiversityofthe
rhythmwithwhichthenotesarebeingplayed.The secondmethodwiththerealtimecontroland
numberofnotes(chords)beingplayedatthesame immediateaccessofthefirstmethodtocreateanew
timeinvariousplacesofthemusicalphrasecouldbe formofinteractivegroovegeneration,wheretheuser
calledaclusterattribute.Thevelocity(accent)with isinmoredirectcontrol,sincewhatisproducedis
whichthenotesareplayedisavelocityattribute. directlyrelatedtowhichnotesarepressed.
Thespatiallocationinastereofieldwherethenotes Furthermore,extensiveaspectsoftherhythm,velocity,
areplayedisapanattribute,etc. chordsizeandotherparameterscanberandomly
Typically,musicthathasbeenrecordedorsequenced variedinrealtimetoallowtheusertocontrolthe
hasalloftheseattributespredeterminedandfixedin complexityanddensityoftheresultingperformance.
relationtoeachother.Aspecificnoteistobeplayed Whetheryouareplayingprogramsorcombinations,
withaspecificrhythmicvalueforaspecificperiodof performingwiththeKARMAControlssliders,
time,ataspecificvolumelevel,ataspecificlocationin switches,anddrum/chordpads,givingalive
astereofield,withthesoundofaspecificmusical performance,orrecordingnewmusicusingthe
instrument,andtheserelationshipsremainfixedno onboardsequencer,youcantakefulladvantageofthe
matterhowmanytimesyouplaybackthe KARMAfunctionatanytime.
performance.Forexample,inmostifnotallauto
accompanimentinstruments,toachieveavariationin
theaccompanimentpatterntheinstrumentessentially
switchestoadifferentprerecordedsequenceof
musicalevents(againwithspecificrelationshipsthat
arefixedinthedata).
InKARMA,everyaspectofamusicalphrasehasbeen
separatedintoindependentlycontrollableattributes.
Eachoftheseattributesiscontrolledbyaseparate
groupofparameters,whichcanbeindividuallyvaried
orchangedingroupsbytheuserinrealtimeasthe
musicisbeinggenerated;orchangedallatoncewith
theselectionofaprogramorcombination.
KARMAcanalsobeusedtogenerateinfinitely
variablerandomizedgroovesandaccompaniment
backings.Upuntilnowtherehavebeentwobasic
typesofbackingtrackgeneration.Thetraditional
methodusedinallautoaccompanimentkeyboardsisa
systemwhichanalyzesnotesplayedonakeyboard
(chordrecognition)andthenplaysbackpatterns
storedinmemorythroughtranspositiontables.The
secondmethodistheoneusedbysomealgorithmic
softwareproductsthatcreatenewpatternseachtime
951
952
Program : KARMA Module A GE Group / Parameters
Combination/Sequencer: KARMA Module A/B/C/D (Generated Effect)
GE DATA to be
KARMA Module read out of
KARMA
GE Number Note Series
Module A
KARMA GE guide
KARMA
GE Parameters Phase
Module B
KARMA Note
KARMA Module Parameters Rhythm Phase 1 Phase 2
Module C Series
KARMA
Duration Phase 1 Phase 2 Drum
Module D
Pattern 1
Index Phase 1 Phase 2

Drum
Real-Time Parameters Dynamic MIDI Pattern 2
KARMA Architecture (Diagram)
Cluster Phase 1 Phase 2
Drum
Pattern 3
GE Parameters Velocity Phase 1 Phase 2
KARMA REALTIME CONTROLS
CCs/Pitch Phase 1 Phase 2
WaveSeq Phase 1 Phase 2
Env 1
Envelope Env 2
Env 3
Repeat
Bend
Direct Index
Drum
GE (Generated Effect) Group Overview
GE (Generated Effect) Group
Overview
ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA generatedinsynchronizationwiththephraseor
modulearegeneratedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect). pattern,makingitpossibletocreatephrasesand
Basedonnotedatafromthekeyboardorexternal patternsinwhichthetonecolorandnotepitches
MIDIdevice,theGEusesvariousinternalparameters changeindependently.
tocontrolhowthenotedatawillbedeveloped,and Thisinstrumentcontainsover2000presetGEsthatcan
howrhythm,chordstructure,andvelocityetc.willbe beusedwithawiderangeofinstruments,playing
controlledtogenerateaphraseorpattern.MIDI styles,andmusicalgenres
controlchangesandpitchbenddatacanalsobe
GE Global Parameters
GE Type [03] 3: Real-Time
Differentfromtheprevioustypesinthattheactual
0: Generated-Riff 2: Generated-Drum notesgivenasinputsourcematerialareusedasa
1: Generated-Gated 3: Real-Time startingpoint,fromwhicheffectsaregeneratedover
timeaccordingtotimecalculations.Examplesinclude
Selectsoneofseveraldifferentoverallalgorithm glissandosandarpeggioswhichstartwiththenote(s)
configurationsforthecurrentGeneratedEffect.This givenasinput(MelodicRepeat),andAutoBendingan
settingdeterminessomebasicmodesofoperation,and inputnoteacertainamountortoanothernote.
whichparametersareavailablewithinthevariousGE
Groups. Gate Type [04]
0: Generated-Riff 0: Vel - retrigger ALL input notes with Velocity
Producesriffs,arpeggios,andchordclustersbasedon 1: Vel CP retrigger Cluster Pattern notes with Velocity
thenotesgivenasinputsourcematerial.Thenotesare
2: CC [T]-sustain notes; retrigger only if Phase Transpose is
expanded,transposed,replicated,andotherwise
different
alteredtoformaNoteSeriesbytheparametersinthe
NoteSeriesGroup.Effectsaregeneratedbasedonthe 3: CC [1]-sustain notes; retrigger when entering Phase1
RhythmPatternasitrelatestotheclocksourceor 4: CC [2]-sustain notes; retrigger when entering Phase2
tempoenvelope. 5: CC [A]-sustain notes; retrigger when entering any Phase
1: Generated-Gated SelectsoneofseveraldifferentGateTypesettings.Two
ANoteSeriesiscreatedasin0:GeneratedRiff Veloptionsretriggerthenotesrepeatedly,whilethe
above,butonlyaportionoftheNoteSeriesis CCoptionsallowsustainednotestobechoppedor
retriggeredaccordingtotheparameters.Effectsare steppedwithCCValues.
generatedbasedontheRhythmPatternasitrelatesto
theclocksourceortempoenvelope.Thenotes AvailableonlywhenGEType(+p.953)=1:
themselvescanbegeneratedrepetitivelyinseveral GeneratedGated.
differentways,orasasustainedsetofnoteswhichis 0: Vel - retrigger ALL input notes with Velocity
thenslicedanddicedbyaselectedcontrollervalue. Theactualnotesgivenasinputsourcematerial(allof
Thiscanbeusedtosimulateseveraltypesofpopular them)aregeneratedrepetitivelyasnoteonsandnote
technoeffects,suchasgatingasynthpadwithahihat offsaccordingtotheparameters.Inotherwords,ifyou
trackandanexternalaudiogate/compressor.ThisGE playeightnotes,alleightnoteswillberepeatedly
TypecanalsobeusedtosimulatetheKorgTriton generatedatonce.Thisproducesagatedeffect
Arpeggiator,alongwithGateType=VelCP, whereeachclusterofnotespossessestheattack
explainedbelow. portionoftheprogrambeingused,asifsomeonewas
2: Generated-Drum repeatedlystrikingakeyboardveryquickly.AVelocity
Usesspecialpatternsofpredeterminedpitchesrather Patterncanbeusedtoimpartdifferentvelocitiestothe
thantheNoteSeriestogeneratenotes.Thesecanbe clustersofnotes.TheClusterPatternGridisdisabled
usednotonlytocreateDrumPatterns,butalsoto andhasnoeffectonhowmanynotesaregenerated.
createcontrolledmusicalpatterns.Effectsare 1: Vel CP retrigger Cluster Pattern notes with Velocity
generatedbasedontheRhythmPatternasitrelatesto TheClusterPatternGridisusedtoindicatewhich
theclocksourceortempoenvelope.Riffsbasedonthe notesaretobegeneratedfromaportionoftheNote
notesintheNoteSeriescanbeappliedaspitchbend, Seriescorrespondingtothenumberofinputnotes
tocreatewavesequenceandotheruniqueeffects,and played.Inotherwords,thetenrowsoftheValue
alsotocontrolotherthingssuchasthelengthof portionoftheClusterPatterngridallowyoutospecify
Phases. whichofuptotennotesyoumayhaveplayedaretobe
generated.IfastepoftheClusterPatternhasrows0,2
and4selected,thenthefirst,third,andfifthnotesin
953
KARMA GE guide
theNoteSerieswillbegeneratedatthatstep.What Gate CC Number [1, 0127]

thesenotesactuallyarewillbeinfluencedbytheNote
SeriesandInputSortsettings.Thiscanbeusedto 1: Off 0126: MIDI CC #00126
simulatetheoperationoftheKorgTritonArpeggiator, SelectwhichCCwillbetransmittedinsteadofthe
forexample.Notethatfillingalltenrowsofeach noteonsandnoteoffsofthegeneratednotes.For
columnisessentiallythesameasusing0:Velabove. example,forchoppingeffects,setto11:11(CC#11).
25: CC - 4 different CC Gate Types 1: Off
WhenoneofthefourCCGateTypesischose,the NoMIDICCsaregenerated.
GateCCNumberparameterspecifiesaMIDI
ControlChangeMessage(CC)tobeusedinplaceof 0126: MIDI CC #00126
noteonsandnoteoffs.Theactualnotesgivenasinput ThespecifiedMIDICCisgeneratedinplaceofthe
sourcematerialarethengeneratedasnoteonsonly Modulesnoteonsandnoteoffs.Noteoffsare
onceatthebeginningoftheeffect;therestofthenote generatedasavalueof0,whilenoteonsare
onsareturnedintothespecifiedCCcontrollervalue generatedasavalueequaltothevelocityofthenote
withthesamevalueasthevelocityofthenoteon;the on.
noteoffsareturnedintoCCvaluesof0.Essentially, AvailableonlywhenGateTypeisoneofthe4CC
thismeansthatapadwillbesustained,havingthe options.
attackportiontriggeredonlyonce.Forexample,ifthe
selectedCCwas#11(Expression)or#07(Volume),the Force Mono [0, 1]
padwillberepeatedlyturnedonandoff,simulating 0: Off 1: On
thepopulartechnoeffectofgatingasynthpadwitha
hihattrackandanexternalaudiogate/compressor.In SelectswhethertheGEwilloperatepolyphonically
KARMAhowever,theVelocityPatterncanbeusedto accordingtoitsotherinternalsettings,orwhetherthe
controlthevalueofeachCCthatisgeneratedfora generationofmorethanonenoteatatimeand
noteon(thevolumeofeachslice),andtheDuration overlappingdurationswillbesuppressed.
Pattern(+p.970)canbeusedtocontrolthedurationof
eachslice. 0: Off
Noteswillbegeneratedasexpectedaccordingtothe
OtherCCscanproduceotherinterestingsteppedand internalsettingsoftheGE.Polyphonicclustersofnotes
wavesequencelikeeffects.Forexample,usingCC#74 maybegeneratedaccordingtotheClusterPattern,
tocontrolFilterCutoffFrequencycanproduce repeatednotesmaybegeneratedontopofothernotes,
interestingSample&Holdeffects. andthedurationsofnotesmayoverlapaccordingto
2: CC [T]-sustain notes; retrigger only if Phase Durationsettings.
Transpose is different 1: On
WhenthisfirstCCoptionischosen,thepadwill ThenormalbehaviorofcertainaspectsoftheGEwill
onlybetriggeredmanually(i.e.whenyoustrikethe beoverridden,suppressingthegenerationofmultiple
keyboard),oronlyifthereisaPhaseChangeandthe notesatthesametime.Anyclustersbeinggenerated
PhaseTranspose(+p.10)isdifferent,requiringthatthe willberemoved,essentiallygeneratingwhatwouldbe
generatednotesbetransposed.Therefore,ifthePhase thesinglelowestnoteinthecluster.Anynotesfrom
Transposesarethesame,thepadwillneverretrigger MelodicRepeatthathappentobegeneratedontopof
unlessyoutriggeritmanually. anothernotewillbesuppressed.Multiplerepeated
3: CC [1]-sustain notes; retrigger when entering Phase1 noteshappeningatthesameinstancewillonlyplay
SameasCC[T]above,withtheexceptionthatthe oneofthem.Durationsofgeneratednoteswillnotbe
padwillberetriggeredwhenstrikingthekeyboard, allowedtooverlap,butmayonlyextendupuntilthe
andeverytimethatthePhasePatternentersastep nextnotetobegenerated.Anynotewillcutoffthe
containingPhase1.Youcanusethistohavethenotes previousnotesdurationifitissustaining.Theresultis
retriggeredoccasionallywhilemovingthroughthe thatonlyonenoteatatimewillbegeneratedor
PhasePattern. sustainingatanygivenmoment.
Note:WhenpolyphonicGEsareappliedto
4: CC [2]-sustain notes; retrigger when entering Phase2 monophonicprograms,theresultsmaybestrangedue
SameasCC[T]above,withtheexceptionthatthe totheoverlappingnotesanddurations.Byturningon
padwillberetriggeredwhenstrikingthekeyboard, ForceMono,anyGEcanbeappliedtoamonophonic
andeverytimethatthePhasePatternentersastep programandmadetosoundgood.However,itcan
containingPhase2.Youcanusethistohavethenotes alsosoundgoodasaneffectonpolyphonicprograms,
retriggeredoccasionallywhilemovingthroughthe becauseitcansimplifyadenseGEinaninteresting
PhasePattern. soundingway.Forexample,youcanturnacomping
5: CC [A]-sustain notes; retrigger when entering any keyboardpartintoasinglenotebassline.
Phase Note:ForceMonoandRhythmGroup:Humanize
SameasCC[T]above,withtheexceptionthatthe
WhenForceMonois1:On,theeffectsofRhythm:
padwillberetriggeredwhenstrikingthekeyboard,
HumanizeareremovedifMelodicRepeatisbeing
andeverytimethatthePhasePatterncausesaPhase
usedatthesametime.AGEcanbestoredwitha
Change.Youcanusethistohavethenotesretriggered
normalamountofHumanize,sothatitcanbeused
occasionallywhilemovingthroughthePhasePattern.
thatwaywiththeForceMonoparameteroff,and
thenForceMonocanbeturnedoninrealtime.The
954
GE (Generated Effect) Group GE Global Parameters
reasonforthisisthattheForceMonoeffectusesthe
firstnotearrivingwithinasectionoftime(i.e.16th
notes)towindowouttherestofthenotes.Ifthe
underlyingmainnotesareslightlylateasaresultof
Humanize,itispossibleforoverlappingrepeated
notestoarriveslightlybeforethem,andthenthemain
notesgetmaskedoutwhiletherepeatednotestake
precedence.SinceHumanizeisarandomlyvaried
amount,thisresultsinacompletelyunpredictable
sequenceofnotesinthiscase,thatcannotproduce
consistentresults.ByremovingtheHumanize
amountwhenForceMonoisonwithMelodic
Repeat,theresultisconsistentandpredictable.
Withdrums,whenForceMonois1:On,Humanize
isremovedevenifnotusingrepeats.Thisisbecause
eachnoteinacolumnofadrumpatternisaffected
individuallybytheHumanizeparameter,andthe
ForceMonoeffectrequiresthemtoalllineuponthe
sameinstantinordertoallowonlyoneofthemtobe
produced.
Note:ForceMonoandClusterGroup:Strum
WhenForceMonois1:On,theeffectsofthe
Strumparameterareremoved,sincenoclusterscan
begenerated.
955
KARMA GE guide
Note Series Group
Overview
TheNoteSeriesGroupcontrolsthecreationofa ThediagramontheleftshowsReplications(+p.957)
NoteSeriesinmemory,whichisthefoundationofa of400(4.0)withanInterval(+p.958)of+12,
largepercentageofGeneratedEffects.TheNoteSeries producinga16noteNoteSeriesfromthefourinput
isacollectionofpitchesandcorrespondingvelocities, notes(4x4.0=16).EachReplicationoftheoriginalfour
createdfrominitialnotescomingfrominputsource notesisshiftedby+12semitonesfromtheprevious
material(i.e.akeyboard,orsequencedatawhichis Replication,yieldingafouroctavearpeggio.
beingusedasinput).Thevariousparameterscontrol ThediagramontherightshowsReplicationsof350
howtheseinitialnotesarereplicated,shifted,sorted, (3.5)withanIntervalof+5,producinga14noteNote
filtered,andotherwisearrangedintotheNoteSeries. Seriesfromthefourinputnotes(4x3.5=14).Each
TheNoteSeriesisthenusedasthebasiccollectionof Replicationoftheoriginalfournotesisshiftedby+5
pitchesandvelocitiesfromwhichnotesaregenerated, semitonesfromthepreviousReplication,withthetwo
ascontrolledbymostoftheotherparametersofthe notesattheendbeingproducedbyahalfReplication.
GeneratedEffect.
Parameters
ThefollowingparameterscreateandchangetheNote 1: Scalic
Series. TheNoteSeriescreatedinmemorywillbeproduced
WhenGEType(+p.953)=2:GeneratedDrum, basedonchordanalysisoftheinputsourcematerial;
theeffectofchangingmostoftheseparametersis thenagroupofnotescorrespondingtotheanalyzed
onlyapparentiftheNoteSeriesisbeingappliedas chordwillbeusedinsteadoftheactualnotes.The
pitchbendinthePhaseGroup/BendGroup,orriff initialoctaveisbasedonthelowestnotereceivedas
lengthisbeingusedintheDrumGroup. inputsourcematerial.Thiscanbeusedsothatone
fingerchordsproducescalicriffs,ortosupplynotes
Thefollowing3parameterswillhaveaneffecton thatarenotpresentinthesourcematerial.
whenPhaseschangeifthePhaseLengthMode
(+p.961)issetto0:ACActual:Replications 2: Scalic 2
(+p.957),FilterSteps(FilterTemplate),andFilter Sameas1:Scalic(above),exceptanattemptismadeto
Dupes.SeePhaseGroup. keepasevennotescaleforeachchordtype.Inother
words,therewillbemorepassingtones,anditwill
Note Type [09] soundmoremodalinnature.Foragoodexampleof
0: Regular 4: Whole Tone 8: Tritones
thedifference,playa4notediminishedchordwith
eachone.Thiscanbeofuseforcreatingabasslinethat
1: Scalic 5: Diminished 9: Fifths ismorepredictablewhenchangingchords,orjazzy
2: Scalic 2 6: Augmented soloingkindsofeffects.
3: Chromatic 7: Fourths
3: Chromatic
Selectsoneofseveralmodesforsupplyingtheinitial The12stepsofachromaticscalewillbeusedasinput
notesfromwhichtheNoteSeriesiscreated. sourcematerial.ThefirstnoteoftheNoteSeriesis
basedonthelowestnotereceivedasinputsource
0: Regular material.
TheNoteSeriescreatedinmemorywillbeproduced
basedontheactualnotesgivenasinputsource
material(i.e.akeyboard,orsequencedatawhichis
beingusedasinput).
956
Note Series Group Parameters
4: Whole Tone Input Transpose [48+48]

The6stepsofawholetonescalewillbeusedasinput Allowstheinputnotestobeshiftedbyaspecified
sourcematerial.ThefirstnoteoftheNoteSeriesis numberofsemitonespriortothecreationoftheNote
basedonthelowestnotereceivedasinputsource Series.Thetransposedinputnotesarethenreplicated
material. andshiftedaccordingtotheotherparameters
5: Diminished describedbelow.Thiscanbeused,inconjunctionwith
The4stepsofadiminishedchordwillbeusedasinput otherNoteSeriesParameters,toshiftandfliptheNote
sourcematerial.ThefirstnoteoftheNoteSeriesis Seriesintootherconfigurationsorinversionsinreal
basedonthelowestnotereceivedasinputsource time.
material.
Inversion [24+24]
6: Augmented Allowsdifferentinversionsoftheinputnotes(after
The3stepsofanaugmentedchordwillbeusedas theyaresorted)priortocreationoftheNoteSeries.For
inputsourcematerial.ThefirstnoteoftheNoteSeries example,ifthenotes{C,E,G,B}werereceivedinthat
isbasedonthelowestnotereceivedasinputsource orderasachordandInversionwas1,thenthenotes
material. wouldbeshiftedto{E,G,B,C8va}beforecreationof
theNoteSeries(thusplayingthe1stinversion).Thisis
7: Fourths
especiallyusefulforsettingmultiplemodulestoplay
3stepsofstackedfourthswillbeusedasinputsource
differentinversionsofthesameeffect,suchasnatural
material.ThefirstnoteoftheNoteSeriesisbasedon
harpglissandosorriffsinharmony.Normallyused
thelowestnotereceivedasinputsourcematerial.
withInputSortsetto0:Upor1:Down.Theeffectof
8: Tritones thisparameterwhenInputSortis2:Actualor3:
2stepsofatritone(augmentedfourth)willbeusedas Randomislesspredictable,althoughpotentially
inputsourcematerial.ThefirstnoteoftheNoteSeries usefulforsomeeffects.
isbasedonthelowestnotereceivedasinputsource
Replications [04000]
material.
04000: 0.040.0
9: Fifths
2steps(rootandfifth)willbeusedasinputsource Setshowmanytimestheinputnoteswillbereplicated
material.ThefirstnoteoftheNoteSeriesisbasedon accordingtotheInterval.Forexample,3
thelowestnotereceivedasinputsourcematerial. ReplicationswithanIntervalof12willgiveyoua
Note:IfRootPositionisOn,thenthepitchesofthe 3octavearpeggio.Canbeafractiontoachieveonlya
NoteSerieswillbeshiftedsothatdifferentinversions portionofthelastreplication.Thevalueisrepresented
ofthesamechordproducethesamesetofpitches.For asbeingx100so350is3.5,475is4.75,etc.Notethatif
moreinformation,seeRootPositiononpage 107. GEType(+p.953)=1:GeneratedGated,thishasno
audibleeffectonthepitchesoftheGeneratedEffect;
Input Sort [04] howeverthisstillaffectstheoverallrangeofthe
availablenotesforDirectIndexingoftheNoteSeries
0: Up 1: Down 2: Actual 3: Random
(describedelsewhere).
Setshowthenotes(andcorrespondingvelocities)from
Max [1255]
theinputsourcematerialarearrangedpriortocreating
theNoteSeries. SetsanoverallfinalplaceintheNoteSeries,beyond
whichindexeswillneverbechosenduringplayback,
0: Up evenifothersettingsmightallowit.Thisisaplayback
Notesarearrangedfromlowesttohighest. onlyparameterwhichdoesnotaffectthecreationof
theNoteSeries.Thisisonewaytochangetheoverall
1: Down
lengthoftheNoteSeriesinrealtime.
Notesarearrangedfromhighesttolowest.
2: Actual Symmetry [0, 1]

Notesareleftintheorderreceived.WithaNote 0: Off 1: On
TypeofRegular,theNoteSerieswillthereforebe
capableofbeingcreatedinmanydifferentorders,since Whensetto1:On,additionalnotesareextrapolatedatthe
theorderoftheinputnotescanvary.Withanyother endoftheNoteSeriesbeyondthenumberspecifiedby
type,theinputnotesarenotactuallyusedandascale theReplicationssetting,whichareaccessedwhen
issubstitutedinstead(asexplainedabove).Forthese clustersaregeneratedinthatareaoftheNoteSeries,or
NoteTypes,usingActualwillresultinadifferent whentheIndexGroupDouble/Invertparameters
orderthanUporDown,butitwillbethesame (+p.975)areused.Thisprimarilyallowsdifferentcluster
ordereachtimeforeachchordtype. sizestobeusedwithoutaffectingthelengthandshapeof
theresultingriff.ThisinteractswithClusterPatternsand
3: Random theIndexPatternClusterAdvanceMode,discussed
Notesarerandomlyarranged.Thisguaranteesthe elsewhere.Notethatwhenthisis0:Off,clusterswill
initialorderwillbedifferenteachtime. wraparoundattheendofaphase,orcausePhase
Changesorcycling.Doublednotescausedbytheuseof
theDoubleparameterintheIndexGroupwillalsobe
wrappedaroundatthetopoftheNoteSerieswhenthisis
off.
957
KARMA GE guide
0: Off Voicing [08]

ThenotesdeterminedbytheRepetitionssetting 0: Closed 3: Open2A 6: Open3B
(describedabove)areusedastherangewithinwhich
1: Open1A 4: Open2B 7: Open4A
togeneratenotes.
2: Open1B 5: Open3A 8: Open4B
1: On
Selectsoneofseveraloptionsforspreadingoutthe
Extranotesmaybeextrapolatedattheendoftherange
inputnotesbeforecreatingtheNoteSeries.Thiscanbe
dependingontheclustersizeatthatpoint.Theresult
usedtowidenthevoicing,createguitarlikevoicings,
willbeawideningoftheapparentrangeoftheriff.
orproduceinterestingvariations.
Interval [24+24]
0: Closed
Setsthenumberofsemitonestooffseteachreplication TheNoteSeriesiscreatedwithnofurthermodification
oftheinputnotesby.Forexample,ifsetto+12or12, fromthissetting.
theArpeggiowillrepeatinoctaves(mostnormal).If
setto2,andReplicationsto3,thenplayingaCMaj 1: Open 1A8: Open4B
{C,E,G}willproducedaCMaj,thenDMaj{D,F#,A}, TheNoteSerieshascertainnotesshiftedupbyan
thenEMaj{E,G#,B}aseachreplicationisshiftedbya octaveasitiscreated,thenmaybereordered
wholetone.Settingsotherthanmultiplesof12are accordingtothesettingofInputSort(+p.957).Can
extremelyusefulinconjunctionwithChordShift, beusedtocreatedifferenttypesofwidervoiced
describedbelow,sothatatonalnotesareshiftedto chordsforsimulatingguitarorstringsectionvoicings.
musicallycorrectpitches.
Filter Dupes [02]
Chord Shift [02] 0: Off 1: Adjacent 2: All
0: Off 1: Scalic 2: Scalic2
AllowsduplicatenotesintheNoteSeriestobe
AllowsnotesintheNoteSeriesthatmaybeatonal(out removedinseveraldifferentways.
ofachordsscale)tobeshiftedtotonalnotes,usingone
0: Off
ofseveraldifferenttables.
TheNoteSeriesiscreatedwithnofurthermodification
0: Off fromthissetting.
TheNoteSeriesiscreatedwithnofurthermodification
1: Adjacent
fromthissetting.
AstheNoteSeriesisbeingcreated,notesthatarethe
1: Scalic sameastheimmediatelyprecedingnotearediscarded.
Chordanalysisisperformedontheinputsource
2: All
material,andastheNoteSeriesiscreated,noteswhich
AftertheNoteSerieshasbeencreated,anynotesthat
maybeatonalbasedontheanalyzedchord(dueto
areduplicatesofanyothersareremoved.
beingshiftedbynonoctavevaluesofInterval)are
shiftedtotonalnotes.Especiallyusefulwhen NotavailableifGEType(+p.953)=1:Generated
Interval(discussedabove)issettosomethingother Gated.
thanmultiplesof12.Thenotetablesusedtoshiftthe
Filter Fixed [0, 1]
notesarethesameastheonesusedinNoteType
(+p.956):1:Scalic,describedabove. 0: Off 1: On
2: Scalic2 WhenFilterStepsisused(describedbelow),allowsthe
Sameas1:Scalic(above),exceptthatthenotetables resultingtonalityoftheNoteSeriestobeFixedin
usedtoshiftthenotesarethesameastheonesusedin relationtothekeyofC.Forexample,assumethat
NoteType:2:Scalic2,describedabove.Scalic2is NoteType(+p.956)issettoChromaticandChord
moremodalinnatureandhasmorepassingtonesthan ShiftisOff,sothattheNoteSeriesisessentiallya
1:Scalic. chromaticscale.IfyouplayasingleC(andInversion
issetto0+p.957),youwillgetachromaticscale
Wrap Bottom [0127]
startingwithC.IfyouthensetupFilterStepssothat
Wrap Top [0127] youarefilteringsteps{1,3,6,8,10}youwouldhavea
CMajordiatonicscale.WithFilterFixedsettoOff,
0127: range C-1G9 ifyouthenplayaDonthekeyboard,thewholescale
willshifttobecomeaDMajordiatonicscale.With
SetsanoverallrangeforthepitchesintheNoteSeries.
FilterFixedsettoOn,thescalestaysfixedtothekey
Notescreatedbeyondthisrangearewrappedaround
ofC,butyouarestartingontheD;essentially,you
(droppedorraisedanoctave,dependingonwhich
haveaDminorscale.Youwillbeplayingdifferent
end).MainlyintendedtolimittheNoteSeriestousable
modalscalesstartingwithdifferentpitches.Notethat
ranges,thesesettingscanalsobeusedcreativelyto
thisisalwaysrelatedtothekeyofC;soifyouwantto
forcearifftocyclearoundinsideacertainrange.
puttheresultingfiltered,fixedNoteSeriesintoanother
key,youcanusetheTransposeKARMAModule
parametertodoso.Formoreinformation,see
Transposeonpage 106.Forexample,ifyousetthe
transposeto+4,youwouldstillplaynotesinthekeyof
C,buttheresultinggeneratednoteswouldbeinthe
958
Note Series Group Parameters
keyofE.Intheaboveexample,playingaCwould forcreatingcomplexgrooveswhereseveralmodules
resultinaEdiatonicscale,playingaDresultsinanF# areallsuppliedwiththesamesourcematerial,where
minorscale(F#Dorianmode)andsoon. forexampleyoumightnotwantthebasslinetoplay
NotavailableifGEType=1:GeneratedGated. the3rdevenifitissuppliedfromthekeyboard,might
Formoreinformation,seeGETypeonpage 953. wanttoremoveallchanceof7thsfromacomping
guitarpart,etc.
Filter Template [077] Selectingallstepstobefilteredwillresultinasingle
AllowstheentireFilterStepsgrid(seeAboutFilter noteintheNoteSeries,determinedbythesettings
Stepsonpage 959)tobechangedtooneof78 ofotherparameterssuchasInputSort,
differentsettings.Template0isallstepsoff(nosteps Inversion,etc.
filtered),whileTemplate77isallstepsonexceptthe Tofixtheresultingfilteredcollectionofnotes
root(onlytherootisallowedintheNoteSeries).Asthe withregardstoaspecifickey,useFilterFixed
Templatesproceedfrom0to78,moreandmoresteps (describedabove).
arefilteredout,indifferentcombinations.
NotavailableifGEType=1:GeneratedGated
Filter Temp + Restore [177] (seeGETypeonpage 953).
OperatesthesameasFilterTemplate(above),with
thedifferencethatwhentheGERealTimeParameter
issettotheminimumvaluespecifiedbytheGEReal
TimeParameterspagerangeparameters(seeMIN
(MinimumValue)onpage 113),theinternalsettingof
theGEfortheFilterStepsgridwillberestored.In
otherwords,youcanhaveacertainFilterStepssetting
alreadysetuponthegrid.UsingFilterTemp+
RestoreasaGERealTimeParameter,youspecifya
rangewheretheMinvaluerestorestheinternal
settings,andtherestoftherangeselectsTemplates,
replacingtheinternalsettings.SoiftheMinValue
was5andtheMaxValuewas10,choosing5would
restoretheinternalsettings,and6through10would
selectthecorrespondingFilterStepsTemplate.Youcan
usethistokeeptheinternalsettingsoftheGE,while
stillallowingawidevarietyofFilterTemplatestobe
substituted.Inthiscase,theavailablerangeis177.
Youcanassignthefullrangeofall77Templates,with
indicatingRestore,oronlyaportionoftherange,
andstillhavetheabilitytorestoretheoriginalinternal
settings.
About Filter Steps

#1 #1 #1
Step #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9
0 1 2
Key: G
C C# D D# E F F# G A A# B
C #
Key: G
E F F# G A A# B C C# D D#
E #
A12stepgridcorrespondstothescaletoneswith
regardtoacurrentkey,whichisdeterminedby
ChordAnalysisoftheinputsourcematerial.For
example,ifthekeyisdeterminedtobeC,thenthe
steps1through12correspondtoC,C#,DtoB;ifthe
keyisdeterminedtobeE,thensteps1through12
correspondtoE,F,F#toD#.AftertheNoteSeriesis
created,notesbelongingtothechosenstepsare
removed,thusfilteringthemout.Forexample,if{C,
E,G,B}wastheinputmaterial,CMaj7wouldbethe
analyzedchord;ifstep#43rdwasselectedonthe
grid(asshownintheabovediagram),alloccurrences
ofEwouldberemovedfromtheNoteSeries.Useful
959
KARMA GE guide
Phase Group
Overview
AGeneratedEffecthastwodifferentPhases.Eachof parameterscanbeusedforaperiodoftime.ThePhase
themisaseparatecollectionofcertainparameters Groupcontainsparametersthatcontrolthelength,
includingRhythm,Velocity,Cluster,PanandIndex direction,andvariousotherattributesofeachPhase,
Patterns,amongothers.Astheeffectisgenerated,a thenumberoftimesandinwhatorderthePhaseswill
PhasePatterncontrolsswitchingbetweenthetwo play,andwhetherornotaportionwillbelooped.
Phases,sothatcompletelydifferentcollectionsof
About Phase Patterns

PhasePattern=8 minimumof1stepandamaximumof16steps.The
exampleaboveshowsaneightstepPhasePattern:7
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
timesthroughPhase1followedbyoncethroughPhase
Phase 2.Aftercompletingtheeightsteps,executionmayloop
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1/2 backtoStep1.Notethattheactualnumberofsteps
ThePhasePatternallowsapatternofswitching performedandwhetheritloopsbackattheendwillbe
betweenthe2PhasesofaGeneratedEffecttobe determinedbyothersettingsdescribedinthischapter.
constructed.TheresultingPhasePatternmayhavea
General Parameters
Thisgroupofparametersaffectssomeoverall Start Mode [03]
characteristicsofPhaseperformance.
0: T-only when Triggered
Total Steps [032] 1: 1-when entering Phase1
0: ( ) 132: number of steps 2: 2-when entering Phase2
3: A-when entering any Phase
SetsthetotalnumberofstepsofthePhasePatternthat
willbeplayedbeforestopping.Theinfinitysign0: ControlshowtheStart%describedaboveisapplied
(infinity)setsittoloopforever;otherwisethesetting totheeffectasitisbeinggenerated(whetheritsonly
representsanumberofstepsoftheselectedPhase usedwhenfirsttriggered,oratothertimesduringthe
Pattern.Forexample,ifthePhasePatternisasimple PhasePattern.)
twosteppatternof{1,2},andtheTotalStepsmenuis
{4},thenfourPhaseswouldbeplayedinthefollowing 0: T-only when Triggered
orderbeforestopping:{1,2,1,2}. TheStart%isappliedonlywhentheeffectis
triggered,i.e.fromthekeyboardorthroughDynamic
Start % [0100 (%)] MIDI.WhenotherstepsofthePhasePatternare
ControlsthelocationintheNoteSeriesatwhichthe enteredduringsubsequentplayback,theNoteSeries
effectwillstartwhenitistriggered.Closerto0%starts willresettoeitherthetoporbottomdependingonthe
nearerthebeginningwhilecloserto100%startsnearer PhaseDirectionsetting.
theend;beginning/endrelatestohighest/lowest
1: 1-when entering Phase1
dependingonthePhaseDirection+p.962)setting.
EachtimethatplaybackofaPhasePatternstep
Thiscanbeappliedjustoncewhenfirsttriggeringthe
containingPhase1begins,theStart%willbe
effect,orasvariousstepsofthePhasePatternare
applied.Thiscanbeusedtostartaphasesomewhere
entered,inconjunctionwiththeStartModedescribed
inthemiddleoftheNoteSeriesfromwhichthe
below.
indexescanbechosenineitherdirectionaccordingto
NotavailablewhenGEType(+p.953)=1: theIndexPattern.
GeneratedGated.If2:GeneratedDrum,theNote
Seriescanbeappliedaspitchbend,discussed 2: 2-when entering Phase2
elsewhere. EachtimethatplaybackofaPhasePatternstep
containingPhase2begins,theStart%willbe
inthemiddleoftheNoteSeriesfromwhichthe
indexescanbechosenineitherdirectionaccordingto
theIndexPattern.
3: A-when entering any Phase

EachtimethatplaybackofanyPhasePatternstep
begins,eitherPhase1orPhase2,theStart%willbe
960
Phase Group General Parameters
inthemiddleoftheNoteSeriesfromwhichthe Modeparameter,describedbelow).Usefulfor
indexescanbechosenineitherdirectionaccordingto constrainingeffectstoacertainnumberofspecific
theIndexPattern. events,suchas4strumsperPhase.
NotavailablewhenGEType(+p.953)=1: Cycle Mode [03]
GeneratedGated.If2:GeneratedDrum,theNote
Seriescanbeappliedaspitchbend,discussed 0: S-replace with silence
elsewhere. 1: F-fill with top/bottom note
Length Mode [02] 2: R-restart at other end of Phase

3: W-wrap at either end of Phase
0: AC-Actual 1: TS-Time Signature 2: EV-Events
4: B-cycle back from beginning of Phase
Selectsoneofseveralmodesfordeterminingwhena 5: E-cycle back from end of Phase
PhaseChangefromthecurrentsteptothenextstepof
6: BE-cycle back from beginning & end of Phase
thePhasePatternwilloccur.Notethatthishasa
certaininteractionwiththeCycleModeparameter, Determineswhatwillhappenwheneitherendofthe
describedbelow. playbackportionofthePhase(specifiedbythePhase
0: AC-Actual Beginning/EndOffsets(+p.963)and/orthelengthof
CausesthePhaseChangetobecompletelydependent theNoteSeries)isreachedduringnotegeneration.If
onthelengthoftheNoteSeriesandthePhase theLengthModeis1:TSTimeSignatureor2:EV
Beginning/EndOffsets.TheportionoftheNote Events,cyclingcanbeallowedtooccur.Thishasa
SeriestobeusedasspecifiedbythePhase differenteffectdependingonthesettingofthePhase
Beginning/EndOffsets(describedbelow)isreferred LengthMode(above).
toastheplaybackportionoftheNoteSeries.The NotavailableifPhaseLengthMode(above)=0:
notesaregeneratedbymovingthroughtheNoteseries Actual.NotavailableifGEType=1:Generated
accordingtotheIndexGroupsettings;wheneitherend Gated,unlessGateType(+p.953)=1:VelCP.If
oftheplaybackportionhasbeenreached,aPhase GEType=2:GeneratedDrum,theNoteSeries
Changeoccurs.Therefore,ifmoreorlessnotesare canbeappliedaspitchbend,discussedelsewhere.
played,thePhaseswillchangesoonerorlaterandbear
norelationtoanytimesignaturesorspecificnumberof 0: S-replace with silence
events.ThisisusefulforGEsthatmodelthebehavior Ifnotegenerationwouldextendbeyondeitherendof
ofmostsimplearpeggiators. theplaybackportionofthePhase,thosenotesare
skippedandreplacedwithsilence.Oncethespecified
NotavailableifGEType(+p.953)=1:Generated numberofevents(includingsilentnotes)orbeatsofa
Gated. timesignaturearegenerated,aPhaseChangeoccurs.
1: TS-Time Signature ThiscanbeusedtosimulatetheTritonArpeggiator
MakestheTimeSignatureparameters(Tsig settingArpeggioType:AsPlayed.
Numerator/Denominator+p.11)availableinthe 1: F-fill with top/bottom note
PhaseSpecificParameterareaofeachPhase(described Ifnotegenerationwouldextendbeyondeitherendof
below).TheseallowsettingeachPhasetovarioustime theplaybackportionofthePhase,thosenotesare
signatures,whichcausethePhasetoplaybackacertain limitedandreplacedwiththebottomortopnoteofthe
numberofbeatsregardlessofanyothercircumstances Phase.Oncethespecifiednumberofeventsorbeatsof
thatmighttriggeraPhaseChange.Whenmoving atimesignaturearegenerated;aPhaseChangeoccurs.
throughtheNoteSeries,ifeitherendoftheplayback SettingsoftheIndexPatternorClusterPatternwhich
portionisreached(specifiedbythePhase wouldcausemovementbeyondthatpointhaveno
Beginning/EndOffsets+p.963)beforetheamountof effect.ThiscanbeusedtosimulatetheTriton
beatsspecifiedhasoccurred,thenthemovementeither ArpeggiatorsettingArpeggioType:AsPlayed(Fill).
freezes,generatessilence,wrapsaround,orcyclesback
andcontinues(dependingonthesettingoftheCycle 2: R-restart at other end of Phase
Modeparameter,describedbelow).Usefulforgroove Ifnotegenerationwouldextendbeyondeitherendof
generationandconstrainingeffectstocertaintime theplayback

KORG OASYS Paramater Guide - v1 - 3 - E5 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KORG OASYS Paramater Guide - v1 - 3 - E5 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KORG OASYS Paramater Guide - v1 - 3 - E5 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parameter Guide

Voice Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

HD-1 Program Structure Common

HD-1 OSC Structure

Filter Amp Amp

Osc + Drive Amp

Program P0: Play

Forinstance,ifyoureonanypageotherthanP0:Play: Banks GM, g(19), and g(d): General MIDI

Bank Bank Type Category Popup Tempo

Program Select Popup Program Select Favorite

Bank/Program Select Category/Program Select

Filter Page Graphic

Common LFO Graphic

06a: Program Select, Load GE Options,

3. IfyouchoosetheAutoRTCSetupOnsetting, Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT]

Scan Zone 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore

t 06: Page Menu Commands

07: Controller View/Effect

Thispageshowsthefunctionsassignedtothephysical Knobs 58 [Assignment]

08: Audio Input/Sampling

S/P DIF L, S/P DIF R 1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin

WhensamplingfromS/P DIF,makesurethatthe Send1(toMFX1):Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.

FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2] SOLO On/Off

REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4] Soundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelsforwhich

"Audio Input" (08a)

Bus(IFX/Indiv.) "Source Bus" (0-8c)

Source Bus = L/R L/R REC REC Indiv.

Bus = L/R or IFX1-12

Source Bus = REC Bus 1/2

Bus = L/R or IFX1-12

Source Bus = Audio Input 1/2

Bus = L/R or IFX1-12

Source Bus = S/P DIF L/R

Bus = L/R or IFX1-12

Source Bus = Indiv.1/2 L/R REC REC Indiv.

INDIV.1 AUDIO OUTPUT

Bus = Indiv.1/2 or IFX1-12

Source Direct Solo [Off, On] usersamplingwillvarydependinguponboththe

09: Control Surface

InProgrammode,youcanselectoneoffivedifferent RESET CONTROLS

Resetting a single control

Clearing all solos

Resetting Tone Adjust

Knobs 18, Channel Strip Pan (1) [Random, L001C064R127]

Note:iftheEQpageEQBypassparameteristurned SOLO switch and SELECT switches 12

OSC1 Select/Solo [Off, On]

OSC2 Select/Solo [Off, On]

MIX VOLUMES Sliders 12

OSC 1 Volume [000127]

OSC 2 Volume [000127]

Master Volume Slider

Other Audio Input settings Audio Input Pan (16) [L000C064R127]

Use/Edit Global Setup [Off, On] Play/Mute (16) [Off, On]

Setup [000127] Switch Off/On (116) [Off, On]

CC# Assign (18) [Off, 000119] Value (18) [000127]

Control [SW18, SL18] Parameter Value [Depends on parameter]

Knob 1: CUTOFF (CC#74) [000127] KARMA SWITCHES 18

Knob 4: EG Release (CC#72) [000127] Master Volume Slider

Tone Adjust and MIDI SysEx